38A-124 (5) 10
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
4W
D. Remove material and equipment from areas of work and storage areas.
END OF SECTION
\\Fs3\g_drive\Projects\2009-Boston\A0112-003.00\Specifications\Fire\FA Spec 10-30-09.doc
io
#1
so
IIIR
M
FIRE ALARM 2601 00-37
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
E. All supplementary steel and channels shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner
parallel to the walls, floor and ceiling construction. All turns shall be made with 90 degrees and
45 degrees fittings, as required to suit the construction and installation conditions.
F. All supplementary steel, channels, supports, and fittings, shall be Underwriters' Laboratories,
Incorporated, approved, be galvanized steel and be manufactured by Steel City, Unistrut,
Power-Strut, T. J. Cope, Chalfant or approved equal.
.o
3.09 TESTING AND INSPECTION
A. Test and inspect all parts of the work provided under this Section and as required by codes,
standards or authorities having jurisdiction. Conduct all tests and inspections to the complete
satisfaction of the Architect and all authorities. Notify the Architect and all involved authorities at
least 48 hours prior to testing or inspection. Do not cover work prior to testing or inspection.
B. Prior to the date of acceptance, furnish the Architect with certificates of testing and inspection
for all systems indicating the approval of all authorities having jurisdiction and conformance with
all requirements of the Contract Documents.
C. All systems shall test free from short circuits and grounds, shall be free from mechanical and
electrical defects, and shall show an insulation resistance between phase conductors and
ground of not less than the values recommended by the manufacturers.
D. Test all circuits for proper neutral connections.
E. Testing recommended by manufacturers shall be required; see Fire Alarm System.
F. Failure or defects in workmanship or materials revealed by tests or inspection shall be corrected
promptly and retested. Defective material shall be replaced at no additional expense to the
Owner. *�
G. Provide all temporary connections, necessary testing equipment, labor and materials, required
for the testing of the systems and equipment. All systems shall be prepared for testing and
protected from damage. The cost of all tests shall be included in the contract price. .F
3.10 PAINTING
A. All equipment installed under this Section shall have as a minimum a shop coat of non-lead
gray paint. Finish painting where required shall be done under other Sections.
3.11 CLEANING UP
A. Upon completion of all installation, and testing, thoroughly inspect all exposed portions of the
fire alarm installation and completely remove all exposed labels, markings, and foreign material.
B. The interior of all boxes and cabinets shall be left clean; exposed surfaces shall be cleaned and
plated surfaces polished.
C. Repair damage to finish surfaces resulting from work under this section.
FIRE ALARM
16700-36
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
OR 3.07 MOUNTING HEIGHTS AND SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS
A. All electrical equipment shall be mounted at the following heights unless noted or detailed
otherwise on the Fire Alarm Drawings or Architectural Drawings. Notes or details on the
'! Architectural Drawings pertaining to mounting heights or locations of electrical equipment shall
supersede those noted below or detailed on the Fire Alarm Drawings. If the mounting height of
any electrical component is questionable, obtain a clarification from the Architect before
installation. All mounting heights shall comply with the Federal ADA (Americans with
Disabilities Act) and the State of Massachusetts Publication 521 CMR: Architectural Barriers
Board for(Buildings, Facilities, etc.for the Visually and Physically Handicapped).
r 1. Equipment located in lobbies shall be as detailed on the Architectural Drawings or as
directed by the Architect.
2. Interior wall brackets shall be as detailed on the Architectural Drawings or as directed
by the Architect.
3. Fire Alarm Pull Stations: 4'-0"above finished floor to the top of the activating lever.
4. Fire Alarm Signals: (Horn/Strobes) 6-8" above finished floor or 6" below ceiling to the
bottom of the strobe lens,whichever is lower.
5. FACP and ANN:6-0"AFF to the top of the panel
B. Provide information to the Contractor, for all required access panels in walls, ceilings and floors,
for access to concealed electrical equipment, pull/junction boxes and fittings. The exact sizes
and physical locations shall be to suit accessibility and construction conditions.
C. Furnish and install all power and control and alarm wiring to include connections for plumbing
and fire protection systems equipment to be wired and connected by the Contractor.
' D. Obtain from Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning, Plumbing and Fire Protection
Specification Sections complete wiring and connection diagrams of all equipment which is to be
wired and connected before installing raceways or wiring for same.
3.08 SUPPLEMENTARY STEEL, CHANNEL AND SUPPORTS
A. Furnish and install all supplementary steel, channels and supports required for the proper
installation, mounting and support of all lighting fixtures and electrical equipment to be installed
under this Contract, as required.
am B. All supplementary steel, channels and supports shall be furnished, installed and secured with all
fittings, support rods and appurtenances required for a complete support or mounting system.
C. Supplementary steel and channels shall be firmly connected to the building construction in a
op manner approved by the Architect prior to the installation of same. Submit to the Architect, via
the Contractor, the locations proposed for using supplementary steel and channels for the
support of equipment, fixtures and raceways. The submittal shall indicate the mounting
methods, size and details of the supports, channels and steel; it shall indicate also that weight
which the supports, channels and supplementary steel is to carry.
D. The type and size of the supporting channels and supplementary steel shall be of sufficient
strength and size to allow only a minimum deflection in conformance with the channel and
supplementary steel manufacturer's requirements for loading.
ap
FIRE ALARM 2601 00-35
am
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
b. Colored coatings.
2. When limited quantities of cable are involved, the Architect may permit the use of the w
following methods in lieu of cable manufacturer's color coding. Each cable must be
coded at all terminal points, in all manholes, boxes or other similar enclosures by:
a. Spiral application of 3/4 inch wide, colored, pressure sensitive plastic tape, .w
half-lapped for a distance of not less than 6 inches. To prevent unwinding, the
last two (2) wraps of taps shall be applied with no tension. The tape shall be
applied so as not to obliterate identification markings on the cable.
w
b. Application of three (3) 3/16 inch wide colored, fungus inert, self-extinguishing,
self-locking, nylon cable ties spaced 3 inches apart. The ties shall be snugly
applied with a special tool or pliers, and any excess removed.
B. The same colored cable shall be connected to the same phase throughout the project.
C. Submit for approval all color coding, phase identification and positioning schemes that he
intends to use at all terminations, etc., before actual connections are made.
D. In the event that electrical conflicts arise in the field, they shall be referred to the Architect
immediately before the Contractor proceeds with the work. Physical orientation or placement of
conductors shall be secondary to the electrical consistency, integrity and continuity.
3.06 OUTLET, PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES ,
A. Install as a part of the raceway system all outlet, pull and junction boxes required for the proper
installation of all components of the electrical system.
w
B. The locations of all wall boxes shall be coordinated with the Architectural Drawings before
installation of same. All boxes, unless specifically noted otherwise on the Drawings, shall be
opposite the hinged side of the door for all single doors.
C. Locations of outlets shown on Drawings are approximate. The Contractor shall study the
Building Plans in relating to the spaces and equipment surrounding each outlet so that
receptacles, switches, lighting fixtures devices or other electrical components are symmetrically
located and mounted in or on the walls, ceiling and floor.
D. Outlet, junction or pull boxes, shown on the Drawings, that interfere with the installation of
mechanical equipment, structural or architectural features or that will be inaccessible due to the
work of other trades shall be relocated accordingly as a part of construction conditions ,
encountered during the course of the construction program at no cost to the Owner.
E. All outlet, pull and junction boxes shall be installed in a rigid and satisfactory manner and shall
be supported by bar hangers in frame construction or shall be fastened directly with wood
screws on wood, bolts with expansion shields on concrete or brick toggle bolts on hollow
masonry units, and machine screws or welded threaded studs on metal. Threaded studs of the
proper type and holding capacity driven in by a power charge and provided with lock washers .�
and nuts are acceptable for mounting of boxes on solid concrete walls or slabs. Preset inserts
of the proper type and holding capacity shall be used in overhead slab construction wherever
possible for the support of pull and junction boxes.
.R
FIRE ALARM
16700-34
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
Northampton,MA
Q. Wire and cable shall be carefully handled during installation so as to avoid mechanical injury to
the conductor, insulation, or covering.
R. All raceways shall be carefully cleaned, blown and swabbed dry inside before installation of
wires and cables. The Architect reserves the right to have all wiring in a raceway or raceways
removed for inspection should the presence of moisture or dirt be suspected in same at no
additional expense to the Architect. If moisture or dirt is found in the raceway system during the
inspection of same, it shall be thoroughly cleaned and dried to the complete satisfaction of the
Owner at no additional expense to the Owner.
S. All vertical risers for power and auxiliary systems passing through floor slabs shall be properly
supported at each floor level.
T. Wiring shall not be pulled into a raceway system until it is mechanically complete in all details.
The ends of the raceway shall be tightly plugged to exclude dust, moisture, or mortar, or plaster
while building is under the process of construction.
3.04 WIRE AND CABLES
A. Joints and splices shall be made in an approved manner and be at least equivalent electrically
and mechanically to the conductor itself. Whenever the conductors is bared for splicing, it shall
me be taped with a good grade of rubber splicing compound and friction or plastic tape so as to
form at least the equivalent of the original insulation and covering.
B. Pressure connectors with "wrap caps" or insulating caps of a type approved by the local
inspecting authorities may be used by joints on branch circuits with conductor sizes up to and
including #10 AWG. Connectors shall be manufactured by Buchanan, Eagle, Ideal, or
approved equal.
C. Insulating compounds, unless indicated or specified otherwise,for cable joints, boxes, terminals
and other similar items, shall have bituminous base and shall be free from granular content,
creosote alkali, acid,free of sulphur and water.
D. Conductors or cables shall not be pulled into the raceway systems until all work which could
cause injury to the conductors or insulation has been completed. A lubricant manufactured by
Ideal, General Electric, Dow Corning or approval equal, shall be used when necessary for the
pulling of conductors or cables into the raceway systems except that no pulling compound shall
be used for the isolated power system circuits.
E. Wires and cables shall be carefully handled during installation so as to avoid kinks, twists, and
mechanical injury to the conductor, insulation or covering.
F. Where conductors are to be connected directly to devices with the use of terminal screws, and
other wiring devices or screw type terminations the wires shall be formed into a loop to fit
around the screws in a clockwise direction so as to be tightly locked in place with same.
G. At no time shall more than one(1)conductor terminate under or on terminal screw.
3.05 COLOR CODING
A. Color coding shall be achieved by one(1)of the following methods:
1. The insulation or covering shall be coded during manufacture by use of one (1) of the
following methods:
a. Color compounds.
FIRE ALARM 2601 00-33
no
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA ""
D. Dual rated FPLP/MC Multi-Conductor Fire Alarm and Control Metal-Clad cable with full size
insulated separator ground wire may be used as permitted by State and Local Codes for fire
alarm wiring concealed above hung ceilings and in studded partitions.
E. Flexible metal conduit of short lengths (maximum 18 inch) shall be provided at all equipment
subject to vibration or movement. Liquid-tight flexible conduit shall be used in wet locations.
F. All raceways shall be properly fastened in accordance with the applicable Articles of the
Electrical Code. Spacing between supports shall not exceed 7 feet unless specifically approved
by the Architect. Conduit installed above suspended ceilings shall be supported from the
building structure. Conduit supports fastened to the roof decking will not be allowed. *■
G. Conduit joints shall be cut square, threaded, reamed smooth, and drawn up tight. Bends or
offsets shall be made with standard conduit ells; field bends shall be made with an approved
bender or hickey. Pipe threads cut in the field for exterior or underground use shall be painted
with red lead or a similar approved substance before being made up.
H. Conduit terminals at cabinets and boxes shall be rigidly secured with locknuts and bushings as
required by the Electrical Code and local authorities. On all conduit 1-1/4 inch trade size and
larger, bushings shall be insulated with double locknut.
I. Conduit fittings shall be galvanized treated or cadmium plated. Rigid steel conduit and **
intermediate metal conduit shall use only threaded connections. Steel supports or racks shall
be galvanized steel channel and fittings, by Unistrut, Steel City or approved equal.
J. Minimum size conduit shall be 1/2 inch. Other sizes shall be as indicated on the Drawings or
required by the Electrical Code for number and size of conductors installed.
K. Conduit runs are shown diagrammatically. The exact routing and means of support shall be
determined in the field. Exposed conduits shall be installed parallel with or at right angles to the
building walls, structural members or architectural features.
L. All conduit ends shall be plugged or capped as soon as they are installed to prevent entrance of 40
moisture or other debris during construction. No wire shall be pulled into any conduit until the
conduit system is complete in all details. All spare conduits shall have a nylon pull line inserted.
M. Expansion fittings shall be furnished and installed wherever building expansion joints occur. "w
Expansion joints shall be provided for non-metallic conduit to compensate for thermal
expansion and contraction as recommended by the manufacturer. Conduit, fittings and outlet
boxes supported on walls, columns or steel work shall be held in place by caulking anchors,
power-driven studs, expansion shields, beam clamps or concrete inserts. Nails or screws used
in conjunction with wood plugs in lieu of toggle or expansion bolts will not be accepted.
N. Connections between conduits of different types shall be made in an approved manner, using
adapters or other materials and methods recommended or the purpose by the conduit
manufacturers.
O. No splices or joints shall be permitted in either feeders or branches except at outlets or A"
accessible junction boxes. Splices in wire shall be standard pigtail, made mechanically tight.
P. Joints and splices shall be made in an approved manner with mechanical type devices of a 40
design that will not cause separation of the cable strands or distortion of the cable. Joints and
splices shall be covered with good grade of splicing compound and plastic tape so as to form
the equivalent of original insulation and covering.
an
FIRE ALARM
16700-32
4W
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.01 SLEEVING
A. Conduit and openings shall be laid out in advance to permit their provision in the work. Sleeves
and conduit shall be set in forms before concrete is poured. Any extra work required where
sleeves or conduits have been omitted or improperly placed shall be performed at the expense
of the Contractor which made the error or omission.
B. Sleeves provided for conduit between floors and through fire walls, or smoke partitions shall be
installed with approved packing between sleeves and conduit to provide for fire stop.
C. Where conduits pass through footings, beams, or slabs they shall be provided with waterproof
sleeves.
D. Except as required below, sleeves shall be made of galvanized sheet metal to finish flush with
building finish lines.
E. Provide acoustic sealer in sleeves between occupied spaces. Sleeves installed in floors of toilet
rooms and apparatus rooms shall extend two inches above the finished floor.
3.02 GROUNDING
�s
A. All systems shall test free of grounds.
Exception: Parts of circuits or equipment that are intentionally and permanently grounded to
provide ground fault detection, noise suppression, emergency ground signaling, and circuit
protection grounding.
B. Materials manufactured within the scope of the Underwriters' Laboratories (grounding and
bonding materials)shall conform to UL Standards and shall carry UL approval.
C. Ground conductors shall be of electrical grade copper except where otherwise indicated.
Grounding connectors shall be uninsulated unless otherwise specified.
D. Connections shall be made readily accessible for inspection. No connections shall be made
concealed in floors or walls.
3.03 WIRING METHODS
A. Generally, unless specified below and approved by the authorities having jurisdiction, wiring
shall consist of insulated conductors installed in rigid steel conduit or intermediate metal conduit.
B. Electrical metallic conduit may be used as permitted by State or Local Codes for feeders,
branch circuits, signal instrumentation and control circuits.
1. EMT may be used as permitted in ceiling or floor cavity spaces,void spaces of masonry
walls, in equipment rooms, in mechanical chases, in electrical chases, in closets, in
exposed locations 8 feet above finished floor and where not subject to accidental
_ damage or abuse. Where subject to accidental damage or abuse, install in rigid steel
conduit or intermediate metal conduit.
2. Set screw connectors shall be galvanized steel,white metal is not acceptable.
C. Metal clad cable with a full size, insulated, separate ground wire may be used as permitted by
state and local codes for branch circuit wiring concealed above hung ceilings and in studded
partitions.
FIRE ALARM 2601 00-31
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
(7) Ceiling mounted panel light fixtures shall be attached to lay-in ceilings
with earthquake clips or other approved means of positive attachment to
T-bar structure.
(8) All non-isolated floor or wall-mounted equipment shall use RESTRAINT w
TYPE III or V.
(9) Where base anchoring of equipment is insufficient to resist seismic ..
forces, restraint TYPE III shall be located above the units' center of
gravity to suitably resist"G"forces specified.
(10) A rigid piping system shall not be braced to dissimilar parts of a building
or two dissimilar building systems that may respond in a different mode
during an earthquake. Examples: Wall and roof; solid concrete wall and
a metal deck with lightweight concrete fill, bus duct, conduit, etc. :
crossing a building expansion joint.
b. Exclusions For Seismic Restraints On Non-Life Safety Systems:
(1) All conduit less than 2-1/2 inch diameter.
(2) All clevis or trapeze supported conduit, cable tray or bus duct
suspended by hangers with positive attachment to the structure that are
less than 12 inches in length as measured from the top of the conduit,
cable tray or bus duct to the point of attachment to the structure. If the
12 inch limit is exceeded by any hanger in the run, seismic bracing is ,A
required for the run.
C. Exclusions for Seismic Restraints On Life Safety Equipment.
(1) Critical, Standby or Emergency power conduit less than 1 inch nominal
diameter.
4. Inspection *"
a. Upon completion of installation of all vibration isolation and seismic restraint
devices, the owner may elect to contract and outside consultant at the owner's
expense to review the installation. Any deficiencies in the installation will be
corrected immediately at the contractor's expense.
TABLE C ?
SEISMIC BRACING TABLE
ON CENTER SPACING(Max) WITHIN EACH CHANGE
EQUIPMENT OF DIRECTION
TRANSVERSE LONGITUDINAL
CONDUIT 40 Feet 80 Feet 10 Feet1
FIRE ALARM
16700-30
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
3. Seismic Restraints
a. Installation
(1) All floor mounted equipment whether isolated or not shall be snubbed,
anchored, bolted or welded to the structure to comply with the required
acceleration. Calculations that determine that isolated equipment
movement may be less than the operating clearance of snubbers
(restraints) do not preclude the need for snubbers. All equipment must
be positively restrained to the structure.
(2) All suspended equipment shall be two or four point independently
braced with TYPE III restraints, installed taught for non-isolated
equipment and slack with '/2' cable deflection for isolated equipment.
Rod bracing shall be installed as per approved submittals and shop
drawings. Equipment less than 50 lbs. Is excluded.
(3) All horizontally suspended cable trays, bus duct and conduit shall use
RESTRAINT TYPE III. Spacing of seismic bracing shall be as per
TABLE C at the end of this Section.
a's (4) For all trapeze supported piping and conduit, the individual pipes and
conduits must be transversely and vertically restrained to the trapeze
support at the designated restraint locations.
(5) For overhead supported equipment, over stress of the building structure
must not occur. Bracing may occur from:
Or (a) Flanges of structural beams.
(b) Upper truss chords in bar joists.
(c) Cast in place inserts or drilled and shielded inserts in concrete
structures.
(6) Conduit Risers
(a) Where conduits pass through cored holes, core diameters to be a
maximum of 2 inches larger than pipe O.D. Cored holes must be
packed with resilient material or fire stop as specified in other
Sections of this Specification and/or State and Local Codes. No
additional horizontal seismic bracing is required at these locations.
(b) Conduit risers through cored holes require a riser clamp at each
level on top of the slab attached in a seismically approved manner
for vertical restraint.
t (c) Conduit risers in pipe shafts require structural steel attached in a
seismically approved manner at each floor level and a riser clamp
at each floor level on top of, and fastened to the structural steel.
The riser clamp and structural steel must be capable of
withstanding all static and seismic loads.
FIRE ALARM 2601 00-29
W
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883 op
Northampton, MA
.w
C. TYPE C: NOT USED
d. TYPE D: Double deflection neoprene isolator encased in ductile iron or steel go
casing.
(1) Mountings shall have Anchorage Pre-approval "R" number from
California OSHPD, certifying the horizontal and vertical seismic load .m
ratings. Mason Industries Type RC or BR.
e. TYPE E: Elastomer Hanger Isolator
(1) Molded neoprene element with an integral bushing to insulate lower
support rod from the hanger box.
(a) Steel hanger box shall withstand three times the rated load without
failure. Mason Industries Type HD.
F. Installation
1. General
a. Isolation and seismic restraint systems must be installed in strict accordance with
the manufacturer's written instructions and all submittal data.
b. Vibration isolators shall not cause any change of position of equipment resulting
in stress on equipment connections.
2. Equipment Installation
a. Equipment shall be isolated as indicated in TABLE B at the end of this section.
b. Additional Requirements:
(1) Spring isolators shall be installed after all equipment is installed without
changing equipment elevations.
(2) After the entire installation is complete and under full operational load,
the spring isolators shall be adjusted so that the load is transferred from
the blocks to the isolators.
(3) Remove all debris from beneath the equipment and verify that there are
no short circuits of the isolation. The equipment shall be free in all
directions.
(4) Install equipment with flexibility in wiring.
(5) Housekeeping pads for equipment in this Section must be properly
doweled or bolted, using wedge type expansion bolted to the structure
to meet the acceleration criteria. Anchor equipment or isolators to
housekeeping pads, See D. RELATED WORK.
FIRE ALARM
16700-28
4W
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
shall have Anchorage Pre-approval"R" number from California OSHPD.
Mason Ind. Model"CCB".
d. TYPE IV: Double deflection neoprene isolator encased in ductile iron or steel
casing.
1) Mountings shall have Anchorage Pre-approval "R" number from
California OSHPD, certifying the horizontal and vertical seismic load
ratings. Mason Industries Type RC or BR.
e. TYPE V: Rigid attachment to structure utilizing wedge type expansion anchors
W for bolting and steel plates, either cast-in or anchored with wedge type expansion
bolts, for welding. Powder shots are not acceptable. Concrete anchor bolt
spacing shall be in accordance with manufacturer's published standards.
4. Vibration Isolator Types
a. TYPE A: Spring Isolator-Free Standing
so (1) Spring shall have a minimum outer diameter to overall height ratio of
0.8 : 1 at rated deflection.
(2) Reserve deflection (from published load ratings to solid height) of 50%
of the rated deflection.
(3) Ductile top cup with adjusting bolt tapped for equipment attachment
go locking cap screw.
(4) Minimum 1/4"thick neoprene acoustical base pad or cup on underside,
unless designated otherwise. Mason Industries Type SLF.
b. TYPE B: Spring Isolator-Restrained
(1) Shall be the same as TYPE A with the following additional features.
(a) Integral restraining bolts with elastomeric cushions preventing
metal-to-metal contact.
(b) Internal spring adjusting nut or bolt with leveling capability.
(c) Built-in all-directional limit stops with minimum 1/4"clearance under
normal operation.
(d) Mountings shall have Anchorage Pre-approval "R" number from
California OSHPD, certifying the horizontal and vertical seismic
load ratings. Mason Industries Type SLR, SSLFH.
FIRE ALARM 2601 00-27
a.
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
2. Seismic Restraints And Vibration Isolation Types
a. All isolation and seismic restraint devices shall be capable of accepting, without
failure, the"G"forces as determined by the seismic certification and calculations
as described in the "SUBMITTAL DATA REQUIREMENTS" section of these
specifications.
b. Corrosion protection for outdoor applications shall be as follows:
(1) Springs cadmium plated,zinc electroplated or powder coat.
(2) Hardware cadmium plated.
(3) All other metal parts hot spray or hot dipped galvanized. w
C. All seismic restraint devices
(1) Shall maintain the equipment in a captive position and not short circuit .�
isolation devices during normal operating conditions.
(2) Shall have provisions for bolting and/or welding to the structure.
.F
d. Welding of springs to isolator housing, base plates, etc. is strictly prohibited.
3. Seismic Restraint Types
a. TYPE I: Same as Type B. Cast or aluminum housings, (except ductile iron) are
not acceptable. Mason Ind. TYPE SLR.
b. TYPE II: Where required, each corner or side of equipment base shall
incorporate a seismic restraint snubber having an all directional resilient pad limit
stop. Restraints shall be fabricated of plate, structural members or square metal
tubing. Angle bumpers are not acceptable. Mason Ind. Type Z-1225/Z-1011.
C. TYPE III: Restraints for suspended systems.
(1) Vibration isolated systems braced with multiple 7 x 19 strand galvanized
cable rope. Mason Industries Type SCB.
(2) Non-isolated systems braced with structural steel strut type with �.
approved fastening devices to equipment and structure. Mason Ind.
Type SSB.
(3) Steel angles (by contractor) shall be provided to prevent rod bending of
hung equipment where indicated by the Seismic Restraint vendor's
submittals. Steel angles shall be attached to the rods with a minimum of
three ductile iron clamps at each restraint location. Welding of support
rods to angles is not acceptable. Rod clamp assemblies shall have
Anchorage Pre-approval "R" number from California OSHPD. Mason
Ind. Model"SRC".
(4) Pipe clevis cross braces are required at all restraint locations. They
shall be special purpose preformed channels deep enough to be held in
place by bolts passing over the clevis cross bolt. Clevis cross braces
FIRE ALARM
16700-26
Im
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
a. Manufacturer of vibration and seismic control equipment shall have the following
responsibilities:
(1) Determine vibration isolation and seismic restraint sizes and locations.
(2) Provide equipment vibration isolation and seismic restraints as specified.
Ike
(3) Guarantee specified isolation system deflections.
(4) Provide installation instructions, drawings and field supervision to insure
to proper installation and performance of systems.
(5) Certify correctness of installation upon completion.
PIP D. Related Work
1. Housekeeping Pads
a. Housekeeping pad attachment shall be by the Project Structural Engineer.
Material and labor required for attachment and construction shall be by the
Concrete Section Contractor.
b. Housekeeping pads shall be coordinated with the Seismic Restraint vendor and
sized to provide a minimum edge distance of 10 bolt diameters of clearance all
around the outermost anchor bolt to allow for the use of full anchor ratings.
2. Supplementary Support Steel
a. Contractor shall supply supplementary support steel and connections for all
equipment and piping, as required.
3. Attachments
a. Contractor shall provide restraint attachment plates cast into housekeeping
pads, concrete inserts, double sided beam clamps, etc. in accordance with the
requirements of the Seismic Restraint vendor.
TABLE A
"G"FORCES FOR VARIOUS CONDITIONS
(SEISMIC ZONE 2 - AV>0.1 <0.2)
CONDUIT RIGIDLY MOUNTED FLEXIBLY MOUNTED ALL LIFE SAFETY
EQUIPMENT EQUIPMENT
.25 .40 .40 .60
E. Materials
1. Devices
a. All vibration isolation and seismic devices described in this section shall be the
product of a single manufacturer. Mason Industries is the base manufacturer of
these specifications; products of other manufacturers are acceptable provided
their systems strictly comply with intent, structural design, performance and
deflections of the Base Manufacturer.
FIRE ALARM 2601 00-25
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
C. Submittal Data Requirements
1. Submittals
a. Catalog cuts or data sheets on specific vibration isolators and restraints to be
utilized detailing compliance with the specification. Reference "TYPE" as per
"MATERIALS"Section of this specification.
b. An itemized list of all isolated and non-isolated equipment. Detailed schedules
showing isolator and seismic restraints proposed for each piece of equipment,
referencing material and seismic calculation drawing numbers.
2. Shop Drawings
a. When walls and slabs are used as seismic restraint locations, details of
acceptable methods for ducts, conduit and pipe must be included.
b. Indicate isolation devices selected with complete dimensional and deflection
data before condition is accepted for installation.
C. Provide specific details of seismic restraints and anchors; include number, size
and locations for each piece of equipment.
d. Coordinated or contract drawings shall be marked-up with the specific locations
and types of restraints shown for all conduits, bus duct and cable tray. Rod
bracing and assigned load at each restraint location shall be clearly delineated.
Any and all tributary loads shall be considered for proper restraint sizing.
e. For ceiling suspended equipment, provide minimum/maximum installation
angle allowed for restraint system as well as braced and unbraced rod lengths
at each allowable installation condition.
3. Seismic Certification and Analysis
a. Seismic restraint calculations must be provided for all connections of equipment
to the structure.All performance of products(such as; strut, cable, anchors, clips,
etc.) associated with restraints must be supported with manufacturer's data
sheets or certified calculations.
b. Seismic restraint calculations must be based on the acceleration criteria shown we
in Table A acting through the equipment's center of gravity.
C. Certification of calculations to support seismic restraint designs must be stamped
by a registered professional engineer in Massachusetts.
d. Analysis must indicate calculated dead loads, derived loads and materials
utilized for connections to equipment and structure. Analysis must detail
anchoring methods, bolt diameter, embedding and/or weld length.
e. An in force, $500,000.00 coverage limit Seismic Design Errors and Omissions
insurance certificate must accompany submittals. Manufacturer's product liability .�
insurance certificates are not acceptable.
4. Manufacturer's Responsibility
FIRE ALARM
16700-24
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
a. Battery Chargers
b. Battery Racks
C. Conduit
d. Control Panel(s)
5. Life safety systems defined
a. All systems involved with fire protection systems.
b. All systems involved with and/or connected to emergency power supply including
all generators, transfer switches, transformers, panelboards and all circuits to fire
protection,smoke evacuation and/or emergency lighting systems.
C. All medical and life support systems.
d. Fresh air relief systems on emergency control sequence including conduit,
dampers, etc.
6. Positive Attachment
a. Positive attachment is defined as a support location with a cast-in or wedge type
expansion anchor, a double sided beam clamp, a welded or through bolted
connection to the structure.
7. Transverse Bracing
a. Restraint(s) applied to limit motion perpendicular or angular to the centerline of
the conduit.
8. Longitudinal Bracing
a. Restraint(s)applied to limit motion along the centerline of the conduit.
B. OEM Equipment Isolation Packages
1. Internal and/or External Systems
a. Substitution of internally or externally isolated and restrained equipment in lieu of
the isolation and restraints specified in this section is acceptable provided all
conditions of this section are met. The equipment manufacturer shall provide a
letter of guarantee from their Engineering Department stamped and certified per
the section on Seismic Restraints and Analysis stating that the seismic restraints
are in full compliance with these specifications. Letters from field offices or
representatives are unacceptable.
b. All costs for converting to the specified vibration isolation and/or restraints shall
be borne by the equipment manufacturer in the event of non compliance with the
preceding.
C. In the event that the equipment is internally isolated and restrained, the entire
unit assembly must be seismically attached to the structure. This attachment
and certification thereof shall be by this section.
FIRE ALARM 2601 00-23
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
F. Sealants, foams or caulking materials for use with non-combustible items including rigid steel
conduit and electrical metallic tubing (EMT) and flexible cable or cable bundles , the following
products shall be used:
1. Intumescent Firestop Sealant
2. Fire Foam
3. Flexible Firestop Sealant
4. Elastomeric Firestop Sealant
G. Wall opening protective materials for use with U.L. listed metallic and specified nonmetallic
outlet boxes, the following product shall be used:
1. Firestop Putty Pad
H. Provide a firestop system with a"F" Rating as determined by UL 1479 or ASTM E 814 which is
equal to the time rating of construction being penetrated.
I. Manufacturer's Instructions: Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation of through-
penetration materials.
1. Seal all holes or voids made by penetrations to ensure an air and water resistant seal.
2. Protect materials from damage on surfaces subjected to traffic.
2.08 VIBRATION ISOLATION AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS
A. General
1. This dual purpose section provides for vibration isolation and seismic control for the
"equipment"as listed below. .�
2. It is the intent of the seismic restraint portion of this specification to provide restraint of
non-structural building components. Restraint systems are intended to withstand the
stipulated seismic accelerations applied through the component's center of gravity.
3. The work in this section includes the following:
a. Vibration isolation elements for equipment.
b. Seismic restraints for isolated equipment.
C. Seismic restraints for non-isolated equipment.
d. Certification of seismic restraint designs and installation supervision.
4. The term EQUIPMENT will be used throughout this specification and it includes ALL
non-structural components within the facility and/or serving this facility, such as
equipment located in outbuildings or outside of the main structure on grade within five ,,
feet of the foundation wall. Equipment buried underground are excluded but entry of
services through the foundation walls are included. Equipment referred to below is a
partial list of equipment for reference. (Equipment not listed is still included in this
specification)
FIRE ALARM
16700-22
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
u elevator, and fire alarm system. All keys shall have 1 %<° engraved yellow plastic key
tags.
W. As-Built Drawing Cabinet
1. Provide a complete set of as-built drawings housed in a red cabinet clearly marked
"As-Built Drawings". The cabinet shall be installed in a location per the Authority
Having Jurisdiction.
X. Electronic LED Graphic Display Annunciator: ANN
1. The ANN shall display an illustrated graphic representation of the building.
2. The ANN shall display all initiating device locations. When an intiating device is
activated,the LED shall light up on the ANN.
3. The ANN shall be clearly marked "Fire Alarm Annunciator Panel" with 1" engraved
white letters on a red background. Zone descriptions shall be of the same design with
the text being approximately V in size.
4. The ANN is required to be located next to the Fire Alarm Control Panel in the east entry
vestibule.This graphic annunciator panel shall be properly labeled with engraved labels
consisting of 1" white letters on a red background "Fire Alarm Annunciator Panel". The
following guidelines shall apply to the construction of graphic representation and
graphic panel:
a. The building name and address along with the wording"Fire Alarm
b. Graphic Annunciator"must be at the top.
C. All structural outlines are to be in black.
d. All fire alarm zones and devices are to be indicated in red.
e. The means of egress(common areas leading to an exit)are to be shaded
in light blue.
f. The graphic map must be framed(for consistency, a red frame is
preferred)and permanently mounted on the wall at eye level.
2.07 FIRE STOPPING
A. Firestop System installation must meet requirements of ASTM E 814 or UL 1479 tested
assemblies that provide a fire rating equal to that of construction being penetrated.
B. Proposed firestop materials and methods shall conform to applicable governing codes having
local jurisdiction.
C. Submit Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications and technical data for each material
including the composition and limitations, documentation of UL firestop systems to be used and
manufacturer's installation instructions.
D. Engage an experienced Installer who is certified, licensed, or otherwise qualified by the
firestopping manufacturer as having been provided the necessary training to install
manufacturer's products per specified requirements.
E. Cast-in place firestop devices are installed prior to concrete placement for use with non-
combustible and combustible plastic pipe (closed and open systems), conduit, or Fire Alarm
cable bundles penetrating concrete floors.
FIRE ALARM 2601 00-21
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
40
R. Visual Only Unit
1. The device shall provide field selectable candela output of 15, 75 and 110 candela.
The strobe shall be listed to UL 1971. The strobe shall meet or exceed the
requirements of the Americans with Disabilities Act(ADA)and shall be of such rating as
shown on the drawings. The device shall be rated at 24 VDC and shall have a flash
rate of 1 HZ.
2. All strobes shall be synchronized.
3. Provide strobe only units as required and shown on the plans
S. Exterior Beacon
1. Each weatherproof exterior strobe light shall be listed with Underwriter's Laboratories
and accepted by the local Authority Having Jurisdiction. Each exterior strobe shall also
be of weather-resistant rain tight construction.
2. The strobe shall have a minimum rated light output of 100 candela (900,000 foot
candles). The strobe light shall be mounted a minimum of 2'-0" and maximum of 8'-0"
above the knox box key repository.
3. Provide weatherproof backbox as required.
T. Magnetic Door Holders
1. Furnish and install magnetic door holders as shown on the plans and on the Door
Schedule and Door Hardware specification located in the Architectural Documents.
2. The housing and contact plates shall be brushed zinc finish. Units shall have a holding
force of approximately 35 pounds.
3. Operating voltage shall be 120 VAC.
U. Municipal Reporting
1. Provide a DACT for alarm, trouble and supervisory reporting to Northampton Fire
Department. The Northampton Public Safety Monitoring Division will furnish the dialer.
The Fire Alarm Contractor shall be responsible for programming the dialer.
2. The DACT panel shall be clearly marked"Fire Alarm Digital
Communicator"with 1"engraved white letters on a red background. Zone
descriptions shall be of the same design with the text being approximately
'/" in size.
V. Knox Box
1. Provide a hazardous materials Knox Box (model 1308) where shown and approved in w
accordance with the Authority Having Jurisdiction.
2. The knox box shall be mounted 4'-6"above finished grade.
3. The hazardous materials knox box shall contain building plans, MSDS sheets,
laminated emergency contact phone number list and key tags for the following: doors,
.w
FIRE ALARM
16700-20
go
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
N. Intelligent and Addressable Photoelectric Smoke Detectors
1. The Intelligent Photoelectric Detectors shall connect with two wires to one of the Fire
Alarm Control Panel Signaling Line Circuit Loops. The detectors shall use the
photoelectric principal to measure smoke density and shall, on command from the
control panel, send data to the panel representing the analog level of smoke density.
2. The detectors shall be ceiling-mount and shall include a twist-lock base. The detectors
shall provide a test means whereby they will simulate an alarm condition and report that
condition to the control panel. The detectors shall provide address-setting means on
the detector head using rotary decimal switches.
3. The detector sensitivity shall be set through the Fire Alarm Control Panel, and shall be
adjustable in the field through the field programming of the system. There shall be 9
levels of alarm sensitivity and 9 levels of pre-alarm sensitivity to choose from.
4. Provide photoelectric smoke detectors as required and shown on the plans.
O. Intelligent Addressable Duct Smoke Detector
1. The Intelligent Addressable Photoelectric Duct Detectors shall be connected with two
wires to one of the Fire Alarm Control Panel Signaling Line Circuits.
2. When sufficient smoke is sensed, an alarm signal is initiated at the fire alarm control
panel and appropriate action is taken to shut off fans and blowers and change over air
handling systems, throughout the areas served by the duct system.
3. Remote Test Station with key switch shall be provided as shown on the plans.
` 4. Provide duct smoke detectors as required and shown on the plans. Coordinate exact
quantities and locations of duct smoke detectors with the HVAC contractor.
P. Intelligent Heat Detectors
1. The Intelligent Heat Detectors shall connect with two wires to one of the Fire Alarm
Control Panel Signaling Line circuits.
2. The detectors shall use an electronic sensor to measure thermal condition caused by a
fire and shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the panel representing
the analog level of such thermal measurements. The heat detector shall provide a
Fixed 135°F detection as indicated on the drawings.
3. The detectors shall be ceiling-mount and shall include a twist-lock base.
Q. Audio-Visual Alarm Indicating Appliances
1. The device shall provide field selectable candela output of 15, 75 and 110 candela.
Horn/strobes shall be listed to UL 464 and UL 1971.
2. All strobes shall be synchronized.
FIRE ALARM 2601 00- 19
OR
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
ow
K. Control/Relay Module
1. Control Modules shall provide the system with a dry-contact output for activating a we
variety of auxiliary devices, such as fans, dampers, control equipment, door holders,
electric door locks, etc. Addressability allows the dry contact to be activated, either
manually or through panel programming.
a.
2. The Control Module shall provide address-setting means using rotary decimal switches.
An LED shall be provided which shall flash under normal conditions, indicating that the
Control Module is operational and is in regular communication with the Control Panel.
3. Provide control modules as required and shown on the plans.
L. Isolator Module w.
1. Isolator Modules shall be provided to automatically isolate wire-to-wire short circuits on
an SLC loop. The Isolator Module shall limit the number of modules or detectors that
may be rendered inoperative by a short circuit fault on the SLC Loop. If a wire-to-wire
short occurs, the Isolator Module shall automatically open-circuit (disconnect) the SLC
loop. When the short circuit condition is corrected, the Isolator Module shall
automatically re-connect the isolated section of the SLC loop. The Isolator Module
shall not require any address setting, and its operations shall be totally automatic. It
shall not be necessary to replace or reset an Isolator Module after its normal operation.
It shall provide a single LED,which shall flash, to indicate that the Isolator is operational
and shall illuminate steadily to indicate that a short circuit condition has been detected ..
and isolated.
2. Provide isolator modules as required and per specifications.
w,
M. Addressable Manual Stations
1. Dual Action Manual Fire Alarm Stations shall be non-crush tube type with a key
operated test-reset lock, and shall be designed so that after actual Emergency
Operation, they cannot be restored to normal use except by the use of a key. All
operated stations shall have a positive, visual indication of operation and shall clearly
show the word"ACTIVATED"upon activation.
2. Manual Stations shall be UL 38 Listed, red finish, constructed of LEXAN with clearly
visible operating instructions provided on the cover. Stations shall be suitable for
surface mounting on matching backbox, or semi-flush mounting on a standard single
gang box, and shall be installed within the limits defined by the American with
Disabilities Act (ADA). The station shall provide a key reset. The key shall be the
same as used for the fire control panel.
3. Provide manual pull stations as required and shown on the plans.
FIRE ALARM
16700- 18
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
an Northampton,MA
(LEDs) that will indicate the status of the following system parameters:
POWER, FIRE ALARM, PRE-ALARM, SECURITY, SUPERVISORY,
SYSTEM TROUBLE, SIGNALS SILENCED and POINT DISABLED.
* (4) The Display shall provide a full QWERTY key touch pad with control
capability to command all system functions, entry of any alphabetic or
numeric information, and field programming. Two different password
levels shall be provided to prevent unauthorized system control or
programming.
(5) The Display shall include the following operator functions: SIGNAL
SILENCE, RESET, DRILL,ACKNOWLEDGE and LAMP TEST.
f. System Circuit Supervision
(1) The FACP shall supervise all circuits to intelligent devices, remote
panels, annunciators and peripheral equipment and annunciate loss of
communications with these devices. The CPU shall continuously scan
above devices for proper system operation and upon loss of response
from a device shall sound an audible trouble, indicate which device or
devices are not responding and print the information in the history buffer
and on the printer.
(2) Sprinkler system valves, control valves, and main gate valve shall be
supervised for off-normal position.
+! H. Notification Power Expander Panel:
1. The NPE shall offer up to 6.0 amps or 8.0 amps of regulated 24-volt DC power. It shall
include an integral charger designed to charge 18.0 amp hour batteries and to support
24-hour standby with 5 minutes of alarm output. Provide 20% increased capacity for
safety and battery degradation. The standby batteries shall be gelled-electrolyte type,
maintenance free.
2. The NPE shall have two input triggers. The input trigger shall be a Notification
Appliance Circuit(from the fire alarm control panel)or a relay.
3. It shall provide four Class A Notification Appliance Circuits.
I. Field Wiring Terminal Blocks
1. For ease of service, all wiring terminal blocks shall be the plug-in/removable type and
be capable of terminating up to 12 AWG wire. Fixed terminal blocks are not acceptable.
J. Monitor Module
1. Monitor modules shall be provided to connect any N.O. dry contact device, including 4-
wire smoke detectors, manual pull stations, waterflow devices and supervisory
devices),to one of the Fire Alarm Control Panel Signaling Line Circuit(SLC)Loops.
2. The Monitor module shall provide address-setting means using rotary decimal
switches. An LED shall be provided which shall flash under normal conditions,
indicating that the Monitor module is operational and in regular communication with the
control panel.
3. Provide monitor modules as required and shown on the plans.
FIRE ALARM 2601 00- 17
.w
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
C. Visually indicate the device type and location via the LCD display located at the
Fire Alarm Control Panel.
G. Main Fire Alarm Control Panel: '
1. The FACP shall contain a microprocessor based Central Processing Unit (CPU). The
CPU shall communicate with and control the following types of equipment used to
make up the system: addressable detectors, addressable modules, printer,
annunciators, and other system controlled devices.
2. System Capacity and General Operation "•
a. The control panel shall provide minimum 318 intelligent addressable devices and
be expandable to 636 intelligent addressable devices per FACP.
b. The Fire Alarm Control Panel shall include a full featured operator interface
control and annunciation panel that shall include a backlit Liquid Crystal Display,
individual, color coded system status LEDs, and an alphanumeric keypad for the ..
Field Programming and Control of the Fire Alarm System.
C. All programming or editing of the existing program in the system shall be
achieved without special equipment and without interrupting the alarm
monitoring functions of the Fire Alarm Control Panel.
d. The FACP shall provide the following features:
(1) Drift Compensation to extend detector accuracy over life.
(2) Sensitivity Test, meeting requirements of NFPA 72.
(3) Maintenance Alerts to warn of excessive compensation.
(4) System Status Reports to display or printer.
(5) Alarm Verification,with verification counters.
(6) PAS pre-signal, meeting NFPA 72 requirements.
(7) Rapid manual station reporting(less than 2 seconds).
(8) Non-Alarm points for general(non-fire)control.
(9) Periodic Detector Test, conducted automatically by software.
(10) Pre-alarm for advanced fire warning.
(11) Temporal coding.
(12) Walk Test,with check for two detectors set to same address.
(13) Control-By-Time for non-fire operations,with holidays.
(14) Day/Night automatic adjustment of detector sensitivity.
(15) Device Blink Control for sleeping areas.
e. Display
(1) The Display shall provide all the controls and indicators used by the
system operator and may also be used to program all system
operational parameters. w
(2) The Display shall include status information and custom alphanumeric
labels for all Intelligent Detectors, Addressable Modules, and Software
zones.
(3) The Display shall provide an 80-character backlit alphanumeric Liquid
Crystal Display (LCD). It shall also provide 8 Light-Emitting-Diodes
FIRE ALARM
16700- 16
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
d. Verified automatic alarm operation of smoke detectors.
e. Automatic sprinkler system water flow.
f. Automatic preaction sprinkler system operation.
2. The fire alarm signal initiation shall immediately result in the following:
a. Initiate the transmission of an alarm to the Northampton Fire Station via digital
dialer reporting system as directed by the Authority Having Jurisdiction.
b. Sound all audible devices throughout the building with a temporal evacuation
signal.
C. Flash all visual devices throughout the building in a synchronized fashion.
d. Flash an alarm LED and sound an audible signal at the FACP. Upon
Acknowledgment, the alarm LED shall light steadily and the audible shall silence.
Subsequent alarms shall re-initiate this sequence.
e. Visually indicate the alarm initiating device type and location via the LCD display
located at the FACP and on the LED electronic graphic annunciator located
immediately adjacent to the fire alarm control panel in the east entry vestibule.
on f. Activate outputs to release all electro-magnetically held smoke doors and
electro-magnetically locked egress doors throughout the building.
g. Activate output relays to shut down effected supply and return air handlers, and
initiate smoke exhaust fans as required.
h. Activate the outside weatherproof beacon.
i. Active the exterior 6"-24VDC electric alarm bell upon sprinkler system waterflow
only.
3. The operation of any tamper switch, duct mounted smoke detector, or activation of any
other device designated to initiate a system Supervisory condition shall cause the
following to occur:
a. Flash a Supervisory LED and sound an audible at the Fire Alarm Control Panel.
Upon Acknowledgment,the LED shall light steadily and the audible shall silence.
Subsequent Supervisory conditions shall re-initiate this sequence.
10 b. Initiate reporting of the event to a 24-hour staffed location.
C. Visually indicate the device type and location via the LCD display located at the
Fire Alarm Control Panel.
4. In the event of any System Trouble condition such as a device removed, loss of AC
Power, wiring fault or any other supervised system trouble condition the following shall
occur:
a. Flash a System Trouble LED and sound and audible tone at the Fire Alarm
Control Panel. Upon Acknowledgment, the LED shall light steadily and the
audible shall silence. Subsequent Trouble conditions shall re-initiate this
sequence.
b. Initiate reporting of the event to a 24-hour staffed location.
FIRE ALARM 2601 00- 15
so
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA 40
3. The contractor shall furnish and install a full Microprocessor Based, Fire Alarm System am
according to the following specifications and as shown on the drawings. The system
will permit maximum system expansion and owner flexibility with a minimum of
additional field wiring. The system shall be wired, connected, tested, and left in first no
class operating condition. The system shall be totally solid state, microprocessor
based,to ensure reliable operation, low maintenance costs, and long life.
4. The equipment and completed installation shall meet the approval of the Local Fire
Department, the Authorities having jurisdiction, and in accordance with applicable
sections of the latest edition of NFPA 72 for Auxiliary Fire Alarm Systems, and National
Fire Codes.
5. The system shall be supported by standby batteries. In the event of a loss of primary
power, the batteries shall support 24 hours of full supervisory operation followed by 5
minutes of alarm. Provide increased capacity of 20%for safety and battery degradation
6. All fire alarm control panels shall be red in color and have a white label with the words
FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL on the front of the panel with a minimum one(1) inch
engraved white letters on a red background. No other functions shall be allowed in the
panel (e.g. security system). Zone descriptions shall be of the same design with the
text being approximately 1/2" in size.
7. All equipment shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories.
8. All equipment shall be new and unused. All equipment, materials and accessories
covered by these requirements shall be provided by a single manufacture or, if provided ,.
by different manufacturers, recognized as compatible by both manufactures.
9. Circuiting Guidelines: Each manual and automatic detection device shall be individually
addressed. Circuit wiring shall be as follows:
a. Individual addressable monitor modules shall be used for each individual
waterflow and tamper switch and for any other indications from related systems.
b. Addressable loop wiring (signaling line circuits) shall be wired in a Class A, Style
6 fashion and shall allow for 25%spare capacity.
C. Addressable relay modules shall provide auxiliary control functions.
d. All audible and visual notification appliance circuits and respective power
supplies shall be wired Class A, Style Z fashion and shall allow for 25% spare .�
capacity. Wire the audible circuit separate from the visual circuit to facilitate
silencing of the system without deactivating the visual notification appliances.
e. Provide isolation modules in each addressable loop to automatically isolate wire-
to-wire short circuits. Isolator modules shall be used on the addressable loop
every 25 addressable devices and at least one for each floor of the building.
F. Sequence of Operation
1. Fire alarm signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices:
ON
a. Manual stations.
b. Heat detectors.
C. Smoke detectors.
am
FIRE ALARM
16700- 14
so
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
b. Complete system drawings drawn using AutoCAD 2000 or compatible version,
to a scale no less than 1/8"=1'-0"showing all system components by:
(1) Locations and addresses of all alarm initiation devices, audio and visual
devices, status monitoring devices, and auxiliary control devices.
(2) Conduit layout and size
(3) Location of end of line devices
(4) Point-to-point wiring with number/size/type of conductors
(5) Large scale drawings of the FACP and remote panels showing module
placement and spare capacity allowances.
po C. The contractor shall submit complete documentation for the Fire Alarm System
showing the Model Number, type, rating, size, style, Manufacturer's Names, and
Manufacturer's Catalog Data Sheets for all items to ensure compliance with
these specifications.
d. Addresses for all field devices shown on floor plans and key lists. Key lists shall
include device type, address, location and corresponding LCD message text.
The installing contractor shall coordinate message assignments with the owner
and local authorities prior to system programming.
e. Provide battery size calculations
3. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Comply with NFPA 72 Appendix A,
recommendations for Owner's manual.
D. Equipment Manufacturers
1. Provide equipment by one of the following manufacturers:
on
a. Edwards Systems Technology/EST:A GE Security company
b. Notifier:A Honeywell Company
C. Siemens/Cerberus Pyrotronics:A Siemens Company
d. FCI/Gamewell—A Honeywell Company
e. SimplexGrinnell :A Tyco Company
E. General Requirements
1. All control panel components and field peripherals shall be designed for continuous
duty without degradation of function or performance. All equipment covered by this
specification or noted on Installation Drawings shall be the best equipment suited for
the application and shall be provided by a single manufacturer or be recognized and
U.L. listed as compatible by both manufacturers.
2. The fire alarm equipment shall carry a Manufacturer's 3-year warranty. A letter from
the equipment manufacture confirming this warranty shall be provided as part of the
submittal package.
FIRE ALARM 2601 00- 13
1W
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
2. All wiring types and sizes shall be as follows or as otherwise required by the equipment
manufacturer:
a. Addressable loop wiring shall be via#16 AWG (minimum).
b. Visual notification appliance circuits shall utilize a minimum#14 AWG
3. Fire Alarm control systems and equipment shall be connected to separate dedicated
branch circuits, sized as required for proper service. Circuits shall be labeled "FIRE
ALARM".
2.06 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM am
A. Scope:
1. Provide complete addressable fire detection, alarm and control system with horn/strobe .m
occupant notification in compliance with the Contract Documents. The system shall
interface to other building systems to conduct monitoring and control functions as
described herein.
2. Each initiating device shall have full analog sensing capabilities; will identify the exact
type and location of every device, and shall operate as described elsewhere in these
Specifications. The Contractor shall furnish and install an addressable fire alarm system ^'
as indicated on the drawings and as herein described.
B. The system and all components shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. for use in Fire
Protective Signaling Systems under the following standards as applicable:
1. UL864 Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems.
2. UL268 Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems.
3. UL 268A Smoke Detectors for Duct Applications.
4. UL 217 Smoke Detectors, Single and Multiple Station.
5. UL 521 Heat Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems.
6. UL 228 Door Closers-Holders for Fire Protective Signaling Systems.
7. UL 464 Audible Signaling Appliances.
8. UL 1638 Visual Signaling Appliances.
9. UL 38 Manually Actuated Signaling Boxes. ON
10. UL 1481 Power supplies for Fire Protective Signaling Systems.
C. Submittals
1. Shop Drawings shall be prepared by persons with the following minimum qualifications:
a. Trained and certified by manufacturer in the fire alarm system design.
b. Fire alarm certified by NICET, minimum level III.
2. System Shop Drawings are required to be submitted for approval, containing the
following information:
a. System Operation Description: Detailed description for this project, including
method of operation and supervision of each type of circuit and sequence of
operations for manually and automatically initiated system inputs and outputs.
Manufacturer's standard descriptions for generic systems are not acceptable.
FIRE ALARM
16700- 12
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
2.05 WIRE AND CABLE
A. All wire and cable shall have copper conductors. Copper wires shall be soft drawn, annealed,
98 percent conductivity, and insulated for 600 volts and shall be color-coded as specified below:
120/208 Volts Phase
Black A
Red B
Blue C
White Neutral
Green Ground
B. Wire sizes #14 through #6 AWG shall be type THHN-THWN. Conductors installed in conduit
lines below grade shall be type USE.
C. Fire-protective signaling wiring shall be in accordance with the Electrical Code, Article 760, Fire
Prevention Systems for Building Fire Alarm Systems, and as indicated on the Drawings. All
w wires for the local fire alarm system shall be color-coded and sized as recommended by the
manufacturer of the fire alarm system, and shall be installed as recommended in drawings. The
combined cross-sectional area of all conductors or cables installed in conduit shall not exceed
the percentage of fill specified in Table 1, Chapter 9 of the Electrical Code.
D. Minimum wire size shall be no. 12 AWG for power and no. 14 AWG for control wiring. 120-volt
branch circuits of more than 100 feet from center of load to panel shall be no. 10 AWG.
E. All circuit phases shall be color coded at terminations, splices, and pull boxes with UL-listed
electrical plastic vinyl tape such as 3M Scotch Brand No. 35 color-coding tape.
F. Wire connectors for copper wire 600 volts and lower (105°C rated and below), sizes #18
through #6 AWG, solid or stranded, shall be screw-on type pressure connectors (of the
"SCOTCHLOK" type) incorporating a non-restricted, zinc coated spring, insulated with a vinyl
jacket having a flexible skirt. Connectors for larger size wires shall be as manufactured by
Thomas& Betts Co. or approved equal. Connectors shall be UL-listed for use at 600 volts.
G. Wire connectors for copper wire 600 volts and below used in manholes and hand-holes shall be
of the waterproof type and shall be made with 3M Scotch kit waterproof direct burial splice
connectors.
H. Flexible metal clad (MC) 90°C rated cable with galvanized steel armor (aluminum armor
unacceptable) shall have the required number of phase conductors, neutral and full size
insulated (green) ground conductor. Conductors shall be#12 AWG. minimum, type THHN as
manufactured by AFC in New Bedford, MA or approved equal.
ex I. Armored (AC) 90°C rated cable with galvanized steel armor (aluminum armor unacceptable)
shall have the required number of phase conductors, neutral and full size insulated (green)
ground conductor. Conductors shall be copper #12 AWG. minimum, type THHN as
manufactured by AFC in New Bedford, MA or approved equal.
J. All cables in air plenum spaces that are not installed within protective conduit system shall be of
type approved for air plenum installation. This shall include signal and communication cables.
1. Provide complete wiring and conduit between all equipment. All devices shall be
mounted upon and terminations made in terminal cabinets. Wiring splices and
transposing or changing of colors will not be permitted.
FIRE ALARM 2601 00- 11
go
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA 10
6. Outlet boxes for normally wet locations and surface or pendent mounted in all locations, op
shall be of the proper cast metal type and shall be manufactured by Crouse-Hinds,
Appleton, Red Dot, Russell and Stoll, or approved equal.
C. Pull and junction boxes shall, in general, be as follows:
1. Pull and junction boxes shall be constructed of code gauge galvanized sheet metal, of
not less than minimum size required by the Electrical Code or other applicable .,■
Specification "Standards" and shall be furnished with screw fastened covers. Boxes
exceeding 48 inches in any direction shall be properly reinforced with angle iron
stiffeners.
wA
2. Pull and junction boxes to be installed in normally wet location areas shall be of the cast
type with threaded hub and gasketed cover plate. The cast pull and junction boxes
shall be manufactured by Crouse-Hinds, Appleton, Russell and Stoll, or approved
equal.
D. Fittings shall, in general, be as follows:
1. Adequate expansion fittings shall be used where crossing building expansion joints.
Expansion fitting shall have grounding jumpers, and shall be manufactured by O.Z., Inc.
or approved equal.
2. Sleeves and openings through fire-rated floors and walls in which cable or conduit pass
shall be sealed by UL Classified fire-stop fittings with elastomeric rings to seal off cold
smoke and toxic fumes. Fittings shall have heat-activated intumescent material which
expands to fill the voids left by destroyed cable insulation. Fire-stop devices shall be '
O.Z./Gedney Fire-Seal fittings, with UL-classified hourly fire ratings equal to the fire
rating of the floor or wall through which the cables or conduit pass. Mineral wool or
oakum stuffed in the penetration shall not be employed.
E. All fire alarm outlet boxes,junction boxes and pull boxes shall be painted RED.
2.04 WIREWAYS
A. Wireways shall be of sheet steel with hinged spring latched covers, galvanized or painted to
protect against corrosion conforming to industry standards and specifications. All necessary
bends, couplings, connectors, etc., shall be provided.
B. Wireway shall be suitable for lay in conductors with connector covers permanently attached so
that removal is not necessary to utilize lay in feature.
C. Interior parts shall be smooth and free of sharp edges and burrs.
D. Wireways shall be as manufactured by Square D Co. or approved equal. �*
.e�
FIRE ALARM
16700- 10
W
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
W Northampton,MA
1.22 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT
A. Comply with the requirements of Section 01570, Construction Waster Management, for removal
and disposal of construction debris and waste.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. All products used on this project shall be new and conform, unless otherwise specifically noted,
to applicable standards as listed in CODES, STANDARDS AND REFERENCES in Part 1 and
be approved for the service and application.
2.02 CONDUIT AND RACEWAYS
A. Galvanized rigid steel conduit shall be zinc-coated steel conforming to industry standards and
specifications and shall be as manufactured by Allied Tube & Conduit Corp., Republic Steel
Corp.,Wheatland Tube Co., or approved equal.
B. Intermediate Metal Conduit shall be zinc-coated steel conforming to industry standards and
specifications and shall be as manufactured by Allied Tube & Conduit Corp., Triangle/PWC,
Inc., or approved equal.
C. Electrical Metallic Tubing shall be zinc-coated steel conforming to industry standards and
specifications and shall be as manufactured by Allied Tube & Conduit Corp., Republic Steel
Corp.,Triangle/PWC, Inc., and Wheatland Tube Co.
D. Flexible conduit shall be galvanized, spiral wrapped metallic conduit (Greenfield) or liquid-tight
flexible metal conduit as herein specified for specific equipment.
2.03 OUTLET, PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES,AND FITTINGS
A. Furnish and install as a part of the raceway system all outlet, pull and junction boxes required
for the proper installation of all components of the Fire Alarm System.
OR B. Outlet boxes shall, in general, be as follows:
1. Exposed, surface and pendant mounted outlet boxes or outlet boxes installed in
normally wet locations shall be of the cast metal type with threaded hubs.
2. Recessed outlet boxes for dry locations shall be of the pressed sheet steel,zinc coated,
cadmium plated type.
3. Outlet boxes shall not be less than 1-1/2 inch deep unless shallower boxes are required
by structural conditions and are especially approved by the Architect.
W 4. Ceiling and bracket outlet boxes shall not be less than 4 inch octagonal except that
smaller boxes may be used where required by the particular fixture to be installed.
Flush or recessed fixtures shall be provided with separate outlet boxes where required
by the fixture terminal temperature requirements.
5. Outlet boxes for general use, flush mounted in concrete work and walls in normally dry
locations, shall be manufactured by Steel City,Appleton, Raco or approved equal.
FIRE ALARM 2601 00-9
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
instructions were given and the dates of the instruction period shall be submitted to the Architect **
at the completion of the project.
B. In addition, prepare three (3) sets of manufacturer's catalogs, other similar data including the
necessary photographic equipment cuts, wiring diagrams covering all mechanical equipment
and devices furnished and installed under this Section. These manuals shall provide complete
instructions for the proper operation and use of the equipment together with instructions for
lubrication and periodic maintenance and for trouble shooting. Operating instructions shall be
specific for each system and shall include copies of posted specific instructions. This manual
shall contain only that information which specifically applies to this project, and all unrelated
material shall be deleted. During the instruction period this manual shall be used and
explained. The material shall be bound in notebook form and indexed.
C. Provide name, address and telephone number of the manufacturer's representative and service
company for each piece of equipment so that the source of replacement parts and service for
each item of equipment can be readily obtained.
D. Training: The Contractor shall provide the services of the manufacturer's representative for a
period of 4 hours, during normal business hours, to instruct the Owner's designated personnel
on the operation and routine maintenance of the system.
1.20 IDENTIFICATION
A. All equipment shall be properly identified by means of clear and concise nameplates, tags,
signs or directories.
B. Provide tags identifying each cable, wire or group of wire comprising a circuit in all control
panels, annunciators, pull boxes, troughs and terminal boxes through which such wires run and
at equipment at which they terminate. Tags shall be flameproof linen fiber or pressure sensitive
types. The circuit of feeder designation shall be as approved by the Architect.
C. Provide tags indicating address and loop number of each detector, module etc.on the device.
D. Provide three(3) ply black bake-lite nameplates with 1/4 inch high engraved white letters on the
following equipment. Wording of the nameplates shall be in conformance with the respective
schedules and notes on the Drawings.
1. Fire Alarm Control Panel(s), Notification Power Extender Panels and Fire Alarm
Terminal Cabinets: Nameplates shall be provided on the exterior of each panel and
terminal cabinet door identifying same. Nameplates shall read as indicated on the
Drawings and shall be mounted on the exterior of the panel and terminal cabinet doors
1/3 of the way down from the top of same.
2. Nameplates shall be provided for each remote operating station, disconnect switch,
starter, and pilot light and control device identifying the units controlled or protected.
1.21 VIBRATION ISOLATION AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS
A. Installation of mechanical and electrical equipment, accessories and components shall be in
accordance with the seismic requirements identified in the Massachusetts State Building Code,
Seventh Edition (7th Edition). Refer to Part 2 of the Specifications for further information.
FIRE ALARM
16700-8
FIX
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
1.16 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A. When Subcontractor considers Work under this Section (or designated portion of Work) is
substantially complete, submit written notice through the General Contractor with a list of items
remaining to be completed or corrected.
B. Should Architect and/or his Engineer observe and find work is not substantially complete, he will
promptly notify Subcontractor through the General Contractor in writing, listing observed
deficiencies.
Pill C. Subcontractor shall remedy deficiencies and send a second written notice of substantial
completion.
D. When Architect and/or his Engineer finds work is substantially complete he will prepare a
F1 Certificate of Substantial Completion in accordance with provisions of General Conditions.
1.17 FINAL COMPLETION
A. When Subcontractor considers Work under this Section is complete, submit through the
General Contractor written certification that:
1. Contract documents have been reviewed.
2. Work has been inspected for compliance with Contract Documents.
3. Work has been completed in accordance with Contract Documents and deficiencies
listed with Certificate of Substantial Completion have been corrected.
4. Equipment and systems have been tested, adjusted and balanced and are fully
operational.
5. Work is complete and ready for final Engineer/Architect review.
B. Should Architect and/or his Engineer observe and find work incomplete, he will promptly
suspend his review and notify Subcontractor in writing through the General Contractor.
C. Subcontractor shall complete his work, remedy deficiencies and send a second certification of
final completion.
D. Architect and/or his Engineer shall, upon receipt of a second certification of completion, make a
s* second review and shall notify the Subcontractor in writing through the General Contractor
listing observed deficiencies.
E. When Architect and/or his Engineer finds work complete, he will consider close out submittals.
1.18 REOBSERVATION
Pill A. Should status of completion of Work require additional services by Architect and/or his
Engineer, due to failure of Work to conform with Subcontractor's claims on initial Architect
and/or Engineer's review for Substantial Completion, or for Final Completion, Owner will deduct
the amount of Architect and/or his Engineer's compensation for additional services from final
payment to Subcontractor.
1.19 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Give detailed instructions, prior to the completion of the work, to the responsible personnel
designated by the Architect in the operation and maintenance of all work installed under this
Section. A letter with two(2) copies containing the name of the person or persons to whom the
FIRE ALARM 2601 00-7
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
I. LEED Certification Documentation: Submit documentation from the manufacturer highlighting
LEED requirements for materials and products of this Section. Comply with requirements of
Section 01315, LEED submittals.
1.12 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT STANDARDS
A. Where materials or equipment are specified by patent proprietary name, or name of the
manufacturer, such specification shall be deemed to be used for the purpose of establishing a �.
standard for that particular item. No equipment or material shall be used unless previously
approved by the Architect.
B. Substitutions may be offered for review provided the material, equipment or process offered for
consideration is equal in every respect to that indicated or specified and only if the term
"approved equal" appears. The request for each substitution must be accompanied by
complete specifications together with drawings or samples to properly appraise the materials,
equipment or process. "
C. If a substitution of materials or equipment in whole or in part is made, the Contractor shall bear
the cost of any changes necessitated by any other trade as a result of said substitution. ap
1.13 GUARANTEE
A. Manufacturers shall provide their standard warranties for material and equipment furnished "'
under this Section. Such warranties shall be in addition to and not in lieu of all liabilities which
the manufacturer and Contractor may have by law or by provisions of the Contract Documents.
B. All materials, equipment and work furnished under this Section shall be guaranteed against all
defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one (1) year commencing with the date of
Substantial Completion. Any failure due to defective material, equipment or workmanship which
may develop, shall be corrected at no expense to the Owner including all damage to areas,
materials and other systems resulting from such failures.
C. Upon receipt of notice from the Owner of failure of any part of the systems during the guarantee
period, the affected parts shall be replaced.Any equipment requiring excessive service shall be
considered defective and shall be replaced.
1.14 CONTINUITY OF SERVICE AND SCHEDULING OF WORK
A. Continuity of all services shall be maintained in all areas, which will be occupied during the
construction period. If an interruption of service becomes necessary, such shall be made only
upon consent of the Owner and at a time outside normal working hours as he shall designate. +*4
B. Refer to the overall scheduling of the work of the project. Schedule work to conform to this
schedule and install work to not delay nor interfere with the progress of the project.
1.15 CERTIFICATES OF APPROVAL
A. Upon completion of all worts, furnish, in duplicate, certificates of inspections from the 40
manufacturers stating that authorized factory engineers have inspected and tested the
operation of their respective equipment and found same to be in satisfactory operating
condition.
FIRE ALARM
16700-6
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
1.10 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY
A. Be responsible for the care and protection of all work included under this Section until it has
been tested and accepted.
B. Protect all equipment and materials from damage from all causes including theft. All materials
and equipment damaged or stolen shall be repaired or replaced with equal material or
equipment.
C. Protect all equipment, outlets and openings with temporary plugs, caps and covers. Protect
1P work and materials of other trades from damage that might be caused by work or workmen and
make good damage thus caused.
1.11 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Submit for approval,within thirty(30)days after signing the Contract and prior to the submission
of any shop drawings, an itemized list of manufacturers of material and equipment and of
Subcontractors proposed to be used under this Section.
B. After approval of the list, submit for review a minimum of eight (8) sets of detailed shop
drawings. All shop drawings for equipment submitted for review shall include complete
Specifications, including type of materials, electrical characteristics, capacities, performance
and power requirements to determine compliance with Contract Documents. All data submitted
including wiring diagram shall be complete for all equipment and shall apply only to this specific
project. All extraneous material shall be deleted.
C. Regardless of any information included in the shop drawing submitted for review, the
requirements of the Drawings and Specifications shall not be superseded in any way by the
shop drawing review.
D. Each submittal shall be reviewed, stamped and certified prior to submission to the Architect.
Such certification shall be made by a Corporate Officer of the Contractor, or by a person duly
authorized to sign binding agreements for the Contractor. The certification shall state that the
data and details contained on each shop drawing, layout drawing, catalog data and brochure
has been reviewed by the Contractor and that it complies with the Contract Documents in all
respects. Shop drawings, layout drawings, catalog data and brochures will not be reviewed and
will be returned to the Contractor unchecked unless they are certified.
E. It is intended that shop drawing data be complete and accurate at the first submission. If the
shop drawing is returned marked "Resubmit" only one (1) additional submission will be
permitted.
F. A minimum period of two (2) weeks, exclusive of transmittal time, will be required in the
Engineer's office each time shop drawings, layout drawings, and catalog data and brochures
are submitted or resubmitted for review. This time period shall be considered when scheduling
the work.
G. The shop drawings and manufacturer's data shall be submitted in a timely manner sufficiently in
advance to give ample time for checking, correcting, resubmitting and rechecking if necessary.
No claim for delay will be granted for failure to comply with this requirement.
! ' H. Equipment shall be of proper size for its allotted space. Equipment shall be disassembled as
required, without invalidating the manufacturer's warranty, so that it can be installed through
regular window, door, and/or louver openings.
FIRE ALARM 2601 00-5
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
other trades (Plumbing, Fire Protection, Electrical and Fire Alarm) so they can indicate their
work.
E. Coordination Drawings shall not be construed as replacing any Shop Drawings.
1.08 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Purchase and maintain at the job site a complete and separate black line set of prints of the
approved Working Drawings on which accurately indicate daily progress by coloring materials
and apparatus as installed. Schedules shall be modified to reflect data consistent with that of
the installed equipment. Clearly show all changes to the work as a result of change orders,
instructions issued by the Architect or conditions encountered in the field. Accurately indicate
the location, size, type and elevation of new utilities and their relationship to existing utilities.
B. The marked-up and colored-in prints will be used as a guide for determining the progress of the
work installed. They shall be inspected weekly and shall be corrected immediately if found
inaccurate or incomplete. Requisitions for payment will not be approved until the Drawings are
accurate and up-to-date.
C. At the completion of the work, submit one (1) set of marked-up prints for review and comment.
After review and comment, these marked-up prints shall be used in the preparation of the
Record Drawings. The Record Drawings shall consist of these prints (corrected) previously
indicated, as well as two (2) CAD disks of the Final Coordination Drawings, corrected on the
basis of the Architect/Engineer's final comments.
D. Obtain and pay for one (1) set of reproducible prints and/or CAD disks (AutoCAD 2000 or
compatible system) applicable to this Section. Make all modifications to these reproducibles as
shown on the marked up prints. Remove all superseded data to show the completed
installation.
E. The Record Drawings may be made from the originals of the Contract Drawings. Arrange with
the Architect to have these reproducibles made from the originals.
F. Deliver the completed reproducible Record Drawings and/or CAD disks properly titled and
dated to the Architect. These Record Drawings shall become the property of the Owner..
1.09 PERMITS, FEES, RULES AND REGULATIONS
A. Give the proper Authorities all requisite notices, detailed shop drawings bearing the stamp of
the Fire Alarm Contractor's Registered Engineer, riser diagrams, and any other information
relating to the work under this Section that is required by the Authorities to obtain a permit. .,
Obtain and pay for all fees, licenses, permits and certificates. Comply with the rules and
regulations of all Local, State and Federal Authorities having jurisdiction, the rules and
regulations of the National Board of Fire Underwriters and the Public Utilities Companies
serving the building. w
B. The Fire Alarm Contract Drawings can be made available to the Fire Alarm contractor by the
Engineer to assist the Contractor with the permitting process. A nominal fee of$250 per sheet
up to a maximum fee of $2500 will be charged to the Fire Alarm contractor for the Drawings.
The cost shall be paid solely by the Fire Alarm contractor, and shall be included as part of this
contract. This expense shall not be billed to the Owner.
.�e
FIRE ALARM
16700-4
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
1.05 OBTAINING INFORMATION
A. Obtain from the manufacturer the proper method of installation and connection of the equipment
that is to be furnished and installed. Obtain all information that is necessary to facilitate the
work and to complete the project.
1.06 COOPERATION AND COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES
A. The Contract Drawings are diagrammatic only intending to indicate general routing and location
of piping, conduit and equipment. The Drawings are not intended to show every offset and
accessory required, nor every structural difficulty that may be encountered.
B. To carry out the intent and purpose of the Drawings, all necessary parts to make complete,
approved working systems ready for use shall be furnished without extra charge.
C. Where requirements of the plans and/or specifications are in conflict, the most stringent
requirement will be included in the Contract. Prior to ordering and/or installing any portion of the
work, which appears to be in conflict, the work shall be brought to the Architect/Engineer's
attention for direction as to what is provided.
D. Final location of system components,accessories and control devices, etc. shall be coordinated
with the Architectural Plans. Additional offsets, fittings, etc., shall be provided as needed to
meet this requirement at no extra cost to the Owner.
E. If discrepancies exist in the scope of work as to what trade provides items (i.e., duct smoke
detectors), they shall be reported to the Architect/Engineer prior to signing the Contract. If the
discrepancies are not reported, the Fire Alarm Subcontractor shall furnish such items as
needed for a complete and operable system.
F. All work shall be installed in cooperation with other trades.
G. Keep fully informed as to the shape, size and position of all openings required for all apparatus
and give information in advance to building openings into the work. Furnish and set in place all
sleeves, pockets, supports and incidentals.
H. Routing and locations of pipes, conduit and equipment shall be adjusted to accommodate the
work with interferences anticipated and encountered. The Fire alarm Subcontractor shall
determine the exact routing and location of his/her systems prior to fabrication and/or installation
of any system component.
1.07 COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A. Prior to the purchasing and fabrication of materials, each Subcontractor shall prepare
Coordination Drawings for all floors/areas showing the size and location of his/her equipment
and lines.
B. The Coordination Drawings shall be produced on AutoCAD 2000 or compatible system. A disc
and one (1) set of reproducible sepias (all-trade composite) shall be provided to the
Architect/Engineer for review.
C. Coordination Drawings shall be 3/8 inch = T-0" scale. Prepare and submit for review, at that
scale or larger, plans and sections of Electrical Rooms.
D. The cost of preparing and reproducing these Drawings will be included as part of this Contract.
The HVAC Subcontractor shall prepare the initial Drawings and circulate the Drawings to the
FIRE ALARM 2601 00-3
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA .s
1.03 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. The following work is not included as work in this Section and is to be performed under other
Sections:
1. Cutting and Patching.
2. Temporary Water, Heat and Fire Protection.
3. Temporary Light and Power.
4. Excavation and Backfill.
5. Foundations and Trenching. .�.
6. Concrete Bases for Equipment.
7. Flashing and Caulking.
8. Painting.
9. Plumbing. wR
10. Heating,Ventilating and Air Conditioning.
11. Electrical.
12. All automatic temperature control system components, wiring and interlock wiring
associated with the heating, ventilating and air conditioning system will be furnished,
mounted,wired and connected by the HVAC Contractor.
13. Mounting of electrical equipment having mechanical connections. Refer to work
involving mechanical trades.
14. Installation, wiring and connecting of automatic temperature controls unless otherwise
noted or specified.
1.04 CODES, STANDARDS AND REFERENCES w
A. All materials and workmanship shall comply with the latest editions of all-applicable Codes,
Local and State Ordinances, Industry Standards and Regulations.
B. The Fire Alarm Subcontractor shall notify the Architect/Engineer of any discrepancies between
the Contract Documents and applicable Codes, Standards, etc.
C. In the event of a conflict,the most stringent requirements shall apply. w
D. The following Codes, Standards and References shall be utilized as applicable:
1. Massachusetts State Building Code, CMR 780 7th Edition
2. National Electric Code(NEC), as amended by CMR 527, CH. 12
3. All requirements of local Authority Having Jurisdiction
4. National Fire Alarm Code NFPA 72, 2007 Edition.
5. Massachusetts Architectural Access Board, CMR 521
6. Massachusetts Fire Prevention Regulations, CMR 527
7. Massachusetts Elevator Regulations, CMR 524 �e
8. American National Standards Institute(ANSI).
9. American Society of Testing Materials(ASTM).
10. Commercial Standards, U.S. Department of Commerce(CS).
11. Factory Mutual(FM).
12. Industrial Risk Insurers(IRI).
13. National Electrical Manufacturers Association(NEMA).
14. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL).
15. U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, Guidelines for Construction and
Equipment for Hospital and Medical Facilities.
FIRE ALARM
16700-2
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
ww Northampton,MA
SECTION 26 01 00 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
PART 1 -GENERAL
!W 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Include GENERAL CONDITIONS, SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS and Division
1,General Requirements, as they apply to work specified in this Section.
B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements, which effect work of this
Section whether or not, such work is specifically mentioned in this Section.
C. Coordinate work with that of all other trades effecting or effected by work of this Section.
Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract.
D. The Owner will be submitting this building for certification under the U.S. Green Building
Council's LEED program. To that end, all systems and equipment must be installed and
operate to comply with the requirements of ASHRAE 90.1-2007 or the local energy code,
whichever is more stringent. In addition, several systems and pieces of equipment are
specified to comply with the requirements of the LEED program. An outside commissioning
authority will commission the building at the completion of construction. Refer to separate
commissioning authority scope of work and specifications for systems affected and Fire
Alarm contractor interface required.
1.02 WORK INCLUDED
A. The work under this Section shall include the furnishing of all material, labor, equipment and
supplies and the performance of all operations to provide a complete working system as
required by the drawings and details and as specified herein.
00
B. The Specifications and Drawings describe the minimum requirements that must be met by the
Electrical Subcontractor for the installation of all work as shown on the Drawings and as
specified hereinunder to include the following items:
1. Raceway Systems.
2. Wireways.
3. Outlets and Pull Boxes.
4. Wire and Cable.
5. Complete New Addressable Fire Alarm System.
6. Alarm wiring to include connections for heating, ventilating and air conditioning system
equipment.
7. Power, control and alarm wiring to include connections for the Fire Protection Systems
Equipment shall be wired and connected by the Electrical Contractor.
8. Supplementary Steel, Channel and Supports.
! !' 9. Supervision and approval of Excavation and Backfilling for Fire Alarm Work.
10. Operation and Maintenance Instructions and Manuals for Fire Alarm Equipment.
11. Nameplates, Labels and Tags.
12. Testing.
13. Vibration Isolation and Seismic Restraints.
14. Interface new addressable single interlock preaction sprinkler system releasing control
panel for 2nd Floor Data Center#218 and Anechoic Chamber#279 to the base building
fire alarm system. Points to monitor are Alarm,Trouble, and Supervisory signals.
15. Interface the smoke evacuation system in the Tower to the base building fire alarm
system. Upon activation of any fire alarm initiating device, initiate the smoke
evacuation system fans and close the two overhead garage doors on the 1s'Floor.
FIRE ALARM 2601 00-1
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
' Northampton,MA
SECTION 26 01 00 FIRE ALARM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
? PART 1 -GENERAL......................................
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS..........................................................................................................1
1.02 WORK INCLUDED...........................................................................................................................1
1.03 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS.......................................................................................2
1.04 CODES, STANDARDS AND REFERENCES..................................................................................2
1.05 OBTAINING INFORMATION...........................................................................................................3
1.06 COOPERATION AND COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES.................................................3
1.07 COORDINATION DRAWINGS........................................................................................................3
1.08 RECORD DRAWINGS.....................................................................................................................4
1.09 PERMITS, FEES, RULES AND REGULATIONS............................................................................4
1.10 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY..................................................................................5
1.11 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS.......................................................................................................5
1.12 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT STANDARDS.................................................................................6
1.13 GUARANTEE...................................................................................................................................6
1.14 CONTINUITY OF SERVICE AND SCHEDULING OF WORK.........................................................6
1.15 CERTIFICATES OF APPROVAL.....................................................................................................6
1.16 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION........................................................................................................7
1.17 FINAL COMPLETION......................................................................................................................7
1.18 REOBSERVATION ..........................................................................................................................7
1.19 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS .................................................7
1.20 IDENTIFICATION..............................................................................................................................8
1.21 VIBRATION ISOLATION AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS.................................................................8
1.22 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT...................................................................................9
PART2 -PRODUCTS..................................................................................................................................9
2.01 GENERAL........................................................................................................................................9
2.02 CONDUIT AND RACEWAYS...........................................................................................................9
2.03 OUTLET, PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES, AND FITTINGS ...........................................................9
2.04 WIREWAYS...................................................................................................................................10
2.05 WIRE AND CABLE ........................................................................................................................11
2.06 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM..................................................................................................................12
2.07 FIRE STOPPING ...........................................................................................................................21
2.08 VIBRATION ISOLATION AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS...............................................................22
PART3 -EXECUTION ...............................................................................................................................31
3.01 SLEEVING.....................................................................................................................................31
3.02 GROUNDING.................................................................................................................................31
3.03 WIRING METHODS.......................................................................................................................31
3.04 WIRE AND CABLES......................................................................................................................33
3.05 COLOR CODING...........................................................................................................................33
106 OUTLET, PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES.....................................................................................34
3.07 MOUNTING HEIGHTS AND SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS ...........................................................35
3.08 SUPPLEMENTARY STEEL, CHANNEL AND SUPPORTS..........................................................35
3.09 TESTING AND INSPECTION...........................................................
3.10 PAINTING ......................................................................................................................................36
3.11 CLEANING UP...............................................................................................................................36
FIRE ALARM 26 01 00-i
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
Northampton,MA
B. The interior of all boxes and cabinets shall be left clean; exposed surfaces shall be cleaned and
plated surfaces polished.
C. Repair damage to finish surfaces resulting from work under this section.
D. Remove material and equipment from areas of work and storage areas.
END OF SECTION
\\fs3\g_drive\projects\2009-boston\a0112-003.00\specifications\elec\e-spec 10-30-09.doc
�A1
ELECTRICAL 260000-73
so
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA .A
ANSI/NETA Standard for Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment go
and Systems, 2009 Edition (ANSI/NETA ATS-2009). The testing scope shall include all tests
identified in the following sections of the ANSI/NETA ATS-2009 where they are applicable to the
equipment to be installed under the Contract.
NETA Section Equipment Include
Optional Tests
7.1 Switch ear and Switchboard Assemblies No
7.2.1.1 Transformers, Dry-Type, Air-Cooled, Low-Voltage, No
Small
7.3.2 Cables, Low-Voltage, 600 Volt Maximum No
7.6.1.1 Circuit Breakers, Air, Insulated-Case/Molded-Case See Note 1
7.6.1.2 Circuit Breakers, Air, Low-Voltage Power No
7.11 Metering Devices
7.12.1.1 Regulating Apparatus, Voltage, Step Voltage
Regulators
7.13 Grounding Systems .■.R
7.14 Ground-Fault Protection Systems. Low-Voltage
7.16.2.1 Motor Control, Motor Control Centers, Low-Voltage
7.19.1 Surge Arresters, Low-Voltage Surge Protection No
Devices
7.21 Outdoor Bus Structures
Notes1: Optional tests not required.
H. Failure or defects in workmanship or materials revealed by tests or inspection shall be corrected
promptly and retested. Defective material shall be replaced at no additional expense to the
Owner. *�
I. Provide all temporary connections, necessary testing equipment, labor and materials, required
for the testing of the systems and equipment. All systems shall be prepared for testing and
protected from damage. The cost of all tests shall be included in the contract price. .�
J. Verify and correct as necessary the following: voltages, tap settings, trip settings, and phasing
on all equipment from the secondary distribution system to points of utilization. Secondary .w
voltages shall be tested at the bus in the main switchboard, at panelboards, and at such other
locations on the distribution systems as necessary. Secondary voltages shall be tested under
no-load and full-load conditions.
K. Measure minimum and maximum voltages, and voltage between phase wires and neutral, and
immediately deliver to the Architect a report on all voltage measurements.
3.16 PAINTING
A. All equipment installed under this Section shall have as a minimum a shop coat of non-lead
gray paint. Finish painting where required shall be done under other Sections.
3.17 CLEANING UP
A. Upon completion of all installation, lamping, and testing, thoroughly inspect all exposed portions
of the electrical installation and completely remove all exposed labels, markings, and foreign
material.
w
ELECTRICAL 260000-72
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
we 3.14 SUPPLEMENTARY STEEL, CHANNEL AND SUPPORTS
A. Furnish and install all supplementary steel, channels and supports required for the proper
installation, mounting and support of all lighting fixtures and electrical equipment to be installed
under this Contract, as required.
B. All supplementary steel, channels and supports shall be furnished, installed and secured with all
fittings, support rods and appurtenances required for a complete support or mounting system.
C. Supplementary steel and channels shall be firmly connected to the building construction in a
manner approved by the Architect prior to the installation of same. Submit to the Architect, via
the Contractor, the locations proposed for using supplementary steel and channels for the
support of equipment, fixtures and raceways. The submittal shall indicate the mounting
methods, size and details of the supports, channels and steel; it shall indicate also that weight
which the supports, channels and supplementary steel is to carry.
D. The type and size of the supporting channels and supplementary steel shall be of sufficient
strength and size to allow only a minimum deflection in conformance with the channel and
supplementary steel manufacturer's requirements for loading.
E. All supplementary steel and channels shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner
parallel to the walls, floor and ceiling construction. All turns shall be made with 90 degrees and
w 45 degrees fittings, as required to suit the construction and installation conditions.
F. All supplementary steel, channels, supports, and fittings, shall be Underwriters' Laboratories,
Incorporated, approved, be galvanized steel and be manufactured by Steel City, Unistrut,
on Power-Strut,T. J. Cope, Chalfant or approved equal.
3.15 TESTING AND INSPECTION
to A. Test and inspect all parts of the work provided under this Section and as required by codes,
standards or authorities having jurisdiction. An approved independent electrical testing
company shall conduct all tests and inspections to the complete satisfaction of the Architect and
,W all authorities. Notify the Architect and all involved authorities at least 48 hours prior to testing
or inspection. Do not cover work prior to testing or inspection.
B. Test reports shall be submitted for approval and shall include certification by the testing
a company that each piece of equipment tested is suitable for engerization or indicate corrective
action required. Equipment shall be re-tested upon correction of deficiencies.
C. Prior to the date of acceptance, furnish the Architect with certificates of testing and inspection
W for all Electrical systems indicating the approval of all authorities having jurisdiction and
conformance with all requirements of the Contract Documents.
D. All systems shall test free from short circuits and grounds, shall be free from mechanical and
electrical defects, and shall show an insulation resistance between phase conductors and
ground of not less than the values recommended by the manufacturers.
to E. Test all circuits for proper neutral connections.
F. Lighting fixtures shall be tested with specified lamps in place for not less than ten hours; the
fixtures may be checked in sections.
G. Testing recommended by manufacturers shall be required; this requirement may be waived by
the Architect. As a minimum, the contractor shall include testing per the ANSI approved
ELECTRICAL 260000-71
am
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
Northampton,MA .�
H. Carefully check electrical connections and sizing of motor circuit protection and prevent damage .o
to motors and equipment due to incorrect direction of rotation caused by faulty electrical
connections or incorrectly sized circuit protection.
I. Final connection to all motors shall be made with flexible conduit (minimum 16 inch long) with ""
green ground wire installed.
3.12 COORDINATION WITH MECHANICAL WORK 00
A. All safety disconnect switches shown on the electrical drawings shall be furnished, installed and
power wired under this Section. Safety disconnect switches for mechanical equipment
indicated on the electrical drawings are sized in accordance with the requirements for a +■.
representative manufacturer's make and model suitable for the design requirements. The
equipment ultimately purchased may vary from these ratings. Verify voltage and current ratings
of all motor driven mechanical equipment as purchased to confirm the correct electrical ratings
for safety disconnect switches and necessary overcurrent devices prior to the procurement of
such items and submission of shop drawings.
B. It is the intent that all power wiring including disconnecting devices be accomplished under this
Section and all control devices under Heating, Ventilating, Air and Air Conditioning and
Plumbing Sections. All motor starters and contactors for the heating, ventilating, air conditioning
and plumbing equipment shall be furnished under their respective Sections and installed and
power wired under this Section.
C. It is not the intent of the Plans and Specifications to cover all details of the wiring requirements
of the mechanical systems, the type of information to be determined will include motor rotation,
individual fuse sizes, exclusive for a particular manufacturer of system, equipment mounting,
etc. The intent is to show and/or describe major portions of the system together with a system
description of operation, to indicate feeder size and branch circuit protection, starter size,
location of equipment and circuit origination. 00
3.13 BUILDING RELATED SYSTEMS
A. Furnish and install all required over current protection, disconnect and/or safety switches, motor
controls, except as specifically noted, conduit, wire, boxes, fittings, wiring and accessories as
may be required for the heating, ventilating and air conditioning and plumbing systems as
shown on the Drawings and herein specified.
B. Determine by thorough investigation of all applicable Contract Plans and Specifications, the
power and control requirements of the heating, ventilating, air conditioning and plumbing
equipment shown on the Plans and/or called for in the Specifications. w�
C. The entire system shall be complete and operable in every respect to the intent of the Plans and
Specifications. The installation shall conform to all Local, State and National Codes, ordinances
and requirements.
D. It is not the intent of the Plans and Specifications to cover all details of the wiring requirements
for the mechanical systems, the type of information to be determined will include motor rotation,
motor interlocking, individual fuse sizes, control wiring, exclusive for a particular manufacturer of
system, equipment mounting, etc. The intent is to show and/or describe major portions of the
system together with a system description of operation, to indicate feeder size and branch
circuit protection, starter size, electrical interlocks, location of equipment and control point and .M
circuit origination.
ELECTRICAL 260000-70
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
' Northampton,MA
E. Provide information to the Contractor, for all required access panels in walls, ceilings and floors,
for access to concealed electrical equipment, pull/junction boxes and fittings. The exact sizes
and physical locations shall be to suit accessibility and construction conditions.
F. The exact location and mounting heights of all lighting fixtures located in mechanical equipment
spaces shall be coordinate in the field with the other Contractors, before installation of same, so
as to avoid interference with ducts, piping and other mechanical equipment.
G. Reflected Ceiling Plans for any and all areas prepared by the Architect showing the location of
lighting fixtures shall take precedence over the locations of same shown on the Lighting Plans
of this Contract set of Electrical Drawings. Install the lighting fixtures in any given area to agree
with the Architect's Reflected Ceiling Plans.
H. Furnish and install all power and control and alarm wiring to include connections for plumbing
and fire protection systems equipment to be wired and connected by the Electrical Contractor.
40
I. Obtain from Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning, Plumbing and Fire Protection
Specification Sections complete wiring and connection diagrams of all equipment which is to be
wired and connected before installing raceways or wiring for same.
3.11 MOTORS AND CONTROLS
A. Motors, in general, will be furnished and installed under Heating, Ventilating and Air
Conditioning, Plumbing and Fire Protection Sections unless specifically called out otherwise.
B. Starters and combination starters shall, in general, be furnished under the Heating, Ventilating
and Air Conditioning Section, but installed and wired under the Electrical Section. Disconnect
switches, except as part of packaged units, shall be furnished and installed under the Electrical
Section.
C. Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, all motors 1/2 horsepower and larger shall be rated
for operation on 480 volts, three-phase, 60 hertz. All other motors shall be rated for operation
on 120 volts, single-phase, 60 hertz.
w
D. Manual motor starters shall be push-button or toggle operated with thermal overload protection
in each phase and mounted in a NEMA 1 enclosure.
e E. Each motor shall be provided with a disconnecting means under this Section of the
specifications where required by the Electrical Code, even though not indicated. A circuit
breaker or horsepower rated switch in a panelboard will be acceptable as a disconnecting
means if located within sight of the motor controller. For single-phase motors, a single or
double pole tumbler or snap switch, rated only for alternating current, will be acceptable for
capacities less than 30 amperes, provided that the ampere rating of the switch is at least 125
percent of the rating of the controlled equipment. Switches shall be horsepower rated and shall
disconnect all ungrounded conductors.
F. Each motor controller and disconnect switch or separately enclosed circuit breaker shall be
identified as to the equipment which it serves.
G. Motor starters shall be mounted on a new 3/4 inch exterior grade plywood mounting board
finished to match starter enclosures. These shall be mounted at 60 inches above finished floor
on solid walls or columns in spaces not normally occupied. Obtain approval of starter locations
from the Architect.
ELECTRICAL 260000-69
am
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883 me
Northampton, MA
E. All outlet, pull and junction boxes shall be installed in a rigid and satisfactory manner and shall ..
be supported by bar hangers in frame construction or shall be fastened directly with wood
screws on wood, bolts with expansion shields on concrete or brick toggle bolts on hollow
masonry units, and machine screws or welded threaded studs on metal. Threaded studs of the
proper type and holding capacity driven in by a power charge and provided with lock washers
and nuts are acceptable for mounting of boxes on solid concrete walls or slabs. Preset inserts
of the proper type and holding capacity shall be used in overhead slab construction wherever
possible for the support of pull and junction boxes.
F. Feeders passing through pull or junction boxes shall be individually grouped and bound with
ty-raps. The feeders in each pull or junction box shall be properly tagged to clearly indicate their
electrical characteristics, circuit number and panel designation. Cables shall be supported on
suitable racks within the boxes and arranged in an orderly manner.
3.10 MOUNTING HEIGHTS AND SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS
A. All electrical equipment shall be mounted at the following heights unless noted or detailed
otherwise on the Electrical Drawings or Architectural Drawings. Notes or details on the
Architectural Drawings pertaining to mounting heights or locations of electrical equipment shall
supersede those noted below or detailed on the Electrical Drawings. If the mounting height of
any electrical component is questionable, obtain a clarification from the Architect before
installation. All mounting heights shall comply with the Federal ADA (Americans with
Disabilities Act) and the State of Massachusetts Publication 521 CMR: Architectural Barriers •
Board for(Buildings, Facilities, etc.for the Visually and Physically Handicapped).
1. Duplex Convenience Outlets, and Telephone Outlets: 18 inches (minimum) above
finished floor to centerline unless noted by symbol, note or dimension on the Drawings.
2. Light Switches: 4'-0"(maximum)above finished floor to centerline.
3. Panelboards: 6'-6"(maximum)to top breaker above finished floor.
4. Disconnect switches, service switches and individually mounted starters and contactors
for the control, operation or isolation of motorized equipment, electric heating units and
the panelboards 5-0" minimum on the Drawings or as required to suite field installation
conditions and with permission of the Architect.
5. Equipment located in lobbies shall be as detailed on the Architectural Drawings or as
directed by the Architect.
6. Interior wall brackets shall be as detailed on the Architectural Drawings or as directed
by the Architect.
B. All feeder, branch circuit or auxiliary system wiring passing through pull boxes or being made up
in panels, distribution panels and auxiliary system terminal cabinets shall be properly grouped, «�
bound and tied together in a neat and orderly manner, keeping with the highest standards of the
trade,with ty-raps.
C. Branch circuits and auxiliary system wiring shall be peeled out of the wiring gutters of the
terminal cabinets and panels at 90 degrees to breakers and terminal lugs for connections to
same.
D. All wall mounted duplex convenience and power receptacles shall be mounted vertically with
the grounding posts at the top of the device.
ELECTRICAL 260000-68
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
b. Application of three (3) 3/16 inch wide colored, fungus inert, self-extinguishing,
self-locking, nylon cable ties spaced 3 inches apart. The ties shall be snugly
applied with a special tool or pliers, and any excess removed.
C. The same colored cable shall be connected to the same phase throughout the project.
D. In general, building load centers and panelboards shall be phased "A", "B", "C", either top to
bottom or left to right. The neutral, although it may be in different locations for different
equipment, shall be identified.
E. Transformers in all systems shall be connected so that:
1. "A"Phase is terminated at"H1"connection.
2. "B"Phase is terminated at"1-12"connection.
3. "C" Phase is terminated at"H3"connection.
4. "X1"connection shall be the"A" Phase.
5. "X2"connection shall be the"B" Phase.
6. "X3"connection shall be the"C" Phase.
F. Submit for approval all color coding, phase identification and positioning schemes that he
intends to use at all terminations, etc., before actual connections are made.
G. In the event that electrical conflicts arise in the field, they shall be referred to the Architect
immediately before the Contractor proceeds with the work. Physical orientation or placement of
conductors shall be secondary to the electrical consistency, integrity and continuity.
H. This Contractor shall be instructed by the Architect or the Utility Company as to the phase
identification to make at the point of connection with the Utility Company supply and shall
thereafter be responsible to carry out and maintain this consistent system of color coding, phase
identification and positioning as herein specified or shown on the Drawings.
3.09 OUTLET, PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES
A. Install as a part of the raceway system all outlet, pull and junction boxes required for the proper
installation of all components of the electrical system.
B. The locations of all wall switch boxes shall be coordinated with the Architectural Drawings
before installation of same. All switch boxes, unless specifically noted otherwise on the
Drawings, shall be opposite the hinged side of the door for all single doors.
C. Locations of outlets shown on Drawings are approximate. The Electrical Contractor shall study
the Building Plans in relating to the spaces and equipment surrounding each outlet so that
receptacles, switches, lighting fixtures devices or other electrical components are symmetrically
located and mounted in or on the walls, ceiling and floor.
D. Outlet, junction or pull boxes, shown on the Drawings, that interfere with the installation of
mechanical equipment, structural or architectural features or that will be inaccessible due to the
work of other trades shall be relocated accordingly as a part of construction conditions
encountered during the course of the construction program at no cost to the Owner.
ELECTRICAL 260000-67
am
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883 ..
Northampton,MA
Ideal, General Electric, Dow Corning or approval equal, shall be used when necessary for the «w
pulling of conductors or cables into the raceway systems except that no pulling compound shall
be used for the isolated power system circuits.
F. Wires and cables shall be carefully handled during installation so as to avoid kinks, twists, and
mechanical injury to the conductor, insulation or covering.
G. Where conductors are to be connected directly to devices with the use of terminal screws, such
as lighting switches, receptacles, and other wiring devices or screw type terminations the wires
shall be formed into a loop to fit around the screws in a clockwise direction so as to be tightly
locked in place with same.
H. At no time shall more than one(1)conductor terminate under or on terminal screw.
3.08 PHASING AND COLOR CODING
A. The insulation or covering of each wire or cable shall be color coded so as to provide for circuit
identification as specified below.
208/120 Volts Phase 480/277 Volts
Black A Brown
Red B Orange wes
Blue C Yellow
White Neutral Gray
Green Ground Green w/yellow trace
240/120 Volts Delta* Phase 120 Volts 3 phase, 3 wire
Black A Purple .�
Orange(high phase to ground) B Purple
Blue C Purple
Black w/3 white tracer strips Neutral ----
Green Ground Green
* Not provided with a balance system neutral.
B. Color coding shall be achieved by one(1)of the following methods:
1. The insulation or covering shall be coded during manufacture by use of one (1) of the
following methods:
a. Color compounds.
b. Colored coatings.
2. When limited quantities of cable are involved, the Architect may permit the use of the
following methods in lieu of cable manufacturer's color coding. Each cable must be
coded at all terminal points, in all manholes, boxes or other similar enclosures by:
a. Spiral application of 3/4 inch wide, colored, pressure sensitive plastic tape,
half-lapped for a distance of not less than 6 inches. To prevent unwinding, the
last two (2) wraps of taps shall be applied with no tension. The tape shall be
applied so as not to obliterate identification markings on the cable.
ELECTRICAL 260000-66
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
P. No splices or joints shall be permitted in either feeders or branches except at outlets or
- accessible junction boxes. Splices in wire#8 AWG and smaller shall be standard pigtail, made
mechanically tight.
Q. Wire #6 AWG and larger shall be connected to panels and apparatus by means of approved
lugs or connectors. Connectors shall be mechanical type, sufficiently large to enclose all
strands of the conductor and be securely fastened. All solderless connections and lugs shall be
by Trego, Inc., Burndy, T&B or approved equal.
R. Joints and splices shall be made in an approved manner with mechanical type devices of a
design that will not cause separation of the cable strands or distortion of the cable. Joints and
splices shall be covered with good grade of splicing compound and plastic tape so as to form
the equivalent of original insulation and covering.
so S. Wire and cable shall be carefully handled during installation so as to avoid mechanical injury to
the conductor, insulation,or covering.
T. All raceways shall be carefully cleaned, blown and swabbed dry inside before installation of
*" wires and cables. The Architect reserves the right to have all wiring in a raceway or raceways
removed for inspection should the presence of moisture or dirt be suspected in same at no
additional expense to the Architect. If moisture or dirt is found in the raceway system during the
to inspection of same, it shall be thoroughly cleaned and dried to the complete satisfaction of the
Owner at no additional expense to the Owner.
U. All vertical risers for lighting, power and auxiliary systems passing through floor slabs shall be
properly supported at each floor level.
V. Wiring shall not be pulled into a raceway system until it is mechanically complete in all details.
The ends of the raceway shall be tightly plugged to exclude dust, moisture, or mortar, or plaster
" " while building is under the process of construction.
3.07 WIRE AND CABLES
A. Joints and splices shall be made in an approved manner and be at least equivalent electrically
and mechanically to the conductor itself. Whenever the conductors is bared for splicing, it shall
be taped with a good grade of rubber splicing compound and friction or plastic tape so as to
form at least the equivalent of the original insulation and covering.
B. Splices and taps in wires #8 and larger shall be made with Burndy, Anderson or Kearney
solderless connectors designed for the purpose. The splices and taps shall be taped with
approved tapes providing insulation not less than that of the conductor. Splices shall be
mechanically and electrically secure.
C. Pressure connectors with "wrap caps" or insulating caps of a type approved by the local
inspecting authorities may be used by joints on branch circuits with conductor sizes up to and
including #10 AWG. Connectors shall be manufactured by Buchanan, Eagle, Ideal, or
approved equal.
D. Insulating compounds, unless indicated or specified otherwise, for cable joints, boxes, terminals
and other similar items, shall have bituminous base and shall be free from granular content,
me
creosote alkali, acid,free of sulphur and water.
E. Conductors or cables shall not be pulled into the raceway systems until all work which could
cause injury to the conductors or insulation has been completed. A lubricant manufactured by
ELECTRICAL 260000-65
w.
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883 4,
Northampton, MA
D. Rigid non-metallic conduit as specified under Part 2 of this Section may be used, if approved by **
local authorities, for installation in underground concrete encased ductbanks when installed per
Articles 352, 353 and 354 of the Electrical Code and as per manufacturer's requirements. All
conduit penetrations of foundations, structural walls or concrete slabs shall be made with
galvanize rigid steel conduit with a minimum of 36" inch radius or approved conduit sealing
bushing.
E. Underground conduit runs shall be rigid non-metallic conduit as specified under Part 2 of this
Section or rigid steel conduit, installed as detailed or as indicated on the drawings. Rigid steel
conduit, unless encased in concrete, shall be coated with asphaltum paint prior to installation.
F. Flexible metal conduit of short lengths (maximum 18 inch) shall be provided at all motors and "*
equipment subject to vibration or movement. Liquid-tight flexible conduit shall be used in wet
locations.
G. All raceways shall be properly fastened in accordance with the applicable Articles of the
Electrical Code. Spacing between supports shall not exceed 7 feet unless specifically approved
by the Architect. Conduit installed above suspended ceilings shall be supported from the
building structure. Conduit supports fastened to the roof decking will not be allowed. .�
H. Conduit joints shall be cut square, threaded, reamed smooth, and drawn up tight. Bends or
offsets shall be made with standard conduit ells; field bends shall be made with an approved
bender or hickey. Pipe threads cut in the field for exterior or underground use shall be painted
with red lead or a similar approved substance before being made up.
I. Conduit terminals at cabinets and boxes shall be rigidly secured with locknuts and bushings as
required by the Electrical Code and local authorities. On all conduit 1-1/4 inch trade size and
larger, bushings shall be insulated with double locknut.
J. Conduit fittings shall be galvanized treated or cadmium plated. Rigid steel conduit and
intermediate metal conduit shall use only threaded connections. Steel supports or racks shall
be galvanized steel channel and fittings, by Unistrut, Steel City or approved equal.
K. Minimum size conduit shall be 1/2 inch. Other sizes shall be as indicated on the Drawings or
required by the Electrical Code for number and size of conductors installed. No combining of
branch circuit wiring beyond three phase wires and neutral wire will be allowed.
L. Conduit runs are shown diagrammatically. The exact routing and means of support shall be
determined in the field. Exposed conduits shall be installed parallel with or at right angles to the
building walls,structural members or architectural features.
M. All conduit ends shall be plugged or capped as soon as they are installed to prevent entrance of
moisture or other debris during construction. No wire shall be pulled into any conduit until the
conduit system is complete in all details. All spare conduits shall have a nylon pull line inserted.
N. Expansion fittings shall be furnished and installed wherever building expansion joints occur.
Expansion joints shall be provided for non-metallic conduit to compensate for thermal
expansion and contraction as recommended by the manufacturer. Conduit, fittings and outlet
boxes supported on walls, columns or steel work shall be held in place by caulking anchors,
power-driven studs, expansion shields, beam clamps or concrete inserts. Nails or screws used
in conjunction with wood plugs in lieu of toggle or expansion bolts will not be accepted.
O. Connections between conduits of different types shall be made in an approved manner, using
adapters or other materials and methods recommended or the purpose by the conduit
manufacturers.
ELECTRICAL 260000-64
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
4. The extra pole provided on all electrical outlets shall be grounded to the equipment
grounding conductor.
5. Raceways equipped with friction grounds shall have the paint removed from the areas
on of contact.
6. Each panelboard shall be equipped with an insulated terminal strip for neutral
conductors and an equipment grounding stud or bus bonded to the panel case, each
with sufficient terminals for the number of circuits, except as qualified for 3 phase
balanced loads. The equipment ground stud or bus shall be connected directly to
ground via a green grounding conductor. The point of grounding shall be at the point of
supply which may be distribution load center, the secondary of a lighting transformer, et
al.
7. Conduit or raceways, where terminated at boxes, cabinets and panelboards by means
of locknuts and bushings, shall be terminated with double locknuts for all voltages.
Enclosure panels at which conduit are terminated shall be securely bonded to the
frame of the enclosure by means of bonding jumpers or by means of welding in those
cases where the panels need not be removable.
8. Where conduits are stubbed up out of the floor into a panel with no bottom, grounding
bushings shall be used. The ground conductor connecting the bushings to the ground
stub on the panel shall be sized per Electrical Code Table 250.122.
9. Secondary neutral of all polyphase or center-tapped lighting and power transformers
shall be connected directly to the ground. The connection at the primary point of
'! supply, run in the same raceway as the supply leads. The secondary neutral shall be
full capacity, full insulated conductor extended to insulated neutral terminal shall be
connected to the strips in the panelboard. All branch circuit neutral strips in the
panelboards.
10. Motor frames shall be grounded by the equipment grounding conductor run in the same
raceway as the power leads.
3.06 WIRING METHODS
A. Generally, unless specified below and approved by the authorities having jurisdiction, wiring
VP shall consist of insulated conductors installed in rigid steel conduit or intermediate metal conduit.
B. Electrical metallic conduit may be used as permitted by State or Local Codes for feeders,
branch circuits, signal instrumentation and control circuits.
1. EMT may be used as permitted in ceiling or floor cavity spaces,void spaces of masonry
walls, in equipment rooms, in mechanical chases, in electrical chases, in closets, in
exposed locations 8 feet above finished floor and where not subject to accidental
damage or abuse. Where subject to accidental damage or abuse, install in rigid steel
conduit or intermediate metal conduit.
2. Set screw connectors shall be galvanized steel,white metal is not acceptable.
C. Metal clad cable with a full size, insulated, separate ground wire may be used as permitted by
state and local codes for branch circuit wiring concealed above hung ceilings and in studded
partitions.
ELECTRICAL 260000-63
w
so
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883 so
Northampton,MA
b. Domestic water service line—all buildings. +
C. Fire protection water service line—all buildings.
d. Concrete encased grounding electrode — all new buildings or if available in
renovated buildings.
e. Ground ring—where shown on the drawings.
f. Rod and pipe electrodes—all buildings.
g. Other listed electrodes—where required.
h. Other local metal underground systems or structures—where available.
3. A concrete encased grounding electrode shall be provided for all new structures and
shall consist of a 20 foot length of bare copper wire located horizontally near the bottom
of a concrete foundation or footing that is in direct contact with earth. Conductor size
shall be as shown on the drawings or shall be sized per NEC Table 250.66, but shall
not be smaller than number 4 AWG.
E. Grounding and Bonding Conductors:
1. Conduits or raceways shall not be utilized as grounding conductors.
2. The neutral conductor of any system shall not be utilized as the grounding conductor.
w�
3. In no system shall the conduit act the grounding means. A separate copper grounding
conductor shall be installed with all feeders, subfeeders and branch circuit wiring
systems. The grounding conductor shall be type THWN-THHN-XHHW to match that of
the normal current carrying conductors and size to comply with requirements of the
Electrical Code and other governing agencies. The grounding conductor shall be
properly identified with green tape or insulation where visible in boxes or outlets.
4. Metallic piping systems such as water, gas, sewer, etc., shall be made electrically
continuous by their connections or bonding jumpers. Each metallic pipe system and
each metallic air duct system shall be bonded to the ground electrode network via a
bonding jumper or an equipment grounding conductor where available and where
allowed by codes. A full size bonding jumper shall be provided across all meters.
5. Bonding jumpers to metallic piping systems shall be number 6 AWG, solid copper,
minimum. Bonding jumper size across water meters shall match the grounding
electrode conductor size.
F. Equipment Grounding:
1. The frames of all electrical equipment including motors, panels, and lighting fixtures
shall be grounded to the equipment grounding conductor.
2. The equipment grounding conductor shall originate only at a point of supply such as a
transformer or at a point where the system is grounded.
3. The equipment grounding conductor shall be run in the same raceway as the power
leads feeding the equipment unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
ELECTRICAL 260000-62
.w
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
2. In general, the grounding shall be as specified hereinafter and as shown on the
Drawings.
B. Equipment:
1. Materials manufactured within the scope of the Underwriters' Laboratories (grounding
and bonding materials) shall conform to UL Standards and shall carry UL approval for
grounding and bonding applications.
2. Ground rods shall be "Copperweld" or approved equal, not less than 3/4 inch in
uw diameter and eight feet along unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.
3. Ground conductors shall be of electrical grade copper except where otherwise
indicated. Grounding connectors shall be uninsulated unless otherwise specified.
C. Methods:
1. The ground connections of conductor system shall be made at the main service
equipment and shall be extended to the point of the metallic water service. Main
connections shall be made on the street side of any meters and flanged pipe.
2. Connections shall be made readily accessible for inspection. No connections shall be
made concealed in floors or walls.
3. In general, all connections shall be welded where safe to apply except that substantial
mechanical connections shall be used where disconnection is required for test and
where called for on the Drawings.
4. All permanent grounding connections shall be by thermal welded connections.
"Cadweld"or"Thermoweld"processes are approved.
5. All bus connections shall be made suitable clamp type copper connectors.
Ow
6. All equipment connections shall be made with clamp type copper connectors, Bumcly
Type GBM or approved equal.
7. Connections to the cold water service pipes shall be with copper pipe clamp.
8. Connectors to CSST gas piping shall be by copper pipe clamp at the CSST connection
nut. Clamps shall not be applied to the tubing itself. When CSST is connected to rigid
metal gas piping that is already bonded,a second connection is not required.
9. Connections to building steel shall be welded.
D. Grounding Electrodes and Grounding Electrode Conductors
1. Grounding electrode conductors shall be as sized on the drawings or per NEC 250,
+ ! whichever is more stringent.
2. Grounding electrode conductors shall be provided and connected as necessary for a
complete, interconnected, grounding electrode system, including:
a. Building steel—all steel buildings.
ELECTRICAL 260000-61
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
Northampton,MA
required by the Power Company. Metering transformers (current and potential) will be
furnished by the Power Company and shall be installed and wired by the Contractor.
B. Before submitting his bid, the Contractor shall consult with the Power Company to determine
their requirements so that all equipment installations and connections shall be made in full
compliance with the regulations of the Power Company.
3.03 MAIN ELECTRIC SERVICE
A. Provide underground primary service as herein specified, indicated on the Drawings and as
required by the Power Company.
.M
B. Secondary voltage characteristics for project shall be 277/480 volts, three phase, 4 wire, 60
cycle.
C. Primary cable and terminations will be provided by the Power Company.
D. Pad-mounted transformer will be provided and set by the Power Company. Transformer pad
and transformer pad grounding shall be provided under this Section in accordance with the w.
Power Company's requirements.
E. All secondary work, except connections of secondary cables to pad-mounted transformer shall
be done under this Section.
F. The Contractor shall obtain from the Power Company all back charges to be assessed the
project and such charges shall be carried in this Contract price.
3.04 SLEEVING
A. Conduit and openings shall be laid out in advance to permit their provision in the work. Sleeves w
and conduit shall be set in forms before concrete is poured. Any extra work required where
sleeves or conduits have been omitted or improperly placed shall be performed at the expense
of the Contractor which made the error or omission.
B. Sleeves provided for conduit between floors and through fire walls, or smoke partitions shall be
installed with approved packing between sleeves and conduit to provide for fire stop.
C. Where conduits pass through footings, beams, or slabs they shall be provided with waterproof
sleeves.
D. Except as required below, sleeves shall be made of galvanized sheet metal to finish flush with
building finish lines.
E. Provide acoustic sealer in sleeves between occupied spaces. Sleeves installed in floors of toilet
rooms and apparatus rooms shall extend two inches above the finished floor.
3.05 GROUNDING
A. General: *�
1. The electrical service, separately derived systems and distribution systems, comprising
of transformers, generators, uninterruptible power supplies, switchboards, distribution
panels, all electric circuits, raceways, cabinets, motors, boxes, devices, battery racks
and non-current carrying metallic parts shall be grounded according to the latest edition
of the Electrical Code.
ELECTRICAL 260000-60
..o
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
we Northampton,MA
N. Downlead cables to steel frame from the cable roof system shall not be brought directly through
the roof. Through roof connectors with solid rods or conduits through pitch pockets shall be
utilized for this purpose.
O. Copper equipment shall not be connected to aluminum surfaces except by means of a UL
approved bimetal transition fitting.
P. The lightning protection installer will work with other trades to ensure a correct, neat and
unobtrusive installation.
Q. It shall be the responsibility of the lightning protection installer to assure a sound bond to the
main water service and to assure interconnection with other building ground systems, including
both telephone and electrical and also to ensure that proper arresters have been installed on
the power service.
R. The lightning protective installer shall secure and deliver a UL Master Label and L.P.I. System
Certification to the Architect for the Owner upon completion of the installation.
S. The Contractor shall also submit two (2) copies of As-Built Shop Drawings, one with the UL
Master Label Application Form and another with L.P.I. Forms 175A and B.
2.29 GROUNDING - BUILDING STRUCTURAL STEEL
A. The building's structural steel framework shall be bonded to a No. 4/0 bare copper wire buried
counterpoise, located in a minimum of 2'-0" from new foundation walls in accordance with a
Class II lighting protection system.
B. Connections shall be made on cleaned areas of the steel framework by the use of bonding
plates with bolted pressure cable connectors having a surface contact area of not less than 8
square inches. Plate to be welded securely to the steel.
C. It is the intent that all conductors and material for this system be furnished and installed by a
certified lighting protection installer such that future additional floors may be provided with a
master labeled lighting protection system.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Refer to all drawings associated with the project, prior to the installation or roughing-in of the
W electrical outlets,conduit and equipment,to determine the exact location of all outlets.
B. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to see that all the electrical equipment shall be
made accessible, such as junction boxes, pull boxes, panelboards, switches, controls and such
other apparatus as may require maintenance and operation from time to time.
C. After installation, electrical equipment shall be protected to prevent damage during the
construction period. Openings in conduits and boxes shall be closed to prevent the entrance of
foreign materials.
3.02 METERING
A. The Contractor shall furnish and install all conduit, meter bases for energy and demand meters
and enclosures, if any, for metering transformers as indicated on the drawings and/or as
ELECTRICAL 260000-59
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
C. The following Specifications and Standards of the latest issue form a part of this Specification:
(A) Lightning Protection Institute Installation Code LIP-175; (B) Underwriters' Laboratories,
Incorporated Master Label Code 96A; (C) NFPA Code No.78.
D. The lightning protection system shall conform to the requirements of the Lightning Protection
Institute and Underwriters' Laboratories, Incorporated Standards for Lightning Protection
Systems. The Underwriters' Laboratories, Incorporated Master Label shall be furnished, along
with L.P.I. Systems Certification, including Forms LPI-175A and 175B.
E. The system to be furnished under this Specification shall be the standard products of a
manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of lightning protection systems and shall be
the manufacturer's latest approved design. The equipment manufacturer shall also be a UL
listed and approved manufacturer and a fully certified manufacturer member in good standing of
the Lightning Protection Institute. All material specified for this work is manufactured by
Thompson Lightning Protection, Incorporated or approved L.P.I. equal. For approval of L.P.I.
manufacturer, proposed material data and Installation Drawings must be submitted for review
not less than ten (10)days prior to bid.
F. Complete Shop Drawings showing the type, size and locations of all equipment, grounds, cable
routings, etc., shall be submitted to the Architect for approval prior to start of work.
G. Samples and pertinent catalog data shall be submitted to the Architect for approval upon **
request.
H. All equipment used in this installation shall be UL approved and labeled in accordance with UL
procedures, with each air terminal bearing an "A" label and all main conductors bearing a "B"
label at 10'-0" intervals.
I. All equipment shall be new, the product of a single manufacturer as outlined above and of a 4W
design and construction to suit the application where it is used in accordance with accepted
industry standards and L.P.I. and UL Code requirements.
J. The installation shall be accomplished by an experienced installer listed with Underwriters' +n
Laboratories, Incorporated as qualified and who is also a Certified Master Installer of the L.P.I.
or working under the direct supervision of an L.P.I. manufacturer as listed above or his
authorized L.P.I. Certified Master Installer Representative.
40
K. All equipment shall be installed in a neat workmanlike manner in the most inconspicuous
manner possible. The system shall consist of a complete cable network on the roof involving all
air terminals, splicers and bonds with cable downleads routed concealed either directly in the „m,
building construction or in conduit to ground.
L. All metallic equipment located on roof not limited to mechanical equipment, fans, roof hatches
and other equipment shall be bonded to the Lightning Protections system for a complete UL .w
installed system.
M. The electrically continuous steel frame of the building shall serve as the down conductors for
the lightning protection system. The number, size, type and location of grounds and
connections to steel at roof and grade level shall be as required by UL and L.P.I. Codes. A
complete cable system with related air terminals, splices and bonds, etc., shall be used on the
roof.
ELECTRICAL 260000-58
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
4. Inspection
a. Upon completion of installation of all vibration isolation and seismic restraint
devices, the owner may elect to contract and outside consultant at the owner's
expense to review the installation. Any deficiencies in the installation will be
corrected immediately at the contractor's expense.
ABLE B Vibration Isolation&Seismic EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION ATTACHMENT
Restraint Requirements for POINT
Electrical Equipment
ON GRADE ABOVE GRADE
SIZE MOUNTING ISOL DEFL BASE ISOL DEFL BASE
EQUIPMENT
- General Purpose Floor - - - - - D 0.30 - -
Transformers-Dry Type All
Ceiling - - - - - - E 0.30 - -
Generators All Floor B 0.75 - - B 1.50 - -
TABLE B NOTES:
GENERAL : ISOL= Isolator, DEFL. = Deflection, All deflections indicated are in inches.
TABLE C
SEISMIC BRACING TABLE
to
ON CENTER SPACING(Max) WITHIN EACH CHANGE
EQUIPMENT OF DIRECTION
TRANSVERSE LONGITUDINAL
CONDUIT 40 Feet 80 Feet 10 Feet
BUS DUCT 30 Feet 60 Feet 4 Feet
CABLE TRAY 40 Feet 80 Feet 10 Feet
2.28 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM
A. The work covered by this Section of the Specifications consists of furnishing all labor, materials
and items of service required for the completion of a functional and unobtrusive lightning
w protection system as approved by the Architect and in strict accordance with this Section of the
Specifications and the applicable Contract Drawings.
B. If any departure from the Contract Drawings or Submittal Drawings covered below are deemed
necessary by the Contractor, details of such departures and reasons therefore shall be
submitted as soon as practicable to the Architect for approval. No such departure shall be
made without the prior written approval of the Architect.
ELECTRICAL 260000-57
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
(6) Conduit Risers
(a) Where conduits pass through cored holes, core diameters to be
a maximum of 2 inches larger than pipe O.D. Cored holes must
be packed with resilient material or fire stop as specified in other
Sections of this Specification and/or State and Local Codes. No
additional horizontal seismic bracing is required at these
locations.
(b) Conduit risers through cored holes require a riser clamp at each
level on top of the slab attached in a seismically approved
manner for vertical restraint. ••
(c) Conduit risers in pipe shafts require structural steel attached in
a seismically approved manner at each floor level and a riser
clamp at each floor level on top of, and fastened to the
structural steel. The riser clamp and structural steel must be
capable of withstanding all static and seismic loads.
(7) Ceiling mounted panel light fixtures shall be attached to lay-in ceilings
with earthquake clips or other approved means of positive attachment to
T-bar structure.
.w
(8) All non-isolated floor or wall-mounted equipment shall use RESTRAINT
TYPE III or V.
(9) Where base anchoring of equipment is insufficient to resist seismic 11°
forces, restraint TYPE III shall be located above the units' center of
gravity to suitably resist"G"forces specified.
(10) A rigid piping system shall not be braced to dissimilar parts of a building
or two dissimilar building systems that may respond in a different mode
during an earthquake. Examples: Wall and roof; solid concrete wall and
a metal deck with lightweight concrete fill, bus duct, conduit, etc. •
crossing a building expansion joint.
b. Exclusions for Seismic Restraints On Non-Life Safety Systems:
(1) All conduit less than 2-1/2 inch diameter.
(2) All clevis or trapeze supported conduit, cable tray or bus duct
suspended by hangers with positive attachment to the structure that are
less than 12 inches in length as measured from the top of the conduit,
cable tray or bus duct to the point of attachment to the structure. If the
12 inch limit is exceeded by any hanger in the run, seismic bracing is .■
required for the run.
C. Exclusions for Seismic Restraints On Life Safety Equipment.
(1) Critical, Standby or Emergency power conduit less than 1 inch nominal
diameter.
ELECTRICAL 260000-56
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
Northampton,MA
b. Additional Requirements:
(1) Spring isolators shall be installed after all equipment is installed without
changing equipment elevations.
(2) After the entire installation is complete and under full operational load,
the spring isolators shall be adjusted so that the load is transferred from
the blocks to the isolators.
(3) Remove all debris from beneath the equipment and verify that there are
no short circuits of the isolation. The equipment shall be free in all
directions.
(4) Install equipment with flexibility in wiring.
(5) Housekeeping pads for equipment in this Section must be properly
doweled or bolted, using wedge type expansion bolted to the structure
to meet the acceleration criteria. Anchor equipment or isolators to
housekeeping pads, See D. RELATED WORK.
3. Seismic Restraints
a. Installation
(1) All floor mounted equipment whether isolated or not shall be snubbed,
anchored, bolted or welded to the structure to comply with the required
! ! acceleration. Calculations that determine that isolated equipment
movement may be less than the operating clearance of snubbers
(restraints) do not preclude the need for snubbers. All equipment must
be positively restrained to the structure.
(2) All suspended equipment shall be two or four point independently
braced with TYPE III restraints, installed taught for non-isolated
equipment and slack with '/z' cable deflection for isolated equipment.
Rod bracing shall be installed as per approved submittals and shop
drawings. Equipment less than 50 lbs. is excluded.
(3) All horizontally suspended cable trays, bus duct and conduit shall use
RESTRAINT TYPE III. Spacing of seismic bracing shall be as per
TABLE C at the end of this Section.
" (4) For all trapeze supported piping and conduit, the individual pipes and
conduits must be transversely and vertically restrained to the trapeze
support at the designated restraint locations.
(5) For overhead supported equipment, over stress of the building structure
must not occur. Bracing may occur from:
*► (a) Flanges of structural beams.
(b) Upper truss chords in bar joists.
(c) Cast in place inserts or drilled and shielded inserts in concrete
structures.
ELECTRICAL 260000-55
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
(3) Ductile top cup with adjusting bolt tapped for equipment attachment
locking cap screw.
(4) Minimum 1/4"thick neoprene acoustical base pad or cup on underside,
unless designated otherwise.
Mason Industries Type SLF.
b. TYPE B: Spring Isolator-Restrained w
(1) Shall be the same as TYPE A with the following additional features.
(a) Integral restraining bolts with elastomeric cushions preventing !
metal-to-metal contact.
(b) Internal spring adjusting nut or bolt with leveling capability.
(c) Built-in all-directional limit stops with minimum 1/4" clearance
under normal operation.
(d) Mountings shall have Anchorage Pre-approval "R" number from
California OSHPD, certifying the horizontal and vertical seismic
load ratings.
Mason Industries Type SLR, SSLFH.
C. TYPE C: NOT USED
d. TYPE D: Double deflection neoprene isolator encased in ductile iron or steel
casing.
(1) Mountings shall have Anchorage Pre-approval "R" number from
California OSHPD, certifying the horizontal and vertical seismic load
ratings.
Mason Industries Type RC or BR.
e. TYPE E: Elastomer Hanger Isolator
(1) Molded neoprene element with an integral bushing to insulate lower w
support rod from the hanger box.
(a) Steel hanger box shall withstand three times the rated load
without failure.
Mason Industries Type HD.
F. Installation
1. General
a. Isolation and seismic restraint systems must be installed in strict accordance with
the manufacturer's written instructions and all submittal data.
b. Vibration isolators shall not cause any change of position of equipment resulting
in stress on equipment connections.
2. Equipment Installation
a. Equipment shall be isolated as indicated in TABLE B at the end of this section.
ELECTRICAL 260000-54
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
b. TYPE II: Where required, each corner or side of equipment base shall
incorporate a seismic restraint snubber having an all directional resilient pad
limit stop. Restraints shall be fabricated of plate, structural members or
! square metal tubing. Angle bumpers are not acceptable.
Mason Ind. Type Z-1225/Z-1011.
C. TYPE III: Restraints for suspended systems.
(1) Vibration isolated systems braced with multiple 7 x 19 strand galvanized
cable rope. Mason Industries Type SCB.
(2) Non-isolated systems braced with structural steel strut type with
approved fastening devices to equipment and structure.
Mason Ind.Type SSB.
(3) Steel angles (by contractor) shall be provided to prevent rod bending of
hung equipment where indicated by the Seismic Restraint vendor's
submittals. Steel angles shall be attached to the rods with a minimum of
three ductile iron clamps at each restraint location. Welding of support
rods to angles is not acceptable. Rod clamp assemblies shall have
Anchorage Pre-approval"R" number from California OSHPD.
Mason Ind. Model"SRC".
(4) Pipe clevis cross braces are required at all restraint locations. They
shall be special purpose preformed channels deep enough to be held in
place by bolts passing over the clevis cross bolt. Clevis cross braces
shall have Anchorage Pre-approval"R" number from California OSHPD.
Mason Ind. Model"CCB".
d. TYPE IV: Double deflection neoprene isolator encased in ductile iron or steel
casing.
(1) Mountings shall have Anchorage Pre-approval "R" number from
California OSHPD, certifying the horizontal and vertical seismic load
ratings.
Mason Industries Type RC or BR.
e. TYPE V: Rigid attachment to structure utilizing wedge type expansion
anchors for bolting and steel plates, either cast-in or anchored with wedge
type expansion bolts, for welding. Powder shots are not acceptable.
Concrete anchor bolt spacing shall be in accordance with manufacturer's
published standards.
4. Vibration Isolator Types
a. TYPE A: Spring Isolator-Free Standing
(1) Spring shall have a minimum outer diameter to overall height ratio of
0.8 : 1 at rated deflection.
(2) Reserve deflection (from published load ratings to solid height) of 50%
of the rated deflection.
ON
ELECTRICAL 260000-53
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
3. Attachments .�
a. Contractor shall provide restraint attachment plates cast into housekeeping
pads, concrete inserts, double sided beam clamps, etc. in accordance with the
requirements of the Seismic Restraint vendor.
TABLE A
"G" FORCES FOR VARIOUS CONDITIONS
(SEISMIC ZONE 2 - AV> 0.1 < 0.2)
CONDUIT, CABLE TRAY RIGIDLY MOUNTED FLEXIBLY MOUNTED ALL LIFE SAFETY
and BUS DUCT EQUIPMENT EQUIPMENT
.25 .40 .40 .60
.A
E. Materials
1. Devices
a. All vibration isolation and seismic devices described in this section shall be
the product of a single manufacturer. Mason Industries is the base
manufacturer of these specifications; products of other manufacturers are
acceptable provided their systems strictly comply with intent, structural design,
performance and deflections of the Base Manufacturer.
2. Seismic Restraints and Vibration Isolation Types
a. All isolation and seismic restraint devices shall be capable of accepting,
without failure, the "G" forces as determined by the seismic certification and
calculations as described in the "SUBMITTAL DATA REQUIREMENTS'
section of these specifications.
b. Corrosion protection for outdoor applications shall be as follows:
(1) Springs cadmium plated,zinc electroplated or powder coat.
(2) Hardware cadmium plated.
(3) All other metal parts hot spray or hot dipped galvanized.
.A
C. All seismic restraint devices
(1) Shall maintain the equipment in a captive position and not short circuit
isolation devices during normal operating conditions. w
(2) Shall have provisions for bolting and/or welding to the structure.
d. Welding of springs to isolator housing, base plates, etc. is strictly prohibited.
3. Seismic Restraint Types
a. TYPE I: Same as Type B. Cast or aluminum housings, (except ductile iron)
are not acceptable.
Mason Ind. TYPE SLR.
ELECTRICAL 260000-52
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
Northampton,MA
go 3. Seismic Certification and Analysis
a. Seismic restraint calculations must be provided for all connections of equipment
to the structure. All performance of products (such as; strut, cable, anchors,
go clips, etc.)associated with restraints must be supported with manufacturer's data
sheets or certified calculations.
b. Seismic restraint calculations must be based on the acceleration criteria shown
in Table A acting through the equipment's center of gravity.
C. Certification of calculations to support seismic restraint designs must be stamped
by a registered professional engineer in Massachusetts.
d. Analysis must indicate calculated dead loads, derived loads and materials
utilized for connections to equipment and structure. Analysis must detail
anchoring methods, bolt diameter,embedding and/or weld length.
e. An in force, $500,000.00 coverage limit Seismic Design Errors and
Omissions insurance certificate must accompany submittals.
Manufacturer's product liability insurance certificates are not acceptable.
4. Manufacturer's Responsibility
a. Manufacturer of vibration and seismic control equipment shall have the following
responsibilities:
(1) Determine vibration isolation and seismic restraint sizes and locations.
(2) Provide equipment vibration isolation and seismic restraints as specified.
" (3) Guarantee specified isolation system deflections.
(4) Provide installation instructions, drawings and field supervision to insure
proper installation and performance of systems.
(5) Certify correctness of installation upon completion.
W D. Related Work
1. Housekeeping Pads
a. Housekeeping pad attachment shall be by the Project Structural Engineer.
Material and labor required for attachment and construction shall be by the
Concrete Section Contractor.
b. Housekeeping pads shall be coordinated with the Seismic Restraint vendor and
sized to provide a minimum edge distance of 10 bolt diameters of clearance all
around the outermost anchor bolt to allow for the use of full anchor ratings.
2. Supplementary Support Steel
a. Contractor shall supply supplementary support steel and connections for all
equipment and piping, as required.
ELECTRICAL 260000-51
w.
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883 �.
Northampton,MA
B. OEM Equipment Isolation Packages . �
1. Internal and/or External Systems
a. Substitution of internally or externally isolated and restrained equipment in lieu of
the isolation and restraints specified in this section is acceptable provided all
conditions of this section are met. The equipment manufacturer shall provide a
letter of guarantee from their Engineering Department stamped and certified per
the section on Seismic Restraints and Analysis stating that the seismic restraints
are in full compliance with these specifications. Letters from field offices or
representatives are unacceptable.
b. All costs for converting to the specified vibration isolation and/or restraints shall
be borne by the equipment manufacturer in the event of non compliance with the
preceding.
C. In the event that the equipment is internally isolated and restrained, the entire
unit assembly must be seismically attached to the structure. This attachment
and certification thereof shall be by this section.
C. Submittal Data Requirements
1. Submittals w
a. Catalog cuts or data sheets on specific vibration isolators and restraints to be
utilized detailing compliance with the specification. Reference 'TYPE" as per
"MATERIALS"Section of this specification.
b. An itemized list of all isolated and non-isolated equipment. Detailed schedules
showing isolator and seismic restraints proposed for each piece of equipment,
referencing material and seismic calculation drawing numbers.
2. Shop Drawings
ws
a. When walls and slabs are used as seismic restraint locations, details of
acceptable methods for ducts, conduit and pipe must be included.
b. Indicate isolation devices selected with complete dimensional and deflection
data before condition is accepted for installation.
C. Provide specific details of seismic restraints and anchors; include number, size
and locations for each piece of equipment.
d. Coordinated or contract drawings shall be marked-up with the specific locations
and types of restraints shown for all conduits, bus duct and cable tray. Rod +
bracing and assigned load at each restraint location shall be clearly delineated.
Any and all tributary loads shall be considered for proper restraint sizing.
e. For ceiling suspended equipment provide minimum/maximum installation angle
allowed for restraint system as well as braced and unbraced rod lengths at each
allowable installation condition.
ELECTRICAL 260000-50
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
3. The work in this section includes the following:
a. Vibration isolation elements for equipment.
b. Seismic restraints for isolated equipment.
C. Seismic restraints for non-isolated equipment.
d. Certification of seismic restraint designs and installation supervision.
4. The term EQUIPMENT will be used throughout this specification and it includes ALL
non-structural components within the facility and/or serving this facility, such as
equipment located in outbuildings or outside of the main structure on grade within five
feet of the foundation wall. Equipment buried underground are excluded but entry of
services through the foundation walls are included. Equipment referred to below is a
! ► partial list of equipment for reference. (Equipment not listed are still included in this
specification)
Conduit Light Fixtures Bus Ducts
Panelboards Switchboards Transformers
Variable Frequency
5. Life safety systems defined
a. All systems involved with fire protection systems.
b. All systems involved with and/or connected to emergency power supply including
all generators, transfer switches,transformers, panelboards and all circuits to fire
protection, smoke evacuation and/or emergency lighting systems.
C. All medical and life support systems.
d. Fresh air relief systems on emergency control sequence including conduit,
dampers, etc.
6. Positive Attachment
a. Positive attachment is defined as a support location with a cast-in or wedge type
expansion anchor, a double sided beam clamp, a welded or through bolted
connection to the structure.
7. Transverse Bracing
a. Restraint(s) applied to limit motion perpendicular or angular to the centerline of
the conduit, cable tray or busduct.
8. Longitudinal Bracing
a. Restraint(s) applied to limit motion along the centerline of the conduit, cable tray
or busduct.
ELECTRICAL 260000-49
W
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
Northampton,MA
4. Labels shall be machine printed,with no field markings.
5. Arc flash labels shall be provided in the following manner and all labels shall be based
on recommended overcurrent device settings.
a. For each 600, 480 and applicable 208 volt panelboard, one arc flash label shall
be provided.
b. For each motor control center, one arc flash label shall be provided.
C. For each low voltage switchboard, one arc flash label shall be provided. A
d. For each switchgear, one flash label shall be provided.
e. For medium voltage switches one arc flash label shall be provided. 40
6. Labels shall be field installed by the engineering service division of the equipment
manufacturer under the Startup and Acceptance Testing contract portion. go
O. Arc Flash Training
1. The contractor of the Arc Flash Hazard Analysis shall train the owner's qualified .
electrical personnel of the potential arc flash hazards associated with working on
energized equipment(minimum of 4 hours). The training shall be certified for continuing
education units (CEUs) by the International Association for Continuing Education
Training (IACET)or equivalent.
2.26 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION TESTING
A. The Electrical Contractor shall, at the completion of his work and prior to final acceptance by the
Owner, perform an infrared line scan of all major electrical equipment connections in the main
switchboard, distribution panelboards to detect possible equipment high resistance connections.
B. This test shall be conducted with the system/equipment energized and operating under normal
load utilizing a "Therm A Trace II" portable infrared scanning instrument and a photographic
recording accessory that uses a Polaroid SX-70 camera to obtain an instant full color hard-copy
for record and quantitative measurement evaluation using clear overlay print directly in degrees
C on a 100°C scale with 25°C background.
C. After the record measurements and hard-copy photographs have been analyzed, the Electrical
Contractor shall retorque any loose or defective connections or components and take a second
recorded measurement to insure a satisfactory and acceptable installation.
2.27 VIBRATION ISOLATION AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS
A General
1. This dual purpose section provides for vibration isolation and seismic control for the
"equipment"as listed below.
2. It is the intent of the seismic restraint portion of this specification to provide restraint of ..
non-structural building components. Restraint systems are intended to withstand the
stipulated seismic accelerations applied through the component's center of gravity.
ELECTRICAL 260000-48
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
(1) Limited Approach Boundary.
(2) Restricted Approach Boundary.
r (3) Prohibited Approach Boundary.
C. Arc Flash Hazard Boundaries.
6. Results of Arc flash Hazard Analysis for high voltage, medium voltage and low voltage
_ systems, including:
a. Working distances.
b. Energy Levels.
C. Recommendations to reduce arc flash hazard energy and exposure.
M. Field Adjustment
1. Adjust relay and protective device settings according to the recommended settings
table provided by the coordination study. Field adjustments to be completed by the
engineering service division of the equipment manufacturer or independent testing
company under the Start-up and Acceptance Testing contract portion.
2. Make minor modifications to equipment as required to accomplish conformance with
short circuit and protective device coordination studies.
3. Notify Design Engineer in writing of any required major equipment modifications.
N. Arc Flash Warning Labels
1. The contractor of the Arc Flash Hazard Analysis shall provide a 3.5 in. x 5 in. thermal
transfer type label of high adhesion polyester or UV resistant vinyl for each work
location analyzed. Labels shall be white with orange warning strip and black lettering
conforming to ANSI-Z535.
2. All labels will be based on recommended overcurrent device settings and will be
provided after the results of the analysis have been presented to the owner and after
any system changes, upgrades or modifications have been incorporated in the system.
3. The label shall include the following information, at a minimum:
a. Location designation.
b. Nominal voltage.
C. Flash protection boundary.
wsr d. Hazard risk category.
e. Incident energy.
f. Working distance.
g. Engineering report number, revision number and issue date.
ELECTRICAL 260000-47
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
Northampton,MA
(7) Multiplying factors for 2, 3, 5 and 8 cycle circuit breakers rated on a total
basis.
3. Recommended Protective Device Settings:
a. Phase and Ground Relays:
(1) Current transformer ratio.
(2) Current setting.
(3) Time setting. w�
(4) Instantaneous setting.
(5) Recommendations on improved relaying systems, if applicable.
b. Circuit Breakers:
(1) Adjustable pickups and time delays(long time,short time, ground)
(2) Adjustable time-current characteristic.
(3) Adjustable instantaneous pickup. .�
(4) Recommendations on improved trip systems, if applicable.
C. Specialty and Multi-function Relays:
(1) All required settings.
4. Incident Energy and Flash Protection Boundary Calculations:
a. Arcing fault magnitude.
b. Protective device clearing time.
C. Duration of arc. ,
d. Arc flash boundary.
e. Working distance.
f. Incident energy.
g. Hazard Risk Category.
h. Recommendations for arc flash energy reduction.
wee
5. NFPA 70E Information.
a. Shock Hazards with covers removed.
b. Shock Hazard Approach Boundaries.
ELECTRICAL 260000-46
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
e. Motor contribution data (induction motors and synchronous motors), including
short-circuit reactance, rated horsepower or kVA, rated voltage, and X/R ratio.
2. Short-Circuit Output Data shall include, but not be limited to the following reports:
a. Low Voltage Fault Report shall include a section for three-phase and unbalanced
fault calculations and shall show the following information for each applicable
location:
(1) Voltage.
(2) Calculated fault current magnitude and angle.
(3) Fault point X/R ratio.
(4) Equivalent impedance.
b. Momentary Duty Report shall include a section for three-phase and unbalanced
fault calculations and shall show the following information for each applicable
! +" location:
(1) Voltage
(2) Calculated symmetrical fault current magnitude and angle.
(3) Fault point X/R ratio.
(4) Calculated asymmetrical fault currents.
(a) Based on fault point X/R ratio.
(b) Based on calculated symmetrical value multiplied by 1.6.
(c) Based on calculated symmetrical value multiplied by 2.7.
(5) Equivalent impedance.
C. Interrupting Duty Report shall include a section for three-phase and unbalanced
fault calculations and shall show the following information for each applicable
location:
(1) Voltage.
(2) Calculated symmetrical fault current magnitude and angle.
" (3) Fault point X/R ratio.
(4) No AC Decrement(NACD) Ratio.
(5) Equivalent impedance.
(6) Multiplying factors for 2, 3, 5 and 8 cycle circuit breakers rated on a
symmetrical basis.
ELECTRICAL 260000-45
�r
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
7. The incident energy calculations must consider the accumulation of energy over time
when performing arc flash calculations on buses with multiple sources. Iterative
calculations must take into account the changing current contributions, as the sources
are interrupted or decremented with time. Fault contribution from motors and
generators should be decremented as follows:
a. Fault contribution from induction motors should not be considered beyond 3-5
cycles.
b. Fault contribution from synchronous motors and generators should be decayed
to match the actual decrement of each as closely as possible (e.g. contributions
from permanent magnet generators will typically decay from 10 per unit to 3 per
unit after 10 cycles).
8. For each equipment location with a separately enclosed main device (where there is
adequate separation between the line side terminals of the main protective device and
the work location), calculations for incident energy and flash protection boundary shall
include both the line and load side of the main breaker.
9. When performing incident energy calculations on the line side of a main breaker (as
required per above), the line side and load side contributions must be included in the
fault calculation.
10. Mis-coordination should be checked amongst all devices within the branch containing
the immediate protective device upstream of the calculation location and the calculation
should utilize the fastest device to compute the incident energy for the corresponding
location. +
11. Arc Flash calculations shall be based on actual over current protective device clearing
time. Calculate incident energies for arcing current and 85% arcing current based on
the maximum and minimum contributions and associated clearing times. Report worst
case result. Maximum clearing time will be capped at 2 seconds based on IEEE 1584-
2002 section B.1.2. Where it is not physically possible to move outside of the flash
protection boundary in less than 2 seconds during an arc flash event, a maximum
clearing time based on the specific location shall be utilized.
L. Report Sections
1. Input data shall include, but not be limited to the following:
a. Feeder input data including feeder type (cable or bus), size, length, number per
phase, conduit type (magnetic or non-magnetic) and conductor material (copper
or aluminum).
b. Transformer input data, including winding connections, secondary neutral-
ground connection, primary and secondary voltage ratings, kVA rating,
impedance, %taps and phase shift.
C. Reactor data, including voltage rating, and impedance. **+
d. Generation contribution data, (synchronous generators and Utility), including
short-circuit reactance (X"d), rated MVA, rated voltage, three-phase and single
line-ground contribution(for Utility sources)and X/R ratio. "
ELECTRICAL 260000-44
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
device curves with the Owner's facility operations personnel to
help determine how the system settings shall be optimized for
selectivity and arc flash hazard reduction.
6. A setting table shall be developed to summarize the settings selected/existing for the
protective devices. Includes settings for specialty and multi function relays as well.
Settings are not limited to over-current element devices. Include settings for all
protective devices/relays provided under or affected by this contract. The table shall
include the following:
a. Device identification.
b. For low voltage breakers, the circuit breaker manufacturer, type, and style,
- sensor rating, long-time, short-time, instantaneous settings, and time bands. For
breakers with ground fault capability,the pickup and time delay.
C. Fuse manufacturer,type, style, and rating.
d. Protective relay manufacturer, type, style, function (51, 50, 67, etc.) pickup,
pa current multiplier, time dial, and delay. For multi-function units, list all devices
being used. Include the CT and/or PT ratios for each function.
w K. Arc Flash Hazard Analysis
1. The arc flash hazard analysis shall be performed according to the IEEE 1584 equations
that are presented in NFPA70E-2004,Annex D.
2. The flash protection boundary and the incident energy shall be calculated at all
significant locations in the electrical distribution system (switchboards, switchgear,
motor-control centers, panelboards, busway and splitters) where work could be
performed on energized parts.
3. The Arc-Flash Hazard Analysis shall include all significant locations in 240 volt and 208
OW volt systems fed from transformers equal to or greater than 125 kVA where work could
be performed on energized parts.
4. Safe working distances shall be based upon the calculated arc flash boundary
considering an incident energy of 1.2 cal/cm2.
5. When appropriate, the short circuit calculations and the clearing times of the phase
overcurrent devices will be retrieved from the short-circuit and coordination study
model. Ground overcurrent relays should not be taken into consideration when
determining the clearing time when performing incident energy calculations
6. The short-circuit calculations and the corresponding incident energy calculations for
multiple system scenarios must be compared and the greatest incident energy must be
uniquely reported for each equipment location. Calculations must be performed to
represent the maximum and minimum contributions of fault current magnitude for all
normal and emergency operating conditions. The minimum calculation will assume that
the utility contribution is at a minimum and will assume a minimum motor contribution
(all motors off). Conversely, the maximum calculation will assume a maximum
contribution from the utility and will assume the maximum amount of motors to be
operating. Calculations shall take into consideration the parallel operation of
synchronous generators with the electric utility,where applicable.
ELECTRICAL 260000-43
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA dW
(2) Voltage and current ratio for curves.
(3) Transformer three-phase and single-line-to-ground ANSI damage
curves. *�*
(4) Transformer inrush points and full load current.
(5) Minimum melting, and clearing curves for fuses, and if available the no- `
damage curve.
(6) Cable damage curves.
(7) Motor starting locked rotor curves, and if available the motor locked rotor
damage point.
wm
(8) Generator short circuit decrement curve and generator damage point.
(9) Maximum short circuit cut-off point.
(10) Clearly marked short circuit current levels through each protective
device/branch, which should be based on the appropriate current
through the device, i.e. Momentary, Interrupting or 30 Cycle current. ,.
(11) Protective device one-line diagram clearly showing all protective devices
on the time-current curve, labels for each device, open breakers, faulted
buses, and the short circuit current flowing in each branch. +
(12) Each TCC sheet shall have appropriate identification and a one-line
diagram that applies to the specific portion of the system associated with
time-current curves on that sheet.
(13) Each protective device curve shall be terminated at a point reflecting
maximum symmetrical or asymmetrical fault current through the device.
(14) Identify the device associated with each curve by manufacturer type,
function, and setting — i.e. tap, time delay, and instantaneous, pickup,
etc. «,
(15) Primary Protective Device Settings for Delta-Wye Connected
Transformer:
(a) Secondary Line-To-Ground Fault Protection: Provide primary
protective device operating band within the transformer's
characteristics curve, including a point equal to 58 percent of
ANSI C57.12.00 withstand point.
(b) Secondary Line-To-Line Faults: Provide 16 percent current
margin between primary protective device and associated
secondary device characteristic curves.
(16) Typical time separations for curves:
W
(a) Consultant/contractor shall discuss the advantages and
disadvantages of various time separation settings between
.0
ELECTRICAL 260000-42
an
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
W f. Notify Owner in writing, of existing, circuit protective devices improperly rated for
the calculated available fault current.
J. Protective Device Coordination Study
�r
1. A PDC study shall be performed in order to determine if the system protection
characteristics are sufficient to provide reliable power to the facility. The PDC study will
also determine if the settings entered in the software will provide proper personnel
protection in the arc flash portion of this study.
2. The PDC study shall consist of selecting major system feeders and plotting the time
current curves (TCC's) to verify proper selective operation of the protective devices.
The study should also determine if the settings can be enhanced to provide increased
personnel/equipment protection without sacrificing selective coordination. It is expected
that the protective device coordination include all substation equipment and major
3. The report shall identify any potential problems in the protective device settings that
affect either selective operation and reliability or personnel protection.
4. The consultant/contractor shall contact the serving utility and obtain protective device
settings for all service entrance overcurrent devices in series with the facility and
affecting coordination with facilities distribution system.
5. TCC Specifics: The TCC's shall graphically illustrate on log-log paper that adequate
time separation exists between series devices. The specific time-current characteristics
of each phase and ground protective device shall be plotted in such a manner that
sufficient upstream devices will be clearly depicted on one sheet to prove selective
coordination.
a. TCC's shall include a system one-line diagram and protective device
coordination curves for each device in the selected area. The TCC shall be
printed in color on 8'/2 x 11" paper—full size portrait mode, using a log-log scale.
The one-line diagram shall be part of the TCC and include all protective devices,
equipment names, and short circuit currents calculated from the main one-line.
The purpose of this requirement is to provide all necessary information on one
sheet, in a format easily readable and standard to the industry.
b. For low voltage systems, TCC's shall be developed for both phase and ground
protective devices. One phase and one ground TCC should be developed for
each unit substation. The TCC should show the largest feeder/motor protective
device in the MCC or panel up through the switchgear/switchboard feeder
breaker, transformer secondary main, unit substation primary fuse, and medium
voltage feeder breaker. For secondary switchboards serving large loads or a
wide variety of loads that may affect upstream coordination, additional TCC's
may be required.
C. For medium voltage systems, TCC's shall be developed for both phase and
ground protective devices. The TCC should show the largest feeder/motor
protective device in the lineup up through the switchgear/transformer secondary
main, unit substation primary fuse, and medium voltage feeder breaker.
d. The following specific information shall also be shown on the coordination
curves:
(1) Device identification.
ELECTRICAL 260000-41
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
g. Results,conclusions, and recommendations.
5. Calculate short-circuit momentary and interrupting duties for a three-phase bolted fault
at each:
a. Electric utility's supply termination point.
b. Incoming switchgear.
C. Unit substation primary and secondary terminals.
d. Low voltage switchgear.
e. Motor control centers.
f. Standby generators and automatic transfer switches.
g. Branch circuit panelboards.
h. Other significant locations throughout the system.
6. For grounded systems, provide a bolted line-to-ground fault current study for areas as
defined for the three-phase bolted fault short-circuit study. ,
7. Protective Device Evaluation:
a. Evaluate equipment and protective devices and compare to short circuit ratings.
b. The equipment duty verification shall determine both the line side and load side
fault current through each equipment and use the highest current to verify
equipment ratings. For solidly grounded systems, both three-phase and single-
line-to-ground faults should be modeled. For other grounding configurations only
a three-phase fault is required.
WA
C. Adequacy of switchgear, motor control centers, and panelboard bus bars to
withstand short-circuit stresses.
d. Equipment duty results shall be graphically displayed on the electrical one-line
as well as tabular report format.
e. The results of the equipment duty verification tabular format report shall provide
the following data:
(1) Equipment name and kV.
(2) Manufacture,type,style, and ratings of the device.
(3) Actual line or load side currents through the device and percent
over/under duty. ..
(4) Flag for the device showing VIOLATION or WARNING level for visual
identification.
w�
ELECTRICAL 260000-40
w�
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
4. If applicable, include fault contribution of existing motors in the study. The Contractor
shall obtain required existing equipment data, if necessary, to satisfy the study
- requirements.
5. Equipment shall be visually inspected to collect the necessary nameplate data used in
the analysis. Consultant/contractor is responsible for visual verification of this data,
including transformers, switchgear and breakers, relays, direct-acting trip units, etc.
Data that may not be readily accessible or may not have nameplate data such as
conductors, busway,etc.can be taken from drawings.
6. Plant/facility shall provide qualified personnel to show contractor/consultant equipment
location and to open all equipment doors, locks, etc. necessary to collect nameplate
data.
7. Where equipment data is available from the plant/facility on updated drawings or in
e0 database format, consultant/contractor may use this data in building the model, but
shall field verify information when necessary.
8. Data collection shall include the step down transformer from the utility service(including
"o primary relaying)down through each 480-volt motor control center(MCC)and 240/208
volt panel for all systems served by transformers rated greater than 125 kVA as per
IEEE-1584-2002.
�a
9. Consultant/contractor shall obtain from the utility the minimum, normal, and maximum
operating service voltage levels, three-phase short circuit MVA and X/R ratio, as well as
line-to-ground short circuit MVA and X/R ratio at the point of connection as shown on
the drawings.
I. Short-Circuit and Protective Device Evaluation Study
1. A short circuit study shall be performed to verify all equipment duties in the system.
The calculations shall comply with ANSI C37.010, C371 3, C37.5, IEEE-141, and IEEE-
399. The short circuit study shall verify the system electrical equipment is properly
rated to withstand and interrupt the expected bolted and arcing faults in the system.
2. Use actual conductor impedances if known. If unknown, use typical conductor
impedances based on IEEE Standard 141-1993.
3. Transformer design impedances shall be used when test impedances are not available.
4. Provide the following:
a. Calculation methods and assumptions.
b. Selected base per unit quantities.
C. One-line diagram of the system being evaluated.
d. Tabulation of input data.
e. Source impedance data, including electric utility system and motor fault
contribution characteristics.
f. Tabulations of calculated quantities.
ELECTRICAL 260000-39
w
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
5. Lumped motor groups for MCC's shall be modeled per IEEE standards using groups
>50 Hp, and <50 Hp. Where motor list data is not available, single lumped groups may
be modeled per IEEE-141 "Red Book".
6. Medium voltage motors greater than 1.0 kV shall be modeled individually on their
respective buses including all protective phase and ground overcurrent relays and
fuses. This model will provide individual work permits for each starter/motor on the
one-line.
7. All low voltage power circuit breaker (LVPCB), insulated case (ICCB), molded case
(MCCB) and fuse data shall be modeled based on the actual nameplate data including
manufacturer, type, style, trip device, and actual settings. Generic substitutions or
assumptions shall not be allowed unless data cannot be field verified. All assumptions
shall be documented in the report.
8. All relay data shall be modeled based on the actual nameplate data including
manufacturer, type, style, trip device, and actual settings. Generic substitutions or
assumptions shall not be allowed unless data cannot be field verified. All assumptions
shall be documented in the report.
9. All overcurrent relay types for the distribution system shall be modeled on the one-line
diagram (and database) including phase and ground overcurrent, differential, residual,
ground neutral, etc. to establish a complete and detailed system model where
protective device data can be easily modified and updated by the facility and all data is
available for a comprehensive protective device coordination study if required in the
future.
10. All system modeling shall conform to accepted modeling practices as outlined in IEEE-
399 "Brown Book". Contractor/consultant may provide more advanced modeling
techniques where compliance with the specification is maintained.
G. Studies
1. Contractor to furnish short-circuit and protective device coordination studies as
prepared by equipment manufacturer or an approved engineering firm.
2. The contractor shall furnish an Arc Flash Hazard Analysis Study per NFPA 70E -
Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace, reference Article 130.3 and Annex D.
H. Data Collection
1. Contractor shall furnish all data as required to complete the power system studies. The
Engineer performing the short-circuit, protective device coordination and arc flash
hazard analysis studies shall furnish the Contractor with a listing of required data
immediately after award of the contract. The Contractor shall expedite collection of the
data to assure completion of the studies as required for final approval of the distribution
equipment shop drawings and/or prior to the release of the equipment for
manufacturing.
w
2. Source combination may include present and future motors and generators.
3. Load data utilized may include existing and proposed loads obtained from Contract
Documents provided by Owner, or Contractor.
ELECTRICAL 260000-38
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
d. Protective device time versus current coordination curves, tabulations of relay
and circuit breaker trip unit settings,fuse selection.
e. Fault current calculations including a definition of terms and guide for
interpretation of the computer printout.
f. Details of the incident energy and flash protection boundary calculations.
g. Recommendations for system improvements,where needed.
h. One-line diagram
4. Arc flash labels shall be provided in hard copy and for large system studies, if more
than 200 bus locations, a copy of the computer analysis software viewer program is
required to provide are flash labels in electronic format.
E. Qualifications
1. The short-circuit, protective device coordination and arc flash hazard analysis studies
shall be conducted under the supervision and approval of a Registered Professional
Electrical Engineer skilled in performing and interpreting the power system studies
2. The Registered Professional Electrical Engineer shall be a full-time employee of the
equipment manufacturer or an approved engineering firm
3. The Registered Professional Electrical Engineer shall have a minimum of five (5)years
of experience in performing power system studies
4. The equipment manufacturer or approved engineering firm shall demonstrate
experience with Arc Flash Hazard Analysis by submitting names of at least ten actual
arc flash hazard analysis it has performed in the past year.
F. Computer Analysis Software
1. The studies shall be performed using the latest revision of the SKM Systems Analysis
Power"Tools for Windows(PTW)software program, ETAP or Easy Power.
2. All one-line symbols shall be spaced properly to facilitate viewing results on the one-
line.
3. Equipment names used in the modeling software shall be identical to the equipment
and naming convention shown on the drawings and equipment unless conflicts exist.
Consultant/contractor shall bring all naming convention conflicts or deficiencies to the
attention of the design engineer for clarification.
4. The Facility may have multiple operating conditions, including, but not limited to,
generation on/off, shutdown, bus-ties, start-up, emergency operation, etc.
Consultant/contractor shall discuss facility operation with designated personnel to
determine the possible operating modes of the system. Each of the operating modes
shall be documented and modeled in the software in order to determine the worst-case
arc flash hazard and associated parameters for the electrical equipment. For the
purpose of this proposal consultant/contractor shall assume that up to four(4)operating
modes are possible.
ELECTRICAL 260000 -37
.►
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
a. ANSI C57.12.00 — Standard General Requirements for Liquid-Immersed
Distribution, Power, and Regulating Transformers
b. ANSI C37.13 — Standard for Low Voltage AC Power Circuit Breakers Used in �*+
Enclosures
C. ANSI C37.010 — Standard Application Guide for AC High Voltage Circuit
Breakers Rated on a Symmetrical Current Basis
d. ANSI C 37.41 — Standard Design Tests for High Voltage Fuses, Distribution
Enclosed Single-Pole Air Switches, Fuse Disconnecting Switches and
Accessories.
3. The National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
a. NFPA 70-National Electrical Code, latest edition
b. NFPA 70E—Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace
C. Submittals for Review/Approval
1. The short-circuit and protective device coordination studies shall be submitted to the ,
design engineer prior to receiving final approval of the distribution equipment shop
drawings and/or prior to release of equipment drawings for manufacturing. If formal
completion of the studies may cause delay in equipment manufacturing, approval from
the engineer may be obtained for preliminary submittal of sufficient study data to ensure •.►
that the selection of device and characteristics will be satisfactory.
D. Submittals for Construction
1. The results of the short-circuit, protective device coordination and arc flash hazard
analysis studies shall be summarized in a final report. The report shall be stamped by
a Professional Engineer registered in the state where the project is taking place. No
more than five (5) bound copies of the complete final report shall be submitted. For
large system studies, submittals requiring more than five(5) copies of the report will be
provided without the section containing the computer printout of the short-circuit input
and output data. Additional copies of the short-circuit input and output data, where
required, shall be provided on CD in PDF format.
2. For large system studies with more than 200 bus locations, the contractor is required to
provide the study project files to the Owner in electronic format. In addition, a copy of
the computer analysis software viewer program is required to accompany the electronic
project files, to allow the Owner to review all aspects of the project and print arc flash
labels, one-line diagrams, etc.
3. The report shall include the following sections:
a. Executive summary.
b. Descriptions, purpose, basis and scope of the study.
C. Tabulations of circuit breaker, fuse and other protective device ratings versus
calculated short circuit duties.
ELECTRICAL 260000-36
aw
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
H. The General Contractor shall pay for the cost of electrical energy consumed by all trades during
the construction period. All charges of the Utility Company in connection with the temporary
electric service shall be paid for under this Section.
r I. As soon as the permanent electric service has been installed, the temporary electric service
from Utility Company may be removed and the permanent service may be used. The General
Contractor shall continue to pay the cost of electrical energy until the building has been
accepted by the Owner.
J. All temporary electric work installed during the construction of this building shall be removed by
this Contractor. This includes all poles, transformers, meters, cables, conduits, panelboards,
re switches, branch circuits wiring, etc.
K. All temporary lighting required during the construction period shall be in accordance with the
Occupational Safety and Health Administration's latest requirements of "Safety and Health
OR Regulations for Construction". Provide the minimum lighting intensities in all areas of
construction as required by these regulations.
2.25 SHORT-CIRCUIT/COORDINATION STUDY/ARC FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS
A. Scope
1. The contractor shall furnish short-circuit and protective device coordination studies as
prepared by the electrical equipment manufacturer or an approved engineering firm.
2. The contractor shall furnish an Arc Flash Hazard Analysis Study per the requirements
set forth in NFPA 70E-Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace. The arc flash
hazard analysis shall be performed according to the IEEE 1584 equations that are
- presented in NFPA70E-2004,Annex D.
3. The scope of the studies shall include all new distribution equipment supplied by the
equipment Manufacturer under this contract.
B. References
1. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE):
a. IEEE 141 — Recommended Practice for Electric Power Distribution and
Coordination of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems
b. IEEE 242—Recommended Practice for Protection and Coordination of Industrial
and Commercial Power Systems
C. IEEE 399 — Recommended Practice for Industrial and Commercial Power
System Analysis
d. IEEE 241 — Recommended Practice for Electric Power Systems in Commercial
Buildings
e. IEEE 1015— Recommended Practice for Applying Low-Voltage Circuit Breakers
Used in Industrial and Commercial Power Systems.
f. IEEE 1584-Guide for Performing Arc-Flash Hazard Calculations
2. American National Standards Institute(ANSI):
ELECTRICAL 260000-35
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
Northampton,MA
8. Identification:
a. All conduit shall be clearly labeled at both ends designating the floor closet by
number,which includes the sequential numbering of the conduit.
b. Junction boxes shall be labeled on the exposed exterior.
C. Conduits entering and exiting junction boxes shall be labeled.
E. The raceways/conduit stubs shall originate at the device indicated on the drawings and extend
to the basket tray located in the corridor. Most areas are not provided with hung ceilings,
therefore furnish and install a minimum of%inch conduit or size as noted on the drawings.
F. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish a 1/4 inch nylon pull cord (with distance markings) in all
raceways to facilitate the pulling of cables by the appropriate Contractor(s).
G. All wall outlet cover plates shall be furnished by the appropriate Contractor.
H. At telephone/data terminal locations designated on the Drawings, the Electrical Contractor shall w
furnish and install 3/4-inch thick sheet of fireproof painted plywood backboard for the mounting
of equipment and cable terminators by the appropriate Contractor(s). Exact dimensions of the
backboards shall be as indicated on the Drawings or as required by the appropriate contractor.
2.24 TEMPORARY LIGHTING AND POWER
A. Provide temporary feeders of sufficient capacity from the Utility Company power lines for the
light and power requirements of this building during the construction period.
B. All poles, transformers, switches, panelboards, cable and meters required for the temporary
electric service shall be furnished and installed under this Section. '
C. Temporary light shall be based on one (1) 200 watt lamp covering each 1,000 square feet of
floor area in the building and sufficient wiring outlets shall be installed to ensure proper lighting
in all stairwells and public corridors. All pigtail type sockets required for the temporary general
lighting shall be of the left hand screw type and all lamps shall be designed with a left hand
screw thread to match the sockets. The temporary wiring and lamps required for this general
lighting shall be paid for under this Section, including the cost of lamp replacements.
D. Install and maintain on each floor of the building a feeder of sufficient capacity for the
requirements of each floor and covering the entire length of the building and provide sufficient
number of outlets, located at convenient points, so that extension cords of not over 50 feet will
reach all work requiring artificial light or power. Subcontractors of all other trades shall furnish
their own extension cords, sockets and lamps as may be required for their work and shall also
pay the cost of all temporary wiring of Construction Offices and Shanties used by them.
E. The General Contractor shall pay for all temporary wiring required for his Construction Offices
and the Architect's Field Office.
F. All temporary electrical work shall be furnished and installed in conformance with the National
Electric Code and in accordance with the requirements of the local ordinances.
G. Any temporary wiring of a special nature for light and power required for the building during the
construction period, other than mentioned above,shall be paid for under this Section.
ELECTRICAL 260000-34
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
B. In general, the communications systems raceways, outlets and terminal backboard locations
shall be as shown on the Drawings and as required by Kollmorgen and their
Telecommunications Contractor for the installation of cables and devices.
C. All Work and the entire installation of same shall be coordinated with the
Architectural/Engineering Coordination Office, the Technology Consultant and the Electrical
Contractor before the start of the construction and shall be in full conformance with their
requirements and recommendations.
D. The conduit system shall meet the following minimum requirements:
1. Minimum requirements for installed conduit, such as support, end protection, continuity,
etc., are found in the National Electrical Codes and ANSI/EIA/TIA-569—A, Commercial
Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces.
2. No section of conduit shall be longer than 100 feet or contain more than two (2) 90
degree bends between pull boxes.
3. The inside radius of a bend in conduit shall be at least ten (10) times the inside
diameter of the conduit.
4. Conduit shall be terminated and insulated with an insulated bushing.
5. The conduit system shall be designed to withstand the forces necessary to pull cables
through without distortion, separation or collapse.
r 6. Junction Boxes:
a. Ajunction box shall be placed in a conduit run where:
(1) The length is over 100 feet.
(2) There are more than two(2)90 degree bends.
(3) There is a reverse bend in the run.
7. Junction Box Size:
a. For straight pull-through, have a length of at least eight (8) times the conduit
diameter.
b. For angle pulls:
(1) Have a distance between each conduit entry inside the box and the
opposite wall of the box at least six(6)times the diameter of the conduit,
this distance increased by the sum of the conduits on the same wall of
the box; and
(2) Have a distance between the nearest edge of each conduit entry
enclosing the same cable of at least six (6) times the diameter of the
conduit.
(3) For conduit entering the wall of a junction box opposite a removable
cover, have a distance from the wall to the cover of no less than six(6)
times the diameter of the conduit.
ELECTRICAL 260000-33
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
Q. Provide manpower and tools for final adjusting of all adjustable fixtures. This operation shall
take place immediately before the building is turned over to the Owner after regular working
hours where required.
2.22 EMERGENCY BALLAST PACK
A. Emergency lighting shall be provided by using a standard fluorescent fixture equipped with an .�
emergency ballast. The ballast shall consist of a high-temperature, maintenance-free nickel
cadmium battery, a charger and electronic circuitry enclosed in one compact red case. A solid-
state charging indicator light to monitor the charger and battery, a double-pole test switch and
installation hardware shall be provided. The emergency ballast shall be capable of operating
one fluorescent lamp at reduced illumination a minimum of 90 minutes in the emergency mode.
The emergency ballast shall be suitable for use with low mercury lamps. The emergency ballast
shall be compatible with one-, two-, three- and four-lamp electronic, standard, energy saving
and dimming AC ballasts. The emergency ballast shall delay AC ballast operation for three
seconds to prevent false-tripping of AC ballast end-of-life shutdown circuits. The emergency
ballast shall have a maximum of 4 watts of input power (16 watts for extended-temperature
emergency ballast), a minimum of 14 Watt-hour battery capacity and exceed emergency w
standards set forth by the current NEC. The emergency ballast shall be UL listed for installation
inside of, on top of or remote from the fixture. The storage and operating temperature range for
extended temperature fluorescent emergency ballast shall be -20C to +55C. The emergency
ballast shall be warranted for a full two (2) years from date of purchase. Dual input voltage is
120/277 VAC.
B. The emergency ballast shall produce a minimum of:
1. 1100 lumens initial light output for 3 foot, and 4 foot linear fluorescent T8, T5 and T5HO
lamps and 31 watt T8 U-shaped fluorescent lamps
2. 700 lumens initial light output for 2 foot linear fluorescent T8,T5 and T5HO lamps.
3. 900 lumens initial light output for 39 watt, 40 watt and 50 watt long compact fluorescent
lamps.
4. 700 lumens initial light output for 32 watt and 42 watt quad or triple-tube compact
fluorescent lamps.
5. 500 lumens initial light output for 26 watt quad or triple-tube compact fluorescent lamps.
6. 400 lumens initial light output for 18 watt quad or triple-tube compact fluorescent lamps. .�
All initial lumen output is based on an ambient temperature of 25C.
C. Emergency ballast packs shall be Manufactured by Bodine Company or approved equal.
2.23 TELEPHONE/DATA SYSTEM
A. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install, complete in every respect, a
telephone/data/TV raceway system including all interior raceways, pull strings, pull boxes,
plywood backboards, outlets, outlet cover plate, fittings and all other appurtenances required.
Leaving the entire raceway installation ready for cables and equipment installed, by others.
ELECTRICAL 260000-32
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
Ballasts shall be manufactured by the lamp manufacturer. Ballast performance (power
input/lumen output, operating temperature levels and total harmonic content) shall be certified
by laboratory tests.
1. Ballast shall meet FCC Standard for EMI/RFI (FCC 47 CFR Part 18 Non-Consumer),
ensuring suitability for both commercial and industrial installations.
2. Ballasts shall have a high power factor/minimum 95% UL listed for Class P, Sound
Rated A, less than 10%for total harmonic distribution.
3. Ballast shall be programmed rapid start for maximum efficiency with a minimum lamp
starting temperature of 0°F.
4. Ballast circuit shall operate lamps in parallel, such that if one lamp fails, others will
remain lit.
5. Provide low temperature ballasts for use outdoors or in unheated indoor areas,
designed for temperature as low as minus 20°F.
6. Where high performance T8 (HPT8) is indicated on drawings, the lamp/ballast
combination shall be listed as a qualifying high performance T8 by The Consortium for
Energy Efficiency(CEE).
7. Ballasts shall be normal ballast factor unless otherwise noted on the drawings.
8. T5 ballasts shall include end of life protection.
9. Ballasts shall be universal voltage where available.
10. T8 ballasts shall be OSRAM Sylvania Quicktronic Prostart Universal, GE Ultrastart
OR Electronic Program/Rapid Start, or Philips Advance Optanium.
11. Include line side terminal disconnects in accordance with NEC 410.130 (G). Utilize
T&B Luminaire Disconnect, or equal.
M. Compact fluorescent ballast shall be as specified on Drawings in light fixture schedule. All light
fixtures provided with electronic ballasts, T5 diameter lamps and smaller shall have end-of-life
lip sensing circuitry.
N. HID ballasts shall start lamps at temperature as low as minus 20°F. Allowable line voltage
variation shall be plus or minus 10% except high-pressure sodium ballasts shall be plus or
minus 5%, unless otherwise indicated. Ballast shall have power factor of 90% or greater.
Ballast shall be fused:
1. Provide factory installed cartridge fuses for each ungrounded conductor.
2. Ampere rating of fuses shall be 500% of rated nominal current for 480 volt lighting
circuits and 300%for lighting circuits operating at circuit voltages less than 480 volts.
0. All recessed incandescent fixtures shall be thermally protected in accordance with UL.
P. Three-lamp fluorescent fixtures shall be supplied with three-lamp electronic ballasts and two-
lamp fluorescent fixtures shall be supplied with two-lamp electronic ballasts. In single-lamp
fixtures, tandem wire two-lamp ballast whenever possible to eliminate unnecessary use of
single-lamp ballast.
w
ELECTRICAL 260000-31
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
K. Lamps of the proper type, wattage and voltage rating shall be furnished and installed in each
fixture as indicated on the fixture schedule. Lamps shall be delivered to the project in the
original cartons and installed in the fixtures just prior to the completion of the work.
1. Fluorescent lamps (T8) shall be of the energy efficient type, suitable for use with the
Instant Start, Rapid Start or Programmed Rapid Start ballasts.
a. Lamps shall be high lumen, long life (minimum 24,000 hours), and high color
rendering index(81 minimum).
b. Lamps shall be designed to satisfy the Federal Toxicity Characteristic Leaching ..�
Procedure(TCLP)criteria for classification as non-hazardous waste.
C. Lamps shall be Osram Sylvania Octron XPS Ecologic, Philips Advantage Alto, or
GE Ecolux Starcoat T8 High Lumen.
d. Color temperature shall be 3500°K unless noted otherwise on the drawings.
e. Reduced wattage lamps shall be provided where indicated on the drawings.
2. Fluorescent lamps (T5) shall be of the energy efficient type, suitable for use with
programmed rapid start, high frequency electronic ballasts. ,
a. Lamps shall be high lumen, long life (minimum 20,000 hours) and high color
rendering index(85 minimum).
b. Lamps shall be designed to satisfy the Federal Toxicity Characteristic Leaching
Procedure(TCLP)criteria for classification as non-hazardous waste.
C. Lamps shall be Osram Sylvania Pentron ECO, Philips Silhouette Alto, or GE
Ecolux Starcoat T5.
d. Color temperature shall be 3500°K unless noted otherwise on the drawings.
e. Lamps shall be high output(HO)where indicated on the drawings.
3. Compact fluorescent lamps utilizing magnetic ballasts shall be preheat type with
integral starter. Compact fluorescent lamps utilizing electronic ballasts shall have 4 pin
bases. Osram Sylvania, General Electric Biax or approved equal, unless otherwise
noted.
4. Incandescent lamps shall be 2,000 hour, 125 volts, except as noted.
5. High Intensity Discharge (HID) lamps (i.e. mercury vapor, metal halide and high-
pressure sodium lamps) shall be suitable to the ballast serving lamps. Type O or PAR
lamps shall be provided in open fixtures.
6. All lamps, except as noted, and within each source type, i.e.,fluorescent, incandescent,
etc., shall be of same manufacturer, General Electric, Philips, Osram Sylvania, or
approved equal.
L. Ballasts for fluorescent fixtures shall be high frequency electronic ballasts and be completely
compatible with lamp types indicated. Contractor and vendor shall be responsible to fully
coordinate fixture, ballast, and lamp compatibility and performance during submittal process.
ELECTRICAL 260000-30
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
!! " Northampton,MA
2.21 LIGHTING FIXTURES
A. Furnish and install all lighting fixtures and lamps complete with all accessories required for
proper installation and operation.
B. The lighting fixtures scheduled on the drawings are indicative of the general type desired and
are not intended to restrict selection of fixtures to the particular manufacturer indicated. Fixtures
of the same design and equivalent light-distribution and brightness characteristics, and of equal
finish and quality will be acceptable if approved as equal by the Engineer.
C. It shall be the responsibility of the Electrical Contractor to check architectural drawings, prior to
ordering fixtures, and furnish the specified recessed fixtures with proper mounting arrangement
to be compatible with the type of ceiling construction in which the fixture is to be mounted.
D. Manufacturer's shop drawings for all lighting fixtures shall be submitted for approval prior to
purchase.
1. Shop Drawings shall indicate complete details of fixtures, including manufacturer's
catalog numbers for sockets, lamps, ballasts, light shields, switches, metal gauges,
type of wiring,finish color and texture.
2. Fluorescent fixture shop drawings shall include; ballast manufacturer and catalog
number, lamp manufacturer and catalog number together with a statement of
compatibility when used together as an integral part of the fixture.
3. Where pertinent to proper installation or operation, Shop Drawings shall indicate
relationship between fixtures and adjacent elements of structure(walls, columns, ducts,
openings, ceiling grid, etc.).
E. Fixtures shall be free of light leaks. No crossbars are permitted over light shields. Fixtures shall
provide for sufficient ventilation of lamps and ballasts. Size and location of vent holes shall be
indicated on Manufacturer's Drawings. Outdoor fixtures shall have wire mesh screens in the
vent holes.
OR F. The Electrical Contractor shall assume all responsibility for the safe handling of all lighting
fixtures, accessories and lamps until the final inspection has been made by the Engineer.
G. Special fittings and material that may be required to support fixtures shall be supplied as well as
supports or grounds required to secure surface of pendent mounted fixtures on suspended
ceilings. Fixtures shall be supported from the structural members, independent of furred or
suspended ceilings or roof deck. This support shall be in addition to regular fixture support
bars, saddles, etc. Where duct work, pipes, type of building construction materials and
structural framing members provide obstruction or difficult support means, hanger rods shall be
used in association with horizontal sections of steel support channels, in an approved manner.
Steel support channels shall be Unistrut, Kindorf,or approved equal.
H. Fixtures, part or parts thereof(including lamps)determined to be defective, upon completion of
the electrical installation,shall be replaced by the Electrical Contractor.
I. Consult with the Ceiling Contractors and coordinate fixture locations and supports with the
suspended ceiling system.
J. Incandescent, compact fluorescent and HID recessed fixtures shall be supplied with trim
gaskets as required to prevent light leaks on ceiling. Furnish and install mounting support bars
for all recessed fixtures, as required.
ELECTRICAL 260000-29
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
Northampton,MA
8XL-CR
w
Pipe Size
Insulation 10"- 18"-
Thickness 0-3" 3"-6" 8" 1 14" 16" 20" 24" *�
0.5"
1"
1.5"
2" w
2.5"
3"
3.5"
' Insulation Requirements is based on Fiberglass or Mineral Wool
!!Any change in insulation type or thickness will impact the heat trace system
Based on maintaining 40°Fahrenheit with a minimum Ambient Temperature of-10°Fahrenheit
- Requires Single Run of Heater
- Insufficient Heater Output
.a
G. The heating cable shall be XL-Trace cable as manufactured by Raychem Corporation, Easy
Heat, or equal.
H. Power connection, end seal, splice, and tee kit components shall be applied in the field.
I. Heating cable circuit shall be protected by a ground-fault device for equipment protection. This
requirement is in accordance with section 427.22 of the NEC.
J. All heating-cable components shall be UL Listed, CSA Certified, or FM Approved for use as part
of the system to provide (choose one: pipe freeze protection, flow maintenance). Component
enclosures shall be rated NEMA 4X to prevent water ingress and corrosion. Installation shall not
require the installing contractor to cut into the heating-cable core to expose the bus wires.
Connection systems that require the installing contractor to strip the bus wires or that us crimps
or terminal blocks, shall not be acceptable. All components that make an electrical connection
shall be reenterable for servicing. No component shall use silicone to seal the electrical .■
connections.An exception will be made in areas where a conduit transition is required.
K. The system shall be controlled by a bulb-sensing thermostat set at 40°F either directly or
through an appropriate contactor.
L. System must be installed per manufacturer's recommendations.
M. Apply the heating cable linearly on the pipe after piping has been successfully pressure-tested.
Secure the heating cable to piping with fiberglass tape.
N. Apply Electric Traced" labels to the outside of the thermal insulation.
O. After installation and before and after installing the thermal insulation, subject heating cable to
testing using a 2500-Vdc Megger, Minimum insulation resistance shall be 20 megohms or w
greater.
ELECTRICAL 260000-28
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
B. Equipment shall be XL-Trace as manufactured by Raychem, Easy Heat,or equal.
C. The self-regulating heating cable shall consist of two (2) 16 AWG nickel-copper bus wires
embedded in parallel in a self-regulating polymer core that varies its power output to respond to
temperature all along its length, allowing the heating cable to be cut to length in the field. The
heating cable shall be covered by a radiation-crosslinked, modified polyolefin dielectric jacket.
To provide a ground path and to enhance the heating cable's ruggedness, the heating cable
shall have a braid of tinned copper and an outer jacket of(select: modified polyolefin (-CR) or
fluoropolymer (-CT)), as required per section 427.23 of the NEC. For installation on plastic
piping,the heating cable shall be applied using aluminum tape(AT-180).
D. In order to conserve energy and to prevent overheating, the heating cable shall have a self-
regulating factor of at least 90 percent. The self-regulation factor is defined as the percentage
reduction, without thermostatic control, of the heating cable output going from 40° F pipe
temperature operation to 150° F pipe temperature operation.
E. The heater shall operate on line voltages of 120 or 208 volts without the use of transformers.
F. The heating cable for metal-pipe freeze protection shall be sized according to the table below.
The required heating cable output rating is in watts per foot at 50° F. (Heating cable selection
based on 1 inch fiberglass insulation on metal piping.
5XL-CR
Pi e Size
Insulation 1.5" 12"-
Thickness 0-1.5" 3.5" 4" 6" 8" 10" 16"
0.5"
1"
1.5"
2,.
2.5"
3"
on
ELECTRICAL 260000-27
40
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883 ..
Northampton,MA
B. All receptacles and special purpose device plates shall be labeled with its panel designation and +�
circuit number. Label to be typical to Brothers one or two line using clear self adhesive with
black lettering label material. Affix label to upper right corner of cover plate. Typical label shall
indicate Panel Designation and Circuit Number as noted below.
L422 OR L422 -Cir. #1
Cir. #2
wee
Typical Labels
wee
2.18 FIRE RATED POKE-THROUGH - FLUSH SERIES
A. Furnish and install, where noted on the Drawings, fire rated "Poke-Through" electrical and
telephone/data service fittings designed to comply with Article 300.21 of the National Electrical
Code.
B. The service fittings shall be UL listed for the fire rating of the ceiling or floor assembly in which it e11e
is to be installed. Installation shall be in complete compliance with the manufacturer's approval
and installation requirements.
C. Poke-through devices shall be either flush or pedestal mount for receptacles, telephone/data or w.
furniture feed, as indicated on the Drawings.
D. A suitable, complete, above floor fitting, flush carpet flange assembly or furniture feed fitting
shall be provided at each service fitting. Color as selected by the Architect.
E. Each service fitting shall be complete with devices, faceplates and fittings for a complete
installation. All poke-through devices shall be as manufactured by Hubbell or approved equal.
2.19 PHOTOELECTRIC CONTROLS
A. Photoelectric controls shall be Specification Grade of the SPST, weatherproof and tamperproof w
type with cast aluminum housing.
B. Operating levels shall be adjustable from 2 to 50 f/c through the use of an adjustable sliding bar.
wer
C. Controls shall have a built-in time delay to prevent false switching.
D. Photoelectric controls shall be as manufactured by Tork, 2100 Series, or approved equal. .R
2.20 HEAT TRACING SYSTEM
A. Furnish and Install a complete UL Listed, CSA Certified, or FM Approved system of heating
cables, components, and controls for all piping specifically indicated and shown on the
Drawings. The system shall consist of, but not necessarily be limited to the following:
1. Electric heating cables. **
2. Temperature controllers and auxiliaries.
w�
3. Accessory materials such as banding,junction boxes, etc.
4. All required feeders to panelboards.
ELECTRICAL 260000-26
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
B. Toggle switch bodies shall be high impact nylon, quiet indicating type with screw type terminals.
Color of all switches shall be white.
C. General lighting switches shall be 1-pole, 2-pole, 3-way or 4-way and be 20 ampere, 120/277
volts AC rated as manufactured by Arrow-Hart, Pass & Seymour, Hubbell, Leviton or approved
equal.
D. Dimmer switches shall be Lutron Nova Series, or approved equal, of wattage rating as indicated
on the Plans.
E. On finished walls, switches shall be flush-mounted. Where two(2)or more switches are shown
at one location, they shall be installed under a common wall plate. All switches shall be
mounted approximately 4 feet above the floor and shall be located on the knob side of all doors.
2.16 RECEPTACLES
A. Bodies shall be high impact nylon, unless noted otherwise, supported by mounting yoke having
plaster ears and shall be "Specification Grade". Receptacles shall be side or back wired with
two(2)screws per terminal. All receptacles shall be the grounding type and shall be connected
to metal mounting yoke. A terminal shall be provided for ground wire on all receptacles. Color
of all receptacles shall be white unless noted otherwise.
4M
- B. Receptacles shall be as manufactured by Arrow-Hart, Pass & Seymour, Hubbell or approved
equal.
40
C. All receptacles unless specifically noted otherwise shall be as follows:
1. Convenience receptacles - Duplex 20 ampere, 125 volts, single-phase, 3-wire, U-Slot
grounded type.
2. Ground fault interrupter type - Duplex 20 ampere, 125 volts, single-phase, U-Slot
grounded type.
3. Weather proof - Duplex 20 ampere, 125 volts, single-phase, 3-wire, U-Slot grounded
type with die cast aluminum, weatherproof spring loaded lift cover and gasket and
ground fault circuit interrupter.
4. Special receptacles as specified on the drawings shall have suitable caps and plates or
covers.
D. All receptacles, unless otherwise noted,shall be installed 18 inches above floor.
E. In general, receptacle circuits shall be independent of lighting circuits and shall not be controlled
by lighting circuit breaker switches or lighting switches.
2.17 DEVICE PLATES
A. Device plates of the one-piece type shall be provided for all outlets to suit the devices installed.
Plates on all finished walls shall be Type 302 stainless steel, 0.032 inch thick that is painted
white with beveled edges. Plates on unfinished walls or fittings may be of zinc-coated sheet
metal with countersunk heads of the same finish as the plate. Plates shall be of the same
manufacturer as the devices.
ELECTRICAL 260000-25
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
w�
Northampton,MA
�w
2.14 FUSES
A. Furnish and install all fuses of the ampere rating indicated. For equipment disconnect fuses,
coordinate final fuse current rating selection with final equipment shop drawings and equipment
nameplate data.
B. Where the available fault current is less than 10,000 amperes, heating and small appliance
disconnect fuses shall be general purpose, one time, cartridge type, UL Class H.
C. Fuses for fused transformer disconnect switches shall be dual element fuses and shall be
current limiting time delay, cartridge type UL Class RK-5, with short circuit interrupting capacity
of 200,000 amperes RMS.
D. Fuses for fused motor or HVAC equipment disconnect switches shall be dual element fuses
and shall be current limiting time delay, cartridge type UL Class RK-1, with short circuit
interrupting capacity of 300,000 amperes RMS.
E. Fuses rated at over 600 amperes at 600 volts, or less, shall be dual element fuses and shall be
current limiting time delay, cartridge type UL Class L, with short circuit interrupting capacity of
300,000 amperes RMS.
F. Provide compact space saving fuses where required to match the equipment manufacturer's .w
fuse mounting provisions. Compact space saving fuses shall be dual element fuses and shall
be current limiting time delay, cartridge type UL Class J or UL Class CC (to match mounting
provisions) with short circuit interrupting capacity of 300,000 amperes RMS for Class J and
200,000 amperes for Class CC.
G. Fuses for fused meter sockets and meter stacks shall be fast acting, current limiting, cartridge
type UL Class T,with short circuit interrupting capacity of 200,000 amperes RMS. w�
H. Fuses for use on the Emergency, Legal Standby, Elevator, or Essential Power System shall be
Cooper Bussmann dual element fuses and shall be current limiting time delay, cartridge type UL
Class L, UL Class RK-1, or UL Class J, as required to match mounting provisions with short w.
circuit interrupting capacity of 300,000 amperes RMS.
I. Fuses for use in fusible panelboards on the Emergency, Legal Standby, Elevator, or Essential
Power System shall be Cooper Bussmann compact circuit protector style, CCP-Class CC or
CCP-CubeFuse, with dual element fuses, current limiting time delay, cartridge type UL Class
CC or CUBEFuse, Type TCF, as required to match mounting provisions with short circuit
interrupting capacity of 200,000 amperes RMS.
J. Furnish to the Owner upon completion of construction and before final acceptance of the
building one (1) complete set of three (3)fuses for each type installed in the building under this
Contract. The spare fuses shall be turned over to an authorized representative of the Owner, ,
designated by the Architect, upon completion of the Construction Program.
K. All secondary system fuses, rated at 600 volts or less, shall be UL approved, be constructed in
conformance with the applicable Standards set forth by NEMA and ANSI. All fuses 600 volts or
less shall be manufactured by Cooper Bussmann or Ferraz-Shawmut.
2.15 TOGGLE SWITCHES
A. Toggle switches shall be of the totally enclosed, flush tumbler type of suitable capacity for the
intended load and shall be"Specification Grade".
ELECTRICAL 260000-24
w
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 288'
MA
411111 eliminate tampering or unauthorized changes in calibration. Breakers shall be interchangeable
and capable of being operated in any position. Two and three-pole breakers shall be common
trip type so that an overload on one pole will trip all poles simultaneously. All circuit breakers
with trip sizes larger than 100 ampere rating shall have interchangeable trips. No handle bar
ties will be allowed on multi-pole circuit breakers to accomplish either manual or automatic
tripping.
J. All circuit breakers rated 125 Ampere to 600 Ampere feeding motors shall have adjustable
magnetic trip units with a range 500%to 1000%(10%tolerance)of trip unit rating.
K. All elevator circuit breakers shall be thermal-magnetic with shunt trip and adjustable
WR interchangeable trip or rating plug.
L. The exact size of circuit breaker, to include minimum fully rated interrupting ratings, for each
panelboard shall be determined from the panel schedules on the drawings. Each panelboard,
as a complete unit, shall have a short circuit current rating equal to or greater than the
equipment rating shown on the panel schedule or on the plans.
M. Branch circuit numbering is for identification and convenience only and is not intended to
designate connecting sequence. The Contractor is responsible for a proper load balance at
each panel.
N. Panelboard cabinets shall be fabricated from code gauge galvanized sheet steel and furnished
with either flush or surface trim. Trims shall be finished in gray enamel paint over a
rust-inhibiting prime coat. A turned edge shall be provided around the front of the box for rigidity
and attachment of the front. Wiring gutters shall be in accordance with the Electrical Code.
Trims shall be fitted with hinged door-in-doors having combination lock and latch, with all locks
keyed alike. A directory holder with clear plastic or glass plate and metal frame shall be
mounted on the inside of each door. A neatly typed directory properly identifying each circuit
shall be provided in the holder. Panelboards shall be so mounted that the distance from finish
floor to the handle of the top most circuit breaker does not exceed 6 feet, 6 inches.
O. Panelboards shall be as manufactured by General Electric, Eaton,or Siemens.
2.13 DISCONNECT SWITCHES
A. Disconnect switches shall be of the fusible or non-fusible type as noted and equipped with an
external lever or handle for manual operation. Each unit shall be enclosed in a code-gauge,
sheet steel cabinet with hinged door and catches and suitable for surface mounting as indicated
on the drawings. Neutral conductors shall be solid throughout.
B. Unless otherwise noted, switches shall be general-duty type ND-240 volts and heavy-duty type
HD - 600 volts in NEMA I enclosures of the size indicated on the drawings or as required.
NEMA Type 3R switches shall be provided where exposed to weather.
C. Disconnect switches for use as a motor disconnect shall be horsepower rated. Rating shall be
equal to or larger than the motor served.
D. Provide Class R fuse clips for all disconnects where fuses are specified to be Class R in the
fuse section of this specification.
E. A disconnect switch shall be furnished and installed for all power equipment as required by the
Electrical Code,whether or not shown on the drawings.
F. Disconnect switches shall be manufactured by Siemens, General Electric, or Eaton.
ELECTRICAL 260000-23
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
H. Transformer core shall be constructed with high grade, non-aging, grain-oriented silicon steel ,■,s
with high magnetic permeability, and low hysteresis and eddy current losses. Maximum
magnetic flux densities shall be substantially below the saturation point. The transformer core
volume shall allow efficient transformer operation at 10% above the highest tap voltage. The
core laminations shall be tightly clamped and compressed.
I. Transformer coils shall be wound of electrical grade aluminum with continuous wound
construction. An electrostatic shield consisting of a single turn of aluminum shall be placed
between the primary and secondary winding and grounded to the transformer core.
J. Neutral bus shall be sized and configured to accommodate at least 200%of the rated current.
K. The core and coil assembly shall be impregnated with non-hydroscopic, the thermosetting
varnish and cured to reduce hot spots and seal out moisture. The assembly shall be installed
on vibration-absorbing pads.
w
L. The enclosures shall be made of heavy gauge steel and shall be finished utilizing a continuous
process of de-greasing, cleaning, and phosphatizing, followed by electrostatic deposition of a
polymer polyester powder coating and baking. The coating color shall be ANSI 61 and shall be
UL recognized for outdoor use.
M. The enclosure construction shall be ventilated, NEMA 2 drip-proof, with lighting holes. All
ventilation openings shall be protected against falling dirt.
2.12 PANELBOARDS-LIGHTING, POWER AND DISTRIBUTION
A. Panelboards shall be of the dead-front type manufactured in accordance with the Underwriters
Laboratories, Inc. Standard for panelboards and enclosing cabinets and so labeled.
B. Panelboards shall be suitable for 277/480 volts or 120/208 volts, 3 phase, 4 wire operation as aw
scheduled on the contract drawings.
C. Special voltage panels shall be suitable for 240/120 volts 3 phase, 4 wire delta or 120 volts 3
phase, 3 wire delta, 60 hertz operation as scheduled on contract drawings.
D. All panelboards shall be clearly marked noting their system voltage, phase arrangement, wiring
and if it they are delta or wye systems. Panelboards that are suitable for 240/120 volts 3 phase,
4 wire delta shall be clearly marked noting the high-leg phase as required in NEC 408.3.
E. Interiors shall have copper or tin plated aluminum bus bars with mains arranged for a grounded
solid-neutral system with lugs only in the mains or main breakers as indicated.
F. In addition to the neutral bus, panelboards shall have a separate equipment ground bus and
terminal strip. Neutral bus shall be insulated from the panel enclosure.
G. Circuit breakers shall be molded case, thermal magnetic type with bolted connections to the
bus. The number and size of single, double, and three-pole circuit breakers indicated on the
drawings shall be provided. The design of the structure shall be such that the units may be
removed without disturbing adjacent sections, bus structure, or insulation.
H. Panelboards below 200 amperes shall have plug-in molded case circuit breakers in lieu of Bolt-
on connections.
I. Automatic tripping shall be indicated by handle automatically assuming a position between the
manual "OFF' and "ON" positions. The individual breakers shall be calibrated and sealed to
ELECTRICAL 260000-22
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
Northampton,MA
E. All dry type transformers shall be provided with internal vibration isolators, numbered terminal
lugs extended to the cable compartment for external connections and nameplate indicating all
NEMA Standard nomenclature relative to the transformer. The transformers shall be provided
with suitable mounting brackets for ceiling or wall mounted units. All floor mounted ventilated
type transformers shall be provided with adequate free areas under same for the circulation of
air in conformance with the manufacturer's requirements.
F. All dry type transformers rated up to and including 15 KVA shall be of the non-ventilated type,
Class "F" insulation. The transformers shall utilize a 185°C insulation system and have an
average winding temperature rise not to exceed 115°C by resistance above 40°C ambient.
Provide two(2)5%taps below nominal voltage.
G. All dry type transformers rated 30 KVA and larger shall be of the ventilated type, Class "H"
insulation. The transformers shall utilize a 220°C insulation system and an average winding
temperature rise not to exceed 150°C rise by resistance above a 40°C ambient. Provide two (2)
2-1/2%taps above and four(4)2-1/2%taps below nominal voltage.
H. Primary and secondary conduit entrances, cable compartments and terminal connections shall
be located near the bottom of the transformers. Transformers with conduit entrances, cable
compartments and external cable connections located near the top of or a type that requires
high temperature insulated cables be installed over the top of coil windings shall not be
acceptable.
I. Where shown on the drawings, provide isolation transformers with electrostatic shielding. An
electrostatic shield consisting of a single turn of aluminum shall be placed between the primary
and secondary winding and grounded to the transformer core.
J. All dry type transformers shall be finished with a grey enamel paint, be Underwriters'
Laboratories, Incorporated approved and bear the UL label. Dry type transformers shall be
constructed in conformance with the requirements of NEMA and ANSI where such standards
are applicable and shall be manufactured by Eaton, Siemens or General Electric.
2.11 DRY-TYPE TRANSFORMERS K RATED
A. Furnish and install, individually mounted dry-type transformers of the two-winding type, self-
cooled,with ratings and voltages as indicated on the drawings.
B. Transformers shall be manufactured by Eaton, General Electric, Siemens, or approved equal.
C. Transformers shall be designed, manufactured, and tested in accordance with all the latest
applicable ANSI and NEMA standards.
D. Transformers shall be designed for continuous operation at rated kVA, for 24 hours a day, 365
days a year operation, with normal life expectancy as defined in ANSI C57.96. The
transformers shall be specifically designed to supply circuits with a harmonic profile equal to or
less than a K-factor of 13 without exceeding 115 degree C temperature rise.
E. Transformers shall be insulated with a UL recognized 220°C insulation system.
go
F. Required performance shall be obtained without exceeding the above indicated temperature
rise in a 40°C maximum ambient.
G. All insulation materials shall be flame retardant and shall not support combustion as defined in
ASTM Standard Test Method D635.
ELECTRICAL 260000-21
go
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883 go
Northampton,MA
F. The transient voltage surge suppresser shall include a transient voltage counter to totalize �.
transient voltage surge which deviate from the sine wave envelope by more than 125 volts.
The readout shall be at least six digit LCD located on the unit's hinged front cover. The counter
shall be equipped with a battery backup to retain memory when power is not present. A push-
button switch on the display's faceplate shall be provided for manual counter reset.
G. The specified system shall be equipped with an audible alarm which shall be activated when
any one or more of the surge current diversion modules has failed. In conjunction with the
audible alarm, an alarm on/off switch shall be provided to silence the alarm and an alarm push-
to-test shall be provided to test the alarm function. Both switches and the audible alarm shall
be located on the unit's hinged front cover.
H. The transient voltage surge suppresser shall be suitable for use on a 480/277 V, Three Phase,
Four wire plus ground distribution system.
I. The TVSS surge current capacity based on an 8 x 20 microsecond waveform shall be 200kA
per phase for electrical switchboards with amperage ratings of 1,000 amps or larger, 130kA per
phase for electrical panelboards with amperage ratings of 1,000 amps or less.
J. The SPD shall be fed by a 60 amp breaker for switchboards 1000 amps or larger and by a 30 ew
amp breaker for panelboards 1000 amps or less. The SPD lead length shall not exceed 5 feet
from the breaker to the unit.
A
K. The manufacturer shall provide a Ten Year Limited Warranty from date of shipment against
failure when installed in compliance with applicable national/local electrical codes and the
manufacturer's installation, operation and maintenance instructions.
L. The transient voltage surge suppression system (TVSS) shall be as manufactured by Liebert,
Current Technology or pre-approved equal.
2.09 MOTOR CONTROLLERS 'r
A. All motor starters, three phase magnetic combination and single phase manual type shall in
general be furnished under Section 15000, but installed and wired under Section 16000. +
Disconnect switches, except as furnished under Section 15000, shall be furnished and installed
under Section 16000.
2.10 DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS
A. Dry-type transformers rated 600 volts and below shall have KVA, voltage ratings and
characteristics as shown on the drawings or as herein specified.
B. Dry type transformers 15 kW through 750 kVA shall meet NEMA Standard TP-1 and bear the
NEMA TP-1 label.
ewe
C. All dry type transformers shall be in a NEMA type sheet steel enclosure where installed in a dry
location. Dry type transformers located in other than dry, non-hazardous locations shall be
provided with an enclosure suitable for the location.
w
D. The maximum permissible db level at all dry type transformers shall be proportional to the
transformer KVA rating and shall be in conformance with the latest NEMA and ANSI Standards.
The equipment manufacturer shall submit, via the Electrical Contractor and General Contractor,
a notarized letter stating the actual db level of any dry type transformer to be installed in this
project, if requested by the Architect.
ELECTRICAL 260000-20
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
Nameplate giving voltage, ampere rating, short circuit rating, manufacturer's name,
general order number and item number.
5. Enclosures
Enclosures shall be of indoor ventilated construction as shown on the drawings.
6. Finish
All exterior and interior steel surfaces of the switchboard shall be properly cleaned and
provided with a rust-inhibiting phosphatized coating. Color and finish of the switchboard
shall be ANSI 61 and use the manufacturer's standard process.
7. Control Power Transformers
Control power transformers with primary and secondary protection shall be provided
where required to operate ground fault systems, electrically operated device adequately
sized for required burdens.
2.08 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION (TVSS) (with noise filtering)
A. These specifications describe the electrical and mechanical requirements for a high energy
transient voltage surge suppression systems (abbreviated as SPD in this specification and on
all drawings). The specified system shall provide effective high energy surge current diversion
and be suitable for application in ANSI/IEEE C62.41 category A, B and C3 environments, as
tested by ANSI/IEEE C62.11, C6245. The system shall be connected in parallel with the
+ protected system; no series connected elements shall be used which limit load current or kVA
capability.
B. The system's individual units shall be UL listed under UL1449 (Rev. 2.5)standard for Transient
Voltage Surge Suppression (NSS) and the surge ratings shall be permanently affixed to the
NSS unit.
C. The NSS unit(s)shall provide all modes(L-N, L-G and N-G)of protection.
D. All mode systems shall provide noise attenuation for electrical noise of 40db per ohm
measurement method for from 10KHz-50MHz, through the use of capacitors connected L-L in
Delta and L-n in Wye systems. (Manufacturer's frequency sweeps required for normal mode.)
E. The system shall be constructed using multiple surge current diversion modules of matched to
1% variance metal oxide varistors (MOV). Each module shall consist of multiple gapless metal
oxide varistors, with each MOV individually fused at the component level with the fuse I.
Squared T capability to allow the suppresser's maximum rated transient current to pass through
the suppresser without fuse operation. The fusing shall be capable of interrupting to 200KA
symmetrical fault current with 600 VAC applied. No gas tubes, silicon avalanche diodes or
other components which might short the line shall be used. All protection modules, including N-
G, shall be monitored and internally fused. The status of each MOV shall be continuously
monitored, and a green LED shall be illuminated if the module is in full working order. When
module performance is degraded, such as if one or more fuses or varistors has failed, the LED
shall indicate a failed module.
(This Specifying Engineer requires submittal documentation of proper fuse coordination of
actual fault tests from a nationally recognized testing laboratory for product approval. Provide a
complete data and test package per the recommendations of NEMA LS-1 )
ELECTRICAL 26 00 00-19
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
f. Circuit breakers with 400 ampere and above shall be Eaton, Series C with +sr
microprocessor-based RMS sensing tripping units.
(1) Each molded case circuit breaker microprocessor-based tripping system
shall consist of three (3) current sensors, a trip unit and a flux-transfer
shunt trip. The trip unit shall use microprocessor-based technology to
provide the adjustable time-current protection functions. True RMS
sensing circuit protection shall be achieved by analyzing the secondary
current signals received from the circuit breaker current sensors and
initiating trip signals to the circuit breaker trip actuators when
predetermined trip levels and time delay settings are reached.
(2) Interchangeable rating plugs shall establish the continuous trip ratings of
each circuit breaker. Rating plugs shall be fixed or adjustable as
indicated. Rating plugs shall be interlocked so they are not
interchangeable between frames, and interlocked such that a breaker
cannot be closed and latched with the rating plug removed.
(3) The microprocessor-based trip unit shall have thermal memory
capabilities to prevent the breaker from being reset following an
overload condition until after a preset time delay.
(4) When the adjustable instantaneous setting is omitted, the trip unit shall
be provided with an instantaneous override. Internal ground fault
protection adjustable pick-up ratings shall not exceed 1200 amperes.
Provide neutral ground fault current sensor for four wire loads.
(5) Breakers shall have built-in test points for testing the long time delay,
instantaneous and ground fault functions of the breaker by means of a
120-volt operated test set. Provide one test set capable of testing all
breakers 400 ampere frame and above.
(6) System coordination shall be provided by the following microprocessor-
based time-current curve shaping adjustments:
-Adjustable long time pick-up and delay.
-Adjustable short time pick-up and delay,with selective curve
shaping.
-Adjustable instantaneous pick-up.
-Adjustable ground fault pick-up and delay,with selective curve
shaping
(7) Circuit Breakers shall be Eaton, Series C circuit breakers,
microprocessor-based RMS sensing trip units types, Digitrip RMS 310.
wu
g. Where indicated, provide circuit breakers UL listed for application at 100 percent
of their continuous ampere rating in their intended enclosure.
h. Provide shunt trips, bell alarms and auxiliary switches as shown on the Contract
Drawings.
4. Nameplates
w
Engraved nameplates shall be furnished for all mains and feeder circuits with
designation and circuit number as indicated on the drawings. Fumish Master
ELECTRICAL 26 00 00-18
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
the circuit breaker on a faulted system. The circuit shall be armed for
approximately eight cycles and shall operate for all fault levels above 11 times
the ampere value of the rating plug.
f. The trip unit shall contain an integral test panel with a test selector switch and a
test pushbutton. A potentiometer shall be provided to enable the user to select
the values of test currents within a range of available settings. The basic
40 protection functions shall not be affected during test operations. The breaker
may be tested in the Trip or No Trip test mode.
g. The trip unit shall contain a keyed receptacle for use with an Auxiliary Power
Module (APM). The APM when connected to a 120V, 50/60 Hz source shall
provide power for testing the trip unit while the breaker is out of the cell or in the
disconnect or withdrawn position. Provide two(2)APM units per assembly.
h. Trip unit shall have thermal memory for enhanced circuit protection.
i. A four-digit, 3/4-inch high, LED alphanumeric display shall be provided to
indicate the following data:
(1) Cause of trip.
• (2) Instantaneous value of maximum phase and ground current.
(3) Level of fault current that initiated an automatic trip operation.
ON (4) Display shall have high output LED's for low level light readability. LCD
displays are not acceptable.
3. Molded Case Circuit Breakers
a. Protective devices shall be molded case circuit breakers providing complete
circuit overcurrent protection by having inverse time and instantaneous tripping
characteristics and shall be Eaton, Series C or approved equal. Ground fault
protection shall be provided where indicated and, where applicable, shall be
current limiting.
OR b. Circuit breakers shall be operated by a toggle-type handle and shall have a
quick-make, quick-break over-center switching mechanism that is mechanically
trip free. Automatic tripping of the breaker shall be clearly indicated by handle
position. Contacts shall be non-welding silver alloy and arc extinction shall be
accomplished by means of DE-ION arc chutes. A Push-to-trip button on the front
of the circuit breaker shall provide a local means manually of exercising the trip
mechanism.
C. Circuit breakers shall have a minimum symmetrical interrupting capacity of
- 65,000 amperes RMS at rated voltage. Where indicated, circuit breakers shall
be U.L. listed for series application or current limiting.
d. Circuit breakers with 250 ampere frame and below shall be thermal-magnetic trip
with inverse time current characteristics and shall be Eaton, Series C.
e. All elevator circuit breaks shall be Eaton, Series C with shunt trip and adjustable
interchangeable trip or rating plug.
ELECTRICAL 26 00 00-17
M
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
Anti-pump provisions shall be provided as standard for motor operated breakers
and optional for manual breakers with spring release solenoids.
e. The breaker control face plate shall include color coded visual indicators to
indicate contact"open"and "closed" positions as well as mechanisms"charged"
and "discharged" positions. Manual control pushbuttons shall be provided for
"opening" and "closing" the breaker. Where electrically operated breakers are
shown on the drawings, breaker shall be complete with control switch plus red w
and green indicating lights to indicate a breaker position. Control power for
electrically generated breakers shall be from fused control transformer mounted
in switchboard.
f. The breakers shall have high endurance characteristics being capable of no-load
and full load interruptions at rated current equal to or exceeding the UL
endurance rating for enclosed breakers without maintenance.
2. Trip Units for Insulated Case Circuit Breakers
a. Each low-voltage insulated circuit breaker shall be equipped with a solid-state
tripping system consisting of three current sensors, microprocessor-based trip
device and flux-transfer shunt trip. Current sensors shall provide operation and
signal function. The trip unit shall use microprocessor-based technology to
provide the basic adjustable time-current protection functions. True RMS
sensing circuit protection shall be achieved by analyzing the secondary current
signals received from the circuit breaker current sensors and initiating trip signals
to the circuit breaker trip actuators when predetermined trip levels and time delay
settings are reached. Interchangeable rating plugs shall establish the continuous
trip ratings of each circuit breaker. The trip unit shall be Eaton, Type Digitrip
RMS.
b. The trip unit shall have an information system that provides LED's to indicated .F
mode of trip following an automatic trip operation. The indication of the mode of
trip shall be retained after an automatic trip. A red trip reset button shall be
provided to turn off the LED indication after an automatic trip. Op
C. The trip unit shall be provided with a display panel, including a representation of
the Time/Current curve of the trip unit that indicates the protection function
settings. The unit shall be continuously self-checking and provide a visual
indication that the internal circuitry is being monitored and is fully operational.
d. Complete system selective coordination shall be provided by the addition of the
following individually adjustable time/current curve shaping solid-state elements: ..
(1) All breakers shall have adjustments for long delay pick-up and time.
(2) Breakers shall have individual adjustments for short delay pick-up and
time, and include IZt settings.
(3) Breakers shall have an adjustable instantaneous pick-up.
(4) Breakers shall have individually adjustable ground fault current pick-up
and time and include I2t settings.
�s
e. When the adjustable instantaneous setting is omitted, the trip unit shall be
provided with a discriminator or making-current release circuit to prevent closing
ELECTRICAL 26 00 00-16
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
mounting utility company current transformers and potential transformers or potential
taps as required by utility company.
2. Provide Service Entrance Label and provide necessary applicable service entrance
r features per NEC and local code requirements.
E. Customer Metering
40 1. Switchboard shall be provide with a separate customer metering compartment with
hinged door that will include package microprocessor based meter equal to Eaton
IQ260. Provide 1/0 (input/Output) cards to meet Kollmorgen's requirements. Verify
requirements with Kollmorgen prior in to ordering.
F. Overcurrent Devices
1. Main protective devices shall be fixed mounted insulated case Eaton types SPB with
frame and trip ratings as shown on the drawings.
2. Panel mounted feeder protective devices shall be molded case breaker type with frame
on and trip ratings as shown on the drawings and have additional characteristics as
specified.
3. Devices shall have a minimum interrupting rating of 65,000 amperes at 480/277 volts,
as shown on the drawings.
4. Devices shall be manually operated (MO).
G. Overcurrent Devices
1. Insulated Case Breakers
a. Protective devices shall be insulated case Eaton fixed mounted type SPB or
approved equal. All breakers shall be UL listed for application in their intended
enclosure for 100% of their continuous ampere rating. Frame ampere ratings
shall be as shown on the drawings.
b. Insulated case circuit breakers shall have a minimum symmetrical interrupting
go capacity of 65,000 amperes rms at rated voltage as shown on the drawings.
C. A selective override circuit shall be provided on breakers having short-time
adjustments but without instantaneous adjustments that will allow selectivity up
I " to its rms symmetrical short-time rating in a system having an X/R ratio of 6.6
with a maximum single phase peak current of 2.3 times the rms symmetrical
short-time rating. No deviations from this specification shall be acceptable.
d. All breakers shall be provided with a true, two-step stored energy mechanism
providing a maximum of five cycle closing.All the energy required for closing the
breaker shall be completely stored and held in readiness pending a release to
close action. Manual operated breakers shall be convertible to motor operation
by insertion of an internally mounted motor operation without voiding the UL
label. Both manual and motor operated breakers shall have multiple
charge/close provisions providing the following possible sequence: Charge-
close-recharge-open-close-open. As a safety feature, provisions shall be
available to manually discharge the stored energy without closing the breaker.
ELECTRICAL 26 00 00-15
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
NEC and UL requirements for service entrance and a UL service entrance label shall ..
be provided.
3. Small wiring, necessary fuse blocks and terminal blocks within the switchboard shall be
furnished as required. All groups of control wires leaving the switchboard shall be
provided with terminal blocks with suitable numbering strips. All control wires shall be
marked.
4. Switchboard shall be provided with adequate lifting means and shall be capable of «�
being moved into installation position and provided contractor supplied floor sills to be
set level. All necessary hardware shall be provided by the Contractor.
5. Furnish cable pull sections or top cable pull boxes where shown on the drawings.
Where cable pull section or pull boxes contain utility service cables, provide utility
acceptable sealing means.
6. Switchboard shall be manufactured by Eaton, General Electric, Siemens or approved
equal.
B. Bussing
1. All bus bars shall be tin-plated aluminum with bolted connections at joints. The bus
bars shall be of sufficient size to limit the temperature rise to 65 degrees C rise, based
on UL tests, and rated to withstand mechanical forces exerted during short circuit
conditions when directly connected to a power source having an available fault current
of 65,000 amperes symmetrical at rated voltages provide full capacity neutral.
2. A ground bus (minimum 1/4 x 2 inch) shall be furnished firmly secured to each vertical
section structure and shall extend the entire length of the switchboard. An incoming
ground lug shall be furnished. Other ground lugs for feeder circuits shall be supplied as
required.
3. All hardware used on conductors shall be high-tensile strength and zinc plated.
4. All terminals shall be of the anti-turn solderless type suitable for copper or aluminum
cable for sizes indicated for 75 degree C cable.
C. Switchboard Types .�
1. Front Accessible with Panel Mounted Feeder Devices
a. Switchboards shown mounted against a wall shall be of construction equal to
Eaton. POW-R-LINE C front accessible. All sections of the switchboard shall
align so that the back of the complete structure may be placed against a wall.
b. Construction shall allow maintenance of incoming line terminations, main device
connections and all main bus bolted connections to be performed without rear
access. The feeder or branch devices shall be removable from the front and
shall be panel mounted with the necessary device line and load connections
front accessible. Provide lugs on all devices for cable sizes shown on drawings.
D. Utility Metering
1. Where indicated on the drawings, furnish a separate barriered-off Utility Metering
Compartment complete with hinged sealed door. Bus work shall include provisions for
ELECTRICAL 26 00 00-14
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
White Neutral Gray
Green Ground Green w/yellow trace
240/120 Volts Delta'` Phase 120 Volts 3 phase, 3 wire
Black A Purple
Orange(high phase to ground) B Purple
Blue C Purple
Black w/3 white tracer strips Neutral
Green Ground Green
*Not provided with a balance system neutral.
B. Wire sizes #14 through #6 AWG shall be type THHN-THWN; wire size #4 and larger shall be
type XHHW. Type SF-2 shall be used for connections to lighting fixtures. Direct burial cable
r shall be type UF. Conductors installed in conduit lines below grade shall be type USE.
C. Minimum wire size shall be no. 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits and no. 14 AWG for
control wiring. 120-volt branch circuits of more than 75 feet and 277-volt circuits of more than
150 feet from center of load to panel shall be no. 10 AWG.
D. All circuit phases shall be color coded at terminations, splices, and pull boxes with UL-listed
electrical plastic vinyl tape such as 3M Scotch Brand No. 35 color-coding tape.
E. Wire connectors for copper wire 600 volts and lower (105°C rated and below), sizes #18
through #6 AWG, solid or stranded, shall be screw-on type pressure connectors (of the
air "SCOTCHLOK" type) incorporating a non-restricted, zinc coated spring, insulated with a vinyl
jacket having a flexible skirt. Connectors for larger size wires shall be as manufactured by
Thomas & Betts Co. or approved equal. Connectors shall be listed per UL 486 for use with
copper or aluminum conductors at 600 volts.
F. Wire connectors for copper wire 600 volts and below used in manholes and hand-holes shall be
of the waterproof type and shall be made with 3M Scotch kit waterproof direct burial splice
connectors.
G. Flexible metal clad (MC) 90°C rated cable with galvanized steel armor (aluminum armor
unacceptable) shall have the required number of phase conductors, neutral and full size
insulated (green) ground conductor. Conductors shall be#12 AWG. minimum, type THHN as
manufactured by AFC in New Bedford, MA or approved equal.
H. All cables in air plenum spaces that are not installed within protective conduit system shall be of
!! type approved for air plenum installation. This shall include signal and communication cables.
2.07 SWITCHBOARD-GROUP MOUNTED
A. General Construction
1. Furnish and install where indicated a dead front type, completely metal enclosed, self-
supporting structure independent of wall supports. Voltage rating shall be as indicated
on the drawings. It shall consist of the required number of vertical sections bolted
together to form one rigid switchboard. The sides and rear shall be covered with
removable screw-on plates. All edges of front cover panels shall be formed.
2. Equipment shall comply with the latest applicable standards of NEMA P132 and UL 891.
Where switchboards are used as service entrance equipment,they shall comply with all
ELECTRICAL 26 00 00-13
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883 ..
Northampton,MA
6. Outlet boxes for normally wet locations and surface or pendent mounted in all locations, ■
shall be of the proper cast metal type and shall be manufactured by Crouse-Hinds,
Appleton, Red Dot, Russell and Stoll, or approved equal.
C. Pull and junction boxes shall, in general, be as follows:
1. Pull and junction boxes shall be constructed of code gauge galvanized sheet metal, of
not less than minimum size required by the Electrical Code or other applicable
Specification "Standards" and shall be furnished with screw fastened covers. Boxes
exceeding 48 inches in any direction shall be properly reinforced with angle iron
stiffeners.
2. Pull and junction boxes to be installed in normally wet location areas shall be of the cast
type with threaded hub and gasketed cover plate. The cast pull and junction boxes
shall be manufactured by Crouse-Hinds, Appleton, Russell and Stoll, or approved
equal.
D. Fittings shall, in general, be as follows:
1. Adequate expansion fittings shall be used where crossing building expansion joints. ..
Expansion fitting shall have grounding jumpers, and shall be manufactured by O.Z., Inc.
or approved equal.
2. Sleeves and openings through fire-rated floors and walls in which cable or conduit pass
shall be sealed by UL Classified fire-stop fittings with elastomeric rings to seal off cold
smoke and toxic fumes. Fittings shall have heat-activated intumescent material which
expands to fill the voids left by destroyed cable insulation. Fire-stop devices shall be
O.Z./Gedney Fire-Seal fittings, with UL-classified hourly fire ratings equal to the fire
rating of the floor or wall through which the cables or conduit pass. Mineral wool or
oakum stuffed in the penetration shall not be employed. .�
2.05 WIREWAYS
A. Wireways shall be of sheet steel with hinged spring latched covers, galvanized or painted to
protect against corrosion conforming to industry standards and specifications. All necessary
bends, couplings, connectors, etc., shall be provided.
B. Wireway shall be suitable for lay in conductors with connector covers permanently attached so "!1"
that removal is not necessary to utilize lay in feature.
C. Interior parts shall be smooth and free of sharp edges and burrs.
D. Wireways shall be as manufactured by Square D Co.or approved equal.
2.06 WIRE AND CABLE
A. All wire and cable shall have copper conductors. Copper wires shall be soft drawn, annealed,
98 percent conductivity, and insulated for 600 volts. All conductors larger than no. 10 AWG
shall be stranded and shall be color-coded as specified below: *�!
208/120 Volts Phase 480/277 Volts
Black A Brown
Red B Orange
Blue C Yellow
ELECTRICAL 26 00 00-12
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
2.03 CONDUIT AND RACEWAYS
A. Galvanized rigid steel conduit shall be zinc-coated steel conforming to industry standards and
specifications and shall be as manufactured by Allied Tube & Conduit Corp., Republic Steel
Corp.,Wheatland Tube Co., or approved equal.
B. Intermediate Metal Conduit shall be zinc-coated steel conforming to industry standards and
specifications and shall be as manufactured by Allied Tube & Conduit Corp., Triangle/PWC,
Inc., or approved equal.
C. Electrical Metallic Tubing shall be zinc-coated steel conforming to industry standards and
or specifications and shall be as manufactured by Allied Tube & Conduit Corp., Republic Steel
Corp.,Triangle/PWC, Inc., and Wheatland Tube Co.
D. Non-metallic conduit shall be composed of polyvinyl chloride, Carlon PV-Duct, Type 40, 90° UL
rated or approved equal conforming to industry standards and specifications.
1. Conduit, fittings and cement shall be produced by the same manufacturer, who must
have had at least 5 years of experience in manufacturing the products.
2. Material must have tensile strength of 7,000 psi at 73.4°F, flexural strength of 11,000
psi, and compressive strength of 8,600 psi.
3. All joints shall be solvent cemented in accordance with the recommendations of the
manufacturer.
E. Flexible conduit shall be galvanized, spiral wrapped metallic conduit (Greenfield) or liquid-tight
flexible metal conduit as herein specified for specific equipment.
2.04 OUTLET, PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES, AND FITTINGS
A. Furnish and install as a part of the raceway system all outlet, pull and junction boxes required
for the proper installation of all components of the Electrical System.
B. Outlet boxes shall, in general, be as follows:
1. Exposed, surface and pendant mounted outlet boxes or outlet boxes installed in
normally wet locations shall be of the cast metal type with threaded hubs.
2. Recessed outlet boxes for dry locations shall be of the pressed sheet steel,zinc coated,
cadmium plated type.
3. Outlet boxes shall not be less than 1-1/2 inch deep unless shallower boxes are required
by structural conditions and are especially approved by the Architect.
w�
4. Ceiling and bracket outlet boxes shall not be less than 4 inch octagonal except that
smaller boxes may be used where required by the particular fixture to be installed.
Flush or recessed fixtures shall be provided with separate outlet boxes where required
r by the fixture terminal temperature requirements.
5. Outlet boxes for general use, flush mounted in concrete work and walls in normally dry
locations, shall be manufactured by Steel City,Appleton, Raco or approved equal.
ELECTRICAL 26 00 00-11
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
PART 2-PRODUCTS IN
2.01 GENERAL
A. All electrical products used on this project shall be new and conform, unless otherwise
specifically noted, to applicable standards as listed in CODES, STANDARDS AND
REFERENCES in Part 1 and be approved for the service and application.
2.02 UNDERGROUND DUCT SYSTEM w°"
A. The duct system shall consist of four inch round bore conduits. The number and type of
conduits in the duct shall be as indicated on the drawings. Duct lines shall be laid to a minimum .•
grade of 4 inches per 100 feet. Grade (pitch) may be from one manhole to the next, or both
ways from a high point between manholes, depending on contour of the finish grade, so that all
ducts will empty out into the manholes. Duct lines shall be installed so that the top of concrete
is not less than 30 inches below finished grade at the high points. Im
B. Changes in direction of runs, exceeding a total of 10 degrees, either vertically or horizontally,
shall be accomplished by long sweep bends, having a minimum radius of curvature of 25 feet, .�
except that manufactured bends may be used at ends of short rounds of 100 feet or less, and
then only at, or close to, the end of the run. The long sweep bends may be made up of one or
more curved or straight sections and/or combinations thereof. Manufactured bends shall have
a minimum radius of 36 inches.
C. Conduits shall terminate in end bells, flush with manhole wall, where duct lines enter manholes.
All conduit shall be thoroughly cleaned before using or laying. During construction and after the
duct line sections are complete; the ends of all conduits shall be plugged to prevent water-
washing mud into the conduits or manholes. Particular care shall be taken to keep the conduits
clean of concrete, dirt or any other substance during the course of construction.
D. Where it is necessary to cut the tapered end on a piece of conduit at the site, the cut and/or
taper shall be made with a special tool or a lathe, so that the new taper matches the taper of the
particular conduit being used.
E. After the duct line has been completed, a brush with stiff wire bristles, filling the entire diameter
of the conduit, shall be pulled through each conduit to make certain that no particles of earth,
sand or gravel have been left in the line.
we
F. Conduit joints in concrete encasement may be placed side by side horizontally, but shall be
staggered at least 6 inches vertically. Non-ferrous conduit duct banks shall consist of Type I
fiber or plastic conduit, at the option of the Contractor. The type of non-ferrous conduit shall not
be mixed on the project. Each single conduit of the duct bank shall be separated and
completely encased in concrete as indicated on the drawings. Separators or spacing blocks
shall be made of concrete, plastic or other suitable non-metallic, non-decaying material placed
on not greater than 4 foot centers. All conduit in the duct lines shall be securely anchored to
prevent any movement during the pouring and spreading of concrete. Ferrous conduit shall be
galvanized rigid steel with all threads painted with red lead before making-up. Nylon pull lines
shall be installed in all spare ducts.
G. All non-ferrous conduits shall be handled and stored in such a manner as to avoid warping,
cracking or deterioration.
ELECTRICAL 26 00 00-10
lop
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
C. Provide name,address and telephone number of the manufacturer's representative and service
company for each piece of equipment so that the source of replacement parts and service for
each item of equipment can be readily obtained.
1.21 IDENTIFICATION
A. All equipment shall be properly identified by means of clear and concise nameplates, tags,
signs or directories.
B. Provide tags identifying each cable, wire or group of wire comprising a circuit or feeder in all
panel boards, switchboards, motor control centers, pull boxes, troughs and terminal boxes
through which such wires run and at equipment at which they terminate. Tags shall be
flameproof linen fiber or pressure sensitive types. The circuit or feeder designation shall be as
approved by the Engineer.
C. Provide three (3) ply black Bakelite nameplates with 1/4 inch high engraved white letters on the
following equipment. Wording of the nameplates shall be in conformance with the respective
schedules and notes on the Drawings.
1. Exterior Secondary Buss Enclosure and Switchboards: Nameplates shall be provided
on each device and/or compartment of same identifying the feeder or equipment served
or the equipment container within the compartment.
2. Motor Controls: Nameplates shall be provided identifying the control of each door of
same identifying the unit controlled or protected by the starter, contactor or protective
device contained within same.
3. Lighting, Power, Distribution and Specialty Voltage Panelboards: Nameplates shall be
provided on the exterior of each panelboard cabinet identifying same. Nameplates
shall indentify name of panelboard (as indicated on the Drawings) and include
panelboards voltage, phase arrangement and wire configuration. Nameplates for
Specialty voltage panelboards shall also include if Delta or Wye configuration. High-leg
phase on 240/120 volt delta panelboards shall be properly identified as required by
NEC 408.3.
4. Nameplates shall be provided for each remote disconnect switch, starter, automatic
transfer switch and control device identifying the units controlled or protected.
D. Provide typewritten directories under transparent plastic on inside face of doors of the panel
boards.
1.22 VIBRATION ISOLATION AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS
A. Installation of mechanical and electrical equipment, accessories and components shall be in
accordance with the seismic requirements identified in the Massachusetts State Building Code,
Seventh Edition(7th Edition). Refer to Part 2 of the Specifications for further information.
1.23 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT
A. Comply with the requirements of Section 01570, Construction Waster Management,for removal
and disposal of construction debris and waste.
ELECTRICAL 260000-9
w
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
1.18 FINAL COMPLETION
A. When Subcontractor considers Work under this Section is complete, submit through the
General Contractor written certification that:
1. Contract documents have been reviewed.
2. Work has been inspected for compliance with Contract Documents.
3. Work has been completed in accordance with Contract Documents and deficiencies
listed with Certificate of Substantial Completion have been corrected.
4. Equipment and systems have been tested, adjusted and balanced and are fully
operational.
5. Work is complete and ready for final Engineer/Architect review.
B. Should Architect and/or his Engineer observe and find work incomplete, he will promptly
suspend his review and notify Subcontractor in writing through the General Contractor.
C. Subcontractor shall complete his work, remedy deficiencies and send a second certification of
final completion.
D. Architect and/or his Engineer shall, upon receipt of a second certification of completion, make a
second review and shall notify the Subcontractor in writing through the General Contractor
listing observed deficiencies.
E. When Architect and/or his Engineer finds work complete, he will consider close out submittals.
1.19 REOBSERVATION
a
A. Should status of completion of Work require additional services by Architect and/or his
Engineer, due to failure of Work to conform with Subcontractor's claims on initial Architect
and/or Engineer's review for Substantial Completion, or for Final Completion, Owner will deduct
the amount of Architect and/or his Engineer's compensation for additional services from final
payment to Subcontractor.
1.20 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Give detailed instructions, prior to the completion of the work, to the responsible personnel
designated by the Architect in the operation and maintenance of all work installed under this
Section. A letter with two(2) copies containing the name of the person or persons to whom the
instructions were given and the dates of the instruction period shall be submitted to the Architect
at the completion of the project.
B. In addition, prepare three (3) sets of manufacturer's catalogs, other similar data including the
necessary photographic equipment cuts, wiring diagrams covering all mechanical equipment
and devices furnished and installed under this Section. These manuals shall provide complete
instructions for the proper operation and use of the equipment together with instructions for
lubrication and periodic maintenance and for trouble shooting. Operating instructions shall be
specific for each system and shall include copies of posted specific instructions. This manual
shall contain only that information which specifically applies to this project, and all unrelated
material shall be deleted. During he instruction
g period this manual shall be used and
explained. The material shall be bound in notebook form and indexed.
ELECTRICAL 260000-8
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
PP may develop, shall be corrected at no expense to the Owner including all damage to areas,
materials and other systems resulting from such failures.
C. Upon receipt of notice from the Owner of failure of any part of the systems during the guarantee
period, the affected parts shall be replaced.Any equipment requiring excessive service shall be
considered defective and shall be replaced.
1.14 CONTINUITY OF SERVICE AND SCHEDULING OF WORK
A. Continuity of all services shall be maintained in all areas, which will be occupied during the
construction period. If an interruption of service becomes necessary, such shall be made only
upon consent of the Owner and at a time outside normal working hours as he shall designate.
B. Refer to the overall scheduling of the work of the project. Schedule work to conform to this
schedule and install work to not delay nor interfere with the progress of the project.
Pp
1.15 CERTIFICATES OF APPROVAL
A. Upon completion of all work, furnish, in duplicate, certificates of inspections from the
manufacturers stating that authorized factory engineers have inspected and tested the
operation of their respective equipment and found same to be in satisfactory operating
condition.
1.16 REMOVAL WORK
A. Particular care shall be taken to avoid creating hazards on the site or causing disruption of
service in the adjoining buildings.
B. All existing equipment indicated to be removed shall be done in a neat and workmanlike
manner. All existing equipment indicated to be turned over to the Owner shall be presented to
the Owner in good condition at a location designated by the Owner. All other equipment shall
be removed from the premises.
C. Remove all abandoned conduit and equipment not built into building construction. Where
ceilings or walls are removed all abandoned duct, conduit and piping shall be removed and
ends of live services capped. Abandoned elements built into walls or located above existing
ceilings shall remain and ends capped and marked abandoned.
1.17 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A. When Subcontractor considers Work under this Section (or designated portion of Work) is
re substantially complete, submit written notice through the General Contractor with a list of items
remaining to be completed or corrected.
B. Should Architect and/or his Engineer observe and find work is not substantially complete, he will
promptly notify Subcontractor through the General Contractor in writing, listing observed
deficiencies.
C. Subcontractor shall remedy deficiencies and send a second written notice of substantial
completion.
D. When Architect and/or his Engineer finds work is substantially complete he will prepare a
Certificate of Substantial Completion in accordance with provisions of General Conditions.
ELECTRICAL 260000-7
w
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
Northampton,MA
No
D. Each submittal shall be reviewed, stamped and certified prior to submission to the Architect.
Such certification shall be made by a Corporate Officer of the Contractor, or by a person duly
authorized to sign binding agreements for the Contractor. The certification shall state that the
data and details contained on each shop drawing, layout drawing, catalog data and brochure
has been reviewed by the Contractor and that it complies with the Contract Documents in all
respects. Shop drawings, layout drawings, catalog data and brochures will not be reviewed and
will be returned to the Contractor unchecked unless they are certified. w
E. It is intended that shop drawing data be complete and accurate at the first submission. If the
shop drawing is returned marked "Resubmit' only one (1) additional submission will be
permitted.
F. A minimum period of two (2) weeks, exclusive of transmittal time, will be required in the
Engineer's office each time shop drawings, layout drawings, and catalog data and brochures
are submitted or resubmitted for review. This time period shall be considered when scheduling
the work.
G. The shop drawings and manufacturer's data shall be submitted in a timely manner sufficiently in
advance to give ample time for checking, correcting, resubmitting and rechecking if necessary.
No claim for delay will be granted for failure to comply with this requirement.
H. Equipment shall be of proper size for its allotted space. Equipment shall be disassembled as ..
required, without invalidating the manufacturer's warranty, so that it can be installed through
regular window, door, and/or louver openings.
I. LEED Certification Documentation: Submit documentation from the manufacturer highlighting
LEED requirements for materials and products under Part 2. Comply with requirements of
Section 01315, LEED submittals.
1.12 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT STANDARDS
A. Where materials or equipment are specified by patent proprietary name, or name of the
manufacturer, such specification shall be deemed to be used for the purpose of establishing a ..
standard for that particular item. No equipment or material shall be used unless previously
approved by the Architect.
B. Substitutions may be offered for review provided the material, equipment or process offered for
consideration is equal in every respect to that indicated or specified and only if the term
"approved equal" appears. The request for each substitution must be accompanied by
complete specifications together with drawings or samples to properly appraise the materials,
equipment or process.
C. If a substitution of materials or equipment in whole or in part is made, the Contractor shall bear
the cost of any changes necessitated by any other trade as a result of said substitution.
1.13 GUARANTEE
A. Manufacturers shall provide their standard warranties for material and equipment furnished
under this Section. Such warranties shall be in addition to and not in lieu of all liabilities which
the manufacturer and Contractor may have by law or by provisions of the Contract Documents.
B. All materials, equipment and work furnished under this Section shall be guaranteed against all
defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one(1) year commencing with the date of
Substantial Completion. Any failure due to defective material, equipment or workmanship which
ELECTRICAL 260000-6
w
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
Northampton,MA
op C. At the completion of the work, submit one (1) set of marked-up prints for review and comment.
After review and comment, these marked-up prints shall be used in the preparation of the
Record Drawings. The Record Drawings shall consist of these prints (corrected) previously
indicated, as well as two (2) CAD disks of the Final Coordination Drawings, corrected on the
basis of the Architect/Engineer's final comments.
D. Obtain and pay for one (1) set of reproducible prints and CAD disks (AutoCAD Release 2000
1-0 minimum or compatible system) applicable to this Section. Make all modifications to these
reproducibles as shown on the marked-up prints. Remove all superseded data to show the
completed installation.
E. The Record Drawings may be made from the originals of the Contract Drawings. Arrange with
the Architect to have these reproducibles made from the originals.
F. Deliver the completed reproducible Record Drawings and CAD disks properly titled and dated to
the Architect. These Record Drawings shall become the property of the Owner.
1.09 PERMITS, FEES, RULES AND REGULATIONS
A. Give the proper Authorities all requisite notices or information relating to the work under this
Section. Obtain and pay for all fees, licenses, permits and certificates. Comply with the rules
and regulations of all Local, State and Federal Authorities having jurisdiction, the rules and
regulations of the National Board of Fire Underwriters and the Public Utilities Companies
serving the building.
1.10 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY
A. Be responsible for the care and protection of all work included under this Section until it has
been tested and accepted.
B. Protect all equipment and materials from damage from all causes including theft. All materials
and equipment damaged or stolen shall be repaired or replaced with equal material or
equipment.
C. Protect all equipment, outlets and openings with temporary plugs, caps and covers. Protect
work and materials of other trades from damage that might be caused by work or workmen and
make good damage thus caused.
1.11 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Submit for approval,within thirty(30)days after signing the Contract and prior to the submission
of any shop drawings, an itemized list of manufacturers of material and equipment and of
Subcontractors proposed to be used under this Section.
B. After approval of the list, submit for review a minimum of eight (8) sets of detailed shop
drawings. All shop drawings for equipment submitted for review shall include complete
Specifications, including type of materials, electrical characteristics, capacities, performance
and power requirements to determine compliance with Contract Documents. All data submitted
including wiring diagram shall be complete for all equipment and shall apply only to this specific
project. All extraneous material shall be deleted.
!" C. Regardless of any information included in the shop drawing submitted for review, the
requirements of the Drawings and Specifications shall not be superseded in any way by the
shop drawing review.
ELECTRICAL 260000-5
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
D. Final location of lighting fixtures, receptacles, switches and control devices, etc. shall be .�
coordinated with the Architectural Plans (i.e., Reflected Ceiling Plan). Additional offsets, fittings,
etc., shall be provided as needed to meet this requirement at no extra cost to the Owner.
E. If discrepancies exist in the scope of work as to what trade provides items (i.e., starters), they
shall be reported to the Architect/Engineer prior to signing the Contract. If the discrepancies are
not reported, the Electrical Subcontractor shall furnish such items as needed for a complete and
operable system.
F. All work shall be installed in cooperation with other trades.
G. Keep fully informed as to the shape, size and position of all openings required for all apparatus w
and give information in advance to building openings into the work. Furnish and set in place all
sleeves, pockets, supports and incidentals.
H. Routing and locations of pipes, conduit and equipment shall be adjusted to accommodate the
work with interferences anticipated and encountered. The Electrical Subcontractor shall
determine the exact routing and location of his/her systems prior to fabrication and/or installation
of any system component.
I. All distribution systems, which require pitch or slope such as plumbing drains, steam and
condensate piping shall have the right of way over those which do not. Confer with other trades ,.
as to the location of pipes, ducts and equipment and install work to avoid interferences.
1.07 COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A. Prior to the purchasing and fabrication of materials, each Subcontractor shall prepare
Coordination Drawings for all floors/areas showing the size and location of his/her equipment
and lines.
B. The Coordination Drawings shall be produced on AUTOCAD Release 2000 or compatible
system. A disk and one(1) set of reproducible bonds (all-trade composite) shall be provided to
the Architect/Engineer for review. �.
C. Coordination Drawings shall be 3/8 inch = V-0" scale. Prepare and submit for review, at that
scale or larger, plans and sections of Electrical Rooms.
D. The cost of preparing and reproducing these Drawings will be included as part of this Contract.
E. Coordination Drawings shall not be construed as replacing any Shop Drawings.
1.08 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Purchase and maintain at the job site a complete and separate black line set of prints of the
approved Working Drawings on which accurately indicate daily progress by coloring materials
and apparatus as installed. Schedules shall be modified to reflect data consistent with that of
the installed equipment. Clearly show all changes to the work as a result of change orders,
instructions issued by the Architect or conditions encountered in the field. Accurately indicate
the location, size,type and elevation of new utilities and their relationship to existing utilities.
B. The marked-up and colored-in prints will be used as a guide for determining the progress of the
work installed. They shall be inspected weekly and shall be corrected immediately if found "
inaccurate or incomplete. Requisitions for payment will not be approved until the Drawings are
accurate and up-to-date.
ELECTRICAL 260000-4
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
go Northampton,MA
21. Installation, wiring and connecting of automatic temperature controls unless otherwise
noted or specified shall be furnished by the HVAC Subcontractor and installed by the
Electrical Subcontractor.
22. Starters and control devices for heating, ventilating and air conditioning equipment
unless otherwise noted or specified shall be furnished by the HVAC Subcontractor and
installed by the Electrical Subcontractor.
23. Starters and control devices for plumbing equipment shall be furnished by the Plumbing
Subcontractor and installed by the Electrical Subcontractor.
OF
1.04 CODES, STANDARDS AND REFERENCES
A. All materials and workmanship shall comply with the latest editions of all-applicable Codes,
Local and State Ordinances, Industry Standards and Regulations.
B. The Electrical Subcontractor shall notify the Architect/Engineer of any discrepancies between
the Contract Documents and applicable Codes, Standards, etc.
C. In the event of a conflict,the most stringent requirements shall apply.
D. The following Codes, Standards and References shall be utilized as applicable:
1. Massachusetts State Building Code.
W 2. National Electric Code(NEC).
3. Environmental Protection Agency(EPA).
4. Commonwealth of Massachusetts Department of Environmental Protection(DEP).
5. Local Ordinances, Regulations Town of Northampton.
6. National Fire Protection Association(NFPA).
7. American National Standards Institute(ANSI).
8. American Society of Testing Materials(ASTM).
9. Commercial Standards, U.S. Department of Commerce(CS).
10. Factory Mutual(FM).
11. National Electrical Manufacturers Association(NEMA).
12. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL).
13. ANSI/EIA/TIA-569—A, Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications
Pathways and Spaces.
1.05 OBTAINING INFORMATION
A. Obtain from the manufacturer the proper method of installation and connection of the equipment
that is to be furnished and installed. Obtain all information that is necessary to facilitate the
work and to complete the project.
1.06 COOPERATION AND COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES
A. The Contract Drawings are diagrammatic only intending to indicate general routing and location
of piping, conduit and equipment. The Drawings are not intended to show every offset and
accessory required, nor every structural difficulty that may be encountered.
ow B. To carry out the intent and purpose of the Drawings, all necessary parts to make complete,
approved working systems ready for use shall be furnished without extra charge.
C. Where requirements of the plans and/or specifications are in conflict, the most stringent
requirement will be included in the Contract. Prior to ordering and/or installing any portion of the
work, which appears to be in conflict, the work shall be brought to the Architect/Engineer's
attention for direction as to what is provided.
ELECTRICAL 260000-3
no
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA go
20 Telephone and Data Raceway System. „o
21 Audio/Visual Raceway System.
22. Security, Card Access and/or Closed Circuit TV Raceway System.
23. Lightning Protection System.
24. Power and alarm wiring to include connections for heating, ventilating and air
conditioning system motors and equipment. All starters and line voltage thermostats
will be furnished to the Electrical Contractor for wiring, connections and mounting.
25. Power, control and alarm wiring to include connections for the Plumbing and Fire
Protection Systems Equipment shall be wired and connected by the Electrical
Contractor.
26. Electrical wiring and connections for Owner Furnished Equipment.
27. Heat Trace System.
28. Supplementary Steel, Channel and Supports.
29. Supervision and Approval of Excavation and Backfilling for Electrical Work.
30. Operation and Maintenance Instructions and Manuals for Electrical Equipment.
31. Nameplates, Labels and Tags. +
32. Testing.
33. Temporary Lighting and Power.
34. Vibration Isolation and Seismic Restraints.
1.03 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. The following work is not included as work in this Section and is to be performed under other w.
Sections:
1. Cutting and Patching.
2. Temporary Water, Heat and Fire Protection.
3. Temporary Light and Power.
4. Excavation and Backfill.
5. Foundations and Trenching.
6. Concrete Bases for Equipment.
7. Flashing and Caulking.
8. Door Louvers.
9. Setting of Frames for Registers and Access Panels.
10. Painting.
11, Exterior Louvers.
12. Fire Protection.
13. Plumbing.
14. Heating,Ventilating and Air Conditioning.
15. Process equipment and system installation shall be provided by others, unless noted
otherwise.
16. Telephone and data system cabling, outlet devices, cover plates, punch down blocks,
racks, patch panels, terminations, equipment and instruments are to be furnished and
installed by others.
17. A/V system cabling, outlet devices, cover plates, racks, terminations, equipment and
instruments are to be furnished and installed by others.
18. Security system cabling, outlet devices, cover plates, terminations, equipment and
instruments are to be furnished and installed by others.
19. All automatic temperature control system components, wiring and interlock wiring
associated with the heating, ventilating and air conditioning system will be furnished,
mounted,wired and connected by the HVAC Subcontractor.
20. Mounting of electrical equipment having mechanical connections. Refer to work
involving mechanical trades.
ELECTRICAL 260000-2
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
Northampton,MA
Pill, SECTION 26 00 00 ELECTRICAL
PART 1 -GENERAL
r 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Include GENERAL CONDITIONS, SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS and Division
1,General Requirements,as they apply to work specified in this Section.
B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements, which effect work of this
Section whether or not, such work is specifically mentioned in this Section.
C. Coordinate work with that of all other trades effecting or effected by work of this Section.
Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract.
D. Sustainable Design Intenent: The Owner will be submitting this building for certification
under the U.S. Green Building Council's LEED program. To that end, all systems and
equipment must be installed and operate to comply with the requirements of ASHRAE 90.1-
2007 or the local energy code, whichever is more stringent. In addition, several systems and
pieces of equipment are specified to comply with the requirements of the LEED program. An
outside commissioning authority will commission the building at the completion of
construction. Refer to separate commissioning authority scope of work and specifications
for systems affected and Fire Protection contractor interface required. Comply with project
requirements intended to achieve a LEED Certified Rating, measured and documented
according to the LEED Green Building Rating System of the US Green Building Council.
1.02 WORK INCLUDED
A. The work under this Section shall include the furnishing of all material, labor, equipment and
supplies and the performance of all operations to provide a complete working system as
ON required by the Drawings and as specified herein.
B. The Specifications and Drawings describe the minimum requirements that must be met by the
Electrical Subcontractor for the installation of all work as shown on the Drawings and as
specified herein to include the following items:
1. Underground Duct System.
2. Service Conduits and Cable.
3. Switchboard.
4. Grounding System.
5. Metering.
6. Panel boards—Lighting, Power and Distribution.
7. Dry Type Transformers..
8. Motor Controllers.
ON 9. Raceway Systems.
10. Wire ways.
11. Outlets and Pull Boxes.
12. Wire and Cable.
on 13. Disconnect Switches.
14. Fuses.
15. Enclosed Circuit Breakers.
16. Wiring Devices and Device Plates.
17. Lighting Fixtures and Lamps.
18. Lighting Control Sensors.
19. Lighting Control System.
ELECTRICAL 26 00 00-1
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
Northampton,MA
2.21 LIGHTING FIXTURES..................................................................................................................29 ..
2.22 EMERGENCY BALLAST PACK...................................................................................................32
2.23 TELEPHONE/DATA SYSTEM......................................................................................................32
2.24 TEMPORARY LIGHTING AND POWER......................................................................................34
2.25 SHORT-CIRCUIT/COORDINATION STUDY/ARC FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS .......................35 ap
2.26 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION TESTING......................................................................................48
2.27 VIBRATION ISOLATION AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS..............................................................48
2.28 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM..........................................................................................57
2.29 GROUNDING- BUILDING STRUCTURAL STEEL......................................................................59
PART3- EXECUTION ................................................................................................................................59 ow
3.01 GENERAL.....................................................................................................................................59
3.02 METERING...................................................................................................................................59
3.03 MAIN ELECTRIC SERVICE .........................................................................................................60
3.04 SLEEVING...............................................................................................................................
3.05 GROUNDING................................................................................................................................60
3.06 WIRING METHODS......................................................................................................................63
3.07 WIRE AND CABLES.....................................................................................................................65
3.08 PHASING AND COLOR CODING................................................................................................66
3.09 OUTLET, PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES....................................................................................67
3.10 MOUNTING HEIGHTS AND SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS..........................................................68
3.11 MOTORS AND CONTROLS.........................................................................................................69
3.12 COORDINATION WITH MECHANICAL WORK...........................................................................70
3.13 BUILDING RELATED SYSTEMS.................................................................................................70
3.14 SUPPLEMENTARY STEEL, CHANNEL AND SUPPORTS.........................................................71
3.15 TESTING AND INSPECTION.......................................................................................................71
3.16 PAINTING.....................................................................................................................................72
3.17 CLEANING UP..............................................................................................................................72
r�
ELECTRICAL 26 00 00-ii
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
SECTION 26 00 00 ELECTRICAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
-"' PART 1 -GENERAL.....................................................................................................................................1
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.........................................................................................................1
1.02 WORK INCLUDED.................................................................................................................I........1
1.03 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS......................................................................................2
1.04 CODES, STANDARDS AND REFERENCES.................................................................................3
1.05 OBTAINING INFORMATION..........................................................................................................3
1.06 COOPERATION AND COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES................................................3
1.07 COORDINATION DRAWINGS.......................................................................................................4
1.08 RECORD DRAWINGS....................................................................................................................4
1.09 PERMITS, FEES, RULES AND REGULATIONS...........................................................................5
1.10 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY.................................................................................5
1.11 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS......................................................................................................5
1.12 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT STANDARDS................................................................................6
1.13 GUARANTEE..................................................................................................................................6
1.14 CONTINUITY OF SERVICE AND SCHEDULING OF WORK........................................................7
1.15 CERTIFICATES OF APPROVAL....................................................................................................7
1.16 REMOVAL WORK..........................................................................................................................7
1.17 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION.......................................................................................................7
1.18 FINAL COMPLETION.....................................................................................................................8
OR1.19 REOBSERVATION.........................................................................................................................8
1.20 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS ................................................8
1.21 IDENTIFICATION............................................................................................................................9
1.22 VIBRATION ISOLATION AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS................................................................9
1.23 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT..................................................................................9
PART2-PRODUCTS................................................................................................................................10
2.01 GENERAL.....................................................................................................................................10
2.02 UNDERGROUND DUCT SYSTEM .............................................................................................. 10
�w 2.03 CONDUIT AND RACEWAYS .......................................................................................................11
2.04 OUTLET, PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES, AND FITTINGS........................................................ 11
2.05 WIREWAYS..................................................................................................................................12
2.06 WIRE AND CABLE ...............................................................................................I....................... 12
2.07 SWITCHBOARD-GROUP MOUNTED ......................... ....... ....... .............................................13
2.08 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION(TVSS) (with noise filtering)..........................19
2.09 MOTOR CONTROLLERS.............................................................................................................20
2.10 DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS.....................................................................................................20
2.11 DRY-TYPE TRANSFORMERS K RATED....................................................................................21
2.12 PANELBOARDS-LIGHTING, POWER AND DISTRIBUTION....................................................22
2.13 DISCONNECT SWITCHES.................................................................................................I........23
2.14 FUSES..........................................................................................................................................24
2.15 TOGGLE SWITCHES...................................................................................................................24
2.16 RECEPTACLES............................................................................................................................25
2.17 DEVICE PLATES..........................................................................................................................25
2.18 FIRE RATED POKE-THROUGH - FLUSH SERIES.....................................................................26
2.19 PHOTOELECTRIC CONTROLS ..................................................................................................26
2.20 HEAT TRACING SYSTEM ...........................................................................................................26
ELECTRICAL 26 00 00-i
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH[+A Project No.2883
Northampton,MA
END OF SECTION
\\fs3\g_ddve\projects\2009-boston\aOI12-003.00\specifiGations\hvac\h-spec 10-30-09.doc
OR
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -179
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
5. Duct Traverse
a. System zone/branch.
b. Duct Size.
C. Area. .
d. Design Velocity.
e. Design Airflow.
f. Test Velocity.
g. Test Airflow.
h. Duct Static Pressure.
i. Air temperature.
6. Air Outlet Report
a. Area Served.
b. Outlet Number. �.
C. Type.
d. Size.
e. AK factor.
f. Velocity, design and actual.
g. Airflow, design and actual.
7. Terminal Unit Report
a. Area Served.
b. Unit Number.
C. Airflow,design and actual. w
d. Waterflow,design and actual.
e. Entering/Leaving water temperature.
f. Entering/Leaving air temperature.
g. Waterside pressure drop.
h. Airside pressure drop.
8. Pump Test Report
a. Unit Number.
b. Manufacturer.
C. Motor data.
d. Voltage and amperage data.
e. Waterflow, design and actual.
f. Suction Pressure.
g. Discharge Pressure.
h. Total Head Pressure.
K. The Balancing Subcontractor shall balance and adjust air and water systems to meet design
requirements +10%. Balancing shall be accomplished by adjusting dampers, drives, valves,
etc.to obtain design requirements.
L. The HVAC Subcontractor shall cooperate and make provisions for the Balancing Subcontractor
as needed to accommodate the air and water balancing. As part of this Contract, the HVAC
Subcontractor shall provide and/or change pulleys, belts, sheaves, valves and dampers, at no
additional cost, in order to properly balance the systems to design requirements.
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -178
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
FP Northampton,MA
1. Air Apparatus Test Report
a. Location.
b. System Number.
u•
C. Manufacturer.
d. Airflow, design and actual.
e. Total CFM.
f. Total Static Pressure.
g. Discharge Static Pressure.
h. Suction Static Pressure.
i. Coil pressure drops(static pressure).
j. Filter pressure drops.
k. Motor volts and amps.
I. Outside Air and Return Air CFM.
M. Drive data.
2. Coil Test Report
a. System Number.
! " b. Location.
C. Manufacturer.
d. Airflow, design and actual.
e. Entering air temperature(DB/WB),design and actual.
f. Leaving air temperature(DB/WB), design and actual.
g. Water flow GPM, design and actual.
h. Entering water temperature, design and actual.
i. Leaving water temperature,design and actual.
j. Waterside pressure drop.
k. Airside pressure drop.
IN 3. Gas Fired Heat Apparatus Test Report
a. System number.
b. Location.
C. Manufacturer.
d. Type Fuel/Input/Output.
e. Voltage.
f. Drive Data.
g. Airflow CFM, design and actual.
h. Total static pressure.
go 4. Fan Test Report
a. System Number.
b. Location.
C. Manufacturer.
d. Airflow, design and actual.
e. Total static pressure,design and actual.
so f. Inlet static pressure.
g. Discharge static pressure.
h. Motor and Drive data.
i. Fan RPM.
!! j. Voltage and Amperage.
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -177
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA "
3.13 AIR AND WATER BALANCING .�
A. The HVAC Subcontractor shall employ an independent Balancing Subcontractor, acceptable to
and approved by the Architect/Engineer,to balance and adjust the air and water systems.
B. Balancing and adjusting shall not begin until all HVAC systems have been installed and are in
full working order. Prior to the start of balancing,the following shall be checked:
1. Rotation of all fans and pumps.
2. Dampers are free to open and close.
3. Fire and smoke dampers are open.
4. Clean filters are in place.
C. Upon completion of balancing and adjusting of the systems hereinafter specified, submit six(6)
copies of the data for review and approval by the Architect/Engineer.
D. The Balancing Subcontractor shall be procured early enough in the project to allow for him/her
to review the project documents and determine if sufficient components are in place to balance
and adjust the systems. The Balancing Subcontractor shall provide a list of any deficient area
he/she identifies.
E. Balancing Subcontractor shall provide all testing instruments, manpower, temporary
connections and materials needed for balancing and adjusting of the air and water systems. All ..,
test instruments shave have been calibrated within the last six (6) months. Balancing
Subcontractor shall provide verification of calibration upon request.
F. Architect/Engineer and Owner shall be notified a minimum of five (5) days prior to balancing
commencing so that a representative can be available to witness the balancing work. In
addition, the Balancing Subcontractor shall (upon completion of the balancing work and report
submittal), at the request of the Architect/Engineer or Owner's representative, verify the
balancing readings at four (4) locations. The locations shall be chosen by the
Architect/Engineer or Owner's representative.
G. All balancing and adjusting of air and water systems shall be done in accordance with the latest
edition of the NEBB Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of
Environmental Systems or the latest edition of SMACNA's HVAC Systems Testing, Adjusting
and Balancing.
H. Balancing of the cooling systems shall be performed in the air conditioning season, heating
systems in the heating season.
I. Prior to balancing of the air and water systems, and as part of the balancing report, the
Balancing Subcontractor shall prepare ductwork and piping schematics of the systems to be
balanced. Schematics shall be similar to those indicated in the NEBB and SMACNA
publications previously identified. Piping schematics shall be of similar content to ductwork
schematics.
J. Air and Water Balancing Report forms shall be similar to the standard NEBB and SMACNA
forms found in the previously identified manuals. The following information shall be provided at
minimum (reports for equipment and systems not indicated shall be obtained from the
NEBB/SMACNA manuals or prepared by the Balancing Subcontractor. Reports prepared by
the Balancing Subcontractor shall be submitted for review and approval prior to final Balancing
Report submittal): +►
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -176
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
G. HVAC Subcontractor shall clean all existing supply air, return air and exhaust air ductwork
systems identified to remain. Ductwork shall be cleaned and inspected prior to installation
and/or attachment of new ductwork to the existing systems. HVAC Subcontractor shall submit
written verification stating ductwork cleaning has been completed.
3.12 TESTING
A. HVAC Subcontractor shall perform all tests, other than herein specified,which may be required
by local authorities or agencies.
B. Furnish all labor, material, equipment and services for the tests herein specified. Make
corrections identified in tests and repeat tests until defects are corrected.
C. Equipment, piping and ductwork installed under this Section shall be tested and found tight.
Concealed and/or covered piping shall be tested prior to being closed in. Tests performed shall
not relieve the HVAC Subcontractor of his responsibility for leaks which may develop after the
tests are made.
D. Pipe Testing
1. Pressure test piping in the presence of the Owner or his representative and any local
authorities who may have jurisdiction.
2. Precautions shall be taken to prevent damage to any equipment by pressure testing of
piping. After testing, equipment shall be returned to its normal position and service.
3. Test pressure shall be held for a minimum of four(4) hours with no loss of pressure.
4. Test pressure shall be 1-1/2 times maximum operating pressure or system design
pressure utilizing cold water, inert gas or air.
00
5. Repair or replace and retest any defective material.
E. Equipment casings and housing (fans, AHU's)shall not leak sufficiently to cause audible sound
air movement detectable by hand.
F. Ductwork Testing
1. Close off and seal all openings of the ductwork to be tested.
2. Provide a source of high pressure air to test ductwork.
No
3. Pressure test ductwork in accordance with SMACNA pressure classification of the
section/system of ductwork.
4. Seal and repair all audible leaks. Retest ductwork after repairs have been made.
5. Maximum duct leakage allowable shall not exceed 3%of total system airflow.
6. Ductwork shall be tested, repaired and retested prior to being enclosed in shafts,
ceilings,walls, etc.
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -175
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
Exhaust Ducts Exposed to Outdoor
Air Ventilation Equipment Casings 1-1/2 FSK
Exhaust Ducts from Cold Rooms 1-1/2 FSK
Supply Air Ducts(Cooling Systems) 1-1/2 FSK
Return Air Ducts in Unconditioned
Spaces 1-1/2 FSK
2. Rigid Fiberglass
Outside Air Intake Ducts 2 FSK
Plenums(Cooling Systems) 2 FSK
rs
Supply Air, Return Air and Relief Ducts
In Mechanical Rooms 1-1/2 FSK
Supply Air and Return Air
Ducts Outdoors 2 Weatherproof(SAM)
3. Elastomeric Foam
Supply Air and Return Air
Ducts Outdoors 2-1/2 SIB
4. Duct Liner
Where Indicated 1 LINACOUSTIC
PERMACOTE
OR MAT FACE
3.11 CLEANING
w
A. The equipment, ductwork and piping installed under this Section shall be cleaned of foreign
matter and flushed out before the system is placed into service. The HVAC Subcontractor shall
make temporary connections where required for cleaning system. HVAC Subcontractor shall
take precautions to prevent foreign matter from getting into equipment, piping and ductwork
during construction.
B. The supplier of chemicals and water treatment equipment shall recommend and provide the s.
chemicals for cleaning and flushing the system.
C. All equipment shall be clean and dry upon completion of work.
D. All pipe strainers shall be cleaned immediately prior to acceptance by Owner.
E. HVAC Subcontractor shall vent high points of closed piping systems.
F. Temporary filters shall be utilized in all air handling units and unit heaters when operating during
construction. These filters shall be replaced as needed during construction. New filters shall be
installed in all equipment prior to occupancy by the Owner. 11"'
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -174
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
Northampton,MA
3. All exposed edges of the liner must be factory or field coated. For systems operating at
4000 FPM or higher, a metal nosing must be installed in all liner leading edges.
4. Repair lines surface penetrations with UL listed adhesive.
5. Duct dimensions indicated are net inside dimensions required for air flow. Increase duct
size to allow for insulation thickness.
J. Piping Insulation Schedule
PIPE SIZE THICKNESS
Inches Inches
1. Fiber Glass Insulation
Cold Water All Sizes 1
Heating Water Supply All Sizes 2
and Return
Exposed to Freezing All Sizes 1-1/2
2. Cellular Glass Insulation (Exterior Piping with Waterproof Covering)
Cold Water All Sizes 1-1/2
Heating Water Supply All Sizes 2-1/2
and Return
3. Elastomeric Foam
!!' Refrigerant Suction All Sizes 1
Refrigerant Liquid Line All Sizes 1
Refrigerant Hot Gas All Sizes 3/4
Condensation Drain All Sizes 1/2
K. Equipment Insulation Schedule
THICKNESS
Inches
1. Flexible Fiber Glass Board
Water Softeners 1
Air Separators 1-1/2
L. Ductwork Insulation Schedule
� THICKNESS FINISH
Inches
1. Flexible Fiberglass
Exhaust Ducts Within 10 ft. of
Exterior Openings 1-1/2 FSK
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -173
.A
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
barrier mastic or form the insulation using elastomeric foam to conform to the outline of
the equipment.
4. For equipment in Mechanical Equipment Rooms and/or in finished spaces, provide a
finish of presized fiberglass cloth to provide a smooth paintable surface or finish with
Manville Zeston 2000 jacketing or aluminum jacketing.
5. Provide insulated dual temperature equipment or cold equipment containing fluids below
ambient temperature with vapor retardant jackets.
6. For insulated equipment containing fluids above ambient temperature, provide jacket with
or without vapor barrier. w
7. Do not insulate over nameplate or ASME stamps. Bevel and seal insulation around
such.
8. When equipment with insulation requires periodic opening for maintenance, repair, or
cleaning, such as for strainers or pump casings, install insulation in such a manner that it
can be easily removed and replaced without damage.
H. External Ductwork Insulation
1. Insulate all ductwork conveying air below ambient temperature with insulation having a ..�
vapor barrier jacket. Seal all vapor retardant jacket seams and penetrations with UL
listed tapes or vapor retardant adhesive.
2. Insulated all ductwork conveying air above ambient temperature with insulation with or
without vapor retardant jacket. Where service access is required, bevel and seal edges
of insulation.
3. Continue insulation through walls sleeves, hangers, and other duct penetrations except
where prohibited by code(i.e. at fire dampers).
4. The insulation on the underside of duct work 24" or greater shall be secured with .►
mechanical fasteners and speed clips spaced approximately 18" on center. The
protruding ends of the fasteners should be cut off flush after the speed clips are installed,
and then,when required, sealed with the same tape as specified above.
5. For ductwork exposed to physical abuse in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or in finished
spaces,finish with Manville Zeston 2000 PVC jacket.
6. For exterior applications, provide insulation with a weatherproof protection jacket. After
the duct is insulated and vapor sealed and the installation of the insulation is approved by
the Architect and/or his Engineer, cover the insulation with a Self Adhesive Membrane
Roofing System (SAM) or an Elastomeric Membrane Roofing System using 0.045 inch 40
thick EPDM with compatible bonding adhesive to make a watertight installation. Either
system shall be installed in a manner as approved by the manufacturer.
I. Duct Liner I,
1. Adhere insulation to sheetmetal with full coverage of a UL listed adhesive.
2. Secure insulation with mechanical liner fasteners as indicated by SMACNA or
manufacturer. Pin length should be as recommended by the liner manufacturer.
w
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 172
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
Northampton,MA
4. Provide insulation for pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature and secure
jackets with self sealing lap or outward clinched, expanded staples. Bevel and seal ends
of insulation at steam traps and unions. All other fittings shall be insulated. Provide seal
on insulation at strainers for access to strainer basket.
5. Cover fittings, strainers and valves 2 inches and under in fiberglass insulated lines with
rigid preformed molded or routed fiberglass pipe-fitting insulators as manufactured by ICA
Hamfab or Pro-Tec-T-Kotes or with two (2) coats of insulating cement to the same
thickness as the sectional insulation and finished with 6 ounce fiberglass cloth jacket
pasted on and coated with fitting mastic to provide vapor seal as applicable. (PVC 25/50
rated fitting covers may be substituted for the fiberglass cloth jacket only in this
application, not the rigid insulation.)
6. Cover fittings, strainers, flanges and valves 2-1/2 inches and larger in fiberglass insulated
lines with rigid preformed molded or routed fiberglass pipe-fitting insulators as
manufactured by ICA Hamfab or Pro-Tec-T-Kotes or with segmented sections of calcium
silicate block wired on and coated with insulating cement to the same thickness as the
sectional insulation and finished with 6 ounce fiberglass cloth jacket pasted on and
coated with fitting mastic to provide vapor seal as applicable. (PVC 25/50 rated fitting
covers may be substituted for the fiberglass cloth jacket only in this application, not the
rigid insulation.)
me 7. Provide at each hanger and/or support an insert between support shield and piping on
piping 1-1/2" inches diameter or larger. Fabricate of Manville Thermo-12 or other heavy
density insulating material suitable for temperature. Insulation inserts shall not be less
than the following lengths:
1-1/2"to 2-1/2"pipe size 10"long
3"to 6"pipe size 12"long
8"to 10"pipe size 16"long
12"and over 22"long
8. For pipe exposed in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or in finished spaces below 10 feet
above finished floor, finish with Manville Zeston 2000 PVC jacket and fitting covers or
aluminum jacket.
9. For all exterior applications insulate piping with Cellular Glass. Fittings,joints and valves
shall be insulated with segmented sections of the cellular glass pipe insulation and
sealed with applicable Adhesive. Provide Waterproof Covering jacket for all insulated
pipe, fittings, joints, and valves. Jacket seams shall be located on bottom side of all
horizontal piping.
G. Equipment Insulation
1. Apply insulation as close as possible to equipment b Y grooving, scorin 9. and beveling
insulation, if necessary. As required, secure insulation to equipment with studs, pins,
clips, adhesive,wires, or bands.
2. Fill joints, cracks, seams, and depressions with bedding compound to form smooth
surface. On cold equipment,use vapor retardant cement.
on 3. Cover insulation on irregular shapes (pump casings, tank end bells, strainers, etc.) with
metal mesh and finish with two heavy coats of insulting cement finished with a vapor
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -171
Mp
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
B. Adjust all pressure reducing valves and pressure relief valves for the minimum pressures
required for proper system operation.
3.09 SHEETMETAL WORK INSTALLATION
A. Install all sheetmetal ductwork required for the various supply, return and exhaust air systems.
All ducts and sheetmetal plenums shall be constructed of galvanized iron of U.S. Standard
Gauge unless otherwise specified and all shall be fabricated and installed in accordance with �.
the "HVAC Duct Construction Standards" as published by SheetMetal and Air Conditioning
Contractors' National Association, Inc.
B. Ducts shall be true to the inside clear dimensions indicated on the drawings. Ducts shall be
straight and smooth on the inside with neatly finished joints and shall be sealed as specified
herein.
C. Ducts shall be securely anchored to the building construction in an approved manner and shall
be so installed as to be completely free from vibration under all conditions of operation.
Horizontal ducts shall be hung with hangers of same material as the duct from concrete inserts,
beam clamps or from expansion shields. Vertical ducts shall be supported at each floor.
Provide all necessary supports and cross framing as required.
D. No pipes or conduits shall pass through any duct without written approval of the Architect.
Where it is impossible to re-route such pipe or conduit, the duct shall be increased at that point
to maintain a constant cross-sectional area and a streamline enclosure for the pipe shall be
provided. Coordinate the sheet metal installation with the work of all other trades.
3.10 INSULATION w
A. Furnish all labor, equipment, accessories and materials and perform all operations necessary
for the installation of all insulation for the duct systems and and hot water piping systems,
including all related equipment and accessories. Insulation shall be installed in a workmanlike
manner and shall conform to the Code of Workmanship of the International Association of Heat
and Frost Insulators and Asbestos Workers.
B. Verify that ductwork and piping has been tested for leakage before applying insulation
materials.
C. Verify that all surfaces are clean, dry and free of foreign material.
D. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, all building codes and
industry standards.
E. Continue all insulation, with or without vapor barrier, through penetrations of all walls and floors
except where prohibited by code(i.e. at duct fire dampers).
F. Piping Insulation
1. Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations.
w
2. Neatly finish insulation at supports, protrusions, and interruptions.
3. Provide insulation for dual temperature pipes or cold pipes conveying fluids below
ambient temperature with vapor barrier jackets having self sealing laps. Insulate and
vapor seal the complete system. Use of staples is not acceptable. Provide insulated and
sealed access to the basket of all strainers.
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -170
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
Northampton,MA
G. All cold city water piping, all piping at reheat coils between coil and balancing valves, control
valve or shut off valves, all heating hot water piping running parallel to radiation and used in
connection and all drainage piping shall be copper tubing. All connections between copper
tubing and fittings in water and drainage piping shall be made with 95-5 tin antimony solder.
Connections between steel pipe and copper tubing shall be made at bronze valves or bronze
couplings shall be used. These connections shall be made outside of all pipe chases. No
connection between steel pipe and copper pipe shall be concealed behind walls. All water
piping shall have wrought copper solder joint pressure fittings. All drainage piping shall have
drainage type fittings. Provide cleanouts in drainage piping at changes in directions and every
40 feet in straight run to completely rod out the piping. Provide loop seal in drain piping from air
conditioning units coil drain pans with loop seal to properly seal against the static pressure in
the unit and run to floor drain or open end drain as applicable.
H. Furnish and install all flanges, bolts and gaskets required to make connections to valves,
a strainers and equipment.
I. Unions or flanges shall be installed at all equipment, pumps, traps, control valves, drips, vents
and drains where it may be necessary to disconnect equipment or piping for maintenance
PM and/or repair. Piping 2 inch and smaller shall have heavy pattern unions. Unions in copper
tubing shall be all bronze or brass. All piping larger than 2 inch shall have flanges of the welded
neck type. Mating flanges of valves may be considered to meet this requirement of the
OM Specification if the equipment is completely accessible without removing large heavy sections of
the piping.
3.06 VALVES
A. Provide shut off valves on every line connecting to equipment and main pipe lines and between
horizontal mains and risers.
B. Drawoff cocks shall be provided at all low points of all piping systems to provide complete
draining of the piping. Hose type cocks shall be used and shall be 1-1/2 inch for main chilled
water and condenser water drawoff in the Equipment Room. All other drawoff cocks shall be
10 3/4 inch.
C. Gate valves shall be installed on all supply and return runouts to each piece of heating or
cooling equipment including all equipment having automatic control valves.
D. All valves more than 6 feet above the floor of Equipment Areas shall have chain operators
which shall extend down to within 6 feet of the floor.
IMP 3.07 BALANCING VALVES
A. Install balancing valves in the return from each hot water heating coil, unit heater, radiator,
convector, in each branch return line, in the discharge of each pump and at all points as shown
or required to balance the systems. Balancing valves in the return runouts and in pump
discharges may be used to comply with the requirements of the VALVES Paragraph above. All
balancing valves shall give tight shut off at 150 psi.
3.08 WATER SPECIALTIES
A. Install all parts of the hot water system as shown on the Drawings and as required to provide a
working system. The pressure rating of all hot water system appurtenances shall be 125 psig.
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -169
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
3.04 PIPE WELDING AND QUALIFICATION OF WELDERS
A. Joints between section of steel pipe and between pipe and fittings 2-1/2 inches and larger shall
be welded. Pipe welding shall be accomplished by the Shielded Metal arc Welding process. All
pipe welding shall comply with the provisions of the latest revision of the ASME/ANSI Standard
Code for Pressure Piping, 831.1 - Power Piping, or State or local requirements. Before any
pipe welding is performed, submit to the Architect a copy of the Welding Procedure
Specifications to be used together with proof of its qualification under the Standards established
by the American Welding Society's Committee D-10 on Pipe and Tubing.
B. All pipe welding shall be accomplished by certified welders. Before any welder performs any
pipe welding, submit to the Architect the qualification record of each welder in conformance with
the above provisions showing that the welder was tested under the approved Welding
Procedure Specifications submitted. Standard Procedure Specifications of welders qualified by
the National Certified Pipe Welding Bureau shall be considered as conforming to the
requirements of these Specifications. Be responsible for the quality of welding done and repair
or replace any work not in accordance with these Specifications.
3.05 PIPING AND FITTINGS
A. All piping shall be cut accurately to measurements established in the building and shall be
installed without springing or forcing, except where cold springing is called for on the Drawings
for expansion loops. Connections to existing piping shall be made to prevent misalignment of
present installation. All open ends of piping shall be covered during construction to prevent
entrance of foreign material.
B. All piping shall be run true and straight. Water lines shall be run level or pitch up in direction of
flow. Connections shall be made from the top of the main for all upfeed runouts and from the
bottom of the main for all down feed runouts for all water mains. Swing joints, offsets or loops
shall be provided so that the piping will be free to expand without creating excessive stress on
any part of the system. Provide air vents at all drops in hot water mains to eliminate all air
pockets. Draw off cocks shall be provided at low points of all systems for complete drainage.
C. All piping to be welded shall be cut off clean in pipe machines and beveled and all welding shot w.
shall be removed. Ends of all pipe shall be reamed to full size. Welded pipe shall have Tube
Turns, Walworth, Bonney Forge or approved equal welding fittings of the same weight and
material as the pipe. Where branch connections are made to a main, a welding tee shall be
used when the branch connection is the same size as, or one or two sizes smaller than the
main. When the branch is smaller than two sizes below the main or is of a size that screwed
pipe will be used, the branch connections to the main shall be made with a Bonney Forge
"Weldolet" or"Threadolet"forged fitting or approved equal. No"fish mouths"or couplings shall
be used for branch connections to mains. All reduction in main size shall be made with
eccentric reducers. All flanges shall be welded neck type with pressure ratings of valves,
strainers and equipment to which they are connected.
D. Cast iron screwed fittings shall be used on non-welded pipe (2" and smaller). Bushings shall
not be used in screwed fittings for size reductions. Only eccentric fittings or reducing tees
and/or elbows shall be used to reduce size of pipe. Oil lines of steel pipe shall have malleable
iron fittings. ,,
E. All steam and return piping and fittings to laboratory and sterilizer equipment that is exposed in
the room shall be chrome plated.
F. All boiler trim piping and all boiler control piping shall be IPS copper or brass piping with
threaded bronze fittings.
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -168
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
" Northampton,MA
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.01 CORE DRILLING
A. Core drilling of all holes in concrete floors and walls and in masonry walls for the installation of
pipes required for the work in this Section of the Specification shall be performed under this
Section.
3.02 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Install all hangers, inserts in new concrete construction and supports for the various parts of the
system. Piping shall be hung and/or supported at intervals of not over 10 feet. Ducts shall be
-- hung at intervals of not over 8 feet. Install riser clamps or spring hangers at tops of risers as
required. Piping hung from wall shall have offset rods or brackets to support hangers.
B. Set all sleeves, inserts and pockets for risers in the forms for concrete pouring.
C. All hanger rods shall be hung from inserts in concrete, or from I-beam clamps on steel beams,
or from coach screw threaded rods in wood construction. Clamps shall have retaining clips and
locknut. If inserts have not been provided, hangers shall be through bolted or Cinch or Slug-In
expansion bolts may be used with the permission of the Architect. When pipe or equipment is
Pp hung or supported, no part of any equipment nor any part of the building shall be stressed
beyond its normal allowable working strength.
D. All steel framework and supports installed under this Section shall conform to the latest
revisions of the Standard Specifications for Steel for Bridges and Buildings of the American
Society for Testing Materials. All shop fabricated framework shall have a shop coat of Lead
Oxide Metal Primer, except steel in concrete shall not be painted.
3.03 SLEEVES AND INSERTS
A. All piping passing through masonry or concrete walls or through concrete floors shall be fitted
with sleeves of steel pipe having flanges or wings at mid-point to keep sleeve from slipping
through floor or wall. All pipes sleeves for pipes passing through floors shall extend 1/2 inch
above the finished floor level except all sleeves in Mechanical Equipment Room floors shall
extend 2 inches above the finish floor level. All pipes passing through or in wood partitions shall
have 16 gauge galvanized iron sleeves so placed that pipes shall not contact a wood surface at
any point.
B. Insulation on pipes shall pass through sleeve and the sleeve shall be sized to allow the
insulation to pass through without interruption. Seal the annular opening at all sleeves passing
through floors or fire partitions with Dow Corning Fire Stop System or Carborundum Company
Fyre Putty installed as recommended by the manufacturer. Install 20 gauge galvanized sheet
metal sleeve over the insulation that protrudes 3 inches each side of sleeve to prevent damage
to the insulation.
C. All inserts in new concrete construction shall be capable of developing the full strength of the
rod or bolt used in them and shall be either continuous insert type or malleable iron concrete
inserts for rod sizes 3/8 inch to 7/8 inch. Continuous inserts shall have anchors every 4 inches
and shall extend 1-1/2 inches above the back of the insert and shall hook to provide anchor. All
inserts shall be tied to the reinforcing steel rods with wire and properly sized reinforcing rods
shall be inserted through the special holes, hooks or brackets provided in or on the insert to
securely anchor insert to the structure.
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -167
>
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883 ,
Northampton,MA
TABLE A NOTES:
GENERAL: Isol. = Isolator, Defl. = Deflection,All deflections indicated are in inches.
(1)Units may not be capable of point support. Refer to separate Air Handling or Air Conditioning Unit
specification section, if base is not provided by that section and external isolation is required, provide
Type B-1 base by this section for entire unit.
(2)Static deflection shall be determined on the DEFLECTION GUIDE below. Deflections indicated are
minimums at actual load and shall be selected from manufacturer's nominal 4", 3", 2"and 1"
deflection spring series. RPM is defined as the slowest operating speed of the equipment.
(3)Single stroke compressors may require inertia bases with thickness greater than 12" max. As
described for base B-2. Inertia base mass shall be sufficient to maintain double amplitude of 1/4". *■
(4)For floor mounted fans substitute base TYPE B-2 for class 2 or 3 or any class fan with static pressure
over 5".
(5)Equipment with less than 1/6 HP are excluded from vibration requirements. (Seismic requirements
still apply)
(6)Utility sets with wheel diameters less than 15" need not have deflections greater than 0.75".
(7)Curb mounted fans with curb area less than nine(9) square feet are excluded.
(8)For equipment with multiple motors, HP classification applies to largest single motor.
(9) Bases shall be hot dip galvanized. Height saving brackets are not required.
(10) Exclude B-2 base for skid mounted pump sets.
(11) Larger of Supply Air or Return Air CFM,
.R
DEFLECTION GUIDE
RPM DEFLECTION
Less than 400 3.50"
401 to 600 2.50"
601 to 900 1.50"
Over 900 0.75"
TABLE B
SEISMIC BRACING TABLE
On Center Spacing(Max) Within Each
Equipment Size Change of
Transverse Longitudinal Direction
DUCT All 30 Feet 60 Feet 15 Feet
PIPE (Threaded, Welded, Soldered All 40 Feet 80 Feet 10 Feet
or Grooved
PIPE (No-Hub Bell &Spigot, Cast All 10 Feet 20 Feet 4 Feet
Iron
BOILER BREECHING All 30 Feet 60 Feet 10 Feet
CHIMNEYS&STACKS All 30 Feet 60 Feet 10 Feet
.R
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -166
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
TABLE A EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION ATTACHMENT POINT
VIBRATION ISOLATION&SEISMIC RESTRAINT
r REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT ON GRADE ABOVE GRADE ROOF
EQUIPMENT SIZE(5)(8) MOUNTING ISOL DEFL BASE ISOL DEFL BASE ISOL DEFL BASE
CEILING
F 0.75
-- -- -- --
COMPUTER ROOM UNITS ALL
FLOOR -- -- B-8 D 0.30 B-8 -- -- -TO 200 TONS FLOOR 1.50 1.50
COOLING TOWERS OR G 0.10 B 2.50 9) B 2.50 (9)
OVER 200 ROOF
CURB MOUNTED FANS ALL(7) ROOF B-5
FAN COIL UNITS
Pill FAN POWERED BOXES
CABINET UNIT HEATERS ALL CEILING F .75 -
UNIT VENTILATORS
HEAT PUMPS
P'll TO 15 H.P. D 0.30 B-2 B 0.75 B-2 B 0.75 B-4
BASE 15-30 H.P. FLOOR B 0.75 B-2 B 0.75 B-2 B 0.75 B-4
MOUNTED
(10) OVER 30 H.P. B 0.75 B-2 B 1.50 B-2 B 1.50 B-4
1 FLOOR D 0.30 D 0.30
PUMPS INLINE CEILING F 0.75 - F 0.75
CONDEN- ALL D 0.30 B-9 D 0.30 B-9
SATE FLOOR
BOILER D 0.30 - D 0.30
FEED
TO 3000 CFM - 0.75 B-3
PIP 3001 -10,000 CURB 1.50 B-3
-- -- -- -- --
DX ROOF TOP UNITS CFM MOUNTED
AIR HANDLING UNITS OVER 10,000 _ 2.50 B-3
AIR CONDITIONING UNITS CFM
Pit MAKE UP AIR UNITS TO 3000 CFM
HEAT RECOVERY UNITS - 0.75
(11) (11) POINT B
OVER 3000 SUPPORTED 2.50
9P CFM
(11)
UNIT HEATERS ALL CEILING -- -- E 0.30 -- -- --
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -165
00
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
K. Inspection
1. Upon completion of installation of all vibration isolation and seismic restraint devices,
the owner may elect to contract and outside consultant at the Owner's expense to
review the installation. Any deficiencies in the installation will be corrected
immediately at the Contractor's expense.
TABLE A EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION ATTACHMENT POINT *�
VIBRATION ISOLATION&SEISMIC RESTRAINT
REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT ON GRADE ABOVE GRADE ROOF
EQUIPMENT SIZE(5)(8) MOUNTING ISOL DEFL BASE ISOL DEFL BASE ISOLI DEFL BASE
AIR HANDLING UNITS TO 10 H.P. FLOOR D 0.30 (1) B 0.75 (1) '
AIR CONDITIONING UNITS CEILING -- -- -- F 0.75 (1)
CABINET TYPE FANS FLOOR D 0.30 (1) B (2) (1)
HEAT RECOVERY UNITS OVER 10 H.P.
CEILING (1) F (2) (1)
TO 10 H.P. D 0.30 -- B 0.75 --
AIR OR
TANK -- --
REFRIGERANT OVER 10 H.P. FLOOR B 0.75 B 1.50 B-2
COMPRESSORS TO 10 H.P. D 0.30 B 0.75 B-2(3)
UNITARY
OVER 10 H.P. B 0.75 B 1.50 B-2(3) --
AIR COOLED CONDENSERS ALL ROOF
- -- - 1.50 B-4
&DRY COOLERS w�
FLOOR/ROOF D 0.30 B-1 B B-1 B-3 OR 4
TO 15 H.P.
CEILING F
AXIAL FANS (2) (2)
FLOOR/ROOF B 0.75 B-1 B B-1 B-3 OR 4 u�
OVER 15 H.P.
CEILING F
BOILERS&
OIL OR GAS B 0.75
FLOOR
STEAM GENERATORS (1)
ELECTRIC G 1 0.10
ARRG'T FLOOR/ROOF B 0.75 B-1 B B-1 B B-1 &B-4
CENTRIFUGAL 1 &3 ALL CEILING F (2) (4) (2)
FANS ARRG'T FLOOR/ROOF D 0.30 B (6) B (6) B_4
4,9&10 CEILING F
ABSORB. FLOOR G 0.10 B 0.75 --
CHILLERS& CENTRIF. G 0.10 B 0.75
CONDENSING ALL
UNITS RECIPR. FLOOR/ROOF B 0.75 B 1.50 1.50 B-4
ROTARY G 0.10 B 0.75 0.75 B 4
eiw
aw
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 164
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
(9) All non-isolated floor or wall mounted equipment and tanks shall use
RESTRAINT TYPE III or V.
(10) Where base anchoring of equipment is insufficient to resist seismic
forces, restraint TYPE III shall be located above the unit's center of
gravity to suitably resist"G"forces specified.
(a) Vertically mounted tanks and up-blast tubular centrifugal fans,
tanks, or similar equipment, may require this additional restraint.
(11) A rigid piping or duct system shall not be braced to dissimilar parts of a
building or two dissimilar building systems that may respond in a
different mode during an earthquake. Examples: Wall and roof; solid
concrete wall and a metal deck with lightweight concrete fill, pipes &
duct crossing a building expansion joint.
I. Exclusions for Seismic Restraints on Non-Life Safety Systems:
1. Curb mounted mushroom exhaust and vent fans with curb area less than nine square
feet are excluded unless specifically detailed in the schedules or drawings.
2. Duct
a. Rectangular, Square, and Oval air handling ducts less than six square feet in
cross sectional area.
b. Round air handling duct less than 33 inches in diameter.
C. Individual ducts suspended by hangers positively attached to the structure that
are less than 12 inches in length as measured to top of the duct to the point of
attachment to the structure. Hangers must be attached within 2 inches of the
top of the duct with a minimum of two #10 sheet metal screws. If the 12 inch
limit is exceeded by any hanger in the run, seismic bracing is required for the
run.
3. Piping
a. All piping less than 2-1/2 inch diameter, except in mechanical rooms where
piping less than 1-1/4 inch is exempted.
b. All clevis or single level trapeze supported piping suspended by hangers with
positive attachment to the structure that are less than 12 inches in length as
measured from the top of the pipe to the point of attachment to the structure. If
the 12 inch limit is exceeded by any hanger in the run, seismic bracing is
required for the run.
J. Exclusions for Seismic Restraints on Life Safety Equipment
1. Duct
a. Smoke evacuation duct or fresh air make-up duct that has a cross sectional
area less than 3 square feet.
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -163
No
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
Northampton, MA no
an
(3) All horizontally suspended pipe and duct shall use RESTRAINT TYPE
III. Spacing of seismic bracing shall be as per TABLE B at the end of this
section.
no
(4) For all trapeze supported piping and conduit, the individual pipes and
conduits must be transversely and vertically restrained to the trapeze
support at the designated restraint locations.
ow
(5) For overhead supported equipment, over stress of the building structure
must not occur. Bracing may occur from:
N.
(a) Flanges of structural beams.
(b) Upper truss chords in bar joists.
aw
(c) Cast in place inserts or drilled and shielded inserts in concrete
structures.
(6) Pipe Risers ""
(a) Where pipe pass through cored holes, holes must be packed
with resilient material or fire stop as specified in other sections of 4M
this specification and/or state and local codes. No additional
horizontal seismic bracing is required at these locations.
(b) Non-isolated, constant temperature pipe risers through cored
holes require a riser clamp at each floor level on top of the slab
attached in a seismically approved manner for vertical restraint.
(c) Non-isolated, constant temperature pipe risers in pipe shafts
require structural steel attached in a seismically approved
manner at each floor level and a riser clamp at each floor level
on top of, and fastened to the structural steel. The riser clamp
and structural steel must be capable of withstanding all thermal,
static and seismic loads.
(d) Isolated and/or variable temperature risers through cored holes
require Type K riser resilient Guides and Anchors installed to
meet both thermal expansion and seismic acceleration criteria.
(e) Isolated and/or variable temperature risers in pipe shafts require .
Type K resilient riser guides and anchors installed on structural
steel to meet both thermal expansion and seismic acceleration
criteria. Each floor level must have a riser clamp that does not
interfere with the thermal expansion/contraction of the pipe.
(7) Chimneys, stacks and boiler breeching passing through floors are to be
bolted at each floor level or secured above and below each floor with
riser clamps.
(8) Diffusers shall be attached to lay-in ceilings with earthquake clips or
other approved means of
pp positive attachment to the T-bar ceiling
structure.
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -162
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
ii. Water pipe larger than 2 inch shall be hung with TYPE F
isolators with 0.75 inch deflection.
iii. Horizontal floor or roof mounted water piping 1-1/4 inch to
OR 2 inch and all steam piping larger than 1 inch shall be
supported by TYPE P isolators with a minimum 0.3 inch
deflection.
iv. Water pipe larger than 2 inch shall be supported by TYPE
B isolators with a minimum of 0.75 inch deflection.
(b) Control air piping and vacuum piping from compressor discharge
to receiver shall be suspended by TYPE E isolators with a
minimum 0.25 inch deflection or supported by TYPE P isolators
with a minimum 0.3 inch deflection.
(3) All ductwork four square feet face area and larger located within 50 feet
from air moving equipment shall be hung with TYPE C hangers with a
minimum of 0.75 inch deflection.
(4) Emergency generator exhaust shall be isolated with TYPE C isolators
with a minimum of 0.75 inch deflection (all neoprene components shall
be omitted).
(5) Vertical riser supports for water&steam pipe 4 inch diameter and larger
shall be isolated from the structure using TYPE K guides and anchors.
(6) Install TYPE FC-1 flexible connectors at all connections of pipe to
rotating equipment.
(7) Install FC-2 or 4 type connectors only at locations which exceed
temperature limitations of FC-1 or service requires stainless steel or
bronze construction flex. (Such as gas,fuel oil, steam or Freon)
4. Seismic Restraints
a. Installation
(1) All floor mounted equipment whether isolated or not shall be snubbed,
anchored, bolted or welded to the structure to comply with the required
acceleration. Calculations that determine that isolated equipment
!!!R movement may be less than the operating clearance of snubbers
(restraints) do not preclude the need for snubbers. All equipment must
be positively restrained to the structure.
on (2) All suspended equipment including, but not limited to air handling units,
pumps, fans, tanks, stacks, VAV boxes, unit heaters, fan powered
boxes, cabinet unit heaters, etc. shall be two (2) or four (4) point
independently braced with TYPE III restraints, installed taught for non-
isolated equipment and slack with 1/2 inch cable deflection for isolated
equipment. VAV Boxes (without fans) attached directly to ductwork on
the main supply side shall be considered as ductwork for seismic design
on purposes. Rod bracing shall be installed as per approved submittals
and shop drawings. Equipment connected to ductwork weighing less
than 75 lbs. is excluded.
40
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -161
am
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
2. Equipment Installation
a. Equipment shall be isolated as indicated in TABLE A at the end of this Section.
b. Additional Requirements:
(1) The minimum operating clearance under all bases shall be 1 inch.
2 All bases shall be laced in position and supported( ) p p temporarily by blocks
or shims prior to the installation of the equipment, isolators and
restraints.
(3) Spring isolators shall be installed after all equipment is installed without
changing equipment elevations.
(4) After the entire installation is complete and under full operational load, '"
the spring isolators shall be adjusted so that the load is transferred from
the blocks to the isolators.
(5) Remove all debris from beneath the equipment and verify that there are
no short circuits of the isolation. The equipment shall be free in all
directions.
(6) Install equipment with flexibility in wiring.
(7) Thrust restraints shall be installed on all cabinet fan heads, axial or
centrifugal fans whose thrust exceeds 10%of unit weight. !
(8) Housekeeping pads for equipment in this section must be properly
doweled or bolted, using wedge type expansion bolted to the structure
to meet the acceleration criteria. Anchor equipment or isolators to ..
housekeeping pads, see section 2.152.D: RELATED WORK.
3. Piping and Ductwork Isolation
a. Installation:
(1) General .�
(a) Hanger isolators shall be installed with the hanger box hung as
close as possible to the structure,without touching.
(b) Hanger rods shall not short circuit the hanger box.
(2) All ceiling supported piping in mechanical equipment rooms and within
50 feet from rotating or reciprocating equipment and pressure reducing
stations whether the equipment is isolated or not shall be isolated as
follows:
(a) Water and steam piping.
i. Water piping 1-1/4 inch to 2 inch and all steam piping
larger than 1 inch shall be hung with TYPE E isolators with
0.25 inch deflection.
wa
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -160
on
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
Northampton,MA
e. Connectors shall be installed in piping gaps equal to the length of the
connector under pressure.
f. Control rods are required in unanchored installations where the installation
exceeds the pressure limitation without control rods.
(1) Control rods shall have 1/2 inch thick Neoprene washer bushings large
enough in diameter to take the thrust at 1,000 psi maximum on the
washer area.
g. Connectors bolted to Victaulic type coupling or gate, butterfly or check valves
to have a minimum 5/8 inch flange spacer (by others) installed between the
connector and the coupling flange. Connectors must mate to a flat faced
flange in all instances.
Unisource Type U302
3. TYPE FC-2: Flexible Stainless Steel Hose
Im a. Stainless steel hose and braid rated with 3:1 safety factor.
b. 2 inch diameter and smaller with male nipples, 2-1/2 inch and larger with fixed
flat faced steel flanges.
(1) Lengths shall be: 9 inch for 2-1/2 inch through 4 inch, 11 inch for 5 inch
and 6 inch, 12 inch for 8 inch, 13 inch for 10 inch, 14 inch for 12 inch
through 16 inch.
Unisource Type UPCS.
4. TYPE FC-3: Upbraided Exhaust Hose
a. Low pressure Stainless steel annularly corrugated with flanged ends.
b. Maximum temperature of 1500°F.
Unisource Type EFH
5. TYPE FC-4:Wire Braid Reinforced Flexible Metal Hose
go a. Metal hose and braid rated with a minimum 3:1 safety factor. (Minimum 150
PSI)
b. Copper tube ends.
Unisource Type UPCB
H. Installation
1. General
a. Isolation and seismic restraint systems must be installed in strict accordance
with the manufacturer's written instructions and all submittal data.
b. Vibration isolators shall not cause any change of position of equipment
resulting in stress on equipment connections.
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -159
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA *"
g. TYPE B-7: Steel Rails ..
(1) Steel members of sufficient strength to prevent equipment flexure during
operation. .�
(2) Height saving brackets as required to reduce operating height.
(3) Rails shall be cross braced at support and equipment attachment points w�
to meet seismic criteria.
NAI Type SR
h. TYPE B-8 Computer Room Stand.
(1) Welded steel stand with 1-1/2"+/-adjustable legs.
(2) For down flow units, provide galvanized steel air scoop.
(3) Provide pre-drilled holes for unit attachment to the stand.
NAI Type CRS
i. TYPE B-9: Steel Rails
(1) Steel members of sufficient strength to prevent equipment flexure during
operation.
(2) Height saving brackets as required to reduce operating height. *�
(3) Rails shall be cross braced at support and equipment attachment points
when used in seismic zones.
NAI Type SR
G. Flexible Connectors
1. All connectors shall be installed on the equipment side of shutoff valves; horizontal ..
and parallel to equipment shafts whenever possible. Piping shall be supported and/or
anchored to resist pipe movement beyond the allowable movement of the flexible
connector. Installations must include check valves and/or other design and
installation precautions to reduce the threat to life safety when subjected to the
specified seismic accelerations.
2. TYPE FC-1: Spherical Elastomer connector ap
a. Manufactured of EPDM
b. Sizes 2 inch and larger shall have two spheres reinforced with an external ring so
between spheres. Bolted-on strap type reinforcing is not acceptable. Sizes 16
inch to 24 inch may be single sphere.
C. Threaded one piece bolted flange assemblies with female threaded ends for
sizes 3/4 inch to 1-1/2 inch.
d. Rated at 250 psi up to 170°F, with a uniform drop in allowable pressure to w
170 psi at 250°F for sizes through 14 inch. 16 inch through 24 inch single
sphere minimum ratings are 180 psi at 170°F and 130 psi at 250T.
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -158
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
(6) Waterproofing shall be achieved by use of a continuous flexible seal
attached to the bottom counter flashing. The seal shall be protected from
exposure to the elements by the top flashing. NOTE WELL: Neoprene
weather seals exposed to sunlight are not acceptable. Metal flashing
that must be rigidly attached to the floating and non-floating portions of
the rail which would short circuit the isolation effectiveness are not
acceptable.
(7) All sides and ends shall be factory covered with 'h' thick exterior grade
plywood.
(8) Provide galvanized steel bridging members as required or as shown on
the drawings to support equipment mounted between the rails. Bridging
steel shall be designed for a maximum deflection at mid-span of U360.
(9) Removable lifting lugs.
(10) Provide flexible connections for all piping connected to equipment. See
paragraph 2.152.H.3.a(6)&(7)for requirements.
NAI Type FRR.
e. TYPE B-5: Roof Curb-Non -Isolated
(1) Curbs shall be manufactured from 12 gauge galvanized sheet metal,
reinforced and cross braced as required. All side&end seams between
sheets shall be continuously welded, corner joints to be bolted.
(2) Curbs shall externally insulated at the factory with R-5 per inch foam
insulation.
+�► (3) All sides and ends shall be factory covered with '/2' thick exterior grade
plywood.
(4) Galvanized steel duct supports shall be provided as required. Supports
shall be capable of supporting the ductwork with a maximum deflection
over the width of the curb of L/360.
on (5) Provide 22 gauge galvanized & insulated pans for roof top units that
require pans under condensing sections.
(6) Curbs shall be completely covered with 7 mil shrink wrap for weather
protection during shipment and storage.
(7) Curbs shall be fully assembled at the factory and shipped as one piece.
NAI Type SeisCurb
40
f. TYPE B-6: Flashable non-isolated roof rails
(1) Rails shall be manufactured from 12 gauge galvanized sheet metal,
reinforced and cross braced on ends.
(2) Provide galvanized steel bridging members as required or as shown on
the drawings to support equipment mounted between the rails. Bridging
steel shall be designed for a maximum deflection at mid-span of U360.
NAI Type FRR-0
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -157
am
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
q) Galvanized insulated access doors: Provide two
24"x18" on the supply air end of the curb and
one 24"x24" between the return air opening in
the roof and the Return Air sound attenuator.
Access door shall be easily removable with
hand tools and be weather tight.
r) Provide flexible connections for all P�i in
P 9
connected to RTU. See paragraph 2.152.H.3(6)
&(7)for requirements.
S) Curbs shall be internally factory lined with 2"
insulation. Insulation shall be fiber glass
acoustical duct liner with reinforced coating
system. Acoustical performance shall be as
shown in the following Table. Liner shall not
support microbial growth and shall be EPA
registered and pass ASTM C1071 &ASTM G21
bacterial tests conducted in accordance with
ASTM G22. Liner shall be fastened in strict
accordance with liner manufacturer's
instructions. Submit liner manufacturer's ,.
installation instructions for approval.
Sound Absorption Coefficient at Frequency
Thickness(in.) C Iles per second)�*
125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 NRC
2" 0.23 0.64 1 0.99 1.05 1.00 0.98 0.90
NAI Type"VIBCURB"
d. TYPE B-4: Flashable Roof Rail System-Isolated
(1) Continuous structural support rails that combine equipment support and
isolation mounting into one unitized assembly. Rails shall bear directly
on the roof structure and are flashed and waterproofed into the roofs
membrane waterproofing system. Field fabricated rails with external
isolators shall not be used.
(2) Rails shall incorporate TYPE B springs which are adjustable, removable
and interchangeable after equipment has been installed. .�
(3) The system shall maintain the same installed and operating height with
or without the equipment load and shall be capable of being utilized as a
blocking device.
(4) The combination floating top rail and top flashing shall be fabricated of
two formed and nested layers of 12 gauge galvanized steel. 12 gauge
galvanized end rails shall tie the side rails together providing full
perimeter support.
(5) All spring locations shall have removable waterproof galvanized steel WN
covers to allow for spring adjustment and/or replacement.
go
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 156
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
Northampton,MA
water seal attached to the bottom counter
flashing. The seal shall be protected from
exposure to the elements by the top flashing.
NOTE WELL: Neoprene weather seals exposed
to sunlight are not acceptable. Metal flashing
that must be rigidly attached to the floating and
non-floating portions of the curb which would
short circuit the isolation effectiveness of the
curb are not acceptable.
` g) Wood nailers around the full perimeter of the
ow
curb and around each spring pocket.
h) Overhung condensing units shall be supported
by cross braced structural steel stanchions with
restrained 3"deflection spring isolators.These
stanchions are to be attached directly to the
building structure and provide a consistent
mounting height relative to the RTU. Provide
40 base plates with pre-drilled holes. Field
fabricated (built—up)curbs supporting spring
mountings shall not be used.
i) Galvanized steel duct supports shall be
provided as required. Supports shall be capable
of supporting the ductwork with a maximum
deflection over the width of the curb of 0360.
j) All duct supports shall be provided with flexible
connectors. Connectors shall be constructed of
6" wide coated woven nylon with double lock
gripping finger attachment to metal.
k) Removable lifting lugs.
1) Shall maintain the same installed and operating
height with or without the equipment load and
w shall be capable of being utilized as a blocking
device.
m) Shall be fully assembled at the factory and
shipped as one piece on flat bed trucks.
n) Shall be completely covered with 7 mil shrink
wrap for weather protection during shipment
and storage.
o) 42"operating height.
00
P) Sound barrier package, supported from the top
isolated rail consisting of galvanized steel
members spanning the width of the curb. Sound
barrier package shall be capable of supporting
one layer of 1/2" Durock board furnished and
installed by the General Contractor.
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -155
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
unsupported span. Centrifugal fan bases shall be complete with motor .,
slide rails and drilled for driver and driven units.
(2) Height saving brackets shall be used to maintain 1 inch operating
clearance under base.
NAI Type SB
b. TYPE B-2: Concrete Inertia Base
(1) Steel concrete forms for floating foundations. Bases for pumps shall be
large enough to support elbows and/or suction diffusers. The base
depth shall be a minimum of 1/12 the longest unsupported span, but not
less than 6 inches or greater than 12 inches. Forms shall be
manufactured from structural steel channel sections and include
concrete reinforcement consisting of steel bars welded in place on 8
inch centers both ways in a layer 1-1/2 inches above the bottom. *s+
(2) Isolators may be set into pocket housings which are an integral part of
the base construction or utilize height saving brackets set at the proper
height to maintain 1 inch clearance below the base. Base shall be
furnished with welded-in steel templates with anchor bolt sleeves and
anchors while concrete is being poured.
NAI Type CIB so
C. TYPE B-3: Spring Roof Curb
(1) Spring Roof Curb go
(a) Spring isolation curbs that bear directly on the roof structure and
are flashed and waterproofed into the roofs membrane
waterproofing system. Equipment manufacturer's or field w
fabricated curbs shall not be used.
i. Curbs shall include the following features: am
a) Sides and ends shall be continuous 12 gauge
galvanized sheet metal.All seams shall be
continuously welded, corner joints to be bolted. +
b) Springs pockets shall have all of the features of
TYPE B isolator.
C) The combination floating top rail and top
flashing shall be fabricated of two formed and
nested layers of 12 gauge galvanized steel.
d) All spring locations shall have removable
waterproof galvanized steel covers to allow for
spring adjustment and/or replacement.
e) Shall be externally factory insulated with 2"thick
R-14.3 faced foam insulation.
w
f) Waterproofing and air tightness shall be
achieved by use of a continuous flexible air and
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -154
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
(12) TYPE M: Flashable restrained isolator
(a) Shall have all features of TYPE B isolator.
(b) Shall have waterproof spring covers for adjustment or removal of
springs.
(c) The combination floating top rail and top flashing shall be
OR fabricated of two formed and nested layers of 12 gauge
galvanized steel.
(d) Isolator shall be flashed directly into the waterproofing
membrane.
(e) To be complete with wood nailer, plywood sides, counter
flashing and resilient weather seal.
NAI Type FRSM.
(13) TYPE P: Elastomer Isolator
(a) Double deflection neoprene compression mountings shall have
all metal surfaces neoprene coated.
(b) Non-skid top and bottom surfaces.
(c) Threaded bolting sleeves shall be embedded in the isolator.
(d) Drilled tie-down bolt holes shall be provided in the base plate.
NAI Type FMD.
F. Equipment Bases
1. All curbs, roof rails and isolators are to be bolted or welded to the structure to attain
the higher of; the specified acceleration criteria or a minimum 30 PSF wind load
applied to the largest face area.
2. All non galvanized materials shall be prime paint finished.
3. Review roof top mounted equipment sections of these specifications and contract
drawings for supplementary conditions and/or requirements.
two 4. Operating height for roof mounted supports & curbs shall be as shown on the
drawings.
5. Provide pre-drilled holes for all roof mounted equipment for attachment to the building
structure.
6. Base Types
a. TYPE B-1: Integral Structural Steel Base
(1) Constructed of structural members as required to prevent base flexure
W at equipment startup and misalignment of driver and driven units.
Perimeter members shall be a minimum of 1/10th the longest
op
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -153
so
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA '""
(c) Load distribution plate where attachment to equipment bearing 4M
surface is less than 75%of the pad area.
(d) When bolting is required for seismic compliance, neoprene and
duck washers and bushings shall be provided to prevent short
circuiting of bolt.
NAI Type NP
(8) TYPE H: Pad type elastomer isolator
(a) Laminated canvas duck&neoprene, maximum loading 1000 psi,
minimum 1/2 inch thick. ,,
(b) Load distribution plate where attachment to equipment bearing
surface is less than 75%of the pad area.
..a
(c) When bolting is required for seismic compliance, neoprene and
duck washers and bushings shall be provided to prevent short
circuiting.
NAI Type LNP
(9) TYPE I:Thrust Restraints
w
(a) A spring element same as TYPE A shall be combined with steel
angles, backup plates, threaded rod, washers and nuts to
produce a pair of devices capable of limiting thrust movement of
air moving equipment to 1/4 inch.
(b) Restraints shall be easily converted in the field from a
compression type to tension type.
(c) Unit shall be factory precompressed.
NAI Type TR
(10) TYPE J: Telescoping Riser Guide
(a) Telescoping arrangement of two sizes of steel tubing separated
by a minimum 1/2 inch thickness of TYPE H pad. *^
NAI Type TRG.
(11) TYPE K: Resilient Pipe Anchors and Guides
(a) All directional acoustical pipe anchor, consisting of a telescopic
arrangement of two sizes of steel tubing separated by a
minimum 1/2 inch thickness of TYPE H pad.
(b) Vertical restraints shall be provided by a similar material
arranged to prevent vertical travel in either direction.
w�
(c) Allowable loads on neoprene pad shall not exceed 500 PSI and
the design shall be balanced for equal resistance in any
direction.
NAI Type RAG. "'
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -152
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
(2) TYPE B: Spring Isolator-Restrained
(a) Shall be the same as TYPE A with the following additional
features.
ww
i. Integral restraining bolts with elastomeric cushions
preventing metal-to-metal contact.
ii. Internal spring adjusting nut or bolt with leveling
capability.
iii. Built-in all-directional limit stops with minimum 1/4 inch
clearance under normal operation.
NAI Type RSM
(3) TYPE C: Spring Hanger Isolator
(a) Spring element (same as TYPE A) with steel upper spring
retainer and a lower elastomer retainer cup with an integral
40 bushing to insulate lower support rod from the hanger box.
(b) Steel hanger box shall be capable of 30° misalignment between
the rod attachment to structure and the connection to the
supported equipment. Hanger boxes shall withstand three times
the rated load without failure.
NAI Type SH
(4) TYPE D: Double deflection neoprene isolator
(a) Shall be fabricated to resist the wind or seismic forces and have
40 provisions for bolting or welding to the structure.
NAI Type RNM
(5) TYPE E: Elastomer Hanger Isolator
(a) Molded neoprene element with an integral bushing to insulate
lower support rod from the hanger box.
(b) Steel hanger box shall withstand three times the rated load
without failure.
NAI Type NH
(6) TYPE F: Combination Spring/Elastomer Hanger Isolator
(a) Spring and neoprene elements in a steel hanger box with the
features as described for TYPE C and E isolators.
NAI Type SNH.
(7) TYPE G: Pad type elastomer isolator
(a) Neoprene pad shall have 0.75' minimum thickness, deflection
rating of 0.1 inch under rated load.
(b) 1/16 inch galvanized steel plate between multiple pad layers.
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -151
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
3. Seismic Restraint Types
a. TYPE I: Same as Type B isolator. Cast or aluminum housings (except ductile
iron)are not acceptable.
NAI Type RSM .
b. TYPE II: Where required, each corner or side of equipment base shall
incorporate a seismic restraint snubber having an all directional resilient pad
limit stop. Restraints shall be fabricated of plate, structural members or square
metal tubing. Angle bumpers are not acceptable.
NAI Type SS
C. TYPE III: Restraints for suspended systems. ,m
(1) Vibration isolated systems shall be braced with multiple 7 x 19
galvanized steel cables with approved attachment devices (such as .W
thimbles and wire rope clips)to equipment and structure.
(2) Non-isolated systems shall be braced with structural steel strut or
cable with approved attachment devices to equipment and structure.
(3) Steel angles (by contractor) shall be provided to prevent rod bending
of hung equipment where indicated by the Seismic Restraint
Supplier's submittals. Steel angles shall be attached to the rods with
a minimum of three model "SRC" clamps at each restraint location.
Welding of support rods to angles is not acceptable.
d. TYPE IV: Double deflection neoprene isolators shall be fabricated to resist the
wind and/or seismic forces and have provisions for bolting or welding to the
structure.
NAI Type RNM.
e. TYPE V: Rigid attachment to structure utilizing wedge type expansion anchors
for bolting and steel plates, either cast-in or anchored with wedge type ,w
expansion bolts, for welding. Powder shots are not acceptable. Concrete
anchor bolt spacing shall be in accordance with manufacturer's published
standards.
w+r
f. Vibration Isolator Types
(1) TYPE A: Spring Isolator-Free Standing
(a) Spring shall have a minimum outer diameter to overall height
ratio of 0.8:1 at rated deflection.
(b) Reserve deflection (from published load ratings to solid height)of w�
50%of the rated deflection.
(c) Minimum 1/4 inch thick neoprene acoustical base pad or cup on
underside, unless designated otherwise.
NAI Type SM.
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -150
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
b. Housekeeping pads shall be coordinated with the Seismic Restraint vendor
and sized to provide a minimum edge distance of 13 bolt diameters of
clearance all around the outermost anchor bolt to allow for the use of full
anchor ratings.
2. Supplementary Support Steel
a. Contractor shall supply supplementary support steel and connections for all
'! equipment, piping, ductwork, etc., including roof-mounted equipment, as
required or specified.
b. Where support for equipment requires stands, bases, rails, etc. these
devices shall be designed and fabricated by Seismic Restraint Supplier to
ensure the seismic capability of the entire installation.
3. Attachments
a. Contractor shall provide restraint attachment plates cast into housekeeping
pads, concrete inserts, double sided beam clamps, etc. in accordance with the
requirements of the Seismic Restraint vendor.
E. Materials
1. Devices
a. All vibration isolation and seismic devices described in this section shall be the
we product of a single manufacturer. NAI (Novia Associates, Inc.) is the base
manufacturer of these specifications; products of other manufacturers are
acceptable provided their systems strictly comply with intent, structural design,
performance and deflections of the Base Manufacturer.
2. Seismic Restraints and Vibration Isolation Types
a. All isolation and seismic restraint devices shall be capable of accepting,
without failure, the "G" forces as determined by the seismic certification and
- calculations as described in the "SUBMITTAL DATA REQUIREMENTS"
Section of these Specifications.
b. Corrosion protection for outdoor applications shall be as follows:
(1) Springs cadmium plated,zinc electroplated or powder coat
(2) Hardware cadmium plated
(3) All other metal parts shall be zinc electroplated, hot spray or hot dipped
galvanized.
e
C. All seismic restraint devices
(1) Shall maintain the equipment in a captive position and not short circuit
isolation devices during normal operating conditions.
(2) Shall have provisions for bolting and/or welding to the structure.
d. Welding of springs to isolator housing, base plates, etc., is strictly prohibited.
�e
w
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -149
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA �!
allowed for restraint system as well as braced and unbraced rod lengths at
each allowable installation condition.
g. Calculate thrust for fan heads, axial and centrifugal fans to determine whether
thrust restraints are required. (See Installation paragraph H.)
3. Seismic Certification and Analysis
a. Seismic restraint calculations must be provided for all connections of
equipment to the structure. All performance of products (such as; strut, cable,
anchors, clips, etc.) associated with restraints must be supported with
manufacturer's data sheets or certified calculations.
b. For roof-mounted equipment, both the seismic acceleration and wind loads(30
psf)for the largest horizontal surface area shall be calculated, the highest load
shall be utilized for the design of the restraints and isolators. •�
C. Certification of calculations to support seismic restraint designs must be
stamped by a professional engineer registered in the State were the project
is located. *�*
(1) Analysis must indicate calculated dead loads, derived loads and
materials utilized for connections to equipment and structure.Analysis
must detail anchoring methods, bolt diameter, embedding and/or weld
length.
(2) Seismic restraints as described herein shall be provided in
accordance with the Massachusetts State Building Code 7th Edition
Section 1612.0 or the applicable BOCA code.
d. An in force, $500,000.00 coverage limit Seismic Design Errors and Omissions
insurance certificate must accompany submittals. Manufacturer's product
liability insurance certificates are not acceptable.
4. Manufacturer's Responsibility
a. Manufacturer of vibration and seismic control equipment shall have the
following responsibilities:
(1) Determine vibration isolation and seismic restraint sizes and locations.
(2) Provide equipment vibration isolation and seismic restraints as specified.
(3) Guarantee specified isolation system deflections.
(4) Provide installation instructions, drawings and field supervision to insure
proper installation and performance of systems.
(5) Certify correctness of installation upon completion.
D. Related Work
1. Housekeeping Pads
a. Housekeeping pad design shall be by the project structural engineer. Material
and labor required for attachment and construction shall be by the Concrete
Section Contractor. �•
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -148
.E
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
Northampton,MA
B. OEM Equipment Isolation Packages
1. Internal and/or External Systems
a. Substitution of internally or externally isolated and restrained equipment in lieu
of the isolation and restraints specified in this section is acceptable provided all
conditions of this section are met. The equipment manufacturer shall provide
a letter of guarantee from their Engineering Department stamped and certified
per the section on Seismic Restraints and Analysis stating that the seismic
restraints are in full compliance with these specifications. Letters from field
offices or representatives are unacceptable.
b. All costs for converting to the specified vibration isolation and/or restraints shall
be borne by the equipment manufacturer in the event of non compliance with
the preceding.
C. In the event that the equipment is internally isolated and restrained, the entire
unit assembly must be seismically attached to the structure. This attachment
and certification thereof shall be by this section.
C. Submittal Data Requirements
1. Submittals
a. Catalog cuts or data sheets on specific vibration isolators and restraints to be
utilized detailing compliance with the Specification. Reference "TYPE" as per
Materials paragraph(E)of this Specification.
b. An itemized list of all isolated and non-isolated equipment. Detailed schedules
showing isolator and seismic restraints proposed for each piece of equipment,
referencing material and seismic calculation drawing numbers.
2. Shop Drawings
a. Show base construction for equipment; include dimensions, structural member
sizes and support point locations.
b. When walls and slabs are used as seismic restraint locations, details of
acceptable methods for ducts, conduit and pipe must be included.
C. Indicate isolation devices selected with complete dimensional and deflection
► data before condition is accepted for installation.
d. Provide specific details of seismic restraints and anchors; include number, size
and locations for each piece of equipment.
e. Coordinated or contract drawings shall be marked-up with the specific
locations and types of restraints shown for all pipe and duct. Rod bracing
requirements and assigned load at each restraint location shall be clearly
delineated. Any and all tributary loads shall be considered for proper restraint
sizing.
f. For ceiling suspended equipment, design restraints for a minimum
installation angle of 300 from vertical. Indicate maximum installation angle
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -147
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA �•
C. Piping flexible connectors.
d. Seismic restraints for isolated equipment.
e. Seismic restraints for non-isolated equipment.
f. Certification of seismic restraint designs and installation supervision.
g. Equipment support stands, bases or rails.
5. The term EQUIPMENT will be used throughout this Specification and it includes ALL
non-structural components within the facility and/or serving this facility, such as
equipment located in outbuildings or outside of the main structure on grade within five
(5)feet of the foundation wall. Equipment buried underground are excluded but entry
of services through the foundation walls are included. Equipment referred to below is
a partial list of equipment for reference. (Equipment not listed is still included in this
Specification)
AC Units Compressors Ductwork Tanks(All types)
Air Handling Units Computer Room Units Fans (All types Unit Heaters
Air Separators Condensers Heat Exchangers Unit Ventilators
Boilers Condensing Units Piping Var.Freq.Drives
Cabinet Heaters Cooling Towers Pumps(All types) Water Heaters
Chillers Dry Coolers Rooftop Units
6. Life safety systems defined
a. All systems involved with fire protection including fire dampers and smoke
exhaust systems.
b. All systems involved with and/or connected to emergency power supply
including smoke evacuation.
C. All medical and life support systems.
d. Fresh air relief systems on emergency control sequence including air handlers,
conduit, duct, dampers, etc.
7. Positive Attachment
a. Positive attachment is defined as a support location with a cast-in or wedge
type expansion anchor, a double sided beam clamp loaded perpendicular to a
beam, a welded or through bolted connection to the structure.
8. Transverse Bracing
a. Restraint(s)applied to limit motion perpendicular or angular to the centerline of
the pipe,duct, or conduit.
9. Longitudinal Bracing
a. Restraint(s)applied to limit motion along the centerline of the pipe or duct, etc.
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -146
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
F. The panel shall include a time delay of approximately 30 minutes scheduled between the time a
High Level is detected and the time visual display on unit cover or panel, audible alarm and
closure of alarm contacts. This time delay is introduced in order to avoid nuisance alarms
produced by short temporary conditions. The time delay also allows the ventilation equipment,
previously started at a lower gas level below alarm conditions, a reasonable length of time to
reverse the gas trend.
G. The sensor stations wall or column mounted metal or PVC gasketed enclosure with vandal-
proof cover screws or a lockable clasp and shall not have any parts accessible from outside.
The local reaction time of the remote stations shall be in the order of a few minutes therefore
avoiding unnecessary start-stops. The sensor's response to ambient conditions shall be
interpreted by the detection circuitry according to selected levels. Information is converted for
transmittal to central panel at scanning time. Local ST stations shall have LED's for visual
indication of"Power-On". Removing or disconnecting a local station from the line or loop or
branch, shall not affect the operation of the balance of the system. There shall be no
maintenance required except for periodic simple calibration checks performed by introducing a
known gas mixture into the sensor and verifying or adjusting the electronic response at the
sensor location. Sensor life shall be guaranteed for 5 years for MOS sensors without any
necessity of replacing chemicals or similar materials. Electrochemical cell sensors shall have a
guaranteed life of two years.
H. Remote sensor stations must be mounted vertically according to the arrow on the sensor with
heights according to manufacturer's recommendations. Locations where a parked vehicle may
exhaust directly into the sensor should be avoided.
I. All equipment shall be interconnected at the factory and shipped factory calibrated after a 7-day
operational test. Panel logic shall be factory tested by simulated field conditions as specified. A
report shall be furnished with the equipment.
J. All electrical connections shall be made by the electrical contractor according to diagrams
shown on drawings furnished with the equipment by the manufacturer. Use 4-wire coded cable
from station to station, maintaining color code. All wiring is low voltage(24V).
2.61 VIBRATION ISOLATION AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS
A. General
1. This dual purpose section provides for vibration isolation and seismic control for the
"equipment" as listed below. This Specification is part of the requirements for the
Contract.
!I 2. It is the intent of the Seismic Restraint portion of this Specification to provide restraint
of non-structural building components. Restraint systems are intended to withstand
the stipulated seismic accelerations applied through the component's center of
gravity.
3. Each and every support attachment to the structure of equipment that meets the
requirements of this specification must be positive, including equipment that may
be excluded from auxiliary seismic bracing as noted in Part 3.
4. The work in this Section includes the following:
a. Vibration isolation elements for equipment.
b. Equipment isolation bases.
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -145
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
Northampton,MA
O. Electric Humidifiers(per component)
• High Humidity Alarm
• Low Humidity Alarm
• Humidity Set point
• Space Relative humidity
• Humidifier Status
P. Miscellaneous Points(for LEED Measurement and Verification)
• Incoming water service(meter reading) .�
• Irrigation water connections(per connection)
2.60 CARBON MONOXIDE DETECTION AND CONTROL SYSTEMS
A. Supply and install as shown on drawings An ACME CEL Series Toxalert, MSA Instruments,
Honeywell, Yokogawa Corporation, Macurco Central Detection and Control System, or ACME
consisting of the following:
Control Panels Model CP-CEL and Model ST Remote Sensor stations.
B. The operation of the system shall be based on the RS-485 communication protocol where each
point is sequentially scanned by the central panel and its status is stored in panel memory.
Each panel shall be capable of handling up to 32 individual sensor stations. The ACME CEL
Series Multipoint System shall use only a common 4-wire communication link between the
central panel and the local stations (points). The Central Panel shall have an LED display with
an indicating light for each sensor location. This light shall blink slowly for low-level indication,
blink quickly for high-level indication and be solid ON for alarm level indication. A liquid-crystal
4-line display shall provide PPM levels for each sensor station, shall indicate the gas being
sampled at that location and its alarm status. The panel shall have a removable keypad for
programming purposes and the programming shall be password protected. The system shall
have all of its components, including the controller, RS-485 communication module and relay
outputs boards in a single enclosure. Multiple enclosures requiring inter-wiring are not
acceptable. The equipment shall be CSA and/or ETL certified.
C. The panel shall incorporate the necessary logic circuits to operate the exhaust supply fans and
the motorized dampers for fresh air and/or exhaust according to the specified logic of .•
ventilation. For example, if the equipment operated by the 100 PPM CO contacts does not
reduce the CO level below this value within 30 minutes(3 to 60 minutes adjustable),the Central
Panel shall go on visual and audible alarm and also provide a contact for remote alarm
indication or supervision. Flexibility of the system shall enable the originally specified relay logic
of the ventilation control system to be easily set or field-modified at a future date by a local
building personnel. Provide on panel selector switches with pilot lights for manual actuation
"ON"of all fans controlled by the panel.
D. The panel shall be of solid ventilated metal construction. All electronic components shall be
behind a locked door. There shall be no accessible switches or knobs on front of panel(except
for override if specified). All electrical connections should be made to clearly identified
terminals.
E. Integrity of the system shall be under constant checking. Should a remote station not confirm a
response, a fault condition will be displayed at the central panel with indication of faulty station
location. A common alarm shall be locked in.
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -144
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
Northampton,MA
K. CV Boxes with Reheat
Space Temperature
11 . Supply Air Flow
VAV Box Damper
Hot Water Reheat Control Valve
Space CO2 reading
Baseline CO2 reading(outside air)
L. Rooftop Units(RTU-1, 2&3)
• Supply fan Start/Stop
• Return Fan Start/Stop
• Supply Fan Status
Return Fan Status
• System Static Pressure
• Supply Fan VSD Control
I'M • Return Fan VSD Control
High Discharge Static Alarm
• Low Temperature Alarm
Discharge Air Temperature
• Return Air Temperature
• Smoke Alarm
• Outside, Return, Smoke and Exhaust Air Dampers
High Relative Humidity Alarm
• Supply Fan Airflow Monitoring-Air CFM
Return Fan Airflow Monitoring-Air CFM
• Outside Air Intake Airflow Monitoring-Air CFM
Baseline CO2 reading (outside air)
M. Hot Water System
Ali
Header Supply Water Temperature Set point
• Header Supply Water Temperature
Header Return Water Temperature
Boiler Supply Water Temperature
Boiler Alarm
Boiler General Alarm(through Boiler Control panel)
Boiler Status(through Boiler Control System per Boiler)
N. Pump Indication(Primary and Boiler Pumps)
Run Status
• Start/Stop
Differential Pressure Set point
Differential Pressure Valve Status
Actual System Differential Pressure
VFD Status(not required on Boiler pumps)
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -143
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA *■
E. Miscellaneous Fans(All Types)
• Start/Stop
• Operating Status •
• Exhaust and associated Intake Damper Operation Status
• Suction Static Pressure Alarm
F. Gravity Ventilators
• Operating Status
• Damper Operation
G. W Boxes
• Room Temperature
• Room Temperature Set point
• Entering CFM
• Entering Air Static Pressure •,,,
• Space CO2 reading
• Baseline CO2 reading (outside air)
H. FPT Boxes w/Reheat
• Space Temperature
• Supply Air Flow
• Fan Status
• W Box Damper
• Hot Water Reheat Control Valve
• Space CO2 reading
• Baseline CO2 reading (outside air)
I. FPT Boxes w/Radiation
• Space Temperature
• Supply Air Flow
• Fan Status *�
• W Box Damper
• Radiation Control Valve
• Space CO2 reading
• Baseline CO2 reading (outside air)
J. W Boxes with Reheat
• Space Temperature
• Supply Air Flow
• W Box Damper
• Hot Water Reheat Control Valve
• Space CO2 reading
• Baseline CO2 reading (outside air)
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -142
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
5. SYSTEM LABELING
a. Labels shall be placed on the outside of all IFP's with the appropriate building
and system names. There shall be separate labels for each system. An
additional label for each field controller will contain information describing the
field controller's network address. All such labels are to be plastic with white
lettering on a black background.
b. Relays, current transducers, I/Ps, P/Is, and other input/output devices are to
be labeled with the system and device name. Labels should be printed
adhesive, hand written labels are unacceptable. Labels should be laminated,
immune to smudging and clouding. Labels should be white lettering on a
black background. If the conductors are carrying 48 volts or higher such
labels should are to be white lettering on red background.
C. All wires connecting input/output devices, network devices, network segments
shall be labeled at both ends of the cable with printed adhesive labels as to its
panel/point or segment name/area served. Labels should be printed
adhesive, hand written labels are unacceptable. Labels should be laminated,
immune to smudging and clouding. Labels should be white lettering on a
black background. If the conductors are carrying 48 volts or higher such
labels should are to be white lettering on red background.
2.59 POINTS LIST
A. General: points list (at a minimum, provide points as necessary to accomplish sequences
described above). Provide for the controller with the necessary points for the described
sequences. At a minimum, the following points will be provided (in addition, provide an
additional 50 spare points for the fire alarm system) Spare capacity in the system shall be
" !! available for an additional 10 points for AO,AOP, Al, DO, DI, a total of 50 points minimum:
B. Variable Frequency Drives
• Output Frequency
• Speed
• Motor Current
• Manual Bypass Activated
C. General Alarm System Points
Tel/Data Room High Temp Alarms
• Electric Room High Temp Alarms
Stand-by Generator Alarms
Boiler Room CO Status, Level and Alarm
D. Utility Vent Set Fans(All Types)
• Start/Stop
• Operating Status
Suction Static Pressure Alarm
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -141
WnWW
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
Northampton,MA
1. Suspended Ceilings- If such ceiling is a return or supply plenum the
cable shall be plenum rated.
2. Chases.
3. Existing Cable Trays- Owner must give express permission for use of
cable tray.
4. Junction Boxes- Mounted within five feet of the device. BX or similar
may be used between device and junction box.
i. In such cases where the cable is in chases or ceilings it shall be run neatly,
secured to a smooth surface, free from danger of sharp edges or exposure to
electrical wires or contact with pipes carrying steam or steam condensate.
j. All devices utilizing modular type connectors will utilize factory fabricated
cables or a combination of factory fabricated cables and terminal blocks.
Field fabrication of modular plug terminated cables is not acceptable.
k. Any fittings, junction boxes, or raceway installed outside will be rated for
outside use.
I. All threaded connectors are to be fitted with plastic bushings.
M. All wiring within a building used for communication between field controllers
and workstations shall be in metallic raceway with the following exceptions:
w
1. Owner shall approve the use of existing fiber optic or coaxial cable
risers between floors.
2. In chases and suspended ceilings a metal jacketed cable approved by
owner may be used.
n. Any raceway, trough, or junction box containing input/output wiring and/or ..�
communications cables shall be dedicated for such use, containing no
conductors 40 volts or higher.
o. Conductors carrying 40 volts or higher will not be installed in an IFP unless
required for the equipment therein.
p. IFP doors, all covers for junction boxes, and L-Bs containing input/output
wiring and/or communications cables are to be painted with yellow enamel.
q. All field controller power supplies are to be equipped with a service switch on
the line voltage side of power supply. In addition, if the power supply feeds
more than one field controller each controller shall be equipped with a service
switch.
r. The inputs and outputs on all field controllers with similar input/output
requirements are to be wired identically in the same order. For example, if the
room temperature sensor is wired to channel two on a terminal unit controller
then all room temperature sensors will be wired to channel two on their
terminal unit controllers. When devices are present which will not be present
on all similar controllers they shall be wired to upper channels. On controllers
not employing those devices the upper channels will be spares.
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -140
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
be calibrated by the Contractor following recommended procedures of
manufacturer.
C. Stroking/Adjusting Control Values
1. Provide checkout and adjustment of control values. Check operations
for input signal vs. stroke. Prior to stroking value operator, review
manufacturer's literature for correct procedure.
2. Provide adjustments, set-up and calibration values operators, limit
switches and positioners for proper action and for tight close off.
d. Stroking/Adjusting Control Dampers
1. Provide checkout and adjustment of control dampers. Check
operations for input signal vs. stroke. Prior to stroking damper
operator, review manufacturer's literature for correct procedure.
2. Provide adjustments, set-up and calibration of damper operators, limit
' switches and positioners for proper action and for tight close off.
e. The Contractor shall indicate by letter to the Owner's Representative on
company letterhead that about testing has been successfully completed and
submit documented test results to the Owner's Representative for review.
Control loop checkout shall be documented utilizing loop check sheet
furnished by others.
4. ELECTRICAL
a. Each point shall be labeled with identifying name.
b. Each automation panel shall be labeled with identifying name and it's
electrical circuit source.
OW C. All network hardware and wiring connected to the automation system shall be
labeled as to it's source/destination, and power source, i.e.: Hubs, Switches,
Routers, RS-232-RS-485 converters, Short Haul Modems, Multiplexers,
Signal Amplifiers, etc.
d. All IFP's containing electric or electronic devices shall be properly grounded.
FP e. This contractor shall supply power to all control panels
f. All field controllers shall have a dedicated 20 amp circuit. Where controllers
are physically grouped together more than one controller may be fed from the
same 20 amp circuit. Any exceptions must be approved by Owner's
Engineer.
g. Field controller outputs shall be wired normally closed for all equipment with
status inputs. Outputs shall be wired normally open for all equipment without
status inputs.
h. All field controller input/output device wiring is to be run in metallic raceway
with the following exceptions:
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -139
w
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
w
(d) Design-related hardware and software submittal applicable to
the equipment being tested.
8. All test data and procedure followed during testing shall be logged, "'
and certified copies of the logs shall be provided to the Engineer.
2. General—Site Test Requirements
a. Upon completion of the work covered by this specification and after systems
and devices are set and adjusted, conduct performance tests of various
systems and devices. Tests shall be carried out under supervision of the .•
Owner's Representative prior to acceptance of system and devices and shall
be arranged for purpose of demonstrating satisfactory functional and accurate
operating characteristics as well as adjustment.
b. During this period, setting of field devices and equipment shall be checked
and sufficient measurements taken to ensure that conditions are correct and
that capacities are adequate to meet specified requirements. Provide
competent personnel to conduct tests. Systems will not be considered
complete until tests have been concluded to satisfaction of the Owner's
Representative and other parties having jurisdiction. In event of faults or
defects, tests must be repeated after faults and defects are corrected. Tests
shall be performed in presence of the Owner's Representative. General
operating tests shall be performed under as near design conditions as
possible.
C. Furnish instruments, ladders, lubricants, test equipment and personnel
required for tests. The Owner will provide electrical power and water for tests
scheduled with his advanced approval.
d. Records of test including nameplate data for identification shall be retained in
amount of three copies in the Operating Instructions. Records shall be on
permanent record material to fit 8-1/2"x 11" binders.
e. The following testing procedures represent minimum requirements. Specific
tests shall be made if required by applicable codes/jurisdictional authorities.
3. Prior to commencement of the Site Acceptance Test the Contractor shall perform the
following tests:
a. Test and calibrate signaling circuits of instrumentation and field devices to
ascertain that required digital and accurate analog signals are transmitted,
received, and displayed at System Operator console and make repairs and
recalibrations required to complete test. The Contractor shall be responsible .,.
for test equipment required to perform these tests and calibrations. Test
equipment used for testing and calibration instrumentation and field devices
shall be at least twice as accurate as respective device (e.g.: if
instrumentation is plus/minus 0.5% accurate, test equipment calibrated and
tagged by independent testing laboratory within 12 months. The Contractor
shall submit list of test equipment to be used for testing of instrumentation and
field devices for approval by the Engineer.
b. Instrumentation and field devices shall be field-calibrated for accuracy of
respective device. Instrumentation and field devices furnished by others shall
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -138
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
I. Witness Factory Test(WFT)
1. Implicit in the scheduling of the witnessed factory test (WFT) is the
assumption that the BAS Contractor has determined through prior,
tests and quality assurance programs that the equipment is ready for
shipment.
2. Perform a 100 percent check for all 1/0 from the HMI graphic screens
to the interface terminal blocks and verification of all communications
networks. 1/0 verification includes testing each analog signal at zero,
ten, fifty, ninety, and one hundred percent, and each digital signal at
zero and one hundred percent of range.
(a) Verify the functionality of each controller program and HMI
applications in regards to the information in Specification
Section of the P&ID's and in the 1/0 list.
(b) Test the functionality of each input and output.
(c) Confirm accurate signaling at each analog output, recorder,
and controller at zero, ten, fifty, ninety, one hundred percent
of range.
(d) Test the UPS system to verify ability to carry the system load
during a power failure for a minimum of 15 minutes.
3. The BAS Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing that the
system is ready for the WFT and allow the Engineer to schedule a
test date within 21 days of receipt of the"Ready to Test" letter. At the
time of notification, the BAS Contractor shall submit any revisions to
the detailed test procedure previously approved by the Engineer in
the project system plan.
4. The purpose of the test shall be to verify the functionality,
performance, and stability of the hardware and software. Each output
and input of every controller must operate trouble free. Successful
completion of this test, as determined by the Engineer, shall be the
basis for approval of the system to be shipped to the site.
5. All control panels shall be included in these tests.
6. All deficiencies identified during these tests shall be corrected and
retested prior to completion of the WFT as determined by the
Engineer.
7. The following documentation shall be made available to the Engineer
at the test site both before and during the WFT:
(a) All drawings and specifications, addenda and change orders.
(b) Master copy of the test procedure.
(c) List of the equipment to be tested including make, model and
serial number.
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -137
00
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA ■.
to
C. Wiring (both ends) and its respective terminal block(s) shall be numbered and
tagged identically.
L. Testing w
1. Factory Test
a. The BAS Contractor shall test all equipment at the factory prior to shipment. w
Unless otherwise specified in the individual specification sections, all
equipment provided by the BAS Contractor shall be tested in the factory as a
single fully integrated system.
b. As a minimum, the testing shall include the following
1. Witnessed Factory Tests(WFT).
c Each test shall be in the cause and effect format. The person conducting the
test shall initiate an input (cause) and upon the system's or subsystem's
producing the correct result (effect), the specific test requirement will have
been satisfied.
d. All tests shall be conducted in accordance with prior Engineer-approved ,■r
procedures, forms and checklist. Each specific test to be performed shall be
described and a space provided after it for sign off by the appropriate party
after its satisfactory completion.
e. Copies of these sign off test procedures, forms and checklists will constitute
the required test documentation.
f. The BAS Contractor shall provide all special testing materials and equipment,
including all interconnecting wires and cables between equipment to be
tested, required to conduct test in accordance with these specifications.
Wherever possible, perform tests using actual process variables, equipment,
and data. Where it is not practical to test with real process variables,
equipment and data, provide suitable means of simulation. Define these
simulations techniques in the test procedures.
g. The BAS Contractor shall coordinate all testing with the Engineer.
h. The Engineer's decision shall be final regarding the acceptability and
completeness of all testing.
i. The Engineer's decision shall be final regarding the acceptability and
completeness of all testing. �.
j. No equipment shall be shipped until the Engineer has received all test results
and approved the system is ready for shipment.
w�
k. All panels, consoles and assemblies shall be inspected and tested to verify
that they are in conformance with related submittal, specifications and
drawings. During the tests all digital system hardware shall be operated for
trouble free to verify the system is capable of continuous operation.
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -136
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
6. Room Temperature Element(TE), Transmitter(TT), Moisture Transmitter(MT)
a. Mount approximately 54 inches (to centerline) above finished floor unless
show otherwise.
4W
7. Low Pressure Differential Transmitters(LPDT)
a. The Contractor shall follow LPDT manufacturer's recommendation for proper
set-up and calibration, mounting and process connections, including
transmitter, room static pressure measuring probes and process tubing sizes
and lengths.
b. LPDT's for room pressurization control shall be mounted in the BAS panel
serving the same HVAC Unit with control tubing routed from the sensing point
in the room to the LPDT in the panel.
C. Control tubing from sensing location to flow transmitter shall be Type L hard
drawn copper tubing as specified in herein. Tubing size shall be as
recommended by flow element manufacturer.
o
8. Flow Elements (All Types)
a. FE's shall be installed in straight length of duct without branch take-offs or
obstructions, with minimum diameters before and after FE as recommended
by manufacturer.
9. Calibration Services
a. Provide field calibration services for instrumentation shown and specified.
Calibrate at 20, 50 and 80 percent of instrument calibrated span.
b. Calibration services shall include the following:
1. Documentation from instrument manufacturer detailing factory
calibration procedures.
2. Certified documentations by instrument technical for each instrument,
detailing step-by-step calibration procedure and noting calibration
device used. Instrument technician must sign and date each sheet of
calibration documentation.
3. Tagging/labeling instrumentation with most recent calibration date and
initials of calibrating technician.
10. Control Panels
a. Where control panels are shown to be free standing (i.e.: not located on wall
column or other building structure) they shall be floor-supported with Unistrut
on frame or pipe stand-mounted. Center of control panels shall be approximately
5-0" above finished floor. Control panels shall be mounted so that
instruments within panel are at least inches above finished floor. Provide
additional mounting hardware or concrete housekeeping pads if needed to
t meet this requirement.
b. Energize control panel and check for proper operation.
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -135
M
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
Northampton,MA so
point (adjustable)for 5 minutes, then an alarm shall be sent through the BAS. an
If the temperature drops below 40°F within the space then the system shall be
de-energized and alarm sent through BAS. When the Ventilation system is
initiated the VAV and transfer ducts shall be closed 100%.
24. Smoke Damper Control (Non-RTU)
a. Smoke detectors shall be furnished and installed by the Fire Alarm Contractor in �a
the space. The HVAC contractor shall furnish and install smoke dampers as
indicated on the drawings. Smoke detector shall be hard-wired to the smoke
dampers by the Fire Alarm Contractor, closing the associated smoke dampers
fully whenever smoke is detected. Smoke Dampers shall remain closed until . A
cleared by the Fire Alarm System.
K. Instrumentation Execution
w.
1. General
a. Instrumentation shall be installed following recommended procedures and
instructions of respective manufacturers.
b. Field-mounted instrumentation shall be properly support at process
connection (i.e.: ductwork or piping) or to building structure via use of Unistrut
or pipe stands.
2. Temperature Switch Low(TSL) (Freezestat)
a. TSL element shall be arranged in serpentine manner across foil for maximum
protection. Provide sufficient quantity of TSL's to meet minimum requirement
of one foot of element length for every one foot of coil area.
b. TSL shall be installed with sensing coil sloped and supported as
recommended by manufacturer.
3. Duct Temperature Indicators (TI)-Thermometers
a. Shall be mounted so scale is visible from apparatus room floor level.
4 Automatic Control Dampers
a. Operators' linkages shall be totally accessible. Adjust operator/positioner for
required control range and tight close off.
b. Cooperate and work in concert with sheet metal subcontractor on adjustment
or repair necessary for proper operation of automatic control dampers that .�
may be required after installation as a result of bending, distortion or damage
during or following installation.
5. Automation Control Values ,o
a. Instruct installing Contractor on proper installation techniques/procedures.
b. Adjust operator/positioner for required control range and tight close off. OR
00
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -134
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
(2) Unoccupied
The primary air system is interlocked with terminal unit controls to
w� provide air through the reheat coil and to the space when heating is
required. During the unoccupied mode, the reheat coil will be
controlled using the unoccupied space temperature set point. The
controller may be reset to the Occupied Mode for a predetermined
time period upon a signal from the control system or manually at the
room sensor.
rw 20. Ductless Split Systems
a. The Packaged Split DX Air Conditioning Unit shall be enabled/disabled
through manufacturer's controls and wall mounted thermostat. The BAS
system shall monitor the space temperature utilizing a wall mounted
temperature sensor.
b. When the unit is energized, a wall mounted space thermostat shall cycle the
w fan on, then the DX cooling shall maintain a space temperature setpoint of
78°F (adjustable), an alarm shall sent if the temperature rises above 95°F
(adjustable). The outdoor air cooled condensing unit shall be interlocked with
the air conditioning unit.
21. Electric Humidifiers
a. The Packaged Electric Humidifiers shall be enabled/disabled through
manufacturer's controls and wall mounted humidistat. The BAS system shall
monitor the space humidity utilizing ATC provided wall mounted humidity
sensors as indicated on the drawings.
40
b. The humidifiers will be controlled to maintain the space relative humidity set point
of 30% RH.
22. Miscellaneous Utility Vent-Set Exhaust Systems
a. Each miscellaneous exhaust fan is a constant volume system operating 24
hours, 7 days a week, to be controlled as follows:
1. The BAS system shall start and monitor the fan status through current
switches. Each system consists of a single fan running continuously.
! ' Upon failure of the fan, then the fan shall de-energize and alarm shall
be sent through the BAS.
2. A high static suction pressure sensor shall stop the fan when -3.0
W.C. (adjustable) is exceeded as described above. An alarm shall be
sent if the fan deviates from the normal mode of operation.
23. Tower 186 Ventilation System
a. A wall-mounted or override button thermostat shall open the transfer (make-
up air) and exhaust air damper, after the dampers have been proven open,
then turn on the exhaust fans whenever space temperature rises above 85°F
(adjustable). The exhaust and intake air dampers shall be proven open 100%
prior to activating the fans. If the space temperature rises above 90°F set
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -133
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
15. Electric Unit Heater
a. Electric unit heaters shall be controlled by a space or unit mounted
thermostat, as indicated on the drawings, which shall start the fan and
energize the heating element on a call for heating. When the thermostat set
point is satisfied, the unit shall cycle off.
16. Elevator Machine Room Ventilation System (Gravity)
a. Elevator Hoistway Ventilation or Machine Room Ventilation at the Roof Level
shall utilizes an automatic control damper (ACD). The ATC shall coordinate
and provide a damper for the Elevator ventilating assembly. The damper �w
(normally open) shall be in the closed position during normal operation, but to
allow smoke to relieve during an emergency condition. Upon activation of any
fire alarm initiating device of the building fire alarm system the damper shall
open or upon a loss of power the damper goes to normally open position per
Massachusetts State Building Code (780 CMR 1304.3.7 and 524 CMR
17.03(4)). On the restoration of normal power service, the damper shall go to
the closed position. The damper shall be enabled/disabled through BAS
system with interlock through the fire alarm system. The ACD shall also open
100% upon a call for cooling or heating from the temperature sensor
controlling the respective Elevator Machine Rooms VV box. The temperature
sensors setpoint shall be 80°F (adjustable). The opposite shall occur once the
temperature sensor is satisfied.
17. Electrical Room and Plumbing Room Ventilation Systems
a. A wall-mounted temperature sensor shall turn on the exhaust fan whenever
space temperature rises above 85°F (adjustable). The exhaust air and make-
up air dampers shall be proved open through an end-switch with a time delay
of 15 seconds (adj.) prior to starting the fan. The opposite shall occur once set
point is satisfied. If the space temperature rises above 95°F set point
(adjustable)for 5 minutes, then an alarm shall be sent through the BAS.
18. Clean Room 118, Staging 116 and Opt./Calb./Cont. 106
a. CV boxes serving spaces these spaces provide ventilation only to Mechanical
Process Heating and Cooling Systems provided by the owner. They shall not
require space temperature sensors, unless otherwise indicated on the
drawings. The boxes shall remain open 100%, unless a loss of building air
occurs or loss of Normal Operation of the Process Mechanical Systems, then
the boxes shall close 100%.
19. Hot Water Reheat Coil
a. The reheat coil will be controlled by an application specific DDC controller
utilizing electric actuation. The space served by the coil shall be controlled in
occupied and unoccupied modes as follows:
(1) Occupied
The controller monitors the room temperature sensor and modulates
the heating valve to maintain the space temperature at setpoint.
HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -132
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
mode shall override only the unoccupied mode. After the
timer has expired the unoccupied mode would resume.
(c) Unoccupied Mode: In the unoccupied mode, the BAS shall
receive a signal from the wall mounted temperature sensor to
maintain a space temperature a setpoint of 80° F. The
opposite shall occur once the space setpoint is satisfied.
(2) Carbon Monoxide Mode:
(a) When a CO (25ppm) warning level is detected, the controller
shall delay the activation of ventilation fan system for 90
seconds (adj.). A warning indicator (one per sensor) shall
light on the face of the controller indicating what sensor(s)
has detected a warning concentration. The level of CO shall
be reported back through the BAS system as a low level
alarm.
(b) If the CO warning concentration persists for longer than the
programmed delay period, then the GV and REF shall be
energized, overriding other modes.
(c) The GV and REF shall run for programmable fifteen (15)
minutes (adj.) after the CO concentration has dropped below
(25ppm).
(d) Should a CO sensor detect an alarm level concentration
(50ppm or greater) a sensor alarm indicator (one per sensor)
shall light on the face of the controller and the audible alarm
shall sound and the system shall send a high level alarm
signal through the BAS. The system shall remain in alarm
until the gas concentration falls below the alarm level.
(e) Should the Temperature drop below 40°F within the space
then REF/GV discontinue operation until room temperature
rises up to 65°F where it may re-energize if CO levels are still
present.
13. Hot Water Unit Heater
a. Hot water unit heater shall be controlled by a space or unit mounted
thermostats, as indicated on the drawings, which shall open the control valve
on a call for heat. A strap on aquastat shall start the fan whenever the water
temperature is over 110°F (adjustable). When the thermostat set point is
satisfied the valve shall be positioned closed.
14. Gas-fired Unit Heater
r a. Gas-fired unit heater shall be controlled by a space or unit mounted
thermostats, as indicated on the drawings, which shall intiate the Gas Heater
controls on a call for heat. When the thermostat set point is satisfied the
heater shall de-energize.
e�!
e
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -131
M
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA we
below 530 ppm for 2 minutes (adj.), then the VV shall 4
resume operation through the temperature control
sequence.
(2) Unoccupied
(a) During the unoccupied mode, the terminal unit will be
controlled using the night set point. The controller may
be reset to the Occupied Mode for a predetermined time
period upon a signal from the control system or manually
at the room sensor.
w.
10. Fan Coil Units Systems (Split DX FCUs&ACCUs)
a. Fan Coil Unit shall be enabled/disabled through BAS system. The unit shall be
controlled by the manufacturer's provided controls and thermostat.
b. The Packaged Split DX Air Conditioning Unit shall be enabled/disabled
through manufacturer's controls and wall mounted thermostat. The BAS
system shall monitor the space temperature utilizing a wall mounted
temperature sensor.
C. When the unit is energized, a wall mounted space thermostat shall cycle the wn
fan on, then the DX cooling shall maintain a space temperature setpoint of
78°F (adjustable), an alarm shall sent if the temperature rises above 95°F
(adjustable). The outdoor air cooled condensing unit shall be interlocked with
the air conditioning unit as well as the thermostat.
11. Stand-by Generator System
a. ATC contractor shall provide and install interlocking wiring for an alarm to be
sent through the BAS upon activation of any or all Generators.
12. Boiler Room Ventilation System (REF&GV)
a. The BAS shall control the Boiler Room Ventilation System via input from the
Space Temperature Sensor, CO Sensor or Override Timer. Boiler Room
Ventilation System involves REF and GV to maintain space. All set points `"
shall be adjustable. REF shall have a current sensor to confirm the fan is
RUNNING and shall indicate an alarm upon failure.
(1) REF& GV Operation:
(a) When REF is indexed to start through the DDC system, the
exhaust air and make-up air dampers shall be proved open a.
through an end-switch, a time delay of 15 seconds (adj.) prior
to starting the REF, the fan shall start in the specific mode as
described below and the unit shall come under control.
(b) Occupied Mode: The occupied mode may be commanded
through the DDC system or a signal from the wall mounted
Override Button set at 1 hour to initiate the REF/GV ,ft
sequence. During the occupied mode, the BAS shall also
receive a signal from the wall mounted temperature sensor to
maintain a space temperature setpoint of 75° F. The occupied
am
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -130
„M
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
Northampton,MA
(1) Occupied
(a) The VAV terminal unit shall be controlled at a user
r defined maximum and minimum supply air volume
settings. The controller monitors the room temperature
sensor and air velocity sensor and modulates the supply
air damper to maintain the room temperature at setpoint.
(2) Unoccupied
(a) During the unoccupied mode the terminal shall be closed
100%. The controller may be reset to the Occupied
Mode for a predetermined time period upon a signal
from the control system or manually at the room sensor.
(b) Optimal start sequence shall minimize the time of
morning warm-up (cool-down) by calculating the warm-
up times as a function of indoor and outdoor air
' conditions. Provide self-calibrating software that"learns"
how fast the building reacts in different temperature
conditions. During morning warm-up (cooldown), the
boxes shall be open 100%.
9. Variable Air Volume with HW Reheat
(a) The variable volume (VAV) terminal unit will be controlled independent of
system pressure fluctuations by an application specific DDC controller utilizing
electric actuation. All variable and constant volume boxes shall not utilize a
recalibration cycle of 100% closed to 100% open, then back to normal
operation. The space served by the VAV terminal unit shall be controlled in
occupied and unoccupied modes as follows:
(1) Occupied
(a) The VAV terminal unit is controlled within user defined
maximum and minimum supply air volume settings. The
controller monitors the room temperature sensor and air
velocity sensor and modulates the supply air damper in
sequence with the reheat valve to maintain the room
temperature at setpoint. The supply air volume
modulates from minimum to maximum with the
modulation of the HW reheat control valve is at the
minimum position.
(b) In rooms indicated to have CO2 sensing, i.e. Conference
rooms, Training Rooms & etc. The CO2 sensor shall be
interlocked with the VV box controller. When the room
CO2 sensor reading exceeds 530 ppm above the
outside air baseline for 2 minutes (adj.), over-ride the
primary air damper minimum position and modulate the
damper open to deliver more primary air to the space.
The room temperature sensor shall modulate the hot
water coil control valve to maintain space temperature
during CO2 over-ride. When the CO2 reading drops
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 230000 -129
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
(1) Occupied
(a) Series flow fan powered boxes shall be controlled by a
wall mounted temperature sensor. During the occupied
period, the fan shall run continuously and the space
sensor shall modulate the primary air damper open on a
rise in space temperature. As space temperature falls,
the primary air damper shall modulate towards its
minimum position, on a further decrease in space
temperature, the space thermostat shall modulate the
hot water control valve to maintain temperature.
(b) In rooms indicated to have CO2 sensing, i.e. Conference
rooms, Training Rooms & etc. The CO2 sensor shall be
interlocked with the FPT box controller. When the room
CO2 sensor reading exceeds 530 ppm above the
outside air baseline for 2 minutes (adj.), over-ride the
primary air damper minimum position and modulate the
damper open to deliver more primary air to the space.
The room temperature sensor shall modulate the hot
water coil control valve to maintain space temperature
during CO2 over-ride. When the CO2 reading drops .a
below 530 ppm for 2 minutes (adj.), then the FPT shall
resume operation through the temperature control
sequence.
(2) Unoccupied
(a) During the unoccupied mode, the terminal unit will be
controlled using the night set point. The controller may .�
be reset to the Occupied Mode for a predetermined time
period upon a signal from the control system or manually
at the room sensor.
(b) FPT Box DDC controls shall be provided by the ATC
Contractor for installation at the factory.
(c) Optimal start sequence shall minimize the time of
morning warm-up (cool-down) by calculating the warm-
up times as a function of indoor and outdoor air
conditions. Provide self-calibrating software that"learns"
how fast the building reacts in different temperature
conditions. During morning warm-up (cooldown), the
boxes shall be open 100%.
8. Variable Air Volume
a. The variable volume (VAV) terminal unit shall be controlled independent of "®
system pressure fluctuations by an application specific BAS controller utilizing
electric actuation. All VAVs shall be hard wired for morning warm-up. The
space served by the VAV terminal unit shall be controlled in occupied and
unoccupied modes as follows: so
op
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 128
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
Northampton,MA
volume remains at minimum when HW radiation is
modulated. On a call for cooling, the controller monitors
the room temperature sensor and air velocity sensor and
modulates the radiation valve closed, followed by the
-r FPT box damper to maintain the room temperature at
set point.
(c) In rooms indicated to have CO2 sensing, i.e.
!' Conference rooms, Training Rooms & etc. The CO2
sensor shall be interlocked with the FPT box controller.
When the room CO2 sensor reading exceeds 530 ppm
above the outside air baseline for 2 minutes (adj.), over-
ride the primary air damper minimum position and
3 modulate the damper open to deliver more primary air to
the space. The room temperature sensor shall modulate
the hot water coil control valve to maintain space
temperature during CO2 over-ride. When the CO2
reading drops below 530 ppm for 2 minutes (adj.), then
the FPT shall resume operation through the temperature
control sequence. The Radiation HW control valve shall
continue to modulate to maintain space temperature set
point during winter occupied operation.
(2) Unoccupied
(a) During the unoccupied mode, the terminal unit will be
P0 controlled using the night set point. The controller may
be reset to the Occupied Mode for a predetermined time
period upon a signal from the control system or manually
at the room sensor.
(b) FPT Box DDC controls shall be provided by the ATC
Contractor for installation at the factory.
(c) Optimal start sequence shall minimize the time of
morning warm-up (cool-down) by calculating the warm-
up times as a function of indoor and outdoor air
conditions. Provide self-calibrating software that"learns"
how fast the building reacts in different temperature
conditions. During morning warm-up (cooldown), the
boxes shall be open 100%.
on
7. Series Fan Powered with Hot Water Coil (No Radiation)
a. The variable volume (FPT) terminal unit will be controlled independent of
system pressure fluctuations by an application specific DDC controller utilizing
electric actuation. All FPTs shall be hard wired for morning warm-up. The
space served by the FPT terminal unit shall be controlled in occupied and
r unoccupied modes as follows:
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -127
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
outside air baseline for 2 minutes (adj.), over-ride the
primary air damper minimum position and modulate the
damper open to deliver more primary air to the space.
The room temperature sensor shall modulate the hot
water coil control valve to maintain space temperature
during CO2 over-ride. When the CO2 reading drops
below 530 ppm for 2 minutes (adj.), then the CV shall
resume operation through the temperature control
sequence.
(2) Unoccupied
(a) During the unoccupied mode the terminal shall be closed
100%. The controller may be reset to the Occupied
Mode for a predetermined time period upon a signal
from the control system or manually at the room sensor.
(b) Optimal start sequence shall minimize the time of
morning warm-up (cool-down) by calculating the warm-
up times as a function of indoor and outdoor air
conditions. Provide self-calibrating software that"learns"
how fast the building reacts in different temperature
conditions. During morning warm-up (cooldown), the es
boxes shall be open 100%.
6. Series Fan Powered and Radiation (No Hot Water Coil)
a. The variable volume (FPT) terminal unit will be controlled independent of
system pressure fluctuations by an application specific DDC controller utilizing
electric actuation. All FPTs shall be hard wired for morning warm-up. The
space served by the FPT terminal unit shall be controlled in occupied and
unoccupied modes as follows:
(1) Occupied
(a) Summer: Series flow fan powered boxes and
associated Radiation shall be controlled by a wall mounted
temperature sensor. During the occupied period, the fan
shall run continuously and the space sensor shall
modulate the primary air damper open on a rise in space
temperature. As space temperature falls, the primary air
damper shall modulate towards its minimum position. The
Radiation control valve shall be closed 100%.
(b) Winter: Series flow fan powered boxes and associated .�
Radiation shall be controlled by a wall mounted
temperature sensor. During the occupied period, the fan
shall run continuously and the space sensor shall
modulate the primary air damper and Radiation HW
control valve. As space temperature falls, the primary air
damper shall modulate towards its minimum position, the
controller monitors the room temperature sensor and air
velocity sensor and modulates the primary air damper in
sequence with the radiation valve to maintain the room
temperature at set point in a call for heating. Primary air
HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -126
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
Northampton,MA
f. The lead hot water pumps shall run continuously. The DDC system will utilize
current switches to confirm all pumps are in the desired state (i.e. ON or OFF)
and generate an alarm if status deviates from DDC start/stop control. Should
+Iw the secondary lead pump go into alarm, the respective lag hot water pump
shall be started and the lead pump shall be locked out until manually reset the
operator.
g. The boilers shall be enabled as required to satisfy the hot water supply set
point temperature, the boilers shall be enabled in order per lead/lag schedule.
h. Should both pumps, primary and stand-by fail, then the hot water system shall
be shut down and a critical building alarm shall be generated.
i. The primary pump set shall be modulated via VFD to maintain a differential
set point 2/3 down the hot water piping system. Provide a differential bypass
valve in each system set to maintain water flow when the VFD's have reached
15 hertz of operation. The running amperage utilized for status monitoring on
the pumps shall be based on the minimum speed, (i.e.: 15Hz).
j. A common daisy chain alarm from the boilers shall also monitor supply and
return water temperatures. The hot water system shall continue to operate
upon alarm until 130°F (adj.) supply water temperature is sensed, which shall
then deactivate the hot water system.
4. Toilet Exhaust Fans
a. Toilet exhaust fans shall be controlled from the building BAS such that during
the occupied period the fan shall run continuously, during the unoccupied
period, the fan shall be off. The exhaust air damper shall be proven open
100% prior to activating the fan.
5. Constant Volume with Hot Water Reheat
a. The constant volume (CV) terminal unit shall be controlled independent of
system pressure fluctuations by an application specific BAS controller utilizing
electric actuation. The space served by the CV terminal unit shall be
controlled in occupied and unoccupied modes as follows:
(1) Occupied
(a) The constant volume (CV) terminal unit supplies a
constant volume of supply air to the space. The
controller monitors the air velocity sensor and modulates
the supply air damper to maintain the supply air volume
at the occupied setpoint.
(b) The controller monitors the room temperature sensor
and modulates the reheat valve to maintain the space
temperature at setpoint.
(c) In rooms indicated to have CO2 sensing, i.e. Conference
rooms, Training Rooms & etc. The CO2 sensor shall be
interlocked with the CV box controller. When the room
CO2 sensor reading exceeds 530 ppm above the
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -125
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
ap. During the unoccupied mode of operation, the unit shall be OFF and the unit .w
dampers and smoke dampers shall be closed.
aq. Provide one outside air temperature and humidity sensor for the building.
Each rooftop unit panel controller shall receive a signal from both the building
temperature and humidity sensors and its associated return air temperature
and humidity sensors.
ar. Differential pressure switches, piped across the discharge and suction side of aw
each fan and wired to the fan starter, shall stop the fan whenever the
differential pressure setpoint is exceeded.
w
as. A high static discharge sensor shall stop unit, go into unoccupied mode and
send an alarm when 3.0 W.C. (adjustable) is exceeded.
at. A low temperature detector in the supply air stream utilizing an adjustable time
delay will de-energize the supply and return fans should temperatures below
38 degrees F be sensed. All dampers shall position to their fail-safe position.
au. The BAS shall monitor rooftop unit status, set points, control functions and
alarm's points completely through rooftop manufacturer's control panel.
Coordination of the rooftop unit manufacturer's controls and the ATC
Contractor's controls need to be resolved prior to release of both
manufacturer's submittals and purchase. Interlock wiring by ATC Contractor.
3. Hot Water System
a. The hot water system consists of three hot water boilers, each with a
circulation pump. One set of primary pumps (one is a stand-by). The system
shall provide START/STOP and status through the DDC. The system shall
operate as follows:
b. The boilers shall be operated in a lead / lag arrangement through the Boiler
Master Control Panel. The ATC system shall be responsible for lead / lag
arrangement of primary hot water pumps. When a boiler is disabled, a 30
second (Adj.)time delay on the circulating pump shall occur.
C. The lead primary hot water pumps shall run continuously. The DDC system
will utilize current switches to confirm all pumps are in the desired state (i.e.
on or off) and generate an alarm if status deviates from DDC start/stop
control. Should the primary lead pump go into alarm, the respective lag hot
water pump shall be started and the lead pump shall be locked out until
manually reset by the operator.
d. The lead boiler, after flow has been proved, shall be enabled to operate under
it's own operating and safety controls. Should the lead boiler go into alarm,
the next lag boiler shall be started and the lead boiler shall be locked out until
manually reset by the operator.
e. A hot water supply temperature shall be at a set point in an inversely proportional
manner to the outside air temperature. Specifically, the scale shall be adjustable
but shall initially be 100°F to 190°F. For outside air temperature of 60°F to 0°F
respectively. The building's hot water supply temperature will be maintained at
set point by firing and modulating each boiler in sequence through the Boiler
Master Control Panel.
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -124
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
ah. A high supply air temperature function, internal to the controller, will be provided
to send a fault if the supply air temperature is above setpoint (1000 ± 2°F, adj.)
for longer than the time setpoint(240 sec. adj.).
ai. The control program has the ability to limit the number of compressors enabled,
based on a load limit setpoint and is signaled by a Building Management System
(BMS)to engage the load limiting feature.
aj. During normal operation, the watchdog blinks once every 3 seconds. If the unit
is in an alarm or fault condition, the signal will be continuous. An optional time
delay relay can be provided, if the interfacing system cannot handle a cycling
contact point. Alarms,faults and warnings are indicated on the keypad display.
-Alarms shutdown the total unit operation and require manual reset.
-Faults shutdown the effected item operation only and require manual reset.
- Warnings are indicators of current problems that may end in alarms or faults
and are reset automatically, by the controller,when the condition is alleviated.
ak. The following items are some typical alarms:
-Low supply air temperature.
-Static pressure sensor failure.
-Supply fan volume position sensor fail.
-Supply fan motor failure(high static or motor overload).
al. The following items are some typical faults:
-Supply air temperature sensor failure.
-Outside air temperature sensor failure.
-Return air temperature sensor failure.
-Compressor safeties.
am. The following items are some typical warnings:
-Hi duct pressure.
-Return air temperature sensor failure.
-Outside air temperature sensor failure.
-Fan volume position sensor failure.
-Room#1 air temperature sensor failure.
-Supply air temperature sensor failure.
! ! -System On/Off(system switch/emergency shutdown).
an. Smoke detectors shall be furnished by the Fire Alarm and installed by the HVAC
Contractor in the supply ductwork and return air ductwork. Smoke detector shall
be hard-wired to the fan starter and shall stop the supply and return fans, close
the associated supply and return air smoke dampers, close the outside air
damper, return air damper and exhaust air damper fully whenever smoke is
detected. Smoke detectors will be wired to the fire alarm panel by the ATC
Contractor.
ao. Differential pressure switches, piped across the discharge and suction side of
each fan and wired to the fan starter, shall stop the fan whenever the differential
pressure setpoint shall be closed.
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -123
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
w�
Northampton,MA
outside air damper position is either set at 100% open or at the minimum e
position setpoint when a high limit condition is sensed.
Y. The high limit condition is based on comparing the return and the outside air dry
bulb temperature. This is called"comparative'sensible high limit operation. The
high limit control setpoint, indicating"comparative"can be changed to a specified
temperature value (50°F to 90°F) for fixed outside air high limit setpoint
operation. The program will use this value for comparison, instead of the return
air temperature.
Z. Mechanical cooling can be enabled if the outside air temperature is above the
lock out temperature (50°F ± 1°F) and the supply fan volume position is above *
the minimum mechanical cooling setpoint(18%±2%for VFDs).
aa. The outside air damper will remain at minimum position when the unit is
mechanically cooling. When mechanical cooling is not engaged, the outside air .w
damper will modulate between minimum position and 100% open based on the
discharge air reset control.
ab. With these conditions passed and the controller indicating "stage up" (see supply
air temp control section), the first cooling stage is started. If the controller should
indicate "stay', before the first cooling stage is operating, the timing sequence
will be reset.
ac. Once the unit is in mechanical cooling, the controller reads the enabled
compressor's safeties. Each compressor will have a compressor motor
protector, oil pressure/temperature switch (semi-hermetic only) and high head
pressure switch. Once in mechanical cooling, the controller can enable/disable a
compressor or un-loader every 1 to 10 minutes, depending on the supply
temperatures relationship to the desired setpoint.
ad. A compressor is started by opening the liquid line solenoid valve. The pressure
in the suction line will then increase to a point above the suction pressure switch
setpoint (35 psig). The compressor is then started with a contact closure from
the suction pressure switch. Pump-down will be invoked any time the liquid line
solenoid valve is closed and the suction pressure is above the 35 psig setpoint.
ae. The evaporative condenser water pump is started anytime a compressor is
enabled. The condenser water level is maintained by a separate solid-state
controller. The condenser fans are staged by the DDC system in response to
the condenser water temperature. The condenser water temperature setpoint is
72°F with a dead-band of±3°F minimum. An anti-cycle timer is provided to limit
condenser fan cycling.
af. The controller has a battery backed, 365 day-a-year clock, with automatic
adjustment for leap years and standard/daylight savings time. The control
program includes a 7 day-a-week, and 1-day holiday time schedule. The time
schedule has two start and stop times for each day, including holidays. Up to 16
holidays can be programmed by indicating the month, day and duration of the
holiday(1-99 days). The schedule is set through a provided 32 character backlit
super-twist LCD with 12 membrane keys.
ag. A low supply air temperature function, internal to the controller, will be provided
to stop the unit operation if the supply air temperature is below setpoint (400±
2°F,adj.)for longer than the time setpoint(240 sec.Adj.).
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -122
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
q. To change from mechanical cooling to economizer, all cooling stages must be
off, and the accumulator must reach the mechanical cooling transition setpoint
(360, adj.).
r. The following reset options are all available through the keypad. The operator
may choose one or none to provide reset for the supply air temperature control
setpoint.
S. Reset during economizer, heating and mechanical cooling operation can come
from space/room air temperature, or return air temperature. This is achieved by
setting the:
- maximum reset setpoint (the max. amount of reset possible, if set to 0°F reset
is disabled).
-target temperature setpoint.
-target temperature dead-band.
MP If the target air temperature is outside of the dead-band,the reset amount will be
incremented or decrement to bring the target temperature closer to setpoint and
within the dead-band.
t. When the return air CO2 sensor reading at the rooftop unit exceeds 530 ppm
above the outside air base line, over-ride the minimum outside air damper
setpoint and increase the damper opening 2% at ten minute intervals until the
return air CO2 reading falls back below 530 PPM above the outside air baseline.
If, the DAT (53.5° F) rises above or drops below setpoint by 2.0° F for 1 minute
(adj.), then the CO2 over-ride shall be discontinued and the original sequence of
control shall over-ride. Install the return air CO2 sensors at each RTU and
provide an additional CO2 sensor for the outdoor air baseline.
U. Discharge air reset sequence shall function when mechanical cooling is not
needed to meet space temperature. Static pressure setpoint shall be fixed at
approximately 0.5 inches. Continually poll all boxes; if all dampers are partially
closed, reset discharge air temperature upward by 0.5°F. If any damper is fully
open and its respective space is unable to hold cooling setpoint, decrease
discharge air temperature by 1.0° F. Repeat this sequence with 15 minute
delays. Range of reset is approximately 50° F to 60° F. Economizer control will
set position of mixed air dampers.
V. When mechanical cooling is needed to meet space temperature, enthalpy
control shall compare the total enthalpy heat in return air and outside air, and
use the air with the least enthalpy.
W. One outside air humidity sensor for the building by ATC and at least one return
air humidity sensor and one return air temperature sensor to serve both air
handling units(total of 2 return air sensors), for complete enthalpy control.
X. Before airflow has been proven or during MWU, the outside air damper will
remain closed. During heating operation, the outside air damper will be at the
minimum control position setpoint. In economizer operation, the outside air and
return air dampers shall operate to maintain the supply control setpoint. If
economizer operation cannot provide enough cooling to satisfy the SaCtlSpt,
mechanical cooling will be energized. Once mechanical cooling is operating,the
4M
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -121
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
.w
h. Static pressure reset sequence shall function when mechanical cooling is in
operation. Discharge air setpoint shall be fixed at 50° F. Continually poll all
boxes; if all dampers are partially closed, reset static pressure setpoint
downward by 0.1 inches. If any damper is fully open and its respective space is
unable to hold cooling setpoint, increase static pressure by 0.2 inches. Repeat
this sequence with 15 minutes delays. Range of reset is approximately 0.2
inches to 1.0 inch.
i. The return fan is started anytime the supply fan is enabled. The return fan
volume directly tracks the supply fan volume. A specified offset may be entered
to maintain a slight positive building pressure, or an optional building static ,,■
pressure transducer and program may be added to control building static
pressure.
j. Once airflow has been proven, the unit will enter morning warm-up (MWU)
status. In morning MWU, the supply fan will operate on static pressure control
and return air will be circulated; until the return air temperature reaches the MWU
setpoint (65°F, adj.). An optional heat source may be modulated/staged to 40
maintain the supply air MWU setpoint(80°F±10, adj.) and/or an optional contact
for MWU will be closed. The contact closure is designed to signal the VAV
boxes when the unit is in MWU. When MWU is complete, economizer operation
is enabled.
k. During economizer, heating or mechanical cooling, a temperature control
program indicates either stage down ±, down, down-, stay, up-, up and up + by
using the supply air temperature control setpoint (SacTLsPt) and comparing it
with a supply air temperature sensor. A "+" indicates the controller has decided
to stage more quickly than usual and a"" indicates the controller will stage more
slowly. The SaCtlSpt is determined by the Supply Air Specified setpoint (55°F,
adj.)and any applicable reset:
SaCtlSpt=SaSpecSpt+Reset
I. The program increments an accumulator based on these values. If the
accumulator reaches the required transition setpoint, unit operation is changed.
M. To change from economizer to heating status, the staging signal must indicate
stage down-, down, or down +, and the accumulator must reach the economizer
transition setpoint(480 adj.). During mechanical cooling,the accumulator stages
up and down the cooling stages
n. To change from economizer to heating status, the staging signal must indicate
stage down-, down, or down+, and the accumulator must reach the economizer
transition setpoint(480 adj.). During mechanical cooling, the accumulator stages
up and down the cooling stages.
o. To transition from heating to economizer, the staging signal must indicate stage
up-, up or up +, and the accumulator must have reached the heating transition A
setpoint(360 adj.).
P. For transition from economizer to mechanical cooling, stage up-, up or up+must ..
be indicated, and the accumulator must reach the economizer transition setpoint
(480 adj.). During mechanical cooling, the accumulator stages up and down the
cooling stages.
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 120
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
J. Sequence of Operation
1. Outdoor Air Thermostat and Humidistat
a. Provide an outdoor air thermostat and humidistat on the north side of the
building to provide the control functions related to outdoor air temperature and
relative humidity for the Automatic Temperature Control System. If locating
! ' the thermostat on the north side of the building is not practical, the thermostat
may be located in a convenient shaded location (i.e., outdoor air intake
upstream of damper).
2. Rooftop Units (RTU-1, 2&3)
a. Unit shall be enabled/disabled through unit manufacturers BacNet by the BAS
for operation of the unoccupied/occupied cycles at which the rooftop
manufacturer's microprocessor controller shall control unit operation.
b. Upon a signal to start, the unit shall provide morning warm-up. During warm-
up, the outside air and exhaust air dampers shall be closed and the return air
damper and smoke damper shall be open. When the fans are signaled to
start an adjustable time delay shall allow VAV, CV and FPT units to open
when morning warm-up is initiated. The gas furnace shall operate according
to unit manufacturer's standard sequence. A return air sensor shall signal the
unit to end the warm-up cycle when 72°F (adjustable) temperature is sensed.
At the end of the warm-up cycle, the return, exhaust air and outdoor air
dampers shall modulate to their preset positions.
C. When the unit is in an unoccupied state, the supply fan is off, return fan is off,
the outside air damper is closed, exhaust air damper is closed, return air damper
is open and the fan volume control device(s)are held to a minimum.
d. When the unit is switched into an occupied state, by the BAS, by a specific
keypad command, or by the remote start/stop contact closure, the fan volume
control device(s)are held to a minimum and the supply fan/return fan is started.
e. After the supply has been energized, a delay timer is incremented. After the
timer has reached its setpoint (60 sec.), the static pressure control program is
enabled and the fan motor enabled signal(s) are checked. If the fan motor
enabled signal is not given, either the static pressure switch(s), or fan
overload(s) have not enabled the fan contactors. The air volume will be
controlled using a common supply duct static pressure transducer for each
system, static pressure probe(field mounted 2/3 down the longest duct trunk and
the static pressure control program. The duct static pressure setpoint is 1.5"w.c.
±0.1"w.c.,field adjustable.
f. If the duct static pressure rises above the proof of air flow pressure setpoint(0.2"
w.c.) plus the dead-band (±0.1"w.c.) and the supply fan volume control position
is above its proof of air flow position setpoint (20%for VFD) plus the dead-band
(±0.2%)proof of air flow is indicated.
g. If the duct static pressure is 1"w.c. greater than the control setpoint, the unit will
indicate a high duct pressure warning and quickly reduce the supply fan volume
position. The unit has also been provided with a mechanical high unit static
pressure switch(3.5"w.c., adj.),to protect the unit from over pressurization.
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -119
A
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
.w
V. The transmitter shall be capable of communicating with the host
controls using one of the following interface options:
(1) Linear analog output signal: Field selectable, fuse
protected and isolated, 0-10VDC and 4-20mA(4-wire).
(2) RS-485: Field selectable BACnet-MS/TP, ModBus-RTU .�
and Johnson Controls N2 Bus.
(3) 10 Base-T Ethernet: Field selectable BACnet Ethernet,
BACnet-IP, ModBus-TCP and TCP/IP. .,.
(4) LonWorks Free Topology.
g. The measuring device shall be UL listed as an entire assembly.
h. The manufacturer's authorized representative shall review and approve
placement and operating airflow rates for each measurement location .w
indicated on the plans. A written report shall be submitted to the consulting
mechanical engineer if any measurement locations do not meet the
manufacturer's placement requirements.
i. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions at the locations
indicated on the plans. A written report shall be submitted to the consulting
mechanical engineer if any discrepancies are found.
j. Duct and plenum devices shall not be adjusted without approval from the
consulting mechanical engineer.
25. Infrared Carbon Dioxide Monitor
w�
a. Provide a Vulcain model 90DM3ASM (4-20 mA or 0-10 V dc). Sensor will have
power requirements of 17-27 V ac. (or 24-38 V dc) Unit will perform the detection
of carbon dioxide within the area the gas will be present. Carbon dioxide will be
detected by the sensing of the absorption rate of a specific bandwidth of light.
The sensor will have resolution levels of 1 ppm with a minimum range of 0-2000
ppm. Temperature and relative humidity variations will have no effect on the
unit's accuracy. Infrared sensor life will be no less than 10 years. Units will
require very low levels of maintenance, including only one calibration per year.
Sensor will be capable of sending either a 4-20 mA or a 0-10 V do analog signal �.
back to the BMS or DDC. The analog output will be field selectable through the
adjustments of jumpers. For local activation of fans or louvers (or other
equipment)and optional SPDT relay(rated at no less than 1//8 HP, 5A, 24 V dc)
will be activated at preset points. Unit must also be capable of providing a local .,
display (backlit 4 digit LED) of the concentration of CO2. Sensor will be capable
of operating within relative humidity ranges of 5-90% and temperature ranges of
32 degrees F to 100 degrees F (0 degrees C to 40 degrees C). Unit must have
size of no more than 5.25 in (H) x 3.5 in. (W) x 2.0 in. (D). Unit must mount
directly onto drywall or other non vibrating surfaces. Unit must be manufactured
within an ISO 9002 production environment.
m
aw
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -118
.R
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
Northampton,MA
mounted transmitter. All terminal plug interconnecting pins shall
be gold plated.
vii. Each sensor assembly shall not require matching to the
transmitter in the field.
viii. A single manufacturer shall provide both the airflow/temperature
measuring probe(s) and transmitter at a given measurement
location.
e. Duct and Plenum Sensor Probe Assemblies:
i. Sensor housings shall be mounted in an extruded, gold anodized,
6063 aluminum tube probe assembly.
ii. The number of sensor housings provided for each location shall
be as follows:
Area (sa.ft.) Sensors
OF <=1 2
>1 to<4 4
4 to<8 6
on 8 to<12 8
12 to<16 12
16 to 32 16
>= 32 32
iii. Probe assembly mounting brackets shall be constructed of 304
stainless steel. Probe assemblies shall be mounted using one of
the following options:
(1) Insertion mounted through the side or top of the duct.
(2) Internally mounted inside the duct or plenum.
(3) Standoff mounted inside the plenum.
iv. The operating airflow range shall be 0 to 5,000 FPM unless
otherwise indicated on the plans.
f. Transmitters
i. The transmitter shall have an LCD display capable of displaying
airflow and temperature. Airflow shall be field configurable to be
displayed as a velocity or a volumetric rate.
ii. The transmitter shall be capable of displaying the individual airflow
and temperature readings of each sensor on the LCD display.
OR iii. The transmitter shall operate on 24 VAC. The transmitter shall
not require an isolated power source.
' * iv. The operating temperature range for the transmitter shall be -20°
F to 120° F. The transmitter shall be protected from weather and
water.
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -117
— all I
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883 .■
Northampton,MA
X. Provide a manufacturer's parts warranty for 36 months from the
date of unit shipment.
xi. All handling and storage procedures shall be per manufacturer's
recommendations.
xii. Airflow measuring devices shall be kept clean and dry, protected
from weather and construction traffic.
xiii. Duct and plenum mounted airflow measurement devices.
b. Provide airflow/temperature measurement devices where indicated on the plans.
Fan inlet measurement devices shall not be substituted for duct or plenum
measurement devices indicated on the plans.
C. Each measurement device shall consist of one or more sensor probe assemblies
and a single microprocessor-based transmitter. Each sensor probe assembly
will contain one or more independently wired sensor housings. Multiple sensor
housings shall be equally weighted and averaged by the transmitter prior to
output. Pitot tubes and arrays are not acceptable. Vortex shedding flow meters
are not acceptable.
d. All Sensor Probe Assemblies:
i. Each sensor housing shall be manufactured of a U.L. listed
engineered thermoplastic.
ii. Each sensor housing shall utilize two hermetically sealed, bead-
in-glass thermistor probes to determine airflow rate and ambient
temperature. Devices that use "chip" type thermistors are
unacceptable. Devices that do not have 2 thermistors in each
sensor housing are not acceptable.
iii. sensor housing shall be calibrated at a minimum of 16 airflow w.
rates and have an accuracy of +/-2% of reading over the entire
operating airflow range. Each sensor assembly shall be calibrated
to standards that are traceable to the National Institute of
Standards and Technology (NIST). Devices whose accuracy is the
combined accuracy of the transmitter and sensor probes must
demonstrate that the total accuracy meets the performance
requirements of this specification throughout the measurement
range.
iv. The operating temperature range for the sensor probe assembly
shall be -20° F to 160° F. The operating humidity range for the
sensor probe assembly shall be 0-99%RH(non-condensing).
V. Each temperature sensor shall be calibrated at a minimum of 3
temperatures and have an accuracy of+/-0.15° F over the entire
operating temperature range. Each temperature sensor shall be
calibrated to standards that are traceable to the National Institute
of Standards and Technology(NIST).
vi. Each sensor probe assembly shall have an integral, U.L. listed,
plenum rated cable and terminal plug for connection to a remotely
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -116
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
b. All electrical devices within the panels shall be factory prewired to a numbered
terminal strip. All wiring within the panel shall be in accordance with NEMA and
UL Standards and shall meet all Local Codes.
23. General Requirements
a. All duct static and temperature sensors shall be located in accessible locations
for calibration, service, commissioning and re-commissioning. All sensor
locations shall be accurately shown on coordination and as-built drawings for
reference and coordination purposes.
b. All pressure and temperature sensors shall have a test port installed next to it for
calibration, future service, commissioning and re-commissioning.
C. ATC contractor shall submit calibration certificates and field calibrating all
sensors after installation but prior to turn-over.
24. Ebtron Airflow/Temperature Measurement Device
a. EBTRON, Inc. Model GTx116-P(basis of design)
i. Alternatives requesting acceptance as "equals" less than 60 days
prior to bid date or products submitted in non-conformance with
the requirements of this specification will not be considered.
ii. For any product to be considered for substitution a written section-
by-section detailed exceptions/compliance document shall be
submitted to the Engineer before any approval will be considered.
iii. UL 873—Temperature and Airflow Indicating Equipment
iv. Submit product data sheets for airflow measuring devices
indicating minimum placement requirements, sensor density,
sensor distribution, and installed accuracy to the host control
system.
V. Devices whose accuracy is the combined accuracy of the
transmitter and sensor probes must demonstrate that the total
accuracy meets the performance requirements of this specification
throughout the measurement range.
vi. Submit a schedule of airflow measuring devices indicating
compliance with specified accuracy at minimum and maximum
airflow rates.
vii. Submit installation, operation and maintenance documentation.
viii. Manufacturer: The company manufacturing the products specified
in this section shall have a minimum of ten years experience
producing products of this type.
ix. The contractor shall be responsible for any and all costs
associated with any and all changes resulting from the use of a
supplier other than the listed acceptable manufacturer.
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -115
no
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA No
(1) Sensors shall include appropriate transmitters which provide analog .o
electronic signal to the controller.
(2) Sensors shall be manufactured by Hy-Cal, Vaisala, Pacific Sensors,
General Eastern or approved equal. on
18. E to P Transducers
a. Electronic to pneumatic transducers shall be provided as required to accept SDC go
inputs and transduce to pressures required for controlled device full range
application. Operating linearity and hysteresis shall not deviate beyond + 1% of
span and 0.75%of span respectively over the full range. .s
19. P to E Transducers
a. Pressure to electronic transducers shall accept inputs over the full range of ""
sensing device output and shall have an output acceptable for full range reading
of sensing by the SDC. Operating linearity and hysteresis shall not deviate
beyond + 1.5% of span and 0.75% of span respectively over the full operating .�
range.
20. Low Temperature Safety Thermostats
a. Electric low temperature warning thermostats shall have low point sensitive
elements installed to cover the entire duct area, with minimum coverage of(20
linear feet minimum). These thermostats shall be tow-positions manual reset
type. Where coils are two-banks, two(2) sets of freezestats wired in series, shall
be provided and hard-wired to shut down the supply and return fans and show
an alarm on the FMCS,as applicable and specified herein.
21. Smoke Detection System
a. Smoke detectors shall be furnished and wired to building alarm system by the
Electrical Subcontractor Smoke detector shall be installed in air handling unit by
the HVAC Subcontractor. All hard-wired interlocking for shutdown of fans shall
be by the ATC Subcontractor with an alarm sent to the CHS.
b. Except as otherwise specifically indicated, all supply, return and/or
exhaust/ventilation systems 2000 CFM and larger that are interlocked with the
air handling unit shall automatically stop when the in-duct smoke detectors are
activated. This alarm condition shall be annunciated at the SDC.
C. Systems over 15,000 CFM shall be equipped with smoke dampers (supply and
return) which shall close and shut down the fans on a detection of smoke. The
dampers shall be equipped with end switches to prevent the fans from starting
until the dampers are opened.
22. Miscellaneous Control Panels
a. Details of each panel shall be submitted for review prior to fabrication. Locations
of each panel shall be convenient for adjustment and service. Provide engraved
nameplate beneath each panel mounted control device clearly describing the
function of said device and range of operation. All manual switches shall be
flush mounted on the hinged door.
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 114
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
Northampton,MA
warranty, starting from the date of installation. Actuators shall be as
manufactured by Belimo or equal.
(11) All actuators shall be of the direct analog fully proportioning variety. Two
+fir position or floating type control actuators may be used if specifically
mentioned in the sequence of operation.
14. Temperature Sensors
a. Temperature sensors shall be RTD's or thermistors. Sensor "Time Constant"
shall not exceed 5 seconds for a 60% response to a step change in temperature.
Sensor repeatability shall be 0.1 OF or better.
(1) Space temperature sensor element shall be accurate within±0.5°F over
a range from 40°F to 100°F. Sensors shall be housed in manufacturer
standard miniature type thermostat cover and shall include override
button as specifically called for in the sequence of operation.
(2) Outside air temperature sensor elements for each of the controllers shall
be accurate within+0.5°F over a range from-20°F to 120°F.
(3) Duct sensors shall be of the average type. Element length shall be
adequate for sensing the average cross-sectional temperature over the
full duct cross-section.
15. Pressure Switches
a. The pressure switches shall meet but not be limited to the following
specifications:
(1) Sensing elements shall be capsule, diaphragm, bellows, bourdon tube,
or solid state capable of withstanding 150%of rated pressure(sensor).
(2) Switch actuation shall be adjustable for the specified applications.
(3) Switch shall have snap-action Form C contact rated for the application.
(4) Gauge pressure switches shall have an adjustable differential setting.
(5) Accuracy of+1%of the switch setting.
16. Flow Switches
a. The flow switches shall meet but not be limited to the following specifications:
(1) Repetitive accuracy of+1%of operating range.
(2) Switch actuation adjustable over the operating flow range.
17. Relative Humidity Sensors
a. Relative humidity sensors shall be accurate to within±3% relative humidity over
+! a range of 30 to 80%.
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -113
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
go
(4) Actuators/operators provided for inlet guide vanes, etc., shall be
compatible with equipment served.
(5) For exact requirements and quantities of actuators/operators, see plans
and coordinate with the HVAC Subcontractor.
b. Valve and Damper Actuators(Electronic) .�
(1) Electronic direct-coupled actuation shall be provided unless the damper
shafts are not accessible, in which case the proper linkage shall be
provided.
(2) The actuator shall be direct-coupled over the shaft, enabling it to be
mounted directly to the damper shaft without the need for connecting
linkage. The fastening clamp assembly shall be of a"V" bolt design with
associated "V" shaped toothed cradle attaching to the shaft for
maximum strength and eliminating slippage. Spring-return actuators
shall have a"V"clamp assembly of sufficient size to be directly mounted
to an integral jackshaft of up to 1.05 inches when the damper is
constructed in this manner. Single bolt or set screw type fasteners are
not acceptable.
(3) The actuator shall have electronic overload or digital rotation sensing
circuitry to prevent damage to the actuator throughout the entire rotation
of the actuator. Mechanical end switches or magnetic clutches to
deactivate the actuator at the end of rotation are not acceptable.
(4) For power-failure/safety applications, an internal mechanical spring
return mechanism shall be built into the actuator housing. Non-
mechanical forms of fail-safe operation such as capacitor discharge or
remote battery backup are not acceptable.
(5) All spring return actuators shall have an external manual gear release to ..
allow manual positioning of the damper when the actuator is not
powered. Spring return actuators with more than 60 in-LB torque
capacity shall have a manual crank for this purpose.
(6) All non-spring return actuators shall have external manual gear release
to allow manual positioning of the damper when the actuator is not
powered. Spring return actuators with more than 60 in-LB torque
capacity shall have a manual crank for this purpose.
(7) All actuators shall be sized by ATC Subcontractor and guaranteed to
provide the proper torque and stroke characteristics for applied duty.
(8) Actuators shall be UL Standard 873 listed and Canadian Standards
Association Class 4813 02 certified as meeting correct safety
requirements and recognized industry standards. *+�
(9) All models of actuators shall have been in production and installed in the
field for two years or more.
(10) Actuators shall be designed for a minimum of 60,000 full stroke cycles at
the actuator's rated torque and shall have a 2-year manufacturer's
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -112
±
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
W Northampton,MA
(3) All blank-off plates and conversions necessary to install smaller than
duct sized dampers are the responsibility of the HVAC Subcontractor.
iw (4) Dampers shall be installed by the HVAC Subcontractor under the
supervision of the ATC Subcontractor
(5) Operators shall be provided for all types of dampers whether they are
provided by equipment manufacturer or by the ATC Subcontractor.
b. Dampers
(1) All damper frames shall be constructed of 13 gauge galvanized sheet
metal and shall have flanges for duct mounting. Dampers installed in
stainless steel ductwork shall be constructed of type 316 L stainless
steel(frame and blades).
(2) Damper blades shall not exceed six(6) inches in width. All blades shall
be of corrugated type construction, fabricated form two (2) sheets of 22
galvanized sheet steel, spot welded together. Blades shall be suitable
for high velocity performance. Damper leakage shall be 2%or less.
(3) All damper bearings shall be made of nylon. Bushings that turn in the
bearings shall be oil impregnated sintered metal.
(4) Replaceable butyl rubber seals shall be provided with the damper.
Seals shall be installed along the top, bottom and sides of the frame and
along each blade edge. Seals shall provide a tight closing. Leakage
and flow characteristics charts must be submitted to the Engineer prior
to installation.
13. Actuator and/or Operators
a. General
(1) All damper actuators/operators shall be fully proportioning, unless
otherwise specified. They shall be quiet in operation and shall have
ample power to overcome friction of damper linkage and air pressure
acting on louvers to position dampers accurately and smoothly. The
damper actuator/operator mounting arrangement shall be outside the
airstream wherever possible, with a maximum of 16 square feet per
actuator/operator.
(2) The actuator/operators shall be capable of operating at varying rates of
speed to correspond to the dictates of the controllers and variable load
requirements. The actuators/operators shall be capable of operating in
sequence when required by; the sequence of operation. The
actuators/operators shall have external adjustable stops to limit the
stroke in either direction. The actuator/operator linkage arrangement
shall be such as to permit normally open or normally closed positions of
the dampers as required.
(3) All dampers sequenced with valves or dampers shall be furnished with
pilot positioners or panel mounted positive positioning relays to ensure
proper control sequencing.
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -111
ws
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
-Minimum/Maximum CFM set point changes(terminal box controllers)
(3) Each Terminal Equipment Control Unit shall be accessible for purposes
of control and monitoring from central or remote operator's terminals as
specified herein. �.
(4) An operator's terminal connected to any SDC on the network, directly or
via modem, will have access to all Terminal Equipment Controllers
connected to all LAN communication busses. Under no circumstances
will it be necessary to identify the specific bus, field panel or Terminal
Equipment Control Unit prior to obtaining values or status for any point
in the building system. 1e
11. Automatic Control Valves
a. Control valves shall be two-way or three-way pattern as shown constructed for
tight shut off and shall operate satisfactorily against system pressures and
differentials. Two-way control valves shall exhibit equal percentage
characteristics. Non-equal percentage valve characteristics shall not be ..
acceptable. Valves with size up to and including 3" shall be "screwed"with 250
psi ANSI pressure body rating; 4" and larger valves shall be 'flanged'
configuration. Proportional control valves shall be sized for a mean pressure
drop of 3.0 psig at rated flow(except as noted). Two-position control valves shall r�er
be line size and shall be provided with a 250 psi static pressure body rating.
b. All valves shall be capable of operating in sequence when required by the
sequence operation.All control valves shall be sized by the control manufacturer
and shall be guaranteed to meet heating and cooling loads as specified.
C. All control valves shall be suitable for the pressure conditions and shall close
against the differential pressure involved. Valve operator connection type
(screwed or flanged)shall conform to pipe schedule in this specification.
d. All valves sequenced with other valves, or control devices, shall be equipped 40
with pilot positioners or panel mounted positive positioning relays to ensure
proper control sequencing.
e. Hot water control valves shall be normally open, single seated type with equal
percentage flow characteristics. The valve discs shall be composition type with
bronze trim.
12. Damper and Damper Operators
a. General
(1) Automatic dampers, furnished by ATC Subcontractor, shall be single or
multiple blade as required and/or shown on the drawings.
(2) Numerous reference are made in this specification as to the
responsibility of furnishing and installation of dampers and operators.
The ATC Subcontractor shall closely coordinate his work with the HVAC
Subcontractor to assure that all dampers are provided as required, and
he shall examine all pertinent specification sections to assure that all .A
dampers required but not provided by equipment manufacturers are
provided under this Contract.
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -110
�w
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
comfort and energy savings. Controllers that incorporate proportional and
integral(PI)control algorithms only shall not be acceptable.
g. Provide each terminal equipment controller with sufficient memory to
+aw accommodate point databases, operating programs, local alarming and local
trending. All databases and programs shall be stored in non-volatile EEPROM,
EPROM and PROM, or minimum of 100-hour battery backup shall be provided.
The controllers shall be able to return to full normal operation without user
40 intervention after a power failure of unlimited duration. Provide uninterruptable
power supplies (UPS's) of sufficient capacities for all terminal controllers that do
not meet this power fail protection requirement. Operating programs shall be
W field selectable for specific applications. In addition, specific applications may be
modified to meet the user's exact control strategy requirements, allowing for
additional system flexibility. Controllers that require factory changes of all
applications are not acceptable.
4
h. Each controller shall have connection provisions for a portable laptop or similar
operator's terminal. This connection shall be possible at both the controller and
the matching room temperature sensor as previously specified. The terminal
may be used for readout of system variables, override control, adjustment of
control parameters, air balancing, servicing and troubleshooting. The terminal
shall provide the user with the following functionality as a minimum:
sw
-Display system status(heating,cooling,etc.)
-Display all point values and set points
-Set and change all set points
-Set and change heating/cooling dead bands
-Set and change PID loop gains
-Set and change system mode(occupied/unoccupied)
-Set and change system mode times
-Override all set points
-Override all digital and analog outputs
-Command all digital and analog outputs
-Select application mode
-Assign controller address
(1) All communication and displays via the portable terminal shall be in full
English language with accompanying English and IS (International
System of Units) engineering units for all displayed data. Selection
between English and IS units shall be accomplished via a single
keystroke on the portable terminal.
(2) In addition to local interface capabilities, all functionality as specified
above may be performed both from the central operator's work station
and from any multi-purpose controller on the communications network
via the same portable terminal. From a terminal connected to any SDC,
it shall be possible to issue global commands to groups of controllers.
Provide the following global commanding capabilities for all controllers
W as a minimum:
-Start/Stop of all terminal unit fans
-On/Off of stages of electric reheat
+ -Heating/Cooling set point changes
-Modulate Open/Closed all valves in percent open notation
-Modulate Open/Closed all dampers in percent open notation
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -109
go
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA to
w
-Accuracy: +/-0.5°F
-Operating Range: 35°-115°F
-Set point Adjustment Range: 55°-95°F
-Set point Modes: at
Independent Heating, Cooling
Night Setback-Heating
Night Setback-Cooling
-Calibration Adjustments: None required 40
-Installation: Up to 100 ft. from controller
e. Each room temperature sensor shall include a terminal jack integral to the so
sensor assembly. The terminal jack shall be used to connect a portable laptop
or similar operator's terminal to control and monitor all hardware and software
points associated with the controller. In lieu of an internal jack, provide a
separate terminal jack mounted on a stainless steel wall plate adjacent to the to
sensor to facilitate direct access to the controller via the terminal.
(1) Each room sensor shall also include the following auxiliary devices: am
-Set point Adjustment Dial
-Temperature Indicator
-Override Switch to
(2) The set point adjustment dial shall allow for modification of the
temperature by the occupant. Set point adjustment may be locked out,
overridden or limited as to time or temperature through software by an
authorized operator at the central work station, SDC or via the portable
programming tool. In lieu of an integral adjustment dial, provide a
separate dial mounted on a stainless steel wall plate adjacent to the
sensor to perform the specified functionality.
(3) The temperature indicator shall be a bi-metal or mercury thermometer
and shall be visible without removing the sensor cover. In lieu of integral
indication, provide a separate thermometer or digital readout mounted
on a stainless steel wall plate adjacent to the sensor for local
temperature indication.
(4) The override switch shall initiate override of the night setback mode to
normal (day) operation when activated by the occupant. The override
function may be locked out, overridden or limited as to the time through
software by an authorized operator at the central work station, SDC or �w
via the portable programming tool. In lieu of an integral switch, provide
a separate momentary contact switch mounted on a stainless steel wall
plate adjacent to the sensor to perform the specified functionality.
f. Each controller shall perform its primary control function independent of other
SDC network communication, or if network communication is interrupted.
Reversion to a fail-safe mode of operation during network interruption is not
acceptable. Should the controller reside on a SDC LAN network, the controller
shall receive its real-time data from the SDC clock to ensure network continuity.
Each controller shall include algorithms incorporating proportional, integral and
derivative(PID)gains for all applications. All PID gains and biases shall be field-
adjustable by the user via terminals as specified herein. This functionality shall
allow for tighter control of space conditions and shall facilitate optimal occupant
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -108
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
I. The ATCU shall be provided with the ability to interface with Portable Operators
Terminal (POT). The interface port shall be provided at the wall sensor.
Through the POT, the ATCU shall support a fully prompted Air Balance
sequence. The POT shall, when connected to the wall sensor, automatically
access the connected ATCU unit. Systems requiring an address number or an
access code to be entered, shall not be acceptable. The air balance sequence
shall step the balancing sequence, the flow values presented by the ATCU shall
match those observed by the balancing contractor's measurement equipment.
Additionally, upon completion of the air balance, the FMCS shall automatically
archive the balance settings for future use if the controller requires replacement.
Systems not able to provide a formatted air balance POT software system, shall
not be acceptable. As a minimum, the balancing program shall step the
balancing contractor through the following functions:
Check damper linking for full end to end stroke travel
Verify and set maximum CFM flow value
Calibrate Maximum CFM flow value
Verify and set minimum CFM flow value
! '! Calibrate minimum CFM flow value
Verify and set reheat flow set point
Calibrate reheat flow set point
Verify and set parallel fan start point
Calibrate parallel fan start point
10. Terminal Equipment Controllers-TEC Hardware
a. Terminal equipment controllers shall be provided for each piece of equipment as
specified. The FMCS shall support specific controllers for the following types of
equipment as a minimum:
-Unit Conditioners
-Heat Pumps
-Unit Ventilators
b. Controllers shall include all points inputs and outputs necessary to perform the
specified control sequences. As a minimum, 50% of the point outputs (except
for unit ventilator controllers) shall be of the Universal type; that is, the outputs
may be utilized either as modulating or two-state, allowing for additional system
flexibility. In lieu of Universal outputs, provide a minimum of 50% spare outputs
of each type via additional point termination boards or controllers. Analog
outputs shall be industry standard signals such as 24V floating control, allowing
for interface to a variety of modulating actuators. Terminal equipment controllers
utilizing proprietary control signals and actuators shall not be acceptable.
C. The controllers consist of either an electronic or pneumatic controller assembly.
Electronic outputs are used for interfacing to electronic valves and damper
actuators. Pneumatic outputs are used for interfacing to pneumatic valves and
damper actuators. Pneumatic outputs shall also be used to provide fast, positive
actuation when speed of response is critical.
d. Each controller performing space temperature control shall be provided with a
matching room temperature sensor. The sensor may be either RTD or
thermistor type providing the following minimum performance requirements are
met:
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -107
00
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA we
of UL 465. Components shall be rated for service in 40°F to 140°F ambient air ,.
temperature.
e. Room thermostat shall be electronic with RTD or thermistor sensing elements
with accuracy of 0.1%. Local set point adjustment shall be standard on all
thermostats. Finish shall be manufacturer's standard. Communication jack shall
be standard of each thermostat, and support local hand-held programmer for
local set-up or program modifications without going to the ATCU. ..
f. ATCU shall consist of either an electronic or pneumatic controller assembly.
Electronic outputs shall interface with electronic valve and damper operators.
Pneumatic outputs shall interface with pneumatic valve and damper operators.
ATCU shall employ proportional and proportional/integral and
proportional/integral/derivative control algorithms to adjust airflow damper and
reheat coil valve to maintain stable load temperature within 1'F of set point.
g. FMCS shall be in continual direct communication with all ATCU's controllers
implemented in the facility via RS-485 serial data communication bus. All
ATCU's shall be integrated into the FMCS for energy management and global
control functions. FMCS shall provide the following for any and all ATCU's
information: Facility scheduling, optimum start,trend reporting, maintenance time
reminders, database back-up and all performance functions specified for the
FMCS.
h. FMCS shall have access to ATCU information as determined by operator access
level. Access to ATCU information shall also be available from the CHS, SDC,
or hand-held programmer. Accessible ATCU operating information shall include 00
but not be limited to:
(1) Space temperature
(2) The current local thermostat settings for both heating and cooling set
points
(3) The current local maximum flow set point
(4) The current local minimum flow set point 40
(5) Supply air temperature
(6) Box flow(CFM)
(7) Hydronic reheat valve position
(8) Primary damper position indication ow
(9) Occupied/unoccupied mode of operation
(10) Morning warm-up mode
i. ATCU's shall accept communicated control parameters from the FMCS to pre- am
empt or coordinate with the local settings of these parameters. The FMCS shall
implement the software capability for set point control to be selectively passed
over to the existing settings on the local zone thermostat based on time of day or ON
other logical criteria. During periods when set point control is not under local
control, the FMCS settings shall be the controlling set points.
j. Each CV control system shall utilize manual override push button located on "o
room thermostat to institute override of FMCS "Global Occupied/Unoccupied
Cycle".
k. Provide digital outputs for future expansion capability to be directly controlled by
the FMCS. Additionally, each CV controller shall accept a duct temperature
sensor for local or global indication of inlet air temperature.
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -106
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
d. The network of PUC's shall individually perform "Time of Day and Holiday
:. Scheduling", "Optimum Start/Stop, "Enthalpy Optimization" and all control
optimization strategies, such as "Supply Air Reset" and Soft Start Ramp-up" for
their connected systems of equipment.
e. Coordination of strategies involving multiple systems of equipment shall be
performed by sharing of necessary data between the PUC's on the
communicating network as managed by the Level 1 controller.
f. All programming defining the functions to be performed by the PUC, including
but not limited to application programs and point database, shall be protected
from loss due to power failure for a minimum of six (6) months. Systems
providing non-volatile memory for these functions are preferred. Systems not
providing non-volatile memory for these functions shall provide battery back-up
sufficient to provide protection for the specified period.
g. All inputs and outputs shall be provided via Industry Standard Signals:
(1) Temperatures, humidities, differential pressure signals and all other
signals inputs shall be any of the following types:
0-20 MA
4-20 MA
0-5 VDC
Resistance Signals
h. Controls shall reside as one node on the level 2 LAN and shall include all point
inputs and outputs necessary to perform the specified sequence of operation for
the associated piece of equipment. The utilization of more than one PUC to
control a specific piece of equipment shall not be acceptable.
i. Modulating outputs shall be Industry Standard milliamp outputs of 0-20 mA or 4-
20 mA.
9. Air Terminal Control Units
a. Controls shall be microprocessor based, pressure independent,
variable/constant volume terminal unit controller. ATCU's shall be
microprocessor-based working from software program memory which is resident
at the controller.
b. The ATCU shall consist of microprocessor, power supply enclosure, actuator,
differential pressure transducer and room thermostat with integral room set point,
communication jack, and manual override push button.
C. All control sequences programmed in the ATCU shall be stored in non-volatile
memory, which is not dependent upon the presence of a battery to be retained.
Power failure shall therefore not cause memory loss or batteries to be recharged
or replaced.
d. The ATCU shall be provided to the terminal unit manufacturer by the ATC
Subcontractor for factory mounting. All costs involved with this operation shall
! be included in the ATC Subcontractor's price. All control components shall be
factory mounted on the terminal unit. Control components shall be housed in an
enclosure rated for return or supply air plenums to comply with the requirements
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -105
W
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883 am
Northampton,MA
shall be able to define the specific system reaction for each point. Wo
Alarms shall be prioritized to minimize nuisance reporting and to speed
operator response to critical alarms. A minimum of six priority levels
shall be provided for each point. Point priority levels shall be combined
with user definable destination categories (PC, printer, SDC, etc.) to
provide full flexibility in defining the handling of system alarms. Each
SDC shall automatically inhibit the reporting of selected alarms during
system shutdown and start-up. Users shall have the ability to manually
inhibit alarm reporting for each point.
(2) In addition to the point's descriptor and the time and date, the user shall
be able to print, display or store a 200 character alarm message to more ..�
fully describe the alarm condition or direct operator response. Each
SDC shall be capable of storing a library of at least 50 alarm messages.
Each message may be assignable to any number of points in the
Controller. In dial-up applications, operator-selected alarms shall initiate
a call to a remote operator device.
n. SDC's shall provide for any point, physical or calculated to be designated for
trending. Any point, regardless of physical location in the network, may be .�
collected and stored in each SDC's point group. Trend data shall be stored at
the SDC's and uploaded to the work station when retrieval is desired. Uploads
shall occur based upon either user-defined interval, manual command or when
the trend buffers are full.
o. SDC's shall automatically accumulate and store run-time hours for digital input
and output points. The totalization routine shall have a sampling resolution of
one minute or less. The user shall have the ability to define a warning limit for
run-time totalization. Unique, user-specified messages shall be generated when
the limit is reached.
.�e
P. SDC's shall automatically sample, calculate and store consumption totals on a
daily, weekly or monthly basis for user-selected analog and digital pulse input
type points. Totalization shall provide calculation and storage of accumulations
of up to 99,999.9 units (e.g., KWH, gallons, BTU, tons, etc.). The totalization
routine shall have a sampling resolution of one minute or less. The user shall
have the ability to define a warning limit. Unique, user-specified messages shall
be generated when the limit is reached. A.
8. Programmable Unitary Controllers(PUC)
a. Programmable Unitary Controllers (PUC) shall be fully programmable
microcomputer based, providing a multi-tasking operating system for control
function simultaneous with all other facility management, operator interface and
system communications functions. Controllers which require hardware changes
or cannot be fully reprogrammed on site shall not be acceptable.
b. Each control panel shall be fully programmable digital control system, providing
all control functions for the equipment specified to be controlled from that panel.
Programming language shall be consistent with that used for Level 1 SAC.
C. PUC's shall include provision for connection of a handheld operator's device for
password controlled access to various levels of operational capability, from
simple information access to full programmability of PUC functions.
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -104
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
(13) Cold deck reset
(14) Hot deck reset
(15) Hot water reset
(16) Chilled water reset
(17) Condenser water reset
(18) Chiller sequencing
All programs shall be executed automatically without the need for operator
intervention and shall be flexible enough to allow user customization. Programs
shall be applied to building equipment as described in the Sequence of
Operations.
I. SDC's shall be able to execute custom, job-specific processes defined by the
user,to automatically perform calculations and special control routines.
(1) It shall be possible to use any of the following in a custom process:
(a) Any system measured point data or status
(b) Any calculated data
(c) Any results from other processes
(d) User-defined constants
(e) Arithmetic functions(+,-,*,/,square root, exp, etc.)
MIN (f) Boolean logic operators(and/or,exclusive or,etc.)
(g) On-delay/off-delay/one-shot timers
(2) Custom processes may be triggered based on any combination of the
following:
(a) Time interval
(b) Time-of-day
(c) Date
(d) Other processes
(e) Time programming
(f) Events(e.g., point alarms)
(3) A single process shall be able to incorporate measured or calculated
data from any and all other SDC's on the network. In addition, a single
process shall be able to issue commands to points in any and all other
SDC's on the network.
(4) Processes shall be able to generate operator messages and advisories
to operator 1/0 devices. A process shall be able to directly send a
message to a specified device or cause the execution of a dial-up
connection to a remote device such as a printer or pager.
M. Alarm management shall be provided to monitor and direct alarm information to
operator devices. Each SDC shall perform distributed, independent alarm
analysis and filtering to minimize operator interruptions due to non-critical
it alarms, minimize network traffic and prevent alarms from being lost. At no time
shall the SDC's ability to report alarms be affected by either operator or activity at
- a PC work station, local 1/0 device or communications with other panels on the
network.
(1) All alarm or point change reports shall include the point's English
language description and the time and date of occurrence. The user
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -103
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
remote annunciation of any detected component failures, low battery conditions
or repeated failure to establish communication.
g. Isolation shall be provided at all peer-to-peer network terminations, as well as all
field point terminations to suppress induced voltage transients consistent with
IEEE Standards 587-1980.
h. In the event of the loss of normal power, there shall be an orderly shutdown of all
SDC's to prevent the loss of database or operating system software. Upon `
restoration of normal power, the SDC shall automatically resume full operation
without manual intervention. Should SDC memory be lost for any reason, the
user shall have the capability of reloading the SDC via the local RS-232C port,
via telephone line dial-in or from a network work station PC. Non-volatile
memory shall be incorporated for all critical controller configuration data and
battery backup shall be provided to support the real-time clock and all volatile
memory for a minimum of 72 hours.
i. All necessary software to form a complete operating system as described in this
specification shall be provided. The software programs shall be an integral part
of SDC's and shall not be dependent upon any higher level computer for
execution.
j. The SDC shall have the ability to perform the following pre-tested control
algorithms:
(1) Two-position control
(2) Proportional control +,
(3) Proportional plus integral control
(4) Proportional, integral, plus derivative control
Control software shall include a provision for limiting the number of times
each piece of equipment may be cycled within any one-hour period.
The system shall provide protection against excessive demand
situations during start-up periods by automatically introducing time
delays between successive start commands to heavy electrical loads.
Upon the resumption of normal power, each SDC shall analyze the
status of all controlled equipment, compare it with normal occupancy
scheduling and turn equipment on or off as necessary to resume normal ■^°
operations.
k. SDC's shall have the ability to perform any or all of the following energy
management routines:
(1) Time-of-day scheduling
(2) Calendar-based scheduling
(3) Holiday scheduling .w
(4) Temporary schedule overrides
(5) Start-Stop Time Optimization
(6) Automatic Daylight Savings Time Switchover .w
(7) Night setback control
(8) Enthalpy switchover(economizer)
(9) Peak demand time limiting
(10) Temperature-compensated duty cycling
(11) Fan speed/CFM control
(12) Heating/cooling interlock
w.
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -102
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
(1) Control processes
(2) Energy management applications
(3) Alarm management applications including custom alarm messages for
various level alarms associated with each point in the system.
(4) Historical/trend data for points specified
(5) Maintenance support applications
(6) Custom processes
(7) Operator 1/0
(8) Dial-up communications
(9) Manual override monitoring
C. Each SDC shall support the following industry standard inputs and outputs
without the addition of equipment outside the SDC cabinet:
t (1) Analog inputs
(a) 4-20 mA
(b) 0-10 Vdc
(c) Thermistors
(d) 1000 ohm RTDs
(2) Digital inputs
(a) Dry contact closure
(b) Pulse Accumulator
(c) Voltage Sensing
(3) Digital outputs(contact closure)
(a) Contact closure(motor starters, sizes 1 A)
(4) Analog outputs
(a) 0-20 psi
(b) 4-20 mA
(c) 0-10 Vdc
d. Each SDC shall have a minimum of 25 percent spare capacity for future point
connection. The type of spares shall be in the same proportion as the
implemented 1/0 functions of the panel, but in no case shall there be less than
two spares of each implemented 1/0 type. Provide all processors, power
supplies and communication controllers complete so that the implementation of a
point only requires the addition of the appropriate point input/output termination
Pill module and wiring.
e. SDC's shall provide at least two RS-232C serial data communication ports for
operation of operator 1/0 devices such as industry standard printers, operator
terminals, modems and portable laptop operator's terminals. SDC's shall allow
temporary use of portable devices without interrupting the normal operation of
permanently connected modems, printers or terminals.
f. Each SDC shall continuously perform self-diagnostics, communication diagnosis
and diagnosis of all panel components. The SDC shall provide both local and
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -101
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
(b) Dial-In
i. Alarms shall automatically dial into the workstation for
display at the terminal and for hard copy printout at the
associated event printer.
ii. Alarms shall, at the operator's option, dial into a stand- w
alone modem-printer to provide for real-time alarm
printouts even when the workstation is off-line (such as
when it is being used to run operator-selected 3rd
party software).
iii. Trend data shall be scheduled for automatic updating
to the workstation at operator-selected times. The
operator shall also have the option of manually
collecting trend data at any time.
6. Portable Operator's Terminal
a. Furnish one portable operator's terminal and controller interface software to be
used for communication with an SDC unit, PLC, ATCU, TEC or fume hood
controller. The terminal shall be an MS-DOS (rev. 6.2 or higher) based laptop
personal computer that uses a controller interface software package to
communicate with the controllers. The laptop PC shall include, as a minimum, a
Pentium 1.7 GHz processor (minimum), 128 MB RAM, 10 GB hard disk, CD
ROM drive and one 3-1/2 inch floppy. +
b. The laptop shall have a color SVGA monitor with a minimum twenty-five (25) line
screen display with English language prompting to allow quick access to system .�
information through pop-up menus.
C. When plugged into any controller, including terminal controllers or into space
sensors, the portable terminal shall have the same functionality as a stationary
terminal with full editing, programming, display and command functions. The
terminal shall allow access to all controllers including terminal unit controllers.
d. The controller interface software (CIS) will allow a high level system operator
access to the fume hood controller to edit, start-up, set, tune and base. The
terminal and CIS shall use full English language descriptors and be completely
menu-driven with pop-up menus. The terminal will display all "point" information
from the connected controller. Items such as"face velocity"and "Sash % open"
and any diagnostic alarm conditions are displayed.
7. Stand-Alone Digital Controllers(SDC)
a. Stand Alone Digital Controller (SDC) shall be microprocessor-based with a
minimum word size of 16 bits. They shall also be multi-tasking, multi-user, real-
time digital control processors consisting of modular hardware with plug-in
enclosed processors, communication controllers, power supplies and
input/output point modules. Controller size shall be sufficient to fully meet the
requirements of this specification and the attached point list.
b. Each SDC Controller shall have sufficient memory to support its own operating
system and databases, including:
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -100
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
C. System Configuration&Definition
(1) Network wide control strategies shall not be restricted to a single DDC
Controller, but shall be able to include data from any and all other
PO network panels to allow the development of Global control strategies.
(2) Provide automatic backup and restore of all DDC controller databases
on the workstation hard disk. In addition, all database changes shall
be performed while the workstation is on-line without disrupting other
system operations. Changes shall be automatically recorded and
downloaded to the appropriate DDC Controller. Changes made at the
DDC Controllers shall be automatically uploaded to the workstation,
ensuring system continuity.
(3) System configuration, programming, editing, graphics generation shall
be performed on-line. If programming and system back-up must be
done with the PC workstation off-line, the FMCS contractor shall
provide at least 2 operator workstations.
d. Alarm Management
(1) Alarm Routing shall allow the user to send alarm notification to
selected printers or PC location based on time of day, alarm severity,
or point type.
(2) Alarm Notification shall be provided via two alarm icons, to distinguish
r between routine, maintenance type alarms and critical alarms. These
alarm icons shall be displayed when user is working in other Windows
programs. The FMCS alarm display screen shall be displayed when
the user clicks on the alarm icon.
(3) Alarm Display shall list the alarms with highest priority at the top of the
display. The alarm display shall provide selector buttons for display of
the associated point graphic and message.
(4) Alarm messages shall be customizable for each point to display
detailed instructions to the user regarding actions to take in the event
r of an alarm.
e. Workstation Communications
' (1) Provide automatic dial-up communications for buildings as specified.
Automatic dial-up communications shall include the following features
as a minimum:
(a) Dial-Out
i. Manual dial-out from the workstation to remote
networks shall be accomplishable using only a mouse
to select and request the desire remote connection.
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -99
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
Northampton,MA
Exact point values may be viewed and the graphs may be ■„
printed.
b. Dynamic Color Graphic Displays
(1) Create Color graphic floor plan displays and system schematics for each
piece of mechanical equipment, including air handling units, chilled
water systems and hot water boiler systems, and room level terminal
units, shall be provided by the BAS contractor as indicated in the point
1/0 schedule of this specification to optimize system performance,
analysis and speed alarm recognition.
(2) The operator interface shall allow users to access the various system
schematics and floor plans via a graphical penetration scheme, menu
selection or text-based commands. Graphics software shall permit the
importing of AutoCAD or scanned pictures for use in the system.
(3) Dynamic temperature values, humidity values, flow values and status
indication shall be shown in their actual respective locations and shall
automatically update to represent current conditions without operator
intervention and without pre-defined screen refresh rates.
(a) Provide the user the ability to display blocks of point data by
defined point groups; alarm conditions shall be displayed by
flashing point blocks.
(b) Equipment state can be changed by clicking on the point block
or graphic symbol and selecting the new state (on/off) or set
point.
(4) Colors shall be used to indicate status and change as the status of the
equipment changes. The state colors shall be user definable.
(5) The windowing environment of the PC operator workstation shall allow
the user to simultaneously view several applications at a time to analyze
total building operation or to allow the display of a graphic associated
with an alarm to be viewed without interrupting work in progress.
(6) Off the shelf graphic software, Microgafx Designer or Coral Draw
software shall be provided to allow the user to add, modify or delete
system graphic displays.
(7) A clipart library of HVAC and automation symbols shall be provided
including fans, valves, motors, chillers, AHU systems, standard
ductwork diagrams and laboratory symbols. The user shall have the
ability to add custom symbols to the clipart library.
(8) A dynamic display of the site specific architecture showing status of
all controllers, PC workstations and networks shall be provided.
.w
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -98
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 288'
MA
(h) List of holiday programming
(i) List of limits and dead bands
0) Custom reports from 3rd party software
(k) System diagnostic reports including, list of DDC panels on line
and communicating, status of all DDC terminal unit device
points
(1) List of programs
(7) Scheduling and override
(a) Provide a graphical spreadsheet-type format for simplification of
time-of-day scheduling and overrides of building operations.
Schedules reside in both the PC workstation and DDC
Controller to ensure time equipment scheduling when PC is off-
line, PC is not required to execute time scheduling. Provide
override access through menu selection or function key.
Provide the following spreadsheet graphic types as a minimum:
i. Weekly schedules
ii. Zone schedules, minimum of 200 unique zones
iii. Scheduling for up to 365 days in advance
iv. Schedule reports to print at PC.
(8) Collection and Analysis of Historical Data
(a) Provide trending capabilities that allow the user to easily
monitor and preserve records of system activity over an
extended period of time. Any system point may be trended
automatically at time-based intervals or change of value, both of
which shall be user-definable. Trend data may be stored on
w hard disk for future diagnostics and reporting. Additionally,
trend data may be archived to network drives or removable disk
media for future retrieval.
(b) Trend data reports shall be provided to allow the user to view all
trended point data. Reports may be customized to include
individual points or predefined groups of at least six points.
Provide additional functionality to allow predefined groups of up
to 250 trended points to be easily transferred on-line to
Microsoft Excel. DDC contractor shall provide custom designed
spreadsheet reports for use by the owner to track energy usage
!"! and cost, equipment run times, equipment efficiency, and/or
building environmental conditions. DDC contractor shall provide
setup of custom reports including creation of data format
templates for monthly or weekly reports.
(c) Provide additional functionality that allows the user to view real-
time trend data on trend graph displays. A minimum of ten
points may be graphed, regardless of whether they have been
predefined for trending. The dynamic graphs shall continuously
update point values. At any time the user may redefine
sampling times or range scales for any point. In addition, the
40 user may pause the graph and take "snapshots" of screens to
be stored on the workstation disk for future recall and analysis.
+
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -97
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
Northampton,MA
while concurrently annunciating on-line FMCS alarms and monitoring
information.
(a) Provide functionality such that any of the following may be
performed simultaneously on-line, and in any combination, via
user-sized windows. Operator shall be able to drag and drop
information between applications, reducing the number of steps
(i.e. Click on a point on the alarm screen and drag it to the
dynamic trend graph application to initiate a dynamic trend).
i. Dynamic color graphics and graphic control
ii. Alarm management, routing to designated locations,
and customized messages
iii. Year in advance equipment and report scheduling *"
iv. Dynamic trend data definition and presentation
V. Graphic definition and construction
vi. Program and point database editing on-line.
(b) If the software is unable to display several different types of
displays at the same time, the FMCS contractor shall provide at
least two operator workstations.
(c) Report and alarm printing shall be accomplished via Windows
Explorer, allowing use of network printers.
(4) Operator specific password access protection shall be provided to allow "
the user/manager to limit workstation control, display and data base
manipulation capabilities as deemed appropriate for each user, based
upon an assigned password. Operator privileges shall "follow" the
operator to any workstation logged onto (up to 200 passwords shall be
supported).
(5) Operator Activity Tracking - An audit trail report to track system
changes, accounting for operator initiated actions, changes made by a
particular person or changes made to a specific piece of equipment,
designated time frame, shall be printable and archived for future use.
The operator activity tracking shall be in a tamper-proof buffer file. '
(6) Reports shall be generated on demand or via pre-defined schedule and
directed to either LCD displays, printers or disk. As a minimum, the
system shall allow the user to easily obtain the following types of
reports:
(a) A general listing of all or selected points in the network
(b) List of all points currently in alarm
(c) List of all points currently in override status
(d) List of all disabled points
(e) List of all points currently locked out
(f) List of user accounts and access levels
(g) List all weekly schedules
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -96
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
P-1 Northampton,MA
(1) Provide workstation(s) of equal capability located at a location choosen
by the owner.
(2) Workstation shall consist of an SVGA color monitor, personal computer
with minimum 256 MB RAM, 40.0 GB hard drive and controller,48X CD
ROM drive, mouse and 101-key enhanced keyboard. Personal
computer shall be an IBM Compatible PC and shall include a minimum
2.OGHZ Pentium processor.
(3) The display provided for system operation shall have a diagonal screen
measurement of no less than 19" and a minimum display resolution of
no less than 800 X 600 pixels. Separate controls shall be provided for
color, contrasts and brightness. The screen shall be non-reflective.
b Provide an HP Laser Color Printer or equivalent printer at each workstation
location or on the network (Ethernet) for recording alarms, operator transactions
and systems reports, meeting the following minimum requirements:
5. Workstation Operator Interface
a. Basic Interface Description
(1) Operator workstation interface software shall minimize operator training
through the use of English language prompting, 30 character English
language point identification, on-line help, and industry standard PC
application software. Interface software shall simultaneously
communicate with up to 4 Building Level Networks and share data
between any of the 4 networks. The software shall provide, as a
minimum,the following functionality:
a. Real-time graphical viewing and control of environment
b. Scheduling and override of building operations
C. Collection and analysis of historical data
d. Point database editing, storage and downloading of controller
databases.
e. Alarm reporting, routing, messaging, and acknowledgment
f. Display dynamic data trend plot.
g. Definition and construction of dynamic color graphic displays.
h. Program editing
i. Transfer trend data to 3rd party software
j. Scheduling reports.
(2) Provide a graphical user interface which shall minimize the use of
keyboard through the use of a mouse or similar pointing device and
"point and click"approach to menu selection. There shall be a minimum
of 8 pre-defined function keys to allow quick access to frequently used
applications.
(3) The software shall provide a multi-tasking type environment that allows
the user to run several applications simultaneously. FMCS software
shall run within a 32 bit operating system such as Windows NT. These
Windows applications shall run simultaneously with the FMCS software.
The mouse or Alt-Tab.keys shall be used to quickly select and switch
between multiple applications. The operator shall be able to work in
Microsoft Word, Excel, and other Windows based software packages,
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -95
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
.A
2. Management Level Network
a. All PC operator workstations shall have access to point information, command
equipment, edit programs for any building level network data connected to the
Management Level Network.
b. The Management Level Network shall support a minimum of 25 PC operator .w
workstations.
C. The Management Level Network shall reside on industry standard Ethernet
utilizing standard TCP/IP.
3. Peer-to-Peer Building Level Network:
a. All operator devices either network resident or connected via dial-up modems
shall have the ability to access all point status and application report data or
execute control functions for any and all other devices via the peer-to-peer
network. No hardware or software limits shall be imposed on the number of
devices with global access to the network data at any time.
b. The network shall support a minimum of 100 DDC controllers and PC
workstations.
C. Each PC workstation shall support a minimum of 4 peer to peer networks
hardwired or dial up.
d. The system shall support integration of third party systems (fire alarm, security,
lighting, PCL, chiller, boiler) via panel mounted open protocol processor. This
processor shall exchange data between the two systems for inter-process ..
control. All exchange points shall have full system functionality as specified
herein for hardwired points.
e. SDC Level 2 Local Area Network: „
(1) This level of communication shall support a family of controllers for
various applications and shall communicate bi-directionally with the
peer-to-peer network through SDC's for transmission of global data.
(2) Level 2 controllers shall be arranged on the LAN in a functional
relationship manner with SDC Controllers. For example, a VAV terminal .�
unit controller shall be on a LAN from the SDC that is controlling its
corresponding AHU.
(3) A maximum of 64 level 2 controllers may be configured on individual
SDC's to ensure adequate global data and alarm response time.
4. Personal Computer Operator Workstation Hardware
a. Personal computer operator workstations shall be provided for command entry,
information management, network alarm management and database
management functions. All real-time control functions shall be resident in the
DDC Controllers to facilitate greater fault tolerance and reliability.
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -94
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
H. Technical Proposals
1. Technical proposals shall be prepared in accordance with these specifications. Three
(3)copies of the proposal shall be submitted. Proposals that are unbound, loose, loose
in a file folder, staples, stapled in a manila file folder, etc., will not be acceptable. The
technical proposal shall include the following data/information as a minimum. The order
of listing here is not intended to indicate, nor should it be construed to indicate, the
relative importance of the data/information:
a. Information on organizational capability to handle this project (management,
personnel,manufacturing, single source responsibility, etc.).
b. Information on training program to demonstrate specification compliance.
C. System Configuration proposed:
(1) Describe system architecture including a schematic layout with location
and type of all control panels.
(2) Describe system operation, functions and control techniques.
(3) Modularity.
(4) Provisions against obsolescence due to technological advancement.
d. Technical data to support the information on the hardware configuration in No. 3
above.
e. Detailed description of all operating, command, application and energy
management software provided for this project.
f. A signed certificate stating the Contractor "has read the performance and
functional requirements, understands them and his technical proposal will
comply with all parts of the specification".
- g. Other requirements for inclusion in the technical proposal are located throughout
this specification.
I. Equipment
1. Networking Communications
a. The design of the FMCS shall network operator workstations and stand-alone
DDC Controllers. The network architecture shall consist of three levels, a
campus-wide Ethernet network based on TCP/IP protocol, a high performance
peer-to-peer building level network and DDC Controller floor level local area
networks with access being totally transparent to the user when accessing data
or developing control programs.
b. The design of FMCS shall allow the co-existence of new DDC Controllers with
existing DDC Controllers in the same network without the use of gateways or
protocol converters.
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -93
MP
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883 4W
Northampton,MA
this contractor shall submit to the owner its standard agreement to support the system ■.
operation. This service must include operators support, application support, remote
diagnostic support as well as database management support.
3. This programmed maintenance agreement shall fully describe the maintenance work to
be performed and shall advise as to the cost of this work prior to awarding the Contract.
G. Instructions and Adjustment
1. Upon completion of the project, the ATC Subcontractor shall:
a. Fine-tune and "debug" all software control loops, routines, programs and ..
sequences of control associated with the control system supplied.
b. Completely adjust and make ready for use, all transmitters, relays, damper
operators, valves, etc., provided under this Section. This Contractor shall furnish
copies of complete, detailed, calibrating checkout and commissioning
documentation for reach controller. Documentation shall list each procedure and
shall be signed by the control specialist performing the service.
C. Furnish a complete set of system operation manuals, including standard
manufacturers' operating manuals, complete as-built installation diagrams, and
complete software hard copy documentation, as well as a magnetic media back-
up.
d. Provide an on-site training program for the Owner's staff in the operation and use
of the control system. Training shall include three(3)segments, as follows:
(1) Segment 1 shall include 24 hours of classroom and hands-on training.
This segment shall instruct personnel in the system configuration, .A
component characteristics, control strategy on each controlled system
and all requirements for daily operation and use of the system. This
segment shall give the Owner's representative a working proficiency in
the day-today operational requirements (i.e., system monitoring, alarm
acknowledgment, HVAC system troubleshooting techniques, set point
and time schedule adjustments, manual override, etc.).
(2) Segment 2 shall include 24 hours of on-site training. This segment will
be geared for the Owner's designated prime operator. An emphasis on
overall software management and manipulation shall be made, to allow
the prime operator(s) to make control strategy and overall facility and
system management changes as required. Attendees shall have
attended Segment 1.
(3) All training shall take place at the site and at times mutually agreed to
between the ATC Subcontractor and the Owner. The ATC
Subcontractor shall provide to the Owner's designated representative, at
least three (3) weeks before each segment, a course syllabus outline
and schedule. The ATC Subcontractor shall provide all training material,
reference material and training aids, as required, all as part of his
Contact cost.
(4) Written notification of the training schedule and completion shall be
forwarded to the Architect.
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -92
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
' Northampton,MA
(2) Provide power sources for use of the ATC contractor where shown on
the electrical plans for ATC compliance with paragraph D. below. In
general this will be used for powering terminal controllers and actuators.
OF
D. Electric Wiring
1. All Electric wiring, wiring connections and all interlocking required for the installation of
the temperature control system, as herein specified, shall be provided by the ATC
Subcontractor, unless specifically shown on the Electrical drawings or called for in the
Electrical specifications. Power to valves and actuators shall be by the ATC
Subcontractor, except as specifically noted in the Electrical drawings and specifications.
2. All wiring shall comply with the requirements of the Electrical Section of the
specifications.
40
3. Provide, on magnetic starters, all necessary auxiliary contacts, with buttons and
switches in required configurations.
Pill E. Submittal Brochure
1. The following shall be submitted for Approval(minimum of six(6)copies):
OR
a. Control drawings with detailed piping and wiring diagrams, including bill of
material and a written sequence of operation for each system controlled by the
ATC contractor. Diagrams shall include individual wiring and tubing marking
on designation, interlock details and wiring details of interfaces to other
manufacturers system.
b. A symbols key and an overall LAN Architecture Diagram.
Os
C. Panel layouts and nameplate lists for all local and central panels.
d. Valve and damper scheduled showing size, configuration, capacity and location
of all equipment.
e. Data sheets for all control system components.
f. Control strategies must be included within the second ATC shop drawing
submittal. The listing of each strategy must be in English and demonstrate the
desired ATC sequence of operation. Submittal must be complete with proposed
schedules, listing of set points and end device point listing and addresses.
F. Guarantee
1. The system specified herein and shown on the drawings shall be guaranteed to be free
from original defects in both material and workmanship and shall perform to
manufacturer specification for a period of one (1) year of normal use and service,
a excepting damages from other causes. This guarantee shall become effective starting
the date the Contract work is accepted as complete by the Architect on behalf of the
Owner and in accordance with the General Provisions/Conditions.
2. Upon completion of the installation, the ATC Subcontractor shall submit to the Owner
an agreement to provide the necessary programmed maintenance, to keep the various
control system in proper working condition beyond the guarantee period. Additionally,
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -91
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883 ..
Northampton,MA
this specification identifying work to be performed under this Section in addition to work «
specifically indicated under this paragraph.
4. All interlocking wiring and installation of control devices associated with the air handling
unit, pumps, chillers, towers, heat exchanger systems, etc., shall be provided by the
ATC Subcontractor. Close coordination shall be exercised between the ATC
Subcontractor and the HVAC Subcontractor and equipment manufacturers so that
installation will be provided in a manner to result in fully operable systems as intended
in these specifications.
C. Incidental Work by Others
1. The following incidental work shall be furnished by the designated Subcontractor under
the supervision of the ATC Subcontractor:
a. The HVAC subcontractor shall coordinate required work with ATC and. without
limiting the generality thereof, the work he is to perform for ATC shall include the
following:
(1) Install automatic valves, sensor wells and other similar equipment that w�
are specified to be supplied by the ATC Subcontractor.
(2) Furnish and install all necessary valved pressure taps, steam, water,
drain and overflow connections and piping.
(3) Provide, on magnetic starters furnished, all necessary auxiliary contacts,
with buttons and switches in required configurations.
(4) Install all automatic dampers and install duct smoke detectors to control
air handling unit shutdown,where applicable.
(5) Provide necessary blank-off plate (safing) required to install dampers
that are smaller than duct size.
(6) Assemble multiple section dampers with required interconnecting
linkages and extend required number of shafts through duct for external
mounting of damper motors.
(7) Provide necessary sheet metal baffle plates to eliminate stratification
and provide air volumes specified. Locate baffles by experimentation
and affix and seal permanently in place only after stratification problem
has been eliminated.
(8) Provide access doors or other approved means of access through
ceiling and walls for service to control equipment.
(9) Install terminal air controllers on constant volume return and supply
boxes, variable volume boxes and variable/constant volume boxes.
Controllers shall be shipped to box manufacturer for factory mounting.
Cost of mounting shall be carried by the terminal unit manufacturer.
b. The Electrical Subcontractor shall:
(1) Provide all power wiring (110 VAC or greater) to motors, heat trace of
exposed piping and ATC panels.
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -90
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
System Control Actuation
RTU's DDC Electric
FPT Boxes DDC Electric
VAV Boxes DDC Electric
Cabinet Unit Heater Electric Electric
Propeller Unit Heater Electric Electric
Pumps DDC Electric
Boilers DDC Electric
Exhaust Fans DDC Electric
Radiation DDC Electric
3. The control system shall be installed by trained and certified competent control
mechanics and electricians regularly employed by the manufacturer of the control
equipment. All control equipment shall be the product of one (1) manufacturer and all
W ATC components shall be capable of interfacing with the HVAC equipment. The
factory trained control contractor must maintain adequate staff and other standard
services to fully support the owner in the timely maintenance, repair, and operation of
the control system. Contractors who do not maintain such staff or must develop some
"a for this project are not acceptable. (Bids from franchised dealers or other whose
principal business is not the manufacture, installation and service of temperature control
systems will not be acceptable.)
4. All products of the FMC shall be provided with the following agency approvals. With the
submittal documents, verification that the approvals exist for all submitted products,
shall be provided. Systems or products not currently offering the following approvals,
w are not acceptable.
UL-916; Energy Management Systems
UL-864; Subcategories UUKL, QVAX, UDT; Fire and Smoke Control Systems
CSA; Canadian Standards Association
FCC; Part 15, Subpart J, Class A Computing Devices
All products shall be labeled with the appropriate approval markings. System
installation shall comply with NFPA, NEMA, Local and National Codes.
B. Scope
1. The control system provided shall consist of all microprocessors, software, database
entry, LCD Monitor, PC, graphic work station, graphics creation, printer, transformers,
transducers, relays, thermostats, dampers, damper operators, air terminal operators,
valves, valve operators and all other necessary control components, along with a
complete system of pneumatic tubing, interlocking and communication wiring/cabling to
fill the intent of the specification and provide for a complete and operable system.
Provide damper operators for equipment such as mixing dampers, where such
operators are not supplied by the equipment manufacturers.
2. Alarms, where applicable, and all interlocking wiring required shall be provided by the
me ATC Subcontractor.
3. The ATC Subcontractor shall review and study all HVAC, Electrical and Plumbing
drawings and entire specification to familiarize himself with the equipment and system
operation and to verify the quantities and types of dampers, operators, alarms, etc., he
has to provide. Numerous references to the ATC Subcontractor are made throughout
on
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -89
..
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA go
•
5. Outdoor Ducts Waterproof Covering:
a. Self Adhesive Membrane Roofing System (SAM) or an Elastomeric Membrane
Roofing System using 0.045" thick EPDM with compatible bonding adhesive.
Applied only after the insulation application is inspected and approved.
b. Armstrong AP Armaflex closed-cell elastomeric insulation. Insulation shall be ..
painted with a UV protective paint (minimum two coats)Armstrong SIB Armaflex
Finish.
6. Duct Liner: Manville Linacoustic Mat Faced or Permacote meeting ASTM C1071;
flexible blanket.
a. "K"Value:ASTM C518, 0.25 at 75°F.
�r
b. Noise Reduction Coefficient: 0.65 or higher based on"Type A mounting".
C. Maximum Velocity on Mat or Coated Air Side: 5,000 ft./min.
d. Adhesive: UL listed,waterproof type.
e. Fasteners: Duct liner galvanized steel pins,welded or mechanically fastened.
7. Round Duct Liner: Manville Spiracoustic, meeting ASTM C427; rigid.
a. "K"Value:ASTM C518, 0.23 at 75°F. *�
b. Noise Reduction Coefficient of 0.70 as per ASTM C427. Type A mounting.
C. Maximum Velocity:4000 ft./min.
2.58 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM (DDC)
A. General
1. Furnish and install, as hereinafter specified, a combination pneumatic/direct
digital/electric/electronic temperature control system and Facilities Management and
Control System (FMCS). The system shall be comprised of a network of various
independent Stand-alone Digital Controllers (SDC's), Programmable Unit Controllers
(PUC's), Modems, Air Terminal Control Units (ATCU's), electric/electronic control
equipment, thermostats, sensors, controllers, valves, dampers, actuators, panels,
hardware, software and other accessory equipment, along with a complete system of
electrical control wiring, pneumatic tubing and software generation to fill the intent of the
specifications and provide for a complete and operable system. Acceptable
manufacturers shall be The Trane Company, Siemens, TAC, Johnson Controls,
Honeywell, CSI,Automated Logic, or Invensys.
2. All control equipment shall be fully proportional, and the latest state of the art in
manufacturing and design. Unless otherwise specified, the following control and
actuation shall be employed for the different systems:
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -88
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
e. Stainless Steel Jacket: Type 304 stainless steel, 0.010 inch (smooth)
(corrugated)finish.
8. Outdoor Equipment Waterproof Covering:
a. Self Adhesive Membrane Roofing System (SAM) or an Elastomeric Membrane
Roofing System using 0.045" thick EPDM with compatible bonding adhesive.
Applied only after the insulation application is inspected and approved.
C. Ductwork Insulation
1. Manufacturers: Johns Manville Corporation; Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Pabco
Fiberboard Corporation; or approved equal.
2. Flexible Fiber Glass Blanket: Manville Microlite Type 75 meeting ASTM C553, Type 1,
Class B-2;flexible blanket.
a. "K"Value:0.27 at 75°F installed.
b. Density: 0.75 lb./cu.ft.
C. Vapor Barrier Jacket: FSK, aluminum foil reinforced with fiber glass yarn and
laminated to fire resistant Kraft paper, secured with UL listed pressure sensitive
tape and/or outward clinched expanded staples and vapor barrier mastic as
needed.
u�r 3. Rigid Fiber Glass Board: Manville 814 Spin-Glas meeting ASTM C612; rigid board.
a. "K"Value:0.23 at 75°F.
b. Density: 3.0 lb./cu. ft.
C. Vapor Retardant Jacket: AP, bleached kraft paper bonded to aluminum foil,
reinforced with fiber glass yarn; or FSK aluminum foil reinforced with fiber glass
yarn and laminated to fire resistant Kraft paper, secured with UL listed pressure
sensitive tape and/or outward clinched expanded staples and vapor barrier
mastic as needed.
4. Elastomeric Foam: Armstrong AP Armaflex meeting ASTM C534; flexible, cellular
elastomeric, molded continuous sheet.
a. "K"Value: 0.27 at 75°F.
b. Maximum Service Temperature of 220°F.
C. Maximum Flame Spread:25(ASTM E84).
d. Maximum Smoke Developed: 50(ASTM E84).
e. Application: Waterproof vapor retarder adhesive as needed; Armstrong 520
Adhesive.
an f. UV Protection: Outdoor protective coating;Armstrong SB Armaflex Finish.
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -87
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
.A
5. Cellular Glass: Pittsburgh Corning Foamglas meeting ASTM C522; rigid molded,
noncombustible.
a. "K"Value: 0.33 at 75°F.
b. Maximum service temperature:250°F.
C. Compressive strength: 100 psi.
d. Maximum Flame Spread: 5(ASTM E84).
w
e. Maximum Smoke Developed: 0(ASTM E84).
f. Absorption of Moisture: 0.2%(Surface Only).
g. Density: 8.0 lb./cu. ft.
h. Application: Adhere and seal with PC 88 Adhesive. Finish with field applied
jacket.
6. Elastomeric Foam: Armstrong AP Armaflex meeting ASTM C534; flexible, cellular
elastomeric, molded pipe insulation or continuous sheet.
a. "K"Value: 0.27 at 75°F.
b. Maximum Service Temperature of 220°F. **
C. Maximum Flame Spread: 25(ASTM E84).
d. Maximum Smoke Developed: 50(ASTM E84).
e. Application: Waterproof vapor retarder adhesive as needed; Armstrong 520
Adhesive.
f. UV Protection: Outdoor protective coating;Armstrong SB Armaflex Finish.
7. Field Applied Jackets:
a. PVC Plastic Jacket: Manville Zeston 2000. One piece molded jacketing material,
gloss white,ASTM E84-25/50.
(1) Connections: Tacks; pressure sensitive, color-matching vinyl tape.
b. Fiberglass Cloth Jacket: UL Listed glass fabric, 6 oz./sq. yd., plain weave .,.
presized with fire retardant cloth sizing,ASTM E84-25/50.
C. Canvas Jacket: UL listed fabric, 6 oz./sq. yd., plain weave cotton treated with
dilute,fire retardant lagging adhesive. ASTM E84-25/50. w
d. Aluminum Jacket: 0.016 inch thick sheet, (smooth) (embossed) finish, with
longitudinal slip joints and 2 inch laps, die-shaped fitting covers with factory
attached protective liner.
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -86
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
Northampton,MA
e. Stainless Steel Jacket: Type 304 stainless steel, 0.010 inch (smooth)
(corrugated)finish.
8. Outdoor Piping Waterproof Covering:
a. Self Adhesive Membrane Roofing System (SAM) or an Elastomeric Membrane
Roofing System using 0.045" thick EPDM with compatible bonding adhesive.
Applied only after the insulation application is inspected and approved.
B. Equipment Insulation
1. Manufacturers: Johns Manville Corporation; Armstrong World Industries, Inc.;
Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; or approved equal.
2. Flexible Fiber Glass Board: Manville Pipe and Tank Insulation meeting ASTM C165;flat
configuration.
a. "K"Value:0.27 at 75°F.
b. Maximum Service Temperature:650°F.
C. Density: 3.0 lb./cu.ft. density.
d. Vapor Retarder Jacket: Aluminum foil reinforced with fiber glass yarn and
laminated to fire resistant Kraft paper, secured with UL listed pressure sensitive
tape and/or outward clinch expanding staples and vapor barrier mastic as
needed.
3. Rigid Fiber Glass Board: Manville 814 Spin-Glas Board meeting ASTM C612;Type 1A.
a. "K"Value: 0.23 at 75°F.
b. Maximum Service Temperature:450°F.
C. Density: 3.0 lb./cu.ft. density.
d. Vapor Retarder Jacket: Aluminum foil reinforced with fiber glass yarn and
laminated to fire resistant Kraft paper, secured with UL listed pressure sensitive
tape and/or outward clinch expanding staples and vapor barrier mastic as
needed.
go 4. Rigid Fiber Glass Board: Manville 1000 Spin-Glas Board meeting ASTM C612; rigid,
noncombustible.
a. "K'Value: 0.23 at 75°F.
b. Maximum Service Temperature: 850°F.
C. Density: 3.0 lb./cu.ft.density.
d. Facing: 1 inch galvanized hexagonal wire mesh stitched on one face of
insulation (optional).
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -85
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883 ..
Northampton,MA
5. Elastomeric Foam: Armstrong AP Armaflex meeting ASTM C534; flexible, cellular •�►
elastomeric, molded pipe insulation or continuous sheet.
a. "K"Value: 0.27 at 75°F.
b. Maximum Service Temperature of 220°F.
C. Maximum Flame Spread: 25(ASTM E84).
d. Maximum Smoke Developed: 50(ASTM E84).
e. Application: Waterproof vapor retarder adhesive as needed; Armstrong 520
Adhesive.
f. UV Protection: Outdoor protective coating;Armstrong SB Armaflex Finish.
6. Cellular Glass: Pittsburgh Corning Foamglas meeting ASTM C522; rigid molded,
noncombustible.
a. "K"Value: 0.33 at 75°F. oft
b. Maximum service temperature: 250°F.
C. Compressive strength: 100 psi.
d. Maximum Flame Spread: 5(ASTM E84).
e. Maximum Smoke Developed: 0(ASTM E84).
f. Absorption of Moisture: 0.2%(Surface Only). ww
g. Density: 8.0 lb./cu. ft.
h. Application: Adhere and seal with PC 88 Adhesive. Secure with 16 gauge *�
stainless steel wire with twisted ends on maximum 9 inch centers. Fittings shall
be covered with segmented sections of the molded pipe insulation to the same
thickness. Finish with field applied jacket.
7. Field Applied Jackets:
a. PVC Plastic Jacket: Manville Zeston 2000. One piece molded jacketing material
and fitting covers, gloss white,ASTM E84-25/50.
(1) Connections: Tacks; pressure sensitive, color-matching vinyl tape.
b. Fiberglass Cloth Jacket: UL Listed glass fabric, 6 oz./sq. yd., plain weave
presized with fire retardant cloth sizing,ASTM E84-25/50.
C. Canvas Jacket: UL listed fabric, 6 oz./sq. yd., plain weave cotton treated with
dilute,fire retardant lagging adhesive,ASTM E84-25/50.
d. Aluminum Jacket: 0.016 inch thick sheet, (smooth) (embossed) finish, with
longitudinal slip joints and 2 inch laps, die-shaped fitting covers with factory
attached protective liner.
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -84
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
2.57 INSULATION
A. Pipe Insulation
1. Manufacturers: Johns Manville Corporation; Armstrong World Industries, Inc.;
Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; ICA Hamfab; Pro-Tec-T-Kotes, Inc.; or approved
equal.
2. Glass Fiber: Manville Micro-Lok meeting ASTM C547; rigid molded, noncombustible.
a. "K"Value:0.23 at 75°F.
b. Maximum Service Temperature: 850°F.
ts!
C. Maximum Flame Spread: 25(ASTM E84).
d. Maximum Smoke Developed: 50(ASTM E84).
e. Vapor Barrier Jacket: AP-T PLUS white Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber
yarn and bonded to aluminum foil, secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps and
butt strips.
3. Fiberglass Pipe-Fitting Insulators: ICA Hamfab Precision Molded in identical half
sections to conform to the specific pipe fitting and in matching density and thickness of
the adjacent sectional fiberglass pipe covering.
a. "K"Value: 0.23 at 75°F.
b. Maximum Service Temperature: 850°F.
C. Maximum Flame Spread:25(ASTM E84).
FA d. Maximum Smoke Developed: 50(ASTM E84).
e. Vapor Barrier Jacket: Fiberglass Cloth with Vapor Seal Mastic or PVC Plastic
Jacket: Manville Zeston 2000,ASTM E84-25/50.
4. Hydrous Calcium Silicate: Manville Thermo-12 Gold ASTM C533; rigid molded pipe;
asbestos-free coded throughout material thickness and maintained throughout
temperature range.
a. "K'Value: 0.42 at 300°F.
b. Maximum Service Temperature: 1200°F.
C. Compressive Strength (block): Minimum of 160 psi to produce 5% compression
at 1-1/2"thickness.
d. Application: Secure with 16 gauge stainless steel wire with twisted ends on
maximum 9 inch centers. Fittings shall be covered with segmented sections of
the molded pipe insulation to the same thickness. Finish with field applied
jacket.
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -83
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
14. Over temperature protection.
15. Integral reactor to reduce the harmonics to the power line
16. Inherent short circuit protection.
17. LED inverter status indicators to facilitate start-up and maintenance.
G. The following items shall be mounted to the enclosure door:
1. 40 character plain English digital or LED display.
2. Power"ON"light.
3. Drive"TRIP"pilot light.
4. Manual/OFF/Automatic three position selector switch.
5. Manual speed control potentiometer.
6. Motor speed (RPM)or frequency.
7. Motor current or percent amps.
8. Door interlock disconnect switch.
9. Manual constant speed bypass switch with integral service switch to isolate drive from
bypass circuit when in service.
H. All accessories to be furnished by the drive manufacturer and shall be contained in a single
enclosure.
I. The services of the Field Service Engineer, in the regular employ of the variable speed
controller manufacturer, shall be provided for a minimum of one day for startup assistance and
training.
J. The variable speed controller shall be warranted by the manufacturer for a period of twenty-four
(24)months from the date of shipment. The Warranty shall include parts, labor, travel costs and
living expenses incurred by the manufacturer to provide factory authorized service.
1. The manufacturer shall warrant that power line noise shall be not more than 5 percent
harmonic distortion 16400 volt-microsecond commutation notch area, in accordance w
with IEEE Standard 519 (latest edition), Guide for Harmonic Control and Reactive
Compensation for Static Power Converters. If drive manufacturer cannot meet IEEE
519-5%THD,then line reactors shall be provided as a minimum.
2. The manufacturer shall provide RF/EMI filters to warrant that the variable speed
controller shall not emit either conducted or radiated RFI (radio frequency interference)
in excess of the limitations set forth in the FCC Rules and Regulations, Part 15, Subpart
J.
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -82
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
C. The inverter and any associated hardware shall be "run in' for a minimum of 8 hours at rated
load at the manufacturer's plant prior to shipment to minimize field startup and operational
problems. The variable speed controller and all associated hardware shall be tested to
ANSI/UL Standard 508 and listed by a nationally recognized testing agency. Units shall adhere
der to ISO 9001 standard testing procedure.
D. The drive system shall provide a near unity power factor throughout the speed range and a
minimum system efficiency (output shaft to input line) of 0.82 at 100 percent speed and 0.70 at
50 percent speed. Inverter shall convert volts as scheduled on drawings,three phase, 60 Hertz
AC power through a fixed voltage pulse width modulated output function to vary the speed of
the controlled motor in response to the control signal. The VFD shall employ a full wave rectifier
to prevent input line notching, DC bus choke, DC bus capacitors and insulated gate bipolar
transistors (IGBT's) as the output switching device. SCR's, GTO's and Darlington Transistors
are not acceptable. The inverter shall be rated for continuous duty at 12 Khz carrier frequency
per NEC Table 150 for the specified voltage. The inverter shall not create radio interference.
E. Input control to the variable speed controller shall be a 4 to 20 mA signal from the Automatic
Temperature Control System.
F. The inverter shall have inherent short circuit protection and shall be capable of withstanding: an
output phase to phase short circuit; a phase to ground short circuit; an inverter semi-conductor
short circuit; and a motor disconnect and/or power disconnect without causing a failure to the
inverter. The unit shall have:
1. Minimum and maximum speed adjustments. Minimum speed shall be adjustable to
1/10 of maximum speed.
2. Seven programmable preset speeds.
3. PI set point controller allowing a pressure or flow signal to be connected to the VFD.
4. Analog inputs capable of operating from 0-10 VDC or 0-20mA, or from a potentiometer
(1 K to 1 O ohms).
5. Programmable digital inputs.
6. Programmable digital outputs.
7. Two adjustable linear acceleration and deceleration ramps each separately adjustable
up to 1200 seconds.
8. A minimum of three (3) programmable critical frequency lockout ranges to prevent VFD
from continuously operating at an unstable speed.
9. Five automatic restarting of the inverter after a power outage or power dip. The number
of attempts and trial time shall be programmable.
10. Adjustable current limit.
+l
11. Adjustable carrier frequency to reduce motor noise.
12. Power loss ride through circuit.
13. Under voltage and over voltage protection.
on
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -81
W
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
G. Magnetic starters for all three phases motors under 20 horsepower at 200 volts and 40 ■
horsepower at 460 volts shall be of the full voltage type. Magnetic starters for all three phase
motors 40 horsepower and over shall be of the part winding, reduced voltage start, two (2)step
increment type. Magnetic starters for all two speed motors shall be dual contactor starters of
the type and arrangement to match the motor. All magnetic starters not integral with the
packaged equipment shall be a combination type with unfused disconnect switch furnished by
this Subcontractor. Magnetic starters shall not be smaller than NEMA Size 0. All magnetic
starters shall provide low voltage release and shall conform to the following:
1. Start/Stop momentary contact push-buttons shall be provided in the cover of all
manually controlled starters. Remote push-button stations with pilot lights shall be
provided as described in the control sequence description. Cover push-buttons shall be .�
omitted when remote push-button is provided.
2. HAND-OFF-AUTO selector switches shall be provided in the cover of all starters
automatically controlled and shall be wired so that all safety control devices are in the
control circuit in both the HAND and the AUTO position.
3. Two (2) pilot lights shall be provided in the cover of each starter unless a remote .w
start-stop push-button station is required. Green shall indicate"motor run"and red shall
indicate"motor stop".
4. Control voltage shall be 120 maximum voltage. Provide necessary control transformers
built in and wired within each starter enclosure. Transformer shall be of machine tool
quality with sufficient capacity to handle control circuit requirements, 50 VA minimum.
Transformer secondary shall be protected with coordinate time delay fuse.
5. Enclosures shall be NEMA 1, general purpose, unless required by location to be
otherwise. Refer to Electrical Floor Plans for actual location of starters.
H. Where time delay is specified, provide an industrial control relay with 5-180 second manually .R
adjustable delay.
I. Starters for single phase motors manually controlled shall be of the thermal toggle type with red .�
pilot light. Automatically controlled single phase motors may be controlled directly by the
automatic control device (thermostat, pressures switch, etc.) provided these devices have an
adequate ampere rating. Provide H-O-A selector switch with overload protection and red pilot
light for all automatically controlled motors. If the automatic control device does not have an
adequate ampere rating or if the motor is interlocked with another motor starter, provide a
magnetic starter with H-O-A selector switch and pilot light in cover.
2.56 VARIABLE SPEED CONTROLLERS
A. The variable speed controllers shall be of the PWM variable frequency inverter type together
with the necessary hardware to drive a standard alternating current induction motor with a
manual bypass switch to transfer operation of the motor from variable speed controller to
constant speed. The variable speed controller shall be as manufactured by Asea Brown Boveri
(ABB), Toshiba, Rockwell Automation, Saftronics, Siemens,Yaskawa or Square D.
aw
B. The variable speed controller shall be furnished in a NEMA 1 enclosure for three wire input
electrical connections, two sets of three output electrical connections and all components
properly segregated and completely enclosed in a single cabinet. The unit shall be UL listed
and shall meet the latest Standards of IEEE,ANSI and the National Electrical Code.
.w
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -80
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
a power factor rating at full load and at rated voltage of not less than 85 percent. Motors 40 HP,
460 volts, 3 phase, 60 Hertz and larger shall be part winding type for reducing voltage starting.
Two speed motors shall be single winding consequent pole type with variable torque. All VFD
motors shall be "Inverter Duty" with Class F insulation or better with cast iron construction,
NEMA Design B rating.
C. Motors less than 1/2 HP shall be capacitor start or split phase type, designed for 120 volt, single
phase,60 Hertz alternating current.
D. Provide single speed, open drip-proof electric motors, unless otherwise indicated, with at least
the following efficiencies.
Table of Minimum Motor Efficiencies
HP Open Drip-Proof(ODP) Totally Enclosed Fan-Cooled(TEFC)
1200 RPM 1800 RPM 3600 RPM 1200 RPM 1800 RPM 3600 RPM
1 82.5% 85.5% 77.0% 82.5% 85.5% 77.0%
1 '/ 86.5% 86.5% 84.0% 87.5% 86.5% 84.0%
2 87.5% 86.5% 85.5% 88.5% 86.5% 85.5%
3 88.5% 89.5% 85.5% 89.5% 89.5% 86.5%
5 89.5% 89.5% 86.5% 89.5% 89.5% 88.5%
71/2 90.2% 91.5% 88.5% 91.0% 91.7% 89.5%
10 91.7% 91.7% 89.5% 91.0% 91.7% 90.2%
15 91.7% 93.0% 90.2% 91.7% 92.4% 91.0%
20 92.4% 93.0% 91.0% 91.7% 93.0% 91.0%
25 93.0% 93.6% 91.70/. 93.0% 93.6% 91.7%
30 93.6% 94.1% 91.7% 93.0% 93.6% 91.7%
40 94.1% 94.1% 92.4% 94.1% 94.1% 92.40 0
50 94.1% 94.5% 93.0% 94.1% 94.5% 93.0%
60 94.5% 95.0% 93.6% 94.5% 95.0% 93.6%
" ! 75 94.5% 95.0% 93.6% 94.5% 95.4% 93.6%
100 95.0% 95.4% 93.6% 95.0% 95.4% 94.1%
125 95.0% 95.4% 94.1% 95.0% 95.4% 95.0%
150 95.4% 95.8% 94.1% 95.8% 95.8% 95.0%
200 95.4% 95.8% 95.0% 95.8% 96.2% 95.4%
E. Drives for belted motors shall be as manufactured by Dodge Manufacturing Company,
Browning Manufacturing Company or T.B.Woods Company with adjustable motor sheaves and
adjustable sliding bases. The drive belts shall be as short as practicable. V-belt drives for all
fans and fan units shall be sized for 150 percent of the design drive capacity. All multiple belt
drives shall have matched sets of belts.
F. All equipment shall be furnished complete with motors, drives and motor starters (except the
starters for those motors in the Equipment Rooms that are connected to the Motor Control
Centers shall be part of the Motor Control Centers provided by the Electrical Subcontractor.
Refer to the Electrical Drawings and Specifications for the motor starters involved). All
packaged equipment shall have motors, drives and starters installed pre-wired and tested at the
factory. In general, all three phase motors shall have magnetic starters with overload protection
of the ambient compensated thermal element type providing overcurrent running protection in
all three phases and all single phase motors shall have manual starters with thermal overload
elements. Thermal overload element for all motors shall be selected and sized to satisfy the
actual nameplate data of the motor rather than by use of NEMA horsepower/amperage
standard charts. All starters shall conform to the NEMA Industrial Control Standards and shall
be a product of one manufacturer, Cutler-Hammer, Square D,Arrow-Hart, or approved equal.
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -79
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
Northampton,MA
3. Fans noted to be spark resistant shall have non ferrous wheel and rubbing plate around
shaft constructed to meet Spark Resistant Classification Type B in accordance with
AMCA Standard A5401.
4. All corrosion resistant fans shall have wheel and inside of housing, including all parts in
contact with the air stream, coated with baked Heresite VR-500 coating.
B. Provide duct mounted direct driven and belt driven centrifugal fans of the in line type as shown
on the drawings. Fans shall be Greenheck, Loren Cook or Twin City and equal to Greenheck
Model DSQ, Model BSQ or Model BSQ-HP as applicable. All fans shall bear the AMCA
Certified Ratings Seal for both air and sound performance.
1. The fan housing shall be of the square design constructed of heavy gauge galvanized
steel and shall include square duct mounting collars. One side of the housing shall be
equipped with a hingeable service door assembly supporting the motor, drives, wheel
and inlet cone. The door assembly must be of sufficient size to permit easy access to
all interior components and must swing out for cleaning, inspection or service without
dismantling the fan.
2. The fan wheel shall be of the aluminum backward inclined, centrifugal type. Wheels
shall be dynamically and statically balanced and shall overlap the spun inlet venturi for
maximum performance.
3. Fan motors for direct drive fans shall be sealed ball bearing heavy duty motors for use
in air stream. The motor and drive for the belt driven fans shall be isolated from the air
stream. Motors shall be of the heavy duty type with permanently lubricated, sealed ball
bearings. The wheel shaft shall be mounted in heavy duty permanently sealed pillow
block bearings. Drives shall be sized for a minimum of 165 percent of driven
horsepower. The motor pulleys shall be adjustable for final system balancing.
4. Flexible wiring leads shall be provided from the fan motor to an external mounted
junction box and disconnect switch permitting access for service without disconnecting
the field wiring.
C. Provide ceiling box type in-line fans of the size and capacity shown complete with speed
control. Units shall be as manufactured by Greenheck, Loren Cook or Twin City equal to
Greenheck CSP units.
1. Cabinet shall be heavy gauge galvanized steel with 1/2 inch thick acoustical insulation.
Fan shall be forward curved centrifugal wheel direct drive with motor mounted on
resilient isolators.
2. Speed switch shall vary the fan speed from 50 to 100 percent and shall be installed at
the fan to adjust fan speed to obtain required fan performance.
2.55 MOTORS, DRIVES AND STARTERS w
A. All motors shall conform to NEMA Standards and shall be suitable for load, duty, service and
location. Motors shall have nameplates giving manufacturer's name, serial number,
horsepower, speed and current characteristics. Motors shall be General Electric,
Westinghouse, Reliance,Allis-Chalmers, Gould or approved equal.
B. Motors 1/2 HP and larger shall be squirrel cage induction or wound rotor induction type, ball or
roller bearings with pressure grease lubrication, specifically wound for 460 volts, 3 phase, 60
Hertz alternating current. All motors 5 horsepower and larger shall be energy efficient type with
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -78
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
Northampton,MA
C. The fan wheel for the direct drive units shall be mounted on and keyed to the motor shaft. For
direct drive units, the motor shall be mounted on rubber-in-shear vibration isolators. For belt
drive units, the entire drive assembly rigid frame shall be mounted on rubber-in-shear vibration
isolators.
D. Roof ventilators shall be either direct drive or V-belt drive with adjustable belt tension device and
permanently sealed pillow block ball bearings with minimum life of L-50,200,000 hours. Motors
and drives shall be isolated from the exhaust airstream. Air for cooling the motor shall be taken
into the motor compartment from a location free from discharge contaminants. Motors shall be
of the heavy duty type with permanently lubricated, sealed ball bearings. Motors shall be single
speed or two speed as shown. All two speed motors shall be full and half speed.
E. Provide for each unit an all welded prefabricated galvanized steel 18 inch high insulated roof
curb. Curb shall have raised cant for roof flashing with allowance made in the raised base for
the thickness of the roof insulation. Curb shall have wood nailer at top to attach roof flashing.
F. Motorized damper shall be pre-wired at the factory and shall be interlocked with fan for
operation.
2.53 GRAVITY ROOF VENTILATORS
A. Provide Greenheck, Loren Cook or Twin City gravity roof intake or exhaust ventilators as shown
on Drawings. Unit shall be similar and equal to Greenheck Type GRS or Fabra-Hood gravity
roof ventilators.
B. Ventilator shall be of the spun aluminum or sheet aluminum construction and shall have bird
�w screen. Provide for each unit an all welded prefabricated galvanized steel 18 inch high
insulated roof curb. Curb shall have raised cant for roof flashing with allowance made in the
raised base for the thickness of the roof insulation. Curb shall have wood nailer at top to attach
roof flashing.
C. All intake hoods shall be furnished with 1 inch foil faced back insulation under the hood to
prevent condensation.
D. Motorized damper shall be provided by the ventilator manufacturer.
2.54 EXHAUST FANS
A. Provide centrifugal type exhaust fans of the type, size and capacities shown. Fans shall be
manufactured by Greenheck, Barry Blower, Loren Cook or Twin City.
! ' 1. Fans shall be utility blower sets of arrangements shown on the Drawings, and shall
have a factory applied weatherproof finish. All fans shall have weatherproof housing for
motor and drive. Motor and drive shall be belt-driven with adjustable motor sheave and
belt guards. Motor nameplate shall exceed brake horsepower by a minimum of 15%.
2. Fan blades for centrifugal fans shall be forward curved for wheels 16 inches and
smaller, backward inclined for wheels below 27 inches in diameter, and air-foil type for
all fans with wheels 27 inches and above. Fans located on roof exposed to the weather
shall be Class 1, Arrangement No. 10 with weather hood. All discharge arrangements
for fans exposed to the weather other than Bottom Horizontal shall have drain hole in
bottom of scroll.
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -77
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
2.50 SQUARE AND RECTANGULAR CEILING DIFFUSERS
A. Provide Metal"Aire,Agitair or Price diffusers as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.
B. All square and rectangular supply air diffusers shall be aluminum and have induction air mixing
vanes similar and equal to Price Industries AMDEX or Agitair Type ARC. All diffuser patterns
shall be as shown or as required to fit air distribution pattern with portions of the neck blanked
off to give the proper air distribution pattern and to limit the maximum neck velocity to 500 fpm.
C. Diffusers shall be provided with integral duct collar to ensure air-tight and neat installation of
duct. (Duct to be mounted inside of diffuser collar)
D. Lay in applications shall be provided with 2'x2' lay in panel. Surface mounted applications in
plaster ceilings shall be provided with plaster frames.
E. All diffusers shall be finished with a cross linked acrylic powder coat. Coating shall be 2.0—3.0
Mils DFT and be rated for 500 Hour salt spray exposure.
2.51 LINEAR SUPPLY DIFFUSERS
A. Provide linear supply diffusers with factory furnished acoustically lined plenum as manufactured
by Price Model SDS, Tuttle and Bailey, Metal'Aire, or Krueger of the sizes shown on the
Drawings. Units shall consist of an adjustable air diffusion section of vanes to match the ceiling
grid with precisely dimensioned roll formed vanes to provide uniform air flow from each slot at
varying air quantities.
B. Diffuser plenums shall have a single inlet collar on the centerline of the plenum and shall have
hanger supports and security clips on each end supplied by the manufacturer to hold the
diffuser firmly against the supporting T-bar. External surfaces of the plenum shall be thermally
insulated with 1 inch fiberglass duct insulation and UL and NFPA approved.
C. Diffusers shall be constructed to maintain precise tolerances necessary for "Coanda Flow" to
prevent dumping. Diffusers shall be finished with a cross linked acrylic powder coat. Coating
shall be 2.0-3.0 Mils DFT and be rated for 500 Hour salt spray exposure, finish of the exposed
surfaces shall be provided of the same color as the ceiling grid. The roll formed vanes and
interior of the plenums shall be finished flat black.
2.52 POWER ROOF VENTILATORS
A. Provide Greenheck, Loren Cook or Twin City power roof ventilators as shown on the drawings.
Units shall be of spun aluminum construction. Units shall be similar and equal to Greenheck
Type G or GB for standard installation and similar and equal to Greenheck Type CUE or CUBE
for exhaust installations where exhaust air is directed away from the roof surface. Units shall be
furnished with 12 inch high galvanized steel insulated prefabricated curbs, motorized type
dampers, bird screen and disconnect switch within the housing which shall disconnect all power
leads to the motor and damper. Disconnect switch shall be factory mounted and wired to the
motor.
B. The fan housing shall be of heavy gauge aluminum mounted on a rigid support structure. The
shroud shall have a rolled bead for additional strength. The fan wheel and inlet cone shall be
aluminum and of the high performance, centrifugal blower type. Wheels shall overlap the spun
inlet venturi for maximum performance. Wheels shall be statically and dynamically balanced to
assure smooth and vibration free operation.
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -76
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
1. Electric actuators shall be UL864 labeled and UL555S qualified to 250°F, drawing no
more than 40 watts in the running or stalled position for 120 VAC actuators. Power
draw in excess of 1 AMP at any time is not acceptable.
�Jw E. All smoke dampers shall be installed in strict accordance with the UL approved installation
instructions provided by the damper manufacturer with the dampers.
2.48 SHEETMETAL ACCESS PANELS
A. Provide access panels/doors of the proper size and at all locations in ductwork necessary to
service fire dampers, smoke dampers, fusible links, automatic dampers, control devices, fan
bearings and as required to service all systems. One inch insulated access doors in ducts shall
be Buckley Model H-10(single cam and hinge)as manufactured by Buckley Associates.
B. Access door panels shall be constructed from 24-Gauge Steel (22 Gauge on 14 x 14 and
larger). Both the frame where it meets the duct and the door where it meets the frame shall be
gasketed with 1/8 inch Neoprene to prevent leakage. Half-inch access doors or those without
gasketing on both sides of the door are unacceptable.
! " 2.49 ACCESS PANELS
A. Furnish access panels for access to all concealed parts of the HVAC systems that require
Im accessibility for the proper operation and maintenance of the system.
B. Size shall be sufficient for the purpose, but no less than 12 inches by 18 inches. Particular
attention shall be exercised in the selection of doors for masonry walls in order that frame sizes
used will match the courses of brick or block.
C. Access doors shall be prime coated of rust inhibitive paint, continuous hinge and manufactured
FX by Inland Steel Products Company "Milcor, Miami-Carey or Walsh-Hannon-Gladwin,
Incorporated"Way Loctor. Type shall be based upon"Milcor"as follows:
1. Suspended Drywall Ceilings: Style ATR with 16 gauge frame, 18 gauge panel and
flush screwdriver operated cam locks.
2. Plastered Walls and Ceilings: Style K with 16 gauge frame, 14 gauge panel and flush
screwdriver operated cam locks.
3. Masonry Non-Rated Walls: Style M with 16 gauge frame, 14 gauge panel and flush
screwdriver operated cam locks.
4. Fire Rated Walls and Ceilings: Style UFR fire rated with UL 1-1/2 hour"B" rating, 16
gauge frame, 20 gauge sandwich type insulated panel, self-latching lock having interior
release mechanism, and key operated cylinder lock keyed as required to suit
requirements of the Architect.
5. Non-rated Drywall Walls: Style DW with 16 gauge frame, 14 gauge panel, and
screwdriver operated cam locks.
6. Access panels located in wet or humid areas shall be stainless steel.
D. Point out to the Ceiling Subcontractor exactly which tile units are to be marked with a colored
button to indicate equipment above.
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -75
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
2.46 FIRE DAMPERS
A. Provide horizontal and vertical UL labeled fire dampers as manufactured by Buckley, Ruskin,
Air Balance or Prefco, Style B.Assembly shall be of the fully enclosed type with duct collars and
fire dampers that consists of formed steel blades with 100 percent interlocking joints to form a
continuous steel curtain when closed. Assembly shall be suitable for horizontal and vertical air
flow as required. Damper shall meet NFPA 90A requirements.
B. Provide 16 gauge galvanized steel duct sleeves for dampers in ducts with maximum height
dimension 24 inches and maximum width dimension of 36 inches and 14 gauge sleeves for
larger ducts. Depth of sleeve shall be sufficient to install perimeter angles attached to the sleeve
on both sides of the wall or floor openings as required by current UL-555. Fire dampers shall be
installed in sleeves or in housings of 16 gauge or 14 gauge as applicable. Sleeves and
housings shall be constructed and installed in accordance with SMACNA "Fire, Smoke and
Radiation Damper Installation Guide for HVAC Systems", Case 2 or Case 3 of Figure 5 and
Case 2 or Case 3 of Figure 6. Connection of duct to the fire damper enclosure or housing shall
be rigid and sealed airtight.
C. Fire dampers shall be designed and constructed so that the blade stack in the open damper
position is completely outside of the air stream.
D. Where duct pass through fire walls or partitions, the spaces around the duct sleeves shall have
the necessary clearance for expansion in conformance with the UL approval. Installation shall
conform to all current UL-555 requirements.
E. Provide access panels in duct and the ceiling or wall as applicable for each fire damper location. u.
F. Dynamic dampers minimum velocity ratings per UL 555 shall be 2000 FPM.
G. Dynamic fire dampers shall be used in all applications except in wall transfer ducts.
2.47 SMOKE DAMPERS
A. Furnish and install where shown on the plans smoke dampers utilizing multiblade type
construction. All smoke dampers shall be UL555S Classified and Labeled for Class I leakage at
250°F with no more leakage than 4 CFM per square foot at one inch. The dampers shall meet
all of the requirements per the current Edition of NFPA 90A and the current Edition of NFPA
92A.
B. All blade seals shall be mechanically fastened glue on or grip tight seals are not acceptable.
C. All smoke dampers shall utilize an operator incorporating the following features:
1. Extended shaft drive for external actuator attachment.
2. Mechanical knee lock to prevent opening of damper blades due to hose stream or other
external forces.
D. Actuators shall be furnished by the damper manufacturer for all smoke dampers. Actuators will
be furnished/mounted and tested by the damper manufacturer. *!
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -74
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
2.43 ACOUSTICAL DUCT LINING
- A. Provide Owens-Corning, Knauf or Pittsburgh Corning acoustical duct lining with a minimum
density of 2 pounds per cubic foot as shown and as specified. The duct size shown on
drawings shall be the net inside dimensions after lining is in place.
B. Lining in ducts shall be one inch thick, similar and equal to Owens-Corning Fiberglass
"Aeroflex" Duct Liner. Lining shall be adhered to all interior surfaces of duct with Benjamin
Foster 85-15, or equal adhesive. In addition, top sections over 12 inch wide and sides over 24
inch high shall have pin type Stic-Klips located not more than 16 inch on center. Pins shall be
sheared off close to washer after assembly. Seal all joints, seams and edges with glass tape
and adhesive.
C. Medium pressure supply ductwork utilizing acoustical duct lining shall have a perforated metal
inner liner one gauge less than the outer wall of the duct. All medium pressure supply ductwork
shall be acoustically lined for a distance of 30 feet from discharge of the roof top unit.
2.44 PREFABRICATED SOUND ATTENUATORS
A. Prefabricated sound attenuators shall be of rectangular modular construction, with acoustic filler
encased in center splitter baffles and in outer side baffles. Outer casings shall be made of no
less than 22-gauge galvanized sheet. Seams shall be lock-formed and mastic filled.
Construction shall be airtight, so that there shall be no leakage or structural failure when an air
pressure differential of 8 inch W.G. is imposed across the outer casing. Sound attenuators shall
be equal to Quiet-Ducts as manufactured by Industrial Acoustics Company, Vibro-Acoustics or
AeroSonics.
B. Acoustic filler shall be glass fiber, packed under compression to eliminate voids due to vibration
or settling and shall be inert, vermin proof, and moisture proof. Its combustion rating shall not
be less than the following, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84: Flamespread
Classification-25, Smoke Development-15, Fuel Contribution-20.
C. Acoustic ratings shall be based on duct-to-reverberant room tests providing separate test
ratings for both Forward Flow and Reverse Flow with airflow of at least 2000 fpm face velocity.
Ratings must be published factory certified catalog values. Test procedure shall eliminate all
effects due to end reflection, directivity, flanking transmission, standing waves, and test
chamber sound absorption. Aerodynamic ratings shall be in accordance with ASME and AMCA
codes.
2.45 DAMPERS AND SPLITTERS
! " A. Provide manual volume dampers in all low pressure supply, return and exhaust ducts as shown
and required with indicating and locking quadrants to properly balance the air supply, return and
exhaust systems. Dampers shall be two (2) gauges heavier than the ducts in which they are
installed. Damper blades shall be riveted to the supporting rods. Cast or malleable brackets
riveted to the sides of the duct shall be used to support the damper positioned rod.
B. Provide a manual opposed blade volume damper in each supply, return and exhaust branch
duct from the associated main duct and in each runout to each supply and return diffuser and
register for primary air balance. (Provide a single blade butterfly type damper in the runout duct
at the takeoff from the main or branch for each round neck diffuser.) All volume dampers shall
have position indicators and locking quadrants.
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -73
w
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
P. During construction, all openings in ductwork shall be covered to prevent entrance of foreign
material.
2.40 BELLMOUTH TAKE-OFFS
A. Contractor shall provide Buckley Bellmouth Take-offs at all branch duct locations.
B. Bellmouth fitting shall be Model BMD with damper. In areas where sufficient duct height is not
available, the Contractor shall provide the Buckley Mini-Mouth fitting, M-BMD with damper, or
the flat oval Bellmouth, Model FOBMD with damper.
C. Bellmouths shall be constructed of heavy-duty galvanized steel. Bellmouths shall include an .�
air-tight Neoprene gasket to ensure a tight fitting with minimal leakage. Pre-drilled holes shall be
provided for quick mounting. Bellmouth shall be as manufactured by Buckley Associates Sheet
Metal Workers Local 17.
D. Standard damper hardware to be constructed of 26 gauge galvanized material with a quadrant
damper and tight fitting gasketing to ensure minimal leakage at damper pivot points.
E. Optional heavy-duty hardware shall be provided at locations of higher static pressure where
shown on the Drawings.
F. Ninety degree take-offs are not permitted on this project.
2.41 FLEXIBLE DUCT
A. Provide Flexmaster Type 2, or approved equal, insulated flexible duct at the connection of
medium pressure duct to terminal units consisting of trilaminate of aluminum foil, fiberglass and
aluminized polyester to prevent tearing and running of the product. The fabric material shall be
mechanically locked to the outside helix. (Use of adhesives to lock the fabric in place is
unacceptable.) Flexible duct shall be listed by UL under UL 181 Standards as Class 1 air duct
and shall be rated for 12 inches positive pressure and 10 inches negative pressure in sizes from
4 inch to 16 inch diameter. Flex duct shall be constructed in accordance with NFPA Standards
90A and 90B. It shall have a smoke/flame spread rating of 50/25. Insulated flex duct shall have �..
a gray fire retardant polyethylene outer jacket with a 1/2 pound, density - 1-1/2 inch thick
fiberglass insulation blanket, factory wrapped. Flexible duct shall be run straight, have no
bends or kinks and shall be pulled taut. Lengths shall be not less than 8 inches or more than 18
inches. Flexible duct shall be similar and equal to Flexmaster Type 2 as manufactured by
Buckley Associates.
2.42 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS
A. Furnish flexible duct connections between all ducts and fans or fan units mounted or suspended
using external vibration isolators and/or restraints. Fans and fan units having internal isolators
and/or restraints shall not have flexible duct connections. Flexible connections shall be �.
Ventglass. Width of connecting flexible material shall be not less than four(4) inches with three
(3) inch wide metal edges and double lock hem between fabric and metal. A minimum of one
(1) inch spacing shall be allowed between the fan or fan unit connections and the duct.
B. For areas of low sound transmission, as shown on the Drawings, the flexible connection
material shall be FerroCoustifab mass loaded fiberglass reinforced vinyl fabric with a weight of
one(1)pound per square foot.
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -72
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
Northampton,MA
spacing of 3-1/4inches as shown in SMACNA Manual Figure 2-3. Vaned elbows shall be
avoided in all Pressure Classifications above 2".
G. All round ducts through 36 inches in diameter and all flat oval ducts through 48 inches wide
shall be constructed of spiral lock seam or approved equal construction. All round duct 37
inches in diameter and over and all flat oval ducts over 48 inches wide shall be of welded joint
construction.
H. All round and oval conduit fittings shall be equal to United States Metal Corporation Spiral Uni-
Seal fittings for use with the conduit. Use conical tees and laterals where shown. Special
fittings shall be used as shown to give even air flow with minimum pressure drop. Ninety
degree elbows shall be die-formed p to and including 8 inch diameter and five (5) piece for 9
inch diameter and larger. Forty five degree elbows shall be die-formed up to and including 8
inch diameter and three(3) piece for 9 inch diameter and larger.
1. Transitions in duct mains and branches shall be made with sides sloping at not more than 1
inch in 7 inches on the side of the transformation for diverging transitions and 1 inch in 4 inches
for converging transitions. Transitions in ductwork to pieces of equipment(coils,filter boxes, air
handling unit intakes, etc.) shall be made with a 20° maximum angle projected from the duct
side on a diverging transition and a 30° maximum angle projected from the straight duct side on
a converging transition. Any conditions requiring deviations from the above shall be brought to
the attention of the Architect for approval.
J. All notches for connecting sections of duct, including longitudinal seam notches, shall not be cut
any deeper than 1-7/8 inch to ensure tight corners in a 2 inch deep slip joints. Any notched
corners not meeting with the approval of the Architect shall be removed and reinstalled or
sealed to the satisfaction of the Architect.
K. All joints and seams in duct, either shop or field, shall be sealed in accordance with Table 1-2 of
the SMACNA"HVAC Duct Construction Standards". Sealer shall be Hardcast 321 water based
sealant, or other approved equal having a VOC content less than 75 GPL compliant with Green
Seal Standard GC-36 and South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule #
1168. Sealer shall be applied to ends of round duct prior to assembly, to the inside of double
Pittsburgh seams before closing and to ends of ducts and cleanouts and/or slips before joining
rectangular ducts. Slips shall be at least two (2) gauges heavier than the duct and all joints
must be made in a neat and workmanlike manner and in all cases joints must be tight. Sealer
shall be used in the attachment of reinforcing or flange angles.
L. Reinforcing angles for galvanized duct shall be galvanized and shall be attached to ducts with
sheet metal screws or rivets 6 inches on center.
M. If companion angles are used, a neoprene gasket shall be used between angles. Companion
angles shall be used to join ducts of different material.
N. All slip cleats or round duct joint connectors shall be sealed with sealer specified above and
fastened with sheet metal screws on 6 inch centers. After twenty-four(24) hours, al joints shall
have a second coat of sealer.
O. Test all duct systems of 4" Pressure Classification and above. Sections to be tested shall be
designated by the Design Engineer on the Reviewed Duct Layout and Fabrication Drawings for
the systems. Testing procedures shall be as outlined in the"HVAC Duct Leakage Test Manual"
as published by SMACNA. If defective metal work is cause of leak, metal work shall be
replaced or repaired. Connection and seam shall be resealed with sealer without pressure on
duct and after twenty-four(24)hours shall be retested.
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -71
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
galvanized steel of lock forming grade conforming to ASTM A653 and A924 Standards unless
otherwise specified.
B. Chemical Storage, Waster Storage and Fume hood exhaust ductwork shall be 18 gauge, type
304 stainless steel from all laboratory hoods and canopy type hoods to the exhaust and from
the exhaust fans through all discharge extensions. The duct shall be constructed to the Static
Pressure Classification equal to the Static Pressure across the fan connected to the System.
All duct connections and joints shall be made air and water tight. .�
C. Miscellaneous Security Rooms as indicated on the Drawings. Miscellaneous Openings: All
vents, ducts and similar openings into closed areas that measure in excess of 96 square inches
and over 6 inches in their smallest dimension must be protected with either '/2 inch diameter ws
steel bars with a maximum space of 6 inches between the bars; grills consisting of 18-gauge
expanded metal, wire mesh; or an equivalent gauge commercial metal duct barrier. The
barriers must be secured to preclude removal from outside the area, and the method of
installation must ensure that classified material cannot be removed through the openings with
the aid of any type of instrument. A barrier will not be required if an approved IDS provides
protection of the opening.
D. Vault Room - Miscellaneous Openings: Omission of all miscellaneous openings is desirable,
but not mandatory. Openings of such size and shape as to permit unauthorized entry, (normally
in excess of 96 square inches in area and over 6 inches in its smallest dimension)and openings
for ducts, pipes, registers, sewers and tunnels shall be equipped with man-safe barriers such as .,.
wire mesh, 18-gauge expanded metal, or rigid metal bars of at least 1/2 inch in diameter
extending across their width with a maximum space of 6 inches between the bars. The rigid
metal bars shall be securely fastened at both ends to preclude removal and, if the bars exceed
18 inches in length, shall have crossbars to prevent spreading. Where wire mesh, expanded
metal, or rigid metal bars are used, care shall be exercised to ensure that classified material
within the vault cannot be removed with the aid of any type of instrument. Pipes and conduits
entering the vault shall enter through walls that are not common to the vault and the structure w
housing the vault. Preferably such pipes and conduits should be installed when the vault is
constructed. If this is not practical,they shall be carried through snug-fitting pipe sleeves cast in
the concrete. After installation, the annular space between the sleeve and the pipe or conduit
shall be caulked solid with lead, wood, waterproof(silicone) caulking, or similar material, which w
will give evidence of surreptitious removal.
E. Ductwork, except where specified otherwise herein, shall be fabricated in accordance with the
"HVAC Duct construction Standards" published by the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning "•"
Contractors National Association, Incorporated. The gauge of all ducts shall be as listed in the
SMACNA Standard. For rectangular duct the use of"Ductmate"flange transverse joints will be
allowed. Submit shop standard booklet indicating the Static Pressure Classification for each �.
portion of each system and showing the types of joints and the various items and sheet metal
appurtenances to be employed for this project. Provide 3/8" scale Duct System Layout and
Fabrication Drawings for all of the systems. These drawings may be used for Coordination
Drawings. �.
F. All elbows and offsets shall be fabricated with inside radius equal to the dimension of the duct in
the plane of the elbow or offset. Where elbows may be required to have shorter radius, they
shall be constructed with full curvature turning vanes spaced to divide the elbow into air
passages that have equal CURVE RATIOS. Short radius elbows: with outside radius of less
than 20 inches shall have one (1) inner splitter; with outside radius of less than 36 inches and
more than 20 inches shall have two (2) inner splitters; and with outside radius of more than 36
inches shall have three (3) inner splitters. Inside radius shall not be less than 4 inches. Where
square heeled vane elbows are shown, the vanes shall be single thickness and shall have a
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -70
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
40 required fusing for fan motor and coil. Provide 24 volt secondary transformer for control voltage.
Terminal strip in control box shall have connectors for field wiring of controls and power source.
K. Terminal unit control panel shall have factory mounted disconnect switch and control power
transformer as required. All devices such as the differential sensor transducer, duct sensors,
velocity controller, transformers, damper actuator and motor, and all other components to meet
the described sequence shall be provided, mounted and wired by the terminal unit manufacturer
as an integral part of the terminal unit. All electrical components shall be mounted in the panel
with an easily removable cover. Units shall incorporate a single point electrical connection for
277/480 volt power source. Provide all required fusing for fan motor and coil. Provide 277 volt
to 24 volt secondary transformer for control voltage. Terminal strip in control box shall have
connectors for field wiring of controls and power source.
L. The unit manufacturer shall furnish certified sound data for both casing discharge and radiated
sound levels as tested in a certified laboratory in strict accordance with ARI Test Standard 880
so and shall include 2nd through 7th octave band data for all unit sizes. Sound levels shall not
exceed those scheduled.
M. All constant air volume primary air valves shall deliver air flow to within 5 percent of the
qW specified maximum and minimum air flows independent of system static pressure changes.
Performance of units shall be based on tests conducted in accordance with ARI Standard 880.
2.38 GAS-FIRED UNIT HEATER
A. Provide Reznor, Modine, Rupp, Lennox or approved equal high efficiency gas fired unit heater
equal to Reznor Venturion UDAS Indoor Separated Combustion Gas Fired Unit Heater as
W shown on the Drawings. Unit shall be designed to incorporate a factory installed power center,
metered combustion air, sealed vent product collection chamber and an intermittent spark
ignited pilot. Unit shall bear the AGA Label.
B. Unit shall be equipped for use with natural gas and 120 volt, single phase power. The heat
exchanger shall be stainless steel. Burners shall be die formed aluminized steel and shall have
flared ports with a stainless steel burner insert.
C. Unit shall be provided with a 24 volt control transformer, a single stage gas control system with
a regulated combination redundant gas valve and an intermittent spark pilot with electronic
flame supervision and timed lockout. The unit shall include all limit and safety controls,
including a combustion air pressure switch to verify proper vent flow before allowing operation
of the gas valve. Provide a 24 volt fan relay to interlock fan starter with duct furnace control
circuit to energize the fan motor when the temperature of the heat exchanger rises and de-
energize the fan motor after the burner has been de-energized by the thermostat and the heat
in the heat exchanger has been dissipated. Refer to Automatic Temperature Control Sequence
of Operation Paragraph.
W D. Unit shall be arranged for ceiling suspension with threaded hanger connections. The cabinet
shall be constructed of cold rolled steel and finished with baked enamel.
2.39 SHEETMETAL DUCTWORK
A. Furnish all sheet metal ductwork constructed to the Static Pressure Class as described herein
for the various supply, return and exhaust air systems. Ductwork of 1" Pressure Classification
shall be considered as all ductwork on the room side of all terminal units. All other supply,
return and exhaust air duct other than those specified below shall be 2" Pressure Classification.
The supply air duct from the supply unit to the terminal units shall be 4" Pressure Classification.
All sheet metal ductwork and sheet metal plenums shall be constructed of G-60 coated
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -69
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
ensure a tight seal. Air volume damper shall be constructed to prevent air leakage in excess of .w
two percent of rated air quantity at 3 inch inlet static pressure. Casing shall be sealed to
prevent air leakage of more than two percent of rated capacity at 1 inch inlet static pressure.
D. Fans shall be forward curved centrifugal type with direct drive permanent split capacitor type
motor and electronic speed controller. Full load amp rating shall not exceed those shown on
the schedule. Fan and motor assembly shall be vibration isolated from the casing to minimize
vibration transmission.
E. Fan terminals shall include an induction port sound baffle insulated with 2" acoustical insulation
which meets all requirements of UL 181 and NFPA 90A. Induction port baffle shall be
constructed of not less than 20 gauge zinc-coated steel and shall be designed to be an integral
part of the fan terminal construction.
F. The unit shall have a primary air volume regulator provided with an electronic sensor or an
amplifying center averaging differential pressure sensing device to compensate for distorted air "
flow conditions at the unit inlet(sensor shall provide accuracy within 5%with a 90° sheet metal
elbow directly at the inlet). Damper operators, volume regulations, flow controllers and
necessary relays shall be factory installed electric and analog electronic type calibrated and A
thoroughly tested for proper performance at the factory. The damper operator shall be capable
of two position and floating control, reversible rotation designed to stall indefinitely without
damage and shall have a three year warranty. The damper shall be controlled to provide
pressure independent proportional variable volume control of the air volume being supplied
from the unit within the limits shown on the Drawings. A field adjustable set point shall
determine the minimum and maximum primary air flow limits set at the thermostat. A curve of
voltage versus primary CFM shall be provided to set primary airflow limits. All primary airflow
adjustments shall be located at the terminal unit manufacturer provided thermostats. All units
serving perimeter areas shall have an output for controlling radiation heating control valves
through the same thermostat.
G. Terminal units shall be hard wired to the rooftop unit morning warm up control panel or through
the DDC system and reverse the operation of the damper for morning warm-up. When
occupied set point is reached, the rooftop unit shall send a signal that the entering air
temperature has changed, and revert the unit to its normal variable air volume control between
the minimum and maximum design conditions.
H. An airflow pressure switch shall sense when the main air handling unit shuts down,
automatically switching the terminal unit to night setback mode, de-energizing the terminal unit
fan and closing the primary air damper. When the main air handling unit is activated, the air
flow pressure switch shall sense main air handling unit fan operation and the thermostat set
point shall be set to the daytime temperature. All thermostats shall be provided by the terminal ..
unit manufacturer. Refer to "AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS" to ensure that the
sequence for the control of the heating is compatible with the equipment provided.
I. Terminal units shall include a hot water coil where indicated on the Drawings. Coil shall be
attached to the terminal and shall be easily accessible for maintenance and cleaning. Coils
enclosed in the terminal shall be provided with an access door. Coil shall be constructed of
aluminum fins mechanically fixed to copper tubes for maximum heat transfer. Coils capacities
shall be as scheduled on the Drawings. +�*
J. Terminal unit control panel shall have factory mounted disconnect switch and control power
transformer as required. Controls shall be factory mounted and wired. All electrical
components shall be mounted in the panel with an easily removable cover. Units shall
incorporate a single point electrical connection for 277/480 volt power source. Provide all
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -68
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
F. Terminal units shall include a hot water coil where indicated on the Drawings. Coil shall be
factory attached to the terminal and shall include an access door upstream for maintenance and
cleaning. Coil shall be constructed of aluminum fins mechanically fixed to copper tubes for
maximum heat transfer. Coils capacities shall be as scheduled on the Drawings.
G. Terminal unit control panel shall have factory mounted disconnect switch and control power
transformer with 24 volt secondary and primary voltage as specified herein. All devices such as
the differential sensor transducer, duct sensors, velocity controller, transformers, damper
actuator, staging contactor for electric coil, and all other components to meet the described
sequence shall be provided, mounted and wired by the terminal unit manufacturer as an integral
part of the terminal unit. All electrical components shall be mounted in the panel with an easily
removable cover. Units shall incorporate a single point electrical connection for specified volt
power source. Terminal strip in control box shall have connectors for field wiring of controls and
power source.
H. The unit manufacturer shall furnish certified sound data for both casing discharge and radiated
sound levels as tested in an ARI certified laboratory in strict accordance with ARI Test Standard
880 and shall include 2nd through 7th octave band data for all unit sizes. Sound levels shall not
exceed those scheduled.
I. All variable air volume terminal units shall be pressure independent and shall deliver air flow to
within 5 percent of the specified maximum and minimum air flows independent of system static
pressure changes. Performance of units shall be based on tests conducted and certified in
accordance with ARI Standard 880.
2.37 FAN POWERED CONSTANT AIR VOLUME TERMINAL UNITS
A. Provide single duct series flow constant air volume fan powered primary air and recirculation air
terminal units of sizes and capacities as shown on the Drawings. Terminals shall be constructed
of galvanized steel. Internal surfaces shall be thermally and acoustically insulated. The fan
terminal casing shall be constructed in a manner to provide a single discharge opening for
cooling, blending and heating. Unit shall have a filter rack with 1 inch thick disposable filters on
the plenum air inlet to the mixing chamber of the unit. Units shall be as manufactured by Price
Industries(Genesis), Enviro-Tec CFQR,Titus(Fantom)or Krueger KQFS.
B. Unit shall be constructed of not less than 20 gauge galvanized steel with round or oval inlet
collars of the proper diameter and a discharge with rectangular slip and drive opening. Units
shall be internally reinforced and gusseted. All terminal units' internal lining shall be attached
and reinforced with 1" -4 PCF non-porous scrim stitched foil faced fiber board. Insulation shall
be provided for requirements of high indoor air quality standards and hospital institutions.
Fabric shall be attached with flame resistant adhesive or stick pin construction. The material
must comply with UL 181, NFPA 90-A, and shall meet bacteriological standard ASTM C665 for
mold resistance and burning characteristics, ASTM E84 for flame spread and smoke
developed. All insulation edges must be mechanically fixed to the box casing at all seams
utilizing full length metal caps. Access doors shall be provided on all four sides and shall form a
positive seal when in the closed position. One door shall be positioned directly under the fan
assembly and heating coil, another door directly below the unit primary air valve and doors on
each side for fan access. Doors shall have tool free snap latches. Casing to be field reversible
so left or right hand inlet/motor configurations can be achieved in the field by rotating unit upside
down.
C. Primary volume control damper shall be either single or multiblade with an equivalent of 14
"! gauge steel, designed to operate through a 45 or 900 arc. Damper shaft shall be solid steel with
position mark on shaft end. The damper shall rotate in (minimum 3) polyethylene bearings for
noiseless operation with no lubrication. Blade shall close against a closed cell gasket seat to
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -67
w.
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA �"'
of the rooftop unit. Refer to vibration isolation and seismic restraints section for curb ■•
requirements.
2.36 VARIABLE AIR VOLUME TERMINAL UNITS ""
A. Provide single duct, pressure independent variable air volume terminal units of sizes and
capacities as shown on the Drawings. Terminals shall be constructed of galvanized steel.
Internal surfaces shall be thermally and acoustically insulated. Units shall be as manufactured
by Price Industries, Metal"Aire, Environmental Technologies, Tuttle&Bailey, Titus, or Krueger.
B. Unit shall be constructed of not less than 20 gauge galvanized steel primary side with round or .m
oval inlet collars of the proper diameter and a 22 gauge discharge with rectangular opening. All
terminal unit internal lining shall be attached and reinforced with 5/8"-4 PCF non-porous scrim
stitched foil faced fiber board. Insulation shall be provided for requirements of high indoor air
quality standards and hospital institutions. Fabric shall be attached with flame resistant
adhesive. The material must comply with UL 181, NFPA 90-A, and shall meet bacteriological
standard ASTM C665 for mold resistance and burning characteristics, ASTM E84 for flame
spread and smoke developed. All insulation edges must be mechanically fixed to the box „
casing at all seams utilizing full length metal caps. A metal liner is also an equivalent substitute.
Units with an access door must maintain the same construction specifications on the door and
opening.
C. Air volume control damper shall be either single or multiblade with an equivalent of 14 gauge
steel, designed to operate through a 45 or 90° arc. Damper shaft shall be solid steel with
position mark on shaft end. The damper shall rotate in (minimum 3) polyethylene bearings for
noiseless operation with no lubrication. Blade shall close against a closed cell gasket seat to
ensure a tight seal. Air volume damper shall be constructed to prevent air leakage in excess of
two percent of rated air quantity at 3 inch inlet static pressure. Casing shall be sealed to
prevent air leakage of more than two percent of rated capacity at 1 inch inlet static pressure. ..
D. Damper operators, volume regulators, flow controllers and necessary relays shall be factory
installed electric and analog electronic type, calibrated and thoroughly tested for proper
performance. The damper operator shall be capable of two position and floating control, .�
reversible rotation, designed to stall indefinitely without damage and shall have a three year
warranty. The damper shall be controlled through an electronic thermostat furnished by the unit
manufacturer to provide pressure independent variable volume control of the air volume being
supplied from the unit within the CFM limits shown on the Drawings. The air flow sensed at the
unit shall be altered by the transducer output through thermal dissipation, representing a
change in air flow. This electronic signal shall be compared to a signal developed from a
thermistor in the electronic thermostat to open the damper to maximum set point to provide w
cooling as necessary to maintain space temperature. Field adjustable set points shall
determine the minimum air flow limits set at the thermostat. A curve of voltage versus CFM
shall be provided to set air flow limits. All airflow adjustments shall be located at the terminal
unit manufacturer provided thermostats. Refer to the control sequence specified under wto
"AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS" paragraph to ensure that the sequence for the
control of the heating coil is compatible with the equipment provided.
E. Terminal units shall be hard wired to the rooftop unit morning warm up control panel or through
the DDC system and reverse the operation of the damper for morning warm-up. When
occupied set point is reached, the rooftop unit shall send a signal that the entering air
temperature has changed, and revert the unit to its normal variable air volume control between
the minimum and maximum design conditions.
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -66
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
Northampton, MA
11. Use a 3K ohm thermistors to read air, water and surface temperatures. A 3K ohm
thermistor is a description of its resistance reading at 77°F(25 0C). A thermistor resistor
characteristic is such that as the temperature decreases the resistance increases, and
as the temperature increases,the resistance decreases.
12. A unit mounted, static pressure transducer converts the duct static pressure to an
electrical signal for the controller. The transducer uses 24 VAC to power its operation
and it provides a 0 - 5 VDC signal directly proportional to its pressure range. The
installing Contractor is required to provide tubing, and pipe the transducer to the static
pressure sensing probe. The static pressure sensing probe shall be located according
to the mechanical designers' recommendations, typically 2/3 down the longest duct
trunk. The following is the pressure range used on this Specification: 0 - 5"w.c. Duct
Static Pressure.
13. This is a description of the control sequence and how the inputs and outputs will be
+o configured. The Keypad will allow for the following modes of operation:
a. Off Mode: In Off Mode,the unit is shutdown.
b. Time Clock Mode: In Time Clock Mode, the unit will switch between occupied
and unoccupied operation via the unit's time schedule.
C. Remote Start/Stop Mode: In Remote Start/Stop Mode, the unit switches
between occupied and unoccupied operation via a field supplied signal.
d. Occupied Mode: In Occupied Mode, the unit is shutdown. The unit may be
started by the remote start/stop signal.
e. Unoccupied Mode: In Unoccupied Mode, the unit is shutdown. The unit may be
started by the remote start/stop signal.
Refer to the"Automatic Temperature Control Sequence of Operation".
P. Smoke Detector
1. Unit shall be provided with a smoke detector(s)sensing in the:
(A) return air; (B) supply air; or(C) both the return &supply air portion of the unit wired
to shut off the unit control circuit.
Q. Power Option
1. Unit shall be provided with a factory installed and wired internal disconnect.
2. Unit shall be provided with phase and brown-out protection to shut down all motors in
the unit if the phases are more than 10% out of balance on voltage, or the voltage is
more than 10% under design voltage or on phase reversal.
3. Unit shall be provided with a factory installed and wired 115 volt, 15 amp ground fault
service receptacle powered with a 1.5 KVA transformer.
4. Unit shall be provided with a factory installed and field wired 115 volt, 15 amp ground
op fault service receptacle.
R. Vibration Isolation Roof curbs shall be constructed of galvanized steel. 24" high Curb to be fully
gasketed between the curb top and unit bottom with the curb providing full perimeter support,
cross structure support and air seal for the unit. Curb gasketing shall be furnished within the
control compartment of the rooftop unit to be mounted on the curb immediately before mounting
�w
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -65
so
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
4. The above components shall be in addition to electrical components associated with
other sections, which shall be incorporated in the main control panel to facilitate
maintenance and trouble-shooting.
5. The controller will have a minimum of 64k of battery backed RAM, a battery backed
clock, a communication port for EIA-232C and for EIA-485, and a keypad display port.
The controller input and output minimum configuration will be as follows:
-16 Analog Inputs
-Digital Inputs and up to 24 Digital Outputs.
-The controller power transformer is a 120 VAC to 20 VAC center tapped transformer.
6. The keypad display consists of two-line, total 32 character backlit super-twist Liquid
Crystal Display (LCD) and a 12 key keypad. The keypad display can be used to set
time schedules, increment/decrement setpoints, read and clear faults/alarms and
monitor unit operations. The keypad shall be mounted within the control panel to
protect it from damage and tampering.
7. The board conditions these signals to a 0-5 VDC signal for the controller. The Analog
input conversion board shall be designed to accept one of the following inputs:
1. 3K ohm thermistor.
2. 0-5 VDC signal
3. 0-20 mA signal
4. The digital input conversion board is designed to accept from 7.5 - 24 VAC or
VDC. The signal enters the Board, is conditioned, illuminates the LED and enters
optical isolator. From the isolator, a 0 or 5 VDC signal is sent to the controller to
indicate OFF or ON respectively.
8. The Analog Output Board is designed to provide four(4)output channels. Each output
channel can be configured to provide either 0- 10 VDC, 0- 5 VDC, 0 -20 mA or 0 -5
mA by changing jumper settings. The minimum and maximum operating output can be
adjusted to a value within the ranges mentioned, through software. The four (4) �•
channel AOX boards are hardware addressed and may be daisy chained together to
provide Analog outputs in multiples of 4.
9. The digital output board contains various digital output modules. On the board is a
ribbon cable connector for transmitting the controllers' signals and a terminal strip for
connection to controlled equipment. The board is designed to handle up to 16 output
modules (24 optional) and is powered through the controller. The board is U.L.
recognized and CSA certified.
10. The digital output modules provided are designed for specific applications. Different
types used include:
a. AC Modules (3 amps, 12- 140 VAC)
Normally Open (OAC5)
Normally Closed (OAC5A5)
b. DC Modules (3 amps, 5-60 VDC)
Normally Open (ODC5)
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -64
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
discharge air sensor shall be provided for field installation in the supply air
ductwork to sense the discharge air temperature. The discharge air set point
shall be adjusted at the electronic controller within the rooftop unit control
compartment. Heating control shall be capable of operation initiated by:
(1) A"W1"call for heat from a thermostat.
(2) A 0 to 10 volt signal from a DDC control system.
O. Controls
1. VAV Unit Controller
a. The unit shall include a programmable controller which provides 7 day, 2 events
per day scheduler, 14 day holiday schedule, optimal start and outputs for
heating, cooling, and economizer and supply air volume. Factory mounted and
wired are the return and outside air temperature sensors. Furnished with the unit
for customer installation are the zone temperature sensor and supply air duct
temperature sensor.
b. Control of supply air flow modulation shall be by factory installed VFD blower
speed controller, controlled by a factory installed system pressure controller and
a field installed duct static pressure sensing device.
10
C. Controller shall be multistage and include compressor anti-short cycle protection
for each compressor.
r .Options: (Multiple selections are permissible)
(1) Unit shall be equipped with hot gas by-pass control on the lead
refrigeration stage to protect against evaporator frosting at low air flows
and suction pressures.
(2) Unit shall be equipped with morning warm up thermostat controller.
go (3) Unit shall be equipped with morning warm up thermostat controller and
a night set back temperature controller with a cooling lock-out function.
2. The main control panel will have access door(s) for direct access to the controls. The
panel shall be equivalent to NEMA type 3R (rainproof) and contain a single externally
operated, molded case switch (non-automatic circuit breaker) suitable for copper wire
up to and including 3 inch conduit. Wire and conduit entrance will be inside of the unit
curbing.
3. The control panel also includes the following:
-Individual fusing,contactors, and overloads for all motor loads.
-Control power transformer with primary and secondary(115 volt)fusing.
-24 volt control transformer and fuse.
-All control relays necessary for control functions.
-115 volt and 24 volt field terminal strips for customer wiring terminations.
-A 24 volt control terminal strip, containing wired terminals for all controls, numbered in
accordan with the wiring diagram.
' ! -DDC Temperature control system,factory-wired.
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -63
an
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA ow
am
a. Hot gas bypass shall be provided on the first refrigerant circuit.
b. Hot gas bypass shall be provided on all refrigerant circuits.
.w
C. Each compressor shall be individually staged for capacity control.
d. All circuits shall be equipped with liquid line sight glasses.
e. Unit shall be provided with a hot gas reheat coil piped to the lead refrigerant
system.
f. Unit shall be provided with a hot gas reheat coil and modulating hot gas reheat
control valve piped to the lead refrigerant system
g. Unit shall be provided with a hot gas reclaim coil for field piping to another unit's
refrigerant system.
h. Unit shall be equipped with a 5 minute anti-short cycle delay timer for each
stage.
i. Unit shall be equipped with 20 second between stage delay timers for each
stage.
j. First stage cooling shall be provided to allow operation in low ambient to 0°F.
k. Each compressor shall be equipped with suction and discharge service valves.
I. Unit shall operate on R-41 OA refrigerant.
N. Gas Heat Section: no
1. Unit shall heat using natural gas fuel.
2. Unit shall be provided with a gas heating furnace consisting of an stainless steel heat 4W
exchanger with multiple concavities, an induced draft blower and an electric pressure
switch to lockout the gas valve until the combustion chamber is purged and combustion
air flow is established. Drum type heat exchangers or heat exchanger tubes with ON
separate internal turbulators are not acceptable.
3. Unit shall be provided with a gas ignition system consisting of an electronic ignitor to a
pilot system, which will be continuous when the heater is operating, but will shut off the
pilot when heating is not required.
4. Unit shall have gas supply piping entrances in the unit base for through the curb gas
piping and in the outside cabinet wall for across the roof gas piping.
5. The gas heat exchanger shall be equipped with a Stainless Steel tubular heat
exchanger with a 25 year non pro-rated warranty. ±�*
a. Unit shall heat using natural gas and be equipped with a modulating gas valve,
adjustable speed combustion blower and stainless steel tubular heat exchanger.
The completely factory mounted gas heating assembly shall be capable of
operating at any firing rate between 100% and 30% of rated capacity. The
combustion air and gas firing rate shall both be capable of modulation. A
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -62
ON
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
L. Evaporator Coils:
r 1. Evaporator coils shall be copper tube with aluminum fins mechanically bonded to the
tubes.
2. Evaporator coils shall have galvanized steel end casings.
3. Evaporator coils shall have equalizing type vertical tube headers.
4. Evaporator coils shall be furnished with a thermostatic expansion valve.
5. Evaporator coils shall be furnished with a double sloped drain pan for the positive
drainage of condensate.
6. A drain connection shall be provided on each side of the unit. The manufacturer shall
provide a P-trap condensate drain fitting for field installation to the drain connections.
Options:
a. Evaporator coil drain pan(s) shall be fabricated of 304 stainless steel. Drain pan
shall meet all LEED requirements and ASHRAE 62-2004.
b. Evaporator coil(s)shall have 304 stainless steel end casings.
C. Evaporator coil(s)fins shall be phenolic coated.
go
d. Evaporator coil(s)shall have copper fins.
M. Refrigeration System:
1. Compressors shall be scroll type with internal thermal overload protection and mounted
on the compressor manufacturer's recommended rubber vibration isolators. Each
compressor shall have independent refrigerant circuits.
2. Compressors shall be mounted in an isolated compartment to permit operation of the
unit without affecting air flow when the door to the compartment is open.
3. Compressors shall be isolated from the base pan and supply air to avoid any
transmission of noise from the compressor into the building area.
4. System shall be equipped with thermostatic expansion valve type refrigerant flow
control.
5. System shall be equipped with automatic reset low pressure and manual reset high
pressure refrigerant controls.
6. Unit shall be equipped with Schrader type service fittings on both the high side and low
pressure sides of the system.
7. Unit shall be equipped with refrigerant liquid line driers.
8. Unit shall be fully factory charged with refrigerant.
9. Options: (Multiple selections are permissible)
w
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -61
ON
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
Northampton,MA 1W
H. Supply Fans: w.
The fan shall be direct drive single width single inlet un-housed airfoil centrifugal, plenum fans.
Supply fans shall have all aluminum construction. Fans attached to 1760 rpm motors shall be "m
rated for a minimum of 1800 RPM maximum speed. Fans attached to 1170 rpm motors shall
be rated for a minimum of 1200 RPM maximum speed. Direct drive fans shall be directly
connected to and supported by the motor shaft. Motor bearings shall be rated for 200,000 go
hours service and shall have external lubrication connections. Fan(s) and motor(s) shall be
dynamically balanced, and the entire fan assembly mounted on rubber isolators. Supply air
shall be from the bottom of the cabinet. (For Variable Volume Systems VFD drive(s) shall be
factory mounted and wired to the fan motor(s).) to
I. Outside Air Options
1. Shall be 0 - 100% with a motor operated outside air damper assembly constructed of
extruded aluminum, hollow core, air foil blade with rubber edge seals and aluminum
end seals. Damper blades shall be gear driven and designed to have no more than 25
CFM of leakage per sq. ft. of damper area when subjected to 2" WG air pressure
differential across the damper. Damper motor shall be spring return to ensure closing "`
of outdoor air damper during periods of unit shut down or power failure. No return air
connection shall be present.
J. Condenser so
1. Air Cooled Condenser Section:
rw
a. The condensing section shall be equipped with vertical discharge axial flow
direct drive fans. Direct drive fans shall be directly connected to and supported
by the motor shaft.
am
b. The condenser coils shall be sloped at least 300 to protect the coils from
damage.
C. Condenser coils shall be copper tubes with aluminum fins mechanically bonded w
to the tubes.
d. Condenser coils to be sized for a minimum of 10°F of refrigerant sub-cooling. OR
Options:
(1) Condenser coils shall be copper tubes with aluminum fins mechanically
bonded to the tubes and with a baked-on phenolic corrosion resistant
coating.
(2) Condenser coils shall be copper tubes with copper fins mechanically
bonded to the tubes.
K. Filters:2-inch-thick,fiberglass, throwaway with an ASHRAE efficiency of 30%.
Options:
1. 4"thick fiberglass pleated with an ASHRAE efficiency of 30%
2. 2"thick permanent filter.
3. 4"with 65%, 85%, or 95%efficient filters.
4. Clogged filter switch.
5. Direct dial reading Magnehelic gauge mounted in the control compartment
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -60
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
Northampton,MA
f. the roof of the air tunnel compartments shall be sloped at a minimum of 1/4 inch
per foot and shall be an average of 2'/inches thick and an R value of 15.7.
g. the floor of the conditioned air and control compartments shall be 1 inch thick
with a minimum R value of 6.25.
h. the access doors shall be 1 '/2 inches thick with a minimum R value of 9.4.
i. The foam shall have a minimum density of 2 pounds per cubic feet.
j. All foam material shall be tested in accordance with ASTM D1929 for a minimum
flash ignition temperature of 610°F.
k. All panels shall have a thermal break with no metal path from inside to outside.
I. Paint finish shall be capable of withstanding at least 2000 hours, with no visible
corrosive effects, when tested in a salt spray and fog atmosphere in accordance
with ASTM 13117-95 test procedure.
M. Unit specific color coded wiring diagrams shall match the unit color coded wiring
and will be provided in both point-to-point and ladder form.
n. Diagrams shall also be laminated in plastic and permanently affixed inside the
control compartment.
o. Access to filters, heating section, and other items needing periodic checking or
maintenance shall be through hinged access doors with quarter turn lockable
latches. Door fastening screws are not acceptable. The blower access door
shall be bolted closed.
p. Access doors shall have stainless steel hinges and full perimeter gasketing.
q. All openings through the base pan of the unit shall have upturned flanges of at
least 1/2"in height around the opening through the base pan.
r. Air side service access doors shall have rain break overhangs.
S. Unit shall have decals and tags to indicate unit lifting and rigging, service areas
and caution areas. Installation and maintenance manuals shall be supplied with
each unit.
t. Cabinet options include:
U. Unit exterior to be"Grey"in color.
V. Unit exterior to be'Tan"in color.
W. Unit shall be furnished with 304 stainless steel drain pans.
X. Unit shall be furnished from the manufacturer with burglar bars on the supply air
duct connection areas.
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -59
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
a. The rooftop unit(s) shall be certified in accordance with UL Standard 1995 and
ANSI Standard 721.47
b. The rooftop unit(s) shall be safety certified by an accredited testing laboratory
and the nameplate shall carry the label of the certification agency.
D. Delivery, Storage, and Handling
1. Deliver rooftop units as factory-assembled units with protective crating and covering as
recommended by the manufacturer.
2. Coordinate delivery of units in sufficient time to allow movement into building.
3. Handle rooftop units to comply with manufacturer's written rigging and installation
instructions for unloading and moving to final location.
4. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations with
roof construction. Roof specialties are specified in Division 7 Sections.
E. Warranty
1. Special Warranty: A written warranty, executed by the manufacturer and signed by the
Contractor, agreeing to replace components that fail in materials or workmanship, .,
within the specified warranty period, provided manufacturer's written instructions for
installation,operation, and maintenance have been followed.
F. Extra Materials ..
1. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged
with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents.
a. Filters: One set of filters for each unit.
G. Rooftop units shall be Self-Contained- Factory assembled and tested; designed for roof or slab
installation; and consisting of compressors, condensers, evaporator coils, refrigeration,
temperature controls, gas heater,filters,and dampers.
1. Construction:
a. Unit shall be completely factory assembled, piped and wired and shipped in one
section.
b. Unit shall be specifically designed for outdoor roof top application with a fully
weatherproof cabinet.
C. All cabinet walls, access doors, roof and floor shall be a high performance
composite panel constructed with G90 galvanized steel on both sides and a
closed cell polyurethane foam interior core providing a rigid, impact resistant
surface.
d. the walls of the air tunnel compartments shall be 2 inches thick with a minimum
R value of 12.5.
e. the walls of the coil compartment shall be 1-1/2"thick with a minimum R value of
9.4.
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -58
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
2. An analysis of the water chemistry shall be performed during this period. This analysis
shall include:
a. Heterotrophic plate count.
b. Conductivity.
C. pH
40
d. Chloride.
e. Other evaluations as required by a particular installation.
2.35 ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS DX 100% O.A.
A. The Contractor shall furnish and install 100% outside air packaged rooftop units by Aaon Inc.,
Valent or Venmar as shown and scheduled on the contract documents. The units shall be
installed in accordance with this specification and performance at the specified conditions as
scheduled.
B. Submittals shall include the following:
1. Product Data: Include manufacturer's technical data for each model indicated, including
rated capacities of selected model clearly indicated; dimensions; required clearances;
shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties; accessories; and
installation and startup instructions.
2. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights,
loadings, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and
size of each field connection. Detail mounting, securing, and flashing of roof curb to roof
structure. Indicate coordinating requirements with roof membrane system.
a. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems and
differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
3. Commissioning Reports: Indicate results of startup and testing commissioning
requirements. Submit copies of checklists.
4. Maintenance Data: Maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
5. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
C. Quality assurance shall include the following:
1. Fabricate and label refrigeration system to comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for
Mechanical Refrigeration."
2. Energy Efficiency Ratio: Equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1, "Energy
Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings" or applicable
state energy code which ever applies
3. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated components specified in this Section
that are listed and labeled.
- HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -57
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
3. A method of off-line circulation must be available. The water must be periodically
circulated during periods of inactivity. Ideally, the system will be circulated for at least
30 minutes every day. The Clearwater Representative can recommend alternative
circulation protocols based on the particulars of an installation. This circulation program
should commence once the system has been filled, even if there is no load on the
system.
4. Systems with galvanized metal must be conditioned to prevent the formation of white
rust. This conditioning requires operating the system for a period of at least 6 weeks
under strict water conditions, particularly keeping the pH of the system below 8.3. This
can usually be accomplished by blow down adjustments. With some make-up waters,
blow down alone is not sufficient to keep pH below 8.3. For systems using these
waters, acid additions during this conditioning period may be required.
L. Initial Operation
w
1. The Dolphin should initially be operated under blow down settings or protocol specified
by Clearwater. New galvanized towers must be conditioned to prevent white rust
formation. This conditioning is done by operating the tower for a period of about 6
weeks with a H of 8.3. After this conditioning
p g period, the tower may operate at normal
pH levels. Controlling this pH may require a higher blow down rate during this 6-week
period.
2. A Clearwater Representative will monitor the performance of the system at installation.
This monitoring is provided at no additional cost to the customer. The monitoring by the
Clearwater Representative will include the following:
a. Inspection of the Dolphin systems for functionality.
b. Inspection of the blow down system for functionality.
C. Calibration and cleaning of conductivity probes or other instrumentation related
to blow down.
d. Visual inspection of overall system condition (service visits may be timed to
coincide with the opening of certain system components such as a boiler vessel
or chiller).
M. Stabilization Period
1. For the first 90 days after installation, a Clearwater Representative will make periodic
visits to continue to monitor the performance of the system. This monitoring is provided
at no additional cost to the customer. This inspection will include the following:
a. Inspection of the Dolphin systems for functionality.
b. Inspection of the blow down system for functionality.
C. Calibration and cleaning of conductivity probes or other instrumentation related
to blow down.
d. Visual inspection of overall system condition (service visits may be timed to
coincide with the opening of certain system components such as a chiller).
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -56
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
a. Status shall be indicated by a flashing green LED
b. Utilize a field supplied 24v rated normally closed switch.
r I. Initial System operation:
1. No water system containing a Dolphin SystemTM shall be put into operation without
the Dolphin being energized and the blow down system [and mechanical filtration
systems]fully operational. Failure to comply may result in damage to connected heat
exchange equipment from scaling and corrosion, or fouling from biological growth.
a. New Systems - The Dolphin should initially be operated under blow down
settings or protocol specified by Clearwater. New galvanized towers must be
conditioned to prevent white rust formation to the tower manufacturer's
requirements. Operating the tower for a period of about 6 weeks with a pH
below 8.3 accomplishes this conditioning. After this conditioning period, the
tower may operate at normal pH levels. Controlling this pH may require a higher
blow down rate for this 6-week period.
J. Dolphin Installation
1. Transformer Panel and Coil-Pipe Assembly should be installed at least 3 ft. from
additional Dolphins and any large motor, pump or high voltage equipment,which might
influence the Dolphin high frequency electromagnetic field.
2. Coil-Pipe Assembly should not be energized for extended periods of time without
having the pipe full of water. If the flow pipe will drain when the pumps are off then the
Dolphin must be de-energized under no-flow conditions.
3. If Coil-Pipe Assembly is installed outdoors rain protection is required.
4. If Coil-Pipe Assembly may be exposed to freezing conditions heat tape or insulation
may be required.
5. Do not rightly coil any excess length of Umbilical Cable. Loose loops are acceptable.
6. The Clearwater Representative will direct all piping and electrical hook-ups associated
with the Dolphin treatment program and will also give direction to the contractor as to
the various sampling, monitoring and blow down requirements to ensure water
chemistry of the system.
K. System Cleaning and Lay-Up Requirements
1. Immediately after hydrostatic testing of piping is completed, all systems shall be
9 flushed, chemically cleaned, and flushed again. To minimize corrosion the system
MUST NOT be left in this condition. The system must both be drained and dried or the
procedures in steps 2, 3 and 4 must be followed immediately after the cleaning is
completed.
2. After cleaning and flushing, the system must be refilled with clean water and
conditioned. To reduce corrosion attack, this water must be conditioned by bringing the
re-circulating water up to the saturation of calcium carbonate by cycling the system or
addition pool chemicals. Use of an industrial corrosion inhibitor is an acceptable
alternative.
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -55
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
F. Dolphin SystemTM functions: W
1. To keep system free from mineral scale on the fill material, pipes, heat exchangers,
pipes, valves and other components in the system by changing calcium carbonate +�
nucleation from surface nucleation to colloidal nucleation, thereby lowering activation
energy of colloidal nucleation.
2. Control the population of microorganisms such as bacteria, algae and protozoa to
10,000 CFU/ml or below, by incorporation into colloidal precipitates(encapsulation)or
through the pulsed power fields (electroporation) within the coil pipe assembly,
regardless of what species are present and how they may have mutated. Typically
the total bacteria count(TBC)is in the range of 2,000—4,000 CFU/ml.
3. Blow down shall contain no added water treatment chemicals required to achieve
performance listed.
G. Building Management System Interface
1. The interface to the building management system will be through a FORM 'C"dry relay
contact located on the circuit board in the transformer panel.
2. The interface will verify the following Dolphin operating status conditions. „R
a. Primary Power status — e.g. Loss of utility power, tripped circuit breaker, blown
fuse or unit unplugged.
b. Secondary Power Status—e.g. Severed or removed Umbilical Cable connection
or a defective transformer.
C. Coil-Pipe Assembly Operation Status—e.g. Coil-Pipe Assembly overheated.
d. Circuit Board Operation Status—e.g. Board overheated, electronic failure.
3. In the event of one of the above anomalies, the supervisory contact will change relay
status.
4. Supervisory Contact power rating on
a. 0.6 A at 125 VAC
b. 0.6 A at 110 VDC am
C. 2.0 A at 30 VDC
1. A conductivity actuated blow down system, approved by Clearwater, must be
specified with the use of the Dolphin water treatment system. Clearwater will
supply a blow down design for any system as requested.
H. Remote Start-Stop Switch
1. A remote switch shall turn off the Dolphin Coil-Pipe Assembly, while maintaining
power to the Transformer Panel. Switch shall be wired into predetermined contacts in
the Transformer Panel.
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -54
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
effect imparts high frequency electric fields into the flowing water that includes
frequencies in the kilohertz and megahertz range. Dolphin System 3000-G delivers a
total of 240 pulses per second.
a. Primary service:
1) 6": 115 VAC,60 cycle, 1 ph, primary service.
2) 480 VA primary.
D. Coil-Pipe Assembly:
1. Pipe Material
a. PVC Sch.80 with bare pipe ends
2. Optional Field Connections:
a. Furnish PVC Van Stone style (Slip-on) flanges for field mounting of Coil-Pipe
Assembly
3. The coils shall be contained within a larger diameter PVC covering cylinder around
the pipe and closed with PVC end caps with ventilation ports.
4. The high temperature coil bobbin assemblies are secured to pipe by circular clamps.
5. Locking power cable (Umbilical Cable) is supplied for connection between the Coil-
Pipe Assembly and the Transformer Panel. Standard Umbilical cables are 10 ft. (size
up to 6").
e a. Furnish optional 25 ft. Umbilical Cable, if required by the installation.
6. Built in thermal protection shall automatically turn the coil assembly off if the operating
temperature exceeds 190°F.
a. The thermal protection for PVC units protects the internal circuitry from internally
generated heat.
1) The maximum applied fluid temperature of PVC units shall not exceed
140°F.
E. Dolphin System pulsed power system(PPS)operational parameters:
1. Conductivity range of 300 to 5,000 pS/cm.
2. pH range of 6.8 to 9.0 or per cooling tower manufacturer's recommendation.
3. Local environmental regulations may dictate the highest pH permitted for blow down.
PPS can raise or lower pH by the balancing of fresh make-up water.
4. Total bacteria count (TBC) of less than 10,000 CFU/ml. The bacteria count is
expected to range below 4,000 CFU/ml under most normal blow down schedules.
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -53
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
B. System Description `
1. The system shall consist of alternating current pulse power Transformer Panel and
Coil-Pipe Assembly. Each Coil-Pipe assembly shall be equipped with a dedicated +*►
individual Transformer Panel.
C. Transformer Panel shall have/be:
1. Transformer Panel Electrical Requirements
Model Nominal Pipe Voltage Approximate
Diameter Input Amps
2010 1" 115 1.5 A
2020 2" 115 2 A
2030 3" 115 4 A '■"
2040 4" 115 5 A
2060 6" 115 5 A
2080 8" 208 or 230 15A
sin le phase
2100 10" 208 or 230 15 A
single phase
2120 12" 208 or 230 12 A ..
single phase
2160 16" 208 or 230 15 A
sin le hase
.w
2. Primary service 60-cycle, single phase, voltage depending on size as listed in
preceding table. All units may be specified to operate at 230V and 50 cycles. The load
is primarily inductive.
3. The Transformer Panel should be located at eye-level for easy access and reading of
the status LED's.
4. Wall mounted NEMA 3R metal enclosure, 304 brushed stainless steel case
5. Terminal block for hard wiring to electrical power service.
6. Fused primary and secondary on 460v/1 ph powered units(8"to 16" Dolphins)
7. Dry form C contact(for building management system).
8. Remote Start-Stop capability, switch field installed
9. Female locking receptacle for connecting the Transformer Panel to the Coil-Pipe
Assembly. Connection coded based on unit size to prevent mismatching of
components
10. LED Status indicating lights
11. Powered Fan ventilation with inlet screen filter
12. Pulsed power transformer and circuitry, which uses alternating current of 60 cycles
per second to create a harmonic"ringing"signal of increasingly higher frequency until
the decreasingly lower amplitude of this echo signal is damped down to zero. This
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -52
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
of the rooftop unit. Refer to vibration isolation and seismic restraints section for curb
requirements.
2.34 NON-CHEMICAL WATER TREATMENT SYSTEM
A. Furnish and install a Dolphin Series 3000 Pulsed Power Water Treatment System in the water
re-circulating line for each Evaporative Packaged Rooftop Unit. The Dolphin System shall be
part of the RTU manufacturer's specification and responsibility. The size of the system shall be
determined through the coordination of the two manufacturers. The Dolphin System shall be
factory installed by the RTU manufacturer per Clearwater Systems Corporation installation
literature. Dolphin System by Clearwater Systems Corporation, Essex, CT, is manufactured in
the USA under strict standards for quality and performance.
1. Systems Description and Operation
Dolphin Functions:
a. To change precipitate formation from surface nucleation (scale) to colloidal
nucleation(bulk-solutions powder).
b. To keep system free from mineral scale on the fill material, pipes, heat
exchangers, and other components in the system.
C. To control the population of microorganisms such as bacteria and algae by
incorporation into colloidal precipitates (encapsulation) or damaging by pulsed
electric fields(eletroportation).
lop d. The Dolphin permits operation at lower blow down quantity resulting in water
savings. Because the Dolphin operates by forming a powder precipitate, water
usage must be measured by flow meters on make-up blow down or by the ration
of a particular mineral in the make-up and blow down water but not by the ratio of
conductivity of the make-up and blow down water.
e. Elimination of scaling and slime formation results in energy savings.
f. Blow down contains no added chemicals aiding conformance to discharge
regulations.
2. Dolphin Pulsed Power System(PPS)Water Parameters:
a. Typical conductivity range of 300 to 5,000 uS/cm.
b. Typical pH range of 6.8 to 9.0 or per cooling tower manufacturer's
recommendation.
C. Local environmental regulations may dictate the highest pH permitted for blow
down. PPS can raise or lower pH by the balancing of fresh make-up water.
d. Hetertrophic Plate Count(HPC)of less than 10,000 CFU/ml. The bacteria count
is expected to range between 2,000 and 4,000 under most normal blow down
schedules.
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -51
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
Northampton,MA
1. Off Mode: In Off Mode,the unit is shutdown.
2. Time Clock Mode: In Time Clock Mode, the unit will switch between occupied
and unoccupied operation via the unit's time schedule.
3. Remote Start/Stop Mode: In Remote Start/Stop Mode, the unit switches
between occupied and unoccupied operation via a field supplied signal. *�
4. Occupied Mode: In Occupied Mode, the unit is shutdown. The unit may be
started by the remote start/stop signal.
5. Unoccupied Mode: In Unoccupied Mode, the unit is shutdown. The unit may be
started by the remote start/stop signal.
Refer to the "Automatic Temperature Control Sequence of Operation"
I. Electrical
1. Unit manufacturer shall supply a single point power panel for main supply voltage.
Separate 115-volt power for lights. "
2. Single point power panel shall include all necessary fuses, non-fused main disconnect,
fan motor starters or VFD's as specified (see VFD section for acceptable manufacturers
and type), control transformer and terminals for remote control interconnection
3. Power panel shall be UL508 labeled as a complete assembly. UL label for enclosure
only with UL internal components is not acceptable. Enclosure shall be NEMA -4 �*
construction UL listed.
4. All wiring shall be in compliance of the current National Electric Code. All wiring shall
be done by a UL705 certified shop at the factory. Field wiring is not acceptable.
5. Each supply fan, return fan and exhaust fan shall be provided with a variable frequency
drive. Refer to variable speed controller specification section for VFD requirements.
J. Sound Power and Performance Certification
1. Air handling unit sound power data shall be submitted for review by Owner's
representative. Sound power data shall be given at the supply connection(s) (outlet)
and return connection(s) (inlet) in addition to radiated sound power from the cabinet.
Raw fan sound power data shall be derived from tests done in accordance with AMCA
Standard 300-85. Data extrapolated from non-like fan sizes and types scheduled is not
acceptable. Attenuation assumed for the cabinet configuration, type of insulation,
opening locations and sizes, etc., shall be verified through actual test measurements.
The mechanical engineer may, at his option, request copies of such tests.
K. Warranty/Start-Up Service
1. Manufacturer shall provide factory start-up service for each air handling unit. .•
Manufacturer shall provide one year part warranty, labor warranty by others.
2. Compressor shall have a five (5) year warranty by the manufacturer of Rooftop unit for
parts and labor.
L. Vibration Isolation Roof curbs shall be constructed of galvanized steel. 42" high Curb to be fully
gasketed between the curb top and unit bottom with the curb providing full perimeter support,
cross structure support and air seal for the unit. Curb gasketing shall be furnished within the
control compartment of the rooftop unit to be mounted on the curb immediately before mounting
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -50
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
IP- monitor unit operations. The keypad shall be mounted within the control panel to
protect it from damage and tampering.
9. The board conditions these signals to a 0-5 VDC signal for the controller. The Analog
input conversion board shall be designed to accept one of the following inputs:
1. 3K ohm thermistor.
2. 0-5 VDC signal
3. 0-20 mA signal
4. The digital input conversion board is designed to accept from 7.5 - 24 VAC or
VDC. The signal enters the Board, is conditioned, illuminates the LED and enters
optical isolator. From the isolator, a 0 or 5 VDC signal is sent to the controller to
indicate OFF or ON respectively.
r 10. The Analog Output Board is designed to provide four(4)output channels. Each output
channel can be configured to provide either 0 - 10 VDC, 0 - 5 VDC, 0 -20 mA or 0 - 5
mA by changing jumper settings. The minimum and maximum operating output can be
adjusted to a value within the ranges mentioned, through software. The four (4)
channel AOX boards are hardware addressed and may be daisy chained together to
provide Analog outputs in multiples of 4.
11. The digital output board contains various digital output modules. On the board is a
ribbon cable connector for transmitting the controllers' signals and a terminal strip for
connection to controlled equipment. The board is designed to handle up to 16 output
modules (24 optional) and is powered through the controller. The board is U.L.
recognized and CSA certified.
12. The digital output modules provided are designed for specific applications. Different
types used include:
1. AC Modules (3 amps, 12- 140 VAC)
Normally Open (OAC5)
Normally Closed (OAC5A5)
2. DC Modules (3 amps, 5-60 VDC)
Normally Open (ODC5)
FR 13. Use a 3K ohm thermistors to read air, water and surface temperatures. A 3K ohm
thermistor is a description of its resistance reading at 77°F (25 0C). A thermistor resistor
characteristic is such that as the temperature decreases the resistance increases, and
as the temperature increases,the resistance decreases.
14. A unit mounted, static pressure transducer converts the duct static pressure to an
W electrical signal for the controller. The transducer uses 24 VAC to power its operation
and it provides a 0 - 5 VDC signal directly proportional to its pressure range. The
installing Contractor is required to provide tubing, and pipe the transducer to the static
pressure sensing probe. The static pressure sensing probe shall be located according
to the mechanical designers' recommendations, typically 2/3 down the longest duct
trunk. The following is the pressure range used on this Specification: 0 - 5"w.c. Duct
Static Pressure.
on 15. This is a description of the control sequence and how the inputs and outputs will be
configured. The Keypad will allow for the following modes of operation:
40
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -49
1P
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
C. The burner shall include a powered combustion fan, spark ignition transformer, �.
gas control valve with actuator, pressure regulator, and all components
necessary for the required code approval.
d. The heater shall be provided with a single gas supply connection. Heater firing
mode is Off/Low Fire/High Fire. The minimum gas pressure supplied to the gas
supply connection shall be 7"WC and Max is 14"WC. The burner is provided to
comply with FM (Factory Mutual), Mass. requirements.
H. Controls
1. All controls shall be factory mounted by the Air Handling Unit manufacturer and be UL w�
705 certified. These controls shall include all damper actuators, temperature sensors,
pressure sensors, air flow measuring sensors, filter switches, smoke and fire detectors
as indicated on the control specification section.
2. Electric and electronic controls shall be wired in UL approved conduit to a terminal
block in a sheet metal UL Listed enclosure located at a common location mounted on
the air handling unit. All pressure sensing controls shall be piped to a common point on
the unit with 1/4"compression fittings.
3. Unit shall include supply and return smoke dampers.
4. The main control panel will have access door(s) for direct access to the controls. The
panel shall be equivalent to NEMA type 313 (rainproof) and contain a single externally
operated, molded case switch (non-automatic circuit breaker) suitable for copper wire
up to and including 3 inch conduit. Wire and conduit entrance will be inside of the unit
curbing.
5. The control panel also includes the following:
-Individual fusing, contactors, and overloads for all motor loads.
-Control power transformer with primary and secondary(115 volt)fusing.
-24 volt control transformer and fuse.
-All control relays necessary for control functions.
-115 volt and 24 volt field terminal strips for customer wiring terminations.
-A 24 volt control terminal strip, containing wired terminals for all controls, numbered in
accordan with the wiring diagram.
-DDC Temperature control system,factory-wired.
6. The above components shall be in addition to electrical components associated with
other sections, which shall be incorporated in the main control panel to facilitate
maintenance and trouble-shooting.
7. The controller will have a minimum of 64k of battery backed RAM, a battery backed *�
clock, a communication port for EIA-232C and for EIA-485, and a keypad display port.
The controller input and output minimum configuration will be as follows:
-16 Analog Inputs w.
-Digital Inputs and up to 24 Digital Outputs.
-The controller power transformer is a 120 VAC to 20 VAC center tapped transformer.
8. The keypad display consists of two-line, total 32 character backlit super-twist Liquid ..
Crystal Display (LCD) and a 12 key keypad. The keypad display can be used to set
time schedules, increment/decrement setpoints, read and clear faults/alarms and
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -48
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
protection. Each screw compressor capacity control shall be achieved
by infinitely variable slide valve unloading.
3. Condensing Unit
a. Evaporative Cooled Condensing Units:
(1) Evaporative Cooled Condensing Units shall be of the draw through type.
Blow through designs are not acceptable due to higher fan power
requirements and the likelihood of outward water leakage due to positive
pressures inside the wet section. The condenser sump shall be
constructed of stainless steel, and shall be double sloped to drain to
facilitate cleaning and maintenance.
(2) All make up water, recirculation water, and drain piping shall be factory
4110 piped by the unit manufacturer. Water circulation system shall
incorporate a minimum of two pumps for redundancy. Single pump
designs shall not be acceptable due to the lack of redundancy of a
critical component. Spray nozzles shall be of the spiral type to prevent
clogging. Moisture eliminators shall be provided on the air inlet and
above the spray tree to prevent moisture carryover.
(3) Evaporative Condenser Coils shall be constructed of seamless copper
tubing supported by non-metallic tube sheets supported in stainless
steel frames, to permit expansion and prevent contact between
dissimilar metals and galvanic corrosion. Designs that incorporate
finned "desuperheater" coils are not acceptable due to the inherent
scaling and corrosion involved with the wet environment inside the
condenser. If a desuperheater circuit is included, the manufacturer shall
on provide a lifetime warranty against failure due to scaling and/or
corrosion.
(4) Condenser Fans shall be direct drive propeller type with venturis for
efficient performance and low sound levels, and shall incorporate an
external fan guard for each fan to protect against inadvertent contact
with the moving fans. Head pressure control is maintained by fan
cycling utilizing variable speed motor control.
(5) Manufacturer must provide non-chemical water treatment for each
evaporative condensing section. See section 2.34 NON-CHEMICAL
WATER TREATMENT SYSTEM.
G. Gas Heat
1. Indirect-Fired Gas Heat
a. The heat exchanger shall be a drum-type primary with tubular secondary
constructed with 400 series stainless steel. A drain connection shall be provided
an for the removal of condensate within the heat exchanger.
b. The safety controls will include a UL listed airflow proving switch, flame proving
switch,flame safety relay,and manual reset high limit temperature control,
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -47
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
and be 2% to 5% accurate from 0 to 10000 FPM velocity. OSA measurement station w*
shall be NIST traceable. OSA measurement station shall be Ebtron "Gold" series or
prior approved equal. Refer to ATC section for additional information.
3. Provide a Magnehelic gauge with CFM scale on external side of the fan sections which
indicates the fan volume.
4. The electronic flow transmitter shall be capable of receiving signals of total and static
pressure from a flow element, of amplifying, extracting the square root, and scaling to
produce a 4 -20 mADC output signal linear and scaled to air volume or velocity. The
flow transmitter shall be capable of the following performance and application criteria.
a. Calibrated spans from 0 - 896 FPM, in eight flow range increments. Output
signal 4 -20 mADC standard. Integral zeroing means 3-way zeroing valve with
manual switch. Temperature effect±2.0%of full span from 40°to 120°F
w+
5. The transmitter shall not be damaged by over-pressurization up to 200 times greater
than span, and shall be furnished with a factory calibrated span and integral zeroing
means. The transmitter shall be housed in a NEMA 12 enclosure with external signal
tubing, power, and output signal connections.
6. The electronic differential pressure transmitter shall be Dwyer model 605, Setra 264 or
equal. OSA transmitter shall be Ebtron GTA116
F. DX Condensing Sections
1. The DX Condensing Section shall be fully integrated with the air handling section and
shall be self manufactured by the air handling unit manufacturer in the same facility as
the air handling section. Third party purchased condensing units skid mounted to the
air handling section are not acceptable due to the lack of single source responsibility
and quality control by the air handling unit manufacturer.
2. Compressors shall be of the hermetic scroll or semi-hermetic screw type.
Reciprocating compressors are not acceptable due to their inherently excessive noise *�
and vibration characteristics. Each refrigeration circuit shall include all specialties for
proper operation, including liquid line filter drier and sight glass, refrigerant distributor(s)
with thermal expansion valve(s), and charging/service ports.
a. Scroll Compressors:
(1) Compressor shall be of compliant design for axial and radial sealing of
the scrolls. Motor shall be suction gas cooled, with sufficient suction
side free volume and oil sump to provide liquid handling capability.
Compressor to include annular discharge check valve to provide low
pressure drop, silent shutdown, reverse rotation protection and
compressors to include belly band heaters for additional liquid migration
protection. Compressors may be arranged in tandem, triple and quad
configuration on a single refrigeration circuit.
b. Screw Compressors:
(1) Compressors shall be of the single stage, positive displacement, 3550
RPM hermetic motor driven, rotary screw type, including an integral oil
separation system, oil sump, oil filter, and integral solid state motor
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -46
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
return bends into the drain pan. Headers are to be located inside the cabinet
casing with only the pipe connections extending through the casing.
C. Coils shall be fully blanked to ensure all air passes through the coil. Intermediate
"! condensate pans are to be furnished on multiple coil units with copper down
tubes to the main drain panel.
d. 304 Stainless steel IAQ double sloped recessed drain pans shall be provided as
an integral part of the unit base in all cooling coil sections. Pans shall be 16
gauge minimum with V-1'/z lb. density, neoprene coated fiberglass insulation
and a 16-gauge under liner. Stainless steel condensate connections shall be
on provided on one side of the unit. Drain pans shall meet all LEED requirements
and ASHRAE 62-2004.
6. Filters
a. Filter sections shall be fabricated as part of the air handling unit. Filters shall be
arranged for upstream, downstream, or side loading as shown on the drawings.
Provide filter holding frames to accommodate scheduled filters.
b. Filter media shall be 2" deep, with rating of MERV13 (80% average efficiency).
The filter media shall be rated using ASHRAE 52.2.
u�
C. Factory install at each filter bank a Dwyer Magnehelic "Series 2000" pressure
gauge complete with static pressure tips, hardware and fittings. Enclose the
gauges in a protective sheet metal box with a hinged inspection door. Paint to
match unit. Provide separate filter gage for each pre and each final filter bank.
7. Economizer
a. Economizer section shall include automatic dampers for return air, fresh air and
exhaust air. Dampers shall be opposed blade type. Dampers shall be sized for
approximately 1200 fpm face velocity based upon gross damper area. Furnish
full height 24"wide access doors for damper and linkage service.
b. Dampers shall be extruded aluminum type with rubber edge seals and stainless
steel arc end seals. Dampers shall be low leak and incorporate nylon bearings.
C. Provide louvers for outside air and exhaust for units located outdoors. Louvers
shall be sized for a maximum face velocity of 450 fpm based on gross louver
OR
area. Hoods in lieu of louvers are not acceptable.
8. Marine Service Lights: Vapor proof marine lights shall be factory wired to individual
switches located next to access doors for fan sections, filter sections, and economizer
sections.
E. Air Flow Measuring Stations—Fans and OSA
1. Fans shall be supplied with a complete flow measuring system capable of supplying a 4
- 20 mA output signal to the EMS system that is proportional to air flow. The flow
measuring station and a flow transmitter, both factory mounted and piped.
2. The flow measuring station shall consist of total and static pressure pick-ups located in
the inlet cone(s) of each fan. OSA measurement device shall be located at the OSA
(minimum) damper. OSA measurement device shall be based on thermal dispersion
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -45
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
Northampton, MA
exceed 1.5 mils displacement when fan is running at 1135 rpm. A copy of the
Vibration test report (Vibration Nomograph) shall be provided with the Operation
and Maintenance Manual upon request. The fan assembly shall also be
vibration tested at design RPM with the spring isolators at the specified
deflection, with the tunable filter utilized and frequencies from 500 cpm to 50,000
cpm shall be scanned to detect misalignment, bearing defects, mechanical
looseness or foundation weakness.
w
VIBRATION-[DIRECT DRIVE] Fan wheel shall be factory dynamically balanced
and shall meet or exceed guidelines in AMCA 204-96 for Balance Quality and
Vibration Levels for Fan Application Category BV-3. Following fan assembly,the
complete spring isolated fan assembly shall be tested using an electronic
balance analyzer with tunable filter and stroboscope. Vibration measurements
shall be taken on each motor bearing housing in the vertical, horizontal, and axial
planes (5 total measurements, 2 each motor bearing and 1 Axial). The
maximum allowable velocity shall not exceed 0.125 inches per second peak
amplitude (filter in) on any of 5 readings and the sum of all readings shall not
exceed .5 mils @ 1170 rpm. A copy of the Vibration test report (Vibration
Nomograph) shall be provided with the Operation and Maintenance Manual
upon request. The fan assembly shall also be vibration tested at design RPM
with the spring isolators at the specified deflection, with the tunable filter utilized
and frequencies from 500 cpm to 50,000 cpm shall be scanned to detect
misalignment, bearing defects, mechanical looseness or foundation weakness.
b. A copy of the above balance test data for this project showing calculations for
deflection and critical speed of the shaft and wheel assembly shall be submitted
to the engineer and a copy forwarded to the Owner.
4. Motors and Drive
a. Furnish high-efficiency open drip proof standard NEMA frame rigid ball bearing
type motors. Reliance"Alpha", Century "E-Plus", or Marathon "ZRI"with grease
lubricated bearings and alemite fittings. Horsepower as shown on the schedule
are minimum allowable. *�
b. The motor shall be mounted on an adjustable slide rail motor base. The fan
motors shall be factory wired to an external junction box with flexible conduit of
adequate length so that it will not have any effect on the vibration isolation.
C. If belt driven, provide V-belt type, cast-iron sheaves, and reinforced rubber belts.
The belts shall be selected for 150% of the motor nameplate horsepower. ..
Drives shall be"Browning"or equal by"Woods."
5. Coils
a. Direct Expansion Coils shall have copper sweat suction connections and
refrigerant distributor liquid connections, and shall be provided with adjustable
superheat controls and external equalizer lines.
b. Cooling coil casing shall be minimum 16-gauge, 304 stainless steel with double
formed 1/2" stacking flanges and 3/4" flanges on the side plates. Flanged tube
sheets shall have extruded tube holes. Reinforcing rods shall be furnished so
that the unsupported length is not over 60". All coil assemblies shall be tested
under water at 300 psi and rated for 150-psi working pressure. Provide diverter
plates at both ends of the coil to divert the condensate drip from the headers and
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -44
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
D. Internal Components
1. Fan Assembly(Arrangement#1 Plenum Fan or Direct Drive)
a. All fan assemblies supplied for the air handlers shall be manufactured by the air
handling unit manufacturer for the purpose of sole source responsibility.
b. Fan performance shall be based on tests run in an AMCA certified laboratory
and administered in accordance with AMCA Standard 210. Fan performance
tests shall be taken with fans running inside the cabinet to include any affects
+fir from the unit cabinet and other internal components.
C. Fans shall be configured so that both fan bearings are on the same side of the
wheel with the wheel over hung (Arrangement #1) or direct drive as shown on
op plans. There shall be no obstructions(i.e., bearings or bearing supports, etc.,)at
the inlet of the fan.All Plenum fan wheels shall be aluminum construction.
d. Each fan shall be sized to perform as indicated on the equipment schedule. The
wheel diameter shall not be less than that shown on the equipment schedule.
The fan shall be constructed to AMCA Standards for the Class Rating as
indicated on the Equipment Schedule.
e. For belt driven fans, provide pressure relief type grease fittings and extend
lubrication lines to the motor side of the fan just inside its access door.
2. Fan Base, Spring Isolation, and Support Framing
a. Mount fan and motor on an internal, fully welded, rigid structural steel channel
OR base. Base shall be free-floating at all four corners on spring type isolators with
earthquake restraints. The fan assembly shall be isolated from the cabinet by
steel springs with deflection as indicated in schedules.
b. The fan discharge shall be isolated from the cabinet by means of a neoprene-
coated flexible connection. If belt driven, L10-200,000 Hr. operating life bearings
shall be mounted on a structural steel channel or machined surface. The
structure supporting the bearing bar shall be fabricated from structural steel and
detachable to allow for removal of the fan wheel and shaft as one piece.
3. Balancing
a. The shafting of the fan shall be sized not to exceed 75%of the first critical speed
for maximum RPM of Class specified. The critical speed will refer to the top of
the speed range of the fans' AMCA class. The lateral static deflection shall not
exceed 0.003"per foot of the length of the shaft.
VIBRATION - [BELT DRIVE] Fan wheels and shaft assemblies shall be factory
dynamically balanced and shall meet or exceed guidelines in AMCA 204-96 for
vp Balance Quality and Vibration Levels for Fan Application Category BV-3.
Following fan assembly, the complete spring isolated fan assembly shall be
tested using an electronic balance analyzer with tunable filter and stroboscope.
ro Vibration measurements shall be taken on each fan bearing housing in the
vertical, horizontal, and axial planes(6 total measurements, 3 each fan bearing).
The maximum allowable peak velocity shall not exceed 0.125 inches per second
peak amplitude (filter in) on any of 6 readings and sum of all readings shall not
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -43
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
am
a. Heavy welded lifting lugs shall be added to the perimeter channel along the
longest length of the unit section.
b. The unit floor shall be fabricated of 16 gauge hot rolled galvanized steel sheets. ON
Each sheet of flooring material shall have a base structural member centered
under all edges for adequate support. All floor seams shall be fully welded flush
to maintain an air tight seal. The flooring shall be welded to the structural .o
members below. Welds from below the floor shall be spaced no greater than 4"
on center. Drive screw attachment is not acceptable.
2. Unit Housing
a. The unit housing side and roof panels shall be constructed of 16-gauge
galvanized steel, and shall utilize a standing seam modular panel type
construction. The panels shall be attached to each other, to the roof, and to the
floor using bolts. Drive screw attachment is not acceptable. All seams shall be
sealed with an acrylic latex sealant prior to assembling the panels and after
completion of the assembly.
b. All floor openings shall have 1"minimum flange up around the entire perimeter.
C. (Type F) Doors shall be double wall, insulated, man size, double seal type with
two separate gaskets closing to knife-edges. Doorframe shall be powder coated
extruded aluminum with stainless steel powder coated adjustable hinges. Door
handles and hinges shall be fully adjustable. Door handles shall incorporate a
roller cam to insure airtight fit. Doors shall be operable from inside as well as
outside unit.
d. Door hinges and latches shall be easily adjustable, without the use of shims or
special tools, to allow for a tight seal between the door and the unit as the
gasketing material compresses over time.
e. Latches shall utilize non-corrosive door handles on exterior and roller cam type
on interior.
3. Insulation: Wall and Ceiling Insulation shall be 4" thick, 3# per cubic foot density,
neoprene coated fiberglass and cover all walls, ceilings and under floors. Insulation
shall meet NFPA-90A smoke and flame spread requirements. There shall be no
insulation exposed to the air stream. All other sections shall have 20 gauge solid steel
liners. Each panel shall be individually removable and be used to secure the insulation
in place. All fan sections shall have a 20-gauge perforated steel acoustical sheet metal
liner covering all walls and ceiling surfaces.
4. Floor insulation shall be 2" minimal polyurethane continuous foam-in-place insulation
applied to underside of floor liners. Fiberglass insulation in bases is not acceptable as
they do not prevent oil-canning and have inherent gaps between batts which
compromise the r-factor of the insulation.
5. Paint Finish: After final assembly the unit exterior shall be coated with an industrial
grade polyurethane paint. In addition, all fan bases, springs and structural steel
supports shall be coated with the same finish. The paint system shall meet ASTM B
Salt fog test for a minimum 2000 hours.
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -42
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
compressor run time. The microprocessor within the wall mounted remote controller shall
provide automatic cooling, display set point and room temperature, 24 hour on/off timer so that
automatic operation function display, check mode for memory of most recent problem. Control
system shall control the continued operation of the air sweep louvers, as well as provide on/off
and system/mode function switching. The controller shall have the capability to provide
sequential starting with up to fifty seconds delay. Two remote controllers can be used to control
one unit.
J. The outdoor unit shall designed specifically for use with indoor units. These units are equipped
with a circuit board that interfaces to the indoor unit and perform all functions necessary for
operation. The unit must have a powder coated finish. The outdoor unit shall be completely
r factory assembled, piped,and wired. Each unit must be run tested at the factory.
• The casing shall be fabricated of galvanized steel, bonderized and finished with a
powder coated baked enamel.
• The motor shall be furnished with either one or two direct drive propeller type fans.
The motor shall have inherent protection, be permanently lubricated bearings.
• The fan motor shall be mounted for quiet operation.
• The fan shall be provided with a raised guard to prevent contact with moving parts.
• The outdoor unit shall have a horizontal discharge airflow.
• The condenser coil shall be of nonferrous construction with lanced or corrugated plate
fins on copper tubing.
The coil shall be protected with an integral metal guard.
• Refrigerant flow from the condenser shall be controlled by means of a metering orifice.
• The compressor shall be a high performance rotary.
• A crankcase heater shall be factory mounted on the outside of the compressor.
The outdoor unit shall have an accumulator.
• The compressor will be equipped with an internal thermal overload.
• The outdoor unit shall have a high pressure safety switch.
The compressor shall be mounted to avoid the transmission of vibration.
• The outdoor unit shall be capable of operating at 0°F ambient temperature without
additional low ambient controls (Optional wind baffle shall be required).
2.33 ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS (Evaporative Cooled)
A. Provide Energy Labs, Innovent, Seasons 4, Aaon or Mammoth, rooftop air conditioning unit of
the size and capacity as shown on the Drawings. Each system shall include the preassembled
components as specified herein and shall be factory tested and shipped in one piece with a
single point electric power connection. Units shall be specifically designed for outdoor rooftop
application and include a weather proof cabinet. Units shall have direct expansion cooling coils.
All units shall have decals and tags to indicate caution areas and to aid unit service.
Nameplates shall be fixed to the unit. Installation and maintenance bulletin shall be supplied
with each unit. Fan and coil performance shall be ARI Certified unit shall utilize R-134A, 407C
or 410A refrigerant.
B. Units shall be factory built, double wall construction with components listed in attached
schedule.
C. Unit Construction: The following sections describe in detail construction requirements for the
unit base, cabinet, access doors, insulation and paint finish. Unit shall be built for outdoor
installation.
1. Unit Base: Each unit shall be constructed on a base fabricated from heavy duty welded
structural steel channel. Channel bases shall be sized as a function of air handling
length.
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -41
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
a facility registered to ISO 9001 and ISO 14001 which is a set of standards applying to
environmental protection set by the International Standard Organization. A full charge of R-
134A, 407C or 410A for 100 feet of refrigerant tubing shall be provided in the condensing unit.
Contractor shall verify tubing length. A dry air holding charge shall be provided in the
evaporator. System efficiency shall meet or exceed 10.0 SEER.
C. Unit shall be stored and handled according to the manufacturer's recommendation. The wired
controller shall be shipped inside the carton with the indoor unit and able to withstand 105°F «.
storage temperatures and 95% relative humidity.
D. The units shall have a manufacturer's warranty for a period of one (1) year from date of
installation. The compressor shall have a warranty of six (6) years from date of installation. If,
during this period, any part should fail to function properly due to defects in workmanship or
material, it shall be replaced or repaired at the discretion of the manufacturer. This warranty
does not include labor. Manufacturer shall have fifteen years experience.
E. The indoor unit shall be factory assembled, wired, and run tested. Contained within the unit
shall be all factory wiring, piping, control circuit board, and fan motor. The unit shall have a self-
diagnostic function, 3-minute time delay mechanism, an auto restart function, an emergency ew
operation function, and a test run switch. Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes will be charged with
dry air instead of refrigerant before shipment from the factory.
F. The evaporator fan shall be a high performance turbo fan driven by a single motor. The fan
shall be statically and dynamically balanced and run on a motor with permanently lubricated
bearings. The indoor fan shall consist of two (2) speeds, High and Low. The indoor unit shall
have an adjustable air outlet system offering 4-way airflow, 3-way airflow, or 2-way airflow. The
auto air swing vanes shall automatically swing up and down for uniform air distribution.
G. Return air shall be filtered by means of a long-life filter to provide approximately 2,500 hours of
use in a normal office environment before cleaning.
H. The evaporator coil shall be of nonferrous construction with smooth plate fins on copper tubing.
The tubing shall have inner grooves for high efficiency heat exchange. All tube joints shall be
brazed with phoscopper or silver alloy. The coils shall be pressure tested at the factory. A
condensate pan and drain shall be provided under the coil. The condensate pump shall be able
to raise drain water 33 inches above the condensate pan.
I. This unit shall have a wired controller to perform input functions necessary to operate the ..
system. The controller shall consist of an On-Off switch, Cool/Dry-Fan selector, Thermostat
setting, Timer Mode, High-Low fan speed, Auto Vane selector, Test Run switching and Check
Mode switching. Temperature changes shall be by 2°F increments with a range of 65—87°F. •
The control system shall consist of two (2) microprocessors interconnected by a single non-
polar two wire cable. Wiring shall run direct from the indoor unit to the controller with no splices.
Manufacturer shall provide 2 conductors 18 gauge stranded wire for connection to remote
controller. The microprocessor located in the indoor unit shall have the capability of sensing
return air temperature and indoor coil temperature, receiving and processing commands from
the wired controller, providing emergency operation and controlling the outdoor unit. Normal
operation of the remote controller provides individual system control in which one remote
controller and one indoor unit are installed in the same room. The controller shall have the
capability of controlling up to a maximum of fifty (50) systems at a maximum developed control
cable distance of 1,650 feet. The control voltage from the controller to the indoor unit shall be
12 volts, DC. The control voltage between the indoor unit and the outdoor unit shall be 12 volts,
DC. The system shall be capable of automatic restart when power is restored after power
interruption. The system shall be capable of automatic restart when power is restored after
power interruption. The system shall include self-diagnostics including total hours of
A.
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -40
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
Northampton,MA
w� Louvers to provide four(4)way air diffusion. Motors shall be furnished with multi-speed switch
suitable for surface mounting or mounting on the unit as indicated on the drawings.
C. Coils shall be constructed of plate type aluminum fins mechanically bonded to seamless copper
tubes. Coils shall be two pass design and shall be suitable for a maximum hot water pressure
for 200 psig.
2.30 PROPELLER UNIT HEATERS (ELECTRIC)
A. Furnish electric unit heaters of the configuration and capacities specified on the Drawings. Unit
heaters shall be as manufactured by Q*Mark, Raywall, or approved equal. Installation shall be
by the Electrical Contractor.
B. The unit heater shall be constructed of an 18 gauge steel casing. The casing shall be
phosphate coated and finished in baked enamel. Mounting brackets designed for ceiling
OR mounting shall be furnished by the unit manufacturer.
C. The heating elements shall be constructed with a copper clad metal sheath and aluminum fins.
The unit heater shall have an automatic reset thermal overheat protector consisting of a linear
capillary tube wired for instantaneous de-energizing of the heating element.
D. The fan motors shall be totally enclosed, all angle operation, with integral thermal overload
protection. Fans shall be direct driven with aluminum blades. The heating elements inlet and
fan discharge shall have protective louvers. The fan discharge shall have adjustable discharge
louvers.
E. The unit heater shall be UL listed, shall meet the requirements of the National Electrical Code
and shall have integral disconnect switch.
2.31 HOT WATER REHEAT COILS
A. Provide McQuay, Trane, Dunham Bush or Carrier, ARI certified hot water heating coils as
shown on the Drawings. The primary surface shall be 5/8 inch O.D. seamless copper tubes on
r 1-1/2 inch centers. The secondary surface shall consist of rippled corrugated aluminum die
formed plate type fins. The fin collars shall be full drawn to completely cover the tubes for
maximum heat transfer and to provide accurate control of fin spacing.
B. Casings shall be constructed of continuous galvanized steel with reinforced mounting flanges.
C. Coils shall have connections provided for universal right or left hand air flow applications. Coil
connections shall be wrought copper 1/2 inch NPT supply and return connections. All joints
shall be brazed with copper brazing alloys.
D. Complete coil shall be tested with 315 pounds air pressure under warm water containing special
wetting agent.
2.32 DUCTLESS SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONING
A. The air conditioning system shall be Mitsubishi Electric, Sanyo, or Carrier split system as
scheduled and shown on the plans. The system shall consist of an indoor design evaporator
with wired control and outdoor unit.
B. The units shall be listed by Electrical Laboratories(ETL)and bear the ETL label. All wiring shall
be in accordance with the National Electrical Code (N.E.C.). The units shall be rated in
accordance with ARI Standard 210 and bear the ARI label. The units shall be manufactured in
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -39
40
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883 4M
Northampton, MA
2.27 FINNED RADIATION w
A. Provide Vulcan, Sterling, Slant-Fin or approval equal,finned tube radiation with copper tube and
aluminum finned heating elements with the pipe size, fin size and spacing to give the output as
shown on the Drawings. Lengths shown on the Drawing are lengths of the finned element. '�
B. Heating element enclosures shall be similar and equal to type as shown. Enclosures shall have
mounting channel with gasket seal at top to prevent wall streaking and shall have 18 gauge full N,
back plate and 14 gauge enclosure front. Enclosure top shall be continuously supported for the
length of cover and shall have hem at bottom edge to conceal support bracket and provide
lateral support.
so
C. Enclosure wall support brackets shall be heavy gauge steel and shall provide element hangers
with vertical adjustment. Brackets shall be spaced not more than four(4)feet on center and not
greater than 18 inches from the cover ends. Enclosure shall be secured at the bottom edge to
the support bracket. Heating element support hangers shall be of the two 2 piece sliding
*`
PP 9 Pp 9 O p� g
cradle type with ball bearings or aluminum slide plates and shall be mounted on the cover
support brackets.
w�
D. Enclosures shall be the height as shown and shall have flush joints with no screws. They shall
extend, in general, from wall to wall, except at door openings the covers shall extend
approximately 12 inches beyond the end of the radiator and terminate in an end cap. Furnish
matching end trim pieces, end caps, end supports, and inside and outside corners for
continuous runs. Finish of cover shall be a finish coat of baked enamel of a color selected by
the Architect.
2.28 CABINET UNIT HEATERS (HOT WATER)
A. Provide McQuay, Sterling, Trane, Vulcan or Airtherm, cabinet type unit heaters of the size and
capacity shown on the Drawings. Cabinet type unit heaters shall be furnished with two sets of
filters. Recessed unit heaters shall have flange on four (4) sides. Unit front plate shall be
galvanized steel, phosphatized and finished with a baked enamel finish of a color as selected by
the Architect.
B. Coils shall have rippled aluminum fins with seamless copper tubes mechanically expanded for a
permanent bond. Coils shall have a manual air vent at high point and shall be constructed for a
working pressure of 150 psig. Coil performance shall be as shown on the Drawings.
C. Fans shall be DWDI forward curved centrifugal type. Fan housing shall be fabricated of heavy
gauge galvanized steel.
D. Fan motor shall be permanent split capacitor single speed having sleeve bearings with oilers.
Motors shall have inherent thermal overload protection with automatic reset and resilient
mounts and shall be designed for use with a unit mounted solid state variable speed controller.
Each unit shall have a solid state variable speed controller with integral"ON/OFF"switch which ■o
shall provide uniform unlimited fan speed from high to low. VSC shall include a voltage
compensating circuit and RFI filter circuit.
2.29 PROPELLER UNIT HEATERS (HOT WATER)
A. Provide Modine, Sterling, Vulcan or Airtherm horizontal propeller unit heaters of the type, size
and capacities shown.
B. The casing shall be of steel, phosphatized and finished with baked enamel. The motor
mounted panel shall be 18 gauge steel. Casing shall enclose the coil, louvers and fan blades.
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -38
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
a) A water level sensing unit comprised of three metallic probes screwed into a
threaded probe head. Probe head shall incorporate probe isolation chamber to
eliminate short—circuiting between probes caused by mineral coating of probe
head. Probe head shall be mounted on the humidifier assembly.
go b) A solenoid operated fill valve factory mounted on the humidifier assembly.
c) End—of—season drain
D. SDU—E fan (Space Distribution Unit, External absorption fan):
1. Mounted on top of or remotely from the humidifier shall be a fan—based space
distribution unit (SDU—E) that shall draw air from the side and discharge visible steam
vapor with a uniform rise, spread and throw out the front.
2. The SDU—E shall have a welded stainless steel frame assembly housing an electric
fan,fan control devices, steam inlet connection and integral dispersion device.
3. The SDU—E shall have a cabinet with exterior that matches the humidifier cabinet.
4. The SDU—E shall be specified for humidifier models with capacity up to 102 Ibs/hr(46.3
kg/h).
E. Water make up valve controller shall be of the electrode probe type and shall consist of two(2)
on components:
1. A three (3) electrode water level sensing unit mounted in the front face of the
evaporating chamber.
2. An electronic, logic control system module or the humidifier shall have an adjustable
surface skimmer arranged so that on each refill cycle, a portion of the humidifier water
will flow to drain.
F. Control panel shall be UL listed and shall be mounted as shown on the Drawings. Control
panel shall contain magnetic contactors, fused control circuit transformer, logic control system
module, automatic program timer, pneumatic electric switches of the same manufacturer of the
temperature control system, numbered terminal strip and fuses for heater circuits. Control
module shall be solid state and shall provide for automatic refill, automatic reset, low water cut
off and automatic flushing.
G. Provide for field installation, a Dwyer Model No. 1638-0 proving switch having an adjustable
control point range of 0.05 inches to 0.25 inches W.C.
H. Provide a tempering device and shall be a Drane Kooler model DK18-5SJ.375 as manufactured
by DRI-STEEM, or approved equal, having the following features:
1. Mixing chamber and fittings shall be constructed of 304 stainless steel with welded
seams.
2. Thermostatically Controlled Tempering Valve shall be brass bodied, adjustable,
charged bulb type.
3. Manual Drain Valve shall be a'/4"brass bodied ball valve.
4. Vacuum Breaker to prevent vacuum binding.
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -37
+w
M
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883 ,p
Northampton,MA
• nvoEstSteamPcnt (SNVT_lev_percent); read the estimated amount of steam we
the humidifier is producing in percent of total capacity
• nvoEstSteamLb_Hr(SNVT_count); read the estimated amount of steam the .W
humidifier is producing in Ibs/hr
• nvoGlassTemp(SNVT_temp); read window glass temperature at transmitter
c) Configuration properties(inputs). The following network configuration inputs (nci)
allow the user to set humidifier information via LonTalk during system
configuration:
• nciGlassTempOfst(SNVT_temp_diff p); set offset from measured value for
window glass temperature
• nciRHRoomOffset(SNVT_lev_percent); set offset from measured value for
space RH
• nciRHDuctOffset(SNVT_lev_percent); set offset from measured value for
duct RH
• nciPID_Band (SNVT_lev_percent); set PID band value
40
• nciPID_KP (SNVT count); set PID P gain value
• nciPID_KI (SNVT_count); set PID I gain value
2. Makeup water switch control and low water safety shutdown. Fully modulating (0%
to100%) control of humidifier outputs. PID control capability. Self—diagnostic test at
start—up. Integral fault relay for remote signaling of alarms. Keypad, capable of either
unit or remote mounting with a 5' (1.5 m) cable, and able to operate within a
temperature range of 32 °F to 122 °F (0 °C to 50 °C). A keypad that provides text
backlighting and allows personal password codes. A keypad capable of monitoring ..
and/or controlling the following parameters:
a) Relative humidity (RH) set point and actual conditions in the space(from
humidity transmitter).
b) Humidity(RH) high limit set point and actual conditions.
c) Total system demand in %of humidifier capacity.
d) Total system output in Ibs/hour(kg/h).
e) Drain/flush frequency interval and duration. *•
f) End—of—season drain status (on standard water systems and if ordered as a DI
water option).
g) Window glass surface temperature (in % RH offset application and if ordered as
an option).
h) System alarms.
i) Previous fault messages.
j) Up to 20 humidifier functions, depending on programming.
k) Operating temperature.
I) User—adjustable water skim duration.
m) Water level control for softened or hard water:
dr
3. System shall provide for automatic refill, low water cutoff, field—adjustable skimmer
bleedoff functions and automatic drain—down of humidifier. System shall consist of:
■
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -36
ON
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
per square inch and shall be mounted on the vaporizing chamber's removable cover.
Over-temperature switch: A factory-mounted and -wired UL-listed limit control sensor with
manual reset shall sense an over-temperature condition and de-energize heater circuit
controls. Water requirements: The humidifier shall be capable of generating steam from tap,
softened or DI/RO water. Drain:An electric drain valve shall be mounted on humidifier assembly
to allow tank to drain automatically at the end of a humidification season.
C. Vapor-logic3 microprocessor controller with the following features or functions:
1. Interoperable with any LonTalk® network. (Note: LonTalk interoperability is not
available with Vapor-logic3 multiple-tank configurations.) The system shall, through
the use of Standard Network Variable Types (SNVTs), allow communication with a
LonTalk building automation system using the following inputs and outputs:
a) Inputs. The following network variable inputs (nvi)allow the user to set humidifier
information via LonTalk:
• nviTimeStamp (SNVT_time_stamp); set the date and time of day
on
• nviMode(SNVT_char_ascii); set humidifier mode (standby, auto, manual
drain)
• nviSpace_SP (SNVT_lev_percent); set humidity set point in space being
humidified.
• nviDuct SP (SNVT_lev_percent); set the duct high limit set point
• nviSetOutputPcnt(SNVT_lev_percent); set steam output as a percentage of
total capacity
• nviSetOutputLbHr(SNVT_count); set steam output in Ibs/hr
b) Outputs. The following network variable outputs (nvo)allow the user to read
humidifier.
• information via LonTalk:
• nvoTimeStam SNVTtime stam
p ( _ _ p); read the humidifier's current date and
time
• nvoMode(SNVT_char_ascii); read the current humidifier mode(standby,
auto, manual
• drain)
• nvoSpace_RH (SNVT_lev_percent); read the RH of the space being
humidified
nvoSpace_SP (SNVT_lev_percent); read the set point of the space being
humidified
• nvoDuct_RH (SNVT_lev_percent); read the duct RH at the transmitter
• nvoDuct_SP (SNVT_lev_percent); read the duct high-limit set point
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -35
M
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883 am
Northampton,MA
as
B. Provide high capacity float actuated non-modulating air vents to vent air from the air separation
fittings. Vents shall not open if system pressure at vent is negative. Air vent shall have all
stainless steel mechanism and Buna-N rubber valve seat. Air vents shall be 3/4 inch pipe size
and rated for 150 psig working pressure at maximum temperature at 250°F and shall be similar
and equal to Bell and Gossett Model 107 High Capacity Air Vent.
2.24 PRESSURE GAUGES
A. Pressure gauges shall have monel rotary type movement, delrin gear, aluminum case, double
strength clear glass window with black embossed figures and graduations on a white dial face,
with 1 percent accuracy of scale range. Gauges shall be manufactured by Trerice Company,
Taylor Instrument or Marshalltown Manufacturing.
B. Water gauges shall be furnished with snubbers. Steam gauges shall be furnished with coil w®
siphon, socket and snubber. All gauges shall be furnished with gauge cocks.
C. Gauges shall be 4-1/2 inch diameter furnished with ranges of 0 to 60 psig for hot water system;
of 0 to 300 psig for chilled water system; of 0 to 30 psig for low pressure steam; of 0 to 100 psig
for medium pressure steam; and of 0 to 200 psig for high pressure steam.
2.25 THERMOMETERS
.gym
A. Thermometers shall be swing angle design of the separable well type and shall have a 9 inch
cast aluminum case. The scale shall be white with black figures and graduations embossed on
the scale. The column shall be filled with blue reading liquid in glass. Thermometers shall be as
manufactured by Trerice Company,Taylor Instrument or Marshalltown Manufacturing.
B. Thermometers shall be furnished complete with all necessary sockets, wells, connectors and
accessories required for installation suitable for the service in which installed. Extension necks No
shall be furnished for insulated piping and ductwork.
C. Thermometers shall be furnished with the temperature ranges of 40 to 240°F for hot water.
w
2.26 ELECTRIC HUMIDIFIER
A. Electric humidifiers shall be manufactured by Dri-Steem Humidifier Company, Armstrong, ..
Nortec, Carel, or Pure Humidifier Company. Units shall be UL listed and shall consist of type
304 stainless steel evaporating chamber with gasketed cover capable of operating under a
pressure of at least 18 inches W.C. without steam or water leaks. Water make-up valve shall
be solenoid operated, brass body type. A cleanable strainer with fine mesh screen shall be so
mounted upstream of the valve. Fill opening shall be 1 inch maximum above overflow.
Humidifier capacity and characteristics shall be as indicated on the Drawings.
B. Enclosure shall be an 18-gauge steel frame with resin cover suitable for finished spaces.
Enclosure frame shall constitute a drip pan, having a threaded connection for drain piping. A
separate compartment shall house electrical devices and shall be secured to prevent accidental
contact with electrical components. The front exterior of the cabinet shall contain the
microprocessor controller's digital keypad. Cleanable vaporizing chamber shall be stainless ..
steel with Heli-arc welded seams. The evaporating chamber shall be mounted on slide rails.
Electrical, water supply and drain connections shall have unions and plugs to allow convenient
removal of the evaporating chamber for cleaning. The humidifier frame shall have prepunched
keyhole-style mounting holes located on 16" (406mm) centers for ease of wall mounting and
leveling. Steam outlet on top of tank shall be configured to connect to: Immersion heater(s):
Heater(s) shall be Incoloy alloy-sheathed resistance type designed for no more than 86 watts
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -34
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
2.18 IN-LINE PUMPS
A. Pumps shall be in-line type of the size and capacities shown. Pumps shall be as manufactured
by Bell and Gossett, Amtrol, Taco, Paco, Armstrong, Weinman or Sulzer. Pumps shall have
removable motor and bracket assembly, flexible coupling, bronze enclosed impeller and
mechanical seals rated from 250°F water.
B. Pumps shall be suitable to support the weight of the pump and motor from the piping
connections.
war 2.19 WATER PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES
A. Provide Bell & Gossett, Amtrol, Armstrong or approved equal, adjustable pressure reducing
valves on the city water supply to the hot water heating system and to the chilled water closed
! ' circuit condenser water system as shown. Valves should be equal to a Bell & Gossett No. 7
adjustable from 25 to 60 psig and set as shown. All valves shall be brass and shall have
replaceable brass strainer baskets.
2.20 WATER PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES
A. Provide Bell & Gossett, Amtrol, Armstrong or approved equal pressure relief valves on the hot
water heating system as shown. Pipe discharges independently to drain with air gap for visual
inspection of flow.
2.21 PRESSURIZED COMPRESSION TANKS AND AIR SEPARATION FITTINGS
A. Provide Bell &Gossett,Amtrol,Armstrong or approved equal pressurized compression tanks of
the size and capacity shown on the Drawings. Tanks shall be pre-charged type with an integral
heavy duty butyl rubber diaphragm. Tank shall have a standard automobile tire charging air
valve to facilitate the onsite charging of the tank to meet system requirements. Tanks shall be
ASME construction for 125 psig working pressure with maximum design operating temperature
of 240°F and have all tappings as required.
B. Provide Bell & Gossett, Amtrol, Armstrong or approved equal tangential flow type steel tank air
separation fittings on the hot water heating system, chilled water system, closed circuit
condenser water system as shown on the Drawings. All fittings shall be ASME rated and
stamped for 125 psig design pressure and shall have tangential inlet and outlet connections and
perforated stainless steel air separator and collector tube designed to release air to the top
fitting of the unit. Provide high capacity float actuated non-modulating air vent at top fitting of
tank. Unit shall have bottom blow down connection.
2.22 MANUAL AIR VENTS
A. Provide manual air vents at the high points of all air conditioning unit coils, all cabinet unit heater
coils, all unit heaters, all finned tube radiators and all reheat coils.
B. Manual air vents shall be rated for 150 psig working pressure at 200°F. Vents shall be similar
! ' and equal to Bell&Gossett 4V Manual Air Vent.
2.23 AUTOMATIC AIR VENTS
A. Provide automatic air vents at all high points of the hot water mains as shown and/or required
for complete venting of the systems. All automatic air vents shall be similar and equal to Bell
and Gossett No. 87 rated for 150 psig working pressure at a maximum temperature of 240°F.
on
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -33
00
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
2. Furnish all required chemicals for the cleaning and proper initial treatment of all
systems hereinafter described, together with all necessary testing equipment and
reagents for field analysis of the water.
C. Provide treatment systems and service for water systems as shown on drawings and specified
herein.
D. Provide piping necessary for complete system so
E. Closed Loop Water Systems(Hot)
1. Five (5) gallon capacity by-pass shot feeder shall be furnished and installed for each am
closed water loop system. Neptune model VTF-5.
2. Two station corrosion coupon rack.
w■
3. A single liquid corrosion inhibitor shall be provided. Product shall be nitrite-borate
based blend. Control limits shall be 800-1,200 parts per million sodium nitrite.
Treatment shall be Barclay Inhibitor N-101. in
F. Flush all systems with Barclay Liquid Flushout or approved equal after completion of
installation. After cleaning, add nitrite Inhibitor N-101 or approved equal, to 800-1,200 ppm
maximum. Submit written report indicating that systems have been thoroughly cleaned and MP
charged with corrosion inhibitor.
G. Apply chemical cleaning operation to interior of systems to remove foreign substances after
completion of installation.
H. Effluent from HVAC system discharged to sewer shall meet requirements of applicable local,
state and national water quality standards.
I. Water treatment shall include feeding devices necessary to feed chemical solution into piping
system and bring chemical properties of water to within manufacturer's recommended operation
limits, in order to minimize corrosion and reduce build-up of slime or other contaminants.
J. One year service required in Part I of this Section shall include, but not be limited to, the
following:
1. Deliver and maintain water treatment chemical for one year.
2. Collect and analyze samples of circulation water every thirty days for one year, and
adjust rate of chemical feed to suit each system.
3. Inspect and maintain chemical feeding devices of one year. Inspection and
maintenance should be performed at minimum intervals of every thirty days.
4. Test water according to project requirements.
K. Submit reports indicating start-up of treatment system has been completed.
L. Submit reports indicating analysis of system water after cleaning and after treatment.
M. Fill boilers with cleaner and water. Apply heat, slowly raising boiler temperature to 160°F, and
maintain for 8 hours minimum. Cool to 135°F, then drain as quickly as possible. Refill with
clean water, drain, refill and check for sludge. Repeat until system is free of sludge.
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -32
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
refrigerant system under all conditions of operation. Provide sufficient valves to enable system
to be pumped down.
D. Refrigerant service valves shall be designed for use with refrigerant used and shall have
pressure ratings compatible with system working pressure encountered. Valves shall be
packed, wing cap, non-rotating swivel seat disk valves as manufactured by either Henry or
Mueller.
E. Check valves shall be brass body suitable for refrigerant liquid or gas service as required by the
system design operation. Valves shall be as manufactured by either Henry or Mueller.
F. Filter dryer in the liquid line shall consist of a steel cylinder filled with a suitable desiccant that
will not plug, cake, rust, channel or break down and shall remove both water and acid from the
refrigerant. The dryer shall be constructed so that none of the desiccant will pass into the
refrigerant lines. The filter dryer shall be replaceable core type"Catch-All" as manufactured by
either Sporlan or Alco.
G. Sight glasses shall be see through type with cover cap on each side. Sight glasses shall be
provided in liquid line before each expansion valve. Sight glasses shall be "See AIP'
combination moisture and liquid indicator as manufactured by either Sporlan or Alco.
H. Hangers for refrigerant piping shall be 1A band type of copper plated steel. As an alternate,
lead inserts may be used between the pipe and steel hangers.
2.16 WATER PUMPS
A. Pumps shall be as manufactured by Bell and Gossett, Aurora, Weinman, Sulzer, Armstrong,
Paco or Taco. All pumps shall be for clear water with the chemicals specified in proper
f concentration to prevent corrosion and in addition the condenser water shall be treated to
prevent the growth of algae in the cooling towers. Pumps shall not overload their motors when
operating at wide open volume. All base mounted pumps shall have fabricated steel base or
cast iron base and this Subcontractor shall ensure that the base is completely filled with grout
when pump is installed. Capacities of pumps shall be as indicated on the Drawings.
B. Hot water pumps shall have ball bearings, bronze impellers, bronze casing wearing rings, steel
shaft, bronze shaft sleeve and mechanical seals. Pumps shall be either end suction or double
suction split case type as shown. Mechanical seals shall be manufactured by Crane or
approved equal and rated for 200 psig at 225°F.
2.17 CHEMICAL FEED TREATMENT
A. Furnish the necessary apparatus to provide water treatment to the hot water system and the
boilers as furnished by Barclay Chemical Company, Betz Chemical Company, Dearborn
Chemicals, Nalco or other fully capable water treatment organization approved by the Architect.
B. A Contract Agreement satisfactory in form and substance to the Architect shall be executed
between this Subcontractor and Water Treatment Company through its authorized agent
binding the Water Treatment Company to furnish supervisory service to assure the use of the
proper chemical treatment to and for the hereinafter mentioned systems for the initial treatment
thereof. The water treatment company shall perform the following specified services through its
agent:
1. Supervise the cleaning and flushing of all systems and the initial introduction of water
treatment chemicals.
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -31
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
C. Unit casing shall be constructed of 18 gauge zinc coated heavy gauge, galvanized steel.
Exterior surfaces shall be cleaned, phosphatized and finished with a weather-resistant baked
enamel finish. Unit's surface shall be tested 300 hours in salt spray test. Units shall have
removable end panels which allow access to all major components and controls.
D. Air cooled condensing units shall have a single refrigeration circuit. Each refrigeration circuit
has an integral sub-cooling circuit. A refrigeration filter drier, expansion valve and check valves
shall be provided as standard. The units shall have both a liquid line and suction gas line
service valve with gauge port. Units shall have one direct drive hermetic reciprocating
compressor with centrifugal oil pump providing positive lubrication to moving parts. Motor shall
be suction gas-cooled and shall have a voltage utilization range of plus or minus 10 percent of
nameplate voltage. Crankcase heater, temperature and current-sensitive motor overloads shall
be included for maximum protection. Shall have internal spring isolation and sound muffling to
minimize vibration transmission and noise. External high and low pressure cutout devices shall
be provided.
E. Coils shall be internally finned or smooth bore 3/8" copper tubes mechanically bonded to
configured aluminum plate fin as standard. Coil shall be factory pressure and leak tested to 375
psig air pressure. Metal grilles with PVC coating for coil protection is optional.
F. Condenser fan and motor shall be direct drive, statically and dynamically balanced propeller
fans with aluminum blades and electroplated steel hubs shall be used in draw-through vertical
discharge position. Either permanently lubricated totally enclosed or open construction type
motors shall be provided and shall have built in current and thermal overload protection. Motor
shall have either ball or sleeve bearing type.
G. Units shall be completely factory wired with necessary controls and contractor pressure lugs or
terminal block for power wiring. Control wiring shall be 24-volt control circuit which includes
fusing and control transformer. Units shall provide external location for mounting a fused
disconnect device.
H. Unit shall have vibration isolation packages and shall reduce transmission of noise and vibration
to building structures, equipment and adjacent spaces. Packages shall be available in either *�
neoprene-in-shear or spring-flex types.
I. Unit shall have solid state, anti-short cycle timer which shall prevent rapid ON/OFF compressor
cycling in light load conditions by not allowing compressor to operate for 5-7 minutes upon
shutdown.
J. Unit shall have a condenser coil guard and metal grille with PVC coating provided to alleviate
coil damage.
2.15 REFRIGERANT PIPING AND ACCESSORIES
4W
A. Refrigerant piping shall be copper tubing Type"L", hard drawn cleaned, dehydrated and capped
for refrigerant service conforming to ASTM B280. All fittings shall be wrought copper brazed
joint type conforming to ANSI B16.22. All joints shall be made using a brazing alloy containing
silver or using a copper-phosphorous alloy. Brazing alloys shall have a minimum of 1,100°F "'
melting temperature and shall conform to ASTM 8260.
B. Provide all pilot operated expansion valves, liquid solenoid valves, strainers, sight glasses with 40
moisture indicators, silica gel dryers, purge valves, relief valves, service valves, shut off valves
and all other accessories and appurtenances to provide a complete and properly functioning
no
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -30
NP
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
2.13 GAS VENT SYSTEMS (AL29-4C)
A. Provide for all interior breeching within the Boiler Room and the gas vent up through the roof
from the gas fired boiler and the gas fired domestic hot water heater as shown on the Drawings
a factory built double wall gas vent system. The gas vent system shall be UL listed and shall be
Selkirk Metalbestos,American Metals Products, Metalfab or Security Chimneys.
B. The vent system shall consist of all items which form a part of the assembly, including standard
tee sections, straight sections, elbows, tall cone flashing, counter flashing, wall thimbles, wall
bands, support plates, anchor plates, roof brace guys and bird proof top cap size(6)feet above
the roof.
C. Installation shall be made in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation and in
compliance with the UL listing. Submit shop drawing layout and support details of all gas vent
systems.
D. The vent shall be of the double-wall, factory-built type for use on condensing appliances or
pressurized venting systems serving Category II, III or IV appliances or as specified by the
equipment manufacturer. Maximum temperature shall not exceed 550°F (288°C). Vent shall
be listed for an internal static pressure of 6"WG and tested to 15"WG.
E. Vent shall be constructed with an inner and outer wall, with a 1" annular insulating air space.
The inner wall (vent) shall be constructed of AL29-4C®superferritic stainless steel, 0.015"thick
for 6"-12" diameters and 0.024" thick for 14"-24" diameters. The outer wall (casing) shall be
constructed of aluminized steel, 0.018" thick for 6"-12" diameters and 0.024" thick for 14"-24"
diameters.
Inner and outer walls hall be connected by means of spacer clips that maintain the concentricity
of the annual space and allow unobstructed differential thermal expansion of the inner and out
walls.
F. All parts exposed to the weather shall be protected by one (1) coat of corrosion and heat
resistant base primer and one(1)coat of heat resistant paint.
G. All supports, roof or wall penetrations, terminations, appliance connectors and drain fittings,
required to install the vent system shall be included.
H. Roof penetration pieces shall be UL listed and provided by the vent manufacturer. Roof curbs
shall be required on roofs greater than 12:12 pitch.
I. All inner vent connections shall be secured by means of profiled connector bands with gear
clamp tighteners. Joints shall be sealed with P077 Sealant. Where exposed to weather, the
outer closure band shall be sealed to prevent rainwater from entering the space between inner
and outer walls.
2.14 AIR-COOLED CONDENSING UNITS (Small)
A. Provide Trane, Carrier or York air-cooled condensing units of the type, size and capacities
! ' shown on the Drawings.
B. Units shall be assembled on heavy gauge steel mounting/lifting rails and shall be weatherproof.
Unit shall include a hermetic reciprocating compressor(s), plate fin condenser coil, fans and
motors, controls and holding charge of R-134A, 407C or 410A. Operating range shall be
between 115°F and 35°F in cooling as standard from factory. Units shall be UL listed, C.S.A.
certified and rated in accordance with ARI Standard 240 and 270.
ow
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -29
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
B. The installing contractor shall supply all boilers and flue condensate drains with "P-traps" and
unions before the neutralizing tubes. All piping shall be PVC and supplied/installed by the
contractor. Plastic tubing is an acceptable alternative when used with barbed fittings. All PVC
joints shall be glued in place and all barbed fittings shall be secured with tie wraps. .�
C. The boiler and flue condensate drains shall not be combined into one neutralizer. All piping
shall be per manufacturer's piping diagrams and directions. All neutralizing tubes shall be
secured to the floor or wall so as not to be exposed to damage or within a normal walkway. The
contractor shall fill all "P-traps" and neutralizing tubes with tap water before the firing of any
boiler
D. The contractor shall inform the owner of any maintenance or scheduled recharge of the tube's
limestone aggregate as described in the manufacturer's I and O manual.
2.12 DOUBLE WALL CHIMNEY SYSTEM
.e
A. Furnish and install where indicated on the drawings a factory-built UL listed MODEL DW
positive pressure chimney and breeching as manufactured.by Van-Packer Co., Buda, IL, Selkirk
Metalbestos, Security Chimneys, Schebler Co., or approved equal. The chimney shall be listed ,■u
by UL as a "1400° Fahrenheit Chimney" for continuous operation at 1400°F and intermittent
operation at 1800°F and also as a "Building Heating Appliance Chimney" (UL103) for
continuous operation at 1000°F and intermittent operation at 1400°F.
B. The chimney manufacturer shall furnish all items which form a part of the assembly, including,
tee sections, straight sections, elbows, end caps, cleanouts, expansion joints, boiler adapter
kits, angle rings, flashing, counter flashing, and insulated thimble where required. Each section
shall bear the factory applied UL label.
C. Installation shall be made in accordance with the Manufacturer's recommendation and in
compliance with the UL listing. The products shall be listed for 6" clearance to combustibles as
a 1400°F chimney,and 4"clearance to combustibles as a Building Heating Appliance Chimney.
D. All chimney and breeching sections(inside the building) shall be of double wall construction with
a 1" insulation between the liner and the shell. The liner shall be 20-gauge type 304 stainless
steel and the shell shall be of 24 gauge-aluminized steel for all sizes up to and including 36" ID.
E. All chimney and breeching sections (outside the building) shall be of double wall construction
with a 1" air space between the liner and the shell. The liner shall be 20-gauge type 304
stainless steel and the shell shall be of 24 gauge Type 316 stainless steel for all sizes up to and
including 36" ID.
F. All sections shall be joined with a vee-band sealed with silicone sealant around the liner flanges
and a draw band around the shell flanges. Silicone sealant shall also be used to seal the draw
bands on the portions of the chimney that are outside of the building.
G. Diameter, total chimney height, breeching diameters and layout shall be as indicated on the
drawings. The chimney is to terminate 3'-0"minimum above the roof.
H. Installation shall be made in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation and in
compliance with the UL listing. Submit shop drawing layout and support details of all gas vent
systems.
40
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -28
,w
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
JIM energized or de-energized. There shall be an independent adjustment of this
setting for each burner.
C. Modulation Start Point: Adjustable from 0 to 100%. This setting shall determine
the percent modulation a stage must achieve before the next stage is activated.
There shall be an independent adjustment of this setting for each burner.
d. Purge Timer: Adjustable from 0—10.0 minutes. This setting shall determine the
delay time between a stage being energized and the beginning of modulation.
e. Lag Stage Delay:Adjustable from 0 to 60 minutes. The next stage in the rotation
shall not be fired until the previous stage has remained in high fire for the period
of time set by the Lag Stage delay.
f. Setback: Setback shall be adjustable from 0 to 75°F, or 0 to 7.5 PSIG on 0-15 or
PP 0-30 PSIG units, 0 to 75 PSIG on 0-100 PSIG units, 0 to 150 PSIG on 0-200
PSIG units, or 0 to 200 PSIG on 0-300 PSIG units. This setting shall determine
the °F/PSIG droop from the primary set point whenever the setback mode is
activated. The setback mode shall be activated by an external switch closure.
g. Standby Timer:Adjustable from 1 to 60 minutes. This setting shall determine the
delay period that must elapse before any designated standby stages are
activated. The timing sequence shall begin when all active stages reach 100%
firing rate.
h. System Delay: Adjustable from 0 to 60 minutes. This timer shall start after the
last stage has turned off. The System contacts will remain energized until the
time period has ended.
i. Rotation Mode: The control shall be capable of the following rotations:
Manual Rotation
Automatic rotation adjustable in one-hour increments from 1 hour to 7 days.
First on/First off
j. Heat/Cool Mode: The control shall be capable of running either in a heating
mode or a cooling mode.
k. Parallel Modulation Mode: The control shall be capable of operating stages such
that all active stages modulate at the same rate.
I. Process Mode: The control shall be capable of accepting a throttling range
around the set point.
A lithium "coin" type battery shall be included to maintain all system parameters in the
event of a power failure. Storage capacity shall be 100 days.
2.11 CONDENSATE ACID NEUTRALIZING TUBES
A. Provide one (1) condensate neutralizing tube for each boiler condensate drain and all flue pipe
condensate drain connections. The condensate tubes shall be designed to elevate the pH level
of the boiler and flue condensate to a minimum of 3 pH above the boiler and flue condensate
pH level, or between 6.2 and 7.2 pH. Each tube shall be model JM-20(6 GPH, 2,000 MBH)as
manufactured by J.J.M. Boiler Works,with 3/4"inlet and outlet connections.
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -27
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883 .�
Northampton,MA
U. The control shall have the capability of operating in a temperature or pressure mode.
Temperature sensors shall be of the thermistor type. Standard operating range shall be-30 to
250°F. Pressure sensors shall be of the 4 - 20ma type. Standard operating range shall be
selectable for 0—15, 0—30, 0—100, 0—200, and 0—300 PSIG.
V. The control shall accept a dry contact input to shut all boiler stages down. The control shall
keep any boilers being shut down in low fire for 45 seconds before opening the limit circuit relay.
W. The control shall accept a 4-20mA signal to change the temperature set point from a remote
source. The range of the set point shall be adjustable from 100 to 240°F.
X. The control shall be capable of accepting four(4)dry closure type boiler lockout inputs.
Y. The control shall be capable of resetting the temperature of heating water based on the outside
temperature when an optional outdoor sensor is installed. All the following shall be user
adjustable:
1. Reset Ratio: The control shall provide adjustable reset ratios from 4:1 (Outdoor
Temperature:Water Temperature)to 1:4.
2. Offset: The control shall provide an integral offset adjustment to parallel shift the
selected reset curve. The range of settings shall be-50°F to 50°F.
3. Outdoor Cutoff: The control shall provide an adjustable outdoor temperature cutoff.
The range of settings shall be-30°F to 75°F with two additional settings, ON and OFF.
4. Minimum Water Temperature: The control shall provide a minimum water temperature
set point to limit the computed water temperature. The range of settings shall be 70°F
to 180°F. ..
Z. The control shall have four(4) normally open contacts that can be used to start/stop the burner.
These outputs shall have a minimum current carrying capability of 5amps. The relays
controlling these outputs shall be field replaceable. The control shall have four(4) modulating
outputs. These outputs shall be modules with two outputs per module. The control shall have
the capability to operate modules having 0—5 volts, 1 —5 volts, 0— 10 volts, 135 ohm, and 4—
20 ma outputs. The control shall be capable of operating two different output groups. The
control shall be capable of identifying the output module types and adjusting control methods
accordingly. Where practical, the output modules shall be protected from accidental incorrect
connection. Should damage occur, where practical, damage shall be confined to the output
module. The control must be able to accept an extension module to increase the capacity by
an additional 8 stages. All of the functions of the extension module will be displayed on the
Multi Mod. The control shall be capable of accepting a dry closure type system prove input.
This shall prevent any stages from activating until the contact is closed. The control shall have
a set of N.O. contacts that shall close when the Multi-Mod requires output. These contacts will �•
remain closed for an adjustable period of time after the last stage is turned off.
1. The control shall have the following user adjustable parameters:
a. Sensor Set Point: The control shall provide an integral sensor set point
adjustment. The set point shall be adjustable in 1°F or 1 PSIG increments.
b. Ignition Start Point: Adjustable from 1 to 50%. This setting shall determine the
position of the firing rate (fully modulating) motor at the time the burner is
.w
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -26
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
and material for a period of eighteen(18) months from date of shipment, or twelve(12) months
from date of start-up,whichever occurs first. The heat exchanger and burner shall be warranted
for a period of five(5)years from date of shipment.
O. Installation:
1. Contractor shall install boiler in strict compliance with manufacturer's installation
instructions.
2. Contractor shall install boiler in strict compliance with state and local codes and
applicable NFPA standards.
3. Contractor shall maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances around sides and
overtop of equipment.
! 4. Contractor shall install boiler components that were removed from equipment for
shipping purposes.
5. Contractor shall install components that were furnished loose with equipment for field
installation.
6. Electric contractor shall provide all electrical control and power interconnect wiring.
7. Contractor shall provide all fuel gas vent and service piping.
8. Contractor shall provide all boiler piping connections.
9. Contractor shall install all combustion air intake and exhaust venting as specified.
P. The boiler manufacturer representative shall test all boiler and burner interlocks, actuators,
valves, controllers, gauges, thermometers, pilot lights, switches, etc. Any malfunctioning
component shall be replaced. All adjustments to boiler, burner, and boiler control system shall
be performed by the boiler manufacturer's local representative.
Q. The boiler manufacturer's representative shall provide start-up of each boiler and instructions of
the owner's representative on the function of all components, including the burner and the boiler
control system
R. The control shall operate on 120 VAC, with a maximum power of 40 watts. The control shall
operate between 20 and 130°F with an operating humidity of 20 to 80% RH (non condensing)
PM with a storage temperature of no less than-4 to 180°F.
S. The control shall have a four(4) line by twenty(20)character VFD display capable of displaying
both numbers and characters. The display shall be visible with no ambient light. All control
operation information shall be available for display. During times of inactivity, or 15 minutes
after last user entry, the display shall enter a lower power mode. IN this mode, the display shall
reduce visible light output. The control shall exit this mode whenever button or digital encoder
activity is sensed. The control shall use five push buttons and one rotary digital encoder for
+ ► user parameter entry. User parameter entry shall be accomplished using a menu system.
T. The control shall have the field upgradeable optional addition of Lon Works network capability,
Telecommunication Gateway Control capability, and remote intercept capability. The control
shall optionally be Johnson Metasys compatible. This communication shall be via RS485. The
control shall have dual RS485 output capability to communicate with any two of the following:
TGC, Notifact,or Metasys.
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -25
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
6. Two(2)pressure test ports.
H. Each boiler shall be equipped for direct spark ignition.
I. Each boiler shall be provided with an integral combustion air control system. The combustion
air system shall be factory assembled. Each combustion air control system shall include at
least the following:
1. The primary control shall vary the speed of the blower based on load demand. The
blower shall apply a varying negative pressure on the gas valve, which will open or
close to maintain zero pressure at the valve orifice, thereby increasing or decreasing *�
the firing rate. Both the air and gas shall be premixed in the blower.
2. One(1) low airflow differential pressure switch to insure that combustion air is supplied.
w
3. High exhaust backpressure switch.
J. The burner control system shall be supplied with a 24 VAC transformer to reduce the 120 VAC,
single phase, 60 hertz primary. The 120/160 power supply to each boiler shall be protected by
a 15 amp fused disconnect switch supplied by the electrical contractor. The boiler must include
an electric spark ignition system. Main flame shall be monitored and controlled by flame rod,
rectification system. Each boiler shall be provided with all necessary controls, all required
programming sequences, and all safety interlocks. Each boiler control system shall be properly
interlocked with all safety devices. Each boiler control system shall provide a timed sequence
pre-ignition air purge of boiler combustion chamber. The combustion airflow sensor shall
monitor and prove the airflow purge.
K. The boiler manufacturer shall provide each boiler with an integral, factory pre-wired control
panel. The control panel shall contain at least the following components, all pre-wired to a
numbered terminal strip:
1. One(1)—Burner"on-off"switch.
2. One (1) — Electronic combination temperature control, flame safeguard and system
control.
3. One(1)—Control circuit breaker, 5 amp.
4. All necessary control switches, pushbuttons, relays,timers and terminal strips.
5. LED Display Panel to adjust set points and control operating parameters, LED displays
to indicate burner sequence, all service codes (0-65), fan speed, boiler set point,
sensor values including inlet and outlet flue gas and outdoor air temperature.
L. Each boiler shall be a complete factory packaged, hydrostatically tested and bear the ASME"H"
stamp.
M. Each boiler shall be factory fire tested. The boiler manufacturer shall perform this fire test under
simulated operating conditions, with the boiler attached to a working chimney system and with
water circulating through the boiler. The manufacturer shall provide a fire test report, including
fuel and air settings and combustion test results permanently affixed to the boiler.
N. The boiler manufacturer shall warranty each boiler, including boiler trim, boiler control system,
and all related components, accessories, and appurtenances against defects in workmanship
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -24
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
maximum of 300 watts and operate at 7000 RPM maximum without vibration or noise and shall
be designed and constructed for exposure to temperatures in its normal location on the boiler.
The operating fan speed will be tachometer sensed and be capable of being displayed at the
LED display. Each burner shall be of the down-fired type and constructed of steel with a
stainless steel inner and stainless steel mesh outer screen. Each boiler shall be provided with a
"Full Modulating" firing control system whereby the firing rate is infinitely proportional at any
firing rate between 20% and 100% as determined by the pulse width modulation input control
signal. Both fuel input and air input must be sequenced in unison to the appropriate firing rate
without the use of mechanical linkage. The Micro Processor shall use a Proportional Integral
Algorithm control to determine the firing rate and have the following capabilities.
1. Maintain single set point.
2. Reset the set point based on outdoor air temperature.
3. Boiler shutdown based on outdoor air temperature.
4. Internal dual set point program with an external switchover. (e.g. — night setback
w/external clock,supplied by others)
5. Alarm relay for any manual reset alarm function.
6. Programmable Low Fire Delay to prevent short cycling based on a time and
temperature factor for release to modulation.
7. LED Display showing current supply and return temperatures, current set points as well
Pill as differential set points. It must also display any fault codes whether automatically
reset or manually reset.
8. Local Manual Operation.
9. Remote Control System (Building Management / Sequencer Control) — The boiler
control shall be capable of accepting a 0 — 10 vdc remote external analog signal to
control the firing rate.
10. On board Domestic Hot Water Priority capable of changing from the heating pump to
the DHW pump as well as temporarily changing the boiler set point from a heating
! !! temperature to a higher set point temperature to satisfy the DHW system and then
returning to the heating mode.
11. Computer(PC) interface for programming and monitoring all functions.
G. Each boiler shall be provided with an integral main gas train, factory assembled, piped, and
wired. The gas valve train shall include at least the following:
1. One(1)manual shutoff valve at gas train inlet connection.
2. Two (2) safety shutoff valves equipped with dual solenoids for independently
energizing for leak testing.
3. Air—Gas ratio control(maximum inlet pressure 14"W.C.)
OP 4. One(1)low gas pressure switch(manual reset).
5. One(1) high gas pressure switch(manual reset).
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -23
wu
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
an outer casing temperature of not more than 50°F above ambient temperature when +*�
the boiler is operated at full rated load.
5. An observation port shall be provided on the boiler to allow full observation of the
burner flame pattern.
6. The flue gas outlet and combustion air intake shall be located on the rear of the boiler.
Boiler to be certified for Category IV venting (stack) as defined in NFPA 54 (ANSI
Z221), latest edition.
7. The boiler supplier shall provide all venting material certified for installation on a
Category IV appliance and shall submit copies of a computer design and detailed +�*
drawing of the venting system for review and approval.
D. Each boiler shall be provided with the following connections:
w
1. One(1)2"Victaulic water inlet(fitting to be supplied with boiler,adapter by contractor)
2. One(1)2"Victaulic water outlet(fitting to be supplied with boiler, adapter by contractor)
3. One(1) relief valve outlet.
4. One(1)flue gas vent outlet.
5. One(1) 1" FPT, fuel gas inlet.
E. Each boiler shall be provided with the following trim compliant with CSD-1:
1. Pressure relief valve to comply with both ASME and local codes.
2. Water pressure and temperature gauge.
3. Primary low water flow fuel cutoff, probe type with manual reset.
4. High water temperature limit control to stop burner at 200°F with manual reset.
5. Operating temperature control to control the sequential operation of the burner.
6. Separate inlet and outlet water temperature sensors capable of monitoring flow.
7. Exhaust temperature sensor.
8. Outdoor reset control as required for single boiler installation.
F. Each boiler shall be supplied with an integral, power type, straight gas, fully automatic fuel *p
burner. The fuel burner shall be an assembly of gas burner, combustion air blower, valve train,
and ignition system. The burner shall be fully coordinated for interaction of its elements with the
boiler heat exchanger and the boiler control system to provide the required capacities,
efficiencies, and performance as specified. Each burner shall be provided with an integral gas
firing combustion head. Each burner shall provide adequate turbulence and mixing to achieve
proper combustion without producing smoke or producing combustibles in the flue gases. Each
boiler shall be provided with an integral variable speed power blower to premix combustion air
and fuel within the blower. The combustion air blower shall have sufficient capacity at the firing
rate to provide air for stoichiometric combustion plus required excess air. Static and total
pressure capability shall comply with the requirements of the boiler. The blower shall be a
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -22
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
2.10 CONDENSING GAS FIRED HOT WATER BOILER(Below 80 PSIG)
A. Furnish and install where shown on the on plans, factory "packaged" low pressure hot water
boilers as manufactured by Patterson-Kelley Co., Aerco KC, Hydrotherm KN Series, Fulton or
DeDietrich. Each factory"packaged" boiler shall be complete with all components, accessories
and appurtenances necessary for a complete and operable boiler as hereinafter specified.
Each unit shall be furnished factory assembled with required wiring and piping as a self-
contained unit. The boiler manufacturer shall be fully responsible for all components assembled
and furnished by him whether or not they are of his own manufacture.
B. The capacity of each boiler shall be to produce an output range as shown on the drawings
based on a fully automatic 5 to 1 turndown ratio of the burner. Each boiler shall be capable of
operating continuously at its rated capacity while maintaining a CSA certified efficiency of not
less than 92%.
1. Boiler shall comply with ASME Section IV for 80 psig(max 200°F).
2. Boiler relief valve setting shall be 80 psig.
3. Boiler outlet water temperature shall be 200°F max.
4. Boiler design water flow rate shall be as shown on the drawings.
(Natural Gas Supply 6N)
5. Fuel shall be natural gas with an assumed higher heating value of 1,030 Btu/Cu Ft.
Natural gas shall be supplied at a pressure of no less than 3.5" W.C. at the inlet gas
valve. The maximum gas pressure shall not exceed 14"W.C.
6. Ambient air temperature shall be assumed to range from 50°F to 90°F with an average
of 70°F.
7. Power voltage shall be 120 VAC, 1-phase, 60 hertz. Control voltage shall be 24 VAC
(transformer to be supplied by boiler manufacturer).
C. Each hot water boiler shall consist of a horizontal, cast aluminum, sectional heat exchanger
complete with trim, valve trains, burner,and boiler control system.
1. Each boiler heat exchanger shall be cast aluminum, counter-flow design for maximum
heat transfer with the multiple sections arranged in a reverse return configuration to
assure balanced water flow through each section.
2. All boiler pressure parts shall be constructed in accordance with the latest revision of
the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IV, and shall be so stamped.
3. Boiler heat exchanger headers shall be fabricated steel and be completely removable
for inspection. Seals shall be EPDM, rated for 400°F service. The boiler design shall
not require use of push nipples or gaskets between the sections.
4. Boiler shall be enclosed with a single wall outer casing. The casing shall be airtight for
pressurized operation. It shall be fabricated from 16-gauge carbon steel. The front
and top wall shall be secured in place with 1/4"—20 NC bolts(sheet metal screws are
not acceptable). The complete outer casing shall be finished, inside and out with a
powder coat finish. The composite structure of the boiler combustion chamber,
insulating air gap and outer casing shall be of such thickness and materials to assure
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -21
ap
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883 ®,
Northampton,MA
shall be installed in combination with "Flow Measuring Stations" as specified hereinafter. **
Provide proper lubricant as recommended by the manufacturer for service involved for all
lubricated plug cocks.
2.07 STRAINERS .�
A. Provide Mueller, Sarco, Barnes&Jones, Warren Webster or approved equal strainers before all
automatically operated valves, traps and pumps. Strainer baskets shall be stainless steel for all
water and all steam service. Wye type 125 psig strainers shall be used on all applications,
except in entrance high pressure steam lines, and at high pressure drips where Wye type 250
psi strainers shall be used.
B. Strainer shall have baskets for water service and steam service for sizes 2 inch and under with
twenty (20) mesh screens; for steam strainers sizes 2-1/2 inch and larger and water strainers
2-1/2 inch and 3 inch size shall have screens with 0.045 inch perforations; and for water w
strainers sizes 4 inch and larger shall have screens with 0.125 inch perforations. Gate valves
shall be installed on all strainer cleanouts.
2.08 TRIPLE DUTY VALVES
A. Furnish and install as shown on plans, a straight pattern valve designed to perform the functions
of a center guided nonslam check valve, shutoff valve, and calibrated balancing valve.
B. The valve shall be of heavy-duty cast iron flanged models only construction with 125 psi ANSI
flanged connections suitable for 175 psi working pressure connections for operating
temperatures up to 250°F. The valve shall be fitted with a bronze seat, replaceable bronze disc
with stainless steel stem, and chatter preventing stainless steel spring. The valve design shall
permit repacking under full system pressure.
C. Cv rating shall be provided at every 10% increment opening for the straight and angle valve.
Manufacturer shall supply the Cv rating for read-out of flow determination and system pressure
drop.
D. The valve shall be equipped with brass readout valves (with integral check valve) to facilitate
taking differential pressure readings across the orifice for accurate system balance. The valve
shall be produced at an ISO 900 approved facility.
E. Triple duty valves shall be manufactured by Bell and Gossett,or approved equal.
2.09 PIPE ALIGNMENT GUIDES
A. Provide each side of the expansion joints as shown and as recommended by the expansion
joint manufacturer alignment guides fabricated of steel plate and structural steel angles equal to
ADSCO Model E Pipe Alignment Guides. Units shall consist of a guide spider clamped and/or
welded to the pipe and a guide body that is anchored to the structure of the building. The spider
shall move through the guide body as the pipe expands and contracts.
B. Guides shall be sized to allow for the thickness of insulation specified for the service in
accordance with the INSULATION paragraph in Part 3 of this Specification. The first guide
each side of the bellows expansion joint shall be located four(4) pipe diameters from the joint.
The second guide shall be located fourteen (14) pipe diameters from the first guide.
Intermediate guides shall be spaced as shown on the drawings between the second guides and
the anchors.
go
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -20
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
I. Face-to-face and end-to-end dimensions of iron body valves shall conform to ANSI B16.10.
Design, workmanship, material and testing shall conform to MSS-SP-70, MSS-SP-71 and
MSS-SP-85.
2.06 FLOW CONTROL BALANCING VALVES
A. All balancing valves for piping 2 inch and smaller shall be either manual Venturi Calibrated
Balance Valve or"Y"-Pattern Globe Valve design as follows:
1. Venturi Calibrated design shall be as manufactured by Flow Design, Inc. (FDI) Flow Set
or Terminator System by HCI combination ball valve and Venturi type flow measuring
section as recommended by ASHRAE. Precision machined throat and stated catalog
accuracy of 3% F.S. The gauge reading (flow signal) shall be at least two feet at the
design flow with the valve in the wide-open position. Each unit shall have dual
temperature/pressure readout ports (fitted with check valve and protective cap) with
provisions for connecting a differential pressure flow meter. A direct reading flow meter
with flow chart shall be provided. Valves shall have memory stops to allow complete
shut-off and return to set position without losing the set-point of the system.
2. "Y"-Pattern Globe Valves for '/ inch to 2 inch shall be manufactured by Tour &
Andersson (TA Hydronics) 786 (solder)/787 Series (NPT), Armstrong, or Hattersley.
All metal parts shall be of nonferrous, pressure die cast, nonporous Ametal that does
not require a Dielectric. Each valve shall provide four (4) functions: (1) Precise flow
measurement, (2) Precision flow balancing, (3) Positive shut-off with no drip seat, (4)
Drain connection using %" NPT hose end thread. Valves shall have four (4) 360°
adjustment turns of the hand wheel for precise setting. Each unit shall have dual
temperature/pressure readout ports with provisions for connecting a differential
pressure flow meter. A direct reading flow meter with flow chart shall be provided.
Valves shall have hidden/tamperproof memory stop to allow complete shut-off and
return to set position without losing the set-point of the system. Valves shall exhibit an
'IF accuracy of+5%within the normal operating range.
3. Koil-KitTM coil hook-up assemblies may be used to minimize space requirements and
installation time. Tour & Andersson (TA Hydronics) Style 78Y (strainer/ball valve/P-T
Port combination assembly)and Style 78U (vent/P-T port combination assembly).
B. All balancing valves for piping 2-1/2 inch and through 12"shall be"Y"-Pattern Glob Valve design
as manufactured by Tour & Andersson (TA Hydronics) 788 (flanged)/789 (grooved) Series,
Armstrong, or Hattersley. Ductile iron body. All other wetted parts of nonferrous, pressure die
cast Ametal. Each valve shall provide 3 functions: (1) Precision flow measurement, (2)
Precision flow balancing, (3) Shut-off. Valves shall have eight (8), twelve (12) or sixteen (16)-
3600 adjustment turns of the hand wheel. Each unit shall have dual temperature/pressure
readout ports (with protective caps) with provisions for connecting a differential pressure flow
meter. A direct reading flow meter with flow chart shall be provided. Valves shall have
hidden/tamperproof memory stop to allow complete shut-off and return to set position without
losing the set-point of the system. Valves shall exhibit an accuracy of+5% within the normal
operating range.
C. All balancing valves shall provide bubble tight shut-off at rated pressure and shall have a
maximum temperature limit to 250°F with the exception of grooved valves that shall have a
maximum temperature limit to 230°F.
D. Valves larger than 12" shall be W-K-M ACF, Rockwell, Walworth, Flow Design, or approved
equal, lubricated plug type equal to W-K-M ACF Figure D-151 Wrench Operated for sizes 2-1/2
inch to 6 inch and Figure D-153 Worm Gear Operated for sizes 8 inch and larger. These valves
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -19
so
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883 .�
Northampton,MA
B. Valves for steel piping other than above and for copper tubing larger than 2 inch shall be similar
and equal to the following manufacturers'figure numbers:
KITZ Stockham Crane Hammond Nibco
2 inch and Smaller:
Ball Valves: 58 S-214-FBR-T-T 9102-B 8201 T-580-70
Gate Valves: 42T B-105 428UB IB-617 T-124
Globe Valves: 9 B-22T 7TF IB-413-T T-235Y
Check Valves: 22T B-319Y 37 IB-940 T-413Y
w�
2-1/2 inch and Larger:
Butterfly Valves: 6122E LG-7X2-BS3-E 44-BXZ3 6201-X LD-2000-3/5
Gate Valves: 72 G-623 465-1/2 IR-1140 F-617-0
Globe Valves: 76 G-512 351 IR-116 F-718B
Check Valves: 78 G-931 373 IR-1124 F-918B
C. Ball valves used in hot water piping that is insulated shall have stem extensions of at least 1-1/4 w
inch length to allow for insulation of valve body to thickness of adjoining insulation.
D. Valves shall be lug style, manufactured in accordance with MSS-SP67, rated at least 200 psi
non-shock cold water working pressure. Body to have 2 inch extended neck for insulating and
to be cast iron or ductile iron. Valve to have aluminum bronze alloy disc with EPDM rubber seat
and seals. Stem shall be 400 series stainless steel and shall not have exposed stem to disc
fasteners. Sizes 2-1/2 inch to 6 inch shall be lever operated with 10-position throttling plate;
sizes 8 inch and larger shall have weatherproof gear operators. Lug style shall be capable for
use as isolation valves and recommended by manufacturer for dead-end service at full pressure
without the need for downstream flanges. ..
E. Check valves for pump discharge lines shall be similar and equal to Muessco Figure 105-AP for
150 psig WOG applications. Valve shall be constructed of Grade B cast iron with bronze trim
and stainless steel spring.
F. Valves for copper tubing 2 inches and smaller shall be similar and equal to the following
manufacturers'figure numbers:
KITZ Stockham Crane Hammond Nibco
Ball Valves: 59 S-214-FBR-T-S 9322 8211 S-580
Gate Valves: 44 B-108 1334 IB-635 S-111
Globe Valves: 10 B-14T 1310 IB-423 S-211Y
Check Valves: 23T B-310TY 1342 IB-945 S-413Y
G. Bronze valves shall be of a material having physical properties conforming to ASTM B62 or to
ASTM B61 for temperatures to 550°F if pressure rating exceeds 125 psig. Stems for bronze
valves shall be of ASTM B584,Alloy 876 or ASTM B371,Alloy C69400 silicon red brass.
H. Iron body valves shall be of a material conforming to ASTM A126, Grade B. Wedges in gate
valves fastened to the stem by threads shall be secured by a nickel alloy or monel pin. Stems
shall be of a material equal to ASTM B371,Alloy 694 or B16, alloy C36000.
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -18
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
P. Dielectric Waterways: 1" through 8" sizes, grooved, plain end, or threaded end, ASTM A53
carbon steel or ASTM A536 ductile iron body, zinc electroplated, with LTHS high temperature
stabilized polyolefin polymer liner. Victaulic Style 47 or Grinnell 407.
Q. Tri-Service Valve Assembly: Combination shut-off, throttling and non-slam check valve. Vic®-
300 MasterSealTm butterfly valve with memory stop assembled with Series 716 (2 '/2' & 3") or
Style 779 Venturi Check (4"-12"). Series 779 check valve with venturi-like taps for flow
measurement. Working pressures to 300 psi (2065 kPa). For sizes 14"-24", Victaulic AGS Tri-
Service Assembly consisting of AGS Vic-300 butterfly valve and non-slam dual disc check valve
Style W715 (232 psi rated). Where (1) piece grooved end triple duty service is preferred,
Grinnell Model TD830 Triple Duty Valve is acceptable to function as spring loaded silent check
valve,flow control valve and shut-off valve.
R. All components installation requirements for hanging, supporting, anchoring, expansion and
contraction shall be in accordance with the latest published instructions from the manufacturer.
S. Pipe ends shall be clean and free from indentations, projections and roll marks in the area from
pipe end to groove.
T. Install the Victaulic AGS piping system in accordance with the latest Victaulic installation
instructions.
1. Use Victaulic grooving tools with AGS roll sets to groove the pipe. Follow Victaulic
guidelines for tool selection and operation.
2. AGS products shall not be installed with standard grooved end pipe or components.
Installing AGS products in combination with standard grooved end products could result
in joint separation and/or leakage.
2.04 WALL PENETRATION CLOSURES
A. The wall penetration for the conduit shall be core drilled to a smooth concrete interior. The
conduit to wall penetration closures shall be modular mechanical type, consisting of interlocking
synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill the annular space between the conduit and the
cored wall opening. Links shall be loosely assembled with bolts to form a continuous rubber
belt around the pipe with a pressure plate under each bolt head and nut. After the seal
assembly is positioned in the cored annular opening, tightening of the bolts shall cause the
rubber sealing elements to expand and provide a watertight seal between the conduit and
concrete wall opening. The conduit to wall penetration closures shall be LINK-SEAL as
manufactured by Thunderline Corporation.
2.05 VALVES
A. All valves shall be Stockham, Crane, Hammond, Nibco or approved equal. All stop valves for
hot water systems shall be either ball or full lug butterfly. Check valves for all pump discharge
lines shall be globe type "silent" check valves and for all other applications shall be as listed in
the table herein. Draw off cocks shall be provided on low points of the systems. Valves 2-1/2
t inch and larger shall be iron body with bronze or stainless steel trim and shall be flanged.
Valves 2 inch and smaller shall be bronze and for steel pipe shall be screwed.
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -17
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883 w
Northampton,MA
I. Expansion Joints:
1. 2" through 6" Sizes: Packless, gasketed, type with grooved end telescoping body,
suitable for axial end movement to 3". 350 psi (2410 kPa). Victaulic Style 150 Mover@. so
2. 3/4" and Larger Sizes: Expansion joint consisting of a series of grooved end nipples
joined with flexible-type couplings. Joint movement and expansion capabilities ,so
determined by number of couplings/nipples used in the joint. Victualic Style 155.
J. Expansion Loops: On grooved systems, install expansion loops utilizing flexible couplings (no
rigid coupling allowed on loop) in accordance with Victaulic or Grinnell sizing and hanging
guidelines.
K. Grooved end ball valves shall be Victaulic Series 726 or Grinnell BV835, grooved end, 2-piece
ductile iron body, chrome-plated carbon steel ball and stem, standard port, TFE seats, with
fluoroelastomer seals, 800 psi.
L. Butterfly valves (2" through 12") by Victaulic shall be Victaulic Vic 300 MasterSealTM grooved
end butterfly valves and shall be used on hot water and condenser water piping for all services
up to and including 300 psi. Valve body shall be ductile iron with grooved ends designed to
accept grooved couplings. Valve disc shall be electroless nickel-plated, offset to allow
continuous 360° seating. Stem seal and seat of pressure-responsive EPDM shall be rated for �*
service up to 250°F. Valves shall be suitable for isolation providing bubble-tight shutoff without
the need for downstream flanges. Butterfly valves(14"through 24") shall be Victaulic Vic@-300
AGS, ductile iron body and disc, two piece 174 PH S/S stem design. Seat and seal material to
suit intended service. Reinforced PTFE bearings and gear operator. Vic@-300 AGS is rated to
300 psi. Butterfly valves by Grinnell (2"through 12") shall be Grinnell Model B-302 grooved end
for applicable services. Valve body is ductile iron with grooved ends to accept Grinnell
couplings. B-302 is rated up to 300 PSI, bubble-tight shut and bi-directional, encapsulated
EPDM disc for service up to 230' F.
M. Check valves (2-1/2" through 12") shall be spring assisted, single disc design. Valves shall be
suitable for horizontal or vertical installation and rated for working pressures up to 300 PSI +�►
CWP. Valves shall be equal to the Vic-Check#716 or Grinnell # 590, or for pump discharges
#779 Venturi Check, with flow measuring ports. Valve bodies shall be ductile iron with
polyphenylene sulphide (PPS) coated interior and factory tested to 300 psi. Check valves (14"
through 24")shall be spring assisted, dual disc design. Valves shall be suitable for horizontal or
vertical installation and rated for working pressures up to 230 PSI CWP. Valves shall be equal
to Victaulic Series W715.
N. Straining devices by Victaulic shall be Style 730(2"-12") and Style W730(14"2-24"), T-type, 300 .�
PSI, and shall consist of ductile iron or steel body with Type 304 stainless steel convoluted
removable basket, providing 57% free open area. Victaulic Style 732/W732 (14"-18"), Y-type,
300 PSI, shall consist of ductile iron body with 304 stainless steel perforated metal removable
basket, with 1/16" or 1/8" diameter perforations. Straining devices by Grinnell shall be Model
S855 T type, or Grinnell Model S853 Y type. Same construction and applications apply as
above.
O. Suction diffusers by Victaulic shall be Style 731-1 (3"-12") and Style W731-1 (14"-24"), 300 PSI,
with ductile iron body. Basket strainer type 304 stainless steel, with 5/32" diameter holes for 3"
through 12" inlet sizes. Removable start-up pre-filter 20 mesh type 304 screen. Outlets for
pressure/temperature drain connections and base support boss. Access coupling Style 07,
flange ANSI Class 150 standard. Suction diffusers by Grinnell shall be Style S810. Same
construction and applications apply as above.
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -16
w
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
F. Standard Grooved couplings 2 'h'-12" consist of two (2) pieces of ASTM A536 ductile iron
housings. Coupling gaskets shall be Victaulic or Grinnell Grade "E" EPDM (rated for 230F)
Grade "EHP" EPDM (rated for 250F) compound gasket with a central cavity pressure
responsive design. Coupling bolts and nuts shall be heat treated carbon steel, with physical
properties conforming to ASTM A183 and A449. All grooved couplings shall be as
manufactured by Victaulic or Grinnell. Couplings shall be Style 77 Standard or Style 177
"installation-ready"flexible couplings at equipment and fittings and Style 07"Zero-Flex' or Style
107"Quick-VicTM"standard rigid couplings in straight runs of pipe.All Grinnell couplings shall be
rigid model 772 up to 24" on straight runs, or flexible style 707, at equipment and where
flexibility or expansion and contraction is desired.
1. Rigid Mechanical couplings by Victaulic shall be Style 107 "Quick-VicTM" (for sizes
through 8")and Style 07"Zero-Flex" for sizes 10" and 12" rigid couplings with offsetting
angle-pattern bolt pads, for risers and straight runs of pipe. Couplings shall provide
system rigidity and support and hanging in accordance with ANSI B31.1, B31.3, 831.9
w and NFPA 13. Victaulic Flexible couplings shall be Style 177 "Quick-VicTMI, (for sizes
through 6") and Styles 77/W77 for 8" and larger couplings shall be used where system
flexibility is required. Noise and vibration reduction shall be achieved with the use of
minimum of three (3) Style 77/1N77 or 177 couplings in close proximity to the vibration
source. Rigid couplings by Grinnell shall be Model 772 (21/2"—24")as applicable to the
above hanging requirements, or Grinnell Model 707 Flexible couplings, as applicable
above in close proximity to vibration source.
op G. Fittings shall be full flow, cast ductile iron or steel fittings with grooves or shoulders designed to
accept Victaulic grooved joint couplings. Fittings shall be factory fabricated of ductile iron,
forged steel or segmentally welded steel pipe.
1. In general, all elbows shall be long radius at 1 '/z inch "D" center line radius. Forged
elbows shall be equal to Fitting No. 100 for 90° elbows and Fitting No. 110 for 450
elbows. Standard cast ductile iron elbows shall be "full-flow, as-cast" ductile iron and
shall be equal to Fitting No. 10 for 90 elbows and Fitting No. 11 for 45 elbows. Same
applies for corresponding Grinnell model fittings.
2. Full size branch connections shall be made with Fitting No. 20 grooved end tees.
Branch connections of sizes up to four(4) sizes less than the main shall be made with
Fitting No. 25 grooved end reducing tees, or corresponding Grinnell model fittings.
Branch connections for less than four(4) sizes shall be made with Victaulic Style 920 or
w� 920N branch connections or Grinnell 730 that are sized one (1) size larger than the
branch or Style 72 outlet coupling used to join grooved pipe to create a branch
connection. Gaskets for branch connection shall be Victaulic or Grinnell Grade "E"
EPDM Compound.
3. Strapless Outlet: 1/2" or 3/4" NPT outlet on 4" (DN100) and larger header sizes rated
for 300 PSI (2065 kPa). Victaulic Style 923 Vic-LetTM.
4. Strapless Thermometer Outlet: To accommodate industrial glass bulb thermometers
with standard 1-1/4°-18 NEF 2B extra fine thread and 6° (152mm) nominal bulb length
on 4" (DN100) and larger header sizes rated for 300 PSI (2065 kPa). Victaulic Style
924 Vic-O-WeIITM.
" H. Flanges shall be Vic-Flange Style 7411V 741 or Grinnell Style 71 connection to ANSI Class 125
and 150 flanged components. Flanges shall be Vic-Flange Style 743 for connection to ANSI
Class 300 flanged components.
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -15
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883 .A
Northampton,MA
816.28. All flanges shall be welded neck type with pressure ratings of or greater than the
valves, strainers and equipment to which they are connected.
E. Where branch connections are made to a main, a welding tee shall be used when the branch
connection is the same size as or one (1) or two (2) sizes smaller than the main. When the
branch is smaller than two (2) sizes below the main or is of a size that screwed pipe will be
used, the branch connections to the main shall be made with a Bonney Forge "Weldolet" or
"Threadolet" forged fitting or approved equal. All reduction in main size shall be made with
eccentric reducers.
F. Cast iron fittings shall be used on non-welded pipe and shall be Walworth, Crane, Grinnell or
approved equal for 125 psig service,except as noted below. . r
G. All boiler trim piping and all boiler control piping shall be 125 psig IPS copper or brass piping
with threaded bronze fittings.
H. All cold city water piping, all piping at reheat coils between the coil and balancing valves, control
valve or shut off valves, all heating hot water piping running parallel to radiation and used in
connection to and between radiation elements and all drainage piping shall be Mueller, Chase
or Anaconda Type L hard copper tubing with wrought copper solder joint pressure fittings with
95-5 tin antimony solder joints. All drainage piping shall have drainage type fittings.
I. Unions in steel pipe shall be malleable iron heavy pattern with brass mating seats equal to
"Dart". Unions in copper tubing shall be all bronze or brass.
J. HVAC Subcontractor shall provide dielectric fittings at connections between all dissimilar
materials. +""!
2.03 ALTERNATE PIPING SYSTEM (Grooved Mechanical Joint Piping System)
w
A. Victaulic or Grinnell (division of Tyco Fire Supression and Building Products) couplings may be
used in lieu of welding or flanging on 2 '/2 inch or larger steel pipe for chilled water, hot water,
condenser water and glycol piping. All piping shall be ASTM A53, Grade B, seamless or
electric resistance welded, black steel pipe of standard weight, Schedule 40, up to and including
10 inch and shall have wall thickness of 0.375 inch for 12 inch and larger size. Pipe shall be roll
grooved for chilled water, hot water, condenser water, and glycol piping in accordance with the
latest manufacturer's specifications. Installation shall be in accordance with the latest
manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Factory trained Representative (direct manufacturer employees)shall provide onsite training for
contractor's field personnel in the proper use of grooving tools, application of groove, and ..
installation of grooved products.
C. Factory trained Representatives (direct manufacturer employees) shall visit the site to ensure
installation is in accordance with the Manufacturer's recommendations. Contractor shall
remove and replace any improperly installed products.
D. All grooved fittings, valves and specialties must be of the make as couplings(one manufacturer)
used to join them to ensure compatibility.
E. The gasket style and elastomeric material (grade) shall be verified as suitable for the intended
service as specified. Gaskets shall be molded and produced by the grooved coupling
manufacturer.
..
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -14
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
Refer to the Vibration Isolation and Seismic Restraint portion of this Specification for additional
information.
B. Hangers for hot water piping 4 inch and larger shall have rolls either of the Harvard type or two
> + (2) rod type to allow the pipe to be close to the slab. Hangers for 3 inch pipe and under shall be
of the clevis type. Hangers on piping under 2 inch may be 1A band type instead of the clevis
type. Hot water piping 2-1/2 inch and larger shall be provided with covering protection saddles.
Where pipes are required to be hung by means of a pipe rack, chair rolls shall be used for pipe
3 inch and above.
C. Hangers for copper piping shall be copper plated steel clevis type hangers or 1A band type
hangers. As an alternate to copper plating of the steel hangers, the hangers may be fitted with
lead inserts.
D. All hangers for piping associated with vibrating equipment shall be vibration eliminator type.
The first two (2) hangers from the piece of equipment shall be combination rubber-in-shear and
springs with 1/4 inch static deflection in the rubber and 3/4 inch in the spring. The remaining
hangers within 100 pipe diameters of the equipment shall be double deflection rubber-in-shear
with 3/8 inch static deflection. These eliminators shall be installed in the hanger rods, shall be of
a design that the adjustment is made to put the load on the spring without changing the installed
height and shall be Vibration Eliminator Company, Mason Industries, Korfund or approved
equal.
E. All hanger rods shall be hung from inserts in concrete, or from I-beam clamps on steel beams,
or from coach screw threaded rods in wood construction. Clamps shall have retaining clips and
locknut. If inserts have not been provided, hangers shall be through bolted or Cinch or Slug-in
tw expansion bolts may be used with the permission of the Architect.
F. Where support points are required between available inserts or to avoid the work of another
trade, provide a system of spanning channels and angles between these support points as
required. When pipe or equipment is hung or supported, no part of any equipment furnished by
this Subcontractor or any part of the building shall be stressed beyond its normal allowable
working strength.
go G. All steel framework and supports provided under this Section shall conform to the latest
revisions of the Standard Specifications for Steel for Bridges and Buildings of the American
Society for Testing Materials. All shop fabricated framework shall have a shop coat of Metal
Primer, except steel in concrete shall not be painted.
2.02 PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. All hot water piping except as noted below shall be ASTM A53, Grade B, seamless or electric
resistance welded, black steel pipe of standard weight, Schedule 40.
GO B. Piping 2-1/2 inches and larger shall be welded with welded type fittings. Piping 2 inches and
smaller shall be screwed type fittings, 300 pound malleable iron, ground joint, bronze to iron
seat,threaded unions and 150 pound malleable iron, black fittings.
C. In lieu of Schedule 40 steel, piping for hot water piping 3 inches and smaller may be Type L
hard copper tubing (Mueller, Chase or Anaconda). Copper piping shall have wrought copper
solder joint pressure fittings with 95-5 tin antimony solder joints. Di-electric fittings shall be
provided and installed at connections between all dissimilar materials.
D. Welded pipe shall have Tube Turns, Walworth, Bonney Forge or approved equal welding
fittings of the same weight and material as the pipe conforming to ANSI Standard B16.9 and
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -13
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
Northampton, MA
1.23 WATERPROOF, FLASHING AND COUNTERFLASHING .,
A. Unless otherwise indicated, the HVAC Subcontractor shall provide all counterflashing and
waterproofing of all piping, ductwork and equipment provided which pierce roofs, walls and
other weather barrier surfaces. All work under this Paragraph shall be coordinated with the
General Contractor.
B. All work shall be performed to assure a weatherproof installation. Any leaks shall be repaired
by the Subcontractor.
C. All flashing required for ductwork and piping penetrations shall be provided by the General
Contractor.
1.24 MISCELLANEOUS IRON AND STEEL
A. The HVAC Subcontractor shall provide all steel supports and hangers as indicated on the
Drawings and/or required to support all HVAC equipment, systems and materials provided
under this Contract.
B. All work shall be performed by skilled mechanics and welders. Stands, brackets and framework
shall be properly sized, assembled and constructed.
C. In general, members shall be welded, except that bolting may be used for field assembly and
where welding is impractical. All welds shall be ground smooth.
D. Assemblies shall be cleaned and dried,then painted with a rust inhibiting paint.
1.25 MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVE
A. The HVAC Subcontractor shall provide the services of a factory trained Engineer or
representative of the manufacturer, to instruct the Owner, inspect, adjust and start-up
equipment provided by him as indicated in the Specification.
B. A written report shall be provided by the manufacturer or representative summarizing the s
inspection, start-up,training, etc.
C. The HVAC Subcontractor shall arrange to have the manufacturer's instructions videotaped with
the Owner and Architect/Engineer being provided with one(1)copy of each tape.
1.26 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS
w.
A. Installation of Mechanical and Electrical equipment, accessories and components shall be in
accordance with the Seismic Requirements identified in the Massachusetts State Building
Code, Seventh (7th) Edition. Refer to Part Two(2)of the Specifications for further information. .�.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. The HVAC Subcontractor shall be required to utilize hangers appropriate for the type of
structural system in the building. Supports and hangers shall be installed in compliance with the
seismic requirements of the Seventh (7th) Edition of the Massachusetts State Building Code.
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -12
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
1.22 IDENTIFICATION OF EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL
A. Label each piece of Mechanical Equipment with a plastic laminate Nameplate with a white
background and with the designated equipment and area or system served engraved in black
letters. Nameplates shall be 1-1/2 inches in height by 4 inches minimum length and secured to
the piece of equipment with two "Phillips head" brass screws or machine bolt with locknuts.
Nameplates shall be manufactured by Seton Nameplate Company, or approved equal by
Dennison Manufacturing Company or Markem Company.
B. Apparatus shall be identified by the use of the following typical labels: "AIR CONDITIONING
UNIT AC-1", "RETURN AIR FAN RAF-1", etc. (the number to be obtained from the Drawings).
C. Exposed ductwork and ductwork above removable ceilings shall be stenciled with 1-3/4 inch
high letters at each junction or branch takeoff, at least once in each room, and at intervals not
more than 20 feet. Stencil shall clearly identify duct service (SUP for supply, RET for return,
EXH for exhaust), area served by branch, the number of the fan or unit to which the duct is
attached and the zone number together with an arrow.showing the direction of flow. Duct shall
be stenciled after insulation has been applied.
D. Piping mains shall be identified at intervals of twenty (20) feet, at points of entrance and exit
from mechanical room, adjacent to each valve, on each riser, at each tee fitting, at points of
entrance and exit from building, at least once in each room, and at each change of direction all
together with an arrow showing the direction of flow. If flow can be in either direction, use
double-headed arrow marker.
E. Pipe marking system shall conform to the requirements of ANSI A13.1-1981 as published by
r ASME. In general, piping shall be labeled after insulation is applied, using pressure sensitive
vinyl pipe markers and pressure sensitive color coded banding tape banded onto itself. The
letters shall be 3-1/2 inches high for pipes or covering 10 inch diameter and over; 2-1/2 inches
high for 8 inch to 10 inch diameter; 1-1/4 inches high for 2-1/2 inch to 6 inch diameter; 3/4 inch
high for 1-1/2 inch and 2 inch diameter; and 1/2 inch high for diameters 1-1/4 inch and smaller.
Markers shall be OPT[-CODE by Seton Nameplate Company or approved equal.
F. Provide color-coded pipe identification markers applied after insulation and/or architectural
painting has been performed where such is required. Legend and colors shall conform to the
following:
Field Lettering &
Service Color Arrow Color Legend
City Water Makeup Green White Makeup Water
Hot Water Supply Yellow Black Hot Water Supply
Hot Water Return Yellow Black Hot Water Return
Generator Exhaust Yellow Black Generator Exhaust
�w Refrigerant Suction Yellow Black Refrigerant Suction
Refrigerant Liquid Yellow Black Refrigerant Liquid
Refrigerant Hot Gas Yellow Black Refrigerant Hot Gas
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -11
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
instructions. This manual shall contain only that information which specifically applies to this ,w
project and all unrelated material shall be deleted. During the instruction period this manual
shall be used and explained. The material shall be bound in note book form and indexed.
C. Provide name, address and telephone number of the manufacturer's representative and service
company for each piece of equipment so that the source of replacement parts and service for
each item of equipment can be readily obtained.
D. The HVAC Subcontractor shall arrange for the Owner instructions on the system operation to
be videotaped for future use by the Owner. Owner and Architect shall receive one (1) copy of
each tape.
w�
1.20 TEMPORARY HEAT DURING CONSTRUCTION
A. If temporary heat is needed in the building during construction, the permanent heating system
may be used for such only after the piping system is completed and tested. Cooperate with the
General Contractor to enable him to use the permanent heating system for temporary heat.
The responsibility for the service and repairs to the heating system during its use for temporary
heat shall be a part of this Section of the Specifications. The fuel or electricity used during its .w
operation and the operation of the system for temporary heat shall not be a part of this Section.
B. If the heating, ventilating and air conditioning system is used for temporary heat during
construction,this Subcontractor shall ensure that: (1)All air handling equipment is operated with
filters in place and the filters are replaced periodically; (2) all strainer baskets are in place and
the baskets are cleaned periodically; (3) all motor bearings, fan bearings and pump bearings
are lubricated properly; and (4)the boiler water and hot water heating system is treated prior to
use as outlined in the Testing,Adjusting and Putting in Service paragraph and the concentration
of inhibitor in the boiler water is checked periodically. This Subcontractor shall ensure that the
boiler manufacturer or his representative provides service and inspection checks at least
monthly during the entire period of temporary heat and that a written report of each service and
inspection check is submitted to the Architect.
C. If the heating system is used for temporary heat during construction, the boiler, burner and
entire system shall be cleaned completely and repaired as necessary prior to turning over the
building to the Owner to put system in first-class condition.
1.21 VALVE TAGS AND LISTS
A. Provide on each gate valve, on each globe valve, and on all automatic control valves installed
under this Section, a 2 inch diameter brass tag with stamped numerals and letters painted
white. The tags shall be attached to the valve handle or stem with brass chains and properly
secured. All numbers shall be prefixed by letters corresponding to those listed for piping
identification.
B. These numbers shall correspond with numbers indicated for valves and controls on the Record
Drawings and on a minimum of two (2) printed valve lists. These printed lists shall state the
number and locations of each valve and the section, fixture or equipment which it controls, and
other necessary information, such as requiring the opening or closing of another valve where
one(1)valve is to be opened or closed. + +
C. Printed lists shall be prepared in a form to meet the approval of the Architect, framed under
glass and displayed in rooms designated by the Architect.
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -10
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
1.17 FINAL COMPLETION
A. When Subcontractor considers Work under this Section is complete, submit through the
General Contractor written certification that:
1. Contract documents have been reviewed.
2. Work has been inspected for compliance with Contract Documents.
3. Work has been completed in accordance with Contract Documents and deficiencies
listed with Certificate of Substantial Completion have been corrected.
4. Equipment and systems have been tested, adjusted and balanced and are fully
operational.
5. Operation of system has been demonstrated to Owner's personnel.
6. Work is complete and ready for Architect's and/or his Engineer's final review.
' B. Should Architect and/or his Engineer observe and find Work incomplete, he will promptly
suspend his review and notify Subcontractor in writing through the General Contractor.
C. Subcontractor shall complete his work, remedy deficiencies and send a second certification of
final completion.
D. Architect and/or his Engineer shall, upon receipt of a second certification of completion, make a
second review and shall notify the Subcontractor in writing through the General Contractor
listing observed deficiencies.
E. When Architect and/or his Engineer finds Work is complete, he will consider closeout
submittals.
1.18 REOBSERVATION FEES
A. Should status of completion of Work require additional services by Architect and/or his Engineer
due to failure of Work to conform with Subcontractor's claims on initial Architect and/or his
Engineer review for Substantial Completion or for Final Completion, Owner will deduct the
amount of Architect and/or his Engineer compensation for additional services from final
payment to Subcontractor.
1.19 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
00
A. The HVAC Subcontractor shall instruct the representative of the Owner in the proper operation
of all systems and equipment provided. The HVAC Subcontractor shall make arrangements
through the General Contractor as to whom and when the instructions are to be given. The
Architect/Engineer shall be satisfied that the Owner has been given complete and thorough
instructions in system operation prior to final payment. A minimum of five (5) days of additional
training shall be provided to meet the intent of this Specification.
B. In addition, prepare five (5) sets of manufacturer's catalogs, other similar data including the
necessary photographic equipment cuts, parts list and wiring diagrams covering all mechanical
equipment and devices furnished and installed under this Section. These manuals shall provide
complete instructions for the proper operation and use of the equipment together with
instructions for lubrication and periodic maintenance and for troubleshooting. Operating
instructions shall be specific for each system and shall include copies of posted specific
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -9
w
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA w
E. The HVAC Subcontractor shall furnish and install all equipment, accessories, connections and .w
incidentals to complete the work under this Section.
1.13 GUARANTEE
w
A. Manufacturers shall provide their standard replacement warranties for material and equipment
furnished under this Section. Such warranties shall be in addition to and not in lieu of all
liabilities which the manufacturer and Contractor may have by law or by provisions of the
Contract Documents.
B. All materials, equipment and work furnished under this Section shall be guaranteed against all
defects in materials and workmanship for a minimum period of one (1) year commencing with ..
the date of Substantial Completion. Any failure due to defective material, equipment or
workmanship which may develop, shall be corrected at no expense to the Owner including all
damage to areas, materials and other systems resulting from such failures.
C. Upon receipt of notice from the Owner of failure of any part of the systems during the guarantee
period, the affected parts shall be replaced.Any equipment requiring excessive service shall be
considered defective and shall be replaced.
1.14 CONTINUITY OF SERVICE AND SCHEDULING OF WORK
A. Continuity of all services shall be maintained in all areas which will be occupied during the ..
construction period. If an interruption of service becomes necessary, such shall be made only
upon consent of the Owner and at a time outside normal working hours as he shall designate.
B. Refer to the overall scheduling of the work of the project. Schedule work to conform to this
schedule and install work to not delay nor interfere with the progress of the project.
1.15 CERTIFICATES OF APPROVAL
A. Upon completion of all work, furnish, in duplicate, certificates of inspections from the
manufacturers stating that authorized factory engineers have inspected and tested the
operation of their respective equipment and found same to be in satisfactory operating w
condition.
1.16 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
w
A. When Subcontractor considers Work under this Section (or designated portion of Work) is
substantially complete, submit written notice through the General Contractor with a list of items
remaining to be completed or corrected.
w
B. Should Architect and/or his Engineer observe and find Work is not substantially complete, he
will promptly notify Subcontractor through the General Contractor in writing, listing observed
deficiencies. .■
C. Subcontractor shall remedy deficiencies and send a second written notice of substantial
completion.
w
D. When Architect and/or his Engineer finds work is substantially complete he will prepare a
Certificate of Substantial Completion in accordance with provisions of General Conditions.
w
w
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -8
w
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
C. Shop drawings shall note the name(s), license number(s) and license expiration dates) of the
contractor(s) installing the systems submitted.
D. Regardless of any information included in the Shop Drawing submitted for review, the
requirements of the Drawings and Specifications shall not be superseded in any way by the
Shop Drawing review.
E. Each submittal shall be reviewed, stamped and certified prior to submission to the Architect.
0" Such certification shall be made by a Corporate Officer of the Contractor, or by a person duly
authorized to sign binding agreements for the Contractor. The certification shall state that the
data and details contained on each shop drawing, layout drawing, catalog data and brochure
has been reviewed by the Contractor and that it complies with the Contract Documents in all
respects. Shop drawings, layout drawings, catalog data and brochures will not be reviewed by
the Engineer and will be returned to the Contractor unchecked unless they are certified.
F. It is intended that shop drawing data be complete and accurate at the first submission. If the
shop drawing is returned marked "Resubmit", only one (1) additional submission will be
permitted.
G. A minimum period of two (2) weeks, exclusive of transmittal time, will be required in the
Engineer's office each time shop drawings, layout drawings, and catalog data and brochures
are submitted or resubmitted for review. This time period shall be considered when scheduling
the work.
H. The Shop Drawings and manufacturers' data shall be submitted in a timely manner sufficiently
in advance to give ample time for checking, correcting, resubmitting and rechecking if
necessary. No claim for delay will be granted for failure to comply with this requirement.
I. Equipment shall be of proper size for its allotted space. Equipment shall be disassembled as
required, without invalidating the manufacturers' warranty, so that it can be installed through
regular window, door, and/or louver openings.
1.12 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT STANDARDS
!fir
A. Where materials or equipment are specified by patent proprietary name, or name of the
manufacturer, such specification shall be deemed to be used for the purpose of establishing a
standard for that particular item. No equipment or material shall be used unless previously
00 approved by the Architect/Engineer.
B. Substitutions may be offered for review provided the material, equipment or process offered for
consideration is equal in every respect to that indicated or specified and only if the term
"approved equal" appears. The request for each substitution must be accompanied by
complete specifications together with drawings or samples to properly appraise the materials,
equipment or process.
C. If a substitution of materials or equipment in whole or in part is made, the Contractor shall bear
the cost of any changes necessitated by any other trade as a result of said substitution.
r D. Manufacturer's directions shall be followed in the delivery, storage and installation of any
equipment. Notify the Architect/Engineer, in writing, of any conflict between the Contract
Drawings and the manufacturer's requirements and obtain a written response prior to
proceeding with work. Should the HVAC Subcontractor fail to comply with this, he/she shall
bear the costs of any corrections which may be required.
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -7
,R.
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA .�
D. Obtain and pay for one (1) set of reproducible prints and CAD disks (AutoCAD Release 2008 ,.
minimum or compatible system) applicable to this Section. Make all modifications to these
reproducibles as shown on the marked-up prints. Remove all superseded data to show the
completed installation.
E. The Record Drawings may be made from the originals of the Contract Drawings. Arrange with
the Architect to have these reproducibles made from the originals.
F. Deliver the completed reproducible Record Drawings and CAD disks properly titled and dated to
the Architect. These Record Drawings shall become the property of the Owner.
1.09 PERMITS, FEES, RULES AND REGULATIONS
A. Give the proper Authorities all requisite notices or information relating to the work under this
Section. Obtain and pay for all fees, licenses, permits and certificates. Comply with the rules
and regulations of all Local, State and Federal Authorities having jurisdiction, the rules and
regulations of the National Board of Fire Underwriters and the Public Utilities Companies
serving the building.
1.10 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY
A. Be responsible for the care and protection of all work included under this Section until it has
been tested and accepted.
B. Protect all equipment and materials from damage from all causes including theft. All materials
and equipment damaged or stolen shall be repaired or replaced with equal material or
equipment.
C. Protect all equipment, outlets and openings with temporary plugs, caps and covers. Protect
work and materials of other trades from damage that might be caused by work or workmen and
make good damage thus caused.
D. When open-flame or spark producing tools such as blower torches,welding equipment, etc., are
required in the process of executing the work in existing building, the General Contractor will be a*
notified not less than twenty-four(24) hours in advance of the time that the work is to begin and
the location where the work is to be performed.
E. Provide, where necessary, fire protective covering and maintain a constant non-working fire
watch where work is being performed and until it is completed.
1.11 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS .A
A. Submit for approval,within thirty(30)days after signing the Contract and prior to the submission
of any Shop Drawings, an itemized list of manufacturers of material and equipment and of
Subcontractors proposed to be used under this Section. .�
B. After approval of the list, submit for review a minimum of eight (8) sets of detailed Shop
Drawings. All Shop Drawings for equipment submitted for review shall include complete
Specifications, including type of materials, operating pressures and temperatures, capacities,
fan curves, pump curves, performance and power requirements to determine compliance with
Contract Documents. All data submitted including wiring diagrams submitted shall be complete
for all equipment and shall apply only to this specific project. All extraneous information shall be
deleted.
.o
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -6
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
"M H. All distribution systems which require pitch or slope such as plumbing drains, steam and
condensate piping shall have the right of way over those which do not. Confer with other trades
as to the location of pipes, ducts and equipment and install work to avoid interferences. The
HVAC Subcontractor shall provide air vents and drains as required for his work to
accommodate offsets and changes of directions needed to maintain proper headroom and pitch
of sloping lines.
I. Ductwork, piping and equipment shall be installed to permit removal of coils, filters, fan shafts,
wheels, control appurtenances, drives and other system components requiring periodic
maintenance. Access to equipment shall be capable without damage to other parts and/or work
of other trades.
J. The HVAC Subcontractor shall not install any piping, ductwork or equipment in or through
Electrical Rooms and Elevator Machine Rooms unless it is intended to serve these rooms.
40 1.07 COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A. Prior to the purchasing and fabrication of materials, each Subcontractor shall prepare
Coordination Drawings for all floors/areas showing the size and location of his/her equipment
and lines.
B. The Coordination Drawings shall be produced on AutoCAD Release 2008 minimum or
00 compatible system. A disc and one(1) set of reproducible sepias (all-trade composite) shall be
provided to the Architect/Engineer for review.
C. Coordination Drawings shall be 3/8 inch = 1 foot-0 inch scale. Prepare and submit for review,
at that scale or larger, plans and sections of areas such as Mechanical Rooms.
D. The cost of preparing and reproducing these Drawings will be included as part of this Contract.
The HVAC Subcontractor shall prepare the initial Drawings and circulate the Drawings to the
other trades(Plumbing, Fire Protection and Electrical)so they can indicate their work.
E. Coordination Drawings shall not be construed as replacing any Shop Drawings.
1.08 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Purchase and maintain at the job site a complete and separate black line set of prints of the
approved Working Drawings on which accurately indicate daily progress by coloring materials
and apparatus as installed. Schedules shall be modified to reflect data consistent with that of
the installed equipment. Clearly show all changes to the work as a result of change orders,
instructions issued by the Architect or conditions encountered in the field. Accurately indicate
the location, size,type and elevation of new utilities and their relationship to existing utilities.
B. The marked-up and colored-in prints will be used as a guide for determining the progress of the
work installed. They shall be inspected weekly and shall be corrected immediately if found
inaccurate or incomplete. Requisitions for payment will not be approved until the Drawings are
accurate and up-to-date.
wu C. At the completion of the work, submit one (1) set of marked-up prints for review and comment.
After review and comment, these marked-up prints shall be used in the preparation of the
Record Drawings. The Record Drawings shall consist of these prints (corrected) previously
indicated, as well as two (2) CAD disks of the Final Coordination Drawings, corrected on the
basis of the Architect/Engineer's final comments.
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -5
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
10. Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute(ARI).
11. American Society of Mechanical Engineers(ASME).
12. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM).
13. American Welding Society, Inc. (AWS).
14. Commercial Standards, U.S. Department of Commerce(CS).
15. Factory Mutual(FM).
16. Industrial Risk Insurers(IRI).
17. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).
18. The Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers, Inc. (IEEE).
19. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association, Inc. (SMACNA).
20. American Gas Association (AGA).
21. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL).
22. U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, Guidelines for Construction and
Equipment for Hospital and Medical Facilities.
1.05 OBTAINING INFORMATION 0M
A. Obtain from the manufacturer the proper method of installation and connection of the equipment
that is to be furnished and installed. Obtain all information that is necessary to facilitate the
work and to complete the project.
B. All equipment shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
1.06 COOPERATION AND COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES
A. The Contract Drawings are diagrammatic only, intending to indicate general routing and location
of piping, ductwork and equipment. The Drawings are not intended to show every offset and
accessory required, nor every structural difficulty that may be encountered.
B. Where requirements of the plans and/or specifications are in conflict, the most stringent
requirement will be included in the Contract. Prior to ordering and/or installing any portion of the
work which appears to be in conflict, the work shall be brought to the Architect/Engineer's
attention for direction as to what is provided.
C. Final location of air distribution devices, thermostats, control devices, etc., shall be coordinated
with the Architectural Plans (i.e., Reflected Ceiling Plan). Additional offsets, fittings, etc., shall
be provided as needed to meet this requirement at no extra cost to the Owner.
D. If discrepancies exist in the scope of work as to what trade provides items (e.g., starters), they
shall be reported to the Architect/Engineer prior to signing the Contract. If the discrepancies are
not reported, the HVAC Subcontractor shall furnish such items as needed for a complete and
operable system.
E. All work shall be installed in cooperation with other trades.
F. Keep fully informed as to the shape, size and position of all openings required for all apparatus
and give information in advance to building openings into the work. Furnish and set in place all
sleeves, pockets, supports and incidentals.
G. Routing and locations of pipes, ductwork and equipment shall be adjusted to accommodate the
work with interferences anticipated and encountered. The HVAC Subcontractor shall determine
the exact routing and location of his/her systems prior to fabrication and/or installation of any
system component.
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -4
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
Temperature Relative
Area Degrees F Humidity%
Office and Support Areas 75 20 - 50
ESD 75 30 - 70
Stab Assembly 75 30 - 70
Assembly 75 30 - 70
Testing 75 30 - 70
Optical Inspection 75 30 - 70
All other areas are designed to maintain 68°F when the outside air temperature is-1'F.
1.03 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. The following work is not included as work in this Section and is to be performed under other
Sections:
1. Cutting and Patching.
2. Temporary Water, Heat and Fire Protection.
3. Temporary Light and Power.
4. Excavation and Backfill.
5. Foundations and Trenching.
6. Concrete Bases for Equipment.
7. Flashing and Caulking.
.- 8. Door Louvers.
9. Setting of Frames for Registers and Access Panels.
10. Painting.
11. Exterior Louvers.
- 12. Process Equipment.
13. Plumbing.
! l' 14. Fire Protection.
15. Power Wiring to all Equipment.
1.04 CODES, STANDARDS AND REFERENCES
A. All materials and workmanship shall comply with the latest editions of all applicable Codes,
Local and State Ordinances, Industry Standards and Regulations.
B. The HVAC Subcontractor shall notify the Architect/Engineer of any discrepancies between the
Contract Documents and applicable Codes, Standards, etc.
C. In the event of a conflict,the most stringent requirements shall apply.
D. The following Codes, Standards and References shall be utilized as applicable:
1. Massachusetts State Building Code.
2. National Electric Code(NEC).
3. Environmental Protection Agency(EPA).
po 4. Commonwealth of Massachusetts Department of Environmental Protection(DEP).
5. Local Ordinances, Regulations City Town of Northhampton.
6. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
7. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.
PIP (ASHRAE).
8. Air Movement and Control Association, Inc. (AMCA).
9. American National Standards Institute(ANSI).
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -3
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
4. A new hot water system in each building including boilers, pumps, piping distribution,
insulation, accessories and controls.
5. Series fan powered VAV boxes with or without hot water reheat as indicated on the
drawings.
6. Perimeter Hot Water Radiation as indicated on the drawings.
7. Low pressure ductwork distribution with diffusers and registers.
8. Hot water reheat coils as specified.
w
9. Exhaust Fan and Gravity Ventilator shall provide combustion air and ventilation in
the Boiler Penthouse in each building.
10. VV boxes for Interior zones with or without reheat coils as indicated on the drawings
and Series Fan Powered Terminal boxes with hot water heat for exterior zones.
11. Provide low pressure supply air ductwork downstream of all boxes. Provide medium
pressure supply air ductwork upstream of all boxes and connected to medium
pressure main.
12. Supply and/or exhaust ventilation systems for elevator machine rooms, toilet rooms,
electric closets,janitor closets, and other equipment spaces as required.
13. Provide hot water cabinet and propeller unit heaters in miscellaneous areas such as
building entrances, sprinkler rooms, stairwells, loading dock, etc.
14. Provide electric propeller unit heaters in Electric Rooms.
15. Provide DDC automatic temperature control system to serve buildings.
16. All Computer Room related design and engineering shall be by Longden
Engineering.Ventilation to these spaces are from the base building systems.
17. Roof mounted DX and gas-fired Make-up Air Unit to serve Process Exhaust
Systems.
18. Testing, adjusting and balancing of air and water systems.
19. Provide electric propeller unit heaters in each exterior located electric rooms. All
electric rooms shall have ventilation exhaust system.
20. All other work shown on specified.
C. The work required by this Section is shown on the Drawings.
D. Heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems for the occupied areas of the buildings have
been designed to have sufficient capacity to maintain the following space conditions when
outside air temperature is- 1 degrees F in the winter and outside air conditions are 86 degrees
F dry bulb and 73 degrees F wet bulb in the summer:
ae
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -2
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
SECTION 23 00 00 HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. The GENERAL CONDITIONS, SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS and Division 1,
General Requirements, are hereby made a part of the work specified in this Section.
B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work of this
Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section.
C. Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting or affected by work of this Section.
Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract.
D. The Owner will be submitting this building for certification under the U.S. Green Building
Council's LEED program.To that end, all systems and equipment must be installed and operate
to comply with the requirements of ASHRAE 90.1-2007 or the local energy code, whichever is
more stringent. In addition, several systems and pieces of equipment are specified to comply
with the requirements of the LEED program. An outside commissioning authority will
commission the building at the completion of construction. Refer to separate commissioning
authority scope of work and specifications for systems affected and HVAC contractor interface
required.
1.02 WORK INCLUDED
>
A. The work under this Section shall include the furnishing of all material, labor, equipment and
supplies and the performance of all operations to provide a complete working system as
required by the drawings and details and as specified herein.
B. The Specifications and Drawings describe the minimum requirements that must be met by the
HVAC Subcontractor for the installation of all work as shown on the Drawings and as specified
hereinunder to include the following items:
1. Three (3) Evaporative Condensing Rooftop Units shall be complete with supply fan,
return fan, evaporative cooled condenser, multiple compressors, variable frequency
drives for each fan, gas heat for morning warm-up, direct expansion coils, DDC
controls with open protocol / BACnet interface and 5-year compressor warranty.
Units shall be mounted on 42" high seismic compliant vibration isolation curbs.
2. Medium pressure supply air duct mains on each floor.
3. New Hot Water Boiler Plants:
a. Existing Building in a new Penthouse includes the following: Three (3)
Patterson-Kelly Boilers as shown on the drawings, each boiler shall have a
circulation pump, one set of primary pumps (one is stand-by), direct vent for
combustion air, expansion tank&air separator, chemical feed, controls and all
other ancillary items. Hot Water Distribution System utilizing two (2) main
loops, one for each floor consisting of a 2-pipe direct return circuit serving hot
water series fan powered terminal units and radiation on the perimeter. Boiler
Plant shall be located in Mechanical Penthouse on the 2nd floor.
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -1
I
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
Northampton,MA
3.09 SHEETMETAL WORK INSTALLATION.....................................................................................170
3.10 INSULATION...............................................................................................................................170
3.11 CLEANING..................................................................................................................................174
3.12 TESTING.....................................................................................................................................175
3.13 AIR AND WATER BALANCING..................................................................................................176
Pw
I
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -iii
OR
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883 go
Northampton,MA
2.18 IN-LINE PUMPS............................................................................................................................33 "*
2.19 WATER PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES.................................................................................33
2.20 WATER PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES........................................................................................33
2.21 PRESSURIZED COMPRESSION TANKS AND AIR SEPARATION FITTINGS..........................33
2.22 MANUAL AIR VENTS...................................................................................................................33 we
2.23 AUTOMATIC AIR VENTS.............................................................................................................33
2.24 PRESSURE GAUGES..................................................................................................................34
2.25 THERMOMETERS........................................................................................................................34
2.26 ELECTRIC HUMIDIFIER..............................................................................................................34
2.27 FINNED RADIATION....................................................................................................................38
2.28 CABINET UNIT HEATERS (HOT WATER)..................................................................................38
2.29 PROPELLER UNIT HEATERS (HOT WATER)............................................................................38 *"
2.30 PROPELLER UNIT HEATERS (ELECTRIC)................................................................................39
2.31 HOT WATER REHEAT COILS.....................................................................................................39
2.32 DUCTLESS SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONING.....................................................................39
2.33 ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS (Evaporative Cooled)...................................................41
2.34 NON-CHEMICAL WATER TREATMENT SYSTEM.....................................................................51
2.35 ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS DX 100% O.A. .............................................................57
2.36 VARIABLE AIR VOLUME TERMINAL UNITS.................:............................................................66
2.37 FAN POWERED CONSTANT AIR VOLUME TERMINAL UNITS................................................67
2.38 GAS-FIRED UNIT HEATER .........................................................................................................69
2.40 BELLMOUTH TAKE-OFFS...........................................................................................................72
2.41 FLEXIBLE DUCT..........................................................................................................................72
2.42 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS...............................................................................................72
2.43 ACOUSTICAL DUCT LINING.......................................................................................................73
2.44 PREFABRICATED SOUND ATTENUATORS..............................................................................73
2.45 DAMPERS AND SPLITTERS.......................................................................................................73 ..,'
2.46 FIRE DAMPERS...........................................................................................................................74
2.47 SMOKE DAMPERS ......................................................................................................................74
2.48 SHEETMETAL ACCESS PANELS...............................................................................................75 ..
2.49 ACCESS PANELS........................................................................................................................75
2.50 SQUARE AND RECTANGULAR CEILING DIFFUSERS.............................................................76
2.51 LINEAR SUPPLY DIFFUSERS ....................................................................................................76
2.52 POWER ROOF VENTILATORS...................................................................................................76
2.53 GRAVITY ROOF VENTILATORS.................................................................................................77
2.54 EXHAUST FANS...........................................................................................................................77
2.55 MOTORS, DRIVES AND STARTERS..........................................................................................78
2.56 VARIABLE SPEED CONTROLLERS...........................................................................................80
2.57 INSULATION.................................................................................................................................83
2.58 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM (DDC).......................................................88
2.59 POINTS LIST..............................................................................................................................141 w
2.60 CARBON MONOXIDE DETECTION AND CONTROL SYSTEMS.............................................144
2.61 VIBRATION ISOLATION AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS............................................................145
PART3 -EXECUTION ............................................................................................................................. 167
3.01 CORE DRILLING........................................................................................................................ 167
3.02 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS..................................................................................................... 167
3.03 SLEEVES AND INSERTS...........................................................................................................167
3.04 PIPE WELDING AND QUALIFICATION OF WELDERS............................................................168
3.05 PIPING AND FITTINGS..............................................................................................................168 ,■,
3.06 VALVES...................................................................................................................................... 169
3.07 BALANCING VALVES................................................................................................................ 169
3.08 WATER SPECIALTIES............................................................................................................... 169
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -ii
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
SECTION 23 00 00 HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART1 -GENERAL.....................................................................................................................................1
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS...............
1.02 WORK INCLUDED..........................................................................................................................1
1.03 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS......................................................................................3
u 1.04 CODES, STANDARDS AND REFERENCES.................................................................................3
1.05 OBTAINING INFORMATION..........................................................................................................4
1.06 COOPERATION AND COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES................................................4
1.07 COORDINATION DRAWINGS.......................................................................................................5
+ " 1.08 RECORD DRAWINGS....................................................................................................................5
1.09 PERMITS, FEES, RULES AND REGULATIONS...........................................................................6
1.10 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY.................................................................................6
1.11 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS......................................................................................................6
` 1.12 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT STANDARDS................................................................................7
1.13 GUARANTEE..................................................................................................................................8
1.14 CONTINUITY OF SERVICE AND SCHEDULING OF WORK........................................................8
1.15 CERTIFICATES OF APPROVAL....................................................................................................8
1.16 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION.......................................................................................................8
1.17 FINAL COMPLETION.....................................................................................................................9
1.18 REOBSERVATION FEES...............................................................................................................9
1.19 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS................................................9
1.20 TEMPORARY HEAT DURING CONSTRUCTION ....................................................................... 10
1.21 VALVE TAGS AND LISTS............................................................................................................10
1.22 IDENTIFICATION OF EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL.................................................................11
1.23 WATERPROOF, FLASHING AND COUNTERFLASHING.................................
1.24 MISCELLANEOUS IRON AND STEEL........................................................................................ 12
1.25 MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVE................................................................................... 12
1.26 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS................................................................................................................12
PART2 - PRODUCTS................................................................................................................................12
2.01 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS.......................................................................................................12
2.02 PIPE AND FITTINGS.................................................................................................................... 13
2.03 ALTERNATE PIPING SYSTEM (Grooved Mechanical Joint Piping System) ..............................14
2.04 WALL PENETRATION CLOSURES.............................................................................................17
2.05 VALVES........................................................................................................................................ 17
2.06 FLOW CONTROL BALANCING VALVES....................................................................................19
2.07 STRAINERS..................................................................................................................................20
2.08 TRIPLE DUTY VALVES................................................................................................................20
2.09 PIPE ALIGNMENT GUIDES.........................................................................................................20
2.10 CONDENSING GAS FIRED HOT WATER BOILER(Below 80 PSIG)........................................21
2.11 CONDENSATE ACID NEUTRALIZING TUBES...........................................................................27
2.12 DOUBLE WALL CHIMNEY SYSTEM...........................................................................................28
2.13 GAS VENT SYSTEMS (AL29-4C)................................................................................................29
2.14 AIR-COOLED CONDENSING UNITS (Small)..............................................................................29
2.15 REFRIGERANT PIPING AND ACCESSORIES...........................................................................30
2.16 WATER PUMPS...........................................................................................................................31
2.17 CHEMICAL FEED TREATMENT..................................................................................................31
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 -i
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883 ,
Northampton,MA
3.12 PLUMBING FIXTURES
A. All plumbing fixtures, except as otherwise noted, shall be furnished and installed by this
Contractor; he shall be responsible for correctly setting these fixtures as shown on Architect's
Plans and interior elevations. All wall penetrations shall have polished chrome-plated
escutcheons.
B. Fixtures designated for barrier free use shall be mounted in accordance with the Americans with
Disabilities Act (ADA) as well as State and Local Codes as applicable, or whichever is stricter if
there is a conflict. Water closet flush valve lever shall be mounted on the wide side of the toilet
areas.
wA
C. All shower controls shall be adjusted by the installing plumber prior to the final inspection.
Controls shall be set to deliver water at a maximum temperature of 110°F to 112°F.
D. All lavatory controls, where applicable, shall be adjusted by the installing plumber prior to the
final inspection. Controls shall be set to deliver water at a maximum temperature of 110
degrees F.
3.13 VENTS THROUGH ROOF
A. All vents extending through the roof which serve the sanitary and waste systems shall extend
no less than 18" and no more than 24" above the roof. Where roofs are used for any purpose
other than weather protection such as gardens, sun decks, parking decks or similar purposes,
the vent shall extend at least 8 feet above the roof and be increased one pipe size and this
change in pipe size shall be made at least one foot below the roof. Offset all vents requiring
same in order to avoid interference with HVAC units, to facilitate flashing conditions as well as
maintain minimum required distance from all natural and mechanical fresh air inlets.
B. All gas vents shall run through the roof and shall extend above the roof and shall be provided
with 3/4" by 1" increaser when required, pipe nipple and Fisher Controls Model No. Y602-17
umbrella type, weather proof bug vent. Off-set all vents to avoid interference with rooftop
equipment, to facilitate flashing as well as maintain minimum required distance from all natural
and mechanical fresh air inlets. *�
C. No vent terminal shall be located directly beneath any door, window, or other ventilating
opening of the building or of an adjacent building, nor shall any vent terminal be within 10 feet
horizontally of such an opening unless it is at least 2 feet above the top of such opening.
D. Vent terminals shall be located at least 25 feet horizontally from all fresh air intakes.
E. All vents through sloping roofs shall be provided with a pipe support on the vertical pipe just
prior to the roof penetration. This support shall be located between the exterior vent terminal
and the first joint or fitting within the building.
3.14 ELECTRICAL ROOMS
A. Piping shall not be installed in or through Electrical Rooms, Electrical Closets, Transformer ,A
Rooms, Telephone Rooms or Elevator Machine Rooms unless the piping is intended to serve
these rooms. No piping shall be installed over electrical panels.
END OF SECTION
\\fs3\g_drive\projects\2009-boston\a0112-003.00\speci6cations\plum\p-spec 10-30-09.doc
PLUMBING 22 00 00 -38
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
Northampton,MA
E. All pipe covering and insulation shall pass through all walls, ceiling and floor continuously. The
only area where the insulation shall not pass continuously shall be at riser clamps. Hangers
4W
shall be installed with insulation shields on the outside of the insulation.
F. All references to hot water systems shall include hot water and tempered water at all
temperatures including the supply and the recirculation.
G. Insulation requirements apply equally to non-potable water systems as they do potable water
systems.
3.06 CLEANOUTS
A. All concealed cleanouts shall be set flush with walls or floors. Finish shall be protected during
construction with proper covering. Flush floor cleanouts shall be coordinated so as to not be
located beneath any partitions, casework nor beneath any non-portable equipment. Cleanouts
shall be iron body with heavy brass plug and raised nut, same size as pipe for piping up to four
(4) inches and not less than four (4) inches in size for piping larger than four (4) inches and
closed gas-tight. Floor cleanouts in carpeted areas shall have carpet cleanout markers. Floor
cleanouts shall not be located beneath partitions, casework, non-portable equipment or similar
installation conditions.
PIP 3.07 VALVES
A. All valves furnished and installed under this Section shall be located in a manner to allow proper
access for service and repair.
B. In no case shall valve stem and handle on a gate or globe valve be installed below the center
line of the pipe it serves.
3.08 FLOOR DRAINS
A. Floor drains shall be furnished and installed by this Contractor; he shall be responsible for
correctly setting these drains at the proper grade to assure proper drainage from all surrounding
areas. Sizes of drains shall be the same size as the pipe it serves. Provide the floor drain with
a trap primer connection wherever the floor drain is served by a trap primer.
3.09 ROOF DRAINS
A. Roof drains and receptor shall be furnished and installed by this Contractor with flashing by the
Roofing Contractor.
3.10 WALL HYDRANTS
A. Hydrants shall be set approximately 18 inches above outside grade and shall include cross
connection protection. Loose key stops shall be turned over to the Owner prior to completion.
3.11 ACCESS PANELS
JIM
A. Furnish and deliver access panels for access to all concealed parts of the plumbing systems
that require accessibility for the proper operation and maintenance of the system. Access
panels shall be installed by the appropriate trades.
PLUMBING 22 00 00 -37
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
Northampton,MA
as
3.03 SANITARY SYSTEMS
A. Soil, waste and vent piping inside the building shall be run as indicated on the Drawings, .s.
properly secured to the building structure with iron hangers. Extend to roof all lines of soil,
waste and vent piping in stacks with all branches and fittings required and extension through
roofs as required by the Local Plumbing Code. Where an end circuit vent pipe from any fixture
or line of fixtures is connected to a vent line serving other fixtures, the connection shall be at
least 3 feet or sufficiently above the floor on which the fixtures are located to prevent the use of
the vent line as a waste.
B. All changes in pipe size and direction on soil and waste lines shall be made with Y's and *°
cleanouts, reducing fittings or recessed reducers. Y's and 450 fittings, or 450 combination
fittings shall be used wherever possible. Use long sweep bends at the bottom of stacks.
C. All fixtures and drains on the sanitary drainage system shall be separately trapped and each
trap shall be vented. Where trap seals are subject to evaporation, they shall be provided with a
drip seal and with a water supply fed from an approved automatic priming device.
D. Sanitary long sweep bends and Y's shall be used for connections to branch lines for fixtures
and T.Y's on vertical runs of pipe only. Long turn fittings shall be used wherever conditions
permit. Short radius fittings may be installed where in conformity with the Plumbing Code.
Furnish and install cleanouts at the bottom of all soil, and waste stacks, at every change in A1°
direction on soil, and waste piping. An end or dandy cleanout fitting the same size as the drain
which it connects shall be installed under all kitchen, kitchenette, coffee room or similar usage
sinks. An approved two-piece trap which can be disassembled to clean this drain may be used
in lieu of the cleanout. Plug all temporary open ends to prevent the entrance of debris.
3.04 STORM SYSTEMS
A. Storm piping inside the building shall be run as indicated on the Drawings, properly secured to
the building structure with iron hangers.
B. All changes in pipe size and direction on storm, lines shall be made with Y's and cleanouts,
reducing fittings or recessed reducers. Y's and 450 fittings, or 450 combination fittings shall be
used wherever possible. Use long sweep bends at the bottom of stacks.
C. Sanitary long sweep bends and Y's shall be used for connections to branch lines and T.Y's on
vertical runs of pipe only. Long turn fittings shall be used wherever conditions permit. Short
radius fittings may be installed where in conformity with the Plumbing Code. Furnish and install
cleanouts at the bottom of all storm, stacks, at every change in direction on storm piping. Plug
all temporary open ends to prevent the entrance of debris.
3.05 INSULATION
aw
A. All pipe covering and insulation shall be carefully applied by mechanics skilled in the trade.
B. Pipe coverings and insulation shall be installed on all piping, valves and fittings. Piping, valves „V,
and fittings designated to be chrome-plated shall not be insulated except hot water, cold water
and waste beneath handicapped lavatories and sinks,which shall be insulated.
C. All systems shall be tested and approved prior to installing pipe covering and insulation. No
D. Staples are not to be used on any insulation system utilizing a vapor barrier jacket.
Im
PLUMBING 22 00 00 -36
Im
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
r G. Pipes shall be run parallel and graded evenly to draining points. Provide a hose end drain
valve, hose connection vacuum breaker with cap and chain at each low point in piping so that
all parts of the systems can be drawn off.
3.02 NATURAL GAS SYSTEMS
A. All piping shall be cut accurately to measurements obtained at the site and shall be installed
without springing or forcing.
B. Branch lines from service or mains shall be taken off the top of main using such crossover
fittings as may be required by structural or installation conditions. All service pipes, fittings and
valves shall be kept at sufficient distance from other work to permit not less than 1/2 inch
between finished coverings on the different services.
C. All piping shall be supported independently from the building structure with pipe hangers. In
general, all lines shall be installed concealed above ceilings in finished spaces where they may
occur.
D. All piping shall be cut true welded. Cap all open ends to prevent the entrance of debris.
E. Provide valves on every branch and where indicated on the Drawings.
on F. All pipes shall be run parallel and graded evenly to low points. Provide a drip leg at each low
point and at the base of each riser.
G. All exterior gas piping, valves and fittings shall be protected and covered with Tapecoat H35
Re Gray corrosion protection tape with integral primer and adhesive.
H. Provide valved pressure gauge assemblies at each main gas service entrance, before and after
each pressure regulator, at each water heater, boiler, emergency or standby generator,
incinerators, HVAC rooftop units and all other major pieces of equipment utilizing gas. Each
pressure gauge assembly shall be individually valved, include a snubber and shall have a dial
range that would locate the system pressure at the approximate mid-point on the dial range.
Assembly shall be similar to TRERICE Model 860, 2-1/2 inch diameter gauge, 735-2 valve and
872-1 snubber.
I. The complete installation, alteration, replacement or repair of gas fueled equipment requires
that the licensed plumber or gas fitter provide the proper venting of any gas fueled appliance in
accordance with the regulations promulgated by the Commonwealth of Massachusetts Board of
Examiners of Plumbers and Gas Fitters, the National Fuel Gas Code, NFPA 54-2002 and ANSI
Z223.1-2002. The provisions of these regulations and codes are applicable to licensed
plumbers or gas fitters. The licensed plumber or gas fitter is responsible for all aspects of the
gas fitting work for which the permit is applied for and issued, including the venting of the flue
gases resulting from the operation of the gas appliance installed, altered, replaced or repaired
in accordance with all applicable codes and regulations. The licensed plumber or gas fitter must
be present for the final inspection of any installation, alteration, replacement or repair of any gas
appliance, which includes the proper venting of such equipment. Final inspection will not result
in an approval unless all regulations, code provisions and standards are complied with,
including those related to the venting of flue gases. Therefore, given that the regulations and
code provisions for the installation, alteration, repair or replacement of gas fueled equipment,
including the venting of the flue gases from that equipment, are enforced as against the
licensed plumber or gas fitter to whom the permit or such work is issued, then only a licensed
plumber or gas fitter or an appropriately trained person under the control and supervision of a
licensed plumber or gas fitter can perform such work, specifically including the venting of gas
fueled equipment in accordance with applicable regulations and code provisions.
PLUMBING 22 00 00 -35
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
2.21 THERMAL EXPANSION TANKS
A. Provide precharged thermal expansion absorbers designed and constructed per ASME Code,
Section VIII. Expansion absorbers shall have precharged air chamber, steel outer shell, rigid
polypropylene liner, heavy duty butyl diaphragm and stainless steel connection. Expansion
tanks 5 gallons or smaller of total volume may be installed in line and supported from overhead.
Tanks greater than 5 gallons of total volume shall be floor mounted on a 4 inch housekeeping
pad.
B. Expansion tank sizes shall be as manufactured by Amtrol, Inc. and shall be in accordance with
the following:
Expansion Tank Model No. Total Volume in Connection Size
No. Gallons
ET-1 ST-5-C 2 3/4"
ET-2 ST-12-C 5 3/4"
ET-3 ST-20V-C 8 3/4"
ET4 ST-30V-C 14 3/4"
ET-5 ST-42V-C 18 3/4"
ET-6 ST-60V-C 25 3/4°
ET-7 ST-80V-C 53 1-1/4"
ET-8 ST-120V-C 68 1-1/4"
ET-9 ST-180V-C 77 1-1/4"
w
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.01 POTABLE AND NONPOTABLE WATER SYSTEMS
A. All copper tubing shall be cut accurately to measurements obtained at the site and shall be
installed without springing or forcing.
B. Branch lines from service or main lines may be taken off the top or bottom of main using such
crossover fittings as may be required by structural or installation conditions. All service pipes,
fittings and valves shall be kept at sufficient distance from other work to permit not less than 1/2
inch from finished coverings and such other work and not less than 1/2 inch between finished
coverings on the different services.
C. All piping shall be supported from the building structure with pipe hangers. Every water supply
riser from the shower valve to the shower head, whether or not exposed, shall be securely
attached to the structure. In general, all lines shall be installed concealed above ceilings in
finished spaces where they may occur.
D. All copper tubing shall be cut true with cutters; the ends shall be reamed out to the full inside
diameter of the pipe. Cap all open ends to prevent the entrance of debris.
E. Provide water hammer arresters. Provide expansion loops. Balance hot water recirculating �.
systems.
F. Provide valves on every branch,to group of fixtures and wherever indicated on the Drawings.
on
PLUMBING 22 00 00 -34
go
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
TABLE A EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
Vibration Isolation&Seismic Restraint ATTACHMENT POINT
on Requirements for Plumbing Equipment ON GRADE ABOVE GRADE
SIZE (2)
EQUIPMENT (3) MOUNTING ISOL DEFL BASE ISOL DEFL BASE
Tanks To 10 hp D 0.30 - - B 0.75 - -
Air
Compressors Over 10 hp B 0.75 - - B 1.50 B-2
&Vacuum B-2
Pumps To 10 hp Floor D 0.30 - - B 0.75 (1)
Unitary
Over 10 hp B 0.75 - - B 1.50 B-2 (1)
To 15 hp Floor D 0.30 B-2 B 0.75 B-2
Base 15-30 h Floor B 0.75 B-2 B 0.75 B-2
Mounted p
Pumps (4) Over 30 hp Floor B 0.75 B-2 B 1.50 B-2
Floor - - - - - - D 0.30 - -
"' Inline All
Ceiling - - - - - - F 0.75 - -
TABLE A NOTES:
GENERAL: ISOL= Isolator, DEFL=Deflection,All deflections indicated are in inches.
(1) Single stroke compressors may require inertia bases with thickness greater than 12 inch max. As
described for base B-2. Inertia base mass shall be sufficient to maintain double amplitude of 1/4 inch.
(2) Equipment with less than 1/3 H.P. are excluded from vibration requirements. (Seismic requirements
still apply)
(3) For equipment with multiple motors, H.P. Classification applies to largest single motor.
(4) Exclude B-2 Base for skid mounted pump sets.
ON CENTER SPACING(Max)
EQUIPMENT TRANSVERSE LONGITUDINAL
w
PIPE 40 Feet 80 Feet
PLUMBING 22 00 00 -33
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
b. Exclusions For Seismic Restraints On Non-Life Safety Systems:
(1) Piping
(a) All piping less than 2-1/2 inches diameter, except in mechanical
rooms where piping less than 1-1/4 inches is exempted.
(b) All clevis or single level trapeze supported piping suspended by
hangers with positive attachment to the structure that are less
than 12 inches in length as measured from the top of the pipe to
the point of attachment to the structure. If the 12 inch limit is *"
exceeded by any hanger in the run, seismic bracing is required
for the run.
C. Exclusions for Seismic Restraints On Life Safety Equipment '
(1) Piping
(a) Natural gas, medical gas, or any piping containing hazardous or
corrosive materials that is less than 1 inch nominal diameter.
K. Inspection *■
1. If in the opinion of the project engineer the seismic restraint installation does not meet
with the project requirements, an outside consultant will be retained to inspect, verify
and submit corrective measures to be taken. The consultant's fees and all work '
associated with such a review shall be borne by the contractor.
PLUMBING 22 00 00 -32
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
equipment. Rod bracing shall be installed as per approved submittals
and shop drawings. Equipment connected to ductwork weighing less
than 75 lbs. is excluded.
(3) All horizontally suspended pipe shall use RESTRAINT TYPE III.
Spacing of seismic bracing shall be as per TABLE B at the end of this
section.
(4) For all trapeze supported piping the individual pipes must be
transversely and vertically restrained to the trapeze support at the
designated restraint locations.
(5) For overhead supported equipment, over stress of the building structure
must not occur. Bracing may occur from:
(a) Flanges of structural beams.
(b) Upper truss chords in bar joists.
(c) Cast in place inserts or drilled and shielded inserts in concrete
structures.
Op (6) Pipe Risers
(a) Where pipes pass through cored holes, holes must be packed
with resilient material or fire stop as specified in other sections of
',w" this specification and/or state and local codes. No additional
horizontal seismic bracing is required at these locations.
(b) Non-isolated, constant temperature pipe risers through cored
holes require a riser clamp at each floor level on top of the slab
attached in a seismically approved manner for vertical restraint.
(c) Non-isolated, constant temperature pipe risers in pipe shafts
require structural steel attached in a seismically approved
manner at each floor level and a riser clamp at each floor level
on top of, and fastened to the structural steel. The riser clamp
and structural steel must be capable of withstanding all thermal,
static and seismic loads.
(7) All non-isolated floor or wall mounted equipment and tanks shall use
RESTRAINT TYPE III or V.
(8) Where base anchoring of equipment is insufficient to resist seismic
forces, restraint TYPE III shall be located above the units center of
gravity to suitably resist"G"forces specified.
(a) Vertically mounted tanks or similar equipment may require this
additional restraint.
(9) A rigid piping system shall not be braced to dissimilar parts of a building
or two dissimilar building systems that may respond in a different mode
during an earthquake. Examples: Wall and roof; solid concrete wall and
a metal deck with lightweight concrete fill, pipes crossing a building
expansion joint.
PLUMBING 22 00 00 -31
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
3. Piping Isolation ..
a. Installation:
(1) General
(a) Hanger isolators shall be installed with the hanger box hung as
close as possible to the structure. (without touching).
(b) Hanger rods shall not short circuit the hanger box.
(2) All piping in mechanical equipment room(s) attached to rotating or
reciprocating equipment shall be isolated as follows:
(a) Water piping.
i. Water piping 1-1/4 inches to 2 inches shall be hung with
TYPE E isolators with 0.25 inch deflection.
ii. Water pipe larger than 2 inches shall be hung with TYPE F
isolators with 0.75 inch deflection.
iii. Horizontal floor or roof mounted water piping 1-1/4 inches
to 2 inches shall be supported by TYPE P isolators with a
minimum 0.3 inch deflection.
iv. Water pipe larger than 2 inches shall be supported by
TYPE B isolators with a minimum of 0.75 inch deflection.
v. Air piping and vacuum piping from compressor discharge
to receiver shall be suspended by TYPE E isolators with a
minimum 0.25 inch deflection or supported by TYPE P
isolators with a minimum 0.3 inch deflection.
(3) Install TYPE FC-1 flexible connectors at all connections of pipe to
externally isolated equipment.
(4) Install FC-2 or 4 type connectors only at locations which exceed
temperature limitations of FC-1 or service requires stainless steel or
bronze construction flex. (Such as gas,fuel oil, steam or Freon)
4. Seismic Restraints
a. Installation
(1) All floor mounted equipment whether isolated or not shall be snubbed,
anchored, bolted or welded to the structure to comply with the required
acceleration. Calculations that determine that isolated equipment
movement may be less than the operating clearance of snubbers
(restraints) do not preclude the need for snubbers. All equipment must
be positively attached to the structure.
(2) All suspended equipment shall be two or four point independently
braced with TYPE III restraints, installed taught for non-isolated
equipment and slack with 1/2 inch cable deflection for isolated
PLUMBING 22 00 00 -30
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
!
4. TYPE FC-4: Flexible bronze Braided Hose
a. Metal hose and braid rated with a minimum 3:1 safety factor. (Minimum 150
PO PSI)
b. Copper tube ends.
J. Installation
1. General
a. Isolation and seismic restraint systems must be installed in strict accordance
with the manufacturer's written instructions and all submittal data.
b. Vibration isolators shall not cause any change of position of equipment
resulting in stress on equipment connections.
2. Equipment Installation
a. Equipment shall be isolated as indicated in TABLE A at the end of this section.
b. Additional Requirements:
(1) The minimum operating clearance under all bases shall be 1 inch.
(2) All bases shall be placed in position and supported temporarily by blocks
or shims prior to the installation of the equipment, isolators and
restraints.
(3) Spring isolators shall be installed after all equipment is installed without
changing equipment elevations.
(4) After the entire installation is complete and under full operational load,
the spring isolators shall be adjusted so that the load is transferred from
the blocks to the isolators.
(5) Remove all debris from beneath the equipment and verify that there are
no short circuits of the isolation. The equipment shall be free in all
directions.
(6) Install equipment with flexibility in wiring.
(7) Housekeeping pads for equipment in this section must be properly
doweled or bolted, using wedge type expansion bolted to the structure
to meet the acceleration criteria. Anchor equipment or isolators to
housekeeping pads, see section Related Work.
PLUMBING 22 00 00 -29
..
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
NAI Type CIB �*
C. TYPE B-7: Steel Rails
(1) Steel members of sufficient strength to prevent equipment flexure during
operation.
(2) Height saving brackets as required to reduce operating height. ..
(3) Rails shall be cross braced at support and equipment attachment points
when used in seismic zones.
NAI Type SR A.
I. Flexible Connectors
1. All connectors shall be installed on the equipment side of shutoff valves; horizontal
and parallel to equipment shafts whenever possible. Piping shall be supported and/or
anchored to resist pipe movement beyond the allowable movement of the flexible
connector. Installations must include check valves and/or other design and
installation precautions to reduce the threat to life safety when subjected to the
specified seismic accelerations.
2. TYPE FC-1: Spherical Elastomer connector
a. Manufactured of EPDM.
b. Sizes 2" and larger shall have two spheres reinforced with an external ring
between spheres. Sizes larger than 20"may be single sphere.
C. Female threaded ends for sizes 3/4"to 1-1/2".
d. Connectors shall be installed in piping gaps equal to the length of the
connector under pressure.
e. ASA 125#flanged connectors shall be rated for of 2100 F, 225 PSIG.
f. Control rods are required in unanchored installations where the installation
exceeds the pressure limitation without control rods.
g. Connectors bolted to Victaulic type coupling or gate, butterfly or check valves
to have a minimum 5/8"flange spacer(by others) installed between the
connector and the coupling flange. Connectors must mate to a flat-faced
flange in all instances.
3. TYPE FC-2: Flexible Stainless Steel Hose
a. Stainless steel hose and braid rated with 3:1 safety factor.
b. 2 inch diameter and smaller with male nipples, 2-1/2 inch and larger with fixed
flat faced steel flanges.
(1) Lengths shall be: 9 inches for 2-1/2 inch through 4 inch, 11 inches for 5
inch and 6 inch, 12 inches for 8 inch, 13 inches for 10 inch, 14 inches for
12 inch through 16 inch.
PLUMBING 22 00 00 -28
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
!R
(1) Mountings shall be fabricated to resist the wind or seismic forces.
NAI Type RNM.
e. TYPE E: Elastomer Hanger Isolator
(1) Molded neoprene element with an integral bushing to insulate lower
support rod from the hanger box.
(2) Steel hanger box shall withstand three times the rated load without
failure.
NAI Type NH.
f. TYPE F: Combination Spring/Elastomer Hanger Isolator
(1) Spring and neoprene elements in a steel hanger box with the features
as described for TYPE C and E isolators.
NAI Type SNH.
H. Equipment Bases
1. Base Types
a. TYPE B-1: Integral Structural Steel Base
(1) Constructed of structural members as required to prevent base flexure
at equipment startup and misalignment of driver and driven units.
Perimeter members shall be a minimum of 1/10th the longest
unsupported span.
(2) Height saving brackets shall be used to reduce operating height and
maintain 1 inch operating clearance under base.
NAI type SB.
b. TYPE B-2: Concrete Inertia Base
(1) Steel concrete forms for floating foundations. Bases for pumps shall be
large enough to support elbows and/or suction diffusers. The base
depth shall be a minimum of 1/12 the longest unsupported span, but not
less than 6 inches or greater than 12 inches. Forms shall be
manufactured from structural steel channel sections and include
concrete reinforcement consisting of steel bars welded in place on 8
inch centers both ways in a layer 1-1/2 inches above the bottom.
IMP (2) Height saving brackets shall be used to maintain 1"clearance below the
base.
(3) Base shall be furnished with steel templates and anchor bolt sleeves to
hold anchors while concrete is being poured.
(4) Isolators may be set into pocket housings which are an integral part of
the base construction or utilize height saving brackets set at the proper
height to maintain 1 inch clearance below the base. Base shall be
furnished with steel templates to hold anchor bolt sleeves and anchors
while concrete is being poured.
PLUMBING 22 00 00 -27
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
(2) Non-isolated systems shall be braced with structural steel strut type with
approved fastening devices to equipment and structure.
(3) Steel angles (by contractor) shall be provided to prevent rod bending of
hung equipment where indicated by the Seismic Restraint vendor's
submittals. Steel angles shall be attached to the rods with a minimum of
three ductile iron clamps at each restraint location. Welding of support
rods to angles is not acceptable.
NAI Model"RBC".
d. TYPE IV: Double deflection neoprene isolator encased in ductile iron or steel
casing. w
(1) Mountings shall be fabricated to resist the wind or seismic forces.
NAI Type RNM.
e. TYPE V: Rigid attachment to structure utilizing wedge type expansion anchors
for bolting and steel plates, either cast-in or anchored with wedge type
expansion bolts, for welding. Powder shots are not acceptable. Concrete
anchor bolt spacing shall be in accordance with manufacturer's published
standards.
4. Vibration Isolator Types
a. TYPE A: Spring Isolator-Free Standing
(1) Spring shall have a minimum outer diameter to overall height ratio of
0.8:1 at rated deflection.
(2) Reserve deflection (from published load ratings to solid height) of 50% .�
of the rated deflection.
(3) Top cup with adjusting bolt tapped for equipment attachment locking cap
screw.
(4) Minimum 1/4 inch thick neoprene acoustical base pad or cup on
underside, unless designated otherwise. ..
NAI Type SM.
b. TYPE B: Spring Isolator-Restrained
(1) Shall be the same as TYPE A with the following additional features.
(a) Integral restraining bolts with elastomeric cushions preventing
metal-to-metal contact.
(b) Internal spring adjusting nut or bolt with leveling capability.
(c) Built-in all-directional limit stops with minimum 1/4 inch clearance
under normal operation.
NAI Type RSM.
C. TYPE C: Not Used.
d. TYPE D: Double deflection neoprene isolator.
PLUMBING 22 00 00 -26
.A
Im
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
G. Materials
1. Devices
a. All vibration isolation and seismic devices described in this section shall be the
product of a single manufacturer. NAI (Novia Associates, Inc.) is the base
manufacturer of these Specifications; products of other manufacturers are
acceptable provided their systems strictly comply with intent, structural design,
performance and deflections of the Base Manufacturer.
2. Seismic Restraints And Vibration Isolation Types
a. All isolation and seismic restraint devices shall be capable of accepting,
without failure, the "G" forces as determined by the seismic certification and
1 calculations as described in the "Submittal Data Requirements" Section of
these Specifications.
b. Corrosion protection for outdoor applications shall be as follows:
(1) Springs cadmium plated,zinc electroplated or powder coated.
op (2) Hardware cadmium or zinc electroplated.
(3) All other metal parts hot spray, hot dipped galvanized or zinc
electroplated.
C. All seismic restraint devices
(1) Shall maintain the equipment in a captive position and not short circuit
isolation devices during normal operating conditions.
(2) Shall have provisions for bolting and/or welding to the structure.
d. Welding of springs to isolator housing, base plates, etc. is strictly prohibited.
3. Seismic Restraint Types
a. TYPE I: Same as TYPE B Isolator. Cast or aluminum housings, (except
ductile iron)are not acceptable.
NAI TYPE RSM.
b. TYPE II: Where required, each corner or side of equipment base shall
incorporate a seismic restraint snubber having an all directional resilient pad
limit stop. Restraints shall be fabricated of plate, structural members or square
metal tubing. Angle bumpers are not acceptable.
NAI Type SS.
C. TYPE III: Restraints for suspended systems
(1) Vibration isolated systems shall be braced with multiple 7 x 19 strand
galvanized cable rope with approved attachment devices (such as
thimbles and wire rope clips)to equipment and structure.
PLUMBING 22 00 00 -25
am
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA am
must detail anchoring methods, bolt diameter, embedment and weld Im
length.
4. An in force, $500,000.00 coverage limit seismic design Errors and Omissions
insurance certificate must accompany submittals. Manufacturer's product liability 00
insurance certificates are not acceptable.
D. Manufacturer's Responsibility ,o
1. Manufacturer of vibration and seismic control equipment shall have the following
responsibilities:
a. Determine vibration isolation and seismic restraint sizes and locations.
b. Provide equipment vibration isolation and seismic restraints as specified.
C. Guarantee specified isolation system deflections.
d. Provide installation instructions, drawings and field supervision to insure
proper installation and performance of systems.
E. Related Work
1. Housekeeping Pads
a. Housekeeping pad attachment shall be by the project structural engineer.
Material and labor required for attachment and construction shall be by the
Concrete section contractor.
b. Housekeeping pads shall be coordinated with the Seismic Restraint vendor
and sized to provide a minimum edge distance of 13 bolt diameters of
clearance all around the outermost anchor bolt to allow for the use of full
anchor ratings.
2. Supplementary Support Steel
a. Contractor shall supply supplementary support steel and connections for all
equipment and piping, including roof mounted equipment, as required or
specified.
b. Where support for equipment requires stands, bases, rails, etc. these devices
shall be designed and fabricated by Seismic Restraint Supplier to ensure the
seismic capability of the entire installation.
3. Attachments
a. Contractor shall provide restraint attachment plates cast into housekeeping
pads, concrete inserts, double sided beam clamps, etc. in accordance with the
requirements of the Seismic Restraint vendor.
F. Code Requirements
a. Seismic restraints as described herein shall be provided in accordance with the
Massachusetts State Building Code 7th Edition Section 1612.0 or the applicable
BOCA code.
PLUMBING 22 00 00 -24
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
C. Submittal Data Requirements
1. Submittals
a. Catalog cuts or data sheets on specific vibration isolators and restraints to be
utilized detailing compliance with the Specification. Reference "TYPE" as per
"Products"Section of this Specification.
b. An itemized list of all isolated and non-isolated equipment. Detailed schedules
showing isolator and seismic restraints proposed for each piece of equipment,
referencing material and seismic calculation drawing numbers.
2. Shop Drawings
a. Show base construction for equipment; include dimensions, structural member
sizes and support point locations.
b. When walls and slabs are used as seismic restraint locations, details of
acceptable methods for ducts, conduit and pipe must be included.
C. Indicate isolation devices selected with complete dimensional and deflection
data before condition is accepted for installation.
d. Provide specific details of seismic restraints and anchors; include number, size
and locations for each piece of equipment.
e. Coordinated or contract drawings shall be marked-up with the specific
locations and types of restraints shown for all pipe. Rod bracing at various
installation angles and assigned load at each restraint location shall be clearly
delineated. Any and all tributary loads shall be considered for proper restraint
sizing.
f. For ceiling suspended equipment design restraints for a minimum installation
angle of 300 from vertical. Indicate maximum installation angle allowed for
restraint system as well as braced and unbraced rod lengths at each allowable
installation condition.
3. Seismic Certification and Analysis
a. Seismic restraint calculations must be provided for all connections of
equipment to the structure. Performance of all products(such as; strut, cable,
anchors, clips, etc.) associated with restraints must be supported with
manufacturer's data sheets or certified calculations.
b. For roof-mounted equipment both the seismic acceleration and wind loads(30
psf) shall be calculated, the highest load shall be utilized for the design of the
restraints and isolators.
C. Certification of calculations to support seismic restraint designs must be
stamped by a professional engineer registered in the State were the project
is located.
(1) Analysis must indicate calculated dead loads, derived loads and
materials utilized for connections to equipment and structure. Analysis
PLUMBING 22 00 00 -23
OR
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883 go
Northampton,MA
war
5. The term EQUIPMENT will be used throughout this specification and it includes ALL
non-structural components within the facility and/or serving this facility, such as
equipment located in outbuildings or outside of the main structure on grade within five
feet of the foundation wall. Equipment buried underground is excluded but entry of ' '
services through the foundation walls is included. Equipment referred to below is a
partial list of equipment for reference. (Equipment not listed are still included in this
specification)
w
Compressors Piping Pumps(All types) Tanks(All types) Water Heaters
6. Life safety systems defined 40
a. All medical and life support systems
b. All systems involved with fire protection, service water supply piping and ow
water tanks.
C. All systems involved with and/or connected to emergency power supply. 40
7. Positive Attachment
a. Positive attachment is defined as a support location with a cast-in or wedge *�+
type expansion anchor, a double sided beam clamp loaded perpendicular to a
beam, a welded or through bolted connection to the structure.
8. Transverse Bracing
a Restraint(s)applied to limit motion perpendicular or angular to the centerline of
the pipe.
9. Longitudinal Bracing
a. Restraint(s)applied to limit motion along the centerline of the pipe.
B. OEM Equipment Isolation Packages
1. Internal and/or External Systems
a. Substitution of internally or externally isolated and restrained equipment in lieu
of the isolation and restraints specified in this section is acceptable provided all
conditions of this section are met. The equipment manufacturer shall provide
a letter of guarantee from their Engineering Department stamped and certified
per the section on Seismic Restraints and Analysis stating that the seismic
restraints are in full compliance with these specifications. A copy of an in force *�
Errors and Omissions Insurance Certificate must accompany the submittal.
Letters from field offices or representatives are unacceptable.
b. All costs for converting to the specified vibration isolation and/or restraints shall
be borne by the equipment manufacturer in the event of non compliance with
the preceding.
C. In the event that the equipment is internally isolated and restrained, the entire
unit assembly must be seismically attached to the structure. This attachment
and certification thereof shall be by this section.
PLUMBING 22 00 00 -22
go
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
4. SA"D" 61-113 Josam 75004 Jay R. Smith 5030
5. SA"E" 114-154 Josam 75005 Jay R. Smith 5040
6. SA°F" 155-330 Josam 75006 Jay R. Smith 5050
2.18 PRESSURE GAUGES
A. Pressure gauges shall have brass movement, aluminum case, double strength clear glass
window with black embossed figures and graduations on a white dial face, with 1 percent
accuracy of scale range. Gauges shall be manufactured by Trerice Company, Taylor
4 Instrument or Marshalltown Manufacturing.
B. Gauges shall be furnished with snubbers and needle valve shut off valves.
C. Gauges shall be 4-1/2 inch diameter furnished with ranges that will locate the intended pressure
at the point of application approximately midpoint on the range scale. Gauges for natural gas
systems shall be gauges specifically designed for elevated pressure applications.
2.19 THERMOMETERS
A. Thermometers shall be adjustable angle design of the separable well type and shall have a 9
inch cast aluminum case. The scale shall be white with black figures and graduations
embossed on the scale. The column shall be filled with blue organic fill. Thermometers shall be
manufactured by Trerice Company, Taylor Instrument or Marshalltown Manufacturing.
B. Thermometers shall be furnished complete with all necessary sockets, wells, connectors and
accessories required for installation suitable for the service in which installed. Extension necks
shall be furnished for insulated piping.
C. Thermometers shall be furnished with the temperature ranges of Zero to 100 degrees F for cold
water and chilled water and of 30 to 240 degrees F for hot water systems.
2.20 VIBRATION ISOLATION&SEISMIC RESTRAINTS
A. General
1. This dual purpose section provides for vibration isolation and seismic control for the
"equipment"as listed below.
l
2. It is the intent of the seismic restraint portion of this specification to provide restraint of
non-structural building components. Restraint systems are intended to withstand the
stipulated seismic accelerations applied through the component's center of gravity.
3. Each and every support attachment to the structure of equipment that meets the
requirements of this specification must be positive, including equipment that may be
excluded from auxiliary seismic bracing as noted in Part 3.
4. The work in this section includes the following:
W a. Vibration isolation elements for equipment.
b. Equipment isolation bases.
C. Piping flexible connectors.
d. Seismic restraints for isolated equipment.
e. Seismic restraints for non-isolated equipment.
f. Certification of seismic restraint designs and installation supervision.
g. Equipment support stands, bases or rails.
PLUMBING 22 00 00 -21
so
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA so
2.16 TESTS AND APPROVALS am
A. Pipe lines shall be blown or flushed clean, before piping tests are applied. All plumbing work
shall be tested as herein specified. No portion shall be covered, concealed, used or made
inaccessible to testing, inspection, repair, correction or replacement until tests thereof have
been satisfactorily completed in the presence of the Architect's Authorized Representatives.
The Plumbing Subcontractor must accommodate his testing operations to the progress of the
project as a whole. Correct all defects appearing under test and repeat the tests until all parts of
the work have withstood them successfully.
B. Furnish all labor, material and services for testing, including testing plugs, pumps and
compressors; he shall make and remove all temporary piping connections required for the tests w
and shall dispose of test water and all wastes after tests. Leave all work in good order, ready
for full use.
C. Tests on all plumbing systems shall be made in accordance with the requirements of the Local
Plumbing Code and the codes, standards, recommended practices and manuals of the National
Fire Protection Association.
2.17 WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS .w
A. Maintenance free water hammer arresters shall be furnished and installed at all locations in the
water systems where quick acting valves are installed as well as wherever water hammer may ++ +
occur. Examples of such locations are as follows:
1. Flushometer valves.
2. Self-closing and metering faucets. so
3. Prior to all pressure reducing valves.
4. Prior to all in-line solenoid valves.
5. Dishwashing Machines. .�
6. All laundry equipment.
7. Emergency showers.
8. Sterilizer water supplies.
9. Autoclaves.
10. Can washers.
11. Hose spray prerinse.
12. Glasswashers, cagewashers and similar equipment.
13. Knee or foot operated valves.
14. Single handle faucets.
15. Quarter turn faucets and valves.
16. Shower control valves.
B. Water hammer arresters shall be as manufactured by Josam Manufacturing Company, Jay R.
Smith Manufacturing Company or Zurn Systems. Arresters shall be installed at each and every
multiple of fixtures or items as listed above, water hammer arresters may serve groups of +..
fixtures. Sizing and placement shall be in accordance with PDI Standard PDI-WH-201 and the
manufacturer's recommendations. Provide access panels.
C. Water hammer arresters shall be as follows:
Type Fixture Unit Rating Model Option Model
ens
1. SA"A" 1-11 Josam 75001 Jay R. Smith 5005
2. SA"B" 12-32 Josam 75002 Jay R. Smith 5010
3. SA"C" 33-60 Josam 75003 Jay R. Smith 5020
PLUMBING 22 00 00 -20
•
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
Northampton,MA
on J. P-4 Hose Bibb:
Chicago Faucet Model No. 952 polished chrome-plated inside sill faucet, 3/4 inch hose thread
outlet,vacuum breaker, removable tee key handle, 1/2 inch inlet,wall flange.
2.14 PIPE IDENTIFICATION AND VALVE TAGS
A. All piping, except that piping which is within inaccessible chases, shall be identified with semi-
rigid plastic identification markers equal to Seton Setmark pipe markers. Direction of flow
arrows are to be included on each marker. Each marker background shall be appropriately
color coded with a clearly printed legend to identify the contents of the pipe in conformance with
the"Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems" (ANSI 13.1-1981). Setmark snap-around
markers shall be used for overall diameters up to six inches and strap-around markers shall be
used above six inch overall diameters. Markers shall be located adjacent to each valve, at each
branch, at each cap for future, at each riser take off, at each pipe passage through wall, at each
pipe passage through floors, at each pipe passage to underground and on vertical and
horizontal piping at 20 foot intervals maximum. All non-potable water lines and outlets shall be
` identified as"Water Subject to Questionable Safety" in accordance with the requirements of the
Massachusetts Uniform State Plumbing Code. Piping supplying natural gas at a pressure
greater than 1/2 psig or 14 inch water column shall be color coded yellow and labeled a
minimum of every ten feet, at all changes in direction, on each side of a penetration and at each
valve. The labels shall be black lettering,capable of being read from a normal line of vision that
indicates the type of gas and the pressure contained within.
B. All valves shall be designated by distinguishing numbers and letters carefully coordinated with a
valve chart. Valve tags shall be 19 gauge polished brass, 1-1/2 inch diameter with stamped
tlr black filled letters similar to Seton S type 250-BL or approved equal. Lettering shall be 1/4 inch
high for type service and 1/2 inch for valve number. Tag shall be attached to valves with
approved brass"S" hooks, or brass jack chain. Whenever a valve is above a hung ceiling, the
valve tag shall be located immediately above the hung ceiling.
C. Furnish a minimum of two typed valve lists to be framed under glass or Plexiglass. Each chart
shall be enclosed in an approved .015 inch thick plastic closure for permanent protection. Valve
numbers shall correspond to those indicated on the Record Drawings and on the printed valve
lists. The printed list shall include the valve number, location and purpose of each valve. It
shall state other necessary information such as the required opening or closing of another valve
when one valve is to be opened or closed. Printed framed valve lists shall be displayed in each
r Mechanical Room or in a location designated by the Owner.
D. Equipment nameplates shall be 3/4 inch by 2-1/2 inch long .02 inch aluminum with a black
enamel background with engraved natural aluminum letters similar to Seton Style 2065-20.
'm Nameplate shall have pressure sensitive taped backing.
E. Provide a brass wall plaque, minimum .020 inch thickness, secured to the exterior wall just
above the grade line for all buried service entrances or exits. Samples of such are: Water
Service Below; Gas Service Below; Sanitary Sewer Below; Storm Sewer Below, Irrigation
Water Below; etc.
2.15 DISINFECTION OF WATER SYSTEMS
A. All water systems shall be disinfected in accordance with Local Public Health and Plumbing
Code Requirements.
PLUMBING 22 00 00 -19
am
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA Im
Symmons S-6080 automatic sensor (battery-operated) faucet with temperature selection, limit go
stop and barrier-free operation with perforated offset strainer and 1 '/4 inch tailpiece.
McGuire heavy duty polished chrome-plated cast brass angle valve kits, loose key, flexible
risers, escutcheon.
1 '/4 inch x 1 '/ inch polished chrome-plated cast brass adjustable "P" trap, cleanout plug, w
extension to wall with escutcheon.
Insulate cold water, hot water and waste beneath lavatory.
Provide lavatory concealed arm carrier support system to suit. w
E. P-5 Shower:
Lasco #1363-C, 36 inches x 36 inches x 72 inches, one piece shower unit, with slip resistant
bottom.
CP drain and perforated strainer with 2 inch caulk connection, Bobrick B-6107 curtain rod and
flanges,2 inch"P"trap with cleanout.
Symmons Model No. 1-100, safety mix shower unit. Heavy-duty pressure balancing valve,
adjustable shower head (1.5 GPM), arm and flange.
F. P-6 Shower:
Lasco #1363-BFS-MA (Massachusetts special), 36 inches x 36 inches x 72 inches, one piece
shower unit,with slip resistant bottom, grab bars,folding seat and a maximum'/"threshold. ..
CP drain and perforated strainer with 2 inch caulk connection, Bobrick B-6107 curtain rod and
flanges,2 inch"P"trap with cleanout.
Symmons Model No. 1-25-FSB safety mix shower unit with hand shower and slide bar.
.�e
G. P-7 Sink:
Elkay Model No. LRAD-2219, 22 inch x 19 1/2 inch, Type 304 stainless steel, 18 gauge, self-
rimming, single bowl insert sink with three (3) 1-1/2 inch diameter faucet holes on 4 inch
centers. Bowl size 18 inch x 14 inch x 7 5/8 inch deep.
Elkay Model No. LKE-4103 concealed mount faucet with single lever handle and spray, LK-99
drain outlet with 1 % inch tailpiece, 1 '/ inch cast brass "P" trap with cleanout and Macquire + +
heavy-duty angle stops with risers to suit, escutcheons.
In-Sink-Evator Model No. 17, 3/ HP batchfeed garbage disposer, 120 volts, 60 Hz, 1725 RPM
with dishwasher connection.
H. P-8 Drinking Fountain:
Halsey Taylor Model OVL-II-EBP barrier-free drinking fountain complete with hanger, receptor,
inline stop, "P"trap with cleanout through wall. Stainless steel finish.
I. P-9 Janitors Sink:
Fiat Model No. MSB-3624, 24 inch x 36 inch x 10 inch deep molded stone mop service basin
with integral 3 inch stainless steel drain body, strainer and stainless steel wall guard.
Model No. 1239-BB aluminum bumper guards on all exposed sides.
#830-AA service faucet with vacuum breaker,threaded spout with pail hook, loose key stops.
"P"trap with cleanout to suit.
PLUMBING 22 00 00 -18
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
B. Size shall be sufficient for the purpose, but no less than 12 inches by 18 inches. Particular
attention shall be exercised in the selection of doors for masonry walls in order that frame sizes
used will match the courses of brick or block.
!! C. Access doors shall be prime coated of rust inhibitive paint, continuous hinge and manufactured
by Inland Steel Products Company "Milcor, Miami-Carey or Walsh-Hannon- Gladwin,
Incorporated"Way Loctor. Type shall be based upon"Milcor'as follows:
1. Suspended Drywall Ceilings: Style ATR with 16 gauge frame, 18 gauge panel and
flush screwdriver operated cam locks.
2. Plastered Walls and Ceilings: Style K with 16 gauge frame, 14 gauge panel and flush
screwdriver operated cam locks.
3. Masonry Non-Rated Walls: Style M with 16 gauge frame, 14 gauge panel and flush
so screwdriver operated cam locks.
4. Fire Rated Walls and Ceilings: Style UFR fire rated with UL 1-1/2 hour"B" rating, 16
gauge frame, 20 gauge sandwich type insulated panel, self-latching lock having interior
release mechanism, and key operated cylinder lock keyed as required to suit
requirements of the Architect.
5. Non-rated Drywall Walls: Style DW with 16 gauge frame, 14 gauge panel, and
screwdriver operated cam locks.
D. Point out to the Ceiling Subcontractor exactly which tile units are to be marked with a colored
button to indicate equipment above.
2.13 PLUMBING FIXTURES
A. Plumbing fixtures shall be products of Kohler, American Standard or Eljer. All exposed trim,
fittings, valves and piping shall be polished chrome plated. All supply stop valves shall be
heavy duty brass body and stem and shall have threaded or sweat solder inlet. Provide wall
�, escutcheons. The following model numbers refer to Kohler, Sloan, Symmons, Lasco, Elkay,
Halsey Taylor, Fiat, and Speakman and are intended to establish a standard of quality:
B. P-1 Water Closet:
K-4330 vitreous china siphon jet elongated bowl with 2 '/4 inch passageway and 1 'h inch top
spud, 1.6 GPF.
K-4650-0 (white)solid plastic open front white seat with check hinge.
Sloan Ecos#8111-1.6/1.1, electronic dual flush (battery-operated)flush valve assembly, 1.6/1.1
gallons per flush.
Combination drainage carrier fitting with supply pipe support.
C. P-2 Urinal:
Sloan#WES-1000,waterfree urinal,vitreous china, start up cartridge. Provideurinal wall supply
support to suit.
D. P-3 Lavatory:
K-2005 vitreous china 21 inch x 18 1/8 inch lavatory with 4 inch faucet centers, drilled for
concealed arm carrier.
PLUMBING 22 00 00 -17
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
Northampton,MA
CIRCULATING PUMP AQUASTAT SETTINGS
Aquastat System HW Delta T Sizing Circ Pump Start Circ Pump Stop
Settings Temp Circ Pump
A 140 degrees F 20 degrees F 115 degrees F 120 degrees F
B 140 degrees F 10 degrees F 125 degrees F 130 degrees F
C 120 degrees F 20 degrees F 95 degrees F 100 degree F
D 120 degrees F 10 degrees F 105 degrees F 110 degrees F
2.11 WATER HEATERS
A. Type A: The heater shall be similar to A.O. Smith Dura-Power Commercial Electric Model No.
DVE-120-18, or approved equal. Heater shall be rated at 18KW, 480V, 3 phase, 60 cycle AC
listed by Underwriters/Laboratories and approved by the National Sanitation Foundation. Tank
shall be 119 gallon capacity with 150 psi working pressure and equipped with dual extruded
high density magnesium anodes. All internal surfaces of the heater exposed to water shall be
glass-lined with an alkaline borosilicate composition that has been fused to steel by firing at a
temperature range of 1400°F to 1600°F. Electric heating elements shall be medium watt
density screw-in type with Incoloy sheath and ceramic terminal block. Internal power circuit
fusing shall be provided. Element operation shall be sequenced with thermostats switched
through individual magnetic contactors. Control circuit shall be factory fused and include
manual reset high temperature cutoff switch and thermostat with sensing element in tin-plaster
well, immersed in water. Control cabinet and jacket shall be of baked enamel finish and shall
provide full size control and element compartment for complete service and maintenance
performance through front hinged compartment door, and enclose tank with fiberglass
insulation. 1-1/4 inch inlet and outlet connection shall be provided. The heater tank shall have
a three year limited warranty as outlined in the written warranty. Fully illustrated instruction
manual to be included.
B. Type B: The heater shall be similar to A.O. Smith Dura-Power Commercial Electric Model No.
DVE-52-6, or approved equal. Heater shall be rated at 6KW, 480V, 3 phase, 60 cycle AC listed
by Underwriters/Laboratories and approved by the National Sanitation Foundation. Tank shall
be 50 gallon capacity with 150 psi working pressure and equipped with dual extruded high
density magnesium anodes. All internal surfaces of the heater exposed to water shall be glass-
lined with an alkaline borosilicate composition that has been fused to steel by firing at a
temperature range of 1400°F to 1600°F. Electric heating elements shall be medium watt
density screw-in type with Incoloy sheath and ceramic terminal block. Internal power circuit
fusing shall be provided. Element operation shall be sequenced with thermostats switched
through individual magnetic contactors. Control circuit shall be factory fused and include
manual reset high temperature cutoff switch and thermostat with sensing element in tin-plaster
well, immersed in water. Control cabinet and jacket shall be of baked enamel finish and shall
provide full size control and element compartment for complete service and maintenance
performance through front hinged compartment door, and enclose tank with fiberglass
insulation. 1-1/4 inch inlet and outlet connection shall be provided. The heater tank shall have
a three year limited warranty as outlined in the written warranty. Fully illustrated instruction
manual to be included. am
2.12 ACCESS PANELS
A. Furnish access panels for access to all concealed parts of the plumbing systems that require
accessibility for the proper operation and maintenance of the system.
PLUMBING 22 00 00 -16
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
2.08 ROOF DRAINS
A. All roof drains shall be the product of one manufacturer such as Jay R. Smith, Josam, Zurn or
approved equal.
B. Type A: Shall be Josam 21500-19-3 iron body, clamping ring with gravel stop, inside caulk
outlet. Provide Josam Series 26200 expansion joint at every drain location where the drain
outlet does not immediately offset into a horizontal position.
C. Type B: Shall be Jay R. Smith Figure 3980-E-C-R"roof-ceptor"drain, cast iron receptor with 2-
1/2 " high solid water dam, cast iron dome bottom strainer, vandal proof screws, extension,
underdeck clamp, and room sump receptors. Roof drain to be provided with "P" trap with
cleanout, vent, and piped to the sanitary system. Provide insulation for heat tracing which is
provided by the Electrical Contractor.
go 2.09 WALL HYDRANTS
A. Josam Model No. 71050-72-73 series cast bronze non-freeze wall hydrant with satin finish
nikaloy face, 3/4 inch HPT outlet, integral vacuum breaker backflow preventer, pressure relief
valve, bronze casing, bronze operating parts convertible into service tool, 3/4 inch. Length to
suit wall thickness.
2.10 CIRCULATING PUMPS
A. Pumps shall be all bronze, centrifugal type, close coupled,with side suction as manufactured by
Bell and Gossett Company, Taco Heaters, Incorporated, Thrush or approved equal. Pump
shall be in line type with valved bypass. Motor shall be single phase, 60 hertz AC.
B. Pump shall be provided with a manual motor starting switch. Pump operation shall be
controlled by an immersion type aquastat set to start pump and stop pump at selected settings.
This Contractor shall provide all control wiring.
C. Circulating pumps shall be in accordance with the following schedule.
CIRCULATING PUMP REQUIREMENTS
Designation CP1 CP2 CP3 CP4
GPM 10 3 - -
Tdh in Ft 9 2 - -
HP 1/8 1/40 - -
Volts 115 115 - -
RPM 3250 3250 - -
Inlet/Outlet Size 1" 1" - -
Manufacturer Taco Taco - -
Model No. 0010 006 - -
A uastat Settings D D - -
D. The following schedule shall be utilized in the Aquastat Settings.
OP
PLUMBING 22 00 00 -15
go
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
C. All shut off valves on cold water, hot water and hot water recirculation piping larger than three .�
inches shall be Nibco Figure No. F-619, flanged ends, iron body bronze mounted, solid wedge,
inside screw, non-rising stem, 200 psi WOG.
D. All check valves on cold water, hot water and hot water recirculation piping three inches and
less in size shall be Nibco Figure No. S-413-W, solder end, bronze body swing check, bronze
disc, 200 psi WOG.
E. All drain valves shall be 1/2 inch Apollo Model 78-103 with Watts No. 8A hose connection
vacuum breaker, cap with chain of length as required.
F. All balancing valves for hot water recirculation shall be the same as specified for shut-off valves. w
Balancing valves shall be "Victaulic," Tour and Anderson Series 786, solder end, circuit
balancing valve, a metal, non-ferrous pressure die cast, non-porous alloy body.
G. All shut-off valves on natural gas systems 2-1/2 inches and larger, as well as all sizes on
elevated gas pressure systems, shall be Homestead Olson Technologies Figure 612 or 612A,
semi-steel, lubricated plug valves,flanged ends,wrench operated,200 psi WOG.
H. All ball valves for installation in insulated piping shall have valve extensions to suit installation
thickness.
I. Backflow preventers 2 inches and smaller shall be reduced pressure principle, all bronze, Watts ..�
Series U-909-QTS for cold water and hot water including bronze strainer, valves, air gap fittings
test cocks and spare parts kit. Backflow preventers larger than 2 inches shall be Watts Series
909 or Series 909HW for cold water and hot water respectively, including strainer, valves, air
gap fittings, test cocks and spare parts kit. Each backflow preventer and shut-off valves shall be
installed between 3 and 4 feet above the floor and a minimum of 12 inches from any wall.
Support the assembly from the floor or the wall. Run vent to nearest floor drain or similar open
receptor. Pressure gauges shall be installed on the supply and discharge side of each backflow
preventer assembly. Each pressure gauge assembly shall include TRERICE 600-C gauge, 3-
1/2 inch diameter size, 0-160 psi dial range, 735-2 valve and 872-1 snubber. Furnish to the
Owner one Watts TK-99 E Test Kit. This Contractor shall act as the Owner's agent in seeking
approval from the Department of Environmental Protection or its designee. This Contractor .,.
shall submit all plans, specifications and applications required for approval and shall pay all
fees. Approvals shall be secured prior to the purchase and installation of backflow preventers.
Test and certify backflow preventer.
J. Valves on Victaulic grooved copper systems shall be Victaulic Model 608 or Engineer Approved
Equal for sizes 2-1/2"through 6", 300 psi with copper tube size grooved ends. Dead-End rating
to full pressure rating of valve. Cast bronze body to CDA-836 (85-5-5-5). Elastomer
encapsulated ductile iron disc, ASTM A-536, Grade 65-45-12, with integrally cast stem. Bubble
tight, bi-directional service,with memory stop for throttling, metering or balancing services.
2.07 FLOOR DRAINS
A. All floor drains shall be the product of one manufacturer such as Jay R. Smith, Josam, Zurn, or
approved equal.
B. Floor drain Type A shall be Josam Series 30000-A-6S.
C. Floor drain Type B shall be Josam Series 32120.
PLUMBING 22 00 00 -14
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
w Northampton,MA
penetrate fire rated construction, the openings shall be packed with the material and system
that shall maintain the integrity of the fire rating as detailed in the UL Fire Resistance Directory.
D. Pipe Sleeves shall be according to the following:
10
1. Sleeves on pipes passing through masonry or concrete construction shall be scheduled
40 galvanized steel pipe.
2. Sleeves on pipes passing through wood or drywall partitions shall be 16 gauge
galvanized steel.
E. Whenever new penetrations to a previously poured slab are required for the installation of floor
drains, shower drains, mop receptors, flush floor cleanouts or similar items of plumbing, these
penetrations shall be totally sealed with a fire and water stop sealant. Sealant shall be Dow
Corning fire stop sealant, Catalog No. 2000. Hourly fire rating in hours must be meet the
! ! requirements of the slab being penetrated.
F. Provide chrome plated brass escutcheons with set screws for exposed piping in all areas. In
mechanical rooms use plain brass or cast iron escutcheons suitable for painting. All
escutcheons shall be sized to fit the bare pipe or insulation in a snug and neat manner. They
shall be of sufficient size to cover sleeves openings for the pipes and of sufficient depth to cover
sleeves projecting above floors.
2.05 CLEANOUTS
A. Cleanouts shall be as manufactured by Josam Manufacturing Company, Jay R. Smith
Manufacturing Company, Zurn Industries, Inc. or approved equal. The following series
numbers are intended to establish a level of quality and comparison.
B. Type A: Josam Series 56010-2-22-41 coated cast iron floor cleanout.
C. Type B: Josam Series 58890-20 round stainless steel wall access cover, center screw and
raised head bronze plug.
D. Type C: Josam Series 58540-20 raised head bronze NPT threaded plug for use in conjunction
with standard pipe fittings.
E. Cleanouts shall be in accordance with the following:
1. Sanitary,Waste and Storm Systems Buried Type A
2. Sanitary,Waste and Storm Systems in Walls Type B
3. Sanitary,Waste and Storm Systems at Base of Stacks Type C
2.06 VALVES
A. All shut-off valves on cold water, hot water, and hot water recirculation piping from 3/4 inch up to
and including 2 inch shall be Apollo Series 77-200, solder end, bronze body ball valve, chrome
plated bronze ball, 600 psi WOG,full port ball valve.
B. All shut-off valves on cold water, hot water and hot water recirculation piping 1/2 inch, 2-1/2 inch
and 3 inch shall be Apollo Series 70-200, solder end, bronze body ball valve, chrome plated
bronze ball, 600 psi WOG.
PLUMBING 22 00 00 -13
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
long, 18 gauge steel. On diameters 5 inches and 6 inches, shield shall be 18-inch long, 16
gauge steel. On diameters 8 inches and 10 inches, shield shall be 24-inch long, 14 gauge steel.
On diameters greater than 10 inches, shield shall be 24-inch long, 12 gauge steel. Structure
attachments shall be as manufactured by Carpenter & Patterson and shall be suitable to carry
the weight. *�
F. All fixtures and equipment shall be supported and fastened in a satisfactory manner and in
accordance with fixture manufacturer's recommendations.
G. Where chair carriers are required, they shall be completely concealed in the building
construction and shall rigidly support the fixture from the floor. Chair carrier shall support
fixtures in such a manner that no part of the fixture will be supported by the wall or partition.
Chair carriers shall be furnished complete with necessary bolts, nuts and washers as well as
connecting nipples of the proper length with gaskets for the fixture connection. Provide auxiliary
support assembly in wide chase situations whenever the water closet coupling is of a length that
the carrier manufacturer recommends the auxiliary foot support directly behind the wall. All
available or optional anchor foot assemblies shall be utilized. Carriers must fit in available
space and shall be of the special narrow type or compact style where necessary. Chair carriers
for water closets and urinals shall include flushometer supply pipe support. Flushometer supply
pipe shall always be provided with a concealed support regardless of if the design includes a
carrier or not.
H. Wherever wood blocking is required to insure adequate support of fixtures and related piping, it
shall be provided by this Contractor and it shall be fire treated.
I. All inserts in new concrete construction shall be capable of developing the full strength of the
rod or bolt used in them and shall be either continuous insert type or malleable iron concrete
inserts for rod sizes 3/8 inch to 7/8 inch. Continuous inserts shall have anchors every 4 inches
and shall extend 1-1/2 inches above the back of the insert and shall hook to provide anchor. All
inserts shall be tied to the reinforcing steel rods with wire and properly sized reinforcing rods
shall be inserted through the special holes, hooks or brackets provided in or on the inserts to
securely anchor insert to the structure.
J. Pipe alignment guides shall be split-sleeve type as manufactured by Broat Manufacturing, Inc.
and shall be suitable for copper tubing.
2.04 SLEEVES, ESCUTCHEONS AND FIRESTOPPING
A. Sleeves shall be furnished and set by this Contractor and he shall be responsible for their
proper and permanent location. This Contractor shall be responsible for all core drilling. Core
openings shall have link-seal fire-rated penetration closures.
B. This Contractor shall provide steel sleeves at all points where pipes and all other work under his
charge pass through masonry, concrete or wood. Sleeves shall have flanges or wings at mind-
points to prevent sleeve from slipping through the floor or wall. Pipe sleeves shall be sufficient
diameter to provide approximately 1/4 inch clearance around the pipe or the insulation on
insulated systems. Sleeves through walls shall end flush with the surface of the walls. Sleeves
in floors shall extend one inch above the floor and after installation of piping shall be packed,
firestopped and made watertight. Sleeves in exterior walls shall have waterstop plates, shall +
end flush with the surface of the walls, shall have link-seal penetration closures and shall be of a
diameter that is compatible with the Link Seal System.
C. Seal the sleeve penetrations with firesto in and smoke stopping systems as manufactured b
P pp� 9 PP� 9 Y Y
Dow Corning, Bio-Shield, Rectorseal Metacaulk, 3M, Hilti, Fyre Putty or equal. Where pipes
PLUMBING 22 00 00 -12
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
D. Insulation shall be in accordance with the following schedule:
Insulation
System Thickness Type
Cold Water 1/2" A
Hot Water 1" B
Horizontal Conductor including
Drain Body and Bend into Vertical 1/2" up to 6"
diameter and 1"
above 6"diameter A
Exposed Cold Water, Hot Water
and Waste Beneath Handicapped
Lavatories and Sinks N/A C
All Piping Systems to be
Heat Traced 1" A
2.03 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Pipe hangers, pipe anchors, auxiliary steel, wood blocking and fixture supports shall be
furnished and set by this Contractor, and he shall be responsible for their proper and permanent
location. This Contractor shall be responsible for all core drilling. All buried hubless cast iron
and hubless high silicon cast iron shall be supported.
B. All piping shall be rigidly supported from the building structure by means of approved hangers
and supports. The hanging and support of all piping system shall conform to the ANSI/MSS-SP
58 AND MSS-SP 69 latest edition. This Contractor shall furnish and install all required auxiliary
steel required for hanging of piping.
C. All horizontal piping shall be hung with approved adjustable malleable iron pipe hangers. Cast
iron soil pipe shall be supported at five (5) foot intervals except where ten (10) foot lengths of
piping are used, then ten (10)foot intervals are acceptable. Hangers shall be provided at each
joint and at each horizontal branch connection. Hangers shall be adequate to maintain
40 alignment, prevent sagging and shall be placed on or immediately adjacent to the coupling.
Horizontal piping shall be braced against horizontal movement with sway bracing. Supports
shall be placed directly beneath horizontal fittings that connect to the stack. Copper tubing 1-
1/2 inch and larger shall be supported at ten (10) foot intervals. Copper tubing 1-1/4 inch and
smaller shall be supported at six(6)foot intervals. Steel piping shall be supported at six(6)foot
intervals for piping 1/2 inch and smaller, at eight (8) foot intervals for 3/4 inch and one inch
piping and at ten(10)foot intervals for piping 1-1/4 inch and larger.
D. Vertical cast iron piping shall be supported at base, at each story height and at ten (10) foot
intervals. Vertical steel piping and copper tubing shall be supported at each story height and at
not more than ten (10)foot intervals.
E. Hangers for piping sizes four (4) inches and smaller shall be Carpenter & Paterson, No. 1A
band type, Grinnell Company, Calco Steel Products Company or equal, black steel with hanger
rods with machine threads. Hangers for piping larger than four (4) inches shall be the
adjustable clevis hanger type, malleable iron with extension rod. Chain, strap, perforated bar or
wire hangers will not be approved. Approved gang hangers may be used in lieu of separate
hangers on pipes running parallel to each other and close together. Where used for
uninsulated copper tubing, all hangers shall be copper plated and chrome plated for chrome
plated piping. Insulation shields shall be provided on all horizontal insulated piping at each
hanger or support location. Insulation shields shall be galvanized steel, 180 degrees arc and
centered on the hanger or support. On diameters 4 inches and smaller, shield shall be 12-inch
PLUMBING 22 00 00 -11
w
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
J. Pipe and fittings shall be in accordance with the following:
1. Exterior Water Service Type A
2. Cold Water Inside Buried Type B
3. Cold Water Type C
4. Hot Water Supply and Recirculation Type C
5. Sanitary,Waste and Vent Inside Buried Type E �.
6. Sanitary,Waste and Vent Within the Building Type D
7. Waste and Vent Smaller than 2 inches Type F
8. Storm Drainage Inside Buried Type E
9. Storm Drainage Within the Building Type D
10. Gas(Elevated Pressure) Type G
11. Water Heater Relief Valve Discharge Type F
12. Storm and Sanitary from Last Building
Cleanout to 10'-0" beyond Foundation Wall Type H
13. Indirect Waste Piping smaller than 1-1/4 inch Type F
14. Indirect Waste Piping 1-1/4 inch and larger Type F
15. Gas Vents Type G .�
K. On 2"and larger water piping, the Victaulic Copper Connection System manufactured to copper
tube size dimensions may be utilized. (Flaring of tube and fittings to IPS dimensions not
allowed). For connections to flanged equipment, utilize Victaulic 641 Flange Adapters. All e.
grooved components shall be the products of one manufacturer. Victaulic coupling style 607
with angular-offset bolt pad design or Engineer Approved Equal. Designs that utilize gripping
teeth, require a gap between housings or require the use of torque wrenches for proper
assembly shall not be allowed. **
2.02 INSULATION
A. Type A: Owens Corning Fiberglas ASJ/SSL-II heavy density resin-bonded inorganic glass, all
service jacket, kraft reinforced foil vapor retarder jacket with two factory-applied pressure
sensitive adhesives for positive closure and vapor sealing. Turn all laps away from normal
view. Circumferential joints shall be sealed with self-sealing butt strips.Valves and fittings shall
be insulated with Zeston Hi-Lo temperature insulation of thickness equal to adjacent piping and
covered with Zeston 2000 PVC fitting covers, U.L. 25/50 fire rated with approved vapor retarder
mastic compatible with the PVC applied around the edges of the adjoining pipe insulation and
on the fitting cover throat overlap seam. Secure with pressure sensitive PVC; Z tape along the
circumferential edges. Extend tape over adjacent insulation with overlap on itself of at least 2
inches.
B. Type B: Owens Corning Fiberglas ASJ heavy duty resin bonded inorganic glass, all service w
jacket with longitudinal laps sealed with staples. Turn all laps away from normal view.
Circumferential joints shall be sealed with self-sealing butt strips. Valves and fittings shall be
insulated with Zeston Hi-Lo temperature insulation of thickness equal to adjacent piping and JW
covered with Zeston 2000 PVC fitted covers, U.L. 25/50 fire rated, secured in place with tacking
and finished with pressure sensitive PVC Z tape along the circumferential edges. Extend tape
over adjacent insulation with overlap on itself of at least 2 inches. All tacks and staples shall be
finished over with white finish.
C. Type C: Truebro Handi Lav-Guard or Brocar Products insulation kit, 3-piece interlocking for"P"
trap assembly and two-piece interlocking for cold water and hot water angle valve assembly.
Kit shall be white flexible vinyl insulation secured with nylon fasteners supplied, foam inserts,
antimicrobial.
W
PLUMBING 22 00 00 -10
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
Northampton,MA
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Type.A. :
Cement lined ductile iron, Class 52, mechanical joint ductile iron fittings conforming to AWWA
Class D. Pipe and fittings shall be 350 psi rated. Pipe and fittings shall be cement lined on the
inside and bituminous coated on the outside. Changes in direction shall have tie rods anchored
to concrete thrust blocks.
B. Type . B. :
Type K hard drawn copper tubing with wrought copper sweat fittings joined with approved silver
solder.
C. Type . C.
Type L hard drawn copper tubing with wrought copper sweat fittings joined with approved 95/5
lead free tin antimony solder.
D. Type. D.
No hub cast iron soil pipe and fittings joined with approved stainless steel mechanical couplings
with neoprene gaskets.
E. Type.E.
Service weight bell and spigot cast iron soil pipe and fittings joined with neoprene resilient
gaskets.
F. Type. F.
Type DWV hard drawn seamless copper tubing with wrought copper drainage fittings joined
with 95/5 lead free tin antimony solder.
G. Type . G.
Schedule 40 black steel pipe with beveled ends with standard weight carbon steel beveled end
fittings joined by welding in accordance with local codes.
H. Type H:
Service weight bell and spigot cast iron soil pipe and fittings joined with oil free oakum and lead.
I. Urinal branch and fixtures wastes shall be of extra heavy or service weight cast iron soil pipe
and fittings with caulked joints, threaded cast iron pipe with cast iron drainage fittings, or iron
size copper or brass pipe with cast brass drainage fittings. Resilient gaskets and no hub
clamps with elastomeric sealing sleeves shall not be used on urinal wastes until an intersecting
point of dilution with other fixtures in the drainage system is attained.
PLUMBING 22 00 00 -9
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
D. Architect and/or his Engineer shall, upon receipt of a second certification of completion, make a
second review and shall notify the Subcontractor in writing through the General Contractor
listing observed deficiencies.
E. When Architect and/or his Engineer finds work complete, he will consider close out submittals.
1.18 REOBSERVATION
A. Should status of completion of Work require additional services by Architect and/or his Engineer w
due to failure of Work to conform with Subcontractor's claims on initial Architect and/or
Engineer's review for Substantial Completion or for Final Completion, Owner will deduct the
amount of Architect and/or his Engineer's compensation for additional services from final „
payment to Subcontractor.
1.19 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Give detailed instructions, prior to the completion of the work, to the responsible personnel
designated by the Architect in the operation and maintenance of all work installed under this
Section. A letter with two(2) copies containing the name of the person or persons to whom the
instructions were given and the dates of the instruction period shall be submitted to the Architect
at the completion of the project.
B. Prepare three (3) sets of manufacturer's catalogs, other similar data including the necessary
photographic equipment cuts, wiring diagrams covering all mechanical equipment and devices
furnished and installed under this Section. These manuals shall provide complete instructions
for the proper operation and use of the equipment together with instructions for lubrication and
periodic maintenance and for trouble shooting. Operating instructions shall be specific for each *"
system and shall include copies of posted specific instructions. This manual shall contain only
that information which specifically applies to this project, and all unrelated material shall be
deleted. During the instruction period this manual shall be used and explained. The material
shall be bound in notebook form and indexed.
C. Provide name, address and telephone number of the manufacturer's representative and service
company for each piece of equipment so that the source of replacement parts and service for
each item of equipment can be readily obtainable.
1.20 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
A. Make all final plumbing connections to all new as well as existing to be relocated equipment not
furnished as part of this Section, such as but not limited to Kitchen Equipment, Laboratory
Equipment or similar items requiring plumbing services. Provide all rough plumbing systems to
these same items of equipment. Refer to the equipment shop drawings and manufacturers' ..
requirements for final locations of connections prior to laying out or installing any work. Furnish
and install all traps with cleanouts and heavy-duty brass loose key angle valve supply stop kits.
Traps and angle valve kits shall include polished chrome-plated escutcheons. All supply stops
shall have threaded or sweat solder inlet. Every faucet shall have a supply stop kit for each
water supply. All exposed traps and supply stop kits shall be polished chrome-plated.
1.21 VIBRATION ISOLATION AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS
A. Installation of Plumbing equipment, accessories and components shall be in accordance with
the Seismic Requirements identified in the Massachusetts State Building Code, Seventh (7"')
Edition. Refer to Part Two(2)of the Specifications for further information.
PLUMBING 22 00 00 -8
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
only upon consent of the Owner and at a time outside normal working hours as he shall
designate.
B. Refer to the overall scheduling of the work of the project. Schedule work to conform to this
W* schedule and install work to not delay nor interfere with the progress of the project.
1.15 CERTIFICATES OF APPROVAL
A. Upon completion of all work, furnish in duplicate certificates of inspections from all inspectors
and authorities having jurisdiction, notarized letters from the manufacturers stating that
authorized factory engineers have inspected and tested the operation of their respective
equipment and found same to be in satisfactory operating condition.
1.16 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
* A. When Subcontractor considers Work under this Section (or designated portion of Work) is
substantially complete, submit written notice through the General Contractor with a list of items
remaining to be completed or corrected.
B. Should Architect and/or his Engineer observe and find Work is not substantially complete, he
will promptly notify Subcontractor through the General Contractor in writing, listing observed
deficiencies.
C. Subcontractor shall remedy deficiencies and send a second written notice of substantial
completion.
D. When Architect and/or his Engineer finds work is substantially complete he will prepare a
Certificate of Substantial Completion in accordance with provisions of General Conditions.
1.17 FINAL COMPLETION
A. When Subcontractor considers Work under this Section is complete, submit through the
General Contractor written certification that:
1. Contract documents have been reviewed.
2. Work has been inspected for compliance with Contract Documents.
3. Work has been completed in accordance with Contract Documents and deficiencies
listed with Certificate of Substantial Completion have been corrected.
4. Equipment and systems have been tested, adjusted and balanced and are fully
operational.
5. Operation of systems has been demonstrated to Owner's personnel.
- 6. Work is complete and ready for Architect's and/or his Engineer's final review.
PR B. Should Architect and/or his Engineer observe and find work incomplete, he will promptly
suspend his review and notify Subcontractor in writing through the General Contractor.
C. Subcontractor shall complete his work, remedy deficiencies and send a second certification of
final completion.
PLUMBING 22 00 00 -7
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
H. A minimum period of two (2) weeks, exclusive of transmittal time, will be required in the
Engineer's office each time shop drawings, layout drawings and catalog data and brochures are
submitted or resubmitted for review. This time period shall be considered by the Contractor
when scheduling his work.
1.12 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT STANDARDS
A. Where materials or equipment are specified by patent proprietary name or name of the
manufacturer, such specification shall be deemed to be used for the purpose of establishing a
standard for that particular item. No equipment or material shall be used unless previously
approved by the Architect.
B. Substitutions may be offered for review provided the material, equipment or process offered for
consideration is equal in every respect to that indicated or specified and only if the term
"approved equal" appears. The request for each substitution must be accompanied by
complete specifications together with drawings or samples to properly appraise the materials,
equipment or process.
C. If a substitution of materials or equipment in whole or in part is made, the Contractor shall bear
the cost of any changes necessitated by any other trade as a result of said substitution.
D. Manufacturer's directions shall be followed in the delivery, storage and installation of any
equipment. Notify the Architect/Engineer, in writing, of any conflict between the Contract
Drawings and the manufacturer's requirements and obtain a written response prior to
proceeding with work. Should the Subcontractor fail to comply with this, he/she shall bear the
costs of any corrections which may be required.
E. The Subcontractor shall furnish and install all equipment, accessories, connections and
incidentals to complete the work under this Section.
F. All plumbing products submitted or utilized shall be Commonwealth of Massachusetts Board of
State Examiners of Plumbers and Gas Fitters approved.
1.13 GUARANTEE
A. Manufacturers shall provide their standard warranties for material and equipment furnished
under this Section. Such warranties shall be in addition to and not in lieu of all liabilities which
the manufacturer and Contractor may have by law or by provisions of the Contract Documents.
B. All materials, equipment and work furnished under this Section shall be guaranteed against all
defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one (1)year commencing with the date of
Substantial Completion. Any failure due to defective material, equipment or workmanship which
may develop shall be corrected at no expense to the Owner, including all damage to areas,
materials and other systems resulting from such failures. .�
C. Upon receipt of notice from the Owner of failure of any part of the systems during the guarantee
period,the affected parts shall be replaced. Any equipment requiring excessive service shall be
considered defective and shall be replaced.
1.14 CONTINUITY OF SERVICE AND SCHEDULING OF WORK
A. Continuity of all services shall be maintained in all areas which will be occupied during the .w
construction period. When an interruption of service becomes necessary, such shall be made
PLUMBING 22 00 00 -6
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
Northampton,MA
B. Protect all equipment and materials from damage from all causes including theft. All materials
and equipment damaged or stolen shall be repaired or replaced with equal material or
equipment.
W C. Protect all equipment, outlets and openings with temporary plugs, caps and covers. Protect
work and materials of other trades from damage that might be caused by work or workmen and
make good damage thus caused.
D. When open flame or spark producing tools such as blow torches, welding equipment, etc., are
required in the process of executing the work, the General Contractor will be notified not less
than twenty-four (24) hours in advance of the time that the work is to begin and the location
W where the work is to be performed.
E. Provide, where necessary, fire protective covering and maintain a constant non-working fire
watch where work is being performed and until it is completed.
F. All exposed piping in parking garages, warehouses and similar type occupancies shall be
permanently protected against physical damage from any type of vehicle.
1.11 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Submit for approval, within thirty (30) days after signing the Contract and prior to submission of
any shop drawings, an itemized list of manufacturers, material, equipment and of
Subcontractors proposed to be used under this Section.
B. After approval of the list, submit for review a minimum of eight (8) sets of detailed shop
drawings. All shop drawings for equipment submitted for review shall include complete
Specifications, including type of materials, operating pressures and temperatures, capacities,
performance and power requirements to determine compliance with Contract Documents. All
data submitted shall be complete for all equipment and shall apply only to this specific project.
C. Regardless of any information included in the shop drawing submitted for review, the
requirements of the Drawings and Specifications shall not be superseded in any way by the
shop drawing review.
D. Each submittal shall be reviewed, stamped and certified prior to submission to the Architect.
Such certification shall be made by the Owner, or Corporate Officer of the Contractor, or by a
person duly authorized by the Owner to sign binding agreements for the Contractor. The
certification shall state that data and details contained on each shop drawing, layout drawing,
catalog data and brochure has been reviewed by the Contractor and that it complies with the
Contract Documents in all respects. Shop drawings, layout drawings, catalog data and
brochures will not be reviewed and will be returned to the Contractor unchecked unless they are
certified.
E. It is intended that the Contractor submit complete and accurate data at the first submission. If
the shop drawing is returned marked "Resubmit", or "Not Accepted", only one (1) additional
submission will be permitted.
RN F. Equipment shall be of proper size for its allotted space. Equipment shall be disassembled as
required, without invalidating the manufacturer's warranty, so that it can be installed through
regular window, door and/or louver openings.
!!P G. The shop drawings and manufacturer's data shall be submitted in a timely manner sufficiently in
advance to give ample time for checking, correcting, resubmitting and rechecking if necessary.
No claim for delay will be granted for failure to comply with this requirement.
PLUMBING 22 00 00 -5
..
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
D. The cost of preparing and reproducing these Drawings will be included as part of this Contract. .�
The HVAC Subcontractor shall prepare the initial Drawings and circulate the Drawings to the
other trades(Fire Protection, Plumbing and Electrical)so they can indicate their work.
E. Coordination Drawings shall not be construed as replacing any Shop Drawings.
F. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall be additionally responsible for preparing drawings indicating
all the buried or underground plumbing systems. Include in these documents all other
underground components such as, but not limited to, underslab drainage systems, foundation
drainage systems,footings,foundation walls, pits,tie beams, electric and telephone duct banks.
1.08 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Purchase and maintain at the job site a complete and separate black line set of prints of the
Contract Drawings on which accurately indicate daily progress by coloring materials and
apparatus as installed. Schedules shall be modified to reflect data consistent with that of the
installed equipment. Clearly show all changes to the work as a result of change orders,
instructions issued by the Architect or conditions encountered in the field. Accurately indicate
the location, size,type and elevation of new utilities and their relationship to existing utilities. .�
B. The marked up and colored in prints will be used as a guide for determining the progress of the
work installed. They shall be inspected weekly and shall be corrected immediately if found
inaccurate or incomplete. Requisitions for payment will not be approved until the Drawings are .,
accurate and up-to-date.
C. At the completion of the work, submit one (1) set of marked up prints for review and comment.
After review and comment, these marked up prints shall be used in the preparation of the
Record Drawings. The Record Drawings shall consist of these prints (corrected) previously
indicated, as well as two (2) CAD disks of the Final Coordination Drawings, corrected on the
basis of the Architect/Engineer's final comments.
D. Obtain and pay for one (1) set of reproducible mylars and CAD disks (AutoCAD Release 2000
minimum or compatible system) applicable to this Section. Make all modifications to these
reproducibles as shown on the marked up prints. Remove all superseded data to show the .,
completed installation.
E. The Record Drawings may be made from the originals of the Contract Drawings. Arrange with
the Architect to have these reproducibles made from the originals.
F. Deliver the completed reproducible Record Drawings and CAD disks properly titled and dated to
the Architect. These Record Drawings shall become the property of the Owner.
1.09 PERMITS, FEES, RULES AND REGULATIONS
A. Give the proper Authorities all requisite notices or information relating to the work under this
Section. Obtain and pay for all fees, licenses, permits and certificates. Comply with the rules
and regulations of all Local, State, and Federal Authorities having jurisdiction, Codes,
Standards, recommended practices and manuals of the National Fire Protection Association,
the Insurance Underwriter and the Public Utilities Companies serving the building. ®'
1.10 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY
A. Be responsible for the care and protection of all work included under this Section until it has
been tested and accepted.
PLUMBING 22 00 00 -4
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
Northampton,MA
B. Prior to performing any new work, uncover, locate and determine the routing, size, material and
direction of slope of all existing systems to be connected to. The invert elevation of the existing
drains and sewers must be established prior to any slab cutting for new systems.
1.06 COOPERATION AND COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES
A. The Contract Drawings are diagrammatic only intending to indicate general routing and location
FF of piping and equipment. The Drawings are not intended to show every offset and accessory
required, nor every structural difficulty that may be encountered.
B. Where requirements of the applicable codes, plans and/or specifications are in conflict,the most
stringent requirement will be included in the Contract. Prior to ordering and/or installing any
portion of the work which appears to be in conflict, the work shall be brought to the
Architect/Engineer's attention for direction as to what is provided.
C. Final location of plumbing fixtures and other pieces of equipment, whether or not furnished by
the Plumbing Subcontractor, requiring plumbing services shall be coordinated with the
Architectural Plans. Additional offsets, fittings, etc., shall be provided as needed to meet this
requirement at no extra cost to the Owner.
D. If discrepancies exist in the scope of work as to what trade provides items, they shall be
reported to the Architect/Engineer prior to signing the Contract. If the discrepancies are not
reported, the Plumbing Subcontractor shall furnish such items as needed for a complete and
operable system.
E. All work shall be installed in cooperation with other trades.
F. Keep fully informed as to the shape, size and position of all openings required for all apparatus
and give information in advance to build openings into the work. Furnish and set in place all
rp sleeves, pockets, supports and incidentals.
G. All distribution systems which require pitch or slope such as plumbing drains, steam and
condensate piping shall have the right of way over those which do not. Confer with other trades
as to the location of pipes, ducts, lights and apparatus and install work to avoid interferences.
H. Prepare and submit for review, coordinated Plans and sections, clearly showing how the work is
e to be installed in relation to the work of other trades. Work that is installed before coordination
with other trades, or that causes interference with the work of other trades shall be changed to
correct condition.
1.07 COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A. Prior to the purchasing and fabrication of materials, each Subcontractor shall prepare
Coordination Drawings for all floors/areas showing the size and location of his/her equipment
and lines.
B. The Coordination Drawings shall be produced on AutoCAD Release 2000 minimum or
compatible system. A disc and one(1) set of reproducible sepias (all-trade composite) shall be
provided to the Architect/Engineer for review.
C. Coordination Drawings shall be 3/8" = 1'-0" scale. Prepare and submit for review, at that scale
or larger, plans and sections.
PLUMBING 22 00 00 -3
.wr
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
8. Painting.
9. Laboratory Equipment.
10. Heating,Ventilating and Air Conditioning.
11, Fire Protection.
12. Electrical.
13. Utilities beyond 10'-0"from the Building.
14. Concrete Basins and Pits.
15. Installation of Access Panels.
16. Furnishing of Toilet Room Accessories.
17. Electric Heat Tracing.
18. Fireproofing and Smoke Stopping.
1.04 CODES, STANDARDS AND REFERENCES
A. All materials and workmanship shall comply with the latest editions of all applicable Codes,
Local and State Ordinances, Industry Standards and Regulations.
B. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall notify the Architect/Engineer of any discrepancies between
the Contract Documents and applicable Codes, Standards, etc.
C. In the event of a conflict,the most stringent requirements shall apply.
D. The following Codes, Standards and References shall be utilized as applicable:
1. State Building Code.
2. National Electric Code(NEC).
3. Environmental Protection Agency(EPA).
4. Department of Environmental Protection (DEP).
5. Local Ordinances, Regulations of the Town of Northampton, MA.
6. National Fire Protection Association(NFPA).
7. Insurance Services Organization (ISO).
8. American National Standards Institute(ANSI).
9. American Society of Mechanical Engineers(ASME).
10. American Society of Testing Materials(ASTM).
11. American Welding Society(AWS).
12. Commercial Standards, U.S. Department of Commerce(CS).
13. Factory Mutual(FM).
14. Industrial Risk Insurers(IRI).
15. National Electrical Manufacturers Association(NEMA).
16. American Gas Association (AGA).
17. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL). A
18. Massachusetts Uniform State Plumbing Code.
19. Massachusetts Fuel Gas Code.
20. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers(ASHRAE).
21. Massachusetts Water Resource Authority(MWRA), if applicable.
22. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry(MSS).
23. Architectural Access Board (AAB).
24. Americans with Disabilities Act(ADA).
1.05 OBTAINING INFORMATION
A. Obtain from the manufacturer the proper method of installation and connection of the equipment
that is to be furnished and installed. Obtain all information that is necessary to facilitate the
work and to complete the project.
PLUMBING 22 00 00 -2
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
F, SECTION 22 00 00 PLUMBING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Include GENERAL CONDITIONS, SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS and
applicable parts of Division 1 as part of this Section.
B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work of this
Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section.
C. Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting or affected by work of this Section.
Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract.
1.02 WORK INCLUDED
A. The work under this Section shall include the furnishing of all material, labor, equipment and
supplies and the performance of all operations to provide a complete working system as
required by the Drawings and details and as specified herein, in general, to include the following
items:
1. Domestic cold water system.
2. Domestic hot water supply and hot water recirculation system.
3. Non-potable cold water system.
4. Sanitary,waste and vent system.
5. Storm water drainage system.
6. A complete natural gas system. This system shall extend and connect to the house
side of the meter provided by the Utility Company.
7. Furnishing of access panels.
8. The permitting, installation or installation supervision of qualified individuals to
assemble and construct combustion venting systems of flue gases shall be under the
control of the licensed plumber or gas fitter.
_ 1.03 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. The following work is not included as work in this Section and is to be performed under other
Sections:
1. All Cutting and Patching.
2. Temporary Water, Heat, Fire Protection and Toilet Facilities.
3. Temporary Light and Power.
4. Excavation and Backfilling.
5. Foundations and Trenching.
6. Concrete Bases for Equipment.
7. Flashing and Caulking.
PLUMBING 22 00 00 -1
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA "
PART3-EXECUTION..........................................................................................................................................34
3.01 POTABLE AND NONPOTABLE WATER SYSTEMS..........................................................................34
3.02 NATURAL GAS SYSTEMS....................................................................................................................35
3.03 SANITARY SYSTEMS............................................................................................................................36
3.04 STORM SYSTEMS.................................................................................................................................36
3.05 INSULATION...........................................................................................................................................36
3.06 CLEANOUTS ..........................................................................................................................................37
3.07 VALVES...................................................................................................................................................37 `.
3.08 FLOOR DRAINS.....................................................................................................................................37
3.09 ROOF DRAINS.......................................................................................................................................37
3.10 WALL HYDRANTS .................................................................................................................................37 ■„
3.11 ACCESS PANELS..................................................................................................................................37
3.12 PLUMBING FIXTURES..........................................................................................................................38
3.13 VENTS THROUGH ROOF.....................................................................................................................38
3.14 ELECTRICAL ROOMS...........................................................................................................................38
PLUMBING 22 00 00 -ii
N
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
OF Northampton,MA
SECTION 22 00 00 PLUMBING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART1 -GENERAL................................................................................................................................................1
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS..................................................................................................................1
1.02 WORK INCLUDED...................................................................................................................................1
1.03 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS..............................................................................................1
1.04 CODES, STANDARDS AND REFERENCES.........................................................................................2
1.05 OBTAINING INFORMATION...................................................................................................................2
1.06 COOPERATION AND COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES.......................................................3
1.07 COORDINATION DRAWINGS................................................................................................................3
1.08 RECORD DRAWINGS.............................................................................................................................4
1.09 PERMITS, FEES, RULES AND REGULATIONS...................................................................................4
1.10 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY.........................................................................................4
1.11 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS.............................:.................................................................................5
1.12 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT STANDARDS........................................................................................6
1.13 GUARANTEE............................................................................................................................................6
1.14 CONTINUITY OF SERVICE AND SCHEDULING OF WORK...............................................................6
1.15 CERTIFICATES OF APPROVAL.............................................................................................................7
1.16 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION................................................................................................................7
1.17 FINAL COMPLETION...............................................................................................................................7
1.18 REOBSERVATION...................................................................................................................................8
1.19 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS.......................................................8
1.20 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS................................................................................................................8
1.21 VIBRATION ISOLATION AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS........................................................................8
PART2-PRODUCTS.............................................................................................................................................9
2.01 PIPE AND FITTINGS................................................................................................................................9
4w2.02 INSULATION...........................................................................................................................................10
2.03 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS................................................................................................................11
2.04 SLEEVES, ESCUTCHEONS AND FIRESTOPPING...........................................................................12
2.05 CLEANOUTS..........................................................................................................................................13
2.06 VALVES...................................................................................................................................................13
2.07 FLOOR DRAINS.....................................................................................................................................14
2.08 ROOF DRAINS.......................................................................................................................................15
2.09 WALL HYDRANTS .................................................................................................................................15
2.10 CIRCULATING PUMPS.........................................................................................................................15
2.11 WATER HEATERS.................................................................................................................................16
2.12 ACCESS PANELS..................................................................................................................................16
2.13 PLUMBING FIXTURES..........................................................................................................................17
2.14 PIPE IDENTIFICATION AND VALVE TAGS ........................................................................................19
2.15 DISINFECTION OF WATER SYSTEMS...............................................................................................19
2.16 TESTS AND APPROVALS ....................................................................................................................20
2.17 WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS..........................................................................................................20
2.18 PRESSURE GAUGES............................................................................................................................21
2.19 THERMOMETERS.................................................................................................................................21
2.20 VIBRATION ISOLATION &SEISMIC RESTRAINTS...........................................................................21
2.21 THERMAL EXPANSION TANKS...........................................................................................................34
PLUMBING 22 00 00 -i
OR
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
1. Nozzle size =2'/" 4.
2. Discharge Coefficient = .90
3. Flow = 1,247 GPM
4. Static Pressure = 106 psi
5. Residual Pressure =91 psi
K. Provide a new hydrant flow test. Use the results of this new hydrant flow test to hydraulically
design the sprinkler systems within the building. +*�
wir
G:\Projects\2009-Boston\AO112-003.00\Specifications\Fire\FP Spec 10-30-09.doc
•ee
wp
on
wr
so
aw
FIRE PROTECTION 21 0000-34
0"
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
the hydraulically most remote 1,500 square feet. Maximum protection area per sprinkler head
shall be 225 square feet for upright and pendent sprinkler heads, and 196 feet for sidewall
sprinkler heads. Hose allowance shall be 250 GPM.
C. Automatic sprinkler systems in mechanical rooms, boiler rooms, electrical/tel data rooms,
storage rooms, janitor's closets, coat closets, IDF Rooms, staging rooms, environmental
chambers room, future clean room, and similar spaces shall be designed to ordinary hazard
occupancy Group I and shall be capable of providing a minimum design density of 0.15 GPM
per square foot over the hydraulically most remote 1,500 square feet. Maximum protection area
per sprinkler head shall be 130 square feet. Hose allowance shall be 250 GPM.
D. Automatic sprinkler systems in machine shops, testing labs, printing/repro room,
manufacturing/assembly areas, stab assembly, and similar spaces shall be designed to ordinary
hazard occupancy Group 2 and shall be capable of providing a minimum design density of 0.20
GPM per square foot over the hydraulically most remote 2,500 square feet. Maximum
protection area per sprinkler head shall be 130 square feet. Hose allowance shall be 500 GPM.
E. Automatic sprinkler systems in paint room, waste storage, and chemical storage shall be
designed to extra hazard occupancy Group 2 and shall be capable of providing a minimum
design density of 0.40 GPM per square foot over the hydraulically most remote 2,500 square
feet. Maximum protection area per sprinkler head shall be 100 square feet. Hose allowance
_ shall be 500 GPM.
F. Automatic sprinkler systems in 1st floor shipping receiving area, finished stores room,
GFM/Depot/Stores room, and 2nd floor Open Storage Room shall be designed to FM Global
requirements for 10 foot high rack storage of uncartoned and unexpanded plastics with 14 foot
high ceilings and shall be capable of operating 25 sprinklers @ 50psi when using a K-factor 11.2
sprinkler head. If a 16.8 K-factor sprinkler head is installed, then the sprinkler system shall be
capable of operating 25 sprinklers @ 22psi. Maximum protection area per sprinkler head shall
be 100 square feet. Hose allowance shall be 500 GPM.
G. Automatic dry pipe sprinkler system for the exterior covered shipping and receiving and secured
shipping shed areas shall be designed in accordance with Ordinary Hazard Group 2 occupancy
requirements and shall be capable of providing a minimum design density of 0.20 GPM per
an square foot over the hydraulically most remote 1,950 square feet. Maximum protection area per
sprinkler head shall be 130 square feet. Hose allowance shall be 250 GPM.
H. Automatic dry pipe sprinkler system for the tower shall be designed in accordance with
Ordinary Hazard Group 1 occupancy requirements and shall be capable of providing a
minimum design density of 0.15 GPM per square foot over the hydraulically most remote
1,950 square feet. Maximum protection area per sprinkler head shall be 130 square feet.
on Hose allowance shall be 250 GPM.
I. Automatic single interlock preaction sprinkler system in Data Center#218 on the 2nd Floor shall
be designed to Ordinary Hazard Group 1 occupancy with a minimum design density of 0.15
'! GPM per square foot over the entire 600 square foot room. Maximum protection area per
sprinkler head shall be 130 square feet. Hose allowance shall be 250 GPM.
J. The following hydrant flow test data has been provided by the Northampton Water Authority and
FM Global. The test was conducted on April 21, 2009, at the hydrants located on site. Results
were as follows:
FIRE PROTECTION 21 0000-33
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
3.03 VALVES
A. All valves shall be located in a manner to allow proper access for service and repair.
B. In no case shall valve stems and handles be installed below the center line of the pipe it serves.
C. Double check valve assembly shall be installed in the horizontal position complete with OS&Y
valves and supervisory switches. This Contractor shall act as the Owner's agent in seeking
approval from the Department of Environmental Protection or its designee. Submit all plans,
specifications and applications required for approval and pay all fees. Approval shall be secured
prior to the purchase and installation of the double check valve assembly.
w
3.04 WATER FLOW SWITCHES
A. All flow switches shall be located in a manner to allow proper access for service and repair. All
switches shall be set with the control box on the top of the pipe. Devices may be mounted on a
horizontal or vertical pipe. On horizontal pipe, they should be installed on the top side of the
pipe where they will be accessible. The units should not be installed within 6 inches of a fitting
which changes the direction of waterflow or within 24 inches of a valve or drain.
3.05 SUPERVISORY SWITCHES
A. All supervisory switches shall be located in a manner to allow proper access for service and
repair.
3.06 PRESSURE SWITCHES
A. All pressure switches shall be located in a manner to allow proper access for service and repair.
3.07 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION ,*
A. Fire Department connections shall be set no less than 1'-6" nor more than 3'-6" above outside
grade.
3.08 ACCESS PANELS
A. Furnish and deliver access panels for access to all concealed parts of the fire protection .
systems that require accessibility for the proper operation and maintenance of the system.
Access panels shall be installed by the appropriate trades.
3.09 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Sprinkler systems shall be hydraulically designed and calculated by the Fire Protection
Contractor. The Fire Protection Contractor shall submit all required hydraulic calculations to
prove the hydraulically most remote areas are being protected. Maintain a minimum of 10 psi ..
cushion between required pressure and available pressure. Comply with all Underwriters' and
code authorities requirements including maximum water flow velocity in the fire protection
system. Fire Protection shop drawings and hydraulic calculations shall bear the seal of a
Registered Fire Protection Professional Engineer in the Commonwealth of Massachusetts.
B. Automatic sprinkler systems in toilets/shower rooms, corridors, vestibules, lobbies,
reception/waiting areas, cafe, offices, open office areas, conference rooms, fitness rooms,
shell spaces (future office areas), and similar spaces shall be designed to light hazard
occupancy shall be designed with a minimum design density of 0.10 GPM per square foot over
FIRE PROTECTION 21 0000-32
on
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
s Northampton, MA
TABLE B
SEISMIC BRACING TABLE
ON CENTER SPACING(Max) WITHIN EACH CHANGE
go EQUIPMENT OF DIRECTION
(LARGER OF. . .)
TRANSVERSE I LONGITUDINAL
PIPE(Threaded, Welded, Soldered or Grooved)
To 16" 40 Feet 80 Feet 10 Feet or 15 Diameters
2.15 TESTS AND APPROVALS
A. Upon completion and prior to acceptance of the installation and before any piping is concealed,
the Fire Protection Contractor shall subject the system to tests required by the latest versions of
NFPA 13, and the Insurance Underwriters and shall arrange for approval of installation. A
certificate of approval and acceptance by authorities having jurisdiction shall be submitted to the
Architect. All tests shall be witnessed by the Architect and Underwriters'Representative.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.01 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS
A. All piping shall be cut accurately to measurements obtained at the site of the system and shall
be installed without springing or forcing. All piping shall be protected against mechanical injury
in manner satisfactory to authorities having jurisdiction. Provide UUFM valved pressure gauge
assemblies at the top of all risers. Assembly shall include needle shutoff valve and snubber.
B. All piping shall be located to avoid conflict with structure, all other trades and as required to
maintain the maximum possible headroom. All service pipes, fittings and valves shall be kept at
sufficient distance from other work to permit not less than 1/2 inch from finished coverings and
such other work and not less than 1/2 inch between finished coverings on the different services.
Provide swing joint assembly to sprinkler heads to be located in the center of ceiling tiles.
C. Pipe shall be run parallel and graded evenly to draining points. Provide a drain valve at each
low point in piping so that all parts of the sprinkler system can be drawn off.
D. Piping shall not be installed in or through Electrical Rooms, Electrical Closets, Transformer
Rooms, Telephone Rooms, Elevator Machine Rooms, or stairwells unless the piping is intended
to serve these rooms. No piping shall be installed over electrical panels.
3.02 SPRINKLER HEADS
A. The Fabrication Drawings are to be prepared by the Fire Protection Contractor and shall indicate
OR all light fixtures, ductwork, smoke or heat detectors, speakers, diffusers and ceiling tracks in
relation to the proposed location of sprinkler heads. Provide additional sprinkler heads over and
above the code minimums as required to obtain symmetrical ceiling layouts.
FIRE PROTECTION 21 0000-31
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA ■*
(b) Pipe risers through cored holes require a riser clamp at each
floor level on top of the slab attached in a seismically
approved manner for vertical restraint.
(c) Pipe in pipe shafts require structural steel attached in a
seismically approved manner at each floor level and a riser
clamp at each floor level on top of, and fastened to the
structural steel. The riser clamp and structural steel must be
capable of withstanding all thermal, static and seismic loads.
(7) All floor or wall mounted equipment and tanks shall use RESTRAINT .w
TYPE III or V.
(8) Where base anchoring of equipment is insufficient to resist seismic
forces, restraint TYPE III shall be located above the units center of
gravity to suitably resist"G"forces specified.
(a) Vertically mounted tanks may require this additional restraint.
(9) A rigid piping system shall not be braced to dissimilar parts of a
building or two dissimilar building systems that may respond
in a different mode during an earthquake. Examples: Wall and roof;
solid concrete wall and a metal deck with lightweight concrete fill or
pipes crossing a building expansion joint.
4. Exclusions For Seismic Restraints On Life Safety Equipment
a. Piping
(1) Fire protection standpipe, risers, mains and branches less than 2
inches diameter.
G. Inspection
.e
1. Upon completion of installation of all vibration isolation and seismic restraint devices,
the owner may elect to contract and outside consultant at the owner's expense to
review the installation. Any deficiencies in the installation will be corrected
immediately at the contractor's expense.
FIRE PROTECTION 21 0000-30
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A.Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
F. Installation
1. Seismic restraint systems must be installed in strict accordance with the
manufacturer's written instructions and all submittal data.
2. Equipment Installation
a. Housekeeping pads for equipment in this section must be properly doweled or
bolted, using wedge type expansion bolted to the structure to meet the
acceleration criteria. Anchor equipment or isolators to housekeeping pads, see
RELATED WORK.
3. Seismic Restraints
no a. Installation
(1) All floor mounted equipment shall be snubbed, anchored, bolted or
welded to the structure to comply with the required acceleration.
�s Calculations that determine that equipment movement may be less
than the operating clearance of snubbers (restraints) do not preclude
the need for snubbers. All equipment must be positively attached to
the structure.
(2) All suspended equipment shall be two or four point independently
braced with TYPE III restraints. Rod bracing shall be installed as per
approved submittals and shop drawings. Equipment less than 50 lbs.
Is excluded.
(3) All horizontally suspended pipe shall use RESTRAINT TYPE III.
Spacing of seismic bracing shall be as per TABLE B at the end of this
section.
(4) For all trapeze supported piping the individual pipes must be
transversely and vertically restrained to the trapeze support at the
designated restraint locations.
(5) For overhead supported equipment, over stress of the building
structure must not occur. Bracing may occur from:
(a) Flanges of structural beams.
(b) Upper truss chords in bar joists.
(c) Cast in place inserts or drilled and shielded inserts in concrete
structures.
(6) Pipe Risers
(a) Where pipes pass through cored holes, core diameters to be
a maximum of 2 inches larger than pipe O.D., including
insulation. Cored holes must be packed with resilient material
or fire stop as specified in other sections of this specification
and/or state and local codes. No additional horizontal seismic
bracing is required at these locations.
FIRE PROTECTION 21 0000-29
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
a. All seismic restraint devices described in this section shall be the product of a
single manufacturer. Mason Industries is the base manufacturer of these
specifications; products of other manufacturers are acceptable provided their
systems strictly comply with intent, structural design and performance of the
Base Manufacturer.
2. Seismic Restraint Types
a. All seismic restraint devices shall be capable of accepting, without failure, the
"G" forces as determined by the seismic certification and calculations as
described in the "SUBMITTAL DATA REQUIREMENTS" section of these
specifications.
b. All seismic restraint devices
(1) Shall maintain the equipment in a captive position.
(2) Shall have provisions for bolting and/or welding to the structure.
3. Seismic Restraint Types *�
a. TYPE I: Not Used
b. TYPE II: Not Used
C. TYPE III: Restraints for suspended systems
(1) Multiple 7 x 19 strand galvanized cable rope.
Mason Industries Type SCB
(2) Structural steel strut type with approved fastening devices to equipment
and structure.
Mason Industries Type SSB
(3) Steel angles (by contractor) shall be provided to prevent rod bending of s
hung equipment where indicated by the Seismic Restraint vendor's
submittals. Steel angles shall be attached to the rods with a minimum of
three ductile iron clamps at each restraint location. Welding of support
rods to angles is not acceptable. Rod clamp assemblies shall have
Anchorage Preapproval"R"number from California OSHPD.
Mason Ind. Model"SRC".
(4) Pipe clevis cross braces are required at all restraint locations. They shall
be special purpose preformed channels deep enough to be held in place
by bolts passing over the clevis cross bolt. Clevis cross braces shall
have Anchorage Preapproval"R"number from California OSHPD. w�
Mason Ind. Model"CCB".
d. TYPE IV: Not Used
e. TYPE V: Rigid attachment to structure utilizing wedge type expansion anchors
for bolting and steel plates, either cast-in or anchored with wedge type
expansion bolts, for welding. Powder shots are not acceptable. Concrete
anchor bolt spacing shall be in accordance with manufacturer's published
standards.
FIRE PROTECTION 21 0000-28
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
d. An in force, $500,000.00 coverage limit seismic design Errors and Omissions
insurance certificate must accompany submittals. Manufacturer's product
liability insurance certificates are not acceptable.
C. Manufacturer's Responsibility
1. Manufacturer of seismic control equipment shall have the following responsibilities:
a. Determine seismic restraint sizes and locations.
b. Provide equipment seismic restraints as specified.
C. Provide installation instructions, drawings and field supervision to insure proper
installation and performance of systems.
D. Related Work
1. Housekeeping Pads
a. Housekeeping pad attachment shall be by the project structural engineer.
Material and labor required for attachment and construction shall be by the
Concrete section contractor.
b. Housekeeping pads shall be coordinated with the Seismic Restraint vendor
and sized to provide a minimum edge distance of 10 bolt diameters of
clearance all around the outermost anchor bolt to allow for the use of full
anchor ratings.
2. Supplementary Support Steel
a. Contractor shall supply supplementary support steel and connections for all
equipment and as required or specified.
3. Attachments
a. Contractor shall provide restraint attachment plates cast into housekeeping
pads, concrete inserts, double sided beam clamps, etc. in accordance with the
requirements of the Seismic Restraint vendor.
TABLE A
"G" FORCES FOR VARIOUS CONDITIONS
(SEISMIC ZONE 2 - AV>0.1 <0.2)
PIPE RIGIDLY MOUNTED ALL LIFE SAFETY
EQUIPMENT EQUIPMENT
25 .40 .60
E. Materials
1. Devices
FIRE PROTECTION 21 0000-27
go
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA am
a. Restraint(s)applied to limit motion perpendicular or angular to the centerline of am
the pipe, duct, or conduit.
8. Longitudinal Bracing
..
a. Restraint(s) applied to limit motion along the centerline of the pipe, duct,
conduit etc.
B. Submittal Data Requirements WN
1. Submittals
a. Catalog cuts or data sheets on specific restraints to be utilized detailing so
compliance with the specification. Reference "TYPE" as per "PRODUCTS"
section of this specification.
go
b. An itemized list of all equipment. Detailed schedules showing seismic
restraints proposed for each piece of equipment, referencing material and
seismic calculation drawing numbers.
so
2. Shop Drawings
a. When walls and slabs are used as seismic restraint locations, details of .�
acceptable methods must be included.
b. Provide specific details of seismic restraints and anchors; include number, size
and locations for each piece of equipment.
C. Coordinated or contract drawings shall be marked-up with the specific
locations and types of restraints shown for all pipe. Rod bracing at various
installation angles and assigned load at each restraint location shall be clearly
delineated. Any and all tributary loads, Eg: Fire Protection pipe runouts shall
be considered for proper restraint sizing.
d. For ceiling suspended equipment provide minimum/maximum installation .�
angle allowed for restraint system as well as braced and unbraced rod lengths
at each allowable installation condition.
3. Seismic Certification and Analysis
a. Seismic restraint calculations must be provided for all connections of
equipment to the structure. Performance of all products (such as; strut, cable,
anchors, clips, etc.) associated with restraints must be supported with
manufacturer's data sheets or certified calculations.
b. Seismic restraint calculations must be based on the acceleration criteria shown .w
in Table A acting through the equipment's center of gravity.
C. Certification of calculations to support seismic restraint designs must be ••
stamped by a registered professional engineer in Massachusetts.
(1) Analysis must indicate calculated dead loads, derived loads and
materials utilized for connections to equipment and structure. Analysis
must detail anchoring methods, bolt diameter, embedment and/or weld
length.
FIRE PROTECTION 21 0000-26
w�
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
1. Introduce smoke into the detector assembly to provide a basic Go / No-Go functional
test.
2. Verify that transport time from farthest sampling port does not exceed the local code
requirements. Refer to NFPA 72 for transport time requirements.
3. Activate the appropriate Fire Alarm zones and advise all concerned that the system is
fully operational. Fill out the logbook and commissioning report accordingly.
2.14 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS
A. General
1. This section provides Seismic Control for the"equipment"as listed below.
2. It is the intent of this specification to provide restraint of non-structural building
components. Restraint systems are intended to withstand the stipulated seismic
accelerations applied through the component's center of gravity.
ex
3. The work in this section includes the following:
a. Seismic restraints for equipment.
b. Certification of seismic restraint designs and installation supervision.
4. Definitions
a. The term EQUIPMENT will be used throughout this specification and it
includes ALL non-structural components within the facility and/or serving this
+ facility, such as equipment located in outbuildings or outside of the main
structure on grade within five feet of the foundation wall. Equipment buried
underground is excluded but entry of services through the foundation walls is
included. Equipment referred to below is a partial list of equipment for
" ' reference. (Equipment not listed are still included in this specification)
Electrical Panels Piping Pumps(All types) Tanks(All types)
5. Life safety systems defined
a. All systems involved with fire protection including sprinkler piping, fire pumps,
go jockey pumps, fire pump control panels, service water supply piping, water
tanks.
b. All systems involved with and/or connected to emergency power supply
including all circuits to fire protection, systems.
6. Positive Attachment
a. Positive attachment is defined as a support location with a cast-in or wedge
type expansion anchor, a double sided beam clamp, a welded or through
bolted connection to the structure.
7. Transverse Bracing
FIRE PROTECTION 21 0000-25
wA
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
P. Air Sampling Pipe Network Calculations ..
1. Pre-engineered pipe work setups are provided in the VESDA LaserFOCUS VLF-500
Product Guide. For specific performance requirements that fall outside the pre- *�+
engineered designs, a sampling pipe aspiration-modeling program such as ASPIRE2
shall provide air sampling pipe network calculations. Pipe calculations shall be supplied
with the proposed pipe layout design to indicate the following performance criteria.
ws
2. Transport Time
a. The manufacturer's recommended transport time (i.e. the time taken by smoke
sampled to reach the detector)for the least favorable sampling point is less than
60 seconds for open hole sampling and less than 90 seconds for capillary tubes.
b. Local codes and standards may also apply. For example:
• NFPA 72 120 Seconds
The maximum transport time must never exceed the local codes.
Q. Commissioning Tests
asp
1. The contractor shall allow for the manufacturer's representative to attend
commissioning of the entire installation in the presence of the owner and/or its
representative.
2. The Contractor shall provide all necessary instrumentation, equipment, materials and
labor.
3. The Contractor shall record all tests and system calibrations and a copy of these results
shall be retained on site in the System Log Book.
R. System Checks
1. Visually check all pipes to ensure that all joints, fittings, bends, sampling points, etc.,
comply with the Specification.
2. Check the system to ensure the following features are operational and programmed in
accordance with the specification.
a. Alarm threshold levels
b. Detector address
C. Time and date
d. Time delays
e. Air flow fault thresholds
f. External button operable(Reset/Disable)
g. Units set to U.S./S.I.
h. Referencing �..
3. Check to ensure that all ancillary warning devices operate as specified.
4. Check interconnection with Fire Alarm Control Panel to ensure correct operation.
S. Tests
FIRE PROTECTION 21 0000-24
.s.
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
C. All joints in the sampling pipe must be air tight and made by using solvent
cement, except at entry to the detector.
d. The pipe shall be identified as Air Sampling/Aspirating Smoke Detector Pipe (or
similar wording) along its entire length at regular intervals not exceeding the
manufacturers recommendation or that of local codes and standards.
e. All pipes should be supported at not less than 5 ft centers, or at a distance
described in local codes and standards.
f. The far end of each trunk or branch pipe shall be fitted with an end cap (no
sampling hole) and made air-tight by using solvent cement. Use of an end vent
will be dependent on pre-engineered pipe design or ASPIRE2 calculations.
2. Sampling Points
a. Sampling holes shall not be separated by more than the maximum distance
allowed for conventional point detectors as specified in the local codes and
* ►► standards. Intervals may vary according to calculations. For NFPA 72 the
maximum allowable distance is 30 ft.
b. Each sampling point port shall be identified in accordance with Codes or
Standards.
C. Consideration shall be given to the manufacturer's recommendations and
standards in relation to the number of sampling points and the distance of the
sampling points from the ceiling or roof structure and forced ventilation systems.
d. Sample port size shall be as specified by pre-engineered design requirements or
by ASPIRE2 calculations for custom sample pipe networks.
N. The Detection system
1. The contractor shall install the system in accordance with the manufacturer's System
Design Manual.
O. The Capillary Sampling Network
1. The sampling pipe shall be installed above the ceiling, and capillary-sampling points
shall be installed on the ceiling and connected by means of a capillary tube.
2. The typical internal diameter of the capillary tube shall be 3/8", the maximum length of
the capillary tube shall be 26 ft unless the manufacturer in consultation with the engineer
have specified otherwise.
3. The capillary tube shall terminate at a ceiling sampling point specifically designed and
approved by the manufacturer. The performance characteristics of the sampling points
shall be taken into account during the system design.
FIRE PROTECTION 21 0000-23
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
2. Initial Detection Alarm Settings
a. Initial settings for the alarm levels shall be determined by the requirements of the
fire zone. •
b. Default settings of the unit shall be:
• Alarm Level 1 (Alert) 0.025%obs/ft
• Alarm Level 2(Action) 0.0448%obs/ft
• Alarm Level 3(Fire 1) 0.0625%obs/ft
3. Initial(factory default)Alarm Delay Thresholds
a. Initial(factory default)settings for the alarm delay threshold shall be:
• Alarm Level 1 (Alert) 10 seconds
• Alarm Level 2(Action) 10 seconds
• Alarm Level 3(Fire 1) 10 seconds ,M
• Fault Alarm 5 seconds
4. Fault Alarms
IM
a. The detector fault relay shall be connected to the appropriate alarm zone on the
Fire Alarm Control Panel in such a way that a detector fault would register a fault
condition on the FACP. The fault relay shall also be connected to the
appropriate control system.
b. Check local Codes, Standards or Regulations to determine whether compliance
with this set-up is required.
5 Power Supply and Batteries
a. The system shall be powered from a regulated supply of nominally 24V DC. The
battery charger and battery shall comply with the relevant Codes and Standards.
b. Local Power Supply Standards that may apply include:
C. UL 1481 Listed -provided the power supply and standby batteries have been
appropriately sized/rated to accommodate the system's power requirements.
d. US Telecommunication Central Office Power Supply- the system shall operate
on negative 48 VDC (provided continuously from the telephone central office
power source)converted to 24VDC.
.p
M. Sampling Pipe Design
1. Sampling Pipe
a. The sampling pipe shall be smooth bore. Normally, pipe with an outside
diameter of OD 1.05"and internal diameter of W should be used.
b. The pipe material shall be UL 1887 Plenum rated CPVC VESDA Pipe and
otherwise be suitable for the environment in which it is installed, or of material as
required by the Specifying Body.
FIRE PROTECTION 21 0000-22
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
J. Displays
1. The detector will be provided with LED indicators.
2. Each Detector shall provide the following features at a minimum:
a. Alert, Alarm, Fire 1 and Fire 2 corresponding to the alarm thresholds of the
detector
b. Circular Smoke Dial display to represent the level of smoke present in protected
space
C. Fault indicator
d. Power indicator
e. Disabled indicator
f. Buttons supporting the following features shall be accessible to authorized
personnel:
(1) Reset—(press and release) un-latches all latched alarm and faults.
(2) Disable — (press and release) disables the fire relay outputs from
actuating and indicates a fault.
AM
(3) Test—(press and release)simulates a Fire 1 condition.
K. Digital Communication Port
1. An RS 232 compatible serial port will be provided on the detector for configuration,
status monitoring, command input, event log extraction and software upgrades. It shall
10 comply with EIA RS232 Protocol.
L. Application
1. Detection Alarm Levels
a. The standard laser based air sampling detection system is supplied with two
alarm outputs(Alert and Fire 1). For four-relay alarm levels use the optional relay
!! interface card.
b. The standard alarm outputs may be used as follows:
(1) Alert (Alarm Level 1) -activate a visual and audible alarm in the fire risk
area.
(2) Fire 1 (Alarm Level 3) - activate an alarm condition in the Fire Alarm
Control Panel to call the Fire Dept. and activate all warning systems.
FIRE PROTECTION 21 0000-21
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
H. Manufactured Units
1. The VESDA LaserFOCUS air sampling smoke detection system is available in the
following configurations:
Part Number Description
VLF-500-00 LaserFOCUS Detector
I. Detector Assembly
1. The detector, filter, aspirator and relay outputs shall be housed in an enclosure and
shall be arranged in such a way that air is drawn from the fire risk area and a sample of
air is passed through the dual stage filter and detector by the aspirator.
2. The detector shall be laser-based type and shall have an obscuration sensitivity range
of 0.008—6.25%obs/ft.
3. The detector shall have four independent field programmable smoke alarm thresholds
across its sensitivity range with adjustable time delays for each threshold between 0 -
60 seconds.
4. The detector shall also incorporate the facility to transmit a fault either via a relay or via a
VESDAnet card as an option.
5. The detector shall have a single pipe inlet that must contain an ultrasonic flow sensor.
High flow fault (urgent and non-urgent) and low flow fault (urgent and non-urgent) can
be reported.
6. The filter must be a two-stage disposable filter cartridge.The first stage shall be capable ,
of filtering particles in excess of 20 microns from the air sample. The second stage shall
be ultra-fine, removing more than 99%of contaminant particles of 0.3 microns or larger,
to provide a clean air barrier around the detector's optics to prevent contamination and
increase service life. ►
7. The aspirator shall be a purpose-designed aspirator assembly.
8. VESDA LaserFOCUS (VLF-500) when using pre-engineered sampling pipe networks
shall be capable of supporting a single pipe run of 150 ft., or two pipe runs of 90 ft.,with
a transport time per NFPA 72 or as appropriate local codes dictate. Custom sampling
pipe network designs shall be supported using ASPIRE2 calculation software.
9. The assembly must contain relays for basic alarm and fault conditions. The relays shall
be software programmable (latching or non-latching). The relays must be rated at 2 A
at 30 VDC. Remote relays shall be offered as an option with a VESDAnet Interface
card and either configured to replicate those on the detector or programmed differently.
10. The assembly shall have built-in event and smoke logging. It shall have separate event .A
log storage for smoke levels, alarm conditions, operator actions and faults. The date
and time of each event shall be recorded. Each detector (zone) shall be capable of
storing up to 18,000 events.
FIRE PROTECTION 21 0000-20
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
a. Both light scattering and particle counting shall be utilized in this device as
follows:
(1) The laser detection chamber shall be of the mass light scattering type
and capable of detecting a wide range of smoke particle types of varying
size.A particle counting method shall be employed for the purposes of:
• Preventing large particles from affecting the true smoke
reading.
• Monitoring contamination of the filter (dust & dirt etc.) to
automatically notify when maintenance is required.
Note: The particle counting circuitry shall not be used for the purpose of smoke
density measurement.
(2) The laser detection chamber shall incorporate a separate secondary
clean air feed from the filter to provide clean air barriers across critical
detector optics to eliminate internal detector contamination.
(3) The detector shall not use adaptive algorithms to adjust the sensitivity
from that set during commissioning. A learning tool shall be provided to
ensure the best selection of appropriate alarm thresholds during the
commissioning process.
3 Equipment Supplier
a. The equipment supplier shall be authorized and trained by the manufacturer to
calculate, design, install, test and maintain the air sampling system and shall be
` able to produce a certificate stating such on request.
G Manufacturer
1. Air Sampling Smoke Detection System:Acceptable Manufacturer:
Regional Offices:
THE AMERICAS
Telephone: 1 781 740 2223
Fax: 1 781 740 4433
Toll Free(in the US)800 229 4434
Website: www.visionusa.com/vesda
FIRE PROTECTION 21 0000- 19
WX
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
i. The detector may also be configured by a PC and allow programming of four „
smoke threshold alarm levels, time delays, faults including airflow, detector,
power and filter as well as an indication of the urgency of the fault and three relay
outputs for remote indication of alarm and fault.
j. The detector shall consist of an air sampling pipe network to transport air to the
detection system and support pre-engineered designs. Complex designs are
supported by calculations from a computer-based design-modeling tool.
k. The detector shall incorporate an ultrasonic flow sensor in the pipe inlet port for
airflow monitoring purposes.
2. Performance Requirements
a. The VESDA LaserFOCUS (VLF-500) shall be NRTL listed and approved to
cover up to 5,000 f:2.
b. The detector shall be approved to provide very early smoke detection and
provide up to four output levels corresponding to Alert, Action, Fire 1 (and Fire 2,
not used). The Alert, Action, Fire 1 thresholds shall be programmable and able
to be set at sensitivities ranging from 0.008 to 6.25%obs/ft.
C. The detector shall provide fault indication on the unit using the Instant Fault
Finder function.
d. The detector shall be self-monitoring for filter contamination.
e. The detector shall provide staged airflow faults via the use of an ultrasonic flow
sensor in the pipe inlet port.
E. Submittals
1. Product data and site drawings shall be submitted and shall include pipe layout,
operational calculations and performance criteria. „
A copy of the manufacturer's product manual shall be supplied to customer upon
completion of the installation.
System commissioning data shall be supplied (in a format recommended by the
manufacturer and per the instructions provided by the manufacturer) within 30 days of
completion of the installation.
F. Quality Assurance
1. Manufacturer Qualifications
a. The manufacturer shall have a minimum of 15 years production experience in the
manufacture and design of high sensitivity air sampling smoke detection
systems.
b. The manufacturer shall be certified as meeting ISO 9001:2000 for manufacturing.
2. Technology
FIRE PROTECTION 21 0000- 18
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
P1 a. UL(Underwriters Laboratories Inc), USA
b. ULC (Underwriters Laboratories Canada), Canada
�w
C. FM Global(Factory Mutual), and FM approved for Hazardous Locations,
d. Class 1, Div.2, GroupsA,B,C,D(3020906), USA
!" e. CSFM (California State Fire Marshall, USA)
C. Codes, Standards or Regulations
1. The LaserFOCUS smoke detector shall be installed to comply with one or more of the
following codes or standards:
a. NFPA Standards
b. NEC Standard
C. Local codes and standards
D. System Description
PP 1. Design Requirements
a. The detector shall consist of a highly sensitive laser based smoke detector, an
aspirator,and a dual-stage filter cartridge.
b. The detector shall have control switches for Reset, Disable, Test and restricted
access switches for Alarm Setup and Flow Setup.
C. The detector shall have individual illuminated indicators for:
(1) Four alarm levels(Alert,Action, Fire1 (& Fire 2, not used).
(2) Fault, Power&Disabled.
(3) Alarm Setup and Flow Setup.
d. The detector shall have a front-panel, 10 segment, illuminated, yellow-colored
circular smoke dial for the purpose of indicating current smoke level and detector
status.
e. The detector shall have individual relay outputs for Fault,Action and Fire 1
f. The detector shall have an RS232-compatible serial control port for the purpose
of configuration, control, status monitoring, event log extraction and upgrade.
g. The detector shall provide for the addition of one interface card.
h. The detector shall provide a general-purpose input to allow either: Reset,
Disable, Disable & Reset, Standby & Reset or External (external equipment
trigger).
FIRE PROTECTION 21 00 00- 17
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
A. Furnish access panels for access to all concealed parts of the fire protection systems that
require accessibility for the proper operation and maintenance of the system.
B. Size shall be sufficient for the purpose, but no less than 12 inches by 18 inches. Particular
attention shall be exercised in the selection of doors for masonry walls in order that frame sizes
used will match the courses of brick or block.
C. Access doors shall be prime coated of rust inhibitive paint, continuous hinge and manufactured
by Inland Steel Products Company "Milcor, Miami-Carey or Walsh-Hannon-Gladwin, "®
Incorporated"Way Loctor". Type shall be based upon"Milcor"as follows:
1. Suspended Drywall Ceilings: Style ATR with 16 gauge frame, 18 gauge panel and flush
screwdriver operated cam locks.
2. Plastered Walls and Ceilings: Style K with 16 gauge frame, 14 gauge panel and flush
screwdriver operated cam locks. ■u
3. Masonry Non-Rated Walls: Style M with 16 gauge frame, 14 gauge panel and flush
screwdriver operated cam locks.
4. Masonry Fire Rated Walls: Fire rated with UL 1-1/2 hour"B" rating, 16 gauge frame, 20
gauge sandwich type insulated panel, self-latching lock having interior release
mechanism and key operated cylinder lock keyed as required to suit requirements of the
Architect.
5. Non-Rated Drywall Walls: Style DW with 16 gauge frame, 14 gauge panel and flush
screwdriver operated cam locks.
D. Point out to the Ceiling Subcontractor exactly which tile units are to be marked with a colored
button to indicate equipment above.
so
2.13 VESDA AIR SAMPLING SMOKE DETECTION
A. General .w
1. The VESDA LaserFOCUS, very early warning air sampling smoke detector, shall be
installed in the 2nd Floor Anechoic Chamber.
..
The system consists of highly sensitive laser based smoke detector using aspirated
pipe inlet, internal flow monitoring, smoke detection and a facility for exhaust pipe
connection. Reset, disable, test and fault determination functions will be available via
the field service access door. System configuration will be provided through AutoLearn
Smoke and Flow functions, also available via the field service access door.
The system shall support Pre-Engineered sampling pipe network designs with verified
calculations in addition to custom sampling pipe network designs using a computer
based design modeling tool. Sampling pipe material shall be UL 1887 approved for use
in air sampling smoke detection systems.
B. Approvals
1. The Very Early Smoke Detection System must be of a type submitted to, tested,
approved, and/or listed by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) as
follows:
06
FIRE PROTECTION 21 0000- 16
MM
w.
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
J. Install dry concealed pendent sprinklers in the entry vestibule 131. Install dry recessed
pendent sprinklers with chrome escutcheons in all remaining vestibules.
K. Do not provide sprinkler protection for the tops of elevator shafts, elevator machine rooms,
or elevator pits.
2.10 SPARE HEADS
A. Spare sprinkler heads shall be provided for each type and temperature rating of sprinkler head
installed. Spare heads along with proper sprinkler head wrenches shall be packed in a metal
container and located as directed by the Owner. Spare sprinkler heads shall be supplied in
proportion to the style and temperature rating of the heads installed.
Up to 300 heads Not less than 6 of each type
300 to 1000 heads Not less than 12 of each type
More than 1000 heads Not less than 24 of each type
2.11 PIPE IDENTIFICATION AND VALVE TAGS
A. All piping, except that piping which is within inaccessible chases, shall be identified with semi-
- rigid plastic identification markers equal to Seton Setmark pipe markers. Direction of flow
arrows are to be included on each marker. Each marker background shall be appropriately
color coded with a clearly printed legend to identify the contents of the pipe in conformance with
the"Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems' (ANSI A13.1-1981). Setmark snap-around
markers shall be used for overall diameters up to six(6) inches and strap-around markers shall
be used above six(6) inch overall diameter. Markers shall be located adjacent to each valve, at
w each branch, at each cap for future, at each riser take off, at each pipe passage through wall, at
each pipe passage through floors, at each pipe passage to underground and on all vertical and
horizontal piping at 20 foot intervals maximum.
B. All valves shall be designated by distinguishing numbers and letters carefully coordinated with a
valve chart. Valve tags shall be 19 gauge polished brass, 1-1/2 inch diameter with stamped
black filled letters similar to Seton Style No.4522, or approved equal. Lettering shall be 1/4 inch
high for type service and 1/2 inch for valve number. Tag shall be attached to valves with
approved brass "S" hooks, or brass jack chain. Whenever a valve is above a hung ceiling, the
valve tag shall be located immediately above the hung ceiling.
C. Furnish a minimum of two typed valve lists to be framed under glass or Plexiglas. Each chart
shall be enclosed in an approved .015 inch thick plastic closure for permanent protection. Valve
numbers shall correspond to those indicated on the Record Drawings and on the printed valve
lists. The printed list shall include the valve number, location and purpose of each valve. It shall
state other necessary information such as the required opening or closing of another valve when
one valve is to be opened or closed. Printed frame valve lists shall be displayed in each
Mechanical Room or in a location designated by the Owner.
D. Equipment nameplates shall be 3/4 inch by 2-1/2 inch long .02 inch aluminum with a black
enamel background with engraved natural aluminum letters similar to Seton Style 2065-20.
Nameplate shall have pressure sensitive taped backing.
E. Provide a brass wall plaque, minimum .020 inch thickness, secured to the exterior wall just
above the grade line for all service entrances and exits that are buried. Sample of the label shall
be FIRE SERVICE BELOW.
2.12 ACCESS PANELS
FIRE PROTECTION 21 0000- 15
am
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
C. Auxiliary drain connections shall be provided when a change in piping direction prevents .�
drainage of sections of branch lines or mains through the main drain valve. The drain shall
consist of a valve not smaller than 3/4 inch size and plug, at least one of which shall be brass.
D. Dry sprinkler system auxiliary drains - Where the capacity of trapped sections of piping is less
than 5 gallons, an auxiliary drain consisting of not less than a '/2' valve and plug shall be
provided. Where the capacity of trapped sections of piping is more than 5 gallons, a drain
consisting of two 1"valves and a 2"by 12"condensate nipple(drum drip)shall be provided.
2.08 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION
A. New Fire Department connection shall be similar to Potter Roemer Series 5795-4"flush mount
Storz style inlet body with hard coated aluminum with Storz on one end and female national pipe
thread on the other. Chrome plate lettered with the approved signage. Provide Potter Roemer
Series 5799 blind cap and chain. The connection's lettering and threads shall match Local Fire
Department requirements. Lettering shall be minimum 1" white lettering on red background. .�
Confirm finish with Architect prior to ordering.
2.09 SPRINKLER HEADS
A. Sprinkler heads shall be UL listed, FM Approved, and of the automatic closed type and of the
temperature rating required. Sprinkler heads shall be located in the center of ceiling tiles. When
the ceiling tile is divided into sections by grooved depressions, the sprinkler head shall be
located in the center of one of the panels. Sprinklers shall also be aligned with other ceiling
mounted architectural features, such as lighting. Body shall be die cast brass, with hex-shaped
wrench boss cast into the body to facilitate installation and reduce the risk of damage during
installation.
B. All recessed and concealed style sprinkler heads shall be of the two-piece type that allows
ceiling panels to be removed without shutting down the sprinkler system. All recessed and
concealed style sprinkler heads shall be of the 1/2 inch field adjustable type.
C. All new sprinklers shall be installed on minimum 1"outlets.
D. All sprinklers in new Light and Ordinary Hazard occupancies shall be Quick Response type.
E. Sprinkler heads in Mechanical Rooms, Storage Rooms and Gymnasiums or installed at an
elevation above finished floors of 7'-0"or less shall have hard-wire sprinkler guard cages.
F. Sprinkler heads in areas to be finished with ceilings shall be both semi recessed pendent
sprinklers with white finish and white escutcheons and concealed pendent style with white cover
plate escutcheons as indicated on Contract Drawings. Sprinkler heads in spaces finished
without ceilings shall be bronze upright or pendent. Sidewall sprinkler heads shall be horizontal
style with escutcheon,white finish. Confirm finish with Architect prior to ordering.
G. Provide sprinkler protection for electric and telephone rooms as indicated on Contract w
Drawings.
H. Install dry concealed pendent sprinklers on preaction sprinkler systems where suspended .�.
ceilings are present.
I. Install FM Global Approved retractable telescoping pendent sprinkler heads in the anechoic
chamber as indicated on Contract Drawings. �*
FIRE PROTECTION 21 00 00- 14
go
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
backsiphonage. This Contractor shall act as the Owner's agent in seeking approval from the
Department of Environmental Protection or its designee. The double check valve assembly
shall be installed in a horizontal position with the top of the check valves a minimum of 30 inches
and a maximum of 53 inches from the floor. There must be at least 12 inches clearance from
any wall. Pressure gauge assemblies, including needle shutoff valve and a snubber, shall be
installed on the supply and discharge side of each backflow preventer assembly. Test and
certify double check valve device. Submit all plans, specifications and applications required for
approval, pay all fees. Approvals shall be secured prior to the purchase and installation of the
double check valve assembly. Secure all local permits that also may be required.
0. All valves shall be Underwriters' listed and FM Global approved.
2.04 WATER FLOW SWITCHES
A. Water flow switches shall be System Sensor Model WFD FM Global approved, UL listed
equipped with two (2) SPDT contacts, adjustable retard dial, cast aluminum saddle, flexible
polyethylene paddle, rubber gasket and dust proof cover.
2.05 SUPERVISORY SWITCHES
A. Supervisory switches for OS&Y valves shall be System Sensor Model OSY2, FM approved, UL
listed equipped with two (2) SPDT contacts, housed in a cast aluminum case with a red
enameled finish tapped for a 1/2 inch NPT conduit connection.
B. Supervisory switches for Post Indicator Valves (PIV) shall be System Sensor Model PIBV2, FM
approved, UL listed equipped with one (1) SPDT contact, housed in a cast aluminum case with
a red enameled finish tapped for a 1/2 inch NPT conduit connection.
2.06 PRESSURE SWITCHES
A. Pressure switches shall be System Sensor Model EPS10 or EPS40, FM approved, UL listed
equipped with two (2) SPDT contacts, housed in an aluminum case, a brass bellows sensing
element, nickel plated brass bellows housing with 1/2 inch NPT male pipe thread. Switches
shall be factory set to transfer between 4 psi to 8 psi and shall be adjustable from 2 psi to 20 psi.
2.07 INSPECTORS TEST AND DRAIN CONNECTIONS
A. Inspector's test connections shall be Test Master II Alarm Test Module Style 720 or equal
with grooved ends 1-1/4"-2" or threaded V-2" (optional pressure relief valve for threaded),
bronze body, dual polycarbonate sight glasses, Bronze valve bonnet, and Malleable Iron
handwheel. The assembly shall be rated for service up to 300 psi working pressure. Each
floor, area or each hydraulically calculated area on floors with multiple hydraulically most remote
areas shall be provided with an inspector's test assembly at the hydraulically most remote point.
Each test connection valve shall be ready accessible and labeled. Each floor control valve
assembly shall be connected to a drain riser, and this drain riser should discharge to outdoors in
a location where water damage will not result.
B. Dry pipe system and preaction system test pipe shall not be less than 1 inch in diameter,
terminating in a smooth bore corrosion resisting orifice to provide a flow equivalent to one
sprinkler of a type installed on the particular system installed on the end of the most distant
sprinkler pipe in the upper story and be equipped with a readily accessible 1 inch shut-off valve,
brass nipple and brass cap.
No
FIRE PROTECTION 21 0000- 13
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
L. The pre-action alarm valve assembly, located in Preaction Closet #219 for protection of Data
Center #218, shall be UL listed, FM approved, Victaulic Series 758, or equal, electrically
supervised single-interlock, automatic pre-action system, closed head system with deluge valve,
release valve, secondary check valve above deluge valve, trim kit, pilot kit, glycerin filled
pressure gauges, single area counting zoned addressable releasing control panel, supervisory *�
air compressor panel with air compressor, alarm bell, alarm switch,trouble bell, and manual pull
station. A control valve shall be located above the preaction valve to facilitate testing. The
Electrical Contractor shall provide power wiring to the pre-action cabinet for the releasing control
panel and air compressor. The Fire Protection Contractor shall furnish and install associated
"counting zoned" system of 135°F heat detectors, including control wiring (in accordance with
Division 16000) for the area served by the pre-action sprinkler system. Detector circuit wiring
shall provide control wiring from pre-action control panel to shut down power to computer
equipment in the event of an alarm condition. The first detector shall produce a local alarm and
an alarm signal at the base building fire alarm panel. Subsequent activation of a second
detector will cause the releasing control panel to energize the pre-action alarm valve and shut
down computer room HVAC equipment and smoke dampers in the room. When the pre-action
alarm valve is energized, it will release water into the piping, but not from any sprinkler head until
the sprinkler head's fusible link melts. Preaction system Water low shall initiate automatic EPO
of the room.
The opening of an automatic sprinkler OR damage to system piping without electrical detection
will initiate the sounding of a warning device and the activation of an alarm contact but will not
cause the piping system to fill with water. Pressure loss on the sprinkler system will activate an
auxiliary contact indicating same. Operation of the emergency manual release will depressurize
the priming chamber of the deluge valve, causing the system to fill the piping network with water,
and activate alarm and water flow contacts for auxiliary functions.
M. The pre-action alarm valve assembly, located in Storage Closet#281 for protection of Anechoic
Chamber #279, shall be UL listed, FM approved, Victaulic Series 758, or equal, electrically
supervised single-interlock, automatic pre-action system, closed head system with deluge valve,
release valve, secondary check valve above deluge valve, trim kit, pilot kit, glycerin filled "
pressure gauges, supervisory air compressor panel with air compressor, alarm bell, alarm
switch,trouble bell, and manual pull station. A control valve shall be located above the preaction
valve to facilitate testing. The Electrical Contractor shall provide power wiring to the pre-action
valve assembly for the releasing control panel and air compressor.
Supply a complete electrical detection system including system tubing, wiring, VESDA air
sampling smoke detection system, signaling devices and connections to auxiliary functions *+
(excluding wiring). The installation and wiring of the detection and control system shall be by the
Fire Protection Contractor. The VESDA system shall be interfaced with the addressable
preaction releasing control panel located outside Preaction Closet #219. Provide release
modules(s)as required compatible with the preaction releasing control panel.
Refer to section 2.13 for VESDA smoke detection requirements.
Refer to FP drawings for sequence of operation for activation of the single interlock Preaction ..
system.
N. Double check valve assembly shall be Watts Model 757 or equal, UL listed FM approved, ■*
complete with test kit and spare parts kit. The Double Check Valve Assembly shall consist of
two independent tri-link check modules within a single housing, sleeve access port, four test
cocks and two drip tight shut-off valves. Tri-link checks shall be removable and serviceable,
without the use of special tools. The housing shall be constructed of 304 Schedule 40 stainless
steel pipe with groove end connections. Tri-link checks shall have reversible elastomer discs
and in operation shall produce drip tight closure against reverse flow caused by backpressure or
FIRE PROTECTION 21 0000- 12
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
2.03 VALVES
A. Type„A,,: Gate valve shall have iron body, bronze mounted,straightway pattern, OS&Y,flanged
ends, suitable for a minimum of 175 lbs. working pressure, similar to Nibco Figure No. F-607-
OTS.
B. Type "B": Gate valve shall have bronze body with threaded ends, OS&Y, for 175 lbs. working
water pressure, similar to Nibco Figure No.T-104-0.
C. Type"C": Globe valve shall be bronze body with threaded ends, suitable for 175 lbs. non-shock
cold water, similar to Nibco Figure No. KT-211-W-UL.
D. Type°D": Check valve shall be swing type with cast iron body, bronze mounted, flanged ends,
suitable for 175 lbs. working water pressure, similar to Nibco Figure No. F-908-W, tapped for
automatic ball drip as required.
E. Type"E,,: Valve shall be manufactured out of bronze and be pressure rated to 125psi WSP,
200psi WOG non-shock.Valve shall have metal-to-metal seating, wye pattern design and
threaded IPS end connections. Valve shall be a Nibco Figure No. T-453-B.
F. Type "F°: Check valve shall be spring-assisted type with ductile iron body, aluminum bronze or
OR elastomer encapsulated ductile iron disc, stainless steel spring and shaft, grooved ends, suitable
for 250 psi working water pressure,Victaulic Series 717.
G. Type "G": Butterfly valve shall be manufactured with ductile iron body, EPDM encapsulated
ductile iron disc with integrally cast stem, grooved ends, suitable for 300 psi working water
pressure,Victaulic Series 705.
H. Valves shall be installed in accordance with the following:
1. Gate Valves 2-1/2"and Larger Type"A"
2. Gate Valves 2"and Smaller Type°B°
3. Globe Valves Type"C
4. Check Valves 2-1/2"and Larger Type"D"&"F"
5. Check Valves 2"and Smaller Type"E"
6. Butterfly Valves 2-1/2"and Larger Type"G"
7. Inspector Test Connection Type"C
8. Fire Department Connection Type°D"
I. All threads shall meet the requirements of the Local Fire Department.
J. Wet alarm check valves shall be approved vertical type for wet systems, complete with retard
chamber, alarm switch, drain valve, glycerin filled pressure gauges, electric alarm bell and other
required trimmings. Valve internal components shall be replaceable without removing valve
from the installed position. Similar to Victaulic Series 751 or equal as approved; and UUFM
Global approved.
K. Dry alarm check valves shall be approved vertical type for dry systems, complete with
accelerator, alarm switch, drain valves, glycerin filled pressure gauges, air pressure
maintenance system, air compressor of a size which can refill the system within 30 minutes,
dryer and other required trimming. Valve shall be externally resetable, and internal components
shall be replaceable without removing valve from the installed position. Similar to Victaulic
Series 756 or equal as approved;and UUFM Global approved.
FIRE PROTECTION 21 0000- 11
MW
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA am
2. For Service Entrance into Building Type B .s.
3. For Above Ground Piping where Making Connections to
Flanged or Grooved Valves and to Underground Entrance Type C
4. Wet Sprinkler System Type D&E
5. Dry Sprinkler System Type F
6. Preaction Sprinkler System Type F
7. Sprinkler Test Drain Type D&E
8. Pipe exposed to the outside and/or weather Type F
H. Grooved End joints:
1. All grooved couplings, fittings, valves, and specialties shall be the products of a single ..e
manufacturer. Grooving tools shall be of the same manufacturer as the grooved
components.
2. The gasket style and elastomeric material (grade) shall be verified as suitable for the w�
intended service as specified. Gaskets shall be molded and produced by the grooved
coupling manufacturer.
3. Grooved ends shall be clean and free from indentations, projections, and roll marks in
the area from pipe end to groove.
4. Grooved coupling manufacturer's factory trained field representative shall provide on-
site training for contractor's field personnel in the proper use of grooving tools,
application of groove,and installation of grooved piping products.
5. Factory trained representative shall periodically inspect the product installation. shall wu
remove and replace any improperly installed products.
2.02 PIPE SLEEVES, HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Hangers for piping of sizes 4 inches and smaller shall be Carpenter& Paterson Figure No. 800
adjustable swivel ring, Crane Company, Tolco Company or approved equal, black steel and
hanger rods with machine threads. Hangers for piping of sizes larger than 4 inches shall be the
adjustable clevis hanger type, steel with extension rod to structure, Carpenter-Paterson Figure
No. 100. All hangers shall be UUFM approved.
B. Pipe sleeves shall be installed and properly secured at all points where pipes pass through w
masonry, concrete or wood. Pipe sleeves shall be of sufficient diameter to provide
approximately 1/4 inch clearance. Pipe sleeves through masonry partitions and floors shall be
Schedule 40 galvanized pipe. Wall sleeves shall have chromium-plated escutcheons with set
screws or clips for firmly holding in place. Sleeves through walls shall end flush with surface of
walls. Sleeves in floors shall extend one inch above the floor and after installation of piping shall
be packed and made water tight. Provide core drilling. Core openings shall have Link-Seal fire
rated penetration closures. Sleeves in exterior walls shall have water stop plates,shall end flush
with the surface of the walls and shall have Link-Seal penetration closures.
C. Where pipes penetrate fire rated floors and partitions, the openings shall be packed with a
material which will maintain the integrity of the fire rating.
FIRE PROTECTION 21 0000- 10
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
C. Provide name, address and telephone number of the Manufacturer's Representative and
service company for each piece of equipment so that the source of replacement parts and
service for each item of equipment can be readily obtained.
1.20 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS
A. Installation of Fire Protection equipment, accessories and components shall be in accordance
with the Seismic Requirements identified in the Massachusetts State Building Code, Seventh
(7) Edition. Refer to Part Two(2)of the Specifications for further information.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPE AND FITTINGS
e
A. Type A: Mechanical joint ductile iron, Class 52, with mechanical joint ductile iron fittings; pipe
and fittings shall be 350 psi rated. Pipe and fittings shall be coated on the outside, cement lined
on the inside. All changes in direction shall have tie rods and clamps anchored to thrust blocks.
B. Type B: Cast iron flanged pipe and fittings; pipe shall conform to Federal Specification
WW-P-421, Class 150; flanges faced and drilled for 125 psi service. Pipe and fittings shall be
coated on the outside,cement lined on the inside.
C. Type C: Schedule 40 black steel pipe, black cast iron screwed companion flanges and flanged
cast iron fittings, all suitable for 175 psi working water pressure (300 psi when static water
pressures are expected to exceed 175 psi).
D. Type D: Schedule 40 black steel pipe with black cast iron screwed sprinkler fittings suitable for
175 psi working water pressure (300 psi when static water pressures are expected to exceed
175 psi).
E. Type E: Schedule 10 welded and seamless steel pipe in accordance with ASTM-135 joined
with groove fittings and couplings approved for service with grooves rolled on the pipe by an
w approved groove rolling machine. Minimum wall thickness shall be Schedule 10 for sizes up to
5 inch pipe, 0.134 inch for 6 inch pipe and 0.188 inch for 8 inch pipe and 10 inch pipe. Fittings
and couplings shall be designed specifically for use in grooved piping systems and suitable for
175 psi minimum working pressure (300 psi when static water pressures are expected to
exceed 175 psi) . Fittings,couplings and gaskets shall be of the same manufacturer.
1. Rigid Type Couplings: Coupling housings cast with offsetting, angle-pattern bolt pads
shall be used to provide system rigidity and support and hanging in accordance with
NFPA 13.Victaulic Style 009.
2. Flexible Type: Use in locations where vibration attenuation and stress relief are
required.Victaulic Style 75/77.
3. Flange Adapter: Flat face, for direct connection to ANSI Class 125 and 150 flanged
components.Victaulic Style 741/744.
F. Type F: Schedule 10/40 galvanized interior and exterior steel pipe with standard iron screwed
or standard grooved fittings as listed for Type E suitable for 175 psi working water pressure(300
psi when static water pressures are expected to exceed 175 psi).
G. Pipe and fittings shall be in accordance with the following:
1. For Exterior Water Service Type A
FIRE PROTECTION 21 0000-9
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA *"
1.17 FINAL COMPLETION .
A. When Subcontractor considers Work under this Section is complete, submit through the General
Contractor written certification that: ew
1. Contract documents have been reviewed.
2. Work has been inspected for compliance with Contract Documents.
3. Work has been completed in accordance with Contract Documents and deficiencies
listed with Certificate of Substantial Completion have been corrected.
4. Equipment and systems have been tested, adjusted and balanced and are fully
operational. The contractor shall attach the NFPA Aboveground and Underground Test
Certificates, as applicable.
5. Work is complete and ready for final Engineer/Architect review.
B. Should Architect and/or his Engineer observe and find work incomplete, he will promptly
suspend his review and notify Subcontractor in writing through the General Contractor.
C. Subcontractor shall complete his work, remedy deficiencies and send a second certification of
final completion.
D. Architect and/or his Engineer shall, upon receipt of a second certification of completion, make a
second review and shall notify the Subcontractor in writing through the General Contractor listing
observed deficiencies.
E. When Architect and/or his Engineer finds work complete, he will consider close out submittals.
1.18 REOBSERVATION
A. Should status of completion of Work require additional services by Architect and/or his Engineer
due to failure of Work to conform with Subcontractor's claims on initial Architect and/or ,
Engineer's review for Substantial Completion or for Final Completion, Owner will deduct the
amount of Architect and/or his Engineer's compensation for additional services from final
payment to Subcontractor.
1.19 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Give detailed instructions, prior to the completion of the work, to the responsible personnel
designated by the Architect in the operation and maintenance of all work installed under this
Section. A letter with two(2)copies containing the name of the person or persons to whom the
instructions were given and the dates of the instruction period shall be submitted to the Architect
at the completion of the project.
B. In addition, prepare three (3) sets of manufacturer's catalogs, other similar data including the
necessary photographic equipment cuts, wiring diagrams covering all mechanical equipment
and devices furnished and installed under this Section. These manuals shall provide complete +�*
instructions for the proper operation and use of the equipment together with instructions for
lubrication and periodic maintenance and for trouble shooting. Operating instructions shall be
specific for each system and shall include copies of posted specific instructions. This manual
shall contain only that information which specifically applies to this project and all unrelated
material shall be deleted. During the instruction period this manual shall be used and explained.
The material shall be bound in note book form and indexed.
FIRE PROTECTION 21 0000-8
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
! ! Northampton, MA
1.13 GUARANTEE
A. Manufacturers shall provide their standard warranties for material and equipment furnished
under this Section. Such warranties shall be in addition to and not in lieu of all liabilities which
the manufacturer and Contractor may have by law or by provisions of the Contract Documents.
B. All materials, equipment and work furnished under this Section shall be guaranteed against all
defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one (1)year commencing with the date of
Substantial Completion. Any failure due to defective material, equipment or workmanship which
may develop, shall be corrected at no expense to the Owner including all damage to areas,
s materials and other systems resulting from such failures.
C. Upon receipt of notice from the Owner of failure of any part of the systems during the guarantee
period, the affected parts shall be replaced. Any equipment requiring excessive service shall be
considered defective and shall be replaced.
1.14 CONTINUITY OF SERVICE AND SCHEDULING OF WORK
A. Continuity of all services shall be maintained in all areas which will be occupied during the
construction period. When an interruption of service becomes necessary, such shall be made
only upon consent of the Owner and at a time outside normal working hours as he shall
w
designate.
B. Refer to the overall scheduling of the work of the project. Schedule work to conform to this
schedule and install work to not delay nor interfere with the progress of the project.
1.15 CERTIFICATES OF APPROVAL
A. Upon completion of all work, furnish, in duplicate, certificates of inspections from all inspectors
40 and authorities having jurisdiction, notarized letters from the manufacturers stating that
authorized factory engineers have inspected and tested the operation of their respective
equipment and found same to be in satisfactory operating condition.
1.16 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A. When Subcontractor considers Work under this Section (or designated portion of Work) is
substantially complete, submit written notice through the General Contractor with a list of items
remaining to be completed or corrected.
B. Should Architect and/or his Engineer observe and find Work is not substantially complete, he will
promptly notify Subcontractor through the General Contractor in writing, listing observed
deficiencies.
C. Subcontractor shall remedy deficiencies and send a second written notice of substantial
completion.
D. When Architect and/or his Engineer finds work is substantially complete he will prepare a
or Certificate of Substantial Completion in accordance with provisions of General Conditions.
0
w
FIRE PROTECTION 21 0000-7
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA *"
brochures will not be reviewed and will be returned to the Contractor unchecked unless they are
certified.
E. It is intended that the Contractor submit complete and accurate data at the first submission. If
the shop drawing is returned marked "Resubmit", or "Not Accepted", only one (1) additional
submission will be permitted.
F. Equipment shall be of proper size for its allotted space. Equipment shall be disassembled as
required, without invalidating the manufacturers' warranty, so that it can be installed through
regular window, door,and/or louver openings.
G. The shop drawings and manufacturer's data shall be submitted in a timely manner sufficiently in
advance to give ample time for checking, correcting, resubmitting and rechecking if necessary.
No claim for delay will be granted for failure to comply with this requirement.
H. A minimum period of two weeks, exclusive of transmittal time, will be required in the Engineer's w
office each time shop drawings, layout drawings, and catalog data and brochures are submitted
or resubmitted for review. This time period shall be considered by the Contractor when
scheduling his work.
a.
I. Fabrication drawings and hydraulic calculations shall be submitted and stamped approved by
the local fire department and insurance underwriters prior to submitting to the Architect for
review. Fabrication drawings and hydraulic calculations shall bear the seal of registration of a
qualified Registered Professional Fire Protection Engineer.
J. LEED Certification Documentation: Submit documentation from the manufacturer highlighting
LEED requirements for materials and products of this Section. Comply with requirements of
Section 01315, LEED submittals.
1.12 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT STANDARDS
,.w
A. Where materials or equipment are specified by patent proprietary name, or name of the
manufacturer, such Specification shall be deemed to be used for the purpose of establishing a
standard for that particular item. No equipment or material shall be used unless previously
approved by the Architect.
B. Substitutions may be offered for review provided the material, equipment or process offered for
consideration is equal in every respect to that indicated or specified and only if the term
"approved equal"appears. The request for each substitution must be accompanied by complete
specifications together with drawings or samples to properly appraise the materials, equipment
or process.
C. If a substitution of materials or equipment in whole or in part is made, the Contractor shall bear
the cost of any changes necessitated by any other trade as a result of said substitution.
.w
D. Manufacturer's directions shall be followed in the delivery, storage and installation of any
equipment. Notify the Architect/Engineer, in writing, of any conflict between the Contract
Drawings and the manufacturer's requirements and obtain a written response prior to
proceeding with work. Should the Subcontractor fail to comply with this, he/she shall bear the
costs of any corrections which may be required.
E. The Subcontractor shall furnish and install all equipment, accessories, connections and
incidentals to complete the work under this Section.
FIRE PROTECTION 21 0000-6
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
1.09 PERMITS, FEES, RULES AND REGULATIONS
A. Give the proper Authorities all requisite notices or information relating to the work under this
Section. Obtain and pay for all fees, licenses, permits and certificates. Comply with the rules
and regulations of all Local, State and Federal Authorities having jurisdiction, the Codes,
Standards, recommended practices and manuals of the National Fire Protection Association,
the Insurance Underwriters and the Public Utilities Companies serving the building.
1.10 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY
A. Be responsible for the care and protection of all work included under this Section until it has
been tested and accepted.
B. Protect all equipment and materials from damage from all causes including theft. All materials
and equipment damaged or stolen shall be repaired or replaced with equal material or
equipment.
C. Protect all equipment, outlets and openings with temporary plugs, caps and covers. Protect
work and materials of other trades from damage that might be caused by work or workmen and
make good damage thus caused.
on D. When open flame or spark producing tools such as blower torches,welding equipment, etc., are
required in the process of executing the work, the General Contractor will be notified not less
than twenty-four (24) hours in advance of the time that the work is to began and the location
where the work is to be performed.
E. Provide, where necessary, fire protective covering and maintain a constant non-working fire
watch where work is being performed and until it is completed.
F. All exposed piping in parking garages, warehouses and similar type occupancies shall be
permanently protected against physical damage from any type of vehicle.
w
1.11 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Submit for approval,within thirty(30)days after signing the Contract and prior to the submission
of any shop drawings, an itemized list of manufacturers of material and equipment and of
Subcontractors proposed to be used under this Section.
B. After approval of the list, submit for review a minimum of eight (8) sets of detailed shop
drawings. All shop drawings for equipment submitted for review shall include complete
*�* Specifications, including type of materials, operating pressures, capacities, performance and
power requirements to determine compliance with Contract Documents. All data submitted shall
be complete for all equipment and shall apply only to this specific project.
C. Regardless of any information included in the shop drawing submitted for review, the
requirements of the Drawings and Specifications shall not be superseded in any way by the
shop drawing review.
D. Each submittal shall be reviewed, stamped and certified prior to submission to the Architect.
Such certification shall be made by the Owner, or Corporate Officer of the Contractor, or by a
person duly authorized by the Owner to sign binding agreements for the Contractor. The
certification shall state that the data and details contained on each shop drawing, layout
drawing, catalog data and brochure has been reviewed by the Contractor and that it complies
with the Contract Documents in all respects. Shop drawings, layout drawings, catalog data and
FIRE PROTECTION 21 0000-5
so
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA ow
A. Prior to the purchasing and fabrication of materials, each Subcontractor shall prepare
Coordination Drawings for all floors/areas showing the size and location of his/her equipment
and lines.
B. The Coordination Drawings shall be produced on AutoCAD Release 2000 minimum or
compatible system. A disc and one (1) set of reproducible sepias (all-trade composite)shall be
provided to the Architect/Engineer for review.
C. Coordination Drawings shall be 3/8" = 1'-0" scale. Prepare and submit for review, at that scale
or larger, plans and sections.
D. The cost of preparing and reproducing these Drawings will be included as part of this Contract.
The HVAC Subcontractor shall prepare the initial Drawings and circulate the Drawings to the
other trades(Fire Protection, Plumbing and Electrical)so they can indicate their work.
E. Coordination Drawings shall not be construed as replacing any Shop Drawings.
1.08 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Purchase and maintain at the job site a complete and separate black line set of prints of the
approved Working Drawings on which accurately indicate daily progress by coloring materials
and apparatus as installed. Schedules shall be modified to reflect data consistent with that of the
installed equipment. Clearly show all changes to the work as a result of change orders,
instructions issued by the Architect or conditions encountered in the field. Accurately indicate
the location, size,type and elevation of new utilities and their relationship to existing utilities.
B. The marked up and colored in prints will be used as a guide for determining the progress of the
work installed. They shall be inspected weekly and shall be corrected immediately if found +�
inaccurate or incomplete. Requisitions for payment will not be approved until the Drawings are
accurate and up-to-date.
C. At the completion of the work submit one (1) set of the marked up prints for review and
comment. After review and comment,these marked up prints shall be used in the preparation of
the Record Drawings.
D. Obtain and pay for one (1) set of reproducible mylars and CAD disks (AutoCAD Release 2000
minimum or compatible system) applicable to this Section. Make all modifications to these
reproducibles as shown on the marked up prints. Remove all superseded data to show the
completed installation.
E. The Record Drawings may be made from the originals of the Contract Drawings. Arrange with
the Architect to have these reproducibles made from the originals.
rw
F. Deliver the completed reproducible Record Drawings, Record Hydraulic Calculations and/or
CAD disks properly titled and dated to the Architect. These Record Drawings shall become the
property of the Owner.
G. The Fire Protection Contractor's Design Engineer shall certify that the completed installation
complies with all applicable codes and underwriters'requirements.
FIRE PROTECTION 21 0000-4
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
!! Northampton, MA
11. American Welding Society(AWS).
12. Commercial Standards, U.S. Department of Commerce(CS).
13. Factory Mutual(FM).
14. Industrial Risk Insurers(IRI).
15. National Electrical Manufacturers Association(NEMA).
16. American Gas Association (AGA).
17. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL).
18. U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, Guidelines for Construction and
Equipment for Hospital and Medical Facilities.
1.05 OBTAINING INFORMATION
A. Obtain from the manufacturer the proper method of installation and connection of the equipment
that is to be furnished and installed. Obtain all information that is necessary to facilitate the work
and to complete the project.
1.06 COOPERATION AND COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES
A. The Contract Drawings are diagrammatic only intending to indicate general routing and location
of piping and equipment. The Drawings are not intended to show every offset and accessory
required, nor every structural difficulty that may be encountered.
B. Where requirements of the applicable codes, plans and/or specifications are in conflict, the most
' stringent requirement will be included in the Contract. Prior to ordering and/or installing any
portion of the work which appears to be in conflict, the work shall be brought to the
Architect/Engineer's attention for direction as to what is provided.
C. Final location of sprinkler heads, valve cabinets, fire department valves, siamese connections,
roof manifolds, etc., shall be coordinated with the Architectural Plans. Additional offsets, fittings,
etc., shall be provided as needed to meet this requirement at no extra cost to the Owner.
D. If discrepancies exist in the scope of work as to what trade provides items, they shall be
reported to the Architect/Engineer prior to signing the Contract. If the discrepancies are not
reported, the Fire Protection Subcontractor shall furnish such items as needed for a complete
and operable system.
E. All work shall be installed in cooperation with other trades. Fire protection systems shall be so
on located as to not interfere with access doors of HVAC units or the required space for
maintenance staff to service these units.
F. Keep fully informed as to the shape, size and position of all openings required for all apparatus
and give information in advance to build openings into the work. Furnish and set in place all
sleeves, pockets, supports and incidentals.
OR G. All distribution systems which require pitch or slope such as plumbing drains, steam and
condensate piping shall have the right of way over those which do not. Confer with other trades
as to the location of pipes, ducts, lights and apparatus and install work to avoid interferences.
H. Prepare and submit for review coordinated Plans and sections, clearly showing how the work is
to be installed in relation to the work of other trades. Work that is installed before coordination
with other trades, or that causes interference with the work of other trades shall.be changed to
correct condition.
1.07 COORDINATION DRAWINGS
FIRE PROTECTION 21 0000-3
am
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
6. Hydrant flow testing.
7. Hydraulic calculations.
8. Furnishing of access panels.
9. Backflow Prevention
1.03 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. The following work is not included as work in this Section and is to be performed under other
Sections:
1. All Cutting and Patching.
2. Temporary Water, Heat, Fire Protection and Toilet Facilities. *
3. Temporary Light and Power.
4. Excavation and Backfilling.
5. Foundations and Trenching.
6. Concrete Bases for Equipment.
7. Flashing of Holes through Roof.
8. Painting.
9. Food Service Equipment.
10. Laboratory Equipment.
11. Heating,Ventilating and Air Conditioning.
12. Plumbing.
13. Electrical. ..
14. Utilities Beyond 10'-0"from the Building.
15. Installation of Access Panels.
16. Fire Extinguishers.
17. Electric Heat Tracing.
18. Kitchen Hood Fire Suppression System.
1.04 CODES, STANDARDS AND REFERENCES
A. All materials and workmanship shall comply with the latest editions of all applicable Codes,
Local and State Ordinances, Industry Standards and Regulations.
B. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall notify the Architect/Engineer of any discrepancies
between the Contract Documents and applicable Codes, Standards, etc.
C. In the event of a conflict,the most stringent requirements shall apply.
D. The following Codes, Standards and References shall be utilized as applicable:
1. Massachusetts State Building Code, 780 CMR, 7t'edition.
2. National Electric Code(NEC).
3. Environmental Protection Agency(EPA).
4. Commonwealth of Massachusetts Department of Environmental Protection(DEP). **
5. Local Ordinances, Regulations of City of Northampton.
6. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
7. Insurance Services Organization(ISO).
8. American National Standards Institute(ANSI).
9. American Society of Mechanical Engineers(ASME).
10. American Society of Testing Materials(ASTM).
FIRE PROTECTION 21 0000-2
.w
w
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
SECTION 21 00 00 FIRE PROTECTION
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Include GENERAL CONDITIONS, SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS and
applicable parts of Division 1 as part of this Section.
B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work of this
40 Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section.
C. Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting or affected by work of this Section.
Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract.
am
D. The Owner will be submitting this building for certification under the U.S. Green Building
Council's LEED program. To that end,all systems and equipment must be installed and operate
to comply with the requirements of ASHRAE 90.1-2007 or the local energy code, whichever is
more stringent. In addition, several systems and pieces of equipment are specified to comply
with the requirements of the LEED program. An outside commissioning authority will
commission the building at the completion of construction. Refer to separate commissioning
authority scope of work and specifications for systems affected and Fire Protection contractor
interface required.
1.02 WORK INCLUDED
A. The work under this Section shall include the furnishing of all material, labor, equipment and
supplies and the performance of all operations to provide a complete working system as
required by the drawings and details and as specified herein.
1. All equipment and systems shall be Year 2000 compatible as part of the project. Any
additional components required for compatibility shall be provided as part of the scope
of work.
B. The Specifications and Drawings describe the minimum requirements that must be met by the
Fire Protection Subcontractor for the installation of all work as shown on the Drawings and as
specified hereinunder to include the following items:
1. Complete new automatic wet pipe sprinkler protection throughout the building in
accordance with 2007 edition NFPA 13, Massachusetts State Building Code—780CMR
! 7th Edition, and all requirements of all local authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Complete automatic dry pipe sprinkler protection for exterior covered shipping and
receiving, secured shipping shed, and tower.
3. Installation of a complete automatic single interlocked pre-action sprinkler system with
counting zoned heat detection for the 2nd Floor Data Center #218 as indicated on
Contract Drawings.
4. Installation of a complete automatic single interlocked pre-action sprinkler system with
VESDA air sampling smoke detection for the 2nd Floor Anechoic Chamber 279 as
indicated on Contract Drawings.
5. Seismic protection.
40
FIRE PROTECTION 21 00 00- 1
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA �*
3.07 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION...........................................................................................32 .�
3.08 ACCESS PANELS........................................................................................................................32
3.09 DESIGN CRITERIA.......................................................................................................................32
,0
.o
■w
w
Ift
FIRE PROTECTION 21 00 00-ii
.m
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
SECTION 21 00 00 FIRE PROTECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART1 -GENERAL.....................................................................................................................................1
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.........................................................................................................1
1.02 WORK INCLUDED .........................................................................................................................1
1.03 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS .....................................................................................2
1.04 CODES, STANDARDS AND REFERENCES.................................................................................2
1.05 OBTAINING INFORMATION..........................................................................................................3
1.06 COOPERATION AND COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES................................................3
1.07 COORDINATION DRAWINGS..............................
!, 1.08 RECORD DRAWINGS....................................................................................................................4
1.09 PERMITS, FEES, RULES AND REGULATIONS...........................................................................5
®„ 1.10 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY.................................................................................5
1.11 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS......................................................................................................5
1.12 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT STANDARDS................................................................................6
1.13 GUARANTEE..................................................................................................................................7
1.14 CONTINUITY OF SERVICE AND SCHEDULING OF WORK.......................................................7
1.15 CERTIFICATES OF APPROVAL....................................................................................................7
1.16 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION.......................................................................................................7
1.17 FINAL COMPLETION.....................................................................................................................8
go1.18 REOBSERVATION.........................................................................................................................8
1.19 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS................................................8
1.20 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS..................................................................................................................9
PART2- PRODUCTS..................................................................................................................................9
so2.01 PIPE AND FITTINGS......................................................................................................................9
2.02 PIPE SLEEVES, HANGERS AND SUPPORTS............................................................................10
2.03 VALVES........................................................................................................................................11
2.04 WATER FLOW SWITCHES..........................................................................................................13
2.05 SUPERVISORY SWITCHES........................................................................................................13
2.06 PRESSURE SWITCHES..............................................................................................................13
2.07 INSPECTORS TEST AND DRAIN CONNECTIONS....................................................................13
2.08 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION...........................................................................................14
2.09 SPRINKLER HEADS....................................................................................................................14
2.10 SPARE HEADS.............................................................................................................................15
2.11 PIPE IDENTIFICATION AND VALVE TAGS.................................................................................15
2.12 ACCESS PANELS........................................................................................................................15
2.13 VESDA AIR SAMPLING SMOKE DETECTION ...........................................................................16
2.14 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS................................................................................................................25
2.15 TESTS AND APPROVALS...........................................................................................................31
PART3-EXECUTION ...............................................................................................................................31
3.01 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS...................................................................................................31
3.02 SPRINKLER HEADS....................................................................................................................31
3.03 VALVES........................................................................................................................................32
3.04 WATER FLOW SWITCHES..........................................................................................................32
3.05 SUPERVISORY SWITCHES........................................................................................................32
3.06 PRESSURE SWITCHES..............................................................................................................32
FIRE PROTECTION 21 00 00-i
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
DIVISION 11—EQUIPMENT
Section 1] 13 00 Loading Dock Equipment 11 13 00-1 through 4
DIVISION 12—FURNISHINGS
Section 12 36 40 Stone Countertops 12 36 40-1 through 6
Section 12 48 13 Entrance Floor Mats and Grilles 1248 13-1 through 4
DIVISION 13- SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
DIVISION 14- CONVEYING EQUIPMENT
Section 14 24 00 Hydraulic Elevator 14 24 00-1 through 44
DIVISION 21—FIRE SUPPRESSION *"
Section 21 20 00 Fire Protection 21 0000-1 through 34
DIVISION 22—PLUMBING
Section 22 00 00 Plumbing 22 00 00-1 through 38
DIVISION 23—HVAC
Section 23 00 00 Heating Ventilating and Air Conditioning 23 00 00-1 through 179
DIVISION 26—ELECTRICAL
Section 26 00 00 Electrical 26 00 00-1 through 73 ..
Section 26 01 00 Fire Alarm 2601 00-1 through 37
DIVISION 31—THROUGH 49
■w
END OF DOCUMENT 00 01 10
we
TABLE OF CONTENTS 0001 10-4 '""
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
Section 07 42 13 Metal Wall Panels 0742 13-1 through 7
Section 07 42 16 Insulated Core Metal Wall Panels 0742 16-1 through 7
Section 07 54 23 FM I-60A Thermoplastic Polyolefin(TPO)Roofing 07 54 23-1 through 10
FM-Application for Acceptance of Roofing System 3 pages
Section 07 72 00 Roof Accessories 07 72 00-1 through 4
Section 07 81 00 Applied Fireproofing 0781 00-1 through l 1
Section 07 84 13 Penetration Firestopping 0784 13-1 through 6
Section 07 84 46 Fire Resistive Joint Systems 07 84 46-1 through 5
Section 07 92 00 Joint Sealants 07 92 00-1 through 7
DIVISION 08—OPENINGS
Section 08 10 00 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08 1000-1 through 9
Section 08 14 16 Flush Wood Doors 08 14 16-1 through 5
Section 08 31 13 Access Doors and Frames 0831 13-1 through 5
Section 08 33 23 Overhead Coiling Doors 083323-1 through 6
Section 08 41 13 Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts 0841 13-1 through 10
? !! Section 08 41 26 All Glass Entrances Storefront 08 41 26-1 through 4
Section 08 44 13 Glazed Aluminum Curtainwall 0844 13-1 through 8
Section 08 51 13 Aluminum Windows 0851 13 -1 through 9
Section 08 7100 Door Hardware 08 71 00-1 through 23
Section 08 80 00 Glazing 08 80 00-1 through 14
Section 08 90 00 Louvers and Vents 08 90 00-1 through 6
DIVISION 09—FINISHES
Section 09 21 16.23 Gypsum Board Shaftwall Assemblies 0921 16.23 through 7
+ !► Section 09 22 16 Non-Structural Metal Framing 0922 16-1 through 7
Section 09 27 00 Gypsum Glass Fiber Fabrications 09 27 00-1 through 2
Section 09 29 00 Gypsum Board 09 29 00-1 through 10
Section 09 30 00 Tiling 09 30 00-1 through 10
Section 09 51 23 Acoustical Tile Ceiling 09 51 23-1 through 7
Section 09 63 40 Stone Flooring 09 63 40-1 through 7
Section 09 65 13 Resilient Base and Accessories 0965 13-1 through 5
Section 09 65 19 Resilient Tile Flooring 0965 19-1 through 6
Section 09 68 13 Tile Carpeting 0968 13-1 through 5
Section 09 69 00 Access Flooring 09 69 00-1 through 8
Section 09 9100 Painting 09 91 00-1 through 15
DIVISION 10—SPECIALTIES
Section 10 10 10 Visual Display Surfaces 1010 10-1 through 4
Section 10 14 00 Signage 101400-1 through 5
Section 10 21 13 Toilet Compartments 1021 00-1 through 5
Section 10 28 00 Toilet Accessories 10 28 00-1 through 5
Section 10 44 00 Fire Protection Specialties 10 44 00-1 through 5
Section 10 5126 Plastic Lockers 1051 26-1 through 5
w�
�u TABLE OF CONTENTS 0001 10-3
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
Form CWM-7 Construction Waste Reduction Progress Report_________ ____1 Page
Section 01 7700 Closeout Procedures 01 7700-1 through 5
Section 01 7823 Operation and Maintenance Data 01 7823-1 through 8
Section 01 7839 Project Record Documents 01 7839-1 through 4
Section 01 7900 Demonstration& Training 01 7900-1 through 4
Section 01 81 13 Sustainable Design Requirements 01 81 13-1 through 6
Section 01 91 10 General Commissioning Requirements(edit) 01 91 10-1 through 3
was
DIVISION 02—EXISTING CONDITIONS
Not Used
DIVISION 03—CONCRETE
.en
Section 03 30 10 Concrete Work(Dated 8/21/09) 03 30 10-1 through 30
Section 03 60 00 Grout(Dated 8/21/09) 03 60 00-1 through 3
DIVISION 04—MASONRY
Section 04 22 23 Architectural Concrete Unit Masonry 04 22 23-1 through 9 wg
Section 04 23 00 Reinforced Concrete Masonry (Dated 8/21/09) 04 23 00-1 through 1 l
DIVISION 05—METALS
Section 05 08 00 Hot Dipped Galvanizing 05 08 00-1 through 4
Section 05 12 00 Structural Steel(Dated 8/21/09) 05 1200-1 through 16
Section 05 21 00 Metal Joists(Dated 8/21/09) 0521 00-1 through 4
Section 05 31 00 Metal Decking(Dated 8/21/09) 0531 00-1 through 7
Section 05 40 00 Cold Formed Metal Framing 05 40 00-1 through 7
Section 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications 05 00 00-1 through 11
Section 05 5100 Metal Stairs 0551 00-1 through 6
Section 05 52 13 Pipe and Tube Railings 0552 13-1 through 9
DIVISION 06—WOOD,PLASTICS,AND COMPOSITES
Section 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry 06 1000-1 through 6
Section 06 16 00 Sheathing 06 1600-1 through 6
Section 06 20 23 Interior Finish Carpentry 06 20 23-1 through 5
Section 06 40 23 Interior Architectural Woodwork 06 40 23-1 through 11
Section 06 64 00 Plastic Paneling 06 64 00-1 through 4
Section 06 64 10 Polycarbonate Plastic Paneling 0664 10-1 through 3
DIVISION 07-THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
Section 07 11 13 Bituminous Damproofing 07 11 13-1 through 3
Section 07 16 00 Crystalline Waterproofing 07 1600-1 through 6
Section 07 21 00 Thermal Insulation 07 21 00-1 through 4
Section 07 27 00 Air Barriers 07 27 00-1 through 3
TABLE OF CONTENTS 0001 10-2
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
DOCUMENT 0001 l 0—TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 00-PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION
Document 00 010 1 Project Title Page
Document 00 01 10 Table of Contents 00 01 10-1 through 4
PROCUREMENT REQUIREMENTS
AGREEMENT FORMS
CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT
DIVISION 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 01 10 00 Summary 01 10 00-1 through 3
Section 0123 00 Alternates 01 23 00-1 through 2
Section 01 2500 Substitution Procedures 01 2500-1 through 4
Substitution Request Form (After Bidding) CSI 13.IA 2 Pages
Section 01 2600 Contract Modification Procedures 01 26 00-1 through 3
Bulletin Form I pages
Change Order Form 2 pages
Section 01 2900 Payment Procedures 01 29 00-1 through 5
Section 01 3100 Project Management and Coordination 01 31 00-1 through 10
Request For Interpretation—CSI Form 13.2A 1 page
Architect's Response to Request for Information 1 page
go Section 01 3200 Construction Project Documentation 01 3200-1 through 6
Section 01 3233 Photographic Documentation 01 3233-1 through 2
Section 01 3300 Submittal Procedures 013300-1 through 12
BH+A Submittal Response Form 1 Page
Section 01 3500 Special Project Procedures 01 3500-1 through 4
Section 01 4000 Quality Requirements 01 4000-1 through 8
Section 01 4001 Mock-Up Requirements 01 40 01-1 through 2
Section 01 4200 References 01 42 00-1 through 4
Section 01 5000 Facilities &Temporary Controls 01 5000-1 through 7
Section 01 58 13 Temporary Project Sign 01 58 13-1 through 2
Section 01 6000 Product Requirements 01 6000-1 through 5
Section 01 7300 Execution 01 7300-1 through 8
Section 01 7329 Cutting and Patching 01 7329-1 through 3
Section 0174 19 Construction Waste Management and Disposal 0174 19-1 through 5
Form CWM-1 Construction Waste Management Identification,---------------I Page
Form CW.LI--3 Construction Waste Reduction Work Plan-J--------------------I
--------------------- -1 Page
so Form CWM-5 Cost/Revenue Analysis of Construction Waste Reduction Work
Page
Plan---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1 Pa g
TABLE OF CONTENTS 0001 10- 1
i
Project Manual for.
Kollmorgen Electro-Optical
Northampton, Massachusetts
rY k Iry --
"` .+.3-C w=,�;,,r .,�N)sr.ata "' '•"`ttC' YCUV'a'.�iaS c,3,i,
Prepared For.
O'Connell Development Group Inc.
480 Hampden Street
Holyoke, MA 01040
Prepared By:
Architect:
Bargmann Hendrie + Archetype, Inc.
300 A Street
Boston, MA 02210
Tel: 617-350-0450
Fax: 617-350-0215
Web:www.bhplus,com
Landscape Architect: Structural Engineering Consultant:
Carol R. Johnson Associates, Inc. McNamara/Salvia Inc.
115 Broad Street 160 Federal Street, 5th Floor
Boston, MA Boston, MA 02110
MEP/FP Engineering Consultant: Civil Engineering Consultant:
AHA Consulting Engineers Tighe & Bond Consulting Engineers
10 Maguire Road, Suite 121 53 Southampton Road
Lexington, MA 02421 Westfield, MA 01085
A'
VOLUME 2
October 30, 2009
ow
ON
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
L. Sound isolate cab enclosure from car structure. Allow no direct rigid connections «�
between enclosure and car structure and between platform and car structure.
M. Isolate cab fan from canopy to minimize vibration and noise. ..
N. Remove oil, dirt and impurities and give a factory coat of rust inhibitive paint to all
exposed surfaces of struts, hanger supports, covers, fascias,toe guards, dust covers and
other ferrous metal.
O. Prehang traveling cables for at least 24 hours with ends suitably weighted to eliminate
twisting.
P. Provide isolation pad between platen head and car structure.
Q. Set jack unit plumb in waterproof hole and bolt it to mounting channels in pit.
R. Sound isolate pump units and controllers from building structure.
S. Mount operating fixtures with concealed fasteners. Coordinate fixture material and
finishes with the Architect.
T. Adjust elevators to meet the performance requirements,
U. Provide and install motors, switches, controls, safety and maintenance and operating
devices in strict accordance with the submitted wiring diagrams and applicable codes
and regulations having jurisdiction.
V. Protect finished surfaces at all times during delivery, storage and installation. After
installation touch ups in the field, surfaces of shop primed elements which have
become scratched or damaged.
W. Lubricate operating parts of system as recommended by the manufacturer.
3.3 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A. Adequately protect surfaces against accumulation of paint, mortar, mastic land
disfiguration or discoloration and damage during shipment and installation.
B. Upon completion, remove protection and thoroughly clean work and have it free from
discoloration, scratches, dents and other surface defects.
C. The finished installation shall be free of defects. Before final completion and
acceptance of the building, repair and/or replace defective work, to the satisfaction of
the Architect and the Owner at no additional cost. ,..
END OF SECTION
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 014240 -44
a�
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Study the Contract Documents with regard to the work as shown and required so as to
insure its completeness.
B. Examine surface and conditions to which this work is to be attached or applied, and
an notify the Architect in writing, if conditions or surfaces are detrimental to the proper
and expeditious installation of the work. Starting the work shall imply acceptance of
the surfaces and conditions to perform the work as specified.
NO C. Verify, by measurements at the job site, dimensions affecting the work. Bring field
dimensions which are at variance with those on the accepted shop drawings to the
attention of the Architect. Obtain the decision regarding corrective measures before the
"am start of fabrication of items affected.
D. Cooperate in the coordination and scheduling of the work of this section with the work
40 of other sections so;as not to delay job progress.
op 3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install the elevators, using skilled workmen in strict accordance with the final accepted
shop drawings, related submittals, and under the supervision of the field foremen
directly employed by the Elevator Contractor.
B. Comply with the code,manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
SO
C. Coordinate work with the work of other trades for proper time and sequence to avoid
construction delays and to insure right-of-way of system. Use lines and levels to
ensure dimensional coordination of the work.
D. Accurately: and rigidly secure supporting elements within the shaftways to the
encountered construction within the tolerance established.
E. Erect guide rails plumb and parallel with a tolerance of 1/8" (plus or minus 1/16").
F. Install rails SO those joints do not interfere with brackets.
G. Set entrance plumb in hoistway and in alignment with guide rails prior to the erection
of the front walls.
H. Arrange door tracks and sheaves so that no metal to metal contact exists.
1. Reinforce hoistway fascias to allow not more than 1/2 inch of deflection.
J. Pack openings around oil line with fire resistant,sound isolating glass or mineral wool.
K. Install elevator cab enclosure on platform plumb and align cab entrance with hoistway
entrances.
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 014240-43
am
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883 me
Northampton, MA
a. Identify each pad by elevator number and wall location. go
14. Accessories: Construct elevator cab to accommodate the door operator, hangers,
interlocks and all accessory equipment provided under other sections of these
specifications,including firefighter phones, card readers and CCTV. ow
15. All cab materials shall conform to the code prescribed flame spread rating and
smoke development requirements 4M
B. Fabrication and Installation
1. Maintain accurate relation of planes and angles with hairline fit of contacting OR
panels and/or surfaces.
2. Any shadow gaps(reveals)between panels shall be consistent and uniform.
3. Unless otherwise specified or shown on the drawings, for work exposed to view
use concealed fasteners.
4. Maximum exposed edge radius at corner bends shall be 1/1 6". There shall be
no visible grain difference at the bends.
5. Form the work to the required shapes and sizes with smooth and even curves,
lines and angles. Provide necessary brackets, spacers and blocking material for
assembly of the cab.
6. Interior cab surfaces shall be flat and free of bow or oil canning. The maximum
overall deviation between the low and high points of 24" by 24" panel section .A
shall not exceed 1/32"
7. Make weights of connections and accessories adequate to safely sustain and
withstand stresses to which they will be subjected.
8. All steel work except stainless steel and bronze materials shall be painted with
an approved coat of primer and one(1)coat of baked enamel paint.
2.12 ALTERNATES .�
A. No Value Engineered Alternates may be submitted with the bid. Alternates will be
considered in the post-bid period.
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 014240-42
40
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL
qM Northampton,MA BH+A Project No. 2883
b. Drill and reinforce doors for installation of door operator hardware, door
protective device, door gibs, etc.
9• Ceiling: Construction techniques for wall panels shall apply to ceiling; panel
40 construction. Locate top emergency exit inconspicuously. Construct and mount
the exit panel to prevent light leakage around the perimeter of panel.
10. Ventilation: The ventilation system of the exhaust type shall be provided in each
elevator.
a. The system shall include a blower driven by a direct connected motor
and mounted on top of car with isolation to effectively prevent
transmission of vibration to the car structure. The blower shall have not
less than two operating speeds. The ventilation system shall be sized to
M provide one air change per minute at low speed and 1.5 air changes per
minute at high speed. The unit design and installation shall be such that
the maximum noise level, when operating at high speed, shall not exceed
Am 55 dBa approximately three feet above the car floor. A three-position
switch to Control the blower shall be provided in the car station.
b. The fan or blower shall start upon the pressing of a car or landing call
00 button and shall stop a predetermined tune (approximately 2 minutes)
after the car has answered the last registered call.
00 11. Lighting: Arrange lighting fixtures and ceiling assembly to provide even
illumination without hot spots and shadows. Overlap fluorescent lamps where
cove lighting is specified.
a. Design and configure lighting system to facilitate maintenance of the
fixtures.
!+� b. A. minimum of 5 foot candle illumination level shall be maintained at
cab controls, floor and threshold of passenger elevator.
12 Handrails: All attachment hardware shall match the selected handrail and shall
permit handrail removal from within the cab.
a. Provide a minimum of 10 gauge plate at the hatch side of the shell,
aligned with the handrail attachment points, to assure secure handrail
mounting.
b. Design handrail attachment system to support the weight of a person
(250 pounds) sitting on it without any deflection and damage to the
handrail,cab panel and the shell.
wr
13. Protective Pads and Pad Hooks: Provide pad hooks at locations as directed by
the Architect. Protective pads shall cover the front return panels, and the side
and rear walls. Provide cutouts in pads for access to the cab operating and
signaling devices. Pads shall be fire- resistant canvas with two (2) layers of
cotton batting padding.
+fir
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 014240-41
40
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
6. Base: Where finished base provided under another section of these
specifications,recess and prepare the shell to accept the base.
a. Provide concealed vent slots above side and rear wall base for proper
ventilation. Arrange and size vent slots for quiet operation without any
whistling. Use 16 gauge baffles to protect the hoistway side of the vent
slots.
7. Front Return Panels, Entrance Posts and Transom: Use 14 gauge furniture sheet
steel with proper reinforcing to prevent oil canning.
a. Swing front return panels shall have required cutouts for the car call
buttons,keyed switches, indicators, emergency light fixture, cabinets and
the specified special control and signaling devices.
(1) Provide concealed full height stainless steel piano hinges
of sufficient strength to support the panel, without
sagging,in the open position. '
(2) The concealed locks shall secure the panel at two points
with linkage that shall be free of vibration and noise +*�
when in the locked position.
(3) When locked in the closed position, the front return
panel shall be in true alignment with the transom and
base.
(4) Lock release holes shall be not more than 114" diameter
and be located at the return side jamb of the panel.
(5) Engrave the elevator identification number and capacity, �*
no smoking sign, firefighter instructions, and other code
mandated instructions and caution signs directly to the
front return panel. Applied panels are unacceptable.
b. Transom shall be 14 gauge, and be reinforced and constructed the same
as the front return panels.
C. Construct entrance posts for the passenger elevators from 12 gauge
sheet steel and reinforce to maintain vertical alignment with the adjacent
panels.
8. Cab Doors: Standard 1" thick, 14 gauge hollow metal flush construction,
reinforced for power operation and insulated for sound deadening. Paint hatch
side of doors black and face cab side with 16 gauge sheet steel in selected
material and finish.
a. The door panels shall have no binder angles. All welds shall be
continuous, ground smooth and invisible.
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 014240-40
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
2.11 CAR ENCLOSURES
A. General Design Requirements
1. The design, materials and finishes of the cab enclosures shall be selected by the
Architect and Engineer following award. For the purposes of bidding, bidders
shall include an allowance of $12,500 per elevator for PEA and PE-2 and
$17,500 for PF-3 for interior finishes.
2. Materials:
a. Cold-rolled Sheet Steel Sections: ASTM A366
b. Rolled Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A7S6
c. Steel Supports and Reinforcement: ASTM A36
d. Aluminum-alloy Rolled Tread Plate:ASTM B632
e. Stainless Steel: ASTM A167 Type 302 or 304
f. Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A276
g. Stainless Steel Tubes: ASTM A269
h. Bronze Sheet: ASTM B36(36M)alloy UNS No.C2800(Muntzmetal)
i Aluminum Extrusions:ASTM B221
j. Bronze Extrusions: ASTM B455
k. Nickel Silver Extrusions: ASTM B151
1. Plastic Laminate: Comply with NEMA LD3, 0.05" thick, color, texture and
finish as selected by the Architect
3. Steel shell: 14 gauge furniture steel reinforced and designed to accept finished
wall panels. Finish: shell panels with one coat of rust inhibitive primer and two
coats of enamel paint in accordance with Section 09900. Apply 1/8" thick,
rubberized Sound deadening material to the hoistway side of the shell.
a. All panels shall have minimum radii. Apply sealant beads,to panel joints
before bolting together with lock washers
4. Wood Shell: 3/4" thick particle board with backing laminate at both sides
designed to accept finished wall panels. Apply 26 gauge sheet steel or fire
proofing compound to the hoistway side of the shell.
5. Canopy: Canopy construction methods shall match the shell walls. Use
12 gauge furniture sheet steel and adequately support canopy to comply with the
loading requirements of the Code.
a. Provide necessary cutouts for the installation of fan and top emergency
exit. Arrange exit panel to swing up using a heavy duty piano hinge. The
exit panel shall have dual locks, necessary stops and a handle. When in
the locked position, the panel shall be flush with the interior face of the
canopy with hairline joints.
ow
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 014240 -39
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA "
5. The hall lanterns or car riding lantern shall sound once for the "up" direction and
twice for the "down" direction located at a minimum 72" above the finished WX
floor.
6. Provide floor designations at each entrance on both sides of jamb at a height of
60"above the floor. Designations shall be 2"high,raised.03 inches and shall be
custom designed by the Architect.
7. Provide as an integral component of the car operating panel an audible signal to
tell passenger that the car is stopping or passing a floor served by the elevator.
2.10 COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
A. Auto Dial Telephone
I. Provide an automatic dialing, hands-fee telephone in the car station. The system
shall be in compliance with ADA requirements.
2. The telephone shall be turned on by pressing the emergency alarm switch in the
car panel. It shall automatically dial a programmed number to alert the security
personnel that there is a problem in the elevator.
3. Provide a programmable time clock switch mechanism which shall allow the
system to dial a second programmed number for after hours and weekends.
4. The system shall have a ring-back feature to allow calls to be placed to the
elevator. It shall answer the incoming call automatically and shut off after an
adjustable programmed time.
5. Provide an audible and visual signal to indicate that a communication link has
been established. Provide a circular drill hole pattern in car operating panel
faceplate located above the floor buttons.
6. Ni-Cad batteries shall ensure operation under all conditions. w
7. Install the instrument in the elevator and wiring within the hoistway, terminating
the wiring in the elevator machine room. A suitable and identified junction box
in the machine room shall be installed.
8. All connections from the junction box to the security room's main telephone
system shall be done by others. All electrical shall conform to Division 16 w�
requirements.
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 014240-38
40
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL
W Northampton, MA BH+A Project No.2883
c. Door Operating Times:
eta
Opening Time for 3'-0"single speed center opening: 2.5 sec.
r Closing Time for 3'-0"single speed center opening: 3.6 sec.
Door dwell time for hall calls: 5.0 seconds
Door dwell time for car calls: 3.0 seconds
Hydraulic Pressure: 400psi maximum
Typical floor-to-floor time - Measured from start of door close on one
floor until they are fully open at the next floor(Approximately 14'-0"):
Elevator PE-1: 12.0 seconds
Elevator PE-2: 12.0 seconds
Elevator PF-3: 13.0 seconds
B. Ride Quality Requirements
W I. Maintain the following ride quality requirements for the elevator:
a. Noise levels inside the car shall not exceed the following;
Car at rest with doors closed and fan off-40 dBa.
Car at rest with doors closed, fan running-55 dBa.
Car running at high speed, fan off-50 dBa.
w Door in operation-60 dBa.
2• Amplitude of acceleration and deceleration shall not exceed 1.75 feet per
second, per second. A sustained jerk shall not be more than twice the
acceleration.
2.9 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Handicapped Requirements
I• Locate door reopening devices at 5 and 29 inches above the finish floor.
2. Locate the alarm button and emergency stop switch at 35 inches, and floor and
control button not more than 54 inches.
so 3. Provide raised markings in the panel to the left of the floor and control buttons.
Letters and numbers shall be a minimum of 5/8 inch and raised .03 inch and
shall be in contrasting color to the call buttons. Plates if used, shall be stud
wir
mounted and recessed flush with car station or as approved by the Architect.
4. The centerline of the hall pushbutton station shall be 42" above the floor.
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS
014240-37
M
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL
BH+A Project No. 2883 am
Northampton,MA
C. Fixture Schedule ow
1. All hall and car fixtures shall be selected from the manufacturer's premium line
of fixtures. ow
2. Main Car Station:
a. Stainless steel with No. 4 finish, swing front return type with only push
buttons protruding.
3. Car Position Indicators aw
a. Provide 2" high liquid crystal or LED indicators with direction arrows,
integral with car operating panel. No
4. Car and Hall Call Buttons
a. As selected by Architect and Engineer 40
5. Hall Lanterns
a. Typical floor hall lantern shall be the manufacturer's standard LED or
liquid crystal 2 1/2" high arrows having illuminating side bars for 180
degree viewing angle. Style as selected by Architect and Engineer op
D. Fixture Attachment,Finish and Design
1. Graphics shall be selected by the Architect.
2. Refer to drawings for other design requirements. Where no special design is
shown the faceplates shall be as follows: w�
3. Where key-operated switch and or key operated cylinder locks are famished in
conjunction with any component of the installation, four keys for each
individual switch or lock shall be furnished, stamped or permanently tagged to
indicate function. Key switch cylinder finishes shall match faceplate finish.
4. All caution signs, code mandated instructions and directives shall be engraved w
and filled with epoxy.
2.8 PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Performance Requirements
1. The elevators shall be adjusted to meet the following performance requirements;
a. Speed: within 95 to 105%of rated speed under any loading condition.
b. Leveling: within 1/4"under any loading condition.
014240-36
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS
OR
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
w Northampton,MA
ow 7. Hall Call Stations
Provide up and down buttons at intermediate landings and a single button at
W each terminal floor. Include firefighter key switch and associated firefighter
instructions in the main lobby level station as well as all required switches and
wording for Code Blue operation.
" All hall stations shall be equipped with a digital position indicator showing car
location and direction of travel. Minimum character height shall be 1'/z-inches.
8. Hall Lanterns
Provide a visual and audible signal at each entrance to indicate which car shall
stop in response to the hall call.
The lanterns with up and down indications at intermediate landings and a single
indication at each terminal landing shall sound once for the up direction and
'w twice for the down direction. The lantern shall have an electronic chime with
adjustable sound volume.
Provide adjustable signal time (3 to 10 seconds, with 1 second increments) to
notify passengers which car shall answer the hall call.
B. Emergency Lighting Fixture
1. Provide a self-powered emergency lighting system in the elevator car, consisting
of light fixture(s), alarm bell and a power pack unit
2. Provide nickel cadmium or Lithium Batteries and a charger and mount the
power pack on top of car.
�w
3. Arrange for completely automatic operation when normal power is interrupted.
4. Provide a test button and indicator light in the car station service cabinet.
5. Unit shall provide continuous illumination and mechanical ventilation for at
least four(4)hours and one(1)hour alarm bell operation,
6. The operation shall be completely automatic upon failure of normal power
supply. Unit shall be connected to normal power supply for car lights and
40 arranged to be energized at all times. It automatically recharges battery after
use.
so 7. Arrange two of the cab light fixtures to operate as the emergency light system.
8. A 6" diameter alarm bell with a sound output of between, 80-90 dBa(measured
from a distance of 10") shall be mounted on top of the elevator car. Activation
of this bell shall be controlled by the ALARM button in the car operating station
which shall illuminate when pressed.
ow
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 014240-35
.r
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
C. An auto-dial telephone complying with ADA requirements. Provide a
visual "call acknowledged" indicator with an engraved "When lit help is .�
on the way" message. The perforated hole pattern in swing front return
panel shall be as approved by the Architect.
f. The locked service cabinet shall be flush and contain the key switches
required to operate and maintain the elevator, including, but not limited
to:
1) Independent service switch
2) Light switch
3) Fan switch
4) 110 volt GFCI duplex receptacle
5) A port for hand-held service tool
6) Emergency light test button
7) Dimmer for cab lights
g. Three (3) position key-operated firefighter switch, call cancel button and
illuminated visual/audible signal system.
h. Engraved and epoxy filled elevator capacity, elevator number, "No
Smoking", and warning and caution messages as required by the Code.
i. Inspection Certificate/ Engraved "Inspection Certificate is on File in
Building Manager's Office Room.No. " sign.
j. Car position indicator without a separate faceplate
k. A floor passing signal on/off button
5. Car Position Indicator
The position of the car in the hoistway shall be indicated by the illumination of
the position indicator numeral corresponding to the floor at which the car has
stopped'or is passing. .�
a. The position indicator shall have illuminated direction arrows to indicate the
direction of travel
ON
6. Car and Hall Call Buttons
a. The buttons shall become individually illuminated as they are pressed and
extinguished as the calls are answered
(1) The call buttons shall have LED call registered lights.
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 014240 -34
40
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
6. Provide manufacturer's standard oil cooler sized and designed to maintain an
maximum oil temperature of 100 degrees F.
7. Provide a thermostatically controlled heater in the oil tank to maintain proper
operating oil temperature.
D. Piping
1. Provide all necessary pipes and fittings to connect the power unit to the jack.
Use minimum Schedule SO steel pipe. A shut off valve shall be provided in the
machine room for maintaining and a blowout-proof muffler shall be installed in
the pipe line for substantially quiet operation.
2. The oil pipe and conduit shall be overhead above suspended ceiling.
a. Exact location must be coordinated with other trades.
b. For pipe hangers use spring hangers Type 30 of Mason Industries. Inc. or
approved equal.
C. Provide neoprene isolation pads between the pipe and the hangers.
3. Adequately support the full run of pipe with isolation type support.
E. Mainline Strainer
00 1. Provide a mainline strainer of the self-cleaning, compact type, equipped with a
40 mesh element and installed in the oil line. Design the unit for 600 psi
working pressure.
on
2.7 FIXTURES
no A. Main Car Operating Panel
1. Provide a main car operating panel on the inside return front panel of each car.
2. The call buttons provided for each floor served shall cause the car to travel to
the floor on momentary pressure of the call button. The call buttons shall
become individually illuminated as they are pressed. The button lights shall be
extinguished as the calls are answered.
The panel shall include:
w.
a. A call button for each floor served
b. Door open button/door close button
c. "Alarm"button
d. "Emergency Stop"button
40
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 014240 -33
so
WS
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883 do
Northampton,MA
8. Microprocessor Documentation:
am
a. Elevator Contractor shall provide and/or obtain complete information on
systems' design, component parts, installation and/or modification
procedures, adjusting procedures and associated computer conceptual 00
logic circuitry and field connection.
b. Provide fully detailed and annotated computer printouts of each program
utilized in the project after final acceptance by Owner and Consultant
C. Provide microprocessor upgrading and/or modifications to programs that
have been designed to enhance the operation of the equipment for a *■
period of 10 years after project approval.
C. Power Unit
1. Provide a self-contained power unit It shall include: a structural steel outer base,
including tank supports; an oil tight drip pan; a floating inner base so that there
is no metallic contact for mounting the motor pump assembly; sound isolation
panels to enclose the unit and reduce airborne noises.
2. Provide a reinforced overhead oil reservoir with a tight fitting tank over the oil
control unit. Included in the reservoir shall be an oil fill strainer with air filter,
oil temperature gauge, oil level gauge assembly, and a self-cleaning strainer in
the suction line.
3. Design the pump for oil hydraulic elevator service. It shall be of the positive
displacement screw type inherently designed for steady discharge with
minimum pulsation and will give smooth quiet operation.
4. The drive shall be by multiple V-Belts and sheaves or directly driven by a �+
submersible pump,
5. The oil control unit shall be of the manufacturer's own design but shall include
relief, safety check, start and slow down valves.
a. Use lowering and leveling valves for drop away speed, lowering speed,
leveling speed and stopping speed to insure smooth down starts and
stops.
b. Provide a valve for manual lowering of the elevator car in event of power
failure and for use in servicing and adjusting the elevator mechanism.
C. Design the tank shut-off valve for isolating oil in the power unit tank to
ensure each of servicing and adjusting the elevator mechanism without
removing oil from the tank.
d All valves shall be accessible for adjustment All adjustment shall be
made without removing the assembly from the oil line.
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 014240-32
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
elevator in case of phase reversal, phase failure or low voltage in the power
► supply.
2. A selector shall be provided which will perform all functions incidental to the
40 control system which relates to the position and movement of the car in the
hoistway.
3. All controller wiring shall be neatly formed and tied. The wiring on the back of
" the panel shall be of the flame-resistant type. The terminals are to have suitable
indelible means of identification to facilitate testing and repair. The
identification markings shall be coordinated with identical markings on the
wiring diagrams. All leads,' except the control and signal circuits, shall be
provided with either solder or solderless lugs. Control and signals wires shall be
brought to accessible washer type or soldered terminals or studs.
4. All leads, except the control and signal circuits, shall be provided with either
solder or solderless lugs. Control and signal wires shall be brought to
accessible washer type or solderless terminals or studs.
5. Provide a solid state starter for the pump motor with soft-start.
6. The elevator control system shall be provided with diagnostic capabilities for
trouble-shooting and monitoring systems operation. As depicted by means of a
touch-screen LCD display.
a. Car and corridor calls that currently exist within the system
b. Elevator operating status.
c. Elevator position and direction of travel.
d. The open/close status of elevator doors.
e. The current operational status of each CPU input and output.
7. In the event diagnostics and monitoring is accomplished via Field Service
Tools, provide the required Field Service Tools with related control system
appurtenances for diagnostic evaluations, system monitoring and field
■r
adjustments.
a. Instructions for proper use of such diagnostic tools and/or equipment
shall be provided with all coding and other operational requirements,
b. Diagnostic tools, instructions and/or other material provided shall be
maintained by the installation contractor, updated and calibrated under
r the service agreement Should the agreement be canceled for any reason
by either party, maintenance and updating of diagnostic tools shall be
provided to the Owner at the Contractor's cost plus established profit
40 margin, based on the mechanic's hourly wage charge. The Owner may
request field and technical instruction be provided by the original
installation contractor or manufacturer for proper servicing by other
qualified elevator company personnel. The established cost plus profit,
00 as previously specified, shall be applicable for the life of the new
systems provided.
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 014240 -31
an
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
passengers. The elevator shall remain parked with its doors closed and door
open button operative until normal power is restored.
2. The control panel shall be located in the machine room. Include two (2) gel
batteries, solid-state controls, charger, monitor lights and a test button and shall
be fed by a 120 volt, 20 Ampere branch or circuit from the emergency power
source provided under Division 16.
a. When normal power is restored, the elevator shall return to normal "
service only after the completion of the automatic lowering operation
b. Provide a test button in the control panel to simulate this operation. �*
G. Security Features Feature
1. Provide an in-car digital card reader tied into the Building Security System for
authentication and access control. Floor lockout feature for the elevators shall
prevent registration of car calls to floors "locked out" as identified and
authenticated by building security system.
2. Provide a digital card reader either adjacent to or integral to the hall station at
the lobby level of all cars and the second floor of the freight car. Digital card
reader shall be tied into the Building Security System for authentication and
access control. Hall Call lockout feature for the elevators shall prevent
registration of hall calls to floors "locked out" as identified and authenticated by
building security system.
3. Fire service and medical emergency service shall override the floor lockout
feature.
4. Elevator contractor shall be responsible for providing all required devices and
components required for interfacing with building security system as well as all
required configuration, programming, and interfacing with the elevator
controller and controller manufacturer.
2.6 MACHINE ROOM EQUIPMENT
A. Pump Motors
1. Provide an alternating current induction motor, maximum speed of 1800 RPM,
(80/ 120 starts]per hour, continuous rated, 500 C temperature rise. *
B. Controller and Selector
1. The controller shall be designed to give service as herein specified. The
controller shall be the generic type, microprocessor or programmable controller-
based unit mounted in a NEMA Type 1 enclosure. The controller shall be
designed to control the starting acceleration, deceleration and stopping of the
elevator and to prevent damage to the motor from overload or excessive current.
A relay shall be provided, as required, designed to prevent the operation of the
w.
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 014240 -30
4"
' "" KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
emergency stop switch has been thrown, provided there is no interruption of power to
XV the elevator
G. Protective Device
Should a hydraulic elevator stall due to motor starter failure, low oil condition, or the
elevator failing to reach the target landing in the up direction, protective device shall
automatically return the elevator to the bottom landing, open the door and shut down the
4s system.
E. Sound Reducing Protection
When operating per plans and specifications, the elevator equipment shall not generate
noise levels in excess of NC-40 in occupied tenant spaces and shall be free of pure tones.
For the purpose of this specification, a pure tone shall be defined as a sound level in any
one-third octave band which is greater than 5 dB above both adjacent one-third octave
bands, in the range 45 to 11,200 Hz. Provide the following treatments as a minimum.
a. Mount sound insulating panels, manufactured of reinforced 16 gauge steel
panels with a 1" thick 1-1/2 lbs. core of fiberglass affixed to interior, on all four
open sides of the power unit frame to isolate airborne noise from belt driven
motor-pump assembly.
b. Install a minimum of two sound isolating couplings in the oil line in the
machine room between pump and jack. Each coupling shall consist of two (2)
machined flanges separated by two (2)neoprene seals to absorb vibration and to
positively prevent metal-to-metal contact in the oil line. Build coupling in such
a manner that they will be absolutely blow-out proof.
C. Install an oil-hydraulic muffler in oil line near power unit. The mufflers contain
pulsation absorbing material inserted in a
aA, blow-out proof housing, arranged for inspecting interior parts without removing
unit from oil line. Rubber hose without
blow-out proof features will not be acceptable.
d. Provide sound reducing vibration isolation elements at all support points of
elevator controllers and pump units. The elements shall be similar to double
deflection neoprene-in-shear mounts, as manufactured by Mason Industries. All
bolts through isolation elements, where necessary, are to incorporate resilient
washers and bushings.
e. Locate the power unit at least 1" from any walls.
f. Use flexible conduit with ground wire for pump unit connections.
F. Auto Lowering
1. Provide automatic battery powered lowering feature for the elevator. In the case
of normal power outage, an emergency operation shall be activated, lowering
me car to the lowest landing. The doors shall open automatically to discharge
ws
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 014240 -29
40
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
floor where only an up hall call has been registered unless the stop for that floor
is in response to a registered car call, or unless the up call is at the lowest floor
for which any call has been registered.
4. When the car has responded to the highest or lowest call, and calls are registered
for the opposite direction, the car shall reverse direction automatically and
respond to those registered calls.
5. When the car arrives at its last Stop and reverses direction of travel, all
previously registered car calls shall be automatically cancelled.
6. When the car has responded to the highest or lowest call, and the hall calls are
registered for the opposite direction,the car shall reverse direction automatically
and respond to those registered calls,
7. When the car arrives at a landing where both up and down hall calls are
registered, it will answer the call in the direction of travel. If no car call is
registered, the car shall be assigned to respond to call registered for opposite
directions; car doors shall close immediately, re-open and respond to the call.
Hall lantern operation shall always correspond to direction of service,
8. When an empty car reverses direction at a landing with no hall calls, doors shall + +
not open and hall lantern shall not operate.
9. If the car has no car calls registered and arrives at a floor where both up and
down hall calls have been registered, the car shall respond to the hall call
corresponding to the direction of car travel. If,after making its stop,a car call is
not registered and no other hall calls exist ahead of the car corresponding to its
original direction of travel, the doors shall close and immediately reopen in
response to the hall call for the opposite direction.
10. The car shall maintain its original direction at each stop until the doors are fully �*
closed to permit a passenger to register a car call before the car reverses its
direction of travel.
E. Independent Service
L Arrange elevator controls to permit the car to be removed from the group system
and to operate in response to car calls only. The door shall not close until car
button for another landing is pressed. Activation of this service shall be from a
key switch in the car station service panel.
F. Automatic Releveling
Equip the elevator with a floor leveling device which shall automatically bring the car to
a stop within 1/4" of floor with any floor for which a stop has been initiated, regardless
of load or direction of travel. Provide an automatic releveling device which shall be
arranged to automatically return the elevator to the floor in the event the elevator should
creep down a predetermined distance below floor level. This device shall be operative at
all floors served,whether the hoistway door or car door is open or closed, or whether the
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 014240-28
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
C. Modular design to permit on board test operation and replacement of all
eW circuit board without removing the complete unit.
d. Controls to shut down the elevator when the unit fails to operate
properly.
E. Jack Units
Design and construct the jack unit in accordance with the applicable requirements of the
ASME Code. It shall be of sufficient size to lift the gross load at the rated speed to the
height specified and shall be factory tested to ensure adequate strength and freedom from
leakage. No brittle material, such as grey cast iron, shall be used in the jack
construction.
The jack unit shall consist o£
a. A plunger of heavy seamless steel tubing turned smooth and true to ±15
inches tolerance, and with no diameter change greater than.04 inches per
foot of length.
b. A stop ring electrically welded to the plunger to prevent plunger leaving
■w its cylinder.
c. Internal guide bearing,
d. Cylinder head with removable packing gland to facilitate replacement of
packing.
e. A drip ring below cylinder head to collect oil.
f. A bleeder valve to release gases from the system.
2.5 CONTROL EQUIPMENT AND FEATURES
A. Simplex Selective Collective Operation
1. Provide simplex selective collective operation from a riser of hall push button
stations.
2. The registration of one or more car calls shall dispatch the car to the designated
floors in the order in which the floors are reached by the car, irrespective of the
sequence in which the calls were registered. The car shall also respond to
registered hall calls in the same direction of travel. Car and hall calls shall be
canceled when answered.
3. When traveling in the up direction, the car shall stop at floors for which car call
or up hall calls have been registered. It shall not stop at floors where a down
hall call only has been registered,unless the stop for that floor is in response to a
registered car call, or unless the down hall call is at the highest floor for which
any tall has been registered. Likewise, a down traveling car shall not stop at a
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 014240-27
w
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
4. Platform shall be provided with vibration isolation pads. The support frame
shall carry rubber pads on which the platforms shall rest without any connection
to the steel frame.
5. Recess the elevator platforms to receive finished flooring as selected by the
Architect.
6. Allow for an 8'-0" overall cab height and a 7-6" clear cab height for the elevator.
D. Door Operation
1. Mount a high speed operator with a minimum of 1/2 HP motor on top of car to .�
operate the car and hoistway door simultaneously.
2. The door shall operate smoothly without a slam during both opening and closing
cycles. Door velocity shall be adjustable and continuously monitored to
maintain minimum floor-to-floor performances and door operation times.
3. Use a spirator to automatically close the hoistway door if the car, for any reason,
leaves the landing zone.
4. The car and the hoistway doors shall open as the car stops at the landing and
close before the car can leave the floor.
5. Door Contact: Equip the car door with an electric contact, which will prevent
operation of the car, unless the car door is in the closed position. The door
contacts shall not be readily accessible from the inside of the car.
6. Nudging: If the doors are held open for a predetermined time (15 to 20 seconds;
individually adjustable) by interrupting the light rays/detector field, or by
holding the door, or by pressing the door open button, a buzzer will sound and
the doors shall start to close at a gentle slow speed.
7. Detector Edge: Provide an infrared curtain door protection system on all cars,
the doors shall be prevented from closing from an open position if a person
interrupts any one or more beams within the curtain. As the doors are closing,
if a person interrupts a light beam the door shall reverse, reopen and reclose
after a predetermined time causing both the car and corridor doors to reverse.
The doors shall start to close when the protection system is free of any
obstruction. The infrared curtain protective system shall have:
a. Height of protective field shall extend from 1 1/2 " above the car
threshold to a height of 68". •.
b. Where horizontal infra-red light beam system is used:
- A minimum of 40 light beams
- Accurately positioned infrared lights to conform to the
requirements of the applicable handicapped code.
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 014240-26
OR
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
we Northampton,MA
,� 4. Use skid mounted drill rig where access is limited in existing structure.
5. Include removal of spoils, dirt and debris.
2.4 MOVING HOISTWAY EQUIPMENT
A. Top of Car Station
1. Mount an inspection station on top of car. This device shall be activated by a switch
"a located in car operating panel and shall include:
a. Up and down direction buttons
b. A stop switch
w c. A 110 volt GFCI duplex receptacle
d. A work light with wire guard and a'off-"on" switch.
1' 2. When the station is operational all operating devices in the cab shall be
inoperative.
B. Guide Shoes
1. Provide roller guide shoes with adjustable mounting base, rigidly bolted to the
top and bottom of each side of the car frame.
a. Roller guides shall consist pf a set of sound reducing neoprene wheels in
precision bearings held in contact with the three finished rail surfaces by
adjustable stabilizing springs.
b. The bearings shall be provided with grease fittings for lubrication. c.
Equip roller guides with adjustable stops to control postwise float d. Fit
the top car roller guides with galvanized, 16 gauge steel guards.
2. Approved manufacturers: ELSCO Model B or approved equal.
C. Car Frame and Platform
1. The car frame shall be made of steel members, with a factor of safety as
required by the ASME Code. The car platform shall consist of a steel frame with
necessary steel stringers, all securely welded together. The frame and platform
shall be so braced and reinforced that no strain will be transmitted to the
elevator car.
2. Provide platform with two (2) layers of 3/4" thick marine grade plywood. Cover
the underside of the car platform with sheet steel.
3. Provide narrow extruded aluminum thresholds having non-slip surface, guide
grooves.
40
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 014240 -25
M
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
14. Dust Covers: Provide 14 gauge steel dust covers to extend 6 inches above any .�
header not protected by fascia. The dust covers shall extend to a full width of
travel of the doors, return to the hoistway wall at a 15 degree angle and be firmly
fastened.
H. Scavenger Pump
1. Provide a positive displacement, rotary type pump for the hydraulic elevators.
The pump shall have a discharge pressure of 200 psi maximum and capacity of
10 gallons per hour,
2. The pump shall be self-priming and self-lubricating. The pump shall be equipped
with a 100 mesh screen strainer.
3. The pump housing shall be constructed of brass with stainless steel internal parts.
4. Mount oil return pump off the pit floor, and connect it to the jack unit and the oil "r
tank with copper tubing.
L Hoistway Access Switch
1. Install a cylindrical type keyed switch at top terminal in order to permit the car to
be moved at slow speed with the doors open to allow authorized persons to .R
obtain access to the top of the car.
2. Where there is no separate pit access door, a similar switch shall be installed at
the lowest landing in order to permit the car to be moved away from the landing
with the doors open in order to gain access to the pit.
3. Locate the switch in the terminal floor entrance jambs without faceplate at a aw
height of 78 inches above the finished floor or at an elevation as directed by the
Architect.
no
4. This switch is to be of the continuous pressure spring-return type, and shall be
operated by a cylinder-type lock having not less than a five. (5) pin or five (5)
disc combination with the key removable only in the "OFF" position. The lock
shall not be operable by any key which operates locks or devices used for other
purposes in the building and shall be available to and used only by inspectors,
maintenance men and repairmen.
J. Jack Hole
1. Drill the jack hole by rotary drill. No hammer drilling or blasting shall be
allowed.
2. Provide a drill casing during the drilling.
3. Install a Schedule 40 PVC waterproof casing with a 6" wide PVC Waterstop ring
to be cast into the pit floor. Cap the waterproof casing until ready to be used.
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 014240 -24
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
3. Entrances shall bear 1'/z hour UL label.
4. Provide each door panel with two removable laminated plastic composition
guides, arranged to run in sill grooves with a minimum clearance. The guide
mounting shall permit their replacement without removing the door from the
hangers. A steel fire stop shall be encased in each guide.
5. Provide the leading edge of door panels with continuous black rubber astragal
bumper strips. The strips shall be relatively inconspicuous when the doors are
closed and shall be easily replaced. Provide rubber bumpers at the top and
bottom of the door to stop them at their limit of travel in opening direction.
6. Sills - Provide narrow extruded aluminum sills with the nosing approximately
one (1) inch deep and running the full length of door travel. The sills shall be at
least 3/8 inch thick. The wearing surface shall be of a non-slip type with the door
guide grooves providing a minimum clearance for the guides.
a. Provide and rigidly secure sill support angles to the building structure after
blocking and leveling them with necessary metal shimming.
7. Provide a special key so that an authorized person can open any landing door
when the car is elsewhere. The key hole shall be fitted with metal ferrule that
matches the door finish.
In 8. Struts: Struts shall be hot rolled steel angles not lighter than
3" x 3" x 1/4" or shall be formed of sheet steel having a section module and
moment of inertia not less than that of 3"x 3"x 1/4" steel angle. Extend the struts
from top of sill to either the bottom of floor framing or intermediate framing
' above. Bolt struts in place with not less than two (2)bolts at each end. Strut clip
angles or brackets shall have a thickness not less than the thickness of the
supported strut
9. Track Support: 3/16 inch thick steel track support plate shall extend between and
be bolted to the vertical steel struts with no less than two (2)bolts at each end.
10. Track Covers: 14 gauge steel coverplates shall extend the full travel of the doors.
Covers shall be made in sections for service access to hangers, sheaves, tracks
and interlocks. The sections above the door opening shall be movable from
no within the elevator car. Cover fastening devices shall be non-removable from
the cover.
11. Fascias: 14 gauge steel fascia plates shall extend at least the full width of the
door and be secured at hanger support and sill with oval head machine screws.
12. Provide fascia plates where the clearance between the edge of the loading side of
' the platform and the inside face of the hoistway enclosure exceeds the code
allowed clearance.
on 13. Toe Guards: Provide 14 gauge steel toe guards to extend 12 inches below any sill
not protected by fascia. The toe guards shall extend the full width of the door and
shall return to the hoistway wall at a 15 degree angle and be firmly fastened.
4M
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 014240-23
on
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
2. Provide emergency terminal speed limiting devices to ensure that the plunger
does not strike its stop ring at more than 100 fpm. •■
3. The terminal stopping devices shall have rollers with rubber or other approved
composition tread to provide silent operation when actuated by the fixed cam in
the hoistway.
D. Interlocks,Contacts and Unlocking Devices
1. Equip each elevator hoistway door with a positive interlock which shall prevent
the operation of the elevator unless all elevator doors are closed and maintained
closed when elevator is away from the landing. The interlocks shall also prevent .�
the opening of a hoistway door from the landing side unless the car is within the
landing zone and is either stopped or being stopped at that level. Design
interlocks so that they are not easily accessible from the landing side.
2. Provide electric contacts on top emergency exit [and governor access panel
(if roped application) to prevent the operation of the elevator when the electric
contacts are not closed
E. Hoistway/Car Door Hangers, Sheaves and Tracks
1. Provide a sheave type two-point suspension hanger and track for each hoistway
and car door. Sheaves shall be hardened steel with polyurethane tire,not less than
3 1/4 inches in diameter with sealed grease packed precision ball bearing.
2. The upthrust shall be taken by a roller mounted on the hanger and arranged to
ride on the underside of the track.
3. The track shall be of formed cold rolled steel or cold drawn steel and shall be
rounded on the track surface to receive the hanger sheaves. The track shall be
removable and shall not be integral with the header.
F. Stop Switches
1. Provide a readily accessible switch for stopping and maintaining the elevator out of
service in pit, on top of car, and if required by Code, in car operating panel
G. Hoistway Entrance Structure 40
1. Frames-The frames shall be constructed of 14 gauge sheet steel.
a. Provide steel with baked enamel unit frame with welded and mitered corners
ground smooth,2" wide square profile.
2. Doors - Provide steel with baked enamel finish doors. The doors shall be
constructed of 16 gauge sheet steel, not less than 1-1/4" thick, reinforced to
accept hangers, interlocks or door closers. Equip all hoistway landing doors with
one-piece full height non-vision wings of material and finish to match hall side of
door panels.
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 014240-22
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
2.3 FIXED HOISTWAY EQUIPMENT
A. Guide Rails, Inserts and Brackets
1. Provide machined, standard size steel T section guide rails with tongue and
grooved joints. Use not less than 15.0 pound rails.
2. Use not less than 3/4"thick machined steel fishplates to form rail joints. Connect
tails to fishplate with four(4)bolts.
IF 3. For concrete and concrete block hoistways furnish rail brackets and provide
inserts and an insert location drawing to Construction Manager or General
Contractor
on 4. Brackets shall be used to support the rails from the hoistway framing and/or
inserts. The rails shall be attached to the brackets by heavy clamps or clips.
Bolting or welding rails to brackets shall only be allowed in certain instances. Do
not attach brackets to the top flange of hoistway framing steel.
5. Provide rail backing where the vertical distance between support framing is
greater than 14'-0" and less than 16-0" no intermediate support framing is shown
on the drawing.
6. Rail support beams will be as shown on structural drawings. Provide any
additional structural support required for the installation of the elevators.
7. Provide oversized steel members and brackets for the rails where the distances
exceed the manufacturers standard dimensions.
B. Buffers
1. Provide spring type buffers. The buffers shall comply in with the requirements of
the ASME Code. Support buffers from the pit floor with all required blocking
and Steadying steel members.
2. The buffers shall be tested by a qualified testing laboratory and
approved as complying with the ASME Code. The buffers marking plates shall
be permanent and legible indicating the manufacture's name, identification
number and stroke.
3. Coordinate the installation of the pit ladder with the Architect and Construction
Manager.
C. Normal and Final Terminal Stopping Devices
1. Provide normal terminal stopping devices to stop the car automatically from any
speed obtained under normal operation within the top and bottom overtravels
independent of the operating devices, final terminal stopping device and the
buffers.
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 014240-21
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
C Pass/Freight Elevator: PF-3 (Freight Car)
I. Quantity: One(1)hydraulic elevator with standard in-ground jack unit
2. Type: Automatic Passenger/Freight
3. Capacity (lbs.): 8,000
4. Speed(fpm): 80
5. Travel in feet: 14'-0" (t)
6. Number of Landings: Two (2)
7. Number of Openings: Two(2)
8. Front: Two (2)
9. Rear: None
10. Operation: Simplex selective collective
11. Control: AC for hydraulics
12. Number of: One (1)
Pushbutton Risers
13. Platform size: 7'-0" wide x 10'-0"deep (clear inside of cab)
14 Guide rails: Steel tees-Provide rail backing as required
15. Buffers: Spring
16. Cab: As further specified
17. Car door size: T-0"wide x 7-0"high
18. Hoistway door size: Same as car
19. Door operation: Quad Speed Center Parting,Full Car Width
20. Fixture and signals: As further specified
21. Machine type: Tandem Gear Non-Submerged Hydraulic Pump
22. Pump Location: Remote(see Architectural Drawings)
23. Power Supply: 480 Volt, 3 Phase, 60 Hz.
24. Pit Depth: 2'-10"(min)
25. Overhead: 10'-9"(max)
26. Emergency: FER Phase I&11
Operations Medical Code Blue
27. Security Lock-Outs: As further specified
w
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 014240 -20
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
B Passenger Elevator: PE-2 (Tower Car)
1. Quantity: One(1)hydraulic elevator with standard in-ground jack unit
2. Type: Passenger
3. Capacity(lbs.): 3,500
4. Speed(fpm): 100
5. Travel in feet: 52'-4" (f)
6. Number of Landings: Four(4)
7. Number of Openings: Four(4)
8. Front: Four(4)
9. Rear: None
10. Operation: Simplex selective collective
11. Control: AC for hydraulics
W 12. Number of: One(1)
Pushbutton Risers
13. Platform size: 8'-0"wide x 6'-2" deep(clear inside of cab)
14 Guide rails: Steel tees-Provide rail backing as required
15. Buffers: Spring
"'. 16. Cab: As further specified
17. Car door size: 6'-0"wide x 7-0"high
18. Hoistway door size: Same as car
19. Door operation: Two Speed Center Parting
!�* 20. Fixture and signals: As further specified
21. Machine type: Submerged Hydraulic Pump
■w 22. Pump Location: Remote(see Architectural Drawings)
23. Power Supply: 480 Volt, 3 Phase, 60 Hz.
24. Pit Depth: 2'-10"(min)
25. Overhead: 10'-9"(max)
W 26. Emergency: FER Phase I& II
Operations Medical Code Blue
27. Security Lock-Outs: As further specified
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 014240- 19
00
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
2.2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
A Passenger Elevator: PE-1 (Lobby Car)
1. Quantity: One(1)hydraulic elevator with standard in-ground jack unit
2. Type: Passenger
3. Capacity (lbs.): 2,500
4. Speed(fpm): 100
5. Travel in feet: 14'-0" (f)
6. Number of Landings: Two (2)
7. Number of Openings: Two (2) ,e►
8. Front: Two (2)
9. Rear: None ,
10. Operation: Simplex selective collective
11. Control: AC for hydraulics
12. Number of: One(1)
Pushbutton Risers
13. Platform size: 7'-0" wide x 5'-1" deep(clear inside of cab)
14 Guide rails: Steel tees-Provide rail backing as required
15. Buffers: Spring
16. Cab: As further specified
17. Car door size: 5'-0"wide x 7-0"high +*
18. Hoistway door size: Same as car
19. Door operation: Single Speed Center Parting ,
20. Fixture and signals: As further specified
21. Machine type: Submerged Hydraulic Pump
22. Pump Location: Remote (see Architectural Drawings)
23. Power Supply: 480 Volt, 3 Phase, 60 Hz.
24. Pit Depth: 2'-10"(min)
25. Overhead: 10'-9"(max)
26. Emergency: FER Phase I& 11
Operations Medical Code Blue
27. Security Lock-Outs: As further specified
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 014240- 18
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
w A. General
1. Cold-rolled Sheet Steel Sections;ASTM A366
2. Rolled Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A786
3. Steel Supports and Reinforcement: ASTM A36
4. Aluminum-alloy Rolled Tread Plate: ASTM B632
5. Stainless Steel:ASTM A167 Type 302 or 304
6. Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A276
on 7. Bronze Sheet ASTM B36 (36M)alloy UNS No. C2800(Mentz)
8. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B221
on 9. Bronze Extrusions: ASTM B455
10. Nickel Silver Extrusions: ASTM B 151
11. PVC pipe: ASTM D 178 5
we
12. PVC Pipe Fittings: ASTM D2466
13. Cement for PVC Pipe and Fittings:ASTM D2564
B. Material Finishes
1. Satin Finish: No. 4 satin,random finish, long grain
*A" 2. Mirror Finish: No. 8 non-directional mirror polished
3. Sheet Steel
a. Shop Prime: Factory-applied baked on coat of mineral filler and primer
b. Finish Paint: Two coats of low sheen baked enamel, color as selected by the
Architect
c. Steel Equipment: Two coats of manufacturer's standard rust-inhibiting paint
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 014240- 17
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
1.15 BIDDING REQUIREMENTS
A. Bidders shall include a list of project references for a minimum of five(5) similar projects completed
in the last two(2)years. Include Owner contact information.
B. No Otis, Kone, Schindler or Thyssen-Krupp branded elevator equipment may be used as the basis for
bid without prior written authorization of the Engineer.
C. Bidders shall include a statement with their bid that they can satisfy all requirements of this
specification without any .need for a Code variance from the Elevator Safety Division to fully
comply with 524 CNIR or ANSIIASME A17.1.
.w,
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 014240 - 16
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
D. Furnish three (3) sets of complete and legible "as-built" field wiring diagrams, layouts
and straight line diagrams showing the electrical connections, functions, and sequence of
operation of
E. Submit a written statement with the bid that the above design loads are acceptable for the
proposed elevator equipment
F. If, after the award, changes in the structural, mechanical and electrical systems are
required due to the type of elevator equipment provided, the Contractor shall be
responsible for all additional design and construction costs.
1.14 PAINTING&FINISHES
A. No less than two (2) coats of rust inhibiting machinery enamel shall be applied to
exposed ferrous metal surfaces in both the hoistway and pit that do not have a galvanized,
anodized,baked enamel,or special architectural finishes.
w B. Prior to seeking final acceptance of the completed work as specified by the Contract
Documents, apply two (2) coats of rust inhibiting enamel paint to the elevator machinery
located within the machine room including the machine room floor.
C. All equipment including buffers, crosshead, safety plank, machine, controller, drive,
governor, disconnect switch, etc., shall be identified by 4" high numerals which shall
contrast with the background to which it is applied. The identification shall be either
decalcomania or stencil type.
D. Paint or provide decal-type floor designation not less than six inches high on hoistway
doors (hoistway side), fascias and/or walls as required by A17.1, Rule 100.7 at intervals
not exceeding T-0". The color of paint used shall contrast with the color of the surfaces to
which it is applied
on
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 014240 - 15
ee�
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
1.11 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AMD TEMPORARY CONTROLS
ee.
A. Comply with the requirements of Division 1.
B. Delivery, Storage and Handling
eue
1. Deliver materials to the site ready for use in, the accepted manufacturer's original
and unopened containers and packaging, bearing labels as to type of material,
brand name and manufacturer's name. Delivered materials shall be identical to
accepted samples.
2. Store materials under cover in a dry and clean location, off the ground Remove
delivered materials which are damaged or otherwise not suitable for installation
from the job site and replace with acceptable materials.
C. Temporary Elevator
1. All equipment shall be restored to a "like new" condition at the Contractor's expense
prior to acceptance of the work by the Construction Manager.
1.12 CONTRACT CLOSE-OUT
A. Comply with the requirements of Division 1.
B. Guarantee and Warranties: w
1. Warrant the equipment installed under these specifications against defects in
material and workmanship and correct any defects not due to ordinary wear and
tear or improper use or car which may develop within one year from the date
each elevator is completed and placed in permanent operation and accepted by
the Owner and Construction Manger. Warranty period shall be deemed to start
when the last unit of the contract is placed into service.
2. This warrantee shall be written and issued at the completion of each unit prior to
final payment.
net
1.13 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Comply with the requirements of Division 1 1111,
B. Furnish neatly bound instructions giving the method of control and operation, together
with data on all switches, relays and other devices as will be needed for serving and for
ordering replacements. '
C. Furnish bound instructions and recommendations for maintenance, with special reference
to lubrication and lubricants. +r
eeee
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 014240- 14
eee►
go
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
OR Northampton,MA
Check pivot points, sheaves, guides and track for wear.
sr
Lubricate guide shoe stems.
Check governor and tape tension sheave fastenings.
For bi-parting doors, clean chains, tracks and sheaves, lubricate as required. Check door
contacts.
Check fastenings and operation of door checks, interlocks, clean and lubricate pivot points as
required.
Annually
Thoroughly clean car and counterweight guide rails using a nonflammable or high flash point
solvent to remove lint,dust and excess lubricant.
Remove, clean and lubricate brake cores on brakes, clean linings, if necessary and inspect for
wear. Correct excess wear and adjust.
Inspect motor generator and hoist motor armatures and rotor clearance. Check motor and
MG set connection and lubricate in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
Drain, flush and refill oil reservoirs of each hoisting motor and motor generator.
Check and reset, if necessary, all brushes for neutral settings, proper quartering and spacing
on commutators.
Group supervisory control systems where installed shall be checked out. The system's
dispatching, scheduling and emergency service features shall be tested and adjusted in
accordance with manufacturer's literature.
OR
Safety Inspection and Tests
All service and repair work shall be performed in compliance with the American National Standard
Safety Code for Elevators, Escalators and Moving Walks, and shall be subject to safety inspection
by the Owner and/or their representatives. Periodic inspection of the elevator as required by the
ASME Al 7.1 Code and local jurisdictions shall be performed by the contractor. The contractor
shall provide personnel who are familiar with the equipment to perform tests. The contractor shall
periodically examine and test all safety devices. He shall make formal safety tests and inspections
as required and outlined in the ASME A17.1 Code. The tests shall be conducted in the presence of
the elevator inspector designated by the local authorities. It will be the responsibility of the
Contractor to determine when these tests are due.
ue.
40
OR
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 014240 - 13
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
On hoistway doors, clean, lubricate and adjust tracks, hangers and eccentrics, linkage gibs wo
and interlocks.
Inspect all fastenings and ropes for wear and lubrication. Clean both governor and hoist
ropes and lubricate hoist ropes if needed.
Inspect all rope hitches and shackles and equalize rope tension.
Inspect hoist reduction gear brake and brake drum, drive sheave and motor, and any bearing
wear.
In the car, test alarm bell system. Clean light fixtures. Inspect, clean and adjust retiring can
device, chain, dashpots, commutators, brushes, cam pivots, fastenings. Test emergency
switch (ground case if necessary). Inspect safety parts, pivots, set screws, switches, etc. �w
Check adjustment of car and counterweight gibs, shoes or roller guides. Lubricate and adjust,
if necessary.
In the pit, lubricate compensating sheave and inspect hitches. Inspect governor and tape
tension sheave fastenings. Empty and clean oil drip pans.
Clean all parts of safeties and lubricate moving parts to assure their proper operation. Check
and adjust clearance between safety jamb and guide rails. Visually inspect all safety parts.
Clean and examine governor ropes,replacing if needed. (Do not lubricate governor rope.)
Semi-Annually
Check controllers. Clean with blower, check alignment of switches, relays, timers, contacts,
hinge pins, etc., adjust and lubricate. Check oil in overload relays, settings and operation of
overloads. Clean and inspect fuses and holders and all controller connections.
In hoistway examine guide rails, cams and fastenings. Inspect and test limit and terminal
switches. Check and adjust car shoes, gibs or roller guides. Adjust or replace as required.
Clean all overhead cams, sheaves, sills, bottom of platform, car tops, counterweights and
hoistway walls.
Inspect sheaves to ensure they are tight on shafts. Sound spokes and rim with hammer for
cracks.
Examine all hoist ropes for wear, lubrication, length and tension. Replace, lubricate and w,
adjust as require to meet code requirements.
On tape drive,check hitches and broken tape switch.
Check car stile channels for bends or cracks, also car frame, cams, supports and car steadying
plates.
Lubricate moving parts of vertical rising or collapsible car gates.
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 014240 - 12
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
" Northampton,MA
Observe operation of elevator throughout its full range and at all floors it serves to test
controls, safety devices,leveling and releveling and other devices.
Check door operation, clean, lubricate and adjust brakes, checks, linkages, gears, wiring
motors,check keys, set screws, contacts, chains,cams and door closer.
Check selector. Clean, adjust and lubricate bushings, dashpots, travel cables, chain, pawl
++ magnets, wiring, contacts,relays,tape drive and broken type switch.
Check car. Clean, adjust and lubricate car door and gate tracks, pivots, hangers, ventilation
grilles, side and top exits.
Inspect interior of elevator cab. Test telephone or intercommunication system, normal and
emergency lights, fan, emergency call system or alarm. Make needed repairs.
Visually inspect controller, contacts and relays. Check adjustment and replace contacts as
required.
Observe operation of signal and dispatching system. Inspect compensating hitches, buffers,
rope clamps, slack cable switch, couplings, keyways, and pulleys. Check load weighing
device and dispatching time settings. Clean,adjust and lubricate as necessary.
Check oil level in car and counterweight oil buffers and add oil as required.
Check brushes and commutators. Inspect commutators for finish, grooving, eccentricity and
mica level. If required, clean, turn or refinish commutator to provide proper commutation.
Inspect brushes for tension seal and wear, replace or adjust as required.
go
Check and adjust:
Car ventilation system.
Car position indicators.
Hall and car call buttons.
Hall lanterns.
Main dispatch panels/remote monitoring panel.
Quarterly
Check leveling operation. Clean and adjust leveling switches, hoistway vanes, magnets, and
inductors. Repair and/or adjust for proper leveling.
Check hoistway doors. Clean, lubricate and adjust tracks, hangers and upthrust eccentrics,
on linkage gibs and interlocks.
Clean, adjust, and lubricate car door or gate tracks,pivots and hangers.
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 014240 - 11
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA *"
Spare Parts
In addition to the minor spare parts herein specified, the contractor shall have available at all times,
for immediate delivery and installation, sufficient supply of emergency spare parts for the repair of
the elevator,the on-site inventory shall include,but not necessarily be limited to,the following: �.
Lamps,minimum two each type.
Transformers and rectifiers for each type and size used.
Relays and switches, minimum one of each type.
Controller and selector switch contacts and coils for each size and type used.
Door interlocks.
Limit switches and terminal stopping switches.
Flexible guide shoe gibs.
Torque wrenches and other small tools.
wAr
The contractor shall provide at the building a spare parts metal; lockable storage
cabinet and metal safety containers for storage of waste and other flammable materials.
Items of Preventive Maintenance Work(as applicable to equipment installed)
The preventive maintenance specified herein is considered the minimum for all equipment. If
specific equipment covered by this contract required additional preventive maintenance for safe,
reliable operation as specified by the manufacturer, the contractor shall perform the required
additional preventive maintenance without added cost to the Owner.
Monthly
Perform general inspection of machinery, sheaves, worm and gear motor, brake, selector or
floor controllers. Lubricate as required.
Empty drain pans,discard oil, in an approved manner. Check and maintain oil level.
Replace all burned out lamps in elevator machine room,pit,hall lanterns, etc.
Remove litter, dust, oil, etc. from all machine room equipment.
Clean trash from pit and empty drip pans.
Check governor and tape tension sheave lubrication. w
Burned out lamps in hall lanterns, pushbuttons, and corridor position indicators, remote
arrival signals, remote dispatch panels, and other signal fixtures shall be supplied and
installed by the contractor. Burned out lamps in elevator, machine rooms and pit shall be
supplied by the Owner and installed by the contractor.
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 014240 - 10
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
(19) The Contractor shall not be responsible for the following items of elevator equipment: cab
interior(including removable panels, door panels, car gates,plenum chambers,hung ceilings,
light diffusers, light tubes and bulbs, handrails, mirrors and carpets, hoistway enclosure,
w
hoistway door,frames and sills.
(20) The Contractor shall check the group dispatching systems and make necessary tests to ensure
that all circuits and time settings are properly adjusted, and that the system performs as
designed and installed.
(21) Contractor shall perform the required mandated inspections and tests as required per local
W jurisdictions during the term of the included one(1)year maintenance contract.
E. The Contractor shall keep the elevator maintained to operate at the original contract speed, keeping
an the original performance time, including acceleration and retardation as designed and installed by
the manufacturer. The door operation shall be adjusted as required to maintain the original door
opening and door closing times, within legal limits.
go F. The Owner reserves the right to make inspections and tests as and when deemed advisable. If it is
found that the elevator and associated equipment are deficient either electrically or mechanically,
the Contractor will be notified of these deficiencies in writing, and it shall be his responsibility to
make the necessary corrections within 30 days after his receipt of such notice. In the event that the
deficiencies have not been corrected within 30 days, the Owner may terminate the Contract and
employ a Contractor to make the corrections at the original bidder's expense.
G. Approximately three months prior to the end of the contract term, the Owner may make a thorough
maintenance inspection of the elevator covered under the contract. At the conclusion of this
inspection, the Owner may give the Contractor written notice of any deficiencies found. The
Contractor shall be responsible for correction of these deficiencies within 30 days after receipt of
such notice.
H. The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any or all alternates.
1. Working Hours
The maintenance work outlined in this specification shall be performed during normal
working hours of 8:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m., Monday through Friday. Bidder shall submit with
his bid a statement of the hourly rates for regular time, time and one-half and double time,
both for mechanics and helpers. Bidder shall indicate what constitutes time and one-half as
opposed to double time. This time is only for non-contractual repairs due to vandalism or
misuse.
w
The contractor shall provide emergency call back service for the elevator under which the
contractor agrees to have a workman report to the site of the emergency within one hour after
receipt of a request for such service by telephone. This emergency call back service shall be
limited to minor adjustments or repairs to provide uninterrupted elevator service. Emergency
call back service during normal working hours shall be performed as part of this contract
without additional charges. Minor adjustment or repairs shall include those which can be
remedied utilizing spare parts listed below.
an
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 014240-9
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
(3) Motor, motor drives,motor windings,rotating element, commutator, field coil,brushes,brush
holders and bearings,rotors, stators, slip rings.
(4) Govenor, governors sheave and shaft assembly,bearings, contacts and governor jaws.
(5) Deflector or secondary sheave, bearings, car and counterweight buffers, car and
counterweight guide rails, top and bottom limit switches, governor tension sheave assembly,
compensating assembly, counterweight and counterweight guide shoes, including rollers or
gibs.
(6) Controller, Selector and Dispatching Equipment: all components including all relays, solid ,■„
state components, resistors, condensers, transformers, contacts, leads, dashpots, computer
devices, selector switches, mechanical or electrical driving equipment, coils, magnet frames,
contact switch assemblies, springs, solenoids, resistance grids, hoistway vanes, magnets and
inductors.
(7) Hoistway door interlocks or locks and contacts, hoistway door hangers and tracks, bottom
door gibs, cams, rollers, and auxiliary door closing devices for power operated doors.
Chains, tracks,cams, interlocks, sheaves for vertical bi-folding doors.
(8) Hoistway limit switches, slowdown switches, leveling switches and associated cams, vanes,
and electronic components.
(9) Guide shoes including rollers or replaceable gibs.
(10) Automatic power operated door operators, door protective devices, car door hangers, tracks
and car door contacts for both side slide and vertical bi-folding doors.
w�
(11) Traveling cables.
(12) Elevator control wiring in hoistway and machine room.
(13) Car safety mechanism and Load weighing equipment.
(14) Buffers.
(15) All car and hoistway operating fixtures including hall lanterns, main Lobby fixtures, car
operating panels, car position indicator, car fans, electric door operators, proximity devices,
safety edge,photo eyes, door reflectors and Starters' Panels.
(16) The guide rails shall be kept free of rust. Where roller guides are used, rails shall be kept dry
and properly lubricated when sliding guides are used. Renew guide shoe rollers and gibs as
required to insure smooth and satisfactory operation.
(17) Furnish lubricants compounded specifically for elevator usage.
(18) Contractor shall not be required to make renewals or repairs necessitated by reason of
negligence or misuse of the equipment or by reason of any other cause beyond the
contractor's control except ordinary wear and tear unless the Contractor receives just
compensation.
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 014240-8
we
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
W Northampton,MA
1.08 STORAGE
A. The Owner and/or their representatives will designate a suitable area where the Contractor may
store equipment until the work is completed. All equipment shall be stored at the sole risk of the
Contractor.
B. If the Contractor utilizes a construction shanty or similar structure, he shall provide his own lock
and key, but a duplicate key shall be furnished to the Project Superintendent. The assigned storage
area shall be left clear and unencumbered of material or debris and shall be left in a broom-clean
condition at the completion of the workday. An approved type "Fire Extinguisher" shall be
provided and installed on a wall for each storage area assigned to the Contractor. The Contractor
shall comply with all code requirements for construction of such shanty at his own expense, (i.e.,
sprinklers,temporary electric,etc.)
1.09 WARRANTY
w A. The Elevator Contractor shall guarantee the materials and workmanship of the apparatus furnished
or reused under these specifications and shall make good any defects which may develop within
one (1) year from the date of completion of the elevator not due to ordinary wear and tear or
vandalism or improper or insufficient maintenance by others or abuse, misuse, or neglect or any
other cause beyond the Elevator Contractor's control.
1.10 MAINTENANCE
A. Furnish full protective maintenance on the equipment described herein on an interim basis on the
+ * completed cars as the work on the other cars is ongoing, as well as for the period of time following
the project for a period of one (1) year from the date of final acceptance of the entire installation.
Such maintenance shall be included in the cost of the project and shall not be separately billable to
the Owner at any period within the one year period. The maintenance shall include systematic
monthly examinations, adjustments and lubrication of all equipment. Also repair or replace any
parts of equipment whenever this is required during the maintenance period and shall use only
genuine standard parts produced by the manufacturer of the equipment installed. The cost of such
maintenance, for the full one year period, shall be included in the price of the installation and shall
not be billable to the property or Owner during that period.
B. All work under the maintenance provisions shall be performed by competent personnel under the
supervision and in the direct employ of the Contractor and 24-hour emergency call back service
shall be available at all times and shall be included without additional cost to the Owner.
C. NOT USED
D. Full protective maintenance requirements:
(1) Regularly and systematically examine, adjust, lubricate, clean and when conditions warrant
repair or replace the following items and all other mechanical or electrical equipment.
(2) Machine, drive and deflector sheave, sheave shaft bearings, brake pulley, brake coil, brake
contact, shoes and linings, and component parts.
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 014240-7
me
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
E. "Install"shall mean to erect,mount and connect complete with related accessories.
F. "Furnish" or "Supply" shall mean to purchase, procure, acquire and deliver complete with related
accessories.
G. "Notice to Proceed" shall mean a written document from the Owner allowing the Contractor to
commence only that portion of the work stated in the written document.
H. "Work" shall mean the services, materials, labor and all other equipment required for complete and
proper installation by the Contractor.
I. "Best", "first-class" or similar terms as applied to materials, products and workmanship shall mean w
that, in the Architect's opinion, there are no superior qualities of materials or products on the
market, and there is no better class of workmanship.
J. "Concealed" shall mean in masonry or other construction, installed in furred spaces, within double ..
partitions or hung ceilings, in trenches, in crawl spaces or in enclosures.
K. "Exposed" shall mean not installed underground or"concealed" as defined above.
1.08 PERMITS
A. The Contractor shall file all necessary plans and application with the local building department or
other authorities having jurisdiction and obtain the required permits and approvals.
B. The Contractor shall submit to the Owner and/or their representatives a copy of the permit
application, elevator specs, permit and print of elevator drawings as submitted and approved by the
authority having jurisdiction.
C. Upon completion of the work, and prior to final payments, tests may be made by the Owner of all
materials and appliances installed hereunder. The Contractor shall furnish all labor and materials �u
required for such tests.
(1) Should the tests show that any of the materials, appliances or workmanship are not first class
or not in compliance with the Specifications, the Contractor, on written notice from the .�
Owner, shall remove same and promptly replace them with other materials and appliances in
conformity with the Specifications.
D. The Contractor shall perform all tests required by the Commonwealth of Massachusetts or other
authorities having jurisdiction in the presence of an authorized inspector to obtain Final Certificate
of Inspection prior to turnover of the elevator to the Owner and/or their representatives. .,
1.07 PROTECTION
40
A. Protect all items against dirt and damage. The Contractor shall be held fully responsible for all
damage until final acceptance. Any equipment or property of the Owner damaged by this
Contractor or his employee's, shall be restored to its original condition or replaced without cost to
the Owner.
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 014240 -6
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
The Drawings submitted shall be as follows:
(1) Elevator layout; including Machine Room, Plan View, and Elevation, which shall be plotted
from a computer aided design package and drawn to scale. Hand drawn submissions will not
be accepted.
(2) Elevator Car enclosure construction details, layout and rendering.
(3) Hoistway entrance door details complete.
(4) Fixture Drawings.
(5) Machine isolation foundation fastening details.
C. Sample submissions shall include:
(1) Cab or fixture material and finishes.
(2) Braille plates and jamb designation.
(3) Push-buttons,position indicators, emergency lighting fixture
D. Sixty (60) days prior to the completion of the work of the contract, the Contractor shall submit to
the Owner and the Consultant six (6) copies of an Operation Maintenance and Parts Manual and
six (6) complete sets of as-built. These shall be reviewed, and if approved, shall become the
property of the Owner.
E. Machine Room Prints
Provide three (3) complete set of"as-built" field wiring and straight line wiring diagrams showing
all electrical circuits in the hoistway as well as the machine room. One(1)set of diagrams shall be
laminated and mounted on pivoted hard boards in the elevator machine room as directed.
F. Comply with the requirements of Section 01300.
1.07 TERMS/DEFINITIONS
The terms used herein are defined as follows:
A. "Owner" shall mean Kollmorgen Electro-Optical,or their approved representative.
B. "Engineer" shall mean the firm of B Squared Engineering, or their authorized representative.
C. "Contractor"shall mean the person, firm or corporation named in the Contract Documents who will
execute the work. It shall include all his employees, subcontractors and suppliers.
D. 'Provide" shall mean to supply, install and connect up complete and ready for safe and regular
operation the particular work referred to unless specifically indicated otherwise by the Architect.
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 014240-5
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. AISC - Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for
Buildings. �.
B. ANSI A117.1 - Buildings and Facilities - Providing Accessibility and Usability for
Physically Handicapped People.
C. ANSI/ASME A17.2 -Inspector's Manual for Elevators and Escalators.
D. ANSI/AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code, Steel
E. ANSI/NFPA 70 -National Electrical Code
F. ANSFNFPA 80 -Fire Doors and Windows
.w
G. AN l OB -Fire Tests of Door Assemblies
H. APA-American Plywood Association
I. ASTM A 139 -Electric-Fusion(ARC)Welded Steel Pipe(NFS 4-in.and Over)
J. ASTM A167 - Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip
K. ASTM A446 - Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process, Structural
(Physical)Quality
L. ASTM B221 - Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes and
Tubes
M. NEMA LD3 -High Pressure Decorative Laminates
N. ANSFTEEE -519-1992
O. ANSI/IEEE-Guide for Surge Withstand Capability(SWC)Tests
1.06 SUBMISSION, SAMPLES, CUTS AND DRAWINGS (AS APPLICABLE)
A. Within fourteen (14) days of the Letter of Award, the Contractor shall provide seven (7) sets of
submissions. Partial submissions are not acceptable. All submissions shall be made at one time,
complete, in a single package. Transmittal letter shall be marked with contractor's name, project
name and contract number.
B. The Shop Drawings shall show material type and gauge, general dimensions, methods of a
attachment, location and size of reinforcements and openings, and a general arrangement of
components. Approval thereof shall not relieve the Contractor of compliance with the
specification,unless the attention of the Architect/Owner and/or their representatives is called to the
non-complying features in writing.
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 014240 -4
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
00 Northampton, MA
C. The approved equipment manufacturers are:
1. Controller: GAL GALaxy, latest generation
CEC—Swift Futura, latest generation
Approved Equal
2. Tracks,hangers, interlocks and door operators:
GAL MOVFR 11(no substitutions)
3. Fixtures-GAL,EPCO,Innovation or National Elevator
4. Door Protective Device:
Adams ICU 47 Plus, Janus PanaForty Plus 3D
w
5. Entrances and Cab Enclosures:
W EDI/ECI,National Cab&Door and Gunderlin
1.04 REGULATORY AGENCIES
A. Regulatory Agencies:
1. All clearances, workmanship, construction, design and materials shall be in
accordance with the requirements of the latest
ASME A17.1 Code and all codes or rules of the City, State, other authorities
± * having legal jurisdiction, and the codes herein after named.
2. The ASME A17.1 Code shall take preference except where other codes having
jurisdiction include more stringent or conflict with the ASME A17.1 Code.
B. Conform to:
1. ANSI/ASME A17.1-2000 and latest amendments and supplements
2. 524 CMR Sections 1.00 to 35.00
3. Commonwealth of Massachusetts Building Code
3. International Building Code as Amended by the Commonwealth of Massachusetts
5. NFPA Codes
6. NFPA,Fire doors-Hoistway entrances
7. ASME A17.5/CSA-B44.1 -Elevator and Escalator Electrical Equipment
.0
8. ANSI Al 17.1 - Buildings and Facilities - Providing Accessibility and Usability
for Physically Handicapped People.
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 014240-3
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
O. Division 16: Branch circuits through fused disconnects for car lights
P. Division 16: Branch circuits in pit for sump and scavenger pumps
Q. Division 16: Lights and receptacles in machine room and pit.
R. Division 16: Emergency power branch circuit to elevator controller to initiate automatic
elevator lowering operation
S. Division 16: Life safety system speakers and telephone communication wiring to a
junction box in the machine room for each elevator.
T. Division 16: Shunt trip devices to automatically disconnect the main power supply to the
elevators prior to the activation of sprinkler system.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications
1. The work of this Section shall be performed by one regularly engaged in the
business of installing and servicing conveying systems of the type and character
required by these specifications. Any major parts of the equipment manufactured
by the installer shall be non-proprietary in nature, and any such parts shall be
clearly listed and identified in his. All elevator components used shall be such
that any elevator service company can readily purchase them at a cost equal to
that which would be paid by the installer after any and all internal rebates or
discounts.
2. Prior written acceptance is required for manufacturers other than the ones listed,
before bidding this project Requests for acceptance will not be considered
unless they are submitted at least one week before the bid date and are
accompanied by the following information:
a. List of five (5) similar installations having exact equipment being
proposed for this project arranged to show name of project, system ,..
description, and date of completed installation.
b. Complete literature, performance and technical data describing the
proposed equipment
C. List of ten service accounts in the general vicinity of Northampton, MA
by building name,building manager or owner, including phone numbers.
d. Location of closest service office from which conveying system will be
maintained.
e. Location of closest parts inventory for this installation.
B. The approved elevator component manufacturers are:
1. Gillespe Corporation—Ware,MA
2. Approved Equal(must be approved prior to bid)
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 014240 -2
ON
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
q" Northampton, MA
SECTION 014240—HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS
PART 1 —GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. The extent of hydraulic elevator work is indicated on the drawings. Work of this Section
includes labor, materials, tools, equipment, appliances and services required to
manufacture,deliver, install the hydraulic elevator(s),complete as shown on the drawings,
as Specified herein,and/or as required by job conditions.
B. The work and/or requirements specified in all sections is described in the singular with the
understanding identical work, services, parts and materials shall be provided and/or
performed when conditions warrant and desired finished product required such unless
otherwise specified herein.
Bids are to be received based on the documents as written.`Value Engineering
Alternates may be proposed,but shall not be the basis of the bid.
C. The work shall include,but is not limited to the following:
1. One (1)2,500 lbs,capacity, simplex,standard in-ground hydraulic passenger elevator
operating at 100 fpm. (Lobby Car)
2. One(1)3,500 lbs.capacity, simplex,standard in-ground hydraulic passenger elevator
operating at 100 fpm. (Tower Car)
3. One (1) 8,000 lbs. capacity, simplex, standard in-ground hydraulic tandem gear
hydraulic elevator operating at 80 fpm.(Freight Car;)
1.02 RELATED WORK BY OTHERS UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE
A. Division 1: Protecting hoistway during installation of equipment
B. Section 017329: Cutting and patching.
WX C. Section 033010: Concrete pits and slabs
D. Section 042300: Grouting under hoistway door sills
E. Section 051200: Structural steel hoistway frame
"M F. Section 055000: Access Ladders
G. Section 055000: Interior Ornamental Metals
H. Section 071600: Pit waterproofing
1. Section 088000: Interior Glass and Glazing
J. Section 042900: Shaft and machine room walls
K. Section 096813: Finished flooring
L. Division 15: Ventilation of hoistway and machine room
w M. Division 15: Pit Drainage and Sump
N. Division 16: Power feeders to starter panels through fused main line switches
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 014240- 1
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
Miter corner joints in framing elements with hairline joints or provide prefabricated corner units
without joints. Where possible,verify sizes by field measurement before shop fabrication.
B. Accessories: Where indicated for recessed or wall-to-wall applications, provide aluminum
framework as recommended by manufacturer. .w
C. General: Strictly comply with manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations.
Coordinate installation with adjacent work to ensure proper clearances and to prevent tripping
hazards. •■
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION .�
A. General Cleaning: Refer to Manufacturer's Cleaning and Maintenance Instructions.
B. Owner's Personnel: Instruct Owner's personnel in proper maintenance procedures.
C. Protection: Protect installed product and finish surfaces from damage during construction and
until acceptance.
END OF SECTION 124813
wee
ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND GRILLES 124813 -4
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
3. Drying Insert: Drying inserts to be Nylon material with 5%post-consumer recycled con-
tent.
4. Recycled Content:Aluminum to be 40%pre-consumer and 4 %post-consumer recycled
content
5. Blades: T-Shaped blades, 1-5/16 x 1/8 x 1-1/2 inch size, combined with T shaped blades
1 l/16 x 1/8"with anti-slip polymer C9065 insert. Spacing between blades not to exceed
3/16 inch.
6. Dimension: Grille depth to be 1-1/2",with frame 1-5/8"
' 7. Panels: Foot Grille to be supplied in panels not to exceed 48"x 42". One Piece design
not allowed.All grille panels to be supplied with individual,prefabricated, factory-
assembled frames
8. Load Capacity: 3,831 lbs per 2 foot span
9. Recessed Frame Integral with Concrete Substrate: The perimeter frames shall be an
inverted "T" shape such as model "VV" by Mats Inc, in order to anchor the structure into
the concrete. All aluminum frames shall be pre-assembled at factory incorporating
welded construction for all joints. Each grille section shall incorporate an invisible
section divider integrated and welded within the frame. Frames and grilles shall be
shipped fully assembled in protective wooden crating to each jobsite. For sections larger
than 6-0 by 8'-0 a mechanical joint may provided.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and floor conditions for compliance with requirements for location, sizes,
and other conditions affecting installation of floor mats.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install surface-type units to comply with manufacturer's written instructions at locations
indicated;coordinate with entrance locations and traffic patterns.
3.3 SUBSTRATE PREPARATION—FOOT GRILLE
A. Examine substrates and conditions where floor mats will be installed. Do not proceed with in-
stallation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Sub floor shall be clean and dry,and
within acceptable tolerances.
3.4 INSTALLATION-FOOT GRILLE
A. Sizes: Shop-fabricate units of floor mat to greatest extent possible in sizes as indicated. Where
not indicated otherwise, provide single unit for each mat installation, but do not exceed
manufacturer's maximum size recommendation for units intended for removal and cleaning.
Where joints in mats are necessary, space symmetrically and away from normal traffic lanes.
ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND GRILLES 124813 -3
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain floor mats through one source from a single manufacturer.
B. Accessibility Requirements: Provide installed floor mats that comply with Section 4.5 in the
U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with ww
Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG),
and the Massachusetts Architectural Access Board.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Entrance Mates: 2%of installed matting.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 ENTRANCE MATS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. MATS, Inc..
B. Basis-of-Design Product: MATS Inc. Supreme Nop. •
I. Material: 100%Solution-dyed UV stabilized polypropylene fibers
2. Weight: 73 oz. sq/yd.
3. Roll Width: 6 feet 7 inches.
4. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of available colors.
2.2 FOOT GRILLES
A. Basis of Design:
1. Provide Dual Track foot grille by Mats Inc., 37 Shuman Avenue, Stoughton, MA,
02072; telephone 800-628-7462 or 781-344-1536; fax 781-344-1537; www.matsinc.com.
B. Materials
1. Construction: Bolt-thru design with individual aluminum spacers. Swedge, welded and
key lock fastening of rails is not allowed.
2. Material: Aluminum Alloy type 6061-T6. Soft Aluminum alloy (such as 6063-T52)is
not allowed
ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND GRILLES 124813 -2
a
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
SECTION 124813 -ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND GRATES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
I. Roll-up mats.
2. Recessed floor drainage grates at vestibules
1.3 SUBMITTALS FLOOR MATS
A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual
components and profiles,and finishes.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated.
1. Floor Mat: 12-inch-(300-mm-) square, assembled sections of floor mat.
D. Maintenance Data: For floor mats to include in maintenance manuals.
1.4 SUBMITTALS FOOT GRILLES
A. Product data: Submit product data,including manufacturer's specification sheet and installation
instructions for specified products. Include methods of installation and substrate preparation for
each type of substrate.
B. Shop drawings: Submit shop drawings showing layout,profiles and product components, in-
cluding anchorage,accessories,finish colors,patterns and textures.
C. Samples: Submit samples for each type and color of exposed entrance mat,frames and accesso-
ries required. Provide samples of mat materials.
D. Quality Assurance Submittals: (1)Certified test reports showing compliance with specified per-
""' formance characteristics and physical properties, and(2)Manufacturer's Installation Instruc-
tions.
E. Closeout Submittals: (1)Cleaning&Maintenance Data(Include methods for maintaining in-
stalled products and precautions against cleaning materials and methods detrimental to finishes
and performance), and(2)Warranty.
ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND GRILLES 124813 - 1
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
E. Sealer Application: Apply stone sealer to comply with stone producer's and sealer
manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION 123640
w■
w■
STONE COUNTERTOPS 123640-6
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
3.4 INSTALLATION OF COUNTERTOPS
OR A. General: Install countertops over plywood subtops with full spread of water-cleanable epoxy
adhesive.
B. General: Install countertops by adhering to supports with water-cleanable epoxy adhesive.
C. Do not cut stone in field, unless otherwise indicated. If stone countertops or splashes require
additional fabrication not specified to be performed at Project site, return to fabrication shop for
adjustment.
D. Do necessary field cutting as stone is set. Use power saws with diamond blades to cut stone.
Cut lines straight, true, and at right angles to finished surfaces unless beveling is required for
clearance. Ease edges slightly to prevent snipping.
E. Set stone to comply with requirements indicated on Drawings and Shop Drawings. Shim and
adjust stone to locations indicated, with uniform joints of widths indicated and with edges and
faces aligned according to established relationships and indicated tolerances. Install anchors and
other attachments indicated or necessary to secure stone countertops in place.
F. Bond joints with stone adhesive and draw tight as countertops are set. Mask areas of
countertops adjacent to joints to prevent adhesive smears.
G. Complete cutouts not finished in shop. Mask areas of countertops adjacent to cutouts to prevent
damage while cutting. Use power saws with diamond blades to cut stone. Make cutouts to
accurately fit items to be installed, and at right angles to finished surfaces unless beveling is
required for clearance. Ease edges slightly to prevent snipping.
H. Install backsplash and end splash by adhering to wall with water-cleanable epoxy adhesive and
to countertops with stone adhesive. Mask areas of countertops and splashes adjacent to joints to
prevent adhesive smears.
3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean countertops as work progresses. Remove adhesive, grout, mortar,
and sealant smears immediately.
B. Remove and replace stone countertops of the following description:
1. Broken,chipped, stained, or otherwise damaged stone. Stone may be repaired if methods
and results are approved by Architect.
2. Defective countertops.
on 3. Defective joints, including misaligned joints.
4. Interior stone countertops not complying with other requirements indicated.
C. Replace in a manner that results in stone countertops matching approved Samples and mockups,
complying with other requirements, and showing no evidence of replacement.
D. Clean stone countertops not less than six days after completion of using clean water and soft
!" rags. Do not use wire brushes, acid-type cleaning agents, cleaning compounds with caustic or
harsh fillers, or other materials or methods that could damage stone.
STONE COUNTERTOPS 123640- 5
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
D. Carefully inspect finished stone units at fabrication plant for compliance with requirements for
appearance,material, and fabrication. Replace defective units.
2.4 STONE COUNTERTOPS
A. General: Comply with recommendations in MIA's "Dimension Stone- Design Manual."
B. Joints: Fabricate countertops without joints. •.
C. Cutouts and Holes:
1. Undercounter Fixtures: Make cutouts for undercounter fixtures in shop using template or
pattern furnished by fixture manufacturer. Form cutouts to smooth, even curves.
2. Provide vertical edges, slightly eased at juncture of cutout edges with top and bottom
surfaces of countertop and projecting 3/16 inch (5 mm)into fixture opening.
3. Fittings: Drill countertops in shop for plumbing fittings, undercounter soap dispensers,
and similar items.
w
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION ow
A. Examine substrates indicated to receive stone countertops and conditions under which stone
countertops will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for �*
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Advise installers of other work about specific requirements for placement of inserts and similar
items to be used by stone countertop Installer for anchoring stone countertops. Furnish
installers of other work with Drawings or templates showing locations of these items.
B. Clean dirty or stained stone surfaces by removing soil, stains, and foreign materials before .,
setting. Clean stone by thoroughly scrubbing with fiber brushes and then drenching with clear
water. Use only mild cleaning compounds that contain no caustic or harsh materials or
abrasives. Allow stone to dry before installing.
am
3.3 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES
so
A. Variation from Plumb: For vertical lines and surfaces, do not exceed 1/16 inch in 48 inches(1.5
mm in 1200 mm}.
B. Variation from Level: Do not exceed lib inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 311rr)), 1/4 inch (6
mm)maximum.
C. Variation in Joint Width: Do not vary joint thickness more than 1/4 of nominal joint width.
STONE COUNTERTOPS 123640-4
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
! " Northampton,MA
b. Bonstone Materials Corporation.
C. C-Cure.
d. Custom Building Products.
e. Laticrete International, Inc.
on f. MAPEI Corp.
g. Summitville Tiles,Inc.
C. Sealant for Countertops: Manufacturer's standard sealant of characteristics indicated below that
ON comply with applicable requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" and will not stain
the stone it is applied to.
1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
00 2. Use sealants that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D(EPA Method 24).
D. Stone Cleaner: Cleaner specifically formulated for stone types, finishes, and applications
PW indicated, as recommended by stone producer. Do not use cleaning compounds containing
acids, caustics,harsh fillers, or abrasives.
E. Stone Sealer: Colorless, stain-resistant sealer that does not affect color or physical properties of
stone surfaces,as recommended by stone producer for application indicated.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
go following:
a. Bostik Findley Inc.
b. Custom Building Products.
C. Hillyard,Inc.
d. HMK Stone Care System.
e. Miracle Sealants Company.
£ Stone Care International Inc.
on g. Summitville Tiles,Inc.
2.3 STONE FABRICATION,GENERAL
A. Select stone for intended use to prevent fabricated units from containing cracks, seams, and
starts that could impair structural integrity or function.
B. Grade and mark stone for final locations to produce assembled countertop units with an overall
uniform appearance.
C. Fabricate stone countertops in sizes and shapes required to comply with requirements indicated,
including details on Drawings and Shop Drawings.
1. For granite,comply with recommendations in NBGQA's "Specifications for Architectural
Granite."
2. Clean sawed backs of stones to remove rust stains and iron particles.
3. Dress joints straight and at right angle to face,unless otherwise indicated.
,. 4. Fabricate edges with machines having abrasive shaping wheels made to reverse contour
of edge profile to produce uniform shape throughout entire length of edge and with
precisely formed arris slightly eased to prevent snipping, and matched at joints between
units. Form corners of molded edges as indicated with outside corners slightly eased,
unless otherwise indicated.
STONE COUNTERTOPS 123640- 3
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate stone
countertops similar to that indicated for this Project and whose products have a record of
successful in-service performance.
B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.
C. Source Limitations for Stone: Obtain each variety of stone from a single quarry with resources
to provide materials of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Lift stone with wide-belt slings; do not use wire rope or ropes that might cause staining. Move
stone, if required,using dollies with cushioned wood supports.
B. Store stone on wood A-frames or pallets with nonstaining separators and nonstaining,
waterproof covers. Ventilate under covers to prevent condensation.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of construction to receive stone countertops by field
measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 GRANITE
A. Granite: Absolute Black Granite as distributed by Shep Brown,telephone 781-589-1196.
B. Cut stone from contiguous,matched slabs in which natural markings occur.
C. Finish: Polished.
D. Match Architect's samples for color, finish, and other stone characteristics relating to aesthetic
effects.
2.2 ADHESIVES, GROUT, SEALANTS,AND STONE ACCESSORIES
A. General: Use only adhesives formulated for stone and ceramic tile and recommended by their
manufacturer for the application indicated.
B. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Adhesive: ANSI A 118.3,with a VOC content of 65 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D(EPA Method 24).
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Bonsal, W. R. Company.
STONE COUNTERTOPS 123640-2
ewe
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
fop Northampton,MA
In SECTION 123640- STONE COUNTERTOPS
PART 1 -GENERAL
an
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes stone countertops.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Each variety of stone
2. Stone accessories and other manufactured products.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, sections, details,and attachments to other work.
C. Samples for Verification:
1. For each stone type indicated, in sets of Samples not less than 12 inches (300 rain)
square. Include two or more Samples in each set and show the full range of variations in
appearance characteristics expected in completed Work.
D. LEED Submittal:
1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For adhesives and sealants, documentation including
printed statement of VOC content.
E. Qualification Data: For Installer and fabricator.
F. Sealant Compatibility Test Report: From sealant manufacturer, complying with requirements in
Division 07 Section"Joint Sealants" and indicating that sealants will not stain or damage stone.
G. Maintenance Data: For stone countertops to include in maintenance manuals. Include Product
Data for stone-care products used or recommended by Installer, and names, addresses, and
telephone numbers of local sources for products.
"M
so
�w
STONE COUNTERTOPS 123640- 1
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
1. Thickness: 6 inches(152 nom).
2. Horizontal Style: 26 inches
3. Vertical Style: 12 inches(305 mm) high.
C. Anchorage Devices: Hot-dip galvanized-steel anchor bolts, nuts, washers, bolts, sleeves, cast-
in-place plates, and other anchorage devices as required to fasten bumpers securely in place and
to suit installation type indicated.
2.2 STEEL FINISHES
A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize components as indicated to comply with the following:
1. ASTM A 123/A 123M for iron and steel loading dock equipment.
2. ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329 for iron and steel hardware for loading dock
equipment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of loading dock equipment.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. *�
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate size and location of loading dock equipment indicated to be attached into concrete ,
and furnish anchoring devices with templates, diagrams, and instructions for their installation.
3.3 INSTALLATION
w
A. Dock Bumpers: Attach dock bumpers to face of loading dock in a manner that complies with
requirements indicated for spacing, arrangement, and position relative to top of platform and
anchorage.
1. Bolted Attachment: Attach dock bumpers to preset anchor bolts embedded in concrete or
to cast-in-place inserts or threaded studs welded to embedded-steel plates or angles. If
preset anchor bolts, cast-in-place inserts, or threaded studs welded to embedded-steel
plates or angles are not provided, attach dock bumpers by drilling and anchoring with *�
expansion anchors and bolts.
B. maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain loading dock equipment.
END OF SECTION 111300
LOADING DOCK EQUIPMENT 111300-2
w
40
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
ow Northampton,MA
SECTION 111300-LOADING DOCK EQUIPMENT
PART 1 -GENERAL
on
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Dock bumpers.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for loading dock
equipment. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and
furnished specialties and accessories.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved
for installation of units required for this Project.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 DOCK BUMPERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
+ ► products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1. Chalfant Dock Equipment.
2. Hugger Dock Equipment Company;Division of Columbus Foam Products, Inc.
3. Pentalift Equipment Corporation.
4. Rite-Hite Corporation.
' B. Laminated-Tread Dock Bumper: Fabricated from multiple, uniformly thick plies cut from
fabric-reinforced rubber tires. Laminate plies under pressure on not less than two 3/4-inch-(I 0-
mni-) diameter, steel supporting rods that are welded at one end to 1/4-inch- (6-mrn-) thick,
OR structural-steel end angle and secured with a nut and angle at the other end. Fabricate angles
with predrilled anchor holes and sized to provide not less than 1 inch (25 n1m) of tread plies
extending beyond the face of closure angles.
LOADING DOCK EQUIPMENT 111300- 1
�w
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
3. Identification Plates: Identify lockers with identification indicated on Drawings.
a. Attach plates to each locker door, near top, centered, with at least two aluminum
rivets.
b. Attach plates to upper shelf of each open-front locker, centered, with a least two
aluminum rivets.
4. Attach recess trim to recessed lockers with concealed clips.
5. Attach filler panels with concealed fasteners. Locate filler panels where indicated on
Drawings.
' 6. Attach sloping-top units to plastic lockers,with closures at exposed ends.
7. Attach boxed end panels with concealed fasteners to conceal exposed ends of
nonrecessed plastic lockers.
8. Attach finished end panels with fasteners only at perimeter to conceal exposed ends of
nonrecessed plastic lockers.
3.3 ADJUSTING, CLEANING,AND PROTECTION
A. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. Adjust doors and latches to operate easily without
no binding.
B. Protect lockers from damage, abuse, dust, dirt, stain, or paint. Do not permit use during
4W
construction.
C. Touch up marred finishes, or replace lockers that cannot be restored to factory-finished
appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by locker
on manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 105126
w
�r
PLASTIC LOCKERS 105126-5
go
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
B. Attach hinge to door and frame with vandal-resistant double threaded stainless steel screws.
C. Continuous latch securely attached to the entire length of the door with stainless steel screws,
providing a full length latching mechanism capable of accepting several lock types.
D. Fabricate slope top from HDPE with a backing strip for attachment to wall.
E. Locking device: Hasp. 12 Gauge stainless steel.
F. Provide openings at top and bottom of each door for ventilation.
G. Base: 3 inch high.
H. End panels: Slope top for single and double locker configuration.
I. Factory finish:
1. Tops, bottoms, side walls, backs, shelves, and continuous latch, smooth white
commercial grade.
2. Door, and door frames, slightly textured matte finish, color selected from manufacturer's
standard.
3. Base color: Black.
4. End panel color selected from manufacturer's standard.
J. Accessible Lockers: Fabricate as follows:
I. Locate bottom shelf no lower than 15 inches(381 mm)above the floor. *�
2. Where hooks, coat rods, or additional shelves are provided, locate no higher than 48
inches(1219 mm)above the floor.
w.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
..E
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine walls, floors, and support bases, with Installer present, for compliance with .,
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of
the Work.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install level, plumb, and true; shim as required, using concealed shims.
B. Equipment and Accessories: Fit exposed connections of trim, fillers, and closures accurately
together to form tight,hairline joints, with concealed fasteners and splice plates.
1. Attach hooks with at least two fasteners.
2. Attach door locks on doors using security-type fasteners.
w
PLASTIC LOCKERS 105126-4
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 PLASTIC LOCKERS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Bradley Corp.
Lenox series or comparable product by another manufacturer.
B. Locker Arrangement: As indicated.
C. Locker Size: 12"w. x 18"d. See locker schedule below for height.
D. Material: 1"Thick High Density Polyethylene resin.
E. Recycled Content: Minimum 30%post-consumer recycled content.
ON
F. Locker material: Sides, backs, shelves, tops, bottoms, doors, door frames and continuous latch
constructed from high-density polyethylene(HDPE).
1. Sides,shelves,tops,bottoms and backs fabricated from 3/8 inch(10 mm)HDPE.
2. Doors, door frames and continuous latch fabricated from '/2 inch(13 mm)HDPE.
3. Slope tops fabricated from 1/2 inch (13 mm) HDPE sheets, and 1 inch (25.4 mm) HDPE
back plates.
ow 4. Bases fabricated from 1 inch(25.4 mm)HDPE.
5. End panels fabricated from 3/8 inch(10 mm)HDPE.
6. Flat tops fabricated from '/2 inch(13 mm)HDPE.
go
G. Door hinge: Continuous piano hinge fabricated from 16 gauge type 304 stainless steel.
H. Handle: Constructed of injection molded plastic.
1. Equipment: Equip each plastic locker with identification plate and the following unless
otherwise indicated:
go 1. Single-Tier Units: Shelf, one double-prong ceiling hook, and two single-prong wall
hooks.
2. Double-Tier Units: One double-prong ceiling hook and two single-prong wall hooks.
to
J. Accessories:
1. Base: 1" thick HDPE base with homogenous color and matte finish texture. Base to be
3"tall, set back 3"for toe clearance.
2. End Panels: 3/8" T. HDPE with homogenous color and matte finish texture to cover
locker sides on exposed ends. Sloped top.
go K. Finish: Color to be selected from manufactures entire range of available colors. Multiple colors
may be used within a single row of lockers.
2.2 FABRICATION
A. Locker box fabricated from a single sheet of HDPE with corners fused together. Weld frame
and shelves to box assembly.
PLASTIC LOCKERS 105126-3
g,
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA 04
B. Source Limitations: Obtain lockers and accessories from single source from single
manufacturer. to
C. Regulatory Requirements: Where plastic lockers and benches are indicated to comply with
accessibility requirements, comply with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers ..
Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act
(ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities" and ICC/ANSI A117.1 and the
Massachusetts Architectural Access Regulations.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Do not deliver lockers until spaces to receive them are clean, dry, and ready for their
installation.
B. Deliver master and control keys to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of recessed openings by field measurements
before fabrication.
1.7 COORDINATION
w�
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of bases for lockers.
B. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related
units of work specified in other Sections to ensure that lockers can be supported and installed as
indicated.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of lockers that fail in materials or workmanship, excluding finish, within
specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to,the following:
a. Structural failures.
b. Faulty operation of latches and other door hardware. .
2. Damage from deliberate destruction and vandalism is excluded.
3. Warranty Period for Plastic Lockers: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PLASTIC LOCKERS 105126-2
so
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
SECTION 10 5126—PLASTIC LOCKERS
PART l -GENERAL
so
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
No A. Section Includes solid plastic lockers.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of
locker and bench.
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Data for Credit MR 4.1 and Credit MR 4.2: For products having recycled
content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and
preconsumer recycled content. Include statement indicating costs for each product
having recycled content.
C. Shop Drawings: For plastic lockers. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
attachments to other work.
1. Show locker trim and accessories.
2. Include locker identification system and numbering sequence.
D. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.
E. Samples for Verification: For plastic lockers, in manufacturer's standard sizes.
F. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
G. Maintenance Data: For adjusting, repairing, and replacing locker doors and latching
mechanisms to include in maintenance manuals.
H. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved
for installation of units required for this Project.
PLASTIC LOCKERS 105126- 1
ON
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
b. Fire rated cabinet
C. Semi-recessed, flat square trim.
d. Solid Door-Aluminum clear anodized finish.
e. Black die cut letters "FIRE EXTINGUISHER"-vertical format.
5. Type 5
a. UL Rating: 4A-60B:C
b. Fire rated cabinet
C. Fully recessed.
d. Solid Door-Aluminum clear anodized finish.
e. Black die cut letters "FIRE EXTINGUISHER%vertical format.
o•
6. Type 6:
a. UL Rating: 4A-60B:C
b. White surface mounted cabinet.
C. Red die-cut letters "FIRE EXTINGUISHER"-vertical format.
END OF SECTION 104413
to
wo
FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 104400-5
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA "
.er
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing fire-protection specialties.
B. Install in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at heights acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Prepare recesses for cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style.
2. Fasten mounting brackets to structure and cabinets, square and plumb.
3. Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb. 4W
3.3 ADJUSTING,CLEANING,AND PROTECTION
A. Adjust cabinet doors that do not swing or operate freely.
B. Refinish or replace cabinets and doors damaged during installation.
C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that cabinets and doors are without
damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.
3.4 FIRE-PROTECTION SCHEDULE
A. Fire extinguishers and cabinets are based on products from Larsen's Manufacturing Company to
establish type, size, and appearance. This shall not limit the use other manufacturer's products.
1. Type 1
a. UL Rating: 4A-60B:C
b. Bracket mount: L-shaped wall bracket with two metal retaining straps with quick
release clasps.
C. 4 x 18 inch high performance plastic sign "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" with Vertical
directional arrow. Seton Identification Products number M8636.
2. Type 2
a. UL Rating: 4A-60B:C
b. Non-rated cabinet
C. Semi-recessed, flat square trim.
d. Solid Door-Aluminum clear anodized finish.
e. Black die cut letters "FIRE EXTINGUISHER"-vertical format.
3. Type 3 w.r
a. UL Rating: 4A-60B:C
b. Non-rated cabinet
C. Fully recessed.
d. Solid Door-Aluminum clear anodized finish.
e. Black die cut letters "FIRE EXTINGUISHER"-vertical format.
4. Type 4 '"
a. UL Rating: 4A-60B:C
FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 104400-4
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
• Northampton,MA
A. Products Descriptions: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products that meet
the descriptive requirements specified in the Fire-Protection Schedule at the end of Part 3.
2.9 FINISHES,GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
4
2.10 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum As-
sociation for designating aluminum finishes.
me B. Class II, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-MI2C22A31 Anodic Coating: Architectural Class II, clear
coating 0.010 mm or thicker complying with AAMA 607.1.
C. Baked-Enamel Finish: AA-C12C42R1x. Apply baked enamel complying with paint manufac-
turer's specifications for cleaning, conversion coating, and painting.
2.11 STEEL FINISHES
A. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, grease, mill scale, rust, and other contaminants
that could impair paint bond using manufacturer's standard methods.
B. Baked-Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's stan-
dard two-coat, baked-enamel finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. Comp-
ly with paint manufacturer's written instructions for applying and baking to achieve a minimum
dry film thickness of 2 mils(0.0-5 mrn).
1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in for hose valves, hose racks, and cabinets to verify actual locations of pip-
ing connections before cabinet installation.
B. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where recessed and semi-
recessed cabinets are to be installed.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
so
FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 104400-3
w
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
4. ASTM B 221-96: Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars,
Rods, Wire, Shapes,and Tubes
5. ASTM C 1048-92: Specification for Heat-Treated Flat Glass—Kind HS, Kind FT Coated
and Uncoated Glass
6. ASTM E 814-94b: Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops
C. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers
1. Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products.
D. National Fire Protection Association
1. NFPA 10-94: Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers
E. Association Publications
1. Factory Mutual. Approval Guide—Fire Protection: A Guide to Equipment Materials &
Services Approved by Factory Mutual Research Corporation for Property Conservation.
Norwood,MA: FM,
2. National Fire Protection Association. NFPA 1: Fire Prevention Code. Quincy, MA:
NFPA,
3. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. Fire Protection Equipment Directory. Northbrook, IL:
UL, 2000
so
2.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain fire extinguishers and cabinets through one source from a single
manufacturer. OR
2.6 COORDINATION OR
A. Coordinate size of cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers are accommo-
dated.
2.7 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following:
1. Portable Fire Extinguishers: so
a. J.L. Industries, Inc.
b. Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
C. Potter-Roemer; Div. of Smith Industries, Inc.
2. Fire-Protection Cabinets:
a. J.L. Industries,Inc.
b. Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
C. Potter-Roemer; Div. of Smith Industries, Inc.
2.8 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 104400-2
40
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
SECTION 10 44 00 -FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
PART 1 -GENERAL
w
PART 2-GENERAL
2.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi-
tions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
2.2 DESCRIPTION
A. This Section includes fire extinguishers and cabinets.
2.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual
components and profiles, and finishes for fire-protection specialties.
1. Fire Extinguishers: Include rating and classification.
2. Cabinets: Include roughing-in dimensions, details showing mounting methods,
relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction, door hardware, cabinet type,
trim style, and panel style.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units
showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of cabinet finish
indicated.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed cabinet finish required, prepared on Sam-
ples of size indicated below and of same thickness and material indicated for the Work. If fi-
nishes involve normal color and texture variations, include sample sets showing the full range
of variations expected.
00
2.4 REFERENCES
A. American Architectural Manufacturers Association
1. AAMA 607.1-1977: Voluntary Guide Specification and Inspection Methods for Clear
Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum
00 B. American Society for Testing and Materials
1. ASTM A 366/A 366M-96: Specification for Steel, Sheet, Carbon, Cold-Rolled, Commer-
cial Quality
2. ASTM A 480/A 484M-96: Specification for General Requirements for Flat-Rolled Stain-
less and Heat-Resisting Steel Plate, Sheet,and Strip
3. ASTM B 209-95: Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate
FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 104400- 1
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
J. TBA-10—Shower Rods, Curtains and Hooks
1. Rod
a. Construction:Type 304 stainless steel, 18 gage, 1 '/4 inch outside diameter.
b. Flange: Type 304 stainless steel,20 gage. Satin finish. One-piece die-formed.
C. Mounted: Concealed
d. Basis of Design: Bobrick B-207, or approved equal.
2. Antibacterial Shower Curtain: Minimum 10-oz. (284-g), nylon-reinforced vinyl or
+ 0.008-inch- (0.2-niin-) thick vinyl material with integral antibacterial agent and corro-
sion-resistant grommets at minimum b inches(152 min)o.c.through top hem.
a. Size: Minimum 6 inches (152 mm) wider than opening by 72 inches (1828 mni)
high. Retain subparagraph below for vinyl or antibacterial shower curtain.
b. Color: White.
C. Basis of Design: Bobrick 204-2 or approved equal
3. Shower Curtain Hooks: Chrome-plated or stainless-steel, spring wire curtain hooks with
snap fasteners, sized to accommodate specified curtain rod. Provide one hook per curtain
grommet.
a. Basis of Design: Bobrick 204-1,or approved equal.
w
K. TBA-I IUtility Shelf Mop and Broom Holder:
1. Products: Bobrick model B-239, or approved equal.
go 2. Mop and Broom Holder with Utility Shelf: 34 inch long unit fabricated of minimum no-
minal 18 gage thick stainless steel with shelf; support brackets for wall mounting; four
hooks for wiping rags; three spring-loaded, rubber hat, cam-type, mop/broom holders
mounted on front.
END OF SECTION 102800
TOILET ACCESSORIES 102800-5
.w
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
4. Receptacle: Removable and reusable.
5. Basis of Design: Bobrick B-270"Contura", or approved equal.
D. TBA-4 -Robe Hook:
1. Construction: One Piece Brass Casting with satin-nickel plated finish.. ..
2. Mounting: Exposed countersunk screws.
3. Projection: 3 7/16 inches
4. Flange: 3 3/4 inches round
5. Basis of Design: Bobrick B-212 or approved equal
E. TBA- 7-Electric Hand Dryer
1. Basis of Design: XLERATOR, Model XL-SB, by Excel Dryer
2. Mounting Type: Surface Mount.
3. Automatic Sensor.
4. Finish: Brushed stainless steel cover.
5. Drying Time: 10-15 seconds. w
6. Air Velocity: 16,000 UP at nozzle; 14,000 UP 4"from nozzle.
7. Air Temperature: 130 degrees at 75 degrees ambient.
8. Green Spec Listed product.
F. TBA-6-Hands Free Roll Towel Dispenser Semi-Recessed
I. Products: AJ Washroom Accessories UI69A/199 EA-SR,or approved equal.
2. Battery operated unit with pass hands through sensor.
3. Material:
a. Exterior: Type 304,22 gage stainless steel.
b. Internal Mechanism: High impact plastic. on
G. TBA-7-Automatic Deck Mounted Liquid Soap Dispenser
1. Product: Bobrick model B-826
2. Mounting: Deck mounted.
3. Spout: Bright polished chrome plated plastic with LED light indicators.
4. Motor Assembly: Water resistant,plastic material.
5. Battery Pack: Water resistant plastic;holds 4 Alkaline"D"size batteries.
6. Soap Refill: 27 oz. shatter-resistant polyethylene bottle.
7. Soap type: liquid.
H. TBA-8-Surface mounted Toilet Paper Dispenser unit :As follows:
I. Product: Bobrick B-2746 Double Roll Toilet Tissue with Controlled Delivery
2. Mounting: Surface.
3. Material: Cast Alumium
4. Capacity: Two 6-inch standard rolls..
5. Access: Key lock
1. TBA-9 Recessed Multi-Roll Toilet Tissue Dispenser
1. Bobrick model B-4388 or approved equal.
2. Material: Stainless steel.
3. Capacity: Two 6-inch standard rolls..
4. Access: Key lock
wi.
TOILET ACCESSORIES 102800-4
an
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
OR Northampton,MA
40
PART 3 -EXECUTION
P4 3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate
to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and
firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.
B. Secure mirrors to walls in concealed, tamper-resistant manner with special hangers, toggle
bolts, or screws. Set units level, plumb, and square at locations indicated, according to manu-
facturer's written instructions for substrate indicated.
C. Install grab bars to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf(1112 N), when tested accord-
ing to method in ASTM F 446.
on
3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation and verify that mechanisms function
properly. Replace damaged or defective items.
B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.
C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
so 3.3 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORY SCHEDULE
A. TBA— 1 Grab Bar :As follows:
OR l. Material: Stainless steel,0.05 inch(1.3 mm)thick.
2. Mounting: Concealed
3. Gripping Surfaces: Slip-resistant texture.
on 4. Outside Diameter: 1-1/2 inches(38 mm) for heavy-duty applications.
5. Basis of Design: B-5806 Series or approved equal.
6. 36-inch
B. TBA—2 Grab Bar : As follows:
1. Material: Stainless steel,0.05 inch(1.3 min)thick.
2. Mounting: Concealed
w 3. Gripping Surfaces: Slip-resistant texture.
4. Outside Diameter: 1-1/2 inches(38 ni in) for heavy-duty applications.
5. Basis of Design: B-5806 Series or approved equal.
6. 42-inch
C. TBA-3 - Sanitary Napkin Disposal Unit : As follows:
1. Mounting: Surface.
2. Material: Stainless steel.
3. Door or Cover: Self-closing.
TOILET ACCESSORIES 102800-3
40
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required
for access by disabled persons, proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servic-
ing of accessories.
B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent delay- �*
ing the Work.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Mirror Warranty: Written warranty, executed by mirror manufacturer agreeing
to replace mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects within minimum warranty period
indicated.
I. Minimum Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering ac-
cessories that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following:
I. Toilet Accessories:
a. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. (BASIS OF DESIGN)
b. A&J Washroom Accessories, Inc.
C. Bradley Corporation.
d. Or approved equal
B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorpo-
rated into the Work include,but are not limited to,those indicated in the Toilet and Bath Acces-
sory Schedule at the end of Part 3.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, No.4 finish (satin), 0.0312-inch (0.8-mill) minimum
nominal thickness, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit,tamper and theft
resistant when exposed,and of galvanized steel when concealed. .w
C. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying.
Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative.
TOILET ACCESSORIES 102800-2
w
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
an Northampton,MA
SECTION 102800—TOILET ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
u.
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi-
tions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes toilet accessories.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 06 Section"Rough Carpentry"for blocking.
2. Division 10 Section"Toilet and Shower Compartments" for mounting of toilet tissue dis-
pensers,grab bars,purse shelves, and similar accessories.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions and thicknesses, dimensions,
profiles, fastening and mounting methods, specified options,and finishes for each type of acces-
sory specified.
B. Samples: For each accessory item to verify design,operation,and finish requirements.
1. Approved full-size Samples will be returned and may be used in the Work.
C. Setting Drawings: For cutouts required in other work; include templates, substrate preparation
instructions,and directions for preparing cutouts and installing anchoring devices.
on D. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each
accessory required. Use designations indicated in the Toilet and Bath Accessory Schedule and
room designations indicated on Drawings in product schedule.
ON
E. Maintenance Data: For accessories to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
Provide lists of replacement parts and service recommendations.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Provide products of same manufacturer for each type of accessory unit and
for units exposed to view in same areas, unless otherwise approved by Architect.
TOILET ACCESSORIES 102800- 1
ON
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
3.2 ADJUSTING
A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to hardware manufacturer's
written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold doors open
approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out-swinging
doorsto return doors to fully closed position.
w END OF SECTION 102113
w.
..r
ew
TOILET COMPARTMENTS 102113 -5
40
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
2. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard paired, self-closing type that can be adjusted to hold
doors open at any angle up to 90 degrees.
3. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard surface-mounted latch unit designed for
emergency access and with combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper. Provide
units that comply with regulatory requirements for accessibility at compartments
designated as accessible.
4. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber-tipped bumper, sized
to prevent in-swinging door from hitting compartment-mounted accessories.
5. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard rubber-tipped bumper at out-swinging doors
6. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit at out-swinging doors that complies with
regulatory requirements for accessibility. Provide units on both sides of doors at
compartments designated as accessible.
B. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel or
chrome-plated steel or brass, finished to match the items they are securing, with theft-resistant-
type heads. Provide sex-type bolts for through-bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use
stainless steel,hot-dip galvanized steel,or other rust-resistant,protective-coated steel.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Ceiling-Hung Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant anchoring assemblies
with leveling adjustment nuts at pilasters for connection to structural support above finished
ceiling. Provide assemblies that support pilasters from structure without transmitting load to
finished ceiling. Provide sleeves(caps)at tops of pilasters to conceal anchorage.
B. Door Size and Swings: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch- (610-mill-) wide, in-
swinging doors for standard toilet compartments and 36-inch- (914-mm-) wide, out-swinging
doors with a minimum 32-inch- (8l 3-rnm-)wide, clear opening for compartments designated as
accessible.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid,
straight, level, and plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended
anchoring devices.
1. Maximum Clearances:
a. Pilasters and Panels: 1/2 inch(13 mm).
b. Panels and Walls: 1 inch(25 mm).
B. Ceiling-Hung Units: Secure pilasters to supporting structure and level, plumb, and tighten.
Hang doors and adjust so bottoms of doors are level with bottoms of pilasters when doors are in
closed position.
C. Urinal Screens: Attach with anchoring devices to suit supporting structure. Set units level and
plumb, rigid, and secured to resist lateral impact.
TOILET COMPARTMENTS 102113 -4
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
! + Northampton,MA
3. Metpar Corp.
B. Toilet-Enclosure Style: Ceiling hung.
C. Urinal-Screen Style: Wall hung flat panel.
D. Door, Panel, and Pilaster Construction: Seamless, metal facing sheets pressure laminated to
core material; with continuous, interlocking molding strip or lapped-and-formed edge closures;
aw corners secured by welding or clips and exposed welds ground smooth. Exposed surfaces shall
be free of pitting, seam marks,roller marks, stains, discolorations,telegraphing of core material,
or other imperfections.
1. Core Material: Manufacturer's standard sound-deadening honeycomb of resin-
impregnated kraft paper in thickness required to provide finished thickness of I inch (25
nim)for doors and panels and 1-1/4 inches(32 aim)for pilasters.
2. Grab-Bar Reinforcement: Provide concealed internal reinforcement for grab bars
mounted on units.
3. Tapping Reinforcement: Provide concealed reinforcement for tapping (threading) at
locations where machine screws are used for attaching items to units.
E. Urinal-Screen Construction:
1. Flat-Panel Urinal Screen: Matching panel construction.
F. Facing Sheets and Closures: Stainless-steel sheet of nominal thicknesses as follows:
1. Pilasters, Braced at Both Ends: Manufacturer's standard thickness, but not less than
0.038 inch(0.95 mm).
2. Pilasters, Unbraced at One End: Manufacturer's standard thickness, but not less than
0.050 inch(1.27 nom).
3. Panels: Manufacturer's standard thickness,but not less than 0.031 inch(0.79 min).
4. Doors: Manufacturer's standard thickness,but not less than 0.031 inch(0.79 mm).
5. Flat-Panel Urinal Screens: Thickness matching the panels.
G. Pilaster Shoes and Sleeves (Caps): Stainless-steel sheet, not less than 0.031-inch (0.79-min)
nominal thickness and 3 inches(76 mm)high, finished to match hardware.
H. Brackets(Fittings):
1. Full-Height(Continuous)Type: Manufacturer's standard design;stainless steel.
L Stainless-Steel Finish: No. 4 bright, directional polish on exposed faces. Protect exposed
surfaces from damage by application of strippable, temporary protective covering before
** shipment.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy-duty operating hardware
and accessories.
ew
1. Material: Stainless steel
TOILET COMPARTMENTS 102113 -3
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
E. Samples for Verification: For the following products, in manufacturer's standard sizes unless
otherwise indicated:
I. Each type of material, color, and finish required for units, prepared on 6-inch- (152-mm-)
square Samples of same thickness and material indicated for Work.
2. Each type of hardware and accessory.
F. Product Certificates: For each type of toilet compartment, from manufacturer.
G. Maintenance Data: For toilet compartments to include in maintenance manuals.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with requirements in GSA's CID-A-A-60003, "Partitions, Toilets,Complete."
B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to
ASTM E 84, or another standard acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, by a qualified
testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1. Flame-Spread Index:25 or less.
2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural &
Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and
Architectural Barriers Act(ABA)Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities"] and the
Massachusetts Architectural Access Board for toilet compartments designated as accessible.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of toilet fixtures, walls, columns, ceilings, and
other construction contiguous with toilet compartments by field measurements before
fabrication.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304, stretcher-leveled standard of flatness.
B. Stainless-Steel Castings: ASTM A 743/A 743M.
2.2 STAINLESS-STEEL UNITS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Accurate Partitions Corporation.
2. Hadrian Manufacturing Inc.
TOILET COMPARTMENTS 102113 -2
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
SECTION 102113 -TOILET COMPARTMENTS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
L Stainless-steel toilet compartments configured as [toilet enclosures and urinal screens
B. Related Sections:
I. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for supports that attach ceiling-hung
compartments o overhead structural system.
2. Division 06 Section'Rough Carpentry for blocking.
3. Division 10 Section "Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories" for toilet tissue dispensers,
grab bars,purse shelves,and similar accessories.
OR
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material
descriptions,dimensions of individual components and profiles,and finishes.
W B. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Data for Credit MR 4.1 and Credit MR 4.2: For products having recycled
content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and
preconsumer recycled content. Include statement indicating costs for each product
having recycled content.
2. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.4: For particleboard, documentation indicating that product
** contains no urea formaldehyde.
C. Shop Drawings: For toilet compartments. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
attachments to other work.
1. Show locations of cutouts for compartment-mounted toilet accessories.
2. Show locations of reinforcements for compartment-mounted grab bars.
3. Show locations of centerlines of toilet fixtures.
4. Show[ceiling grid and overhead support or bracing locations.
D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of unit indicated. Include Samples of hardware and
accessories involving material and color selection.
TOILET COMPARTMENTS 102113 - 1
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Protect signs from damage until acceptance by Owner.
END OF SECTION 101400
so
w
on
00
SIGNAGE 101400 -5
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
Northampton,MA go
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Anchors and Inserts: Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts for
exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or
lead expansion-bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Furnish inserts, as required, to be set
into concrete or masonry work.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard signs of configurations indicated.
2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Baked-Enamel Finish: AA-C12C42RIx (Chemical Finish: cleaned with inhibited chemicals;
Chemical Finish: acid-chromate-fluoride-phosphate conversion coating; Organic Coating: as
specified below). Apply baked enamel complying with paint manufacturer's written instructions
for cleaning,conversion coating, and painting.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
.w
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with w
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Locate signs and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of types described and
complying with manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Install signs level, plumb, and at heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion
and other defects in appearance.
2. Interior Wall Signs: Install signs on walls adjacent to latch side of door where applicable.
Where not indicated or possible, such as double doors, install signs on nearest adjacent
walls. Locate to allow approach within 3 inches (75 inn)) of sign without encountering
protruding objects or standing within swing of door.
B. Wall-Mounted Signs: Comply with sign manufacturer's written instructions except where more
stringent requirements apply.
C. Dimensional Characters: Mount characters using standard fastening methods to comply with s
manufacturer's written instructions for character form, type of mounting, wall construction, and
condition of exposure indicated. Provide heavy paper template to establish character spacing
and to locate holes for fasteners.
1. Projected Mounting: Mount characters at projection distance from wall surface indicated.
SIGNAGE 101400-4
00
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
40 Northampton,MA
2. Thickness: 2 inch
3. Color(s): As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.
4. Mounting: Concealed studs; noncorroding] for substrates encountered.
2.2 PANEL SIGNS
2.3 PANEL SIGNS
A. General: Provide panel signs that comply with requirements indicated for materials,
thicknesses, finishes,colors, designs, shapes, sizes,and details of construction.
1. Produce smooth panel sign surfaces constructed to remain flat under installed conditions
within tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch(I.5 mm)measured diagonally.
B. Cast-Acrylic Sheet: Manufacturer's standard and as follows:
1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
C. Brackets: Fabricate brackets and fittings for bracket-mounted signs from extruded aluminum to
suit panel sign construction and mounting conditions indicated. Factory-paint brackets in color
matching background color of panel sign.
D. Graphic Content and Style: Provide sign copy that complies with requirements indicated in the
Sign Schedule on Drawings and on artwork supplied on electronic media by Architect for size,
style, spacing, content,mounting height and location,material, finishes,and colors of signage.
E. Tactile and Braille Copy: Manufacturer's standard process for producing copy complying with
ADA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI Al 17.1. Text shall be accompanied by Grade 2
braille. Produce precisely formed characters with square cut edges free from burrs and cut
marks.
on
F. Colored Coatings for Acrylic Sheet: For copy, background, and frame colors, provide Pantone
Matching System (PMS) colored coatings, including inks and paints, that are recommended by
ON acrylic manufacturers for optimum adherence to acrylic surface and are nonfading for
application intended.
G. Panel Sign Schedule: Provide one (1) panel sign for every room, space or defined area in the
building including Room Name, Room Number, and International Symbol at toilet rooms and
stairways.
1. At Each Stair Provide the following:
a. Stair No. and Floor on Keyside of Door
b. Stair No. and Floor on stair side of Door
C. Each Stair sign shall contain the international symbol of stairs.
d. A sign that states"NO ACCESS TO ROOF"at first floor of each stair.
2. Provide a Sign at Service, Staff and Public Entrances that state: THIS IS A NON-
SMOKING FACILITY
«w
SIGNAGE 101400 -3
.o
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA .�•
G. Maintenance Data: For signs to include in maintenance manuals.
H. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer
B. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate products
similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-
service performance.
C. Source Limitations for Signs: Obtain each sign type indicated from one source from a single
manufacturer.
w�
D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in ADA-ABA Accessibility
Guidelines, ICC/ANSI A117.1, and the Massachusetts Architectural Access Board.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify recess openings by field measurements before fabrication and
indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate placement of anchorage devices with templates for installing signs.
.ea
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 DIMENSIONAL CHARACTERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following:
1. Advance Corporation; Braille-Tac Division.
2. Gemini Incorporated.
3. lnnerface Sign Systems, Inc.
4. Metal Arts; Div. of L&H Mfg. Co.
5. Mohawk Sign Systems. .�
6. Nelson-Harkins Industries.
B. Cast Characters: Produce characters with smooth flat faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed
lines and profiles, free of pits, scale, sand holes, and other defects. Cast lugs into back of
characters and tap to receive threaded mounting studs. Alloy and temper recommended by sign
manufacturer for casting process used and for use and finish indicated. Comply with the
following requirements. .
1. Character Material: Aluminum.
SIGNAGE 101400-2
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
SECTION 101400- SIGNAGE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
+w
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Dimensional characters.
2. Panel signs.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
+*� A. ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines: U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance
Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and
Facilities;Architectural Barriers Act(ABA)Accessibility Guidelines."
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for signs.
1. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by
others,and accessories.
2. Provide message list, typestyles, graphic elements,including tactile characters and
Braille,and layout for each sign.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual units or sections
of units showing the full range of colors available for the following:
1. Aluminum.
2. Acrylic sheet.
D. Samples for Verification: For each of the following products and for the full range of color,
texture, and sign material indicated, of sizes indicated:
1. Dimensional Characters: Full-size Samples of each type of dimensional character(letter,
number, and graphic element).
10 2. Acrylic Sheet: 8 by 10 inches(200 by 250 mni)for each color required.
E. Sign Schedule: Develop schedule for signs indicated and one panel sign for each room, space,
00 and area in the building.
F. Qualification Data: For Installer and fabricator.
SIGNAGE 101400- 1
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
Northampton,MA *�
B. Prepare surfaces to achieve a smooth, dry, clean surface free of flaking, unsound coatings,
cracks, defects, and substances that will impair bond between resilient tackable material and
surfaces.
C. Prepare recesses for sliding visual display units as required by type and size of unit.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. General: Install visual display surfaces in locations and at mounting heights indicated on
Drawings, or if not indicated, at heights indicated below. Keep perimeter lines straight, level,
and plumb. Provide grounds, clips, backing materials, adhesives, brackets, anchors, trim, and
accessories necessary for complete installation.
B. Field-Assembled Visual Display Units: Coordinate field-assembled units with grounds, trim,
and accessories indicated. Join parts with a neat, precision fit.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF FIELD-FABRICATED VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS
A. Visual Display Boards: Attach concealed clips, hangers, and grounds to wall surfaces and to
visual display boards with fasteners at not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. Secure both top
and bottom of boards to walls.
1. Field-Applied Aluminum Trim: Attach trim over edges of visual display boards and
conceal grounds and clips. Attach trim to boards with fasteners at not more than 24
inches(600 mm)o.c.
a. Attach chalktrays to boards with fasteners at not more than 12 inches (300 mm)
O.C.
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean visual display surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. Attach one
cleaning label to visual display surface in each room.
B. Touch up factory-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.
C. Cover and protect visual display surfaces after installation and cleaning.
END OF SECTION 101100
VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES 101100-4
w
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
+► Northampton,MA
1. Porcelain-Enamel Marker board: Balanced, high-pressure, factory-laminated
00 markerboard assembly of 3-ply construction consisting of backing sheet, core material,
and porcelain-enamel face sheet with low-gloss finish.
a. Particleboard Core: 3/8 inch(9.5 mm(, 0.0129-inch- (0.35-mm-)thick, galvanized
steel sheet backing.
b. Laminating Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard moisture-resistant thermoplastic
type.
w� 2. Aluminum Frames and Trim: Fabricated from not less than 0.062-inch- (1.57-mm-)
thick,extruded aluminum; of size and shape indicated.
a. Manufacturer's aluminum angle trim: 1"x''/z"x 1/16".
r
3. Chalktray: Manufacturer's standard,continuous.
a. Solid Type: Extruded aluminum with ribbed section and end caps. "Series 5"tray.
b. Provide Chalk tray at all Markerboard installations.
2.2 FABRICATION
!Aw
A. Visual Display Boards: Field assemble visual display boards,unless otherwise indicated.
B. Aluminum Frames and Trim: Fabricate units straight and of single lengths, keeping joints to a
minimum. Miter corners to neat,hairline closure.
2.3 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Class II, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A31 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as
fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class II,
clear coating 0.010 mm or thicker)complying with AAMA 611.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances,surface conditions of wall,and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine walls and partitions for proper backing for visual display surfaces.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
w
A. Remove dirt, scaling paint, projections, and depressions that will affect smooth, finished
surfaces of visual display boards.
Rw
VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES 101100- 3
A•
w,
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA +�•�
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative of motor-operated, sliding visual display
unit manufacturer for installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of visual display surface through one source from a
single manufacturer.
C. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of visual
display surfaces and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division l Section
"Product Requirements."
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Deliver factory-built visual display boards, including factory-applied trim where indicated,
completely assembled in one piece without joints, where possible. If dimensions exceed
maximum manufactured panel size, provide two or more pieces of equal length as acceptable to
Architect. When overall dimensions require delivery in separate units, prefit components at the
factory, disassemble for delivery, and make final joints at the site.
B. Store visual display units vertically with packing materials between each unit.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings.
1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying
the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating visual display surfaces
without field measurements. Coordinate wall construction to ensure that actual
dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
2. Allow for trimming and fitting where taking field measurements before fabrication might
delay the Work.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MARKER BOARD PANEL ASSEMBLIES
A. Basis of Design Manufacturers:
I. Claridge Products& Equipment, Inc.
2. or approved equal
B. Provide field assembled Marker Board assemblies as scheduled on the drawings or described in
the keyed notes.
VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES 101100-2
OR
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
SECTION 101100-VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES
PART 1 -GENERAL
Px
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
ON A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division l Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
O.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes markerboards.
w
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Visual Display Boards: Chalkboards,markerboards, and tackboards.
go
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
A. LEED Submittal:
1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.2: For adhesives, including printed statement of VOC
content.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details,and attachments to other work.
1. Show location of panel joints.
2. Include sections of typical trim members.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of visual display surface indicated and as follows:
1. Actual sections of Porcelain-enamel face sheet, visual display wall panel, display rail
visual display fabric.
2. Samples of accessories involving color selection.
s
D. Qualification Data: For Installer.
E. Maintenance Data: For visual display surfaces to include in maintenance manuals.
F. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
.w
VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES 101100- 1
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
3) PPG: 90-709 Pitt-Tech One Pack Interior/Exterior Primer/Finish DTM In-
dustrial Enamel.
4) SW: Galvite HS B50WZ30
b. First and Second Coats: Semigloss, acrylic-latex, interior enamel applied at
spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thick-
. ness of not less than 2.6 mils(0.066 mm).
1) ICI: 1406-XXXX Dulux Professional Acrylic Semi-gloss Wall & Trim
Enamel.
2) Moore: SuperSpec Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel #276.
3) PPG: Speedhide 6-500 Series Acrylic Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel.
4) SW: DTM Acrylic Latex Semigloss B66-200
E. Interior Concrete Sealer and finishes
!!* 1. Interior Clear Acrylic Sealer: Water based clear sealer for use on horizontal unpainted
concrete not called out as Burnished Concrete. Apply 2 coats at thickness recommended
by manufacturer.
a. Moore: Silicone Acrylic Concrete Waterproof Sealer 075.
b. ICI: 3214-0000 Groundworks Clear Acrylic Concrete Sealer.
C. SW:Armorseal 1K, Waterbased Urethane Floor Enamel
END OF SECTION 099100
PAINTING 099100 - 15
w�
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
1) ICI: 1406-XXXX Dulux Professional Acrylic Semi-gloss Wall & Trim
Enamel.
2) Moore: SuperSpec Alkyd Enamel Undercoater&Primer Sealer#245.
3) PPG Speedhide 6-500 Series Acrylic Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel.
4) SW: Kem Kromik Universal Metal Primer B50Z series
C. Finish Coat: Semigloss, acrylic-latex, interior enamel applied at spreading rate
recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less
than 1.3 mils(0.033 nim).
1) ICI: 1406-XXXX Dulux Professional Acrylic Semi-gloss Wall & Trim
Enamel.
2) Moore: SuperSpec Semi-Gloss Enamel#276.
3) PPG: : Speedhide 6-500 Series Acrylic Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel.
4) SW: DTM Acrylic Latex Semi Gloss B66-200
wa
D. Zinc-Coated Metal: Provide the following finish systems over zinc-coated metal:
I. Low-Luster, Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer. Application for duct-
work/exposed metal deck.
a. Primer: Galvanized metal primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the
manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.031
111m).
1) ICI 4120-XXXX Devguard All Purpose Metal&Galvanized Primer.
2) Moore: M04 Acrylic Metal Primer.
3) PPG: : 90-709 Pitt-Tech One Pack Interior/Exterior Primer/Finish DTM
Industrial Enamel
4) SW: Galvite HS B50WZ30
b. First and Second Coats: Low-luster(eggshell or satin), acrylic-latex, interior ena-
mel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total
dry film thickness of not less than 2.8 mils(0.071 inm).
1) ICI: 1402-XXXX Dulux Professional Acrylic Eggshell Wall & Trim Ena-
mel
2) Moore: SuperSpec Latex Eggshell Enamel #274.
3) PPG: Speedhide 6-400 Series Acrylic Latex Eggshell Enamel
4) SW: DTM Acrylic Latex Semigloss B66-200
2. Semigloss,Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer. Application for exposed
structural steel and other ferrous metals.
a. Primer: Galvanized metal primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the
manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.031
mm).
l) ICI 4120-XXXX Devguard All Purpose Metal& Galvanized Primer.
2) Moore: M04 Acrylic Metal Primer.
PAINTING 099100 - 14
wo
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
XM Northampton,MA
4) SW: PrepRite 200 Interior Latex Primer 1328W200
on b. First and Second Coats: Flat, acrylic-latex, interior enamel applied at spreading
rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not
less than 2.8 mils (0.071 mni).
FM
I) ICI: 1200 Dulux Pro Premium Velvet Matte Flat Latex Interior Paint.
2) Moore: Moorecraft Super Spec Latex Flat No. 275
Im 3) PPG: 6-70 Series SpeedHide Interior Wall Flat Latex.
4) SW:ProMar 400 Interior Latex Flat Wall Pain B30W400 Series.
2. Low-Luster,Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer. Application for walls.
a. Primer: Latex-based, interior primer applied at spreading rate recommended by
the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils
(0.031 rnm).
1) ICI: 1000-1200 Dulux Ultra Latex Basecoat Primer.
2) Moore: SuperSpec Latex Enamel Undecoater&Primer Sealer#253
3) PPG: Speedhide 6-2 Interior Primer/Sealer.
4) SW: PrepRite 200 Interior Latex Primer 1328W200
b. First and Second Coats: Low-luster (eggshell), acrylic-latex, interior enamel ap-
plied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry
film thickness of not less than 2.8 mils(0.071 imn).
I) ICI: 1402-XXXX Dulux Professional Acylic Eggshell Wall &Trim Paint.
2) Moore: SuperSpec Latex Eggshell Enamel#274
3) PPG: Speedhide 6-400 Eggshell Latex enamel.
4) SW: ProMar 200 Interior Latex Eggshell B20W201 series.
C. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over ferrous metal:
1. Semigloss, Acrylic-Enamel Finish: One finish coat over an enamel undercoater and a
primer.
a. Primer: Quick-drying, rust-inhibitive, alkyd-based or epoxy-metal primer, as rec-
ommended by the manufacturer for this substrate, applied at spreading rate rec-
ommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less
than 1.5 mils(0.038 r11111).
1) ICI 4120-XXXX Devguard All Purpose Metal &Galvanized Primer.
2) Moore: IronClad Alkyd Low Lustre Metal& Wood Enamel#63
3) PPG: 7-858/852 Industrial Rust Inhibitive Steel Primer.
4) SW: Kern Kromik Universal Metal Primer B50Z series
b. Undercoat: Alkyd, interior enamel undercoat or semigloss, acrylic-latex, interior
enamel, as recommended by the manufacturer for this substrate, applied at spread-
ing rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of
not less than 13 mils(0.033 mm).
PAINTING 099100- 13
dw
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA w
2) Moore: Impervo Alkyd High Gloss Metal&Wood Enamel#133.
3) PPG: 7-8xx Industrial Interior/Exterior Gloss-Oil Enamel.
4) S-W: Industrial Enamel B-54 Series VOC complying.
3.7 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE
A. Concrete Masonry Units: Provide the following finish systems over interior concrete masonry
block units:
1. Semigloss, Alkyd-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over an undercoat and a filled surface.
a. Block Filler: High-performance, latex-based, block filler applied at spreading rate .w
recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less
than 5.0 mils(0.13 mm).
1) ICI: 3010-XXXX Ultra-Hide Interior/Exterior Vinyl-Acrylic Block Filler.
2) Moore: Supercraft Bock Filler#285.
3) PPG: 6-7 Speedhide Interior/Exterior Masonry Latex Block Filler.
4) S-W: Heavy-Duty Block Filler B42W46.
b. Undercoat: Interior, alkyd- or latex-based, enamel undercoater, as recommended
by the manufacturer for this substrate, applied at spreading rate recommended by
the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils
(0.031 mill).
1) ICI: 1507-XXXX Dulux Ultra Traditional Inteior Alkyd Semi-Gloss Wall &
Trim Emanel. "
2) Moore: SuperSpec Alkyd Enamel Undercoater&Primer Sealer#245
3) PPG: Speedhide 6-1110 Alkyd Semi-Gloss Interior Enamel
4) S-W: PrepRite Block Filler B25W25
C. Finish Coat: Odorless, semigloss, alkyd, interior enamel applied at spreading rate
recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less
.�
than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm).
1) ICI: 1507-XXXX Dulux Ultra Traditional Inteior Alkyd Semi-Gloss Wall &
Trim Emanel.
2) Moore: SuperSpec Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel#271
3) PPG: Speedhide 6-1110 Alkyd Semi-Gloss Interior Enamel.
4) S-W: ProClassic H.S. Interior Semi-Gloss Alkyd Enamel A-34 Series.
B. Gypsum Board: Provide the following finish systems over interior gypsum board surfaces:
1. Flat, Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer. Application for ceilings and
soffits.
a. Primer: Latex-based, interior primer applied at spreading rate recommended by
the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils
(0.031 mm).
1) ICI: 1000-1200 Dulux Ultra Latex Basecoat Primer.
2) Moore: SuperSpec Latex Enamel Undecoater&Primer Sealer#253
3) PPG: Speedhide 6-2 Interior Primer/Sealer.
PAINTING 099100- 12
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
�* Northampton,MA
b. First and Second Coats: Deep-color, full-gloss, exterior, alkyd enamel applied at
spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thick-
ness of not less than 3.7 mils(0.094 mm).
1) ICI: 4308-0400 Devguard Alkyd Industrial Gloss Enamel.
2) Moore: SuperSpec Gloss House Paint#175
3) PPG: 7-8xx Industrial Interior/Exterior Gloss-Oil Enamel.
4) S-W: SWP Exterior Gloss Paint A-2 Series.
C. Zinc-Coated Metal: Provide the following finish systems over exterior zinc-coated(galvanized)
metal surfaces:
1. Semigloss,Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a galvanized metal primer.
a. Primer: Galvanized metal primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the
manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.031
mm).
1) ICI: 4120-XXXX Devguard All Purpose Metal &Galvanized Primer.
2) Moore: M04 Acrylic Metal Primer
3) PPG: 90-709 Pitt-Tech One Pack Interior/Exterior Primer/Finish DTM In-
dustrial Enamel.
4) SW: DTM Acrylic Primer/finish B66W1 Series
b. First and Second Coats: Semigloss, exterior, acrylic-latex enamel applied at
w spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thick-
ness of not less than 2.6 mils(0.066 mm).
1) ICI: 2406-XXXX Dulux Professional Exterior 100% Acrylic Semi-gloss
Finish.
2) Moore: SuperSpec Latex House& Trim Paint#170
3) PPG: 78 Line Sun-Proof Semi-Gloss Acrylic Latex House and Trim Paint.
4) SW: DTM Acrylic Semigloss B66-200 Series
2. Full-Gloss,Alkyd-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a galvanized metal primer.
a. Primer: Galvanized metal primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the
manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.031
Y11m$.
1) ICI: 4120-XXXX Devguard All Purpose Metal &Galvanized Primer.
2) Moore: IronClad Latex Low Lustre Metal &Wood Enamel#163
3) PPG: 90-709 Pitt-Tech One Pack Interior/Exterior Primer/Finish DTM In-
dustrial Enamel.
4) S-W: Galvite Paint B50WZ30/
b. First and Second Coats: Full-gloss, exterior, alkyd enamel applied at spreading
rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not
less than 2.6 mils 10.066 min).
aw
1) ICI: 4308-XXXX Devguard Alkyd Industrial Gloss Enamel.
PAINTING 099100- 11
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
a. Primer: Rust-inhibitive metal primer applied at spreading rate recommended by
the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils �►
(0.033 mm).
1) ICI: 4120-XXXX Devguard All Purpose Metal &Galvanized Primer
2) Moore: IronClad Latex Low Lustre Metal &Wood Enamel#363.
3) PPG: 7-858/852 Industrial Rust Inhibitive Steel Primer.
4) SW: Kern Kromik Universal Metal Primer B50Z series/
b. First and Second Coats: Semigloss, exterior, acrylic-latex enamel applied at
spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thick-
ness of not less than 2.6 mils(0.066 mm).
1) ICI: 2406-XXXX Dulux Professional Exterior 100% Acrylic Semi-gloss
Finish
2) Moore: Superspec Low Lustre Latex House Paint#170 '
3) PPG: 78 Line Sun-Proof Semi-Gloss Acrylic Latex House and Trim Paint.
4) SW: DTM Acrylic Coating Semi-gloss B66-200 Series
3. Full-Gloss,Alkyd-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a rust-inhibitive primer.
a. Primer: Rust-inhibitive metal primer applied at spreading rate recommended by
the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils
(0.033 min).
1) ICI: 4120-XXXX Devguard All Purpose Metal &Galvanized Primer
2) Moore: : IronClad Latex Low Lustre Metal &Wood Enamel#163
3) PPG: 7-858/852 Industrial Rust Inhibitive Steel Primer.
4) S-W: Kern Kromik Universal Metal Primer B50Z series .w
b. First and Second Coats: Full-gloss, exterior, alkyd enamel applied at spreading
rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not
less than 3.0 mils(0.076 mm).
1) ICI: 4308-XXXX Devguard Alkyd Industrial Gloss Enamel.
2) Moore: Impervo Alkyd High Gloss Metal& Wood Enamel#133.
3) PPG: 7-8xx Industrial Interior/Exterior Gloss-Oil Enamel.
4) S-W: Industrial Enamel B-54Z Series.
4. Deep-Color, Full-Gloss, Alkyd-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a rust-inhibitive pri-
mer.
a. Primer: Rust-inhibitive metal primer applied at spreading rate recommended by
the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils
(0.036 mm).
1) ICI: 4120-XXXX Devguard All Purpose Metal & Galvanized Primer.
2) Moore: IronClad Latex Low Lustre Metal & Wood Enamel#163.
3) PPG: 7-858/852 Industrial Rust Inhibitive Steel Primer.
4) S-W: Kern Kromik Universal Metal Primer B50Z series.
PAINTING 099100- 10
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
No Northampton,MA
B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective
wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing painting operations.
3.6 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE
A. Concrete: Provide the following finish systems over exterior concrete, stucco, and brick maso-
nry surfaces:
1. Low-Luster Acrylic Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer.
a. Primer: Alkali-resistant, exterior, acrylic-latex primer applied at spreading rate
recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less
than 1.3 mils (0.033 mm).
1) ICI: 2000-xxxx Dulux Professional Exterior 100%Acrylic Latex Primer
2) Moore: SuperSpec Latex Exterior Primer#169.
3) PPG: 6-603 Speedhide Interior/Exterior Acrylic Latex Alkali Resistant
Primer.
4) SW: Loxon Exterior Acrylic Masonry Primer A24 Series
b. First and Second Coats: Low-luster(eggshell or satin), exterior, acrylic-latex paint
applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry
film thickness of not less than 2.3 mils(0.058 wnm).
1) ICI: 2402-XXXX Dulux Professional Exterior 100%Acrylic Satin Finish
2) Moore: SuperSpec Low Lustre Latex House Paint#185.
3) PPG: 76 Line Sun-Proof Exterior House& Trim Acrylic Satin Latex.
4) SW: A100 Exteior Latex Satin A82 Series
B. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over exterior ferrous metal. Primer is not
required on shop-primed items.
1. Low-Luster Acrylic Finish: 2 finish coats over a rust-inhibitive primer.
a. Primer: Rust-inhibitive metal primer applied at spreading rate recommended by
the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils
(0.033 mm).
1) ICI: 4120-XXXX Devguard All Purpose Metal&Galvanized Primer
2) Moore: IronClad Latex Low Lustre Metal& Wood Enamel#363
3) PPG: 7-858/852 Industrial Rust Inhibitive Steel Primer.
4) SW: Kem Kromik Universal Metal Primer B50Z Series
b. First and Second Coat: Low-sheen (eggshell or satin), exterior, acrylic-latex paint
applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry
film thickness of not less than 2.8 mils(0.071 mm).
1) ICI: 2402-XXXX Dulux Professional Exterior 100%Acrylic Satin Finish
2) Moore: Superspec Low Lustre Latex House Paint#185
3) PPG: 76 Line Sun-Proof Exterior House&Trim Acrylic Satin Latex.
4) SW: DTM Acrylic Coating Semi-gloss B66-200 Series
2. Semi-gloss,Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a rust-inhibitive primer.
PAINTING 099100-9
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
5. Accessory items.
w
G. Ductwork and acoustic metal deck shall be painted by spray equipment only. Brushing or roll-
ing is not acceptable.
H. Electrical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following where exposed to r�
view:
1. Conduit and fittings.
2. Back boxes.
3. Work boxes.
I. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material, as recommended by
the manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been
prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or
unsealed areas in first coat appears,to ensure a finish coat with no burn through or other defects
due to insufficient sealing.
J. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth,
opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holi-
days, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be accepta-
ble.
K. Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass-smooth surface film of
even luster. Provide a finish free of laps, runs, cloudiness, color irregularity, brush marks,
orange peel,nail holes, or other surface imperfections.
L. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color,texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish,
or repaint work not complying with requirements.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded
paint materials from the site.
B. After completing coating application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered coatings by
washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.
C. Protect work of other trades against damage from coating operation. Correct damage by
cleaning, repairing, replacing, and recoating, as approved by Architect, and leave in an
undamaged condition.
D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or
defaced coated surfaces.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage by painting. Correct
damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing,and repainting, as approved by Architect. w
w�
PAINTING 099100- 8
so
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
00 Northampton,MA
vent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with the Steel Structures Painting
„w Council's(SSPQ recommendations.
5. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based solvents so
surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized
sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods.
D. Materials Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written in-
structions.
++ 1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of for-
eign materials and residue.
2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required
„■ during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface
film and strain material before using.
3. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits.
E. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat when mul-
tiple coats of the same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish
coat,but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.
3.3 APPLICATION
40 A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and
techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied.
W B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or other-
wise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent sur-
face deterioration.
C. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for the type of material applied. Use brush of appropri-
ate size for the surface or item being painted.
2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet,velvet back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by
the manufacturer for the material and texture required.
3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by the
manufacturer for the material and texture required.
w. D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recom-
mended spreading rate. Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommend-
ed by the manufacturer and as specified herein.
E. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to items
exposed in equipment rooms and in occupied spaces.
F. Mechanical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following where exposed to
view:
1. Piping,pipe hangers,and supports.
2. Tanks.
3. Ductwork.
4. Insulation.
4W
PAINTING 099100 -7
so
w�
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA !`
1. Flat Paints, Coatings, and Primers: VOC content of not more than 50 g/L.
2. Nonflat Paints,Coatings, and Primers: VOC content of not more than 150 g/L.
3. Anti-Corrosive and Anti-Rust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: VOC not more than 250
g/L.
4. Floor Coatings: VOC not more than 100 g/L.
5. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: VOC content of not more than 200 g/L.
6. Dry-Fog Coatings: VOC content of not more than 400 g/L.
7. Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: VOC content of not more than 340 g/L.
8. Pre-Treatment Wash Primers: VOC content of not more than 420 g/L.
D. Colors: Provide color selections made by the Architect. Each room, element, or surface may
contain multiple colors.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
.w
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with the Applicator present, under which painting
will be performed for compliance with paint application requirements.
B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compa-
tibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characte-
ristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers.
C. Apply paints and coatings after dust generating activities are completed.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fix-
tures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or
impossible because of the size or weight of the item, provide surface-applied protection before
surface preparation and painting.
B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean the substrates of substances
that could impair the bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning.
C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's writ-
ten instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified.
I. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime.
2. Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete, concrete masonry block, cement plaster, and
mineral-fiber-reinforced cement panel surfaces to be painted. Remove efflorescence,
chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze.
If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of sur-
face preparation.
3. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral
spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off.
4. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop
coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use sol-
PAINTING 099100-6
go
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS
ws
A. Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding
air temperatures are between 50 and 90 deg F(10 and 32 deg C).
B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surround-
ing air temperatures are between 45 and 95 deg F(7.2 and 35 deg C).
C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog,or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent;
or at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C)above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
1.10 EXTRA MATERIAL
A. Furnish to the Owner unopened containers of each paint color and type in the amount of 3% of
the total quantity of paint needed,but no less than 1 full gallon.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers Names: The following manufacturers are referred to in the paint schedules by
use of shortened versions of their names,which are shown in parentheses:
1. ICI Dulux Paints . (ICI).
2. Benjamin Moore&Co. (Moore).
3. PPG Industries,Inc.(PPG).
�s 4. Sherwin-Williams Co. (S-W)
5. Or approved equal
2.2 PAINT MATERIALS,GENERAL
A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, undercoats, and finish-coat materials
that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service
and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best-quality paint material of the various coating
types specified. Paint-material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification
will not be acceptable.
w. I. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors
or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the
exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish manufacturer's material
data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions.
C. VOC Content of Field-Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide products that comply with
the following limits for VOC content, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when
so calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24); these requirements do not
apply to paints and coatings that are applied in a fabrication or finishing shop:
40
PAINTING 099100- 5
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
D. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to dem-
onstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project w
names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information spe-
cified.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed painting sys-
tem applications similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project with a record of
successful in-service performance.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers, primers, and undercoat materials for each coating sys-
tem from the same manufacturer as the finish coats.
C. Benchmark Samples (Mockups): Provide a full-coat benchmark finish sample of each type of
coating and substrate required on the Project. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P5.
Duplicate finish of approved prepared samples.
1. The Architect will select one room or surface to represent surfaces and conditions for
each type of coating and substrate to be painted.
a. Wall Surfaces: Provide samples on at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq.m)of wall surface.
b. Small Areas and Items: The Architect will designate an item or area as required.
2. After permanent lighting and other environmental services have been activated, apply
coatings in this room or to each surface according to the Schedule or as specified. Pro-
vide required sheen, color, and texture on each surface.
a. After finishes are accepted, the Architect will use the room or surface to evaluate
coating systems of a similar nature. w�
3. Final approval of colors will be from job-applied samples.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to the Project Site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and contain- *�+
ers bearing manufacturer's name and label, and the following information:
I. Product name or title of material.
2. Product description(generic classification or binder type).
3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture.
4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents.
5. Thinning instructions.
6. Application instructions.
7. Color name and number.
8. VOC content.
B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum
ambient temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C). Maintain containers used in storage in a clean con-
dition,free of foreign materials and residue.
PAINTING 099100-4
so
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
1.5 REFERENCES:
ew
A. ASTM D 16-Terminology Relating to Paint,Varnish,Lacquer, and Related Products.
B. ASTM D 4263 - Indicating Moisture in Concrete by the Plastic Sheet Method.
C. ASTM F 1869 - Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using
Anhydrous Calcium Chloride.
4
D. International Concrete Repair Institute (ICRI) Guideline No. 03732 - Selecting and Specifying
Concrete Surface Preparation for Sealers,Coatings, and Polymer Overlays.
go E. SSPC-SP 1 - Solvent Cleaning.
F. SSPC-SP 6/NACE 3 -Commercial Blast Cleaning.
w
G. SSPC-SP 13/NACE 6- Surface Preparation of Concrete.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each paint system specified. Include block fillers and primers.
1. Material List: Provide an inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each ma-
terial and cross-reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each
material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification.
2. Manufacturer's Information: Provide manufacturer's technical information, including la-
bel analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material
proposed for use.
3. Certification by the manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations
controlling use of volatile organic compounds(VOCs).
A. LEED Submittal:
1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.2: For paints, including printed statement of VOC content.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors
available for each type of finish-coat material indicated.
C. Samples for Verification: Of each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate ac-
tual conditions, on representative Samples of the actual substrate.
1. Provide stepped Samples, defining each separate coat, including block fillers and primers.
Use representative colors when preparing Samples for review. Resubmit until required
sheen, color, and texture are achieved.
2. Submit Samples on the following substrates for the Architect's review of color and tex-
ture only:
a. Stained or Natural Wood: Provide two 4-by-8-inch (100-hy-200-corn) samples of
natural-or stained-wood finish on actual wood surfaces.
b. Ferrous Metal: Provide two 4-inch- (100-nrnl-) square samples of flat metal and
two 8-inch-(200-mm-) long samples of solid metal for each color and finish.
PAINTING 099100-3
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
Northampton,MA
4. Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the following:
a. Valve and damper operators. •
b. Linkages.
C. Sensing devices.
d. Motor and fan shafts.
5. Labels: Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Factory Mutual (FM), or oth-
er code-required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomen-
clature plates.
6. Decorative Concrete Block: Do not paint the finished surfaces of decorative interior con- °AR
crete block. Paint the opposite, unfinished side of block if indicated in the finish sche-
dule or documents.
D. Work of this section includes all scaffolding, staging, hoisting, and rigging required to perform
the work.
am
1.2 ALTERNATE
A. Alternate work specified in Section 01 23 00 is required for the work of this Section.
1.3 SCHEDULE OF PAINT TYPES
A. Exterior and interior paint types are scheduled at the end of this Section. The following types
shall be used as follows:
1. Exterior:
a. Wood: Satin transparent finish.
2. Interior:
a. Concrete: Semi-Gloss
b. CMU: Semi-Gloss
C. Gypsum Board: Egg Shell on walls in all public areas.
d. Gypsum Board Soffits and Ceilings:Flat. �.
e. Woodwork: Satin transparent finish.
f. Ferrous Metal: Semi-Gloss
g. Zinc-coated metal: Semi-gloss
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section.
1. Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when measured at an
85-degree meter.
2. Eggshell refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 5 and 20 when measured
at a 60-degree meter.
3. Satin refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 15 and 35 when measured at a
60-degree meter.
4. Semigloss refers to medium-sheen finish with a gloss range between 30 and 65 when
measured at a 60-degree meter. w.
5. Full gloss refers to high-sheen finish with a gloss range more than 65 when measured at a
60-degree meter.
PAINTING 099100-2
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
W SECTION 099100-PAINTING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this
Section, including but not limited to the following: surface preparation and field painting of the
following:
1. Exposed interior items and surfaces including,but not limited to the following:
a. Concrete masonry units(CMU).
!+ b. Steel.
C. Galvanized metal.
d. Gypsum board.
e. Aluminum.
2. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to
shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections.
B. Paint exposed surfaces, except where the paint schedules indicate that a surface or material is
not to be painted or is to remain natural. If the paint schedules do not specifically mention an
item or a surface, paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces
whether or not schedules indicate colors. If the schedules do not indicate color or finish, the
Architect will select from standard colors and finishes available.
1. Painting includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including
color coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron work, and primed metal surfaces of me-
chanical and electrical equipment.
40
C. Do not paint prefnished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and
labels.
1. Prefinished items include the following factory-finished components: Light Fixtures, Pre-
finished Fiber Cement Board, Factory Finished Flush Wood Doors, Factory Finished
Plywood Panelling.
2. Concealed surfaces include walls or ceilings in the following generally inaccessible spac-
es:
a. Foundation spaces.
b. Furred areas.
C. Ceiling plenums.
d. Utility tunnels.
e. Pipe spaces.
£ Duct shafts.
3. Finished metal surfaces include the following:
a. Anodized aluminum.
b. Stainless steel.
C. Chromium plate.
PAINTING 099100 - 1
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
G. Scribe perimeter panels to provide a close fit with adjoining construction with no voids greater
than 1/8 inch(3 rnm)where panels abut vertical surfaces. w
H. Cut and trim access flooring and perform other dirt-or-debris-producing activities at a remote
location or as required to prevent contamination of subfloor under access flooring already
installed.
I. Ground flooring system as recommended by manufacturer and as needed to comply with
performance requirements for electrical resistance of floor coverings.
J. Scribe and install underfloor-cavity dividers to closely fit against subfloor surfaces, and seal
with mastic.
K. Scribe vertical closures to closely fit against subfloor and adjacent finished-floor surfaces. Set
in mastic and seal to maintain plenum effect within underfloor cavity.
L. Clean dust, dirt, and construction debris caused by floor installation, and vacuum subfloor area,
as installation of floor panels proceeds.
M. Seal underfloor air cavities at construction seams, penetrations, and perimeter to control air
leakage as recommended in writing by manufacturer.
N. Install access flooring without change in elevation between adjacent panels and within the .�
following tolerances:
1. Plus or minus 1/16 inch(1.5 mm) in any 10-foot(3-m)distance.
2. Plus or minus 1/8 inch(3 mm from a level plane over entire access flooring area.
3.4 ADJUSTING, CLEANING,AND PROTECTION
A. Prohibit traffic on access flooring for 24 hours and removal of floor panels for 72 hours after
installation to allow pedestal adhesive to set.
B. After completing installation, vacuum clean access flooring and cover with continuous sheets of
reinforced paper or plastic. Maintain protective covering until time of Substantial Completion.
ew
C. Replace access flooring panels that are stained, scratched, or otherwise damaged or that do not
comply with specified requirements.
sue
END OF SECTION 096900
ACCESS FLOORING 096900- 8
ON
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
PART 3 -EXECUTION
go
3.1 EXAMINATION
00 A. Examine substrates, with Installer and manufacturer's representative present, for compliance
with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of
work.
00
B. Preinstallation Adhesive Field Test: Before installing pedestals, field test their adhesion to
subfloor surfaces as follows:
4W
I. In areas representative of each subfloor surface, set typical pedestal assemblies in same
adhesive and methods required for completed work.
2. Allow test installation to cure for 30 days, with a pressure of 25 lbf H I I N) applied
vertically to pedestals during this period.
3. After curing, apply lateral load against a straight steel bar inserted 2 inches (51 mm) into
pedestal stems. Measure the force needed to cause adhesive failure of pedestal base.
4. Proceed with installation only after tests show compliance with performance requirement
specified for pedestals'capability to resist overturning moment.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Lay out floor panel installation to keep the number of cut panels at floor perimeter to a
minimum. Avoid using panels cut to less than 6 inches(152 mm).
B. Locate each pedestal, complete any necessary subfloor preparation, and vacuum clean subfloor
to remove dust,dirt, and construction debris before beginning installation.
3.3 INSTALLATION
so
A. Install access flooring system and accessories under supervision of access flooring
manufacturer's authorized representative to produce a rigid, firm installation that complies with
ON performance requirements and is free of instability,rocking,rattles, and squeaks.
B. Set pedestals in adhesive as recommended in writing by access flooring manufacturer to provide
full bearing of pedestal base on subfloor.
C. Attach pedestals to subfloor by post-installed mechanical anchors.
D. Adjust pedestals to permit top of installed panels to be set flat, level, and to proper height.
E. Secure stringers to pedestal heads according to access flooring manufacturer's written
instructions.
F. Install flooring panels securely in place, properly seated with panel edges flush. Do not force
panels into place.
ACCESS FLOORING 096900- 7
go
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
accommodating four duplex receptacles, three knockouts for standard voice/data faceplates or
Tate voice/data interface plates (or grommeted interface plates). Standard capacity 7-5/16 by 6-
15/16 inch PVD Servicenters shall be capable of accommodating two duplex receptacles and
two Tate voice/data interface plates (or grommeted interface plates). The service outlet box
shall be a drop-in design having a hinged Lexan lid with carpet insert and Lexan frame with
tapered edge. Service outlet box shall be capable of withstanding without failure a load of 800
lb.
B. Provide manufacturer's standard steps, ramps, fascia plate, perimeter support, and grommets
where indicated on the contract drawings.
C. Provide 5 spare floor panels and 8 square feet of understructure systems for each type used in
the project for maintenance stock. Deliver to project in manufacturer's standard packaging
clearly marked with the contents.
D. Provide 2panel lifting devices.
2.5 FINISHES
A. Static Dissipative vinyl tile: Static dissipative vinyl tile shall be fabricated in one piece to cover
each panel face within perimeter plastic edging . The tile shall have a static generation of less
than 30 volts with conductive footwear at 20 percent relative humidity per AATCC-134 and
static decay of 5,000 volts to zero in less than 0.2 seconds per Fed. Test Method 101 C, Method
4046,at 15 percent relative humidity.
B. Surface to Ground Resistance of Conductive Laminate Covering: Not less than 25,000 ohms
(2.5 x 104), nor more than 1,000,000 ohms (1.0 x 106), as determined by testing in accordance
with the test method for conductive flooring specified in Chapter 3 of NFPA 99, but modified to �u
place one electrode on the floor surface and to attach one electrode to the understructure.
Resistance shall be tested at 500 volts.
2.6 FABRICATION TOLERANCES
A. Floor panel flatness measured on a diagonal: +/-0.035" �►
B. Floor panel flatness measured along edges: +/- 0.025"
C. Floor panel width or length of required size: +/-0.01011 ww
D. Floor panel squareness tolerance: +/- 0.015"
w
wn
ACCESS FLOORING 096900-6
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
2.3 PANEL COMPONENTS
A. Floor Panels:
W 1. Panels shall consist of a top steel sheet welded to a formed steel bottom pan filled
internally with a lightweight cementitious material. Mechanical or adhesive methods for
attachment of the steel top and bottom sheets are unacceptable.
2. Floor panels shall be protected from corrosion by electro-deposited epoxy paint. The use
! ! of zinc electroplating shall be prohibited.
3. Cementitious fill material shall be totally encased within the steel welded shell except
where cut for special conditions. Note: This greatly reduces the potential for dust in the
environment from exposed cement materials.
4. Perforated Airflow Panels: Perforated steel airflow panels designed for static loads of
1000 lbs. shall be interchangeable with standard field panels and shall have 25% open
aw surface area with the following air distribution capability:
a. Panel without damper: 784 cfm at 0.1-inch of H2O(static pressure).
b. Panel with damper at 100% open position: 652 cfm at 0.1-inch of H2O (static
pressure).
W
B. Grate Airflow Panels: Die cast aluminum grate panels designed for static and rolling loads shall
be interchangeable with standard field panels. Grate panels shall have 56% open area with the
following air distribution capability: 2016 cfm at 0.1-inch of H2O (static pressure). Grate
panels shall have the following load bearing capacities:
C. Design Load: Panel supported on actual understructure shall be capable of supporting a safe
working or design load of 1000 lbs. placed on a one square inch area, using a round or square
indentor, at any location on the panel without yielding.
D. Uniform load: 250 lbs./ft.2
E. Safety Factor: (2)Times Design Load
F. Rolling Load: Grate panel and supporting understructure shall be able to withstand the
following rolling loads at any location on the panel without developing a local and overall
surface deformation greater than 0.040 inches. Note: wheel 1 and wheel 2 tests shall be
performed on two separate panels.
1. Wheel 1:
a. Size: 3"dia x 1 13/16"wide
b. Load: 1000lbs.
C. Passes: 10
2. Wheel 2:
a. Size: 6"dia x 2"wide
b. Load: 800lbs.
C. Passes: 10,000
3. Impact load: 100 lbs.
e
2.4 ACCESSORIES
w
A. UL listed Power, Voice & Data Servicenters shall be provided in locations as detailed on the
contract drawings. High capacity 11 '/4 inch square PVD Servicenters shall be capable of
ACCESS FLOORING 096900- 5
OR
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
w
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Access floor system shall be as manufactured by Tate Access Floors, Inc. and shall consist of
ConCore® 2500 access floor panel supported by a bolted stringer understructure system.
B. Alternative products shall meet or exceed all requirements as indicated herein and must receive
prior written approval by the architect or designer.
C. Access floor manufacture shall be ISO9001: 2000 certified demonstrating it has a robust and
well documented quality management system with continuous improvement goals and
strategies.
2.2 SUPPORT COMPONENTS
A. Pedestals:
1. Pedestal assemblies shall be corrosive resistant, all steel welded construction, and shall
provide an adjustment range of +/- 1" for finished floor heights 6" or greater. Zinc
electroplating shall be prohibited on all pedestal components, including head plate,
threaded rod,adjustment nut, pedestal tube,base plate,and all fasteners.
2. Pedestal assemblies shall provide a means of leveling and locking the assembly at a
selected height, which requires deliberate action to change height setting and prevents
vibration displacement.
3. Hot dip galvanized steel pedestal head shall be welded to a threaded rod which includes a
specially designed adjusting nut. The nut shall provide location lugs to engage the
pedestal base assembly, such that deliberate action is required to change the height
setting.
4. Threaded rod shall provide a specially designed anti-rotation device, such that when the
head assembly is engaged in the base assembly,the head cannot freely rotate (for FFH of
6" or greater). Note: This prevents the assembly from inadvertently losing its leveling
adjustment when panels are removed from the installation during use.
5. Hot dip galvanized pedestal base assembly shall consist of a formed steel plate with no
less than 16 inches of bearing area, welded to a 7/8" square steel tube and shall be
designed to engage the head assembly.
B. Stringers: go
I. Stringers shall support each edge of panel.
2. Steel stringer shall have conductive galvannealed coating. Zinc electroplating shall be
prohibited on stringers and stringer fasteners.
3. Stringers shall be individually and rigidly fastened to the pedestal with one machine go
screw for each foot of stringer length. Bolts shall provide positive electrical contact
between the stringers and pedestals. Connections depending on gravity or spring action
are unacceptable. so
4. Stringer grid shall be 4' stringers in a basketweave configuration ensuring maximum
lateral stability in all directions.
ACCESS FLOORING 096900-4
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
I. Combustibility:All components of the access floor system shall qualify as non-combustible
by demonstrating compliance with requirements of ASTM E 136, Standard Test Method for
Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace at 750 deg C.
w J. Recycled Content: Panel and understructure system shall be required to have a minimum re-
cycled content of 30%.
K. Axial Load: Pedestal support assembly shall provide a 5000 lb. axial load without permanent
deformation.
L. Overturning Moment: Pedestal support assembly shall provide an average overturning mo-
w, ment of 1000 in-lbs. when glued to a clean, sound,uncoated concrete surface. ICBO number
for the specific system or structural calculations shall be required attesting to the lateral sta-
bility of the system under seismic conditions.
M. Stringer Concentrated Load: Stringer shall be capable of withstanding a concentrated load of
450 lbs. placed in its midspan on a one square inch area using a round or square indentor
without exceeding a permanent set of 0.010"after the load is removed.
1.6 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Access floor system, where indicated on the design documents, shall consist of modular and
removable fully encased cementitious filled welded steel panels supported on all four edges by
structural steel members which are designed to bolt onto adjustable height pedestal assemblies
W forming a modular grid pattern.
B. Panel shall be easily removed by one person with a suction cup lifting device and shall be
on interchangeable except where cut for special conditions.
C. Quantities, finished floor heights (FFH) and location of accessories shall be as specified on the
ON contract drawings.
1.7 SUBMITTALS
00
A. Detail sheets, for each proposed product type, which provide the necessary information to
describe the product and its performance.
,w.
B. Test reports, certified by an independent testing laboratory with a minimum of five years
experience testing access floor components in accordance with CISCA Recommended Test
Procedures, certifying that component parts perform as specified.
C. Manufacturer's installation instructions and guidelines.
,,. D. Manufacturer's Owner Manual outlining recommended care and maintenance procedures.
ACCESS FLOORING 096900-3
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Design Load: Panel supported on actual understructure(the system)shall be capable of sup-
porting a safe working load or design load of 2500 lbs. This rating signifies that the system
will withstand not only a concentrated load placed on a one square inch area at any location
on the panel without yielding but also demonstrates the ability to withstand an overload ca-
pacity of two times its rating(ie. a safety factor of 2). (For a detailed description of this im-
portant criteria,refer to the Design Load bulletin at www.tateaccessfloors.coin and click on
Technical Resources/Technical Bulletins).
B. Safety Factor: Panel supported on actual understructure(the system) shall be capable of
withstanding a minimum of(2)two times the design load anywhere on the panel without fail-
ure. Failure is defined as the point at which the system will no longer accept the load.
C. Uniform Load: Panel supported on actual understructure(the system)shall be capable of
supporting a uniform load of 650 lbs./ft2 placed on the entire area of the panel without yield-
ing and generating a permanent set of no more than 0.010"once the load is removed. Note:
The uniform load rating of an access floor panel as specified herein should not be confused
with the"uniform live load"as specified in seismic zone applications.
D. Rolling Load: Panel supported on actual understructure(the system)shall be able to with-
stand the following rolling loads at any location on the panel without developing a local and
overall surface deformation greater than 0.040 inches. Note: wheel 1 and wheel 2 tests shall s
be performed on two separate panels.
Wheel 1: Size: 3"dia x 1 13/16"wide Load: 1500 lbs. Passes: 10
Wheel 2*: Size: (A)6"dia x 2"wide Load: 2000 lbs. Passes: 10,000
(B) 10"dia.X 4"wide
*Note: For loads up to 1500 lbs., specify Wheel 2 (A). For loads greater than 1500 lbs.,
Specify Wheel 2 (B).
E. Impact Load: Panel and supporting understructure(the system)shall be capable of support-
ing an impact load of 150 lbs. dropped from a height of 36 inches onto a one square inch area
(using a round or square indentor)at any location on the panel.
F. Panel Drop Test: Panel shall be capable of being dropped face up onto to a concrete slab
from a height of 36", after which it shall continue to meet all load performance requirements
as previously defined. ,
G. Panel Cutout: Panel with an 8"diameter interior cutout supported on actual understructure
shall be capable of maintaining its design load strength anywhere on the panel without the use
of additional supports.
H. Flammability: System shall meet Class A Flame spread requirements for flame spread and
smoke development. Tests shall be performed in accordance with ASTM-E84-1998, Stan-
dard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics for Building Materials.
ACCESS FLOORING 096900-2
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
SECTION 096900-ACCESS FLOORING
PART I -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Work of this section includes, but is not limited to: access floor panels, floor coverings,
understructure and various electrical, data and communication accessories.
B. Related Sections
1. Concrete sealer shall be compatible with pedestal adhesive, see Division 3.
2. Electrical contractor shall provide necessary material and labor to electrically connect the
access floor to the building, see Division 26.
1.3 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS FOR STORAGE AND INSTALLATION
A. Area to receive and store access floor materials shall be enclosed and maintained at ambient
temperatures between 35°to 95°F and relative humidity levels between 20%to 80%. All floor
panels shall be stored at ambient temperature between 50° to 90° F for at least 24 hours before
installation begins. All areas of installation shall be enclosed and maintained at ambient
temperature between 50° to 90° F and at relative humidity levels between 20% to 80%, and
shall remain within these environmental limits throughout occupancy.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. CISCA (Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association) - "Recommended Test
Procedures for Access Floors" shall be used as a guideline when presenting load performance
product information.
1.5 PERFORMANCE CERTIFICATION
A. Product tests shall be witnessed and certified by independent engineering and testing laboratory
based in the U.S. with a minimum of five years experience testing access floor components in
accordance CISCA"Recommended Test Procedures for Access Floors".
ACCESS FLOORING 096900- 1
me
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
C. Maintain dye lot integrity. Do not mix dye lots in same area.
D. Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in
furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut
edges as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.
E. Extend carpet the into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable
flanges,alcoves,and similar openings.
F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting
by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking
an device.
- G. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders.
ow H. Stagger joints of carpet tiles so carpet tile grid is offset from access flooring panel grid. Do not
fill seams of access flooring panels with carpet adhesive;keep seams free of adhesive.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile:
on 1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner
recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.
2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet tile surface.
3. Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face-beater element.
B. Protect installed carpet tile to comply with CRI 104, Section 16, "Protecting Indoor
Installations."
C. Protect carpet tile against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and
fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or
recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 096813
aiw
TILE CARPETING 096813 -5
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
conditions affecting carpet tile performance. Examine carpet tile for type, color, pattern, and
potential defects. ,
B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following:
1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other ..
materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness
characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by carpet the
manufacturer.
2. Subfloor finishes comply with requirements specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-
Place Concrete" for slabs receiving carpet tile.
3. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges,depressions, scale,and foreign deposits.
C. For raised access flooring systems,verify the following:
I. Access floor complies with installation requirements specified in Division 09 Section
"Access Flooring."
2. Access floor substrate is compatible with carpet tile and adhesive if any.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and with
carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to
receive carpet tile installation.
B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks,
holes and depressions 1118 inch (3 nim) wide or wider and protrusions more than 1/32 inch (0.8
nim)unless more stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions.
a�
C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with
adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical
methods recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer. *•
D. Clean metal substrates of grease, oil, soil and rust, and prime if directed by adhesive
manufacturer. Rough sand painted metal surfaces and remove loose paint. Sand aluminum
surfaces,to remove metal oxides, immediately before applying adhesive.
E. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet tile.
3.3 INSTALLATION
w
A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 14, "Carpet Modules," and with carpet tile
manufacturer's written installation instructions.
B. Installation Method: As recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer. '
TILE CARPETING 096813 -4
00
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Comply with CRI 104 for temperature,humidity,and ventilation limitations.
B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install carpet tiles until spaces are enclosed and
weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity
conditions are maintained at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
C. Do not install carpet tiles over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to
bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet tile
manufacturer.
D. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet tiles,
install carpet tiles before installing these items.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty for Carpet Tiles: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of
carpet tile installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 CARPET TILE
A. Products: Carry an allowance of$30 per square yard. Manufacturer, style, color, and pattern to
�s
be determined.
2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based
formulation provided or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.
go B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining, pressure-sensitive type to suit
products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for
installed carpet tile and is recommended by carpet tile manufacturer for releasable installation.
w
1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D(EPA Method 24).
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other
TILE CARPETING 096813 -3
�w
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
1. Carpet Tile: Full-size Sample.
2. Exposed Edge, Transition, and Other Accessory Stripping: 12-inch- (300-mm-) long
Samples.
E. Product Schedule: For carpet tile. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Installer.
B. Product Test Reports: For carpet tile, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
C. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For carpet tiles to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following:
1. Methods for maintaining carpet tile, including cleaning and stain-removal products and
procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule.
2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet tile.
1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS a,w
A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Carpet Tile: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated,
but not less than 10 sq.yd. (8.3 sq.m j.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire-Test-Response Ratings: Where indicated, provide carpet the identical to those of
assemblies tested for fire response according to NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.
B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.
I. Build mockups at locations and in sizes shown on Drawings.
2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the
completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Comply with CRI 104.
TILE CARPETING 096813 -2
No
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton.MA
SECTION 096813 -TILE CARPETING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
OW A. Section includes modular,carpet tile.
B. Related Requirements:
Wo 1. Division 09 Section "Resilient Base and Accessories" for resilient wall base and
accessories installed with carpet tile.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
w, 1. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade
resistance.
2. Include installation recommendations for each type of substrate.
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.3:
a. For carpet tile, documentation indicating compliance with testing and product
W requirements of CRI's"Green Label Plus" program.
b. For installation adhesive, documentation including printed statement of VOC
content.
C. Shop Drawings: Show the following:
1. Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where
cutouts are required in carpet tiles.
2. Carpet tile type,color,and dye lot.
3. Type of subfloor.
4. Type of installation.
5. Pattern of installation.
6. Pattern type, location, and direction.
7. Type,color, and location of insets and borders.
A. 8. Type, color, and location of edge,transition,and other accessory strips.
9. Transition details to other flooring materials.
D. Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label
each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation
indicated on Drawings and in schedules.
TILE CARPETING 096813 - 1
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
END OF SECTION 096519
eAr
so
.w
w
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 096519-6
wo
ON
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
C. Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as
manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed
tiles.
D. Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent
fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets,pipes,outlets, and door frames.
E. Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend floor tiles
to center of door openings.
F. Install flooring wall to wall before the installation of floor-set cabinets, casework, furniture,
equipment, movable partitions, etc. Extend flooring into toe spaces, door recesses, closets, and
similar openings as shown on the drawings.
G. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting
W by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent,
nonstaining marking device.
W H. Install floor tiles on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, building expansion joint covers,
and similar items in finished floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern
between pieces of tile installed on covers and adjoining tiles. Tightly adhere tile edges to
substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters.
1. Adhere floor tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to
produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints,
telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.
J. Install copper grounding strips into adhesive in strict accordance with manufacturer's written
instructions. Coordinate location of strips with electrician for connection to building grounding
system.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of floor tile.
B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor tile installation:
1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.
2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly.
3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.
C. Protect floor tile products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction
operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.
D. Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from floor tile surfaces
before applying liquid floor polish.
1. Apply three coats.
E. Cover floor tile until Substantial Completion.
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 096519-5
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum
moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in
other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign
deposits that might interfere with adhesion of floor tile.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of
resilient products.
B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.
1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.
2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and '
that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by
manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed
with installation only after substrates pass testing.
4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer[and as follows].
Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.
C. Access Flooring Panels: Remove protective film of oil or other coating using method
recommended by access flooring manufacturer.
w
D. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching
compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.
E. Do not install floor tiles until they are same temperature as space where they are to be installed.
1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed
at least 48 hours in advance of installation.
F. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before
installation.
3.3 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile.
B. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor
offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using
cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter.
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 096519-4
on
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
go Northampton,MA
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Floor Tile: Furnish 1 box for every [50] boxes or fraction thereof, of each type, color,
and pattern of floor tile installed.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 VINYL COMPOSITION FLOOR TILE
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following:
1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.;
2. Mannington Mills, Inc.; .
B. Tile Standard: ASTM F 1066,Class 2,through-pattern tile
C. Wearing Surface: Smooth
D. Thickness: [0.125 inch(3.2 mm)
E. Size: 12 by 12 inches (305 by 305 mrij).
F. Colors and PatternsAs selected by Architect from full range of industry colors; allow for a
maximum of five colors.
w
2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
e A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or
blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for
applications indicated.
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit floor tile and substrate
conditions indicated.
I. Use adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D(EPA Method 24):
a. VCT and Asphalt Tile Adhesives: Not more than 50 g/L.
2. Provide Static Dissipative Tile Adhesive with 2 in. (5.08 cm) wide x 24 in. (60.96 cm)
long copper ground-connection strips under the tile.
C. Floor Polish: Provide protective liquid floor polish products as recommended by manufacturer.
D. Static Dissipative Floor Polish as application for initial maintenance finish on static dissipative
tile.
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 096519-3
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA -"
B. Provide static dissipative resilient tile, adhesive, copper grounding strips, and maintenance
finish supplied by the manufacturer.
C. For Static Dissipative Tile provide flooring material to meet the following electrical properties
when installed according to manufacturer's instructions with the required adhesive: w.
1. ESD STM7.1 :Floor Materials—Resistive Characterization of Materials results between
106 and 109 ohms
2. ASTM F 150 (Electrical Resistance of Flooring)between 106 and 109 ohms.
3. ANSI ESD STM 97.1: Floor Materials and Footwear—Resistance in Combination with a
Person results between 106 and 109 ohms
4. ANSI/ESD STM 97.2: Floor Materials and Footwear Voltage Measurement in
Combination with a Person)- less than 10 volts with dissipative footwear at 20%relative
humidity.
5. Federal Test Method 4046 [101 C] (Static Decay) 5000 volts to zero in less than 0.2
second.
wR
D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to
ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.
I. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.
E. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Build mockups for floor tile including accessories.
a. Size: Minimum 100 sq. ft. (9.3 sq. m) for each type, color, and pattern in locations
directed by Architect.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Store floor tile and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient
temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50
deg F (10 deg C)or more than 90 deg F (3 2' deg C). Store floor tiles on flat surfaces. .�
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than
[70 deg F (21 deg(7)or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C), in spaces to receive floor tile during the
following time periods:
1. 48 hours before installation.
2. During installation.
3. 48 hours after installation.
B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by
manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F(13 deb;C)or more than 95 deg F (35 deb;C').
C. Close spaces to traffic during floor tile installation.
D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor tile installation.
E. Install floor tile after other finishing operations, including painting,have been completed.
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 096519-2
on
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
SECTION 096519-RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
PART I -GENERAL
go
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Vinyl composition floor tile.
2. Vinyl composition static dissipative floor tile
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 09 Section "Resilient Base and Accessories" for resilient base, reducer strips,
and other accessories installed with resilient floor coverings.
2. Division 16 Electrical for connection of copper bonding strips to building grounding
system.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
on
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For adhesives„ including printed statement of VOC
content.
C. Shop Drawings: For each type of floor tile. Include floor tile layouts, edges, columns,
doorways, enclosing partitions,built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts.
1. Show details of special patterns.
D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of floor tile indicated.
E. Samples for Verification: Full-size units of each color and pattern of floor tile required.
F. Product Schedule: For floor tile. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
G. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
H. Maintenance Data: For each type of floor tile to include in maintenance manuals.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project who are
competent in techniques required by manufacturer for floor tile installation indicated.
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 096519- 1
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form without
producing discoloration(whitening)at bends.
2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible.
3.4 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories.
B. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates
throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of carpet, resilient floor covering
that would otherwise be exposed.
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient
products.
B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation:
I. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.
C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction
operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.
#w D. Cover resilient products until Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 096513
, w
go
40
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 -5
we
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum w
moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in +�*
other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign
deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products.
.0
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of
resilient products.
B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching
compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.
C. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as the space where they are to
be installed.
..A
D. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before
installation.
3.3 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.
B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other
permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.
C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of
adjacent pieces aligned.
wee
D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in
continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.
E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation.
F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient
base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.
G. Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces.
.A
H. Job-Formed Corners:
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 -4
op
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
w Northampton,MA
E. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length.
w
F. Outside Corners: Preformed
G. Inside Corners: Job formed or preformed.
H. Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
�w 1. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.
2.2 RESILIENT MOLDING ACCESSORY
A. Resilient Molding Accessory:
I. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following]
a. Burke Mercer Flooring Products;Division of Burke Industries, Inc.
b. Johnsonite.
C. Roppe Corporation, USA.
d. VPI,LLC; Floor Products Division.
B. Description:
1. Nosing for carpet
2. Nosing for resilient floor covering
3. Reducer strip for resilient floor covering
4. Joiner for tile and carpet
5. Transition strips
C. Material: Vinyl
! " D. Profile and Dimensions: As required and selected by the Architect.
E. Colors and Patterns: [As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors]
2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or
blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for
applications indicated.
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and
substrate conditions indicated.
1. Use adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D(EPA Method 24):
a. Cove Base Adhesives: Not more than 50 g/L.
w
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 -3
w
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than
[70 deg F ("21 deg C) or more than 95 deg F Q5 deg C), in spaces to receive floor the during the
following time periods:
I. 48 hours before installation.
2. During installation.
3. 48 hours after installation.
B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by
manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C)or more than 95 deg F(35 deg.Q.
C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been
completed.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective wR+
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet(3 linear m) for every 250 linear feet (75 linear m) or
fraction thereof, of each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 RESILIENT BASE
A. Resilient Base:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following]
a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
b. Burke Mercer Flooring Products; Division of Burke Industries, Inc.
C. Johnsonite.
d. Roppe Corporation,USA. .w
e. VPI, LLC; Floor Products Division.
B. Resilient Base Standard: ASTM F 1861.
I. Material Requirement: Type TV(vinyl,thermoplastic).
2. Manufacturing Method: Group I(solid, homogeneous.
3. Style: Cove(base with toe)at VCT; Straight(flat or toeless)at carpeting.
C. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 aim).
D. Height: 4 inches 0 02 min)] [6 inches(152 min).
wM
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 -2
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
SECTION 096513 -RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Resilient base.
2. Resilient molding accessories.
go B. Related Sections:
1. Division 09 Section"Resilient Tile Flooring" for resilient floor tile.
W
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For adhesives, including printed statement of VOC
go content.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated, in manufacturer's standard-size
Samples but not less than 12 inches (300 min) long, of each resilient product color,texture, and
pattern required.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to
ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.
1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I,not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.
B. Mockups: Provide resilient products with mockups specified in other Sections.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with
ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than
50 deg F (10 deg C:)or more than 90 deg F {32 deg Q.
wr
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 1
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
F. Rake out joints to depth required to receive grout as units are set.
G. Point joints after setting. Fill full with mortar type and color indicated. Tool joints flat,
uniform, and smooth,without visible voids.
3.7 GROUTING
A. Grout stone joints with polymer-modified cement grout to comply with ANSI A108.10 and with
manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Grout stone joints with water-cleanable epoxy grout to comply with ANSI A108.6 and with
manufacturer's written instructions.
3.8 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace stonework of the following description:
WX 1. Broken,chipped, stained, or otherwise damaged stone. Stone may be repaired if methods
and results are approved by Architect.
2. Defective joints.
3. Stone paving, flooring, and joints not matching approved Samples and mockups.
4. Stonework not complying with other requirements indicated.
B. Replace in a manner that results in stonework matching approved Samples and mockups,
complying with other requirements, and showing no evidence of replacement.
C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean stonework as work progresses. Remove mortar fins and smears
before tooling joints.
D. Clean stonework after setting and grouting are complete. Use procedures recommended by
stone fabricator for types of application.
E. Apply sealer to cleaned stonework according to sealer manufacturer's written instructions.
3.9 PROTECTION
A. Prohibit traffic from installed stone for a minimum of 72 hours.
B. Protect installed stonework during construction with nonstaining kraft paper. Where adjoining
areas require construction work access, cover stonework with a minimum of 3/4-inch (20-rn111)
untreated plywood over nonstaining kraft paper.
END OF SECTION 096340
g•
M
STONE FLOORING 096340- 7
on
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
D. Variation in Plane between Adjacent Units (Lipping): Do not exceed 1/32-inch (0.8-mill)
difference between planes of adjacent units. w
3.5 INSTALLATION OF STONE DIRECTLY OVER CONCRETE
A. Saturate concrete with clean water several hours before placing setting bed. Remove surface
water about one hour before placing setting bed.
B. Apply mortar bed immediately after applying mortar-bed bond coat. Spread, tamp, and screed
to uniform thickness at elevations required for setting stone to finished elevations indicated.
C. Mix and place only that amount of mortar bed that can be covered with stone before initial set.
Cut back, bevel edge, and discard material that has reached initial set before stone can be
placed.
D. Place stone before initial set of mortar occurs. Immediately before placing stone on setting bed,
apply uniform 1/16-inch- (I.5-nom-)thick bond coat to bed or to back of each stone unit.
E. Tamp and beat stone with a wooden block or rubber mallet to obtain full contact with setting
bed and to bring finished surfaces within indicated tolerances. Set each unit in a single
operation before initial set of mortar; do not return to areas already set and disturb stone for
purposes of realigning finished surfaces or adjusting joints.
F. Rake out joints to depth required to receive grout as units are set.
G. Point joints after setting. Fill full with mortar type and color indicated. Tool joints flat,
uniform, and smooth, without visible voids.
3.6 INSTALLATION OF STONE OVER CLEAVAGE MEMBRANE
A. Place cleavage membrane over substrates indicated to receive stone, lapped at least 4 inches
(100 ruin) at joints.
B. Place mortar bed over cleavage membrane with reinforcing wire fabric fully embedded in
middle of mortar bed. Spread, tamp, and screed to uniform thickness at elevations required for
setting stone to finished elevations indicated.
w
C. Mix and place only that amount of mortar bed that can be covered with stone before initial set.
Cut back, bevel edge, and discard material that has reached initial set before stone can be
placed.
D. Place stone before initial set of mortar occurs. Immediately before placing stone on setting bed,
apply uniform 1/1 6-inch- (1.5-nom-)thick bond coat to bed or to back of each stone unit.
E. Tamp and beat stone with a wooden block or rubber mallet to obtain full contact with setting
bed and to bring finished surfaces within indicated tolerances. Set each unit in a single
operation before initial set of mortar; do not return to areas already set and disturb stone for
purposes of realigning finished surfaces or adjusting joints.
STONE FLOORING 096340-6
pp
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
on Northampton,MA
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces indicated to receive stone, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements and other conditions affecting performance.
B. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to
performance of stone flooring.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
asu
A. Vacuum clean concrete substrates to remove dirt, dust,debris,and loose particles.
B. Remove substances from concrete substrates that could impair mortar bond, including curing
and sealing compounds, form oil, and laitance.
C. Clean dirty or stained stone surfaces by removing soil, stains, and foreign materials before
setting. Clean stone by thoroughly scrubbing with fiber brushes and then drenching with clear
water. Use only mild cleaning compounds that contain no caustic or harsh materials or
abrasives.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Do necessary field cutting as stone is set. Cut lines straight and true and finish field-cut edges
to match shop-cut edges.
B. Scribe and field-cut stone as necessary to fit at obstructions. Produce neat joints of size
specified or indicated.
C. Expansion- and Control-Joint Installation: Locate and install according to Drawings and Shop
Drawings.
3.4 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A. Variation in Line: For positions shown in plan for edges of paving, flooring, ramps, steps,
changes in color or finish,and continuous joint lines, do not exceed 1 r8 inch in 96 inches( rnnl
in 2400 inns), 1/4 inch in 20 feet(6 rnm in 6 m),or 3/8 inch(10 rnm)maximum.
B. Variation in Joint Width: Do not vary joint thickness more than 1116 inch (1.5 inin) or 1/4 of
me nominal joint width,whichever is less.
C. Variation in Surface Plane: Do not exceed 1118 inch in 10 feet(3 rnm in 3 in), 1'4 inch in 20 feet
00 (6 min in 6 In), or 3I8 inch(10 mm)maximum from level or slope indicated.
on
STONE FLOORING 096340- 5
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Cleavage Membrane: Polyethylene sheeting, ASTM D 4397, 4.0 mils (0.l mm) thick[; or
unperforated asphalt felt,ASTM D 226, Type I(No. 15)].
B. Divider Strips and Edging: Metal or combination of metal and PVC or neoprene base, designed w.
specifically for flooring applications, in longest lengths available, and as follows:
I. Exposed-Edge Material: Stainless steel; ASTM A 666, Type 302. w
2. Cross-Section Profile: Angle or L-shape.
3. Height: Equal to stone thickness plus depth of setting bed.
4. Width: 1/8 inch(3.2 mm) ,
5. Control-Joint Filler: Neoprene.
C. Floor Sealer: Colorless, slip- and stain-resistant sealer that does not affect color or physical
properties of stone surfaces, as recommended by stone producer for application indicated.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, .s
the following:
a. Bostik Findley Inc.
b. Custom Building Products.
C. Hillyard,Inc.
d. HMK Stone Care System.
e. Miracle Sealants Company.
f. Stonecare International.
g. Summitville Tiles, Inc.
2.6 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
A. Mortar: Comply with referenced standards and with manufacturers' written instructions for mix
proportions, mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other
procedures needed to produce mortar of uniform quality and with optimum performance
characteristics.
l. Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders,
water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise
indicated. Do not use calcium chloride.
2. Combine mortar materials and thoroughly mix in a mechanical batch mixer unless
otherwise indicated. Discard mortar when it has reached initial set.
3. Mixing Pointing Mortar: Thoroughly mix cementitious and aggregate materials together
before adding any water. Add only enough water to produce a damp, unworkable mix
that will retain its form when pressed into a ball. Maintain mortar in this dampened
condition for one to two hours. Add remaining water in small portions until mortar *R
reaches desired consistency. Use mortar within 30 minutes of final mixing; do not
retemper or use partially hardened material.
w
STONE FLOORING 096340-4
am
11 M
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
2.3 MORTAR MATERIALS
A. Thin-Set Mortar:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following]
a. Boiardi Products Corporation.
so b. Bonsal.
C. Bostik Findley Inc.
d. C-Cure.
e. Custom Building Products.
f. DAP Inc.
g. Laticrete International, Inc.
h. MAPEI Corp.
i. Summitville Tiles, Inc.
j. TEC Specialty Construction Brands; H. B. Fuller Company.
2. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI Al 18.4,consisting of the following:
am a. Mixture of Dry-Mortar Mix and Latex Additive: Mixture of prepackaged dry-
mortar mix and styrene-butadiene-rubber or acrylic-resin liquid-latex additive.
B. Water: Potable.
2.4 GROUT
A. Grout Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
B. Polymer Modified Cement Grout: ANSI A118.7.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following]
a. Boiardi Products Corporation.
b. Bonsal.
C. Bostik Findley Inc.
d. C-Cure.
00 e. Custom Building Products.
f. DAP Inc.
g. Laticrete International, Inc.
h. MAPEI Corp.
i. Summitville Tiles, Inc.
j. TEC Specialty Construction Brands; H. B. Fuller Company.
2. Polymer Type: Either ethylene vinyl acetate, in dry, redispersible form, prepackaged
with other dry ingredients, or acrylic resin or styrene-butadiene rubber in liquid-latex
form for addition to prepackaged dry-grout mix.
3. Unsanded grout mix for joints 1/8 inch(3 mm)and narrower.
STONE FLOORING 096340- 3
■m
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA so
B. Installer Qualifications: Stone fabricator.
.w
C. Source Limitations for Stone: Obtain each variety of stone, regardless of finish, from a single
quarry supplier with resources to provide materials of consistent quality in appearance and
physical properties.
D. Source Limitations for Other Materials: Obtain each type of cementitious material, grout,
admixture, stone accessory, and other material from single source.
E. Mockups: Build mockups to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for
materials and execution.
1. Build mockup of typical interior floor area about 96 inches(2400 rim) square.
2. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Store stone on pallets with nonstaining separators and nonstaining, waterproof covers. Ventilate
under covers to prevent condensation.
B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not
use cementitious materials that have become damp.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Cold-Weather Requirements for Interior Stone Flooring:
1. Do not set stone when air or material temperature is below 50 deg F (10 deg C).
2. Maintain temperature at 50 deg F (10 deg C) or above in installation areas during
installation and for 7 days after completion unless higher temperatures are required by
fabricator's or supplier's instructions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 STONE
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide stone of varieties and from sources
complying with Division 04 Section "Exterior Stone Cladding."
w.
2.2 SLATE(ST-1)
A. Slate: Comply with ASTM C 629, Classification II Interior, with a fine, even grain and
unfading color, from clear, sound stock.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide following:
a. Silver Blue Slate— 12x12 and 16 by 16.
2. Supplier: Stone Source, 327 A Street. Boston, MA. phone: 617 671-0900 fax: 617 963-
7972, www.stonesource.com.
STONE FLOORING 096340-2
R.
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
ow Northampton,MA
om SECTION 096340- STONE FLOORING
PART 1 -GENERAL
90
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
0
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes the following applications of dimension stone:
1. Interior flooring.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. For each variety of stone.
2. For stone accessories and other manufactured products.
B. LEED Submittal:
1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For adhesives, including printed statement of VOC
content.
qW
C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, sections,details,and attachments to other work.
D. Samples for Initial Selection: For joint materials involving color selection.
E. Samples for Verification:
1. For each stone type indicated, in sets of Samples not less than 12 inches (300 mm)
square. Include three or more Samples in each set and show the full range of variations
in appearance characteristics expected in completed Work. Samples will establish the
standard by which stone will be judged.
2. For each color of grout required.
F. Qualification Data: For qualified fabricator.
A.
G. Maintenance Data: For stone flooring to include in maintenance manuals. Include Product
Data for stone-care products used or recommended by Installer and names, addresses, and
telephone numbers of local sources for products.
F
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
±us
A. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator that custom fabricates stone.
STONE FLOORING 096340- 1
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced
standards and publications.
3. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a
minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts,
eye screws, or other devices that are secure; that are appropriate for substrate; and that
will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age,corrosion,or elevated temperatures.
4. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten
hangers to cast-in-place hanger inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or drilled-in anchors
that extend through forms into concrete.
5. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs.
6. Space hangers not more than 48 inches (1200 mm) o.c. along each member supported
directly from hangers, unless otherwise indicated; and provide hangers not more than 8
inches(200 m in)from ends of each member.
C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four
tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers, with-
out attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing wires into
concrete with cast-in-place or postinstalled anchors.
D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and
where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels.
E. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another.
Remove and replace dented,bent, or kinked members.
F. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fitted accurately into suspension system
runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat,
precise fit.
G. Paint visible,trimmed edges to match finished surface of uncut panels.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspen-
sion system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and tou-
chup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be success-
fully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.
END OF SECTION 095123
ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 095123 -7
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
B. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Provide sealants and sealant primers for use inside the
weatherproofing system that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Part 59, Subpart D(EPA Method 24):
l. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L. .w
2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.
3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.
C. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following:
1. BA-98; Pecora Corp.
2. Tremco Acoustical Sealant; Tremco, Inc.
3. or equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut,with
Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that af-
fect ceiling installation and anchorage, and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical .A
panel ceilings.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Coordination: Furnish layouts for cast-in-place anchors, clips, and other ceiling anchors whose
installation is specified in other Sections.
B. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at
opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and comply
with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.
3.3 INSTALLATION „u
A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with publications referenced below per
manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook."
I. Standard for Ceiling Suspension System Installations: Comply with ASTM C 636.
2. Standard for Ceiling Suspension Systems Requiring Seismic Restraint: Comply with
ASTM E 580.
B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows:
1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling
plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system.
2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger
spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard
suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in
form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and
ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 095123 -6
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
ws
2.4 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS DESCRIPTION
"W A. Type 1 & 2 Ceilings: Narrow-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System:
Armstrong "Silhouette XL 1/8" Reveal" or equal. Main and cross runners roll formed from
cold-rolled steel sheet, prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip galvanized according
to ASTM A 653/653M, GO (ZOO])coating designation,with prefinished 9/16-inch-wide metal
caps on flanges; other characteristics as follows:
1. Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty system.
2. End Condition of Cross Runners: Coupling.
3. Face Design: Flush face.
4. Cap Material: Steel sheet
5. Cap Finish: Painted white
6. Grid face dimension: 9/16"
7. Retention Clips where indicated on the finish schedule
go B. Type 3 Ceiling: Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross
runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet,prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-
dip galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, not less than G30 (Z90) coating
designation,with prefinished 15/16-inch- (24-corn-)wide metal caps on flanges.
1. Structural Classification: Heavy-duty system.
2. End Condition of Cross Runners: Butt-edge type.
3. Face Design: Flat, flush.
4. Cap Material: Steel or aluminum cold-rolled sheet. Coordinate finish with metal type
selected.
5. Cap Finish: Painted in color as selected from manufacturer's full range.
on 6. Retention Clips where indicated on the finish schedule
NO
2.5 PERIMETER TRIM
A. Where indicated, provide manufactured perimeter soffit trim where indicated.
am B. Basis of Design Product:
I. Armstrong Axiom Classic Perimeter Trim
2. Finish: To match suspension system.
on 3. Profile Height: Size to match detail indicated.
4. Corners:Provide factory corners or field mitered corners with splice plates.
C. Provide all clips, supports, and accessories required for a complete installation.
2.6 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT
w
A. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nondrying, nonhardening,
nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic-rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior
concealed joints to reduce airborne sound transmission.
ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 095123 - 5
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
I. Products: Provide the following or approved equal:
2. Amstrong-Optima Open Plan
3. Classification: Panels fitting ASTM E 1264 for type and form as follows:
a. Type XII,mineral base with painted finish; Form 2,modular.
4. Pattern: Panels fitting ASTM E 1264 pattern E, fine textured
5. Color: White
6. Attributes: Humidity Resistant with Antimicrobial Solution
7. Light Reflectance Coefficient: Not less than LR 0.90.
8. Noise Reduction Coefficient: NRC 0.95.
9. Low formaldehyde.
10. Edge Detail: Square Tegular.
11. Thickness: 1 inch. w
12. Size: 24 by 24 inches(600 by 600 mm).
13. Recycled Content: 70-75%.
14. Application Location: 1St and 2"d floor areas as indicated on drawings.
B. Modular, Mineral-Base Acoustical Panels (ACT-2): Where this designation is indicated, pro-
vide acoustical panels, complying with the following:
1. Products: Provide the following or approved equal:
2. Amstrong-Optima Open Plan
3. Classification: Panels fitting ASTM E 1264 for type and form as follows:
a. Type XII,mineral base with painted finish;Form 2, modular.
4. Pattern: Panels fitting ASTM E 1264 pattern E, fine textured
5. Color: White
6. Attributes: Humidity Resistant with Antimicrobial Solution '
7. Light Reflectance Coefficient: Not less than LR 0.90.
8. Noise Reduction Coefficient:NRC 0.95.
9. Low formaldehyde.
10. Edge Detail: Square Tegular.
11. Thickness: 1 inch.
12. Size: 24 by 48 inches(600 by 1200 mm).
13. Recycled Content: 70-75%.
14. Application Location: 1St and 2"d floor areas as indicated on drawings.
C. Mineral-Base Ceramic-Like Faced Acoustical Panel Ceiling(ACT-3)Tower Ceiling and where
scheduled. Based on"Clean Room VL"By Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
I. Classification: Panels fitting ASTM E 1264 for type and form as follows:
a. Type III,mineral base with painted finish; Form 1,nodular. *�
2. Pattern: Panels fitting ASTM E 1264 pattern CD,non-perforated
3. Color: White
4. Light Reflectance Coefficient: Not less than LR 0.80.
5. Noise Reduction Coefficient: NRC 0.10.]
6. Ceiling Attenuation Class: Not less than CAC 40.
7. Edge Detail: Square-Lay In
8. Thickness: 3/4 inch
9. Size: 24 by 24 inches(610 by 610 nine.
ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 095123 -4
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed
and weatherproof, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete,
and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for
Project when occupied for its intended use.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with other con-
struction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC
40 equipment,fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with pro-
tective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents.
w
1. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Full-size units equal to 2.0 percent of amount installed, full
cartons with labels.
gr 2. Suspension System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal to 2.0 per-
cent of amount installed.
w PART 2 -PRODUCTS
** 2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
on products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to, the manufactur-
ers specified.
1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
2. or equal.
2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS,GENERAL
A. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated
that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical rat-
ings,and light reflectances,unless otherwise indicated.
2.3 ACOUSTICAL TILE DESCRIPTIONS
w
A. Modular, Mineral-Base Acoustical Panels (ACT-1): Where this designation is indicated, pro-
vide acoustical panels, complying with the following:
ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 095123 -3
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
Northampton,MA
E. Samples for Verification: Full-size units of each type of ceiling assembly indicated; in sets for
each color, texture, and pattern specified, showing the full range of variations expected in these +•
characteristics.
1. 6-inch- (150-inm-)square samples of each acoustical panel type,pattern, and color.
2. Full-size samples of each acoustical panel type,pattern, and color.
3. Set of 12-inch- (300-mm-) long samples of exposed suspension system members, includ-
ing moldings, for each color and system type required.
F. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demon-
strate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names
and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.
G. Product Test Reports: Indicate compliance of acoustical panel ceilings and components with
requirements based on comprehensive testing of current products.
H. Research/Evaluation Reports: Evidence of acoustical panel ceiling's and components' com-
pliance with building code in effect for Project, from a model code organization acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction. *�
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations for Ceiling Units: Obtain each acoustical ceiling panel from one source
with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties
without delaying the Work.
B. Source Limitations for Suspension System: Obtain each suspension system from one source
with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties �..
without delaying the Work.
C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide acoustical panel ceilings that comply with the fol-
lowing requirements:
1. Surface-burning characteristics of acoustical panels comply with ASTM E 1264 for
Class A materials as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84.
D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements of
Division 1 Section"Project Meetings."
E. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. wR
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING *"
A. Deliver acoustical panels and suspension system components to Project site in original, un-
opened packages and store them in a fully enclosed space where they will be protected against
damage from moisture,direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.
B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized
moisture content.
ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 095123 -2
No
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
go Northampton,MA
OR SECTION 095123 -ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS
PART 1 -GENERAL
g•
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
w
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes:
1. Ceilings consisting of acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems.
.. B. The Work of this Section also requires coordination providing all openings and penetrations for
fire protection and HVAC work shown on the Fire Protection and HVAC drawings.
1.3 ALTERNATE
A. Alternate work specified in Section 01 23 00 is required for the work of this Section.
ON
1.4 SUBMITTALS
"' A. Product Data: For each type of product specified.
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Data for Credit MR 4.1 and Credit MR 4.2: For products having recycled
content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and pre-
consumer recycled content. Include statement indicating costs for each product having
recycled content.
C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans drawn to scale and coordinating penetrations
and ceiling-mounted items. Show the following:
1. Ceiling suspension system members.
2. Method of attaching suspension system hangers to building structure.
3. Ceiling-mounted items including light fixtures; air outlets and inlets; speakers; sprinklers;
and special moldings at walls,column penetrations, and other junctures of acoustical ceil-
ings with adjoining construction.
4. Minimum Drawing Scale: 1/8 inch= I foot(1:96).
D. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual acoustical panels
or sections of acoustical panels, suspension systems, and moldings showing the full range of
colors,textures,and patterns available for each type of ceiling assembly indicated.
ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 095123 - 1
M
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
w
A. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are
free of foreign matter.
1. Remove latex-portland cement grout residue from the as soon as possible.
2. Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's written
instructions but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners
recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners
are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect
metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean
water before and after cleaning.
3. Remove temporary protective coating by method recommended by coating manufacturer .,
and that is acceptable to tile and grout manufacturer. Trap and remove coating to prevent
drain clogging.
B. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to
prevent staining, damage, and wear. If recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral
protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors.
C. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is
completed.
D. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral protective cleaner from
tile surfaces.
wo
3.7 INTERIOR TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE
A. Interior Floor Installations, Concrete Slab on Grade: oft
1. Tile Installation: TCA F113. Thin-set mortar.
2. Thin-Set Mortar: Latex-portland cement mortar.
a. Grout: Polymer-modified sanded grout. w
B. Interior Floor Installations, Concrete Slab on Grade:
1. Tile Installation: TCA F112: Cement mortar bed (thickset) bonded to concrete. ANSI
A108.113.
•�
a. Thin-Set Mortar for Cured-Bed Method: Latex-portland cement mortar.
b. Grout: Polymer-modified sanded grout.
C. Interior Wall Installations, Masonry:
1. Tile Installation TCA W202: Thin-set mortar.
a. Thin-Set Mortar: Latex-portland cement mortar.
b. Grout: Polymer-modified unsanded grout.
D. Interior Wall Installations,Metal Studs or Furring:
I. Tile Installation TCA W243: Thin-set mortar on tile backer board.
a. Thin-Set Mortar: Latex-portland cement mortar.
b. Grout: Polymer-modified unsanded grout.
END OF SECTION 093000
TILING 093000- 10
00
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
om Northampton,MA
2. Where adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim are specified or indicated to be same
size, align joints.
3. Where tiles are specified or indicated to be whole integer multiples of adjoining tiles on
floor,base,walls,or trim, align joints unless otherwise indicated.
E. Joint Widths: Unless otherwise indicated, install tile with the following joint widths:
1. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: 1/16 inch(1.6 mm).
pe 2. Glazed Wall Tile: 1/16 inch(1.6 mm).
F. Lay out tile wainscots to dimensions indicated or to next full the beyond dimensions indicated.
G. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control,
contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated. Form joints during installation of setting
materials,mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles.
1. Where joints occur in concrete substrates, locate joints in tile surfaces directly above
them.
2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 07 Section
"Joint Sealants."
H. Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds in same type of setting bed as adjacent floor unless
otherwise indicated.
1. At locations where mortar bed (thickset) would otherwise be exposed above adjacent
floor finishes,set thresholds in latex-portland cement mortar(thin set).
2. Do not extend cleavage membrane, waterproofing or crack isolation membrane under
thresholds set in latex-portland cement mortar. Fill joints between such thresholds and
adjoining tile set on cleavage membrane, waterproofing, or crack isolation membrane
with elastomeric sealant.
I. Grout Sealer: Apply grout sealer to cementitious grout joints in tile floors according to grout-
"' sealer manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as grout sealer has penetrated grout joints,
remove excess sealer and sealer from tile faces by wiping with soft cloth.
op
3.4 WATERPROOFING INSTALLATION
A. Install waterproofing to comply with ANSI A]08.13 and manufacturer's written instructions to
produce waterproof membrane of uniform thickness and bonded securely to substrate.
B. Do not install tile or setting materials over waterproofing until waterproofing has cured and
been tested to determine that it is watertight.
3.5 CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE INSTALLATION
A. Install crack isolation membrane to comply with ANSI A108.17 and manufacturer's written
instructions to produce membrane of uniform thickness and bonded securely to substrate.
B. Do not install tile or setting materials over crack isolation membrane until membrane has cured.
w
TILING 093000 -9
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
■0
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thin-set of
mortar with trowelable leveling and patching compound specifically recommended by tile-
setting material manufacturer.
B. Where indicated, prepare substrates to receive waterproofing by applying a reinforced mortar
bed that complies with ANSI A1 08.1A and is sloped 1/4 inch per foot(1:50)toward drains.
C. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, verify that tile has been factory blended and
packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as those taken from
other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to
manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing.
D. Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: If indicated under tile type or needed to prevent
grout from staining or adhering to exposed tile surfaces, precoat them with continuous film of w
temporary protective coating,taking care not to coat unexposed tile surfaces.
3.3 TILE INSTALLATION
A. Comply with TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" for TCA installation methods
specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of the ANSI A108 Series
"Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCA installation
methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and grouting
materials used.
I. For the following installations, follow procedures in the ANSI A108 Series of tile
installation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage:
a. Tile floors in wet areas.
b. Tile swimming pool decks.
B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete �*+
covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at
obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.
C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring
visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for
straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other
penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.
D. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work and
center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out file work to
minimize the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths unless
otherwise indicated.
1. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as joints within .A
tile sheets so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work.
TILING 093000 - 8
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
*�* Northampton,MA
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following:
a. Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company;Grout Sealer.
b. Bostik, Inc.; CeramaSeal Grout&Tile Sealer.
C. Custom Building Products; Grout and Tile Sealer.
'" d. Jamo Inc.;Penetrating Sealer.
e. MAPEI Corporation; KER 004, Keraseal Penetrating Sealer for Unglazed Grout
and Tile.
f. Southern Grouts&Mortars, Inc.; Silicone Grout Sealer.
g. TEC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company; TA-256 Penetrating Silicone Grout
Sealer.
on
2.9 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT
OR A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout
manufacturers'written instructions.
B. Add materials,water, and additives in accurate proportions.
C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and
e�uu
other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance
characteristics for installations indicated.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance of installed tile.
1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm, dry, clean, free of coatings that are
incompatible with tile-setting materials including curing compounds and other substances
that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances required by
ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated.
2. Verify that concrete substrates for tile floors installed with bonded mortar bed or thin-set
"' mortar comply with surface finish requirements in ANSI A108.01 for installations
indicated.
a. Verify that surfaces that received a steel trowel finish have been mechanically
scarified.
b. Verify that protrusions, bumps, and ridges have been removed by sanding or
grinding.
ww
3. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical
units of work,and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed.
4. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if
not coordinated,adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect.
TILING 093000 -7
.w
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA aw
i. Mer-Kote Products, Inc.
j. Southern Grouts&Mortars, Inc.
k. TEC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company.
2. Provide prepackaged, dry-mortar mix combined with acrylic resin liquid-latex additive at
Project site. we
3. For wall applications, provide mortar that complies with requirements for nonsagging
mortar in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A 118.4.
ww
2.7 GROUT MATERIALS
A. Latex-Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6 for materials described in Section H-2.4, com- 00
posed as follows:
1. Mixture of Dry-Grout Mix and Latex Additive: Mixture of factory-prepared, dry-grout
mix and latex additive complying with the following requirements: as
a. Sanded Dry-Grout Mix: Commercial portland cement grout complying with
ANSI A118.6 for materials described in Section H-2.1, for joints 1/8 inch (3.2 e+
mm)and wider.
1) Use at unglazed floor tile.
b. Non-Sanded Dry-Grout Mix: Commercial portland cement grout complying with
ANSI A118.6 for materials described in Section H-2.1, for joints less than 1/8 inch
(3.2 mm)wide.
I) Use at glazed wall tile.
C. Latex Additive: Acrylic resin. no
2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based
formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations
indicated.
B. Temporary Protective Coating: Either product indicated below that is formulated to protect
exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout; compatible with tile, mortar, and
grout products; and easily removable after grouting is completed without damaging grout or tile.
1. Petroleum paraffin wax, fully refined and odorless, containing at least 0.5 percent oil with ,
a melting point of 120 to 140 deg F(49 to 60 deg C)per ASTM D 87.
2. Grout release in form of manufacturer's standard proprietary liquid coating that is
specially formulated and recommended for use as temporary protective coating for tile.
C. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and
grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout
manufacturers.
D. Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's standard product for sealing grout joints and that does not change
color or appearance of grout.
TILING 093000 -6
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
a. Noble Company(The);Nobleseal TS.
b. Or equal.
2.5 CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE
A. General: Manufacturer's standard product, that complies with ANSI Al 18.12 for standard
performance and is recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. Include
w reinforcement and accessories recommended by manufacturer.
B. Chlorinated Polyethylene Sheet: Nonplasticized, chlorinated polyethylene faced on both sides
with nonwoven polyester fabric; 0.030-inch(0.76-mm)nominal thickness.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following:
s" a. Noble Company (The);Nobleseal CIS.
b. Or equal.
ON
2.6 SETTING MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement Mortar(Thickset) Installation Materials: ANSI A108.02.
1. Cleavage Membrane: Asphalt felt, ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15); or polyethylene
sheeting,ASTM D 4397,4.0 mils(0.1 mm)thick.
2. Reinforcing Wire Fabric: Galvanized, welded wire fabric, 2 by 2 inches (50.8 by 50.8
mm) by 0.062-inch (1.57-mm) diameter; comply with ASTM A 185 and ASTM A 82
except for minimum wire size.
3. Expanded Metal Lath: Diamond-mesh lath complying with ASTM C 847.
a. Base Metal and Finish for Interior Applications: Uncoated or zinc-coated
(galvanized) steel sheet, with uncoated steel sheet painted after fabrication into
lath.
b. Base Metal and Finish for Exterior Applications: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel
sheet.
C. Configuration over Studs and Furring: Flat.
d. Configuration over Solid Surfaces: Self furring.
e. Weight: 2.5 lb/sq.yd. (1.4 kg/sq. m).
B. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar(Thin Set): ANSI A118.4.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
*� the following.
a. Boiardi Products; a QEP company.
b. Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company.
C. Bostik, Inc.
d. C-Cure.
e. Custom Building Products.
f. Jamo Inc.
g. Laticrete International, Inc.
h. MAPEI Corporation.
TILING 093000-5
�Irr
on
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
C. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges, blend tile in factory and
package so tile units taken from one package show same range in colors as those taken from
other packages and match approved Samples.
D. Mounting: For factory-mounted tile, provide back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies as standard
with manufacturer unless otherwise indicated.
1. Where tile is indicated for installation in swimming pools or in wet areas, do not use
back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies unless tile manufacturer specifies in writing that
this type of mounting is suitable for installation indicated and has a record of successful
in-service performance.
E. Factory-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under tile type, protect
exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout by precoating with continuous
film of petroleum paraffin wax,applied hot. Do not coat unexposed tile surfaces.
2.2 TILE PRODUCTS
A. FLOOR AND WALL TILE: w„
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the
following:
a. Meteor Brown by Pietre Native, supplied by Shep Brown, 781-589-1196.
2. Module Size: 12 by 24 inches
3. Base Size: Cut to 6 inches in height.
4. Grout Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.3 THRESHOLDS w�
A. General: Fabricate to sizes and profiles indicated or required to provide transition between
adjacent floor finishes.
1. Bevel edges at 1:2 slope, with lower edge of bevel aligned with or up to 1/16 inch (1.5 `
mm) above adjacent floor surface. Finish bevel to match top surface of threshold. Limit
height of threshold to 1/2 inch(12.7 mm)or less above adjacent floor surface.
B. Granite Thresholds: ASTM C 615,with polished finish.
1. Description: Uniform, medium-grained,black stone without veining.
2.4 WATERPROOF MEMBRANE
A. General: Manufacturer's standard product that complies with ANSI A118.10 and is
recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. Include reinforcement and
accessories recommended by manufacturer.
B. Chlorinated Polyethylene Sheet: Nonplasticized, chlorinated polyethylene faced on both sides
with nonwoven polyester fabric; 0.030-inch(0.76-mm)nominal thickness.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following:
TILING 093000-4
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
40
A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact
until time of use. Comply with requirements in ANSI A137.1 for labeling tile packages.
B. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms,under cover, and in a dry location.
C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and
on contamination can be avoided.
D. Store liquid materials in unopened containers and protected from freezing.
E. Handle tile that has temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent coated surfaces
from contacting backs or edges of other units. If coating does contact bonding surfaces of tile,
remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting tile.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and
ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in
referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products installed and
that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
on
contents.
1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount
installed for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated. Repackage loose
the to prevent breakage. Provide complete label for quick identification.
2. Grout: Furnish quantity of grout equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type,
composition, and color indicated. Minimum one (1) unopened package for each type,
composition and color.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
w� 2.1 PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide file that complies with ANSI A137.1 for types,
compositions, and other characteristics indicated.
1. Provide tile complying with Standard grade requirements unless otherwise indicated.
B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with
ANSI A108.02, ANSI standards referenced in other Part 2 articles, ANSI standards referenced
by TCA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules, and other requirements
specified.
TILING 093000 -3
r
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
Northampton,MA
B. LEED Submittal:
1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For adhesives and sealants, including printed statement
of VOC content.
C. Shop Drawings: Show locations of each type of tile and tile pattern. Show widths, details, and
locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile substrates and finished
tile surfaces.
D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of tile and grout indicated. Include Samples of
accessories involving color selection.
E. Samples for Verification:
I. Full-size units of each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required.
2. Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory.
3. Stone thresholds in 6-inch(150-mm) lengths.
4. Metal edge strips in 6-inch(150-mm) lengths.
F. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
G. Product Certificates: For each type of product, signed by product manufacturer.
H. Material Test Reports: For each tile-setting and grouting product.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from one source or
producer.
1. Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from same production run and of consistent
quality in appearance and physical properties for each contiguous area.
B. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality
for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from one manufacturer and each aggregate
from one source or producer.
C. Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in this
Section from a single manufacturer for each product:
I. Stone thresholds.
2. Waterproof membrane.
3. Crack isolation membrane.
D. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
I. Build mockup of each type of floor tile installation.
2. Build mockup of each type of wall tile installation.
3. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
TILING 093000-2
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
SECTION 093000-TILING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
4" A. Section Includes:
1. Ceramic tile.
2. Stone thresholds.
3. Waterproof membrane.
4. Crack isolation membrane.
5. Metal edge strips.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing of expansion, contraction, control, and
isolation joints in tile surfaces.
2. Division 09 Section"Gypsum Board Assemblies" for tile backer units.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. General: Definitions in the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards and in ANSI A137.1
apply to Work of this Section unless otherwise specified.
B. ANSI A108 Series: ANSI A108.01, ANSI A108.02, ANSI A108.1A, ANSI A108.1B,
ANSI A108.1C, ANSI A108.4, ANSI A108.5, ANSI A108.6, ANSI A108.8, ANSI A108.9,
ANSI A108.10, ANSI A108.11, ANSI A108.12, ANSI A108.13, ANSI A108.14,
ANSI A 108.15, ANSI A 108.16, and ANSI A 108.17, which are contained in "American
National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile."
C. Module Size: Actual tile size plus joint width indicated.
D. Face Size: Actual tile size, excluding spacer lugs.
aw
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated including,but not limited to:
1. Waterproof membrane.
2. Crack isolation membrane.
3. Grout
4. Setting material
TILING 093000- 1
w
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA no
2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
END OF SECTION 092900
�w
wec
w
w,►
GYPSUM BOARD 092900- 10
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
* ! Northampton,MA
B. Control Joints: Install control joints at locations indicated on Drawings, or if not indicated on
surfaces over 30 feet in length, according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by
Architect for visual effect.
C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:
I. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners.
2. Bullnose Bead: Use at outside corners.
3. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges and where gypsum wall board abuts other
materials.
4. U-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges and where gypsum wall board abuts other
materials.
5. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: Use at curved openings.
D. Exterior Trim: Install in the following locations:
1. Comerbead: Use at outside corners.
2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.
3.7 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD
A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations,
fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for
decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.
B. Prefill open joints,rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.
C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not
intended to receive tape.
D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to
ASTM C 840:
l. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated.
2. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated.
3. Level 5: Where indicated on Drawings and all curved wall locations..
E. Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.8 PROTECTION
A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other
non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall
application.
B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight,
Vr construction,and other causes during remainder of the construction period.
C. Remove and replace panels that are wet,moisture damaged,and mold damaged.
1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
4-0 discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
+4.
GYPSUM BOARD 092900-9
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA �*
3. On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end
joints. Locate edge joints over furring members.
4. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.
C. Multilayer Application:
1. On ceilings, a PP 1 Y gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base layers on
walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to
framing members and offset face-layer joints one framing member, 16 inches (400 in m)
minimum, from parallel base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-
resistance-rated assembly.
2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers
vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring
member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer
joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger
joints on opposite sides of partitions.
3. On Z-furring members, apply base layer vertically (parallel to framing) and face layer `
either vertically (parallel to framing) or horizontally (perpendicular to framing) with
vertical joints offset at least one furring member. Locate edge joints of base layer over
furring members.
4. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with
screws.
D. Curved Surfaces:
I. Install panels horizontally (perpendicular to supports) and unbroken, to extent possible,
across curved surface plus 12-inch- (300-mm-) long straight sections at ends of curves
and tangent to them.
2. For double-layer construction, fasten base layer to studs with screws 16 inches (400 mm)
o.c. Center gypsum board face layer over joints in base layer, and fasten to studs with
screws spaced 12 inches (300 mm)o.c.
3.4 APPLYING EXTERIOR GYPSUM PANELS FOR CEILINGS AND SOFFITS
A. Apply panels perpendicular to supports, with end joints staggered and located over supports.
1. Install with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) open space where panels abut other construction or
structural penetrations.
2. Fasten with corrosion-resistant screws.
3.5 APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS
A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A108.11, at locations indicated to receive tile.
3.6 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same
fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
wax
GYPSUM BOARD 092900- 8
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
4M Northampton,MA
E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.
40
F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings,
etc., except in chases braced internally.
1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke
ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 s ft. 0.7 s m in
g , g y p p q• ( q• ) �
area.
2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts,pipes,and conduits.
W 3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof
slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow
1/4-to 3/8-inch- (6.4-to 9.5-mm-)wide joints to install sealant.
G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural
abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- (6.4- to 12.7-mni-) wide spaces at these
locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between
edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.
H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to
open(unsupported)edges of stud flanges first.
1. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings
and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both
faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with
manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking
paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.
J. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily
installed after panels have been installed on one side.
3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:
1. Wallboard Type: As indicated on Drawings.
2. Type X:As indicated on Drawings and where required for fire-resistance-rated assembly.
3. Flexible Type:Apply in double layer at curved non-rated assemblies
4. Ceiling Type: Ceiling surfaces.
5. Moisture-and Mold-Resistant Type:At all toilet areas and areas subject to moisture.
B. Single-Layer Application:
1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest
extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated.
2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels horizontally (perpendicular to framing) unless
otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end
�. joints.
a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses
of panels.
b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally unless otherwise
indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.
GYPSUM BOARD 092900-7
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
Northampton, MA
1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of
assembly.
2. Recycled Content of Blankets: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of
preconsumer recycled content not less than<Insert number>percent.
E. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant
complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through
perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative
assemblies according to ASTM E 90.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following:
a. Pecora Corporation;AC-20 FTR.
b. Specified Technologies, Inc.; Smoke N Sound Acoustical Sealant.
C. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.
2. Acoustical joint sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D(EPA Method 24).
F. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation." "
PART 3 -EXECUTION
w
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, with Installer
present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold
damaged.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. ®"
3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL ■.
A. Comply with ASTM C 840.
B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid
abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels
not less than one framing member.
C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with
not more than 1/]6 inch(1.5 nim)of open space between panels. Do not force into place.
D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate
supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered
edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not
make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.
GYPSUM BOARD 092900-6
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
go Northampton,MA
C. Expansion (Control) Joint: One-piece, rolled zinc with V-shaped slot and
removable strip covering slot opening.
2.7 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.
B. Joint Tape:
1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper.
2. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Paper.
3. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.
C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible
with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.
on 1. Prefilling: At open joints,rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas,
use setting-type taping compound.
2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and
trim flanges, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.
3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type,all-purpose compound.
4. Finish Coat: For third coat,use drying-type,all-purpose compound.
5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level finish, use setting-type, sandable topping
compound.
D. Joint Compound for Exterior Applications:
1. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Use setting-type taping compound and setting-type,
sandable topping compound.
W E. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels:
I. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by backer unit manufacturer.
2.8 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and
manufacturer's written recommendations.
B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering
gypsum panels to continuous substrate.
1. Laminating adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D(EPA Method 24).
C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002,unless otherwise indicated.
1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from
0.03') to 0.1 12 inch(0.84 to 2.84 mm)thick.
2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by
panel manufacturer.
D. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing)
produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag
wool, or rock wool.
GYPSUM BOARD 092900-5
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
2. Long Edges: Tapered.
3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10.
2.4 EXTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD FOR CEILINGS AND SOFFITS
A. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M,with manufacturer's standard edges.
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering **
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following:
a. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC.
b. USG Corporation. ..
2. Core: 1/2 inch(12.7 inm),regular type or 5/8 inch(15.9 in m), Type X.
2.5 TILE BACKING PANELS
A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A]18.9 and ASTM C 1288 or 1325, with manufacturer's
standard edges.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following:
a. Custom Building Products; Wonderboard
b. James Hardie Building Products, Inc.; Hardiebacker.
C. National Gypsum Company,Permabase Cement Board.
d. USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board.
2. Thickness: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) or 5/8 inch (15.9 mm) to match adjacent gypsum
wallboard panel..
3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10.
2.6 TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc.
2. Shapes:
a. Cornerbead.
b. Bullnose bead.
C. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
d. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
e. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound.
f. Expansion(control)joint.
g. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges.
B. Exterior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
1. Material: Hot-dip galvanized steel sheet,plastic, or rolled zinc.
2. Shapes:
a. Cornerbead.
b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
GYPSUM BOARD 092900-4
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies,provide materials and construction identical
to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to
ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.
C. Low Emitting Materials: For ceiling and wall assemblies, provide materials and construction
identical to those tested in assembly and complying with the testing and product requirements of
the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile
Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
2.2 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL
A. Recycled Content of Gypsum Panel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of
preconsumer recycled content not less than<Insert number>percent.
B. Regional Materials: Gypsum panel products shall be manufactured within 500 miles (800 km)
of Project site from materials that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as
manufactured, within 500 miles(800 km)of Project site.
C. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and
that correspond with support system indicated.
w
2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following:
1. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC.
2. National Gypsum Company.
3. USG Corporation.
B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.
1. Thickness: 1/2 inch(12.7 mm).
2. Long Edges: Tapered and featured(rounded or beveled)for prefilling.
„ C. Gypsum Board,Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.
1. Thickness: 5/8 inch(15.9 mm).
2. Long Edges: Tapered and featured(rounded or beveled)for prefilling.
" D. Flexible Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. Manufactured to bend to fit radii and to be
more flexible than standard regular-type gypsum board of same thickness.
1. Thickness: 1/4 inch(6.4 mm).
+ 2. Long Edges: Tapered.
E. Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.
1. Thickness: 1/2 inch(12.7 mm).
2. Long Edges: Tapered.
F. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. With moisture- and
mold-resistant core and paper surfaces.
1. Core: As indicated, 1/2 inch(12.7 mm),regular type or 5/8 inch(15.9 mm),Type X.
GYPSUM BOARD 092900-3
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA w.
a. Include statement indicating location of manufacturer and distance to Project for
each regionally manufactured material. +�
b. Include statement indicating location of manufacturer and point of extraction,
harvest, or recovery for each raw material used in regionally extracted and
manufactured materials. Indicate distance to Project and fraction by weight of
each regionally manufactured material that is regionally extracted.
4. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For adhesives used to laminate gypsum board panels to
substrates, documentation including printed statement of VOC content.
5. Laboratory Test Reports for Credit EQ 4: For adhesives used to laminate gypsum board '®
panels to substrates, documentation indicating that products comply with the testing and
product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice
for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale .A
Environmental Chambers."
C. Samples: For the following products:
1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch- (300-min-) long length for each trim
accessory indicated.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather,
condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack
panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging.
1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board .,
manufacturer's written recommendations,whichever are more stringent.
B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.
C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold
damaged.
1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging,or irregular shape.
2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS ..
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and
construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an
w.
independent testing agency.
GYPSUM BOARD 092900-2
40
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
4W SECTION 092900-GYPSUM BOARD
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Interior gypsum board.
2. Exterior gypsum board for ceilings and soffits.
3. Tile backing panels.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Division 06 Section "Sheathing" for gypsum sheathing for exterior walls.
2. Division 09 Section "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for non-structural framing and
suspension systems that support gypsum board panels.
3. Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board Shaft Wall Assemblies" for metal shaft-wall
framing,gypsum shaft liners,and other components of shaft-wall assemblies.
1.3 ALTERNATE
A. Alternate work specified in Section 01 23 00 is required for the work of this Section.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Data for Credit MR 4.1[and Credit MR 4.2]: For products having recycled
content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and
preconsumer recycled content. Include statement indicating cost for each product having
recycled content.
2. Product Certificates for Credit MR 5.1[and Credit MR 5.2]: For products and materials
required to comply with requirements for regional materials, certificates indicating
location of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each
raw material. Include statement indicating distance to Project, cost for each regional
material,and fraction by weight that is considered regional.
3. Product Certificates for Credit MR 5.1[and Credit MR 5.2]: For products and materials
required to comply with requirements for regionally manufactured[and regionally
extracted and manufactured] materials. Include statement indicating cost for each
regionally manufactured material.
GYPSUM BOARD 092900- 1
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
Northampton,MA
C. Adhesive: Solvent based construction adhesive suitable for gypsum board applications. W.
D. Bases: Provide manufacturer's standard metal base construction to match sizes
indictated. Finish shall be selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of I.
options and colors.
2.4 FABRICATION
so
A. Moulds for reinforced gypsum units will be rigid and constructed of materials that will
result in smooth, finished products conforming to profiles and dimensions indicated on
Drawings. .�
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Inspect adjacent construction for conditions that would prevent proper installation of
reinforced gypsum units.
wu
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install reinforced gypsum units true, plumb and level in accordance with manufacturer's
installation instructions.
3.4 FINISHING
A. The joints between the reinforced gypsum units themselves and where they join
drywall shall be taped and finished.
B. The joint shall follow the curvature of the unit. The installer shall be responsible for
repair of any surface imperfections resulting at the job site.
w
END OF SECTION 09 27 00
GYPSUM GLASS FIBER FABRICATIONS 092700-2
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
Northampton,MA
SECTION 09 27 00- GYPSUM GLASS FIBER FABRICATIONS
PART1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Work of this Section includes gypsum glass fiber reinforced enclosures, including
finished steel bases where indicated.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 09 22 16- Non-Structural Metal Framing for coordination with metal
framing
2. Section 09 29 00-Gypsum Board and gypsum board intersections.
3. Section 09 91 00-Painting.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's descriptive literature and installation instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, construction, dimensions, locations, connections,
and installation details.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,
the following:
1. Plastraglas,Omaha,NE 402-455-0652,
2. Formglas, Toronto, Ontario, Canada, 416-635-8030
3. Plasterform,Mississauga, Ontario, Canada, 800-268-4534
4. or approved equal.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Prefabricated glass fiber reinforced gypsum units using multi-directional unlayered
spray layup procedures and combined with high strength gypsum plaster that is
specifically formulated for combination with glass fibers and which requires no special
additives.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Wire hangers: 12 gage galvanized steel wires.
B. Fasteners: Self-drilling, self-tapping bugle head screws, Type G, length required for
each assembly.
GYPSUM GLASS FIBER FABRICATIONS 092700- 1
w.
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling
r plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system.
a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting
horizontal forces by bracing,countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger
spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension
system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of
trapezes or equivalent devices.
3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to
inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for
substrate,and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.
4. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck.
5. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck.
6. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts,pipes,or conduit.
D. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports.
E. Seismic Bracing: Sway-brace suspension systems with hangers used for support..
on
F. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems
meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other
so and butt-cut to fit into wall track.
G. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet(3
mm in 3.6 n ) measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely
" between parallel members that will receive finishes.
END OF SECTION 092216
w
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216-7
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
C. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead
structure.
3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required
for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to
match framing required above door heads. ,.
4. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated
assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to
underside of solid structure.
a. Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-resistance-
rated assembly indicated.
5. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated. w
6. Curved Partitions:
a. Bend track to uniform curve and locate straight lengths so they are tangent to arcs.
b. Begin and end each arc with a stud, and space intermediate studs equally along .�
arcs. On straight lengths of no fewer than two studs at ends of arcs, place studs 6
inches(150 mm)o.c.
E. Direct Furring:
1. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment,
or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches(610 nom)o.c.
w!r
F. Z-Furring Members:
I. Erect insulation, specified in Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation," vertically and
hold in place with Z-furring members spaced 24 inches(610 mm)o.c.
2. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall
with concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven
fasteners spaced 24 inches(6 10 mm)o.c.
3. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange
extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw-attach short flange of furring
channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space second member no more
than 12 inches(305 mm)from corner and cut insulation to fit. w
G. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than
1/8 inch(3 mm)from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.
3.5 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A. Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than
spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.
wA
1. Hangers: 48 inches (1219 mm) o.c.
2. Carrying Channels(Main Runners): 48 inches(1219 nim)o.c.
3. Furring Channels(Furring Members): 16 inches(406 mom o.c.
B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by
building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.
C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216-6
go
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
1. Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach offset anchor plates or ceiling
runners (tracks) to surfaces indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials. Where
offset anchor plates are required, provide continuous plates fastened to building structure
not more than 24 inches(610 inm)o.c.
2. After sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, remove them only to extent necessary
for installation of non-load-bearing steel framing. Do not reduce thickness of fire-
resistive materials below that required for fire-resistance ratings indicated. Protect
adjacent fire-resistive materials from damage.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754.
1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply
to framing installation.
B. Install supplementary framing,and blocking to support fixtures,equipment services,heavy trim,
grab bars,toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.
C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.
D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing
members. Frame both sides of joints independently.
ap 3.4 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES
A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than
we spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.
1. Single-Layer Application: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated.
2. Multilayer Application: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated.
3. Tile Backing Panels: 16 inches o.c.unless otherwise indicated.
B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior
walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.
C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.
D. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural
supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to
terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above
ceiling.
1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to
produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished
assemblies.
2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames;
install runner track section(for cripple studs)at head and secure to jamb studs.
a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated.
b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1J2-inch
(13-min) clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in
finished assembly.
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216-5
go
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
3. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- (13-mm-)deep members designed to reduce sound
transmission.
a. Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped.
F. Grid Suspension System for Gypsum Board Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system
composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following:
a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Drywall Grid Systems.
b. Chicago Metallic Corporation; Drywall Grid System.
C. USG Corporation; Drywall Suspension System.
wr
2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards.
1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding
power,and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.
B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide one of the following:
1. Retain both "Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt" and "Foam Gasket" subparagraphs below
and option in "Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls" Paragraph above to allow Contractor to
choose type of isolation strip.
2. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt),
nonperforated.
3. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener
penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, in width to suit steel
stud size.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and substrates,with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames,
cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions
affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of
overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building ,
structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and that
hangers will develop their full strength.
B. Coordination with Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials: w�
w�+
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216-4
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches (38 by 38 mm), 0.068-inch- (1.72-1121n-)
thick,galvanized steel.
H. Hat-Shaped,Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.
1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.018 inch(0.45 mm).
2. Depth: 7/8 inch(22.2 mm)
1. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- (13-nun-) deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce
sound transmission.
1. Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped.
W J. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.053-inch (1.34-mm) uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum
1/2-inch- (13-mm-)wide flanges.
1. Depth: 3/4 inch(19 mm).
2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum
40 uncoated-steel thickness of 0.033 inch(0.8 mm).
3. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- (1.59-
mm-) diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch-(1.21-mm-)diameter wire.
to
K. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches (32 mrn), wall
attachment flange of 7/8 inch (22 nim), minimum uncoated-metal thickness of 0.018 inch (t}.45
rnm), and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated.
2.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- (1.59-mm-)
diameter wire,or double strand of 0.048-inch-(1.21-mm-)diameter wire.
B. Hanger Attachments to Concrete:
1. Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with holes or loops for attaching
wire hangers and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to [5] times that
imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 by an
independent testing agency.
2. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Suitable for application indicated, fabricated from
corrosion-resistant materials with clips or other devices for attaching hangers of type
indicated, and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to [10] <Insert number>
times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190
by an independent testing agency.
C. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class l zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16 inch (4.12 rn111)
in diameter.
wo
D. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of 0.053
inch(1.34 man)and minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-)wide flanges.
1. Depth: 2-1/2 inches(64 mm), 2 inches(51 mm), or 1-1/2 inches(38 mm).
E. Furring Channels(Furring Members):
on 1. Cold-Rolled Channels: 0.053-inch (1.34-mm) uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum
1/2-inch-(13-mm-)wide flanges, 3/4 inch(19 mm)deep.
2. Hat-Shaped,Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645,7/8 inch(22 mm)deep.
44
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216-3
No
4W
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS
A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of
preconsumer recycled content not less than [25] percent.
w
B. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.
1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless
otherwise indicated.
2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z1 80) hot-dip galvanized unless
otherwise indicated.
C. Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. Use either steel studs and runners or dimpled steel studs and
runners.
1. Steel Studs and Runners:
a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.018 inch(0.45 mm).
b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
D. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following:
I. Single Long-Leg Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch- (51-mm-) deep *�*
flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs, installed with studs friction fit into
top runner and with continuous bridging located within 12 inches (305 m1n) of the top of
studs to provide lateral bracing.
2. Double-Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runners, inside runner with 2-inch- (51-nun-)
deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs and fastened to studs, and outer
runner sized to friction fit inside runner.
3. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes
applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in
thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.
a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following:
I) Dietrich Metal Framing; SLP-TRK Slotted Deflection Track.
2) MBA Building Supplies; F1atSteel Deflection Track.
3) Superior Metal Trim; Superior Flex Track System(SFT).
E. Firestop Tracks: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with
movement of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly
indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of
studs.
I. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following:
a. Fire Trak Corp.; Fire Trak System[attached to studs with Fire Trak Posi Klip].
b. Grace Construction Products;F1ameSafe F1owTrak System.
C. Metal-Lite, Inc.; The System.
F. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width
indicated.
I. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.027 inch(0.68 mm). "1p
G. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: Steel, 0.053-inch (1.34-mm) minimum base-metal thickness,
with minimum 1/2-inch- (1 3-mm-)wide flanges. 00
1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches(38 mm).
WA
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216-2
W
Fft
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
SECTION 092216-NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
so
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior gypsum board assemblies.
2. Suspension systems for interior gypsum ceilings, soffits, and grid systems.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Division 05 Section"Cold-Formed Metal Framing" exterior non-load-bearing wall studs.
w
1.3 ALTERNATE
A. Alternate work specified in Section 01 23 00 is required for the work of this Section.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Data for Credit MR 4.1[and Credit MR 4.2]: For products having recycled
content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and
preconsumer recycled content. Include statement indicating cost for each product having
recycled content.
go
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate non-
load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in
assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.
B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical
to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to
ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.
w
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216- 1
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
Northampton,MA
2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
END OF SECTION 092116.23
GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES 092116.23 -7
MR
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
Northampton,MA go
2. Where handrails directly attach to gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies, provide
galvanized steel reinforcing strip with 0.0312-inch (0.79-mm)minimum thickness of base ..
(uncoated) metal, accurately positioned and secured behind at least a 1 gypsum board
face-layer panel.
D. Integrate stair hanger rods with gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies by locating cavity of
assemblies where required to enclose rods.
E. At penetrations in shaft wall, maintain fire-resistance rating of shaft-wall assembly by installing
supplementary steel framing around perimeter of penetration and fire protection behind boxes
containing wiring devices, elevator call buttons,elevator floor indicators,and similar items.
F. Isolate perimeter of gypsum panels from building structure to prevent cracking of panels, while
maintaining continuity of fire-rated construction.
G. Firestop Tracks: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-resistance-rated
assembly indicated.
H. Control Joints: Install control joints at locations indicated on Drawings or according to **
ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect, while maintaining fire-resistance
rating of gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies.
1. Seal gypsum board shaft walls with acoustical sealant at perimeter of each assembly where it
abuts other work and at joints and penetrations within each assembly. Install acoustical sealant
to withstand dislocation by air-pressure differential between shaft and external spaces; maintain
an airtight and smoke-tight seal; and comply with ASTM C 919 requirements or with
manufacturer's written instructions,whichever are more stringent.
J. In elevator shafts where gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies cannot be positioned within 4 �.
inches (102 nim) of the shaft face of structural beams, floor edges, and similar projections into
shaft, install 1/2- or 5;'8-inch- (13- or 16-mm-) thick, gypsum board cants covering tops of
projections. No recesses allowed(at steel beams especially).
1. Slope cant panels at least 75 degrees from horizontal. Set base edge of panels in adhesive
and secure top edges to shaft walls at 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. with screws fastened to
shaft-wall framing.
2. Where steel framing is required to support gypsum board cants, install framing at 24
inches(6 10 mm)o.c. and extend studs from the projection to shaft-wall framing.
K. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than ,
1/8 inch(3mm)from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight,
construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.
B. Remove and replace panels that are wet,moisture damaged,or mold damaged.
1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging, and irregular shape.
GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES 092116.23 -6
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
1W A. Examine substrates to which gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies attach or abut, with Installer
present, including hollow-metal frames, elevator hoistway door frames, cast-in anchors, and
structural framing. Examine for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and
other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold
ww damaged.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials: Coordinate with gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies so both
elements of Work remain complete and undamaged. Patch or replace sprayed fire-resistive
materials removed or damaged during installation of shaft-wall assemblies to comply with
requirements specified in Division 07 Section "Applied Fireproofing."
1. Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach offset anchor plates or ceiling
runner tracks to surfaces indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials. Where
offset anchor plates are required, provide continuous plates fastened to building structure
not more than 24 inches(610 min)o.c.
B. After sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, remove only to extent necessary for
installation of gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies and without reducing the fire-resistive
material thickness below that which is required to obtain fire-resistance rating indicated.
Protect remaining fire-resistive materials from damage.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies to comply with requirements of fire-
resistance-rated assemblies indicated, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and the
following:
go I. ASTM C 754 for installing steel framing except comply with framing spacing indicated.
2. Division 09 Section"Gypsum Board" for applying and finishing panels.
B. Do not bridge architectural or building expansion joints with shaft-wall assemblies; frame both
!! sides of expansion joints with furring and other support.
C. Install supplementary framing in gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies around openings and as
required for blocking, bracing, and support of gravity and pullout loads of fixtures, equipment,
services, heavy trim, furnishings, and similar items that cannot be supported directly by shaft-
wall assembly framing.
1. At elevator hoistway entrance door frames, provide jamb struts on each side of door
frame.
GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES 092116.23 -5
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA `
H. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing),
produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag
wool, or rock wool.
1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of
assembly.
2. Recycled Content: Provide blankets with recycled content such that postconsumer
recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content constitutes a minimum of
<Insert number>percent by weight.
I. Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
1. Provide sealants that have a VOC content of [250] <Insert limit> g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D(EPA Method 24).
2.6 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES
A. Basis-of-Design Product: As indicated on Drawings by design designation of a qualified testing
agency.
B. Fire-Resistance Rating: As indicated.
C. STC Rating: As indicated.
D. Studs: Manufacturer's standard profile for repetitive members, corner and end members, and
fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated.
1. Depth: As indicated.
2. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0220 inch(0.55 mm).
E. Runner Tracks: Manufacturer's standard J-profile track with long-leg length as standard with
manufacturer,but at least 2 inches(51 inm) long and in depth matching studs.
1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: Matching steel studs.
F. Firestop Tracks: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with
movement of structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated;
in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.
G. Jamb Struts: Manufacturer's standard J-profile strut with long-leg length of 3 inches (76 mm),
in depth matching studs, and not less than 0.0329 inch(0.84 mm)thick.
w
H. Room-Side Finish: Gypsum board
1. Shaft-Side Finish: As indicated by fire-resistance-rated assembly design designation.
J. Insulation: Sound attenuation blankets.
GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES 092116.23 -4
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
b. Long Edges: Double bevel.
C. Gypsum Board: As specified in Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board."
D. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: As specified in Division 09 Section "Gypsum
Board."
r 2.4 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING
A. Framing Members: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.
B. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal, unless otherwise
indicated.
! !!� 1. Recycled Content: Provide steel sheet with average recycled content such that
postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less
than [25]percent.
2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180)] hot-dip galvanized, unless
otherwise indicated.
2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced product standards and
manufacturer's written recommendations.
B. Trim Accessories: Cornerbead, edge trim, and control joints of material and shapes specified in
Division 09 Section Gypsum Board that comply with gypsum board shaft-wall assembly
manufacturer's written recommendations for application indicated.
C. Gypsum Base Joint-Reinforcing Materials: As specified in Division 09 Section "Gypsum
Veneer Plastering."
D. Gypsum Board Joint-Treatment Materials: As specified in Division 09 Section "Gypsum
Board."
E. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended by manufacturer for directly
adhering gypsum face-layer panel[and gypsum-base face-layer panels to backing-layer panels
in multilayer construction.
1. Use adhesives that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D(EPA Method 24).
F. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002,unless otherwise indicated.
G. Track Fasteners: Power-driven fasteners of size and material required to withstand loading
conditions imposed on shaft-wall assemblies without exceeding allowable design stress of track,
fasteners, or structural substrates in which anchors are embedded.
GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES 092116.23 -3
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from
weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes.
C. Stack panels flat on leveled supports off floor or slab to prevent sagging.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or with gypsum board
manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.
B. Do not install interior products until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.
C. Do not install panels that are wet,moisture damaged, or mold damaged.
1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging,and irregular shape.
2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. .�
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
I. G-P Gypsum. ,
2. National Gypsum Company.
3. USG Corporation.
2.2 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES, GENERAL
A. Provide materials and components complying with requirements of fire-resistance-rated
assemblies indicated.
1. Provide panels in maximum lengths available to eliminate or minimize end-to-end butt
joints.
2. Provide auxiliary materials complying with gypsum board shaft-wall assembly
manufacturer's written recommendations.
2.3 PANEL PRODUCTS
A. Recycled Content: Provide gypsum panel products with recycled content such that
postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content constitutes a
minimum of<Insert number>percent by weight.
B. Gypsum Liner Panels: Comply with ASTM C 442/C 442M.
1. Type X: Manufacturer's proprietary liner panels with moisture-resistant paper faces.
a. Core: 1 inch(25.4 mm)thick.
GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES 092116.23 -2
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
qW Northampton,MA
we SECTION 092116.23 -GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies for the following:
1. Shaft-wall enclosures.
op B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 07 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" for head-of-wall assemblies that
incorporate gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each gypsum board shaft-wall assembly indicated.
- B. LEED Submittals:
l. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For adhesives and sealants, including printed statement
of VOC content.
2. Product Data for Credit MR 4.1[and Credit MR 4.2]: For products having recycled
ww content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and
preconsumer recycled content.
a. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies
with fire-resistance ratings determined according to ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting
agency.
B. STC-Rated Assemblies: Provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies
tested according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by a testing and
inspecting agency.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, and bundles bearing brand name and
identification of manufacturer or supplier.
GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES 092116.23 - 1
.s
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
C. Form closely fitted joints with exposed connections accurately located and secured.
D. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as
indicated.
E. Repair finishes damaged by cutting, welding, soldering, and grinding. Restore finishes so no
evidence remains of corrective work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the
factory,make required alterations,and refinish entire unit or provide new units.
F. Protect unpainted galvanized and nonferrous-metal surfaces that will be in contact with
concrete, masonry, or dissimilar metals from corrosion and galvanic action by applying a heavy
coating of bituminous paint or by separating surfaces with waterproof gaskets or nonmetallic
flashing.
G. Install concealed gaskets, flashings,joint fillers, and insulation as louver installation progresses,
where weathertight louver joints are required. Comply with Division 07 Section "Joint
Sealants" for sealants applied during louver installation.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Test operation of adjustable louvers and adjust as needed to produce fully functioning units that
comply with requirements.
B. Clean exposed surfaces of louvers and vents that are not protected by temporary covering, to
remove fingerprints and soil during construction period. Do not let soil accumulate during 40
construction period.
C. Before final inspection, clean exposed surfaces with water and a mild soap or detergent not
harmful to finishes. Thoroughly rinse surfaces and dry.
D. Restore louvers and vents damaged during installation and construction so no evidence remains
of corrective work. If results of restoration are unsuccessful, as determined by Architect,
remove damaged units and replace with new units.
1. Touch up minor abrasions in finishes with air-dried coating that matches color and gloss .�
of, and is compatible with, factory-applied finish coating.
END OF SECTION 089000
w.
LOUVERS AND VENTS 089000-6
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
!� Northampton,MA
4. Edge Treatment: Trim perimeter edges of blank-off panels with louver manufacturer's
A1e, standard extruded-aluminum-channel frames, not less than 0.080-inch (2.03-mm)
nominal thickness,with corners mitered and with same finish as panels.
5. Seal perimeter joints between panel faces and louver frames with gaskets or sealant.
6. Seal joints between panel faces with gaskets or sealant.
7. Panel Finish: Same finish applied to louvers.
8. Attach blank-off panels with clips or sheet metal screws.
2.6 FINISHES,GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
2.7 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Finish louvers after assembly.
B. High-Performance Organic Finish: 3-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2605
and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat,
and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers'
written instructions.
1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range including
metallics.
2. Coordinate with Section 07 42 16-Insulated Core Metal Wall Panels for matching finish.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
o•
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of
anchorages that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery
of such items to Project site.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Locate and place louvers and vents level, plumb,and at indicated alignment with adjacent work.
B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws where
required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection.
LOUVERS AND VENTS 089000- 5
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
2.3 FIXED,EXTRUDED-ALUMINUM LOUVERS
A. Horizontal, Drainable-Blade Louver:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, ..
the following:
a. Airolite Company, LLC(The).
b. Arrow United Industries; a division of Mestek, Inc.
C. Construction Specialties, Inc.
d. Nystrom Building Products.
e. Ruskin Company; Tomkins PLC.
f. Vent Products Company, Inc. w
2. Louver Depth: 4 inches (100 mm).
3. Frame and Blade Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.080 inch (2.03 mm) for blades and
0.080 inch(2.03 mm)for frames.
4. Mullion Type: Exposed
5. Louver Performance Ratings:
a. Free Area: Not less than 8.0 sq. ft. (0.74 sq. m) for 48-inch- (1220-mm-) wide by
48-inch- (1220-mm-)high louver.
b. Point of Beginning Water Penetration: Not less than 1000 fpm (5.1 m/s).
6. AMCA Seal: Mark units with AMCA Certified Ratings Seal.
■
2.4 LOUVER SCREENS
A. General: Provide screen at each exterior louver. w1
1. Screen Location for Fixed Louvers: Interior face.
2. Screening Type: Insect screening.
B. Secure screen frames to louver frames with stainless-steel machine screws, spaced a maximum
of 6 inches(150 mm)from each corner and at 12 inches(300 mm)o.c.
C. Louver Screen Frames: Fabricate with mitered corners to louver sizes indicated.
1. Metal: Same kind and form of metal as indicated for louver to which screens are
attached.
2. Finish: Same finish as louver frames to which louver screens are attached
D. Louver Screening for Aluminum Louvers:
1. Insect Screening: Aluminum, 18-by-16 (1.4-by-1.6-mm) mesh, 0.012-inch (0.30-mm)
wire.
2.5 BLANK-OFF PANELS
A. Insulated, Blank-Off Panels: Laminated panels consisting of insulating core surfaced on back
and front with metal sheets and attached to back of louver.
1. Thickness: 3 inches(50 mm).
2. Metal Facing Sheets: Aluminum sheet, not less than 0.032-inch (0.81-mm) nominal
thickness.
3. Insulating Core: extruded-polystyrene foam.
LOUVERS AND VENTS 089000-4
0
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
to Northampton,MA
PART 2-PRODUCTS
10
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M),Alloy 6063-T5, T-52, or T6.
B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper as required
for forming, or as otherwise recommended by metal producer for required finish.
C. Fasteners: Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions.
1. For fastening aluminum,use aluminum or 300 series stainless-steel fasteners.
D. For color-finished louvers,use fasteners with heads that match color of louvers.
*" E. Postinstalled Fasteners for Concrete and Masonry: Torque-controlled expansion anchors, made
from stainless-steel components, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 4
times the loads imposed, for concrete, or 6 times the load imposed, for masonry, as determined
by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
F. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
2.2 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Assemble louvers in factory to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units as
necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and
coordinated installation.
RM B. Maintain equal louver blade spacing, including separation between blades and frames at head
and sill,to produce uniform appearance.
ON C. Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with allowances
made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining material tolerances, and perimeter
sealant joints.
4" 1. Frame Type: Channel unless otherwise indicated.
D. Include supports, anchorages,and accessories required for complete assembly.
E. Provide vertical mullions of type and at spacings indicated, but not more than recommended by
manufacturer, or 72 inches(1830 mm)o.c.,whichever is less.
1. Exposed Mullions: Where indicated, provide units with exposed mullions of same width
* and depth as louver frame. Where length of louver exceeds fabrication and handling
limitations, provide interlocking split mullions designed to permit expansion and
contraction.
F. Provide subsills made of same material as louvers for recessed louvers.
G. Join frame members to each other and to fixed louver blades with fillet welds, threaded
fasteners, or both, as standard with louver manufacturer unless otherwise indicated or size of
louver assembly makes bolted connections between frame members necessary.
a
LOUVERS AND VENTS 089000-3
e�►
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
B. Air-Performance, Water-Penetration, and Air-Leakage Ratings: Provide louvers complying
with performance requirements indicated, as demonstrated by testing manufacturer's stock units .�
48 inches(1220 mm)wide by 48 inches(1220 mm)high. Test units according to AMCA 500.
1. Perform testing on unpainted, cleaned, degreased units.
2. Perform water-penetration testing on louvers without screens.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1. For louvers specified to bear AMCA seal, include printed catalog pages showing
specified models with appropriate AMCA Certified Ratings Seals.
B. Shop Drawings: For louvers and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
attachments to other work. Show frame profiles and blade profiles, angles, and spacing.
1. Show weep paths, gaskets, flashing, sealant, and other means of preventing water
intrusion.
2. Show mullion profiles and locations. '
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of metal finish required.
E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For louvers indicated to comply with structural performance
requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified
professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
F. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed according to
AMCA 500-L by a qualified testing agency or by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified
testing agency, for each type of louver and showing compliance with performance requirements
specified.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain louvers and vents from single source from a single manufacturer
where indicated to be of same type,design, or factory-applied color finish.
w
B. SMACNA Standard: Comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal
Manual" for fabrication, construction details, and installation procedures.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before
fabrication.
LOUVERS AND VENTS 089000-2
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
4" SECTION 089000-LOUVERS AND VENTS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Fixed, extruded-aluminum louvers.
2. Insulated blank-off panels.
4"
B. It is the intent of the Project to match the finish of the louvers to the wall panels they are
mounted within which includes two colors.
C. Related Section: Section 07 42 16-Insulated Core Metal Wall Panels for finish requirements.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Louver Terminology: Definitions of terms for metal louvers contained in AMCA 501 apply to
this Section unless otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.
B. Horizontal Louver: Louver with horizontal blades; i.e.,the axes of the blades are horizontal.
C. Drainable-Blade Louver: Louver with blades having gutters that collect water and drain it to
channels in jambs and mullions,which carry it to bottom of unit and away from opening.
D. Storm-Resistant Louver: Louver that provides specified wind-driven rain performance, as
determined by testing according to AMCA 500-L.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Louvers shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following
loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated without permanent deformation
of louver components, noise or metal fatigue caused by louver blade rattle or flutter, or
permanent damage to fasteners and anchors. Wind pressures shall be considered to act normal
to the face of the building.
1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on a uniform pressure for the following:
a. Low Building Louvers: 25 psf.
b. Low Building Louvers near corners of building: 30.5 psf.
on C. Tower Louvers: 38.6 psf.
am
LOUVERS AND VENTS 089000- 1
ow
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
4.9 MIRROR CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Protect mirrors from breakage and contaminating substances resulting from construction
operations.
B. Do not permit edges of mirrors to be exposed to standing water.
C. Maintain environmental conditions that will prevent mirrors from being exposed to moisture
from condensation or other sources for continuous periods of time. •
D. Wash exposed surface of mirrors not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections
that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash mirrors as recommended in writing by
mirror manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 08 80 00
.w,
w.
a.
GLAZING 08 80 00- 14
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
4.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
00
A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers
to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove
nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.
B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction
operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with
glass,remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at
frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a week, for buildup of dirt, scum,
alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from
natural causes,accidents,and vandalism, during construction period.
E. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date
scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as
recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
4.8 MIRROR INSTALLATION
A. General: Install mirrors to comply with mirror manufacturer's written instructions and with
no referenced GANA publications. Mount mirrors accurately in place in a manner that avoids
distorting reflected images.
B. Provide a minimum air space of 1/8 inch(3 mm)between back of mirrors and mounting surface
for air circulation between back of mirrors and face of mounting surface.
C. Wall-Mounted Mirrors: Install mirrors with mastic and mirror hardware. Attach mirror
hardware securely to mounting surfaces with mechanical fasteners installed with anchors or
inserts as applicable. Install fasteners so heads do not impose point loads on backs of mirrors.
1. Top and Bottom Aluminum J-Channels: Provide setting blocks 1/8 inch(3 mm)thick by
4 inches (100 mm) long at quarter points. To prevent trapping water, provide, between
setting blocks, two slotted weeps not less than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) wide by 3/8 inch (9.5
mm)long at bottom channel.
2. Install mastic as follows:
a. Apply barrier coat to mirror backing where approved in writing by manufacturers
s of mirrors and backing material.
b. Apply mastic to comply with mastic manufacturer's written instructions for
coverage and to allow air circulation between back of mirrors and face of
mounting surface.
C. After mastic is applied, align mirrors and press into place while maintaining a
minimum air space of 1/8 inch (3 mm) between back of mirrors and mounting
surface.
GLAZING 08 80 00- 13
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover
horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills.
D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped.
Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.
E. Do not remove release paper from tape until right before each glazing unit is installed.
F. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense
compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops.
Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.
w.
4.5 GASKET GLAZING(DRY)
A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings *"
exactly,with allowance for stretch during installation.
B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place
with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.
C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and
press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and
installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners
and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without
developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket
manufacturer.
D. Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and
press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressure-
glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to
produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints
with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.
F. Wet glaze on Natatorium side of glass as required to maintain warranty for glass products
within Natatorium environment.
so
4.6 SEALANT GLAZING (WET)
A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass �*+
lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding
into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and
backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance
for optimum sealant performance.
B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond
of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.
C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.
GLAZING 08 80 00- 12
w
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
4.3 GLAZING, GENERAL
so
A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and
other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in
referenced glazing publications.
B. Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by Project conditions during installation to
provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant
thicknesses,with reasonable tolerances.
C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from
Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or
other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and
appearance.
D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by
preconstruction testing.
E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing
publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of
compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.
F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.
G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches(1270 mm).
w
1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass.
Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and
glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances
and to comply with system performance requirements.
2. Provide 1/8-inch (3-mm) minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to
sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed
thickness of tape.
H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways
in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to
requirements in referenced glazing publications.
1. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern,draw,bow,and similar characteristics.
J. Set glass liter with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as specified.
4.4 TAPE GLAZING
A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush
with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.
B. Install tapes continuously,but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to
make them fit opening.
GLAZING 08 80 00- 11
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance
requirements.
B. Clean-cut or flat-grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites to produce square edges
with slight chamfers at junctions of edges and faces.
C. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners.
3.12 FABRICATION OF MIRRORS
A. Mirror Edge Treatment: Flat polished. w.
1. Seal edges of mirrors with edge sealer after edge treatment to prevent chemical or
atmospheric penetration of glass coating.
2. Require mirror manufacturer to perform edge treatment and sealing in factory
immediately after cutting to final sizes.
B. Mirror Sizes: To suit Project conditions, cut mirrors to final sizes and shapes.
PART 4-EXECUTION
w
4.1 EXAMINATION
w
A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the
following:
1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and w.
offsets at corners.
2. Presence and functioning of weep systems.
3. Minimum required face and edge clearances.
4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
4.2 PREPARATION
w
A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing.
Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.
..e
B. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so
that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that will leave
visible marks in the completed work.
GLAZING 08 80 00- 10
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
Northampton,MA
3.9 MIRROR MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or
minus 5.
on B. Edge Sealer: Coating compatible with glass coating and approved by mirror manufacturer for
use in protecting against silver deterioration at mirrored glass edges.
gw C. Mirror Mastic: An adhesive setting compound, asbestos-free, produced specifically for setting
mirrors and certified by both mirror manufacturer and mastic manufacturer as compatible with
glass coating and substrates on which mirrors will be installed.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Franklin International; Titebond Division.
b. Laurence, C.R. Co., Inc.
C. Macco Adhesives;Liquid Nails Division.
d. OSI Sealants, Inc.
e. Palmer Products Corporation.
f. Pecora Corporation.
g. Royal Adhesives& Sealants; Gunther Mirror Mastics Division.
h. Sommer&Maca Industries, Inc.
40 D. Film Backing for Safety Mirrors: Film backing and pressure-sensitive adhesive; both
compatible with mirror backing paint as certified by mirror manufacturer.
so
3.10 MIRROR HARDWARE
A. Top and Bottom Aluminum L-Channels: Aluminum extrusions with a return deep enough to
ON produce a glazing channel to accommodate mirrors of thickness indicated and in lengths
required to cover bottom and top edges of each mirror in a single piece.
1. Top and Bottom Trim: L-channels formed with front leg and back leg not less than
length required to support thickness of mirror, and a thickness of not less than 0.05 inch
(1.3 mm).
a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following:
+ . 1) Laurence, C. R. Co., Inc.; CRL Satin Anodized Aluminum L-Bar Extrusion.
2) Or equal.
2. Finish: Clear bright anodized.
3.11 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS
A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face
clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product
w
GLAZING 088000-9
w
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
4. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full
range. .�
B. General Glazing and Cap Bead Sealant: Provide sealant with maximum Shore A hardness of 50.
Provide one of the following:
a. Dow Corning 795. �.
b. General Electric Silglaze N 2500 or Contractors SCS-1000.
C. Tremco Proglaze.
w,e
C. Weather Seal Sealant: Provide non-acid curing sealant with movement range f 50%, ASTM
C719.Provide one of the following:
a. Dow Corning 795.
b. General Electric Silpruf.
C. Tremco Spectrum 2.
3.6 GLAZING TAPES
A. Provide solvent-free butyl-polyisobutylene rubber with 100% solids content complying with
AAMA A 804.1. Provide preformed glazing tape in extruded tape form. Provide one of the
following:
1. Protective Treatments 303 or 606.
2. Tremco Preshimmed 440.
3. Woodmont Chem-Tape 40.
.�r
3.7 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS
A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing
standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application
indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.
B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.
C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or
minus 5. ..
D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass
manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.
E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side
walking).
an
3.8 SILVERED FLAT GLASS MIRRORS
Im
A. Glass Mirrors, General: ASTM C 1503.
B. Clear Glass: Mirror Select; Quality;ultraclear(low-iron) float glass with a minimum 91 percent
visible light transmission. so
I. Nominal Thickness: 6.0 mm.
w
GLAZING 088000- 8
e�
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
w Northampton,MA
so E. Insulating Glass Unit Type 3 (Silver Spandrel)
a. Basis-of-Design Product: PPG Solarban 80(2)Spandrel.
b. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: 1 inch thick.
we C. Interspace Content: Argon.
d. Outdoor Lite:PPG Solarban 80(2) Spandrel.
e. Indoor Lite: Class 1 (clear)tempered safety glass.
3.4 GLAZING GASKETS
W A. General: Provide sealants and gaskets with performance characteristics suitable for applications
indicated. Ensure compatibility of glazing sealants with laminated glass interlayers, plastic
glazing, and with any other surfaces in contact.
B. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of profile and hardness required to
maintain watertight seal,made from one of the following:
1. Neoprene complying with ASTM C 864.
2. EPDM complying with ASTM C 864.
3. Silicone complying with ASTM C 1115.
as 4. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber complying with ASTM C 1115.
C. Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed-cell, integral-skinned neoprene,
40 EPDM, silicone, or thermoplastic polyolefin rubber gaskets complying with ASTM C 509,
Type 11, black; of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal. Coordinate gasket
material and compatible glazing sealants.
10 1. Application: Use where soft compression gaskets will be compressed by inserting dense
compression gaskets on opposite side of glazing or pressure applied by means of
pressure-glazing stops on opposite side of glazing.
D. Lock-Strip Gaskets: Neoprene extrusions in size and shape indicated, fabricated into frames
with molded corner units and zipper lock-strips, complying with ASTM C 542,black.
3.5 GLAZING SEALANTS
A. General:
1. Compatibility: Provide glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with
other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units,
and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as
demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for
selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at
time of installation.
3. VOC Content: For sealants used inside of the weatherproofing system, not more than
250 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D.
e�
GLAZING 088000- 7
�s
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
I. Construction: Laminate glass with polyvinyl butyral interlayer to comply with interlayer
manufacturer's written recommendations.
2. Interlayer Thickness: Provide thickness not less than that indicated and as needed to
comply with requirements.
3. Interlayer Color: Clear unless otherwise indicated.
3.3 INSULATING GLASS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following:
1. Falcomer Glass Industries.
2. Guardian Industries.
3. Libbey Owens Ford.
4. PPG Industries.
5. Viracon, Inc.
B. Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by
a dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190, and complying with other
requirements specified.
1. Sealing System: Dual seal,with manufacturer's standard primary and secondary.
2. Spacer: Aluminum with mill or clear anodic finish.
C. Insulating Glass Unit Type I(Clear)
a. Basis-of-Design Product: PPG Solarban 60(3)except(2)with clear.
b. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: 1 inch thick.
C. Interspace Content: Argon.
d. Outdoor Lite:PPG Solarban 60 tempered safety glass.
e. Indoor Lite: Class 1 (clear)tempered safety glass.
f. U-Value: 0.29
g. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.36 Maximum.
h. Shade Coefficient: 0.42
i. Visible Light Transmittance: 59% .w
D. Insulating Glass Unit Type 2 (Silver Vision)
a. Basis-of-Design Product: PPG Solarban 80(2)
b. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: 1 inch thick.
C. Interspace Content: Argon.
d. Outdoor Lite:PPG Solarban 80(2)tempered safety glass.
e. Indoor Lite: Class I (clear)tempered safety glass.
f. U-Value: 0.29
g. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.23 Maximum. w
h. Shade Coefficient: 0.27
i. Visible Light Transmittance: 47%
GLAZING 088000-6
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
2.10 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Manufacturer's form in which insulating-
glass manufacturer agrees to replace insulating-glass units that deteriorate within specified
warranty period. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal under
normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning insulating
glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of
vision by dust,moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass.
w►
1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
2. Manufacturer's warranty must include glass installed within the natatorium.
B. Special Warranty for mirrors: Manufacturer's standard form in which mirror manufacturer
agrees to replace mirrors that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of
mirrors is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to mirror
breakage or to maintaining and cleaning mirrors contrary to manufacturer's written instructions.
Defects include discoloration,black spots, and clouding of the silver film.
I. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 3 -PRODUCTS
3.1 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass lites in
esr
thicknesses as needed to comply with requirements indicated.
B. Strength: Where float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, Kind HS heat-treated
float glass, or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance
"a Requirements" Article. Where heat-strengthened glass is indicated, provide Kind HS heat-
treated float glass or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance
Requirements" Article. Where fully tempered glass is indicated, provide Kind FT heat-treated
float glass.
3.2 GLASS PRODUCTS
A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type 1, Quality-Q3, Class I(clear)unless otherwise indicated.
B. Heat-Treated (Tempered) Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I; Quality-Q3; Class I (clear)
unless otherwise indicated; of kind and condition indicated.
1. For uncoated glass,comply with requirements for Condition A.
w
2. For coated vision glass,comply with requirements for Condition C(other coated glass).
C. Laminated Glass: ASTM C 1172, and complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 for
Category II materials, and with other requirements specified. Use materials that have a proven
gs record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after
fabrication and installation.
GLAZING 088000- 5
w
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
B. Fabricator, Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Minimum five (5) years documented experience
producing sealed insulating glass units specified this section.
C. Installer Qualifications: Minimum five (5) years documented experience installing products
specified in this section, and approved by fabricator.
D. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain glass from one primary-glass manufacturer to the greatest
extent possible. Obtain insulating units from one manufacturer. Obtain glazing accessories from
one source.
E. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single
manufacturer for each product and installation method.
F. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers
and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these
publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.
I. GANA Publications: GANA's "Glazing Manual."
2. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing ,
Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use."
G. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated, permanently mark glazing
with certification label of the manufacturer. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of
glass,thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies.
H. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least ■"
one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC.
2.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to
glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or
other causes.
B. Comply with insulating-glass manufacturer's written recommendations for venting and sealing
units to avoid hermetic seal ruptures due to altitude change.
2.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate
temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when
glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.
I. Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are
outside limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C).
ew
GLAZING 088000-4
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
E. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature
W changes acting on glass framing members and glazing components.
1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material
surfaces.
2.6 SUBMITTALS
�w
A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Data for Credit MR 4.1 and Credit MR 4.2: For products having recycled
content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and pre-
consumer recycled content. Include statement indicating costs for each product having
recycled content.
2. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For sealants, mastics and adhesives including printed
statement of VOC content.
C. Glass Samples: For each type of glass product other than clear monolithic vision glass; 12
inches(300 mm)square.
1. Laminated glass.
2. Insulating glass.
D. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use
same designations indicated on Drawings.
E. Qualification Data: For installers and manufacturers of insulating-glass units with sputter-
coated, low-e coatings.
F. Product Certificates: For glass and glazing products, from manufacturer.
G. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
testing agency,for insulating glass,tempered glass,glazing sealants and glazing gaskets.
1. For glazing sealants, provide test reports based on testing current sealant formulations
within previous 36-month period.
H. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.
1. Insulated glass at Natatorium must be included within the glass manufacturer's warranty.
go Provide warranty sample with product data submission indicating that warranty includes
natatorium insulated glass panels.
so 2.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications for Insulating-Glass Units with Sputter-Coated, Low-E Coatings:
!*� A qualified insulating-glass manufacturer who is approved by coated-glass manufacturer.
GLAZING 088000- 3
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
F. ASTM C 1172 - Standard Specification for Laminated Architectural Flat Glass.
G. ASTM C 1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants.
H. ASTM E 283 - Standard Test Method For Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through
Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the ^'
Specimen.
I. ASTM E 330 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain
Walls,and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.
J. ASTM E 773 - Standard Test Method for Seal Durability of Sealed Insulating Glass Units.
K. ASTM E 774- Standard Specification for Sealed Insulating Glass Units.
L. ASTM E 1300 - Standard Practice for Determining the Minimum Thickness and Type of Glass
Required to Resist a Specified Load.
M. GANA (GM)- FGMA Glazing Manual; Glass Association of North America.
N. GANA (SM)-FGMA Sealant Manual; Glass Association of North America.
O. GANA (LGDG)-Laminated Glass Design Guide; Glass Association of North America.
w.
2.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in
referenced glazing publications.
B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to
ASTM C 1036.
C. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit.
2.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and
impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to
the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets
to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in
construction.
B. Size glass to withstand dead loads and positive and negative live loads acting normal to plane of
glass in accordance with The State of Virginia Building Code.
C. Size glass to withstand dead loads and positive and negative live loads acting normal to plane of
glass to a design pressure of 18 pounds per square foot in accordance with ASTM E 1300.
D. Limit glass deflection to 3/4 inch or flexure limit of glass with full recovery of glazing
materials,whichever is less.
wR
GLAZING 088000-2
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
PART 1 - SECTION 088000-GLAZING
PART 2-GENERAL
2.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
2.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified
in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section:
1. Hollow metal doors and frames.
2. Flush wood doors with lites.
3. Storefront framing.
4. Glazed Aluminum curtainwalls.
5. Interior borrowed lites.
6. Interior butt glazed walls with metal shoes and head channels.
7. Annealed monolithic glass mirrors.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 08 Section "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames" doors and frames to receive
xv glass.
2. Division 08 Section"Flush Wood Doors"for doors to receive glazing.
3. Division 08 Section "Aluminum Framed Entrances and Storefronts" for storefront and
entrances to receive glazing.
4. Division 08 Section"Glazed aluminum Curtainwalls"for curtainwalls to receive glazing.
5. Division 08 Section"Aluminum Windows"for windows to receive glazing.
6. Division 10 Section"Toilet Accessories"for prefabricated mirrors in toilet rooms.
2.3 REFERENCES
on, A. ANSI Z97.1 - American National Standard for Glazing Materials Used in Buildings -- Safety
Performance Specifications and Methods of Test.
B. ASTM C 162 - Standard Terminology of Glass and Glass Products.
C. ASTM C 864 - Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets,
Setting Blocks,and Spacers.
«W
D. ASTM C 1036- Standard Specification for Flat Glass.
E. ASTM C 1048 - Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Flat Glass -- Kind HS, Kind FT
Coated and Uncoated Glass.
w
GLAZING 08 80 00- 1
e
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
12 Closed Area Doors
W 2 pair butt hinges
Closer
Deadbolt: KABA-MAS electro-mechanical deadbolt series X-09
Lever Type Lockset: KABA Brand Simplex Series 1000,Push Button,knob style,
reversible
Silencers
Floor stop
13 Closed Area Doors
2 pair butt hinges
Closer
Lock: KABA-MAS electro-mechanical deadbolt series CDX-09 Combination Deadbolt
lock for pedestrian doors with electrified rim device
Silencers
Floor stop
aw
14 Deadbolts for Overhead Coiling Door
15 1 1/2 Pair butt hinges
Closer
Deadbolt: KABA-MAS electro-mechanical deadbolt series X-09
Lockset: KABA Brand Simplex Series 1000, Push Button,knob style,reversible with
4W weathershield
Threshold
Weatherstripping
Door Sweep
16A Recessed floor closers each leaf equal to Donna BTS-80 for double acting doors
1" diameter single projection push bar in brushed stainless, provide(1)on each side of
each leaf
17 Overhead door track with stop
Recessed floor track
Flush cup pulls each leaf, each side
END OF SECTION 08 7100
DOOR HARDWARE 087100-23
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
7A Security Controlled Interior Single Leaf Door
1 1/2 pair of butts(1 pair electric hinge type)
Closer
Electrically locked lockset with storeroom function
Silencers
Kick plate on push side
Floor mounted stop
Power Supply: Equal to Locknetics Series 505 with EIR
7B Security Controlled Interior Double Doors
3 pair of butts WM
Closer on active leaf
Electrically locked lockset with storeroom function on active leaf
Power Supply:1 Equal to Locknetics Series 505 with EIR
q
Inactive leaf. automatic flush bolts,dustproof strike
Kick plates on push side of each leaf
Floor mounted stop
8 Lock core only for use in overhead door control
9 Hardware by door manufacturer
10 2 pair of butts .
Cipher Lock(KABA-MAS Brand Series 1000, push button,reversible with knob)
Closer
Floor Stop
Silencers
11 Closed Area Doors
2 pair butt hinges
Closer
Lock: KABA-MAS electro-mechanical deadbolt series CDX-09 Combination Deadbolt
lock for pedestrian doors
Silencers
Floor stop o"
we
DOOR HARDWARE 0871 00-22
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
5A 1 1/2 pair of butts
Privacy Function Lockset
Closer-Pull Side Mounted
Floor Stop
Silencers
Kick Plate -sides
6A Double magnetic lock equal to Locknetics Series 320 with 720 pound holding force.
-Request to exit button
40 - Scan II infrared sensor mounted on door head frame
-Door status monitoring capability
- Power Supply Equal to Locknetics Series 510(2amp)with EIR. One power supply
shall be feed two sets of doors each
Closers on each leaf.top jamb mounted(180 degree where possible)
1" diameter,straight push/pull set, 1 per leaf
613 Security Controlled Exterior Double Doors
4, Double magnetic lock equal to Locknetics Series 390
- Request to exit button
- Scan 11 infrared sensor mounted on door head frame
PW - Door status monitoring capability
- Power Supply Equal to Locknetics Series 510(2amp)with EIR. One power supply
shall be feed two sets of doors each
Closers on each leaf. top jamb mounted(180 degree where possible)
I" diameter,straight push/pull set, 1 per leaf
Threshold
Door bottoms
Weatherstripping
Sweep
6C I" diameter,straight push/pull set, I per leaf
Closers on each leaf
6D Rim Exit Device with Storeroom Function and Exterior Lever
Continuous Hinge
Closer
Weatherstripping
Threshold
Door Bottom
DOOR HARDWARE 0871 00- 21
g
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
2F Active/Inactive
3 pair of butts *"
Office function lockset on active leaf
Closer on active leaf
Automatic flush bolts top and bottom with dustproof strike
Kick plates each leaf on push side
2G Active/Inactive
3 pair of butts
Office function lockset on active leaf
Automatic flush bolts top and bottom with dustproof strike •
Kick plates each leaf on push side
Floor stop
w
3A l 1/2 pair of butts
Storeroom Function Lockset(provide rim exit device at 249)
Closer-Room Side Mounted(pull side mounte at door 232)
Floor Stop
Silencers
3B Active/Inactive
3 pair of butts
Storeroom function lockset on active leaf
Closer on active leaf
Automatic flush bolts top and bottom with dustproof strike
Kick plates each leaf on push side
Floor stop
3C Active/Inactive
4 pair of butts
Storeroom function lockset on active leaf
Closer on active leaf
Automatic flush bolts top and bottom with dustproof strike
Armor plates each leaf on push side ..
Floor stop
4A l 1/2 pair of butts
Push Plate/Pull Bar
Closer-Pull Side Mounted
Floor Stop
Silencers
Kick Plate- sides
DOOR HARDWARE 0871 00-20
go
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
IF Active/Inactive(both leaves active at door D188A3)
3 pair of butts(4 pair of butts at 163A and Dl 88A3)
Passage function lockset on active leaf
Closer on active leaves
Manual flush bolts
Dustproof strike
Kick plates each leaf on push side(omit DI 88A3 and 163A)
Floor stop at 171
1G 1 1/2 pair of butts
Dummy lever,no inside trim
Catch on each leaf
2A 2 pair of butts
Office Function Lockset
Floor Stop
Silencers
2B 1 1/2 pair of butts
Office Function Lockset
Floor Stop
Silencers
2C 1 1/2 pair of butts
Office Function Lockset
Closer
Floor Stop
Silencers
2D 2 pair of butts
Office Function Lockset
Closer
Floor Stop
Silencers
2E 3 pair of butts
Office Function Lockset on active leaf
Inactive Leaf.Manual flush bolts, dustproof strike,no trim
Closer on active leaf
Floor Stops
DOOR HARDWARE 0871 00- 19
s■
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA w
D. Hardware Sets
1A 2 pair of butts
Passage Function Lockset
Floor Stop
Silencers
1B 1 1/2 pair of butts
Passage Function Lockset
Floor Stop(omit at 159)
Silencers
1B-1 1 1/2 pair of butts
Passage Function Lockset
Floor Stop
Silencers
Kick plates-both sides *�
1C 1 1/2 pair of butts
Passage Function Lockset
Closer
Floor Stop
Silencers
1D NOT USED
w�
w
1E Active/Inactive �•
3 pair of butts
Passage function lockset on active leaf
Closers on each leaf
Automatic flush bolts top and bottom with dustproof strike
Kick plates each leaf on push side
wee
DOOR HARDWARE 0871 00- 18
IM
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
D. Instruct Owner's personnel in the proper adjustment, lubrication, and maintenance of door
hardware and hardware finishes.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
go A. Prior to Substantial Completion, the installer, accompanied by representatives of the
manufacturers of locks, exit devices, closer, and any electrified hardware, shall perform the
following work:
1. Examine and re-adjust each item of door hardware as necessary to restore function of
doors and hardware to comply with specified requirements.
2. Consult with and instruct Owner's personnel in recommended additions to the
maintenance procedures.
3. Replace hardware items that have deteriorated or failed due to faulty design, materials, or
installation of hardware units.
4. Prepare a written report of current and predictable problems of substantial nature in the
performance of the hardware.
5. At completion of project, a qualified factory representative for the manufacturers of
locksets, closer, exit devices, and access control products shall arrange and hold a training
session to instruct the Owner's personnel on the proper maintenance, adjustment, and/or
operation of their respective products. After training a letter of compliance, indicating
when the training was held and who was in attendance,shall be sent to the Architect.
3.05 PROTECTION
PM
A. Provide for the proper protection of complete items of hardware until the Owner accepts the
project as complete. Damaged or disfigured hardware shall be replaced or repaired by the
responsible party.
3.06 HARDWARE SCHEDULE
A. Provide hardware for each door to comply with requirements of Section "Finish Hardware,"
hardware set numbers indicated in door schedule,and in the following schedule of hardware sets.
B. It is intended that the following schedule includes complete items of finish hardware necessary to
complete the work. If a discrepancy is found in the schedule, such as a missing item, improper
hardware for a frame, door or fire codes,the preamble will be the deciding document.
C. Locksets, exit devices, and other hardware items are referenced in the Hardware Sets for series,
type, and function. Refer to the preamble for special features, options, cylinders/keying, and other
requirements.
aw
DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00- 17
wo
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
hardware shall conduct training; provide at least 10 days notice to representatives. After
training a letter of compliance, indicating when the training was held and who was in
attendance, shall be sent to the Architect.
2. Prior to ordering electrified hardware, schedule and hold a meeting for the purpose of
coordinating finish hardware with security, electrical, doors and frames, and other related ■
suppliers. A representative of the supplier of finish hardware, and doors and frames, the
electrical subcontractor, and the Owner's security contractor shall meet with the Owner,
Architect, and General Contractor prior to ordering finish hardware. After meeting a letter
of compliance, indicating when the training was held and who was in attendance, shall be
sent to the Architect.
B. Hardware will be installed by qualified tradesmen, skilled in the application of commercial grade
hardware. For technical assistance if necessary, installers may contact the manufacturer's rep for
the item in question, as listed in the hardware schedule.
C. Mount hardware units at heights indicated in "Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware
for Standard Steel Doors and Frames"by the Door and Hardware Institute.
D. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations, using only the fasteners provided by the manufacturer.
E. Do not install surface mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrate. Protect
all installed hardware during painting.
F. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate
as necessary for proper installation and operation.
G. Operating parts shall move freely and smoothly without binding, sticking,or excessive clearance. .■
H. Wire (including low voltage), conduit, junction boxes, and pulling of wire is by Division 16,
Electrical. Electrical Contractor shall connect wire to door position switches and run wire to
.M
central room or area as directed by the Architect. Wires shall be tested and labeled with the
Architects opening number. Connections to/from power supplies to electrified hardware and any
connection to fire/smoke alarm system, and/or smoke evacuation system where specified is by
Division 16 Electrical.
3.03 ADJUSTING, CLEANING,AND DEMONSTRATING
A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door, to insure proper operation or
function of every unit. Replace units which cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly.
B. Where door hardware is installed more than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy of a
space or area, return to the installation during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy and
make a final check and adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area. Clean operating
items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door ..
control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment.
C. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation.
DOOR HARDWARE 0871 00- 16
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
e. Two permanent core control keys
f. Six construction master keys for each type (Contractor is to provide one set of
construction keys to Architect)
6. Visual key control:
a. Keys shall be stamped with their respective key set number and stamped"DO NOT
DUPLICATE".
b. Grand master and master keys shall be stamped with their respective key set letters.
C. Do not stamp any keys with the factory key change number.
d. Do not stamp any cores with key set on face(front)of Core. Stamp on back or side
of cores so not to be visible when core is in cylinder.
7. Deliver grand master keys, master keys, change keys, and/or key blanks from the factory
or authorized distributor directly to the Owner in sealed containers, return receipt
' requested. Failure to comply with these requirements may be cause to require
replacement of all or any part of the keying system that was compromised at no
additional cost to the Owner.
8. Approved products: Schlage Everest D, Best Peaks, Sargent Signature, or approved
equal.
2.05 KEY CONTROL SYSTEM
A. Provide a key control system, including envelopes, labels, tags with self-locking key clips,
receipt forms, 3-way visible card index, temporary markers, permanent markers, and standard
metal cabinet, all as recommended by system manufacturer, with capacity for 150% of the
number of locks required for the Project.
1. Provide complete cross index system set up by the hardware supplier, and place keys on
markers and hooks in the cabinet as determined by the final key schedule.
2. Provide hinged-panel type cabinet for wall mounting.
3. Approved products: Telkee,HPC,Lund, or approved equal.
w
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Prior to installation of any hardware, examine all doors, frames, walls and related items for
conditions that would prevent proper installation of finish hardware. Correct all defects prior to
4M proceeding with installation.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Coordination:
1. Prior to installation of hardware, schedule and hold a meeting for the purpose of
instructing installers on proper installation and adjustment of finish hardware.
Representatives of locks, exit devices, closers, automatic operators, and electrified
DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00- 15
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA .e•
4. Protection Plates: US32D(BHMA 630).
�u
5. Overhead Stops and Holders: US32D(BHMA 630).
6. Door Closers: Powder Coat to Match.
7. Wall Stops: US32D(BHMA 630).
8. Latch Protectors: US32D(BHMA 630).
9. Weatherstipping: Clear Anodized Aluminum.
10. Thresholds: Mill Finish Aluminum.
2.04 KEYING
A. Provide a new key system from the same manufacturer as the locks conforming to the
following requirements:
1. Provide restricted patented removable core cylinders at all keyed devices. Restricted shall
control the access to the products by requiring a signed letter of authorization and/or
authorization form from the Owner or authorized agent of the Owner. Patent shall protect
against the unauthorized manufacturing and duplication of the products. Restricted
patented cores shall not be operable by non-patented key blanks. Restricted patented
cores shall incorporate a mechanism to check for the patented features on the keys.
Provide construction cores with construction master keying for use during construction. +*"
The hardware supplier, accompanied by the Owner or Owner's security agent, shall
install permanent keyed cores upon completion of the project. The temporary
construction cores are to be returned to the hardware supplier.
2. Provide permanent cores keyed by the manufacturer or authorized distributor as directed
by the Owner. Provide owner with a copy of the bitting list, return receipt requested.
3. The hardware supplier, accompanied by a qualified factory representative for the
manufacturer of the cores and cylinders, shall meet with Owner and Architect to review
keying requirements and lock functions prior to ordering finish hardware. Submit a
keying schedule to Architect for approval.
4. Provide cores, unless noted otherwise, operated by a Great Grand Master Key System to
be established for this project. Allow for ten Grand Master Keys under the Great Grand.
Do not use the letter "1", "O", or"X" for any of the grand masters. Allow for twenty-four
Master Keys under each Grand Master, and sixty-four changes under each master key.
All cylinders shall be keyed in alike or different sets as noted by their respective key set
number. Do not use the letter"I" or"O"in any of the master key sets.
5. Provide patented restricted keys as follows: w
a. Ten grand master keys for each set.
b. Ten master keys for each set.
C. Three keys per core and/or cylinder.
d. Two construction core control keys
wu
DOOR HARDWARE 0871 00- 14
on
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
go Northampton,MA
N. Door Stops and Holders
1. Provide door stops for all doors in accordance with the following requirements:
a. Provide wall stops wherever possible. Provide convex type where mortise type locks
are used and concave type where cylindrical type locks are used.
b. Where wall stops cannot be used,provide dome type floor stops of the proper height.
c. At any opening where a wall or floor stop cannot be used, a medium duty surface
on mounted overhead stop shall be used.
2. Acceptable manufacturers and/or products: Ives, Burns,Rockwood.
OR O. Thresholds, Seals,Door Sweeps,Automatic Door Bottoms, and Gasketing
1. Provide thresholds, weatherstripping (including door sweeps, seals, astragals) and
gasketing systems (including smoke, sound, and light) as specified and per architectural
details. Match finish of other items as closely as possible. Size of thresholds shall be as
follows:
a. Saddle Thresholds— 1/4 inch high x jamb width x door width
b. Bumper Seal Thresholds— 1/2 inch high x 5 inches wide x door width
2. Provide door sweeps, seals, astragals, and auto door bottoms only of type where resilient
or flexible seal strip is easily replaceable and readily available.
3. Acceptable manufacturers and/or products: National Guard,Reese,Zero.
P. Silencers
1. Provide "Push-in" type silencers for each hollow metal or wood frame. Provide three for
each single frame and two for each pair frame. Omit where gasketing is specified or
required by code.
2. Acceptable manufacturers and/or products: Ives,Burns,Rockwood.
Q. Latch Protectors
I. Provide latch protectors of type required to function with the specified lock.
2. Acceptable manufacturers and/or products: Ives,Burns,Rockwood.
2.03 FINISHES
A. Finish of all hardware shall be US26D(BHMA 626/652)with the exceptions as follows:
1. Hinges at Exterior Doors: US32D(BHMA 630).
2. Continuous Hinges: US28.
3. Push Plates, Pulls,and Push Bars: US32D(BHMA 630).
DOOR HARDWARE 0871 00- 13
w
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA 'o
1. Provide heavy or medium duty and concealed or surface mounted overhead stop or
overhead stop/holder for interior doors as specified. Provide medium duty surface mounted ..�
overhead stop for interior doors and at any door that swings more than 140 degrees before
striking a wall, open against equipment, casework, sidelights, and/or where conditions do
not allow a wall stop or a floor stop presents a tripping hazard.
2. Where overhead holders are specified provide friction type at doors without a closer and
positive type at doors with a closer.
3. Acceptable manufacturers and/or products: Glynn-Johnson,Rixson, Sargent.
on
M
on
w.
w�
•
DOOR HARDWARE 0871 00- 12
no
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
regulation shall be by tamper-proof, non-critical valves. Closers shall have separate
adjustment for latch speed,general speed, and backcheck.
5. Provide closers with a solid forged steel main arms and factory assembled heavy-duty
forged forearms for parallel arm closers.
6. Closers shall not incorporate Pressure Relief Valve(PRV)technology.
7. Closer cylinders, arms, adapter plates, and metal covers shall have a powder coating finish
which has been certified to exceed 100 hours salt spray testing as described in ANSI
Standard Al 56.4 and ASTM B117,or shall have special rust inhibitor(SRI).
4•
8. Provide special templates, drop plates, mounting brackets, or adapters for arms as required
for details, overhead stops, and other finish hardware items interfering with closer
mounting.
9. Mount closers on room side of corridor doors, inside of exterior doors, and stair side of
stairway doors from corridors. Closers shall not be visible in corridors, lobbies and other
0s„ public spaces unless approved by Architect.
10. Door closers meeting this specification: LCN 4000 series, Sargent 281/281PIO series
factory assembled(without PRV).
L. Door Trim
1. Provide push plates 4 inches wide x 16 inches high x 0.050 inch thick and beveled 4 edges.
Where width of door stile prevents use of 4 inches wide plate, adjust width to fit.
2. Provide push bars of solid bar stock, diameter and length as scheduled. Push bars shall be
of sufficient length to span from center to center of each stile. Where required, mount
back to back with pull.
3. Provide offset pulls of solid bar stock, diameter and length as scheduled. Where required,
mount back to back with push bar.
4. Provide flush pulls as specified. Where required,provide back-to-back mounted model.
5. Provide pulls of solid bar stock,diameter and length as scheduled. Where required, mount
so back to back with push bar.
6. Provide pull plates 4 inches wide x 16 inches high x 0.050 inch thick, beveled 4 edges, and
prepped for pull. Where width of door stile prevents use of 4 inches wide plate, adjust
am width to fit.
7. Provide wire pulls of solid bar stock, diameter and length as scheduled.
8. Acceptable manufacturers and/or products: Ives,Burns, Rockwood.
M. Overhead Stops and Overhead Stop/Holders
•
DOOR HARDWARE 0871 00- 11
am
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
b. Lever trim on doors serving rooms considered by the authority having jurisdiction to
be hazardous shall have a tactile warning. +r.
10. Exit devices for fire rated openings shall be UL labeled fire exit hardware.
11. Acceptable manufacturers and/or products: Von Duprin 98 Series, Precision Apex series,
Sargent 80 series with deadlatching.
J. Power Supplies
1. Provide power supplies, recommended and approved by the manufacturer of the electrified
locking component, for the operation of electrified locks, electrified exit devices, magnetic
locks, electric strikes,and other components requiring a power supply.
2. Provide the appropriate quantity of power supplies necessary for the proper operation of
the electrified locking component and/or components as recommended by the
manufacturer of the electrified locking components with consideration for each electrified
component utilizing the power supply, the location of the power supply, and the approved
wiring diagrams. Locate the power supplies as directed by the Architect.
3. Provide a power supply that is regulated and filtered 24 VDC, or as required, and UL class
2 listed.
4. Provide a power supply complete requiring only 120VAC to the fused input and shall be
supplied in an enclosure.
5. Provide a power supply with emergency release terminals, where required, that allow the
release of all devices upon activation of the fire alarm system complete with fire alarm
input for initiating"no delay"exiting mode.
6. Acceptable manufacturers and/or products: Von Duprin PS800 series, Precision ELR
series, Sargent 3500 series.
K. Door Closers
1. Provide door closers certified to ANSIBHMA A156.4 Grade 1 requirements by a BHMA
certified independent testing laboratory. Closers shall be ISO 9000 certified. Units shall be
stamped with date of manufacture code.
2. Door closers shall have fully hydraulic, full rack and pinion action with a high strength
cast iron cylinder and metal cover, and shall utilize full complement bearings at shaft.
Cylinder body shall be 1-1/2 inch diameter, and double heat-treated pinion shall be 11/16
inch diameter.
3. Provide hydraulic fluid requiring no seasonal closer adjustment for temperatures ranging
from 120 degrees F to -30 degrees F. Fluid shall be fireproof and shall pass the ,.
requirements of the UL l OC"positive pressure"fire test.
4. Spring power shall be continuously adjustable over the full range of closer sizes, and allow
for reduced opening force as required by accessibility codes and standards. Hydraulic
DOOR HARDWARE 0871 00- 10
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
H. Deadlocks
1. Provide mortise deadlock series conforming to ANSI A156 and function as specified.
Cylinders:Refer to 2.04 KEYING.
2. Provide deadlocks with a standard 2-3/4 inches backset. Deadbolt shall be a full 1 inch
throw, constructed of stainless steel.
r 3. Provide manufacturers standard strike.
4. Acceptable manufacturers and/or products: Schlage L400 series, Best 38H series, Sargent
4870 series.
5. Provide electro-mechanical deadlocks by KABA/MAS series X-09 and CDX-09. No
substitutions for this project will be permitted.
I. Exit Devices
1. Provide exit devices tested to ANSI/BHMA A156.3 Grade 1, and UL listed for Panic Exit
and/or Fire Exit Hardware. Cylinders: Refer to 2.04 KEYING.
2. Exit devices shall be touchpad type, fabricated of brass, bronze, stainless steel, or
aluminum, plated to the standard architectural finishes to match the balance of the door
hardware.
3. Touchpad shall extend a minimum of one half of the door width. Touch-pad finish shall be
compatible to exit device finish. Compression springs will be used in devices, latches, and
outside trims or controls,tension springs also acceptable.
4. Devices to incorporate a deadlatching feature for security and/or for future addition of
alarm kits and/or other electrical requirements.
5. Provide manufacturer's standard strikes.
6. Provide exit devices cut to door width and height. Locate exit devices at a height
recommended by the exit device manufacturer, allowable by governing building codes,
and approved by the Architect.
7. Mechanism case shall sit flush on the face of all flush doors, or spacers shall be furnished
to fill gaps behind devices. Where glass trim or molding projects off the face of the door,
provide glass bead kits.
wr 8. Non-fire-rated exit devices shall have cylinder dogging.
9. Where lever handles are specified as outside trim for exit devices, provide heavy-duty
■
lever trims with forged or cast escutcheon plates. Provide vandal-resistant levers that will
travel to a 90-degree down position when more than 35 pounds of torque are applied, and
which can easily be re-set.
a. Lever style will match the lever style of the locksets.
DOOR HARDWARE 087100-9
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
height or fraction there of. Intermediate pivots spaced equally not less than 25 inches or
not more than 35 inches on center, for doors over 121 inches high.
3. Provide appropriate model where pivot sets are specified at fire rated openings.
4. Provide mortar guard for each electric pivot specified, unless specified in hollow metal
frame specification.
5. Acceptable manufacturers and/or products: Ives,Dorma, Rixson.
E. Flush Bolts
1. Provide automatic and manual flush bolts with forged bronze face plates, extruded brass
levers, and with wrought brass guides and strikes. Provide 12 inch steel or brass rods at
doors up to 90 inches in height. Top rods at manual flush bolts for doors over 90 inches in
height shall be increased by 6 inches for each additional 6 inches of door height. Provide
dust-proof strikes at each bottom flush bolt.
2. Acceptable manufacturers and/or products: Ives,Burns, Rockwood. e
F. Cylindrical Locks -Grade 1
1. Provide cylindrical locks conforming to ANSI A156.2 Series 4000, Grade 1. Cylinders:
Refer to 2.04 KEYING.
2. Provide locks with a standard 2-3/4 inches backset, unless noted otherwise,with a 1/2 inch ■'�'
latch throw. Provide proper latch throw for UL listing at pairs.
3. Provide locksets with a separate anti-rotation throughbolts, and shall have no exposed
screws. Levers shall operate independently, and shall have two external return spring
cassettes mounted under roses to prevent lever sag.
4. Provide standard ASA strikes unless extended lip strikes are necessary to protect trim.
5. Lever trim shall be solid cast levers without plastic inserts, and wrought roses on both
sides. Locksets shall be thru-bolted to assure proper alignment.
a. Lever design shall be Schlage Athens in 626 finish
b. Lever trim on the secure side of doors serving rooms considered by the authority
having jurisdiction to be hazardous shall have a tactile warning.
6. Acceptable manufacturers and/or products: Schlage ND series, Corbin-Russwin CL3300
series, Sargent 10-Line.
G. Keypad Cipher Locks
1. Provide cipher locks manufactured by KABA MAS brand series 1000 and Weathershield
series where specified.
2.
DOOR HARDWARE 0871 00- 8
00
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
3. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units that are exposed when door is closed
except to the extent that no standard units of type specified are available with concealed
fasteners. Do not use thru-bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is
exposed in other work unless their use is the only means of reinforcing the work
adequately to fasten the hardware securely. Review door specification and advise
" Architect if thru-bolts are required.
4. Hardware shall be installed with the fasteners provided by the hardware manufacturer.
B. Continuous Hinges
1. Provide aluminum geared continuous hinges conforming to ANSI A156.25, Grade 2.
2. Provide aluminum geared continuous hinges, where specified in the hardware sets,
fabricated from 6063-T6 aluminum, with .25 inch diameter Teflon coated stainless steel
hinge pin.
3. Provide split nylon bearings at each hinge knuckle for quiet, smooth, self-lubricating
40 operation.
4. Hinges shall be capable of supporting door weights up to 450 pounds, and shall be
successfully tested for 1,500,000 cycles.
5. On fire-rated doors, provide aluminum geared continuous hinges that are classified for use
on rated doors by a testing agency acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction.
6. Provide aluminum geared continuous hinges with electrified option where specified.
Provide with sufficient number and gage of concealed wires to accommodate electric
function of specified hardware.
7. Install hinges with fasteners supplied by manufacturer. Hole pattern shall be
symmetrically patterned.
8. Acceptable manufacturers and/or products: Ives,Roton, Stanley.
C. Electric Power Transfer
1. Provide power transfer sufficient for number and gage of wires to accommodate electric
function of specified hardware.
2. Electric power transfer is to be located per manufacturer's template and UL requirements,
unless interference with operation of door or other hardware items.
3. Acceptable manufacturers and/or products: Von Duprin,Dor-O-Matic,Markar.
D. Pivot Sets
1. Provide pivot sets complete with oil-impregnated top pivot,unless indicated otherwise.
2. Where offset pivots are specified, Provide one intermediate pivot for doors less than 91
inches high and one additional intermediate pivot per leaf for each additional 30 inches in
DOOR HARDWARE 0871 00-7
A
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance
instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and ..
replacement of door hardware.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Approval of manufacturers other than those listed shall be in accordance with paragraph 1.05.A. A*"
B. Note that even though an acceptable substitute manufacturer may be listed, the product must
provide all the functions and features of the specified product or it will not be approved.
Item Scheduled Manufacturer Acceptable Substitute
Hinges Ives(IVE) Hager, McKinney
Continuous Hinges Ives IVE Roton, Stanley
Electric Power Transfer Von Du rin(VON) Dor-O-Matic,Markar
Pivots Ives(IVE) Dorma,Rixson
Flush Bolts Ives IVE Burns,Rockwood
Locksets&Deadlocks Schla e(SCH) Best, Sargent
Exit Devices Von Du rin(VON) Precision, Sargent
Power Supplies Von Du rin(VON) Precision, Sargent w
Door Closers LCN LCN Sargent
Door Trim Ives(IVE) Burns,Rockwood
Overhead Stops Glynn-Johnson(GLY) Rixson, Sargent
Stops&Holders Ives IVE Burns,Rockwood
Thresholds& Weatherstrip National Guard(NGP) Reese,Zero
Silencers Ives(IVE) Burns, Rockwood
Latch Protector Ives IVE Burns,Rockwood
Cylinders&Keying Schla e(SCH) No Substitute
C. Hand of Door: Drawings show direction of slide, swing, or hand of each door leaf. Furnish each
item of hardware for proper installation and operation of door movement as shown.
D. Where the hardware specified is not adaptable to the finished shape or size of the members wr
requiring hardware, furnish suitable types having the same operation and quality as the type
specified, subject to the Architect's approval.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Fasteners
■w
I. Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates, generally prepared for
machine screw installation.
2. Furnish screws for installation with each hardware item. Finish exposed (exposed under
any condition)screws to match hardware finish,or, if exposed in surfaces of other work,to
match finish of this other work as closely as possible including "prepared for paint"
surfaces to receive painted finish.
DOOR HARDWARE 0871 00-6
MR
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
E. Electronic Security Hardware: When electrified hardware is included in the hardware
specification, the hardware supplier must employ an individual knowledgeable in electrified
components and systems, who is capable of producing wiring diagrams and consulting as needed.
Coordinate installation of the electronic security hardware with the Architect and electrical
engineers and provide installation and technical data to the Architect and other related
subcontractors. Upon completion of electronic security hardware installation, inspect and verify
that all components are working properly.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final hardware schedule,
me and include installation instructions with each item or package.
B. Each article of hardware shall be individually packaged in manufacturer's original packaging.
C. Contractor will provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to the Project, but not yet
installed. Control handling and installation of hardware items so that completion of Work will
not be delayed by hardware losses both before and after installation.
D. Items damaged in shipment shall be replaced promptly and with proper material and paid for by
whomever did the damage or caused the damage to occur.
E. Hardware shall be handled in a manner to avoid damage, marring, or scratching. Irregularities
- that occur to the hardware after it has been delivered to the Project shall be corrected,replaced, or
repaired by the Contractor. Hardware shall be protected against malfunction due to paint,
solvent, cleanser, or any chemical agent.
F. No direct shipments will be allowed unless approved by the Contractor.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. Provide manufacturer's warrantees as specified in Division I and as follows:
1. Closers: 10 years.
2. Exit Devices: 3 years, except electrified devices, 1 year.
3. Locksets: 3 years.
4. Continuous Hinges: Lifetime warranty.
5. Other hardware: 1 year.
B. No liability is to be assumed where damage or faulty operation is due to improper installation,
improper use, or abuse.
C. Products judged to be defective during the warranty period shall be replaced or repaired in
accordance with the manufacturer's warranty,at no additional cost to the Owner.
1.08 MAINTENANCE
DOOR HARDWARE 0871 00-5
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
4. Parts list for each product.
5. Copy of final approved hardware schedule,edited to reflect"As installed."
6. Copy of final keying schedule.
7. As installed "Wiring Diagrams" for each opening connected to power, both low voltage
and 110 volts.
8. One (1) complete set of special tools required for maintenance and adjustment of
hardware, including changing of cylinders.
9. Copy of warranties including appropriate reference numbers for manufacturers to identify
the project.
I. Certificates of Compliance: Upon request of Architect or Authority Having Jurisdiction
certificates of compliance for fire-rated hardware and installation instructions shall be made
available.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Substitutions: Products are to be those specified to ensure a uniform basis of acceptable
materials. Requests for substitutions must be made in accordance with Division I requirements. w�
If proposing a substitute product, submit product data for the proposed item with product data for
the specified item and indicate basis for substitution and savings to be made. Provide sample if
requested. Certain products have been selected for their unique characteristics and particular
project suitability.
1. Items specified as "no substitute" shall be provided exactly as listed. ,.
2. Items listed with no substitute manufacturers listed have been requested by the Owner or
Architect to match existing for continuity and/or future performance and maintenance
standards or because there is no known equal product.
3. If no other products are listed in a category,then "no substitute" is implied.
B. Supplier Qualifications: A recognized architectural hardware supplier, with warehousing
facilities in the Project's vicinity, that has a record of successful in-service performance for
supplying door hardware similar in quantity, type, and quality to that indicated for this Project
and that provides a certified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) available to the Owner,
Architect,and Contractor, at reasonable times during the course of the Work for consultation.
C. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of hardware (latch and locksets, hinges, exit
devices, closers, etc.) from a single manufacturer.
D. Fire-Rated Openings: Provide door hardware for fire-rated openings that complies with NFPA
Standard No. 80 and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide only items of door
hardware that are listed and are identical to products tested by Underwrites Laboratories, Intertek
Testing Services, or other testing and inspecting organizations acceptable to the authorities
having jurisdiction for use on types and sizes of doors indicated in compliance with requirements
of fire-rated door and door frame labels.
DOOR HARDWARE 087100-4
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
4. Name and manufacturer of each item.
5. Fastenings and other pertinent information.
6. Location of each hardware set cross-referenced to indications on Drawings.
7. Explanation of all abbreviations,symbols,and codes contained in schedule.
ills 8. Mounting locations for hardware.
9. Door and frame sizes and materials.
10. Name and phone number for the local manufacturer's representative for each product.
11. Operational Description of openings with any electrified hardware (locks, exits,
4P electromagnetic locks, electric strikes, automatic operators, door position switches,
magnetic holders or closer/holder units, and/or access control components). Operational
description should include how the door will operate on egress, ingress, and/or fire/smoke
.w alarm connection.
D. Key Schedule: After a keying meeting between representatives of the Owner, Architect,
hardware supplier, and, if requested, the representative for the lock manufacturer, provide a
keying schedule listing the levels of keying, as well as an explanation of the key system's
Y� g � g P Y Y
function, the key symbols used, and the door numbers controlled. Utilize ANSI A156.28
"Recommended Practices for Keying Systems" as a guideline for nomenclature, definitions, and
approach for selecting the optimal keying system.
E. Samples: If requested by the Architect, submit production sample or sample installations as
requested of each type of exposed hardware unit in the finish indicated, and tagged with a full
description for coordination with the schedule.
1. Samples will be returned to the supplier in like-new condition. Units that are acceptable to
the Architect may, after final check of operations, be incorporated into the Work, within
limitations of key coordination requirements.
F. Templates: After final approval of the hardware schedule, provide templates for doors, frames,
and other work specified to be factory prepared for the installation of door hardware.
G. Riser and Wiring Diagrams: After final approval of the hardware schedule, submit riser and
wiring diagrams as required for the proper installation of complete electrical, electromechanical,
and electromagnetic products.
H. Operations and Maintenance Data: Provide in accordance with Division 1 and include the
following:
1. Complete information on care, maintenance, and adjustment; data on repair and
replacement parts,and information on preservation of finishes.
2. Catalog pages for each product.
on
3. Name, address,and phone number of local representative for each manufacturer.
DOOR HARDWARE 0871 00-3
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
a. NFPA 70—National Electric Code
b. NFPA 80- Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows
c. NFPA 101 -Life Safety Code
d. NFPA 105- Smoke and Draft Control Door Assemblies
2. 2006 IFC(Virginia Statewide Fire Prevention Code)
C. UL- Underwriters Laboratories
1. UL I OB-Fire Test of Door Assemblies
2. UL I OC-Positive Pressure Test of Fire Door Assemblies
3. UL 1784-Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies
4. UL 305 -Panic Hardware
D. Accessibility
1. Virginia USBC(2006 IBC)
E. DHI -Door and Hardware Institute
1. Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule
2. Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware war
F. ANSI-American National Standards Institute
1. ANSI/BHMA A156.1 - A156.29, and ANSI A156.31 - Standards for Hardware and
Specialties
1.04 SUBMITTALS se
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division l
requirements. Advise architect within the submittal package of incompatibility or issues.
B. Catalog Cuts: Product data including manufacturers'technical product data for each item of door
hardware, installation instructions, maintenance of operating parts and finish, and other
information necessary to show compliance with requirements.
C. Final Hardware Schedule Content: Submit schedule with hardware sets in vertical format as
illustrated by the Sequence of Format for the Hardware Schedule as published by the Door and
Hardware Institute. Indicate complete designations of each item required for each door or
opening, Include the following information:
w
I. Door Index; include door number, heading number, and Architects hardware set number.
2. Opening Lock Function Spreadsheet; list locking device and function for each opening.
3. Type, style, function, size, and finish of each hardware item.
DOOR HARDWARE 0871 00-2
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
SECTION 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
w
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes
1. Furnishing and installation of all mechanical and electrical finish hardware necessary for
all doors, and hardware as specified herein and as enumerated in hardware sets and as
indicated and required by actual conditions at the building. The hardware shall include the
furnishing of all necessary screws, bolts, expansion shields, drop plates, and all other
devices necessary for the proper application of the hardware.
B. Related Sections
1. Division 8 Section"Hollow Metal Doors and Frames".
2. Division 8 Section"Flush Wood Doors".
+ 3. Division 8 Section"Overhead Coiling Doors"
4. Division 8 Section"Aluminum Framed Entrances and Storefronts".
5. Division 26 Section"Electrical".
C. Specific Omissions: Hardware for the following is specified or indicated elsewhere, unless
specifically listed in the hardware sets:
1. Windows
sew
2. Cabinets of all kinds,including open wall shelving and locks.
3. Signage, except as noted.
4. Complete toilet accessories including coat hooks,unless note otherwise.
5. Overhead doors,unless noted otherwise.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. Applicable state and local building codes and standards.
B. FIRE/LIFE SAFETY
1. NFPA -National Fire Protection Association
DOOR HARDWARE 0871 00- 1
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
.► Northampton,MA
B. Clean aluminum surfaces immediately after installing windows. Avoid damaging protective
coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants,glazing materials, dirt, and other substances.
C. Clean factory-glazed glass immediately after installing windows. Comply with manufacturer's
written recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Remove nonpermanent labels,
and clean surfaces.
D. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during
construction period.
E. Protect window surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from
construction operations. In addition, monitor window surfaces adjacent to and below exterior
concrete and masonry surfaces during construction for presence of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits,
stains, or other contaminants. If contaminating substances do contact window surfaces, remove
contaminants immediately according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
END OF SECTION 085113
w
w.
ALUMINUM WINDOWS 085113 -9
w
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA am
2.9 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Source Quality: Provide aluminum windows specified herein from a single source.
1. Building Enclosure System: When aluminum windows is part of a building enclosure
system, curtain wall system and related products, provide building enclosure system
products from a single source manufacturer.
B. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate aluminum windows in accordance with framing
manufacturer's prescribed tolerances.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
w►
A. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions, with Installer
present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance of work. Verify rough opening dimensions, levelness of sill plate, and
operational clearances. Examine wall flashings, vapor retarders, water and weather barriers,
and other built-in components to ensure a coordinated, weathertight window installation.
I. Metal Surfaces: Dry; clean; free of grease, oil, dirt, rust, corrosion, and welding slag;
without sharp edges or offsets at joints.
2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with Drawings, Shop Drawings, and manufacturer's written instructions for installing
windows,hardware, accessories, and other components.
B. Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal
movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall
flashing and other adjacent construction.
C. Set sill members in bed of sealant or with gaskets, as indicated, for weathertight construction. ..
D. Install windows and components to drain condensation, water penetrating joints, and moisture
migrating within windows to the exterior.
E. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic
action at points of contact with other materials.
F. Connect automatic operators to building electrical system.
3.3 ADJUSTING, CLEANING,AND PROTECTION .�
A. Adjust operating sashes and ventilators, screens, hardware, and accessories for a tight fit at
contact points and weather stripping for smooth operation and weathertight closure. Lubricate
hardware and moving parts.
ALUMINUM WINDOWS 085113 - 8
ON
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
*e Northampton,MA
B. Framing system gaskets, sealants, and joint fillers as recommended by manufacturer for joint
aw type.
C. Sealants and joint fillers for joints at perimeter of window system as specified in Division 7
Section "Joint Sealants".
D. Perimeter Anchors: When steel anchors are used, provide insulation between steel material and
aluminum material to prevent galvanic action.
E. Glazing: Factory glazing as required and specified in Division 8 Section"Glazing".
F. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12
requirements, except containing no asbestos, formulated for 30-mil (0.762-mm) thickness per
coat.
on
2.6 COMPONENTS
A. The frame depth shall be not less than 4" (102).
B. All frame members shall have minimum wall thickness of 0.070" and shall provide the
structural strength sufficient to meet the specified performance requirements.
C. Glazing beads shall be extruded aluminum and shall be a minimum thickness of 0.060".
D. Reference to tolerances for wall thickness and other cross-sectional dimensions of window
members are nominal and in compliance with AA Aluminum Standards and Data.
E. All references to dimensions for wall thicknesses and other cross-sectional dimensions of
window members are nominal and in compliance with ANSI H35.2-1990.
F. All frame members shall be tubular.
2.7 FABRICATION
on A. General: Fabricate components per manufacturer's installation instructions. When assembled,
components shall be accurately fitted to produce hairline joints.
1. Window Frame Joinery:Mitered and Mechanically clipped and/or staked.
2. Factory sealed frame and corner joints.
2.8 FINISHES
A. Factory Finishing:
1. Kawneer Permanodic® AA-M12C22A4I, AAMA 611, Architectural Class I Clear
Anodic Coating (Color 414 Clear). Color shall match coating and color on Aluminum
Glazed Curtain Walls and Aluminum Storefronts.
ALUMINUM WINDOWS 085113 -7
am
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA ••
2.2 MATERIALS
go
A. Aluminum (Windows and Components): Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for
type of use and finish indicated, complying with the requirements of standards indicated below.
1. Extruded Material Standard:ASTM B 221, 6063-T6 alloy and temper.
B. Steel Reinforcement: Complying with ASTM A 36/ A 36M for structural shapes, plates and
bars; ASTM A 611 for cold-rolled sheet and strip or ASTM A 570/A 570M for hot-rolled sheet
and strip.
C. Glazing Gaskets: Dry glazing gaskets shall be an extruded EPDM in accordance with ASTM
C864.
D. Glazing Sealant: Wet glazing material shall be a 100 percent silicone, neutral-cure sealant in
accordance with AAMA 805.2-94, Group A.
E. Fasteners: Where exposed, shall be 300 Series Stainless Steel.
F. Thermal Barrier: The thermal barrier shall be Kawneer ISOWEB® consisting of two parallel
glass fiber-reinforced nylon strips installed continuously and mechanically bonded to the
aluminum.
2.3 HARDWARE
A. Typical Hardware:
1. Locking
a. Cast White Bronze Cam Locks(Standard)
2. Hinging
a. 4-Bar Hinges(Standard)
2.4 INSECT SCREENS ++�
A. General: Design windows and hardware to accommodate screens in a tight-fitting, removable
arrangement, with a minimum of exposed fasteners and latches. Fabricate insect screens to
fully integrate with window frame. Locate screens on inside of window and provide for each
operable exterior sash or ventilator.
1. Extruded aluminum frames, 6063-T6 alloy and temper, joined at corners; 18 x 16
fiberglass screen mesh; frames finished to match aluminum windows; splines shall be w
extruded vinyl,removable to permit rescreening.
2. Provide operable screen section as needed to allow for window operation.
go
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Spacers, Setting Blocks, Gaskets, and Bond Breakers: Manufacturer's standard permanent,non-
migrating types in hardness recommended by manufacturer, compatible with sealants, and
suitable for system performance requirements.
.0
.N
ALUMINUM WINDOWS 085113 -6
wo
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
D. Fenestration Standard: Comply with AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, "North American
Fenestration Standard Voluntary Performance Specification for Windows, Skylights and Glass
Doors," for definitions and minimum standards of performance, materials, components,
accessories, and fabrication. Comply with more stringent requirements if indicated.
ow
1. Provide AAMA-certified aluminum windows with an attached label.
E. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass manufacturers and
40 with GANA's "Glazing Manual" unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."
1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify aluminum window openings by field measurements before
fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying
the Work,establish opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating aluminum windows
without field measurements. Coordinate wall construction to ensure that actual opening
" dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Project Warranty: Refer to"Conditions of the Contract" for project warranty provisions.
on B. Manufacturer's Product Warranty: Submit, for Owner's acceptance, manufacturer's warranty for
window system as follows:
I. Warranty Period: Two (2) years from Date of Substantial Completion of the project
provided however that the Limited Warranty shall begin in no event later than six months
from date of shipment by manufacturer..
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 BASIS OF DESIGN
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Kawneer Company, Inc.
1. Address: Kawneer Company, Inc. 555 Guthridge Court, Technology Park/Atlanta,
Norcross, GA 30092 Telephone: 770 449 5555 Fax: 770 734 1560
B. Series: 5500 ISOWEB®Thermal Window System
1. Window Member Profile: 4" (102)nominal dimension.
C. Series: 5500 ISOWEB®Thermal Window System in Casement Configuration
OR
ALUMINUM WINDOWS 085113 -5
OR
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA w
8. Window System Operators: Show locations,mounting, and details for installing operator
components and controls.
9. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis
data prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional engineer detailing
fabrication and assembly of aluminum windows and used to determine the following:
.w
a. Structural test pressures and design pressures from wind loads indicated.
b. Deflection limitations of glass framing systems.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes. •*
D. Samples for Verification: For aluminum windows and components required, prepared on
Samples of size indicated below.
1. Window Corner Fabrication: 12-by-12-inch- (300-by-300-nisi-) long, full-size window
corner including full-size sections of extrusions with factory-applied color finish, weather
stripping,and glazing.
E. Product Schedule: For aluminum windows. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
F. Qualification Data: For Installer.
G. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed within the last
four years by a qualified testing agency for each type, class, grade, and size of aluminum
window. Test results based on use of downsized test units will not be accepted.
H. Maintenance Data: For operable window sash, operating hardware, weather stripping, and
finishes to include in maintenance manuals. w.
1. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
w.
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An installer acceptable to aluminum window manufacturer for
installation of units required for this Project.
1. Installer's responsibilities include providing professional engineering services needed to
assume engineering responsibility.
2. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for aluminum windows, including Shop
Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in
assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer capable of fabricating aluminum windows that
meet or exceed performance requirements indicated and of documenting this performance by
inclusion in lists and by labels,test reports,and calculations.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain aluminum windows through one source from a single manufacturer.
I. IT IS THE INTENT OF THE PROJECT TO HAVE THE ALUMINUM
WINDOWS, GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS SPECIFIED IN
SECTION 08 44 13 AND ALUMINUM STOREFRONTS SPECIFIED IN
SECTION 08 44 13 TO BE PROVIDED FROM THE SAME MANUFACTURER.
ALUMINUM WINDOWS 085113 -4
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
+s Northampton,MA
H. Forced Entry Resistance: All windows shall conform to AAMA 1302.5.
I. Thermal Barrier Test: Thermal break shall be designed in accordance with AAMA TIR-A8 and
tested in accordance with AAMA 505.
e�
1.7 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS CASEMENT WINDOWS
A. Casement Window Performance Requirements:
1. Air Infiltration: The test specimen shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E283 at a
minimum vent size of 32"x 60". Air infiltration rate shall not exceed 0.30 cfm/sf at a
static air pressure differential of 6.24 psf.
2. Water Resistance: The test specimen shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E547 and
ASTM E331 at a minimum vent size of 32" x 60". There shall be no leakage as defined
in the test method at a static air pressure differential of 12 psf.
3. Uniform Load Deflection: A minimum static air pressure difference of 60 psf shall be
applied in the positive and negative direction in accordance with ASTM E330. The unit
shall be evaluated after each load.
ew 4. Uniform Load Structural Test: A minimum static air pressure difference of 90 psf shall be
applied in the positive and negative direction in accordance with ASTM E330. The unit
shall be evaluated after each load.
5. Component Testing: Window components shall be tested in accordance with procedures
described in AAMA 101/I.S.2-97.
6. Thermal Transmittance Test (U-Value): When tested in accordance with AAMA 1503,
the conductive thermal transmittance(U-Value)shall not be more than
a. Outswing Casement:U-Value not more than.58 BTU/hr/sf/°F
7. Condensation Resistance Test (CRF): When tested in accordance with AAMA 1503, the
condensation resistance factor(CRF)shall not be less than:
„ a. Outswing Casement: CRF not less than 56
8. Forced Entry Resistance: All windows shall conform to AAMA 1302.5.
9. Thermal Barrier Tests: Thermal break shall be designed in accordance with AAMA TIR-
A8 and tested in accordance with AAMA 505.
ur 1.8 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, fabrication methods,
dimensions of individual components and profiles, hardware, finishes, and operating
instructions for each type of aluminum window indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware, attachments to other
! ” work,operational clearances,installation details,and the following:
1. Mullion details, including reinforcement and stiffeners.
2. Joinery details.
u, 3. Expansion provisions.
4. Flashing and drainage details.
5. Weather-stripping details.
6. Thermal-break details.
7. Glazing details.
ALUMINUM WINDOWS 085113 -3
w
am
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA on
1. All test unit sizes and configurations shall conform to the minimum size in accordance
with AAMA /WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440-05 for the designation F-AW80 and ..
CAN/CSA-A440-00 Windows.
2. Units submitted for laboratory testing shall be units of the manufacturer's standard
construction, glazed and assembled in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications
and AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/1.S.2/A440-05 and CAN/CSA-A440-00 Windows.
1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS GENERAL �+!
A. General: Provide aluminum windows capable of complying with performance requirements
indicated, based on testing manufacturer's windows that are representative of those specified,
and that are of minimum test size indicated below:
B. Structural Loads:
1. Wind Loads:
a. Low Building : 25 psf.
b. Low Building Doors near corners: 30.5 psf.
1.6 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS FIXED WINDOWS
A. Air Infiltration: The test specimen shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E283 at a minimum
size of 60" x 90" (1524 x 2286). Air infiltration rate shall not exceed 0.10 cfm/ft2 at a static air
pressure differential of 6.24 psf(300 Pa). The test specimen shall meet the Fixed rating of less
than 0.25 (m3/h)/m at 300Pa when tested in accordance with CAN/CSA-A440-00 Windows.
B. Water Resistance: The test specimen shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E547 and ASTM
E331 at a minimum size of 60" x 90" (1524 x 2286). There shall be no leakage as defined in the
test method at a static air pressure differential of 10 psf(500 Pa). The test specimen shall meet
the B5 rating with no water leakage at 500 Pa when tested in accordance with CAN/CSA-A440-
00 Windows.
C. Uniform Load Deflection: A minimum static air pressure difference of 80 psf(3840 Pa)shall be
applied in the positive and negative direction in accordance with ASTM E330. There shall be no
deflection in excess of L/175 of the span of any framing member. The test specimen shall meet *�
the C5 rating when tested in accordance with CAN/CSA-A440-00 Windows.
D. Uniform Load Structural: A minimum static air pressure difference of 60 psf(2874 Pa) shall be
applied in the positive and negative direction in accordance with ASTM E330. The unit shall be
evaluated after each load.
E. Component Testing: Window components shall be tested in accordance with procedures
described in AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440-05.
F. Thermal Transmittance (U-factor): When tested to AAMA Specification 1503, the thermal ,
transmittance(U-factor)shall not be more than .34 BTU/hr/ft2/°F.
G. Condensation Resistance (CRF): When tested to AAMA Specification 1503 and CAN/CSA-
A440,the condensation resistance factor(CFR)shall not be less than 74(72 I-Frame).
ALUMINUM WINDOWS 085113 -2
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
!* Northampton,MA
SECTION 085113 -ALUMINUM WINDOWS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes fixed, operable aluminum-framed windows for exterior locations in single
and multiple configurations.
ww B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 08 Section "Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts" for coordinating
finish among aluminum fenestration units.
2. Division 08 Section "Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls" for incorporating aluminum
windows into glazed curtain walls and for coordinating finish among aluminum
fenestration units.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Performance class designations according to AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS:
1. AW: Architectural.
2. HC; HEAVY COMMERICAL
B. Structural Test Pressure: For uniform load structural test, is equivalent to 150 percent of the
design pressure.
C. Minimum Test Size: Smallest size permitted for performance class (gateway test size).
Products must be tested at minimum test size or at a size larger than minimum test size to
comply with requirements for performance class.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
aes
A. General: Commercial Grade Architectural Aluminum Windows, including glass and glazing,
metal panels, perimeter trims, sills and stools, window installation hardware and accessories,
shims and anchors,and perimeter sealing of window units.
1. Provide Aluminum Windows in accordance with AAMA /WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440-
05 Standard/Specification for Windows, Doors, and Unit Skylights for a Class and Grade
of F-AW80 and in accordance with CAN/CSA-A440-00 Windows.
B. Test Units:
ALUMINUM WINDOWS 085113 - 1
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA •
B. Metal Protection: w
1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by
painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape or installing
nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.
2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting
contact surfaces with bituminous paint.
C. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing * +
members, and moisture migrating within glazed aluminum curtain wall to exterior.
D. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades. ,
E. Install operable units level and plumb, securely anchored, and without distortion. Adjust
weather-stripping contact and hardware movement to produce proper operation.
F. Install glazing as specified in Division 08 Section "Glazing."
3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Erection Tolerances: Install glazed aluminum curtain walls to comply with the following
.■
maximum tolerances:
1. Plumb: 1/8 inch in 10 feet(3.2 inns in 3 m); 1/4 inch in 40 feet(6 nim in 12 Ill).
2. Level: 118 inch in 20 feet(3.2 inm in 6 m); 1/4 inch in 40 feet(6 mm in 12 171).
3. Alignment:
a. Where surfaces abut in line or are separated by reveal or protruding element up to
1/2 inch(12.7 mm)wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch(1.6 mm).
b. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element from 1/2 to 1 inch
(12.7 to 25.4 mm)wide,limit offset from true alignment to 1/8 inch(3.2 mm).
C. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element of 1 inch (25.4 mm)
wide or more, limit offset from true alignment to 1/4 inch(6 mm).
4. Location: Limit variation from plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3.2 mm in 3.7 m); 1/2 inch
(12.7 mm)over total length.
me
3.4 SHEET METAL TRIM INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Articles in Section 08 41 13 Aluminum Entrances and Storefront.
END OF SECTION 084413
w,.
GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 084413 - 8
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
+!! Northampton,MA
2.8 FINISHES
A. Factory Finishing:
1. Kawneer Permanodic® AA-M12C22A41, AAMA 611, Architectural Class I Clear
Anodic Coating (Color 414 Clear). Color shall match coating and color on Aluminum
Entrances and Storefronts and Aluminum Windows.
2.9 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Source Quality:Provide glazed aluminum curtainwalls specified herein from a single source.
1. Building Enclosure System: When glazed aluminum curtainwalls is part of a building
enclosure system, windows, storefront and related products, provide building enclosure
system products from a single source manufacturer.
B. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate glazed aluminum curtainwalls in accordance with framing
manufacturer's prescribed tolerances.
2.10 SHEET METAL TRIM
A. Refer to Articles in Section 08 41 13 Aluminum Entrances and Storefront.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Do not install damaged components.
3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.
4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints.
5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic
deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints.
6. Weld components in concealed locations to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish.
Protect glazing surfaces from welding.
7. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.
GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 084413 -7
00
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
Northampton,MA ■•
2.4 INSULATED SPANDREL PANELS
no
A. Insulated Spandrel Panels: Laminated, metal-faced flat panels with no deviations in plane
exceeding 0.8 percent of panel dimension in width or length.
1. Overall Panel Thickness: 2 inches(50.8 min). so
2. Exterior Skin: Aluminum.
a. Thickness: Manufacturer's standard for finish and texture indicated.
b. Finish: Matching framing system. �+
C. Texture: Smooth.
d. Backing Sheet: 1/8-inch-(3.2-mm-)thick,tempered hardboard.
3. Interior Skin: Aluminum
a. Thickness: Manufacturer's standard for finish and texture indicated.
b. Finish: Low-gloss,white baked enamel or manufacturer's standard.
C. Texture: Smooth.
d. Backing Sheet: Manufacturer's standard
4. Thermal Insulation Core: Manufacturer's standard.
w�
2.5 OPERABLE UNITS
A. Venting Windows: Comply with Division 08 Section "Aluminum Windows."
B. Doors: Comply with Division 08 Section "Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts."
2.6 SUN CONTROL DEVICE
A. 1600 Sunshade:Aluminum sunshade(consisting of outriggers, louvers, and fascia.
1. Outrigger: Wedge
2. Louver: Circular
3. Fascia: Angular
B. Anchorage: Outriggers shall be mechanically attached to connections specified in Section
055000.
C. Finishes:
1. Outriggers shall be painted. Color to be custom color provided by the architect.
2. Louvers and Fascia shall be anodized to match curtain wall finish.
2.7 FABRICATION
A. General:
1. Fabricate components per manufacturer's installation instructions and with minimum
clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of assembly, yet enabling installation and
dynamic movement of perimeter seal.
2. Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints flush,hairline and weatherproof.
3. Prepare components to receive anchor devices.Fabricate anchors.
4. Arrange fasteners and attachments to conceal from view.
GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 084413 -6
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of structural supports for glazed aluminum curtain
walls by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
w•
1.7 WARRANTY
w A. Project Warranty: Refer to"Conditions of the Contract"for project warranty provisions.
B. Manufacturer's Product Warranty: Submit, for Owner's acceptance, manufacturer's warranty
for curtain wall system as follows:
1. Warranty Period: Two (2) years from Date of Substantial Completion of the project
provided however that the Limited Warranty shall begin in no event later than six months
from date of shipment by Manfacturer.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 BASIS OF DESIGN
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Kawneer Company, Inc.
1. Address: Kawneer Company, Inc. 555 Guthridge Court, Technology Park/Atlanta,
Norcross, GA 30092 Telephone: 770 449 5555 Fax: 770 734 1560
B. Series: 1600 Wall System"
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum(Curtain Wall and Components):
1. Material Standard: Extruded Aluminum,ASTM B 221, 6063-T6 alloy and temper.
2. Member Wall Thickness: Each framing member shall have a wall thickness sufficient to
meet the specified structural requirements.
3. Tolerances: Reference to tolerances for wall thickness and other cross-sectional
dimensions of curtain wall members are nominal and in compliance with AA Aluminum
Standards and Data.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners: Where exposed, shall be Stainless Steel.
B. Gaskets: Glazing gaskets shall comply with ASTM C 864 and be extruded of a silicone
compatible EPDM rubber that provides for silicone adhesion.
C. Perimeter Anchors: Aluminum. When steel anchors are used, provide insulation between steel
material and aluminum material to prevent galvanic action.
D. Thermal Barrier: Thermal separator shall be extruded of a silicone compatible elastomer that
provides for silicone adhesion.
GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 084413 -5
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA w
O. Maintenance Data: For glazed aluminum curtain walls to include in maintenance manuals.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer capable of fabricating glazed aluminum curtain .�
walls that meet or exceed energy performance requirements indicated and of documenting this
performance by certification, labeling, and inclusion in lists.
..r
B. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved
for installation of units required for this Project.
C. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for
aesthetic effects and performance characteristics of assemblies. Aesthetic effects are indicated
by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they
relate to sightlines,to one another, and to adjoining construction.
D. Source Limitations for Aluminum Curtainwall Systems: Obtain from single source from single
manufacturer.
1. IT IS THE INTENT OF THE PROJECT TO HAVE THE GLAZED ALUMINUM
CURTAIN WALLS , ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONT SYSTEM, SPECIFIED
IN SECTION 08 41 13 AND ALUMINUM WINDOWS SPECIFIED IN SECTION 05
5113 TO BE PROVIDED FROM THE SAME MANUFACTURER.
E. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1. AWS Dl.l/DI.1M, "Structural Welding Code- Steel."
2. AWS D1.2/Dl.2M, "Structural Welding Code-Aluminum."
F. Energy Performance Standards: Comply with NFRC for minimum standards of energy
performance, materials, components, accessories, and fabrication. Comply with more stringent
requirements if indicated.
1. Provide NFRC-certified glazed aluminum curtain walls with an attached label.
G. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.
1. Build mockup of typical wall area as shown on Drawings.
2. Field testing shall be performed on mockups according to requirements in "Field Quality
Control" Article.
3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations
in writing.
4. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
H. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site..
GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 084413 -4
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
d. Glazing.
e. Flashing and drainage.
D. Shop Drawings (Formed Metal trim): Show fabrication and installation layouts of sheet metal
flashing and trim, including plans, elevations, expansion joint locations, and keyed details.
Distinguish between shop-and field-assembled work. Include the following:
1. Identification of material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and location in
Proj ect.
2. Details for forming sheet metal flashing and trim, including profiles, shapes, seams, and
dimensions.
3. Details for joining, supporting, and securing sheet metal flashing and trim, including
layout of fasteners, cleats,clips, and other attachments. Include pattern of seams.
4. Details of termination points and assemblies, including fixed points.
E. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.
F. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard
sizes.
G. Fabrication Sample: Of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of assemblies, made from 12-
inch(300-rnni)lengths of full-size components and showing details of the following:
1. Joinery, including concealed welds.
2. Anchorage.
3. Expansion provisions.
4. Glazing.
4* 5. Flashing and drainage.
H. Samples for Initial Selection (Formed MetaL): For each type of sheet metal flashing, trim, and
accessory indicated with factory-applied color finishes involving color selection.
I. Samples for Verification (Formed Metal): For each type of exposed finish required, prepared
on Samples of size indicated below:
1. Trimand Miscellaneous Fabrications: 12 inches (300 znnz) long and in required profile.
Include fasteners and other exposed accessories.
J. Delegated-Design Submittal: For glazed aluminum curtain walls indicated to comply with
performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the
qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
K. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For glazed aluminum curtain walls, accessories, and
components,from manufacturer.
OR L. Welding certificates.
M. Energy Performance Certificates: For glazed aluminum curtain walls, accessories, and
components, from manufacturer.
N. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
preconstruction testing agency, for glazed aluminum curtain walls, indicating compliance with
performance requirements.
GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 084413 -3
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
Northampton,MA ,■,
E. Water Resistance, (static): The test specimen shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 331.
There shall be no leakage at a static air pressure differential of 12 psf(575 Pa) as defined in
AAMA 501.
F. Water Resistance, (dynamic): The test specimen shall be tested in accordance with AAMA
501.1. There shall be no leakage at an air pressure differential of 12 psf(575 Pa) as defined in
AAMA 501.
G. Uniform Load: A static air design load of 40 psf(1915 Pa) shall be applied in the positive and *�
negative direction in accordance with ASTM E 330. There shall be no deflection in excess of
L/175 of the span of any framing member at design load. At structural test load equal to 1.5
times the specified design load, no glass breakage or permanent set in the framing members in
excess of 0.2%of their clear spans shall occur.
H. Seismic: When tested to AAMA 501.4, system must meet design displacement of 0.010 x the
story height and ultimate displacement of 1.5 x the design displacement.
I. Thermal Transmittance (U-factor): When tested to AAMA Specification 1503, the thermal
transmittance(U-factor)shall not be more than: 0.66 (clear)BTU/hr/ft2/°F.per AAMA 50. .A
J. Condensation Resistance (CRF): When tested to AAMA Specification 1503, the condensation
resistance factor shall not be less than 66frame and 60glass(clear),
.w
K. Sound Transmission Loss: When tested to ASTM E90 and ASTM E1425, the Sound
Transmission Class (STC) and Outdoor/Indoor Transmission Class (OITC) shall not be less
than:
1. STC 31 or OITC 26 based upon 1" insulating glass(1/4", 1/2"AS, 1/411),
2. STC 37 or OITC 30 based upon 1" laminated glass (1/4" laminated, 1/2" AS, 1/4"
laminated).
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles,and finishes.
B. LEED Submittal:
1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For glazing sealants used inside of the weatherproofing
system, including printed statement of VOC content.
C. Shop Drawings: For glazed aluminum curtain walls. Include plans, elevations, sections, full-
size details, and attachments to other work. wA
1. Include details of provisions for assembly expansion and contraction and for draining
moisture occurring within the assembly to the exterior. �.
2. Include full-size isometric details of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of glazed
aluminum curtain walls, showing the following:
a. Joinery, including concealed welds.
b. Anchorage.
C. Expansion provisions.
GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 084413 -2
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
Northampton,MA
SECTION 084413 -GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
uA
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes conventionally glazed aluminum curtain wall assemblies including operable
entrances.
B. Work of this section also include
on 1. Formed aluminum trim with matching finish.
2. Insulated metal panel installed integrally with Curtainwall.
3. Sun Control Device
C. Related Sections:
1. Division 05 Section Metal Fabrications for custom stainless steel supports for sun control
device.
2. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for installation of joint sealants installed with glazed
aluminum curtain walls and for sealants to the extent not specified in this Section.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as determined by
testing of manufacturer's standard glazed aluminum curtain walls representing those indicated
for this Project without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other
defects in construction.
B. Delegated Design: Design glazed aluminum curtain walls, including comprehensive
! engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and
design criteria indicated.
C. Structural Loads:
1. Wind Loads:
a. Low Building : 25 psf.
b. Low Building Doors near corners: 30.5 psf.
D. Air Infiltration: The test specimen shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 283. Air
infiltration rate shall not exceed 0.06 cfm/ft2 (0.3 I/s • m2)at a static air pressure differential of
s 6.24 psf(300 Pa).
GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 084413 - 1
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA ,
E. Install joint sealants as specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjust all-glass entrance doors and hardware to produce smooth operation and tight fit at
contact points and weather stripping.
1. For all-glass entrance doors accessible to people with disabilities, adjust closers to
provide a 3-second closer sweep period for doors to move from a 70-degree open position
to 3 inches(%5, min)from the latch measured to the leading door edge.
B. Remove excess sealant and glazing compounds and dirt from surfaces.
END OF SECTION 084126
.x
ALL-GLASS ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084126-4
on
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
• Northampton,MA
2.3 METAL COMPONENTS
A. Fitting Configuration:
1. All-Glass Storefronts: Continuous rail fitting at top and bottom.
2. Material: Aluminum.
3. Height:
a. Top Rail: As indicated.
b. Bottom Rail: As indicated.
4. Profile: As indicated.
5. End Caps: Manufacturer's standard precision-fit end caps for rail fittings.
B. Anchors and Fastenings: Concealed.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Provide holes and cutouts in glass to receive hardware, fittings, and accessory fittings before
tempering glass. Do not cut,drill,or make other alterations to glass after tempering.
1. Fully temper glass using horizontal (roller-hearth) process, and fabricate so that when
glass is installed,roll-wave distortion is parallel with bottom edge of door or lite.
B. Factory assemble components and factory install hardware and fittings to greatest extent
possible.
2.5 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41,Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker.
4M
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install all-glass systems and associated components according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
B. Set units level,plumb, and true to line,with uniform joints.
C. Maintain uniform clearances between adjacent components.
D. Lubricate hardware and other moving parts according to manufacturer's written instructions.
ALL-GLASS ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084126 -3
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA .w
E. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
F. Maintenance Data: For all-glass systems to include in maintenance manuals.
G. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
.A
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved
for installation of units required for this Project.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain all-glass systems from single source from single manufacturer.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with
all-glass systems by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop
Drawings.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following:
1. Blumcraft of Pittsburgh.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated surfaces), Type I
(transparent), tested for surface and edge compression per ASTM C 1048 and for impact
strength per 16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials.
1. Class 1: Clear monolithic.
a. Thickness: 1'2 inch (l3 nim).
b. Locations: As indicated.
2. Exposed Edges: Machine ground and flat polished.
3. Butt Edges: Flat ground.
4. Corner Edges: Lap joint corners with exposed edges polished.
.w.
B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221:x-1), with strength and durability
characteristics of not less than Alloy 6063-T5.
1. Stainless-Steel Cladding: ASTM A 666, Type 304. ..
ALL-GLASS ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084126-2
INN
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
SECTION 084126-ALL-GLASS ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Interior all-glass storefronts.
B. Related Sections:
I. Division 05 Section"Metal Fabrications" for overhead-steel support for all-glass systems.
2. Division 08 Section "Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts" for storefront
entrance doors.
3. Division 08 Section"Glazing" for general glass requirements.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. ADA/ABA Accessibility Guidelines: U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance
Board's "Americans with Disability Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act (ABA)
Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities."
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for all-glass
system.
? B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details,including the following:
1. Plans,elevations,and sections.
2. Details of fittings and glazing,including isometric drawings of rail fittings.
3. Door hardware locations,mounting heights, and installation requirements.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of exposed finish indicated.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required,prepared on Samples of size
indicated below.
1. Metal Finishes: 6-inch- (150-min-) long sections of rail fittings, accessory fittings, and
other items.
ALL-GLASS ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084126- 1
go
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA .0
2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight
performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating w
sheet metal.
3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches (300 mm) apart. Anchor each cleat with two
fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners.
4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and
tool marks.
5. Install sealant tape where indicated.
6. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted.
7. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.
B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates,
protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other
permanent separation as recommended by SMACNA.
END OF SECTION 08 41 13
ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 0841 13 - 10
om
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
go Northampton,MA
2. Do not install damaged components.
0„ 3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.
4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints.
5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic
deterioration.
w 6. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.
B. Metal Protection:
1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by
painting contact surfaces with primer or applying sealant or tape, or by installing
nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.
2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting
contact surfaces with bituminous paint.
C. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing
members,and moisture migrating within the system to exterior.
D. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Division 07 Section
"Joint Sealants"to produce weathertight installation.
E. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades, and without
warp or rack.
F. Install glazing as specified in Division 08 Section"Glazing."
G. Install perimeter joint sealants as specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" to produce
weathertight installation.
3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES STOREFRONT
A. Install aluminum-framed systems to comply with the following maximum erection tolerances:
" 1. Location and Plane: Limit variation from true location and plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet(3
mm in 3.7 m); 1/4 inch(6 mm)over total length.
2. Alignment:
a. Where surfaces abut in line, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch(1.5 mm).
b. Where surfaces meet at corners, limit offset from true alignment to 1/32 inch (0.8
mm).
B. Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurements to 1/8 inch(3 111m).
3.4 INSTALLATION FORMED METAL,GENERAL
A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in
place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, welding
rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to
complete sheet metal flashing and trim system.
1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform,
neat seams with minimum exposure of solder,welds,and sealant.
ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 0841 13 -9
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA ..�
2.8 SHEET METAL FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in w
SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, geometry,
metal thickness, and other characteristics of item indicated. Fabricate items at the shop to
greatest extent possible.
1. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with
performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal.
2. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication.
3. Form sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool
marks and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form
hems.
4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not
allowed on faces exposed to view.
B. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to
a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 inm in 6 in) on slope and location lines as indicated and
within 1/8-inch(3-inni)offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.
C. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric
sealant.
D. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used, form expansion
joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 nim) deep, filled with butyl
sealant concealed within joints.
w�
E. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of sizes as recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural
Sheet Metal Manual" and by FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for application, but not
less than thickness of metal being secured.
F. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal
with epoxy seam sealer.
G. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.
w�
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION STOREFRONT
A. General: ...
1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 0841 13 - 8
w
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
00 Northampton,MA
2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
me A. Source Quality:Provide aluminum storefront specified herein from a single source.
1. Building Enclosure System: When aluminum storefront is part of a building enclosure
system, windows, curtain wall system and related products, provide building enclosure
system products from a single source manufacturer.
B. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate aluminum storefront in accordance with framing
manufacturer's prescribed tolerances.
2.7 SHEET METAL TRIM
A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a
strippable,temporary protective film before shipping.
B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy as standard with manufacturer for
finish required,with temper as required to suit forming operations and performance required.
1. Exposed Coil-Coated Finishes: Kawneer Permanodic® AA-M12C22A41, AAMA 611,
Architectural Class I Clear Anodic Coating (Color 414 Clear) Color shall match coating
and color on Aluminum Glazed Curtain Walls and Aluminum Windows.
2. Fasteners: Self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners
" designed to withstand design loads and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet
metal.
3. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed,with hex-washer head.
a. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for
metal being fastened.
4. Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel.
C. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant
tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining
tape 1/2 inch (13 mm)wide and 1/8 iizch(3 nim)thick.
w
D. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric silicone polymer sealant; low modulus; of
type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim
and remain watertight.
E. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant;
polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited
movement.
F. Epoxy Seam Sealer: Two-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam-cementing compound,
recommended by aluminum manufacturer for exterior nonmoving joints, including riveted
joints.
G. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 0841 13-7
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA ■w
1. Door Construction: Extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically
fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or
that incorporate concealed tie rods.
2. Door Design: As indicated.
3. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Square. snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed
.�
gaskets.
B. Entrance Door Hardware: As specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware" except for the
following which will be provided by the Door Manufacturer:
1. Continuous-Gear Hinges: Manufacturer's standard with stainless-steel bearings between
knuckles, fabricated to full height of door and frame.
2. Weather Stripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable components.
a. Compression Type: Made of ASTM D 2000, molded neoprene, or ASTM D 2287,
molded PVC.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners: Where exposed, shall be Stainless Steel.
B. Gaskets: Glazing gaskets shall be extruded EPDM rubber.
C. Perimeter Anchors: Aluminum. When steel anchors are used, provide insulation between steel
material and aluminum material to prevent galvanic action.
D. Thermal Barrier(Trifab®VG 451T):
1. Kawneer IsoLock® Thermal Break with a 1/4" (6.4) separation consisting of a two-part
chemically curing, high-density polyurethane, which is mechanically and adhesively
joined to aluminum storefront sections.
a. Thermal Break shall be designed in accordance with AAMA TIR-A8 and tested in
accordance with AAMA 505.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. General:
1. Fabricate components per manufacturer's installation instructions and with minimum
clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of assembly, yet enabling installation and
dynamic movement of perimeter seal.
2. Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints flush,hairline and weatherproof. ..
3. Prepare components to receive anchor devices. Fabricate anchors.
4. Arrange fasteners and attachments to conceal from view.
.w.
2.5 FINISHES
A. Factory Finishing:
1. Kawneer Permanodic® AA-M12C22A4], AAMA 611, Architectural Class I Clear
Anodic Coating (Color #14 Clear) Color shall match coating and color on Aluminum
Glazed Curtain Walls and Aluminum Windows.
ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 0841 13 -6
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
+ Northampton,MA
C. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions.
Handle storefront material and components to avoid damage. Protect storefront material against
damage from elements, construction activities, and other hazards before, during and after
storefront installation.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Project Warranty: Refer to"Conditions of the Contract" for project warranty provisions.
B. Manufacturer's Product Warranty: Submit, for Owner's acceptance, manufacturer's warranty for
storefront system as follows:
1. Warranty Period: Two (2) years from Date of Substantial Completion of the project
provided however that the Limited Warranty shall begin in no event later than six months
from date of shipment by manufacturer.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 BASIS OF DESIGN
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Kawneer Company, Inc.
1. Address: Kawneer Company, Inc. 555 Guthridge Court, Technology Park/Atlanta,
Norcross, GA 30092 Telephone: 770 449 5555 Fax: 770 734 1560
w
B. Exterior Application: Series: EnCORE®Thermal Storefront System
1. Framing Member Profile: 1-3/4" (44.5) x 3-9/16" (90.5), 4-1/2" (114.3) or 6" (228.6)
nominal dimension where indicated.
OM
C. Interior Application: Series:Trifab®VG 450 Storefront System.
W D. Framing Member Profile: Framing Member Profile: 1-3/4" x 4-1/2" (44.5 x 114.3) nominal
dimension;Non-Thermal
E. MATERIALS
F. Aluminum(Framing and Components):
1. Material Standard:ASTM B 221;6063-T6 alloy and temper
2. Member Wall Thickness: Each framing member shall provide structural strength to meet
specified performance requirements.
3. Tolerances: Reference to tolerances for wall thickness and other cross-sectional
dimensions of storefront members are nominal and in compliance with AA Aluminum
Standards and Data.
2.2 ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS
A. Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for manual-swing operation.
ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 0841 13- 5
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA ■
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved
for installation of units required for this Project.
B. Engineering Responsibility: Prepare data for aluminum-framed systems, including Shop
Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in systems
similar to those indicated for this Project.
C. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for
systems' aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by
dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate
to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are
indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction
testing, field testing, and in-service performance.
iw
D. Source Limitations for Aluminum-Framed Systems: Obtain from single source from single
manufacturer.
I. IT IS THE INTENT OF THE PROJECT TO HAVE THE ALUMINUM-FRAMED +�+
SYSTEM, GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS SPECIFIED IN SECTION
08 44 13 AND ALUMINUM WINDOWS SPECIFIED IN SECTION 08 51 13 TO
BE PROVIDED FROM THE SAME MANUFACTURER.
E. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.2, "Structural
Welding Code-Aluminum."
F. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.
1. Build mockup of typical wall area as shown on Drawings. ..
2. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project Site.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of structural supports for aluminum-framed
systems by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop .w
Drawings.
1.7 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING .M
A. Ordering: Comply with manufacturer's ordering instructions and lead-time requirements to ■,,
avoid construction delays.
B. Packing, Shipping, Handling and Unloading: Deliver materials in manufacturer's original,
unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact.
ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 0841 13 -4
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
!*+ Northampton,MA
E. Samples for Initial Selection(Storefront): For units with factory-applied color finishes.
F. Samples for Verification (Storefront): For each type of exposed finish required, in
manufacturer's standard sizes.
G. Fabrication Sample (Storefront): Of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of aluminum-
framed systems, made from 12-inch (300-min) lengths of full-size components and showing
details of the following:
1. Joinery, including concealed welds.
2. Anchorage.
3. Expansion provisions.
4. Glazing.
5. Flashing and drainage.
as H. Samples for Initial Selection (Formed MetaL): For each type of sheet metal flashing, trim, and
accessory indicated with factory-applied color finishes involving color selection.
I. Samples for Verification (Formed Metal): For each type of exposed finish required, prepared
on Samples of size indicated below:
1. Trimand Miscellaneous Fabrications: 12 inches (300 m'3i) long and in required profile.
Include fasteners and other exposed accessories.
J. Other Action Submittals:
1. Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier,
detailing fabrication and assembly of entrance door hardware, as well as procedures and
diagrams. Coordinate final entrance door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and
related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of entrance door
hardware.
K. Delegated-Design Submittal: For aluminum-framed systems indicated to comply with
40 performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the
qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1. Detail fabrication and assembly of aluminum-framed systems.
2. Include design calculations.
L. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
M. Welding certificates.
N. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
testing agency, for aluminum-framed systems, indicating compliance with performance
requirements.
O. Source quality-control reports.
P. Maintenance Data: For aluminum-framed systems to include in maintenance manuals.
Q. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.
ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 0841 13 -3
so
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA ON
G. Thermal Transmittance (U-factor): When tested to AAMA Specification 1503, the thermal
transmittance(U-factor)shall not be more than: go
1. Glass to Exterior—0.47(low-e)or 0.61 (clear)
2. Glass to Center—0.44(low-e)or 0.61 (clear
3. Glass to Interior—0.41 (low-e)or 0.56(clear
..
H. Condensation Resistance (CRF): When tested to AAMA Specification 1503, the condensation
resistance factor shall not be less than:
1. Glass to Exterior—70frame and 69glass(low-e)or 69 frame and 58 glass(clear).
2. Glass to Center—62 frame and 68glass(low-e)or 63 frame and 56 glass(clear).
3. Glass to Interior—56 frame and 67 glass(low-e)or 54 frame and 58 glass(clear).
I. Sound Transmission Class(STC) and Outdoor-Indoor Transmission Class(OITC): When tested
to AAMA Specification 1801 and in accordance with ASTM E1425 and ASTM E90, the STC
and OITC Rating shall not be less than:
1. Glass to Exterior—38(STC)and 31 (OITC)
2. Glass to Center—37(STC)and 30(OITC)
3. Glass to Interior—38(STC)and 30(OITC)
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for aluminum-
framed systems.
B. LEED Submittal:
1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For adhesives and sealants used inside of the w
weatherproofing system, including printed statement of VOC content.
C. Shop Drawings (Storefront): For aluminum-framed systems. Include plans, elevations,
sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1. Include details of provisions for system expansion and contraction and for drainage of
moisture in the system to the exterior.
2. For entrance doors, include hardware schedule and indicate operating hardware types,
functions, quantities, and locations.
D. Shop Drawings (Formed Metal trim): Show fabrication and installation layouts of sheet metal
flashing and trim, including plans, elevations, expansion-joint locations, and keyed details.
Distinguish between shop- and field-assembled work. Include the following:
1. Identification of material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and location in
Proj ect.
2. Details for forming sheet metal flashing and trim, including profiles, shapes, seams, and �+
dimensions.
3. Details for joining, supporting, and securing sheet metal flashing and trim, including
layout of fasteners,cleats, clips,and other attachments. Include pattern of seams.
4. Details of termination points and assemblies, including fixed points.
ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 0841 13 -2
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
*�* Northampton,MA
SECTION 08 4113—ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
�r A. Section Includes:
1. Storefront framing for window walls.
2. Storefront entrances at interior.
B. Work of this section also include formed aluminum trim with matching finish.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General Performance: Aluminum-framed systems shall withstand the effects of the following
performance requirements without exceeding performance criteria or failure due to defective
manufacture, fabrication, installation,or other defects in construction:
B. Delegated Design: Design aluminum-framed systems, including comprehensive engineering
analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design
criteria indicated.
C. Structural Loads:
1. Wind Loads:
a. Low Building :25 psf.
b. Low Building Doors near corners: 30.5 psf.
D. Air Infiltration: The test specimen shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 283. Air
infiltration rate shall not exceed 0.06 cfm/ft2 (0.3 1/s • m2)at a static air pressure differential of
**� 6.24 psf(300 Pa).
E. Water Resistance: The test specimen shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 331. There
shall be no leakage at a minimum static air pressure differential of 8 psf(383 Pa) as defined in
AAMA 501.
F. Uniform Load: A static air design load of 20 psf(958 Pa) shall be applied in the positive and
negative direction in accordance with ASTM E 330. There shall be no deflection in excess of
L/175 of the span of any framing member. At a structural test load equal to 1.5 times the
specified design load, no glass breakage or permanent set in the framing members in excess of
0.2%of their clear spans shall occur.
ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 0841 13 - 1
go
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
3.3 STARTUP SERVICE
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
I. Perform installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
3. Test door closing when activated by detector or alarm-connected fire-release system. 40
Reset door-closing mechanism after successful test.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust hardware and moving parts to function smoothly so that doors operate easily, free of
warp,twist, or distortion.
B. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts as recommended by manufacturer.
C. Adjust seals to provide weathertight fit around entire perimeter. w
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate,and maintain overhead coiling doors.
END OF SECTION 083323
.A
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 083323 -6
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
cuts operator power when engaged. A disconnect chain shall not be required to engage or
release the manual chain hoist. Provide a disconnect cable for auxiliary push-up operation on
smaller doors. Operator drive and door driven sprockets shall be provided with#50 roller chain.
Provide an integral Motor Mounted Interlock system to prevent damage to door and operator
when mechanical door locking devices are provided. Operator shall be capable of driving the
door at a speed of 8 to 9 inches per second (20 to 23 cm/sec). Fully adjustable, driven linear
screw type cam limit switch mechanism shall synchronize the operator with the door. The
electrical contractor shall mount the control station(s) and supply the appropriate disconnect
switch,all conduit and wiring per the overhead door wiring instructions.
1. Control Station: Surface mounted, "Open/Close/Stop" push buttons with keyed lock-out,
not masterkeyable;NEMA 4.
B. Weather/Sensing Edge: Provide automatic stop control by an automatic sensing switch within
neoprene or rubber astragal extending full width of door bottom bar.
so 1. Provide an electric sensing edge device. Contact before door fully closes shall cause door
to immediately stop downward travel. Provide a self-monitoring wireless sensing edge
connection to motor operator eliminating the need for a physical traveling electric cord
+R connection between bottom bar sensing edge device and motor operator. Supervised
system alters normal door operation preventing damage, injury or death due to an
inoperable sensing edge system.
C.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for substrate construction and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Examine locations of electrical connections.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install overhead coiling doors and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware,
anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports; according to manufacturer's written
W instructions and as specified.
B. Install overhead coiling doors,hoods,and operators at the mounting locations indicated for each
door.
C. Accessibility: Install overhead coiling doors, switches, and controls along accessible routes in
compliance with regulatory requirements for accessibility.
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 083323 -5
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
Northampton, MA
a. Barrel: Steel pipe capable of supporting curtain load with maximum deflection of
0.03 inches per foot(2.5 mm per meter)of width.
b. Spring Balance: Oil-tempered, heat-treated steel helical torsion spring assembly
designed for proper balance of door to ensure that maximum effort to operate will
not exceed 25 lbs(110 N).Provide wheel for applying and adjusting spring torque. .w
3. Brackets: Fabricate from minimum 3/16 inch (5 mm) steel plate with permanently
lubricated ball or roller bearings at rotating support points to support counterbalance shaft
assembly and form end closures.
a. Finish:
1) Phosphate treatment followed by baked-on polyester powder coat, custom
color as selected by Architect: minimum 2.5 mils (0.065 mm) cured film w�
thickness;ASTM D-3363 pencil hardness: H or better.
C. Hood:
1. 24 gauge galvanized steel with reinforced top and bottom edges. Provide minimum 1/4 '
inch(6.35 mm)steel intermediate support brackets as required to prevent excessive sag.
a. Finish:
I) GalvaNexTM Coating System and phosphate treatment followed by baked-on *"
polyester powder coat, custom color as selected by Architect; minimum 2.5
mils (0.065 mm) cured film thickness; ASTM D-3363 pencil hardness: H or
better.
ON
D. Weatherstripping:
1. Bottom Bar: Replaceable, bulb-style, compressible EDPM gasket extending into guides.
2. Bottom Bar, Motor Operated Doors: Weather/sensing edge with neoprene or rubber
astragal extending full width of door bottom bar.
3. Guides: Replaceable vinyl strip on guides sealing against fascia side of curtain.
4. Lintel Seal: Nylon brush seal fitted at door header to impede air flow. •
5. Hood: Neoprene/rayon baffle to impede air flow above coil.
E. Locking:
1. Masterkeyable cylinder operable from both] side[s] of bottom bar. Provide interlock
switches on motor operated units.
F. Operator and Bracket Mechanism Cover: Provide 24 gauge galvanized steel sheet metal cover
to provide weather resistance and to enclose exposed moving operating components]at coil area
of unit. Finish to match door hood.
op
2.3 OPERATION
A. Supply Cornell Model MG, industrial duty - rated for a maximum of 20 cycles per hour, cULus
listed, Totally Enclosed Non Ventilated gear head operator(s) rated (1/3) (1/2) or (3/4) hp as
recommended by door manufacture for size and type of door, Volts, Phase. Provide
complete with electric motor and factory pre-wired motor control terminals, maintenance free
solenoid actuated brake, emergency manual chain hoist or provisions for auxiliary push-up
operation on smaller doors and control station(s). Motor shall be high starting torque, industrial
type, protected against overload with an auto-reset thermal sensing device. Primary speed
reduction shall be heavy-duty, lubricated gears with mechanical braking to hold the door in any
position. Operator shall be equipped with an emergency manual chain hoist assembly that safely
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 083323 -4
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURER
A. Manufacturer: Cornell Iron Works, Inc., Crestwood Industrial Park, Mountaintop, PA 18707.
Telephone: (800) 233-8366, Fax: (800) 526-0841. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL), ISO
9001:2000 Registered.
B. Model: ESD20
2.2 MATERIALS
PW A. Curtain:
1. Slat Material: No. 6F, (Listed Exterior/Interior):
a. Galvanized Steel/Galvanized Steel: Gage required tomeet performance
requirements,Grade 40,ASTM A 653 galvanized steel zinc coating.
b. Insulation: 7/8 inch(22 mm)foamed-in-place,closed cell urethane.
C. Total Slat Thickness: 15/16 inch(24 mm).
d. Slats have a Flame Spread Index of 0 and a Smoke Developed Index of 10 as
tested per ASTM E84.
e. Slat has an R-value of 8.0 and an STC rating of 26.
2. Bottom Bar: Reinforced extruded aluminum interior face with full depth insulation and
w exterior skin slat to match curtain material and gauge.
3. Fabricate interlocking sections with high strength cast iron endlocks on alternate slats
each secured with two '/4" (6.35 mm) rivets. Provide windlocks as required to meet
specified wind load.
4. Exterior Slat Finish:
a. GalvaNexTM Coating System and phosphate treatment followed by baked-on
polyester powder coat, color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's custom
!" color as selected by Architect;minimum 2.5 mils(0.065 mm)cured film thickness;
ASTM D-3363 pencil hardness: H or better.
5. Interior Slat Finish: Same as exterior slats
.® 6. Bottom Bar Finish:
a. Exterior Face: Match slats.
b. Interior Face: Powder coat to match slats.
B. Guides:
1. Fabricate with minimum 3/16 inch (4.76 mm) structural steel angles. Provide windlock
bars of same material when windlocks are required to meet specified wind load. Top of
inner and outer guide angles to be flared outwards to form bellmouth for smooth entry of
curtain into guides. Provide removable guide stoppers to prevent over travel of curtain
and bottom bar.Top 16 '/2" (419.10 mm) of coil side guide angles to be removable for
ease of curtain installation and as needed for future curtain service.
a. Finish: Steel: Phosphate treatment followed by baked-on polyester powder coat,
custom color as selected by Architect; minimum 2.5 mils (0.065 mm) cured film
thickness;ASTM D-3363 pencil hardness: H or better.
2. Counterbalance Shaft Assembly:
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 083323 -3
ON
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA No
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type and size of overhead coiling door and accessory. Include the
following:
1. Construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components,profiles
for slats, and finishes.
2. Rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished
accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: For each installation and for special components not dimensioned or detailed
in manufacturer's product data. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to „
other work.
1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection.
2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's finish charts showing full range of colors and
textures available for units with factory-applied finishes.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required,prepared on Samples of size
indicated below.
1. Curtain Slats: 12 inches(305 nom)long.
E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For overhead coiling doors indicated to comply with performance
requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified
professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1. Summary of forces and loads on walls and jambs.
F. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
G. Maintenance Data: For overhead coiling doors to include in maintenance manuals.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved
for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain overhead coiling doors from single source from single
manufacturer.
1. Obtain operators and controls from overhead coiling door manufacturer.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency,and marked for intended location and application.
D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural &
Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and the
Massachusetts Architectural Access Board.
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 083323 -2
MR
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
! Northampton,MA
SECTION 083323 -OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Insulated service doors.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 05 Section"Metal Fabrications" for miscellaneous steel supports.
2. Division 26 Sections for electrical service and connections for powered operators and
accessories.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Design overhead coiling doors, including comprehensive engineering
analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design
criteria indicated.
B. Structural Performance, Exterior Doors: Exterior overhead coiling doors shall withstand the
wind loads, the effects of gravity loads, and loads and stresses within limits and under
conditions indicated according to the FM Global requirements.
1. Wind Loads:
a. Low Building Doors: 25 psf.
b. Low Building Doors near corners of building: 30.5 psf.
C. Tower Doors in center of tower: 31.4 psf.
on d. Tower Doors at corner of tower: 38.6 psf.
2. Deflection Limits: Design overhead coiling doors to withstand design wind load without
„w evidencing permanent deformation or disengagement of door components.
C. Operation Cycles: Provide overhead coiling door components and operators capable of
operating for not less than number of cycles indicated for each door. One operation cycle is
No complete when a door is opened from the closed position to the fully open position and returned
to the closed position.
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 083323 - 1
OR
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
�* Northampton,MA
END OF SECTION 083113
w.
40
40
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 083113 - 5
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
D. Latching Mechanisms: Furnish number required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane when
closed. ..
1. For cylinder locks, furnish two keys per lock and key all locks alike.
2. For recessed panel doors, provide access sleeves for each locking device. Furnish plastic
grommets and install in holes cut through finish.
2.5 FINISHES ■,,,
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,
temporary protective covering before shipping.
C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of
approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
D. Steel and Metallic-Coated-Steel Finishes:
1. Factory Prime: Apply manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free,
universal primer immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment.
2. Factory Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's
standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat,
with a minimum dry-film thickness of 1 mil(0.025 inns)for topcoat.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames.
B. Install doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces or recessed to receive finish material.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust doors and hardware, after installation, for proper operation.
B. Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged.
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 083113 -4
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
4. Hardware: Latch.
go F. Fire-Rated, Flush Access Doors with Concealed Flanges (Public Spaces including corridors,
offices,conference and meetings spaces and lobby)
1. Assembly Description: Fabricate door to fit flush to frame, with a core of mineral-fiber
insulation enclosed in sheet metal. Provide self-latching door with automatic closer and
interior latch release. Provide manufacturer's standard-width exposed flange,
proportional to door size.
2. Locations: Wall and ceiling.
3. Fire-Resistance Rating: Not less than that of adjacent construction.
4. Uncoated Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.036 inch(0.91 min), 20 gage.
a. Finish: Factory prime for field painting.
5. Frame Material: Same material and thickness as door.
6. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard.
7. Hardware: Lock.
w
G. Hardware:
1. Latch: Cam latch operated pinned-hex-head .
2. Lock: Cylinder
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
B. Steel Sheet: Uncoated or electrolytic zinc coated, ASTM A 879/A 879M, with cold-rolled steel
sheet substrate complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), exposed.
C. Frame Anchors: Same type as door face.
D. Inserts, Bolts, and Anchor Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized steel according to
ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329.
No
2.4 FABRICATION
A. General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units ready for
installation.
B. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials
with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam
marks,roller marks,rolled trade names, or roughness.
C. Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish
attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access doors to types of supports
indicated.
1. For concealed flanges with drywall bead, provide edge trim for gypsum board] securely
attached to perimeter of frames.
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 083113 - 3
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA ,■,,
2.2 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES FOR WALLS AND CEILINGS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following:
I. Acudor Products, Inc.
2. Babcock-Davis.
3. Elmdor/Stoneman Manufacturing Co.; Div. of Acorn Engineering Co.
4. J. L. Industries, Inc.; Div. of Activar Construction Products Group.
5. Karp Associates, Inc.
6. Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
7. Milcor Inc.
8. Nystrom, Inc.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of access door and frame from single source from single
manufacturer.
C. Flush Access Doors with Exposed Flanges(Service areas and toilet rooms):
1. Assembly Description: Fabricate door to fit flush to frame. Provide manufacturer's
standard-width exposed flange,proportional to door size. „®
2. Locations: Wall and ceiling..
3. Door Size: As required.
4. Uncoated Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.060 inch(1.52 min), 16 gage. .�
a. Finish: Factory finish.
5. Frame Material: Same material,thickness, and finish as door.
6. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard.
7. Hardware: Latch.
D. Flush Access Doors with Concealed Flanges (Public Spaces including corridors, offices,
conference and meetings spaces and lobby) w
1. Assembly Description: Fabricate door to fit flush to frame. Provide frame with gypsum
board beads for concealed flange installation.
2. Locations: Wall and ceiling.
3. Door Size: As required
4. Uncoated Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.060 inch(1.52 mm), 16 gage.
a. Finish: Factory prime for field painting.
5. Frame Material: Same material and thickness as door. ap
6. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard.
7. Hardware: Lock.
E. Fire-Rated,Flush Access Doors with Exposed Flanges(Service areas and toilet rooms located in w
rated partitions or assemblies:
1. Assembly Description: Fabricate door to fit flush to frame, with a core of mineral-fiber
insulation enclosed in sheet metal. Provide self-latching door with automatic closer and
interior latch release. Provide manufacturer's standard-width exposed flange,
proportional to door size.
2. Locations: Wall and ceiling.
3. Fire-Resistance Rating: Not less than that of adjacent construction.
1. Uncoated Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.036 inch(0.91 min), 20 gage.
a. Finish: Factory finish. .�
2. Frame Material: Same material,thickness,and finish as door.
3. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard.
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 083113 -2
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
SECTION 083113 -ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Access doors and frames for walls and ceilings.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include construction details,fire ratings if applicable, materials, individual components
and profiles,and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Include plans, elevations,sections, details,and attachments to other work.
2. Detail fabrication and installation of access doors and frames for each type of substrate.
C. Samples: For each door face material, at least 3 by 5 inches (75 by 125 slim) in size, in
specified finish.
D. Product Schedule: Provide complete access door and frame schedule, including types,
locations, sizes,latching or locking provisions,and other data pertinent to installation.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
•0 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire-Rated Access Doors and Frames: Units complying with NFPA 80 that are identical to
access door and frame assemblies tested for fire-test-response characteristics according to the
following test method and that are listed and labeled by UL or another testing and inspecting
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction:
1. NFPA 252 or UL lOB for fire-rated access door assemblies installed vertically.
2. NFPA 288 for fire-rated access door assemblies installed horizontally.
go
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 083113 - 1
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
+■► Northampton,MA
B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and
the referenced quality standard, and as indicated.
1. Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80.
C. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated
below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire-
rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and mortises
after fitting and machining.
W 1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors.
Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or
covering unless otherwise indicated. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4
inch(6.4 mm) from bottom of door to top of threshold unless otherwise indicated.
a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.
2. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches(3-1/2 degrees)at lock and hinge edges.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.
END OF SECTION 081416
on
00
on
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416- 5
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
Northampton,MA
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Air Louvers Inc.
b. Anemostat;a Mestek company.
C. Hiawatha Incorporated.
d. L &L Louvers, Inc.
e. LL Building Products, Inc.; a division of GAF Materials Corporation.
f. Louvers&Dampers, Inc.; a Mestek company. *�►
g. McGill Architectural Products.
2. Metal and Finish: Hot-dip galvanized steel, 0.040 inch(1.0 nim)thick,factory primed for
paint finish.
2.5 FABRICATION *�•
A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of
referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated.
B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply
with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings,
DHI Al 15-W series standards, and hardware templates. w
C. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors in factory.
go
2.6 SHOP PRIMING
A. Doors for Opaque Finish: Shop prime doors with one coat of wood primer specified in
Division 09 Section "Interior Painting". Seal all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises with
primer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine doors and installed door frames before hanging doors.
1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing
characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs.
2. Reject doors with defects.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 08 Section "Door Hardware."
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416-4
e�•
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
C. Structural-Composite-Lumber-Core Doors:
1. Structural Composite Lumber: WDMA LS.10.
a. Screw Withdrawal,Face: 700 lbf(3 100 N).
D. Fire-Protection-Rated Doors: Provide core specified or mineral core as needed to provide fire-
'" protection rating indicated.
1. Edge Construction: Provide edge construction with intumescent seals concealed by outer
stile. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.
2. Pairs: Provide formed-steel edges and astragals with intumescent seals.
a. Finish steel edges and astragals with baked enamel same color as doors.
2.3 DOORS FOR OPAQUE FINISH
A. Interior Solid-Core Doors<Insert drawing designation>:
1. Grade: Premium.
2. Faces: Hardboard or MDF.
3. Hardboard Faces: AHA A135.4, Class 1 (tempered)or Class 2 (standard).
4. MDF Faces: ANSI A208.2, Grade 150 or 160.
5. Exposed Vertical and Top Edges: Any closed-grain hardwood.
6. Core: Structural composite lumber.
7. Construction: Three plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive
planed before veneering. Faces are bonded to core using a hot press.
2.4 LOUVERS AND LIGHT FRAMES
A. Wood Louvers: Door manufacturer's standard solid-wood louvers unless otherwise indicated.
1. Wood Species: Any closed-grain hardwood.
B. Metal Louvers:
"" 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Air Louvers Inc.
b. Anemostat;a Mestek company.
C. Hiawatha Incorporated.
d. L&L Louvers, Inc.
e. LL Building Products,Inc.; a division of GAF Materials Corporation.
£ Louvers&Dampers,Inc.; a Mestek company.
g. McGill Architectural Products.
2. Blade Type: Vision-proof,inverted V.
3. Metal and Finish: Hot-dip galvanized steel, 0.040 inch (I.0 inm) thick, factory primed
for paint finish.
C. Louvers for Fire-Rated Doors: Metal louvers with fusible link and closing device, listed and
labeled for use in doors with fire-protection rating of 1-1/2 hours and less.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416-3
w
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
Northampton, MA
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Package doors individually in cardboard cartons and wrap bundles of doors in plastic sheeting.
C. Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and
weatherti ht wet work in aces is complete and d
g � p p dry, and HVAC system is operating and
maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the
remainder of the construction period.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to,the following:
a. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) in a 42-by-84-inch
(1067-by-2134-mm)section.
b. Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch
(0.25 mm in a 76.2-mm)span.
2. Warranty Period for Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following:
1. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc.
2. Buell Door Company Inc.
3. Eggers Industries.
4. Graham; an Assa Abloy Group company.
5. Lambton Doors.
6. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc.; a Masonite company.
7. VT Industries Inc.
2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL
A. Low-Emitting Materials: Provide doors made with adhesives and composite wood products that
do not contain urea formaldehyde.
B. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Heavy Duty.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416-2
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
SECTION 081416-FLUSH WOOD DOORS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Solid-core doors with hardboard or MDF faces.
2. Shop priming flush wood doors.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 08 Section "Glazing" for glass view panels in flush wood doors.
2. Division 09 Sections "Painting for field finishing doors.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of door indicated. Include details of core and edge
construction, louvers, and trim for openings.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door;
construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and
4w other pertinent data.
1. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware.
2. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts.
3. Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish requirements.
4. Indicate fire-protection ratings for fire-rated doors.
C. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors from single manufacturer.
B. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with WDMA I.S.1-A,
" "Architectural Wood Flush Doors."
C. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a
qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive
pressure according to NFPA 252.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416- 1
�w
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
w Northampton,MA
C. Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified
below. Shim as necessary.
1. Non-Fire-Rated Standard Steel Doors:
a. Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch(3 nim)plus or minus 1!16 inch(1.6 mm).
b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch (3 mm) plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6
mm).
C. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch(9.5 mm).
d. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor(No Threshold): Maximum 3/4
inch(19 mm).
2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80.
D. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing" and with
hollow metal manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not
more than 9 inches (230 mm) o.c. and not more than 2 inches (50 mm) o.c. from each
corner.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final
inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace
defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped,bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.
B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow metal work immediately after
�w installation.
C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of
prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying,rust-inhibitive primer.
D. Metallic-Coated Surfaces: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION 081113
s
W
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 -9
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
Northampton,MA
1. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on a line 90
degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. w
2. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal line
parallel to plane of wall.
3. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch(1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners of jambs on
parallel lines,and perpendicular to plane of wall.
4. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch(1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a perpendicular line
from head to floor.
C. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door
hardware.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install hollow metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in
place; comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Hollow Metal Frames: Install hollow metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with
ANSI/SDI A250.11..
1. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent
anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving
surfaces smooth and undamaged.
a. At fire-protection-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80.
b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling
limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously;
grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.
C. Install frames with removable glazing stops located on secure side of opening.
d. Install door silencers in frames before grouting.
e. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been
properly set and secured.
f. Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim
as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. .�
g. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that are filled with grout
containing antifreezing agents.
2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor,
and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.
3. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation behind frames.
4. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space
between frames and masonry with grout.
5. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness, alignment,
twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:
a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on a line
90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.
b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal
line parallel to plane of wall.
C. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners of
jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.
d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch(1.6 mm),measured at jambs at floor.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 8
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
4. Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with
Division 26 Sections.
G. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form
corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints.
1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollow
metal work.
2. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that each
glazed lite is capable of being removed independently.
3. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors
and frames.
�. 4. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow metal work.
5. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with type of glazing and
type of installation indicated.
2.11 STEEL FINISHES
00 A. Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating.
1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer
complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer
manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite
prolonged exposure.
go PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame
installation.
on C. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to
performance of the Work.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding,
filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed
faces.
B. Prior to installation, adjust and securely brace welded hollow metal frames for squareness,
alignment,twist,and plumbness to the following tolerances:
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 -7
w.
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA "M
practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project
site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment.
B. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in SDI 117.
C. Hollow Metal Doors: **
1. Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottom of exterior doors to permit
moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration.
2. Glazed Lites: Factory cut openings in doors. s„
3. Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors where required by
NFPA 80 for fire-performance rating or where indicated. Extend minimum 3/4 inch (19
nun)beyond edge of door on which astragal is mounted.
D. Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling
limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal
as frames. �u
1. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously;grind, fill, dress, and make smooth,
flush, and invisible.
2. Sidelight Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints,
fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs
by butt welding.
3. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be
grouted.
4. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot
welds per anchor.
5. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:
a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches (457 mm) from top and
bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 min) o.c. and as
follows: .■
1) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches(1524 to 2286 nnin)high.
b. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches (457 mm) from top and
bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c. and as
follows:
1) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches(1524 to 2286 nun)high.
6. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors, drill stops to receive door silencers as
follows. Keep holes clear during construction.
a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers.
b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers.
E. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, edge channels, and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or
hot-rolled steel sheet.
F. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated mortised
hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to the Door
Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Division 08 Section "Door
Hardware." A
1. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated,according to ANSI/SDI A250.8
2. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised and surface-mounted door
hardware.
3. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series
specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware.
w
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 -6
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
2.5 FRAME ANCHORS
A. Jamb Anchors:
1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not
less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2
inches (50 m111) wide by 10 inches (250 rnm) long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177
inch(4.5 min)thick.
2. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud,welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042
w inch(1.0 Warn)thick.
2.6 HOLLOW METAL PANELS
A. Provide hollow metal panels of same materials, construction, and finish as specified for
adjoining hollow metal work.
2.7 STOPS AND MOLDINGS
A. Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with hollow metal frames, a minimum of 5/8 inch (16
nom)high unless otherwise indicated.
' ! B. Loose Stops for Glazed Lites in Frames: Minimum 0.032 inch(0.8 rnna)thick, fabricated from
same material as frames in which they are installed.
2.8 LOUVERS
A. Provide louvers for interior doors, where indicated, that comply with SDI I I 1 C, with blades or
baffles formed of 0.020-inch- ((0.5-mm-)) thick, cold-rolled steel sheet set into 0.032-inch-
(0.8-mni-)thick steel frame.
1. Sightproof Louver: Stationary louvers constructed with inverted V-shaped or Y-shaped
+w blades.
2. Fire-Rated Automatic Louvers: Louvers constructed with movable blades closed by
actuating fusible link, and listed and labeled for use in fire-rated door assemblies of type
and fire-resistance rating indicated by same testing and inspecting agency that established
fire-resistance rating of door assembly.
2.9 ACCESSORIES
A. Mullions and Transom Bars: Join to adjacent members by welding or rigid mechanical anchors.
B. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames,not less than 0.016 inch(0.4 Irma)thick.
2.10 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate hollow metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form
metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 -5
w
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
b. Thermal-Rated (Insulated) Doors: Where indicated, provide doors fabricated with
thermal-resistance value (R-value) of not less than 6.0 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu
(1.057 K x sq. m/Wwhen tested according to ASTM C 1363.
1) Locations: Exterior doors.
3. Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Beveled edge or Manufacturer's standard.
a. Beveled Edge: 1/8 inch in 2 inches(3 mm in 50 mm).
b. Vertical Edges for Double-Acting Doors: Round vertical edges with 2-1/8-inch
(54-min)radius.
C. Top and Bottom Edges: Closed with flush or inverted 0.042-inch-
thick,end closures or channels of same material as face sheets.
d. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 1]7, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel
Doors and Frames."
B. Exterior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet. Provide doors
complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and
model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level:
]. Level 3 and Physical Performance Level A (Extra Heavy Duty), Model 1 (Full Flush).
C. Interior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet unless metallic-coated sheet ws
is indicated. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing
ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level:
1. Level 3 and Physical Performance Level A(Extra Heavy Duty), Model 1 (Full Flush).
D. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcing plates
from same material as door face sheets.
E. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot-rolled steel
sheet.
2.4 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
A. General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile.
B. Exterior Frames: Fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet.
I. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners.
2. Fabricate frames as full profile welded unless otherwise indicated.
3. Frames for Level 3 Steel Doors: 0.053-inch- (1.3-mm-)thick steel sheet.
C. Interior Frames: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet
1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners.
2. Fabricate frames as full profile welded unless otherwise indicated.
3. Frames for Level 3 Steel Doors: 0.053-inch- (1.3-mm-)thick steel sheet.
4. Frames for Wood Doors: 0.053-inch-(1.3-min-)thick steel sheet.
5. Frames for Borrowed Lights: 0.053-inch-(1.3-m -)thick steel sheet.
D. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcement plates
from same material as frames.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 -4
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
2. Benchmark; a division of Therma-Tru Corporation.
3. Ceco Door Products;an Assa Abloy Group company.
4. Curries Company;an Assa Abloy Group company.
5. Fleming Door Products Ltd.;an Assa Abloy Group company.
6. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable
for exposed applications.
B. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with
minimum G60(Z:180) metallic coating.
C. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS), 40Z (12G) coating
designation;mill phosphatized.
1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M
or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M,
Class B.
D. Inserts,Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.
E. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches (102 nun), as measured
according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.
F. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I(blankets without membrane facing); consisting
of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool with 6- to 12-lb/cu. ft. (96- to 192-kg/cu.nn)
density; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-development indexes of 25 and 50,
respectively;passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.
G. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Division 08 Section"Glazing."
H. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil
(0.4-mm) dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of
asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.
2.3 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL DOORS
A. General: Provide doors of design indicated, not less than thickness indicated; fabricated with
smooth surfaces, without visible joints or seams on exposed faces unless otherwise indicated.
Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8.
1. Design: Flush panel
2. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene,
polyurethane,polyisocyanurate,mineral-board, or vertical steel-stiffener core.
04 a. Fire Door Core: As required to provide fire-protectionratings indicated.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 -3
w
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
testing agency,for each type of hollow metal door and frame assembly. �.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow metal work from single source from single manufacturer.
B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled ..
by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive
pressure according to NFPA 252'
C. Fire-Rated, Borrowed-Light Frame Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are
listed and labeled, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257 .
Label each individual glazed lite.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Deliver hollow metal work palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit
and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic.
w
B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded
to jambs and mullions.
C. Store hollow metal work under cover at Project site. Place in stacks of five units maximum in a
vertical position with heads up, spaced by blocking, on minimum 4-inch- (102-inni-) high wood
blocking. Do not store in a manner that traps excess humidity.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before
fabrication.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for hollow metal frames. Furnish setting drawings,
templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor
bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
I. Amweld Building Products,LLC.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 -2
op
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
SECTION 081113 -HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART I -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
so A. Section Includes standard hollow metal doors and frames.
B. Related Sections
1. Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for embedding anchors for hollow metal work into
masonry construction.
2. Division 08 Section"Door Hardware for door hardware for hollow metal doors.
3. Division 09 Sections "Exterior Painting" and "Interior Painting" for field painting
hollow metal doors and frames.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings.
B. Standard Hollow Metal Work: Hollow metal work fabricated according to ANSI/SDI A250.8.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material
descriptions,core descriptions, fire-resistance rating, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: Include the following:
1. Elevations of each door design.
2. Details of doors, including vertical and horizontal edge details and metal thicknesses.
3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses.
4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware.
5. Details of each different wall opening condition.
6. Details of anchorages,joints, field splices, and connections.
7. Details of accessories.
8. Details of moldings,removable stops, and glazing.
9. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems.
C. Other Action Submittals:
1. Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow metal work prepared by or under the supervision
of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings.
Coordinate with door hardware schedule.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 1
w
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately
,,. so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.
END OF SECTION 079200
10
40
ow
ow
JOINT SEALANTS 079200- 7
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products .�
and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.
B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint
sealants as applicable to materials, applications,and conditions indicated.
C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position
required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint
widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.
2. Do not stretch,twist,puncture, or tear sealant backings.
3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and
replace them with dry materials.
D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants
and backs of joints.
E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time
backings are installed:
1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.
3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow
optimum sealant movement capability.
F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or
curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form
smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure
contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.
I. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.
2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not
discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.
3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise
indicated.
a. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods
and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of
products in which joints occur. aw
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances
and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without
deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage
JOINT SEALANTS 079200-6
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
a. Bostik, Inc.;Chem-Calk 600.
b. Pecora Corporation;AC-20+.
C. Tremco Incorporated; Tremflex 834.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
W 3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-
sealant performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to
comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:
I. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of
joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and
approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint
sealants,oil,grease,waterproofing,water repellents,water, surface dirt, and frost.
2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a
combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing
optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning
go operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air.
Porous joint substrates include the following:
a. Concrete.
b. Masonry.
IN 3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
4. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do
not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint
sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following:
a. Metal.
b. Glass.
C. Porcelain enamel.
d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as
W indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to
comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-
sealant bond;do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with
adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or
by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling
without disturbing joint seal.
w
JOINT SEALANTS 079200- 5
w
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
Northampton,MA
C. Liquid-Applied Joint Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for
each liquid-applied joint sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 w
classifications for type,grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.
D. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous
substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have
not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.
E. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.2 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS
A. Single-Component, Nonsag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S,
Grade NS, Class 100 150, for Use NT.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following:
a. Dow Corning Corporation; 790.
b. Pecora Corporation; 301 NS. w
C. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; SikaSil-C990.
d. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 1
B. Single-Component, Nonsag, Traffic-Grade, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: w
ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS,Class 100150, for Use T.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following:
a. Dow Corning Corporation; 790.
b. Pecora Corporation; 301 NS
C. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 800.
C. Mildew-Resistant, Single-Component, Acid-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant (Option 1):
ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following:
a. Dow Corning Corporation; 786 Mildew Resistant.
b. Tremco Incorporated; Tremsil 200 Sanitary.
D. Mildew-Resistant, Single-Component, Nonsag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant (Option
2): ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following:
a. Pecora Corporation; 898.
b. Or equal.
2.3 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS
A. Latex Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP,
Grade NF.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following:
JOINT SEALANTS
079200-4
me
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-
sealant manufacturer[or are below 40 deg F (5 deg C)].
2. When joint substrates are wet.
3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for
applications indicated.
on 4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed
from joint substrates.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Installer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or
replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in
this Section within specified warranty period.
VP I. Warranty Period: (2)two years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which joint-sealant
manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with
performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: (20)twenty years from date of Substantial Completion.
C. Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from
the following:
1. Movement of the structure caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design
or construction resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's
written specifications for sealant elongation and compression.
2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications.
3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals,tools, or other outside agents.
4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric
contaminants.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS,GENERAL
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible
with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as
demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer,based on testing and field experience.
B. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Provide sealants and sealant primers for use inside the
an weatherproofing system that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59,Part 59, Subpart D(EPA Method 24):
1. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L.
on 2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.
3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.
JOINT SEALANTS 079200- 3
40
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
Northampton,MA w
D. Samples for Verification: For each kind and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples
with joint sealants in 1/2-inch- (I3-into-) wide joints formed between two 6-inch- (150-rr�m-} e
long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.
E. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:
I. Joint-sealant application,joint location, and designation.
2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name.
3. Joint-sealant formulation.
4. Joint-sealant color.
F. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
G. Product Certificates: For each kind of joint sealant and accessory, from manufacturer.
H. Sealant, Waterproofing, and Restoration Institute (SWRI) Validation Certificate: For each
sealant specified to be validated by SWRI's Sealant Validation Program.
I. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
testing agency, indicating that sealants comply with requirements.
J. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer,
indicating the following:
1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for
compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants.
2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate
preparation needed for adhesion. w
K. Field-Adhesion Test Reports: For each sealant application tested.
L. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE + �
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved
for installation of units required for this Project. ,
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each kind of joint sealant from single source from single
manufacturer.
C. Product Testing: Test joint sealants using a qualified testing agency.
D. Mockups: Install sealant in mockups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are indicated
to receive joint sealants specified in this Section. Use materials and installation methods
specified in this Section.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:
JOINT SEALANTS
079200-2
.u,
00
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
am Northampton,MA
SECTION 079200-JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes joint sealants.
B. Work includes
1. All joints indicated graphically as sealant or labeled sealant.
2. Housekeeping sealant between all plumbing fixtures and wall surfaces; this work is not
indicated on the drawings.
3. All joints between interior architectural woodwork,finish carpentry items,and equipment
and specialties required to close gaps and variations in the substrate.
C. Related Sections:
1. Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for masonry control and expansion joint fillers and
gaskets.
2. Division 07 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" for sealing joints in fire-resistance-
rated construction.
3. Division 08 Section "Structural-Sealant-Glazed Curtain Walls" for structural and other
glazing sealants.
4. Division 08 Section "Glazing" for glazing sealants.
5. Division 09 Section"Gypsum Board" for sealing perimeter joints.
6. Division 09 Section "Acoustical Tile Ceilings" for sealing edge moldings at perimeters
with acoustical sealant.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.
B. LEED Submittal:
1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For sealants and sealant primers used inside the
weatherproofing system, including printed statement of VOC content.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants
showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.
u
on
JOINT SEALANTS 079200- 1
OR
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
3.4 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify fire-resistive joint systems with preprinted metal or plastic labels. Attach labels
permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches(150 nun) of joint edge so labels will be
visible to anyone seeking to remove or penetrate joint system. Use mechanical fasteners or self-
!"" adhering-type labels with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which
labels are placed.
0•
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspecting Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and
inspections.
B. Where deficiencies are found or fire-resistive joint systems are damaged or removed due to
testing,repair or replace fire-resistive joint systems so they comply with requirements.
C. Proceed with enclosing fire-resistive joint systems with other construction only after inspection
reports are issued and installations comply with requirements.
3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with
cleaning materials that are approved in writing by fire-resistive joint system manufacturers and
that do not damage materials in which joints occur.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure fire-
resistive joint systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If
go damage or deterioration occurs despite such protection, cut out and remove damaged or
deteriorated fire-resistive joint systems immediately and install new materials to produce fire-
resistive joint systems complying with specified requirements.
END OF SECTION 078446
Im
00
FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 078446-5
a
.s
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA ww
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
joint configurations, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. w�
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning: Clean joints immediately before installing fire-resistive joint systems to
comply with fire-resistive joint system manufacturer's written instructions and the following
requirements: so
1. Remove from surfaces of joint substrates foreign materials that could interfere with
adhesion of fill materials.
2. Clean joint substrates to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum ON
bond with fill materials. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation.
3. Remove laitance and fonn-release agents from concrete.
B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by fire-resistive joint system
manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers
to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent fill materials of fire-resistive joint system from
contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of the Work and that
would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods
used to remove stains. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing fire-resistive joint
system's seal with substrates.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install fire-resistive joint systems to comply with manufacturer's written installation
instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated.
B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during
their application and in position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to
achieve fire ratings indicated.
C. Install fill materials for fire-resistive joint systems by proven techniques to produce the
following results:
1. Fill voids and cavities formed by joints and forming materials as required to achieve fire-
resistance ratings indicated.
2. Apply fill materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by joints. .w
3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce
smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.
40
oft
FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 078446-4
40
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
1. Joints include those installed in or between fire-resistance-rated walls, floor or
40 floor/ceiling assemblies and roofs or roof/ceiling assemblies.
2. Fire-Resistance Rating: Equal to or exceeding the fire-resistance rating of construction
they will join.
3. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
' the following:
a. Grace Construction Products.
b. Hilti, Inc.
C. Nelson Firestop Products.
d. RectorSeal Corporation.
e. Specified Technologies Inc.
f. 3M Fire Protection Products.
g. Tremco, Inc.;Tremco Fire Protection Systems Group.
C. Joints at Exterior Curtain-Wall/Floor Intersections: Provide fire-resistive joint systems with
rating determined by ASTM E 119 based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-
inch wg(2.49 Pa)or ASTM E 2307.
1. Fire-Resistance Rating: Equal to or exceeding the fire-resistance rating of the floor
00 assembly.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
a. Grace Construction Products.
b. Hilti, Inc.
C. Nelson Firestop Products.
d. RectorSeal Corporation.
e. Specified Technologies Inc.
£ 3M Fire Protection Products.
g. Thermafiber,Inc.
der h. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Fire Protection Systems Group.
D. Exposed Fire-Resistive Joint Systems: Provide products with flame-spread and smoke-
developed indexes of less than 25 and 450,respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84.
E. VOC Content: Provide fire-resistive joint systems that comply with the following limits for
VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D(EPA Method 24):
! ' l. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L.
2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.
3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.
F. Accessories: Provide components of fire-resistive joint systems, including primers and forming
materials, that are needed to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only
components specified by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer and approved by the qualified
testing agency for systems indicated.
so
on
FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 078446-3
w•
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA am
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Fire-resistive joint systems shall comply with the following
requirements: 1W
1. Fire-resistive joint system tests are performed by a qualified testing agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Fire-resistive joint systems are identical to those tested per testing standard referenced in
"Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" Article. Provide rated systems complying with the
following requirements:
a. Fire-resistive joint system products bear classification marking of qualified testing
agency.
b. Fire-resistive joint systems correspond to those indicated by reference to
designations listed by the following:
I) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory."
C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site concurrently with
preinstallation conference for Penetration Firestopping.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install fire-resistive joint systems when ambient or substrate
temperatures are outside limits permitted by fire-resistive joint system manufacturers or when
substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.
B. Install and cure fire-resistive joint systems per manufacturer's written instructions using natural
means of ventilation or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.
1.6 COORDINATION
w
A. Coordinate construction of joints to ensure that fire-resistive joint systems are installed
according to specified requirements.
B. Coordinate sizing of joints to accommodate fire-resistive joint systems.
C. Notify Owner's testing agency at least seven days in advance of fire-resistive joint system
installations; confirm dates and times on day preceding each series of installations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
«w
2.1 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS
A. Where required, provide fire-resistive joint systems that are produced and installed to resist
spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and
maintain original fire-resistance rating of assemblies in or between which fire-resistive joint
systems are installed. Fire-resistive joint systems shall accommodate building movements
without impairing their ability to resist the passage of fire and hot gases.
B. Joints in or between Fire-Resistance-Rated Construction: Provide fire-resistive joint systems
with ratings determined per ASTM E 1966 or UL 2079:
FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 078446-2
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
SECTION 078446-FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Joints in or between fire-resistance-rated constructions.
2. Joints at exterior curtain-wall/floor intersections.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for penetrations in fire-resistance-rated
walls, horizontal assemblies, and smoke barriers.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
■r
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. LEED Submittal:
1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For fire-resistive joint systems, including printed
statement of VOC content.
C. Product Schedule: For each fire-resistive joint system. Include location and design designation
of qualified testing agency.
D. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
E. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating fire-resistive joint systems have been installed in
compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written recommendations.
F. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
testing agency, for fire-resistive joint systems.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FM Global according to
FM Global 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors," or been evaluated by UL and found to
w comply with UL's"Qualified Firestop Contractor Program Requirements."
FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 078446- 1
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA ■.
3.4 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify penetration firestopping with preprinted metal or plastic labels. Attach labels
permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches(150 mm)of firestopping edge so labels
will be visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestopping. Use mechanical
fasteners or self-adhering-type labels with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to
surfaces on which labels are placed.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B. Where deficiencies are found or penetration firestopping is damaged or removed because of
testing, repair or replace penetration firestopping to comply with requirements.
C. Proceed with enclosing penetration firestopping with other construction only after inspection
reports are issued and installations comply with requirements.
on
3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as the Work progresses by methods and with an
cleaning materials that are approved in writing by penetration firestopping manufacturers and
that do not damage materials in which openings occur.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that
penetration firestopping is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, immediately cut out and remove
damaged or deteriorated penetration firestopping and install new materials to produce systems
complying with specified requirements.
END OF SECTION 078413
w
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 -6
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting
performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing penetration firestopping to
comply with manufacturer's written instructions and with the following requirements:
1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials
that could interfere with adhesion of penetration firestopping.
w 2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable
of developing optimum bond with penetration firestopping. Remove loose particles
remaining from cleaning operation.
3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by manufacturer using that
manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not
allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent penetration firestopping from contacting adjoining
surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of the Work and that would otherwise be
permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove stains.
Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing firestopping's seal with substrates.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written installation
instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated.
B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during
" their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths
required to achieve fire ratings indicated.
C. Install fill materials for firestopping by proven techniques to produce the following results:
1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and
penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.
2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and
penetrating items.
3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce
smooth,uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 -5
we
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
b. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming/backing materials to
prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state.
C. Fire-rated form board.
d. Fillers for sealants.
2. Temporary forming materials.
3. Substrate primers. "*
4. Collars.
5. Steel sleeves.
2.3 FILL MATERIALS
A. Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that do not re-emulsify after cure during
exposure to moisture.
B. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with
intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant.
C. Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels consisting of aluminum-foil-faced elastomeric .�.�
sheet bonded to galvanized-steel sheet.
D. Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening dielectric, water-resistant putties containing no solvents,
inorganic fibers, or silicone compounds.
E. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component intumescent elastomeric sheets with aluminum
foil on one side.
F. Mortars: Prepackaged dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic cement,
fillers, and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a
nonshrinking, homogeneous mortar.
G. Pillows/Bags: Reusable heat-expanding pillows/bags consisting of glass-fiber cloth cases filled
with a combination of mineral-fiber, water-insoluble expansion agents, and fire-retardant
additives. Where exposed, cover openings with steel-reinforcing wire mesh to protect
pillows/bags from being easily removed.
H. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand
and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.
I. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of
grade indicated below:
2.4 MIXING
A. For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with penetration firestopping
manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required),
type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other
items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with optimum performance
characteristics for application indicated. ..
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 -4
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
3. Nelson Firestop Products.
4. Passive Fire Protection Partners.
5. RectorSeal Corporation.
6. Specified Technologies Inc.
7. 3M Fire Protection Products.
8. Tremco, Inc.;Tremco Fire Protection Systems Group.
2.2 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
A. Provide penetration firestopping that is produced and installed to resist spread of fire according
to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-
resistance rating of construction penetrated. Penetration firestopping systems shall be
compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with penetrating items
if any.
B. Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings
determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of
0.01-inch wg(2.49 Pty).
1. Fire-resistance-rated walls include fire rated partitions.
2. F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.
C. Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings
determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of
0.01-inch wg(2.49 Pa).
1. Horizontal assemblies include floors, floor/ceiling assemblies, and, ceiling membranes of
roof/ceiling assemblies]
2. F-Rating: At least I hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions
penetrated.
D. W-Rating: Provide penetration firestopping showing no evidence of water leakage when tested
according to UL 1479.
E. Exposed Penetration Firestopping: Provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed
indexes of less than 25 and 450,respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84.
F. VOC Content: Provide penetration firestopping that complies with the following limits for
VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D(EPA Method 24):
1. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L.
2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.
3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.
G. Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed to
install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components specified by
penetration firestopping manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency
for firestopping indicated.
1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials, including the following:
a. Slag-wool-fiber or rock-wool-fiber insulation.
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 -3
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA „
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FM Global according to .IS
FM Global 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors," or been evaluated by UL and found to
comply with its "Qualified Firestop Contractor Program Requirements."
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Penetration firestopping shall comply with the following
requirements:
1. Penetration firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing agency acceptable to **
authorities having jurisdiction.
a. Penetration firestopping products bear classification marking of qualified testing
and inspecting agency.
b. Classification markings on penetration firestopping correspond to designations
listed by the following:
1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory."
2) FM Global in its "Building Materials Approval Guide."
C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install penetration firestopping when ambient or substrate
temperatures are outside limits permitted by penetration firestopping manufacturers or when
substrates are wet because of rain, frost,condensation, or other causes.
B. Install and cure penetration firestopping per manufacturer's written instructions using natural
means of ventilations or,where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that penetration
firestopping is installed according to specified requirements.
B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate
penetration firestopping.
C. Notify Owner's testing agency at least seven days in advance of penetration firestopping
installations; confirm dates and times on day preceding each series of installations.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Grace Construction Products.
2. Hilti, Inc.
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 -2
OP
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
SECTION 078413 -PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
PART 1 -GENERAL
go
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls.
2. Penetrations in horizontal assemblies.
B. Work of this section includes preparation of a schedule of penetration firestopping an
-- recommended assemblies meeting the required fire resistive rating.
C. Related Sections:
1. Division 07 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" for joints in or between fire-
resistance-rated construction, at exterior curtain-wall/floor intersections, and in smoke
barriers.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
RM B. LEED Submittal:
1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For penetration firestopping, including printed statement
of VOC content and chemical components.
C. Product Schedule: For each penetration firestopping system. Include location and design
designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency.
D. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
E. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating penetration firestopping has been installed in
compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written recommendations.
F. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
testing agency,for penetration firestopping.
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 1
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
3.8 CLEANING, PROTECTING,AND REPAIR
A. Cleaning: Immediately after completing spraying operations in each containable area of
Project, remove material overspray and fallout from surfaces of other construction and clean
exposed surfaces to remove evidence of soiling.
B. Protect SFRM, according to advice of product manufacturer and Installer, from damage
resulting from construction operations or other causes so fire protection will be without damage
or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
C. Coordinate application of SFRM with other construction to minimize need to cut or remove fire
protection. As installation of other construction proceeds, inspect SFRM and patch any
damaged or removed areas.
D. Repair or replace work that has not successfully protected steel.
END OF SECTION 078100
IMF
W
go
APPLIED FIREPROOFING 078100- 11
IM
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
2. Finish: Even, spray-textured finish produced by lightly rolling flat surfaces of fire-
protected members before fire-resistive material dries,to smooth out surface irregularities
and to seal in surface fibers.
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following
special inspection and prepare reports:
1. SFRM.
B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections
and prepare test reports.
C. Tests and Inspections: Testing and inspecting of completed applications of SFRM shall take
place in successive stages, in areas of extent and using methods as follows. Do not proceed
with application of SFRM for the next area until test results for previously completed
applications of SFRM show compliance with requirements. Tested values must equal or exceed
values indicated and required for approved fire-resistance design.
1. Thickness for Floor, Roof, and Wall Assemblies: For each 1000-sq. ft. (93-sq. 111) area,
or partial area, on each floor, from the average of 4 measurements from a 144-sq. in.
(0.093-sq. in) sample area, with sample width of not less than 6 inches (152 mm) per
ASTM E 605. '*
2. Thickness for Structural Frame Members: From a sample of 25 percent of structural
members per floor, taking 9 measurements at a single cross section for structural frame
beams or girders, 7 measurements of a single cross section for joists and trusses, and 12
measurements of a single cross section for columns per ASTM E 605.
3. Density for Floors,Roofs, Walls, and Structural Frame Members: At frequency and from
sample size indicated for determining thickness of each type of construction and
structural framing member, per ASTM E 605 or AWCI Technical Manual 12-A,
Section 5.4.5, "Displacement Method."
4. Bond Strength for Floors, Roofs, Walls, and Structural Framing Members: For each
10,000-sq. ft. (929 sq. m) area, or partial area, on each floor, cohesion and adhesion from
one sample of size indicated for determining thickness of each type of construction and
structural framing member, per ASTM E 736.
a. Field test SFRM that is applied to flanges of wide-flange, structural-steel members
on surfaces matching those that will exist for remainder of steel receiving fire-
resistive material.
b. If surfaces of structural steel receiving SFRM are primed or otherwise painted for
coating materials, perform series of bond tests specified in UL's "Fire Resistance
Directory." Provide bond strength indicated in referenced UL fire-resistance
criteria, but not less than 150 lbf/sq. ft.(7.2 kPa)minimum per ASTM E 736.
S. If testing finds applications of SFRM are not in compliance with requirements, testing
and inspecting agency will perform additional random testing to determine extent of
noncompliance.
D. Remove and replace applications of SFRM that do not pass tests and inspections for cohesion
and adhesion,for density, or for both and retest as specified above.
E. Apply additional SFRM, per manufacturer's written instructions, where test results indicate that
thickness does not comply with specified requirements, and retest as specified above.
APPLIED FIREPROOFING 078100- 10
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
E. Extend fire-resistive material in full thickness over entire area of each substrate to be protected.
Unless otherwise recommended in writing by SFRM manufacturer, install body of fire-resistive
covering in a single course.
F. Spray apply fire-resistive materials to maximum extent possible. Following the spraying
operation in each area, complete the coverage by trowel application or other placement method
recommended in writing by SFRM manufacturer.
3.4 APPLICATION,CONCEALED SFRM
P• A. Apply concealed SFRM in thicknesses and densities not less than those required to achieve fire-
resistance ratings designated for each condition,but apply in greater thicknesses and densities if
specified in Part 2 "Concealed SFRM" Article.
!0 B. Cure concealed SFRM according to product manufacturer's written recommendations.
C. Apply sealer to concealed SFRM where indicated.
3.5 APPLICATION,EXPOSED SFRM
A. Apply exposed SFRM in thicknesses and densities not less than those required to achieve fire-
resistance ratings designated for each condition,but apply in greater thicknesses and densities if
indicated.
1. For steel beams and bracing, provide a thickness of not less than 1 inch (25 iiim).
2. For metal floor or roof decks,provide a thickness of not less than lr2 inch(U inin).
B. Provide a uniform finish complying with description indicated for each type of material and
matching Architect's sample or, if none, finish approved for field-erected mockup.
C. Apply exposed cementitious SFRM to produce the following finish:
1. Spray-textured finish with no further treatment.
2. Even, spray-textured finish, produced by rolling flat surfaces of fire-protected members
with a damp paint roller to remove drippings and excessive roughness.
D. Apply exposed sprayed-fiber fire-resistive material to produce the following finish:
1. Sealer where indicated.
E. Cure exposed SFRM according to product manufacturer's written recommendations.
3.6 APPLICATION,EXPOSED INTUMESCENT MASTIC FIRE-RESISTIVE COATINGS
A. Apply exposed intumescent mastic fire-resistive coatings in thicknesses and densities not less
than those required to achieve fire-resistance ratings designated for each condition.
B. Apply intumescent mastic fire-resistive coating as follows:
1. Install reinforcing fabric as required to obtain designated fire-resistance rating and where
w indicated.
APPLIED FIREPROOFING 078100-9
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
B. Verify that concrete work on steel deck has been completed.
C. Verify that roof construction, installation of roof-top HVAC equipment, and other related work .�
are completed.
D. Conduct tests according to fire-resistive material manufacturer's written recommendations to .�
verify that substrates are free of substances capable of interfering with bond.
E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
w
A. Cover other work subject to damage from fallout or overspray of fire-resistive materials during
application.
B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of fire-resistive material, including dirt,
oil, grease, release agents, rolling compounds, mill scale, loose scale, and incompatible primers,
paints, and encapsulants.
C. Prime substrates where recommended in writing by SFRM manufacturer unless compatible
shop primer has been applied and is in satisfactory condition to receive SFRM.
D. For exposed applications, repair substrates to remove surface imperfections that could affect
uniformity of texture and thickness in finished surface of SFRM. Remove minor projections
and fill voids that would telegraph through fire-resistive products after application.
3.3 APPLICATION, GENERAL
A. Comply with fire-resistive material manufacturer's written instructions for mixing materials,
application procedures, and types of equipment used to mix, convey, and spray on fire-resistive
material, as applicable to particular conditions of installation and as required to achieve fire-
resistance ratings indicated.
B. Apply SFRM that is identical to products tested as specified in Part 1 "Quality Assurance" „
Article and substantiated by test reports, with respect to rate of application, accelerator use,
sealers, topcoats, tamping, troweling, water overspray, or other materials and procedures
affecting test results.
C. Install metal lath and reinforcing fabric, as required, to comply with fire-resistance ratings
and fire-resistive material manufacturer's written recommendations for conditions of exposure
and intended use. Securely attach lath and fabric to substrate in position required for support
and reinforcement of fire-resistive material. Use anchorage devices of type recommended in
writing by SFRM manufacturer. Attach accessories where indicated or required for secure
attachment of lath and fabric to substrate.
D. Coat substrates with bonding adhesive before applying fire-resistive material where required to
achieve fire-resistance rating or as recommended in writing by SFRM manufacturer for material
and application indicated.
APPLIED FIREPROOFING
078100- 8
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
2.4 AUXILIARY FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS
e
A. General: Provide auxiliary fire-resistive materials that are compatible with SFRM an
substrates and are approved by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction for use in fire-resistance designs indicated.
a�
B. Substrate Primers: For use on each substrate and with each sprayed fire-resistive product,
provide primer that complies with one or more of the following requirements:
1. Primer's bond strength complies with requirements specified in UL's "Fire Resistance
Directory" for coating materials based on a series of bond tests per ASTM E 736.
2. Primer is identical to those used in assemblies tested for fire-test-response characteristics
of SFRM per ASTM E 119 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Adhesive for Bonding Fire-Resistive Material: Product approved by manufacturer of SFRM.
D. Metal Lath: Expanded metal lath fabricated from material of weight, configuration, and finish
required to comply with fire-resistance designs indicated and fire-resistive material
w manufacturer's written recommendations. Include clips, lathing accessories, corner beads, and
other anchorage devices required to attach lath to substrates and to receive SFRM.
E. Reinforcing Fabric: Glass- or carbon-fiber fabric of type, weight, and form required to comply
with fire-resistance designs indicated;approved and provided by manufacturer of SFRM.
F. Reinforcing Mesh: Metallic mesh reinforcement of type, weight, and form required to comply
with fire-resistance designs indicated; approved and provided by manufacturer of intumescent
mastic coating fire-resistive material. Include pins and attachment.
G. Sealer for Sprayed-Fiber Fire-Resistive Material: Transparent-drying, water-dispersible, tinted
protective coating recommended in writing by manufacturer of sprayed-fiber fire-resistive
material.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
an
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for substrates and other conditions affecting performance of work. A substrate is
in satisfactory condition if it complies with the following:
I. Substrates comply with requirements in the Section where the substrate and related
,■ materials and construction are specified.
2. Substrates are free of dirt, oil,grease,release agents,rolling compounds, mill scale, loose
scale, incompatible primers, incompatible paints, incompatible encapsulants, or other
NO foreign substances capable of impairing bond of fire-resistive materials with substrates
under conditions of normal use or fire exposure.
3. Objects penetrating fire-resistive material, including clips, hangers, support sleeves, and
similar items, are securely attached to substrates.
4. Substrates are not obstructed by ducts, piping, equipment, and other suspended
construction that will interfere with applying fire-resistive material.
APPLIED FIREPROOFING 078100-7
�w
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
aggregates mixed with water at Project site to form a slurry or mortar for conveyance and
application.
C. Physical Properties: Minimum values, unless otherwise indicated, or higher values required to
attain designated fire-resistance ratings, measured per standard test methods referenced with
each property as follows: *R
1. Dry Density: Values for average and individual densities as required for fire-resistance
ratings indicated, per ASTM E 605 or AWCI Technical Manual 12-A, Section 5.4.5,
"Displacement Method," but with an average density of not less than 22 lb/cu. ft. (352
kg"cu. In).
2. Bond Strength: [434 lbf/sq. ft. (21 kPa)] minimum per ASTM E 736.
3. Compressive Strength: [51 lbf/sq. in. (351 kPa)] minimum per ASTM E 761.
4. Dry Density: Values for average and individual densities as required for fire-resistance
ratings indicated, per ASTM E 605 or AWCI Technical Manual 12-A, Section 5.4.5,
"Displacement Method," but with an average density of not less than 39 lb/cu. ft. (625
kg./Cu. to).
5. Bond Strength: [1000 Ibf/sq. ft. (48 kPa)] minimum per ASTM E 736.
6. Compressive Strength: [300 lbf/sq. in. (2067 kPa)]minimum per ASTM E 761.
7. Corrosion Resistance: No evidence of corrosion per ASTM E 937.
8. Deflection: No cracking, spalling, or delamination per ASTM E 759.
9. Effect of Impact on Bonding: No cracking, spalling,or delamination per ASTM E 760.
10. Air Erosion: Maximum weight loss of 0.025 g/sq. ft. (0.270 g/s m)] pper ASTM E 859.
H. Combustion Characteristics: Passes ASTM E 136.
12. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide SFRM with the following surface-burning
characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 by UL or
another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction:
a. Flame-Spread Index: 10 or less
b. Smoke-Developed Index: [0]
13. Fungal Resistance: No observed growth on specimens per ASTM G 21.
2.3 EXPOSED INTUMESCENT MASTIC FIRE-RESISTIVE COATINGS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following:
1. Fire-Resistive, Water-Based, Intumescent Mastic Coating Material:
a. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc.;[Basecoat, Firefilm II and Colorcoat.
b. Albi Manufacturing,Division of StanChem Inc.; Albi Clad TF.
C. Carboline Company, Fireproofing Products Div.; Nullifire S607 and topcoat
provided by manufacturer of basecoat
d. Isolatek International Corp.; Cafco SprayFilm-WB 2 Basecoat and Topseal.
e. Isolatek International Corp.; Cafco SprayFilm-WB 3 Basecoat and [topcoat
B. Fire-Resistive, Intumescent Mastic Coating: Factory-mixed formulation.
1. Water-Based Formulation: Approved by manufacturer and authorities having jurisdiction .w
and investigated for[Interior General] [Conditioned Interior Space] Purpose by UL.
C. Color and Gloss: s selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
w»
APPLIED FIREPROOFING 078100-6
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
1. Dry Density: [15 lb/cu, ft. (240 k(3/cu. m)] for average and individual densities, or
greater if required to attain fire-resistance ratings indicated, per ASTM E 605 or AWCI
Technical Manual 12-A, Section 5.4.5, "Displacement Method."
2. Thickness: Minimum average thickness required for fire-resistance design indicated
according to the following criteria, but not less than 0375 inch (9 mni), per
ASTM E 605:
a. Where the referenced fire-resistance design lists a thickness of 1 inch(25 mm) or
more, the minimum allowable individual thickness of SFRM is the design
thickness minus 0.25 inch(6 mm).
b. Where the referenced fire-resistance design lists a thickness of less than 1 inch (25
mm) but more than 0.375 inch (9 mm), the minimum allowable individual
thickness of SFRM is the greater of 0.375 inch(9 mm) or 75 percent of the design
thickness.
C. No reduction in average thickness is permitted for those fire-resistance designs
whose fire-resistance ratings were established at densities of less than 15 lb/cu. ft.
(240 kg/cu. m).
3. Bond Strength: [150 lbf/sq. ft. (7.2 kPa)] minimum per ASTM E 736 based on
laboratory testing of 0.75-inch(l9-znni)minimum thickness of SFRM.
4. Compressive Strength: [5.21 lbf/sq. in. (35.9 kPa)] minimum per ASTM E 761.
Minimum thickness of SFRM tested shall be 0.75 inch (19 nim) and minimum dry
density shall be as specified but not less than 15 lb/cu. ft. (240 kg.'cli.m).
5. Corrosion Resistance: No evidence of corrosion per ASTM E 937.
6. Deflection: No cracking,spalling,or delamination per ASTM E 759.
7. Effect of Impact on Bonding: No cracking, spalling, or delamination per ASTM E 760.
8. Air Erosion: Maximum weight loss of[0.025 g/sq. ft. (0.270 llsq. m)] in 24 hours per
ASTM E 859. For laboratory tests, minimum thickness of SFRM is 0.75 inch (19 Inn]),
maximum dry density is 15 lb/cu. ft. (240 kg/CLL in),test specimens are not prepurged by
mechanically induced air velocities,and tests are terminated after 24 hours.
9. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide SFRM with the following surface-burning
characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 by UL or
another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction:
a. Flame-Spread Index: 10 or less.
b. Smoke-Developed Index: [0].
10. Fungal Resistance: No observed growth on specimens per ASTM G 21.
2.2 EXPOSED SFRM
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following:
1. Exposed Cementitious SFRM:
a. Carboline Co.,Fireproofing Products Div.;Pyrolite 22.
b. Grace, W.R. &Co. -Conn., Construction Products Div.;Monokote Type Z106G.
C. Isolatek International Corp.;Cafco 400.
d. Southwest Vermiculite Co.,Inc.; 5MD.
B. Material Composition: Manufacturer's standard product, as follows:
1. Exposed Cementitious SFRM: Factory-mixed, dry, cement aggregate formulation; or
chloride-free formulation of gypsum or portland cement binders, additives, and inorganic
APPLIED FIREPROOFING 078100- 5
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Sequence and coordinate application of SFRM with other related work specified in other
Sections to comply with the following requirements:
I. Provide temporary enclosure as required to confine spraying operations and protect the
environment.
2. Provide temporary enclosures for applications to prevent deterioration of fire-resistive
material due to exposure to weather and to unfavorable ambient conditions for humidity, *�*
temperature, and ventilation.
3. Avoid unnecessary exposure of fire-resistive material to abrasion and other damage likely
to occur during construction operations subsequent to its application.
4. Do not apply fire-resistive material to metal floor deck substrates until concrete topping .�
has been completed.
5. Do not begin applying fire-resistive material until clips, hangers, supports, sleeves, and
other items penetrating fire protection are in place.
6. Defer installing ducts, piping, and other items that would interfere with applying fire-
resistive material until application of fire protection is completed.
7. Do not install enclosing or concealing construction until after fire-resistive material has
been applied, inspected, and tested and corrections have been made to defective
applications.
up
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by Contractor and by Installer, in go
which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace SFRMs that fail in materials or workmanship
within specified warranty period.
so
PART 2- PRODUCTS
w
2.1 CONCEALED SFRM
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following:
1. Concealed Cementitious SFRM:
a. Carboline Co.,Fireproofing Products Div.; Pyrolite 15 High Yield.
b. Grace, W. R. &Co. -Conn., Construction Products Div.; Monokote Type MK-6.
C. Isolatek International Corp.; Cafco 300.
d. Southwest Vermiculite Co., Inc.; Type 5.
B. Material Composition: Manufacturer's standard product.
I. Concealed Cementitious SFRM: Factory-mixed, dry formulation of gypsum or portland
cement binders, additives, and lightweight mineral or synthetic aggregates mixed with
water at Project site to form a slurry or mortar for conveyance and application.
C. Physical Properties: Minimum values, unless otherwise indicated, or higher values required to
attain designated fire-resistance ratings, measured per standard test methods referenced with
each property as follows:
APPLIED FIREPROOFING 078100-4
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
E. Provide products containing no detectable asbestos as determined according to the method
specified in 40 CFR 763, Subpart E,Appendix E,Section 1, "Polarized Light Microscopy."
F. Mockups: Apply mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects [and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Extent of Mockups: Approximately 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m) of surface for each product
indicated.
2. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
u. Substantial Completion.
G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures
related to SFRM including,but not limited to,the following:
1. Review products, exposure conditions, design ratings, restrained and unrestrained
conditions, calculations, densities, thicknesses, bond strengths, and other performance
requirements.
2. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify sequencing and coordination
requirements.
3. Review weather predictions, ambient conditions, and proposed temporary protections for
SFRM during and after installation.
4. Review surface conditions and preparations.
5. Review field quality-control testing procedures.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to Project site in original, unopened packages with intact and legible
manufacturers' labels identifying product and manufacturer, date of manufacture, shelf life if
applicable,and fire-resistance ratings applicable to Project.
B. Use materials with limited shelf life within period indicated. Remove from Project site and
discard materials whose shelf life has expired.
C. Store materials inside, under cover, and aboveground; keep dry until ready for use. Remove
from Project site and discard wet or deteriorated materials.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply SFRM when ambient or substrate temperature is
40 deg F {4 deg Cj or lower unless temporary protection and heat are provided to maintain
temperature at or above this level for 24 hours before, during, and for 24 hours after product
+* application.
B. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces during and after application of SFRM. Use natural
means or, if they are inadequate, forced-air circulation until fire-resistive material dries
thoroughly.
APPLIED FIREPROOFING 078100-3
wee
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA up
steel joists tested at lower maximum tensile stress than those indicated are
not permitted.
b. Minimum thicknesses needed to achieve required fire-resistance ratings of
structural components and assemblies.
3. Treatment of SFRM after application.
p�uu
C. Product Certificates: For each type of SFRM, signed by product manufacturer.
D. Qualification Data: For Installer and testing agency.
E. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From SFRM manufacturer indicating the following:
I. Materials have been tested for bond with substrates.
2. Materials have been verified by SFRM manufacturer to be compatible with substrate w!
primers and coatings.
3. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate
preparation needed for adhesion. �*
F. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
testing agency, for proposed SFRM.
G. Research/Evaluation Reports: For SFRM.
H. Field quality-control test and special inspection reports.
I. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual certified, licensed, or otherwise qualified by
SFRM manufacturer as experienced and with sufficient trained staff to install manufacturer's
products according to specified requirements. A manufacturer's willingness to sell its SFRM to
Contractor or to an installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on the
buyer.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain SFRM through one source from a single manufacturer. wet,
C. SFRM Testing: By a qualified testing and inspecting agency engaged by Contractor or
manufacturer to test for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test
methods.
D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide SFRM with the fire-test-response characteristics
indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or
another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify
bags containing SFRM with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
I. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance
Directory", FM's "Approval Guide, Building Materials" and acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, for SFRM serving as direct-applied protection tested per
ASTM E 119.
2. Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84.
APPLIED FIREPROOFING 078100-2
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
!* Northampton,MA
SECTION 078100-APPLIED FIREPROOFING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
_ A. This Section includes the following:
1. Concealed SFRM.
2. Exposed SFRM.
3. Exposed intumescent mastic fire-resistive coatings.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 05 Section "Structural Steel Framing" for surface conditions required for
structural steel receiving SFRM.
2. Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for fire-resistance-rated firestopping
systems.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. SFRM: Sprayed fire-resistive material.
B. Concealed: Fire-resistive materials applied to surfaces that are concealed from view behind
other construction when the Work is completed and have not been defined as exposed..
C. Exposed: Fire-resistive materials applied to surfaces that are exposed to view when the Work is
an completed,that are accessible through suspended ceilings,that are in elevator shafts and
machine rooms ,that are in mechanical rooms.
!" 1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Structural framing plans indicating the following:
1. Locations and types of surface preparations required before applying SFRM.
2. Extent of SFRM for each construction and fire-resistance rating,including the following:
a. Applicable fire-resistance design designations of a qualified testing and inspecting
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1) For steel joist assemblies, include applicable fire-resistance design
designations, with each steel joist tested with the same maximum tensile
stress as each steel joist indicated on Drawings. Design designations with
APPLIED FIREPROOFING 078100- 1
s
No
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA up
2. Attach safety railing system to roof hatch curb.
3. Attach ladder safety post according to manufacturer's written instructions. op
F. Seal joints with elastomeric or butyl sealant as required by manufacturer of roof accessories.
3.3 TOUCH UP
A. Touch up factory-primed surfaces with compatible primer ready for field painting in accordance
with Division 09 painting Sections.
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair
galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions.
7200
w�
w
w
am
ROOF ACCESSORIES 077200-4
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
B. Safety Railing System: Roof-hatch manufacturer's standard system including rails, clamps,
fasteners, safety barrier at railing opening, and accessories required for a complete installation;
attached to roof hatch and complying with 29 CFR 1910.23 requirements and authorities having
jurisdiction.
1. Height: 42 inches(1O60 mm)above finished roof deck.
2. Posts and Rails: Galvanized-steel pipe, 1-1/4 inches (31 ,rim) in diameter or galvanized-
steel tube, 1-5/8 inches(41 mm)in diameter.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations,
dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of work.
1. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely
anchored and is ready to receive roof accessories.
2. Verify dimensions of roof openings for roof accessories.
3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install roof accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions. Anchor roof
accessories securely in place and capable of resisting forces specified. Use fasteners,
separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for completing roof accessory
installation. Install roof accessories to resist exposure to weather without failing, rattling,
leaking,and fastener disengagement.
B. Install roof accessories to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance.
C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates,
wp protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other
permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.
1. Coat concealed side of uncoated aluminum roof accessories with bituminous coating
where in contact with wood,ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.
2. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required by roof accessory
manufacturer for waterproof performance. Coordinate roofing cement type and
application with roofing membrane manufacturer's requirements.
D. Install roof accessories level, plumb, true to line and elevation, and without warping, jogs in
alignment, excessive oil canning,buckling, or tool marks.
E. Roof Hatch Installation:
I. Check roof hatch for proper operation. Adjust operating mechanism as required. Clean
and lubricate joints and hardware.
ROOF ACCESSORIES 077200-3
w
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of roof accessories with roofing membrane and base flashing w.
and interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a leakproof, weathertight, secure, and
noncorrosive installation.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Provide manufacturer's standard warranty for pre-manufactured roof hatch.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers
listed in other Part 2 articles.
2.2 ROOF HATCHES .,
A. Roof Hatches: Fabricate roof hatches with insulated double-wall lids and insulated double-wall
curb frame with integral deck mounting flange and lid frame counterflashing. Fabricate with
welded and sealed corner joints. Provide continuous weathertight perimeter gasketing and
equip with corrosion-resistant hardware.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Bilco Company(The).
b. Or approved equal
2. Loads: Fabricate roof hatches to withstand 40-lbf/sq. ft. (1.9-0a)external and 20-lbf/sq.
ft. (0.95-kPa)internal loads.
3. Type and Size: Single-leaf lid, 30 by 36 inches(750 by 900 mm.
4. Select one material and thickness from three subparagraphs below. If Project requires
more than one metal type, indicate different metal types on Drawings or by inserts.
5. Curb and Lid Material: Aluminum sheet, 0.090 inch(2.28 mm)thick minimum.
a. Finish: Mill.
6. Insulation: Polyisocyanurate board.
7. Hatch Lid: Opaque, insulated, and double walled, with manufacturer's standard metal
liner of same material and finish as outer metal lid.
8. Interior Lid Liner: Manufacturer's standard metal liner of same material and finish as
outer metal lid. w�
9. Curb Liner: Manufacturer's standard, of same material and finish as metal curb.
10. Curb height for roof hatch may be determined by adding thickness of roof insulation and
minimum base flashing height recommended by roofing membrane manufacturer.
11. Fabricate units to minimum height of 18 inches(300 mm), unless otherwise indicated.
12. Hardware: Stainless-steel spring latch with turn handles, butt- or pintle-type hinge
system, and padlock hasps inside and outside.
ROOF ACCESSORIES
077200-2
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
SECTION 077200-ROOF ACCESSORIES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
wo
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
I. Roof hatches.
so B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for metal vertical ladders for access to roof
hatches.
2. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for roof sheathing, wood cants, and wood nailers.
No 1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of roof accessory indicated. Include construction details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles,and finishes.
B. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sheet Metal Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" details
for fabrication of units, including flanges and cap flashing to coordinate with type of roofing
indicated.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Pack, handle, and ship roof accessories properly labeled in heavy-duty packaging to prevent
damage.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify required openings for each type of roof accessory by field
measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
ws
ROOF ACCESSORIES 077200- 1
w
IM
APPLICATION FOR ACCEPTANCE OF ROOFING SYSTEM F al
ON FM Global OFFICE REVIEW
(Please leave blank for FM Global Office Review)
WIND:
Design Wind Speed: (mph) Ground Terrain: ❑ B ❑C ❑ D
Ratin lift U
Uplift Pressure in field: (psf) p 9 Required:
Adequate Uplift Rating Provided: Adequate? ❑Yes ❑No
FIRE:
Internal Assembly Rating: ❑Class 1 ❑Class 2 ❑ Non-Combustible
External Fire Rating: ❑ Class A ❑ Class B ❑ Class C ❑ None
Concealed Spaces? ❑Yes ❑ No S rinklers below Roof? ❑Yes ❑ No
Adequate? ❑Yes ❑ No
HAIL:
Hail Rating Needed? ❑ SH ❑ MH ❑ None Hail Rating Provided? ❑ SH ❑ MH ❑ None
Adequate? ❑Yes ❑ No
COLLAPSE:
If standing seam, has collapse been reviewed? El ❑ No
COMMENTS:
Reviewed By:
Date:
FM Global Field Review:
(Leave blank for on-site review by FM Global Loss prevention Consultant):
fm
rw
System installed per reviewed/accepted plans? ❑Yes ❑ No
If no, explain:
Installation witnessed by FM Global? ❑Yes ❑ No
Uplift test needed? ❑Yes ❑ No
(Uplift testing is REQUIRED for applicable new and recover roofs in hurricane, typhoon or tropical cyclone prone regions(see DS 1-
29 and 1-52 for more information)
Uplift testing satisfactorily completed ❑Yes ❑ No ❑DNA
If yes, note pressures held for the: Field Perimeter Corners
If no, explain and provide required and obtained uplift pressures and other details and attach to this form.
aw
Reviewed By:
Date:
ww
on
X2688 ENGINEERING(Rev.Feb 2007)
on
APPLICATION FOR ACCEPTANCE OF ROOFING SYSTEM F al
DECK:
Please include manufacturer, type,yield strength, thickness/ a e, etc.
❑ Steel:
o, ❑ LWIC(Form Deck): ❑Cementitious Wood Fiber:
❑ Concrete: ❑ Pre-cast panels or ❑ Cast in Place
❑Wood
❑ Fiber Reinforced Cement I ❑ Fiber Reinforced Plastic
❑ Gypsum: ❑ Plank I ❑ Poured
❑Other:
Comments:
po ROOF STRUCTURE(Include Size,Gage,Etc.):
❑ Purlins ❑ "C OR ❑"Z
❑Joists ❑Wood OR ❑ Steel
❑ Beams ❑Wood OR ❑ Steel
E] Other:
Spacing: Field: Perimeter: Corners:
Comments:
IW FASTENERS USED IN ROOF ASSEMBLY:
Roof Cover Fasteners: Trade Name: Length: Diameter:
Stress Plate/Batten:
Spacing: Field: X Perimeter: X Corners: X
r, Insulation Fasteners:Trade Name: Type:
Size: Stress Plate:
Spacing: Field: Perimeter: Corners:
Deck Or Roof Panels Fasteners:
Trade Name: Type:
Length: Size Washer:
If Weld: Size: Weld: Washer:
XW Deck Side Lap Fasteners: Field: X Perimeter: X Corners: X
Spacing: Field: X Perimeter: X Corners: X
Base Sheet Fasteners
Trade Name: Type:
Head Diameter: Length:
Spacing: (Attached Sketches as necessary)
Spacing Along Laps: Field: Perimeter: Corners:
No. Intermediate Rows: Field: Perimeter: Corners:
Spacing Along Intermediate Rows: Field: Perimeter: Corners:
PERIMETER FLASHING:
Attach a detailed sketch of metal fascia, gravel stop, nailer, co in , etc.
❑ FM Approved Flashing ❑ Per FM Global Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49
❑ Other: Comments:
DRAINAGE:
For new construction: Has roof drainage been designed by a Qualified Engineer per FM Global Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-54
and the local building code?❑Yes❑ No Attach details
For re-roofing and recovering: will the roof drainage be changed from the original design(for example:drain inserts, drains
covered or removed, new expansion joints,blocked or reduced scupper size? ❑Yes❑ No
If yes,were the changes reviewed by a Qualified Engineer?❑Yes❑ No Attach details
Is secondary(emergency)roof drainage provided per FM Global Data Sheet 1-54?❑Yes❑ No Attach details
Signature of Property Owner:
Title: Date:
40
Signature of Installing Contractor:
Title: Date:
10
X2688 ENGINEERING(Rev.Feb 2007)
APPLICATION FOR ACCEPTANCE OF ROOFING SYSTEM F al
CONTACT INFORMATION: INDEX NUMBER:
ROOFING CONTRACTOR(NAME&ADDRESS) TELEPHONE NO.: FAX:
E-MAIL ADDRESS: CONTACT:
CLIENT(NAME&ADDRESS) TELEPHONE NO.: FAX:
E-MAIL ADDRESS: CONTACT:
OVERVIEW OF WORK: (Submit 1 form per roof area)
Building Name&Number:
MR Building Dimensions: Length: ft/m; Width: ft/m.; Height ft/m.
Roof Slope:
Parapet Height,max(in./m): Parapet Height,min(in/m):
Type of Work: ❑ New Construction ❑ Recover(New roof over existing Roofing System)
❑ Reroof New cover/remove existing roofing system to deck ❑Other
FM Approved RoofNav Assembly Numbers:
ROOF SURFACING:
❑ None
❑Coating (Trade Name/Application Rate)
❑Granules (Application Rate)
so ❑ Gravel/Slag (Application Rate)
❑ Ballast: ❑ Stone Size ❑ Pavers (Beveled or square edge); ❑ Other:
Ballast Weight(psf): Field: Perimeter: Corners:
ROOF COVER/MEMBRANE:
Please provide ALL applicable details including trade name, type, number of plies, thickness, reinforced, adhesive
❑ Panel: ❑Through Fastened Metal
❑ Standing Seam metal
❑ Fiber Reinforced Plastic(FRP)
❑Other:
❑ Built Up Roofing(BUR)
❑Modified Bitumen
❑ Single Ply: ❑Adhered ❑ Fastened ❑Ballasted
❑ Spray Applied
❑ Other:
BASE SHEET:
PIP Please include Trade Name, Type, and Width
❑ None
Trade Name: Width: ❑ 36 In. ❑ 1 meter(39 In.)
❑ Fastened ❑Adhered
❑ Secured per RoofNav OR Per FM Global Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-29
Comments:
❑Air Retarder
❑Vapor Retarder
INSULATION
Layer Trade Name Thickness Fastened Adhered Tapered
In.
Iwe 1.Top ❑ ❑ ❑
2. Next ❑ ❑ ❑
3. Next ❑ ❑ ❑
4. Next ❑ ❑ ❑
❑ Glass Fiber/Mineral Wool/Batt ❑ Facer Type/Vapor Barrier
❑Thermal Barrier
❑ Other:
❑ None
+I
X2688 ENGINEERING(Rev.Feb 2007)
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
B. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to
inspect roofing installation on completion.
C. Repair or remove and replace components of membrane roofing system where inspections
indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.
D. Additional inspections, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of
replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
3.9 PROTECTING AND CLEANING
A. Protect membrane roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction
period. When remaining construction will not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for
deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to
Architect and Owner.
B. Correct deficiencies in or remove membrane roofing system that does not comply with
requirements; repair substrates; and repair or reinstall membrane roofing system to a condition
free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty
requirements.
C. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures
recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.
END OF SECTION 075423
FM IA-60 THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN(TPO)ROOFING 075423 - 10
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 288')
�w Northampton,MA
1. Fasten roof membrane to top flanges of steel deck according to recommendations in
FM Approvals' "RoofNav" and FM Global Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-29 for
specified Windstorm Resistance Classification.
2. In the roof corners and perimeter, ensure the distance between rows of roof cover
batten bars are the following maximum percentages of the FM Approved spacing.
a. Roof Perimeter: Distance between rows is <60% of the FM Approved roof field
spacing or one row of intermediate fasteners is provided in between.
b. Roof Corners: Distance between rows is <_ 40% of the FM Approved roof field
spacing or two rows of intermediate fasteners are provided in between. Apply
membrane roofing with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible.
E. In-Seam Attachment: Secure one edge of TPO sheet using fastening plates or metal battens
centered within membrane seam and mechanically fasten TPO sheet to roof deck.
F. Seams: Clean seam areas, overlap membrane roofing, and hot-air weld side and end laps of
membrane roofing and sheet flashings according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure
a watertight seam installation.
I. Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply lap sealant to seal cut
edges of sheet membrane.
2. Verify field strength of seams a minimum of twice daily and repair seam sample areas.
3. Repair tears,voids, and lapped seams in roofing that does not comply with requirements.
G. Spread sealant bed over deck drain flange at roof drains and securely seal membrane roofing in
place with clamping ring.
.n
3.6 BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrates according to
membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with cured or uncured sheet
flashing.
C. Clean seam areas, overlap, and firmly roll sheet flashings into the adhesive. Hot-air weld side
and end laps to ensure a watertight seam installation.
3.7 WALKWAY INSTALLATION
A. Flexible Walkways: Install walkway products in locations indicated. Heat weld to substrate or
adhere walkway products to substrate with compatible adhesive according to roofing system
manufacturer's written instructions.
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Owner may engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and
+ * inspections.
e�
FM IA-60 THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN(TPO)ROOFING 075423 -9
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA ,■,
1. Fasten substrate board to top flanges of steel deck according to recommendations in
FM Approvals' "RoofNav" and FM Global Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-29 for .�
specified Windstorm Resistance Classification.
3.4 INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate installing membrane roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to
precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday. w,
B. Comply with membrane roofing system and insulation manufacturer's written instructions for
installing roof insulation.
1. Fasten insulation to top flanges of steel deck according to recommendations in FM
Approvals' "RoofNav" and FM Global Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-29 for
specified Windstorm Resistance Classification. *�+
2. Preliminary securement of the roof insulation boards for the mechanically fastened,
single ply membrane, roof covering system in the warehouse should be provided
using FM Approved fasteners specifically listed for the board. A minimum of two w
(2) fasteners should be used for boards having any one dimension no greater than 4
ft., and four (4) fasteners should be used for boards having any one dimension
greater than 4 ft. Fastening for the membrane should be increased at the corners
and perimeter as described in FM Global Property Loss Prevention DataSheet 1-29.
C. Install insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Where overall insulation
thickness is 2.7 inches (68 mm) or greater, install two or more layers with joints of each
succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches (I 50 mm) in
each direction.
D. Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush and does
not restrict flow of water.
3.5 MECHANICALLY FASTENED MEMBRANE ROOFING INSTALLATION
A. Mechanically fasten membrane roofing over area to receive roofing and install according to
roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
I. For in-splice attachment, install membranes roofing with long dimension perpendicular to
steel roof deck flutes.
B. Start installation of membrane roofing in presence of roofing system manufacturer's technical
personnel.
C. Accurately align membrane roofing and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum
dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps.
w
D. Mechanically fasten roofing securely at terminations, penetrations, and perimeter of roofing.
FM IA-60 THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN(TPO)ROOFING 075423 - 8
on
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
an Northampton,MA
2.6 WALKWAYS
A. Flexible Walkways: Factory-formed, nonporous, heavy-duty, slip-resisting, surface-textured
walkway pads or rolls, approximately 3116 inch (5 mm) thick, and acceptable to membrane
roofing system manufacturer.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with the
following requirements and other conditions affecting performance of roofing system:
1. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place and curbs are set and braced and
that roof drain bodies are securely clamped in place.
2. Verify that wood blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at
penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation.
3. Verify that surface plane flatness and fastening of steel roof deck complies with
requirements in Division 05 Section "Steel Decking."
4. Verify that minimum concrete drying period recommended by roofing system
manufacturer has passed.
5. Verify that concrete substrate is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary
moisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263.
+ 6. Verify that concrete curing compounds that will impair adhesion of roofing components
to roof deck have been removed.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate of dust,debris,moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing installation
according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp projections.
B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or
migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is taking
place or when rain is forecast.
C. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from
entering completed sections of roofing system at the end of the workday or when rain is
forecast. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing.
on 3.3 SUBSTRATE BOARD
A. Install substrate board with long joints in continuous straight lines, perpendicular to roof slopes
with end joints staggered between rows. Tightly butt substrate boards together.
w
10
FM IA-60 THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN(TPO)ROOFING 075423 -7
ON
OR
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA up
1. SecurEdge l Piece Gravel Stop: a 22 gauge, 12 foot long, pre-punched 90 degree angle
cleat and 12 foot long fascia section. Available in .040 mil, thick Kynar 500, clear and ow
colored anodized finish or 24 gauge steel, Kynar 500 finish. Metal fascia color shall be
as designated by the Owner's Representative.
2. Carlisle Termination Bar: a 1 inch wide and .098 inch thick extruded aluminum bar pre-
punched 6 inches on center; incorporates a sealant ledge to support Lap Sealant and
provide increased stability for membrane terminations.
E. Lightning Protection: Provide manufacturer's standard flashing arrangement or preformed
flashing unit acceptable to the manufacturer at lightning protection air terminals and cable
penetrations.
I. All Lightning protection details must meet the requirements of FM IA-60.
2.3 SUBSTRATE BOARDS
w�
A. Substrate Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, Type X gypsum board, 5/8 inch(16 mm)thick.
B. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion-
resistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening substrate board to roof
deck.
ww
2.4 ROOF INSULATION
A. General: Preformed roof insulation boards manufactured or approved by TPO membrane
roofing manufacturer, selected from manufacturer's standard sizes suitable for application, of
thicknesses indicated and that produce FM Approvals-approved roof insulation.
B. Poly isocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type I1, Class 1, Grade 2, felt or glass-fiber
mat facer on both major surfaces.
C. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where
indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated.
2.5 INSULATION ACCESSORIES
A. General: Furnish roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for
intended use and compatibility with membrane roofing.
B. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion-
resistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation to substrate,
and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.
a. <Insert manufacturer's name;product name or designation>.
FM IA-60 THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN(TPO)ROOFING 075423 -6
a.
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
2. Thickness: 60 mils(1.5 imn ,nominal.
3. Exposed Face Color: White .
2.2 AUXILIARY MEMBRANE ROOFING MATERIALS
A. General: Auxiliary membrane roofing materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer
for intended use, and compatible with membrane roofing. All products shall be furnished by
Carlisle and specifically formulated for the intended purpose.
1. Bonding Adhesive: Sure-Weld(where part of mechanically attached assembly)
2. Edge Sealant: Cut Edge Sealant(where part of mechanically attached assembly)
3. Sealer: Water Cut-Off Mastic and PT 304 Sealant
4. Pocket Sealant: TPO Molded Pocket Sealant
5. Cleaner: Carlisle Weathered Membrane Cleaner
6. Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having
jurisdiction.
7. Adhesives and sealants that are not on the exterior side of weather barrier shall comply
with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59,
Subpart D(EPA Method 24):
B. Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's standard unreinforced thermoplastic polyolefin sheet flashing,
55 mils (1 A min)thick, minimum, of same color as sheet membrane.
C. Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's products required for the specified FM classtification:
1. HP-X Fasteners: A heavy duty 415 threaded fastener with a phillips head used for
membrane securement into steel deck.
2. HP-Xtra Fasteners: An oversized diameter (.315") steel threaded fastenerused in
conjunction with Piranha Xtra Plates for membrane securement into steel or wood decks.
3. InsulFast Fasteners: A threaded #12 fastener with #3 phillips head used for insulation
attachment only into steel decks.
4. Piranha Plates: A 2-3/8 inch diameter metal barbed fastening plate used with Carlisle
Fasteners for membrane securement. This plate can be used for insulation securement.
5. Piranha Xtra Plates: A 2-3/8 inch diameter metal barbed fastening plate with an oversized
hole for use with Carlisle HP-Xtra Fasteners for membrane securement. This plate can
be used for insulation securement.
6. Insulation Fastening Plates: a nominal 3 inch diameter metal plate used for insulation
attachment with the appropriate Carlisle Fastener.
7. Sure-Seal Pressure-Sensitive RUSSTM (Reinforced Universal Securement Strip): a 6"or
w 9" wide, nominal 45-mil thick clean, cured black reinforced EPDM membrane with 3"
wide Factory-Applied Tape (FAT) laminated along one edge for the 6" wide RUSS and
along both edges for the 9"wide RUSS.
8. 6" wide Pressure-Sensitive RUSS is used horizontally or vertically at the base of walls,
curbs, etc., in conjunction with 2" diameter Fastening Plates below the EPDM deck
membrane for additional membrane securement (Polymer Seam Plates are required for
steel decks).
9. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet
flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, T-joint covers, lap
sealants,termination reglets,and other accessories.
D. Termination Bars: Provide termination and edge bars required to for the specifie
classification.
FM IA-60 THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO)ROOFING 075423 -5
on
w.
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled
with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, approval or
listing agency markings, and directions for storing and mixing with other components.
•
B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location
and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored
liquid material from direct sunlight. ,,
C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight,
moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation
manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.
D. Handle and store roofing materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent
deflection of deck. .�
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions
and warranty requirements.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard or customized form, without monetary limitation, in
which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of membrane roofing system that op
fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Special warranty includes membrane roofing, base flashings, roof insulation, fasteners,
substrate board, and roofing accessories, and other components of membrane roofing
system.
2. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.
so
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
■u
2.1 TPO MEMBRANE ROOFING
A. Fabric-Reinforced Thermoplastic Polyolefin Sheet: ASTM D 6878, internally fabric or scrim 1•
reinforced, uniform, flexible[fabric backed] TPO sheet.
B. Basis of Design Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, vailable No
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not
limited to, the following:
a. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated. so
b. Or approved equal.
■w
FM IA-60 THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN(TPO)ROOFING 075423 -4
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
Northampton,MA
G. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer
and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for components of membrane roofing system.
H. Field quality-control reports.
I. Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in maintenance manuals.
J. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is FM Approvals approved for
membrane roofing system identical to that used for this Project.
go B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by membrane
roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive
manufacturer's special warranty.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain components including roof insulation, fastenersfor membrane
roofing system from same manufacturer as membrane roofing or approved by membrane
roofing manufacturer].
w
D. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: ASTM E 108, Class A; for application and roof slopes indicated,
as determined by testing identical membrane roofing materials by a qualified testing agency.
Materials shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
E. Preliminary Roofing Conference: Before starting roof deck construction, conduct conference at
Project site.
1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, testing and inspecting agency
representative, roofing Installer, roofing system manufacturer's representative, deck
Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects roofing, including installers
of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment.
2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including manufacturer's
written instructions.
3. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's
personnel,equipment,and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.
4. Review deck substrate requirements for conditions and finishes, including flatness and
OR fastening.
5. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing.
6. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations,
equipment curbs,and condition of other construction that will affect roofing system.
7. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if
applicable.
8. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after
installation.
9. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation.
FM IA-60 THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN(TPO)ROOFING 075423 -3
ON
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA IM,
C. FM Approvals Listing: Provide membrane roofing, base flashings, and component materials
that comply with requirements in FM Approvals 4450 and FM Approvals 4470 as part of a as
membrane roofing system, and that are listed in FM Approvals' "RoofNav" for Class l or
noncombustible construction, as applicable. Identify materials with FM Approvals markings.
1. Fire/Windstorm Classification: Class 1A-60.
2. Hail Resistance: [MH] [SH].
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1. In addition to the Architect's review, FM (Factory Mutual) will be reviewing the
submittal.
2. Submit FM Globals "APPLICTION FOR ACCEPTANCE OF ROOFING
SYSTEM". A blank copy is attached at the end of this Section. A copy in MS Word
can be provided to the Contractor upon request.
B. LEED Submittals:
.w
I. Product Data for Credit SS 7.2: For roof materials, indicating that roof materials comply
with Solar Reflectance Index requirement.
2. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For adhesives and sealants, including printed statement .A
of VOC content.
C. Shop Drawings: For roofing system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
attachments to other work.
I. Base flashings and membrane terminations.
2. Tapered insulation, including slopes.
3. Roof plan showing orientation of steel roof deck and orientation of membrane roofing
and fastening spacings and patterns for mechanically fastened membrane roofing.
4. Insulation fastening patterns for corner, perimeter, and field-of-roof locations.
D. Samples for Verification: For the following products:
1. Sheet roofing,of color specified, including T-shaped side and end lap seam.
2. Roof insulation.
3. Walkway pads or rolls.
4. Metal termination bars.
5. Battens.
6. Six insulation fasteners of each type, length, and finish.
7. Six roof cover fasteners of each type, length, and finish. ,w
E. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and manufacturer.
F. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by roofing manufacturer certifying that roofing system
complies with requirements specified in "Performance Requirements" Article.
l. Submit evidence of compliance with performance requirements.
FM IA-60 THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN(TPO)ROOFING 075423 -2
.o
Me-
to
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
SECTION 075423—FM IA-60 THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN(TPO)ROOFING
PART I -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Mechanically fastened TPO membrane roofing system.
2. Roof insulation.
B. Additional requirements for the TPO membrane roofing system specified include:
1. Factory Mutual IA-60 classified assembly.
2. System is part of a 1 hour rated roof assembly,UL Design P701.
C. Related Sections:
1. Division 06 Section"Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers,curbs,and blocking.
2. Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for metal roof penetration
flashings, flashings, and counter flashings.
3. Division 26 Section Electrical for coordination of roofing with the lightning protection
system.
on 1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. TPO: Thermoplastic polyolefin.
B. Roofing Terminology: See ASTM D 1079 and glossary in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and
Waterproofing Manual" for definitions of terms related to roofing work in this Section.
t*�
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General Performance: Installed membrane roofing and base flashings shall withstand specified
uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to
defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Membrane
roofing and base flashings shall remain watertight.
B. Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible with one another under
conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by membrane roofing
manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
FM IA-60 THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN(TPO)ROOFING 075423 - 1
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates,
40 protect against galvanic action as recommended by metal wall panel manufacturer.
C. Joint Sealers: Install gaskets,joint fillers, and sealants where indicated and where required for
weathertight performance of metal wall panel assemblies. Provide types of gaskets, fillers, and
sealants indicated or, if not indicated,types recommended by metal wall panel manufacturer.
3.3 INSULATED-CORE METAL WALL PANEL INSTALLATION
A. General: Apply continuous ribbon of sealant to panel joint on concealed side of insulated-core
metal wall panels as vapor seal; apply sealant to panel joint on exposed side of panels for
weather seal.
B. Foamed-Insulation-Core Metal Wall Panels: Fasten metal wall panels to supports with
40 concealed clips at each joint at location and spacing and with fasteners recommended by
manufacturer. Fully engage tongue and groove of adjacent panels.
3.4 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting and
provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components.
B. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation
ON instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners
where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps,joints,
and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant.
40
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
!*� A. Inspection Agency: The project is subject to inspection by FM Global..
3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal wall panels are
installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On
completion of metal wall panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal
wall panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.
► B. After metal wall panel installation, clear weep holes and drainage channels of obstructions, dirt,
and sealant.
C. Replace metal wall panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful
repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
++ END OF SECTION 074216
INSULATED-CORE METAL WALL PANELS 074216- 7
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
Northampton, MA
Provide flashing and trim as required to seal against weather and to provide finished
appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, bases, drips, sills, jambs, corners, ■
endwalls, framed openings, rakes, fasciae, parapet caps, soffits, reveals, and fillers. Finish
flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal wall panels.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate and finish metal wall panels and accessories at the factory to greatest extent
possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated
performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles
and with dimensional and structural requirements.
B. Fabricate metal wall panels in a manner that eliminates condensation on interior side of panel
and with joints between panels designed to form weathertight seals.
C. Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full
length of panel.
D. Fabricate metal wall panel joints with factory-installed captive gaskets or separator strips that
provide a tight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, in a manner that will minimize noise
from movements within panel assembly.
E. Sheet Metal Accessories: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in
SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions, metal,
and other characteristics of item indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances, metal wall panel supports, and other conditions
affecting performance of work.
B. Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating metal wall panels to verify actual
locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of metal wall panels before metal wall panel
installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 METAL WALL PANEL INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. General: Install metal wall panels according to manufacturer's written instructions in
orientation, sizes, and locations indicated on Drawings. Install panels perpendicular to girts and
subgirts unless otherwise indicated. Anchor metal wall panels and other components of the
Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement.
INSULATED-CORE METAL WALL PANELS 074216-6
M.
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
40 Northampton,MA
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 BASIS OF DESIGN
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:Benchmark Architectural Systems,part of Kingspan Metal Panels.
B. Basis of Design:
1. Panel Type IA:Designwall H-Wave
2. Panel Type IB:Designwall H-Wave
3. Panel Type IV:Designwall 2000. Located behind raised character signage.
2.2 PANEL MATERIALS
A. Panel Thickness:3 inches.
B. Panel Exterior:26 gage, smooth aluminum zinc-coated steel.
eur
C. Core: Foamed-in-place urethane with nominal density of 2.0-2.6 lbs./cu.ft.
1. R-Value: 27,per ASTM C-1363
D. Interior Panel: 26 Gage aluminum-zinc coated steel with 26 gage embossed face.
E. Panel Exterior Finish:PVDF, 1.0 mil. Formulation in Mica or Metalic Finish.
1. Color Panel Type IA: "Bright Silver"
2. Color Panel Type IA: Medium Gray
gas
F. Panel Interior Finish: Manufacturer's standard.
2.3 FOAMED-INSULATION-CORE METAL WALL PANELS
A. General: Provide factory-formed and -assembled metal wall panels fabricated from two metal
facing sheets and insulation core foamed in place during fabrication, and with joints between
40 panels designed to form weathertight seals. Include accessories required for weathertight
installation.
B. Concealed-Fastener, Foamed-Insulation-Core Metal Wall Panels Formed with tongue-and-
groove panel edges; designed for sequential installation by interlocking panel edges and
mechanically attaching panels to supports using concealed clips or fasteners.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Wall Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete metal wall panel
assembly including trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, flashings, sealants,
gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal wall panels
unless otherwise indicated.
B. Flashing and Trim: Formed from 0.018-inch- 0.46-mni-) minimum thickness, zinc-coated
(galvanized) steel sheet or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating.
INSULATED-CORE METAL WALL PANELS 074216-5
00
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
C. Stack metal wall panels horizontally on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight
and ventilated covering. Store metal wall panels to ensure dryness, with positive slope for
drainage of water. Do not store metal wall panels in contact with other materials that might
cause staining, denting, or other surface damage.
D. Retain strippable protective covering on metal wall panel for period of metal wall panel
installation.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit assembly of metal wall panels to be performed according to manufacturers'
written instructions and warranty requirements.
B. Field Measurements: Verify locations of structural members and wall opening dimensions by
field measurements before metal wall panel fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop
Drawings.
w
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate metal wall panel assemblies with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, and
construction of other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive
installation.
go
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or OR
replace components of metal wall panel assemblies that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
I. Failures include, but are not limited to,the following: !
a. Structural failures including rupturing, cracking, or puncturing.
b. Deterioration of metals and other materials beyond normal weathering.
2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer
agrees to repair finish or replace metal wall panels that show evidence of deterioration of
factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.
1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to,the following:
a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244.
b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214.
C. Cracking, checking,peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.
I. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
s
rNw
INSULATED-CORE METAL WALL PANELS 074216-4
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
+ * Northampton,MA
J. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.
- 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of metal wall panel from single source from single
manufacturer.
1. IT IS THE INTENT OF THE PROJECT TO HAVE THE MANUFACTURER OF
INSULATED CORE METAL WALL PANELS TO BE THE SAME
MANUFACTURER OF THE METAL WALL PANELS SPECIFIED IN SECTION 07
42 13 TO ENSURE MATCHING OF THE FINISH.
C. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide metal wall panels identical to those of
assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a qualified testing agency. Identify
products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
D. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation. Refer to
Section 01 40 01-Mock-Up Requirements
E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. .
1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, testing and inspecting agency
representative, metal wall panel Installer, metal wall panel manufacturer's representative,
e structural-support Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects metal
wall panels including installers of doors,windows,and louvers.
2. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's
personnel,equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.
3. Review methods and procedures related to metal wall panel installation, including
manufacturer's written instructions.
4. Examine support conditions for compliance with requirements, including alignment
between and attachment to structural members.
5. Review flashings, special siding details, wall penetrations, openings, and condition of
other construction that will affect metal wall panels.
w 6. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance, certificates, and tests and
inspections if applicable.
7. Review temporary protection requirements for metal wall panel assembly during and
after installation.
8. Review wall panel observation and repair procedures after metal wall panel installation.
" 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Deliver components, sheets, metal wall panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be
damaged or deformed. Package metal wall panels for protection during transportation and
handling.
B. Unload, store, and erect metal wall panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting,
and surface damage.
INSULATED-CORE METAL WALL PANELS 074216-3
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface
temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C)
material surfaces.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material **'
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of
wall panel and accessory.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of metal wall panels; details of edge a.
conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment system, trim, flashings,
closures, and accessories; and special details. Distinguish between factory-, shop- and field-
assembled work.
1. Accessories: Include details of the following items, at a scale of not less than 1-1/2
inches per 12 inches(1:10):
a. Flashing and trim.
b. Anchorage systems.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of metal wall panel indicated with factory-applied
color finishes.
I. Include similar Samples of trim and accessories involving color selection.
2. Include manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full
range of colors available for each sealant exposed to view.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size
indicated below.
1. Metal Wall Panels: 12 inches (305 nlm) long by actual panel width. Include fasteners,
closures, and other metal wall panel accessories.
2. Trim and Closures: 12 inches (305 min) long. Include fasteners and other exposed
accessories.
3. Accessories: 12-inch- (305-m,n-)long Samples for each type of accessory.
E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For metal wall panel assembly indicated to comply with
performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the
qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
F. Coordination Drawings: Exterior elevations drawn to scale and coordinating penetrations and .�
wall-mounted items. Show the following:
1. Wall panels and attachments.
2. Penetrations of wall by pipes and utilities.
G. Qualification Data: For Installer..
H. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
testing agency, for each product.
L Maintenance Data: For metal wall panels to include in maintenance manuals.
INSULATED-CORE METAL WALL PANELS 074216-2
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 288'
MA
SECTION 074216-INSULATED-CORE METAL WALL PANELS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes formed-insulation-core metal wall panels.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 07 Section "Metal Wall Panels" for single-skin, through-the-face-fastened metal
wall, liner, and soffit panels.
2. Division 08 Section Louvers and Vents for coordination and matching of louvers with
metal wall panel colors.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Metal Wall Panel Assembly: Insulated-core metal wall panels, attachment system components,
miscellaneous metal framing, and accessories necessary for a complete weathertight wall
system.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
s
A. General Performance: Metal wall panel assemblies shall comply with performance
requirements without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other
eo
defects in construction.
B. Delegated Design: Design metal wall panel assembly, including comprehensive engineering
analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design
0" criteria indicated.
A. Structural Performance: Metal wall panel assemblies shall withstand the effects the following
loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated, based on testing according to
ASTM E 330:
1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on a uniform pressure for the following:
a. Low Building Louvers: 25 psf.
b. Low Building Louvers near corners of building: 30.5 psf.
C. Tower Louvers: 38.6 psf.
B. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature
changes by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components,failure of joint
INSULATED-CORE METAL WALL PANELS 074216- 1
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
3.3 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting, and
provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components.
B. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation
instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners
where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps,joints,
and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspection Agency: The project is subject to inspection by FM Global..
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal wall panels are
installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On
completion of metal wall panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal
wall panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.
B. Replace metal wall panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful
repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
END OF SECTION 074213
METAL WALL PANELS 074213 - 7
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles
and with dimensional and structural requirements.
B. Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full
length of panel.
C. Sheet Metal Accessories: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in
SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions, metal,
and other characteristics of item indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
es
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances, metal wall panel supports, and other conditions
affecting performance of work.
w
B. Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating metal wall panels to verify actual
locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of metal wall panels before metal wall panel
installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
ww
3.2 METAL WALL PANEL INSTALLATION
A. General: Install metal wall panels according to manufacturer's written instructions in
orientation, sizes, and locations indicated on Drawings. Install panels perpendicular to girts and
subgirts unless otherwise indicated. Anchor metal wall panels and other components of the
Work securely in place,with provisions for thermal and structural movement.
B. Fasteners:
1. Steel Wall Panels: Use stainless-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the exterior; use
galvanized steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the interior.
C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates,
protect against galvanic action as recommended by metal wall panel manufacturer.
D. Joint Sealers: Install gaskets,joint fillers, and sealants where indicated and where required for
weathertight performance of metal wall panel assemblies. Provide types of gaskets, fillers, and
sealants indicated or, if not indicated,types recommended by metal wall panel manufacturer.
E. Lap-Seam Metal Wall Panels: Fasten metal wall panels to supports with fasteners at each
lapped joint at location and spacing recommended by manufacturer.
METAL WALL PANELS 074213 -6
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
B. Basis of Design:
1. Panel Type Il:Kingspan Exposed Fastener MR-36 Horizontal Series
2. Panel Type III: Kingspan Concealed Fastener F-12 Series.
C. Panel Exterior Finish: PVDF, 1.0 mil. Formulation in Mica or Metalic Finish.
1. Color Panel Type 11: Silversmith
2. Color Panel Type III: Silversmith
2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets and bolts, end-welded
studs, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed
fasteners with heads matching color of metal wall panels by means of plastic caps or factory-
applied coating. Provide EPDM,PVC, or neoprene sealing washers.
2.3 EXPOSED-FASTENER,LAP-SEAM METAL WALL PANELS
t
A. General: Provide factory-formed metal wall panels designed to be field assembled by lapping
side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching panels to supports using exposed
fasteners in side laps. Include accessories required for weathertight installation.
2.4 CONCEALED-FASTENER,LAP-SEAM METAL WALL PANELS
A. General: Provide factory-formed metal wall panels designed to be field assembled by lapping
and interconnecting side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching through panel to
supports using concealed fasteners[and factory-applied sealant] in side laps. Include
4W accessories required for weathertight installation.
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Wall Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete metal wall panel
assembly including trim, copings, fasciae,mullions, sills, corner units, clips, flashings, sealants,
gaskets, fillers,closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal wall panels,
unless otherwise indicated.
B. Flashing and Trim: Formed from 0.018-inch (0.46-rani) minimum thickness, zinc-coated
(galvanized) steel sheet or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating.
Provide flashing and trim as required to seal against weather and to provide finished
appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, bases, drips, sills, jambs, corners,
endwalls, framed openings, rakes, fasciae, parapet caps, soffits, reveals, and fillers. Finish
flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal wall panels.
2.6 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate and finish metal wall panels and accessories at the factory to greatest extent
possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated
METAL WALL PANELS 074213 -5
a
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
drainage of water. Do not store metal wall panels in contact with other materials that might
cause staining,denting, or other surface damage.
D. Retain strippable protective covering on metal wall panel for period of metal wall panel
installation.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit assembly of metal wall panels to be performed according to manufacturers'
written instructions and warranty requirements.
B. Field Measurements: Verify locations of structural members and wall opening dimensions by
field measurements before metal wall panel fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop
Drawings.
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate metal wall panel assemblies with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, and
construction of other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive
installation.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of metal wall panel assemblies that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period. "
1. Failures include, but are not limited to,the following:
a. Structural failures including rupturing,cracking,or puncturing.
b. Deterioration of metals and other materials beyond normal weathering.
2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer
agrees to repair finish or replace metal wall panels that show evidence of deterioration of
factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.
I. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to,the following:
a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244.
b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214.
C. Cracking,checking,peeling,or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.
I. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 BASIS OF DESIGN
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Kingspan
METAL WALL PANELS 074213 -4
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of metal wall panel from single source from single
manufacturer.
1. IT IS THE INTENT OF THE PROJECT TO HAVE THE MANUFACTURER OF THE
METAL WALL PANELS TO BE THE SAME MANUFACTURER OF THE
INSULATED-CORE METAL WALL PANELS SPECIFIED IN SECTION 07 42 16 TO
ENSURE MATCHING OF THE FINISH.
C. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide metal wall panels identical to those of
assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a qualified testing agency. Identify
- products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
D. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation. Refer to
Section 01 40 01-Mock-Up Requirements
E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. .
1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, testing and inspecting agency
representative, metal wall panel Installer, metal wall panel manufacturer's representative,
structural-support Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects metal
wall panels including installers of doors,windows,and louvers.
2. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's
personnel,equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.
3. Review methods and procedures related to metal wall panel installation, including
manufacturer's written instructions.
4. Examine support conditions for compliance with requirements, including alignment
between and attachment to structural members.
5. Review flashings, special siding details, wall penetrations, openings, and condition of
other construction that will affect metal wall panels.
6. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance, certificates, and tests and
inspections if applicable.
7. Review temporary protection requirements for metal wall panel assembly during and
after installation.
8. Review wall panel observation and repair procedures after metal wall panel installation.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Deliver components, sheets, metal wall panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be
damaged or deformed. Package metal wall panels for protection during transportation and
handling.
B. Unload, store, and erect metal wall panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting,
and surface damage.
C. Stack metal wall panels horizontally on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight
and ventilated covering. Store metal wall panels to ensure dryness, with positive slope for
METAL WALL PANELS 074213 -3
on
w�
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (6-' deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C)
material surfaces.
so
1.5 SUBMITTALS
up
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of
wall panel and accessory.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of metal wall panels; details of edge
conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment system, trim, flashings,
closures, and accessories; and special details. Distinguish between factory-, shop- and field-
assembled work.
1. Accessories: Include details of the following items, at a scale of not less than 1-1/2
inches per 12 inches(1:10): •.
a. Flashing and trim.
b. Anchorage systems.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of metal wall panel indicated with factory-applied
color finishes.
I. Include similar Samples of trim and accessories involving color selection.
2. Include manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full
range of colors available for each sealant exposed to view.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size
indicated below.
1. Metal Wall Panels: 12 inches (305 mm) long by actual panel width. Include fasteners,
closures, and other metal wall panel accessories.
2. Trim and Closures: 12 inches (305 nom) long. Include fasteners and other exposed
accessories.
3. Accessories: 12-inch- ("305-mm-)long Samples for each type of accessory.
E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For metal wall panel assembly indicated to comply with
performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the
qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. e.
F. Coordination Drawings: Exterior elevations drawn to scale and coordinating penetrations and
wall-mounted items. Show the following:
1. Wall panels and attachments.
2. Penetrations of wall by pipes and utilities.
G. Qualification Data: For Installer.. .w
H. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
testing agency, for each product. ..
1. Maintenance Data: For metal wall panels to include in maintenance manuals.
J. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.
METAL WALL PANELS 074213 -2
40
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
*■ Northampton,MA
SECTION 074213 -METAL WALL PANELS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Concealed-fastener and exposed fastener, lap-seam metal wall panels used at the rooftop
equipment screen.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 07 Section"Composite Wall Panels" for metal-faced composite wall panels.
1.3 DEFINITION
A. Metal Wall Panel Assembly: Metal wall panels, attachment system components, miscellaneous
metal framing, thermal insulation, and accessories necessary for a complete weathertight wall
system.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General Performance: Metal wall panel assemblies shall comply with performance
requirements without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other
defects in construction.
B. Delegated Design: Design metal wall panel assembly, including comprehensive engineering
analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design
criteria indicated.
A. Structural Performance: Metal wall panel assemblies shall withstand the effects the following
loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated, based on testing according to
ASTM E 330:
1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on a uniform pressure for the following:
a. Low Building Louvers: 25 psf.
b. Low Building Louvers near corners of building: 30.5 psf.
C. Tower Louvers: 38.6 psf.
B. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature
changes by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint
sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface
temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
40
METAL WALL PANELS 074213 - 1
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
2. CCW-705 Membrane by Carlise Coatings and Waterproofing
3. Bithuthene System by Grace Construction Products
4. or approved equal
B. Primers and Accessories: As recommended by and acceptable to manufacturer of self-adhering
membrane, compatible with adjacent materials.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION FOR AIR BARRIER
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with require-
ments and other conditions affecting performance.
on 1. Verify that substrate is visibly dry and free of moisture.
2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 AIR BARRIER APPLICATION
A. Strictly comply with manufacturer's printed instructions and approved submittals. Install air
barrier to establish and maintain continuity across substrates. Lap joints in adhered barrier to
shed water. Maintain full contact.
3.3 PROTECTING AIR BARRIER
A. Protect air barrier from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.
B. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures rec-
ommended by manufacturer of affected construction.
END OF SECTION 07 27 00
go
w.
AIR BARRIERS 072700- 3
r.
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
Northampton,MA
1.4 PEFORMANCE REQUIRMENTS FOR AIR BARRIERS
A. Air Barrier Permeablitiy: Not to exceed 0.004 cfm/sq. foot. Under a pressure differential of 0.3
inches water.
B. Static Test of Exterior Wall Assembly Including Penetrations and Intersection of Roof and
Wall: Install air seal components and assemblies to resist air leakage caused by static air pres-
sure across exterior wall assemblies and other interruptions to the integrity of the building en-
closure systems. Test to rate specified in code as measured in accordance with ASTM E283. If
assembly fails tests, determine cause,rebuild assembly and retest, all at no additional expense to
the Owner.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating
substrate,technical data, and tested physical and performance properties.
B. Product Test Reports: From a qualified independent testing agency indicating and interpreting
test results of waterproofing for compliance with requirements, based on comprehensive testing
of current waterproofing formulations.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicat-
ing manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration date, pot life, curing time,
and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.
B. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent
their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other
causes.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS '"
A. Environmental Limitations: Apply waterproofing within the range of ambient and substrate
temperatures recommended by air barrier manufacturer. Do not apply air barrier to a damp or
wet substrate, when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, or when temperatures are less than 5
deg F {3 deL C)above dew point.
an
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
40
2.1 MANUFACTURERS FOR SELF-ADHESIVE AIR BARRIER
A. Self-Adhering Membrane: Self-adhering rubberized asphalt integrally bonded to polyethylene 00
film,nominal 40 mil thickness overall.
1. Blueskin SA by Monsey Bakor,Kimberton,PA
am
AIR BARRIERS
072700-2
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
SECTION 07 27 00-AIR BARRIERS
PART 1 -GENERAL
go
1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi-
tions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Provide air barriers where indicated on new building envelope.
1.3 DESIGN REQUIRMENTS FOR AIR BARRIER
A. Commonwealth of Massachusetts Building Code Requirements: The intent of this specification
is to comply with 780 CMR 13, including section 1304.3,Air Leakage,as follows
B. Code 780 CMR 1304.3.1,Air Barriers: The building envelope shall be designed and constructed
with a continuous air barrier to control air leakage into, or out of the conditioned space. An air
barrier shall also be provided for interior partitions between conditioned space and space de-
signed to maintain temperature and humidity levels which differ from those in the conditioned
- space by more than 50 percent of the difference between the conditioned space and the design
ambient conditions. The air barrier shall have the following characteristics:
1. It must be continuous,with all joints made air-tight.
2. It shall have an air permeability not to exceed 0.004 cfm/sf under a pressure differential
of 0.3 inch water.
3. It shall be capable of withstanding positive and negative combined design wind, fan, and
stack pressures on the envelope without damage or displacement, and shall transfer the
load to the structure. It shall not displace adjacent materials under full load.
4. It shall be durable or maintainable.
5. The air barrier shall be jointed in an air tight and flexible manner to the air barrier maters-
al of adjacent systems, allowing for the relative movement of systems due to thermal and
moisture variations and creep.Connections shall be made between:
a. Foundation and walls.
b. Walls and glass block and doors.
C. Wall and roof.
d. Wall and roof over unconditioned space.
e. Walls, floor and roof across construction,control,and expansion joints.
f. Walls, floors and roof to utility,pipe and duct penetrations.
C. Code 780 CMR 1304.3.2 Air Barrier Penetrations: All penetrations of the air barrier and paths
of air infiltration/exfiltration shall be made air-tight.
AIR BARRIERS 07 27 00- 1
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
3.5 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR FRAMED CONSTRUCTION
A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written
instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use
mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.
B. Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members according to the
following requirements:
1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If wA
more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a
snug fit between ends.
2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between
edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.
3. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches (2438 mm),
support unfaced blankets to flanges of metal studs.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and ..
other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse
and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after
installation.
END OF SECTION 072100
ON
ew
THERMAL INSULATION 072100-4
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
5. Owens Corning.
B. Unfaced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I; with maximum flame-spread
and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing
ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.
C. Sustainability Requirements: Provide glass-fiber blanket insulation as follows:
1. Free of Formaldehyde: Insulation manufactured with 100 percent acrylic binders and no
formaldehyde.
2. Low Emitting: Insulation tested according to ASTM D 5116 and shown to emit less than
0.05-ppm formaldehyde.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
to A. Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to insulation or that interfere with insulation
attachment.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and
applications indicated.
B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice,
rain,or snow at any time.
C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions
and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.
D. Provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard
thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness
op indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF BELOW-GRADE INSULATION
A. On vertical footing and foundation wall surfaces, set insulation units using manufacturer's
recommended adhesive according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. On horizontal surfaces under slabs, loosely lay insulation units according to manufacturer's
written instructions. Stagger end joints and tightly abut insulation units.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION IN CEILINGS FOR SOUND ATTENUATION
A. Where glass-fiber blankets are indicated for sound attenuation above ceilings, install blanket
insulation over entire ceiling area in thicknesses indicated. Extend insulation 48 inches (12 19
nun)up either side of partitions.
THERMAL INSULATION 072100-3
me
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to moisture,
soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's
written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.
B. Protect foam-plastic board insulation as follows:
I. Do not expose to sunlight except to necessary extent for period of installation and
concealment.
2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver foam-plastic board materials to
Project site before installation time.
3. Quickly complete installation and concealment of foam-plastic board insulation in each
area of construction.
w
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION
A. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, of type and minimum compressive
strength indicated below, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and
450,respectively, per ASTM E 84.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Dow Chemical Company(The).
2. Type IV, 25 psi k 17 kPa).
3. Type VI,40 psi (276 kPa).
2.2 SPRAY POLYURETHANE FOAM INSULATION
A. Closed-Cell Polyurethane Foam Insulation: ASTM C 1029, Type II, with maximum flame-
spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450,respectively,per ASTM E 84.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the ..
following:
a. Dow Chemical Company(The).
2. Minimum density of 2.0 lb/cu. ft. thermal resistivity of 6.2 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at
75 deg F(43 K x m/W at 24 deg C).
2.3 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1. CertainTeed Corporation.
2. Guardian Building Products, Inc.
3. Johns Manville. ..
4. Knauf Insulation.
THERMAL INSULATION 072100-2
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
SECTION 072100- THERMAL INSULATION
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
so
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
OR A. Section Includes:
1. Foam-plastic board insulation.
2. Spray polyurethane foam insulation.
3. Glass-fiber blanket insulation.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 092900- Gypsum Board for acoustic batt insulation installed in non-structural
metal framing finished in Gypsum Board.
40 1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Data for Credit MR 4.1[and Credit MR 4.2]: For products having recycled
content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and
preconsumer recycled content. Include statement indicating costs for each product
having recycled content.
C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
testing agency,for each product.
04 D. Research/Evaluation Reports: For foam-plastic insulation,from ICC-ES.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to
ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of
applicable testing agency.
THERMAL INSULATION 072100- 1
.n
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
H. Comply with waterproofing manufacturer's recommendations for sequencing construction
operations after waterproofing applications to avoid conditions detrimental to performance of
waterproofing application.
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Services: Provide manufacturer's field service consisting of product use
recommendations and periodic site visit for inspection of product installation in accordance with ws
manufacturer's instruction
B. Do not cover waterproofed surfaces with other construction until they have been observed by
manufacturers field representative and Architect/Engineer.
C. Flood test areas that are capable of holding water after end of curing period.
1. Plug or dam drains. ,
2. Fill structures intended to hold liquids with water to within 1/2 inch (12.5 mm) from top
of waterproofed vertical surfaces.
3. Test slabs by constructing temporary dams where necessary, at least 2 inches (50 mm)
high,and filling with 2 inches(50 mm)of water.
4. Let water stand for 24 hours.
5. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks are observed.
3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean spillage and overspray from adjacent surfaces using appropriate cleaning agents and
procedures.
B. Protect installed product from damage during construction; do not allow traffic on unprotected
waterproofed surfaces.
C. Do not backfill against waterproofed surfaces for at least 36 hours after installation; use moist
backfill material when backfilling occurs less than 7 days after installation.
D. Do not apply paint or other coatings for at least 21 days; before applying coatings neutralize
waterproofed surface as recommended by waterproofing manufacturer.
E. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
ON
END OF SECTION 07 16 00
go
w�
CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING 07 1600-6
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
± ► Northampton,MA
2. Fill and form surfaces using specified dry pack repair compound or waterproofing
material in mortar consistency while slurry coat is still green, but after slurry coat has
reached initial set.
3. Trowel into a cove shape.
3.4 Construction Joints: Apply sealing strips at each construction joint by filling grooves
coinciding with construction joint.
1. If grooves have not been preformed, at least 3/4 inch(19 mm)wide and minimum 1 inch
(25 mm)deep,saw cut and chip grooves to that dimension.
2. Apply specified slurry coat to slot at rate recommended by manufacturer.
3. Fill and form surfaces using specified dry pack repair compound while slurry coat is still
green,but after slurry coat has reached initial set.
4. Compact tightly using pneumatic packer or hammer and block.
3.5 INSTALLATION ON CURED CONCRETE
A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions, including [Product Data],technical bulletins, catalog
installation instructions, and product carton instructions.
B. Mix materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Wet concrete surfaces and saturate with clean water to ensure migration of crystalline chemicals
into concrete;remove free surface water before application of waterproofing treatment.
D. Exposed Surface Application: Apply waterproofing uniformly with semi-stiff bristle brush or
spray under conditions and application rate recommended by manufacturer.
E. Apply second coat while first coat is still green,but after reaching initial set.
F. Use light pre-watering between coats when rapid drying conditions occur.
G. Curing: Cure exposed waterproofing treatment using a mist fog spray of clean water after
coating has hardened sufficiently not to be damaged by spray; do not use plastic sheeting laid
directly on waterproofing;air circulation is required.
1. If water curing is not possible, follow manufacturer's recommendations for curing using
chemical curing agent approved by manufacturer.
2. Avoid coating damage with spray operation.
* 3. Spray treated surface 3 times a day for 2 to 3 days.
4. In hot climates, spray treated surfaces at intervals recommended by waterproofing
manufacturer.
wo 5. During curing period, protect treated surfaces from rainfall, ambient temperature below
freezing, and puddling of water.
6. Provide supplementary air circulation as recommended by waterproofing manufacturer.
7. Concrete Structures to Hold Liquids: Cure waterproofed concrete surfaces for 3 days and
00 allow coating to set for 12 days before filing with liquid; for hot corrosive liquids allow
to set for additional 6 days before filling.
CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING 07 1600-5
e
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
D. Do not install unless substrate and ambient air temperatures are within range acceptable to
waterproofing manufacturer.
3.2 NEWLY PLACED HORIZONTAL CONCRETE SURFACE
A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions, including Product Data , technical bulletins, catalog
installation instructions, and product carton instructions.
B. Newly placed concrete should be free of bleed water and be able to support the weight of a
power trowel.Apply a rough wood float or broom finish.
C. Immediately after floating the surface, apply one-half of the dry shake material evenly by a
hand or mechanical spreader at rate the recommended by manufacturer.
D. As soon as the dry shake material has absorbed moisture from the base slab, finish the concrete
surface and incorporate the dry shake material into surface during the finishing process.
3.3 PREPARATION OF CURED CONCRETE
A. Prepare surfaces to be treated in accordance with waterproofing manufacturer's instructions.
B. Clean laitance, curing compounds, excess form oil, dirt film, paint, coatings or other foreign
matter harmful to the performance of waterproofing from surfaces of cured concrete to be
treated.
C. Prepare cured surfaces if necessary to provide open capillary surface to provide tooth and
suction for treatment;use acid etching, sandblasting, waterblasting,or other methods.
D. Defects: Rout out defects, such as cracks, faulty construction joints, honeycombing, form tie
holes,and other defects to sound concrete,and repair.
1. Chip defective areas into a U-shaped slot 1 inch (25 mm) wide and minimum 1 inch (25
mm)deep.
2. Clean slot, wet, saturate with water and remove surface water.
3. Apply specified slurry coat to slot at rate recommended by manufacturer. so
4. Allow slurry coat to reach initial set.
5. Fill cavity with specified dry pack repair compound.
6. Compress tightly into cavity using pneumatic packer or hammer and blocks.
on
E. Rock Pockets, Honeycombing, and Other Defective Concrete:
1. Rout out defective areas to sound concrete.
2. Remove loose material and saturate with water.
3. Remove surface water and apply specified slurry coat.
4. After slurry coat has set, but while still green, fill cavity to surface with specified
patching compound.
F. Coves: At right-angle intersections cove the joint for smooth transition of waterproofed surface.
I. Apply specified slurry coat to slot at rate recommended by manufacturer.
e
ws
CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING 07 1600-4
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Waterproofing Products: Provide installed products that comply with the following, when
tested using cured concrete samples made without admixtures, with two 0.05 inch (1 mm)thick
coats of waterproofing:
!W
B. Penetration: At least 2 inches (50 mm) penetration of crystal-forming material, evidenced by
scanning electron microscope photographs.
C. Permeability: No measurable leakage through waterproofed concrete, when tested in
accordance with COE CRD-C 48 at 405 feet (123.4 m) of head or 175 PSI (1200 KPa) using 2
inch(50 mm)thick,2000 PSI(13.8 MPa)compressive strength concrete.
D. Chemical Resistance: No detrimental effects when tested using 4000 PSI (27.6 MPa)
compressive strength concrete in accordance with ASTM C 267 using hydrochloric acid (pH of
+* 3.5),brake fluid, transformer oil, ethylene glycol, toluene, and caustic soda as test mediums for
duration of 84 days each; minimum of 14 percent increase in concrete compressive strength
when tested in accordance with ASTM C 39/C 39M.
E. Potable Water Contact Approval: NSF certification for use on structures holding potable water,
based on testing in accordance with NSF 61.
F. Waterproofing: Two-coat crystalline waterproofing.
1. First Coat: Slurry of Concentrate; proprietary compound of Portland cement, silica sand
and active chemicals, mixed with water in proportions recommended by manufacturer to
achieve the specified coverage with application method used.
2. First Coat Coverage: 1.5 lb/sq yd(0.8 kg/sq m).
3. First Coat Coverage: 2.0 lb/sq yd(1.09 kg/sq m).
4. Second Coat: Modified; proprietary compound of Portland cement, silica sand and active
chemicals, mixed with water in proportions recommended by manufacturer to achieve
full coverage with application method used.
G. Dry Pack Repair Compound: Dry pack consistency mixture of manufacturer's Concentrate;
proprietary compound of Portland cement, silica sand and active chemicals; and water in
proportions recommended by manufacturer.
H. Patching Compound: Single component, fast-setting, non-shrink, high bond strength hydraulic
cement;provide additive where needed for increased bond strength to existing concrete.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.
B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of
unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
C. Obtain waterproofing manufacturer's approval of substrates; submit field inspection report.
CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING 07 1600-3
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
Northampton, MA
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm with not less than 10 years experience manufacturing
crystalline waterproofing of the type specified, able to provide test reports showing compliance
with specified performance characteristics, and able to provide on-site technical representation
to advise on installation.
B. Installer Qualifications: Experienced in work of the type specified in this section and approved
in writing by waterproofing manufacturer.
C. Preinstallation Meeting: Prior to starting work, conduct a meeting with the waterproofing
installer, installers of adjacent work, and waterproofing manufacturer's representative to verify
project requirements, substrate conditions, manufacturer's installation instructions, and
manufacturer's warranty requirements; notify the Owner and Architect/Engineer at least one
week in advance of meeting.
.r
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with 4W
identification labels intact.
B. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.
C. Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions and at temperature
conditions recommended by manufacturer.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits
recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under
environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. •
PART 2- PRODUCTS
.m
2.1 CRYSTALLINE WATRPROOFING MANUFACTURER'S
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide available products that may by
one of the following manufacturers:
1. The Euclid Chemical Company, HEY-DI K-11, 19218 Redwood Road, Cleveland, OH
44110, Phone ; 1-800-424-9300, www. euclidchemical.com.
2. Xypex Chemical Corp., 13731 Mayfield Pl. ; Richmond, BC, Canada V6V 2G9; Toll
Free Tel: 800-961-4477; Tel: 604-273-5265; Email: request info (info(2xypex com);
Web: www.xy ex.coin
B. Obtain all crystalline waterproofing products from a single source. no
to
CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING 07 1600-2
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
SECTION 07 16 00—CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes crystalline waterproofing at interior surface of elevator pits.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C 39/C 39M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete
Specimens; 1999.
B. ASTM C 267 - Standard Test Methods for Chemical Resistance of Mortars, Grouts, and
Monolithic Surfacings and Polymer Concretes; 1997.
C. ASTM E 329 - Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of
Materials Used in Construction; 1998a.
D. COE CRD-C 48 - Standard Test Method for Water Permeability of Concrete; 1992.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
! ' 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
3. Installation methods.
4. Test Reports: Certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance
r characteristics and physical properties.
5. Testing Agency: Independent laboratory meeting the requirements of ASTM E 329 and
certified by the United States Bureau of Standards.
6. Certificates: Product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying that:
7. Materials comply with specified performance characteristics and physical requirements.
8. Installer is qualified and approved by manufacturer.
9. Manufacturer's report on field inspection of substrates,prior to installation.
10. Close Out: Executed warranties.
CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING 07 16 00- 1
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
3.4 COLD-APPLIED,EMULSIFIED-ASPHALT DAMPPROOFING
A. On Concrete Foundations: Apply 2 brush or spray coats at not less than 1.5 gal./100 sq. ft. (0.6
L/sq. nn) for first coat and 1 gal./100 sq. ft. (0.4 L/sq. m) for second coat, 1 fibered brush or
spray coat at not less than 3 gal./100 sq. ft. (1.2 I.Jsq. rn), or 1 trowel coat at not less than 4
gal./100 sq. ft. (1.6 I.Jsq. in).
3.5 CLEANING
A. Remove dampproofing materials from surfaces not intended to receive dampproofing.
END OF SECTION 071113
BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 071113 -3
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 COLD-APPLIED, EMULSIFIED-ASPHALT DAMPPROOFING
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Henry Company.
2. Karnak Corporation. w
B. Trowel Coats: ASTM D 1227, Type 11, Class 1.
C. Fibered Brush and Spray Coats: ASTM D 1227, Type Il, Class 1. w°
D. VOC Content: Zero
2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Emulsified-Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 1227, Type III, Class 1, except diluted with water as
recommended by manufacturer.
B. Patching Compound: Manufacturer's fibered mastic of type recommended by dampproofing 4W
manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for surface
smoothness and other conditions affecting performance of work. ,
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Protection of Other Work: Mask or otherwise protect adjoining exposed surfaces from being
stained, spotted, or coated with dampproofing. Prevent dampproofing materials from entering
and clogging weep holes and drains.
B. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to work; fill voids, seal joints, and
apply bond breakers if any,as recommended by prime material manufacturer.
C. Apply patching compound for filling and patching tie holes, honeycombs, reveals, and other
imperfections.
w�
3.3 APPLICATION, GENERAL
A. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations unless more stringent requirements are
indicated or required by Project conditions to ensure satisfactory performance of dampproofing.
BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 071113 -2
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
SECTION 071113 -BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
W A. This Section includes the following:
1. Cold-applied,emulsified-asphalt dampproofing.
B. Related Sections include the following:
I. Division 07 Section"Self-Adhering Sheet Waterproofing"for waterproofing.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include recommendations for method of
00 application,primer,number of coats, coverage or thickness,and protection course.
B. Material Certificates: For each product, signed by manufacturers.
go C. LEED Submittal:
1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.2: For dampproofing, including printed statement of VOC
content.
IN
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain primary dampproofing materials and primers through one source
from a single manufacturer. Provide secondary materials recommended by manufacturer of
primary materials.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit dampproofing to be performed according to manufacturers' written
instructions.
w
B. Ventilation: Provide adequate ventilation during application of dampproofing in enclosed
spaces. Maintain ventilation until dampproofing has cured.
BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 071113 - 1
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Replace damaged and defective polycarbonate panels to eliminate functional and visual defects.
END OF SECTION 066400
POLYCARBONATE PLASTIC PANELING 066410-3
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
Northampton, MA
B. Thickness as indicated on drawings. ..r
y f
1�
4 6 8 10 16
y � :
' P 800 1300 1500 1700 2700
a y
0.16 0.27 0.31 0.35 0.55
980, 1050, 1200, 1220, 1250, 2100
akm
48" 72"
0.7 1.05 1.4 1.75 2.8
f £ s
2'3" 3' S" 4-7" 59" 9-2"
r � 3.9 3.6 3.3 3.0 2.3
AN
0.69 0.63 0.58 0.53 0.41
C. Color to be selected by Architect from full range of available colors.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 COORDINATION W&
A. Coordinate size,orientation, and fastening of panels with work specified in Section 055213.
3.2 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for Ow
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Cut polycarbonate panels according to manufacturer's written instructions.
POLYCARBONATE PLASTIC PANELING 066410-2
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
SECTION 066410—POLYCARBONATE PLASTIC PANELING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes polycarbonate panels at stair and over look guardrails.
B. Related Sections:
W
1. Division OS Section Pipe and Tube Railings for location and attachment of
polycarbonate panels.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Samples for Selection: For polycarbonate panels.
w
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain polycarbonate panels from single manufacturer.
B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to
ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of
applicable testing agency.
1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.
2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 POLYCARBONATE SHEET PANELING
A. Basis of Design: Polygal Standard Sheet,Manufactured by Polygal (www. oIy9al.coin).
No
POLYCARBONATE PLASTIC PANELING 066410- 1
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrate by sanding high spots and filling low spots as needed to provide flat, even
surface for panel installation.
B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of adhesive, including oil, grease, dirt,
and dust.
C. Condition panels by unpacking and placing in installation space before installation according to
manufacturer's written recommendations.
D. Lay out paneling before installing. Locate panel joints where indicated and directed by the
Architect. Trimmed panels at corners shall not less than 12 inches(300 min)wide.
1. Mark plumb lines on substrate at trim accessory locations for accurate installation.
2. Locate trim accessories to allow clearance at panel edges according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
wA
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install plastic paneling according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install panels in a full spread of adhesive.
.w.
C. Install trim accessories with adhesive and concealed nails. Do not fasten through panels.
D. Fill grooves in trim accessories with sealant before installing panels and bed inside corner trim
in a bead of sealant.
END OF SECTION 09 77 00
PLASTIC PANELING 066400-4
4
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements:
1. During installation, and for not less than 48 hours before, maintain an ambient
temperature and relative humidity within limits required by type of adhesive used and
recommendation of adhesive manufacturer.
2. Provide ventilation to disperse fumes during application of adhesive as recommended by
adhesive manufacturer.
so
B. Field Measurements: Verify actual measurements/openings by field measurements before
fabrication; show recorded measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate field measurements
and fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid construction delays.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 PLASTIC SHEET PANELING
A. General: Gelcoat-finished, glass-fiber reinforced plastic panels complying with ASTM D 5319.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Kemlite
Varietex or comparable product by one of the following:
w■
a. Marlite.
b. Nudo Products, Inc.
2. Nominal Thickness: 0.09 inch(2.3 mrn).
g+ 3. Surface Finish: "Sandstone: Lightly textured.
4. Color:As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
am 2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Trim Accessories: Manufacturer's standard one-piece vinyl extrusions designed to retain and
cover edges of panels. Provide division bars, inside corners,outside corners, outside angles,
inside angles,and caps as needed to conceal edges.
1. Color: Match panels.
B. Adhesive: As recommended by plastic paneling manufacturer.
1. VOC Content: 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA
Method 24).
C. Sealant: Single-component, mildew-resistant, neutral-curing silicone sealant recommended by
plastic paneling manufacturer and complying with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint
Sealants."
PLASTIC PANELING 066400- 3
MR
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
3. Manufacturer's Instructions: Manufacturer's installation instructions.
G. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to s
ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of
applicable testing agency.
1. Flame-Spread Index: 25or less.
2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450or less.
3. Testing Agency: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications:
1. Installer Qualifications: Installer should be experienced in performing work of this
section and should have specialized in installation of work similar to that required for this
project.
2. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer should be capable of providing field service
representation during construction and should be capable of approving application
method.
B. Mock-Ups: Install at project site a job mock-up using acceptable products and manufacturer
approved installation methods. Obtain Owner's and Architect's acceptance of finish color,
texture, pattern,and workmanship standards.
1. Mock-Up Size: 8 by 16 feet area including seams and trim.
2. Incorporation: Mock-up may be incorporated into final construction upon Owner's
approval.
1.6 SOURCE QUALITY w�
A. Source Quality: Obtain plastic panels and accessories from a single manufacturer. Provide
panels and molding only from manufacturer specified to ensure warranty and color .�
harmonization of accessories.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, &HANDLING
A. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with
identification labels intact.Package sheets on skids or pallets for shipment to project site.
B. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions
and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by manufacturer. Store panels
indoors in a dry place at the project site.
C. Handling: Remove foreign matter from face of panel by use of a soft bristle brush, avoiding
abrasive action.
w.
PLASTIC PANELING 066400-2
w
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
• Northampton,MA
an SECTION 066400-PLASTIC PANELING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
q•
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Special wall surfaces,including fiberglass reinforced plastic panels.
B. Related Sections: Section(s)related to this section include:
1. Section 09 29 00 Gypsum Board for gypsum and cement board backing.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Performance Requirements: Provide fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP)panels which have been
manufactured and installed to maintain performance criteria stated by manufacturer without
defects, damage,or failure.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit listed submittals in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Submittal Procedures Section.
B. Product Data: Submit product data, including manufacturer's SPEC-DATA product sheet, for
specified products.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing layout, profiles, and product components,
including anchorage, accessories, finish colors, patterns and textures. Indicate location and
dimension of joints and fastener attachment.
D. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For adhesives including printed statement of VOC
content and chemical components.
E. Samples for Selection: For plastic paneling and trim accessories.
go F. Quality Assurance Submittals: Submit the following:
1. Test Reports: Certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance
characteristics and physical properties.
2. Certificates: Product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying materials comply with
specified performance characteristics,criteria and physical requirements.
PLASTIC PANELING 066400- 1
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual
defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform
appearance.
B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.
C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to
restore damaged or soiled areas.
END OF SECTION 064023
imp
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 11
w.
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
E. Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood: Handle, store, and install fire-retardant-treated wood to comply
with chemical treatment manufacturer's written instructions, including those for adhesives used w
to install woodwork.
F. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with
countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use w.
fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with
woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated.
G. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length
pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. Do not use
pieces less than 96 inches (2400 mm) long, except where shorter single-length pieces are WP
necessary. Scarf running joints and stagger in adjacent and related members.
1. Fill gaps, if any, between top of base and wall with plastic wood filler, sand smooth, and
finish same as wood base if finished.
2. Install standing and running trim with no more variation from a straight line than 1/8 inch
in 96 inches(3 min in 2400 min).
H. Paneling: Anchor paneling to supporting substrate with concealed panel-hanger clips. Do not
use face fastening.
I. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are
accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide
unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.
W4
1. Install cabinets with no more than lib inch in 96-inch (3 min in 2400-mill) sag, bow, or
other variation from a straight line.
2. Maintain veneer sequence matching of cabinets with transparent finish.
3. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than 16
inches (400 mm) o.c. with [No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for ]-inch (25-111m)
penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips] [No. 10 wafer-head sheet
metal screws through metal backing or metal framing behind wall finish] [toggle bolts
through metal backing or metal framing behind wall finish].
J. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other
supports into underside of countertop.
1. Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch Q mm in 2400-mm) sag, bow,
or other variation from a straight line.
2. Secure backsplashes to tops with concealed metal brackets at 16 inches (400 mm) o.c.
and to walls with adhesive.
3. Calk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Division 07 Section
"Joint Sealants." s
K. Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of woodwork. Fill nail holes
with matching filler where exposed.
ws
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 10
A
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
1. As selected by Architect from laminate manufacturer's full range of colors, patterns, and
textures.
D. Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces.
go E. Core Material: Exterior-grade plywood.
F. Backer Sheet: Provide plastic-laminate backer sheet, Grade BKL, on underside of countertop
substrate.
2.11 SHOP FINISHING
A. Grade: Provide finishes of same grades as items to be finished.
B. General: Finish architectural woodwork at fabrication shop as specified in this Section. Defer
only final touchup, cleaning, and polishing until after installation.
W C. Transparent Finish:
1. Grade: Premium.
2. AWI Finish System: Catalyzed polyurethane.
3. Staining: Match Architect's sample.
4. Open Finish for Open-Grain Woods: Do not apply filler to open-grain woods.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in
? * installation areas.
B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and
complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Grade: Install woodwork to comply with requirements for the same grade specified in Part 2 for
fabrication of type of woodwork involved.
B. Assemble woodwork and complete fabrication at Project site to comply with requirements for
fabrication in Part 2,to extent that it was not completed in the shop.
C. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims.
Install level and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 inns in 2400
mxn).
D. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish
at cuts.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 -9
w
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
E. Panel-Matching Method: To be selected by the Architect.Retain paragraph above for Economy
grade;retain paragraph below for Custom or Premium grade.
F. Fire-Retardant-Treated Paneling: Provide panels consisting of wood veneer and fire-retardant
particleboard or fire-retardant medium-density fiberboard. Panels shall have flame-spread
index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of 450 or less per ASTM E 84.
2.9 PLASTIC-LAMINATE CABINETS
A. Grade: Premium.
B. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: As indicated. "
C. Reveal Dimension: As indicated.
w►
D. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with
the following requirements:
1. Horizontal Surfaces Other Than Tops: Grade HGS.
2. Vertical Surfaces: Grade HGS.
3. Retain one edge construction from subparagraph below. Coordinate with standards and
grade selection.
4. Edges: Grade HGS.
E. Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces:
1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: High-pressure decorative laminate, Grade VGS.
a. For semiexposed backs of panels with exposed plastic-laminate surfaces, provide
surface of high-pressure decorative laminate,Grade VGS.
2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Solid-hardwood lumber.
3. Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood.
F. Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic Laminate Surfaces: High-pressure decorative
laminate, Grade BKL. sus
G. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures
of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:
1. As selected by Architect from laminate manufacturer's full range of colors, patterns, and
textures.
H. Provide dust panels of 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments R.
and drawers, unless located directly under tops.
2.10 PLASTIC-LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS
A. Grade: Premium.
B. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate Grade: HGS.
C. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures
of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 -8
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
D. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius
indicated for the following:
1. Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members and Rails: 1116 inch
(1.5 mill).
E. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum
extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for
shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for
to scribing,trimming, and fitting.
1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times woodwork fabrication will
� be complete.
2. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled.
Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be
removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check
measurements of assemblies against field measurements indicated on Shop Drawings
before disassembling for shipment.
r F. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing
fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or
roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts
to remove splinters and burrs.
1. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish.
!! 2.7 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH
A. Grade: Premium
B. Wood Species and Cut: As selected by Architect.
1. Provide split species on trim that faces areas with different wood species, matching each
face of woodwork to species and cut of finish wood surfaces in areas finished.
C. For trim items wider than available lumber,use veneered construction. Do not glue for width.
D. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members,
except for members with ends exposed in finished work.
�e
2.8 FLUSH WOOD PANELING
A. Grade: Premium
B. Wood Species and Cut: To be selected by the Architect.
C. Matching of Adjacent Veneer Leaves: To be selected by the Architect.
D. Veneer Matching within Panel Face: To be selected by the Architect.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 -7
am
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
Northampton,MA so
J. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with
BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated. go
1. Satin Chromium Plated: BHMA 626 for brass or bronze base; BHMA 652 for steel base.
K. For concealed hardware,provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class
requirements in BHMA A 156.9. OR
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Fire-retardant-treated softwood lumber, kiln
dried to less than 15 percent moisture content.
B. Anchors: Select material,type, size,and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage.
Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior
walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed-steel or lead
expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors.
C. Adhesives, General: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.
D. VOC Limits for Installation Adhesives and Glues: Use installation adhesives that comply with
the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D(EPA
Method 24):
1. Wood Glues: 30 g/L.
2. Contact Adhesive: 250 g/L.
E. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Contact cement.
2.5 SEAT CUSHIONS
A. Provide fabric seat cushions for benches shown.
1. Cushions fabricated by Furniture Concepts, 7 Cross Street Malden, MA 02148,
www.fumconcel2ts.com.
2. Point of Contact: Kevin McMahon, 781-324-8660.
3. Fabric to be selected by Architect.
2.6 FABRICATION, GENERAL
w.,
A. Interior Woodwork Grade: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Premium-grade interior
woodwork complying with referenced quality standard.
B. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood
moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation
areas.
w�
C. Sand fire-retardant-treated wood lightly to remove raised grain on exposed surfaces before
fabrication.
am
go
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
064023 -6
No
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Comply with performance
requirements of AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood). Use the following treatment
type:
1. Exterior Type: Organic-resin-based formulation thermally set in wood by kiln drying.
2. Interior Type A: Low-hygroscopic formulation.
3. Mill lumber after treatment within limits set for wood removal that do not affect listed
fire-test-response characteristics, using a woodworking plant certified by testing and
inspecting agency.
4. Mill lumber before treatment and implement special procedures during treatment and
drying processes that prevent lumber from warping and developing discolorations from
drying sticks or other causes, marring, and other defects affecting appearance of treated
woodwork.
5. Kiln-dry materials before and after treatment to levels required for untreated materials.
C. Fire-Retardant Fiberboard: Medium-density fiberboard panels complying with ANSI A208.2,
made from softwood fibers, synthetic resins, and fire-retardant chemicals mixed together at time
of panel manufacture to achieve flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of
200 or less per ASTM E 84.
1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Medite FR" by SierraPine
Ltd.;Medite Div.
2.3 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES
* A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural
cabinets, except for items specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware (Scheduled by
Describing Products)."
B. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, 135 degrees of
opening.
C. Wire Pulls: Back mounted, solid metal,4 inches(_100 mm)long, 5!16 inch(8 rnm)in diameter.
D. Catches: Magnetic catches,BHMA A156.9,B03141.
E. Shelf Rests: BHMA Al 56.9,B04013;metal,two-pin type with shelf hold-down clip.
F. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9,B05091.
1. Heavy Duty (Grade 1 HD-100 and Grade 1HD-200): Side mounted; full-extension type;
zinc-plated steel ball-bearing slides.
G. Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121.
H. Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11,E07041.
I. Grommets for Cable Passage through Countertops: 2-inch (51-mn) OD, molded-plastic
grommets and matching plastic caps with slot for wire passage. Color to be selected by
Architect.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023-5
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA .a
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related
units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be
supported and installed as indicated.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of AWI's quality standard for each
type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: As selected by the Architect. * +
C. Wood Species for Opaque Finish: Eastern white pine,sugar pine,or western white pine.
D. Wood Products: Comply with the following:
l. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD, made with binder containing no
urea formaldehyde.
2. Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1, made with adhesive
containing no urea formaldehyde.
E. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or, if not indicated, as
required by woodwork quality standard.
1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide high-pressure
decorative laminates by one of the following:
.�
a. Abet Laminati, Inc.
b. Formica Corporation.
C. Lamin-Art, Inc.
d. Nevamar Company, LLC; Decorative Products Div.
e. Westinghouse Electric Corp.; Specialty Products Div.
f. Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc.
.s
2.2 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS
A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with
requirements in this Article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with fire-
test-response characteristics specified.
1. Do not use treated materials that do not comply with requirements of referenced ..
woodworking standard or that are warped, discolored,or otherwise defective.
2. Use fire-retardant-treatment formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise
adversely affect finishes. Do not use colorants to distinguish treated materials from
untreated materials.
3. Identify fire-retardant-treated materials with appropriate classification marking of UL,
U.S. Testing, Timber Products Inspection, or another testing and inspecting agency ..
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
sm
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 -4
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
B. Source Limitations: Engage a qualified woodworking firm to assume undivided responsibility
for production of interior architectural woodwork.
C. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork
Quality Standards" for grades of interior architectural woodwork indicated for construction,
finishes, installation,and other requirements.
D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where fire-retardant materials or products are indicated,
10 provide materials and products with specified fire-test-response characteristics as determined by
testing identical products per test method indicated by UL, ITS, or another testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify with appropriate
markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency in the form of separable paper label or,
where required by authorities having jurisdiction, imprint on surfaces of materials that will be
concealed from view after installation.
E. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 01 Section"Project Management and Coordination."
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork
have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation
areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified
in"Project Conditions" Article.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
IM A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet
work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative
humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
PX B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify
dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress
to avoid delaying the Work.
1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field
measurements before being enclosed,and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
2. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying
the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating woodwork without field
measurements. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to
ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 -3
no
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA ,W
1. Show details full size.
2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed
blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections.
3. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures and other items
installed in architectural woodwork.
4. Show veneer leaves with dimensions, grain direction, exposed face, and identification
numbers indicating the flitch and sequence within the flitch for each leaf.
C. Samples for Initial Selection:
1. Shop-applied transparent finishes.
2. Plastic laminates.
D. Samples for Verification:
1. Lumber with or for transparent finish,not less than 50 sq. in. (300 sq. cm for each species
and cut, finished on 1 side and 1 edge.
2. Veneer-faced panel products with or for transparent finish, 12 by 24 inches (300 by 600
inm)], for each species and cut. Include at least one face-veneer seam and finish as
specified.
3. Lumber and panel products with shop-applied opaque finish, 50 sq. in. (300 sq. cin) for **
lumber and 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 min) for panels, for each finish system and color,
with[ 1/2 of] exposed surface finished.
4. Plastic laminates, 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 nom), for each type, color, pattern, and
surface finish.
5. Exposed cabinet hardware and accessories,one unit for each type and finish.
E. LEED Submittals: ■*
1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For installation adhesives, including printed statement
of VOC content.
2. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.4:
a. For each composite-wood product used, documentation indicating that the bonding
agent contains no urea formaldehyde.
b. For each adhesive used, documentation indicating that the adhesive contains no .R
urea formaldehyde.
3. Product Data for Credit(s) MR 4.1 and MR 4.2: For products having recycled content,
documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer
recycled content
F. Product Certificates: For each type of product, signed by product manufacturer. .�
G. Qualification Data: For Installer and fabricator.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate products
similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-
service performance.
.s
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 -2
PM
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
SECTION 064023 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Flush wood paneling and related trim.
2. Plastic-laminate cabinets.
on 3. Plastic-laminate countertops.
4. Shop finishing of interior woodwork.
5. Upholstered seat cushions for custom bench seating.
B. Related Sections include the following:
I. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging
strips required for installing woodwork and concealed within other construction before
woodwork installation.
2. Division 06 Section "Finish Carpentry" for interior carpentry exposed to view that is not
■o specified in this Section.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
MR
A. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for
installing woodwork items unless concealed within other construction before woodwork
4P installation.
B. Rough carriages for stairs are a part of interior architectural woodwork. Platform framing,
headers, partition framing, and other rough framing associated with stairwork are specified in
Division 06 Section"Rough Carpentry."
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For high-pressure decorative laminate, adhesive for bonding plastic laminate,
fire-retardant-treated materials, cabinet hardware and accessories and finishing materials and
processes.
1. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements.
B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale
details,attachment devices, and other components.
we
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 1
me
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
3.4 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM INSTALLATION
A. Install with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces from maximum
lengths of lumber available. Do not use pieces less than 24 inches(610 n1m)long, except where
necessary. Stagger joints in adjacent and related standing and running trim. Cope at returns and
miter at corners to produce tight-fitting joints with full-surface contact throughout length of
joint. Use scarf joints for end-to-end joints. Plane backs of casings to provide uniform
thickness across joints where necessary for alignment.
1. Match color and grain pattern of trim for transparent finish (stain or clear finish) across
joints.
� 2. Install trim after gypsum board joint finishing operations are completed.
3. Drill pilot holes in hardwood before fastening to prevent splitting. Fasten to prevent
movement or warping. Countersink fastener heads on exposed carpentry work and fill
holes.
Pp
3.5 STAIR TREAD INSTALLATION
A. Treads and Risers at Interior Stairs: Secure treads and risers mechanically to frame.
3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Replace interior finish carpentry that is damaged or does not comply with requirements.
Interior finish carpentry may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and
shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
3.7 CLEANING
A. Clean interior finish carpentry on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up factory-applied
finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.
3.8 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage from weather and other causes during remainder of the
construction period.
B. Remove and replace finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold
damaged.
1. Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
2. Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
END OF SECTION 062023
INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 062023 - 5
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
B. Ease edges of lumber less than 1 inch (25 min) in nominal thickness to I/16-inch (1.5-mm)
m
radius and edges of lumber I inch (25 ni) or more in nominal thickness to 1/8-inch (3-min)
radius.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine finish carpentry materials before installation. Reject materials that are wet, moisture
damaged, and mold damaged.
.aR
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application.
B. Before installing interior finish carpentry, condition materials to average prevailing humidity in
installation areas for a minimum of 24 hours unless longer conditioning is recommended by
manufacturer.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Do not use materials that are unsound, warped, improperly treated or finished, inadequately
seasoned, or too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements.
I. Do not use manufactured units with defective surfaces, sizes, or patterns.
B. Install interior finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use
concealed shims where necessary for alignment.
1. Scribe and cut interior finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as
recommended by manufacturer.
2. Countersink fasteners, fill surface flush, and sand where face fastening is unavoidable.
3. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 inm in 2478 min) for level and plumb.
Install adjoining interior finish carpentry with 1/32-inch (0.8-rnn)) maximum offset for .�
flush installation and 1/1 6-inch (1.5-nom)maximum offset for reveal installation.
4. Install stairs with no more than 3/16-inch (4.7-mm) variation between adjacent treads and
risers and with no more than 3/8-inch (9.5-min) variation between largest and smallest
treads and risers within each flight.
5. Coordinate interior finish carpentry with materials and systems in or adjacent to it.
Provide cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that penetrate interior finish
carpentry.
INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 062023 -4
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
B. Lumber Trim for Opaque Finish(Painted):
1. Species and Grade: Eastern white, Idaho white, lodgepole, ponderosa, radiata, or sugar
pine; D Select (Quality), Finish or 1 Common (Colonial), Premium or 2 Common
(Sterling)];NeLMA,NLGA,or WWPA.
2. Maximum Moisture Content: 15 percent with at least 85 percent of shipment at 12
percent or less.
3. Finger Jointing: Not allowed.
4. Face Surface: Surfaced(smooth).
2.2 STAIR TREADS
A. Material: To milled from trees harvested on the project site.
B. Risers and Treads: As dimensioned.
C. Abrasive Studs: At 4 inches on center, provide abrasive studs located 1 inches from the edge of
the tread.
1. Basis of Design: Latham Australia Abrasive Studs
2. Color: Sparkling Black
3. Shape:Round
4. Size: 50mm installed in drilled holds.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Fasteners for Interior Finish Carpentry: Nails, screws, and other anchoring devices of type,
size, material, and finish required for application indicated to provide secure attachment,
concealed where possible.
B. Glue: Aliphatic-resin, polyurethane, or resorcinol wood glue recommended by manufacturer
for general carpentry use.
OR
1. Use wood glue that has a VOC content of 30 g/L or less when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D(EPA Method 24).
C. Multipurpose Construction Adhesive: Formulation complying with ASTM D 3498 that is
recommended for indicated use by adhesive manufacturer.
1. Use adhesive that has a VOC content of 70 g/L or less when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D(EPA Method 24).
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Back out or kerf backs of the following members except those with ends exposed in finished
work:
I. Interior standing and running trim.
NP
W
INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 062023-3
w
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA w.
1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For adhesives and glues used at Project site, including
printed statement of VOC content.
E. Research/Evaluation Reports: Showing that fire-retardant-treated wood complies with building
code in effect for Project.
F. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
w.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Protect materials against weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber, ..
plywood, and other panels flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation.
Provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings.
B. Deliver interior finish carpentry materials only when environmental conditions meet
requirements specified for installation areas. If interior finish carpentry materials must be
stored in other than installation areas, store only where environmental conditions meet
requirements specified for installation areas.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install interior finish carpentry materials until
building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in space is completed and nominally dry, and
HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy
levels during the remainder of the construction period.
B. Do not install finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.
I. Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
2. Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS .r
2.1 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM
A. Hardwood Lumber Trim for Transparent Finish(Stain or Clear Finish):
1. Species and Grade: To be selected by Architect. .�
2. Maximum Moisture Content: 13 percent.
3. Finger Jointing: Not allowed.
4. Gluing for Width: Not allowed.
5. Veneered Material: Not allowed.
6. Face Surface: Surfaced(smooth).
7. Matching: Selected for compatible grain and color.
INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 062023 -2
w
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
SECTION 062023 - INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
PART I -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Interior standing and running trim.
2. Interior stair treads
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for furring, blocking, and other carpentry work
not exposed to view.
2. Division 06 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for shop-fabricated interior
woodwork.
3. Division 09 Section"Painting" for priming and back-priming of interior finish carpentry.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Lumber grading agencies,and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following:
1. NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers'Association.
2. NHLA: National Hardwood Lumber Association.
3. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component
materials, dimensions, profiles, textures, and colors and include construction and application
details.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of paneling indicated.
C. Samples for Verification:
1. For each species and cut of lumber and panel products with non-factory-applied finish,
with 1/2 of exposed surface finished, 50 sq. in. (300 sq. cm) for lumber and 8 by 10
inches(200 by 250 mm)for panels.
2. For each finish system and color of lumber and panel products with factory-applied
finish, 50 sq. in. (300 sq. cm)for lumber and 8 by 10 inches(200 by 250 mm)for panels.
D. LEED Submittals:
INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 062023 - 1
awe
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA . ,
without forcing. Abut ends of boards over centers of studs, and stagger end joints of adjacent
boards not less than one stud spacing. Attach boards at perimeter and within field of board to
each steel stud.
1. Space fasteners approximately 8 inches (200 inm) o.c. and set back a minimum of 3/8
inch(£).7 min)from edges and ends of boards.
2. For sheathing under stucco cladding, boards may be initially tacked in place with screws
if overlying self-furring metal lath is screw-attached through sheathing to studs
immediately after sheathing is installed.
D. Vertical Installation: Install board vertical edges centered over studs. Abut ends and edges of
each board with those of adjacent boards. Attach boards at perimeter and within field of board
to each stud.
1. Space fasteners approximately 8 inches (200 mm) o.c. and set back a minimum of 3/8
inch (9.s mm)from edges and ends of boards.
2. For sheathing under stucco cladding, boards may be initially tacked in place with screws
if overlying self-furring metal lath is screw-attached through sheathing to studs
immediately after sheathing is installed. w„
E. Seal sheathing joints according to sheathing manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Apply elastomeric sealant to joints and fasteners and trowel flat. Apply sufficient amount �.
of sealant to completely cover joints and fasteners after troweling. Seal other
penetrations and openings.
2. Apply glass-fiber sheathing tape to glass-mat gypsum sheathing joints and apply and
trowel silicone emulsion sealant to embed entire face of tape in sealant. Apply sealant to
exposed fasteners with a trowel so fasteners are completely covered. Seal other
penetrations and openings.
END OF SECTION 061600
w
SHEATHING
061600-6
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to
use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. Arrange joints so that
pieces do not span between fewer than three support members.
B. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting
construction unless otherwise indicated.
ow C. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following:
1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners.
2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's "International Building Code."
3. Table R602.3(1), Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3(2),
"Alternate Attachments," in ICC's "International Residential Code for One- and Two-
Family Dwellings."
D. Use common wire nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully
penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials.
Make tight connections. Install fasteners without splitting wood.
E. Coordinate sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so these materials
are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through
completed assembly.
F. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of
structural support elements.
G. Coordinate sheathing installation with installation of materials installed over sheathing so
sheathing is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at end of the workday when rain is
forecast.
3.2 GYPSUM SHEATHING INSTALLATION
A. Comply with GA-253 and with manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Fasten gypsum sheathing to wood framing with [nails] [or] [screws].
2. Fasten gypsum sheathing to cold-formed metal framing with screws.
3. Install boards with a 3/8-inch (9.5-min) gap where non-load-bearing construction abuts
structural elements.
4. Install boards with a 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) gap where they abut masonry or similar materials
W that might retain moisture,to prevent wicking.
B. Apply fasteners so heads bear tightly against face of sheathing,but do not cut into facing.
on C. Horizontal Installation: Install sheathing with V-grooved edge down and tongue edge up.
Interlock tongue with groove to bring long edges in contact with edges of adjacent boards
SHEATHING 061600 - 5
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA iw
1. For roof and wall sheathing, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying
with ASTM A 153/A 153M for walls and [of Type 304 stainless steel for roofs. ,
B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.
C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.
D. Screws for Fastening Gypsum Sheathing to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Steel drill screws, in
length recommended by sheathing manufacturer for thickness of sheathing to be attached, with ■*
organic-polymer or other corrosion-protective coating having a salt-spray resistance of more
than 800 hours according to ASTM B 117.
wsu
1. For steel framing less than 0.0329 inch (0.835 mm) thick, use screws that comply with
ASTM C 1002.
2. For steel framing from 0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 nom) thick, use screws that
comply with ASTM C 954. ON
2.7 SHEATHING JOINT-AND-PENETRATION TREATMENT MATERIALS
A. Sealant for Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing: Elastomeric, medium-modulus, neutral-curing
silicone joint sealant compatible with joint substrates formed by gypsum sheathing and other
materials, recommended by sheathing manufacturer for application indicated and complying
with requirements for elastomeric sealants specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
B. Sealant for Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing: Silicone emulsion sealant complying with *■
ASTM C 834, compatible with sheathing tape and sheathing and recommended by tape and
sheathing manufacturers for use with glass-fiber sheathing tape and for covering exposed
fasteners.
w
1. Sheathing Tape: Self-adhering glass-fiber tape, minimum 2 inches (50 mm) wide, 10 by
10 or 10 by 20 threads/inch (390 by 390 or 390 by '780 threads;`in;1, of type recommended
by sheathing and tape manufacturers for use with silicone emulsion sealant in sealing
joints in glass-mat gypsum sheathing and with a history of successful in-service use.
C. Sheathing Tape for Foam-Plastic Sheathing: Pressure-sensitive plastic tape recommended by .M
sheathing manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in sheathing.
2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Framing: Formulation complying with [APA AFG-01]
[ASTM D 3498] that is approved for use with type of construction panel indicated by
manufacturers of both adhesives and panels.
1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of [50] [70] <Insert limit>g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D(EPA Method 24).
2. Adhesives shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic
Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
SHEATHING 061600-4
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
2.4 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED PLYWOOD
A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with
requirements in this article that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and with fire-
test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test
method indicated by a qualified testing agency.
B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame-spread index of 25
or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significant progressive
combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not
extending more than 10.5 feet (3.2 in) beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during
the test.
1. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners.
2. Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for
fire-retardant-treated plywood by pressure process after being subjected to accelerated
weathering according to ASTM D 2898. Use for exterior locations and where indicated.
3. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less
when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where
exterior type is not indicated.
C. Kiln-dry material after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent. Do not use
material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.
D. Identify fire-retardant-treated plywood with appropriate classification marking of qualified
testing agency.
E. ApplicationTreat plywood indicated on Drawings,and the following:
1. Roof and wall] sheathing within 48 inches(1220 mrn)of roof assembly.
2.5 WALL SHEATHING
A. Plywood Wall Sheathing: Exterior,Structural Isheathing.
1. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 1/2 inch (13 inni).
B. Glass-Mat Gypsum Wall Sheathing: ASTM C 1177/1177M.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide the following:
a. G-P Gypsum Corporation;Dens-Glass Gold.
2. Type and Thickness: Type X,5i'8 inch(15.9 nuii)]thick.
3. Size: 48 by 96 inches(1219 by 2438 131m).
2.6 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified
in this article for material and manufacture.
SHEATHING 061600-3
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
a!r
A. Stack panels flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation.
Protect sheathing from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored.
Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
w
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For assemblies with fire-resistance ratings, provide w
materials and construction identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per
ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
2.2 WOOD PANEL PRODUCTS
A. Emissions: Products shall meet the testing and product requirements of the California .�
Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic
Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
w.
B. Certified Wood: For the following wood products, provide materials produced from wood
obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with
FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship."
1. Plywood.
C. Plywood: DOC PSI.
D. Thickness: As needed to comply with requirements specified, but not less than thickness
indicated.
E. Factory mark panels to indicate compliance with applicable standard.
2.3 PRESERVATIVE-TREATED PLYWOOD
A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2[for interior
construction not in contact with the ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction
not in contact with the ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with the
ground].
B. Mark plywood with appropriate classification marking of an inspection agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings and plywood in contact with masonry or w.
concrete or used with roofing, flashing,vapor barriers,and waterproofing.
SHEATHING 061600-2
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
Northampton,MA
SECTION 061600- SHEATHING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Wall sheathing.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Division 06 Section"Rough Carpentry" for plywood backing panels.
2. Division 07 Section "Air Barriers" for water-resistive barrier applied over wall
sheathing.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component
materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.
1. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of
± treatment.
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For adhesives, documentation including printed
statement of VOC content.
2. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.4: For composite wood products, documentation indicating
that product contains no urea formaldehyde.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Evaluation Reports: For following products,from ICC-ES:
1. Preservative-treated plywood.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fire-
retardant-treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that
periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is
representative of the material tested.
00
SHEATHING 061600- 1
w�
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite ..
protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment.
Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.
B. Protect rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, rough carpentry becomes
sufficiently wet that moisture content exceeds that specified, apply EPA-registered borate
treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label. �*
END OF SECTION 061000
.a�
w
wn�
wr
ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000- 6
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION,GENERAL
A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and
fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit.
Locate blocking, grounds,and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other
construction.
B. Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities
requiring backing panels. Install fire-retardant treated plywood backing panels with
classification marking of testing agency exposed to view.
C. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures,
specialty items,and trim.
D. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with
fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with
function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or
optimum joint arrangement.
E. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated
lumber.
F. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated,
complying with the following:
I. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners.
2. Retain one of two subparagraphs below, with or without subparagraph above, as required
to comply with requirements of Project and local codes.
3. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code.
w
3.2 WOOD GROUND AND BLOCKING INSTALLATION
A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated
and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other
work involved.
B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces
unless otherwise indicated.
C. Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install
continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking.
D. Provide permanent grounds of dressed, pressure-preservative-treated, key-beveled lumber not
less than 1-1r2 inches {38 nom} wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact
thickness of finish material. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required.
ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000- 5
on
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA go
1. Hem-fir(north); NLGA.
2. Mixed southern pine; SPIB.
3. Spruce-pine-fir;NLGA.
4. Hem-fir; WCLIB or WWPA.
5. Spruce-pine-fir(south);NeLMA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
6. Western woods includes hem-fir and spruce-pine-fir(south).
7. Western woods; WCLIB or WWPA.
8. Northern species includes hem-fir(north)and spruce-pine-fir.
9. Northern species;NLGA.
10. Eastern softwoods includes spruce-pine-fir(south).
11. Eastern softwoods;NeLMA.
C. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to
eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work.
D. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots
capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling.
2.5 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS
A. Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exterior, AC fire-retardant treated, in thickness
indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1/2-inch (13-mm)nominal thickness.
2.6 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified
in this article for material and manufacture.
w
1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative
treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating
complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M or of Type 304 stainless steel.
B. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.
C. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1. ON
D. Lag Bolts: ASME B 18.2.1 (ASIv1E B 18.2.3.8M).
so
E. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (,ASTM F1 568M. Property Class 4.6);
with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M)hex nuts and,where indicated, flat washers.
am
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Water-Repellent Preservative: NWWDA-tested and-accepted formulation containing 3-iodo-2- No
propynyl butyl carbamate, combined with an insecticide containing chloropyrifos as its active
ingredient.
40
ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000-4
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:
1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar
members in connection with roofing,flashing,vapor barriers,and waterproofing.
2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS
A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with
requirements in this article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with fire-
test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test
method indicated by a qualified testing agency.
B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame
spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of
significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes,and with
the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet(3.2 m)beyond the centerline of the burners at
any time during the test.
1. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners.
2. Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for
fire-retardant-treated lumber and plywood by pressure process after being subjected to
accelerated weathering according to ASTM D 2898. Use for exterior locations and where
indicated.
3. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less
when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where
exterior type is not indicated.
on C. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent.
D. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing
agency.
E. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:
1. Concealed blocking.
2. Plywood backing panels.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other
construction,including the following:
1. Blocking.
2. Nailers.
3. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.
4. Cants.
5. Grounds.
B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 and any of the following
species:
ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000-3
go
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
Northampton,MA w,
3. For fire-retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated lumber both before
and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent
testing agency according to ASTM D 5664.
4. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of
treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.
5. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of
treatment.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit
stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the
ALSC Board of Review.
g
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Stack lumber flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation.
Protect lumber from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide
for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency
is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency
certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the
ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.
B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 19 percent thickness or less, unless otherwise
indicated.
2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER
A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior
construction not in contact with the ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in
contact with the ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with the ground.
1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no
arsenic or chromium.
B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use ..
material that is warped or that does not comply with requirements for untreated material.
C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board
of Review.
w�
ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000-2
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
SECTION 061000-ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.
2. Wood blocking,cants, and nailers.
3. Utility shelving.
4. Plywood backing panels.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal (.38 111111 actual) or greater but less than 5
to inches nominal(1 14 mm ictual)in least dimension.
B. Lumber grading agencies,and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following:
1. NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers'Association.
2. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority.
3. RIS: Redwood Inspection Service.
OR 4. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau.
5. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau.
6. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
! ! A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component
materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.
1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate
type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained.
2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include
physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent
testing agency.
ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000- 1
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair
galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective
coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at time of
Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 055213
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 -9
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
B. Expansion Joints: Install expansion joints at locations indicated but not farther apart than
required to accommodate thermal movement. Provide slip joint internal sleeve extending 2
inches (50 mm) beyond joint on either side, fasten internal sleeve securely to one side, and
locate joint within 6 inches(150 mm) of post.
3.4 ANCHORING POSTS
A. Use metal sleeves preset and anchored into concrete for installing posts. After posts have been
inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve with nonshrink, nonmetallic
grout or anchoring cement, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's
written instructions.
.w
B. Form or core-drill holes not less than 5 inches (125 mrn) deep and 3/4 inch (20 mm) larger than
OD of post for installing posts in concrete. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill
annular space between post and concrete with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout or anchoring 141"
cement, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written
instructions.
C. Cover anchorage joint with flange of same metal as post, welded to post after placing anchoring
material.
D. Install removable railing sections,where indicated, in slip-fit metal sockets cast in concrete.
3.5 ATTACHING RAILINGS
A. Anchor railing ends at walls with round flanges anchored to wall construction and welded to
railing ends.
ewe
B. Attach railings to wall with wall brackets, except where end flanges are used. Provide brackets
with 1-112-inch (38-mm) clearance from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface.
Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads.
1. Use type of bracket with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt.
2. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural
loads.
C. Secure wall brackets and railing end flanges to building construction as follows:
1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and hanger or
lag bolts. ■'
2. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts.
3. For steel-framed partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into fire-retardant-treated wood
backing between studs. Coordinate with stud installation to locate backing members.
3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
wee
A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop
painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
was
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 - 8
g•
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
1. Exteriors (SSPC Zone 113)and Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC-
SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
2. Interiors(SSPC Zone IA): SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
C. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with
galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry,
unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1:
Shop,Field,and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.
D. Chains: Chain shall be hot-dipped galvanized.Eyes and snap hooks shall be stainless steel.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine plaster and gypsum board assemblies, where reinforced to receive anchors, to verify
that locations of concealed reinforcements have been clearly marked for Installer. Locate
reinforcements and mark locations if not already done.
"! 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight,hairline joints.
B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately in
location, alignment, and elevation;measured from established lines and levels and free of rack.
1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated or
finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or
other means without further cutting or fitting.
2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of l/16 inch in 3 feet(2 min in 1 m).
3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel
with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1114 inch in 12 feet (5
min in 3m).
C. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will be in contact with grout,
concrete, masonry,wood,or dissimilar metals,with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.
op D. Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints.
E. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for
securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction.
3.3 RAILING CONNECTIONS
A. Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing components.
Comply with requirements for welded connections in "Fabrication" Article whether welding is
performed in the shop or in the field.
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 - 7
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
1. At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide crush-
resistant fillers, or other means to transfer loads through wall finishes to structural
supports and prevent bracket or fitting rotation and crushing of substrate.
N. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete or masonry
work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by railings.
Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure.
O. For railing posts set in concrete, provide steel sleeves not less than 6 inches (150 111111) long �•
with inside dimensions not less than 1/2 inch f 13 mm) greater than outside dimensions of post,
with metal plate forming bottom closure.
P. For removable railing posts, fabricate slip-fit sockets from steel tube or pipe whose ID is sized
for a close fit with posts; limit movement of post without lateral load, measured at top, to not
more than one-fortieth of post height. Provide socket covers designed and fabricated to resist
being dislodged.
1. Provide chain with eye, snap hook, and staple across gaps formed by removable railing
sections at locations indicated. Fabricate from same metal as railings.
Q. Toe Boards: Where indicated, provide toe boards at railings around openings and at edge of
open-sided floors and platforms. Fabricate to dimensions and details indicated.
2.6 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,
temporary protective covering before shipping.
C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are
acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations
in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are
acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to
minimize contrast.
D. Provide exposed fasteners with finish matching appearance, including color and texture, of
railings. +�u
2.7 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES
A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize as specified in Section 050800.
B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with
minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and
environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications:
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 -6
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
2.5 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions,
member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage,but not less than that required to
support structural loads.
OR B. Assemble railings in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and
assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly
mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain
structural value of joined pieces.
C. Cut,drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of
approximately 1/32 inch (I min) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on
exposed surfaces.
D. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces.
E. Fabricate connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide
weep holes where water may accumulate.
F. Cut,reinforce,drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.
G. Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections unless otherwise indicated.
H. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings
ON designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings.
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness
shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces.
1. Form changes in direction as follows:
1. As detailed.
J. Bend members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each configuration required; maintain
cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or
otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components.
K. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.
L. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated. Close ends
of returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 114 inch (6 min)or less.
M. Brackets, Flanges,Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges,miscellaneous fittings,
and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwise indicated.
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 - 5
OR
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
1. Provide galvanized finish for exterior installations and where indicated.
was
D. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
2.3 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide the following:
1. Ungalvanized-Steel Railings: Plated steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633 or �r
ASTM F 1941 (AS'I'M F 1941 M),Class Fe/Zn 5 for zinc coating.
2. Hot-Dip Galvanized Railings: Type 304 stainless-steel or hot-dip zinc-coated steel
fasteners complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329 for zinc coating.
B. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and
class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of
construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads.
C. Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components:
1. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching who
them to other work, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors capable of
sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit
masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing
according to ASTM E 488,conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply with
ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941:11), Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise
indicated.
2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel is Indicated: Group 2 (A4)]
stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M), and nuts, ASTM F 594
(ASTM F 836111).
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy
welded.
B. Etching Cleaner for Galvanized Metal: Complying with MPI#25.
C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and
compatible with paints specified to be used over it.
D. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 09 painting Sections.
.w.
E. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1 l 87.
F. Nonshrink,Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged,nonstaining,noncorrosive,nongaseous grout
complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for
interior and exterior applications.
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 -4
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
for installations of metal stairs(including handrails and railing systems)that are similar to those
indicated for this Project in material,design,and extent.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of railing from single source from single manufacturer.
C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,
"Structural Welding Code- Steel."
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with
metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication.
1.7 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint
and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats
are compatible with one another.
B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and
directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items
with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to
Project site in time for installation.
C. Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. Do not support
railings temporarily by any means that do not satisfy structural performance requirements.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 METALS,GENERAL
A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller
marks,rolled trade names, stains, discolorations,or blemishes.
B. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as
supported rails unless otherwise indicated.
2.2 STEEL AND IRON
A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with average recycled content of steel
products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not
" less than[25] <Insert number>percent.
B. Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed)or ASTM A 513.
C. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard Weight(Schedule 40), unless
another grade and weight are required by structural loads.
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 -3
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
b. Concentrated load of[50 lbf(0.22 kN)] [200 lbf(0.89 kN)] applied horizontally on
an area of 1 sq. ft. (0.093 sq. m).
C. Uniform load of 25 lbf/sq. ft. (1.2 kN/sq. m) applied horizontally.
d. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature
changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints,
overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.
1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C'), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C:), material
surfaces.
D. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals .�
and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Railing brackets.
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Data for Credit MR 4.1[and Credit MR 4.2]: Indicating percentages by weight
of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content for products having recycled content.
Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.
w�
C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance
requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified
professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
E. Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer.
F. Mill Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of stainless-steel products certifying that products
furnished comply with requirements. +..
G. Welding certificates.
H. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers
certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.
1. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
testing agency,according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935.
wee
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to
practice in the Commonwealth of Massachusetts and who is experienced in providing
engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 -2
on
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
SECTION 055213 -PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
_ A. Section Includes:
1. Steel pipe and tube railings.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 05 Section "Metal Stairs" for steel tube railings associated with metal stairs.
2. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry"for wood blocking for anchoring railings.
3. Division 06 Section"Finish Carpentry"for finish wood cap.
W 4. Division 06 Section"Polycarbonate Sheet"for infill panels at guards and railings.
5. Division 09 Section "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for metal backing for anchoring
railings.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
'M A. Delegated Design: Design railings, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a
qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.
B. Structural Performance: Railings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following
loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:
1. Top Rail of Guards: Capable of withstanding the following loads applied as indicated:
a. Concentrated load of 200 lbf(890 N)applied at any point and in any direction.
b. Uniform load of 50 lbfift. (730 N/M) applied horizontally and concurrently with
uniform load of 100 lbf/ft.(1460)Nlm)applied vertically downward.
C. Concentrated and uniform loads above need not be assumed to act concurrently.
2. Handrails Not Serving as Top Rails: Capable of withstanding the following loads applied
as indicated:
a. Concentrated load of 200 lbf(890 N)applied at any point and in any direction.
b. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ft. (730 N/m)applied in any direction.
C. Concentrated and uniform loads above need not be assumed to act concurrently.
3. Infill Area of Guards: Capable of withstanding a horizontal concentrated load of 200 lbf
(890 N) applied to I sq. ft. (0.09 sq. m) at any point in system, including panels,
intermediate rails,balusters, or other elements composing infill area.
a. Load above need not be assumed to act concurrently with loads on top rails in
determining stress on guards.
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 - 1
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary
for securing metal stairs to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and
masonry inserts,through-bolts,lag bolts,and other connectors.
B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing
metal stairs. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from
established lines and levels and free of rack.
C. Install metal stairs by welding stair framing to steel structure or to weld plates cast into concrete
unless otherwise indicated.
D. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete,
masonry, or similar construction.
E. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are
not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after ..
fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.
F. Field Welding: Comply with requirements for welding in "Fabrication,General" Article.
w�!
G. Place and finish concrete fill for treads and platforms to comply with Division 03 Section "Cast-
in-Place Concrete."
3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Division 09 painting Sections.
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair
galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 055100
wiu
we
METAL STAIRS 055100-6
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of
approximately 132 inch (I mrn) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on
exposed surfaces.
D. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or
otherwise impairing work.
E. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.
F. Weld connections to comply with the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. Weld exposed corners and seams continuously unless otherwise indicated.
5. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary
Joint Finish Standards" for Type 2 welds: completely sanded joint, some undercutting
and pinholes okay.
G. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners
where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk)
screws or bolts unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
H. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep
holes where water may accumulate.
2.6 FINISHES
A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize as specified in Section 050800.
B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with
minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and
environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications:
1. Exteriors (SSPC Zone 1B)and Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC-
SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
2. Interiors(SSPC Zone IA): SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
C. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with
galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry,
unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1:
go Shop,Field,and Maintenance Painting of Steel,"for shop painting.
METAL STAIRS 055100-5
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
G. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type,ASME B18.2-1.1 (ASME B18.21.2M).
H. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors capable of
sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit
masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing
according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with
ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (AS"I'M F 1941 M), Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise
indicated.
2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel is Indicated: Alloy Group I
(A1)stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M), and nuts, ASTM F 594
(ASTM F 836M).
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy
welded.
B. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 09 painting Sections.
C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and w
compatible with paints specified to be used over it.
D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
E. Nonshrink,Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged,nonstaining,noncorrosive,nongaseous grout
complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for
interior and exterior applications.
F. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-
Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with a minimum 28-day
compressive strength of 3000 psi (20 MPa)unless otherwise indicated.
G. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185/A 185M, 6 by 6 inches (152 by 152 mm), W I A by WI A,
unless otherwise indicated.
2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Provide complete stair assemblies, including metal framing, hangers, struts, clips, brackets,
bearing plates, and other components necessary to support and anchor stairs and platforms on
supporting structure.
1. Join components by welding unless otherwise indicated.
2. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.
.s.
B. Preassembled Stairs: Assemble stairs in shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units
only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and
coordinated installation.
METAL STAIRS 055100-4
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal stairs. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and
directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items
with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to
Project site in time for installation.
C. Coordinate locations of hanger rods and struts with other work so that they will not encroach on
required stair width and will be within the fire-resistance-rated stair enclosure.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 METALS, GENERAL
A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise
w*' indicated. For components exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without
seam marks,roller marks,rolled trade names,or blemishes.
2.2 FERROUS METALS
A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with average recycled content of steel
products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not
less than [25] percent.
B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
C. Uncoated, Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, either commercial steel, Type B,
on or structural steel, Grade 25 (Grade 170), unless another grade is required by design loads;
exposed.
! ! 2.3 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or
ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 194111), Class Fe/Zn 12 for exterior use, and Class Fe/Zn 5 where
built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for type,grade,and class required.
B. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts,ASTM A 307,Grade A(ASTM F 568M.Property
Glass 4.6); with hex nuts,ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and,where indicated, flat washers.
C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563
(ASTM A 563M); and,where indicated,flat washers.
1. Provide mechanically deposited or hot-dip,zinc-coated anchor bolts for stairs indicated to
be galvanized stairs indicated to be shop primed with zinc-rich primer..
D. Machine Screws: ASME B18.63 (ASME£318.6.7M).
E. Lag Screws: ASME B18.2.1 (ASME B18.2.3.8M).
F. Plain Washers: Round,ASME B18.22.1 (ASME B18.22M).
METAL STAIRS 055100-3
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
Northampton,MA
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans,elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For products involving selection of color,texture, or design.
D. Samples for Verification: For the following products, in manufacturer's standard sizes:
1. Precast concrete treads.
2. Epoxy-resin-filled stair treads.
3. Stair treads with nonslip-aggregate surface finish.
4. Metal floor plate treads.
5. Grating treads.
6. Abrasive nosings.
E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance
requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified
professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
F. Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer.
G. Welding certificates.
H. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers
certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE +
A. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to
practice in the Commonwealth of Massachusetts and who is experienced in providing
engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed
for installations of metal stairs(including handrails and railing systems)that are similar to those
indicated for this Project in material,design, and extent.
B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.
C. NAAMM Stair Standard: Comply with "Recommended Voluntary Minimum Standards for
Fixed Metal Stairs" in NAAMM AMP 510, "Metal Stairs Manual," for class of stair designated,
unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
1. Preassembled Stairs: Commercial class.
D. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/DI.1M,
"Structural Welding Code- Steel."
.w
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint
and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats
are compatible with one another.
METAL STAIRS 055100-2
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
SECTION 055100-METAL STAIRS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Preassembled steel stairs with concrete-filled treads.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete fill for stair treads and
platforms.
2. Division 05 Section'Pipe and Tube Railings" for pipe and tube railings.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Design metal stairs, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a
qualified professional engineer,using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.
B. Structural Performance of Stairs: Metal stairs shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and
the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated.
► 1. Treads and Platforms of Metal Stairs: Capable of withstanding a uniform load of 100
lbf/sq. ft. (4.79 kN/sq. m) or a concentrated load of 300 lbf{1.33 kN) on an area of 4 sq.
in. (25.8 sq. cm), whichever produces the greater stress.
2. Stair Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from loads specified above in
addition to stresses resulting from railing system loads.
3. Limit deflection of treads, platforms, and framing members to L/360 or 1/4 inch (6.4
inm),whichever is less.
C. Seismic Performance: Metal stairs shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined
according to ASCE/SEI 7.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Data for Credit MR 4.1[and Credit MR 4.2]: Indicating percentages by weight
of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content for products having recycled content.
Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.
�w
METAL STAIRS 055100- 1
go
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
3.5 INSTALLING NOSINGS
A. Center nosings on tread widths unless otherwise indicated.
B. For nosings embedded in concrete steps or curbs, align nosings flush with riser faces and level
with tread surfaces.
3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Division 09 painting Sections.
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair
galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 055000
NO
METAL FABRICATIONS 055000- 11
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion .�.
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no
roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent
surface.
D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal
fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for
use with concrete and masonry inserts,toggle bolts,through bolts, lag screws,wood screws,and
other connectors.
E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete,
aw
masonry, or similar construction.
F. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will come into contact with
grout, concrete, masonry,wood,or dissimilar metals with the following:
1. Cast Aluminum: Heavy coat of bituminous paint.
2. Extruded Aluminum: Two coats of clear lacquer.
3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported,
including manufacturers'written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings.
3.3 INSTALLING METAL BOLLARDS
A. Fill metal-capped bollards solidly with concrete and allow concrete to cure seven days before
installing.
B. Anchor bollards to existing construction with expansion anchors. Provide four 3/4-inch (19-
nim)bolts at each bollard unless otherwise indicated.
C. Anchor bollards in place with concrete footings. Center and align bollards in holes 3 inches (7 5
min) above bottom of excavation. Place concrete and vibrate or tamp for consolidation.
Support and brace bollards in position until concrete has cured.
D. Fill bollards solidly with concrete, mounding top surface to shed water.
3.4 INSTALLING PIPE GUARDS
wr
A. Provide pipe guards at exposed vertical pipes in parking garage where not protected by curbs or
other barriers. Install by bolting to wall or column with expansion anchors. Provide four 3/4-
inch (19-min) bolts at each pipe guard. Mount pipe guards with top edge 26 inches (660 nom)
above driving surface.
METAL FABRICATIONS 055000- 10
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
2.16 FINISHES, GENERAL
w
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.
C. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into
surrounding surface.
2.17 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES
A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize as specified in Section 050800.
+ B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with
minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and
environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications:
I. Exteriors (SSPC Zone 113)and Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC-
SP 61NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
2. Interiors(SSPC Zone IA): SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
C. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with
galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry,
unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. I:
Shop, Field,and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.
2.18 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum
Association for designating aluminum finishes.
B. As-Fabricated Finish: AA-M10 (Mechanical Finish: as fabricated,unspecified).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION,GENERAL
A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing
metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with
edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and
levels.
B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are
not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.
METAL FABRICATIONS 055000-9
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
2.12 ABRASIVE METAL NOSINGS
A. Cast-Metal Units: Cast aluminum, with an integral-abrasive, as-cast finish consisting of
aluminum oxide, silicon carbide, or a combination of both. Fabricate units in lengths necessary
to accurately fit openings or conditions.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. American Safety Tread Co., Inc.
b. Balco Inc. ow
C. Safe-T-Metal Company, Inc.
d. Wooster Products Inc.
2. Nosings: Cross-hatched units, 4 inches (100 mm) wide with 1-inch (25-11)1n) lip, for ,A
casting into concrete steps.
B. Provide anchors for embedding units in concrete, either integral or applied to units, as standard an
with manufacturer.
C. Apply bituminous paint to concealed surfaces of cast-metal units.
40
2.13 PIPE GUARDS
A. Fabricate pipe guards from 3/8-inch- (9.5-inm-) thick by 12-inch- {;00-mm-) wide steel plate,
bent to fit flat against the wall or column at both ends and to fit around pipe with 2-inch (50-
mm) clearance between pipe and pipe guard. Drill each end for two 3/4-inch (19-mm) anchor
bolts.
B. Galvanize pipe guards.
.w
C. Prime pipe guards with zinc-rich primer
2.14 METAL DOWNSPOUT BOOTS AT LOADING DOCK
A. Provide downspout boots made from cast iron in heights indicated with inlets of size and shape
to suit downspouts. Provide units with flanges and holes for countersunk anchor bolts. + +
1. Outlet: Vertical,to discharge into pipe.
B. Prime cast iron downspout boots with zinc-rich primer.
2.15 BRACKETS FOR SUN CONTROL DEVICE
A. Provide stainless steel bracket to support the sun control device specified in Section 084413.
B. Profile and size of bracket shall be as indicated.
C. Provide stainless steel finish hardware included bolts, washers, nuts, and finish caps to secure
sun control device to bracket.
METAL FABRICATIONS 055000- 8
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
B. Galvanize ship's ladders, including treads,railings,brackets, and fasteners.
2.9 LADDER SAFETY CAGES
A. General:
1. Fabricate ladder safety cages to comply with ANSI A14.3. Assemble by welding or with
stainless-steel fasteners.
2. Provide primary hoops at tops and bottoms of cages and spaced not more than 20 feet
(6 m) o.c. Provide secondary intermediate hoops spaced not more than 48 inches (1200
min)o.c. between primary hoops.
3. Fasten assembled safety cage to ladder rails and adjacent construction by welding or with
stainless-steel fasteners unless otherwise indicated.
B. Steel Ladder Safety Cages:
1. Primary Hoops: 1/4-by-4-inch(6.4-by-100-mm)flat bar hoops.
2. Secondary Intermediate Hoops: 1/4-by-2-inch(6.4-by-50-nom)flat bar hoops.
3. Vertical Bars: 3/16-by-1-1/2-inch (4.8-by-38-mrn)flat bars secured to each hoop.
4. Galvanize ladder safety cages, including brackets and fasteners to match galvanized ships
ladders.
as 5. Prime ladder safety cages, including brackets and fasteners, to match primed and painted
ladders.
2.10 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM
A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown
with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed
field splices where possible.
B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with
other work.
1. Provide with integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete or masonry
construction.
C. Miscellaneous trim at the interior of the building shall be stainless steel. Other trim shall be
have galvanized finish.
2.11 METAL BOLLARDS
A. Fabricate metal bollards from Schedule 80 steel pipe.
1. Cap bollards with 1/4-inch- (6.4-mm-)thick steel plate.
B. Fabricate bollards with 3/8-inch- (9.5-inm-) thick steel baseplates for bolting to concrete slab.
Drill baseplates at all four corners for 3/4-inch(19-mm)anchor bolts.
PX C. Prime bollards with zinc-rich primer.
METAL FABRICATIONS 055000- 7
go
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA '"
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
�w
A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to
complete the Work.
B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise
indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent
construction.
1. Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where indicated.
2. Furnish inserts for units installed after concrete is placed.
C. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated.
D. Prime miscellaneous framing and supports with zinc-rich primer.
2.7 METAL LADDERS
A. General:
1. Comply with ANSI A 14.3 unless otherwise indicated.
2. For elevator pit ladders,comply with ASME A17.1.
B. Steel Ladders:
1. Space siderails 18 inches(457 nim) apart unless otherwise indicated.
2. Space siderails of elevator pit ladders 12 inches(300 mm)apart.
3. Siderails: Continuous, 3/8-by-2-1/2-inch (9.5-by-64-nom) steel flat bars, with eased
edges.
4. Rungs: 3/4-inch- (19-mm-)diameter steel bars.
5. Fit rungs in centerline of siderails;plug-weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces.
6. Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung by coating with abrasive material
metallically bonded to rung.
a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
I) IKG Industries,a division of Harsco Corporation; Mebac.
2) S1ipNOT Metal Safety Flooring,a W. S. Molnar company; S1ipNOT.
7. Support each ladder[at top and bottom and not more than 60 inches k 150 mm) o.c. with
welded or bolted steel brackets.
8. Galvanize exterior ladders, including brackets and fasteners.
9. Prime; ladders, including brackets and fasteners,with zinc-rich primer.
2.8 METAL SHIPS'LADDERS
A. Provide metal ships' ladders where indicated. Fabricate of open-type construction with channel
or plate stringers and pipe and tube railings unless otherwise indicated. Provide brackets and
fittings for installation.
1. Fabricate ships' ladders, including railings from steel.
2. Fabricate treads and platforms from welded or pressure-locked steel bar grating. Limit
openings in gratings to no more than 1/2 inch (12 mni)in least dimension.
3. Comply with applicable railing requirements in Division 05 Section "Pipe and Tube
Railings."
METAL FABRICATIONS 055000-6
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and
compatible with paints specified to be used over it.
D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
E. Nonshrink,Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged,nonstaining,noncorrosive, nongaseous grout
complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for
interior and exterior applications.
F. Concrete: Comply with requirements in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for
normal-weight, air-entrained, concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000
psi (20 MPa).
2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units
only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain
structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated
installation.
B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of
approximately 1%32 inch (1 nt€n) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on
exposed surfaces.
C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or
otherwise impairing work.
D. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.
E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no
roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent
surface.
F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or
welds where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head
(countersunk)fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
G. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude
water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.
H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws,
and similar items.
I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring
devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads.
METAL FABRICATIONS 055000-5
w�
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
(ASTM F 1941 M), Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class
required.
B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M.
Property Class 4.6); with hex nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and, where indicated, flat
washers.
C. Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless-steel bolts,
ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 7381`x-1); with hex nuts, ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M); and, where **
indicated, flat washers;Alloy [Group 1 (A 1)] [Group 2 (A4)].
D. Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3 (ASME B18.6.7M).
E. Lag Screws: ASME B18.2.1 (AS ti1E B18.2.3.8M).
F. Plain Washers: Round,ASME B18.22.1 (ASME 1318.22M).
G. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type,ASME B 18.2 1.1 (ASME B 18.21.2M).
H. Anchors, General: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the
load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in
concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified
independent testing agency.
1. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded type or wedge type unless otherwise
indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or
ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all hot-dip
galvanized per ASTM F 2329.
J. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors.
1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with
ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM 1= 1 941:`x-1), Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise
indicated.
2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel is Indicated: Alloy Group 1
(A ) stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M), and nuts, ASTM F 594
(ASTM F 836M). �*
K. Slotted-Channel Inserts: Cold-formed, hot-dip galvanized-steel box channels(struts)complying
with MFMA-4, 1-5/8 by 7/8 inches (41 In 22 mm) by length indicated with anchor straps or
studs not less than 3 inches (75 nim)long at not more than 8 inches(200 min')o.c. Provide with
temporary filler and tee-head bolts, complete with washers and nuts, all zinc-plated to comply
with ASTM B 633,Class Fe/Zn 5,as needed for fastening to inserts.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy
welded.
B. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 09 painting Sections.
so
METAL FABRICATIONS 055000-4
w.
IA*
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
1. AWS D1.1/D1.IM, "Structural Welding Code- Steel."
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with
metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint
and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats
are compatible with one another.
B. Coordinate installation of anchorages and angles for casting into concrete. Furnish setting
drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete
inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or
masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 METALS, GENERAL
A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise
indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials
without seam marks,roller marks,rolled trade names, or blemishes.
2.2 FERROUS METALS
A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with average recycled content of steel
products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not
less than [25] percent.
B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
"! C. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold-formed steel tubing.
D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard weight(Schedule 40)unless otherwise indicated.
E. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold-formed metal box channels(struts)complying with MFMA-4.
F. Stainless-Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 304.
2.3 FASTENERS
A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use
and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941
METAL FABRICATIONS 055000-3
�w
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA ""
6. Division 08 Section "Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls" for coordination of anchorage
with sun control device. .�
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Design ladders including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified
professional engineer,using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.
B. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature
changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints,
overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.
I. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (6' deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material
surfaces.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
I. Nonslip aggregates and nonslip-aggregate surface finishes.
2. Metal nosings and treads.
3. Paint products.
4. Grout.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their
connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type and finish of extruded nosing.
D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance
requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified
professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
E. Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer.
F. Mill Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of stainless-steel certifying that products furnished
comply with requirements.
G. Welding certificates.
H. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers
certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,
"Structural Welding Code- Steel."
B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
METAL FABRICATIONS 055000-2
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
Northampton,MA
SECTION 055000-METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
4a
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Steel framing and supports for ceiling-hung toilet compartments.
2. Steel framing and supports for operable partitions.
3. Steel framing and supports for overhead and coiling doors.
4. Steel framing and supports for countertops.
5. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment.
6. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified
in other Sections.
7. Elevator machine beams,hoist beams.
8. Steel shapes for supporting elevator door sills.
9. Metal ladders.
10. Metal ships' ladders
11. Miscellaneous steel trim including steel angle corner guards, steel edgings, and loading-
dock edge angles.
12. Metal bollards.
13. Abrasive metal nosings.
pe 14. Metal Pipe Guards
15. Metal downspout boots.
16. Custom bracket supports for sun control devices.
17. Custom fabrications for periscope support within tower.
B. Products furnished,but not installed,under this Section:
1. Loose steel lintels.
2. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, and wedge-type inserts indicated
to be cast into concrete or built into unit masonry.
e■ C. Related Sections:
1. Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing anchor bolts, steel pipe
sleeves,slotted-channel inserts,wedge-type inserts, and other items cast into concrete.
2. Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for installing loose lintels, anchor bolts, and other
items built into unit masonry.
3. Division 05 Section "Structural Steel Framing."
4. Division 05 Section"Metal Stairs."
5. Division 05 Section "Pipe and Tube Railings."
METAL FABRICATIONS 055000- 1
go
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
3.5 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and
installed cold-formed metal framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and
manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and
Installer, that ensure that cold-formed metal framing is without damage or deterioration at time
+! of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 054000
±w
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 054000-7
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Cold-formed metal framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be field
assembled.
B. Install cold-formed metal framing according to AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel
Framing - General Provisions" and to manufacturer's written instructions unless more stringent
requirements are indicated.
C. Install shop- or field-fabricated, cold-formed framing and securely anchor to supporting
structure.
wu
D. Install cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with
connections securely fastened.
E. Install framing members in one-piece lengths unless splice connections are indicated for track
or tension members.
F. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in •
intensity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place,
undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent
connections to framing are secured.
G. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with cold-formed metal framing.
Independently frame both sides of joints.
H. Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's standard
punched openings.
1. Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed metal framing level, plumb, and true to line to a
maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet(1:960)and as follows:
1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) from
plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of
sheathing or other finishing materials.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: Owner may engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform
field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B. Field and shop welds will be subject to testing and inspecting.
ws
C. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.
D. Remove and replace work where test results indicate that it does not comply with specified
requirements.
E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine
compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 054000-6
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
D. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.
ww
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20.
B. Shims: Load bearing,high-density multimonomer plastic,nonleaching.
C. Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick, selected from
manufacturer's standard widths to match width of bottom track or rim track members.
2.7 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with
connections securely fastened, according to referenced AISI's specifications and standards,
manufacturer's written instructions,and requirements in this Section.
B. Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery, and erection
stresses. Lift fabricated assemblies to prevent damage or permanent distortion.
#?" C. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum
allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet(1:960�)and as follows:
1. Spacing: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch(3 mm)
from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements
of sheathing or other finishing materials.
2. Squareness: Fabricate each cold-formed metal framing assembly to a maximum out-of-
square tolerance of 1/8 inch(3 mm).
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine supporting substrates and abutting structural framing for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach continuous angles, supplementary
framing, or tracks to structural members indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials.
B. After applying sprayed fire-resistive materials, remove only as much of these materials as
needed to complete installation of cold-formed framing without reducing thickness of fire-
resistive materials below that are required to obtain fire-resistance rating indicated. Protect
remaining fire-resistive materials from damage.
C. Install sealer gaskets to isolate the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and the top of
foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations.
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 054000-5
10
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
2.3 EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING
A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched,
with stiffened flanges, complying with ASTM C 955,and as follows:
1. Minimum Uncoated-Steel Thickness: Required to meet design loading.
2. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches(41 miry) minimum or as required to meet design loading.
B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated,unpunched,
with unstiffened flanges, complying with ASTM C 955, and as follows:
1. Minimum Uncoated-Steel Thickness: Required to meet design loading.
2. Flange Width: 1-1/4 inches (32 mm). )minimum or as required to meet design loading.
C. Single Deflection Track: Manufacturer's single, deep-leg, U-shaped steel track; unpunched,
with unstiffened flanges, of web depth to contain studs while allowing free vertical movement,
with flanges designed to support horizontal and lateral loads.
D. Vertical Deflection Clips: Manufacturer's standard bypass or clips, capable of accommodating .w
upward and downward vertical displacement of primary structure.
2.4 FRAMING ACCESSORIES
A. Fabricate steel-framing accessories from steel sheet, ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural
Grade, Type H,metallic coated, of same grade and coating weight used for framing members.
1. Supplementary framing.
2. Bracing,bridging,and solid blocking.
3. Web stiffeners.
4. Anchor clips.
5. End clips.
6. Foundation clips.
7. Gusset plates.
8. Stud kickers,knee braces, and girts.
9. Hole reinforcing plates.
10. Backer plates.
2.5 ANCHORS, CLIPS,AND FASTENERS
A. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to
ASTM A 123/A 123M.
B. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated
from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10
times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified
independent testing agency.
C. Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C 1513, corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-tapping
steel drill screws.
1. Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing,manufacturer's standard elsewhere.
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 054000-4
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
E. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM E 329 to conduct the testing indicated, as docu-
mented according to ASTM E 548.
F. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding
Code--Steel," and AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."
G. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where metal framing is part of a fire-resistance-rated as-
sembly, provide framing identical to that of assemblies tested for fire resistance per
ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Protect cold-formed metal framing from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during
delivery, storage, and handling.
B. Store cold-formed metal framing, protect with a waterproof covering, and ventilate to avoid
condensation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
so
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide cold-formed metal framing
by one of the following:
I. AllSteel Products,Inc.
2. Clark Steel Framing.
3. Dale/Incor.
4. Dietrich Metal Framing;a Worthington Industries Company.
5. MarinoWare; a division of Ware Industries.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of grade and
coating weight as follows:
1. Grade: As required by structural performance.
2. Coating: G90(2275).
B. Steel Sheet for Vertical DeflectionClips: ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural steel, zinc coated,
of grade and coating as follows:
I. Grade: As required by structural performance.
2. Coating: G90(G2 715).
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 054000-3
so
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
B. Shop Drawings: Show layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed metal
framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners.
Show reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping, bracing, bridg-
ing, splices, accessories, connection details, and attachment to adjoining Work. Shop drawings
shall be stamped by a structural engineer.
C. Mill certificates signed by steel sheet producer or test reports from a qualified independent test-
ing agency indicating steel sheet complies with requirements.
D. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel.
E. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demon-
strate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names
and addresses,names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.
F. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating that each of the following
complies with requirements,based on comprehensive testing of current products:
I. Expansion anchors.
2. Power-actuated anchors.
3. Mechanical fasteners.
4. Vertical deflection clips.
5. Miscellaneous structural clips and accessories.
G. Research/Evaluation Reports: Evidence of cold-formed metal framing's compliance with build-
ing code in effect for Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
an
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed cold-formed metal fram-
ing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has
resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Engineering Responsibility: Engage a qualified professional engineer to prepare design calcula-
tions, Shop Drawings,and other structural data.
C. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to prac-
tice in the Commonwealth of Massachusetts and who is experienced in providing engineering
services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installa-
tions of cold-formed metal framing that are similar to those indicated for this Project in materi-
al,design, and extent.
D. Mill certificates signed by steel sheet producer[or test reports from a qualified independent test-
ing agency] indicating steel sheet complies with requirements, including uncoated steel thick-
ness, yield strength, tensile strength, total elongation, chemical requirements, [ductility,] and
galvanized-coating thickness.
■s
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 054000-2
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
W Northampton,MA
SECTION 054000-COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
PART 1 -GENERAL
.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Exterior non-load-bearing wall framing.
2. It is the intention of this Section that the contractor provide the engineering required to
provide a cold formed metal framing system that meets the performance requirements
stated and referenced. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to determine the required
gage of all steel studs based on a maximum stud spacing of 16 inches O.C. and spans of
those indicated or inferred on the Drawings
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 09 Section "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for interior non-load-bearing,
metal-stud framing and ceiling-suspension assemblies.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Provide cold-formed metal framing capable of withstanding design
loads within limits and under conditions indicated.
! 1. Design Loads: As indicated on structural drawings.
2. Deflection Limits: Design framing systems to withstand design loads without deflections
greater than the L/240
W 3. Design framing systems to provide for movement of framing members without damage
or overstressing, sheathing failure, connection failure, undue strain on fasteners and anc-
hors, or other detrimental effects when subject to a maximum ambient temperature
change of 120 deg F (67 deg C).
4. Design framing system to maintain clearances at openings, to allow for construction to-
lerances, and to accommodate live load deflection of primary building structure as fol-
lows:
B. At locations indicated on the drawings, provide sills and jams capable of providing bracing for
the window system. Deflection requirements shall conform to the window manufacturer's re-
quirements.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of cold-formed metal framing product and accessory indicated.
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 054000- 1
KOLLMORGEN ELECRO-OPTICAL McNamara/Salvia, Inc.
Northampton,MA August 21, 2009
d. At the beginning of each shift of work, and after each time welding equipment
has been moved,two test studs shall be installed and bent to 45 degrees. If
failure occurs, adjust equipment and repeat test. Two consecutive test studs shall
be welded and found satisfactory before production for that shift begins or is
resumed.
4. Testing: Testing of production studs will be by an independent agency as specified
herein. Replace all studs which fail under tests.
F. Cutting and Fitting: Cut and fit deck units and accessories around openings and projections
through decking. Make cuts neat, square, and trim. Cut openings true to dimensions using metal
saws,drills, or shears. Do not torch cut.
G. Reinforcement at Openings:
1. Provide reinforcing for all openings through metal deck as shown on the drawings.
2. Miscellaneous openings not shown on the drawings, such as those required for vents,
risers, conduits, etc., shall be cut and reinforced, if necessary,by the trade requiring the
opening.
H. Roof Sump Pans: Place over openings in roof decking and weld to top decking surface. Space
welds not more than 12 in O.C. with at least one weld at each corner. Cut opening in bottom of
sump pan to accommodate drain.
1. Closure Strips: Install at all open uncovered ends and edges of roof decking, and in voids
between decking and other construction. Install flexible closure strips in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
J. Roof Insulation Support: Provide metal closure strips for support of roof insulation adjacent to
edges and openings.
K. Touch-up painting: Touch-up galvanized finishes as required for U/L approval and where finish
has been removed on all surfaces of non-composite metal roof deck.
3.3 PROTECTION OF COMPLETED WORK
A. Do not use deck units for storage or as a working platform until permanently secured in position.
B. The General Contractor shall assure that completed deck is not damaged by use as a runway,
storage of materials or subsequent work. He is to assure that construction loads are not allowed
which exceed the safe carrying capacity of the deck.
END OF SECTION
METAL DECKING 053100- 7
KOLLMORGEN ELECRO-OPTICAL McNamara/Salvia, Inc.
Northampton,MA August 21,2009
3. Where welded studs are field applied through deck, shear studs may be substituted for
deck fusion welds on a one for one basis.
4. Where deck is temporarily supported on finished concrete work to facilitate a second
concrete pour provide fastening to secure deck until concrete directly supported by the
metal deck has reached its 28 day design strength.
5. Other Requirements:
a. Weld or mechanically fasten end closures at 4 ft. o.c. Weld or mechanically
fasten side closures at 3 ft. o.c. Fasten side laps between adjacent deck units with
welds,button punch or Tek fasteners in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations and at intervals not over 36 inches o.c.for floors. Refer to
drawings for sidelap fastening requirements at roof.
b. Fastening method and spacing shall comply with UL fire rating requirements.
E. Stud Shear Connectors:
1. Preparation: When stud shear connectors are to be welded through metal deck and/or
corrugated metal forming,the top flange of beams to receive such studs shall be
unpainted and free of debris prior to installation of the deck and/or forming. Studs shall
be field welded to the structural members only after all steel framing, deck and/or forms
are in place and shored when required. Deck and/or forming shall be installed so that the
bottom rib or plate is in continuous contact with the surface to receive the studs.
2. Stud Shear Connector Capacity: Number of shear connectors indicated on the drawings
is based on 100 percent of the allowable capacity for shear connectors in normal weight
or lightweight concrete as listed in AISC specifications for the Design,Fabrication and
Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings. Actual shear connector capacities shall be
determined by tests on each type of deck supplied an the number of shear connectors
required in each rib. If additional shear connectors are required due to decreases in the
capacity of shear connectors for the type of deck and stud placement supplied, such
additional shear connectors shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner.
3. Installation:
.w
a. Install shear connectors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Use only
personnel and equipment authorized by the manufacturer. +�+
b. Use through-deck shear connector welding where deck material thickness
permits proper weld fusion to develop required connector capacity. Provide
adequate test results to verify the feasibility of through-deck welding for the
particular connector sizes and deck thickness involved.
C. If through-deck shear connector welding is not feasible, install shear connectors .�
through prepunched holes in the deck. Provide prepunched holes only for the
shear connectors involved and keep hole oversize to the minimum required to
develop a proper weld. +*
METAL DECKING 053100-6
KOLLMORGEN ELECRO-OPTICAL McNamara/Salvia, Inc.
Northampton,MA August 21,2009
flanges not less than three inches wide. Recess not less than l-1/2 inches below roof deck
we surface.
D. Welding Electrodes: AWS A5.1-79 Class E-6022 or acceptable equivalent.
E. Shear Stud Connectors: See Section 051200 Structural Steel.
F. Hanger Tabs: 50 pound allowable load,maximum.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
to
3.1 INSPECTION
Prior to start of installation, check all supporting members for correct layout and alignment and
report all deviations from the drawings to the Architect, General Contractor, and Structural
Engineer.
iuw 3.2 ERECTION
A. General: Install deck units and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations
and shop drawings.
B. Placing Deck Units: Position deck units on supporting members and adjust to final position with
ends bearing on support and accurately aligned end to end before being permanently fastened.
Provide roof deck end laps of not less than 2 inches. Floor deck shall bear minimum of 3 inches
of supports. Do not stretch or contract side lap interlocks. Place deck units flat and square, and
secure to adjacent framing without warp or deflection.
C. Slab pour stops and deck edges
1. The location of all gauge metal and rolled shape pour stops,as well as members supporting
the work of other trades, shall be established by measuring from reference lines and bench
marks installed by the Contractor's field engineers. These reference lines and benchmarks
will be indicated in all erection drawings. Locating these items by measuring from
members of the structural frame is not acceptable.
2. Connection details for members supporting the work of other trades as well as metal deck
to pour stops shall be provided with adequate adjustment capability to accommodate the
frame tolerances indicated in the AISC Code of Standard Practice,and still permit these
members and pour stops to be installed in their proper locations with respect to reference
lines and bench marks established by the Contractor.
D. Fastening roof and floor deck units:
1. Fasten roof decks as shown on the drawings.
2. Floor Decks: Secure to supporting members with 3/4 inch minimum diameter fusion
Ar welds spaced 12 inches O.C. at all supports.
METAL DECKING 053100- 5
to
KOLLMORGEN ELECRO-OPTICAL McNamara/Salvia, Inc.
Northampton,MA August 21, 2009 "o
A. Sheet Steel: Minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi. Conform to ASTM A653, Grade A, where
galvanized finish is used. Conform to ASTM A611, Grade C where painted or phosphatized
finish is used.
B. Deck Units: Provide manufacturer standard roll formed decking as follows:
1. Deck Supporting Concrete or Cementitious Fill: Composite design as indicated on the
drawings. Finish to be painted on the bottom surface and phosphatized on the top surface *■
or galvanized as noted on drawings.
2. Deck Not Supporting Concrete or Cementitious Fill: Non-composite design. Finish to be
galvanized.
C. Finishes: Conform to the following:
I. Galvanized Finish: ASTM A653,G60 coating at deck not supporting concrete.
2. Galvanized Finish: ASTM A653,G30 coating at deck supporting concrete. *"
3. Phosphatized Finish: Manufacturer's, standard, chemically cleaned, iron phosphate
coated prior to forming.
4. Painted Finish: Manufacturer's standard, baked on,rust inhibitive paint,capable of
withstanding a 100-hour salt fog test when tested in accordance with ASTM B117 and
compatible with stud welding process. Apply to chemically cleaned,phosphatized
surface.
D. Galvanized Touch-up Paint: Metallic zinc paint complying with FS TT-P-641, Type II. ■"
E. Self drilling screws:#10 or#12 TEK.
w
2.2 FABRICATION
Form deck units with flush,telescoped or nested 2-inch end laps and nested side laps. Length of
deck unit shall be sufficient to span three or more supports. For composite deck, provide
deformations required to structurally bond the fill material. Provide hanger tabs for 50 lb
maximum load at deck supporting concrete only.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Metal Closure Strips: Fabricate of galvanized sheet steel of same quality as deck units.
Minimum thickness for roofs,20 gauge. Minimum thickness for floors, 18 gauge. Bend to
provide tight fitting closures at open ends and sides of decking.
B. Cover Plates: Fabricate of sheet steel of same quality as deck units, 18 gauge minimum
thickness. Configuration to match contour of floor deck units.
C. Roof Sump Pans: Fabricate from single piece of sheet steel of same quality as deck units, 14 �*
gauge minimum thickness. Level bottom and sloping sides to direct water flow to drain. Bearing
METAL DECKING 053100-4
KOLLMORGEN ELECRO-OPTICAL McNamara/Salvia, Inc.
Northampton,MA August 21,2009
2. The Testing Agency shall visually inspect all deck welds for size and spacing prior to
being covered by other work.
B. Stud Connectors:
" 1. The Testing Agency shall inspect stud connectors in accordance with AWS D1.1
paragraph 4.25 and 4.26 as follows:
a. All studs shall be acoustically inspected. Studs,which do not ring when struck
with a hammer shall be bent 15 degrees. If no fracture occurs, stud is considered
acceptable and left bent. Verify spacing,clearance and quantity.
WX
b. In addition to the above,not less than one of each 100 studs shall be tested by
bending 15 degrees. If no fracture occurs, stud is considered acceptable and left
bent.
C. If at any time the number of rejectable studs exceeds 3%, additional testing in
accordance with b. above shall be performed on one of each 25 studs and this
increased frequency of testing shall be continued until the number of rejectable
studs is 3%or less. All cost of additional testing required by this paragraph shall
be borne by the Contractor.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturers Data: Submit two copies of manufacturer's specifications and installation
instructions for each product specified. Manufacturers specifications to include metal deck
section moduli and moment of inertia for each deck specified. Include manufacturer's
certification as may be required to show compliance with these specifications. Furnish a copy of
each instruction to the installer. In addition,for composite decks, submit for each slab type,
unshored maximum spans and allowable superimposed live loads for the span conditions shown
on the drawings.
B. Shop Drawings(Metal Deck): Submit shop drawings as specified under Section 013300.
Indicate decking plan,deck profile,dimensions,gage, anchorage, supports,projections,openings
and reinforcement, finishes,applicable details and accessories, location and capacity of required
! " deck shoring,type,and locations and size of welds.
C. Shop Drawings(Shear Studs): Submit shop drawings as specified under Section 013300.
Indicate shear stud size,locations and all related details for placement(s).
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
go General Contractor shall inspect all metal deck upon delivery to the site. Any damaged deck shall
be rejected immediately and replaced. Store metal deck at the site above ground on platforms,
skids or other supports with one end elevated for drainage. Cover deck until needed with a
waterproof covering ventilated to prevent condensation.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
METAL DECKING 053100-3
KOLLMORGEN ELECRO-OPTICAL McNamara/Salvia, Inc.
Northampton,MA August 21, 2009
Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks,and Roof Decks," latest edition. Design shall
also comply with the following:
1. Non-Composite Deck:
a. Maximum Flexural Working Stress: 20,000 psi.
b. Maximum Roof Deflection: 1/240 span length, center to center of supports under
live load. "
2. Composite Deck:
a. Maximum Flexural Working Stress in Metal Deck Under Dead Load Plus
Construction Load: 0.6 times minimum yield stress. Maximum allowable
flexural working stress shall be 36,000 psi regardless of material strength Fy.
b. Maximum Flexural Working Stress in Deck Under Superimposed Load: 0.6
times the minimum yield stress.
C. Maximum flexural tensile working stress in deck under the combination of
superimposed load,the dry weight of concrete, and the weight of the deck: 0.8
times the minimum yield stress.
d. Maximum Concrete Stress: 0.45 times specified 28-day strength.
e. Maximum Floor Deflection: 1/360 span length,center-to-center of supports ,.
under superimposed dead load plus live load.
f. Maximum Deflection Under Weight of Wet Concrete: 1/180 span length, center- ""
to-center of supports, but not to exceed 3/4 in.
3. Span Conditions: Strength design of deck units shall be based on clear span length, edge-
to-edge of supports.
F. Reference Standards
1. Design and Manufacturer: Meet requirements of Steel Deck Institute Basic Design
Specifications and AISI Specifications for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural
Members, latest edition. *�
2. Welding- Including Shear Stud Connectors: Meet requirements of AWS Structural
Welding Code,AWS D1.1,latest edition.
1.3 TESTING AND INSPECTION
A. Metal Deck:
I. The Testing Agency will visually inspect all metal deck to observe that material is in
acceptable condition and has been properly installed.
METAL DECKING 053100-2
OR
KOLLMORGEN ELECRO-OPTICAL McNamara/Salvia, Inc.
Northampton,MA August 21,2009
Section 053100—METAL DECKING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.0 RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1-Specification section, apply to work of this section.
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Work Included: Work consists of furnishing all labor,material and equipment necessary for
completion of the following work:
1. Non-composite roof deck.
2. All accessories including fillers, sump pans, closures,transition plates,etc.
3. Reinforcement at openings through metal deck.
4. Touch-up painting of galvanized deck.
5. Composite floor deck.
6. Shear stud connectors installed through metal decking.
B. Related Work:
r 1. Structural Steel: Section 051200 Structural Steel
2. Testing of Stud Shear Connectors and Deck Welding: Section 053100— 1.03 herein.
3. Roof and Floor Opening Deck Support Frames: Section 055000 Metal Fabrications
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welder Qualifications: Welding shall be done only by welding operators currently qualified
according to AWS D1.1.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Regularly engaged in production of metal decking.
C. Erector Qualifications: Minimum of five(5)years experience in erection of metal decking for
projects of similar size and difficulty. Subject to approval of Owner.
D. Testing Agency: Testing and inspection will be made by an approved testing laboratory selected
and paid by the Owner. Contractor shall furnish Testing Agency access to work, facilities and
incidental labor required for testing and inspection. Retention by the Owner of an independent
testing agency shall in no way relieve the Contractor of responsibility for performing all work in
accordance with the contract requirements.
E. Design Criteria: See Drawings for required section properties and spans. Steel deck shall be
designed using Steel Deck Institute design formulas as provided in the "Steel Deck Institute
METAL DECKING 053100- 1
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL McNamara/Salvia, Inc.
Northampton,MA August 21, 2009
Standard Shop paint shall conform to:
w
1. Steel Structures Painting Council specification 15-68T,type l (red oxide)
2. Federal specification TT-P-636(red oxide)
3. Approved equal which meets minimum performance requirements of 1 or 2 above.
C. Bridging:
SJI Standard Specifications unless otherwise indicated on plans. **
D. Extended Ends: Design type"R"extensions for allowable uniform load for the joist span
UNO.
E. Accessories: Provide all accessories as required and as indicated on the drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION s"
3.1 ERECTION
A. General: Handle and erect joists in conformance with standard specifications and in the
locations indicated on the drawings. Do not drop or rack to cause permanent twist. Joists
dropped or damaged during erection are subject to replacement.
B. Welding: Unless noted otherwise, weld all joists to steel bearing.
C. Bridging: Adjustment of bridging location will be ermitted for clearance of ducts
g� g� J g� g P ,
mechanical equipment,recessed lighting fixtures, etc., subject to acceptance by the Architect
and Structural Engineer. Complete bridging and sidewall anchors before any loads are
applied to the joist system.
3.2 TOUCH-UP PAINTING
Touch-up damaged areas of shop paint at all locations.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Refer to Specification Section 014000 and Section 1.02, 1.03 herein for inspection and/or
certifications required of Supplier.
END OF SECTION
w
METAL JOISTS 052100-4
I"
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL McNamara/Salvia, Inc.
Northampton,MA August 21,2009
c. Ascertainment that the welding is performed only by welding operators and welders
who are properly certified. The Testing Agency shall witness such qualification
testing of welding operators and welders, as may be required.
d. Ascertainment that the fit-up,joint preparation, size, contour,extent of
reinforcement, and length and location of welds conform to specified requirements
and the contract drawings, and that no specified welds are omitted or unspecified
welds added without approval.
2. The Testing Agency shall test field welds in accordance with AWS D1.1 as follows:
a. Refer to specification 051200 structural steel requirements.
3. Additional testing will be required:
a. Refer to specification 051200 structural steel requirements.
F. High Strength Bolts
1. Refer to specification 051200 structural steel requirements
1.4 SUBMITTALS
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings as specified under Section 013300. Indicate sizes, spacing
and location of joists, connections,bridging,bottom chord extensions,reinforcing anchorages,
!! ! cambers, loads and all accessories. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS welding
symbols.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
Store metal joists at the job site on platforms,skids or other supports and upright to prevent
twisting. Inspect joists upon delivery. Repair or replace damaged joists as directed by the
manufacturer subject to acceptance by the Structural Engineer. Keep joists [and joist girders] free
from dirt and mud during storage and erection.
1.6 JOB CONDITIONS
Protection: Protect any adjacent materials or areas below from damage due to weld splatter or
sparks during field welding.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 JOISTS [AND JOIST GIRDERS]
A. Construction: Construct joists [and joist girders]to conform to Standard Specifications and
'! ! in sizes,types and lengths indicated on the drawings. Slope bearing plates where indicated
on drawings, or required.
B. Shop Painting: Dip, spray or paint all joists with one coat red oxide paint. [Black asphalt
may be substituted where joists are concealed from view].
METAL JOISTS 052100-3
9M
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL McNamara/Salvia, Inc.
Northampton, MA August 21,2009
2. Welding: Meet requirements of AWS Structural Welding Code,D1.1, latest edition.
3. Erection: Meet requirements of AISC Code of Standard Practice, Section 7, latest
edition and Steel Joist Institute(SJI)recommended code of standard practice for steel
joist and joist girders,latest edition.
1.3 TESTING AND INSPECTION
A. Prior to start of erection,the joist erector shall check the height and location of all bearing
surfaces and shall report all deviations from the approved shop drawings to the Architect,
Structural Engineer and General Contractor. The erector shall also verify that all joists are
undamaged and ready for erection. Damaged or twisted joists will be repaired or replaced as
directed by the manufacturer subject to acceptance by the Structural Engineer.
B. The Testing Agency's inspector will perform his duties in such a way that neither fabrication
nor erection is unnecessarily delayed or impeded. In no case will the inspector recommend or
prescribe the method or repair of a defect.
C. The Testing Agency inspector shall verify that the fabricator maintains detailed fabrication *�►
and quality control procedures which provide a basis for inspection control of the
workmanship and the fabricator's ability to conform to approved drawings,project
specifications and referenced standards. The special inspector shall review the procedures for
completeness and adequacy relative to the code requirements for the fabricator's scope of
work.
D. Field inspection by the Testing agency of erected joists will be such as to assure that the work
conforms to specified requirements and will include:
I. Inspection of field welding as required herein.
2. Ascertainment of proper fit and alignment.
3. Ascertainment of proper installation and tensioning of bolts where required.
4. Ascertainment that Contractor's erection procedures adequately correct for distortion and
shrinkage in field welded assemblies and connections.
5. The Testing Agency shall perform an inspection of joists,to verify compliance with the
details shown on the approved construction documents, such as bridging,bottom chord
extensions, bracing, stiffening,member locations and size proper application of joint
details at each connections.
E. Field Welding and Materials:
1. Inspection of welding by the Testing Agency will be such as to assure that the work
conforms to specified requirements, and will include:
a. Ascertainment that electrodes used for manual shielded metal-arc welding and the
electrodes and flux used for submerged arc welding conform the requirements of this
Section. .w
b. Ascertainment that the approved welding procedure and the approved welding
sequence is followed. *�
METAL JOISTS 052100-2
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL McNamara/Salvia, Inc.
? Northampton, MA August 21,2009
Section 052100-METAL JOISTS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Work Included: Work consists of furnishing all labor,material and equipment necessary for
fabrication and erection of metal joists [and joist girders] including bridging, anchors,and
related accessories.
B. Related Work:
1. Structural Steel: Section 051200 Structural Steel.
2. Steel Deck: Section 053100 Metal Decking.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welder Qualifications: Welding shall be done only by certified welding operators currently
► qualified according to AWS D1.1.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Joist manufacturer must be a member of the Steel Joist Institute
and regularly engaged in the manufacture of the products supplied.
C. Testing Agency:
1. Testing and inspection will be made by an approved testing laboratory selected and paid
by the Owner. Contractor shall furnish testing agency access to work,facilities and
incidental labor required for testing and inspection. Retention by the Owner of an
independent testing agency shall in no way relieve the Contractor of responsibility for
performing all work in accordance with the contract requirements.
2. Furnish the testing agency with the following:
a. A complete set of shop and erection drawings.
b. Full and ample means and assistance for testing all material.
c. Proper facilities,including scaffolding,temporary work platforms, etc, for inspection
of the work in the mills, shop and field.
00 d. Representative sample pieces requested for testing.
D. Reference Standards:
1. Materials,Fabrication,and Design:
a. Steel Joists: Meet requirements of Steel Joist Institute(SJI) Standard
Specifications for Open Web Steel Joists,K series,LH series,and DLH series,
latest edition.
METAL JOISTS 052100- 1
w
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL McNamara/Salvia, Inc
Northampton, MA August 21,2009
w
40
ON
w�
w
STRUCTURAL STEEL 051200-16
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL McNamara/Salvia, Inc
"!* Northampton,MA August 21, 2009
4. Tolerances for Architectural Steel: (AESS)Comply with AISC Code requirements for
architecturally exposed structural steel,unless otherwise noted. Provide as indicated and
within the following permissible deviations. Compensate for daily temperature variations,
cumulative welding draw, construction loadings,sequential applications of permanent dead
load,or any other predictable conditions that could cause distortions to exceed tolerance
limitations.
a. Steel with Windows or Other Architectural Infills in Same Plane:
1. Vertical Opening Dimensions: ±1:750.
2. Horizontal Opening Dimensions: ±1:750
3. Variation from Flushness of Adjoining Members: 1/16"maximum.
4. Steel Open Portals or Framing with Out-of-Plane Infills: Provide in accordance
with AISC Code.
C. Verification of erection Tolerances:
1. Surveys,made by a surveyor with experience on similar projects,employed by the General
! " Contractor and acceptable to the Architect, Structural Engineer and Owner, shall be made
as follows:
uw a. Actual plan location at the top and bottom splice points of each column shall be
determined immediately upon completion of each of the first four tiers erected and
every third tier thereafter.
b. Actual elevation at the top splice point of each column shall be determined immediately
upon completion of every third tier.
c. Actual elevation at each support and at midspan of the top of all members framing into
columns shall be determined prior to erection and/or installation of any materials over
the top of the members.
2. Survey reports shall be submitted to the Architect, Structural Engineer and Owner within
ur 24 hours after recording the date. Such reports shall, in addition,identify all deviations of
member location and/or elevation in excess of allowable tolerances specified.
3. Take necessary measures,and modify details and/or procedures as required,to correct any
columns whose plan location or top elevation vary beyond allowable tolerances. Review of
survey data by the Owner and/or his consultants is for verification of compliance with
specified tolerances only and does not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for
complying with all contract requirements.
3.4 SUPPORT OF OTHER WORK
No permanent loading,other than the weight of supported metal deck and concrete slabs, shall be
imposed on composite beams and girders until the concrete in such slabs has achieved 75 percent of
its design strength,without prior approval by the Structural Engineer. Contractor shall submit
calculations prepared by a Registered Structural Engineer registered in the State of Florida
verifying the adequacy of the non-composite members to support the anticipated loading. All costs
associated with the accommodation of such loading, including review of submittals and
modification of structural members and/or details, shall be borne by the Contractor.
END OF SECTION
�w
STRUCTURAL STEEL 051200-15
oft
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL McNamara/Salvia, Inc
Northampton, MA August 21,2009 me
a. The location of all gauge metal and rolled shape pour stops,as well as members supporting
the work of other trades, shall be established by measuring from reference lines and bench ON
marks installed by the Contractor's field engineers. These reference lines and benchmarks
will be indicated in all erection drawings. Locating these items by measuring from
members of the structural frame is not acceptable. go
b. Connection details for members supporting the work of other trades as well as metal deck
pour stops shall be provided with adequate adjustment capability to accommodate the frame
tolerances indicated in the AISC Code of Standard Practice,and still permit these members
and pour stops to be installed in their proper locations with respect to reference lines and 40
bench marks established by the Contractor.
11. Direct tension indicator washers(DTI)to be installed to manufacturer requirements.
a. At the contractor's discretion as a substitute for hex head or tension control(twist off)
bolts.
12. Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel (AESS):
a. Welding: Select weld sizes, sequence, and equipment to limit distortions within allowable
tolerances. "Print through"or"dimpling"on exposed surfaces is not acceptable.
Continuously weld joints. Grind welds smooth and otherwise treat as required to blend
with adjacent parent metal. Where flush butt joints are required, make welds slightly
oversized and grind flat.
b. Filling: Apply epoxy filler to pockets,voids,pitting or other blemishes on
exposed surfaces of architectural painted steel, including on faces and welds.
c. Protection: Take care to prevent damage or blemished from temporary braces or erection
clips. For painted surfaces, grind welds smooth and fill erection holes with weld metal or
plastic filler and smooth by grinding or filling.
13. Steel grating shall be tack welded at 12"oc at all supporting members unless otherwise noted
on the plans. Provide zinc touch-up paint at all galvanized conditions. Mechanical fasteners
may be substituted on a one to one basis if approved by the structural engineer.
B. Erection Tolerances: Comply with requirements of AISC code of Standard Practice,except as
follows:
1. Columns:
a. Maximum deviation of column pieces adjacent to elevator shafts from established center
line shall not exceed 1", accumulative from all sources.
b. Bases of all columns shall be located on established center lines within+/- 1/4".
w
2. Members Connecting to Columns:
a. Elevation deviation of member working point with respect to upper splice line of
supporting column shall not exceed+3/16 or-5/16 from the elevation shown on the
drawings.
3. All leveling and plumbing shall be based on a mean temperature of 70 degrees F.
Compensate for difference in temperature at time of erection.
STRUCTURAL STEEL 051200-14
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL McNamara/Salvia, Inc
Northampton,MA August 21,2009
1. General: Erect structural steel in accordance with AISC Specifications for the Design,
Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings,latest edition, including supplements,
with additional requirements of this section.
2. Base and Bearing Plates: Set base,bearing plates, and leveling plates level(+/- 1/32")and at
correct elevations(+/- 1/16"). Temporarily support on steel wedges or shims until supported
members are plumbed and grouting is completed.
3. Field Assembly:
a. Assemble structural steel frames to the lines and elevations indicated within the specified
erection tolerances.
b. Align the various members forming a complete frame of structure after assembly and adjust
accurately before being fastened.
c. Measure and adjust for distortion and shrinkage of field welded assemblies as erection
proceeds. Submit procedure to Testing Agency for review prior to start of erection.
d. Splice only where indicated on drawings.
4. Field Connections: Make field connections with bolts, high strength bolts or field welding
unless otherwise indicated. All high-strength bolts shall be tightened to provide the minimum
tension shown in Table J3.7 of AISC "Manual of Steel Construction,"Ninth Edition,unless
otherwise shown on the design or erection drawings. Clean existing surfaces before welding to
existing steel. No drifting or cutting to enlarge unfair holes will be allowed. Make minor
corrections by reaming. Serious defects may not be corrected in the field but shall be called to
the attention of the Structural Engineer for a decision as to the method and/or procedure.
+W 5. Compression Splices: Fasten splices in compression after bearing surfaces have been brought
into contact. Clean bearing surfaces before assembling. All gaps 1/16"wide or greater shall be
closed by driving non-tapered mild steel shims full depth of the bearing surface along the full
length of the gap as necessary to obtain a minimum 80%bearing of the available area at each
go flange.
6. Temporary Bracing: The permanent lateral bracing system for the building is not complete
until all connections have been made up in all lateral system components of the building.
Consider all structural steel in a building as steel frames once the concrete slabs and non-
composite metal deck are in place.Provide suitable temporary bracing as necessary to maintain
structural steel in proper position until permanently secured. Leave temporary bracing in place
as required for safety and until concrete slabs have reached 75%of design strength and all non-
composite metal deck connections to steel members have been made.
7. Field Modification: Written acceptance from the Structural Engineer must be obtained before
using cutting torch for field modification or refabrication of structural steel. The structural steel
fabricator shall be responsible for errors in fabrication and for correct fit in the field.
8. Composite Beam Shear Stud Connectors: Shear stud connectors shall be located as shown on
the structural drawings and,where deck occurs, shall be field welded through the floor deck
according to manufacturer's recommendations. Studs shall be installed as soon as possible after
installation of metal deck.
9. Drilled-In Inserts: Install in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations in accurately drilled holes of required diameter and depth. Where epoxy-
bonded inserts are used,thoroughly clean hole of all debris and drill dust prior to installation of
- insert and epoxy bonder. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until material has achieved
full design strength.
10. Slab pour stops and deck edges
STRUCTURAL STEEL 051200-13
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL McNamara/Salvia, Inc
Northampton,MA August 21, 2009
C. Stud Anchors: Automatically end weld according to AWS D.1. Shop weld where possible.
Thoroughly clean surface where stud is to be attached; remove mill scale by grinding or
sandblasting where it is sufficiently thick to interfere with proper welding.
D. Drilled-in Concrete Anchors:
1. Interior Use: For use in conditioned environments free from potential moisture,provide carbon
steel anchors conforming to ASTM A307 with zinc plating in accordance with FS 22-Z-235.
2. Exterior or Exposed Use: In exposed or potentially wet environments,and for attachment of
exterior cladding materials,provide galvanized or stainless steel anchors. Galvanized anchors
shall conform to ASTM A 133. Stainless steel anchors shall be Series 300 stainless steel bolts
with Series 300 or Type 18-8 stainless steel nuts and washers.
3. Expansion Anchors: Wedge type with current ICBO approval and published in ICBO Research
Report. Complete with required nuts,washers,and manufacturer's installation instructions.
Size and manufacturer as indicated on drawings.
a. Where anchor manufacturer is not indicated, subject to compliance with requirements and
acceptance by Architect,provide one of the following:
"Kwik-Bolt" or"Super Kwik-Bolt" -Hilti
"Power-Stud"—Powers Fasteners
"Red Head Wedge Anchor" - ITW •
4. Adhesive Anchors: Threaded carbon steel rod conforming to ASTM A307 complete with
required nuts,washers,adhesive system and manufacturer's installation instructions. Current
ICBO approval and published ICBO Research Report required. Size and manufacturer as
indicated on drawings.
a. Where anchor manufacturer is not indicated, subject to compliance with requirements and
acceptance by the Architect provide one of the following:
"HVA Adhesive Anchor" -Hilti Fastening Systems
"Power-Fast"or"Chem-Stud"—Powers Fasteners
"Redi-Chem" - ITW
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
Prior to start of erection,the steel erector shall check the elevation of all bearing surfaces and the
location of all embedded anchor bolts and connection plates, and shall report all deviations from the
Contract Documents to the Architect and Structural Engineer. Do not proceed with erection until
all unacceptable conditions are corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
n.
Field Measurements: Take measurements on site as required for correct fabrication and installation.
Fabricator shall be responsible for errors in fabrication and for correct fit of structural steel.
3.3 INSTALLATION •
A. Erection:
r
STRUCTURAL STEEL 051200-12
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL McNamara/Salvia, Inc
Northampton,MA August 21, 2009
and marked in the shop with a center punch or other acceptable means. Marking shall be placed on
the flanges and web at each end of columns. Work point shall be as defined in AISC Code of
Standard Practice, Section 7.11.2(a).
F. Finished Work: All work shall be finished in accordance with the approved shop drawings and
shall be true and free from twists,kinks,buckles,open joints and other defects.
G. Cutting and Fitting: Perform all necessary cutting, fitting and drilling for the accommodation of
other trades and do whatever is necessary to secure correct information for same,both before and
after steel is delivered. No cutting or drilling will be permitted on the job without the approval of
the Structural Engineer.
H. Milling: Subassemblies with milled surfaces shall be completely assembled and welded before
milling.
L Welding: Comply with AISC specifications and latest American Welding Society standards.
Welds not specified shall be 3/16" fillet continuous but not less than the AISC minimum based on
the thickness of the parts joined.
VP
J. Splices: Splicing of members to obtain the required lengths will not be permitted without prior
acceptance of the Structural Engineer unless shown on the drawings.
K. Cambering: Beams and girders shall be cambered where indicated on the drawings. In-place
camber tolerance shall be+ 1/2 ", -0" maximum.
L. Substitutions: Where exact sizes and weights called for are not readily available, secure the
Structural Engineer's acceptance of suitable sizes in time to prevent delay due to such substitutions.
M. Shear Stud Connectors: Automatically end weld according to AWS D1.1. Shop weld where
possible. Thoroughly clean surface where stud is to be attached; remove mill scale by grinding or
sandblasting where it is sufficiently thick to interfere with proper welding. At metal deck, field
install by welding through deck.
N. Steel Columns: See drawings for adjustment to theoretical length.
O. Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel (AESS): Comply with"Section 10,Architecturally
Exposed Structural Steel"of AISC Code,except as otherwise specified. Fabricate with special care
using material selected for best appearance. Employ necessary fabricating techniques to produce
and maintain the required quality of Work and tolerances. Make exposed edges and ends square
and smooth, free of cutting marks, shear distortion,burrs,and nicks. Provide uniform and
consistent joints with all exposed copes,miters and butt cuts. Do not apply permanent mill
markings, erection marks, symbols, or painted notes on exposed surfaces.
2.3 ANCHORS
A. General: Provide all anchors for columns,beams,plates, etc.,as shown on drawings, shop
drawings, or as required.
B. Anchor Bolts: Provide at per Section 2.01C with suitable nuts and plain washers at A307 bolts.
Use hardened washers at all other locations. Size and length as shown on drawings,headed or
hooked as noted on drawings.
an
STRUCTURAL STEEL 051200-11
40
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL McNamara/Salvia, Inc
Northampton,MA August 21, 2009 "®
P. Filler for Architectural Painted Steel: Solvent-resistant,2-component metal and
epoxy compound suitable for repair of steel. .+
TNEMEC 63-1500 by TNEMEC Co.
Q. Comply with current AISC requirements for material toughness for jumbo shapes(Group 4&5) ,
hot rolled or welded built-up cross sections with an element of the cross section more than 2"thick
where indicated in the drawings.
2.2 FABRICATION
A. General:
1. Meet requirements of standards listed under 1.02 F. Reference Standards.
2. Detailing and fabrication procedures shall account for distortion and shrinkage due to welding
processes,both in the shop and in the field. ,
B. Connections: Provide connections as shown or noted on the drawings. Connections not shown or
noted shall be standard Framed Beam Connections as shown in AISC Manual of Steel
Construction,9th Edition,pp 4-9 through 4-31 inclusive,except that bearing-type bolts in slotted
holes may not be used to transmit by component of stress in the direction of the slot.
All high strength bolts used in column splices, connections of beams and girders to columns,
bracing connections,tension members, and where noted on drawings, shall be tensioned to the +
values in Table J3.7 of AISC "Manual of Steel Construction," Ninth Edition. Other high strength
bolts may be installed snug tight.No combination of welds and bolts, or of tensioned and snug-tight
bolts, shall be used to transmit stress in the same faying surface of any connection.
C. Design of Connections:
1. The Contractor shall design and detail all connections required to resist the loads and reactions
shown on the drawings and as specified. Fabrication and erection details shall supplement and
be consistent with details shown on the drawings.
2. Unrestrained simple beam connections shall be as shown on the drawings and,unless reaction +
forces are shown, all have a capacity at least equal to that of the beam stressed to AISC
Specification allowable bending stress at mid span for the span. Composite behavior shall be
accounted for, as applicable. w„
3. One-sided or other eccentric connections shall be avoided except where so detailed on the
structural drawings or where shown on Shop Drawings and approval of Architect is obtained.
4. Beam-to-column web connections shall be designed to minimize eccentric loading on the
column. Unrestrained simple beam end connections shall be detailed and fabricated to
minimize end restraint of the beam. All parts of such connections, such as welds,bolts and
other material, shall be designed taking eccentricity into account.
5. Ends of beams which have copes to the extent that allowable shear or bending stress is
exceeded shall have web plates of sufficient size welded to the beams to reduce such stresses.
6. X bolts: Type X bolts are not permitted.
D. Shop Painting:
1. See Section 2.01
ws
E. Marking: Mark all members in protected,plainly visible locations in accordance with reference
numbers on setting diagrams. The member work point at each end of columns shall be determined
STRUCTURAL STEEL 051200-10
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL McNamara/Salvia, Inc
Northampton, MA August 21,2009
1. Shop paint not required U.N.O.
2. Provide paint system at steel and that designated to have"zinc-rich primer"as per Section M.
All bolts at steel designated to have zinc rich primer to be galvanized.
3. Where steel is to be field painted,verify shop coat of paint compatible with finish paint system
specified in Division 9.
4. Where steel is to be field fire-proofed,verify shop coat of paint compatible with Section
078110.
L. Galvanizing: Hot dip galvanize designated steel after fabrication in compliance with ASTM A 123.
Galvanize hardware in accordance with ASTM A153. All bolts and connection material at
galvanized steel is also to be galvanized.
M. Steel Coating Systems:
1. Surface preparation:
a. None required U.N.O.
b. SSPC-SP3 or 7—shall be used for all shop painted steel to be fireproofed.
c. SSPC—SP6, commercial blast cleaning shall be used for all exposed steel in a wet
environment or in a mild exposure to moisture including all steel designated to receive a
"zinc-rich primer".
2. Apply cold galvanizing paint in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
a. Z.R.C. cold galvanizing compound,by Z.R.C. Chemical Products or TNEMEC 394: Two
coats, 3 mil minimum total dry film thickness.
3. All Exposed Steel and that specified to receive"zinc-rich primer".
a. Tnemec Company: Shop primer: zinc rich primer"90-97 Tnemec-Zinc," or 394 Series
at a dry film thickness 2.5 to 3.5 mils;shop top coat: Series 161 Fascure epoxy or 27
Typoxy, dry film thickness 5.0-6.0 mils minimum. Finish coats to be as specified in
Division 9.
on
4. Fireproofing compatibility:
Primer paint of section 2a or 3a to be compatible with applied fireproofing where exists
in wet/dry conditions. Contractor to verify system compatibility with spec Section
078110.
5. All bolts and connection material at steel fabricated to section M.3 is also to be galvanized.
N. Coal Tar Epoxy:Apply to structural steel where specified on drawings based on manufacturers
specifications. Coating thickness= 16 mils minimum.
go 1. H.B. Tnemecol 46-465 Coal Tar Solution by TNEMEC Co.
O. Direct Tension Indicating Washers (DTI's):ASTM F959, steel alloy washer with 5 to
6 equi-spaced protrusions on one side. Use type A325 with ASTM A325 bolts and type A490 with
ASTM A490 bolts.
STRUCTURAL STEEL 051200-9
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL McNamara/Salvia, Inc
Northampton,MA August 21, 2009
A. Substitutions for member sizes,type(s)of steel, connection details or any other modifications
proposed by Contractor will be considered by Architect and Structural Engineer only under
following conditions:
I. That request has been made and accepted prior to submission of shop drawings.
2. That there is a substantial cost advantage or time advantage to Owner; or that proposed revision
is necessary to obtain required materials or methods at proper times to accomplish work within
schedule.
3. That sufficient sketches, engineering calculations, and other data have been submitted to
facilitate checking by Architect and Structural Engineer, including cost reductions or savings in
time to complete work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Structural Steel: Unless otherwise scheduled or indicated,meet requirements of ASTM A36
Structural Steel (Fy=36 Ksi), latest edition.
B. High Strength Structural Steel: Meet requirements of ASTM A572 or ASTM A992 High Strength
Structural Steel Grade 50(Fy=50 Ksi)or ASTM A588 High Strength Structural Steel, Grade 50
(Fy=50 Ksi), latest edition, as noted on drawings. *+
C. Anchor Bolts: Meet requirements of the following as noted on plans; ASTM A307,Carbon Steel
Externally and Internally Threaded Standard Fasteners, latest edition or,ASTM A449.
D. High Strength Bolts: Meet requirements of ASTM A325 High Strength Bolts for Structural Steel
Joints, latest edition, including suitable nuts and hardened washers or ASTM A490 Quenched and
Tempered Alloy Steel Bolts for Structural Steel Joints,latest edition, including suitable nuts and
hardened washers.
E. Pipe: Meet requirements of ASTM A53, Type E or S,Grade B(Fy=35 Ksi) latest edition. *"
F. HSS Shapes:
1. Round: Meet requirements of ASTM A500 Grade C(Fy=46 Ksi)latest editions.
2. Square or Rectangle: Meet requirements of ASTM A500,Grade B (Fy=46 Ksi), latest
edition.
G. Stud Connectors: Meet requirements of AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code, latest edition, Type
B.
H. Headed or Deformed Stud Anchors: Meet requirements of AWS Dl.l Structural Welding code,
latest edition, Type B.
I. Drilled-in or Embedded Anchors: As required on the drawings and as specified under paragraph
"ANCHORS."
J. Filler Metals for Welding: Meet requirements of AWS D1.1, 70 Series.
K. Shop Paint:
STRUCTURAL STEEL 051200-8
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL McNamara/Salvia, Inc
Northampton, MA August 21, 2009
A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings as specified under Section 011000. Clearly indicate
profiles, sizes, spacing and locations of structural members, connections,attachments, anchorages,
framed openings, size and type of fasteners,cambers, and clearances. Indicate welded connections
using standard AWS welding symbols. Clearly indicate net weld lengths, sizes and welding
so sequences. Clearly identify all high strength bolts not required to be tensioned(installed "snug
tight" as defined by AISC).No individual piece drawing will be accepted without simultaneous
submission of its location on an erection plan. Electronic transmission of structural drawings will be
allowed to be used to generate steel erection drawings with prior written permission of the
structural engineer.
B. Mill Test Reports: Furnish Mill Test Reports for all Structural Steel.
C. Certifications: For all high-strength bolts,nuts and hardened washers, submit certification of
domestic(U.S.)manufacture and compliance with all provisions of these specifications.
Alternately, for high-strength bolts, nuts and/or hardened washers of foreign manufacture, submit
certified Mill Test Reports and other pertinent data demonstrating compliance with all provisions of
these specifications.
D. Design Calculations: Submit design calculations prepared under the supervision of a Registered
Professional Engineer,employed by the Fabricator and registered in the State of Florida,for the
following:
1. Connections not completely detailed on the structural drawings.
2. Request for substitution of member sizes or material grades.
3. Modification of the strength or configuration of structural framing requested for the
Contractor's convenience, erection sequence or construction equipment and/or materials.
Such calculations shall be in conformance with the reference standards cited herein and shall clearly
! " demonstrate applicability for the intended use.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Materials to be Installed by Others: Deliver anchor bolts and other anchorage devices which are
embedded in cast-in-place concrete or masonry construction to the project site in time to be
installed before the start of cast-in-place concrete operations or masonry work. Provide setting
drawings,templates and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other devices. Templates
shall be permanently marked with column center lines and north arrow.
No B. Storage of Structural Steel: Structural steel members which are stored at the project site shall be
above ground on platforms,skids, or other supports and stored upright to prevent twisting. Protect
steel from corrosion. Store other materials in a weather-tight and dry place, until ready for use.
me Store packaged materials in their original,unbroken package or container.
1.6 JOB CONDITIONS
r
A. Protection: Protect any adjacent materials or areas below from damage due to weld splatter or
sparks during field welding.
1.7 JOB SUBSTITUTIONS
STRUCTURAL STEEL 051200-7
go
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL McNamara/Salvia, Inc
Northampton, MA August 21, 2009 "o
b. Tension Control(Self-Indicating)Bolts:
me
(1) Verify Contractor's testing of bolt capacity to achieve specified tensions for each lot of
bolts. Contractor to provide a calibrated device capable of indicating bolt tension.
(2) Perform a visual inspection of all high strength bolted connections to assure that all ,w,
torque-off splines have been sheared.
c. Direct Tension Indicating Washers(DTI's):
wr
(1) Check all bolt,nut, flat washer and DTI certifications for conformance with
specifications.
(2) Verify contractor's testing of bolt capacity to achieve specified tensions for each lot of «
bolts. Contractor to provide a calibrated device capable of indicating bolt tension.
(3) Verify proper compression of all DTI washers to"calibrated gap"for project.
F. Drilled-In Inserts:
1. Self-Expanding Inserts: The Testing Agency shall inspect self-expanding, drilled-in inserts
shown on the structural drawings as follows:
a. Prior to installation,the Testing Agency shall determine that the installing contractor has
the proper materials and equipment for drilling holes in the receiving surface of required
diameter and length.
b. All inserts shall be visually inspected after installation to ensure that they have been
installed perpendicular to the receiving surface and to proper depth.
c. Inspect 10%of all inserts at each level for a tension load of 150%of the manufacturer's
recommended allowable working loads in tension. If at any time the number of rejectable
inserts exceeds 10%of the number of inserts tested at that level, all inserts in that group
shall be tested by the same method and this 100%testing rate shall be continued until 10%
or less of the inserts tested in a group are found to be rejectable. Cost of additional testing
required by this paragraph shall be borne by the Contractor.
2. Epoxy-Bonded Inserts: The Testing Agency shall inspect epoxy-bonded, drilled-in inserts as
follows:
a. The Testing Agency shall be present at the site to observe the installation of the first 10
inserts placed. Such observation shall be to ensure that drilled holes are of required
diameter and depth,holes are properly cleaned prior to installation of the insert,and that
holes are completely filled with properly mixed epoxy after installation.
b. All inserts shall be visually inspected after installation to ensure that the
insert has been installed perpendicular to the receiving surface and to proper depth.
G. Fabrication Procedures: The Testing Agency shall verify that the fabricator maintains detailed
fabrication and quality control procedures which provide a basis for inspection control of the
workmanship and the fabricator's ability to conform to approved drawings,project ,
specifications and referenced standards. The Testing Agency shall review the procedures for
completeness and adequacy relative to the code requirements for the fabricator's scope of work.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
STRUCTURAL STEEL 051200-6
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL McNamara/Salvia, Inc
Northampton,MA August 21,2009
e. All other welds: 10%of the welds chosen at random:magnetic particle.
4. Additional testing will be required:
a. If more than 10 percent of the tested welds are rejected,then an additional 10 percent of all
such welds shall be tested using the same method. This 10 percent additional testing
process shall be repeated until the rejection rate drops below one in 10.
b. All cost of additional inspection required by this paragraph shall be borne by the
Contractor.
5. In addition, if defective welds are discovered,the remaining uninspected welds shall receive
such ultrasonic or magnetic particle inspection as may be required by the Structural Engineer.
6. The welding inspector will have the authority to reject weldments. Such rejection may be
based on visual inspection where in his opinion the weldment would not pass a more detailed
investigation.
7. Reports by the Testing Agency's inspector will contain, as a minimum, an adequate description
of each weld tested,the identifying mark of the welder responsible for the weld,a critique of
any defects noted by visual inspection or testing, and a statement regarding the acceptability of
the weld tested, as judged by current A.W.S. standards. Reports shall be distributed as early as
possible but not later than one work week after the tests have been performed. The Structural
Engineer shall be notified by phone if, in the judgement of the inspector,test results require
immediate comment.
8. Radiographic testing may be substituted for ultrasonic.
9. Vertical Anchor Plates and Horizontal Base Plates at moment and braced frames only and Base
metal at welds 1-1/2" and thicker shall be inspected for laminations using the ultrasonic method
as per ASTM A-435. Plates having lamination more than 1" wide or longer than 6" shall be
! ' rejected.
E. High Strength Bolts
1. The inspector shall determine that the appropriate requirements of Sections J3 and M2 of the
AISC "Specification" are met.
2. Bolts in bearing-type connections required to be tightened only to the snug-tight condition need
not be inspected for bolt tension other than to ensure that the plies of the connected elements
have been brought into snug contact.
3. Slip Critical-Type Bolts
a. Standard Bolts:
(1) Verify Contractor's testing of installation procedures(turn of the nut)to achieve
specified bolt tensions for each lot of bolts. Contractor to provide a calibrated device
capable of indicating bolt tension.
on (2) If rejectable bolts are found in any connection all the remaining bolts in that connection
shall be inspected for tightness. Inspection procedure shall be in accordance with
"Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts" approved by
Research Council on Riveted and Bolted Structural Joints of the Engineering
Foundation(Research Council on Structural Connections). Cost of additional
inspection required by this paragraph shall be borne by the Contractor.
STRUCTURAL STEEL 051 200-5
r�
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL McNamara/Salvia, Inc
Northampton, MA August 21, 2009
scale, and other defects and deformities,as described in ASTM A6, and examination of
aforementioned fabricated pieces for conformity with approved shop drawings. Testing of welding w
will be performed as required herein.
C. Field inspection by the Testing Agency of erected steel will be such as to assure that the work
conforms to specified requirements and will include:
1. Inspection of field welding as required herein.
2. Ascertainment of proper fit and alignment. to
3. Ascertainment of proper installation and tensioning of bolts.
4. Ascertainment that Contractor's erection procedures adequately correct for
distortion and shrinkage in field welded assemblies and connections. �►
5. Inspections of the steel frame to verify compliance with the details shown on the approved
construction documents(structural drawings)such as Brace Locations, Stiffener Plates,
Member locations and Proper application of Joint Details at each connection. ,
D. Welding and Materials:
1. Inspection of welding by the Testing Agency will be such as to assure that the work conforms
to specified requirements, and will include:
a. Ascertainment that electrodes used for manual shielded metal-arc welding and the
electrodes and flux used for submerged arc welding conform to the requirements of this
Section.
s
b. Ascertainment that the approved welding procedure and the approved welding sequence is
followed.
c. Ascertainment that the welding is performed only by welding operators and welders who
are properly certified. The Testing Agency shall witness such qualification testing of
welding operators and welders, as may be required.
d. Ascertainment that the fit-up,joint preparation, size, contour, extent of reinforcement, and
length and location of welds conform to specified requirements and the contract drawings,
and that no specified welds are omitted or unspecified welds added without approval.
2. The Testing Agency shall perform tests in the Fabricator's shop in accordance with AWS D1.1
as follows:
a. All welds: 100%visual.
b. Partial Penetration Welds: One spot test per weld: magnetic particle. w�
c. Full Penetration Welds: 100%ultrasonic.
d. All other welds: 10%of the welds chosen at random: magnetic particle.
3. The Testing Agency shall test field welds in accordance with AWS D1.1 as follows:
a. All welds: 100%visual.
b. Fillet Welds: One spot test per member: magnetic particle.
c. Partial Penetration Welds: one spot test per weld: magnetic particle.
d. Full Penetration Welds:
(1) All complete penetration groove welds contained in joints and splices shall be tested
one hundred(100)per cent by ultrasonic testing.
STRUCTURAL STEEL 051200-4
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL McNamara/Salvia, Inc
Northampton,MA August 21,2009
OR 1. Design,Detailing,Fabrication and Erection: Meet requirements of AISC "Specification for the
Design,Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings, "and AISC "Code of
Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." latest editions including supplements,
except as amended below:
a. The AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," is amended as
follows:
(1) Section 3.1 Structural Steel: Add a new second paragraph to this section as follows:
"Structural steel members shown on plans but not identified as to size, section or
material grade will be included in the bid price for the work by assuming sizes, sections
or material grades shown for similarly loaded members having approximately the same
overall length. All such members,and their associated cost,will be identified in the bid
for the work."
(2) Section 3.3 Discrepancies: Delete the sentence "In case of discrepancies between plans
and specifications for buildings,the specifications govern."
(3) Section 3.4 Legibility of Plans: In the first sentence, delete the phrase "and made to a
scale not less than 1/8"to the foot."
(4) Section 4.2.1: Delete the sentence "This approval constitutes the owner's acceptance of
r all responsibility for the design adequacy of any connections designed by the fabricator
as part of his preparation of these shop drawings."
2. Welding: Meet requirements of AWS Structural Welding Code D1.1, latest edition.
3. High Strength Bolts: Meet requirements of AISC Specifications for Structural Joints Using
ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts, latest edition.
4. Exposed Structural Steel: Meet requirements of AISC Specifications for Architecturally
Exposed Structural Steel, latest edition.
5. Surface Preparation: Meet requirements of specifications contained in Steel Structures Painting
Council's Steel Structures Painting Manual, Volume 2, Systems and Specifications, latest
edition.
G. Pre-Fabrication/Erection Conference: Conduct a conference with representatives of the Contractor,
Fabricator,Detailer,Erector,Engineer,Architect and Owner's Testing Laboratory at the Project
Site prior to commencing shop drawing preparation to confirm erection methods,construction
sequences,connection detail types, submission procedures, submission schedule and testing and
inspection requirements.
1.3 TESTING AND INSPECTION
Shop inspection implies testing performed during specific visits to fabricators shop. Frequency of
shop inspection visits is to be determined based on fabrication schedule.For projects with more than
one fabricator frequency applies to each shop separately.
A. The Testing Agency's inspector will perform his duties in such a way that neither fabrication nor
erection is unnecessarily delayed or impeded. In no case will the inspector recommend or prescribe
the method of repair of a defect.
B. Shop inspection by the Testing Agency for all columns and 20%of beams and girders shall include
examination of steel for straightness and alignment,conformance to length tolerances,fissures,mill
STRUCTURAL STEEL 051200-3
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL McNamara/Salvia, Inc
Northampton, MA August 21,2009
A. General Contractor's Quality Control System
I. General: The General Contractor shall establish a quality control system and shall perform
sufficient inspection and tests of all items of work, including that of his subcontractors,to
ensure conformance to the Contract Documents for materials,workmanship, construction, w.
finish, functional performance and identification. Contractor's quality control system is the
means by which he assures himself that his construction complies with the requirements of the
Contract Documents. Controls shall be adequate to cover all construction operations.
2. Records: Contractor shall maintain correct records on an appropriate form for all inspections
and tests performed, instructions received from the Architect or Testing Agency, and actions
taken as a result of those instructions. These records shall include evidence that the required
inspections or tests have been performed(including type and number of inspections or tests, ■.►
nature of defects, causes for rejection,etc.),proposed or directed remedial action,and
corrective action taken. Contractor shall document inspections and tests as required by this
section.
B. Fabricator Qualifications: Experienced in fabrication of structural steel for projects of similar size
and difficulty. Shall have particular experience in fabrication of large,welded,built-up sections.
Subject to approval of Architect, Structural Engineer and Owner. Fabricator must have current
CBD AISC Quality Certification.
C. Steel Detailer Qualifications: Steel detailers must have current AISC Certification. Steel detailers
must be experienced in detailing structural steel for projects of similar size and complexity. Steel
detailer must be experienced in detailing structural steel in accordance with AISC seismic
provisions for structural steel buildings.
D. Welder Qualifications: Welding shall be done only by welding operators currently qualified
according to AWS D1.1.
E. Testing Agency:
1. Testing and inspection will be made by an approved testing laboratory selected and paid by the
Owner. Contractor shall furnish testing agency access to work, facilities and incidental labor
required for testing and inspection. Retention by the Owner of an independent testing agency
shall in no way relieve the Contractor of responsibility for performing all work in accordance
with the contract requirements.
2. Furnish the testing agency with the following:
a. A complete set of shop and erection drawings.
b. Information as to time and place of all rollings and shipment of material to shops.
c. Full and ample means and assistance for testing all material.
d. Proper facilities, including scaffolding,temporary work platforms, etc, for inspection of the **'
work in the mills, shop and field.
e. Representative sample pieces requested for testing.
f. Mill test reports.
3. Each person installing connections shall be assigned an identifying symbol or mark, and all
shop and field connection shall be identified so that the inspector can refer back to the person
making the connection.
F. Reference Standards:
STRUCTURAL STEEL 051200-2
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL McNamara/Salvia, Inc
Northampton,MA August 21,2009
SECTION 051200—STRUCTURAL STEEL
- PART 1 - GENERAL
1.0 RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary conditions
+ and Division 1-Specification sections,apply to work of this section.
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Work Included: Work consists of furnishing all labor, material and equipment necessary for
completion of following work:
1. Structural steel framing and support members,rods complete with required connection
materials,welds,washers,bolts,nuts, shims, anchor bolts, anchors and templates.
2. Base plates, cap plates and concrete anchors.
3. Erecting,connecting,field welding,and adjusting for plumb and level.
4. All other work normally related to the above or specified under this section.
B. Related Work:
' 1. Grouting Under Base and Bearing Plates: Section 036000 Grout
2. Steel Stairways: Section 055000 Metal Fabrications
3. Loose Steel Angle Lintels Not Attached to Structural Steel: Section 055000 Metal Fabrications
4. Support Framing for Openings in Metal Deck: Section 055000 Metal Fabrications
5. Steel Supports for Mechanical or Electrical Equipment: Divisions 15 and 16
! 6. Painting and coatings for steel: Division 9
7. Structural Precast Concrete Anchorage Devices for Attachment to Structural Steel: Section
034100 Structural Precast Concrete
8. Testing: Section 014320 Quality Control
9. Steel Grating: Section 055000 Metal Fabrications
C. Work Furnished but not Installed:
1. Anchor Bolts,Anchor Bolt Templates,Loose Bearing Plates and Embedded Items: Installed
under Section 030010 Concrete Work or Section 042000 Unit Masonry, 042300 Reinforced
Unit Masonry.
D. Definitions:
1. Structural Steel: Load bearing structural metal framing excluding steel studs,loose steel lintels
built into masonry, support framing around openings in metal deck, steel stairs and load bearing
steel items specified under Section 055000 Metal Fabrications.
2. Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel: Includes the following for this project:
a. As noted on Architectural Drawings.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
STRUCTURAL STEEL 051200-1
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
D. To provide the galvanized surface required,the following procedures shall be implemented:
1. A monitoring recorder shall be utilized and inspected regularly to observe any variances in the .�
galvanizing bath
temperature.
2. The pickling tanks shall contain hydrochloric acid with a constant rang between 10-14%, iron
content less than 8% and zinc content less than 3%. Titrations shall be taken weekly at a
minimum.
3. Rinse tanks, for the removal of cleaning chemicals, shall contain water.
4. Water quenching of galvanized steel shall be prohibited.
E. Installation: Comply with fabricator's and galvanizer's requirements for installation of materials and
fabrications, including use of nylon slings or padded cables for handling factory-primed or factory- .�.
finished materials.
F. Touch-Up and Repair: For damaged and field-welded metal coated surfaces, clean welds, bolted
connections and abraded areas.
1. At galvanized surfaces, apply organic zinc repair paint complying with requirements of ASTM
A780. Galvanizing repair paint shall have 95 percent zinc by weight, ZIRP by Duncan
Galvanizing. Thickness of applied galvanizing repair paint shall be not less than coating thickness
required ASTM A123 or A153 ass applicable. Touch-up of galvanized surfaces with aerosol
spray, silver paint, bright paint, brite paint, or aluminum paints is not acceptable.
2. The galvanizer/galvanizing facility must have an ongoing touch-up and repair program acceptable
to the Authority which has been in effect for a minimum of five years.
3. A touch-up repair kit shall be provided with each order.
END OF SECTION 05 08 00
w
HOT DIP GALVANIZING 050800-4
aw
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE SYSTEMS
Op A. For the purpose of establishing a standard of quality and performance,the Deltagalv system as provided
by Duncan Galvanizing of Everett, MA is referenced. Systems which meet or exceed the performance
requirements hereinafter specified shall be submitted for approval to the Architect.
2.2 HOT-DIP GALVANIZING
A. Provide coating for iron and steel fabrications applied by the hot-dip process, Deltagaly" by Duncan
Galvanizing, Comply with ASTM A123 for fabricated products and ASTM A 153 for hardware.
Provide thickness of galvanizing specified in referenced standards. The galvanizing bath shall contain
.05-.09%nickel and other earthly materials.
B. Safeguard against embrittlement in conformance with ASTM A143.
C. Warpage or Distortion Prevention:
1. To safeguard against warpage or distortion of steel members, in conformance with ASTM A384,
steel fabricator shall submit shop drawings of non-standard fabrications, all tubular fabrications,
all fabrications involving any dimension which exceeds the size of the galvanizer's kettle, and
any fabrication involving materials of different thicknesses.
2. Submit these drawings to the galvanizer before fabrication to determine the suitability of the
! material for galvanizing.
D. To prevent unnecessary damage to the finished coating by field welding,use bolted connections for field
connections wherever possible.
E. To ensure a smooth even coating, pipe rails should be fabricated from mechanical steel tubing with"slip
fit"type connections.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION OF GALVANIZING
A. Galvanize materials in accordance with referenced standards and this specification.
B. Galvanizing shall provide an acceptable substrate for applied coatings.
C. The dry kettle process shall be used to eliminate any flux inclusions on the surface of the galvanized
material. Prior to galvanizing, the steel shall be immersed in a pre flux solution (zinc ammonium
w chloride). The pre flux tanks must be 12°to 14° Baume' and contain less than .4% iron. The wet kettle
process shall be prohibited.
HOT DIP GALVANIZING 050800- 3
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
ws
A. Coordination Between Fabricator and Galvanizer: Prior to fabrication, direct fabricator to submit
approved shop drawings to the galvanizer for all fabrications. Direct galvanizer to review fabricator's
shop drawings for suitability of materials for galvanizing and coatings and coordinate any required
modifications to fabrications required to be done by the fabricator.
B. Steel Materials: For steel to be hot-dip galvanized, provide steel chemically suitable for metal coatings
complying with the following requirements: Carbon below 0.25 percent, silicon below 0.24 percent,
phosphorous below 0.05 percent, and manganese below 1.35 percent. Notify galvanizer is steel does not
comply with these requirements to determine suitability for processing.
1. To prevent unnecessary damage to the galvanized coating by field welding, provide slip fit
method of connecting pipe railings. Fabricate pipe railing from mechanical steel tubing internally
vented with holes 3/4 the size of the pipe's internal diameter. For other fabrications, bolted
connections shall be used wherever possible.
2. Assemblies: Where size of assembly is too large for galvanizing kettle, galvanize components
prior to fabrication and assemble after galvanizing.
C. Engage the service of a galvanizer who has demonstrated a minimum of five (5)years experience in the
successful performance of the processes outlined in this specification. The Owner has the right to
inspect and approve or reject the galvanizer/galvanizing facility.
D. The galvanizer/galvanizing facility must have an ongoing Quality Control/Quality Assurance program
acceptable to the Authority which has been in effect for a minimum of five years and shall provide the
Authority with process and final inspection documentation.
E. The galvanizer/galvanizing facility must have an on-premise testing facility capable of measuring the
chemical and metallurgical composition of the galvanizing bath and pickling tanks.
.�r
F. Provide and apply materials complying with environmental requirements of authority having
jurisdiction. All materials shall be delivered to the galvanizer with label or product data sheet affixed to
the manufacturer's containers showing the manufacturer's name, batch number, type of paint, stock
number, label analysis of solids and vehicle, reducing and thinning instructions, drying and recoat time,
MSDS sheets, recommended application procedures and environmental restrictions. Paint materials
shall be stored in an acceptable location reserved only for such materials and related equipment in
compliance with applicable local health and fire regulations and OSHA requirements.
G. The galvanizer/galvanizing facility must have a dedicated, on premise painting and curing facility for
the exclusive use of coating galvanized steel. Said facility shall utilize the following:
I. Recording hygrometer to measure air temperature and humidity.
2. A spray booth confirming OSHA regulations with filtered exhaust.
3. A convection hot air curing system with solvent vapor removal liability.
4. The curing booth shall be heated using an indirect thermostat controlled gas fired forced hot air
blower. The booth shall be protected with a sprinkler system complying with NFPA 15. The air in
the curing booth shall be continuously monitored by a lower explosive limit (LEL) monitoring
device connected to the ventilation system. The booth shall be capable of reaching 150° F with a
sustained capability of 100° F.
HOT DIP GALVANIZING 050800-2
w
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
SECTION 05 08 00-HOT DIPPED GALVANIZING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies hot-dip galvanizing for all miscellaneous and structural steel exposed to the
weather,moisture,or corrosive atmosphere.
1. Hot-Dip Galvanizing: The dipping of steel members and assemblies into an alloy of molten zinc
and nickel for lasting long-term protection.
2. The resultant nickel-zinc alloys with the base metal.
1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Comply with applicable portions of the following reference standards:
1. American Galvanizers Association Inc. (AGA) : Publication entitled"Inspection Manual for Hot-
Dip Galvanized Products."
2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
a. A123 - Zinc (Hot Galvanized) Coating on Products Fabricated from Rolled, Pressed, and
Forged Steel Shapes, Plates,and Hardware.
b. A 153 -Zinc Coating(Hot Dip)on Iron and Steel Hardware.
C. A 143 - Safeguarding Against Embrittlement.
d. A384- Safeguarding Against Warpage.
e. A385-Providing High Quality Zinc Coatings.
£ A780-Repair of Hot-Dip Galvanizing.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Certificate of Compliance from Galvanizer: Submit notarized Certificate of Compliance with
application for payment for galvanizing, signed by galvanizer, indicating compliance with requirements
of specifications. Include scope of services provided, and quantity and itemized description of items
processed.
B. Visual Stamp: The galvanizer shall mark all lots of material with a clearly visible stamp or tag
indicating the name of the galvanizer, the weight of the nickel-zinc coating, and the applicable ASTM
Specification Numbers.
HOT DIP GALVANIZING 05 08 00- 1
I
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO- OPTICAL McNamara/Salvia, Inc.
Northampton, MA August 21, 2009
5. Consolidate by puddling or with mechanical vibration during placing and
reconsolidate after excess moisture has been absorbed before plasticity is lost.
Reconsolidation may be done as next lift is placed. Complete grouting of any section
of wall to top of wall in one(1)day.
3.8 BRACING
Adequately brace reinforced Unit Masonry walls,for governing Massachusetts State
t building code loads until cured and permanently supported. Minimum lateral restraint to
be 200#/ft at tops of walls.
3.9 ALLOWABLE TOLERANCES: Refer to Section 042000, Unit Masonry for allowable
tolerances.
3.10 POINTING AND CLEANING: Refer to Section 042000, Unit Masonry for pointing
and cleaning required.
END OF SECTION
REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY 042300- 11
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL McNamara/Salvia, Inc.
Northampton, MA August 21, 2009
A. General: Refer to Section 042000, Unit Masonry for additional installation requirements
applying to reinforced Unit Masonry installation.
1. Where indicated on the structural drawings or as per Section 3.04 Reinforced Unit
Masonry with deformed steel reinforcing bars and grout as indicated.
2. Construct with vertical alignment of cells and other spaces to be grouted to provide
continuous unobstructed openings. Remove mortar protruding more than 1/2 inch into
cavity.
3. Grout spaces less than 2 inches in width with fine grout using low-lift grouting
techniques. In spaces greater than 2 inches,use coarse grout using high-lift or low-
lift grouting techniques.
4. Hold mortar in bed joints back 3" from edges of Unit Masonry unit adjacent to grout
spaces,bevel back and upward from grout space. Keep mortar droppings out of
grout spaces. Head and bed joints shall be formed by shoving units at least 2" into
w
place.
5. Support vertical reinforcement in position at top and bottom of lift and at intervals
not exceeding 192 bar diameters.
6. When the grouting is stopped for one hour or longer, stop pouring of grout 1-
1/2"±1/2"below the top of the uppermost unit.
B. Low-Lift Grouting: In multi-wythe construction, one tier may be carried up 16" before
grouting,but lay up other tiers and grout in lifts not exceeding 8". Grout lifts in single
wythe construction not exceeding 16" high. Immediately puddle grout spaces with stick
or rod(not trowel)sufficiently to cause grout to flow into all spaces between Unit
Masonry units.
C. High-Lift Grouting: Place vertical reinforcing in position after laying of Unit Masonry
wall is complete, but prior to grouting.
1. In grouted collar joint construction,build vertical grout barriers or dams of solid Unit *■
Masonry across grout space approximately 30'apart. Barriers shall be continuous
entire height of wall.
2. Provide clean-out openings at bottom of each reinforced grout cell; omit every other
unit on one side of wall for collar joint grouting. Where individual elements are
grouted,provide one or more openings for each element. Clean-outs to be of
sufficient size and location to allow cleaning and inspection of grout spaces. During
Work, use high-pressure jet of water to remove excess mortar and clean grout space. ..
Seal cleanout after inspection and before grouting.
3. Do not place grout until mortar has set and cured sufficiently to prevent'blow-outs.'
Deliver grout in transit mix trucks. Add water so slump is near maximum without
segregation. Pump grout from mixer into grout space as rapidly as practical and
discard if not in place within 1-2 hours after water is first added to batch.
4. Depending upon weather conditions and absorption rate of Unit Masonry units, lift
heights and waiting periods may be varied. Under normal weather conditions with
typical Unit Masonry units, individual lifts of grout shall be limited to 4' in height
with waiting period between lifts of 30 to 60 minutes.
REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY 042300- 10
OR
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO- OPTICAL McNamara/Salvia, Inc.
go Northampton,MA August 21,2009
1. Grout to be used in high-lift grouted elements shall be batched at a concrete plant in
q" accordance with ASTM C94 and delivered to the site in transit mix trucks or other
suitable transportation devices.
2. Grout to be used in low-lift grouted elements and mortar may be job-mixed.
Conform to requirements listed below.
B. Job-Mixed Mortar and Grout:
1. Measurement: Method of measuring materials shall be by either volume or weight
and such that specified proportions can be controlled and accurately maintained.
Measurement of sand by shovel is not allowable.
2. Mixing: Mix cementitious materials and aggregate for at least three minutes for
mortar and five minutes for grout in a mechanical batch mixer,with the maximum
amount of water to produce a workable consistency.
3. Retempering: Mortars that have stiffened because of evaporation of water from the
mortar may be retempered by adding water as frequently as needed to restore
required consistency,except that mortar not used within 12 hours after initial mixing
�* shall be discarded.
3.4 WALL TIES AND REINFORCING
A. Reinforced Block Walls: Horizontally reinforce by use of specified wire reinforcing
placed continuously at 16" o.c. in bed joints. Space at 8" o.c. in parapets. Install at 8"
o.c. for 24" above lintels and below sill openings. Install at 8" on center for 24" above
footings. Lap 8" at ends and make continuous around corners.
B. Deformed Bar Reinforcing: Placement as indicated on drawings. Where not otherwise
indicated,provide 1-45 vertical each side of each opening with a 2 ft.minimum extension
past sill and head, and 1-45 vertical full height at all unsupported edges and each side of
each control and/or expansion joint. Splice reinforcement bars where shown: do not
splice at other points unless acceptable to the Structural Engineer. Provide lapped
splices,unless otherwise shown. In splicing vertical bars or attaching to dowels,lap
ends,place in contact and wire tie. Provide not less than minimum lap shown on
drawings.
C. Refer to drawings for special reinforcing conditions.
3.5 ACCESSORY ITEMS: Refer to Section 042000, Unit Masonry for installation of
accessory items.
on 3.6 FORMS AND SHORES
Construct forms as required to shape, lines, and dimension indicated on the drawings
substantially and sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar or grout. Brace or tie to
maintain position and shape. Do not remove until Unit Masonry has cured sufficiently to
support its own weight and other applied loads.
3.7 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION
REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY 042300-9
ON
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO- OPTICAL McNamara/Salvia, Inc.
Northampton, MA August 21,2009 to
b) Gauge: 9 gauge side,intermediate and cross rods.
c) Finish: Hot dip galvanized after fabrication,ASTM A153, Class B-2(1.5 oz.per
sq. ft.), except manufacturer's standard mill galvanized may be used for interior
walls and partitions.
2. Provide units with 2,3,and 4 longitudinal rods,as indicated.
B. Anchors:
1. Flexible Anchors: Where reinforced Unit Masonry is indicated to be anchored to
structural framework with flexible anchors,provide two-piece anchors,which will
permit longitudinal and vertical movement of Unit Masonry but will provide lateral
restraint.
2. Finish: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication,ASTM Al 53,Class B-2 (1.5 oz.per sq.
ft.)or 7 mil copper coating,ASTM B227,Grade 30 HS,except manufacturer's
standard mill galvanized may be used for interior walls and partitions. w
C. Concrete Inserts: Refer to Section 042000,Unit Masonry for dovetail and other concrete
inserts required.
D. Reinforcing Bars: Deformed,ASTM A615 plus(S I), Grade 60.
2.5 INSULATION: Refer to Section 042000,Unit Masonry for insulation required.
2.6 ACCESSORIES: Refer to Section 042000, Unit Masonry for accessories required.
w
PART 3—EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
Before beginning Work,the Unit Masonry contractor shall inspect foundations or other
bearing surfaces for proper grades and elevations, freedom from dirt and other foreign
material. Report unsatisfactory conditions immediately to the General Contractor. ..s
3.2 PREPARATION
Remove all dirt, ice, loose rust and scale from walls,ties, and reinforcing prior to
installation.
Clean all equipment for mixing,transportation,and placing mortar before starting Work. ..
3.3 MEASUREMENT AND MIXING OF MORTAR AND GROUT
A. General:
wu
REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY 042300- 8
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL McNamara/Salvia, Inc.
Northampton,MA August 21,2009
1. Provide normal weight load-bearing"hollow" units for general use. Provide "solid"
units where specifically indicated. Non-load bearing units unacceptable.
2. Weight Classifications:
a) Lightweight: Less than 105 lbs.per cu. foot,oven-dry weight of concrete.
b) Normal Weight: 125 lbs. per cu. ft.,or greater, oven-dry weight of concrete.
3. "Hollow" Units-Net area 55%or more of gross area: ASTM C90, Type I -
Moisture-Controlled.
a) Grade N-General Use.
b) Minimum compressive strength of 2500 psi based on net area.
4. "Solid" Units-Net area 75%or more of gross area:ASTM C145, Type I -Moisture-
Controlled.
w
a) Grade N-General Use.
b) Provide completely solid,net area equal to gross area, units where indicated as
"100% solid."
c) Minimum compressive strength of 2500 psi based on net area.
5. Curing: In moisture-controlled atmosphere at normal pressure and temperature, or in
an autoclave,to comply with requirements for Type I units.
6. Sizes and Shapes:
a) Face dimensions nominally 16" long by 8" high(15-5/8" x 7-5/8" actual), except
as otherwise indicated. Thickness nominally 12", 10", 8", 6",4",2" (11-5/8", 9-
5/8", 7-5/8", 5-5/8", 3-5/8", and 1-5/8" actual) as indicated.
b) Provide specialty shapes by manufacturing or cutting if allowed by the Architect
where required for control joints, columns, pilasters, and other conditions
indicated on the drawings.
7. Lintel Units: Provide u-shaped lintel units with solid bottom where CMU lintels
used. Do not use an"open"section.
No 8. Bond Beams: Bond beams to be provided using"open"type sections. Do not use u-
shape section for continuous bond beams unless block is at lintel opening.
2.4 WALL TIES AND REINFORCING
A. Wire Reinforcing:
1. General: Welded wire units,prefabricated lengths of not less than 10',with matching
corner"L" and intersecting "T" units,ASTM A82,with deformed continuous side
and intermediate rods; and plain cross rods;widths approximately 2" less than
nominal width of walls and partitions as required to position side rods for full
embedment in mortar with mortar coverage of not less than 2" on joint faces exposed
to exterior and not less than 2"elsewhere.
a) Type: Ladder or Truss type.
REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY 042300-7
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL McNamara/Salvia, Inc.
Northampton,MA August 21, 2009
B. Portland Cement: Conform to ASTM C150, Type I,except Type III may be used for
cold weather construction.
C. Hydrated Lime: Conform to ASTM C207,Type S.
D. Aggregates for Mortar: Conform to ASTM C144.
E. Water: Clean, potable, and free from deleterious amounts of acids, alkalis, or organic
material.
F. Aggregates for Grout: Conform to ASTM C404.
G. Additives: None permitted,except as specified herein. Specifically, do not lower
freezing point of mortar or grout by use of calcium chloride or other antifreeze agents.
H. Mortar Color: Refer to Section 042000, Unit Masonry for mortar color required.
2.2 MIXES '
A. Mortar:
1. Comply with ASTM C270,Property Specifications, for mortar types required. Unit
Masonry cement not allowed without prior written acceptance by Architect and
Structural Engineer.
a) Type M- average compressive strength at 28 days=2500 psi
Type S - average compressive strength at 28 days= 1800 psi
B. Reinforced Unit Masonry Grout:
e�
1. Fine and Coarse Grout: Comply with ASTM C476. Grout shall contain a
minimum of seven sacks of Portland Cement per cubic yard. Add sufficient
water to provide proper consistency without segregation for pouring or troweling. w
Minimum 28-day compressive strength of 2500 psi required.
2. Fine Grout: Proportion by volume. One part Portland Cement,with not more
than one-tenth part hydrated lime or lime putty added, and two and one-fourth to
three parts sand.
3. Coarse Grout: Proportioned by volume. One part Portland Cement with not
more than one-tenth part hydrated lime or lime putty added, and two to three
parts sand, and not more than two parts gravel.
2.3 UNIT MASONRY UNITS
A. General: Obtain each type of exposed material from one manufacturer for entire project.
B. Concrete Unit Masonry Units:
REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY 042300-6
w
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL McNamara/Salvia, Inc.
op Northampton,MA August 21,2009
4) Air Temperature 20°F.and Below: Heat sand and mixing water to produce
mortar temperatures between 65°F. and maximum of 120°F. Provide
enclosure and auxiliary heat to maintain air temperature above 32°F.
Temperature of units when laid shall be not less than 20°F.
c) Grouting: Temperature of Unit Masonry to be grouted shall not be less than 35°
F.when grout is placed. Place grout in Unit Masonry at a minimum temperature
of 70°F. and a maximum temperature of 120°F.to produce in-place grout
temperature of 70°F. at end of Work day. Maintain grouted Unit Masonry above
35°F. for 24 hours following placement of grout.
d) Admixtures: No mortar or grout admixtures are permitted without the written
acceptance of the Architect and Structural Engineer.
e) Frozen Work: The above paragraphs are designed to permit Unit Masonry Work
to continue during periods of cold temperature. Any frozen Unit Masonry Work
will be prima facie evidence that the above requirements have not been complied
with. The Contractor shall be required to remove and replace all frozen materials
as directed by the Architect and Structural Engineer.
1. Cold Weather Protection After Installation:
a) Mean Daily Temperature 40°F.to 32°F.: Protect Unit Masonry from
rain or snow for 24 hours by covering with a weather resistive
membrane.
b) Mean Daily Air Temperature 32°F.to 20°F.: Cover Unit Masonry
completely with weather resistive insulating blankets for 24 hours; 48
hours for grouted Unit Masonry.
c) Mean Daily Air Temperature 20°F. and Below: Maintain Unit Masonry
temperature above 32°F. for 24 hours by enclosure and supplementary
heat,by electric heating blankets, infrared heat lamps, or other methods
proven to be satisfactory.
3. Hot Weather Protection During Installation: When air temperature exceeds
90°F. in the shade,protect freshly laid Unit Masonry from direct exposure to
wind and sun.
4. Moisture Protection During Installation: Where exposed to weather,the top
of Unit Masonry walls shall be covered at the end of each day's Work using a
waterproof material weighted down to insure its remaining in place.
Maintain such protection until final capping of the wall.
B. Protection of Complete Work From Physical Damage: Refer to Section 042000,Unit
Masonry for protection requirements.
PART 2—PRODUCTS
2.1 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
! ► A. Obtain each type of exposed mortar material from one manufacturer for entire project.
REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY 042300-5
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL McNamara/Salvia, Inc.
Northampton,MA August 21,2009
B. Samples:
1. Refer to Section 042000,Unit Masonry for sample submittals required.
2. Submit samples required for prism tests as required under Section 014320,
Quality Control "
3. Submit design mixes for reinforced Unit Masonry grout as required under
Section 030010, Concrete Work.
4. Submit mortar color samples if requested by Architect. ""■
C. Reinforcing Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings as specified under Section 011000.
Indicate bar sizes, spacing, lap lengths and locations, and quantities of reinforcing steel, ,.
bending and cutting schedules, and supporting and spacing devices. Indicate locations of
all openings, framing or special conditions affecting the Work. Provide 1/4" elevations
of all walls with reinforcing shown.
D. Certificates: Furnish manufacturer's certification and test results indicating that Unit
Masonry units meet specified ASTM requirements.
E. Product Data: Include manufacturer's printed product information for each type of Unit
Masonry unit,accessory, and other manufactured products required.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING: Refer to Section 042000, Unit Masonry
for delivery, storage and handling requirements.
1.6 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Environments Requirements:
1. Cold Weather Construction:
a) Preparation: Before beginning Work,remove ice or snow formed on Unit
Masonry bed by carefully applying heat until top surface is dry to the touch.
Remove all frozen or damaged Unit Masonry. Do not lay Unit Masonry units,
which are wet frozen.
b) Perform the following construction procedures as Unit Masonry Work is .ee
progressing. Temperature ranges referenced below are air temperature; including
wind chill effect, at time of installation. In heating mortar materials,maintain
mixing temperature selected within 10°F. Do not heat water above 160°F.
I) Air Temperature 40°F.to 32°F.: Heat mixing water to produce mortar
temperature between 55°F. and maximum of 120°F.
2) Air Temperature 32°F.to 25°F.: Heat sand and mixing water to produce
mortar temperatures between 65°F. and maximum of 120°F.
3) Air Temperature 25°F.to 20°F.: Heat sand and mixing water to produce
mortar temperatures between 75°F. and maximum of 120°F. Use
salamander or other sources of heat on both sides of walls under
construction. Use windbreaks when wind is in excess of 15 mph.
REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY 042300-4
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL McNamara/Salvia, Inc.
4. Northampton, MA August 21,2009
Masonry throughout the course of construction. Not less than three such tests shall be
conducted for the project.
C. Mortar and grout tests shall be conducted on materials used to construct the first set of
three prisms in B above. In the event such tests fail to achieve the required strength,
perform additional testing as required by the Structural Engineer.
D. Testing Agency shall provide special inspection complying with the requirements of the
governing building code during the construction of the following Work:
1. Exterior back up walls
2. Load bearing walls
3. Walls with height> {14'}
4. All walls within or immediately surrounding loading dock area
Special inspection shall be performed by personnel experienced in Unit Masonry construction
and acceptable to the building official and Structural Engineer. The special inspector shall
observe the preparation of all Unit Masonry prisms,and grout and mortar specimens. For Unit
Masonry constructed by low-lift grouting techniques,the special inspector shall observe and
verify compliance with Contract documents for the placement of Unit Masonry units,
reinforcing and grout on a schedule of at least twice each day that Unit Masonry construction
is in progress. For Unit Masonry constructed by high-lift grouting techniques,the special
inspector shall observe and verify compliance with Contract documents for the placement of
Unit Masonry units,grout, and reinforcing immediately prior to closing of clean-outs for each
section of Unit Masonry to be grouted; he shall continuously observe the grouting operation of
the first 1000 square feet of Unit Masonry installed and on a schedule of twice for each three
days that grouting operations are in progress thereafter. Special inspection shall also include:
OR 1. Verify compliance with requirements of Section 1.06 herein.
2. Verify size and spacing of all reinforcing.
3. Verify all reinforcing is placed with required lap and development lengths, and is
on located properly in grouted cells.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to Section 014320 Quality Control for additional tests submittals required.
Submit the following tests for each class of unit and type of Unit Masonry assemblage
two weeks prior to start of construction. Prepare specimens and test in accordance with
standards cited herein.
1. Tests made on individual Unit Masonry units within the last four months.
2. Current mortar test including mortar proportions.
3. Current grout test including grout proportions.
go 4. Current prism test.
a. Include mortar and grout proportions used in test specimens.
b. Substantiate that each type Unit Masonry assemblage meets or exceeds the
required 28-day compressive strength(fm).
REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY 042300-3
.t
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL McNamara/Salvia, Inc.
Northampton, MA August 21,2009 so
2. Records: Contractor shall maintain correct records on an appropriate form for all
inspections and tests performed, instructions received from the Architect, Structural go
Engineer or Testing Agency, and actions taken as a result of those instructions.
These records shall include evidence that the required inspections or tests have been
performed(including type and number of inspections or tests,nature of defects,
causes for rejection, etc.),proposed or directed remedial action,and corrective action
taken. Contractor shall document inspections and tests as required by this Section.
B. The Owner will employ an Independent Testing Laboratory acceptable to the Architect
and Structural Engineer to provide testing services specified in paragraph 1.03 Testing
and Inspection.
1. Contractor shall cooperate with Testing Agency personnel and shall furnish tools,
samples of materials,design mixes, equipment,and assistance as requested.
2. Contractor shall build and store Unit Masonry test prisms in a manner acceptable to
the Testing Agency. Prisms to be tested shall remain at the job site until moved by w
Testing Agency personnel.
3. Contractor shall notify Testing Agency at least 24 hours prior to expected time for
operations requiring testing or inspection services.
4. Contractor shall make arrangements with the Testing Agency and pay for additional
samples and tests made for the Contractor's convenience or for retesting of failed
samples.
5. Retention of an independent Testing Agency by the Owner shall in no way relieve
the Contractor of responsibility for performing all Work in accordance with Contract
requirements. ..
C. Reference Standards: Comply with following standards except where more stringent
requirements are stated herein.
es
1. American National Standards Institute,ANSUNBS 211 (A41.1), "Building Code
Requirements for Unit Masonry."
2. American Society for Testing Materials,ASTM,tests as enumerated elsewhere.
3. Brick Institute of America, BIA, "Technical Notes on Brick Construction."
4. National Concrete Unit Masonry Association,NCMA, "A Manual of Facts on
Concrete Unit Masonry."
5. Portland Cement Association, PCA, "Concrete Unit Masonry Handbook."
D. Mock Up: Refer to Section 0420000, Unit Masonry for mock-up sample panels required.
E. Subcontractor Qualifications: Regularly engaged in subcontracting Work of this type.
Minimum of 5 years experience on projects of similar size and complexity.
1.3 TESTING AND INSPECTION
A. Prepare test specimens in accordance with the requirements of the governing building
code.
B. Tests, consisting of three prisms each made in the field from materials currently in use,
shall be conducted for each 5000 square feet,or fraction thereof, of structural Unit
REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY 042300-2
w.
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO- OPTICAL McNamara/Salvia, Inc.
Northampton, MA August 21,2009
Section 042300—REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 —GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Work Included: Work consists of furnishing all labor, material and equipment necessary
for completion of the following Work:
1. Reinforced concrete Unit Masonry exterior walls,back up for exterior walls,piers,
basement walls,retaining walls, screen walls,and interior partitions complete with
reinforcement and anchorage.
2. Mortar for reinforced Unit Masonry.
3. Grout for reinforced Unit Masonry.
4. Reinforcing for reinforced Unit Masonry.
5. Build-in of items supplied by other trades.
6. Cut and fit for other sections of Work.
7. All related Work in Section 042000,Unit Masonry that applies to Reinforced Unit
Masonry.
B. Related Work:
1. Caulking of Unit Masonry Control Joints: Section 079200 Joint Sealants.
2. Built-in Door and Window Frames: Section 081110 Metal Doors and Frames.
C. Work Installed but Furnished by Others: Refer to Section 042000, Unit Masonry for
additional Work items installed but furnished by others.
1. Anchor Bolts, Weld Plates,Embed Plates,and Bearing Plates Built into Unit
Masonry: Furnished under Sections,034100 Structural Precast Concrete; 051200
Structural Steel; 055000 Metal Fabrications.
2. Steel Angle Lintels Built into Unit Masonry: Furnished under Section 055000 Metal
Fabrication.
3. Angle Clips For Lateral Load Bracing at tops of walls: Furnished under Sections
051200 Structural Steel,055000 Metal Fabrications.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. General Contractor's Quality Control System
1. General: The General Contractor shall establish a quality control system and shall
perform sufficient inspection and tests of all items of Work, including that of his
subcontractors,to ensure conformance to the Contract Documents for materials,
workmanship,construction, finish, functional performance and identification.
Contractor's quality control system is the means by which he assures himself that his
construction complies with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Controls
shall be adequate to cover all construction operations.
to
REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY 042300- 1
am
�w
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
am Northampton,MA
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage special inspectors to perform tests and inspections
and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas, as needed to
perform tests and inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to comply with specified
requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense.
3.8 REPAIRING,POINTING,AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise
damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install
in fresh mortar,pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.
B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and
completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent
construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application,
where indicated.
C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove
mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.
D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows:
1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes
or chisels.
2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for
comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding
with cleaning of masonry.
3. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by
rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water.
4. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
' 5. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A applicable to
type of stain on exposed surfaces.
3.9 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL
A. Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's
property. At completion of unit masonry work,remove from Project site.
B. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as
described above,and other masonry waste,and legally dispose of off Owner's property.
END OF SECTION 042000
ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042223 -9
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
4. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus
1/8 inch(3 xnm}. wu
S. For exposed bed joints and head joints of stacked bond, do not vary from a straight line
by more than 1/16 inch 0.5 mm)from one masonry unit to the next.
.w
3.4 LAYING MASONRY WALLS
A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint
thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets.
Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at
other locations.
B. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by racking back units in each course from those in
course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive
mortar, remove loose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required before laying fresh
masonry.
C. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections.
Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.
D. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise indicated. .�
E. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of
metal lath, wire mesh,or plastic mesh in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core.
F. Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout 24 inches (600 mm) under bearing plates, beams, lintels,
posts, and similar items unless otherwise indicated.
3.5 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING
A. Lay hollow CMUs as follows:
1. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course on
footings where cells are not grouted.
B. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint
thickness unless otherwise indicated.
3.6 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8
inch (16 Trim) on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch (13 mm) elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a
minimum of 6 inches(150 min).
1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches(406 min)o.c.
B. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units.
C. Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at[corners,] returns,
offsets, column fireproofing,pipe enclosures, and other special conditions.
ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042223 - 8
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing
equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to opening.
D. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous
pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp,
unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install
cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible,cut edges concealed.
E. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and
textures.
to 3.3 TOLERANCES
A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements:
*" 1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch (12
mm)or minus 1/4 inch(6 mm).
2. For location of elements in plan do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or
minus 1/2 inch(12 mm).
3. For location of elements in elevation do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or
minus 1/4 inch(6 mm)in a story height or 1/2 inch(12 mm)total.
B. Lines and Levels:
1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls do not vary from level by more than 1/4
inch in 10 feet(6 nun in 3 m), or 1/2 inch (12 nun)maximum.
w 2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary
from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet(3 in in in 3 m), L/4 inch in 20 feet(6 nom in 6
m), or 1/2 inch(12 nom)maximum.
3. For vertical lines and surfaces do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet(6
mm in 3 ni), 3/8 inch in 20 feet(9 mm in 6 m),or 1/2 inch(12 nam)maximum.
4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and
expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet(.3
in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet(6 in in in 6 in), or 1/2 inch(12 mni)maximum.
5. For lines and surfaces do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet(6 nim in
3 m), 3/8 inch in 20 feet(9 nYm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm)maximum.
6. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1
inch in 10 feet(6 nun in 3 m), or 1/2 inch (12 nun)maximum.
7. if Type FBS Rough brick or Type FBA brick is used, revise tolerance in subparagraph
„ below to allow for variation in brick size.
8. For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment by more
than 1/16 inch (1.5 nim) except due to warpage of masonry units within tolerances
specified for warpage of units.
C. Joints:
1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch
op (3 mm),with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch(12 snm).
2. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from bed joint thickness of adjacent courses by more
than 11/8 inch (3 nim).
3. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus 3/8
inch(91nm)or minus 1114 inch(6 mm).
ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042223 -7
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES
A. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226,
Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt).
2.7 MASONRY CLEANERS
A. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing �+�*
mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without
discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use by
cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned. w,
2.8 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators,
retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise
indicated. ..,
B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix.
Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients
before delivering to Project site. �r
C. Pigmented Mortar: Use colored cement product or select and proportion pigments with other
ingredients to produce color required. Do not add pigments to colored cement products. �.
I. Application: Use pigmented mortar for exposed mortar joints with the following units:
a. Decorative CMUs.
s
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction for piping systems to verify
actual locations of i m g connections.
P�P�
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to full thickness
shown. Build single-wythe walls to actual widths of masonry units, using units of widths
indicated.
ss
B. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections.
®s
ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042223 -6
No
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
40 Northampton,MA
H. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144.
I. Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with
ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry mortar
of composition indicated.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following:
a. Euclid Chemical Company(The);Accelguard 80.
b. Grace Construction Products, W. R.Grace& Co. -Conn.;Morset.
C. Sonneborn Products,BASF Aktiengesellschaft;Trimix-NCA.
on J. Water-Repellent Admixture at Decorative Units: Liquid water-repellent mortar admixture
intended for use with CMUs containing integral water repellent by same manufacturer.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following:
a. ACM Chemistries;RainBloc for Mortar.
b. BASF Aktiengesellschaft; Rheopel Mortar Admixture.
C. Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Dry-Block Mortar
Admixture.
K. Water: Potable.
2.4 REINFORCEMENT
A. Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951/A 951M.
1. Exterior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel.
2. Wire Size for Rods: 0.148-inch(3.77-mni)diameter.
3. Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs,and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches(407 mill)o.c.
4. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet(3 m),with prefabricated corner and tee units.
B. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Single-Wythe Masonry: Either ladder or truss type with
single pair of side rods.
2.5 TIES AND ANCHORS
A. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from materials that
comply with the following unless otherwise indicated.
1. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M; with
ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2 coating.
2. Stainless-Steel Wire: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Type 304.
B. Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Structural Steel Framing: Provide anchors that allow
vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to
plane of wall.
C. Corrugated Metal Ties Where indicated in details: Metal strips not less than 7/8 inch (22 111110
wide with corrugations having a wavelength of 7.6 to 12.7 mm and an amplitude of 0.06 to 0.10
inch (1.5 to 2.5 min) made from 0.060-inch- (1.52-miii-) thick, steel sheet, galvanized after
fabrication.
ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042223 -5
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
B. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching exposed
faces of adjacent units unless otherwise indicated.
1. Provide special shapes for corners,jambs, and other special conditions.
2. Provide square-edged units for outside corners unless otherwise indicated.
C.
D. CMUs: ASTM C 90.
1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive
strength of 3050 psi(21.0 MPa)
2. Density Classification: Normal weight.
3. Size (Width): Manufactured to dimensions 3/8 inch less than nominal dimensions,
included 8 inch, 6 inch,and 4 inch required for details.
E. Decorative CMUs: ASTM C 90.
1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive
strength of 3050 psi(21.0 MPa).
2. Density classification in first subparagraph below affects appearance and water
absorption.
3. Density Classification: Normal weight.
4. Size (Width): Manufactured to dimensions specified in "CMUs" Paragraph as required
for details.
5. Pattern and Texture:
a. Standard pattern, ground-face finish.
6. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range including premium
white and lighter shades.
2.3 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
A. Regional Materials: Provide aggregate for mortar and grout,cement, and lime that have been
extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within 500 miles (800 km) of
Project site.
B. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather ow
construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color
indicated.
C. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
D. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime containing
no other ingredients. we
E. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91.
ow
F. Mortar Cement: ASTM C 1329.
G. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use ow
in mortar mixes and complying with ASTM C 979. Use only pigments with a record of
satisfactory performance in masonry mortar.
MW
ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042223 -4
w.
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
go Northampton,MA
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an
enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If
units become wet,do not install until they are dry.
B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not
use cementitious materials that have become damp.
C. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for use with
dispensing silos. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms,
under cover,and in a dry location or in covered weatherproof dispensing silos.
D. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt
and oil.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with
waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when
construction is not in progress.
OR
B. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left
exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such
masonry.
C. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice
or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost
or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in
ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
D. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in
ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL
A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to
contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not use units
where such defects will be exposed in the completed Work.
2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A. Regional Materials: Provide CMUs that have been manufactured within 500 miles (800 kill)of
Project site from aggregates and cement that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as
well as manufactured,within 500 miles(800 km)of Project site.
ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042223 -3
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
D. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of the following:
1. Decorative CMUs.
E. Material Certificates: For each type and size of the following:
1. Masonry units.
a. Include material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements.
b. For masonry units include data and calculations establishing average net-area
compressive strength of units.
2. Cementitious materials. Include brand,type, and name of manufacturer.
3. Preblended, dry mortar mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients.
4. Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients.
5. Joint reinforcement. .�
6. Anchors,ties,and metal accessories.
F. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar. Include description of type and proportions of
ingredients.
1. Include test reports for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification. Test
according to ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength, ASTM C 1506 for water
retention, and ASTM C 91 for air content. �+
2. Include test reports, according to ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply with
compressive strength requirement.
G. Statement of Compressive Strength of Masonry: For each combination of masonry unit type
and mortar type, provide statement of average net-area compressive strength of masonry units,
mortar type, and resulting net-area compressive strength of masonry determined according to
Tables 1 and 2 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
H. Cold-Weather and Hot-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and
equipment to be used to comply with requirements.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and
color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from single source
from single manufacturer for each product required. *�
B. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality,
including color for exposed masonry, from single manufacturer for each cementitious
component and from single source or producer for each aggregate.
C. Masonry Standard: Comply with AC1530.I/ASCE 6/TMS 602 unless modified by
requirements in the Contract Documents.
D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 01 Section 'Project Management and Coordination."
.w.
ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042223 -2
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
SECTION 04 22 23—ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Concrete masonry units(Type 1)
2. Decorative concrete masonry units.(Type 2)
3. Mortar and grout.
4. Masonry joint reinforcement.
5. Ties and anchors.
6. Miscellaneous masonry accessories.
B. Work is this section includes grouting solid the concrete masonry units located at the base of the
perimeter walls on both floors.
C. Related Sections:
1. Division 04 Section "Reinforced Concrete Masonry"
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. CMU(s): Concrete masonry unit(s).
B. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Certificates for Credit MR 5. and Credit MR 5.2: For products and materials
required to comply with requirements for regional materials indicating location and
distance from Project of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or
recovery for each raw material. Include statement indicating cost for each regional
material and the fraction by weight that is considered regional.
C. Samples for Initial Selection:
I. Decorative CMUs, in the form of small-scale units.
ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042223 - 1
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL McNamara/Salvia
Northampton, MA August 21,2009
Completely fill with grout under beam and column bearings, erection blockouts,connection
W blockouts or pockets, and elsewhere as required. Mix, install,and cure grout according to
manufacturer's recommendations.
END OF SECTION
�s
go
GROUT 036000-1
w
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO- OPTICAL McNamara/Salvia
Northampton,MA August 21, 2009
B. For each day's production prepare,test and submit compression test results of one set of
3 (2"x 2")cubes made from each type of grout used in the field.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
Product Data: Submit catalog data on grout proposed for use. '
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING *�
Deliver in original unopened containers and store in a dry place under cover.
1.6 JOB CONDITIONS
Environmental Requirements: Maintain temperature of 40 degrees F. or above for at least 72
hours following placement.
PART 2—PRODUCTS
2.0 NON-SHRINK GROUT OR DRYPACK
A. Acceptable Manufacturer and Products:
1. Non-Metallic Grout: Use one of the following where grout is exposed to view or
weathering.
a. U.S. Grout Corporation"Five Star Grout" w
b. Protex Industries"Propak"
c. Master Builders"Master Flow 713"
d. L&M Chemicals"Duragrout"or"Crystex"
e. Euclid Chemical Company "Euco NS"
f. Or approved equal
B. Grout shall conform to CRD-C-621, Corps of Engineers"Specifications for Non-
Shrinkage Grout."
PART 3 —EXECUTION
3.0 PREPARATION
A. Remove defective concrete,laitenance, dirt, oil, grease, and loose material from surface
to receive grout.
w
B. Clean bottom of leveling plate,base plate, or bearing plate of all dirt, oil, grease, and
loose material; align,level, and support plate in accordance with fabricator's instructions,
templates, etc. in its final position. Maintain fixed in that position during grouting and
curing.
3.1 INSTALLATION
GROUT 036000-1
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL McNamara/Salvia
!� Northampton,MA August 21,2009
SECTION 036000—GROUT
PART 1 —GENERAL
1.00 RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 —Specification section, apply to work of this section.
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Work Included: Work consists of furnishing all labor,material,and equipment necessary
for installation of non-shrink grout at the following locations:
l. Under steel column bearing plates
2. Under steel beam bearing plates and bearings
3. In erection blockouts,connection blockouts or pockets in concrete walls,beams or
columns
4. All "drypack"work specified on the drawings
5. Elsewhere as indicated on the drawings
B. Related Work.
1. Steel framing and base plates: Section 051200 Structural Steel
2. Masonry grouting: Section 040200 Unit Masonry
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency:
�w
1. Testing and inspection will be made by an approved testing laboratory selected and
paid by the Owner. Contractor shall furnish Testing Agency access to work,facilities
and incidental labor required for testing and inspection. Retention by the Owner of
an independent testing agency shall in no way relieve the Contractor of responsibility
for performing all work in accordance with the contract requirements.
2. Furnish the Testing Agency with the following:
a. A complete set of shop and erection drawings.
b. Minimum 48 hour advanced notice as to time and placement of all grout under
this section.
c. Full and ample means and assistance for testing all material.
d. Proper facilities, including scaffolding,temporary work platforms, etc, for
inspection of the work in the mills, shop and field.
e. Copy of approved submittal for each product to be used.
1.3 TESTING AND INSPECTION
A. Prepare test specimens in accordance with the requirements of the governing building
code.
GROUT 036000-1
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO- OPTICAL McNamara/Salvia
Northampton, MA August 21,2009
E. Flagpole Base: Form,reinforce,and pour base as indicated on drawings and flagpole shop
drawings. Coordinate installation of flagpole base tube and grounding rod.
F. Light Pole Bases: Form,reinforce, and pour light pole bases as indicated on electrical drawings.
Coordinate installation of conduit and anchor bolts with electrical contractor.
END OF SECTION w
.w,
.R
CONCRETE WORK 030010-30
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO- OPTICAL McNamara/Salvia
++ Northampton,MA August 21,2009
a. FF defines the maximum floor curvature allowed over 24". Computed on the basis of
" successive 12"(300 mm)elevation differentials,FF is commonly referred to as the
"Flatness F Number".
FF=4.45/
Maximum difference in elevation in decimals of inches,between successive 12"
elevation differences.
b. FL defines the relative conformity of the floor surface to a horizontal plane as measured
over a 10 foot(30.5)distance. FL is commonly referred to as the"Levelness F Number".
FL= 12.5/
Maximum difference in elevation in decimals of inches,between two(2)points separated
by 120"(10'-0").
c. All floors shall be measured in accordance with ASTM El 155 "Standard Test Method for
Determining floor flatness and levelness using the"F Number"system"(Inch-Pound
Units).
Measure instruments must be capable of measuring point elevations at 12"centers such
" as dipstick floor profile or F-meter.
d. Floor tolerances compliance tests shall be performed by the testing agency within 24
hours after placement. Results will be reported to the architect and structural engineer
not later than 72 hours after installation. All tests shall be performed before forms and
shoring has been removed.
e. Floor tolerance compliance testing shall be performed as follows:
go
1. For all slab placements.
f. Remedial action to floor surfaces not meeting flatness criteria specified herein will not
proceed until test results have been reviewed by Structural Engineer. Any costs
associated with remedial action will be at the contractor's expense.
± 3.14 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE REQUIREMENTS
All other concrete work indicated on the drawings shall be provided and installed, even though
not specifically mentioned herein,to complete the work,which may include the following: Refer
also to architectural drawings.
A. Anchors: Install anchors furnished under other sections in accordance with shop approved
drawings and/or setting instructions.
B. Equipment Bases: Install concrete bases for all pumps,boilers,tanks, fans,transformers, floor
mounted electrical equipment,etc., including anchor bolts and inserts in accordance with setting
instructions furnished by the Contractor responsible for installing the equipment. Finish all bases
in a workmanlike manner with a troweled finish. The bases shall be located and sizes determined
by the Contractor furnishing the equipment.
C. Concrete Benches and Planters: Form and pour in place all exterior concrete benches and
planters as indicated. Reinforce as detailed.Finish bench tops with smooth,troweled finish and
slope slightly for drainage.
D. Under Floor Duct Encasement: Pour concrete around under floor mechanical ducts as indicated
go on the mechanical drawings. Coordinate with ductwork installer.
CONCRETE WORK 030010-29
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL McNamara/Salvia
Northampton, MA August 21, 2009
(FF)not less than 20 and a levelness number(FL)not less than 15. Cut down high spots
and fill low spots. Uniformly slope surfaces to drains. Immediately after leveling, re-
float surfaces to a uniform, smooth,granular texture.
No less than 80%of the floor surface profile shall fall outside a plus or minus 5/16"
envelope within any 10'-0' length at the time of testing.
w
3. Trowel Finish:
a. Apply trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces to be exposed to view,and slab surfaces
to be covered with wood flooring,resilient flooring,carpet,thin-set tile and stone,paint
or other thin film finish coating system.
b. At elevated slabs: WS
After floating,begin first trowel finish operation using a power-driven trowel. Begin
final troweling when surface produces a ringing sound as trowel is moved over surface.
Consolidate concrete surface by final hand-troweling operation, free or trowel marks,
uniform in texture and appearance. Flatness number for the floor surface to be(FF)not
less than 25. Grind smooth surface defects,which could telegraph through applied floor
covering system. No less than 80%of the floor surface profile shall be outside a plus or
minus 3/16"envelope within any 10'-0' length at the time of testing.
c. At slabs on grade:
After floating,begin first trowel finish operation using a power-driven trowel. Begin
final troweling when surface produces a ringing sound as trowel is moved over surface.
Consolidate concrete surface by final hand-troweling operation, free or trowel marks,
uniform in texture and appearance. Flatness number for the floor surface to be(FF)not
less than 35 and levelness number(FL)not less than 25. Grind smooth surface defects,
which could telegraph through applied floor covering system. No less than 80%of the
floor surface profile shall be outside a plus or minus 3/16"envelope within any 10'-0'
length at the time of testing.
C. Embedded Items: Unless noted otherwise on drawings,tolerances shall be as follows:
1. Anchor Bolts
a. Adjacent anchor bolts in a group receiving a single fabricated setting piece: +/-1/8"
b. Location and alignment of anchor bolt groups from designated location and alignment:
+/-1/41,
2. Embedded Plates and Weldments:
a. Location: +/-I" vertical,+/-2" horizontal
b. Plumb and alignment: 1/4" in 12"
3.13 EVALUATION AND ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA �.
A. General:
Evaluation and acceptance of work under this section shall be in accordance with the provisions
of ACI 301 Chapters 17 and 18.
B. Floor Flatness:
.0
1. Measurement Criteria
go
CONCRETE WORK 030010-28
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL McNamara/Salvia
Northampton,MA August 21, 2009
class as original concrete. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished
concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.
5. Repair isolated random cracks and single holes not over 1" in diameter by dry-pack method.
Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean of dust, dirt and loose
particles. Dampen cleaned surfaces and apply specified bonding compound. Mix dry pack,
consisting of one part Portland Cement to 2-1/2 parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 mesh
sieve,using only enough water as required for handling and placing. Place dry pack after
bonding compound has dried. Compact dry pack mixture in place and finish to match
adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for not less than 72 hours.
3.12 TOLERANCES
A. Formed Surfaces and Building Lines: Conform to ACI 301 4.3, as modified and amended herein.
1. Sleeves and Blockouts:
a. Size: +1/2",-0"
b. Location:
go
(1) Minimum dimension 6" or larger: +/-1/2"
(2) Minimum dimension less than 6": Locate in nearest open
space between reinforcing,not less than 1" clear from nearest reinforcing bar.
2. Permissible variations from plumb and designated building lines for portions of buildings
more than 100 feet above ground shall be as specified in ACI 301 Table 4.3.1.
C. Slab Finishing Tolerances: Floor flatness (FF)and Levelness(FL)tolerances shall conform to the
criteria listed below except Floor Levelness(FL)does not apply to slabs on un-shored steel deck.
Measure(FL)on shored floor slabs prior to removing shores.
1. Scratch Finish:
a. Scratch finish slab surfaces that are to receive concrete floor topping or mortar setting
beds for tile, stone and other bonded applied cementitious finish flooring material.
b. After placing slabs,plane surface to a flatness number for the floor surface(FF)not less
that 15 and a levelness number(FL)not less that 13. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains
where required. After leveling,roughen surface before final set with stiff brushes,
brooms or rakes. No less than 80%of the floor surface profile shall fall outside a plus or
minus '/2"envelope within any 10'-0' length at the time of testing.
2. Float Finish:
a. Apply float finish to monolithic slab surfaces to receive trowel finish and other finishes
as hereinafter specified, and slab surfaces which are to be covered with membrane or
an elastic waterproofing,membrane or elastic roofing,and as otherwise indicated.
b. After screeding, consolidating,and leveling concrete slabs, does not work surface until
ready for floating. Begin floating when surface water has disappeared or when concrete
has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of power-driven floats,or both. Consolidate
surface with power-driven floats, or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to
power units. Check and level surface plane to a flatness number for the floor surface
CONCRETE WORK 030010-27
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL McNamara/Salvia
Northampton, MA August 21,2009
I. Allow Architect to observe concrete surfaces immediately upon removal of forms.
2. Modify or replace concrete not conforming to required lines, details, and elevations.
3. Repair or replace concrete not properly placed resulting in excessive honeycombing and other
defects. Patch,repair, or replace exposed architectural finished concrete as directed by the
Architect.
4. Patching of tie holes is required. At areas exposed to view only.
5. Repair defects in structural concrete elements as follows:
w�
a. Deep Defects Exposing Reinforcing: Chip to sound concrete and clean thoroughly to
removed all loose concrete and dust. Apply thin coat of specified epoxy adhesive. Form
and pour, or dry pack with specified non-metallic, non-shrink grout, prior to development ,
of tack-free condition of epoxy adhesive. Strip forms after grout has hardened and
provide specified finish. Moist cure or apply specified clear curing and sealing compound
immediately after finishing.
b. Defects Greater Than 1/2 Inch Depth Not Exposing Reinforcing: Chip, clean, and apply w
specified epoxy adhesive. Dry pack using specified non-metallic, non-shrink grout prior
to development of tack-free condition of epoxy adhesive. Provide specified finish and
cure as specified above. +*!
c. Defects Less Than 1/2 Inch Depth and Tie Holes:
(1) For concrete having a specified compressive strength of 5,000 psi or less: Chip
and clean as specified above. Dry pack, finish, and cure as specified above.
(2) For concrete having a specified compressive strength greater than 5,000 psi:
Chip and clean as specified above.At Contractor's option, dampen surface and
apply specified epoxy mortar, followed by specified finish(no curing required);
or apply thin coat of the specified bonding compound followed by dry pack,
finish and cure as specified above.
d. Other equivalent repair procedures may be used subject to review and acceptance by the
Architect and Structural Engineer.
B. Unformed Surfaces:
1. Test unformed surfaces, such as monolithic slabs, for smoothness and verify surface plane to
tolerances specified for each surface and finish. Correct low and high areas as herein
specified. Test unformed surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope, in addition to
smoothness using a template having required slope.
2. Correct high areas in unformed surfaces by grinding or other methods acceptable to the
Architect after concrete has cured a minimum of 14 days.
3. Correct low areas in unformed surfaces during or immediately after completion of surface
finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with fresh concrete. Finish
repaired areas to blend with adjacent concrete. Where acceptable to the Architect and
Structural Engineer,the specified underlayment compound, applied in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions, may be used.
4. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes not exceeding l" diameter,by
cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas to sound concrete with
clean, square cuts and expose reinforcing steel with a least 3/4" clearance all around.
Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply specified bonding
compound. Mix patching concrete of same materials to provide concrete of same type or
CONCRETE WORK 030010-26
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL McNamara/Salvia
Northampton,MA August 21,2009
as ceramic or quarry tile, glue-down carpet), painting,and other coatings and finish
materials.
C. Curing Formed Surfaces: Where wooden forms are used, cure formed concrete surfaces,
including undersides of beams, supported slabs and other similar surfaces by moist curing with
forms in place for full curing period or until forms are removed. When forms are removed,
continue curing by methods specified above for specified curing time.
D. Curing Unformed Surfaces: Cure unformed surfaces, such as slabs, floor topping,and other flat
surfaces by application of appropriate curing method.
Final cure concrete surfaces to receive liquid floor hardener or finish flooring by use of moisture-
retaining cover,unless otherwise directed.
E. Surface Treatments: Apply specified surface treatments in areas shown on the architectural
drawings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as specified below:
1. Apply Metallic Hardener at a rate of 1.5 lbs.per sq. ft.
2. Apply Mineral Aggregate Hardener at a rate of 1.0 lbs. per sq. ft.
F. Environmental conditions: See Section 1.07 for hot weather concreting requirements.
G. Exposed surfaces: In addition to requirements of 3.11 herein all surfaces to be painted/stained or
left permanently exposed are to have additional surface rubbing or otherwise as required either by
the manufacturer or architect.
3.10 FORM REMOVAL AND RESHORING
A. Removal of Forms: Supplement and Modify ACI 301 as follows:
1. ACI 301 4.5.4: Formwork not supporting weight of concrete such as sides of beams,walls,
columns and similar parts of the work,may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less
than 50 degrees F. for 24 hours after placing the concrete,provided the concrete is
sufficiently cured to be undamaged by form removal operations,provided that supplementary
curing and protection is provided for the exposed concrete,and provided that the concrete
strength required by the general notes for form removal has been met.
2. ACI 3014.5.5: Formwork supporting weight of concrete may not be removed in less than 14
days or until concrete has attained 75%of 28-day design strength.
±� a. Compressive strength of cast-in-place concrete shall be determined by testing field-cured
concrete specimens representative of the concrete location for the members in question.
Field-cured concrete specimens(if required by the Contractor for early form removal)
shall be made and tested by the Owner's testing facility and paid for by the Contractor.
3. ACI 3014.5.6: Form facing material may be removed four days after placement only if
OR shores and other vertical supports have been designed and arranged to permit removal of
form facing material without loosening or disturbing shores and supports.
3.11 REPAIR OF SURFACE DEFECTS
A. Formed Surfaces:
CONCRETE WORK 030010-25
wee
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO- OPTICAL McNamara/Salvia
Northampton, MA August 21,2009
A. General:
1. Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at a relatively constant
temperature for the period necessary for hydration of the cement and hardening of concrete.
2. Curing shall commence as soon as free water has disappeared from the concrete surface after
placing and finishing. The curing period shall be seven days for all concrete except high-
early strength concrete, which shall be cured for three days minimum,unless test cylinders,
made and kept adjacent to the structure and cured by the same methods, are tested with the
average compressive strength equal to 70%of the specified 28-day strength.
3. Curing shall be in accordance with ACI 301 procedures. Avoid rapid drying at the end of the
curing period. During hot and cold weather,cure concrete in accordance with ACI 305 and
ACI 306.
B. Curing Methods: Perform concrete curing by using moisture curing,moisture-retaining cover
curing, curing compound,or by a combination of these methods,as specified herein. The
Contractor shall choose a curing method based on compatibility with the requirements for
subsequent material usage(finishes etc.)on the concrete surface and/or as specifically called for
on the drawings. The curing period shall be seven days minimum for all concrete except high
early strength concrete,which shall be cured for three days minimum, unless test cylinders, made
and kept adjacent to the structure and cured by the same methods are tested with the average
compressive strength equal to 70%of the specified 28-day strength.
1. Provide moisture curing when specified by one of the following methods:
a. Keep concrete surface continuously wet by covering with water.
b. Continuous water-fog spray.
c. Covering concrete surface with specified absorptive cover,thoroughly saturating cover
with water and keeping it continuously wet. Place absorptive cover to provide coverage
of concrete surfaces and edges,with 4" lap over adjacent absorptive covers.
2. Provide moisture-cover curing as follows:
a. Cover concrete surfaces with moisture retaining cover for curing concrete,placed in
widest practical width with sides and ends lapped at least 3" and sealed by waterproof
tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover
material and waterproof tape.
3. Provide dissipating curing compound to interior slabs with resilient flooring, carpet over
cushion, or left exposed, and to exterior slabs, walks and curbs as follows:
a. Apply specified curing compound to concrete slabs as soon as final finishing operations ww
are complete(within 30 minutes). Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power-
spray or roller in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Recoat areas subjected to
rainfall within three hours after initial application.
b. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. w�
c. Use moisture curing as specified above in lieu of membrane curing compounds on
surfaces which are to be covered with coating material applied directly to concrete such
as liquid floor hardener,waterproofing, dampproofing, membrane roofing, flooring(such
CONCRETE WORK 030010-24
w�
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL McNamara/Salvia
0* Northampton,MA August 21,2009
weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously,provide construction joints as herein
specified. Deposit concrete as nearly as practicable to its final location to avoid segregation.
3. Placing Concrete in Forms: Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers not deeper than
24" and in a manner to avoid inclined joints. Where placement consists of several layers,
place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic to avoid cold joints.
Guide the flow of concrete in walls and columns for vertical drop between the reinforcing.
Free fall,except in walls and columns, shall not exceed five feet.Free fall in walls and
columns shall not exceed 10 feet without prior acceptance by Structural Engineer.
4. Placing Concrete Slabs: Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation,
within limits of construction joints,until the placing of a panel or section is completed.
Continuous intermediate screed strips at intervals not greater than 15 feet set prior to concrete
placement are required. For slabs cast over metal deck,place screeds along beam lines. Set
screeds and adjust as necessary to achieve proper slab elevation and minimum thickness,
allowing for beam camber and deflection of deck and framing members.
5. Do not add water to compensate for slump loss at fiber reinforced concrete that does not
contain a superplasticizer.
6. Topping: Protect base surface from oil,paint,dirt,or other contaminants. Mechanically
remove prior to topping placement.Thoroughly dampen base surface and leave free of
standing water prior to placement. Place concrete as specified for slabs.
E. Consolidating:
1. Maintain one standby vibrator for every three vibrators used.
2. Consolidate placed concrete by internal vibrating equipment with a minimum frequency of
7000 rpm, supplemented by hand spading,rodding,or tamping. Use equipment and
procedures for consolidation of concrete in accordance with ACI 309.
3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators
vertically at uniformly spaced locations not farther than visible effectiveness of machine.
Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6" into preceding layer. Do not
insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to set. At each insertion, limit
duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of
reinforcement and other embedded items without causing segregation of mix.
4. Consolidate concrete during placing operations so that concrete is thoroughly worked around
reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.
3.7 FINISH OF FORMED SURFACES
A. Definitions: Refer to ACI 301 Chapter 10,for formed surface finish definitions.
B. Provide formed surface finishes as defined on the Architectural drawings.
3.8 SLAB SURFACE FINISHES
A. Definitions: Refer to ACI 301 11.7 for definition of slab surface finishes.
B. Provide slab surface finishes as defined on the Architectural drawings. See Section 3.1213 for
specific slab levelness requirements.
00 3.9 CONCRETE CURING,PROTECTION AND SURFACE TREATMENTS
CONCRETE WORK 030010-23
NO
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO- OPTICAL McNamara/Salvia
Northampton, MA August 21,2009 MW
3. Place construction joints in the center one-third of spans of beams unless indicated otherwise.
Continue reinforcement across construction joints. Submit construction joint locations not
shown on the drawings for Structural Engineer's acceptance.
4. Water stops: Provide water stops in construction joints. Continuously at all construction
joints below grade. Install water stops to form continuous diaphragm in each joint. Make
provisions to support and protect exposed water stops during progress of work. Fabricate
field joints in water stops in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Joints in Slabs on Ground: .e,►►
I. Construction Joints: Form joints as shown on the drawings or with specified slab
construction joint form. w
2. Control (Contraction)Joints: Construct joint by saw cutting or with specified slab control
joint form. Make saw cuts as soon as possible after placing concrete without dislodging
aggregate and to a depth of 1/4 of the slab thickness.
3. Isolation Joints: Do Not Separate slabs from vertical surfaces with specified expansion joint
material unless otherwise shown on the drawings. Refer to drawings for special isolation
joint details.
4. All Slabs on Grade: Construct slabs in as large a placement area as practical. Locate
construction joints on column center lines. Provide control joints at column center lines and
at intervals not more than 15 feet each way unless noted otherwise on plans.
w�
C. Joints in Suspended Slabs: Locate construction joints in the center of the slab span between two
framing members.Joints to be parallel to supporting elements unless otherwise shown or
accepted. Continue all reinforcement across joints uninterrupted. Submit construction joint
locations not shown on drawings to Architect and Structural Engineer for acceptance.
D. Bonding of Construction Joints: Apply specified watertight joint compound in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions at all joints below grade. +�
3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Preplacement Inspection: Formwork installation,reinforcing steel placement, and installation of
all items to be embedded or cast-in to be verified by the Contractor prior to placement.
B. General: Comply with AC1 301,ACI 304, and as herein specified. "
1. Do not place concrete in freestanding water, over ice, or on frozen subgrade.
2. Concrete shall not be placed within 20 feet of pile driving. Concrete shall have cured a
minimum of 24 hours before pile driving commences within a distance of 20 feet.
3. Refer to geotechnical report for additional limitations related to foundation installation.
C. Conveying: Convey concrete from the mixer to point of deposit without segregation.
D. Placing:
1. Wet exposed subgrade, masonry filler units,precast concrete,previously placed concrete, and
uncoated wood forms immediately prior to placing concrete.
2. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no concrete will be placed
on concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause the formation of seams or planes of
CONCRETE WORK 030010-22
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO- OPTICAL McNamara/Salvia
Northampton,MA August 21,2009
B. Welding of Reinforcement: Welding-reinforcing bars not permitted except where specifically
indicated. Protect exposed bars intended for bonding with future construction from corrosion by
providing adequate covering.
C. Field Bending of Reinforcement: Reinforcement partially embedded in concrete shall not be field
bent except as shown on the drawings or specifically permitted by the Structural Engineer.
D. Inspection of Reinforcement: Completed installation of concrete reinforcement must be accepted
by the Special Inspector before depositing concrete.
E. Drilled-in dowels: Provided drilled-in dowels to existing work where called for on the drawings.
Drill holes in existing concrete, insert steel dowels and pack solidly with non-shrink grout or
epoxy as specified. Do not core holes. Do not penetrate existing reinforcing without prior
written approval of Structural Engineer. Dowels may be re-spaced to avoid existing reinforcing.
Tolerance on drilled-in dowels to be±spacing/2.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS
A. General
1. Coordinate work with requirements of other trades and notify Architect and Structural
Engineer of all conflicts and nonconforming conditions.
2. Coordinate the requirements for installation of embedded items specified and furnished in
other sections of the specifications. Obtain templates and instructions for setting embedded
items.
in 3. Do not install sleeves in concrete slabs,beams,walls, or columns except where shown on the
structural drawings or approved by the Architect and Structural Engineer.
B. Embedded Pipes and Conduits: Conform to requirements of ACI 318 6.3.
C. Anchor Bolts, Inserts,Form Blockouts, and other items built into the concrete shall be securely
fastened to formwork or held in place with templates. Insertion into concrete after casting is not
allowed.
D. Dovetail Slots: Install in formwork whenever masonry abuts concrete such as brick ledges, or
surfaces to receive masonry veneer,intersections of masonry walls with concrete walls or
columns. At wall intersections, install one vertical slot for each 8" of masonry wall width. At
brick ledges,or concrete backup,install vertical slots at 16" o.c.
3.5 JOINTS
A. Construction Joints in Formed Elements:
1. General: Locate and install construction joints as indicated on the drawings or,if not shown
on drawings, locate so as not to impair strength or appearance of the structure. Submit
construction joint locations not shown on drawings to Architect and Structural Engineer for
acceptance.
2. Keyways: Provide keyways as detailed on the drawings. Where not detailed,provide 1-1/2"
P0 minimum depth continuous keyways in all construction joints in walls and slabs and between
walls and footings.
CONCRETE WORK 030010-21
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO- OPTICAL McNamara/Salvia
Northampton, MA August 21,2009
3. Thin form-coating compounds only in conformance with manufacturer's instructions. Do not
allow excess form-coating material to accumulate in forms or to come into contact with
concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed.
C. Void Spaces: Contractor shall be solely responsible for providing void spaces of full size and
extent shown on the drawings. Specified void forms may be used at the Contractor's option.
Where used, such forms shall be placed in the largest pieces practical and shall be adequately
secured in place with joints sealed to prevent leakage of concrete into the void space. Contractor
shall provide evidence satisfactory to the Structural Engineer that proper void spaces have been
provided.
D. Chamfer Strips: Install 45 degree chamfer strips at exposed outside corners. Install chamfer
strips at internal corners and edges of formed joints as detailed.
E. Rustication Strips: Install as shown in the drawings. Securely nail within the forms using finish
nails.
F. Architectural Finish Concrete:
I. Sandblasted Finish Concrete: Construct forms with new high density overlay plywood,with
joints regularly spaced and held to a minimum both horizontally and vertically. Between
formwork joints at all exposed outside corners, install 1/8" x 3/4" compressible form tape to wa
prevent leakage of mortar from forms.
2. Form Liner: Install form liners using methods and materials recommended by the form liner
manufacturer.
w.
G. Inspection of Formwork: All formwork surfaces that will provide the finish surface of exposed
concrete must be approved by the Architect before depositing concrete.
ws
3.3 PLACING REINFORCEMENT
A. General:
1. Comply with Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute's "Recommended Practice for Placing
Reinforcing Bars," and as herein specified.
2. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other materials, which reduce
or destroy bond with concrete.
3. Accurately position, support,and secure reinforcement against displacement by construction
or concrete placement operations with metal chairs, runners,bolsters, spacers,hangers, or
other means acceptable to the Structural Engineer. On vertical formwork, use approved bar
chairs or spacers as required to maintain proper concrete cover and bar position.
4. Install reinforcement to tolerances given in ACI 301 5.4.
5. Install welded wire fabric in the longest lengths practical. Lap adjoining pieces at least one
full mesh and wire together. Offset end laps in adjacent widths to prevent continuous laps.
6. Handling of Epoxy-Coated Bars: All systems for handling coated bars shall have padded
contact areas. All bundling bands shall be padded. Touch up all damaged or missing epoxy w�
coating on reinforcement prior to pouring concrete.
CONCRETE WORK 030010-20
in
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL McNamara/Salvia
!* Northampton,MA August 21,2009
1. See 2.05 HA.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.0 GENERAL
A. Perform concrete work in accordance with ACI 301 except as specified herein and on the
drawings.
B. Use ready-mixed concrete conforming to ASTM C94.
W 3.1 CONCRETE CAST ON EARTH
A. Preparation:
1. Foundation Bearing Surfaces: Excavate to smooth,level surface in undisturbed,natural soil
unless otherwise indicated or accepted by the Geotechnical Engineer.
2. Slab Subgrade: Underslab surfaces shall be fine graded to smooth, level surface prior to
installation of slab forms.
3. Vapor Barrier: Install directly below slab on grade at slabs-on-grade.
4. Earth Cuts: Earth cuts may be used as forms for pile caps only. When using earth forms,
hand trim sides and bottoms, square edges, and remove loose dirt prior to placing concrete.
B. Inspection: All foundation bearing surfaces shall be inspected and accepted by the Soils Engineer
prior to start of formwork.
po
3.2 FORMWORK
u A. General:
1. Design, construct,brace, and maintain formwork in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 347 as
modified herein.
2. Fabricate forms for easy removal. Provide crush plates or wrecking plates where stripping
may damage concrete surfaces. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways,reglets,recesses,
and the like,to facilitate removal.
3. Provide temporary openings where interior area of formwork is inaccessible for clean out, for
inspection before concrete placement, or for placement of concrete. Securely brace temporary
openings and seal to forms to prevent loss of concrete mortar.
4. Composite beams that require temporary shoring shall remain shored until the slab has
attained 75%of 28-day design strength. At least two levels of temporary shoring shall be
used to support a floor on which concrete is being placed.
B. Preparation of Form Surfaces:
1. Clean reused forms of concrete matrix residue,repair and patch as required to return forms to
acceptable surface condition.
2. Coat contact surfaces of forms with specified form coating compound before reinforcement is
placed in conformance with manufacturer's instructions.
OM
CONCRETE WORK 030010-19
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO- OPTICAL McNamara/Salvia
Northampton, MA August 21, 2009
2. City Sidewalks and Pumped Lightweight Concrete: 564 lbs. per cu.yd.
3. All Other Structural Concrete: 470 lbs. per cu.yd.
E. Fly Ash/Portland Cement Replacement: See 2.03A.3
F. Blast furnace slab replacement. See 2.03 A.5
G. Additional Requirements for Lightweight Concrete:
1. Air Dry Unit Weight: 112, +/-4 pcf measured at 56 days in accordance with ASTM C567
except that air drying shall be continued for 49 days after curing.
2. Wet Unit Weight: 116, +/-2 pcf. w
3. Splitting Tensile Strength: 5.7 times the square root of the specified 28-day concrete
compressive strength.
4. Pumped Lightweight Concrete Mixes shall contain fly ash(type C of F) in proportions of not
less than 8%nor greater than 20%by weight of the total amount of cementitious materials
and the specified air entraining agent in quantities sufficient for 5%to 8%total air content by
volume. Such mixes may contain the specified water reducing admixture and/or approved
pumping aids. Contractor to take precautions in finishing interior slabs on metal deck that
contain air entrainment to avoid surface distress due to the air content.
H. Concrete for Floors: Conform to ACI 301 3.14 as modified herein.
1. Parking slabs,vehicular ramps, and loading docks exposed to weather: Class 4, Fc=4000 psi
except that the maximum water-cement ratio shall be 0.40 and minimum concrete cover shall
be 2 inches.
2. Lightweight concrete floor slabs: fc=4000 psi unless otherwise noted.
3. All other slabs, fc'= 4000 psi.
K. Selection of Proportions: Use method of ACI 301 3.9. Proportioning based on method of ACI
301 3.10 not allowed.
1. Field test records used for documentation of the average strength produced by a proposed mix
in accordance with ACI 301 3.9.3.2 shall,in addition to the requirements there listed,comply
with the following:
The test record shall represent production concrete from a single design mix,produced during
the past year, and may be composed of 30 or more consecutive tests.
The test record shall represent concrete made with identical materials and proportions
(including admixtures)to the proposed mix.
The test record shall represent concrete proportioned to produce the maximum slump allowed
by these specifications, and for air-entrained concrete,within+/-0.5 percent of the maximum .
air content allowed.
2. Mixes proportioned on the basis of trial mixtures shall meet the provisions of ACI 301
3.9.3.3.
K. Air Entrainment:
CONCRETE WORK 030010-18
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO- OPTICAL McNamara/Salvia
Northampton,MA August 21,2009
1. Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following:
"Euco Weld" -Euclid Chemical Co.
"Weldcrete"-Larson Co.
"Sikabond" - Sika Chemical Corp.
N. Bonding Admixture: Acrylic latex,non-rewettable type. Interior or exterior usage.
1. Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following:
"SBR Latex" or"Flex-Con" -Euclid Chemical Co.
"Daraweld C" -W.R. Grace Co.
"Acryl 60" -Standard Dry Wall
O. Underlayment Compound: Free flowing, self-leveling, pumpable cementitious base compound.7
day minimum strength=4000 psi.
1. Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following:
"SilFlo 300"—Slipro Corp.
im "Flo-Top" -Euclid Chemical Co.
"Pourcrete" -Master Builders
PIP P. Expansion Anchors: See Section 051200.
Q. Adhesive Anchors: See Section 051200.
R. Non-Shrink Grout: See Section 036000.
2.5 PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES
A. Strength: Proportion mixes to attain compressive strengths as indicated on the drawings in 28
days unless higher strengths are specified herein. Strength requirements for high-early strength
concrete based on 7-day compressive strength.
B. Durability: Conform to ACI 301 3.4 as modified herein.
1. Concrete Exposed to Weather such as paving,site work,loading docks,and exterior slabs:
Meet requirements of ACI 301 3.4.1.
C. Slump Limits: Slump of concrete,measured at point of placement, shall fall within the following
limits:
1. Concrete Containing HRWR(Superplasticizer): 8 inches maximum unless otherwise directed
by the Structural Engineer.
2. Pumped Lightweight Concrete: 5-1/2 inches maximum.
3. All Other Structural Concrete: 4 inches maximum.
D. Minimum Cementitious Materials Content(Portland Cement plus Fly Ash and/or
blast furnace slag)unless otherwise shown on the drawings.
1. Interior slabs on Ground: 517 lbs. per cu.yd.
CONCRETE WORK 030010-17
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO- OPTICAL McNamara/Salvia
Northampton, MA August 21, 2009
a. Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following:
"Surflex" -Euclid Chemical Co.
"Mastercron" -Master Builders.
3. See 2.04 D3
1. Non-Slip Aggregate Finish: Provide fused aluminum oxide grits, or crushed emery, as abrasive
aggregate for non-slip finish with emery aggregate containing not less than 40%aluminum oxide ■""
and not less than 25%ferric oxide. Use material that is factory-graded,packaged,rustproof and
non-glazing, and is unaffected by freezing, moisture, and cleaning materials. Apply where
indicated on architectural drawings.
J. Colored Wear-Resistant Finish: Packaged, dry, combination of materials, consisting of Portland
Cement,graded quartz aggregate, coloring pigments, and dispersing agents. Use coloring
pigments that are finely ground,non-fading mineral oxides, inter-ground with cement. Color, as
selected by Architect,unless otherwise indicated.
1. Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following:
"Surflex" - Euclid Chemical Co.
"Colorchron" -Master Builders
K. Epoxy Products: Two component materials suitable for use on dry or damp surface, complying
with ASTM C881, for use in all structural concrete repairs. Obtain prior approval of Architect
and Structural Engineer as to methods and procedures.
I. Injection Epoxy: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following:
"Fx-751 Hydro-Ester Low Modulus LV" -Fox Industries
"Sikadur 35, Hi Mod LV" - Sika Chemical Corp.
2. Epoxy Mortar: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following:
"Concresive 1310" -Adhesive Engineering Co.
"Euco Thin Coat" or"Euco Concrete Coat" -Euclid Chemical Co. "Sikatop "Sikatoe 121 and
122" - Sika Chemical Corp.
3. Epoxy Adhesive: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following:
"Euco Epoxy 9463" -Euclid Chemical Co.
"Sikadur 32 Hi-Mod" - Sika Chemical Corp.
4. Watertight Joint Compound: Subject to compliance with requirements, use one of the
following:
"Euco Epoxy#452" -Euclid Chemical Co. ■*
"Sidadur Hi-Mod" - Sika Chemical Corp.
L. Epoxy Joint Filler: Not for use at joints at parking levels or ramps. See Section 079200 for n■,
approved product. Three components, 100%solids epoxy compound, with a minimum shore D
hardness of 50.
1. Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following:
"Euco Epoxy 4600 or#700" -Euclid Chemical Co.
"Sikadur Lo-Mod" - Sika Chemical Corp.
M. Bonding Compound: Polyvinyl acetate,rewettable type. Interior usage only.
CONCRETE WORK 030010-16
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO- OPTICAL McNamara/Salvia
Northampton,MA August 21,2009
` "Master Kure 30"-Master Builders
2. Dissipating Resin Compound: ASTM C309, Type I. The film must chemically break down
in a two to four week period allowable moisture loss shall not exceed 0.030 g/sq.cm
a. Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following:
CureCrete 309—by CureCrete Distribution
"W.B. Resin Cure=30%"- Conspec Marketing&Manufacturing Co., Inc.
"Kurez DR"-Euclid Chemical Co.
"Masterseal"-Master Builders
3. Curing and Hardening Dustproofing Compound: Sodium silicate compound. Use for
remedial curing and hardening subject to acceptance by Architect and Structural Engineer.
Manufacturer shall supply 20 year warranty.
a. Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following:
Ashford Formula—by CureCrete
CT Densifier—by Chemprobe
E. Absorptive Cover: Burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz.per sq.
yd., complying with AASHTO M182,Class 2.
F. Moisture-Retaining Cover: One of the following, complying with ASTM C171:
Waterproof paper
Polyethylene film
Polyethylene-coated burlap.
G. Clear Penetrating Sealer: Material suitable for application on horizontal surfaces containing not
less than 20 percent siloxane or 40 percent silane in mineral spirits or alcohol-based carrier.
Provide certification of 90 percent chloride screen effectiveness when tested in accordance with
the procedure of NCHRP Report No. 244, "Southern Climate Exposure" at manufacturer's
recommended rate of application.
1. Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following:
Deck A Pell HZO—by Tnemec/Chemprobe
"Chem-Treat BSM40" -Dynamit Nobel of America, Inc.
"Consolideck SV -ProSoCo, Inc.
"Enviro Sea] 40"—Harris Specialty Chemicals, Inc.
H. Surface Hardeners: Apply where indicated on architectural plans.
1. Metallic Hardener: Mixture of specially processed and graded iron aggregate,Type III
Portland Cement, and plasticizing agents.
a. Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following:
"Euco-Plate" -Euclid Chemical Co.
"Masterplate 200" -Master Builders
2. Mineral Aggregate Hardener: Factory blended mixture of specially processed and graded
mineral aggregate,Type I Portland Cement and plasticizing agents.
Pe
CONCRETE WORK 030010-15
wee
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO- OPTICAL McNamara/Salvia
Northampton,MA August 21,2009
1. Interior Use or Exterior Use Where Sealants Are Specified: Bituminous saturated fiber
conforming to ASTM D1751, 1/2 in. thickness. Provide manufacturer's certification of
compatibility with specified sealants where required.
2. Exterior Use Where Sealants Are Not Specified: Premolded asphalt and fiber conforming to
ASTM D994, 1/2 in.thickness.
C. Water stops: Provide flat, dumbbell type or center bulb type water stops at construction joints
and other joints as indicated. Size to suit joints, but no less than 6 inches.
1. Rubber Water stops: Corps of Engineers CRD-0513
a. Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products of one of the following
manufacturers:
Burke Company
Edoco Technical Products
Williams Products
2. Polyvinyl Chloride Water stops: Corps of Engineers CRD-0572
a. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the follow
manufacturers:
Burke Company
Edoco Technical Products
Progress Unlimited
3. Flexible PVC Waterstops: Corps of engineers CRD-0572.
a. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the follow
manufacturers:
Bometals, Inc.
Greenstreak
Meadows, W.R., Inc.
Murphy,Paul Plastics Co.
Progress Unlimited,Inc.
Tamms Industries, Inc.
Vinylex Corp.
D. Curing Compounds: Unless otherwise indicated on architectural or structural plans referenced to
curing compound refers to a dissipating resin compound.
1. Curing and Sealing Compound: (VOC Compliant)Federal Specification TT-C-800A, 30%
solids content minimum,and have test data from an independent laboratory indicating a
maximum moisture loss of 0.030 grams per sq. cm. when applied at a coverage rate of 300 sq.
ft. per gallon. Manufacturer's certification required.
a. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
"Kurez Vox"—Euclid Chemical Company
"Super-Rez Seal" or "Super Pliocure"-Euclid Chemical Co.
CONCRETE WORK 030010-14
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL McNamara/Salvia
Northampton,MA August 21,2009
5. High Range Water Reducing Admixture(Superplasticizer): ASTM C494,Type F or G.
a. Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following:
"Eucon 37" -Euclid Chemical Co.
"Pozzolith 400N" -Master Builders
"Sikament" - Sika Chemical Co.
"Daracem" - W.R. Grace&Co.
6. Non-Corrosive,Non-Chloride Accelerator: ASTM C494,Type C or E. The admixture
manufacturer must have long-term,non-corrosive test data(of at least a year's duration)using
an acceptable accelerated corrosion test method such as electrical potential measurements.
a. Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following:
"Accelguard 80" -Euclid Chemical Co.
!' "Daraset Accelerator" -W. R. Grace&Co.
"Pozzolith-40" - Master Builders
ps 7. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494, Type D
a. Subject to compliance with requirements,use one of the following:
"Eucon Retarder 75" -Euclid Chemical Co.
"Daratard" -W. R. Grace&Co.
"Pozzolith 300-R" -Master Builders
8. Fibrous Concrete Reinforcement: 100%virgin collated,polypropylene fibers containing no
reprocessed olefin materials and specifically manufactured for use as concrete secondary
reinforcement. Volume per cubic yard shall be minimum 1 ''/2 lbs/cu.yd. Fiber length to be
'/2"or 3/4"as per manufacturer. Minimum tensile strength to be 70 ksi. Mixing and placing
shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer requirements. Fiber manufacturer must
document evidence of five-year satisfactory performance history. Use one of the following
or approved equal:
a. Nylon Fibers"—Nycon, Inc.
b. "Grace Fibers"—W.R. Grace&Company
IM c. "Forta CFP"—Forta Corporation
d. "Fibermesh"—Fibermesh Company
e. "Fiberstrand 100"—Euclid Chemical Company
9. Certification: Written certification of conformance to above requirements will be required
from all admixture manufacturers prior to mix design review by the Structural Engineer.
2.4 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class C,of one of the following materials;or polyethylene
sheet,ASTM D 4397,not less than 10 mils thick: Non-woven,polyester-reinforced,
polyethylene coated sheet; 10 mils thick.
B. Expansion Joints:
CONCRETE WORK 030010-13
w
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO- OPTICAL McNamara/Salvia
Northampton, MA August 21,2009
1. Portland blast-furnace slag cement: ASTM C-595,type IS or ISCMS
2. Ground granulated blast-furnace slag:ASTM C-989
a. Subject to compliance with the requirements provide the following:
1. NEW CEM—Blue Circle Cement, Inc.
2. Approved Equal.
b. May be substituted for up to 50%of minimum cement or cementitious at one for
one(by weight)substitution rate,providing required strength at all specified ages
is attained.
B. Aggregates:
1. General: Provide aggregates from the same source throughout the project unless otherwise
specified.
ws
2. Normal Weight Aggregate: ASTM C33 containing no deleterious substances, which cause
surface spalling. Certify that no alkali reactivity is produced with the proposed aggregate-
cement combinations when tested in accordance with ASTM C227. Pea gravel shall be
graded for 90%passing the 3/8 inch screen and 90%retained on the 1/4 inch screen. Use pea
gravel only when acceptable to the Architect and Structural Engineer.
Maximum nominal aggregate size to be 3/4"unless otherwise approved by the structural
engineer.
a. 1 ''/z"maximum aggregate size may be used at pile caps.
3. Lightweight Aggregate: Conform to ASTM C330,manufactured by expanding clay, shale,
or slate.
C. Water: Potable
D. Admixtures:
1. General: Unless specified,no admixtures may be used without specific approval of the
Architect and Structural Engineer.
2. Prohibited Products: Calcium chloride or admixtures containing more than 0.05%chloride
ions or thiocyanates are not permitted. `
3. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C260
a. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
"Air Mix" - Euclid Chemical Co.
"Daravair" - W.R. Grace
"MB-VR" or"MB-AE" - Master Builders
4. Water Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494, Type A
a. Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following:
"Eucon WR-75" -Euclid Chemical Co.
"Pozzolith 200N" -Master Builders
"Plastocrete 161" - Sika Chemical Co.
"WRDA" - W.R. Grace&Co.
CONCRETE WORK 030010-12
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO- OPTICAL McNamara/Salvia
Northampton,MA August 21, 2009
H. Supports for Reinforcement: Provide supports for reinforcement including bolsters, chairs,
spacers and other devices for spacing, supporting and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire
fabric in place within specified tolerances. Use wire bar-type supports complying with CRSI,
Class I or 2,unless otherwise acceptable.
I. Use supports with sand plates or horizontal runners for slab-on-grade where base material
will not support chair legs.
2. All materials that come in direct contact with epoxy coated bars, such as slab bolsters,high
chairs,tie wires, etc., shall be plastic coated.
3. Provide accessories and supports for welded wire fabric and reinforcement in slabs as
required to maintain position as shown on the drawings.
W J. Reinforcing Splices:Mechanical splices for reinforcing shall develop 125%of the specified
yield strength Fy of the bar. Subject to compliance with the requirements use one of the
following:
4" a. DB Grout sleeve system by Richmond Screw Anchor Co.
b. NMB splice sleeve type O-X by Sleeve Splice North America, Inc.
c. Or approval equal.
on
2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Cementitious Materials:
1. General:Provide materials of the same brand or source throughout the project unless
otherwise specified.
2. Portland Cement: ASTM C150 Type I or II or High-Early Strength Type III, or Low Heat of
Hydration Type IV.
3. Fly Ash:
a. ASTM C618, Class C or F, except maximum loss on ignition: 3.0%. Maximum percent
retained on#325 sieve: 28%, Maximum water requirement, stated as percentage of
control: 100%.
b. Testing:ASTM C311
c. Percentage of fly ash in mix design shall be by weight,not by volume. Water/cement
ratio will be calculated as water/cementitious(total cement and fly ash)ratio.
go d. Fly Ash Substitution:
1. Class C fly ash may be substituted for up to 25%of minimum cement or cementitious
4W at one for one(by weight)substitution rate,providing required strength at all
specified ages is attained.
2. Class F fly ash may be substituted for up to 20%of minimum cement or cementitious
at one for one(by weight)substitution rate sufficient to provide required strength at
all specified ages.
3. Permitted only with written permission of Engineer following review of mix
submittals.
e. Prohibited: Fly ash in same mix with Type IP blended cement.
f. Mix Submittals: Limited amounts of fly ash may be added to aid pumping: Permitted
only with permission of Engineer following review. See 2.05H.4.
CONCRETE WORK 030010-11
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL McNamara/Salvia
Northampton, MA August 21,2009
1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
"Keyed Kold" -Burke Co.
"Super Screed" - Vulcan Metal Products.
H. Slab Control Joint Forms: Molded plastic material for insertion into slab surface during finishing.
Configuration to provide joint depth of not less than 1/4th of the slab thickness.
1. Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following:
"Zipcap" - Greenstreak Plastic Products Co.
"Crack Inducer" -Progress Unlimited, Inc.
"Kold-Seal Zipper Strip" -Vinylex Corp. fo
1. Chamfer Strips: 3/4",45 degree job-cut wood.
J. Rustication Strips: Job-cut wood, size and shape as indicated on the drawings.
K. Form Coatings: Provide commercial formulation form-coating compounds that will not bond
with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of
concrete surfaces. Provide the following or equal:
"Nox-Crete PSC from Coating,"manufactured by Non-Crete Inc., Omaha,NE Tele: 800-228-7170.
2.2 REINFORCING MATERIALS
A. General: Sizes, types,grade or yield strengths as indicated on the drawings. Use 60,000 psi yield
strength if not otherwise indicated. Use reinforcing conforming to ASTM A706 where welding of •
reinforcing is required unless otherwise indicated. Provide uncoated finish unless otherwise
indicated.
B. Deformed Bars: ASTM A615 plus supplementary requirement(S I),Deformed Billet Steel Bars
or ASTM A706, Low-Alloy Steel Deformed Bars unless otherwise indicated.
wR
C. Smooth Bars for Masonry Joint Reinforcement: Conform to requirements of ASTM A615 plus
supplementary requirement(S1) or ASTM A706.
D. Smooth Wire for Spiral Reinforcement: ASTM A82,Cold-Drawn Steel Wire for Concrete
Reinforcement having a yield strength, measured at a strain of 0.35 percent, of 70,000 psi.
E. Welded Wire Fabric: Mesh size and gauge as indicted on the drawings. Conform to ASTM
A]85, plain in flat sheets.
F. Coatings:
1. Epoxy Coated: ASTM A775. Apply before or after fabrication and bending. Film thickness
of coating after curing to be 8 to 12 mils when measured in accordance with Method G 12.
Provide epoxy coated reinforcing where indicated on the drawings. See 3.03A.6 for field
touch up.
G. Tie Wire: Tie wire shall be No. 16 American Wire Gage or heavier black annealed or Plastic
Coated as specified.
CONCRETE WORK 030010-10
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL McNamara/Salvia
Northampton,MA August 21, 2009
3. Immediately following screening, apply specified evaporation retarding agent in
accordance with recommendations of manufacturer. Plastic cracking conditions may
require application of compound several times during concrete finishing sequence.
4. During curing operation cover concrete with wet burlap or cotton mats. Keep mats
constantly wet for 7 days minimum. Leave mats in place for 3 additional days after
discontinuing wetting process.
5. When the air temperature is forecast to exceed 92 degrees F. at any time during the
duration of a concrete pour,the contractor shall obtain acceptance from the Structural
Engineer of the procedures to be used in protecting, depositing,finishing,and curing the
concrete.
B. Protection: Protect newly finished slabs from rain damage. Protect finished slabs from mortar
leakage from pouring of concrete above. Cover masonry walls,glazing, and other finish materials
with polyethylene or otherwise protect from damage due to pouring of concrete.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.0 GENERAL
±!! All materials shall be in accordance with ACI 301 unless amended or superceded by requirements
of following articles or General Notes on the structural drawings.
2. 1 FORM MATERIALS AND SYSTEMS
A. Formwork and formwork systems shall be designed by a Registered Professional Engineer
employed by the Contractor. The Professional Engineer shall be registered in the state of Florida.
The Contractor shall submit written certification indicating conformance with this requirement.
B. Forms for Exposed Finish Concrete: Unless otherwise indicated,construct formwork for exposed
concrete surfaces with plywood,metal,metal-framed plywood faced or other acceptable panel-
type materials,to provide continuous, straight, smooth, exposed surfaces. Furnish in largest
practicable sizes to minimize number of joints and to conform to joint system shown on drawings.
Provide form material with sufficient thickness to withstand pressure of newly placed concrete
without bow or deflection.
C. Forms for Unexposed Finish Concrete: Form concrete surfaces,which will be unexposed in
finished structure with plywood, lumber,metal, or other acceptable material. Provide lumber
dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.
D. Forms for Textured Finish Concrete: Form-textured finish concrete surfaces with units of face
design, size, arrangement, and configuration as shown on drawings or as required to match
Architect's control sample. Provide solid backing and form supports to ensure stability of
textured form liners.
E. Cylindrical Columns and Supports: Form round section members with metal,fiberglass
reinforced plastic, or paper or fiber tubes. Construct paper or fiber tubes of laminated plies using
water-resistant adhesive with wax-impregnated exterior for weather and moisture protection.
Provide units with sufficient wall thickness to resist loads imposed by wet concrete without
deformation.
F. Void Forms: Moisture resistant treated paper faces,biodegradable. Structurally sufficient to
support weight of wet concrete until initial set. Sizes as required to produce void spaces as
shown on the drawings.
G. Slab Construction Joint Forms: Galvanized steel with continuous tongue and groove.
on
CONCRETE WORK 030010-9
!p
,w
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL McNamara/Salvia
Northampton, MA August 21,2009
I. Weldable Reinforcing Steel:All reinforcing bars to be welded that do not meet ASTM A706
require submission of a report of material properties stating conformance with the welding
procedures specified in AWS DI A.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Delivery of Materials: Deliver materials in manufacturer's unopened containers fully identified
with manufacturer's name,trade name,type, class, grade, size, and color. **
B. Storage of Materials: Store materials in unopened containers. Store off ground and under cover,
protected from damage.
C. Reinforcing: Unload and store reinforcing bars so they will be kept free of mud and damage.
D. Concrete:No water is to be added after the addition of super plasterizers. "
1. Non-Silica Fume Concrete
a. Hauling Time: Discharge all concrete transmitted in a truck mixer, agitator,or other
transportation device not later than 1-1/2 hours, or 300 revolutions of the drum after the
mixing water has been added, whichever is earliest.
b. Extra Water: Deliver concrete to the job in exact quantities required by the design mix.
Should extra water be required before depositing the concrete,the Contractor's
Superintendent shall have sole authority to authorize the addition of water. Any
additional water added to the mix after leaving the batch plant shall be indicated on the
trip ticket and signed by the person responsible. Where extra water is added to the
concrete, it shall be mixed thoroughly for 30 revolutions of the drum at mixing speed.
Water may be added at the site only once to each batch.
1.7 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Hot Weather Concreting(ACI 305R)
Hot weather is defined as any combination of high temperature; low humidity and high wind
velocity which causes rate of evaporation in excess of 0.2 pounds per square ft. per hour as
determined by ACI 305R, figure 2.1.5. When concrete is placed under conditions of hot
weather concreting, Contractor shall provide extra protection of concrete against excessive
placement temperatures and excessive drying throughout placing and curing operations and
follow Items 1-5 below.
1. Forms, reinforcement,and air shall be cooled by water fog spraying immediately before !
placing concrete. Placement temperature of concrete shall not exceed 90 degrees F.
2. Protect concrete during finishing operations by one of the following:
a. Continuous fog spray between finishing operations.
b. Immediately following screening, applying evaporation retarding agent in accordance
with recommendations of manufacturer.
CONCRETE WORK 030010-8
go
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL McNamara/Salvia
on Northampton,MA August 21, 2009
g. Design slump,ASTM C143.
h. Required average strength qualification data per ACI 301 3.9.1 and 3.9.2. Submit
separate qualification data for each production facility,which will supply concrete to the
project.
i. Average strength qualification data(trial mix data or field test data per ACI 301 3.9.3).
go When field test data is used to qualify average strength, submit separate qualification data
for each production facility, which will supply concrete to the project.
j. Field test data submitted for qualification of average strength under ACI 301 3.9.1, 3.9.2,
and 3.9.3 shall include copies of the Concrete Testing Agency's reports from which the
data was compiled.
k. For lightweight concrete, submit splitting tensile strength qualification data acceptable to
the Structural Engineer. Such data may be in the form of tests conducted in accordance
with ASTM C496 within the last year on concrete made with similar materials to those
proposed and produced to meet a specified strength within 1000 psi of that required.
2. Separate design mixes are required for each strength and class of concrete, each
change in type and/or quantity of mix materials including admixtures, each change in
slump limits, and each change in entrained air content.
3. For lightweight concrete placed by pumping, separate mix designs are required for
each 100 feet of vertical or horizontal distance from the pump to the point of
discharge. This requirement may be waived if evidence acceptable to the Architect
and Structural Engineer is submitted demonstrating, by previous successful
experience,that the proposed mix will meet all requirements of these specifications,
when sampled at the point of discharge, over the full range of distances required.
C. Submit shop drawings for fabrication,bending and placement of concrete reinforcement. Comply
with ACI Detailing Manual(SP 66). Provide scale elevations of all walls with reinforcing shown.
Include special reinforcement required at openings through concrete structure. Include all
accessories specified and required to support reinforcement. Obtain from General Contractor
location of proposed construction joints and show them on the shop drawings.
D. Formwork Layout Drawings:
1. Formwork layout drawings are required at Architect's request only.
me
E. Product Data:
1. Submit product data with application and installation instructions for proprietary materials
and items including reinforcement and forming accessories, admixtures,patching compounds,
epoxies,grouts, dry-shake finish material,hardeners, sealer,water stops,joint systems and
others as required by the Architect.
2. Submit curing compound product data and verification of its compatibility with other finish
materials and surface treatments required.
F. Submit samples of concrete materials if requested by the Architect, including names, sources, an
descriptions.
H. Substitutions: Any request for product substitution must be submitted for acceptance,with all
necessary documentation prior to time of bid.
CONCRETE WORK 030010-7
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL McNamara/Salvia
Northampton, MA August 21,2009
2. Results of field testing at time of sampling including date and time of sampling, amount of
water added at site prior to sampling, ambient air temperature and concrete temperature,
concrete slump and air content,and concrete wet unit weight.
3. Results of laboratory testing including date test specimens were transported to laboratory,
date and age of concrete at time of testing,compressive strength of each cylinder tested,
average compressive strength of tested cylinders, and specified design strength of concrete
represented by the test.
D. Additional Testing: Contractor shall bear the cost of testing and inspection resulting as a
consequence of the following:
I. Work not in compliance with the Contract Documents.
2. Testing requested by the Contractor or Subcontractor such as additional cylinders for early
breaks, etc.
3. Testing to verify the adequacy of work done without prior notice, without proper supervision,
or contrary to standard construction practice.
E. Reinforcing Steel Inspection: Concrete reinforcing shall be inspected prior to closing of concrete
form work or placing of concrete. Refer to Section 3.03 for placing requirements. Inspect all
reinforcing for conformance with contract requirements. Submit written reports of all inspections
in accordance with Test reports herein. Such reports shall include a description of each area
inspected and deficiencies noted. Deficiencies observed shall immediately be brought to the
attention of the contractor's field superintendent. Corrections made by contractor to resolve such
deficiencies must be addressed and listed in the report. It is not sufficient to simply document
that deficiencies were observed and brought to the contractor's attention.
F. Weldable Reinforcing Steel: Review materials report of 1.05I if submitted. Verify reinforcing to
be welded meets ASTM A706 prior to welding. Provide 100%visual and magnetic particle
inspection of all fillet and partial penetration groove welds at reinforcing bars. Provide 100%
U.T. inspection of all full penetration welds at reinforcing bars.
G. Mix Designs: Review of concrete mix designs for compliance with ACI 318 Chapter 4 and
Sections 5.2, 5.4. 5.8 is required by the testing agency.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. All submittals to be in accordance with Section Ol 1000.
B. Mix Designs:
I. Submit substantiating data for each concrete mix design contemplated for use to the Architect
and Structural Engineer not less than three weeks prior to first concrete placement.Data for
each mix shall, as a minimum, include the following:
a. Mix identification designation (unique for each mix submitted).
b. Statement of intended use for mix.
c. Mix proportions, including all admixtures used. wR
d. Manufacturer's data and/or certifications verifying conformance of all mix materials,
including admixtures,with specified requirements.
e. Wet and dry unit weight,ASTM C138. *"
f. Entrained air content,ASTM C173.
CONCRETE WORK 030010-6
ON
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO- OPTICAL McNamara/Salvia
Northampton,MA August 21, 2009
3. Transporting and storing of all specimens involved in testing and inspection. Test cylinders
are to be transported to laboratory not later than 24 hours after casting,not earlier than 16
hours after casting.
4. Inspection of mixing and placing of concrete at the site, including recording of. amount and
location of concrete placement,method of placing concrete,and any other pertinent
information. Verify compliance with requirements of this specification for concrete
placement and curing(including Section 1.07).
5. Testing for slab levelness as per Section 3.13B.
B. Test Specimens: The Testing laboratory will take specimens of each class of concrete from
different locations on the job as follows: At least one set of four cylinders for each 100 cubic
yards or fraction thereof of each class of concrete,but not less than one set for any one day's
operations.
1. For concrete placed by pumping,test specimens and concrete used for determination of
slump, air content, and weight are to be taken at the point of placement of concrete.
2. Samples will be obtained in accordance with ASTM C172.
3. Marking,curing and subsequent handling of test cylinders,except as modified herein, shall
be
in accordance with ASTM C31. Testing shall be in accordance with ASTM C39.
4. Cure test specimens for ASTM C31 as follows:
a. To verify 28-day compressive strength unless otherwise noted:
1) The cylinders shall be placed in laboratory storage under moist curing conditions at
approximately 70 degree F within 24 hours after molding, and maintained therein
until tested.
b. To verify compressive strength for form removal or for additional test cylinders required
due to cold weather concreting conditions:
1) Store test specimens on structure as near to point of sampling as possible and
possible and protect from elements in same manner as that given to portion of
structure as specimen represents.
2) Transport to test laboratory no more than 4 hours before testing. Remove molds from
specimen immediately before testing.
6. One cylinder shall be tested at 7 days for information.
7. Two cylinders shall be tested at 28 days for acceptance. The acceptance test results shall be
the average strength of these two cylinders.
8. One cylinder shall be kept for eventual testing at 56 days to verify any marginal results of 28-
day tests. If not required to be tested,cylinder will be discarded after 28 days.
C. Test Reports: Reports of cylinder tests shall be submitted as specified herein within five days of
so laboratory testing. Test reports shall,as a minimum, include:
1. Project data including project name and address,concrete supplier, supplier's delivery ticket
number and mix identification number, Testing Agency's test or cylinder identification
number, and location of pour.
CONCRETE WORK 030010-5
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL McNamara/Salvia
Northampton, MA August 21,2009
A. General Contractor's Quality Control System: .®
1. General: The General Contractor shall establish a quality control system and shall perform
sufficient inspection and tests of all items of work, including that of his subcontractors,to
ensure conformance to the Contract Documents for materials, workmanship,construction, A
finish, functional performance and identification. Contractor's quality control system is the
means by which he assures himself that his construction complies with the requirements of
the Contract Documents. Controls shall be adequate to cover all construction operations.
2. Records: Contractor shall maintain correct records on an appropriate form for all inspections
and tests performed, instructions received from the Architect, Structural Engineer or Testing
Agency, and actions taken as a result of those instructions. These records shall include
evidence that the required inspections or tests have been performed(including type and
number of inspections or tests,nature of defects, causes for rejection, etc.),proposed or
directed remedial action, and corrective action taken. Contractor shall document inspections
and tests as required by this section.
B. The Owner will employ an Independent Testing Laboratory acceptable to the Architect and
Structural Engineer to provide testing services specified in paragraph 1.04 Testing and
Inspection.
B. The Architect, Structural Engineer, and Independent Testing Laboratory shall be offered
uninterrupted access to the ready-mix batching plant at all time that the work is in progress.
C. Provide the Testing Agency with the following:
1. Incidental labor required to facilitate testing.
2. Minimum one day's advance notice when concrete is to be placed.
3. Storage facilities for concrete test cylinders.
4. Materials, samples,and access to materials as required for testing.
5. Reimbursement of costs for testing and inspection resulting as a consequence of the
following:
w.
a. Work not in compliance with the Contract Documents.
b. Testing requested by Contractor or Subcontractor such as additional cylinders for early
breaks, etc.
c. Testing to verify the adequacy of work done, without prior notice, without proper
supervision, or contrary to standard construction practice.
D. All concrete flat work finishers on project shall hold current ACI concrete flat work finisher
certification.
1.4 TESTING AND INSPECTION
A. Concrete inspection and testing will be made in accordance with building code requirements, and
Contract Documents,and will include the following:
1. Testing concrete for strength, slump, air content,temperature, and unit weight.
2. Marking and testing concrete cylinders, including furnishing cylinder containers for
specimens.
CONCRETE WORK 030010-4
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO- OPTICAL McNamara/Salvia
Northampton,MA August 21, 2009
a. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute CRSI MSP-2, "Manual of Standard Practice."
4. Contractor shall have following ACI publications at Project construction site:
a. ACI SP-15, "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings C1301-84 (Revised
"' 1989)with selected ACI and ASTM References.
b. ACI 302.1R, "Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction."
c. ACI 305R, "Hot Weather Concreting."
d. ACI 306.1,"Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting."
C. Design Criteria:
1. Concrete: See General Notes on Structural Drawings and ACI 301, Chapter 3.
2. Formwork Design: The Contractor shall assume all responsibility for the safety of
the formwork and shall provide all necessary design, construction,materials,and
maintenance to produce the required concrete work safely. Design all formwork to have
sufficient camber to maintain the tolerances specified. Strength shall be sufficient to
compensate for the weight of the fresh concrete and a construction live load of 50 psf
minimum.
D. The Contractor is responsible for quality control,including workmanship and materials furnished
by his subcontractors and suppliers.
I. Inspection or testing by the Owner does not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to
perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
2. Workmanship: The Contractor is responsible for and shall bear the cost of correcting
concrete work which does not conform to the specified requirements including,but not
limited to, strength,tolerances, finishes and flatness/levelness. Correct deficient concrete by
means acceptable to the Architect and Structural Engineer. The cost of extra work incurred
by the Architect and Structural Engineer to approve corrective work shall be bome by the
Contractor.
E. Record of Work: A record shall be kept by the General Contractor listing the time and date of
placement of all concrete for the structure. Such record shall be kept until the completion of the
On project and shall be available to the Architect and Structural Engineer for examination at any
time.
All concrete batch trip tickets will be collected and retained by the Contractor. Concrete batch
trip tickets shall contain information specified in ASTM C94,Paragraph entitled "Batch Ticket
Information, including items 15.2.1 through 15.2.8. Batch trip ticket shall also show the total
amount of water in the mix as batched(including water present in the aggregate before batching)
and the amount of water required by the design mix proportions.
F. Mock-Up: Prior to casting Architectural finished concrete, Contractor shall form and cast a
sample wall panel 5' long x 3'high at a location on the site designated by the Architect. Panel
shall be formed,cast and cured using methods specified for Architectural concrete finish.
Following curing,panel shall receive finish as specified. After acceptance by the Architect panel
shall become the standard of comparison for completed finish. At completion of the project,
panel shall be removed from the site by the Contractor.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
±w
CONCRETE WORK 030010-3
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO- OPTICAL McNamara/Salvia
Northampton,MA August 21,2009
A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: The Work under this section shall be subject to all
applicable provisions of the state and local building and safety codes.
B. Reference Standards: Comply with following standards except where more stringent requirements
are shown or specified:
1. American Concrete Institute (ACI):
a. ACI 214, "Recommended Practice for Evaluation of Strength Test Results of Concrete."
b. ACI 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings."
c. ACI 302.1R"Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction."
d. ACI 305R, "Hot Weather Concreting."
e. ACI 318, "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete."
f. ACI 347, "Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork."
g. ACI SP-66, "ACI Detailing Manual."
h. ACI SP-15, "ACI Field Reference Manual."
2. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM):
w�
a. ASTM C31, "Method of Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimen in the Field."
b. ASTM C33, "Specifications for Concrete Aggregates."
c. ASTM C39, "Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. ..
d. ASTM C94, "Specifications for Ready-Mixed Concrete."
e. ASTM C, "Test Method for Compressive Strength for Hydraulic Cement Mortars Using
(2-in or 50-mm Cube Specimens)."
f. ASTM C, "Test Method for Unit Weight, Yield, and Air Content(Gravimetric)of
Concrete."
g. ASTM C143, "Test Method for Slump of Portland Cement Concrete."
h. ASTM C150, "Specification for Portland Cement."
i. ASTM C172, "Method of Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete."
j. ASTM C173, "Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the
Volumetric Method."
k. ASTM C231, "Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure
Method.
1. ASTM C260, "Specifications for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete."
m. ASTM C311, "Methods of Sampling and Testing Fly Ash or Natural Pozzolans for Use
as an Mineral Admixture in Portland Cement Concrete."
n. ASTM C457, "Practice for Microscopical Determination of Air-Void Content and
Parameter of the Air-Void System in Hardened Concrete."
o. ASTM C494, "Specifications for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete."
p. ASTM C567, "Test Method for Unit Weight of Structural Lightweight Concrete."
q. ASTM C618, "Specification for Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use ..
as an Mineral Admixture in Portland Cement Concrete."
r. ASTM C685, "Standard Specification for Concrete made by Volumetric Batching and
Continuous Mixing."
s. ASTM C1077, "Standard Practice for Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for Use
in Construction and Criteria for Laboratory Evaluations.
3. Other:
CONCRETE WORK 030010-2
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO- OPTICAL McNamara/Salvia
go Northampton,MA August 21, 2009
SECTION 030010—CONCRETE WORK
00 PART I —GENERAL
!p 1.0 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division I-Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Work Included: Work consists of furnishing all labor,material,and equipment necessary for
completion of all concrete work including,but not necessarily limited to,the following:
I. Formwork,complete with required shoring,reshoring,bracing, and anchorage.
2. Reinforcing,complete with required supports,spacers,and related accessories.
3. Vapor barrier under interior slabs on grade.
4. Accessories including water stops.
s 5. Cast-in-place concrete including footings,grade beams,tie beams,walls, slabs-on-grade,
toppings,pile caps, concrete on metal deck, stairs,piers and encasement of structural
members.
6. Finish and cure for floor slabs and toppings.
7. Special finishes for architectural concrete.
8. Miscellaneous concrete work such as equipment bases, splash pads, and underfloor duct
encasement.
!" B. Related Work:
1. Grouting Under Steel Bearing Plates and Elevator Sills: Section 036000 Grout
2. Concrete Paving and sidewalks: Section 321313 Concrete Paving
3. Curbs and Gutter: Section 321600 Concrete Curbs and Gutter
4. Structural Precast Concrete: Section 034100 Structural Precast Concrete
5. Traffic Topping: Section 071813 Traffic Topping
6. Garage Sealants: Section 079200 Joint Sealers and Fillers
C. Work Furnished But Not Installed:
go
1. Masonry Reinforcing Bars: Installed under Section 042000 Unit Masonry or 042300
Reinforced Unit Masonry.
2. Concrete and Reinforcing in Concrete Filled Piles: Installed under Division 31.
D. Work Installed But Furnished by Others:
1. Anchor Bolts, Weld Plates,Bearing Plates,Embed Plates, and Angles Cast Into Concrete:
Furnished under Sections 034100 Structural Precast Concrete, 051200 Structural Steel,
055000 Metal Fabrications.
2. Railing Sleeves: Furnished under Section 055000 Metal Fabrications.
3. Dovetail Slots for Masonry: Furnished under Section 042000 Unit Masonry or 042300
Reinforced Unit Masonry.
1.2.1 QUALITY CONTROL
e
CONCRETE WORK 030010-1
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
1.7 CxA'S RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Organize and lead the commissioning team.
B. Provide commissioning plan.
C. Convene commissioning team meetings.
D. Provide Project-specific construction checklists and commissioning process test procedures.
E. Verify the execution of commissioning process activities using random sampling. The
sampling rate may vary from 1 to 100 percent. Verification will include, but is not limited to,
equipment submittals, construction checklists, training, operating and maintenance data, tests,
and test reports to verify compliance with the OPR. When a random sample does not meet the
requirement,the CxA will report the failure in the Issues Log.
u �
F. Prepare and maintain the Issues Log.
G. Prepare and maintain completed construction checklist log.
H. Witness systems,assemblies,equipment, and component startup.
I. Compile test data, inspection reports, and certificates; include them in the systems manual and
commissioning process report.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS(Not Used)
" PART 3 -EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 0191 13
GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS 019113 -3
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
1.4 COMMISSIONING TEAM
A. Members Appointed by Contractor(s): Individuals, each having the authority to act on behalf of
the entity he or she represents, explicitly organized to implement the commissioning process
through coordinated action. The commissioning team shall consist of, but not be limited to,
representatives of [each ]Contractor, including Project superintendent and subcontractors, �.
installers, suppliers,and specialists deemed appropriate by the CxA.
B. Members Appointed by Owner:
1. CxA: The designated person, company, or entity that plans, schedules, and coordinates
the commissioning team to implement the commissioning process. Owner will engage ,
the CxA under a separate contract.
2. Representatives of the facility user and operation and maintenance personnel.
3. Architect and engineering design professionals.
.w
1.5 OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Provide the OPR documentation to the CxA and [each ]Contractor for information and use.
B. Assign operation and maintenance personnel and schedule them to participate in commissioning
team activities. *"
C. Provide the BoD documentation, prepared by Architect and approved by Owner,to the CxA and
[each ]Contractor for use in developing the commissioning plan, systems manual, and operation
and maintenance training plan.
1.6 [EACH]CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES
A. [Each ]Contractor shall assign representatives with expertise and authority to act on its behalf
and shall schedule them to participate in and perform commissioning process activities
including,but not limited to,the following:
1. Evaluate performance deficiencies identified in test reports and, in collaboration with
entity responsible for system and equipment installation,recommend corrective action.
2. Cooperate with the CxA for resolution of issues recorded in the Issues Log.
3. Attend commissioning team meetings held on a [weekly] [biweekly] [monthly]
[variable] <Insert frequency>basis.
4. Integrate and coordinate commissioning process activities with construction schedule.
5. Review and accept construction checklists provided by the CxA.
6. Complete [paper] [electronic] construction checklists as Work is completed and provide
to the Commissioning Authority on a[daily] [weekly] <Insert frequency>basis.
7. Review and accept commissioning process test procedures provided by the
Commissioning Authority.
8. Complete commissioning process test procedures.
+.R
wa
GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS 019113 -2
ow
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
SECTION 019113 - GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS
PART I -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
B. OPR and BoD documentation are included by reference for information only.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes general requirements that apply to implementation of commissioning without
regard to specific systems, assemblies, or components.
B. Related Sections:
I. Division 21 Section "Commissioning of Fire Suppression" for commissioning process
F4 activities for fire-suppression systems,assemblies, equipment,and components.
2. Division 22 Section "Commissioning of Plumbing" for commissioning process activities
for plumbing systems,assemblies, equipment, and components.
3. Division 23 Section "Commissioning of HVAC" for commissioning process activities for
HVAC&R systems, assemblies, equipment, and components.
4. Division 26 Section "Commissioning of Electrical Systems" for commissioning process
activities for electrical systems, assemblies, equipment,and components.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. BoD: Basis of Design. A document that records concepts, calculations, decisions, and product
selections used to meet the OPR and to satisfy applicable regulatory requirements, standards,
and guidelines. The document includes both narrative descriptions and lists of individual items
that support the design process.
B. Commissioning Plan: A document that outlines the organization, schedule, allocation of
!!! resources,and documentation requirements of the commissioning process.
C. CxA: Commissioning Authority.
D. OPR: Owner's Project Requirements. A document that details the functional requirements of a
project and the expectations of how it will be used and operated. These include Project goals,
measurable performance criteria, cost considerations, benchmarks, success criteria, and
supporting information.
E. Systems, Subsystems, Equipment, and Components: Where these terms are used together or
separately,they shall mean "as-built" systems, subsystems,equipment,and components.
GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS 019113 - 1
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA ws
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 MEASUREMENT AND VERIFICATION
A. Credit EA 5: Implement measurement and verification plan in the EVO's "International
Performance Measurement and Verification Protocol (IPMVP) Volume III: Concepts and
Options for Determining Energy Savings in New Construction," and as further defined by the
following:
B. If not already in place, install metering equipment to measure energy usage. Monitor, record,
and trend log measurements.
C. Evaluate energy performance and efficiency by comparing actual to predicted performance.
D. Measurement and verification period shall cover at least one year of postconstruction
occupancy.
3.2 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT
A. Credit MR 2.1 and Credit MR 2.2: Comply with Division 01 Section "Construction Waste
Management and Disposal."
3.3 CONSTRUCTION INDOOR-AIR-QUALITY MANAGEMENT
A. Credit EQ 3.]: Comply with SMACNA's "SMACNA IAQ Guideline for Occupied Buildings
under Construction."
1. If Owner authorizes use of permanent heating, cooling, and ventilating systems during
construction period as specified in Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and
Controls," install filter media having a MERV 8 according to ASHRAE 52.2 at each
return-air inlet for the air-handling system used during construction.
2. Replace all air filters immediately prior to occupancy.
END OF SECTION 018113
w
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 018113 -6
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
e. Wood veneer wall covering.
2.4 LOW-EMITTING MATERIALS
A. Credit EQ 4.1: For field applications that are inside the weatherproofing system, use adhesives
and sealants that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according
to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D:
1. Wood Glues: 30 g/L.
2. Metal to Metal Adhesives: 30 g/L.
3. Adhesives for Porous Materials(Except Wood): 50 g/L.
4. Plastic Foam Adhesives: 50 g/L.
5. Carpet Adhesives: 50 g/L.
6. Carpet Pad Adhesives: 50 g/L.
7. VCT and Asphalt Tile Adhesives: 50 g/L.
8. Cove Base Adhesives: 50 g/L.
9. Gypsum Board and Panel Adhesives: 50 g/L.
10. Rubber Floor Adhesives: 60 g/L.
11. Ceramic Tile Adhesives: 65 g/L.
12. Multipurpose Construction Adhesives: 70 g/L.
13. Fiberglass Adhesives: 80 g/L.
14. Contact Adhesive: 80 g/L.
15. Structural Glazing Adhesives: 100 g/L.
16. Special Purpose Contact Adhesive (contact adhesive that is used to bond melamine
covered board, metal, unsupported vinyl, Teflon, ultra-high molecular weight
! ! polyethylene, rubber or wood veneer 1/16 inch or less in thickness to any surface): 250
g/L.
17. Top and Trim Adhesive: 250 g/L.
18. Plastic Cement Welding Compounds: 350 g/L.
19. ABS Welding Compounds: 400 g/L.
20. CPVC Welding Compounds: 490 g/L.
21. PVC Welding Compounds: 510 g/L.
22. Adhesive Primer for Plastic: 650 g/L.
23. Sheet Applied Rubber Lining Adhesive: 850 g/L.
24. Aerosol Adhesive,General Purpose Mist Spray: 65 percent by weight.
25. Aerosol Adhesive,General Purpose Web Spray: 55 percent by weight.
26. Special Purpose Aerosol Adhesive(All Types): 70 percent by weight.
27. Other Adhesives: 250 g/L.
28. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L.
29. Nonmembrane Roof Sealants: 300 g/L.
30. Single-Ply Roof Membrane Sealants: 450 g/L.
31. Other Sealants: 420 g/L.
32. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.
33. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.
34. Modified Bituminous Sealant Primers: 500 g/L.
35. Other Sealant Primers: 750 g/L.
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 018113 - 5
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA +�
8. Credit EQ 4.1: Product data for adhesives and sealants used inside the weatherproofing
system indicating VOC content of each product used. Indicate VOC content in g/L
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D.
9. Credit EQ 4.2: Product data for paints and coatings used inside the weatherproofing
system indicating chemical composition and VOC content of each product used. Indicate
VOC content in g/L calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D. w
10. Credit EQ 4.4: Product data for products containing composite wood or agrifiber
products or wood glues indicating that they do not contain urea-formaldehyde resin.
wA
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. LEED Coordinator: Engage an experienced LEED-Accredited Professional to coordinate
LEED requirements. LEED coordinator may also serve as waste management coordinator.
.w
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 RECYCLED CONTENT OF MATERIALS
A. Credit MR 4.1: Provide building materials with recycled content such that post-consumer
recycled content plus one-half of pre-consumer recycled content constitutes a minimum of[10]
percent of cost of materials used for Project.
1. Cost of post-consumer recycled content of an item shall be determined by dividing
weight of post-consumer recycled content in the item by total weight of the item and
multiplying by cost of the item.
2. Cost of pre-consumer recycled content of an item shall be determined by dividing weight
of pre-consumer recycled content in the item by total weight of the item and multiplying
by cost of the item.
2.2 REGIONAL MATERIALS
A. Credit MR 5.1: Provide a minimum of [10] percent of building materials (by cost) that are
regional materials.
2.3 CERTIFIED WOOD
A. Credit[MR 7]: Provide a minimum of 50 percent (by cost) of wood-based materials that are
produced from wood obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to +�*
comply with FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship."
1. Wood-based materials include, but are not limited to, the following materials when made e1
from wood,engineered wood products, or wood-based panel products:
a. Rough carpentry.
b. Miscellaneous carpentry.
C. Finish carpentry. w
d. Architectural woodwork.
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 018113 -4
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
3. Credit MR 5.1: List of proposed regional materials. Identify each regional material,
4W including its source,cost, and the fraction by weight that is considered regional.
4. Credit MR 7: List of proposed certified wood products. Indicate each product containing
certified wood, including its source and cost of certified wood products.
5. Credit EQ 3.1: Construction indoor-air-quality management plan.
E. LEED Progress Reports: Concurrent with each Application for Payment, submit reports
comparing actual construction and purchasing activities with LEED action plans for the
go following:
1. Credit MR 2.1 and Credit MR 2.2: Waste reduction progress reports complying with
Division 01 Section"Construction Waste Management and Disposal."
2. Credit MR 4.1: Recycled content.
3. Credit MR 5.1: Regional materials.
4. Credit MR 7: Certified wood products.
F. LEED Documentation Submittals:
1. Credit EA 5: Product data and wiring diagrams for sensors and data collection system
used to provide continuous metering of building energy-consumption performance over a
period of time of not less than one year of postconstruction occupancy.
2. Credit MR 2.1 and Credit MR 2.2: Comply with Division 0l Section "Construction
Waste Management and Disposal."
3. Credit MR 4.1 and Credit MR 4.2: Product data and certification letter indicating
percentages by weight of post-consumer and pre-consumer recycled content for products
+*! having recycled content. Include statement indicating costs for each product having
recycled content.
4. Credit MR 5.1: Product data for regional materials indicating location and distance from
Project of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each
raw material. Include statement indicating cost for each regional material and the
fraction by weight that is considered regional.
5. Credit MR 7: Product data and chain-of-custody certificates for products containing
certified wood. Include statement indicating cost for each certified wood product.
6. Credit EQ 3.1:
a. Construction indoor-air-quality management plan.
* b. Product data for temporary filtration media.
C. Product data for filtration media used during occupancy.
d. Construction Documentation: Six photographs at three different times during the
construction period, along with a brief description of the SMACNA approach
employed, documenting implementation of the indoor-air-quality management
measures, such as protection of ducts and on-site stored or installed absorptive
materials.
7. Credit EQ 3.2:
a. Signed statement describing the building air flush-out procedures including the
dates when flush-out was begun and completed and statement that filtration media
was replaced after flush-out.
b. Product data for filtration media used during flush-out and during occupancy.
C. Report from testing and inspecting agency indicating results of indoor-air-quality
testing and documentation showing compliance with indoor-air-quality testing
procedures and requirements.
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 018113 -3
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA .�►
G. Recycled Content: The recycled content value of a material assembly shall be determined by
weight. The recycled fraction of the assembly is then multiplied by the cost of assembly to r
determine the recycled content value.
1. 'Post-consumer" material is defined as waste material generated by households or by
commercial, industrial, and institutional facilities in their role as end users of the product,
which can no longer be used for its intended purpose.
2. "Pre-consumer" material is defined as material diverted from the waste stream during the
manufacturing process. Excluded is reutilization of materials such as rework, regrind, or
scrap generated in a process and capable of being reclaimed within the same process that
generated it.
H. Recycled Content: The percentage by weight of constituents that have been recovered or w.
otherwise diverted from the solid waste stream, either during the manufacturing process (pre-
consumer), or after consumer use(post-consumer).
1. Spills and scraps from the original manufacturing process that are combined with other
constituents after a minimal amount of reprocessing for use in further production of the
same product are not recycled materials.
2. Discarded materials from one manufacturing process that are used as constituents in
another manufacturing process are pre-consumer recycled materials.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit additional LEED submittals required by other Specification Sections.
B. LEED submittals are in addition to other submittals. if submitted item is identical to that
submitted to comply with other requirements, submit duplicate copies as a separate submittal to
verify compliance with indicated LEED requirements.
C. Project Materials Cost Data: Provide statement indicating total cost for materials used for
Project. Costs exclude labor, overhead, and profit. Include breakout of costs for the following '
categories of items:
1. Furniture.
2. Plumbing.
3. Mechanical.
4. Electrical.
5. Specialty items such as elevators and equipment. .w
6. Wood-based construction materials.
D. LEED Action Plans: Provide preliminary submittals within thirty [30] days of date established
for commencement of the work indicating how the following requirements will be met:
1. Credit MR 2.1 and Credit MR 2.2: Waste management plan complying with Division 01 .•
Section "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."
2. Credit MR 4.1: List of proposed materials with recycled content. Indicate cost, post-
consumer recycled content, and pre-consumer recycled content for each product having
recycled content.
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 018113 -2
OR
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
go Northampton,MA
SECTION 018113 - SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 -GENERAL
go
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
rw A. Section includes general requirements and procedures for compliance with certain USGBC
LEED prerequisites and credits needed for Project to obtain LEED-Certified certification based
on LEED-NC,Version 2.2.
B. Related Sections:
1. Divisions 01 through 33 Sections for LEED requirements specific to the work of each of
these Sections. Requirements may or may not include reference to LEED.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Chain-of-Custody Certificates: Certificates signed by manufacturers certifying that wood used
to make products was obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to
comply with FSC STD-01-001, FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship."
Certificates shall include evidence that manufacturer is certified for chain of custody by an
FSC-FSC-accredited certification body.
B. LEED: Leadership in Energy &Environmental Design.
C. Rapidly Renewable Materials: Materials made from plants that are typically harvested within a
10-year or shorter cycle. Rapidly renewable materials include products made from bamboo,
cotton,flax,jute,straw, sunflower seed hulls,vegetable oils,or wool.
D. Regional Materials: Materials that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as
manufactured, within 500 miles (800 kni) of Project site. If only a fraction of a product or
material is extracted/harvested/recovered and manufactured locally, then only that percentage
(by weight)shall contribute to the regional value.
E. Regionally Manufactured Materials: Materials that are manufactured within a radius of 500
miles (800 km) from Project site. Manufacturing refers to the final assembly of components
into the building product that is installed at Project site.
F. Regionally Extracted and Manufactured Materials: Regionally manufactured materials made
from raw materials that are extracted, harvested, or recovered within a radius of 500 miles (800
OR kan)from Project site.
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 018113 - 1
r
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA .�.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training
module. Assemble training modules into a training manual organized in coordination with
requirements in Division 01 Section "Operations and Maintenance Data."
B. Set up instructional equipment at instruction location.
3.2 INSTRUCTION
A. Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain
systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system.
B. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires
seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season. ,
I. Schedule training with Owner,through Architect, with at least (14) fourteen days'
advance notice.
C. Cleanup: Collect used and leftover educational materials and give to Owner. Remove
instructional equipment. Restore systems and equipment to condition existing before initial
training use.
3.3 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING VIDEO RECORDINGS
A. General: Engage a qualified commercial videographer to record demonstration and training ■
video recordings. Record each training module separately. Include classroom instructions and
demonstrations, board diagrams, and other visual aids,but not student practice.
w�
B. Video Recording Format: Provide high-quality color video recordings with menu navigation in
format acceptable to Architect.
C. Recording: Mount camera on tripod before starting recording, unless otherwise necessary to
show area of demonstration and training. Display continuous running time.
D. Narration: Describe scenes on video recording by audio narration by microphone while video °
recording is recorded or dubbing audio narration off-site after recording. Include description of
items being viewed.
E. Pre-Produced Video Recordings: Provide video recordings used as a component of training
modules in same format as recordings of live training.
END OF SECTION 017900
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 017900-4
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
e. Identification systems.
£ Warranties and bonds.
g. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments.
3. Emergencies: Include the following,as applicable:
a. Instructions on meaning of warnings,trouble indications,and error messages.
b. Instructions on stopping.
C. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.
d. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits.
e. Sequences for electric or electronic systems.
£ Special operating instructions and procedures.
4. Operations: Include the following,as applicable:
a. Startup procedures.
b. Equipment or system break-in procedures.
C. Routine and normal operating instructions.
d. Regulation and control procedures.
go e. Control sequences.
f. Safety procedures.
g. Instructions on stopping.
h. Normal shutdown instructions.
i. Operating procedures for emergencies.
j. Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure.
on k. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.
1. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
m. Special operating instructions and procedures.
5. Adjustments: Include the following:
a. Alignments.
b. Checking adjustments.
C. Noise and vibration adjustments.
d. Economy and efficiency adjustments.
6. Troubleshooting: Include the following:
a. Diagnostic instructions.
b. Test and inspection procedures.
7. Maintenance: Include the following:
a. Inspection procedures.
b. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.
C. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.
d. Procedures for routine cleaning
e. Procedures for preventive maintenance.
f. Procedures for routine maintenance.
g. Instruction on use of special tools.
8. Repairs: Include the following:
a. Diagnosis instructions.
b. Repair instructions.
C. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly
instructions.
go d. Instructions for identifying parts and components.
e. Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance.
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 017900-3
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA „d
e. Name of Contractor.
f. Date of video recording. w
2. At completion of training, submit complete training manual(s)for Owner's use.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Videographer Qualifications: A professional videographer who is experienced photographing
demonstration and training events similar to those required. wr
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required to
minimize disrupting Owner's operations.
r
B. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction
time,and course content.
C. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data
has been reviewed and approved by Architect.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM
A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules
for each system and for equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification
Sections.
B. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include
a description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each
module, include instruction for the following as applicable to the system, equipment, or
component:
1. Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the following:
a. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions.
b. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. '
C. Operating standards.
d. Regulatory requirements.
e. Equipment function. go
f. Operating characteristics.
g. Limiting conditions.
h. Performance curves.
2. Documentation: Review the following items in detail:
a. Emergency manuals.
b. Operations manuals.
C. Maintenance manuals. !
d. Project record documents.
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 017900-2
ON
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
SECTION 017900-DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
PART 1 -GENERAL
ur
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
am A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's personnel,
including the following:
1. Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment.
2. Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems,and equipment.
3. Demonstration and training video recordings.
B. Related Sections:
? 1. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific requirements for demonstration and
training for products in those Sections.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Instruction Program: Submit outline of instructional program for demonstration and training,
on including a list of training modules and a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of
instruction time, and instructors' names for each training module. Include learning objective
and outline for each training module.
1. Indicate proposed training modules utilizing manufacturer-produced demonstration and
training video recordings for systems, equipment, and products in lieu of video recording
of live instructional module.
B. Qualification Data: Videographer.
C. Attendance Record: For each training module, submit list of participants and length of
instruction time.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Demonstration and Training Video Recordings: Submit(2)two copies within(7) seven days of
end of each training module.
1. Identification: On each copy,provide an applied label with the following information:
a. Name of Project.
b. Name and address of videographer.
C. Name of Architect.
d. Name of Construction Manager.
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 017900- 1
rw
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
PART 3 - EXECUTION
•
3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE
A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project
record document purposes. Post changes and modifications to project record documents as they
occur; do not wait until the end of Project.
B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the
field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record
documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean,
dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record
documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours.
END OF SECTION 017839
w�
40
W
ego
M
so
w
ap
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839-4
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
±o Northampton,MA
B. Record Digital Data Files: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial
Completion, review marked-up record prints with Architect. When authorized, prepare a full
set of corrected digital data files of the Contract Drawings,as follows:
1. Format: Same digital data software program, version, and operating system as the
on original Contract Drawings.
2. Format: DWG or Revit operating in Microsoft Windows operating system.
3. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on record prints.
r Delete,redraw, and add details and notations where applicable.
4. Refer instances of uncertainty to Architect for resolution.
5. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data files of the Contract Drawings for
use in recording information.
a. Refer to Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" for requirements related to
use of Architect's digital data files.
b. Architect will provide data file layer information. Record markups in separate
layers.
2.2 RECORD PRODUCT DATA
A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation
varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.
I. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that
cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in
manufacturer's written instructions for installation.
3. If possible, a Change Order proposal should include resubmitting updated Product Data.
This eliminates the need to mark up the previous submittal.
4. Note related Change Order[,record Specifications, and record Drawings where
applicable.
B. Format: Submit record Product Data as scanned PDF electronic file(s) of marked up paper
copy of Product Data.
1. Include record Product Data directory organized by specification section number and
title, electronically linked to each item of record Product Data.
+o
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS
A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous
record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file
miscellaneous records and identify each,ready for continued use and reference.
B. Format: Submit miscellaneous record submittals as scanned PDF electronic file(s) of marked
up miscellaneous record submittals.
1. Include miscellaneous record submittals directory organized by specification section
number and title,electronically linked to each item of miscellaneous record submittals.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839-3
we
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
C. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Refer to other Specification Sections for miscellaneous
record-keeping requirements and submittals in connection with various construction activities.
Submit (1) one paper copy and (1) one annotated PDF electronic files and directories] of each
submittal.
w.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
M.
2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop
Drawings.
1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies
from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data,
whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide
information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints.
a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be
difficult to identify or measure and record later.
b. Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique.
C. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it.
d. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations.
e. Cross-reference record prints to corresponding archive photographic
documentation.
2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to,the following:
a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. *�+
b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings.
C. Depths of foundations below first floor.
d. Locations and depths of underground utilities.
e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits.
f. Revisions to electrical circuitry.
g. Actual equipment locations.
h. Duct size and routing.
i. Locations of concealed internal utilities.
j. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive.
k. Changes made following Architect's written orders. +*
1. Details not on the original Contract Drawings.
m. Field records for variable and concealed conditions.
n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.
3. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Utilize
personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record
prints.
4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish
between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.
5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted
from original Drawings.
6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order
numbers, and similar identification,where applicable.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839-2
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
SECTION 017839-PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
,. 1.2 SUMMARY
so A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents,
including the following:
I. Record Drawings.
2. Record Product Data.
3. Miscellaneous record submittals.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 01 Section "Execution" for final property survey.
2. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures.
3. Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance
manual requirements.
4. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific requirements for project record documents
of the Work in those Sections.
1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:
1. Number of Copies: Submit [1)one set(s)of marked-up record prints.
2. Number of Copies: Submit copies of record Drawings as follows:
a. Initial Submittal: Submit [1) one paper copy set of marked-up record prints and
(1) one set(s) of plots from corrected record digital data files. Architect will
00 indicate whether general scope of changes, additional information recorded, and
quality of drafting are acceptable.
b. Final Submittal: Submit one paper copy set and (1) one PDF electronic files of
marked-up record prints. Print each Drawing, whether or not changes and
additional information were recorded.
B. Record Product Data: Submit (1) one paper copy and (1) one annotated PDF electronic files
and directories of each submittal.
1. Where record Product Data are required as part of operation and maintenance manuals,
submit duplicate marked-up Product Data as a component of manual.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839- 1
so
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA .w
D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance
data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment
not part of a system.
1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information
for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.
2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional
manual for use by Owner's operating personnel.
E. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include
only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each
product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a
tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents.
Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.
I. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and
where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or
systems.
F. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the
relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and
flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to
ensure correct illustration of completed installation.
1. Do not use original project record documents as part of operation and maintenance 40
manuals.
2. Comply with requirements of newly prepared record Drawings in Division 01 Section
"Project Record Documents."
G. Comply with Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation
and maintenance documentation.
w�
END OF SECTION 017823
.w
w
4w
w
wr
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 8
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation
including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment:
1. Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins.
2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly
and component removal,replacement, and assembly.
" 3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components.
4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.
D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential
maintenance procedures:
1. Test and inspection instructions.
2. Troubleshooting guide.
3. Precautions against improper maintenance.
4. Disassembly; component removal,repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions.
5. Aligning, adjusting,and checking instructions.
6. Demonstration and training video recording, if available.
E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of
w required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine
maintenance and service with standard time allotment.
1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly,
quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies.
2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording
maintenance.
F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with
parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local
sources of maintenance materials and related services.
G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and
telephone number of service agent.
H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and
conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.
1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION
A. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that provides
an organized reference to emergency,operation, and maintenance manuals.
B. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures
for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies
indicated.
C. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care
and maintenance of each product,material,and finish incorporated into the Work.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 -7
o.
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA w
E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for
identification.
2.5 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish.
Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and
sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.
B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and
arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and
telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference
Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation
or identifier where applicable.
C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:
I. Product name and model number.
2. Manufacturer's name. ,
3. Color,pattern, and texture.
4. Material and chemical composition.
5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.
D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following:
1. Inspection procedures.
2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.
3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.
4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance.
5. Repair instructions.
E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and
related services.
F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and
conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.
1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.
2.6 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include
source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures,
maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service
contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below.
B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual,
identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product,
list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent,
and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or
schedule designation or identifier where applicable.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 -6
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
D. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:
1. Instructions on stopping.
2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.
3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits.
4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
5. Special operating instructions and procedures.
2.4 OPERATION MANUALS
A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in
individual Specification Sections and the following information:
1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and
equipment indicated on Contract Documents.
2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility.
3. Operating standards.
4. Operating procedures.
5. Operating logs.
6. Wiring diagrams.
7. Control diagrams.
8. Piped system diagrams.
9. Precautions against improper use.
10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.
B. Descriptions: Include the following:
1. Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract
Documents.
2. Manufacturer's name.
3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component.
4. Equipment function.
5. Operating characteristics.
6. Limiting conditions.
7. Performance curves.
8. Engineering data and tests.
9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.
C. Operating Procedures: Include the following,as applicable:
1. Startup procedures.
2. Equipment or system break-in procedures.
3. Routine and normal operating instructions.
4. Regulation and control procedures.
5. Instructions on stopping.
6. Normal shutdown instructions.
7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.
8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
9. Special operating instructions and procedures.
D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as
we installed.
W
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 5
IN
w
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA w.
paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with
pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets.
a. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize
data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross-
reference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper
operation or maintenance of equipment or system.
b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name,[and] subject matter of
contents[, and indicate Specification Section number on bottom of spine]. Indicate
volume number for multiple-volume sets.
2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section of the manual.
Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components
of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification
Section number and title of Project Manual.
3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic
software storage media for computerized electronic equipment.
4. Requirements in two subparagraphs below are typical. Insert unique requirements, such
as special paper or plastic lamination of important items for permanent preservation, if
needed. .,
5. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-1 1-inch(21 -by-280-min)white bond paper.
6. Drawings: Attach reinforced,punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text.
a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and
use as foldouts.
b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled
envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in
manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents,
and drawing locations.
s�
2.3 EMERGENCY MANUALS
A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following:
1. Type of emergency.
2. Emergency instructions.
3. Emergency procedures.
B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include
instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem,piece of equipment,and component:
1. Fire.
2. Flood.
3. Gas leak.
4. Water leak.
5. Power failure.
6. Water outage.
7. System, subsystem, or equipment failure.
8. Chemical release or spill. w.
C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages,
and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for
notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 -4
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
OR Northampton,MA
2.2 REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY,OPERATION,AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each
system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system.
Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed:
1. Title page.
2. Table of contents.
3. Manual contents.
B. Title Page: Include the following information:
1. Subject matter included in manual.
2. Name and address of Project.
3. Name and address of Owner.
4. Date of submittal.
5. Name and contact information for Contractor.
6. Name and contact information for Construction Manager.
7. Name and contact information for Architect.
8. Name and contact information for Commissioning Agent.
9. Names and contact information for major consultants to the Architect that designed the
systems contained in the manuals.
10. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.
C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed
to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project
Manual.
1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to
accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each
volume of the set.
D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by
system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems,
equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.
E. Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite electronic
PDF file for each manual type required.
1. Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available. Where
scanning of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for minimum readable
file size.
2. File Names and Bookmarks: Enable bookmarking of individual documents based upon
file names. Name document files to correspond to system, subsystem, and equipment
names used in manual directory and table of contents. Group documents for each system
and subsystem into individual composite bookmarked files, then create composite
manual, so that resulting bookmarks reflect the system, subsystem, and equipment names
in a readily navigated file tree. Configure electronic manual to display bookmark panel
upon opening file.
F. Manuals, Paper Copy: Submit manuals in the form of hard copy,bound and labeled volumes.
1. Binders: Heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness
necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-II-inch (215-by-280-mm)
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 -3
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA �w
a. Name each indexed document file in composite electronic index with applicable
item name. Include a complete electronically-linked operation and maintenance
directory.
b. Enable inserted reviewer comments on draft submittals.
2. Three paper copies. Include a complete operation and maintenance directory. Enclose
title pages and directories in clear plastic sleeves. Architect will return all copies.
C. Initial Manual Submittal: Submit draft copy of each manual at least [30] thirty days before �.
commencing demonstration and training. Architect will comment on whether general scope and
content of manual are acceptable.
D. Final Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for
Substantial Completion and at least [15] fifteen days before commencing demonstration and
training. Architect and Commissioning Agent will return copy with comments.
w�
1. Correct or modify each manual to comply with Architect's and Commissioning Agent's
comments. Submit copies of each corrected manual within [15] fifteen days of receipt of
Architect's and Commissioning Agent's comments and prior to commencing
demonstration and training.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY
A. Organization: Include a section in the directory for each of the following:
1. List of documents.
2. List of systems.
3. List of equipment.
4. Table of contents.
B. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation
and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system.
C. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For
pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list.
D. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation,and maintenance
manual.
E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, +R
identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the
Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to
ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building
Systems."
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 -2
A*
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
IP Northampton,MA
SECTION 017823 -OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
PART I -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
IF A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and
maintenance manuals, including the following:
1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory.
2. Emergency manuals.
3. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment.
4. Product maintenance manuals.
5. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals.
10
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submittals for
OR operation and maintenance manuals.
2. Division 01 Section "General Commissioning Requirements" for verification and
compilation of data into operation and maintenance manuals.
3. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific operation and maintenance manual
requirements for the Work in those Sections.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular
interaction.
B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Manual Content: Operations and maintenance manual content is specified in individual
specification sections to be reviewed at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed
manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section.
B. Format: Submit operations and maintenance manuals in the following format:
1. PDF electronic file. Assemble each manual into a composite electronically-indexed file.
Submit on digital media acceptable to Architect.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 1
M•
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
S. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.
C. Pest Control: Engage an experienced, licensed exterminator to make a final inspection and rid
Project of rodents, insects, and other pests. Prepare a report.
END OF SECTION 017700
OF
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 5
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA .�
B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each
surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and
maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
I. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification
of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project:
a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities,
including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other
foreign substances.
b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other
foreign deposits.
C. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured
surface.
d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from
Project site.
e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building.
f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition,
free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural
weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original
condition.
g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs,
plenums, shafts,trenches,equipment vaults, manholes,attics, and similar spaces.
h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.
i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap;
shampoo if visible soil or stains remain.
j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows.
Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. w
Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish
mirrors and glass,taking care not to scratch surfaces.
k. Remove labels that are not permanent. .w
1. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces.
Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or
that already show evidence of repair or restoration.
1) Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification,
including mechanical and electrical nameplates.
m. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment,elevator equipment, and
similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and
other foreign substances.
n. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede
operation or reduce longevity.
o. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains
resulting from water exposure.
p. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed
surfaces of diffusers,registers, and grills.
q. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during
construction or that display contamination with particulate matter upon inspection.
1 Clean HVAC system in compliance with NADCA Standard 1992-01.
Provide written report upon completion of cleaning.
r. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency.
Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and
defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply
with requirements for new fixtures.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700-4
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
1.5 WARRANTIES
A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of
the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is
indicated.
B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within [15] fifteen days of completion
of designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during
construction period by separate agreement with Contractor.
C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the
Project Manual.
1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders,
thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-1l-inch
(215-by-280-mm)paper.
ON 2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark
tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or
installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone
number of Installer.
3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title
"WARRANTIES," Project name,and name of Contractor.
4. Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warranty and bond submittal package
into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling navigation to each item.
Provide table of contents at beginning of document.
D. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or
fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially
hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.
1. Use cleaning products that meet Green Seal GS-37, or if GS-37 is not applicable, use
products that comply with the California Code of Regulations maximum allowable VOC
levels.
!w� PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 FINAL CLEANING
A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply
with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution
!" regulations.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700-3
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA wer
7. Revise if Owner makes final changeover or if key-control system manufacturer delivers
keys directly to Owner.
8. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's
personnel of changeover in security provisions.
9. Complete startup testing of systems.
10. Submit test/adjust/balance records.
11. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,
construction tools,and similar elements.
12. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities.
13. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and
maintenance.
14. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.
15. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual
defects.
B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of
request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled
requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection
or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by
Architect,that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
I. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as
incomplete is completed or corrected.
2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion.
1.4 FINAL COMPLETION
A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion,
complete the following:
1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 01 Section "Payment
Procedures."
2. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be
completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy
of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for
acceptance.
3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance
requirements.
4. Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty.
5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, *
equipment, and systems.
B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request,
Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. .�
Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor
of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as
incomplete is completed or corrected.
w
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700-2
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
** Northampton,MA
SECTION 017700-CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
in A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
ON
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including,
but not limited to,the following:
1. Substantial Completion procedures.
2. Final completion procedures.
3. Warranties.
4. Final cleaning.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 01 Section"Execution" for progress cleaning of Project site.
2. Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance
manual requirements.
3. Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings,
Record Specifications, and Record Product Data.
e,
4. Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training" for requirements for instructing
Owner's personnel.
5. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements
for the Work in those Sections.
1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
u�l1
A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial
Completion,complete the following. List items below that are incomplete with request.
1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on
so the list,and reasons why the Work is not complete.
2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.
3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final
certifications, and similar documents.
4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to
services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar
releases.
5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final
completion construction photographic documentation, damage or settlement surveys,
property surveys, and similar final record information.
6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by
Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700- 1
40
w
00
o ° W
N
ca3o ` Q �
� Fo,pa o 0
o ° w
a >, wzz �
FFF � ° CQ
F Q F
oa3ozo
° w
CA Q
a w �
� O
O z
0
a z F
z �
� z
F- F
� U
G ° w
z
Q U OF Oa
uo
3H °
F
z �
U H F z
a
o VD
a � F
z
w a Fa ° ov 2
w
"�► O � � F z Q
�s
d o ° za w
® ❑'O R V] L h R �" � Ri y M 4 d L y O
R O £ .�. �
L is
N T w OD OL OD bD OD DO bD
�' Uw aawrsaacs. o. a, 'v, � aac. �
•
w
o ° a + o
O z x +
a
zd ° n �
� 3x
z° W
dHa
ao>
� adzdo
x F
a W
3 w A
z zzo �
aid
U E"
w � aa
� a
3 Wad
z a
O wed
vF, zaH a
U a
G�.
O
°' z O O ,'a✓�, U �
111 ,o
w O
O
a ao � c � aF
v' Yom, U HFaa � d Z
3
OR. U oF. R^R. 3 U O R O d -�' F- LR a o
W °�a ou nn eo ob en eo o� eu 'C o U 3 o L R a R7 n
o a, a p a p a p a c d L w° 3 F °- F E F
_ is i 9 en d
N T b0 bD DG
of bO bD Q Z
�/] > Y Y Y Y Y Y
Y Y £
own.� u u c, E u � u � � rd, a e o �, o 0 o a, �, O •o a> R a °' O
c
u w ww'wacia ac 'v, � aa 'a333 � � xti �7U 'awo U
ox
1R
OPR
00 w
° ^ 1
cli
VD F
CC �
0.
up) O
1p
as
as
FW
A U
zo
a
c
z
¢
a
w
maw
o � z
A
oJO
3 d
W
z �
¢ zaw
0aaz
aWQUo
Fa � ao
d o
zAF
1- z
° ao
¢ F
¢ a
z
Q
w � O
M
a 3 wF � z Q
z � �6 oao � w
�
Q
o`, 2
w
1 N:D V L ice' d L = •C6 d y H R � O
w o a ai C G C C G C C G •R O i. yp
v > W en nu en e� o0 on bn en c d d o k 3 F h 'R c vx G u no y i 7
O G t
LUUW aao,wan 0, aa v� aaa333 � x � UO; � o`
00
w
0
Qo �
� F
°v o
x �
ad
xW
vz
w o
3 H
H �
z
wH
III
w
O U
U
W
U
w
z w re
w �� d
F Fzw
3 oa3
+� o
H o
U w
� 3
a U w W
•� cn
a V za ° Q
aaQw z
�C wox H
z � w
a as o W
Q ¢a FF v
w W
d c 2
� co�
G. -
U 0.01 a, 0. oa. U Ct. P. c L p eLe O `e mo
a0 a y
N T cc It DD b0 t cbD b0 a>y R R R R R R R U h L 2 0 C/) W � u u V u .d. R is O O O d 3 a R a R R R a .r U U W 0. 0. 0. 0. 0. 7 4 .� a P. ',� G .0. CG C� U 0. G:7 O .N�.
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
3. Stockpile materials away from construction area. Do not store within drip line of
remaining trees.
4. Store components off the ground and protect from the weather.
5. Remove recyclable waste off Owner's property and transport to recycling receiver or
to processor.
3.3 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE
A. Packaging:
1. Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat sheets. Bundle and store in a dry
location.
2. Polystyrene Packaging: Separate and bag materials.
3. Pallets: As much as possible, require deliveries using pallets to remove pallets from
Project site. For pallets that remain on-site, break down pallets into component wood
pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood.
4. Crates: Break down crates into component wood pieces and comply with requirements
for recycling wood.
B. Wood Materials:
1. Clean Cut-Offs of Lumber: Grind or chip into small pieces.
2. Clean Sawdust: Bag sawdust that does not contain painted or treated wood.
C. Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets or in container and store in a dry
location.
3.4 DISPOSAL OF WASTE
A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove
waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Burning: Do not burn waste materials.
C. Disposal: Transport waste materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.
3.5 ATTACHMENTS
A. Form CWM-1 for construction waste identification.
B. Form CWM-3 for construction waste reduction work plan.
C. Form CWM-5 cost/revenue analysis of construction waste reduction work plan.
D. Form CWM-7 for construction waste
END OF SECTION 017419
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 017419- 5
op
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA w.r
3. Total cost of disposal (with no waste management).
4. Revenue from recycled materials.
5. Savings in hauling and tipping fees by donating materials.
6. Savings in hauling and tipping fees that are avoided.
7. Handling and transportation costs. Include cost of collection containers for each type of
waste.
8. Net additional cost or net savings from waste management plan.
PART 2- PRODUCTS(Not Used)
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 PLAN IMPLEMENTATION
A. General: Implement approved waste management plan. Provide handling, containers, storage,
signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement waste management plan
during the entire duration of the Contract.
B. Waste Management Coordinator: Engage a waste management coordinator to be responsible
for implementing, monitoring, and reporting status of waste management work plan. .�
C. Training: Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste management
procedures, as appropriate for the Work occurring at Project site. �.
D. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure
minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and
used facilities.
3.2 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE,GENERAL .R
A. General: Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on-site workers.
B. Recycling Incentives: Revenues, savings, rebates, tax credits, and other incentives received for
recycling waste materials shall accrue to Contractor.
C. Preparation of Waste: Prepare and maintain recyclable waste materials according to recycling
or reuse facility requirements. Maintain materials free of dirt, adhesives, solvents, petroleum
contamination, and other substances deleterious to the recycling process.
D. Procedures: Separate recyclable waste from other waste materials, trash, and debris. Separate
recyclable waste by type at Project site to the maximum extent practical according to approved
construction waste management plan.
1. Provide appropriately marked containers or bins for controlling recyclable waste until
they are removed from Project site. Include list of acceptable and unacceptable materials
at each container and bin.
2. Stockpile processed materials on-site without intermixing with other materials. Place,
grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 017419-4
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
G. LEED Submittal: LEED letter template for Credit MR 2.1 and 2.2, signed by Contractor,
tabulating total waste material, quantities diverted and means by which it is diverted, and
statement that requirements for the credit have been met.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Waste Management Coordinator Qualifications: Experienced firm, with a record of successful
waste management coordination of Projects with similar requirements, that employs a LEED
Accredited Professional, certified by USGBC, as waste management coordinator. Waste
management coordinator may also serve as LEED coordinator.
B. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by EPA-approved certification
program.
C. Waste Management Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with
requirements in Division 01 Section Project Management and Coordination." Review methods
and procedures related to waste management including,but not limited to,the following:
1. Review and discuss waste management plan including responsibilities of waste
management coordinator.
2. Review requirements for documenting quantities of each type of waste and its
disposition.
3. Review and finalize procedures for materials separation and verify availability of
containers and bins needed to avoid delays.
4. Review procedures for periodic waste collection and transportation to recycling and
disposal facilities.
5. Review waste management requirements for each trade.
1.7 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN
A. General: Develop a waste management plan according to ASTM E 1609 and requirements of
this Section. Plan shall consist of waste identification, waste reduction work plan, and
cost/revenue analysis. Indicate quantities by weight or volume, but use same units of measure
throughout waste management plan.
B. Waste Identification: Indicate anticipated types and quantities construction waste generated by
the Work. Use Form CWM-1 for construction waste. Include estimated quantities and
assumptions for estimates.
C. Waste Reduction Work Plan: List each type of waste and whether it will be salvaged, recycled,
or disposed of in landfill or incinerator. Use Form CWM-3 for construction waste. Include
on points of waste generation, total quantity of each type of waste, quantity for each means of
recovery,and handling and transportation procedures.
D. Cost/Revenue Analysis: Indicate total cost of waste disposal as if there was no waste
management plan and net additional cost or net savings resulting from implementing waste
management plan. Use Form CWM-5 for construction waste Include the following:
1. Total quantity of waste.
2. Estimated cost of disposal (cost per unit). Include hauling and tipping fees and cost of
collection containers for each type of waste.
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 017419-3
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
C. Lumber.
d. Wood sheet materials.
e. Wood trim.
f. Metals.
g. Roofing.
h. Insulation.
i. Carpet and pad.
j. Gypsum board.
k. Piping.
1. Electrical conduit.
m. Packaging: Regardless of salvage/recycle goal indicated in paragraph above,
salvage or recycle 100 percent of the following uncontaminated packaging w�
materials:
1) Paper.
2) Cardboard.
3) Boxes.
4) Plastic sheet and film.
5) Polystyrene packaging.
6) Wood crates. .�
7) Plastic pails.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Waste Reduction Progress Reports: Concurrent with each Application for Payment, submit
report. Use Form CWM-7 for construction waste' Include the following information: w.
1. Material category.
2. Generation point of waste.
3. Total quantity of waste in tons(tonnes).
4. Quantity of waste salvaged, both estimated and actual in tons(tonnes).
5. Quantity of waste recycled,both estimated and actual in tons(tonnes).
6. Total quantity of waste recovered(salvaged plus recycled) in tons(tonnes).
7. Total quantity of waste recovered(salvaged plus recycled)as a percentage of total waste.
B. Waste Reduction Calculations: Before request for Substantial Completion, submit calculated
end-of-Project rates for salvage, recycling, and disposal as a percentage of total waste generated "
by the Work.
C. Records of Donations: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable waste donated to �*
individuals and organizations. Indicate whether organization is tax exempt.
D. Records of Sales: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable waste sold to individuals and
organizations. Indicate whether organization is tax exempt.
E. Recycling and Processing Facility Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of recyclable waste
by recycling and processing facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight
tickets,receipts, and invoices.
F. Landfill and Incinerator Disposal Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of waste by landfills
and incinerator facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts,
and invoices.
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 017419-2
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
SECTION 017419-CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
OR A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:
1. Recycling nonhazardous construction waste.
2. Disposing of nonhazardous construction waste.
PP B. Related Sections:
1. Division 04 Section"Unit Masonry" for disposal requirements for masonry waste.
2. Division 31 Section "Site Clearing" for disposition of waste resulting from site clearing
and removal of above-and below-grade improvements.
on 1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting
from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes
packaging.
B. Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or
selective demolition operations.
C. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale,
recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
D. Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in
preparation for reuse.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Achieve end-of-Project rates for salvage/recycling of 75 percent by weight of total
non-hazardous solid waste generated by the Work. Practice efficient waste management in the
0* use of materials in the course of the Work. Use all reasonable means to divert construction and
demolition waste from landfills and incinerators. Facilitate recycling and salvage of materials,
including the following:
10 1. Construction Waste:
a. Site-clearing waste.
b. Masonry and CMU.
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 017419- 1
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
B. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage.
Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be
exposed during cutting and patching operations.
C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage
to adjoining areas.
3.3 PERFORMANCE
A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and
patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.
B. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling,breaking, chipping, grinding,and similar
operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or
adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply
with original Installer's written recommendations.
C. Patching: Patch construction by filling,repairing,refinishing, closing up, and similar operations
following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as
possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other
Sections.
D. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely
remove paint,mortar, oils,putty, and similar materials.
END OF SECTION 017329
OF
CUTTING AND PATCHING 017329-3
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
Northampton,MA
1. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers.
2. Membranes and flashings. ■.
3. Exterior curtain-wall construction.
4. Equipment supports.
5. Piping, ductwork,vessels,and equipment.
6. Noise-and vibration-control elements and systems.
B. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual
evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or **
in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's
aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually
unsatisfactory manner.
C. Cutting and Patching Conference: Before proceeding, meet at Project site with parties involved
in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential
interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before
proceeding.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged
during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing
warranties.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.
B. In-Place Materials: Use materials identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use
materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
e
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to ••
be performed.
3.2 PREPARATION *"
A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut.
CUTTING AND PATCHING 017329-2
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
SECTION 017329-CUTTING AND PATCHING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to
cutting and patching individual parts of the Work.
2. Division 07 Section"Penetration Firestopping" for patching fire-rated construction.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of
other Work.
B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions after
installation of other Work.
w 1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Cutting and Patching Proposal: Submit a proposal describing procedures at least [10] ten days
before the time cutting and patching will be performed,requesting approval to proceed. Include
the following information:
1. Extent: Describe cutting and patching, show how they will be performed, and indicate
why they cannot be avoided.
on 2. Changes to In-Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to
structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building's appearance
and other significant visual elements.
3. Products: List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform the Work.
4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch miscellaneous elements or related components
in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their
capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased
operational life or safety.
CUTTING AND PATCHING 017329- 1
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
E. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Division 01 Section
"Quality Requirements."
3.9 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
.r
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage
or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.
3.10 CORRECTION OF THE WORK
A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes.
I. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up
with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment.
B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition.
C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired
without visible evidence of repair.
D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components
that cannot be repaired.
E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces.
END OF SECTION 017300
EXECUTION 017300- 8
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
4. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where more than one installer has
worked.
B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.
C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for
proper execution of the Work.
1. Remove liquid spills promptly.
2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the
entire work area, as appropriate.
D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written
instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials
specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning
materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.
E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.
F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure
freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials
down sewers or into waterways. Comply with waste disposal requirements in Division 01
Section "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."
H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining
materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from
damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.
I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through
the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure
operability without damaging effects.
J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the
construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful,dangerous, damaging,or otherwise
deleterious exposure during the construction period.
3.8 STARTING AND ADJUSTING
A. Coordinate startup and adjusting of equipment and operating components with requirements in
Division 01 Section "General Commissioning Requirements."
B. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove
malfunctioning units,replace with new units, and retest.
C. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation
without binding.
D. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties.
Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
EXECUTION 017300-7
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
H. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated,
arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.
I. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered
hazardous.
w
3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching.
Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time,and complete without delay.
1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance
of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their
original condition.
B. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut.
C. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage.
Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be
exposed during cutting and patching operations.
D. Adjacent Occupied Areas: Where interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of
free passage to adjoining areas is unavoidable, coordinate cutting and patching in accordance
with requirements of Division 01 Section "Summary."
E. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping,grinding, and similar *�!
operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or
adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply
with original Installer's written recommendations.
w
F. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations
following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as
practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other
Sections, where applicable.
G. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint,
mortar, oils,putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces.
3.7 PROGRESS CLEANING
A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce
requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully. w�
1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and
debris.
2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if
the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg Q.
3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste.
Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally,according to regulations.
a. Utilize containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored. "
EXECUTION 017300-6
w.
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
I. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record
uw Documents.
2. Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, provide
temporary reference points sufficient to locate the Work.
3. Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed. Restore marked
construction to its original condition.
D. Certified Survey: On completion of foundation walls, major site improvements, and other work
requiring field-engineering services, prepare a certified survey showing dimensions, locations,
angles,and elevations of construction and sitework.
3.5 INSTALLATION
A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and
an elevation, as indicated.
1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.
2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance
and ease of removal for replacement.
3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas,unless otherwise indicated.
4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 96 inches (2440 mm0 in occupied spaces and
90 inches(2300 mm)in unoccupied spaces.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in
applications indicated.
C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results.
Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.
D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or
loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.
E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.
F. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be
factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that
adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated
requirements.
G. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size
and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with
other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size
+� and type required for load conditions.
1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at
heights directed by Architect.
2. Allow for building movement,including thermal expansion and contraction.
3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and
directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and
items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver
such items to Project site in time for installation.
EXECUTION 017300 - 5
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT
A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on .�
Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are
discovered,notify Architect promptly.
B. General: Engage a land surveyor to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices.
1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of
construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project. *�
2. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain
required dimensions.
3. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply. w�
4. Check the location, level and plumb,of every major element as the Work progresses.
5. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable
tolerances.
6. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established
by authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill *�
and topsoil placement, utility slopes,and rim and invert elevations.
D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building
foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and ..
electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels.
Level foundations and piers from two or more locations.
w.
E. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and
levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and
duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log we,
available for reference by Architect.
3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING
A. Identification: Owner will identify existing benchmarks,control points,and property corners.
B. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference
points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control
points during construction operations.
1. Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior written
approval of Architect. Report lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks or control points
promptly. Report the need to relocate permanent benchmarks or control points to
Architect before proceeding.
2. Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base
replacements on the original survey control points.
C. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of(2) two permanent benchmarks on Project
site, referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having
jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark.
EXECUTION 017300-4
w
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of
sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; underground electrical services,
and other utilities.
2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public
utilities serving Project site.
B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the
Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where
indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance. Record observations.
1. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of
the Work is required by other Sections, include the following:
a. Description of the Work.
b. List of detrimental conditions,including substrates.
C. List of unacceptable installation tolerances.
d. Recommended corrections.
2. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with
existing finishes or primers.
go 3. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of
connections before equipment and fixture installation.
4. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are
to be installed.
5. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility that is necessary to adjust,
move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility
appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck
measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to
00 other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before
fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the
Work.
C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown
diagrammatically on Drawings.
D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for
clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control
of the Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in
am, Division 01 Section"Project Management and Coordination."
EXECUTION 017300-3
go
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
B. Certificates: Submit certificate signed by land surveyor certifying that location and elevation
of improvements comply with requirements.
C. Certified Surveys: Submit(2)two copies signed by land surveyor.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice
in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land-surveying
services of the kind indicated.
B. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of
construction elements.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged
during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not
to void existing warranties.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.
1. For projects requiring compliance with sustainable design and construction practices and
procedures, utilize products for patching that comply with requirements of Division 01
Section "Sustainable Design Requirements."
B. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed
surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent
possible.
1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, w.
will provide a match acceptable to the Architect for the visual and functional
performance of in-place materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and
construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate
and verify the existence and location of underground utilities, and other construction affecting
the Work.
EXECUTION 017300-2
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
po Northampton,MA
SECTION 017300-EXECUTION
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the
Work including,but not limited to,the following:
1. Construction layout.
2. Field engineering and surveying.
3. Installation of the Work.
4. Cutting and patching.
5. Coordination of Owner-installed products.
6. Progress cleaning.
7. Starting and adjusting.
8. Protection of installed construction.
10 9. Correction of the Work.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 01 Section"Submittal Procedures" for submitting surveys.
2. Revise first subparagraph below to suit Project.
3. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with
Project Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines
w and levels, and final cleaning.
4. Division 07 Section 'Penetration Firestopping" for patching penetrations in fire-rated
construction.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
" A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of
other work.
B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions after
installation of other work.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For land surveyor.
EXECUTION 017300- 1
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
on Northampton,MA
D. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by
Architect from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with
requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's
product line that includes both standard and premium items.
2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS
t A. Conditions for Consideration: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable
product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not
satisfied, Architect may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with
these requirements:
1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents,
that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results,
and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.
2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the
Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance,weight, size,
durability,visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.
3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty.
4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and
names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested.
5. Samples,if requested.
PART 3 -EXECUTION(Not Used)
END OF SECTION 016000
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000- 5
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with
requirements of the Contract Documents. ,
4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make
selection.
S. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications
establish salient characteristics of products.
6. Or Equal: For products specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal," or
"or approved equal," or "or approved," comply with requirements in "Comparable
Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.
B. Product Selection Procedures:
1. Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the
named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions
for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.
2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source,
provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements.
Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be
considered.
3. Products:
a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both
manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with
requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience „■
will be considered.
b. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both available
manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed
product, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in
"Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product.
4. Manufacturers:
5. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a
product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. Comparable
products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will be considered, unless
otherwise indicated.
6. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of available manufacturers,
provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed
manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in
"Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer's product. '
7. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product
indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or
indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers.
Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics
that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable
Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named
manufacturers.
C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Architect's sample",
provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's
decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches.
1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other
specified requirements, comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Substitution ■*
Procedures" for proposal of product.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000-4
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
C. Storage:
1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units.
2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure.
3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight
enclosure above ground,with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.
4. Store foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of
installation and concealment.
5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity,
ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage.
6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing.
7. Delete subparagraph below if Owner provides own storage facilities.
8. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and
equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner.
1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES
A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other
warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on
product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract
Documents.
1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a
particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.
2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide
specific rights for Owner.
B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and
identification,ready for execution.
1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and
properly executed.
on 2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a
written document using indicated form properly executed.
3. Refer to Divisions 02 through 49. Sections for specific content requirements and
particular requirements for submitting special warranties.
C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures."
PART 2-PRODUCTS
! 2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES
A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents,
are undamaged and,unless otherwise indicated,are new at time of installation.
1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items
needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.
2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are
specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used
successfully in similar situations on other projects.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000-3
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product.
Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification
Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.
1. Include data to indicate compliance with the requirements specified in "Comparable
Products"Article.
2. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or
documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product
request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable
product request within [15] fifteen days of receipt of request, or [7] seven days of receipt
of additional information or documentation,whichever is later.
a. Form of Approval: As specified in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures."
b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a comparable
product request within time allocated.
w
B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 01
Section "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Compatibility of Options: if Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more .�
products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if
previously selected products were also options.
1. Each contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods
compatible with products and construction methods of other contractors.
2. If a dispute arises between contractors over concurrently selectable but incompatible
products,Architect will determine which products shall be used.
1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage,
deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written
instructions.
B. Delivery and Handling:
1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent
overcrowding of construction spaces.
2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that
are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other
losses.
3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original
sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for
handling, storing, unpacking,protecting, and installing.
4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and
to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected.
w
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000-2
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
to Northampton,MA
SECTION 016000-PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
cur A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in
Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on
products; special warranties; and comparable products.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 01 Section"Substitution Procedures" for requests for substitutions.
2. Division 01 Section "References" for applicable industry standards for products
specified.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or
taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material,"
"equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.
1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or
model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product
literature,that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.
2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or
facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new
products.
3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal
process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service
performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or
on exceed those of specified product.
B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's
product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or
model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type,
function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other
characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers
named in the specification.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000- 1
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
B. Sign Text: (Final Artwork and Layout will be provided by Architect in electronic format to
Contractor.)
■w
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL
UZ x
r is r
#"
r
�r
Owner's Development Manager: O'Connell Development Group
Architect: Bargmann Hendrie+Archetype, Inc.
Structural Engineer: McNamara Salvia,Inc. ww
MEPFP Engineer: AHA Consulting Engineers
Landscape Architect: Carol Johnson&Associates, Inc.
Civil Engineer: Tighe&Bond,lnc.
Contractor: Western Builders, Inc.
END OF SECTION 015813
ww
TEMPORARY PROJECT SIGN 015813 -2
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
ea• Northampton,MA
SECTION 015813 -TEMPORARY PROJECT SIGN
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the design requirements for the project identification signage.
B. Contractor shall obtain all relative permits for installation of the temporary project sign.
C. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 061000-Rough Carpentry
PART2-PRODUCTS
A. Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements in Section 061000.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
A. Project Identification Sign: Prepare Project identification signs in size indicated.
1. Install Sign as directed by the Owner and Architect.
2. Do not permit installation of unauthorized signs.
3. Engage an experienced sign fabricator to apply graphics for Project identification signs.
Comply with details indicated.
4. Construct sign of exterior-type Grade B-B high-density concrete form overlay plywood
in, no less than '/2 inch in thickness. Support on posts or framing of preservative-treated
wood or steel.
5. Paint sign panel and applied graphics with exterior-grade alkyd gloss enamel over
!! exterior primer or provide weatherproof acrylic sheet over face of sign.
6. Paint rear face of sign, edges and supports to protect material
7. Size:
a. 7feet high by 8 feet wide.
8. Maintain sign throughout construction; relocate as required. Provide temporary supports
system as required.
TEMPORARY PROJECT SIGN 015813 - 1
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control,
ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated
results and to avoid possibility of damage.
C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and
protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.
D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has
ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than
Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may
have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work,
clean exposed surfaces,and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.
END OF SECTION 015000
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000- 7
■,m
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA �.
procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial
Completion. Obtain extended warranty for Owner. Perform control operations lawfully, using
environmentally safe materials.
F. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin, furnish and install site enclosure
fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by .�
entrance gates.
1. Extent of Fence: As required to enclose entire Project site or portion determined
sufficient to accommodate construction operations or as indicated.
G. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install temporary enclosure around partially completed areas
of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft,
and similar violations of security. Lock entrances at end of each work day.
H. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades,including warning signs and lighting.
I. Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as indicated
and as required by authorities having jurisdiction.
J. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in
progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar
activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior. ""
K. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types
needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with
NFPA 241.
1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas.
2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar
sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel
at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be
followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information.
4. Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a warning
sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be removed.
Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles. �+
3.5 MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL
A. Refer to Section 01 35 00.
+�wr
3.6 OPERATION, TERMINATION,AND REMOVAL
A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and
abuse,limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.
B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.
w
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000-6
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to
Owner.
B. Temporary Use of Permanent Roads and Paved Areas: Locate temporary roads and paved areas
in same location as permanent roads and paved areas. Construct and maintain temporary roads
and paved areas adequate for construction operations. Extend temporary roads and paved areas,
within construction limits indicated, as necessary for construction operations.
C. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Parking: Provide temporary parking areas for construction personnel.
E. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water.
F. Project Signs: Provide Project signs as indicated. Unauthorized signs are not permitted.
G. Waste Disposal Facilities: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section
"Construction Waste Management and Disposal."
H. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel.
'! 1. Temporary Elevator Use: Refer to Division 14 Sections for temporary use of new elevators.
J. Temporary Stairs: Until permanent stairs are available, provide temporary stairs where ladders
are not adequate.
K. Temporary Use of Permanent Stairs: Use of new stairs for construction traffic will be
permitted, provided stairs are protected and finishes restored to new condition at time of
Substantial Completion.
3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct
construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible
air,waterway,and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects.
B. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Comply with[requirements of 2003 EPA
Construction General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent and
requirements specified in Section"Site Clearing."
C. Stormwater Control: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide
barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of
stormwater from heavy rains.
D. Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line
of trees to protect vegetation from damage from construction operations. Protect tree root
systems from damage,flooding, and erosion.
E. Pest Control: Engage pest-control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and
harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000- 5
on
0
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA war
D. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of
construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type,
number, location, operation,and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.
E. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities
for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from
adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a
harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed.
w
F. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction
activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction
from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on
completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to
produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption.
1. Provide dehumidification systems when required to reduce substrate moisture levels to
level required to allow installation or application of finishes.
G. Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient
size, capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations.
H. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination
for construction operations,observations, inspections,and traffic conditions.
1. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for use by all
construction personnel. Install (2)two telephone line(s)for each field office.
1. Provide additional telephone lines for the following:
a. Provide a dedicated telephone line for each facsimile machine in each field office.
b. Provide [1)one telephone line(s)for Owner's use.
2. At each telephone,post a list of important telephone numbers.
a. Revise list below to suit Project. See Evaluations.
b. Police and fire departments.
C. Ambulance service.
d. Contractor's home office.
e. Architect's office.
f. Engineers'offices.
g. Owner's office. w„
h. Principal subcontractors'field and home offices.
3. Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two-way radio for use when
away from field office.
40
3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION
so
A. General: Comply with the following:
1. Provide construction for temporary offices, shops, and sheds located within construction ..
area or within 30 feet (9 111) of building lines that is noncombustible according to
ASTM E 136. Comply with NFPA 241.
2. Maintain support facilities until Architect schedules Substantial Completion inspection.
Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000-4
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
4. Heating and cooling equipment necessary to maintain a uniform indoor temperature of 68
to 72 deg F (20 to 22 deg.C).
5. Lighting fixtures capable of maintaining average illumination of 20 fc (215 ]x) at desk
height.
C. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate
materials and equipment for construction operations.
2.3 EQUIPMENT
A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by
locations and classes of fire exposures.
B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented,
self-contained,liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control.
1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating
units is prohibited.
2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a testing agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
3. Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for
temporary use during construction, provide filter with MERV of[8] eight at each return
air grille in system and remove at end of construction and clean HVAC system as
required in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures".
C. Air Filtration Units: HEPA primary and secondary filter-equipped portable units with four-
stage filtration. Provide single switch for emergency shutoff. Configure to run continuously.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference
with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the
Work.
B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities
are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.
3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION
A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service.
B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully.
I. Connect temporary sewers to as directed by authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for
construction.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 -3
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA 10
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA,NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary
electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.
B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each
temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.
C. Accessible Temporary Egress: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural &
Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines,
ICC/ANSI A 117.1, and the Massachusetts Architectural Access Board.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage installer of each permanent service to assume +*�
responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its
use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned
responsibilities.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
w.
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch (50-mm), 0.148-inch- (3.8-mm-)thick, galvanized steel, .�
chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet (1.8 nn) high with galvanized steel pipe posts;
minimum 2-3/8-inch- (60-mm-) OD line posts and 2-7i8-inch- (73-inn-) OD corner and pull
posts.
B. Portable Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch (50-mizi), 0.148-inch- (3.8-1111n-) thick,
galvanized steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet (1.8 m) high with galvanized steel
pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- (60-mm-) OD line posts and 2-718-inch- (73-mm-) OD corner
and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch- (42-mm-) OD top and bottom rails. Provide concrete or
galvanized steel bases for supporting posts.
2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES
A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature
controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading.
B. Common-Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of Owner, Architect, and
construction personnel office activities and to accommodate project meetings specified in other
Division 01 Sections. Keep office clean and orderly. Furnish and equip offices as follows:
1. Conference room of sufficient size to accommodate meetings of(12) twelve individuals. w
Provide electrical power service and 120-V ac duplex receptacles, with not less than 1
receptacle on each wall. Furnish room with conference table, chairs, and 4-foot- (1,2-m-)
square tack and marker boards.
2. Drinking water and private toilet.
3. Coffee machine and supplies.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000-2
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
! Northampton,MA
SECTION 015000-TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART I - GENERAL
ps
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and
protection facilities.
4W
B. Related Sections:
C. Section 01 35 00- Special Project Procedures of Indoor Air Quality and Protection of in-place
work from moisture.
1.3 USE CHARGES
A. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included
in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use temporary services
and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to the Owner, Architect, testing agencies,
and authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Sewer Service: Pay sewer service use charges for sewer usage by all entities for construction
operations.
C. Water Service: Pay water service use charges for water used by all entities for construction
operations.
D. Electric Power Service: Pay electric power service use charges for electricity used by all
entities for construction operations.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for
construction personnel.
B. Erosion- and Sedimentation-Control Plan: Show compliance with requirements of EPA
Construction General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction,whichever is more stringent.
C. Moisture-Protection Plan: Refer to Section 01 35 00—Special Project Procedures.
D. Dust-Control and HVAC-Control Plan: Refer to Section 01 35 00—Special Project Procedures.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000- 1
•
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA I.
http://dodssp.daps.dia.mil
Available from Defense Standardization Program go
www.dps.dia.mil
Available from General Services Administration (202)619- "w
8925
www.gsa.gov
.w
Available from National Institute of Building Sciences (202)289-
7800
www.wbdg.org/ccb .�
FTMS Federal Test Method Standard
(See FS)
UFAS Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (800)872-
2253
Available from Access Board (202)272-
0080
www.access-board.gov
F. State Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or
other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following
list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be
accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 014200
REFERENCES 014200-4
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
http://.dodssp.daps.dla.mil
DOE Department of Energy (202) 586-9220
www.energy.gov
EPA Environmental Protection Agency (202)272-0167
www.epa.gov
on FCC Federal Communications Commission (888)225-5322
www.fcc.gov
NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology (301)975-6478
www.nist.gov
OSHA Occupational Safety &Health Administration (800)321-6742
! ' www.osha.gov (202)693-1999
USPS Postal Service (202)268-2000
www.usps.com
E. Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or
other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and
regulations in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to
change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act(ADA) (800) 872-
2253
Architectural Barriers Act(ABA) (202)272-
0080
Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities
Available from U.S.Access Board
' www.access-board.gov
CFR Code of Federal Regulations (866)512-
1800
Available from Government Printing Office (202) 512-
1800
w www.gpoaccess.gov/cfr/index.html
DOD Department of Defense Military Specifications and Standards (215)697-
2664
Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point
http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil
FED-STD Federal Standard
(See FS)
FS Federal Specification (215)697-
2664
Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point
on
REFERENCES 014200-3
ON
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA a
B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless
otherwise indicated.
C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with
industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not
bound with the Contract Documents. ■*
1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain
copies directly from publication source.
1.4 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS
A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other
Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Gale's
"Encyclopedia of Associations" or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional
Associations of the United States."
B. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other „
Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list.
Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate
and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
C. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract
Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names,
telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up- .fir
to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
w
DIN Deutsches Institut fh Normung e.V. 49 30 2601-0
www.din.de
ICC International Code Council (888)422-7233
www.iccsafe.org
D. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications
or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the
following list. Names,telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed
to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
w�
CE Army Corps of Engineers (202)761-0011
www.usace.army.mil
CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission (800)638-2772
www.cpsc.gov (301)504-7923
DOC Department of Commerce (202)482-2000
www.commerce.gov
DOD Department of Defense (215)697-6257
REFERENCES 014200-2
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
SECTION 014200-REFERENCES
PART I -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.
B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications,
and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the
Conditions of the Contract.
C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested,"
uw "authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed."
D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on
Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown,"
"noted," "scheduled," and"specified" have the same meaning as "indicated."
E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having
so jurisdiction, and rules, conventions,and agreements within the construction industry that control
performance of the Work.
F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly,
installation,and similar operations.
G. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking,
OR assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing,
protecting,cleaning, and similar operations.
H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.
I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site
is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on
which Project is to be built.
1.3 INDUSTRY STANDARDS
A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent
requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if
bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards
are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.
REFERENCES 014200- 1
.w
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA ww
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 LOCATION
A. Locate the mock-ups within the Construction Contract Limits.
B. Coordinate location with construction operations to avoid conflict while mock-ups remain in
place.
3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION
A. Architect will review each Mock-up, indicate corrections or modifications required, or approve
the mock-up. On advice of counsel, select appropriate terms for action stamp and insert term
and explanation of each action taken in subparagraph below. See Evaluations.
3.3 DISPOSITION AND REMOVAL
A. Maintain and protect approved mock-ups at Project site, available for quality-control compari-
sons throughout the course of construction activity.
B. Obtain approval from Architect and Owner before removing mock-ups. w
C. Contractor shall remove and legally dispose of mock-ups at completion of the Work.
END OF SECTION 01450
.e.
MOCK-UP REQUIREMENTS 01 40 01 -2
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
SECTION 0140 01 -MOCK-UPS REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi-
tions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for constructing construction
mock-ups for the following:
1. 074216 INSULATED-CORE METAL WALL PANELS
2. 079200 JOINT SEALANTS
3. 084413 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR WALL PANEL MOCK-UP
A. Wall Panels: The wall panel mock-up shall demonstrate the following construction:
OR I. Color or each wall panel and matching color of each trim, flashing, and curtain wall as-
sembly.
2. Connection to wall panel types.
3. Connection of wall panel(s)to curtain wall.
go 4. Connection of wall panel and grade.
5. Connection of wall panel and roof assembly.
1.4 PROCEDURES
A. Coordination: Coordinate construction of mock-ups with construction schedule and submittals.
1. Architect reserves the right to withhold or provide conditional approval on a submittal
for a product required for the mock-up.
OR B. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress
Documentation" for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of re-
lated construction activities.
C. Processing Time: Allow enough time for construction, review, and approval by the Architect,
including time for correction.
1. Include mock-ups as line items on the As-Built construction schedule.
2. Notify the Architect and Owner in writing at least 14 days prior to completion of the
mock-up.
3. Coordinate time for Architect's approval to coincide with regularly scheduled progress
No meeting.
4. Do not proceed with fabrication or construction until approval has been received.
on
MOCK-UP REQUIREMENTS 014001 - 1
so
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other
Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched
areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible
as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching
in Division 01 Section "Execution."
B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.
C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of +
responsibility for quality-control services.
END OF SECTION 014000 '"'
.n
.w
■
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000- 8
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
! Northampton,MA
3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and
inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples.
4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples.
5. Retain first subparagraph below if required or is not common practice in Project vicinity.
6. Delivery of samples to testing agencies.
7. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing
agency.
8. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project
site.
H. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance
and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and
replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.
1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.
I. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality-
control services required by the Contract Documents . Coordinate and submit concurrently with
Contractor's construction schedule. Update as the Work progresses. .
1.9 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
A. Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to conduct special
tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner,
as indicated in Statement of Special Inspections attached to this Section, and as follows:
PART 2- PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG
A. Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:
1. Date test or inspection was conducted.
2. Description of the Work tested or inspected.
3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect.
40 4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.
B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and modifications as they occur. Provide access to
test and inspection log for Architect's[and Construction Manager's] reference during normal
working hours.
3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION
A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair
damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000- 7
go
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required
by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of
Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction,whether specified or not.
2. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing
agency to perform these quality-control services.
3. Notify testing agencies at least [24]twenty-four hours in advance of time when Work that
requires testing or inspecting will be performed.
4. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a
certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.
5. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract
Documents are Contractor's responsibility.
6. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction,
when they so direct.
C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service
representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including
service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Division 01 Section "Submittal
Procedures."
.w
D. Manufacturer's Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's technical
representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's technical representative's
services include participation in preinstallation conferences, examination of substrates and
conditions, verification of materials, observation of Installer activities, inspection of completed
portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports.
E. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's
responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for
construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.
w
F. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of
duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.
1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the
Work during performance of its services.
2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests
are conducted.
3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and
inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.
4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar
quality-control service through Contractor.
5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve
or accept any portion of the Work.
6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor. w
G. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and
similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify �*
agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the
following:
I. Access to the Work.
2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000-6
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
e. Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, products, and
methods of construction indicated for the completed Work.
f. When testing is complete, remove test specimens, assemblies, mockups do not
reuse products on Project.
2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test,
*' inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to Architect, with copy to Contractor.
Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work
complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.
K. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each
form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using
materials indicated for the completed Work:
1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by
Architect and Owner.
2. Notify Architect (7) seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be
constructed.
3. Employ supervisory personnel who will oversee mockup construction. Employ workers
that will be employed during the construction at the Project.
4. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
5. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction.
a. Allow(5)five days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup.
6. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for
judging the completed Work.
7. Demolish and remove mockups when directed, unless otherwise indicated.
L. Integrated Exterior Mockups: Construct integrated exterior mockup in accordance with
approved Shop Drawings. Coordinate installation of exterior envelope materials and products
for which mockups are required in individual specification sections, along with supporting
materials.
1.8 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility,
Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.
1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing
agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to
perform.
2. Payment for these services will be made from testing and inspecting allowances, as
authorized by Change Orders.
3. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work
that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the
Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order.
B. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are
Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities required to verify that
the Work complies with requirements,whether specified or not.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000-5
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated
for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient
production capacity to produce required units.
D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling
work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has
resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to
practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing
engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed
for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar to those indicated for this
Project in material,design, and extent.
F. Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities shall be
performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy
qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated.
1. Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction shall supersede requirements for
specialists.
G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the
experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according
to ASTM E 329 ; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and where
required by authorities having jurisdiction,that is acceptable to authorities.
1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7.
2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary
Laboratory Accreditation Program.
H. Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of
manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation
of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for
this Project.
1. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of
manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of
manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this
Project.
J. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing
for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the
following:
1. Contractor responsibilities include the following:
a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction.
b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing
results to prevent delaying the Work.
C. Provide sizes and configurations of test assemblies, mockups, and laboratory ■.,
mockups to adequately demonstrate capability of products to comply with
performance requirements.
d. Build site-assembled test assemblies and mockups using installers who will
perform same tasks for Project.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000-4
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: For integrated exterior mockups, provide plans, sections, and elevations,
indicating materials and size of mockup construction.
1. Indicate manufacturer and model number of individual components.
2. Provide axonometric drawings for conditions difficult to illustrate in two dimensions.
1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Contractor's Quality-Control Plan: For quality-assurance and quality-control activities and
responsibilities.
B. Contractor's Quality-Control Manager Qualifications: For supervisory personnel.
C. Contractor's Statement of Responsibility: When required by authorities having jurisdiction,
submit copy of written statement of responsibility sent to authorities having jurisdiction before
starting work on the following systems.
1. Seismic-force resisting system, designated seismic system, or component listed in the
designated seismic system quality assurance plan prepared by the Architect.
2. Main wind-force resisting system or a wind-resisting component listed in the wind-force-
resisting system quality assurance plan prepared by the Architect.
D. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a
recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.
E. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following:
1. Specification Section number and title.
2. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections.
3. Description of test and inspection.
4. Identification of applicable standards.
5. Identification of test and inspection methods.
6. Number of tests and inspections required.
7. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections.
8. Requirements for obtaining samples.
9. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
40 A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels
required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar
to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as
well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000-3
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA wr
show interface between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified
installation tolerances. Mockups are not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved
mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged.
1. Integrated Exterior Mockups: Mockups of the exterior envelope erected separately from
the building but on the project site, consisting of multiple products, assemblies and
subassemblies.
D. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for the Project before
products and materials are incorporated into the Work to verify performance or compliance with �*
specified criteria.
E. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing ,
agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to
establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements.
F. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, i.e.,
plant,mill, factory, or shop.
G. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation ow
of the Work and for completed Work.
H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing
laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.
I. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an
employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation,
including installation, erection,application, and similar operations.
1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that
certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or
that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade or trades.
J. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having successfully
completed a minimum of(3) three previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this
Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with
requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. „„
1.4 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS
w
A. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards
establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply
with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but
apparently equal,to Architect for a decision before proceeding.
B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be
the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the
minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits.
To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as
appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision
before proceeding.
■N
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000-2
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
q" SECTION 014000- QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality
control.
B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or
indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the
Contract Document requirements.
go 1. Specific quality-assurance and-control requirements for individual construction activities
are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections
may also cover production of standard products.
2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-
assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document
requirements.
3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required
by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of
this Section.
W C. Related Sections:
1. Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for developing a schedule of
required tests and inspections.
2. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during
execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed
construction will comply with requirements.
B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after
execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and
OR completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract
enforcement activities performed by Architect.
C. Mockups: Full size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are constructed
to verify selections made under sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where
indicated, qualities of materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000- 1
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA s
walls and windows must be constructed to prevent water penetration and dampness.
Temporary heat must be in use and maintain a minimum of 55 degrees space temperature
with a maximum relative humidity of 60%. Once the above conditions have been
established interior system installation may commence.
2. Seal all openings in slab-on-grade floors to prevent the passage of moisture to the
construction area.
3. All porous building materials stored within the construction area must be covered with
polyethylene and raised off the floor to provide for adequate air circulation.
4. Any porous materials that become wet will not be used and must be removed from the
construction site.
5. Any porous material which absorbs greater than 15%moisture content is considered wet
and will not be use and must be removed from the construction site.
6. Dampness, dust, dirt, or any potential contributing factor which support the formation of
biological of microbial contamination must be controlled at all times. It is the
responsibility of the general contractor to monitor these conditions and take any
corrective action necessary. If at any time consideration is noted the condition must be
addressed immediately and cleaned with EPA approved cleaning solvents.
F. Mechanical System Maintenance: All mechanical systems that are in general area of the
demolition or construction work must be protected from contamination as well as from the
introduction of dust and odor. This shall include monthly replacement of all mechanical system
filters, vacuuming of mechanical equipment interior,and when necessary blocking of outside air
intake louvers.
END OF SECTION 01 35 00 .w
SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES 01 35 00-4
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
+w Northampton,MA
1. Levels of airborne dust must be limited to 10% above background conditions. Control of
me dust shall include the use of hydroscopic agents, water misting, or vacuuming utilizing
HEPA filtration.Dry sweeping must be avoided.
2. Wet sanding of gypsum board is preferable unless dry standing includes full isolation of
areas under finish from adjacent spaces by the use of polyethylene protection with sealed
joints. Use of compressed air for cleaning is not allowed.
3. Temporary partitions must be constructed between the construction area and the occupied
building to prevent the passage of dust, odors, and general construction pollutants. All
partitions must be sealed completely and shall be rigidly fixed in position to prevent
unauthorized access between areas. When doorways are required to they shall also be
sealed tightly to the sub-frame to prevent passage of dust, odors, and general construction
pollutants. All doorways must be locked from the construction side to prevent
unauthorized access from the occupied building.
4. When temporary partitions between the construction area and the occupied building are
not adequate, buffer zones may be created which will require positive pressure airflow to
go be introduced into the buffer zone to prevent infiltration of odors an dust into the
occupied area. Construction of buffer zone partitions will be identical to temporary
partitions as described above and will be provided with communicating doors sealed air
tight all as described above.
C. Exterior dust control: Dust control of the entire site must be in accordance with Division 1 and
comply with the following:
1. The use of hydroscopic agents and water misting must be employed to control traffic-
generated dust throughout the entire worksite.
2. The placement of all dust producing equipment such as concrete/cement mixers, concrete
and bituminous cutting equipment, etc. must be used in consideration of seasonal
prevailing winds. As seasons change consideration must be given to replacement of dust
generating equipment.
3. During clearing and demolition procedures, temporary barriers must be n place in the
area of the occupied building and site. . All demolition activities must include water
misting of the entire area to minimize dust as much as possible.
4.
D. Odor Control:Odor Control within the construction area must be in accordance with Division 1.
In addition to these sections,comply with the following:
1. Fumes associated with welding, cutting torches, etc. shall utilize either general or
localized exhaust for each task. All exhaust must discharge to exterior of the building and
away from all occupied building intakes.
2. Fumes associated with construction vehicles and equipment shall utilize general exhaust
throughout the entire area. The construction area must operate under a negative pressure
at all times and all exhaust must discharge to exterior of the building and away for all
occupied building intakes.
go 3. Clean all spills as they occur and remove all solvent containing products as soon as
possible. If necessary provide adequate exhaust ventilation to quickly remove odor and
vapors.
E. Biological Contamination Control: Biological contamination control within the construction
area must be in accordance with Division 1 and comply with the following:
1. The entire building must be kept watertight to prevent the introduction of water
penetration and dampness. Prior to installing any interior building systems all openings
created or required for the renovation must be closed or adequate temporary exterior
on
SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES 013500-3
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA ..
these measures will be enforced. The foreman of each subcontractor shall have complete
knowledge of containment procedures and other specific controls as well fails as backup
contingency plans to be implemented in the event of a failure. If any subcontractor fails to
comply with the requirements of this section any cost incurred to respond to any issue by the
General Contractor or the Owner shall be the responsibility of the subcontractor.
B. The Owner may assign a representative who will represent the Owner's interest in maintaining
good indoor air-quality conditions. The General Contractor and the Owner's representative shall
tour the site daily to assure compliance with these indoor air quality procedures. Any *�
deficiencies must be recorded in writing and corrected immediately. The failure to maintain an
accurate log of deficiencies will prevent the General Contractor form recovering any costs
associated with corrective measures.
C. During weekly construction meetings the indoor air quality program shall be discussed along
with the log of deficiencies. All noted deficiencies shall be addressed and what remediation
work was put in place to correct an issue.
PART 2-PRODUCTS (Not Used) .M
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
w
3.1 PLAN IMPLEMENTATION
A. Storage of Materials: Storage of all construction materials must be in accordance with Division
1. In addition to these sections, comply with the following:
I. All non-absorbent construction materials delivered to the site such as structural steel,
concrete masonry units, framing, materials, piping, and equipment must be stored and ..
protected from weather conditions in so far as possible until time of use. Any material on
earth, unprotected will not be used and must be removed from the site.
2. All absorbent construction materials delivered to the site such as gypsum wall board,
insulation, bags of materials, etc. must be stored and protected from weather conditions.
Storage of all materials within the existing building is allowed only when all window
openings are provided with final windows or covered with polyethylene barriers. All
stored material must be covered with polyethylene, supported above concrete floors, and
provided with adequate airflow. Stricter requirements recommended or required by
product manufacturers shall be followed. Any a material that is subjected to moisture
damage will not be used and must be removed from the site.
3. All mechanical equipment shall be stored until installation only when all window
openings have the existing windows, final windows, or covered with polyethylene
barriers. All stored material must remain in shipping containers and packaging an only
removed when ready to install. All stored material must be supported above the concrete
floor and provided with adequate airflow. After installation, all equipment must be
covered and protected from dust and moisture damage.
B. Interior Dust Control: Dust control building work must be in accordance with Division 1. In
addition to these sections, comply with the following:
SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES 01 35 00-2
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
SECTION 0 1 35 00- SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES
PART I -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following: Indoor Air
Quality.
B. Goals for the Project:
1. This specification section sets forth the following goals to maintain good indoor air
quality for job site conditions in the construction area in relation to the existing building.
a. Maintaining:
1) Adequate Dust Control.
2) Construction related orders due to formaldehyde
3) Construction related orders due to VOC emissions.
4) Combustion by-products generated by heaters, cutting torches,etc.
5) Biological contamination resulting from mold,animal droppings, etc.
C. Where the term "as required", "necessary", or "adequate", are used in this specification, the
! " Owner and Architect will make the final determination that the Contractor's work meets the
intent of these terms.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Indoor Air Quality Action Management Plan. Plan for the construction for each phase and pre-
occupancy phases of the building as follows:
1. During Construction meet or exceed the recommended Control Measures of the Sheet
Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA) IAQ
Guidelines for Occupied Buildings under Construction, 1995,Chapter 3.
2. Protect stored on-site or installed absorptive materials form moisture damage.
3. If permanently installed air handlers are used during construction, filtration media with a
on Minimum Efficiency Reporting Value(MERV)of 8 shall be used at each return air grille,
as determined by ASHREA 52.2-1999. Replace all filtration media immediately prior to
occupancy.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. During the preconstruction meeting and immediately prior to any demolition work or new
construction work representatives of each subcontractor shall meet with the General Contractor
in a briefing session on what measures are being taken to protect indoor air quality and how
SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES O1 35 00- 1
� �t
BARG '•IANN HE\DRIE + ARCHET'YI'E, I NC.
tw Architecture I Planning I Interior Design
300 A Street 617 350 0450 tel bha @bhplus.com
Boston,MA 02210-1710 617 350 0215 fax www.bhplus.com
submittal response form
date:
project&number: Kollmorgen Electro-Optical
® BH+A Project No 2883
submittal no:
This submittal has been reviewed for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design
concept expressed inn the Contract Documents.This review has not been conducted for the purpose of determining the accuracy
and completeness of other details such as dimensions and quantities or for substantiating instructions for installation or
performances of equipment or systems designed by the Contractor,all of which remain the responsibility of the Contractor to the
extent required by the Contract Documents.The Architect's review shall not constitute approval of safety precautions or,unless
otherwise specifically stated by the Architect, of construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures. The
Architect's approval of a specific item shall not indicate approval of an assembly of which the item is a component. When
professional certification of performance characteristics of materials,systems or equipment is required by the Contract Documents,
the Architect shall be entitled to rely upon such certification to establish that the materials,systems or equipment will meet the
performance criteria required by the Contract Documents.
r�
action: Reviewed and approved,subject to the limitations noted above
Op Reviewed and approved as noted,subject to the limitations noted above.
Revise and Resubmit
tw
Disapproved
reviewed by:
comments:
on
P:\2883_kollmorgen\doc\specs\102309\attachments\submittalresponse.doc
1M
ow
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA .+
3.3 SPECIMEN STAMPS
A. Architect's Action Stamp
TW#Psomiltal kasr l eft revie ota for the thrho
of ct€trkimo Mr maa.°oxs g6 i€h iTa?otmatsan gwev ate
she€ie�igr macep€ !"ftr.Md in the C°crwwl Dammesw.
IP a rattew has;riot perm ctr,.ductud Jof ine purpiwe of
dverminiar the accuracy Uod <,om rtrceneaa of ter et
cutasSs r,€s c:ra as €lsrrzss°iasraa and qu*rti#iez or for
sunsatantirtong itts:€ruvtlonac ft=r staet,ttTatierta or
*g, zCvzax az ss�r of vttutpeatersa of x.°,.gcerr4N alc;�greed by tip
C"o lrac cat, atl taf wls h vz;—<su the re"'sazeaihility of
the contTactor to ?hc e Xtvnt rcjt¢aTe i my atse C:"tentmrf !ARIA
fr a kxeu a,
Ter r Arch cct' cc ax w is all r—t oearsaraaanke
aiaMast a of Any t tar st hvfw€?e
spe t'r:i"Hy om ? my la< Amalwn tai tommmamo
xsc za racsl s vF ,au saea.a g t,e€carer. €he
-` Arcnateel' am v° chic Am Awl! not
ta.c iLtx4x' ;Y.�.Ya
or, im ,,.c,_x; y z, wh '. Ow itc€aa u, # 40
LVhz.,. ,+a ca f,--a;atz e.: a;bot;S eta3s<a tg of
,al 4a�a.e't ;tic, <<Y.&Y"Ra. of
t: r qu; t;. .s, om E ra3r. -; tsz,"Mam the
w'az,c._,,..,< w r,whl"h not 3h, un i,atrt, �T'wnr2 tt NP
sy o.�css, z�a;ex, I =. ,a;-.aa..r;€,arsa-t. c°cs>c:tr a��al€aarrz
Div th� L least_c t
C WS)
f2rt`rs d and a`a+>lvr«avc-4 ttuh, t rar the taa,'rrararrat<s
:t .f,Ni;ifcaw.,°tar,,..d axfxa-a+w:a s.a roar d. +z;!,jev:r d0 MW
t "t ;a3rg%b3f!'a rs€L%D4€n1z^& ax a..„g= me
jPP. yj
km sr and rrS,"?ra4'i
j3r.s°^.Fs3rr+s"tt..
■w
Ry
END OF SECTION 013300
RR.
RRw
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300- 12
low
OR
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
1. Stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate
action.
2. In lieu of an action stamp, Architect may attach a submittal response form identified
action taken and providing comments. Samples are included at the end of this section.
C. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will
return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to
appropriate party.
D. Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial
submittals has received prior approval from Architect.
E. Incomplete submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be
returned without review.
#�w F. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 11
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
Northampton, MA ,
Y. Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and
Maintenance Data."
Z. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to,
performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations.
Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads.
Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for
calculations. Include page numbers.
2.2 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES
A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a
design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide
products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.
I. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit *'
a written request for additional information to Architect.
B. Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and
other required submittals, submit digitally-signed PDF electronic file and (3)three paper copies
of certificate, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and
system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional.
1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the
Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing
these services.
W.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW
A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with
other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections
and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect.
B. Project Closeout and Maintenance/Material Submittals: Refer to requirements in Division 01
Section "Closeout Procedures."
C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name
and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date
of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked,
and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.
3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION
A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and
will return them without action.
B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or
modifications required,and return it. Architect will take the following actions:
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300- 10
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
N. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is
authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.
O. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying
that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of
manufacturing experience where required.
P. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
Q. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
R. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's
standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with
requirements in the Contract Documents.
S. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating current product produced by
manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on
evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or
on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
T. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project.
Include the following information:
1. Name of evaluation organization.
2. Date of evaluation.
3. Time period when report is in effect.
4. Product and manufacturers'names.
5. Description of product.
6. Test procedures and results.
7. Limitations of use.
U. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section
"Quality Requirements."
V. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing
agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation
of product,for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.
1 W. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing
agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed
before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate
preparation needed for adhesion.
X. Field Test Reports: Submit reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed
either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for
compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300-9
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
E. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary
indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the
following information in tabular form:
1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product indicated in the Contract
Documents..
2. Manufacturer and product name,and model number if applicable.
3. Number and name of room or space.
4. Location within room or space.
5. Retain subparagraph below unless default submittal format specified elsewhere in this
article applies.
6. Submit product schedule in the following format:
a. PDF electronic file.
F. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01
Section "Construction Progress Documentation."
G. Application for Payment: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section
"Payment Procedures."
H. Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Payment
Procedures."
I. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each
portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a
special design. Include the following information in tabular form:
1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying
products.
2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s)covered by subcontract.
3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract.
4. Submit subcontract list in the following format:
a. PDF electronic file.
J. LEED Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Sustainable '
Design Requirements."
I. Submit LEED submittals in the following format:
a. PDF electronic file.
K. Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Project
Management and Coordination."
L. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience
of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact
information of architects and owners, and other information specified.
M. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel
comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure .�
Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on American Welding Society (AWS) forms.
Include names of firms and personnel certified.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300- 8
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop
Drawings on sheets at least 8-112 by 11 inches (215 by 280 mm)but no larger than 30 by
42 inches(750 by 1067 nim)] .
3. Submit Shop Drawings in the following format:
a. PDF electronic file.
D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these
characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between
submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.
I. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together
in one submittal package.
2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:
a. Generic description of Sample.
b. Product name and name of manufacturer.
C. Sample source.
d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section.
3. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-
control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be
used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.
a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual
Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time
of use.
b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's
property,are the property of Contractor.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of
units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns
available.
d. Number of Samples: Submit (2) two full set(s) of available choices where color,
pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from
manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected.
4. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared
from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and
physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of
color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the
following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or
containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing
color,texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing
and inspection.
a. Number of Samples: Submit [3] three sets of Samples. Architect will retain (1)
one Sample sets; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned
Sample set as a Project record sample.
1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication
techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to
be demonstrated.
2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in
material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least [3] three sets of
paired units that show approximate limits of variations.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300-7
ww
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
4. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements
specified in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures." ..
5. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of
entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be
signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that
entity. *�+
a. Provide a digital signature with digital certificate on electronically-submitted
certificates and certifications where indicated.
b. Provide a notarized statement on original paper copy certificates and certifications
where indicated.
B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and
type of product or equipment.
1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data
are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.
2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.
3. Include the following information, as applicable:
a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts.
b. Manufacturer's product specifications. ,
C. Standard color charts.
d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards.
e. Testing by recognized testing agency. .e.
f. Application of testing agency labels and seals.
g. Notation of coordination requirements.
h. Availability and delivery time information.
4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable:
a. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring.
b. Printed performance curves.
C. Operational range diagrams.
d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop
Drawings.
5. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples.
6. Submit Product Data in the following format:
a. PDF electronic file.
b. (4) four paper copies of Product Data, unless otherwise indicated. Architect, will
return(l)one copy. ■*
C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base
Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data, unless
submittal based upon Architect's digital data drawing files is otherwise permitted.
1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the
following information, as applicable:
a. Identification of products.
b. Schedules.
C. Compliance with specified standards.
d. Notation of coordination requirements.
e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated.
g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.
w
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300-6
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
! Northampton,MA
a. Project name.
b. Date.
C. Destination(To:).
d. Source(From:).
e. Names of subcontractor,manufacturer,and supplier.
f. Category and type of submittal.
g. Submittal purpose and description.
h. Specification Section number and title.
! i. Indication of full or partial submittal.
j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
k. Transmittal number.
1. Submittal and transmittal distribution record.
m. Remarks.
n. Signature of transmitter.
2. On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant
information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on
previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents,
including minor variations and limitations. Include same identification information as
related submittal.
J. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.
1. Note date and content of previous submittal.
2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of
revision.
3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect's action
stamp.
K. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers,
fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of
construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.
L. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals that are marked with approval notation from
Architect's action stamp.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required by
individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification
Sections.
1. Submit electronic submittals via email as PDF electronic files.
a. Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an
electronic Project record document file.
2. Action Submittals: Submit (4) four paper copies of each submittal, unless Contractor
requires more than(1)one copy returned. Architectwill return [1] one copies.
3. Informational Submittals: Submit (4) four paper copies of each submittal, unless
otherwise indicated. Architect will not return copies.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300- 5
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA ■W
shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g.,
061000.0 LA). a.
k. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
1. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
M. Location(s)where product is to be installed, as appropriate.
n. Other necessary identification. an
E. Identification and Information: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic
submittal file as follows: 40
1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file with links enabling
navigation to each item.
2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. go
a. File name shall use project identifier and Specification Section number followed
by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., LNHS-061000.01).
Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g.,
LNHS-061000.01.A).
3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval
markings and action taken by Architect.
4. Include the following information on an inserted cover sheet: .�
a. Project name.
b. Date.
C. Name and address of Architect.
d. Name of Construction Manager. w
e. Name of Contractor.
f. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal.
g. Name of subcontractor.
h. Name of supplier.
i. Name of manufacturer.
j. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
k. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
1. Location(s)where product is to be installed, as appropriate.
m. Related physical samples submitted directly. ww
n. Other necessary identification.
5. Include the following information as keywords in the electronic file metadata:
a. Project name.
b. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
C. Manufacturer name.
d. Product name.
F. Options: Identify options requiring selection by the Architect. w�
G. Deviations: Identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals.
H. Additional Paper Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless
Architect observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal
may serve as final submittal.
1. Transmittal: Assemble each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and
handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will return submittals,
without review, received from sources other than Contractor.
1. Transmittal Form: Provide locations on form for the following information:
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300-4
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of
construction activities.
a. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other
submittals,and related activities that require sequential activity.
b. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently
unless partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved
submittal schedule.
C. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same
Specification Section as separate packages under separate transmittals.
d. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work
so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals
concurrently for coordination.
e. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring
coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.
C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows.
Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the
Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of
the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.
1. Initial Review: Allow [15] fifteen days for initial review of each submittal involving one
of the Architect's subconstultants and (7) seven days for architectural submittals. Allow
additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will
advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.
2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner
as initial submittal.
3. Resubmittal Review: Allow(7) seven days for review of each resubmittal.
4. Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by Architect's consultants,
Owner, or other parties is indicated, allow (14) fourteen days for initial review of each
submittal.
D. Identification and Information: Place a permanent label or title block on each paper copy
submittal item for identification.
1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block.
2. Provide a space approximately [6 by 8 inches (150 by 200 mm) on label or beside title
block to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by
Architect[and Construction Manager].
3. Include the following information for processing and recording action taken:
a. Project name.
b. Date.
C. Name of Architect.
d. Name of Construction Manager.
e. Name of Contractor.
f. Name of subcontractor.
g. Name of supplier.
h. Name of manufacturer.
i. Revise first subparagraph below to suit Project and office practice.
j. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.
1) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a
decimal point and then a sequential number(e.g., 061000.01). Resubmittals
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300- 3
.s
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
D. Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format licensed by Adobe Systems
used for representing documents in a device-independent and display resolution-independent
fixed-layout document format.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS w
A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates
required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing,
fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making
corrections or modifications to submittals noted by the Architect and additional time for
handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections.
1. Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values, and ww
Contractor's construction schedule.
2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with start-up construction schedule. Include
submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those submittals
required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of
long lead time for manufacture or fabrication.
3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's ..
construction schedule.
4. Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format:
a. Scheduled date for first submittal.
b. Specification Section number and title.
C. Submittal category: Action, informational.
d. Name of subcontractor.
e. Description of the Work covered.
f. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval.
g. Retain three subparagraphs below if CPM construction schedules are required.
h. Scheduled dates for purchasing. ,
i. Scheduled dates for installation.
j. Activity or event number.
1.5 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Architect's Digital Data Files: Electronic copies of CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings
will be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.
1. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data drawing files of the Contract
Drawings for use in preparing Shop Drawings.
a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital
data drawing files as they relate to the Contract Drawings.
b. Digital Drawing Software Program: The Contract Drawings are available in Revit
or Revit converted to AutoCad.
C. Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of an Agreement
form acceptable to the Owner and Architect.
d. The architect and their consultants will charge ($25) twenty-five dollars per sheet
to prepare Contract Documents for Contractor's use.
e. The following plot files will by furnished for each appropriate discipline:
1) Floor plans.
2) Reflected ceiling plans.
3) BIM Model
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300-2
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
SECTION 013300- SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural
requirements for submitting Shop Drawings,Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.
B. Certain submittals, including but not limited to Section 075423 — FM IA-60
THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING requires simultaneous review by
Factory Mutual. The Architect and Owner have no control on the timing of the FM review;
Contractor shall provide adequate time to facilitate the FM review. Delay in review by FM shall
RS not be a cause for a delay or extension of Contract Time.
C. Related Sections:
1. Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures" for submitting Applications for Payment and
the schedule of values.
2. Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules
and reports, including Contractor's construction schedule.
3. Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and
maintenance manuals.
4. Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record
Specifications,and record Product Data.
5. Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training" for submitting video recordings of
demonstration of equipment and training of Owner's personnel.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require
Architect's responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual
Specification Sections as action submittals.
B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not
require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with
requirements. Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individual
Specification Sections as informational submittals.
C. File Transfer Protocol (FTP): Communications protocol that enables transfer of files to and
from another computer over a network and that serves as the basis for standard Internet
protocols. An FTP site is a portion of a network located outside of network firewalls within
which internal and external users are able to access files.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300- 1
w
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA w.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
.w
2.1 PHOTOGRAPHIC MEDIA
A. Digital Images: Provide images in JPG format, produced by a digital camera with minimum
sensor size of[8] eight megapixels, and at an image resolution of not less than 1600 by 1200
pixels and 400 dpi.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS
A. General: Take photographs using the maximum range of depth of field, and that are in focus, to •
clearly show the Work. Photographs with blurry or out-of-focus areas will not be accepted.
B. Digital Images: Submit digital images exactly as originally recorded in the digital camera,
without alteration,manipulation, editing, or modifications using image-editing software.
C. Periodic Construction Photographs: Take a minimum of(36) thirty six with the cutoff date
associated with each Application for Payment. Select vantage points to show status of
construction and progress since last photographs were taken.
D. Additional Photographs: Architect may request photographs in addition to periodic
photographs specified.
1. Three days'notice will be given, where feasible.
2. In emergency situations,take additional photographs within 24 hours of request.
3. Circumstances that could require additional photographs include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Special events planned at Project site.
b. Immediate follow-up when on-site events result in construction damage or losses.
C. Photographs to be taken at fabrication locations away from Project site. These
photographs are not subject to unit prices or unit-cost allowances.
d. Substantial Completion of a major phase or component of the Work.
e. Extra record photographs at time of final acceptance.
f. Owner's request for special publicity photographs.
END OF SECTION 013233
PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 013233 -2
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
SECTION 013233 -PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:
1. Periodic construction photographs.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training" for submitting video recordings of
demonstration of equipment and training of Owner's personnel.
1.3 INTENT
A. It is the intent of the Project to have the Contractor provide a monthly photographic record of
the project. The Contractor may take and prepare the photographs as long as the are clear, in
focus and accurately record the progress of the work. A professional photographer is not
required unless the quality of the photographs taken by the Contractor are not acceptable to the
on Architect and Owner.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Digital Photographs: Submit image files within(7)seven days of taking photographs.
1. Format: Minimum 1600 by 1200 pixels, 400 dpi minimum, in unaltered original files,
00 with same aspect ratio as the sensor, uncropped, date- and time- stamped, in folder named
by date of photograph, accompanied by key plan file.
2. Identification: Provide the following information in an accompanying narrative for each
W image:
a. Name of Project.
b. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction , and elevation or story
of construction.
PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 013233 - 1
.w,
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
3. As the Work progresses, indicate final completion percentage for each activity.
B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect and Owner, separate
contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a
need-to-know schedule responsibility.
1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices.
2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the
same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned
portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities. ..
END OF SECTION O1 3200
wry
..rA
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200-6
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
6. Accidents.
7. Meetings and significant decisions.
8. Unusual events(refer to special reports).
9. Stoppages,delays, shortages, and losses.
10. Meter readings and similar recordings.
11. Emergency procedures.
12. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction.
13. Change Orders received and implemented.
14. Change Directives received and implemented.
15. Services connected and disconnected.
16. Equipment or system tests and startups.
17. Partial completions and occupancies.
18. Substantial Completions authorized.
B. Material Location Reports: At monthly intervals, prepare and submit a comprehensive list of
materials delivered to and stored at Project site. List shall be cumulative, showing materials
previously reported plus items recently delivered. Include with list a statement of progress on
and delivery dates for materials or items of equipment fabricated or stored away from Project
site.
C. Field Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between field conditions
and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a Request for
Information. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with
recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.
2.5 SPECIAL REPORTS
on A. General: Submit special reports directly to Owner within (3) three day(s) of an occurrence.
Distribute copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence.
B. Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at
IN Project site, whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report.
List chain of events, persons participating, response by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of
results or effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise Owner in advance when these
events are known or predictable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect
actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule in conjunction with the draft
application for payment.
1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have
been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each
such meeting.
2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not
limited to, changes in logic,durations, actual starts and finishes,and activity durations.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200- 5
w
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
3. Processing: Process data to produce output data on a computer-drawn, time-scaled
network. Revise data, reorganize activity sequences, and reproduce as often as necessary
to produce the CPM schedule within the limitations of the Contract Time.
4. Format: Mark the critical path. Locate the critical path near center of network; locate
paths with most float near the edges.
5. Cost- and Resource-Loading of CPM Schedule: Assign cost to construction activities on
the CPM schedule. Do not assign costs to submittal activities. Obtain Architect's
approval prior to assigning costs to fabrication and delivery activities. Assign costs under
principal subcontracts for testing and commissioning activities, operation and �*
maintenance manuals, punch list activities, Project record documents, LEED
documentation, and demonstration and training.
E. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its
submission, prepare a time-impact analysis using a network fragment to demonstrate the effect
of the proposed change on the overall project schedule.
F. Initial Issue of Schedule: Prepare initial network diagram from a sorted activity list indicating
straight "early start-total float." Identify critical activities. Prepare tabulated reports showing
the following: .�.
1. Contractor or subcontractor and the Work or activity.
2. Description of activity.
3. Principal events of activity.
4. Immediate preceding and succeeding activities.
5. Early and late start dates.
6. Early and late finish dates.
7. Activity duration in workdays.
8. Total float or slack time.
9. Average size of workforce.
10. Dollar value of activity (coordinated with the schedule of values).
G. Schedule Updating: Concurrent with making revisions to schedule, prepare tabulated reports
showing the following:
1. Identification of activities that have changed.
2. Changes in early and late start dates.
3. Changes in early and late finish dates.
4. Changes in activity durations in workdays.
5. Changes in the critical path.
6. Changes in total float or slack time.
7. Changes in the Contract Time.
2.4 REPORTS
,0
A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following
information concerning events at Project site:
I. List of subcontractors at Project site. •R
2. Approximate count of personnel at Project site.
3. Equipment at Project site.
4. Material deliveries.
5. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions, including presence of rain or ..
snow.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200-4
on
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
2.2 START-UP CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A. Bar-Chart Schedule: Submit start-up horizontal bar-chart-type construction schedule within(7)
seven days of date established for commencement of the Work.
B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of
each week with a continuous vertical line. Outline significant construction activities for first
[90]ninety days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a
cash requirement prediction based on indicated activities.
2.3 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE(CPM SCHEDULE)
A. General: Prepare network diagrams using AON(activity-on-node)format.
B. Start-up Network Diagram: Submit diagram within [14] fouteen days of date established for
commencement of the Work. Outline significant construction activities for the first [90] ninety
days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash
requirement prediction based on indicated activities.
C. CPM Schedule: Prepare Contractor's construction schedule using a[cost- and resource-loaded,]
time-scaled CPM network analysis diagram for the Work.
1. Develop network diagram in sufficient time to submit CPM schedule so it can be
accepted for use no later than [30)thirty days after date established for commencement of
the Work.
a. Failure to include any work item required for performance of this Contract shall
not excuse Contractor from completing all work within applicable completion
dates,regardless of Architect's approval of the schedule.
2. Use "one workday" as the unit of time for individual activities. Indicate nonworking
days and holidays incorporated into the schedule in order to correlate with Contract Time.
D. CPM Schedule Preparation: Prepare a list of all activities required to complete the Work.
Using the start-up network diagram, prepare a skeleton network to identify probable critical
paths.
1. Activities: Indicate the estimated time duration, sequence requirements, and relationship
of each activity in relation to other activities. Include estimated time frames for the
following activities:
a. Preparation and processing of submittals.
b. Mobilization and demobilization.
C. Purchase of materials.
d. Delivery.
e. Fabrication.
f. Utility interruptions.
g. Installation.
h. Work by Owner that may affect or be affected by Contractor's activities.
i. Testing and commissioning.
j. Punch list and final completion.
k. Activities occurring following final completion.
2. Critical Path Activities: Identify critical path activities, including those for interim
completion dates. Scheduled start and completion dates shall be consistent with Contract
milestone dates.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200-3
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton, MA
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONTRACTOR'S AS-PLANNED CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for commencement of the Work to date of
final completion.
I. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an
early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.
B. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each principal
element of the Work. Comply with the following:
I. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than (30) thirty days, unless
specifically allowed by Architect.
2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long
lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities .�
in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals,
approvals,purchasing, fabrication,and delivery.
3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Division 01
Section "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in
Contractor's construction schedule with submittal schedule.
4. Startup and Testing Time: Include not less than [l 5] fifteen days for startup and testing.
5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for
Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures
necessary for certification of Substantial Completion.
6. Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than (45) forty-five days for punch **
list and final completion.
C. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but
not limited to,the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and final completion.
D. Cost Correlation: At the head of schedule, provide a cost correlation line, indicating planned
and actual costs. On the line, show dollar volume of the Work performed as of dates used for
preparation of payment requests.
E. Upcoming Work Summary: Prepare summary report indicating activities scheduled to occur or �►
commence prior to submittal of next schedule update. Summarize the following issues:
1. Unresolved issues.
2. Unanswered RFIs.
3. Rejected or unretumed submittals.
4. Notations on returned submittals.
wu
F. Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is [14] fourteen or more calendar
days behind the current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule indicating
means by which Contractor intends to regain compliance with the schedule. Indicate changes to ,■„
working hours, working days, crew sizes, and equipment required to achieve compliance, and
date by which recovery will be accomplished.
G. Computer Scheduling Software: Prepare schedules using current version of a program that has
been developed specifically to manage construction schedules.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200-2
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
± ► Northampton,MA
SECTION 013200 -CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
PART 1 -GENERAL
on
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
po A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of
construction during performance of the Work, including the following:
1. Start-up construction schedule.
2. Contractor's construction schedule.
3. Daily construction reports.
4. Material location reports.
5. Field condition reports.
! 6. Special reports.
B. Related Sections:
on 1. Division 01 Section"Submittal Procedures" for submitting schedules and reports.
2. Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting a schedule of tests and
inspections.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format:
1. PDF electronic file.
B. Start-up construction schedule.
1. Approval of cost-loaded start-up construction schedule will not constitute approval of
schedule of values for cost-loaded activities.
tw
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of
construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors.
B. Coordinate Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values, submittal schedule,
progress reports,payment requests,and other required schedules and reports.
1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from entities
involved.
2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule
them in proper sequence.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200- 1
g•
ARCHITECT'S RESPONSE TO REQUEST FOR INFORMATION
Project: Kollmorgen Electro-Optical Owner: Kollmorgen Electro-Optical
Northampton,MA Northampton,MA
+ " DATE: CONTRACTOR'S RFI No._
FROM: To:
Bargmann Hendrie+Archetype, Inc.
300 A Street
Boston,MA 02210
T.617-350-0450 Fax:
F:617-350-0215 Pages:
The following is our response to the issues raised in the"Request for Information",noted above:
Attachments:
Distribution:
so
w
tie
Advancement
of Construction
Technology REQUEST FOR
INTERPRETATION
Project: Kollmorgen Electro-Optical R.F.I.Number:
From:
A!P
To: Bargmann Hendrie+Archetype,Inc. Date:
40 300 A Street,Boston,MA 02210 A/E Project Number:2883
Re: Contract For:General Construction
Specification Section: Paragraph: Drawing Reference: Detail:
Request:
Signed by: Date:
Response:
40
❑Attachments
Response From: To: Date Rec'd: Date Ret®d:
Signed by: Date:
Copies: ❑Owner ❑Consultants ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑File
Copyright 1994,Construction Specifications Institute, Page of July 1994
99 Canal Center Plaza,Suite 300 Alexandria,VA 22314 CSI Form 13.2A
to
ttw
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA w
3. Reporting: Record meeting results and distribute copies to everyone in attendance and to
others affected by decisions or actions resulting from each meeting.
PART 2- PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION(Not Used)
END OF SECTION 013100
w
.R
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100- 10
•
y
on
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
14) Status of RFIs.
15) Status of proposal requests.
16) Pending changes.
17) Status of Change Orders.
18) Pending claims and disputes.
op 19) Documentation of information for payment requests.
4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute the
meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information.
a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each progress
meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue
revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.
E. Coordination Meetings: Conduct Project coordination meetings at weekly or biweekly intervals
depending on the status of construction. Project coordination meetings are in addition to
specific meetings held for other purposes, such as progress meetings and preinstallation
conferences.
1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner,Owner's Commissioning Authority
and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with
current progress or involved in planning,coordination, or performance of future activities
shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meetings shall be familiar
with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous coordination meeting.
Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for
discussion as appropriate to status of Project.
! ! a. Combined Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last
coordination meeting. Determine whether each contract is on time, ahead of
schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to combined Contractor's construction
'w schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure
commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions
are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed
within the Contract Time.
b. Schedule Updating: Revise combined Contractor's construction schedule after
each coordination meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or
recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with report of each meeting.
C. Review present and future needs of each contractor present, including the
following:
1) Interface requirements.
2) Sequence of operations.
3) Status of submittals.
4) Deliveries.
5) Off-site fabrication.
6) Access.
7) Site utilization.
8) Temporary facilities and controls.
9) Work hours.
10) Hazards and risks.
11) Progress cleaning.
12) Quality and work standards.
13) Change Orders.
w
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100-9
.s
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA .,
a. Preparation of record documents.
b. Procedures required prior to inspection for Substantial Completion and for final
inspection for acceptance.
C. Submittal of written warranties.
d. Requirements for preparing sustainable design documentation.
e. Requirements for preparing operations and maintenance data.
f. Requirements for demonstration and training.
g. Preparation of Contractor's punch list.
h. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment at Substantial Completion and
for final payment.
i. Submittal procedures.
j. Coordination of separate contracts.
k. Owner's partial occupancy requirements.
1. Installation of Owner's furniture, fixtures, and equipment.
m. Responsibility for removing temporary facilities and controls.
.w
4. Minutes: Entity conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes.
D. Progress Meetings: Architect progress meetings at intervals appropriate to construction but not *�+
more than weekly.
1. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests.
2. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner,Owner's Commissioning Authority
and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with
current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities
shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar
with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
3. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review
other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as *�
appropriate to status of Project.
a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting.
Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule,
in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction
behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to
do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and
subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.
1) Review schedule for next period.
b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:
1) Revise subparagraphs below to suit Project.
2) Interface requirements.
3) Sequence of operations.
4) Status of submittals.
w
5) Deliveries.
6) Off-site fabrication.
7) Access.
8) Site utilization. ,
9) Temporary facilities and controls.
10) Progress cleaning.
11) Quality and work standards.
12) Status of correction of deficient items.
13) Field observations.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100- 8
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Owner
and Architect of scheduled meeting dates.
2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the
particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:
a. Contract Documents.
b. Options.
C. Related RFIs.
d. Related Change Orders.
e. Purchases.
f. Deliveries.
g. Submittals.
h. Review of mockups.
i. Possible conflicts.
j. Compatibility problems.
k. Time schedules.
1. Weather limitations.
m. Manufacturer's written recommendations.
n. Warranty requirements.
o. Compatibility of materials.
p. Acceptability of substrates.
q. Temporary facilities and controls.
r. Space and access limitations.
S. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
t. Testing and inspecting requirements.
U. Installation procedures.
V. Coordination with other work.
W. Required performance results.
X. Protection of adjacent work.
ter y. Protection of construction and personnel.
3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including
required corrective measures and actions.
4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties
requiring information.
5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded.
Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the
Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.
C. Project Closeout Conference: Schedule and conduct a Project closeout conference, at a time
convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than(60) sixty days prior to the scheduled date
of Substantial Completion.
I. Conduct the conference to review requirements and responsibilities related to Project
closeout.
2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Owner's Commissioning Authority,
Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors;
suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the meeting. Participants at the
meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the
Work.
3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect or delay Project closeout,
including the following:
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100-7
«�u
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA ,wR
10. Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as
appropriate.
1.8 PROJECT MEETINGS
A. Preconstruction Conference: Owner and Architect will schedule and conduct a preconstruction
conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no
later than (7)seven days after execution of the Agreement.
1. Conduct the conference to review responsibilities and personnel assignments.
2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants;
Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned
parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with
Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the
following:
a. Tentative construction schedule.
b. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items.
C. Designation of key personnel and their duties. w.
d. Lines of communications.
e. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders.
f. Procedures for RFIs.
g. Procedures for testing and inspecting. w.
h. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.
i. Distribution of the Contract Documents.
j. Submittal procedures.
k. Sustainable design requirements.
1. Preparation of record documents.
m. Use of the premises.
n. Work restrictions.
o. Working hours.
p. Owner's occupancy requirements.
q. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls.
r. Procedures for moisture and mold control.
S. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns.
t. Construction waste management and recycling.
U. Parking availability.
V. Office,work,and storage areas.
W. Equipment deliveries and priorities. .,
X. First aid.
Y. Security.
Z. Progress cleaning.
4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting
minutes.
B. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each
construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.
1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or
affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100-6
!*
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
7. RFI subject.
8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate.
9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
10. Field dimensions and conditions,as appropriate.
11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's solution(s) impacts the Contract Time
or the Contract Sum,Contractor shall state impact in the RFI.
12. Contractor's signature.
13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop
Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items
needing interpretation.
a. Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected
materials, assemblies,and attachments on attached sketches.
C. RFI Forms: AIA Document G716 or Software-generated form with substantially the same
go content as indicated above, acceptable to Architect.
D. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond.
Allow(7)seven working days for RFI's involving one of the Architect's subconsultants and(5)
days for Architect's response for each RFI.
1. The following RFIs will be returned without action:
a. Requests for approval of submittals.
b. Requests for approval of substitutions.
C. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract
Documents.
d. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum.
e. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals.
f. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs.
W 2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case
Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information.
3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the
Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to
Division 01 Section "Contract Modification Procedures."
E. On receipt of Architect's action,update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response
to affected parties. Review response and notify Architectwithin [5] five days if Contractor
disagrees with response.
F. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number.
Submit log weekly.
1. Project name.
2. Name and address of Contractor.
3. Name and address of Architect.
4. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted.
5. RFI description.
OR 6. Date the RFI was submitted.
7. Date Architect's response was received.
8. Retain one of two subparagraphs below. First subparagraph is for use with
AIA Document A201; second is for use with EJCDC Document C-700.
9. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and
Proposal Request,as appropriate.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100-5
A
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
prepared in sufficient scope or detail, or are otherwise deficient, the Architect will so
inform the Contractor,who shall make changes as directed and resubmit.
10. Coordination Drawing Prints: Prepare coordination drawing prints in accordance with
requirements of Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures."
C. Coordination Digital Data Files: Prepare coordination digital data files in accordance with the
following requirements:
1. File Preparation Format: DWG or REVIT operating in Microsoft Windows operating
system.
2. File Submittal Format: Submit or post coordination drawing files using format same as
file preparation format.
3. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data files of the Drawings for use in ,W
preparing coordination digital data files.
a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital
data files as they relate to the Drawings.
b. Digital Data Software Program: The Drawings are available in Revit or Revit
converted to AutoCad.
C. Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of an Agreement
form acceptable to the Owner and Architect.
1.6 KEY PERSONNEL
A. Key Personnel Names: Within (15) fifteen days of starting construction operations, submit a
list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at
Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and
telephone numbers, including home, office, and cellular telephone numbers and email
addresses. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as .�.
standbys in the absence of individuals assigned to Project.
1.7 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION(RFIs)
A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of
the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified.
1. Architect will return RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by
Contractor with no response.
2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's
work or work of subcontractors.
B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or
interpretation and the following:
1. Project name.
2. Project number.
3. Date.
4. Name of Contractor.
5. Name of Architect.
6. RFI number, numbered sequentially.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100-4
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
£ Indicate required installation sequences.
g. Indicate dimensions shown on the Drawings. Specifically note dimensions that
appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance
requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect indicating proposed
resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations
will not be considered changes to the Contract.
B. Coordination Drawing Organization: Organize coordination drawings as follows:
1. Floor Plans and Reflected Ceiling Plans: Show architectural and structural elements, and
mechanical, plumbing, fire protection, fire alarm, and electrical Work. Show locations of
visible ceiling-mounted devices relative to acoustical ceiling grid. Supplement plan
drawings with section drawings where required to adequately represent the Work.
2. Plenum Space: Indicate subframing for support of ceiling and wall systems, mechanical
and electrical equipment, and related Work. Locate components within ceiling plenum to
accommodate layout of light fixtures indicated on Drawings. Indicate areas of conflict
between light fixtures and other components.
3. Mechanical Rooms: Provide coordination drawings for mechanical rooms showing plans
and elevations of mechanical, plumbing, fire protection, fire alarm, and electrical
equipment.
4. Structural Penetrations: Indicate penetrations and openings required for all disciplines.
5. Slab Edge and Embedded Items: Indicate slab edge locations and sizes and locations of
embedded items for metal fabrications, sleeves, anchor bolts, bearing plates, angles, door
floor closers, slab depressions for floor finishes, curbs and housekeeping pads, and
similar items.
6. Mechanical and Plumbing Work: Show the following:
a. Sizes and bottom elevations of ductwork, piping, and conduit runs, including
F„ insulation,bracing, flanges,and support systems.
b. Dimensions of major components, such as dampers, valves, diffusers, access
doors, cleanouts and electrical distribution equipment.
w
C. Fire-rated enclosures around ductwork.
7. Electrical Work: Show the following:
go a. Runs of vertical and horizontal conduit 1-1/4 inch diameter and larger.
b. Light fixture, exit light, emergency battery pack, smoke detector, and other fire
alarm locations.
so C. Panel board, switch board, switchgear, transformer, busway, generator, and motor
control center locations.
d. Location of pull boxes and junction boxes, dimensioned from column center lines.
8. Fire Protection System: Show the following:
a. Locations of standpipes, mains piping, branch lines, pipe drops, and sprinkler
heads.
9. Review: Architect will review coordination drawings to confirm that the Work is being
PX coordinated, but not for the details of the coordination, which are the Contractor's
responsibility. If the Architect determines that the coordination drawings are not being
�w
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100-3
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and
accessibility for required maintenance, service,and repair.
3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.
B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures
required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees
at meetings.
C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative �*
procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of
the Work. Such administrative activities include,but are not limited to,the following:
1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule.
2. Preparation of the schedule of values.
3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls.
4. Delivery and processing of submittals.
5. Progress meetings.
6. Preinstallation conferences.
7. Project closeout activities.
8. Startup and adjustment of systems. w
9. Project closeout activities.
D. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with
consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. Coordinate use of
temporary utilities to minimize waste.
1.5 COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A. Coordination Drawings, General: Prepare coordination drawings in accordance with ..s
requirements in individual Sections, where installation is not completely shown on Shop
Drawings, where limited space availability necessitates coordination, or if coordination is
required to facilitate integration of products and materials fabricated or installed by more than
one entity.
1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large enough to
indicate and resolve conflicts. Do not base coordination drawings on standard printed
data. Include the following information, as applicable:
a. Use applicable Drawings as a basis for preparation of coordination drawings.
Prepare sections, elevations, and details as needed to describe relationship of
various systems and components.
b. Coordinate the addition of trade-specific information to the coordination drawings
by multiple contractors in a sequence that best provides for coordination of the
information and resolution of conflicts between installed components before
submitting for review.
C. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural,
structural, civil,mechanical, and electrical systems.
d. Indicate space requirements for routine maintenance and for anticipated
replacement of components during the life of the installation.
e. Show location and size of access doors required for access to concealed dampers,
valves, and other controls.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100-2
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
SECTION 013100-PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
RPM
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
W
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project
including,but not limited to,the following:
1. General project coordination procedures.
2. Administrative and supervisory personnel.
3. Coordination drawings.
4. Requests for Information(RFIs).
5. Project meetings.
B. Each contractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Certain areas of responsibility
are assigned to a specific contractor.
C. Related Sections:
1. Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and
submitting Contractor's construction schedule.
2. Division 01 Section "Execution" for procedures for coordinating general installation and
field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points.
3. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating closeout of the Contract.
J" 4. Division 01 Section "General Commissioning Requirements" for coordinating the Work
with Owner's commissioning authority.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. RFL• Request from Contractor seeking information from the Owner and Architect during
construction.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the
Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate
construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper
installation,connection,and operation.
1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where
installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before
or after its own installation.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100- 1
go
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
go Northampton,MA
4. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens."
5. AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment."
6. Evidence that claims have been settled.
7. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of
date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed
responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work.
PART 2- PRODUCTS(Not Used)
PART 3 -EXECUTION(Not Used)
END OF SECTION 012900
tsr
go
PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900-5
on
.w
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA 00
H. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's
lien from entities lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the Contract and
related to the Work covered by the payment.
1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after
deduction for retainage,on each item. "*
2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full
waivers.
3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit
waivers.
4. Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms, executed in a manner acceptable to
Owner.
w�
I. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or
coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:
1. List of subcontractors.
2. Schedule of values.
3. Contractor's construction schedule(preliminary if not final).
4. Combined Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final) incorporating
Work of multiple contracts, with indication of acceptance of schedule by each Contractor.
5. Products list(preliminary if not final).
6. Submittal schedule(preliminary if not final).
7. List of Contractor's staff assignments.
8. List of Contractor's principal consultants.
9. Copies of building permits. ■u
10. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for
performance of the Work.
11. Initial progress report.
12. Report of preconstruction conference.
13. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies.
14. Performance and payment bonds.
15. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance.
J. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Substantial
Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of
the Work claimed as substantially complete.
1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a ,
statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.
2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued
previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.
K. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting
documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the
following:
I. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements.
2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof
that taxes,fees, and similar obligations were paid.
3. Updated final statement,accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum.
PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900-4
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
r Northampton,MA
1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial
Completion,and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.
B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement
between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction work covered by each Application
for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement.
C. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement
between Owner and Contractor. The period covered by each Application for Payment is one
month, ending on the last day of the month.
1. Submit draft copy of Application for Payment seven days prior to due date for review by
Architect.
D. Application for Payment Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703, or as
form for Applications for Payment.
E. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person
authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete
applications without action.
I. Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction schedule.
Use updated schedules if revisions were made.
2. Include amounts for work completed following previous Application for Payment,
whether or not payment has been received. Include only amounts for work completed at
time of Application for Payment.
3. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last
day of construction period covered by application.
4. Indicate separate amounts for work being carried out under Owner-requested project
acceleration.
F. Stored Materials: Include in Application for Payment amounts applied for materials or
equipment purchased or fabricated and stored,but not yet installed. Differentiate between items
stored on-site and items stored off-site.
1. Provide certificate of insurance, evidence of transfer of title to Owner, and consent of
�. surety to payment,for stored materials.
2. Provide supporting documentation that verifies amount requested, such as paid invoices.
Match amount requested with amounts indicated on documentation; do not include
overhead and profit on stored materials.
3. Provide summary documentation for stored materials indicating the following:
a. Materials previously stored and included in previous Applications for Payment.
b. Work completed for this Application utilizing previously stored materials.
C. Additional materials stored with this Application.
d. Total materials remaining stored, including materials with this Application.
G. Transmittal: Submit (4) four signed and notarized original copies of each Application for
Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include
waivers of lien and similar attachments if required.
PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900-3
u�
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No.2883
Northampton,MA
B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items
for the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.
1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of values:
a. Project name and location.
b. Name of Architect.
C. Architect's project number. so
d. Contractor's name and address.
e. Date of submittal.
2. Arrange the schedule of values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the �**
following for each item listed:
a. Related Specification Section or Division.
b. Description of the Work. ON
C. Name of subcontractor.
d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator.
e. Name of supplier. «■
f. Change Orders(numbers)that affect value.
g. Dollar value of the following, as a percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest
one-hundredth percent,adjusted to total 100 percent. ON
1) Labor.
2) Materials.
3) Equipment.
3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued
evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project
Manual table of contents. Provide multiple line items for principal subcontract amounts.
a. Include separate line items under Contractor and principal subcontracts for LEED
documentation and other project closeout requirements.
4. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar;total shall equal the Contract Sum.
5. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work where .�
Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated
and stored,but not yet installed.
a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. If required,
include evidence of insurance.
6. Provide separate line items in the schedule of values for initial cost of materials, for each
subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.
7. Each item in the schedule of values and Applications for Payment shall be complete.
Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.
a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual
work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the schedule of values
or distributed as general overhead expense,at Contractor's option.
8. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the schedule of values before the next
Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result
in a change in the Contract Sum.
1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT w.,
A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as
certified by Architect and paid for by Owner.
so
PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900-2
oft
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
SECTION 012900-PAYMENT PROCEDURES
PART 1 -GENERAL
we
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and
process Applications for Payment.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 01 Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures
for handling changes to the Contract.
2. Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for administrative
requirements governing the preparation and submittal of the Contractor's construction
schedule.
3. Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" for administrative requirements governing
the preparation and submittal of the submittal schedule.
4. Division 01 Section "Sustainable Design Requirements" for administrative requirements
governing submittal of cost breakdown information required for LEED documentation.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract
Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's
Applications for Payment.
1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of Contractor's
construction schedule.
1. Correlate line items in the schedule of values with other required administrative forms
so and schedules, including the following:
a. Application for Payment forms with continuation sheets.
b. Submittal schedule.
C. Items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor's construction
schedule.
2. Submit the schedule of values to Architect at earliest possible date but no later than (7)
seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment.
PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900- 1
ARCHITECT CONTRACTOR OWNER
Bargmann Hendrie+Archetype ""
300 A Street
Boston, MA 02210
BY: BY: BY:
DATE: DATE: DATE:
Other
BY:
DATE: w�
ww
�w
Date
Page 2 of 2
CHANGE ORDER N0.x 0 1CHANGE-00-2883ALS �,
CHANGE ORDER
Owner [ ]
Architect [ ]
Consultant [ ]
Contractor [ ]
Field [ ]
Other [ ]
PROJECT: Kollmorgen Electro-Optical CHANGE ORDER NO.: _N
NIP Northampton, MA
DATE OF ISSUANCE:
TO CONTRACT: ARCHITECT'S
PROJECT NO.: 2883.00
CONTRACT FOR: General Construction CONTRACT DATE.
The Contract is changed as follows:
1.
$0.00
2.
$0.00
3.
$0.00
ew 4. $0.00
$0.00
No Not valid until signed by Owner,Architect and Contractor.
Theoriginal Contract Sum was........................................................................................................... $ -
Net change by previously authorized Change Orders................................................................................. $
The Contract Sum prior to this Change Order was............................................................................. $
The Contract Sum will be increased by this Change Order in the amount of....................................... $
The new Contract Sum including this Change Order will be................................................................. $ -
The Contract Time will be unchanged by............................................................................................... (0) days
The date of Substantial Completion as of the date of this Change Order therefore is................................. unchanged
NOTE: This summary does not reflect changes in the Contract Sum or Contract Time which have been authorized
by Construction Change Directive.
Date
Page 1 of 2
CHANGE ORDER NO.x p1 \CHANGE-00-2883.XLS
BULLETIN
Distribution to the Representative of the:
Owner
Architect -
Consultant
Contractor -
Field
BH+A Document B Other -
PROJECT: Kollmorgen Electro Optical BULLETIN: B-
(Name,address) Northampton,MA
OWNER: Kollmorgen Electro Optical DATE OF ISSUANCE:
TO: ARCHITECT:
Bargmann Hendrie+Archetype,Inc.
(contractor) 300 A Street
Boston,MA 02210-2208
40 ARCHITECT'S PROJECT NO:2669
CONTRACT FOR: General Construction CONTRACT DATE:
Proposal Request: Please submit an itemized quotation for changes in the Contract Sum and/or Time
PR incidental to proposed modifications to the Contract Documents described herein.
Refer to this Document in the Proposal. Submit final costs for Work involved and
change in Contract Time (if any) within seven (7) Working Days to the Architect.
Note:This is not a Change Order nor a direction to proceed with the work herein.
Supplemental Instructions: The Work shall be carried out in accordance with the following supplemental
SI instructions issued in accordance with the Contract Documents without change in
Contract Sum or Contract Time. Prior to proceeding in accordance with these
instructions, indicate your acceptance of these instructions for minor change to the
I'm Work as consistent with the Contract Documents and return a copy to the Architect
within seven(7)Working Days
Construction Change Directive:
CCD In order to expedite the Work and avoid or minimize delays in the Work which may
MR affect Contract Sum or Contract Time, the Contract Documents are amended as
described below. Proceed with this Work promptly. Submit final costs for Work
involved and change in Contract Time (if any) within five (5) Working Days to the
OR Architect,for inclusion in a subsequent Change Order. Note: Not valid unless signed
by both the Architect and the Owner below.
Summary:
00 Description:(written description of work)
Attachments:(list attached documents which support description)
ISSUED: CONFIRMED:
BY By:
Architect:BH+A Date Contractor: Date
AUTHORIZED:
BY
Owner's Agent: Date
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
1.8 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
A. On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures
of Owner and Contractor on a form similar to AIA Document G701.
PART 2-PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 -EXECUTION(Not Used)
END OF SECTION 012600
�w
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600-3
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA +�•
1. Proposal requests issued by the Architect are for information only. Do not consider
them as an instruction either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed ,.
change.
2. Within 7 calendar days of receipt of a proposal request, submit an estimate of cost ne-
cessary to execute the change to the Architect for the Owner's review.
a. Include a list of quantities of products required and unit costs, with the total
amount of purchases to be made. Where requested, furnish survey data to subs-
tantiate quantities.
b. Indicate applicable delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade dis-
counts.
C. Include a statement indicating the effect the proposed change in the Work will
have on the Contract Time. .o
1.6 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE BULLETIN
A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Bulletin similar AIA Document G714.
Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for
subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.
B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the
Construction Work Change Directive.
I. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to
substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.
+u�
1.7 CONTRACTOR-INITIATED PROPOSALS
A. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or unforeseen conditions require modifications to the
Contract, Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change to Architect.
1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the
Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the
proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.
2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total
amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to *R
substantiate quantities.
3. Indicate applicable delivery charges,equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.
4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.
5. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the
change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times,
and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the
Contract Time.
6. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Product Requirements" if the
proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system
specified. w�
7. Comply with Owner's Tax Exempt status.
8. Comply with the mark-up provisions defined in the Conditions of the Contract.
w
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600-2
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
SECTION 012600- CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing
Contract modifications.
1.3 BULLETINS- GENERAL
A. The Architect will also respond to Requests for Information with Bulletins. An example Bulle-
tin form has been included at the end of this Section. The Bulletin will be sequentially num-
bered and dated. The Bulletins will be issued in three forms:
1. Supplemental Instructions (SI): The Architect will issue a bulletin with supplemental
instructions authorizing minor changes in the work not involving adjustment to the
Contract Time or Sum.
2. Proposal Requests (PR): The Architect will issue a bulletin with a date, description of
proposed changes in the Work that require adjustment to the Contract Sum or Time. If
necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and
Specifications.
3. Construction Change Directive (CCD): When the Owner and the Contractor disagree,
w� or sufficient time is not available to establish final terms of a Proposal Request, the
Architect may issue a Bulletin in the form of a Construction Change Directive. The
Construction Change Directive instructs the Contractor to proceed with a change in the
Work for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.
1.4 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK BULLETINS(ASI)
A. Architect will issue a Bulletin for Work not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the
Contract Time. Bulletin is similar to AIA Document G710, "Architect's Supplemental Instruc-
tions."
1.5 CHANGE ORDER PROPOSAL REQUEST BULLETINS (PR)
A. Proposal Requests: The Architect will issue a Bulletin requesting a detailed description of
proposed changes in the Work that will require adjustment to the Contract Sum or Contract
Time.
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600- 1
SUBSTITUTION
REQUEST
(Continued)
The Undersigned certifies:
• Proposed substitution has been fully investigated and determined to be equal or superior in all respects to specified product.
• Same warranty will be furnished for proposed substitution as for specified product.
• Same maintenance service and source of replacement parts,as applicable,is available.
• Proposed substitution will have no adverse effect on other trades and will not affect or delay progress schedule.
• Cost data as stated above is complete. Claims for additional costs related to accepted substitution which may subsequently become
apparent are to be waived.
• Proposed substitution does not affect dimensions and functional clearances.
• Payment will be made for changes to building design, including A/E design, detailing, and construction costs caused by the
substitution.
• Coordination,installation,and changes in the Work as necessary for accepted substitution will be complete in all respects. "It
Submitted by:
Signed by:
Firm:
Address:
Telephone:
Attachments:
am
an
A/E®s REVIEW AND ACTION ON
❑Substitution approved-Make submittals in accordance with Specification Section 01330.
❑ Substitution approved as noted-Make submittals in accordance with Specification Section 01330. am
❑Substitution rejected-Use specified materials.
❑Substitution Request received too late-Use specified materials.
Signed by:
Date: 00
Additional Comments: ❑Contractor ❑Subcontractor ❑Supplier ❑Manufacturer ❑A/E ❑
w
we
A
Copyright 1996,Construction Specification Institute, Page of September 1996
99 Canal Center Plaza,Suite 300 Alexandria,VA
22314 CSI Form 13.1A
Advancement
of Construction
Technology
SUBSTITUTION
REQUEST
(After the Bidding Phase)
Project: Kollmorgen Electroc Optical Substitution Request Number:
Northampton,MA From:
To: Bargmann Hendrie+Archetype,Inc. Date:
go 300 AStreet,Boston.MA 02210 A/E Project Number:2883.00
Re: Contract For:
#11
Specification Title: Description:
Section: Page: Article/Paragraph:
PO
Proposed Substitution:
Manufacturer: Address: Phone:
Trade Name: Model No.:
Installer: Address: Phone:
History: ❑New product ❑ 2-5 years old ❑5-10 yrs old ❑More than 10 years old
Differences between proposed substitution and specified product:
11
} ❑Point-by-point comparative data attached-REQUIRED BY A/E
Reason for not providing specified item:
po
Similar Installation:
Project: Architect:
Address: Owner:
Date Installed:
Proposed substitution affects other parts of Work: ❑No ❑Yes;explain
Savings to Owner for accepting substitution:
Proposed substitution changes Contract Time: ❑No ❑Yes [Add] [Deduct] days.
Supporting Data Attached: ❑Drawings ❑Product Data El Samples El Tests El Reports
Copyright 1996,Construction Specification Institute, Page of September 1996
99 Canal Center Plaza,Suite 300 Alexandria,VA CSI Form 13.IA
22314
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA •
d. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.
e. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule.
f. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having
jurisdiction.
g. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.
h. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. �.
L Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
j. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution
has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is
compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 012500 ew
a�
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500-4
R.
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
1.6 PROCEDURES
A. Coordination: Modify or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the approved
substitutions.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately upon discovery of need
for change, but not later than (5) five days days prior to time required for preparation and
review of related submittals.
1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the
following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect
will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these
requirements:
a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce
indicated results.
' b. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.
C. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule.
d. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having
jurisdiction.
e. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.
f. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.
10 g. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
h. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution
has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is
compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.
B. Substitutions for Convenience: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received
within(60) sixty days after commencement of the Work. Requests received after that time may
be considered or rejected at discretion of Architect.
1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the
following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied,Architect
will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these
requirements:
A a. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy
conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities
Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include
compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of
other construction by Owner, and similar considerations.
b. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract
Documents.
C. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce
indicated results.
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500-3
on
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA �.
b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to
other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate
contractors,that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.
C. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of
the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable specification section.
Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size,
durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific
features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work
specified.
d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and
installation procedures.
e. Samples,where applicable or requested.
f. Certificates and qualification data,where applicable or requested.
g. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and
addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners.
h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test
results for compliance with requirements indicated.
i. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project,
from Massachusetts State Building Code, 7t'Edition. .s
j. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed
substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall
Contract Time. if specified product or method of construction cannot be provided
within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's
letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays
in delivery.
k. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum.
1. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in
the Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible
with related materials, and is appropriate for applications indicated.
m. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently
become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated
results.
3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or
documentation for evaluation within (5) five days of receipt of a request for substitution.
Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within
(5) five days of receipt of request, or (7) seven days of receipt of additional information
or documentation,whichever is later.
a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or
Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work.
b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a proposed
substitution within time allocated.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed
substitution with related products and materials. Engage qualified testing agency to perform
compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers.
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500-2
wa
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
SECTION 012500- SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 01 Section "Product Requirements" for requirements for submitting comparable
product submittals for products by listed manufacturers.
2. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific requirements and limitations for
substitutions.
OW
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from
those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.
1. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to
changed Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory changes, or
unavailability of required warranty terms.
2. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that are not
required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to
Contractor or Owner.
�w
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product
or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and
title and Drawing numbers and titles.
1. Substitution Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.1A, facsimile of form provided in the
Project Manual, or similar form.
2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following,
op as applicable:
a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation cannot be
provided, if applicable.
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500- 1
..
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
.w
Northampton, MA
PART 2- PRODUCTS (Not Used)
so
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES
A. Alternate No. One(1)
1. Base Bid: Provide manufactured perimeter trim at soffit conditions and specified in
Section 09 5123 Acoustical Tile Ceilings.
2. Alternate: Delete manufactured perimeter trim at soffits and construct painted, metal
framed,gypsum board soffits as detailed and specified in the following Sections:
a. Section 09 22 16- Non-Structural Metal Framing
b. Section 09 29 00- Gypsum Board
C. Section 09 91 00- Painting
END OF SECTION 012300
w
w.
ALTERNATES 012300-2
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
* Northampton,MA
SECTION 012300-ALTERNATES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
on A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined
in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted from the base bid amount if
Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be
completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described
in the Contract Documents.
1. Alternates described in this Section are part of the Work only if enumerated in the
Agreement.
2. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract
' Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the
Contract Sum.
1.4 PROCEDURES
A. Coordination: Modify or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate
work of the alternate into Project.
1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar
items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part
of alternate.
B. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in
writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or
deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to
alternates.
C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract.
D. Schedule: A schedule of alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections
referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work
described under each alternate.
ALTERNATES 012300- 1
PW
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
0 Northampton,MA
Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for
clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by
others when so noted.
a. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context,
are implied where a colon(:)is used within a sentence or phrase.
PART 2- PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 -EXECUTION(Not Used)
END OF SECTION 011000
qW
W
on
SUMMARY 011000-3
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
1.4 USE OF PREMISES
A. General: Contractor shall have full use of premises for construction operations, including use of
Project site, during construction period. Contractor's use of premises is limited only by Owner's
right to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project.
B. Use of Site: Limit use of premises to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of
Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.
C. Concurrent Work: Owner will award separate contract(s) for the specialty systems and
equipment to be installed at Project site. Those operations may be conducted simultaneously
with work under this Contract.
D. Owner Occupancy of Completed Areas of Construction: Owner reserves the right to occupy
and to place and install equipment in completed areas of building, before Substantial
Completion, provided such occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work. Such
placement of equipment and partial occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work.
1.5 WORK RESTRICTIONS
A. On-Site Work Hours: Work shall be generally performed during normal business working
hours of 7:00 a.m.to 3:30 p.m.,Monday through Friday, except otherwise indicated.
1. Early Morning Hours: Per Town of Northampton work restrictions.
B. Nonsmoking Building: The Project will be a nonsmoking facility and smoking is not permitted
within the building footprint.
1.6 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS "
A. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the
50-division format and CSI/CSC's "MasterFormat 2004 " numbering system.
1. Section Identification: The Specifications use Section numbers and titles to help cross-
referencing in the Contract Documents. Sections in the Project Manual are in numeric
sequence; however, the sequence is incomplete because all available Section numbers are
not used. Consult the table of contents at the beginning of the Project Manual to
determine numbers and names of Sections in the Contract Documents.
2. Division 01: Sections in Division 01 govern the execution of the Work of all Sections in
the Specifications.
B. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and
the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. **
These conventions are as follows:
1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract
Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate.
Words implied, but not stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words
shall be interpreted as plural, and plural words shall be interpreted as singular where
applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates.
2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. "
Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor.
SUMMARY 011000 -2
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
SECTION 011000- SUMMARY
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Work covered by the Contract Documents.
2. Use of premises.
3. Owner's occupancy requirements.
4. Work restrictions.
5. Specification formats and conventions.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures
of governing temporary use of Owner's facilities.
1.3 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. Project Identification: Kollmorgen Electro-Optical
1. Project Location: Village Hill,Northampton,MA
B. Owner: Village Hill,Northampton,MA
C. Owner's Project Manager: O'Connell Development Group, Inc., 480 Hampden Street,
Holyoke,MA 01040.
1. Project Manager has been engaged for this Project to serve as an advisor to Owner and to
provide assistance in administering the Contract for Construction between Owner and
Contractor.
2. Project Manager Contact: Andrew Crystal,LEED AP
D. Architect: Bargmann Hendrie+Archetype, Inc.,300 A Street,Boston,MA 02210.
E. Contractor: Western Builders, P.O. Box 587, 73 Pleasant Street, Granby, MA 0103 has been
engaged as Contractor for this Project.
F. The Work consists of the following:
1. The Work includes construction of new manufacturing facility including related sitework.
SUMMARY 011000- 1
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA ..
DIVISION 11 —EQUIPMENT
w
Section 11 13 00 Loading Dock Equipment 11 1300-1 through 4
DIVISION 12—FURNISHINGS
Section 12 36 40 Stone Countertops 12 36 40-1 through 6
Section 12 48 13 Entrance Floor Mats and Grilles 1248 13-1 through 4
DIVISION 13- SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
DIVISION 14- CONVEYING EQUIPMENT
Section 14 24 00 Hydraulic Elevator 142400-1 through 44
DIVISION 21—FIRE SUPPRESSION
Section 2120 00 Fire Protection 21 0000-1 through 34
DIVISION 22—PLUMBING
Section 22 00 00 Plumbing 22 00 00-1 through 38
DIVISION 23—HVAC
Section 23 00 00 Heating Ventilating and Air Conditioning 23 00 00-1 through 179
DIVISION 26—ELECTRICAL
Section 26 00 00 Electrical 26 00 00-1 through 73
Section 26 01 00 Fire Alarm 2601 00-1 through 37
DIVISION 31 —THROUGH 49
END OF DOCUMENT 00 01 10
awe
wer
TABLE OF CONTENTS 0001 10-4 *�!
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
go Section 07 42 13 Metal Wall Panels 0742 13-1 through 7
Section 07 42 16 Insulated Core Metal Wall Panels 0742 16-1 through 7
Section 07 54 23 FM I-60A Thermoplastic Polyolefin(TPO)Roofing 07 54 23-1 through 10
FM-Application for Acceptance of Roofing System 3 pages
Section 07 72 00 Roof Accessories 07 72 00-1 through 4
Section 07 81 00 Applied Fireproofing 0781 00-1 through 11
Section 07 84 13 Penetration Firestopping 0784 13-1 through 6
OP Section 07 84 46 Fire Resistive Joint Systems 07 84 46-1 through 5
Section 07 92 00 Joint Sealants 07 92 00-1 through 7
10 DIVISION 08—OPENINGS
Section 08 10 00 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 081000-1 through 9
Section 08 14 16 Flush Wood Doors 08 14 16-1 through 5
40 Section 08 31 13 Access Doors and Frames 0831 13-1 through 5
Section 08 33 23 Overhead Coiling Doors 083323-1 through 6
Section 08 41 13 Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts 0841 13-1 through 10
w Section 08 41 26 All Glass Entrances Storefront 0841 26-1 through 4
Section 08 44 13 Glazed Aluminum Curtainwall 0844 13-1 through 8
Section 08 51 13 Aluminum Windows 0851 13 -1 through 9
Section 08 71 00 Door Hardware 0871 00-1 through 23
Section 08 80 00 Glazing 08 80 00-1 through 14
Section 08 90 00 Louvers and Vents 08 90 00-1 through 6
DIVISION 09—FINISHES
Section 09 21 16.23 Gypsum Board Shaftwall Assemblies 0921 16.23 through 7
_ Section 09 22 16 Non-Structural Metal Framing 0922 16-1 through 7
Section 09 27 00 Gypsum Glass Fiber Fabrications 09 27 00-1 through 2
Section 09 29 00 Gypsum Board 09 29 00-1 through 10
Section 09 30 00 Tiling 09 30 00-1 through 10
09 51 23-1 through 7
Section 09 51 23 Acoustical Tile Ceiling g
Section 09 63 40 Stone Flooring 09 63 40-1 through 7
Section 09 65 13 Resilient Base and Accessories 0965 13-1 through 5
Section 09 65 19 Resilient Tile Flooring 0965 19-1 through 6
Section 09 68 13 Tile Carpeting 0968 13-1 through 5
Section 09 69 00 Access Flooring 09 69 00-1 through 8
go Section 09 91 00 Painting 0991 00-1 through 15
DIVISION 10—SPECIALTIES
"*' 10 10 10-1 through 4
Section 10 10 10 Visual Display Surfaces g
Section 10 14 00 Signage 10 1400-1 through 5
Section 10 21 13 Toilet Compartments 10 21 00-1 through 5
"' Section 10 28 00 Toilet Accessories 10 28 00-1 through 5
Section 10 44 00 Fire Protection Specialties 10 44 00-1 through 5
Section 10 51 26 Plastic Lockers 1051 26-1 through 5
TABLE OF CONTENTS 0001 10-3
00
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
Northampton,MA
Form CWM-7 Construction Waste Reduction Progress Report._______________I Page
Section 01 7700 Closeout Procedures 01 7700-1 through 5
Section 01 7823 Operation and Maintenance Data 01 7823-1 through 8
Section 01 7839 Project Record Documents 01 7839-1 through 4
Section 01 7900 Demonstration&Training 01 7900-1 through 4
Section 01 81 13 Sustainable Design Requirements 01 81 13-1 through 6
Section 01 91 10 General Commissioning Requirements (edit) 01 91 10-1 through 3
DIVISION 02—EXISTING CONDITIONS
Not Used
DIVISION 03—CONCRETE
.s
Section 03 30 10 Concrete Work(Dated 8/21/09) 0330 10-1 through 30
Section 03 60 00 Grout(Dated 8/21/09) 03 60 00-1 through 3
DIVISION 04—MASONRY
Section 04 22 23 Architectural Concrete Unit Masonry 04 22 23-1 through 9
Section 04 23 00 Reinforced Concrete Masonry (Dated 8/21/09) 04 23 00-1 through 11 w
DIVISION 05—METALS
Section 05 08 00 Hot Dipped Galvanizing 05 08 00-1 through 4
Section 05 12 00 Structural Steel (Dated 8/21/09) 05 1200-1 through 16
Section 05 21 00 Metal Joists(Dated 8/21/09) 0521 00-1 through 4
Section 05 31 00 Metal Decking(Dated 8/21/09) 0531 00-1 through 7
Section 05 40 00 Cold Formed Metal Framing 05 40 00-1 through 7
Section 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications 05 00 00-1 through 11
Section 05 51 00 Metal Stairs
OS 51 00-1 through 6
Section 05 52 13 Pipe and Tube Railings 0552 13-1 through 9
DIVISION 06—WOOD PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES .0
Section 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry 06 10 00-1 through 6
Section 06 16 00 Sheathing 06 1600-1 through 6
Section 06 20 23 Interior Finish Carpentry 06 20 23-1 through 5
Section 06 40 23 Interior Architectural Woodwork 06 40 23-1 through 11
Section 06 64 00 Plastic Paneling 06 64 00-1 through 4
Section 06 64 10 Polycarbonate Plastic Paneling
g 06 64 10-1 through 3
DIVISION 07-THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
Section 07 11 13 Bituminous Damproofing 07 11 13-1 through 3
Section 07 16 00 Crystalline Waterproofing 07 1600-1 through 6
Section 07 21 00 Thermal Insulation 0721 00-1 through 4 .
Section 07 27 00 Air Barriers 07 27 00-1 through 3
TABLE OF CONTENTS 0001 10-2
KOLLMORGEN ELECTRO-OPTICAL BH+A Project No. 2883
!! ! Northampton,MA
DOCUMENT 000110—TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 00-PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION
Document 00 01 01 Project Title Page
Document 00 01 10 Table of Contents 00 01 10-1 through 4
PROCUREMENT REQUIREMENTS
AGREEMENT FORMS
CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT
DIVISION 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 01 10 00 Summary 01 10 00-1 through 3
Section 01 23 00 Alternates 01 23 00-1 through 2
Section 01 2500 Substitution Procedures 01 2500-1 through 4
Substitution Request Form (After Bidding) CSI 13.1A 2 Pages
Section 01 2600 Contract Modification Procedures 01 2600-1 through 3
Bulletin Form I pages
Change Order Form 2 pages
Section 01 2900 Payment Procedures 01 2900-1 through 5
Section 01 31 00 Project Management and Coordination 01 3100-1 through 10
Request For Interpretation—CSI Form 13.2A I page
Architect's Response to Request for Information I page
Section 01 3200 Construction Project Documentation 01 3200-1 through 6
Section 01 3233 Photographic Documentation 01 3233-1 through 2
Section 01 3300 Submittal Procedures 01 3300-1 through 12
BH+A Submittal Response Form I Page
Section 01 3500 Special Project Procedures 01 3500-1 through 4
Section 0140 00 Quality Requirements 01 40 00-1 through 8
Section 01 4001 Mock-Up Requirements 01 4001-1 through 2
Section 01 4200 References 01 4200-1 through 4
Section 01 5000 Facilities&Temporary Controls 01 5000-1 through 7
Section 01 58 13 Temporary Project Sign 01 58 13-1 through 2
Section 01 6000 Product Requirements 01 6000-1 through 5
Section 01 7300 Execution 01 7300-1 through 8
Section 01 7329 Cutting and Patching 01 7329-1 through 3
Section 0174 19 Construction Waste Management and Disposal 01 7419-1 through 5
Form CWM-1 Construction Waste Management Identification................I Page
Form CWM-3 Construction Waste Reduction Work Plan------------------------I
------ ------------1 Page
Form CWM-5 Cost/Revenue Analysis of Construction Waste Reduction Work
Plan ------------------- ---------------------------------------------------1 Page
TABLE OF CONTENTS 0001 10- 1
Project Manual for.,
Kollmorgen Electra-Optical
Northampton, Massachusetts
1 FR��=t�; vLw�.'eeii;2� `M.m«5:.�.�.td..%.::.wii.+"iw"`x:it ,• Y-.. s n. a.w
Prepared For:
O'Connell Development Group Inc.
480 Hampden Street
Holyoke, MA 01040
Prepared By.' `
Architect:
Bargmann Hendrie + Archetype, Inc.
300 A Street
Boston, MA 02210
Tel: 617-350-0450
Fax: 617-350-0215
Web:www.bhplus.com
Landscape Architect: Structural Engineering Consultant:
Carol R. Johnson Associates, Inc. McNamara/Salvia Inc.
115 Broad Street 160 Federal Street, 5t Floor
Boston, MA Boston, MA 02110
MEP/FP Engineering Consultant: Civil Engineering Consultant:
AHA Consulting Engineers Tighe & Bond Consulting Engineers
10 Maguire Road, Suite 121 53 Southampton Road
Lexington, MA 02421 'Westfield, MA 01085
VOLUME 1
October 30, 2009